DDW-2024-006395

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT TITLE PAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 01-1
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
RECONSTRUCTION

CONSULTANT PROJECT NO.: 021-21-01

February 2024

OWNER
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT
2837 East Highway 193
Layton, Utah 84040

ENGINEER
154 East 14075 South
Draper, Utah 84020

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT TITLE PAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 01-2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SEALS PAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 07 - 1
SECTION 00 01 07
SEALS PAGE

02/22/24

02/22/24

02/22/24
[ CIVIL (CFN) ] [ MECHANICAL (CFN) ] [ STRUCTURAL (SDC) ]

02/22/24

[ ELECTRICAL /
INSTRUMENTATION (DSY) ] [ ARCHITECTURAL (RLH) ] [ HVAC (RJK)]
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SEALS PAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 07 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 10-1

SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 2
PART I – INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Section
00 01 01 Project Title Page
00 01 07 Seals Page
00 01 10 Table of Contents
PART II - BIDDING DOCUMENTS
00 11 13 Advertisement for Bids
00 21 13 Instructions to Bidders
00 41 00 Bid Form
00 43 13 Bid Bond (Penal Sum)
00 45 13 Bidder’s Qualifications
00 45 30 E-Verify Agreement and Affidavit
00 51 00 Notice of Award
00 52 13 Long-Form Agreement
00 55 00 Notice to Proceed
00 61 14 Performance Bond
00 61 15 Payment Bond
00 62 76 Contractor’s Application for Payment
00 63 36 Field Order Form
00 63 49 Work Change Directive
00 63 63 Change Order
00 65 16 Certificate of Substantial Completion
00 65 18 Notice of Acceptability of Work
PART III - CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT
00 70 00 General Conditions
00 73 00 Supplemental General Conditions

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 10-2

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(CONTINUED)
PART IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
01 11 00 Summary of Work (CFN)
01 14 40 Construction and Schedule Constraints (CFN)
01 20 00 Measurement and Payment (CFN)
01 25 10 Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions (CFN)
01 26 13 Requests for Interpretation (CFN)
01 29 73 Schedule of Values (CFN)
01 31 30 Safety (CFN)
01 32 16 Construction Progress Schedule (CFN)
01 33 20 Submittal Procedures (CFN)
01 35 53 Security (CFN)
01 41 26 Permits (CFN)
01 42 13 Abbreviations of Institutions (CFN)
01 42 19 Reference Standards (CFN)
01 45 00 Quality Control (CFN)
01 50 10 Site Access and Storage (CFN)
01 57 19 Temporary Environmental Controls (CFN)
01 58 13 Temporary Project Signage (CFN)
01 71 00 Mobilization (CFN)
01 71 30 Site Conditions Surveys (CFN)
01 71 50 Protection and Restoration of Existing Facilities (CFN)
01 74 19 Disposal of Water (CFN)
01 77 00 Project Closeout (CFN)
01 78 39 Project Record Documents (CFN)
01 81 10 Seismic Design Criteria (SDC)
01 81 11 Wind Design Criteria (SCD)
01 91 14 Equipment Testing and Startup (CFN)

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
02 41 00 Demolition, Salvage, and Reconstruction (CFN)

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
03 11 00 Concrete Forming (SCD)
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing (SCD)
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete (SCD)
03 35 11 Concrete Floor Finishes (SCD)
03 40 00 Precast Concrete (SCD)
03 60 00 Grouting (SCD)

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 10-3

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(CONTINUED)
PART IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
04 01 20 Masonry Cleaning (SCD)
04 05 12 Mortar and Grout (SCD)
04 22 00 Concrete Unit Masonry (SCD)

DIVISION 05 – METALS
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications (SCD)

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
06 10 53 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry (SCD)
06 16 00 Sheathing (SCD)

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
07 19 00 Water Repellants (RLH)
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation (RLH)
07 22 00 Polyisocyanurate Roofing Material (RLH)
07 53 23 EPDM Thermoset Single-Ply Roofing (RLH)
07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (RLH)
07 72 00 Roof Accessories (RLH)
07 92 00 Joint Sealants (CFN)

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames (RLH)
08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors (CFN)
08 62 23 Tubular Daylighting Devices (RLH)
08 71 00 Door Hardware (RLH)

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
09 90 00 Protective Coatings and Linings (CFN)
09 90 10 Pipeline Coatings and Linings (CFN)
09 91 23 Interior Painting (RLH)

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties (RLH)

DIVISION 21 – FACILITY FIRE HYDRANTS
21 11 16 Facility Fire Hydrants (CFN)

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
22 00 00 Plumbing (CFN)

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 10-4

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(CONTINUED)
PART IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section
DIVISION 23 – HVAC
23 00 00 General Mechanical Requirements (RJK)
23 01 00 Operation and Maintenance Manuals (RJK)
23 05 13 Motors, Drives, and Electrical Requirements (RJK)
23 05 48 Mechanical Sound, Vibration, and Seismic Control (RJK)
23 05 53 Mechanical Identification Accessories (RJK)
23 05 93 System Commissioning, Testing, and Balancing (RJK)
23 09 00 Mechanical Control Systems (RJK)
23 31 00 Ductwork (RJK)
23 33 00 Ductwork Accessories (RJK)
23 37 13 Air Outlets and Inlets (RJK)
23 41 16 Air Filters (RJK)
23 73 50 Packaged Rooftop Units (RJK)
23 76 00 Terminal Electric Heat Transfer Units (RJK)

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL
26 05 00 Electrical General Provisions (DSY)
26 05 13 Medium-Voltage Cables (DSY)
26 05 19 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (DSY)
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding (DSY)
26 05 33 Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems (DSY)
26 05 34 Conduits (DSY)
26 05 53 Electrical Identification (DSY)
26 05 73 Power System Studies (DSY)
26 05 83 Wiring Connections (DSY)
26 08 00 Field Electrical Acceptance Tests (DSY)
26 12 13 Liquid Filled Medium-Voltage Transformers (Owner Provided – For Reference Only) (DSY)
26 16 00 Metering Switchgear (Owner Provided – For Reference Only) (DSY)
26 19 00 Medium-Voltage Induction Motors (DSY)
26 20 00 Low-Voltage AC Induction Motors (DSY)
26 21 00 Utility Coordination (DSY)
26 22 00 Dry Type Transformers (DSY)
26 24 16 Panelboards (DSY)
26 27 25 Toggle Switches (DSY)
26 27 26 Receptacles (DSY)
26 27 27 Plates (DSY)
26 28 15 Safety Switches (DSY)
26 28 16 Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers (DSY)
26 28 17 Medium Voltage Pad Mount Switchgear (Owner Provided – For Reference Only) (DSY)
26 29 13 Motor Starters (DSY)
26 29 25 Medium Voltage Variable Frequency Drives (Owner Provided – For Reference Only) (DSY)
26 43 00 Surge Protective Devices (DSY)
26 50 00 Lighting (DSY)
26 85 50 Heat Tracing (DSY)

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 10-5

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(CONTINUED)
PART IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
31 10 00 Site Preparation (CFN)
31 23 00 Earthwork (CFN)
31 23 19 Dewatering (CFN)

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
32 12 16 A.C. Pavement and Base (CFN)
32 13 73 Pavement Joint Sealants (CFN)
32 16 00 Driveways, Sidewalks, Curbs, Gutters, and Other Concrete Flatwork (CFN)
32 31 13 Chain Link Fencing and Gates (CFN)
32 31 14 Cantilever Slide Gates (CFN)
32 90 01 Landscape Restoration (CFN)

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES
33 05 07 PVC Pipe C900-905 (CFN)
33 11 11 Steel Pipe (CFN)
33 11 12 Steel Pipe Fabricated Specials (CFN)
33 13 00 Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection (CFN)

DIVISION 40 – PROCESS INTEGRATION
40 05 00 Piping, General (CFN)
40 05 07 Pipe Supports (CFN)
40 05 10 Mill Piping (CFN)
40 05 50 Miscellaneous Valves (CFN)
40 05 51 Valves, General (CFN)
40 05 52 Valve and Gate Actuators (CFN)
40 05 63 Ball Valves (CFN)
40 05 64.16 Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves (Double Offset) (CFN)
40 05 65 Valves for Pump Control and Check Service (CFN)
40 05 69 Pressure Relief Valves (CFN)
40 71 13 Flow Magnetic (CFN)
40 73 13 Pressure Gauges (CFN)
40 73 26 Pressure-Transmitters (CFN)
40 75 01 Instrument List (CFN)

DIVISION 43 – GAS, LIQUID, AND STORAGE
43 20 10 Pumps, General (CFN)
43 24 03 Vertical Turbine Pumps (CFN)

DIVISION 46 – WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT
46 33 50 On-site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System (CFN)
46 33 60 Chemical Feed System (CFN)

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TABLE OF CONTENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 01 10-6

TABLE OF CONTENTS
(CONTINUED)
PART IV - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Section
APPENDIX A – Prepurchase medium voltage VFD cutsheets
APPENDIX B – Prepurchase medium voltage switchgear cutsheets
APPENDIX C – Prepurchase medium voltage pad mount transformer cutsheets

VOLUME 2 OF 2 - DRAWINGS
Drawings for South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction (Bound Separately)
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 00
FRONT END DOCUMENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 11 13 - 1
SECTION 00 11 13
ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS

This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-111, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional
Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on
excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject
to the copyright.
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT
2837 East Hwy 193 Layton, Utah 84040
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION
GENERAL NOTICE
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT (Owner) is requesting Bids for the construction of
the following Project:
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION
021-21-01
Bids for the construction of the Project will be received at the Weber Basin Water Conservancy
District located at 2837 E Hwy 193, until Thursday, March 21, 2024 at 2:00 pm local time. At that
time the Bids received will be publicly opened and read.
The Project includes the following Work:
The Work of this Contract comprises the construction of a well house structure, and improvements
necessary to equip an existing groundwater well. The well, with a design flowrate of 4,500 gpm will
be pumped with a 1,250 horsepower, medium voltage motor and variable frequency drive. The CMU
building will house electrical equipment and mechanical piping. Site improvements include the
demolition of existing structures, pavement, piping; and the construction of a six-foot retaining wall,
new fencing, gates, pavement, and connections to existing water lines. Major electrical equipment
has been pre-purchased by the Owner and will be installed by the Contractor.
Bids will be received for the following Contract: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction Project,
Contract No. 20027.
Owner anticipates that Project’s total bid price will be approximately $ 4,000,000. Project has an
expected duration of 350 days.
OBTAINING BIDDING DOCUMENTS
Information and Bidding Documents for the Project can be found at the following designated website:
https://weberbasin.gov/PublicResources/PublicNotices
Bidding Documents may be downloaded from the designated website. Prospective Bidders are urged
to register with the designated website as a plan holder, even if Bidding Documents are obtained
from a plan room or source other than the designated website in either electronic or paper format.
The designated website will be updated periodically with addenda, lists of registered plan holders,
reports, and other information relevant to submitting a Bid for the Project. All official notifications,
addenda, and other Bidding Documents will be offered only through the designated website. Neither
Owner nor Engineer will be responsible for Bidding Documents, including addenda, if any, obtained
from sources other than the designated website.
PRE-BID CONFERENCE

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 11 13 - 2
A mandatory pre-bid conference for the Project will be held on Thursday, March 07, 2024 at 2:00 pm
at the offices of Weber Basin Water Conservancy District, 2837 E Hwy 193, Layton, UT 84040. Bids
will not be accepted from Bidders that do not attend the mandatory pre-bid conference.
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
For all further requirements regarding bid submittal, qualifications, procedures, and contract award,
refer to the Instructions to Bidders that are included in the Bidding Documents.
THIS ADVERTISEMENT IS ISSUED BY:
Owner: WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT
By: Jesse Moreno
Title: Project Manager
Date: Thursday, February 22, 2024
+ + END OF ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS + +

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 1
SECTION 00 21 13
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-200, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional
Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on
excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject
to the copyright.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 – Defined Terms ................................................................................................................................................ 2
ARTICLE 2 – Bidding Documents ...................................................................................................................................... 2
ARTICLE 3 – Qualifications Of Bidders ........................................................................................................................... 3
ARTICLE 4 – Pre-Bid Conference ...................................................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 5 – Site And Other Areas; Existing Site Conditions; Examination Of Site; Owner’s Safety
Program; Other Work At The Site ..................................................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 6 – Bidder’s Representations And Certifications .................................................................................... 6
ARTICLE 7 – Interpretations And Addenda .................................................................................................................. 6
ARTICLE 8 – Bid Security ..................................................................................................................................................... 7
ARTICLE 9 – Contract Times ............................................................................................................................................... 7
ARTICLE 10 – Substitute And “Or Equal” Items .......................................................................................................... 7
ARTICLE 11 – Subcontractors, Suppliers, And Others ............................................................................................. 8
ARTICLE 12 – Preparation Of Bid ..................................................................................................................................... 8
ARTICLE 13 – Basis Of Bid ................................................................................................................................................... 9
ARTICLE 14 – Submittal Of Bid ........................................................................................................................................ 10
ARTICLE 15 – Modification And Withdrawl Of Bid ................................................................................................. 10
ARTICLE 16 – Opening Of Bids ........................................................................................................................................ 11
ARTICLE 17 – Bids To Remain Subject To Acceptance .......................................................................................... 11
ARTICLE 18 – Evaluation Of Bids And Award Of Contract ................................................................................... 11
ARTICLE 19 – Bonds And Insurance.............................................................................................................................. 12
ARTICLE 20 – Signing Of Agreement ............................................................................................................................. 12
ARTICLE 21 – Sales And Use Taxes ................................................................................................................................ 12
ARTICLE 22 – Contracts To Be Assigned ..................................................................................................................... 12

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 2
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINED TERMS
1.01 Terms used in these Instructions to Bidders have the meanings indicated in the General
Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. Additional terms used in these Instructions to
Bidders have the meanings indicated below:
A. Issuing Office—The office from which the Bidding Documents are to be issued, and which
registers plan holders.
ARTICLE 2 – BIDDING DOCUMENTS
2.01 Bidder shall obtain a complete set of Bidding Requirements and proposed Contract Documents
(together, the Bidding Documents). See the Agreement for a list of the Contract Documents. It
is Bidder’s responsibility to determine that it is using a complete set of documents in the
preparation of a Bid. Bidder assumes sole responsibility for errors or misinterpretations
resulting from the use of incomplete documents, by Bidder itself or by its prospective
Subcontractors and Suppliers.
2.02 Bidding Documents are made available for the sole purpose of obtaining Bids for completion of
the Project and permission to download or distribution of the Bidding Documents does not
confer a license or grant permission or authorization for any other use. Authorization to
download documents, or other distribution, includes the right for plan holders to print
documents solely for their use, and the use of their prospective Subcontractors and Suppliers,
provided the plan holder pays all costs associated with printing or reproduction. Printed
documents may not be re-sold under any circumstances.
2.03 Owner has established a Bidding Documents Website as indicated in the Advertisement or
invitation to bid. Owner recommends that Bidder register as a plan holder with the Issuing
Office at such website and obtain a complete set of the Bidding Documents from such website.
Bidders may rely on that sets of Bidding Documents obtained from the Bidding Documents
Website are complete, unless an omission is blatant. Registered plan holders will receive
Addenda issued by Owner.
2.04 Electronic Documents
A. When the Bidding Requirements indicate that electronic (digital) copies of the Bidding
Documents are available, such documents will be made available to the Bidders as
Electronic Documents in the manner specified.
1. Bidding Documents will be provided in Adobe PDF (Portable Document Format)
(.pdf) that is readable by Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 20 or later. It is the intent
of the Engineer and Owner that such Electronic Documents are to be exactly
representative of the paper copies of the documents. However, because the Owner
and Engineer cannot totally control the transmission and receipt of Electronic
Documents nor the Contractor’s means of reproduction of such documents, the
Owner and Engineer cannot and do not guarantee that Electronic Documents and
reproductions prepared from those versions are identical in every manner to the
paper copies.
B. Unless otherwise stated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder may use and rely upon
complete sets of Electronic Documents of the Bidding Documents, described in
Paragraph 2.06.A above. However, Bidder assumes all risks associated with differences
arising from transmission/receipt of Electronic Documents versions of Bidding
Documents and reproductions prepared from those versions and, further, assumes all
risks, costs, and responsibility associated with use of the Electronic Documents versions

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 3
to derive information that is not explicitly contained in printed paper versions of the
documents, and for Bidder’s reliance upon such derived information.
ARTICLE 3 – QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS
3.01 Bidder is to submit the following information with its Bid to demonstrate Bidder’s qualifications
to perform the Work:
A. Complete Contractor Qualification Form included in 00 45 13.
B. Written evidence establishing its qualifications such as bonding capacity, financial data,
previous experience, and present commitments.
C. A written statement that Bidder is authorized to do business in the state where the
Project is located, or a written certification that Bidder will obtain such authority prior
to the Effective Date of the Contract.
D. Bidder’s state or other contractor license number, if applicable.
E. Subcontractor and Supplier qualification information.
F. Other required information regarding qualifications.
3.02 Prequalified Electrical Subcontractors. All bids must list a subcontractor that is included as one
of the following Prequalified Electrical Contractors for performing all electrical work.
A. Cache Valley Electric
B. Freedom Electric
C. S&S Electric
D. Silver Electric
E. Skyline Electric
F. Turner Electric
G. Wood Electric
3.03 Prequalified Access Control Subcontractors. All bids must list subcontractors including one of
the following Prequalified Access Control Contractors for installation of access control systems.
A. Peak Alarm of Salt Lake City, UT
B. Mountain Alarm of Orem, UT
3.04 Owner will contract with one of the SCADA providers listed below to execute the scope of work
defined in the drawings.
A. SKM Engineering
B. M8 Automation

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 4
3.05 The apparent successful bidder will be required to complete and return the attached Public
Contract Boycott Restrictions Compliance Certification within five (5) days of notice.
3.06 A Bidder’s failure to submit required information within the times indicated may disqualify
Bidder from receiving an award of the Contract.
3.07 No requirement in this Article 3 to submit information will prejudice the right of Owner to seek
additional pertinent information regarding Bidder’s qualifications.
ARTICLE 4 – PRE-BID CONFERENCE
4.01 A mandatory pre-bid conference will be held at the time and location indicated in the
Advertisement or Invitation to Bid. Representatives of Owner and Engineer will be present to
discuss the Project. Bids will not be accepted from Bidders who do not attend the conference. It
is each Bidder’s responsibility to sign in at the pre-bid conference to verify its participation.
Bidders must sign in using the name of the organization that will be submitting a Bid. A list of
qualified Bidders that attended the pre-bid conference and are eligible to submit a Bid for this
Project will be issued in an Addendum.
4.02 Information presented at the pre-Bid conference does not alter the Contract Documents. Owner
will issue Addenda to make any changes to the Contract Documents that result from discussions
at the pre-Bid conference. Information presented, and statements made at the pre-bid
conference will not be binding or legally effective unless incorporated in an Addendum.
ARTICLE 5 – SITE AND OTHER AREAS; EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS; EXAMINATION OF SITE;
OWNER’S SAFETY PROGRAM; OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
5.01 Site and Other Areas
A. The Site is identified in the Bidding Documents. By definition, the Site includes rights-
of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner for the use of the Contractor.
Any additional lands required for temporary construction facilities, construction
equipment, or storage of materials and equipment, and any access needed for such
additional lands, are to be obtained and paid for by Contractor.
5.02 Existing Site Conditions
A. Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions
1. The Supplementary Conditions identify the following regarding existing conditions
at or adjacent to the Site:
a. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent
to the Site that contain Technical Data.
b. Those drawings known to Owner of existing physical conditions at or adjacent
to the Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface
structures at or adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that
contain Technical Data.
c. Reports and drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental
Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site.
d. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
2. Owner will make copies of reports and drawings referenced above available to any
Bidder on request. These reports and drawings are not part of the Contract
Documents, but the Technical Data contained therein upon whose accuracy Bidder

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 5
is entitled to rely, as provided in the General Conditions, has been identified and
established in the Supplementary Conditions. Bidder is responsible for any
interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from any Technical Data or any other
data, interpretations, opinions, or information contained in such reports or shown
or indicated in such drawings.
3. If the Supplementary Conditions do not identify Technical Data, the default
definition of Technical Data set forth in Article 1 of the General Conditions will
apply.
B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings,
pursuant to Paragraph 5.05 of the General Conditions, and not in the drawings referred
to in Paragraph 5.02.A of these Instructions to Bidders. Information and data regarding
the presence or location of Underground Facilities are not intended to be categorized,
identified, or defined as Technical Data.
5.03 Other Site-related Documents
A. In addition to the documents regarding existing Site conditions referred to in Paragraph
5.02.A, the following other documents relating to conditions at or adjacent to the Site are
known to Owner and made available to Bidders for reference. Owner will make copies
of these other Site-related documents available to any Bidder on request.
1. Refer to Supplemental Conditions §5.03.
B. Owner has not verified the contents of these other Site-related documents, and Bidder
may not rely on the accuracy of any data or information in such documents. Bidder is
responsible for any interpretation or conclusion Bidder draws from the other Site -
related documents.
C. The other Site-related documents are not part of the Contract Documents.
D. Bidders are encouraged to review the other Site-related documents, but Bidders will not
be held accountable for any data or information in such documents. The requirement to
review and take responsibility for documentary Site information is limited to
information in (1) the Contract Documents and (2) the Technical Data.
E. No other Site-related documents are available.
5.04 Site Visit and Testing by Bidders
A. Bidder is required to visit the Site and conduct a thorough visual examination of the Site
and adjacent areas. During the visit the Bidder must not disturb any ongoing operations
at the Site.
B. A Site visit is scheduled following the pre-bid conference. Maps to the Site will be
available at the pre-Bid conference.
C. Bidders visiting the Site are required to arrange their own transportation to the Site.
D. All access to the Site other than during a regularly scheduled Site visit must be
coordinated through the following Owner or Engineer contact for visiting the Site: Jesse
Moreno, WBWCD, [phone]. Bidder must conduct the required Site visit during
normal working hours.
E. Bidder is not required to conduct any subsurface testing, or exhaustive investigations of
Site conditions.
F. On request, and to the extent Owner has control over the Site, and schedule permitting,
the Owner will provide Bidder general access to the Site to conduct such additional

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 6
examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, and studies as Bidder deems necessary
for preparing and submitting a successful Bid. Owner will not have any obligation to
grant such access if doing so is not practical because of existing operations, security or
safety concerns, or restraints on Owner’s authority regarding the Site. Bidder is
responsible for establishing access needed to reach specific selected test sites.
G. Bidder must comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations regarding excavation and
location of utilities, obtain all permits, and comply with all terms and conditions
established by Owner or by property owners or other entities controlling the Site with
respect to schedule, access, existing operations, security, liability insurance, and
applicable safety programs.
H. Bidder must fill all holes and clean up and restore the Site to its former condition upon
completion of such explorations, investigations, tests, and studies.
5.05 Owner’s Safety Program
A. Site visits and work at the Site may be governed by an Owner safety program . If an
Owner safety program exists, it will be noted in the Supplementary Conditions.
5.06 Other Work at the Site
A. Reference is made to Article 8 of the Supplementary Conditions for the identification of
the general nature of other work of which Owner is aware (if any) that is to be performed
at the Site by Owner or others (such as utilities and other prime contractors) and relates
to the Work contemplated by these Bidding Documents. If Owner is party to a written
contract for such other work, then on request, Owner will provide to each Bidder access
to examine such contracts (other than portions thereof related to price and other
confidential matters), if any.
ARTICLE 6 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS
6.01 Express Representations and Certifications in Bid Form, Agreement
A. The Bid Form that each Bidder will submit contains express representations regarding
the Bidder’s examination of Project documentation, Site visit, and preparation of the Bid,
and certifications regarding lack of collusion or fraud in connection with the Bid. Bidder
should review these representations and certifications and assure that Bidder can make
the representations and certifications in good faith, before executing and submitting its
Bid.
B. If Bidder is awarded the Contract, Bidder (as Contractor) will make similar express
representations and certifications when it executes the Agreement.
ARTICLE 7 – INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA
7.01 Owner on its own initiative may issue Addenda to clarify, correct, supplement, or change the
Bidding Documents.
7.02 Bidder shall submit all questions about the meaning or intent of the Bidding Documents to
Engineer via the Owner in writing. Contact information and submittal procedures for such
questions are as follows:
A. Email questions to Jesse Moreno at [e-mail] with the subject line
“Well #2 Question”.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 7
7.03 Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by Engineer in response to such questions
will be issued by Addenda delivered to all registered plan holders. Questions received less than
seven days prior to the date for opening of Bids may not be answered.
7.04 Only responses set forth in an Addendum will be binding. Oral and other interpretations or
clarifications will be without legal effect. Responses to questions are not part of the Contract
Documents unless set forth in an Addendum that expressly modifies or supplements the Contract
Documents.
ARTICLE 8 – BID SECURITY
8.01 A Bid must be accompanied by Bid security made payable to Owner in an amount of 5% percent
of Bidder’s maximum Bid price (determined by adding the base bid and all alternates) and in
the form of a Bid bond issued by a surety meeting the requirements of Paragraph 6.01 of the
General Conditions. Such Bid bond will be issued in the form included in the Bidding Documents.
8.02 The Bid security of the apparent Successful Bidder will be retained until Owner awards the
contract to such Bidder, and such Bidder has executed the Contract, furnished the required
Contract security, and met the other conditions of the Notice of Award, whereupon the Bid
security will be released. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute and deliver the Contract and
furnish the required Contract security within 15 days after the Notice of Award, Owner may
consider Bidder to be in default, annul the Notice of Award, and the Bid security of that Bidder
will be forfeited, in whole in the case of a penal sum bid bond, and to the extent of Owner’s
damages in the case of a damages-form bond. Such forfeiture will be Owner’s exclusive remedy
if Bidder defaults.
8.03 The Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving
the award may be retained by Owner until the earlier of 7 days after the Effective Date of the
Contract or 61 days after the Bid opening, whereupon Bid security furnished by such Bidders
will be released.
8.04 Bid security of other Bidders that Owner believes do not have a reasonable chance of receiving
the award will be released within 7 days after the Bid opening.
ARTICLE 9 – CONTRACT TIMES
9.01 The number of days within which, or the dates by which, the Work is to be (a) substantially
completed and (b) ready for final payment, and (c) Milestones (if any) are to be achieved, are
set forth in the Agreement.
9.02 Provisions for liquidated damages, if any, for failure to timely attain a Milestone, Substantial
Completion, or completion of the Work in readiness for final payment, are set forth in the
Agreement.
ARTICLE 10 – SUBSTITUTE AND “OR EQUAL” ITEMS
10.01 The Contract for the Work, as awarded, will be based on materials and equipment specified or
described in the Bidding Documents without consideration during the bidding and Contract
award process of possible substitute or “or-equal” items. In cases in which the Contract allows
the Contractor to request that Engineer authorize the use of a substitute or “or -equal” item of
material or equipment, application for such acceptance may not be made to and will not be
considered by Engineer until after the Effective Date of the Contract.
10.02 All prices that Bidder sets forth in its Bid will be based on the presumption that the Contractor
will furnish the materials and equipment specified or described in the Bidding Documents, as

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 8
supplemented by Addenda. Any assumptions regarding the possibility of post-Bid approvals of
“or-equal” or substitution requests are made at Bidder’s sole risk.
ARTICLE 11 – SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS, AND OTHERS
11.01 A Bidder must be prepared to retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance
of the Work if required to do so by the Bidding Documents or in the Specifications. If a
prospective Bidder objects to retaining any such Subcontractor or Supplier and the concern is
not relieved by an Addendum, then the prospective Bidder should refrain from submitting a Bid.
11.02 In addition to identification of the Bidder’s selected prequalified subcontractors as listed in
Article 3, the apparent Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, must submit to
Owner a list of the Subcontractors or Suppliers proposed for the following portions of the Work
within five days after Bid opening:
A. Structural Concrete
11.03 If requested by Owner, such list must be accompanied by an experience statement with pertinent
information regarding similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each such
Subcontractor or Supplier. If Owner or Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable
objection to any proposed Subcontractor or Supplier, Owner may, before the Notice of Award is
given, request apparent Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute, in which case
apparent Successful Bidder will submit a substitute, Bidder’s Bid price will be increased (or
decreased) by the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution, and Owner may consider
such price adjustment in evaluating Bids and making the Contract award.
11.04 If apparent Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, Owner may award the
Contract to the next lowest Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors and
Suppliers. Declining to make requested substitutions will constitute grounds for forfeiture of
the Bid security of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor or Supplier, so listed and against which Owner
or Engineer makes no written objection prior to the giving of the Notice of Award will be deemed
acceptable to Owner and Engineer subject to subsequent revocation of such acceptance as
provided in Paragraph 7.07 of the General Conditions.
ARTICLE 12 – PREPARATION OF BID
12.01 The Bid Form is included with the Bidding Documents.
A. All blanks on the Bid Form must be completed in ink and the Bid Form signed in ink .
Erasures or alterations must be initialed in ink by the person signing the Bid Form. A
Bid price must be indicated for each section, Bid item, alternate, adjustment unit price
item, and unit price item listed therein.
B. If the Bid Form expressly indicates that submitting pricing on a specific alternate item is
optional, and Bidder elects to not furnish pricing for such optional alternate item, then
Bidder may enter the words “No Bid” or “Not Applicable”.
12.02 If Bidder has obtained the Bidding Documents as Electronic Documents, then Bidder shall
prepare its Bid on a paper copy of the Bid Form printed from the Electronic Documents version
of the Bidding Documents. The printed copy of the Bid Form must be clearly legible, printed on
8½ inch by 11-inch paper and as closely identical in appearance to the Electronic Document
version of the Bid Form as may be practical. The Owner reserves the right to accept Bid Forms

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 9
which nominally vary in appearance from the original paper version of the Bid Form, providing
that all required information and submittals are included with the Bid.
12.03 A Bid by a corporation must be executed in the corporate name by a corporate officer (whose
title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The
corporate address and state of incorporation must be shown.
12.04 A Bid by a partnership must be executed in the partnership name and signed by a partner (whose
title must appear under the signature), accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The
official address of the partnership must be shown.
12.05 A Bid by a limited liability company must be executed in the name of the firm by a member or
other authorized person and accompanied by evidence of authority to sign. The state of
formation of the firm and the official address of the firm must be shown.
12.06 A Bid by an individual must show the Bidder’s name and official address.
12.07 A Bid by a joint venture must be executed by an authorized representative of each joint venturer
in the manner indicated on the Bid Form. The joint venture must have been formally established
prior to submittal of a Bid, and the official address of the joint venture must be shown.
12.08 All names must be printed in ink below the signatures.
12.09 The Bid must contain an acknowledgment of receipt of all Addenda, the numbers of which must
be filled in on the Bid Form.
12.10 Postal and e mail addresses and telephone number for communications regarding the Bid must
be shown.
12.11 The Bid must contain evidence of Bidder’s authority to do business in the state where the Project
is located, or Bidder must certify in writing that it will obtain such authority within the time for
acceptance of Bids and attach such certification to the Bid.
12.12 If Bidder is required to be licensed to submit a Bid or perform the Work in the state where the
Project is located, the Bid must contain evidence of Bidder’s licensure, or Bidder must certify in
writing that it will obtain such licensure within the time for acceptance of Bids and attach such
certification to the Bid. Bidder’s state contractor license number, if any, must also be shown on
the Bid Form.
ARTICLE 13 – BASIS OF BID
13.01 Lump Sum
A. Bidders must submit a Bid on a lump sum basis as set forth in the Bid Form.
13.02 Unit Price
A. Bidders must submit a Bid on a unit price basis for each item of Work listed in the unit
price section of the Bid Form.
B. The “Bid Price” (sometimes referred to as the extended price) for each unit price Bid
item will be the product of the “Estimated Quantity”, which Owner or its representative
has set forth in the Bid Form, for the item and the corresponding “Bid Unit Price” offered
by the Bidder. The total of all unit price Bid items will be the sum of these “Bid Prices”;
such total will be used by Owner for Bid comparison purposes. The final quantities and
Contract Price will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 13.03 of the General
Conditions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 10
C. Discrepancies between the multiplication of units of Work and unit prices will be
resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any
column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct
sum.
ARTICLE 14 – SUBMITTAL OF BID
14.01 The Bidding Documents include one separate unbound copy of the Bid Form, and, if required,
the Bid Bond Form. The unbound copy of the Bid Form is to be completed and submitted with
the Bid security and the other documents required to be submitted under the terms of Article 2
of the Bid Form.
14.02 A Bid must be received no later than the date and time prescribed and at the place indicated in
the Advertisement or invitation to bid and must be enclosed in a plainly marked package with
the Project title, and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Project for which the Bid is
submitted, the name and address of Bidder, and must be accompanied by the Bid security and
other required documents. If a Bid is sent by mail or other delivery system, the sealed envelope
containing the Bid must be enclosed in a separate package plainly marked on the outside with
the notation “BID ENCLOSED”. A mailed Bid must be addressed to the location designated in
the Advertisement.
14.03 Bids received after the date and time prescribed for the opening of bids, or not submitted at the
correct location or in the designated manner, will not be accepted and will be returned to the
Bidder unopened.
ARTICLE 15 – MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BID
15.01 An unopened Bid may be withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed in the same
manner that a Bid must be executed and delivered to the place where Bids are to be submitted
prior to the date and time for the opening of Bids. Upon receipt of such notice, the unopened Bid
will be returned to the Bidder.
15.02 If a Bidder wishes to modify its Bid prior to Bid opening, Bidder must withdraw its initial Bid in
the manner specified in Paragraph 15.01 and submit a new Bid prior to the date and time for
the opening of Bids.
15.03 If within 24 hours after Bids are opened any Bidder files a duly signed written notice with Owner
and promptly thereafter demonstrates to the reasonable satisfaction of Owner that there was a
material and substantial mistake in the preparation of its Bid, the Bidder may withdraw its Bid,

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 11
and the Bid security will be returned. Thereafter, if the Work is rebid, the Bidder will be
disqualified from further bidding on the Work.
ARTICLE 16 – OPENING OF BIDS
16.01 Bids will be opened at the time and place indicated in the advertisement or invitation to bid and,
unless obviously non-responsive, read aloud publicly. An abstract of the amounts of the base
Bids and major alternates, if any, will be made available to Bidders after the opening of Bids.
ARTICLE 17 – BIDS TO REMAIN SUBJECT TO ACCEPTANCE
17.01 All Bids will remain subject to acceptance for the period of time stated in the Bid Form, but
Owner may, in its sole discretion, release any Bid and return the Bid security prior to the end of
this period.
ARTICLE 18 – EVALUATION OF BIDS AND AWARD OF CONTRACT
18.01 Owner reserves the right to reject any or all Bids, including without limitation, nonconforming,
nonresponsive, unbalanced, or conditional Bids. Owner also reserves the right to waive all minor
Bid informalities not involving price, time, or changes in the Work.
18.02 Owner will reject the Bid of any Bidder that Owner finds, after reasonable inquiry and
evaluation, to not be responsible or qualified in the opinion of the Owner.
18.03 If Bidder purports to add terms or conditions to its Bid, takes exception to any provision of the
Bidding Documents, or attempts to alter the contents of the Contract Documents for purposes
of the Bid, whether in the Bid itself or in a separate communication to Owner or Engineer, then
Owner will reject the Bid as nonresponsive.
18.04 If Owner awards the contract for the Work, such award will be to the responsible Bidder
submitting the lowest responsive Bid.
18.05 Evaluation of Bids
A. In evaluating Bids, Owner will consider whether the Bids comply with the prescribed
requirements, and such alternates, unit prices, and other data, as may be requested in
the Bid Form or prior to the Notice of Award.
B. For the determination of the apparent low Bidder when unit price bids are submitted,
Bids will be compared based on the total of the products of the estimated quantity of
each item and unit price Bid for that item, together with any lump sum items.

18.06 In evaluating whether a Bidder is responsible, Owner will consider the qualifications of the
Bidder and may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors and Suppliers

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 21 13 - 12
proposed for those portions of the Work for which the identity of Subcontractors and Suppliers
must be submitted as provided in the Bidding Documents.
18.07 Owner may conduct such investigations as Owner deems necessary to establish the
responsibility, qualifications, and financial ability of Bidders and any proposed Subcontractors
or Suppliers.
ARTICLE 19 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
19.01 Article 6 of the General Conditions, as may be modified by the Supplementary Conditions, sets
forth Owner’s requirements as to performance and payment bonds, other required bonds (if
any), and insurance. When the Successful Bidder delivers the executed Agreement to Owner, it
must be accompanied by required bonds and insurance documentation.
19.02 Article 8, Bid Security, of these Instructions, addresses any requirements for providing bid bonds
as part of the bidding process.
ARTICLE 20 – SIGNING OF AGREEMENT
20.01 When Owner issues a Notice of Award to the Successful Bidder, it will be accompanied by the
unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement along with the other Contract Documents as
identified in the Agreement. Within 15 days thereafter, Successful Bidder must execute and
deliver the required number of counterparts of the Agreement and any bonds and insurance
documentation required to be delivered by the Contract Documents to Owner. Within 10 days
thereafter, Owner will deliver one fully executed counterpart of the Agreement to Successful
Bidder, together with printed and electronic copies of the Contract Documents as stated in
Paragraph 2.02 of the General Conditions.
END OF SECTION

DISTRICT SUPPLIED PUBLIC CONTRACT BOYCOTT RESTRICTIONS
COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATION FORM
Public Contract Boycott Restrictions Compliance Certification
Pursuant to §63G-27-201, U.C.A. et seq., I, ______________________, am the
________________________ (Position/Title) of ___________________________ (“Company”)
in ______________________________ (City & State). I have the legal authority to make the
following assertation (check one):
I certify that the Company has fewer than 10 employees and is therefore exempt from
§63G-27-201, U.C.A. et seq.
OR
I certify that the Company is not currently engaged in any boycotting activities.
OR
I certify that the Company is not currently engaged in a boycott of:
The State of Israel;
A company associated with fossil fuel-based energy, timber, mining, or
agriculture;
A company that facilitates or supports the manufacture, distribution, sale, or use
of firearms;
A company that does not meet or commit to meet environmental standards;
A company that does not facilitate or commit to facilitate access to abortion or sex
characteristic surgical procedures; or
A company that does business with any of the above.
I also certify that, for the duration of the contract, the Company will not engage in a boycott of
the State of Israel and the Company will inform Weber Basin Water Conservancy District in
writing if the Company begins to engage in any boycott listed above.
______________________________
Affiant

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BID FORM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 41 00 - 1
SECTION 00 41 00
BID FORM

This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-410, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional
Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on
excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject
to the copyright.

The terms used in this Bid with initial capital letters have the meanings stated in the Instructions to
Bidders, the General Conditions, and the Supplementary Conditions.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 – Owner And Bidder ........................................................................................................................................ 2
ARTICLE 2 – Attachments to This Bid ............................................................................................................................. 2
ARTICLE 3 – Basis of Bid – Lump Sum Bid And Unit Prices ................................................................................... 2
ARTICLE 4 – Basis of Bid – Cost-Plus Fee ...................................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 5 – Basis of Bid – Price Plus Time .................................................................................................................. 4
ARTICLE 6 – Time of Completion ...................................................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 7 – Bidder’s Acknowledgements: Acceptance Period, Instructions, And Receipt of Addenda
......................................................................................................................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 8 – Bidder’s Representations And Certifications .................................................................................... 5
ARTICLE 9 – Potential Economic Price Adjustments................................................................................................ 6

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BID FORM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 41 00 - 2
ARTICLE 1 – OWNER AND BIDDER
1.01 This Bid is submitted to:
Weber Basin Water Conservancy District
ATTN: Jesse Moreno
2837 East Highway 193
Layton, Utah
1.02 The undersigned Bidder proposes and agrees, if this Bid is accepted, to enter into an Agreement
with Owner in the form included in the Bidding Documents to perform all Work as specified or
indicated in the Bidding Documents for the prices and within the times indicated in this Bid and
in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Bidding Documents.
ARTICLE 2 – ATTACHMENTS TO THIS BID
2.01 The following documents are submitted with and made a condition of this Bid:
A. Required Bid security.
B. List of Proposed Subcontractors.
C. List of Proposed Suppliers.
D. Evidence of authority to do business in the state of the Project; or a written covenant to
obtain such authority within the time for acceptance of Bids.
E. Contractor’s license number as evidence of Bidder’s State Contractor’s License or a
covenant by Bidder to obtain said license within the time for acceptance of Bids; and,
F. Required Bidder Qualification Statement with supporting data.
ARTICLE 3 – BASIS OF BID – LUMP SUM BID AND UNIT PRICES
3.01 Unit Price Bids
A. Bidder will perform the following Work at the indicated unit prices:
Item
No.
Description Unit Estimated
Quantity
Bid Unit
Price
Bid Amount
1 Mobilization:
Price shall include mobilization,
demobilization, temporary
facilities, administrative items,
materials testing, and permitting.
Shall not exceed 6% of the total Bid.
LS 1 $
2 Demolition of Existing Facilities:
Price shall include but not be
limited to demolition and hauling
of existing building materials,
mechanical equipment, electrical
gear, civil/site improvements, saw
cutting, tree trimming, and other
items scheduled for demolition,
removal, and/or salvage as
specified and shown on the plans.
LS 1 $

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BID FORM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 41 00 - 3
3 Onsite Sodium Hypochlorite
Generation System:
Price shall include but not be
limited to furnishing and installing
a complete and operable system as
specified and shown on the plans.
LS 1 $
4 Balance of Work – Construction
of New South Weber Well #2:
Balance of all work including but
not limited to site preparation, civil
improvements, yard piping,
connection to existing piping,
architectural, structural,
mechanical, electrical, HVAC,
instrumentation, and all work other
than tasks described in Items 1, 2,
4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 as necessary to
complete the project as described
in the plans and specifications.
LS 1 $
5 Asphalt Pavement: Price shall
include all material, labor, and
equipment to place the asphalt
pavement section shown on detail
C-2109.
SY 775 $
6 Type “G” Material for Ground
Cover: Price shall include all
material, labor, and equipment to
place Type “G” road base over a
properly prepared subgrade where
designated to be used as the
finished grade outside of other
structures or pavement sections.
TON 250 $
7 Contractor Services Related to
Owner Provided Medium Voltage
Metering Cabinet: Price shall
include all related work necessary
to properly coordinate and install
the Owner Provided Medium
Voltage Metering Cabinet as
described in 01 11 00 Summary of
Work §1.5-B
EA 1 $
8 Contractor Services Related to
Owner Provided Medium Voltage
Switch ‘MVS’: Price shall include
all related work necessary to
properly coordinate and install the
Owner Provided Medium Voltage
Switch as described in 01 11 00
Summary of Work §1.5-B
EA 1 $
9 Contractor Services Related to
Owner Provided Transformer
EA 1 $

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BID FORM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 41 00 - 4
‘HT2’: Price shall include all related
work necessary to properly
coordinate and install the Owner
Provided Transformer ‘HT2’ as
described in 01 11 00 Summary of
Work §1.5-B
10 Contractor Services Related to
Owner Provided Medium Voltage
VFD: Price shall include all related
work necessary to properly
coordinate and install the Owner
Provided Medium Voltage VFD as
described in 01 11 00 Summary of
Work §1.5-B
EA 1 $
B. Bidder acknowledges that:
1. Each Bid Unit Price includes an amount considered by Bidder to be adequate to
cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item, and
2. Estimated quantities are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of
comparison of Bids, and final payment for all Unit Price Work will be based on actual
quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents.
3.02 Total Bid Price (Lump Sum and Unit Prices)
Total Bid Price (Total of all Lump Sum and Unit Price Bids) $
ARTICLE 4 – TIME OF COMPLETION
4.01 Bidder agrees that the Work will be substantially complete on or before April 15, 2025, and will
be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General
Conditions on or before August 31, 2025.
4.02 Bidder accepts the provisions of the Agreement as to liquidated damages.
ARTICLE 5 – BIDDER’S ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS: ACCEPTANCE PERIOD, INSTRUCTIONS, AND
RECEIPT OF ADDENDA
5.01 Bid Acceptance Period
A. This Bid will remain subject to acceptance for 60 days after the Bid opening, or for such
longer period that Bidder may agree to in writing upon request of Owner.
5.02 Instructions to Bidders
A. Bidder accepts all the terms and conditions of the Instructions to Bidders, including
without limitation those dealing with the disposition of Bid security.
5.03 Receipt of Addenda
A. Bidder hereby acknowledges receipt of the following Addenda:
Addendum Number Addendum Date

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BID FORM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 41 00 - 5
Addendum Number Addendum Date

ARTICLE 6 – BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS
6.01 Bidder’s Representations
A. In submitting this Bid, Bidder represents the following:
1. Bidder has examined and carefully studied the Bidding Documents, including
Addenda.
2. Bidder has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site and
adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions that
may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
3. Bidder is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and
performance of the Work.
4. Bidder has carefully studied the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or adjacent to the Site and the drawings of physical conditions relating
to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in
the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to the Technical Data in such reports
and drawings.
5. Bidder has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous
Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified
in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and
drawings.
6. Bidder has considered the information known to Bidder itself; information
commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site;
information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Bidding
Documents; and the Technical Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or
by definition, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and
Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (b) the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be
employed by Bidder, if selected as Contractor; and (c) Bidder’s (Contractor’s) safety
precautions and programs.
7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph,
Bidder agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,
studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price,
within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions
of the Contract.
8. Bidder is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and others
at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Bidding Documents.
9. Bidder has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Bidder has discovered in the Bidding Documents, and of
discrepancies between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the written
resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.
10. The Bidding Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the
Work.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BID FORM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 41 00 - 6
11. The submission of this Bid constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Bidder
that without exception the Bid and all prices in the Bid are premised upon
performing and furnishing the Work required by the Bidding Documents.
6.02 Bidder’s Certifications
A. The Bidder certifies the following:
1. This Bid is genuine and not made in the interest of or on behalf of any undisclosed
individual or entity and is not submitted in conformity with any collusive agreement
or rules of any group, association, organization, or corporation.
2. Bidder has not directly or indirectly induced or solicited any other Bidder to submit
a false or sham Bid.
3. Bidder has not solicited or induced any individual or entity to refrain from bidding.
4. Bidder has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive practices in
competing for the Contract. For the purposes of this Paragraph 8.02.A:
a. Corrupt practice means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything
of value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process.
b. Fraudulent practice means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made
(a) to influence the bidding process to the detriment of Owner, (b) to establish
bid prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or (c) to deprive Owner of the
benefits of free and open competition.
c. Collusive practice means a scheme or arrangement between two or more
Bidders, with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to
establish bid prices at artificial, non-competitive levels.
d. Coercive practice means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,
persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process
or affect the execution of the Contract.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BID BOND (PENAL SUM FORM)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 43 13 - 1
SECTION 00 43 13
BID BOND (PENAL SUM FORM)

Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-430) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and
American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

Bidder Surety
Name: [Full formal name bidder] Name: [Full formal name of Surety]
Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business):
[Full address of Bidder] [Full address of Surety]
Owner Bid
Name: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Project (name and location):
Mailing address (principal place of business): South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
South Weber, Utah 2837 East Hwy 193
Layton, UT 84040
Bid Due Date [Bid Date]
Bond
Penal Sum: [Bond Amount]
Date of Bond: [Bond Date]
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth herein, do each
cause this Bid Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
Bidder Surety

(Full formal name of Bidder) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)
By: By:
(Signature) (Signature) (Attach Power of Attorney)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:

Attest: Attest:
(Signature) (Signature)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to C ontractor,
Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BID BOND (PENAL SUM FORM)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 43 13 - 2
1. Bidder and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns to pay to
Owner upon default of Bidder the penal sum set forth on the face of this Bond. Payment of the penal sum is the extent of Bi dder’s and
Surety’s liability. Recovery of such penal sum under the terms of this Bond will be Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy upon de fault of
Bidder.
2. Default of Bidder occurs upon the failure of Bidder to deliver within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any exte nsion
thereof agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and
payment bonds required by the Bidding Documents.
3. This obligation will be null and void if:
3.1 Owner accepts Bidder’s Bid and Bidder delivers within the time required by the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof
agreed to in writing by Owner) the executed Agreement required by the Bidding Documents and any performance and payment
bonds required by the Bidding Documents, or
3.2 All Bids are rejected by Owner, or
3.3 Owner fails to issue a Notice of Award to Bidder within the time specified in the Bidding Documents (or any extension thereof
agreed to in writing by Bidder and, if applicable, consented to by Surety when required by Paragraph 5 hereof).
4. Payment under this Bond will be due and payable upon default of Bidder and within 30 calendar days after receipt by Bidder an d
Surety of written notice of default from Owner, which notice will be given with reasonable promptness, identifying this Bond and the
Project and including a statement of the amount due.
5. Surety waives notice of any and all defenses based on or arising out of any time extension to issue Notice of Award agreed to in writing
by Owner and Bidder, provided that the total time for issuing Notice of Award including extensions does not in the aggregate exceed
120 days from the Bid due date without Surety’s written consent.
6. No suit or action will be commenced under this Bond prior to 30 calendar days after the notice of default required in Paragraph 4
above is received by Bidder and Surety, and in no case later than one year after the Bid due date.
7. Any suit or action under this Bond will be commenced only in a court of competent jurisdiction located in the state in which the Project
is located.
8. Notices required hereunder must be in writing and sent to Bidder and Surety at their respective addresses shown on the face o f this
Bond. Such notices may be sent by personal delivery, commercial courier, or by United States Postal Service registered or certified
mail, return receipt requested, postage pre-paid, and will be deemed to be effective upon receipt by the party concerned.
9. Surety shall cause to be attached to this Bond a current and effective Power of Attorney evidencing the authority of the offi cer, agent,
or representative who executed this Bond on behalf of Surety to execute, seal, and deliver such Bond and bind the Surety thereby.
10. This Bond is intended to conform to all applicable statutory requirements. Any applicable requirement of any applicable statu te that
has been omitted from this Bond will be deemed to be included herein as if set forth at length. If any provision of this Bo nd conflicts
with any applicable statute, then the provision of said statute governs and the remainder of this Bond that is not in conflic t therewith
continues in full force and effect.
11. The term “Bid” as used herein includes a Bid, offer, or proposal as applicable.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 1
SECTION 00 45 13
BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS

This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-451, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional
Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on
excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject
to the copyright. The District reserves the right to reject any or all bids; or to accept or reject the whole or any part of any
bid; or to waive any informality or technicality in any bid in the best interest of the District if the contractor qualifications
cannot be met.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 – General Information .................................................................................................................................... 2
ARTICLE 2 – Licensing ........................................................................................................................................................... 3
ARTICLE 3 – Diverse Business Certifications .............................................................................................................. 3
ARTICLE 4 – Safety.................................................................................................................................................................. 3
ARTICLE 5 – Financial ........................................................................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 6 – Surety Information ....................................................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 7 – Insurance .......................................................................................................................................................... 5
ARTICLE 8 – Construction Experience ........................................................................................................................... 5
ARTICLE 9 – Required Attachments ................................................................................................................................ 6

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 2
ARTICLE 1 – GENERAL INFORMATION
1.01 Provide contact information for the Business:
Legal Name of Business:
Corporate Office
Name: Phone number:
Title: Email address:
Business address of corporate office:

Local Office
Name: Phone number:
Title: Email address:
Business address of local office:

1.02 Provide information on the Business’ organizational structure:
Form of Business: ☐ Sole Proprietorship ☐ Partnership ☐ Corporation
☐ Limited Liability Company ☐ Joint Venture comprised of the following companies:
1.
2.
3.
Provide a separate Qualification Statement for each Joint Venture r.
Date Business was formed: State in which Business was formed:
Is this Business authorized to operate in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No ☐ Pending
1.03 Identify all businesses that own Business in whole or in part (25% or greater), or that are wholly
or partly (25% or greater) owned by Business:
Name of business: Affiliation:
Address:
Name of business: Affiliation:
Address:
Name of business: Affiliation:
Address:
1.04 Provide information regarding the Business’ officers, partners, and limits of authority.
Name: Title:
Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $
Name: Title:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 3
Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $
Name: Title:
Authorized to sign contracts: ☐ Yes ☐ No Limit of Authority: $
Name: Title:
1.05 Provide information regarding site inspection of proposed work.
Name: Date of Inspection

ARTICLE 2 – LICENSING
2.01 Provide information regarding licensure for Business:
Name of License:
Licensing Agency:
License No: Expiration Date:
Name of License:
Licensing Agency:
License No: Expiration Date:
ARTICLE 3 – DIVERSE BUSINESS CERTIFICATIONS
3.01 Provide information regarding Business’ diverse Business Certification, if any. Provide evidence
of current certification.
Certification Certifying Agency Certification
Date
☐ Disadvantaged Business Enterprise
☐ Minority Business Enterprise
☐ Woman-Owned Business Enterprise
☐ Small Business Enterprise
☐ Disabled Business Enterprise
☐ Veteran-Owned Business Enterprise
☐ Service-Disabled Veteran-Owned Business
☐ HUBZone Business (Historically
Underutilized) Business
☐ Other
☐ None
ARTICLE 4 – SAFETY
4.01 Provide information regarding Business’ safety organization and safety performance
Name of Business’s Safety Officer:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 4
Safety Certifications
Certification Name Issuing Agency Expiration

4.02 Provide Worker’s Compensation Insurance Experience Modification Rate (EMR), Total
Recordable Frequency Rate (TRFR) for incidents, and Total Number of Recorded Manhours
(MH) for the last 3 years and the EMR, TRFR, and MH history for the last 3 years of any proposed
Subcontractor(s) that will provide Work valued at 10% or more of the Contract Price. Provide
documentation of the EMR history for Business and Subcontractor(s).

Year
Company EMR TRFR MH EMR TRFR MH EMR TRFR MH

ARTICLE 5 – FINANCIAL
5.01 Provide information regarding the Business’s financial stability. Provide the most recent
audited financial statement, and if such audited financial statement is not current, also provide
the most current financial statement.
Financial Institution:
Business address:
Date of Business’s most recent financial statement: ☐ Attached
Date of Business’s most recent audited financial statement: ☐ Attached
Financial indicators from the most recent financial statement
Contractor’s Current Ratio (Current Assets ÷ Current Liabilities)
Contractor’s Quick Ratio ((Cash and Cash Equivalents + Accounts Receivable +
Short Term Investments) ÷ Current Liabilities)
ARTICLE 6 – SURETY INFORMATION
6.01 Provide information regarding the surety company that will issue required bonds on behalf of
the business, including but not limited to performance and payment bonds.
Surety Name:
Surety is a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the state of:
Is surety authorized to provide surety bonds in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 5
Is surety listed in “Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal
Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies” published in Department Circular 570 (as
amended) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury?
☐ Yes ☐ No
Mailing Address
(Principal place of business):

Physical Address
(Principal place of business):

Phone (main): Phone (claims):
ARTICLE 7 – INSURANCE
7.01 Provide information regarding Business' insurance company(s), including but not limited to its
Commercial General Liability carrier. Provide information for each provider.
Name of insurance provider, and type of policy (CLE, auto, etc.):
Insurance Provider Type of Policy (Coverage Provided)

Are providers licensed or authorized to issue policies in the Project location? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Does provider have an A.M. Best Rating of A-VII or better? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Mailing Address
(Principal place of business):

Physical Address
(Principal place of business):

Phone (main):

Phone (claims):
ARTICLE 8 – CONSTRUCTION EXPERIENCE
8.01 Provide information that will identify the overall size and capacity of the Business.
Average number of current full-time employees:
Estimate of revenue for the current year:
Estimate of revenue for the previous year:
8.02 Provide information regarding the Business’s previous contracting experience.
Years of experience with projects like the proposed project:
As a general contractor: As a joint venturer:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 6
Has Business, or a predecessor in interest, or an affiliate identified in Paragraph 1.03 :
Been disqualified as a bidder by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years?
☐ Yes ☐ No
Been barred from contracting by any local, state, or federal agency within the last 5 years?
☐ Yes ☐ No
Been released from a bid in the past 5 years? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Defaulted on a project or failed to complete any contract awarded to it? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Refused to construct or refused to provide materials defined in the contract documents or in a
change order? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Been a party to any currently pending litigation or arbitration? ☐ Yes ☐ No
Provide full details in a separate attachment if the response to any of these questions is Yes.
8.03 List all projects currently under contract in Schedule A and provide indicated information.
8.04 List a minimum of three and a maximum of six projects completed in the last 5 years in
Schedule B and provide indicated information to demonstrate the Business’s experience with
projects similar in type and cost of construction.
8.05 In Schedule C, provide information on key individuals whom Business intends to assign to the
Project. Provide resumes for those individuals included in Schedule C. Key individuals include
the Project Manager, Project Superintendent, Quality Manager, and Safety Manager. Resumes
may be provided for Business’s key leaders as well.
8.06 List major equipment available for this contract in an attachment.
ARTICLE 9 – REQUIRED ATTACHMENTS
9.01 Provide the following information with the Statement of Qualifications:
A. If Business is a Joint Venture, separate Qualifications Statements for each Joint Venturer,
as required in Paragraph 1.02.
B. Diverse Business Certifications if required by Paragraph 3.01.
C. Certification of Business’s safety performance if required by Paragraph 4.02.
D. Financial statements as required by Paragraph 5.01.
E. Attachments providing additional information as required by Paragraph 8.02.
F. Schedule A (Current Projects) as required by Paragraph 8.03.
G. Schedule B (Previous Experience with Similar Projects) as required by Paragraph 8.04.
H. Schedule C (Key Individuals) and resumes for the key individuals listed, as required by
Paragraph 8.05.
I. List of major equipment available for this contract.
J. Additional items as pertinent.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 7
This Statement of Qualifications is offered by:
Business:
(typed or printed name of organization)
By:
(individual’s signature)
Name:
(typed or printed)
Title:
(typed or printed)
Date:
(date signed)
(If Business is a corporation, a partnership, or a joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)

Attest:
(individual’s signature)
Name:
(typed or printed)
Title:
(typed or printed)
Address for giving notices:

Designated Representative:
Name:
(typed or printed)
Title:
(typed or printed)
Address:

Phone:
Email:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 8
Schedule A—Current Projects
Name of Organization
Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed
Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed
Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer

Construction Manager

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 9
Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects
Name of Organization
Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed
Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed
Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 10
Schedule B—Previous Experience with Similar Projects
Name of Organization
Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed

Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed
Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

Project Owner Project Name
General Description of Project
Project Cost Date Project
Completed
Key Project Personnel Project Manager Project Superintendent Safety Manager Quality Control Manager
Name
Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contacting the names individuals as a reference)
Name Title/Position Organization Telephone Email
Owner
Designer
Construction Manager

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 11
Schedule C—Key Individuals
Project Manager
Name of individual
Years of experience as project manager
Years of experience with this organization
Number of similar projects as project manager
Number of similar projects in other positions
Current Project Assignments
Name of assignment Percent of time used for
this project
Estimated project completion
date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference)
Name Name
Title/Position Title/Position
Organization Organization
Telephone Telephone
Email Email
Project Project
Candidate’s role on project Candidate’s role on project
Project Superintendent
Name of individual
Years of experience as project superintendent
Years of experience with this organization
Number of similar projects as project superintendent
Number of similar projects in other positions
Current Project Assignments
Name of assignment Percent of time used for
this project
Estimated project completion
date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference)
Name Name
Title/Position Title/Position
Organization Organization
Telephone Telephone
Email Email
Project Project
Candidate’s role
on project
Candidate’s
role on project

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BIDDER'S QUALIFICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 13 - 12

Safety Manager
Name of individual
Years of experience as project manager
Years of experience with this organization
Number of similar projects as project manager
Number of similar projects in other positions
Current Project Assignments
Name of assignment Percent of time used for
this project
Estimated project completion
date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference)
Name Name
Title/Position Title/Position
Organization Organization
Telephone Telephone
Email Email
Project Project
Candidate’s role on project Candidate’s role on project
Quality Control Manager
Name of individual
Years of experience as project superintendent
Years of experience with this organization
Number of similar projects as project superintendent
Number of similar projects in other positions
Current Project Assignments
Name of assignment Percent of time used for
this project
Estimated project completion
date

Reference Contact Information (listing names indicates approval to contact named individuals as a reference)
Name Name
Title/Position Title/Position
Organization Organization
Telephone Telephone
Email Email
Project Project
Candidate’s role
on project
Candidate’s
role on project

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT E-VERIFY AGREEMENT AND AFFIDAVIT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 30 - 1
SECTION 00 45 30
E-VERIFY AGREEMENT AND AFFIDAVIT

By executing this affidavit, the undersigned Contractor verifies its compliance with Utah Code Ann. §
63G-12-302 and 13-47-201, stating affirmatively that the individual, firm, or corporation which is
engaged in the physical performance of services on behalf of Owner has registered with, and uses the
federal work authorization program commonly known as E-Verify, or any subsequent replacement
program, in accordance with the applicable provisions and deadlines established in Utah Code Ann.
§ 63G-12-302 and 13-47-201.
Contractor agrees that it will continue to use the federal work authorization program throughout the
Contract period, and should it employ or contract with any Subcontractor(s) in connection with the
physical performance of services pursuant to this Agreement with Owner, Contractor will secure
from each such Subcontractor(s) similar verification of compliance with Utah Code Ann. § 63G-12-
302 and 13-47-201 using a similar affidavit.
Contractor agrees to maintain records of such compliance and provide a copy of each verification to
Owner within five days of the time that Subcontractor is retained to perform such services.
Contractor hereby attests that its federal work authorization user identification number and date of
authorization are as follows:
Bidder/Contractor Owner/Public Entity
Name: Full formal name of Bidder/Contractor Name: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District
Federal User ID Number: [Federal ID Number] Address (principal place of business):
Date of Authorization: [Date of authorization] 2837 E Hwy 193
Layton, UT 84040 Address (principal place of business):
Full address of Contractor
I hereby declare under penalty of perjury that the foregoing is true and correct. Executed on the _______ day of
________________, 20____.
Bidder/Contractor as Principal Notary Public
Subscribed and sworn before me on this ______ day
of _______, 20____.
(Full formal name of Contractor)

(Signature)
Name:
(Printed or typed) (Notary Signature & Seal)
Title: My Commission Expires
(date)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT E-VERIFY AGREEMENT AND AFFIDAVIT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 45 30 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT NOTICE OF AWARD
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 51 00 - 1
SECTION 00 51 00
NOTICE OF AWARD

Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-510) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and
American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

Date of Issuance: [Pick Date]
Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner's Contract No.:
Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates Engineer's Project No.: 021-21-01
Project: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction Contract Name:
Bidder:
Bidder’s Address:

You are notified that Owner has accepted your Bid dated [__________________] for the above Contract, and that you are
the Successful Bidder and are awarded a Contract for:
[__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________].
[Describe Work, alternates, or sections of Work awarded]
The Contract Price of the awarded Contract is: $ [___________] [note if subject to unit prices, or cost-plus]
[______] unexecuted counterparts of the Agreement accompany this Notice of Award, and one copy of the Contract
Documents accompanies this Notice of Award, or has been transmitted or made available to Bidder electronically.
[Revise if multiple copies accompany the Notice of Award]
☐ Drawings will be delivered separately from the other Contract Documents.
You must comply with the following conditions precedent within 15 days of the date of receipt of this Notice of Award:
1. Deliver to Owner [______] counterparts of the Agreement, fully executed by Bidder.
2. Deliver with the executed Agreement(s) the Contract security (e.g., performance and payment bonds) and
insurance documentation as specified in the Instructions to Bidders and General Conditions, Articles 2 and 6.
3. Deliver with the executed Agreement(s) the Contractor’s signed Public Contract Boycott Restrictions
Compliance Certificate, found attached to the Instructions to Bidders.
4. Other conditions precedent (if any):
[Describe other conditions that require Successful Bidder’s compliance]
Failure to comply with these conditions within the time specified will entitle Owner to consider you in default, annul
this Notice of Award, and declare your Bid security forfeited.
Within ten days after you comply with the above conditions, Owner will return to you one fully executed counterpart of
the Agreement, together with any additional copies of the Contract Documents as indicated in Paragraph 2.02 of the
General Conditions.
Owner:
By:
Authorized Signature
Name (printed):
Title:

Copy: Engineer
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT NOTICE OF AWARD
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 51 00 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AGREEMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 52 13 - 1
SECTION 00 52 13
AGREEMENT

This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-520, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional
Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on
excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject
to the copyright.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 – Work ................................................................................................................................................................... 2
ARTICLE 2 – The Project....................................................................................................................................................... 2
ARTICLE 3 – Engineer ............................................................................................................................................................ 2
ARTICLE 4 – Contract Times ............................................................................................................................................... 2
ARTICLE 5 – Contract Price ................................................................................................................................................. 3
ARTICLE 6 – Payment Procedures ................................................................................................................................... 3
ARTICLE 7 – Contract Documents .................................................................................................................................... 4
ARTICLE 8 – Representations, Certifications, And Stipulations........................................................................... 5

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AGREEMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 52 13 - 2
This agreement is by and between Weber Basin Water Conservancy District (“Owner”) and [Specify
formal name of Contractor] (“Contractor”).
Terms used in this Agreement have the meanings stated in the General Conditions and the
Supplementary Conditions.
Owner and Contractor hereby agree as follows:
ARTICLE 1 – WORK
1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The
Work is generally described as follows:
Construction of a well house structure and improvements necessary to equip an
existing groundwater well. The well, with a design flowrate of 4,500 gpm will be
pumped with a 1,250 horsepower, medium voltage motor and variable frequency drive.
The CMU building will house electrical equipment and mechanical piping. Site
improvements include the demolition of existing structures, pavement, piping; and the
construction of a six-foot retaining wall, new fencing, gates, pavement, and connections
to existing water lines. Major electrical equipment has been pre-purchased by the
Owner and will be installed by the Contractor.
ARTICLE 2 – THE PROJECT
2.01 The Project, of which the Work under the Contract Documents is a part, is generally described
as follows:
Equipping the existing groundwater well South Weber Well #2.
ARTICLE 3 – ENGINEER
3.01 Owner has retained Bowen Collins & Associates (“Engineer”) to act as Owner’s representative,
assume all duties and responsibilities of Engineer, and have the rights and authority assigned to
Engineer in the Contract.
3.02 The part of the Project that pertains to the Work has been designed by Bowen Collins &
Associates.
ARTICLE 4 – CONTRACT TIMES
4.01 Time of the Essence
A. All time limits for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, and completion and
readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the
Contract.
4.02 Contract Times: Dates
A. The Work will be substantially completed on or before April 15, 2025, and completed
and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General
Conditions on or before August 31, 2025.
4.03 Liquidated Damages
A. Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence as stated in Paragraph 4.01
above and that Owner will suffer financial and other losses if the Work is not completed
and Milestones not achieved within the Contract Times, as duly modified. The parties

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AGREEMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 52 13 - 3
also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving, in a legal or
arbitration proceeding, the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed
on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree
that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty):
1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner $ 500 for each day that expires
after the time (as duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) specified above for
Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete.
2. Completion of Remaining Work: After Substantial Completion, if Contractor shall
neglect, refuse, or fail to complete the remaining Work within the Contract Time (as
duly adjusted pursuant to the Contract) for completion and readiness for final
payment, Contractor shall pay Owner $ 500 for each day that expires after such time
until the Work is completed and ready for final payment.
3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and final
completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently.
B. If Owner recovers liquidated damages for a delay in completion by Contractor, then such
liquidated damages are Owner’s sole and exclusive remedy for such delay, and Owner is
precluded from recovering any other damages, whether actual, direct, excess, or
consequential, for such delay, except for special damages (if any) specified in this
Agreement.
ARTICLE 5 – CONTRACT PRICE
5.01 Owner shall pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents the amounts that follow, subject to adjustment under the Contract:
A. For all Work, at the prices stated in Contractor’s Bid Form, a total lump sum Contract
price of: $ [Enter $ value].
All specific cash allowances are included in the above price in accordance with Paragraph
13.02 of the General Conditions.
B. The Contractor’s Bid Form is included herein.
ARTICLE 6 – PAYMENT PROCEDURES
6.01 Submittal and Processing of Payments
A. Contractor shall submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 15 of the
General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by Engineer as provided
in the General Conditions.
6.02 Progress Payments; Retainage
A. Owner shall make progress payments on the basis of Contractor’s Applications for
Payment on or about the 30th day of each month during performance of the Work as
provided in Paragraph 6.02.A.1 below, provided that such Applications for Payment have
been submitted in a timely manner and otherwise meet the requirements of the Contract.
All such payments will be measured by the Schedule of Values established as provided
in the General Conditions (and in the case of Unit Price Work based on the number of
units completed) or, in the event there is no Schedule of Values, as provided elsewhere
in the Contract.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AGREEMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 52 13 - 4
1. Prior to Substantial Completion, progress payments will be made in an amount
equal to the percentage indicated below but, in each case, less the aggregate of
payments previously made and less such amounts as Owner may withhold,
including but not limited to liquidated damages, in accordance with the Contract
a. Ninety-five (95) percent of Work completed (with the balance being retainage).
B. Upon Substantial Completion, Owner shall pay an amount sufficient to increase total
payments to Contractor to 100 percent of the Work completed, less such amounts set off
by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 15.01.E of the General Conditions, and less 200 percent
of Engineer’s estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected as shown on
the punch list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment.
6.03 Final Payment
A. Upon final completion and acceptance of the Work, Owner shall pay the remainder of the
Contract Price in accordance with Paragraph 15.06 of the General Conditions.
6.04 Consent of Surety
A. Owner will not make final payment or return or release retainage at Substantial
completion or any other time, unless contractor submits written consent of the surety to
such payment, return, or release.
6.05 Interest
A. All amounts not paid when due will bear interest at the rate earned in the Public
Treasurer’s Investment Fund (PTIF).
ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
7.01 Contents
A. The Contract Documents consist of all the following:
1. This Agreement.
2. Bid Form.
3. Bonds.
a. Performance bond (together with power of attorney).
b. Payment bond (together with power of attorney).
4. General Conditions.
5. Supplementary Conditions.
6. Specifications as listed in the table of contents of the project manual.
7. Drawings listed in the Index of Drawings in Volume 2:
8. Addenda (numbers 1 to [Enter last addendum number] , inclusive).
9. Appendices (Owner provided equipment data sheets for Contractor’s reference
only, enumerated as follows)
a. Appendix A: Prepurchase Medium Voltage VFD
b. Appendix B: Prepurchase Medium Voltage Switchgear
c. Appendix C: Prepurchase Medium Voltage Pad Mount Transformer

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AGREEMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 52 13 - 5
10. The following which may be delivered or issued on or after the Effective Date of the
Contract and are not attached hereto:
a. Notice to Proceed.
b. Work Change Directives.
c. Change Orders.
d. Field Orders.
e. Warranty Bond, if any.
f. Public Contract Boycott Restrictions Compliance Certification
B. The Contract Documents listed in Paragraph 7.01.A are attached to this Agreement
(except as expressly noted otherwise above).
C. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article 7.
D. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided
in the Contract.
ARTICLE 8 – REPRESENTATIONS, CERTIFICATIONS, AND STIPULATIONS
8.01 Contractor’s Representations
A. In order to induce Owner to enter into this Contract, Contractor makes the following
representations:
1. Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents, including
Addenda.
2. Contractor has visited the Site, conducted a thorough visual examination of the Site
and adjacent areas, and become familiar with the general, local, and Site conditions
that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work.
3. Contractor is familiar with all Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress,
and performance of the Work.
4. Contractor has carefully studied the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface
conditions at or adjacent to the Site and the drawings of physical conditions relating
to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site that have been identified in
the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to the Technical Data in such reports
and drawings.
5. Contractor has carefully studied the reports and drawings relating to Hazardous
Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site that have been identified
in the Supplementary Conditions, with respect to Technical Data in such reports and
drawings.
6. Contractor has considered the information known to Contractor itself; information
commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site;
information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; the Contract
Documents; and the Technical Data identified in the Supplementary Conditions or
by definition, with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and
Technical Data on (a) the cost, progress, and performance of the Work; (b) the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be
employed by Contractor; and (c) Contractor’s safety precautions and programs.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AGREEMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 52 13 - 6
7. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraph,
Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests,
studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price,
within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions
of the Contract.
8. Contractor is aware of the general nature of work to be performed by Owner and
others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents.
9. Contractor has given Engineer written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or
discrepancies that Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents, and of
discrepancies between Site conditions and the Contract Documents, and the written
resolution thereof by Engineer is acceptable to Contractor.
10. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey
understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the
Work.
11. Contractor’s entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation
by Contractor that without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon
performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents.
8.02 Contractor’s Certifications
A. Contractor certifies that it has not engaged in corrupt, fraudulent, collusive, or coercive
practices in competing for or in executing the Contract. For the purposes of this
Paragraph 8.02:
1. “corrupt practice” means the offering, giving, receiving, or soliciting of anything of
value likely to influence the action of a public official in the bidding process or in the
Contract execution;
2. “fraudulent practice” means an intentional misrepresentation of facts made (a) to
influence the bidding process or the execution of the Contract to the detriment of
Owner, (b) to establish Bid or Contract prices at artificial non-competitive levels, or
(c) to deprive Owner of the benefits of free and open competition;
3. “collusive practice” means a scheme or arrangement between two or more Bidders,
with or without the knowledge of Owner, a purpose of which is to establish Bid
prices at artificial, non-competitive levels; and
4. “coercive practice” means harming or threatening to harm, directly or indirectly,
persons or their property to influence their participation in the bidding process or
affect the execution of the Contract.
8.03 Standard General Conditions
A. Owner stipulates that if the General Conditions that are made a part of this Contract are
EJCDC® C 700, Standard General Conditions for the Construction Contract (2018),
published by the Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee, and if Owner is the
party that has furnished said General Conditions, then Owner has plainly shown all
modifications to the standard wording of such published document to the Contractor,
through a process such as highlighting or “track changes” (redline/strikeout), or in the
Supplementary Conditions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AGREEMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 52 13 - 7
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, Owner and Contractor have signed this Agreement.
This Agreement will be effective on [Pick date of agreement] (which is the Effective Date of the
Contract).
Owner: Contractor:

(typed or printed name of organization) (typed or printed name of organization)
By: By:
(individual’s signature) (individual’s signature)
Date: Date:
(date signed) (date signed)
Name: Name:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)
Title: Title:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)
(If [Type of Entity] is a corporation, a partnership, or a
joint venture, attach evidence of authority to sign.)
Attest: Attest:
(individual’s signature) (individual’s signature)
Title: Title:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)
Address for giving notices: Address for giving notices:

Designated Representative: Designated Representative:
Name: Name:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)
Title: Title:
(typed or printed) (typed or printed)
Address: Address:

Phone: Phone:
Email: Email:
(If Owner is a corporation, attach evidence of authority
to sign. If Owner is a public body, attach evidence of
authority to sign and resolution or other documents
authorizing execution of this Agreement.)
License No.:
(where applicable)
State:

END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AGREEMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 52 13 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT NOTICE TO PROCEED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 55 00 - 1
SECTION 00 55 00
NOTICE TO PROCEED

This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-550, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional
Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on
excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject
to the copyright.

Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner's Contract No.:
Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 021-21-01
Contractor: Contractor's Project No.:
Project: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Contract Name: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Effective Date of Contract: [Pick Date]

TO CONTRACTOR:

Owner hereby notifies Contractor that the Contract Times under the above Contract will commence
to run on [Pick Date] pursuant to Paragraph 4.01 of the General Conditions.

On that date, Contractor shall start performing its obligations under the Contract Documents. No
Work shall be done at the Site prior to such date.
In accordance with the Agreement, the date of Substantial Completion is April 15, 2025 and the date
of readiness for final payment is August 31, 2025.

Before starting any work at the Site, Paragraph 2.01 of the General Conditions requires that
Contractor and Owner must each deliver to the other (with copies to Engineer and other identified
additional insureds) certificates of insurance which each is required to purchase and maintain in
accordance with these Contract Documents.

Owner:

Authorized Signature
By:
Title:
Date Issued: [Pick Date]

Copy: Engineer

END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT NOTICE TO PROCEED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 55 00 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PERFORMANCE BOND
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 61 14 - 1
SECTION 00 61 14
PERFORMANCE BOND

Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-610) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and
American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

Contractor Surety
Name: Full formal name of Contractor Name: Full formal name of Surety
Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business):
Full address of Contractor Full address of Surety
Owner Contract
Name: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Description (name and location):
Mailing address (principal place of business): South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
South Weber , Utah 2837 E Hwy 190
Layton, UT 84040 Contract Price: Amount from Contract
Effective Date of Contract: Date from Contract
Bond

Bond Amount: Bond Amount
Date of Bond: Bond Date
(Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract)
Modifications to this Bond form:
☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 16
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth herein, do each cause this
Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
Contractor as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)
By: By:
(Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:

Attest: Attest:
(Signature) (Signature)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers . (2) Any singular reference to Contractor,
Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PERFORMANCE BOND
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 61 14 - 2
1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assign s to
Owner for the performance of the Construction Contract, which is incorporated herein by reference.
2. If Contractor performs the Construction Contract, Surety and Contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond, except when
applicable to participate in a conference as provided in Paragraph 3.
3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, Surety’s obligation under this Bond will arise after:
3.1 Owner first provides notice to Contractor and Surety that Owner is considering declaring a Contractor Default. Such
notice may indicate whether Owner is requesting a conference among owner, Contractor, and Surety to discuss
contractor’s performance. If owner does not request a conference, surety may, within five (5) business days after receipt
of owner’s notice, request such a conference. If surety timely requests a conference, owner shall attend. Unless owner
agrees otherwise, any conference requested under this Paragraph 3.1 will be held within ten (10) business days of
surety’s receipt of owner’s notice. If owner, contractor, and surety agree, contractor shall be allowed a reasonable time
to perform the Construction Contract, but such an agreement does not waive owner’s right, if any, subsequently to declare
a Contractor Default;
3.2 Owner declares a Contractor Default, terminates the Construction Contract and notifies surety; and
3.3 Owner has agreed to pay the Balance of the Contract Price in accordance with the terms of the Construction Contract to
surety or to a contractor selected to perform the Construction Contract.
4. Failure on the part of owner to comply with the notice requirement in Paragraph 3.1 does not constitute a failure to comply with
a condition precedent to surety’s obligations, or release surety from its obligations, except to the extent surety demonstrates
actual prejudice.
5. When owner has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 3, surety shall promptly and at surety’s expense take one of the following
actions:
5.1 Arrange for contractor, with the consent of owner, to perform and complete the Construction Contract;
5.2 Undertake to perform and complete the Construction Contract itself, through its agents or independent contractors;
5.3 Obtain bids or negotiated proposals from qualified contractors acceptable to owner for a contract for performance and
completion of the Construction Contract, arrange for a contract to be prepared for execution by owner and a contractor
selected with owners concurrence, to be secured with performance and payment bonds executed by a qualified surety
equivalent to the bonds issued on the Construction Contract, and pay to owner the amount of damages as described in
Paragraph 7 in excess of the Balance of the Contract Price incurred by owner as a result of contractor Default; or
5.4 Waive its right to perform and complete, arrange for completion, or obtain a new contractor, and with reasonable
promptness under the circumstances:
5.4.1 After investigation, determine the amount for which it may be liable to owner and, as soon as practicable after the
amount is determined, make payment to owner; or
5.4.2 Deny liability in whole or in part and notify owner, citing the reasons for denial.
6. If surety does not proceed as provided in Paragraph 5 with reasonable promptness, surety shall be deemed to be in default on
this Bond seven days after receipt of an additional written notice from owner to surety demanding that surety perform its
obligations under this Bond, and owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to owner. If surety proceeds as
provided in Paragraph 5.4, and owner refuses the payment, or surety has denied liability, in whole or in part, without further
notice, owner shall be entitled to enforce any remedy available to owner.
7. If surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.2, or 5.3, then the responsibilities of surety to owner will not be greater than those
of contractor under the Construction Contract, and the responsibilities of owner to surety will not be greater than those of owner
under the Construction Contract. Subject to the commitment by owner to pay the Balance of the Contract Price, surety is
obligated, without duplication for:
7.1 the responsibilities of contractor for correction of defective work and completion of the Construction Contract;

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PERFORMANCE BOND
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 61 14 - 3
7.2 additional legal, design professional, and delay costs resulting from contractor’s Default, and resulting from the actions
or failure to act of surety under Paragraph 5; and
7.3 liquidated damages, or if no liquidated damages are specified in the Construction Contract, actual damages caused by
delayed performance or non-performance of contractor.
8. If surety elects to act under Paragraph 5.1, 5.3, or 5.4, surety’s liability is limited to the amount of this Bond.
9. Surety shall not be liable to owner or others for obligations of contractor that are unrelated to the Construction Contract, and
the Balance of the Contract Price will not be reduced or set off on account of any such unrelated obligations. No right of ac tion
will accrue on this Bond to any person or entity other than owner or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns.
10. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts,
purchase orders, and other obligations.
11. Any proceeding, legal or equitable, under this Bond must be instituted in any court of competent jurisdiction in the location in
which the work or part of the work is located and must be instituted within two years after a declaration of Contractor Defau lt
or within two years after contractor ceased working or within two years after surety refuses or fails to perform its obligations
under this Bond, whichever occurs first. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum perio ds
of limitations available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable.
12. Notice to surety, owner, or contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their signature
appears.
13. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction
was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted
therefrom and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When
so furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.
14. Definitions
14.1 Balance of the Contract Price—The total amount payable by owner to contractor under the Construction Contract after
all proper adjustments have been made including allowance for contractor for any amounts received or to be received
by owner in settlement of insurance or other claims for damages to which contractor is entitled, reduced by all valid and
proper payments made to or on behalf of contractor under the Construction Contract.
14.2 Construction Contract—The agreement between owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all
Contract Documents and changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.
14.3 Contractor Default—Failure of contractor, which has not been remedied or waived, to perform or otherwise to comply
with a material term of the Construction Contract.
14.4 Owner Default—Failure of owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay contractor as required under the
Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.
14.5 Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between owner and Contractor.
15. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond will be deemed
to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor.
16. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:
16.1 None
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PERFORMANCE BOND
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 61 14 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAYMENT BOND
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 61 15 - 1
SECTION 00 61 15
PAYMENT BOND

Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-615) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and
American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

Contractor Surety
Name: Full formal name of Contractor Name: Full formal name of Surety
Address (principal place of business): Address (principal place of business):
Full address of Contractor Full address of Surety
Owner Construction Contract
Name: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Description (name and location):
Mailing address (principal place of business): South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
South Weber, Utah 2837 E Hwy 193
Layton, UT 84040 Contract Price: Amount from Contract
Effective Date of Contract: Date from Contract
Bond

Bond Amount: Bond Amount
Date of Bond: Bond Date
(Date of Bond cannot be earlier than Effective Date of Contract)
Modifications to this Bond form:
☐ None ☐ See Paragraph 18
Surety and Contractor, intending to be legally bound hereby, subject to the terms set forth herein, do each cause this
Performance Bond to be duly executed by an authorized officer, agent, or representative.
Contractor as Principal Surety

(Full formal name of Contractor) (Full formal name of Surety) (corporate seal)
By: By:
(Signature) (Signature)(Attach Power of Attorney)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:

Attest: Attest:
(Signature) (Signature)
Name: Name:
(Printed or typed) (Printed or typed)
Title: Title:
Notes: (1) Provide supplemental execution by any additional parties, such as joint venturers. (2) Any singular reference to Contractor,
Surety, Owner, or other party is considered plural where applicable.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAYMENT BOND
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 61 15 - 2
1. Contractor and Surety, jointly and severally, bind themselves, their heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assign s to
owner to pay for labor, materials, and equipment furnished for use in the performance of the Construction Contract, which is
incorporated herein by reference, subject to the following terms.
2. If contractor promptly makes payment of all sums due to Claimants, and defends, indemnifies, and holds harmless owner from
claims, demands, liens, or suits by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in
the performance of the Construction Contract, then surety and contractor shall have no obligation under this Bond.
3. If there is no Owner Default under the Construction Contract, surety’s obligation to owner under this Bond will arise after owner
has promptly notified contractor and surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13) of claims, demands, liens, or suits against
owner or owner’s property by any person or entity seeking payment for labor, materials, or equipment furnished for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract, and tendered defense of such claims, demands, liens, or suits to contractor and surety.
4. When owner has satisfied the conditions in Paragraph 3, surety shall promptly and at surety’s expense defend, indemnify, and
hold harmless owner against a duly tendered claim, demand, lien, or suit.
5. Surety’s obligations to a Claimant under this Bond will arise after the following:
5.1 Claimants who do not have a direct contract with contractor
5.1.1 have furnished a written notice of non-payment to contractor, stating with substantial accuracy the amount
claimed and the name of the party to whom the materials were, or equipment was, furnished or supplied or for
whom the labor was done or performed, within ninety (90) days after having last performed labor or last
furnished materials or equipment included in the Claim; and
5.1.2 have sent a Claim to surety (at the address described in Paragraph 13).
5.2 Claimants who are employed by or have a direct contract with contractor have sent a Claim to surety (at the address
described in Paragraph 13).
6. If a notice of non-payment required by Paragraph 5.1.1 is given by owner to contractor, that is sufficient to satisfy a Claimant’s
obligation to furnish a written notice of non-payment under Paragraph 5.1.1.
7. When a Claimant has satisfied the conditions of Paragraph 5.1 or 5.2, whichever is applicable, surety shall promptly and at
surety’s expense take the following actions:
7.1 Send an answer to the Claimant, with a copy to owner, within sixty (60) days after receipt of the Claim, stating the
amounts that are undisputed and the basis for challenging any amounts that are disputed; and
7.2 Pay or arrange for payment of any undisputed amounts.
7.3 Surety’s failure to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2 will not be deemed to constitute a waiver of
defenses surety or Contractor may have or acquire as to a Claim, except as to undisputed amounts for which surety and
Claimant have reached agreement. If, however, surety fails to discharge its obligations under Paragraph 7.1 or 7.2, surety
shall indemnify the Claimant for the reasonable attorney’s fees the Claimant incurs thereafter to recover any sums found
to be due and owing to the Claimant.
8. Surety’s total obligation will not exceed the amount of this Bond, plus the amount of reasonable attorney’s fees provided under
Paragraph 7.3, and the amount of this Bond will be credited for any payments made in good faith by surety.
9. Amounts owed by owner to contractor under the Construction Contract will be used for the performance of the Construction
Contract and to satisfy claims, if any, under any construction performance bond. By contractor furnishing and owner accepting
this Bond, they agree that all funds earned by contractor in the performance of the Construction Contract are dedicated to
satisfying obligations of contractor and Surety under this Bond, subject to owner’s priority to use the funds for the completion
of the work.
10. Surety shall not be liable to owner, Claimants, or others for obligations of contractor that are unrelated to the Construction
Contract. Owner shall not be liable for the payment of any costs or expenses of any Claimant under this Bond and shall have

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAYMENT BOND
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 61 15 - 3
under this Bond no obligation to make payments to or give notice on behalf of Claimants, or otherwise have any obligations to
Claimants under this Bond.
11. Surety hereby waives notice of any change, including changes of time, to the Construction Contract or to related subcontracts,
purchase orders, and other obligations.
12. No suit or action will be commenced by a Claimant under this Bond other than in a court of competent jurisdiction in the stat e
in which the project that is the subject of the Construction Contract is located or after the expiration of one year from the date
(1) on which the Claimant sent a Claim to surety pursuant to Paragraph 5.1.2 or 5.2, or (2) on which the last labor or service was
performed by anyone or the last materials or equipment were furnished by anyone under the Construction Contract, whichever
of (1) or (2) first occurs. If the provisions of this paragraph are void or prohibited by law, the minimum period of limitati on
available to sureties as a defense in the jurisdiction of the suit will be applicable.
13. Notice and Claims to surety, owner, or contractor must be mailed or delivered to the address shown on the page on which their
signature appears. Actual receipt of notice or Claims, however accomplished, will be sufficient compliance as of the date received.
14. When this Bond has been furnished to comply with a statutory or other legal requirement in the location where the construction
was to be performed, any provision in this Bond conflicting with said statutory or legal requirement will be deemed deleted h ere
from and provisions conforming to such statutory or other legal requirement will be deemed incorporated herein. When so
furnished, the intent is that this Bond will be construed as a statutory bond and not as a common law bond.
15. Upon requests by any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of this Bond, contractor and Owner shall promptly
furnish a copy of this Bond or shall permit a copy to be made.
16. Definitions
16.1 Claim—A written statement by the Claimant including at a minimum:
16.1.1 The name of the Claimant;
16.1.2 The name of the person for whom the labor was done, or materials or equipment furnished;
16.1.3 A copy of the agreement or purchase order pursuant to which labor, materials, or equipment was furnished for
use in the performance of the Construction Contract;
16.1.4 A brief description of the labor, materials, or equipment furnished;
16.1.5 The date on which the Claimant last performed labor or last furnished materials or equipment for use in the
performance of the Construction Contract;
16.1.6 The total amount earned by the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the Claim;
16.1.7 The total amount of previous payments received by the Claimant; and
16.1.8 The total amount due and unpaid to the Claimant for labor, materials, or equipment furnished as of the date of the
Claim.
16.2 Claimant—An individual or entity having a direct contract with contractor or with a subcontractor of contractor to
furnish labor, materials, or equipment for use in the performance of the Construction Contract. The term Claimant also
includes any individual or entity that has rightfully asserted a claim under an applicable mechanic’s lien or similar statute
against the real property upon which the Project is located. The intent of this Bond is to include without limitation in the
terms of “labor, materials, or equipment” that part of the water, gas, power, light, heat, oil, gasoline, telephone service, or
rental equipment used in the Construction Contract, architectural and engineering services required for performance of
the work of contractor and contractor’s subcontractors, and all other items for which a mechanic’s lien may be asserted
in the jurisdiction where the labor, materials, or equipment were furnished.
16.3 Construction Contract—The agreement between owner and Contractor identified on the cover page, including all
Contract Documents and all changes made to the agreement and the Contract Documents.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAYMENT BOND
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 61 15 - 4
16.4 Owner Default—Failure of owner, which has not been remedied or waived, to pay contractor as required under the
Construction Contract or to perform and complete or comply with the other material terms of the Construction Contract.
16.5 Contract Documents—All the documents that comprise the agreement between owner and Contractor.
17. If this Bond is issued for an agreement between a contractor and subcontractor, the term Contractor in this Bond will be deemed
to be Subcontractor and the term Owner will be deemed to be Contractor.
18. Modifications to this Bond are as follows:
18.1 None
END OF SECTION
Fr
o
m
To 1.2.3.4.5.
a.
X
b.
X
c.
6.7.8.9.
Pa
y
m
e
n
t

o
f
:
is

r
e
c
o
m
m
e
n
d
e
d

b
y
:
Pa
y
m
e
n
t

o
f
:
is

a
p
p
r
o
v
e
d

b
y
:
By
Da
t
e
Ap
p
r
o
v
e
d

B
y
:
BC
&
A
WE
B
E
R

B
A
S
I
N

W
A
T
E
R

C
O
N
S
E
R
V
A
N
C
Y

D
I
S
T
R
I
C
T
WE
B
E
R

S
O
U
T
H

W
E
L
L

#
2

R
E
C
O
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
CO
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
'
S

A
P
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

F
O
R

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
PA
G
E

0
0

6
2

7
6

-

1
(C
o
l
u
m
n

G

t
o
t
a
l

o
n

P
r
o
g
r
e
s
s

E
s
t
i
m
a
t
e
s

+

L
i
n
e

5
c

a
b
o
v
e
)

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
.
5.
0
0
%
-
$

5.
0
0
%
-
$

Wo
r
k

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
d

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
St
o
r
e
d

M
a
t
e
r
i
a
l

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
.
Th
e

u
n
d
e
r
s
i
g
n
e
d

C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t
o
r

c
e
r
t
i
f
i
e
s
,

t
o

t
h
e

b
e
s
t

o
f

i
t
s

k
n
o
w
l
e
d
g
e
,

t
h
e

f
o
l
l
o
w
i
n
g
:
(1
)

A
l
l

p
r
e
v
i
o
u
s

p
r
o
g
r
e
s
s

p
a
y
m
e
n
t
s

r
e
c
e
i
v
e
d

f
r
o
m

O
w
n
e
r

o
n

a
c
c
o
u
n
t

o
f

W
o
r
k

d
o
n
e

u
n
d
e
r

t
h
e

C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t

h
a
v
e

b
e
e
n

ap
p
l
i
e
d

o
n

a
c
c
o
u
n
t

t
o

d
i
s
c
h
a
r
g
e

C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t
o
r
'
s

l
e
g
i
t
i
m
a
t
e

o
b
l
i
g
a
t
i
o
n
s

i
n
c
u
r
r
e
d

i
n

c
o
n
n
e
c
t
i
o
n

w
i
t
h

t
h
e

W
o
r
k

c
o
v
e
r
e
d

b
y

pr
i
o
r

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
s

f
o
r

P
a
y
m
e
n
t
;
(2
)

T
i
t
l
e

t
o

a
l
l

W
o
r
k
,

m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s

a
n
d

e
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t

i
n
c
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
d

i
n

s
a
i
d

W
o
r
k
,

o
r

o
t
h
e
r
w
i
s
e

l
i
s
t
e
d

i
n

o
r

c
o
v
e
r
e
d

b
y

t
h
i
s

Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

f
o
r

P
a
y
m
e
n
t
,

w
i
l
l

p
a
s
s

t
o

O
w
n
e
r

a
t

t
i
m
e

o
f

p
a
y
m
e
n
t

f
r
e
e

a
n
d

c
l
e
a
r

o
f

a
l
l

L
i
e
n
s
,

s
e
c
u
r
i
t
y

i
n
t
e
r
e
s
t
s
,

a
n
d

en
c
u
m
b
r
a
n
c
e
s

(
e
x
c
e
p
t

s
u
c
h

a
s

a
r
e

c
o
v
e
r
e
d

b
y

a

b
o
n
d

a
c
c
e
p
t
a
b
l
e

t
o

O
w
n
e
r

i
n
d
e
m
n
i
f
y
i
n
g

O
w
n
e
r

a
g
a
i
n
s
t

a
n
y

s
u
c
h

L
i
e
n
s
,

se
c
u
r
i
t
y

i
n
t
e
r
e
s
t
,

o
r

e
n
c
u
m
b
r
a
n
c
e
s
)
;

a
n
d
(3
)

A
l
l

t
h
e

W
o
r
k

c
o
v
e
r
e
d

b
y

t
h
i
s

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

f
o
r

P
a
y
m
e
n
t

i
s

i
n

a
c
c
o
r
d
a
n
c
e

w
i
t
h

t
h
e

C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
s

a
n
d

i
s

n
o
t

de
f
e
c
t
i
v
e
.
Co
n
t
r
a
c
t
o
r

S
i
g
n
a
t
u
r
e
(E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
)
(D
a
t
e
)
(F
u
n
d
i
n
g

o
r

F
i
n
a
n
c
i
n
g

E
n
t
i
t
y

(
i
f

a
p
p
l
i
c
a
b
l
e
)
(D
a
t
e
)
(E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
)
RE
T
A
I
N
A
G
E
AM
O
U
N
T

E
L
I
G
I
B
L
E

T
O

D
A
T
E

(
L
i
n
e

4

-

L
i
n
e

5
c
)

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
.
LE
S
S

P
R
E
V
I
O
U
S

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
S

(
L
i
n
e

6

o
f

p
r
i
o
r

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
)

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
.
AM
O
U
N
T

D
U
E

T
H
I
S

A
P
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
BA
L
A
N
C
E

T
O

F
I
N
I
S
H
,

P
L
U
S

R
E
T
A
I
N
A
G
E
OR
I
G
I
N
A
L

C
O
N
T
R
A
C
T

P
R
I
C
E

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
.
.
Ne
t

c
h
a
n
g
e

b
y

C
h
a
n
g
e

O
r
d
e
r
s

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
.
.
Cu
r
r
e
n
t

C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t

P
r
i
c
e

(
L
i
n
e

1

±
L
i
n
e

2
)

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
.
.
TO
T
A
L

C
O
M
P
L
E
T
E
D

A
N
D

S
T
O
R
E
D

T
O

D
A
T
E
(C
o
l
u
m
n

F

t
o
t
a
l

o
n

P
r
o
g
r
e
s
s

E
s
t
i
m
a
t
e
s
)

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
.
.
To
t
a
l

r
e
t
a
i
n
a
g
e

(
L
i
n
e

5
a

+

L
i
n
e

5
b

…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
…
(D
a
t
e
)
(L
i
n
e

8

o
r

o
r

o
t
h
e
r

-

a
t
t
a
c
h

e
x
p
l
a
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

o
t
h
e

o
t
h
e
r

a
m
o
u
n
t
)
-
$

(L
i
n
e

8

o
r

o
t
h
e
r

-

a
t
t
a
c
h

e
x
p
l
a
i
n
a
t
i
o
n

o
f

o
t
h
e

o
t
h
e
r

a
m
o
u
n
t
)
CON
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
'
S
C
ER
T
I
F
I
C
A
T
I
O
N
-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

NE
T

C
H
A
N
G
E

B
Y

CH
A
N
G
E

OR
D
E
R
S
-
$

TO
T
A
L
S

-
$

-
$

Nu
m
b
e
r
Ad
d
i
t
i
o
n
s
CO
-
2
5
CO
-
3
0
De
d
u
c
t
i
o
n
s
Co
n
t
r
a
c
t
o
r
'
s

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

f
o
r

P
a
y
m
e
n
t

N
o
.

Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

F
o
r

P
a
y
m
e
n
t
Ch
a
n
g
e

O
r
d
e
r

S
u
m
m
a
r
y
Ap
p
r
o
v
e
d

C
h
a
n
g
e

O
r
d
e
r
s
En
g
i
n
e
e
r
'
s

P
r
o
j
e
c
t

N
o
:
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

P
e
r
i
o
d
:
Fr
o
m

(
C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t
o
r
)
:
Co
n
t
r
a
c
t
:
Co
n
t
r
a
c
t
o
r
'
s

P
r
o
j
e
c
t

N
o
:
Ow
n
e
r
'
s

C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t

N
o
:
To

(
O
w
n
e
r
)
:
Pr
o
j
e
c
t
:
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

D
a
t
e
:
Vi
a

(
E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
)
:
SE
C
T
I
O
N

0
0

6
2

7
6
CO
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
'
S

A
P
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

F
O
R

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
Co
p
y
r
i
g
h
t
©

2
0
1
8

(
E
J
C
D
C

C
-
6
2
0
)

N
a
t
i
o
n
a
l

S
o
c
i
e
t
y

o
f

P
r
o
f
e
s
s
i
o
n
a
l

E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
s
,

A
m
e
r
i
c
a
n

C
o
u
n
c
i
l

o
f

E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
i
n
g

C
o
m
p
a
n
i
e
s
,
a
n
d

A
m
e
r
i
c
a
n

S
o
c
i
e
t
y

o
f

C
i
v
i
l

E
n
g
i
n
e
e
r
s
.

A
l
l

r
i
g
h
t
s

r
e
s
e
r
v
e
d
.
Pr
o
g
r
e
s
s

E
s
t
i
m
a
t
e

-

L
u
m
p

S
u
m

w
o
r
k
Co
n
t
r
a
c
t
o
r
'
s

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
Fr
o
m
To
-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

To
t
a
l
s
A
Va
l
u
e

o
f

W
o
r
k

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
d

(
$
)
C
D
Sp
e
c
i
f
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

Se
c
t
i
o
n

N
o
.
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
Sc
h
e
d
u
l
e
d

V
a
l
u
e

($
)
-
$

Fo
r

(
C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t
)
:
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

N
u
m
b
e
r
:
Fr
o
m

P
r
e
v
i
o
u
s

Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

(
C
+
D
)
Th
i
s

P
e
r
i
o
d
Va
l
u
e

o
f

M
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s

Pr
e
s
e
n
t
l
y

S
t
o
r
e
d

(n
o
t

i
n

C

o
r

D
)
To
t
a
l

V
a
l
u
e

Co
m
p
l
e
t
e
d

a
n
d

St
o
r
e
d

t
o

D
a
t
e

(C
+
D
+
E
)
%
(F
/
B
)
Ba
l
a
n
c
e
to

F
i
n
i
s
h
(B
-
F
)
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

D
a
t
e
:
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

P
e
r
i
o
d
:
B
E
F
G
BC
&
A
WE
B
E
R

B
A
S
I
N

W
A
T
E
R

C
O
N
S
E
R
V
A
N
C
Y

D
I
S
T
R
I
C
T
WE
B
E
R

S
O
U
T
H

W
E
L
L

#
2

R
E
C
O
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
CO
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
'
S

A
P
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

F
O
R

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
PA
G
E

0
0

6
2

7
6

-

2
Pr
o
g
r
e
s
s

E
s
t
i
m
a
t
e

-

U
n
i
t

P
r
i
c
e

W
o
r
k
Co
n
t
r
a
c
t
o
r
'
s

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
Fr
o
m
To
-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

0.
0
0
0.
0
0
-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

0.
0
0
-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
0.
0
0
-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

It
e
m
Co
n
t
r
a
c
t

I
n
f
o
r
m
a
t
i
o
n
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

N
u
m
b
e
r
:
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

D
a
t
e
:
1/
0
/
1
9
0
0
C3
D
To
t
a
l

V
a
l
u
e

o
f

It
e
m

(
$
)
Fr
o
m

Pr
e
v
i
o
u
s

Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

(C
3
)
Es
t
.

Q
t
y
.

In
s
t
a
l
l
e
d

T
h
i
s

Pe
r
i
o
d
Es
t
.

T
o
t
a
l

Q
t
y
.

In
s
t
a
l
l
e
d

(C
1
+
C
2
)
Va
l
u
e

o
f

W
o
r
k

In
s
t
a
l
l
e
d

t
o

Da
t
e
Va
l
u
e

o
f

Ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
s

Pr
e
s
e
n
t
l
y

S
t
o
r
e
d
(N
o
t

i
n

C
)
E
F
Wo
r
k

C
o
m
p
l
e
t
e
d
B
C1
C2
To
t
a
l

V
a
l
u
e

o
f

Co
m
p
l
e
t
e
d

a
n
d

St
o
r
e
d

t
o

D
a
t
e

(D

+

E
)
%
(F

/

B
)
Ba
l
a
n
c
e

t
o

Fi
n
i
s
h
(B

-

F
)
1/
0
/
1
9
0
0
1/
0
/
1
9
0
0
Bi
d

It
e
m

No
.
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
It
e
m

Qu
a
n
t
i
t
y
Un
i
t
s
Un
i
t

P
r
i
c
e
Fo
r

(
C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t
)
:
0
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

P
e
r
i
o
d
:
A
WE
B
E
R

S
O
U
T
H

W
E
L
L

#
2

R
E
C
O
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
CO
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
'
S

A
P
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

F
O
R

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
PA
G
E

0
0

6
2

7
6

-

3
-
$

To
t
a
l
s
-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

BC
&
A
WE
B
E
R

B
A
S
I
N

W
A
T
E
R

C
O
N
S
E
R
V
A
N
C
Y

D
I
S
T
R
I
C
T
St
o
r
e
d

M
a
t
e
r
i
a
l

S
u
m
m
a
r
y
Co
n
t
r
a
c
t
o
r
'
s

A
p
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n
Fr
o
m
To
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

N
u
m
b
e
r
:
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

D
a
t
e
:
Fo
r

(
C
o
n
t
r
a
c
t
)
:
0
Ap
p
l
i
c
a
t
i
o
n

P
e
r
i
o
d
:
A
B
C
D
St
o
r
e
d

P
r
e
v
i
o
u
s
l
y
St
o
r
e
d

T
h
i
s

M
o
n
t
h
Su
p
p
l
i
e
r

In
v
o
i
c
e

No
.
Bi
d

I
t
e
m

No
.
Am
o
u
n
t
(
$
)
Am
o
u
n
t

S
t
o
r
e
d

th
i
s

M
o
n
t
h
(
$
)
Su
b
t
o
t
a
l

Am
o
u
n
t

Co
m
p
l
e
t
e
d

a
n
d

St
o
r
e
d

t
o

d
a
t
e

($
)

(
D

+

E
)
Da
t
e

P
l
a
c
e
d

In
t
o

S
t
o
r
a
g
e

(M
o
n
t
h
/
Y
e
a
r
)
1/
0
/
1
9
0
0
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n

o
f

M
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
s

o
r

E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t

S
t
o
r
e
d
1/
0
/
1
9
0
0
1/
0
/
1
9
0
0
In
c
o
r
p
o
r
a
t
e
d

i
n
t
o

W
o
r
k
F
G
Ma
t
e
r
i
a
l
s

Re
m
a
i
n
i
n
g

i
n

St
o
r
a
g
e

(
$
)
(D

+

E

-

F
)
Da
t
e

P
l
a
c
e
d

In
t
o

W
o
r
k
(M
o
n
t
h
/
Y
e
a
r
)
Am
o
u
n
t
(
$
)
E
Su
b
m
i
t
t
a
l
No
.

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

BC
&
A
WE
B
E
R

B
A
S
I
N

W
A
T
E
R

C
O
N
S
E
R
V
A
N
C
Y

D
I
S
T
R
I
C
T
WE
B
E
R

S
O
U
T
H

W
E
L
L

#
2

R
E
C
O
N
S
T
R
U
C
T
I
O
N
CO
N
T
R
A
C
T
O
R
'
S

A
P
P
L
I
C
A
T
I
O
N

F
O
R

P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
PA
G
E

0
0

6
2

7
6

-

4
To
t
a
l
s
-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

-
$

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ORDER FORM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 63 36 - 1
SECTION 00 63 36
FIELD ORDER FORM

Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-942) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and
American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Field Order No.
Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner’s Project No.:
Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 021-21-01
Contractor: Contractor's Project No.:
Project: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Contract Name: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Date Issued: Pick a date Effective Date of Field Order: Pick a date
Contractor is hereby directed to promptly execute this Field Order, issued in accordance with Paragraph 11.04
of the General Conditions, for minor changes in the Work without changes in Contract Price or Contract Times.
If Contractor considers that a change in Contract Price or Contract Times is required, submit a Change Proposal
before proceeding with this Work.
Reference:

Description:

Attachments:
ISSUED: RECEIVED:
By: By:
Engineer (Authorized Signature) Contractor (Authorized Signature)
Title: Title:
Date: Date:

Copy to: Owner
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ORDER FORM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 63 36 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 63 49 - 1
SECTION 00 63 49
WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE

This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-940, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional Engineers,
American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on excerpts from EJCD C
documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject to the copyright.

Work Change Directive No.
Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner’s Project No.:
Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 021-21-01
Contractor: Contractor's Project No.:
Project: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Contract Name: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Date Issued: Pick a date Effective Date of Work Change Directive: Pick a date
Contractor is directed to proceed promptly with the following change(s):
Description:

Attachments:

Purpose for Work Change Directive:
Directive to proceed promptly with the Work described herein, prior to agreeing to changes on Contract
Price and Contract Time, is issued due to:
☐ Non-agreement on pricing of proposed change.
☐ Necessity to proceed for schedule or other Project reasons.
Estimated Change in Contract Price and Contract Times (non-binding, preliminary):
Contract Price $ [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated]
Contract Time days [increase] [decrease] [not yet estimated]
BASIS OF ESTIMATED CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE:
☐ Lump Sum ☐ Unit Price
☐ Cost of the Work ☐ Other
RECOMMENDED BY ENGINEER: AUTHORIZED BY OWNER:
By: By:
Engineer (Authorized Signature) Owner (Authorized Signature)
Title: Title:
Date: Date:
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 63 49 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHANGE ORDER
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 63 63 - 1
SECTION 00 63 63
CHANGE ORDER
Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-941) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering Companies, and
American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.
Change Order No.
Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner's Contract No.:
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates Engineer's Project No.: 021-21-01
Project: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Contract Name: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Date Issued: Pick a date Effective Date of Change Order: Pick a date
The Contract is modified as follows upon execution of this Change Order:
Description:
Attachments:

CHANGE IN CONTRACT PRICE CHANGE IN CONTRACT TIMES
note changes in Milestones if applicable
Original Contract Price: Original Contract Times:
$
Substantial Completion:
Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
[increase] [decrease] from previously approved
Change Orders No. ____ to No. ____:
[increase] [decrease] from previously approved Change
Orders No. ____ to No. ____:
$
Substantial Completion:
Ready for Final Payment:
days
Contract Price prior to this Change Order: Contract Times prior to this Change Order:
$
Substantial Completion:
Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
[increase] [decrease] of this Change Order: [increase] [decrease] of this Change Order:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHANGE ORDER
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 63 63 - 2
$
Substantial Completion:
Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
Contract Price incorporating this Change Order: Contract Times with all approved Change Orders:
$
Substantial Completion:
Ready for Final Payment:
days or dates
RECOMMENDED BY ENGINEER: ACCEPTED BY OWNER: ACCEPTED BY CONTRACTOR:
By: By: By:
Engineer (if required) Owner (Authorized)
Signature)
Contractor (Authorized)
Signature) Title: Title: Title
:

Date: Pick a date Date: Pick a date Date
:
Pick a date
Approved by Funding Agency (if applicable)
By: Date: Pick a date
Title:
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 65 16 - 1
SECTION 00 65 16
CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-625) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering
Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner's Contract No.:
Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 021-21-01
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Project: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Contract Name: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
This [Select preliminary or final] Certificate of Substantial Completion applies to:
☐ All Work ☐ The following specified portions of the Work:

Date of Substantial completion: Select date, as determined by Engineer.
The Work to which this Certificate applies has been inspected by authorized representatives of
Owner, Contractor, and Engineer, and found to be substantially complete. The Date of Substantial
Completion of the Work or portion thereof designated above is hereby established, subject to the
provisions of the Contract pertaining to Substantial Completion. The date of Substantial Completion
in the final Certificate of Substantial Completion marks the commencement of the contractual
correction period and applicable warranties required by the Contract.
A punch list of items to be completed or corrected is attached to this Certificate. This list may not be
all-inclusive, and the failure to include any items on such list does not alter the responsibility of the
Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
Amendments of contractual responsibilities recorded in this Certificate should be the product of
mutual agreement of Owner and Contractor; see Paragraph 15.03.D of the General Conditions.
The responsibilities between Owner and Contractor for security, operation, safety, maintenance,
heat, utilities, insurance, and warranties upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work must be as
provided in the Contract, except as amended as follows:
Amendments to Owner's
responsibilities:

☐ None

☐ As follows

Amendments to Contractor's
responsibilities:

☐ None

☐ As follows

The following documents are attached to and made a part of this Certificate:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 65 16 - 2
[List attachments such as punch list; other documents]
This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents, nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract.

ENGINEER:
By: (signature):
(Authorized signature)
Name (printed):
Title:

Date: Pick a date.

END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT NOTICE OF ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 65 18 - 1
SECTION 00 65 18
NOTICE OF ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK

Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-626) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering
Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

Owner: Weber Basin Water Conservancy District Owner's Project No.:
Engineer: Bowen Collins & Associates Engineer’s Project No.: 021-21-01
Contractor: Contractor’s Project No.:
Project: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Contract Name: South Weber Well #2 Reconstruction
Notice Date: Pick a date Effective Date of Construction Contract: Pick a date

Engineer hereby gives notice to Owner and Contractor that Engineer recommends final payment to
Contractor, and that the Work furnished and performed by Contractor under the Construction
Contract is acceptable, expressly subject to the provisions of the Construction Contract’s Contract
Documents (“Contract Documents”) and of the Agreement between Owner and Engineer for
Professional Services dated Pick a date (“Owner Engineer Agreement”). This Notice of Acceptability
of Work (Notice) is made expressly subject to the following terms and conditions to which all who
receive and rely on said Notice agree:
1. This Notice has been prepared with the skill and care ordinarily used by members of the
engineering profession practicing under similar conditions at the same time and in the same
locality.
2. This Notice reflects and is an expression of the Engineer’s professional opinion.
3. This Notice has been prepared to the best of Engineer’s knowledge, information, and belief as of
the Notice Date.
4. This Notice is based entirely on and expressly limited by the scope of services Engineer has been
employed by Owner to perform or furnish during construction of the Project (including
observation of the Contractor’s Work) under the Owner Engineer Agreement and applies only
to facts that are within Engineer’s knowledge or could reasonably have been ascertained by
Engineer as a result of carrying out the responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer under
such Owner Engineer Agreement.
5. This Notice is not a guarantee or warranty of Contractor’s performance under the Construction
Contract, an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents,
including but not limited to defective Work discovered after final inspection, nor an assumption
of responsibility for any failure of Contractor to furnish and perform the Work thereunder in
accordance with the Contract Documents, or to otherwise comply with the Contract Documents
or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein.
6. This Notice does not relieve Contractor of any surviving obligations under the Construction
Contract and is subject to Owner’s reservations of rights with respect to completion and final
payment.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT NOTICE OF ACCEPTABILITY OF WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 65 18 - 2
This Certificate does not constitute an acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract
Documents, nor is it a release of Contractor's obligation to complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract.

ENGINEER:
By: (signature):
(Authorized signature)
Name (printed):
Title:
Date: Pick a date.

END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 1
SECTION 00 70 00
GENERAL CONDITIONS

Copyright © 2018 (EJCDC® C-700) National Society of Professional Engineers, American Council of Engineering
Companies, and American Society of Civil Engineers. All rights reserved.

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 – Definitions and Terminology ................................................................................................................... 5
1.01 Defined Terms ................................................................................................................................................... 5
1.02 Terminology ....................................................................................................................................................... 9
ARTICLE 2 – Preliminary Matters................................................................................................................................... 11
2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance ................................... 11
2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................................... 11
2.03 Before Starting Construction .................................................................................................................... 11
2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives ........................... 11
2.05 Acceptance of Schedules ............................................................................................................................. 12
2.06 Electronic Transmittals ............................................................................................................................... 12
ARTICLE 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse...................................................................... 12
3.01 Intent ................................................................................................................................................................... 12
3.02 Reference Standards ..................................................................................................................................... 13
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies ............................................................................................... 13
3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents .......................................................................................... 14
3.05 Reuse of Documents ..................................................................................................................................... 15
ARTICLE 4 – Commencement and Progress of the Work ..................................................................................... 15
4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed ................................................................. 15
4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................................... 15
4.03 Reference Points ............................................................................................................................................ 15
4.04 Progress Schedule ......................................................................................................................................... 15
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ............................................................................................................... 16
ARTICLE 5 – Site; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions ......... 17
5.01 Availability of Lands ..................................................................................................................................... 17
5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas ....................................................................................................................... 17
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions ...................................................................................................... 18
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions ...................................................................................... 19
5.05 Underground Facilities ................................................................................................................................ 21
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .................................................................................... 23
ARTICLE 6 – Bonds and Insurance ................................................................................................................................. 25

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 2
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ............................................................................................ 25
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ............................................................................................................... 26
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ................................................................................................................................ 27
6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance .................................................................................... 28
6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation................................................................................................................... 29
6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds ............................................................ 30
ARTICLE 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................................. 30
7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction ........................................................................... 30
7.02 Supervision and Superintendence .......................................................................................................... 31
7.03 Labor; Working Hours ................................................................................................................................. 31
7.04 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment ............................................................................................. 31
7.05 “Or Equals” ........................................................................................................................................................ 31
7.06 Substitutes ........................................................................................................................................................ 32
7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers .......................................................................................... 34
7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties........................................................................................................................... 35
7.09 Permits ............................................................................................................................................................... 36
7.10 Taxes ................................................................................................................................................................... 36
7.11 Laws and Regulations .................................................................................................................................. 36
7.12 Record Documents ........................................................................................................................................ 37
7.13 Safety and Protection ................................................................................................................................... 37
7.14 Hazard Communication Programs ......................................................................................................... 38
7.15 Emergencies ..................................................................................................................................................... 38
7.16 Submittals ......................................................................................................................................................... 38
7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee ................................................................................. 41
7.18 Indemnification .............................................................................................................................................. 42
7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services ........................................................................................ 42
ARTICLE 8 – Other Work at the Site .............................................................................................................................. 43
8.01 Other Work ....................................................................................................................................................... 43
8.02 Coordination .................................................................................................................................................... 44
8.03 Legal Relationships ....................................................................................................................................... 44
ARTICLE 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities ......................................................................................................................... 45
9.01 Communications to Contractor ................................................................................................................ 45
9.02 Replacement of Engineer ............................................................................................................................ 45
9.03 Furnish Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 45
9.04 Pay When Due ................................................................................................................................................. 46

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 3
9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings .................................................................... 46
9.06 Insurance ........................................................................................................................................................... 46
9.07 Change Orders ................................................................................................................................................. 46
9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals .......................................................................................................... 46
9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities ............................................................................................. 46
9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition .......................................................................... 46
9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements ..................................................................................................... 46
9.12 Safety Programs ............................................................................................................................................. 46
ARTICLE 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ........................................................................................... 47
10.01 Owner’s Representative .............................................................................................................................. 47
10.02 Visits to Site ...................................................................................................................................................... 47
10.03 Resident Project Representative ............................................................................................................. 47
10.04 Engineer’s Authority..................................................................................................................................... 47
10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work ...................................................................................................... 48
10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work ................ 48
10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities ........................................................... 48
10.08 Compliance with Safety Program ............................................................................................................ 48
ARTICLE 11 – Changes to the Contract......................................................................................................................... 49
11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract ....................................................................................... 49
11.02 Change Orders ................................................................................................................................................. 49
11.03 Work Change Directives .............................................................................................................................. 49
11.04 Field Orders ...................................................................................................................................................... 50
11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work ............................................................................................. 50
11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work ....................................................................................................... 50
11.07 Change of Contract Price ............................................................................................................................. 50
11.08 Change of Contract Times........................................................................................................................... 52
11.09 Change Proposals ........................................................................................................................................... 52
11.10 Notification to Surety ................................................................................................................................... 53
ARTICLE 12 – Claims ............................................................................................................................................................ 53
12.01 Claims ................................................................................................................................................................. 53
ARTICLE 13 – Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work .......................................................................... 54
13.01 Cost of the Work ............................................................................................................................................. 54
13.02 Allowances ........................................................................................................................................................ 58
13.03 Unit Price Work .............................................................................................................................................. 58
ARTICLE 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work ........... 59

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 4
14.01 Access to Work ................................................................................................................................................ 59
14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals .......................................................................................................... 59
14.03 Defective Work ............................................................................................................................................... 60
14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work .................................................................................................................. 61
14.05 Uncovering Work ........................................................................................................................................... 61
14.06 Owner May Stop the Work ......................................................................................................................... 61
14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work ...................................................................................................... 62
ARTICLE 15 – Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period ..................................... 62
15.01 Progress Payments ........................................................................................................................................ 62
15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title ................................................................................................................. 65
15.03 Substantial Completion ............................................................................................................................... 65
15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy ............................................................................................................................ 66
15.05 Final Inspection .............................................................................................................................................. 67
15.06 Final Payment .................................................................................................................................................. 67
15.07 Waiver of Claims ............................................................................................................................................ 68
15.08 Correction Period ........................................................................................................................................... 68
ARTICLE 16 – Suspension of Work and Termination ............................................................................................. 69
16.01 Owner May Suspend Work ........................................................................................................................ 69
16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause ............................................................................................................. 69
16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience .............................................................................................. 71
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ............................................................................................ 71
ARTICLE 17 – Final Resolution of Disputes ................................................................................................................ 71
17.01 Methods and Procedures ............................................................................................................................ 71
ARTICLE 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................ 72
18.01 Giving Notice .................................................................................................................................................... 72
18.02 Computation of Times .................................................................................................................................. 72
18.03 Cumulative Remedies ................................................................................................................................... 72
18.04 Limitation of Damages ................................................................................................................................. 72
18.05 No Waiver ......................................................................................................................................................... 72
18.06 Survival of Obligations ................................................................................................................................. 72
18.07 Controlling Law .............................................................................................................................................. 73
18.08 Assignment of Contract ............................................................................................................................... 73
18.09 Successors and Assigns ............................................................................................................................... 73
18.10 Headings ............................................................................................................................................................ 73

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 5
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
A. Wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, a term printed with
initial capital letters, including the term’s singular and plural forms, will have the
meaning indicated in the definitions below. In addition to terms specifically defined,
terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents include references to
identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms.
1. Addenda—Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which
clarify, correct, or change the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract
Documents.
2. Agreement—The written instrument, executed by Owner and Contractor, that sets
forth the Contract Price and Contract Times, identifies the parties and the Engineer,
and designates the specific items that are Contract Documents.
3. Application for Payment—The document prepared by Contractor, in a form
acceptable to Engineer, to request progress or final payments, and which is to be
accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract
Documents.
4. Bid—The offer of a Bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices
for the Work to be performed.
5. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner.
6. Bidding Documents—The Bidding Requirements, the proposed Contract
Documents, and all Addenda.
7. Bidding Requirements—The Advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to
Bidders, Bid Bond or other Bid security, if any, the Bid Form, and the Bid with any
attachments.
8. Change Order—A document which is signed by Contractor and Owner and
authorizes an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work or an adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Times, or other revision to the Contract, issued on or
after the Effective Date of the Contract.
9. Change Proposal—A written request by Contractor, duly submitted in compliance
with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an adjustment in
Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision by Engineer
concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of
Work under the Contract Documents; challenging a set-off against payments due; or
seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract.
10. Claim
a. A demand or assertion by Owner directly to Contractor, duly submitted in
compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, seeking an
adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; contesting an initial decision
by Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the
acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; contesting Engineer’s
decision regarding a Change Proposal; seeking resolution of a contractual issue
that Engineer has declined to address; or seeking other relief with respect to
the terms of the Contract.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 6
b. A demand or assertion by Contractor directly to Owner, duly submitted in
compliance with the procedural requirements set forth herein, contesting
Engineer’s decision regarding a Change Proposal, or seeking resolution of a
contractual issue that Engineer has declined to address.
c. A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor, duly submitted in compliance
with the procedural requirements set forth herein, made pursuant to
Paragraph 12.01.A.4, concerning disputes arising after Engineer has issued a
recommendation of final payment.
d. A demand for money or services by a third party is not a Claim.
11. Constituent of Concern—Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials,
polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), lead-based paint (as defined by the HUD/EPA
standard), hazardous waste, and any substance, product, waste, or other material of
any nature whatsoever that is or becomes listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant
to Laws and Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of
conduct concerning, any hazardous, toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or
material.
12. Contract—The entire and integrated written contract between Owner and
Contractor concerning the Work.
13. Contract Documents—Those items so designated in the Agreement, and which
together comprise the Contract.
14. Contract Price—The money that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion
of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
15. Contract Times—The number of days or the dates by which Contractor shall: (a)
achieve Milestones, if any; (b) achieve Substantial Completion; and (c) complete the
Work.
16. Contractor—The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for
performance of the Work.
17. Cost of the Work—See Paragraph 13.01 for definition.
18. Drawings—The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and
character of the Work to be performed by Contractor.
19. Effective Date of the Contract—The date, indicated in the Agreement, on which the
Contract becomes effective.
20. Electronic Document—Any Project-related correspondence, attachments to
correspondence, data, documents, drawings, information, or graphics, including but
not limited to Shop Drawings and other Submittals, that are in an electronic or
digital format.
21. Electronic Means—Electronic mail (email), upload/download from a secure Project
website, or other communications methods that allow: (a) the transmission or
communication of Electronic Documents; (b) the documentation of transmissions,
including sending and receipt; (c) printing of the transmitted Electronic Document
by the recipient; (d) the storage and archiving of the Electronic Document by sender
and recipient; and (e) the use by recipient of the Electronic Document for purposes
permitted by this Contract. Electronic Means does not include the use of text
messaging, or of Facebook, Twitter, Instagram, or similar social media services for
transmission of Electronic Documents.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 7
22. Engineer—The individual or entity named as such in the Agreement.
23. Field Order—A written order issued by Engineer which requires minor changes in
the Work but does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times.
24. Hazardous Environmental Condition—The presence at the Site of Constituents of
Concern in such quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons
or property exposed thereto.
a. The presence at the Site of materials that are necessary for the execution of the
Work, or that are to be incorporated into the Work, and that are controlled and
contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the
requirements of the Contract, is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
b. The presence of Constituents of Concern that are to be removed or remediated
as part of the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition.
c. The presence of Constituents of Concern as part of the routine, anticipated, and
obvious working conditions at the Site, is not a Hazardous Environmental
Condition.
25. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations—Any and all applicable laws, statutes,
rules, regulations, ordinances, codes, and binding decrees, resolutions, and orders
of any and all governmental bodies, agencies, authorities, and courts having
jurisdiction.
26. Liens—Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract-related funds,
real property, or personal property.
27. Milestone—A principal event in the performance of the Work that the Contract
requires Contractor to achieve by an intermediate completion date, or by a time
prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work.
28. Notice of Award—The written notice by Owner to a Bidder of Owner’s acceptance of
the Bid.
29. Notice to Proceed—A written notice by Owner to Contractor fixing the date on which
the Contract Times will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to
perform the Work.
30. Owner—The individual or entity with which Contractor has contracted regarding
the Work, and which has agreed to pay Contractor for the performance of the Work,
pursuant to the terms of the Contract.
31. Progress Schedule—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing
the sequence and duration of the activities comprising Contractor’s plan to
accomplish the Work within the Contract Times.
32. Project—The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner by engineers,
contractors, and others, including planning, study, design, construction, testing,
commissioning, and start-up, and of which the Work to be performed under the
Contract Documents is a part.
33. Resident Project Representative—The authorized representative of Engineer
assigned to assist Engineer at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project
Representative (RPR) includes any assistants or field staff of Resident Project
Representative.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 8
34. Samples—Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship that are
representative of some portion of the Work and that establish the standards by
which such portion of the Work will be judged.
35. Schedule of Submittals—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, of
required submittals and the time requirements for Engineer’s review of the
submittals.
36. Schedule of Values—A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating
portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis
for reviewing Contractor’s Applications for Payment.
37. Shop Drawings—All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or
information that are specifically prepared or assembled by or for Contractor and
submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,
whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents.
38. Site—Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by
Owner upon which the Work is to be performed, including rights -of-way and
easements, and such other lands or areas furnished by Owner which are designated
for the use of Contractor.
39. Specifications—The part of the Contract that consists of written requirements for
materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work,
and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the
Work.
40. Subcontractor—An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or
with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work.
41. Submittal—A written or graphic document, prepared by or for Contractor, which
the Contract Documents require Contractor to submit to Engineer, or that is
indicated as a Submittal in the Schedule of Submittals accepted by Engineer.
Submittals may include Shop Drawings and Samples; schedules; product data;
Owner-delegated designs; sustainable design information; information on special
procedures; testing plans; results of tests and evaluations, source quality-control
testing and inspections, and field or Site quality-control testing and inspections;
warranties and certifications; Suppliers’ instructions and reports; records of
delivery of spare parts and tools; operations and maintenance data; Project
photographic documentation; record documents; and other such documents
required by the Contract Documents. Submittals, whether or not approved or
accepted by Engineer, are not Contract Documents. Change Proposals, Change
Orders, Claims, notices, Applications for Payment, and requests for interpretation
or clarification are not Submittals.
42. Substantial Completion—The time at which the Work (or a specified part thereof)
has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work (or a
specified part thereof) is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract
Documents, so that the Work (or a specified part thereof) can be utilized for the
purposes for which it is intended. The terms “substantially complete” and
“substantially completed” as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial
Completion of such Work.
43. Successful Bidder—The Bidder to which the Owner makes an award of contract.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 9
44. Supplementary Conditions—The part of the Contract that amends or supplements
these General Conditions.
45. Supplier—A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, or vendor having a
direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or
equipment to be incorporated in the Work by Contractor or a Subcontractor.
46. Technical Data
a. Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary
Conditions, with respect to either (1) existing subsurface conditions at or
adjacent to the Site, or existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site
including existing surface or subsurface structures (except Underground
Facilities) or (2) Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site.
b. If no such express identifications of Technical Data have been made with
respect to conditions at the Site, then Technical Data is defined, with respect to
conditions at the Site under Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.06, as the data
contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels,
assessments of the condition of subsurface facilities, laboratory test results,
and other factual, objective information regarding conditions at the Site that
are set forth in any geotechnical, environmental, or other Site or facilities
conditions report prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor.
c. Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground
Facilities are not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical
Data, and instead Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the
Drawings.
47. Underground Facilities—All active or not-in-service underground lines, pipelines,
conduits, ducts, encasements, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, or
other such facilities or systems at the Site, including but not limited to those facilities
or systems that produce, transmit, distribute, or convey telephone or other
communications, cable television, fiber optic transmissions, power, electricity, light,
heat, gases, oil, crude oil products, liquid petroleum products, water, steam, waste,
wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control
systems. An abandoned facility or system is not an Underground Facility.
48. Unit Price Work—Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices.
49. Work—The entire construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof
required to be provided under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the
result of performing or providing all labor, services, and documentation necessary
to produce such construction; furnishing, installing, and incorporating all materials
and equipment into such construction; and may include related services such as
testing, start-up, and commissioning, all as required by the Contract Documents.
50. Work Change Directive—A written directive to Contractor issued on or after the
Effective Date of the Contract, signed by Owner and recommended by Engineer,
ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work.
1.02 Terminology
A. The words and terms discussed in Paragraphs 1.02.B, C, D, and E are not defined terms
that require initial capital letters, but, when used in the Bidding Requirements or
Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 10
B. Intent of Certain Terms or Adjectives: The Contract Documents include the terms “as
allowed,” “as approved,” “as ordered,” “as directed” or terms of like effect or import to
authorize an exercise of professional judgment by Engineer. In addition, the adjectives
“reasonable,” “suitable,” “acceptable,” “proper,” “satisfactory,” or adjectives of like effect
or import are used to describe an action or determination of Engineer as to the Work. It
is intended that such exercise of professional judgment, action, or determination will be
solely to evaluate, in general, the Work for compliance with the information in the
Contract Documents and with the design concept of the Project as a functioning whole
as shown or indicated in the Contract Documents (unless there is a specific statement
indicating otherwise). The use of any such term or adjective is not intended to and shall
not be effective to assign to Engineer any duty or authority to supervise or direct the
performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to undertake responsibility contrary
to the provisions of Article 10 or any other provision of the Contract Documents.
C. Day: The word “day” means a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the
next midnight.
D. Defective: The word “defective,” when modifying the word “Work,” refers to Work that is
unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it:
1. does not conform to the Contract Documents;
2. does not meet the requirements of any applicable inspection, reference standard,
test, or approval referred to in the Contract Documents; or
3. has been damaged prior to Engineer’s recommendation of final payment (unless
responsibility for the protection thereof has been assumed by Owner at Substantial
Completion in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 or Paragraph 15.04).
E. Furnish, Install, Perform, Provide
1. The word “furnish,” when used in connection with services, materials, or
equipment, means to supply and deliver said services, materials, or equipment to
the Site (or some other specified location) ready for use or installation and in usable
or operable condition.
2. The word “install,” when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment,
means to put into use or place in final position said services, materials, or equipment
complete and ready for intended use.
3. The words “perform” or “provide,” when used in connection with services,
materials, or equipment, means to furnish and install said services, materials, or
equipment complete and ready for intended use.
4. If the Contract Documents establish an obligation of Contractor with respect to
specific services, materials, or equipment, but do not expressly use any of the four
words “furnish,” “install,” “perform,” or “provide,” then Contractor shall furnish and
install said services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use.
F. Contract Price or Contract Times: References to a change in “Contract Price or Contract
Times” or “Contract Times or Contract Price” or similar, indicate that such change applies
to (1) Contract Price, (2) Contract Times, or (3) both Contract Price and Contract Times,
as warranted, even if the term “or both” is not expressed.
G. Unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, words or phrases that have a well-
known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract
Documents in accordance with such recognized meaning.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 11
ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance
A. Performance and Payment Bonds: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of
the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner the performance bond
and payment bond (if the Contract requires Contractor to furnish such bonds).
B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of
the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner, with copies to each
additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the certificates, endorsements, and
other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in accordance with
Article 6, except to the extent the Supplementary Conditions expressly establish other
dates for delivery of specific insurance policies.
C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt of the signed counterparts of the Agreement
and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall promptly deliver to
Contractor, with copies to each additional insured (as identified in the Contract), the
certificates and other evidence of insurance required to be provided by Owner under
Article 6.
2.02 Copies of Documents
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor four printed copies of the Contract (including one fully
signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic portable document
format (PDF). Additional printed copies will be furnished upon request at the cost of
reproduction.
B. Owner shall maintain and safeguard at least one original printed record version of the
Contract, including Drawings and Specifications signed and sealed by Engineer and other
design professionals. Owner shall make such original printed record version of the
Contract available to Contractor for review. Owner may delegate the responsibilities
under this provision to Engineer.
2.03 Before Starting Construction
A. Preliminary Schedules: Within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract (or as
otherwise required by the Contract Documents), Contractor shall submit to Engineer for
timely review:
1. a preliminary Progress Schedule indicating the times (numbers of days or dates) for
starting and completing the various stages of the Work, including any Milestones
specified in the Contract;
2. a preliminary Schedule of Submittals; and
3. a preliminary Schedule of Values for all of the Work which includes quantities and
prices of items which when added together equal the Contract Price and subdivides
the Work into component parts in sufficient detail to serve as the basis for progress
payments during performance of the Work. Such prices will include an appropriate
amount of overhead and profit applicable to each item of Work.
2.04 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives
A. Before any Work at the Site is started, a conference attended by Owner, Contractor,
Engineer, and others as appropriate will be held to establish a working understanding
among the parties as to the Work, and to discuss the schedules referred to in
Paragraph 2.03.A, procedures for handling Shop Drawings, Samples, and other

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 12
Submittals, processing Applications for Payment, electronic or digital transmittals, and
maintaining required records.
B. At this conference Owner and Contractor each shall designate, in writing, a specific
individual to act as its authorized representative with respect to the services and
responsibilities under the Contract. Such individuals shall have the authority to transmit
and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on
behalf of each respective party.
2.05 Acceptance of Schedules
A. At least 10 days before submission of the first Application for Payment a conference,
attended by Contractor, Engineer, and others as appropriate, will be held to review the
schedules submitted in accordance with Paragraph 2.03.A. No progress payment will be
made to Contractor until acceptable schedules are submitted to Engineer.
1. The Progress Schedule will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides an orderly
progression of the Work to completion within the Contract Times. Such acceptance
will not impose on Engineer responsibility for the Progress Schedule, for
sequencing, scheduling, or progress of the Work, nor interfere with or relieve
Contractor from Contractor’s full responsibility therefor.
2. Contractor’s Schedule of Submittals will be acceptable to Engineer if it provides a
workable arrangement for reviewing and processing the required submittals.
3. Contractor’s Schedule of Values will be acceptable to Engineer as to form and
substance if it provides a reasonable allocation of the Contract Price to the
component parts of the Work.
4. If a schedule is not acceptable, Contractor will have an additional 10 days to revise
and resubmit the schedule.
2.06 Electronic Transmittals
A. Except as otherwise stated elsewhere in the Contract, the Owner, Engineer, and
Contractor may send, and shall accept, Electronic Documents transmitted by Electronic
Means.
B. If the Contract does not establish protocols for Electronic Means, then Owner, Engineer,
and Contractor shall jointly develop such protocols.
C. Subject to any governing protocols for Electronic Means, when transmitting Electronic
Documents by Electronic Means, the transmitting party makes no representations as to
long-term compatibility, usability, or readability of the Electronic Documents resulting
from the recipient’s use of software application packages, operating systems, or
computer hardware differing from those used in the drafting or transmittal of the
Electronic Documents.
ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE
3.01 Intent
A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is required by one Contract
Document is as binding as if required by all.
B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project (or
part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 13
C. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, if there is a discrepancy between the
electronic versions of the Contract Documents (including any printed copies derived
from such electronic versions) and the printed record version, the printed record
version will govern.
D. The Contract supersedes prior negotiations, representations, and agreements, whether
written or oral.
E. Engineer will issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents as
provided herein.
F. Any provision or part of the Contract Documents held to be void or unenforceable under
any Law or Regulation will be deemed stricken, and all remaining provisions will
continue to be valid and binding upon Owner and Contractor, which agree that the
Contract Documents will be reformed to replace such stricken provision or part thereof
with a valid and enforceable provision that comes as close as possible to expressing the
intention of the stricken provision.
G. Nothing in the Contract Documents creates:
1. any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor,
Supplier, or other individual or entity performing or furnishing any of the Work, for
the benefit of such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity; or
2. any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of
any money due any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity,
except as may otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations.
3.02 Reference Standards
A. Standards Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations
1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference
standards, or codes of any technical society, organization, or association, or to Laws
or Regulations, whether such reference be specific or by implication, means the
standard specification, manual, reference standard, code, or Laws or Regulations in
effect at the time of opening of Bids (or on the Effective Date of the Contract if there
were no Bids), except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract
Documents.
2. No provision of any such standard specification, manual, reference standard, or
code, and no instruction of a Supplier, will be effective to change the duties or
responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, or Engineer from those set forth in the part of
the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer. No such provision or
instruction shall be effective to assign to Owner or Engineer any duty or authority
to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or any duty or authority to
undertake responsibility inconsistent with the provisions of the part of the Contract
Documents prepared by or for Engineer.
3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies
A. Reporting Discrepancies
1. Contractor’s Verification of Figures and Field Measurements: Before undertaking
each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study the Contract Documents, and
check and verify pertinent figures and dimensions therein, particularly with respect
to applicable field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to
Engineer any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy that Contractor discovers, or

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 14
has actual knowledge of, and shall not proceed with any Work affected thereby until
the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or
interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to the Contract
issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
2. Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents: If, before or during the performance of
the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy within
the Contract Documents, or between the Contract Documents and (a) any applicable
Law or Regulation, (b) actual field conditions, (c) any standard specification,
manual, reference standard, or code, or (d) any instruction of any Supplier, then
Contractor shall promptly report it to Engineer in writing. Contractor shall not
proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency as required by
Paragraph 7.15) until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved, by a
clarification or interpretation by Engineer, or by an amendment or supplement to
the Contract issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01.
3. Contractor shall not be liable to Owner or Engineer for failure to report any conflict,
error, ambiguity, or discrepancy in the Contract Documents unless Contractor had
actual knowledge thereof.
B. Resolving Discrepancies
1. Except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, the
provisions of the part of the Contract Documents prepared by or for Engineer take
precedence in resolving any conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy between such
provisions of the Contract Documents and:
a. the provisions of any standard specification, manual, reference standard, or
code, or the instruction of any Supplier (whether or not specifically
incorporated by reference as a Contract Document); or
b. the provisions of any Laws or Regulations applicable to the performance of the
Work (unless such an interpretation of the provisions of the Contract
Documents would result in violation of such Law or Regulation).
3.04 Requirements of the Contract Documents
A. During the performance of the Work and until final payment, Contractor and Owner shall
submit to the Engineer in writing all matters in question concerning the requirements of
the Contract Documents (sometimes referred to as requests for information or
interpretation—RFIs), or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract
Documents, as soon as possible after such matters arise. Engineer will be the initial
interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and judge of the
acceptability of the Work.
B. Engineer will, with reasonable promptness, render a written clarification, interpretation,
or decision on the issue submitted, or initiate an amendment or supplement to the
Contract Documents. Engineer’s written clarification, interpretation, or decision will be
final and binding on Contractor, unless it appeals by submitting a Change Proposal, and
on Owner, unless it appeals by filing a Claim.
C. If a submitted matter in question concerns terms and conditions of the Contract
Documents that do not involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work under
the Contract Documents, (2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or
otherwise), or (3) other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will promptly
notify Owner and Contractor in writing that Engineer is unable to provide a decision or

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 15
interpretation. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on resolution of such a
matter in question, either party may pursue resolution as provided in Article 12.
3.05 Reuse of Documents
A. Contractor and its Subcontractors and Suppliers shall not:
1. have or acquire any title to or ownership rights in any of the Drawings,
Specifications, or other documents (or copies of any thereof) prepared by or bearing
the seal of Engineer or its consultants, including electronic media versions, or reuse
any such Drawings, Specifications, other documents, or copies thereof on extensions
of the Project or any other project without written consent of Owner and Engineer
and specific written verification or adaptation by Engineer; or
2. have or acquire any title or ownership rights in any other Contract Documents,
reuse any such Contract Documents for any purpose without Owner’s express
written consent, or violate any copyrights pertaining to such Contract Documents.
B. The prohibitions of this Paragraph 3.05 will survive final payment, or termination of the
Contract. Nothing herein precludes Contractor from retaining copies of the Contract
Documents for record purposes.
ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed
A. The Contract Times will commence to run on the 30th day after the Effective Date of the
Contract or, if a Notice to Proceed is given, on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed.
A Notice to Proceed may be given at any time within 30 days after the Effective Date of
the Contract. In no event will the Contract Times commence to run later than the 60th
day after the day of Bid opening or the 30th day after the Effective Date of the Contract,
whichever date is earlier.
4.02 Starting the Work
A. Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date when the Contract Times
commence to run. No Work may be done at the Site prior to such date.
4.03 Reference Points
A. Owner shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction
which in Engineer’s judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the
Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve
the established reference points and property monuments, and shall make no changes
or relocations without the prior written approval of Owner. Contractor shall report to
Engineer whenever any reference point or property monument is lost or destroyed or
requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be
responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points or
property monuments by professionally qualified personnel.
4.04 Progress Schedule
A. Contractor shall adhere to the Progress Schedule established in accordance with
Paragraph 2.05 as it may be adjusted from time to time as provided below.
1. Contractor shall submit to Engineer for acceptance (to the extent indicated in
Paragraph 2.05) proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will not result
in changing the Contract Times.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 16
2. Proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that will change the Contract Times
must be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Article 11.
B. Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during all
disputes or disagreements with Owner. No Work will be delayed or postponed pending
resolution of any disputes or disagreements, or during any appeal process, except as
permitted by Paragraph 16.04, or as Owner and Contractor may otherwise agree in
writing.
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress
A. If Owner, Engineer, or anyone for whom Owner is responsible, delays, disrupts, or
interferes with the performance or progress of the Work, then Contractor shall be
entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times.
B. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for
delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Delay,
disruption, and interference attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or
Supplier shall be deemed to be within the control of Contractor.
C. If Contractor’s performance or progress is delayed, disrupted, or interfered with by
unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of Owner, Contractor, and
those for which they are responsible, then Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable
adjustment in Contract Times. Such an adjustment will be Contractor’s sole and
exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this
paragraph. Causes of delay, disruption, or interference that may give rise to an
adjustment in Contract Times under this paragraph include but are not limited to the
following:
1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes such as fires, floods, epidemics, and
earthquakes;
2. Abnormal weather conditions;
3. Acts or failures to act of third-party utility owners or other third-party entities
(other than those third-party utility owners or other third-party entities performing
other work at or adjacent to the Site as arranged by or under contract with Owner,
as contemplated in Article 8); and
4. Acts of war or terrorism.
D. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of Contract Times or Contract Price is limited
as follows:
1. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is conditioned on
the delay, disruption, or interference adversely affecting an activity on the critical
path to completion of the Work, as of the time of the delay, disruption, or
interference.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price for any delay,
disruption, or interference if such delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or
interference caused by or within the control of Contractor. Such a concurrent delay
by Contractor shall not preclude an adjustment of Contract Times to which
Contractor is otherwise entitled.
3. Adjustments of Contract Times or Contract Price are subject to the provisions of
Article 11.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 17
E. Each Contractor request or Change Proposal seeking an increase in Contract Times or
Contract Price must be supplemented by supporting data that sets forth in detail the
following:
1. The circumstances that form the basis for the requested adjustment;
2. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference began to affect
the progress of the Work;
3. The date upon which each cause of delay, disruption, or interference ceased to affect
the progress of the Work;
4. The number of days’ increase in Contract Times claimed as a consequence of each
such cause of delay, disruption, or interference; and
5. The impact on Contract Price, in accordance with the provisions of Paragraph 11.07.
Contractor shall also furnish such additional supporting documentation as Owner
or Engineer may require including, where appropriate, a revised progress schedule
indicating all the activities affected by the delay, disruption, or interference, and an
explanation of the effect of the delay, disruption, or interference on the critical path
to completion of the Work.
F. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work
resulting from the existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition, an
Underground Facility that was not shown or indicated by the Contract Documents, or not
shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy, and those resulting from Hazardous
Environmental Conditions, are governed by Article 5, together with the provisions of
Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
G. Paragraph 8.03 addresses delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or
progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent
to the Site.
ARTICLE 5 – SITE; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL
CONDITIONS
5.01 Availability of Lands
A. Owner shall furnish the Site. Owner shall notify Contractor in writing of any
encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of
the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work.
B. Upon reasonable written request, Owner shall furnish Contractor with a current
statement of record legal title and legal description of the lands upon which permanent
improvements are to be made and Owner’s interest therein as necessary for giving notice
of or filing a mechanic’s or construction lien against such lands in accordance with
applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Contractor shall provide for all additional lands and access thereto that may be required
for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment.
5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas
A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas
1. Contractor shall confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities,
the storage of materials and equipment, and the operations of workers to the Site,
adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 18
or otherwise, and other adjacent areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, and shall
not unreasonably encumber the Site and such other adjacent areas with
construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume
full responsibility for (a) damage to the Site; (b) damage to any such other adjacent
areas used for Contractor’s operations; (c) damage to any other adjacent land or
areas, or to improvements, structures, utilities, or similar facilities located at such
adjacent lands or areas; and (d) for injuries and losses sustained by the owners or
occupants of any such land or areas; provided that such damage or injuries result
from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the
Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.
2. If a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of any such land or
area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct
of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible, Contractor shall (a)
take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.13, or
otherwise; (b) promptly attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through
negotiations with such owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by
arbitration or other dispute resolution proceeding, or in a court of competent
jurisdiction; and (c) to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations,
indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and
any of them, from and against any such claim, and against all costs, losses, and
damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects,
attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute
resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any claim or action, legal or equitable,
brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer, or any other party
indemnified hereunder to the extent caused directly or indirectly, in whole or in part
by, or based upon, Contractor’s performance of the Work, or because of other
actions or conduct of the Contractor or those for which Contractor is responsible.
B. Removal of Debris During Performance of the Work: During the progress of the Work the
Contractor shall keep the Site and other adjacent areas free from accumulations of waste
materials, rubbish, and other debris. Removal and disposal of such waste materials,
rubbish, and other debris will conform to applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. Cleaning: Prior to Substantial Completion of the Work Contractor shall clean the Site and
the Work and make it ready for utilization by Owner. At the completion of the Work
Contractor shall remove from the Site and adjacent areas all tools, appliances,
construction equipment and machinery, and surplus materials and shall restore to
original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents.
D. Loading of Structures: Contractor shall not load nor permit any part of any structure to
be loaded in any manner that will endanger the structure, nor shall Contractor subject
any part of the Work or adjacent structures or land to stresses or pressures that will
endanger them.
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. Those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to
the Site that contain Technical Data;

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 19
2. Those drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the Site, including
those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or adjacent to
the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technical Data; and
3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
B. Underground Facilities: Underground Facilities are shown or indicated on the Drawings,
pursuant to Paragraph 5.05, and not in the drawings referred to in Paragraph 5.03.A.
Information and data regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities are
not intended to be categorized, identified, or defined as Technical Data.
C. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data: Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the
Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to
such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not Contract Documents.
If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b.
D. Limitations of Other Data and Documents: Except for such reliance on Technical Data,
Contractor may not rely upon or make any claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of
their officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or
subcontractors, with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including,
but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and
procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions
and programs incident thereto;
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or
shown or indicated in such drawings;
3. the contents of other Site-related documents made available to Contractor, such as
record drawings from other projects at or adjacent to the Site, or Owner’s archival
documents concerning the Site; or
4. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or
any such other data, interpretations, opinions, or information.
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
A. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that any subsurface or physical condition
that is uncovered or revealed at the Site:
1. is of such a nature as to establish that any Technical Data on which Contractor is
entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate;
2. is of such a nature as to require a change in the Drawings or Specifications;
3. differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or
4. is of an unusual nature, and differs materially from conditions ordinarily
encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided
for in the Contract Documents;
then Contractor shall, promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further
disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any Work in
connection therewith (except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15),
notify Owner and Engineer in writing about such condition. Contractor shall not
further disturb such condition or perform any Work in connection therewith (except

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 20
with respect to an emergency) until receipt of a written statement permitting
Contractor to do so.
B. Engineer’s Review: After receipt of written notice as required by the preceding
paragraph, Engineer will promptly review the subsurface or physical condition in
question; determine whether it is necessary for Owner to obtain additional exploration
or tests with respect to the condition; conclude whether the condition falls within any
one or more of the differing site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; obtain any
pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; prepare recommendations to
Owner regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface
or physical condition in question and the need for any change in the Drawings or
Specifications; and advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and
recommendations.
C. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Site Condition: After receipt of Engineer’s
written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a written
statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the subsurface or physical
condition in question, addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such
condition, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications will be made,
and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and
recommendations, in whole or in part.
D. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection
with the subsurface or physical condition in question may resume prior to completion of
Engineer’s review or Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the
condition in question has been adequately documented, and analyzed on a preliminary
basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct Contractor to resume such Work.
E. Possible Price and Times Adjustments
1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract
Times, to the extent that the existence of a differing subsurface or physical
condition, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an increase or
decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the Work;
subject, however, to the following:
a. Such condition must fall within any one or more of the categories described in
Paragraph 5.04.A;
b. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in
Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03; and,
c. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to
the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
2. Contractor shall not be entitled to any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract
Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if:
a. Contractor knew of the existence of such condition at the time Contractor made
a commitment to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times by
the submission of a Bid or becoming bound under a negotiated contract, or
otherwise;
b. The existence of such condition reasonably could have been discovered or
revealed as a result of any examination, investigation, exploration, test, or study
of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 21
Requirements or Contract Documents to be conducted by or for Contractor
prior to Contractor’s making such commitment; or
c. Contractor failed to give the written notice required by Paragraph 5.04.A.
3. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the
amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then
any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order.
4. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the
amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later
than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor
regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question.
F. Underground Facilities; Hazardous Environmental Conditions: Paragraph 5.05 governs
rights and responsibilities regarding the presence or location of Underground Facilities.
Paragraph 5.06 governs rights and responsibilities regarding Hazardous Environmental
Conditions. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03 and 5.04 are not applicable to the
presence or location of Underground Facilities, or to Hazardous Environmental
Conditions.
5.05 Underground Facilities
A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: Unless it is otherwise expressly provided in the
Supplementary Conditions, the cost of all of the following are included in the Contract
Price, and Contractor shall have full responsibility for:
1. reviewing and checking all information and data regarding existing Underground
Facilities at the Site;
2. complying with applicable state and local utility damage prevention Laws and
Regulations;
3. verifying the actual location of those Underground Facilities shown or indicated in
the Contract Documents as being within the area affected by the Work, by exposing
such Underground Facilities during the course of construction;
4. coordination of the Work with the owners (including Owner) of such Underground
Facilities, during construction; and
5. the safety and protection of all existing Underground Facilities at the Site, and
repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work.
B. Notice by Contractor: If Contractor believes that an Underground Facility that is
uncovered or revealed at the Site was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was
not shown or indicated on the Drawings with reasonable accuracy, then Contractor shall,
promptly after becoming aware thereof and before further disturbing conditions
affected thereby or performing any Work in connection therewith (except in an
emergency as required by Paragraph 7.15), notify Owner and Engineer in writing
regarding such Underground Facility.
C. Engineer’s Review: Engineer will:
1. promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether such
Underground Facility was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not
shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy;
2. identify and communicate with the owner of the Underground Facility; prepare
recommendations to Owner (and if necessary issue any preliminary instructions to

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 22
Contractor) regarding the Contractor’s resumption of Work in connection with the
Underground Facility in question;
3. obtain any pertinent cost or schedule information from Contractor; determine the
extent, if any, to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to
reflect and document the consequences of the existence or location of the
Underground Facility; and
4. advise Owner in writing of Engineer’s findings, conclusions, and recommendations.
During such time, Contractor shall be responsible for the safety and protection of
such Underground Facility.
D. Owner’s Statement to Contractor Regarding Underground Facility: After receipt of
Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and recommendations, Owner shall issue a
written statement to Contractor (with a copy to Engineer) regarding the Underground
Facility in question addressing the resumption of Work in connection with such
Underground Facility, indicating whether any change in the Drawings or Specifications
will be made, and adopting or rejecting Engineer’s written findings, conclusions, and
recommendations in whole or in part.
E. Early Resumption of Work: If at any time Engineer determines that Work in connection
with the Underground Facility may resume prior to completion of Engineer’s review or
Owner’s issuance of its statement to Contractor, because the Underground Facility in
question and conditions affected by its presence have been adequately documented, and
analyzed on a preliminary basis, then the Engineer may at its discretion instruct
Contractor to resume such Work.
F. Possible Price and Times Adjustments
1. Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Times, to the extent that any existing Underground Facility at the Site that
was not shown or indicated on the Drawings, or was not shown or indicated with
reasonable accuracy, or any related delay, disruption, or interference, causes an
increase or decrease in Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of the
Work; subject, however, to the following:
a. With respect to Work that is paid for on a unit price basis, any adjustment in
Contract Price will be subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03;
b. Contractor’s entitlement to an adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to
the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E; and
c. Contractor gave the notice required in Paragraph 5.05.B.
2. If Owner and Contractor agree regarding Contractor’s entitlement to and the
amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, then
any such adjustment will be set forth in a Change Order.
3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the
amount or extent of any adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times, no later
than 30 days after Owner’s issuance of the Owner’s written statement to Contractor
regarding the Underground Facility in question.
4. The information and data shown or indicated on the Drawings with respect to
existing Underground Facilities at the Site is based on information and data (a)
furnished by the owners of such Underground Facilities, or by others, (b) obtained
from available records, or (c) gathered in an investigation conducted in accordance

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 23
with the current edition of ASCE 38, Standard Guideline for the Collection and
Depiction of Existing Subsurface Utility Data, by the American Society of Civil
Engineers. If such information or data is incorrect or incomplete, Contractor’s
remedies are limited to those set forth in this Paragraph 5.05.F.
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site
A. Reports and Drawings: The Supplementary Conditions identify:
1. those reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions
that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site;
2. drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that
have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and
3. Technical Data contained in such reports and drawings.
B. Reliance by Contractor on Technical Data Authorized: Contractor may rely upon the
accuracy of the Technical Data expressly identified in the Supplementary Conditions
with respect to such reports and drawings, but such reports and drawings are not
Contract Documents. If no such express identification has been made, then Contractor
may rely on the accuracy of the Technical Data as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.46.b.
Except for such reliance on Technical Data, Contractor may not rely upon or make any
claim against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, with respect to:
1. the completeness of such reports and drawings for Contractor’s purposes, including,
but not limited to, any aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences and
procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, and safety precautions
and programs incident thereto;
2. other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in such reports or
shown or indicated in such drawings; or
3. any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from any Technical Data or
any such other data, interpretations, opinions or information.
C. Contractor shall not be responsible for removing or remediating any Hazardous
Environmental Condition encountered, uncovered, or revealed at the Site unless such
removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within
the scope of the Work.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing all
Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or
anyone else for whom Contractor is responsible, and for any associated costs; and for the
costs of removing and remediating any Hazardous Environmental Condition created by
the presence of any such Constituents of Concern.
E. If Contractor encounters, uncovers, or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition
whose removal or remediation is not expressly identified in the Contract Documents as
being within the scope of the Work, or if Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is
responsible creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition, then Contractor shall
immediately: (1) secure or otherwise isolate such condition; (2) stop all Work in
connection with such condition and in any area affected thereby (except in an emergency
as required by Paragraph 7.15); and (3) notify Owner and Engineer (and promptly
thereafter confirm such notice in writing). Owner shall promptly consult with Engineer
concerning the necessity for Owner to retain a qualified expert to evaluate such

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 24
condition or take corrective action, if any. Promptly after consulting with Engineer,
Owner shall take such actions as are necessary to permit Owner to timely obtain
required permits and provide Contractor the written notice required by
Paragraph 5.06.F. If Contractor or anyone for whom Contractor is responsible created
the Hazardous Environmental Condition in question, then Owner may remove and
remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition, and impose a set-off against
payments to account for the associated costs.
F. Contractor shall not resume Work in connection with such Hazardous Environmental
Condition or in any affected area until after Owner has obtained any required permits
related thereto, and delivered written notice to Contractor either (1) specifying that such
condition and any affected area is or has been rendered safe for the resumption of Work,
or (2) specifying any special conditions under which such Work may be resumed safely.
G. If Owner and Contractor cannot agree as to entitlement to or on the amount or extent, if
any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, as a result of such Work
stoppage, such special conditions under which Work is agreed to be resumed by
Contractor, or any costs or expenses incurred in response to the Hazardous
Environmental Condition, then within 30 days of Owner’s written notice regarding the
resumption of Work, Contractor may submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may impose
a set-off. Entitlement to any such adjustment is subject to the provisions of
Paragraphs 4.05.D, 4.05.E, 11.07, and 11.08.
H. If, after receipt of such written notice, Contractor does not agree to resume such Work
based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe or does not agree to resume such Work under
such special conditions, then Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area
affected by such condition to be deleted from the Work, following the contractual change
procedures in Article 11. Owner may have such deleted portion of the Work performed
by Owner’s own forces or others in accordance with Article 8.
I. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members,
partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,
from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all
fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all
court, arbitration, or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to a
Hazardous Environmental Condition, provided that such Hazardous Environmental
Condition (1) was not shown or indicated in the Drawings, Specifications, or other
Contract Documents, identified as Technical Data entitled to limited reliance pursuant to
Paragraph 5.06.B, or identified in the Contract Documents to be included within the
scope of the Work, and (2) was not created by Contractor or by anyone for whom
Contractor is responsible. Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.I obligates Owner to indemnify
any individual or entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s
own negligence.
J. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to the failure to
control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor or
by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible, or to a Hazardous Environmental
Condition created by Contractor or by anyone for whom Contractor is responsible.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 25
Nothing in this Paragraph 5.06.J obligates Contractor to indemnify any individual or
entity from and against the consequences of that individual’s or entity’s own negligence.
K. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of
Constituents of Concern or to a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or
revealed at the Site.
ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
A. Contractor shall furnish a performance bond and a payment bond, each in an amount at
least equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of
Contractor’s obligations under the Contract. These bonds must remain in effect until one
year after the date when final payment becomes due or until completion of the correction
period specified in Paragraph 15.08, whichever is later, except as provided otherwise by
Laws or Regulations, the terms of a prescribed bond form, the Supplementary
Conditions, or other provisions of the Contract.
B. Contractor shall also furnish such other bonds (if any) as are required by the
Supplementary Conditions or other provisions of the Contract.
C. All bonds must be in the form included in the Bidding Documents or otherwise specified
by Owner prior to execution of the Contract, except as provided otherwise by Laws or
Regulations, and must be issued and signed by a surety named in “Companies Holding
Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable
Reinsuring Companies” as published in Department Circular 570 (as amended and
supplemented) by the Bureau of the Fiscal Service, U.S. Department of the Treasury. A
bond signed by an agent or attorney-in-fact must be accompanied by a certified copy of
that individual’s authority to bind the surety. The evidence of authority must show that
it is effective on the date the agent or attorney-in-fact signed the accompanying bond.
D. Contractor shall obtain the required bonds from surety companies that are duly licensed
or authorized, in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located, to issue bonds
in the required amounts.
E. If the surety on a bond furnished by Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes
insolvent, or the surety ceases to meet the requirements above, then Contractor shall
promptly notify Owner and Engineer in writing and shall, within 20 days after the event
giving rise to such notification, provide another bond and surety, both of which must
comply with the bond and surety requirements above.
F. If Contractor has failed to obtain a required bond, Owner may exclude the Contractor
from the Site and exercise Owner’s termination rights under Article 16.
G. Upon request to Owner from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity
claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the
performance of the Work, Owner shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such
person or entity.
H. Upon request to Contractor from any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other person or entity
claiming to have furnished labor, services, materials, or equipment used in the
performance of the Work, Contractor shall provide a copy of the payment bond to such
person or entity.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 26
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions
A. Owner and Contractor shall obtain and maintain insurance as required in this article and
in the Supplementary Conditions.
B. All insurance required by the Contract to be purchased and maintained by Owner or
Contractor shall be obtained from insurance companies that are duly licensed or
authorized in the state or jurisdiction in which the Project is located to issue insurance
policies for the required limits and coverages. Unless a different standard is indicated in
the Supplementary Conditions, all companies that provide insurance policies required
under this Contract shall have an A.M. Best rating of A-VII or better.
C. Alternative forms of insurance coverage, including but not limited to self-insurance and
“Occupational Accident and Excess Employer’s Indemnity Policies,” are not sufficient to
meet the insurance requirements of this Contract, unless expressly allowed in the
Supplementary Conditions.
D. Contractor shall deliver to Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in
the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Contractor
has obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required by the Contract.
Upon request by Owner or any other insured, Contractor shall also furnish other
evidence of such required insurance, including but not limited to copies of policies,
documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and deductibles, full
disclosure of all relevant exclusions, and evidence of insurance required to be purchased
and maintained by Subcontractors or Suppliers. In any documentation furnished under
this provision, Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers may block out (redact) (1) any
confidential premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or
jurisdiction other than those applicable to this Contract.
E. Owner shall deliver to Contractor, with copies to each additional insured identified in
the Contract, certificates of insurance and endorsements establishing that Owner has
obtained and is maintaining the policies and coverages required of Owner by the
Contract (if any). Upon request by Contractor or any other insured, Owner shall also
provide other evidence of such required insurance (if any), including but not limited to
copies of policies, documentation of applicable self-insured retentions (if allowed) and
deductibles, and full disclosure of all relevant exclusions . In any documentation
furnished under this provision, Owner may block out (redact) (1) any confidential
premium or pricing information and (2) any wording specific to a project or jurisdiction
other than those relevant to this Contract.
F. Failure of Owner or Contractor to demand such certificates or other evidence of the other
party’s full compliance with these insurance requirements, or failure of Owner or
Contractor to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided, will not be
construed as a waiver of the other party’s obligation to obtain and maintain such
insurance.
G. In addition to the liability insurance required to be provided by Contractor, the Owner,
at Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain Owner’s own liability insurance. Owner’s
liability policies, if any, operate separately and independently from policies required to
be provided by Contractor, and Contractor cannot rely upon Owner’s liability policies for
any of Contractor’s obligations to the Owner, Engineer, or third parties.
H. Contractor shall require:
1. Subcontractors to purchase and maintain worker’s compensation, commercial
general liability, and other insurance that is appropriate for their participation in

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 27
the Project, and to name as additional insureds Owner and Engineer (and any other
individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional
insureds on Contractor’s liability policies) on each Subcontractor’s commercial
general liability insurance policy; and
2. Suppliers to purchase and maintain insurance that is appropriate for their
participation in the Project.
I. If either party does not purchase or maintain the insurance required of such party by the
Contract, such party shall notify the other party in writing of such failure to purchase
prior to the start of the Work, or of such failure to maintain prior to any change in the
required coverage.
J. If Contractor has failed to obtain and maintain required insurance, Contractor’s
entitlement to enter or remain at the Site will end immediately, and Owner may impose
an appropriate set-off against payment for any associated costs (including but not
limited to the cost of purchasing necessary insurance coverage), and exercise Owner’s
termination rights under Article 16.
K. Without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if a party has failed to obtain required
insurance, the other party may elect (but is in no way obligated) to obtain equivalent
insurance to protect such other party’s interests at the expense of the party wh o was
required to provide such coverage, and the Contract Price will be adjusted accordingly.
L. Owner does not represent that insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract
necessarily will be adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor’s interests . Contractor
is responsible for determining whether such coverage and limits are adequate to protect
its interests, and for obtaining and maintaining any additional insurance that Contractor
deems necessary.
M. The insurance and insurance limits required herein will not be deemed as a limitation
on Contractor’s liability, or that of its Subcontractors or Suppliers, under the indemnities
granted to Owner and other individuals and entities in the Contract or otherwise.
N. All the policies of insurance required to be purchased and maintained under this
Contract will contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be
canceled, or renewal refused, until at least 10 days prior written notice has been given
to the purchasing policyholder. Within three days of receipt of any such written notice,
the purchasing policyholder shall provide a copy of the notice to each other insured and
Engineer.
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance
A. Required Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain Worker’s Compensation,
Commercial General Liability, and other insurance pursuant to the specific requirements
of the Supplementary Conditions.
B. General Provisions: The policies of insurance required by this Paragraph 6.03 as
supplemented must:
1. include at least the specific coverages required;
2. be written for not less than the limits provided, or those required by Laws or
Regulations, whichever is greater;
3. remain in effect at least until the Work is complete (as set forth in
Paragraph 15.06.D), and longer if expressly required elsewhere in this Contract, and
at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing, or replacing

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 28
defective Work as a warranty or correction obligation, or otherwise, or returning to
the Site to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract;
4. apply with respect to the performance of the Work, whether such performance is by
Contractor, any Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly
employed by any of them to perform any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts
any of them may be liable; and
5. include all necessary endorsements to support the stated requirements.
C. Additional Insureds: The Contractor’s commercial general liability, automobile liability,
employer’s liability, umbrella or excess, pollution liability, and unmanned aerial vehicle
liability policies, if required by this Contract, must:
1. include and list as additional insureds Owner and Engineer, and any individuals or
entities identified as additional insureds in the Supplementary Conditions;
2. include coverage for the respective officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, and consultants of all such additional insureds;
3. afford primary coverage to these additional insureds for all claims covered thereby
(including as applicable those arising from both ongoing and completed
operations);
4. not seek contribution from insurance maintained by the additional insured; and
5. as to commercial general liability insurance, apply to additional insureds with
respect to liability caused in whole or in part by Contractor’s acts or omissions, or
the acts and omissions of those working on Contractor’s behalf, in the performance
of Contractor’s operations.
6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance
A. Builder’s Risk: Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor
shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a completed
value basis, in the amount of the Work’s full insurable replacement cost (subject to such
deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary Conditions or required by
Laws and Regulations). The specific requirements applicable to the builder’s risk
insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions.
B. Property Insurance for Facilities of Owner Where Work Will Occur: Owner is responsible
for obtaining and maintaining property insurance covering each existing structure,
building, or facility in which any part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the
Work will attach or be adjoined. Such property insurance will be written on a special
perils (all-risk) form, on a replacement cost basis, providing coverage consistent with
that required for the builder’s risk insurance, and will be maintained unti l the Work is
complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D.
C. Property Insurance for Substantially Complete Facilities: Promptly after Substantial
Completion, and before actual occupancy or use of the substantially completed Work,
Owner will obtain property insurance for such substantially completed Work, and
maintain such property insurance at least until the Work is complete, as set forth in
Paragraph 15.06.D. Such property insurance will be written on a special perils (all-risk)
form, on a replacement cost basis, and provide coverage consistent with that required
for the builder’s risk insurance. The builder’s risk insurance may terminate upon written
confirmation of Owner’s procurement of such property insurance.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 29
D. Partial Occupancy or Use by Owner: If Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of
the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, as provided in
Paragraph 15.04, then Owner (directly, if it is the purchaser of the builder’s risk policy,
or through Contractor) will provide advance notice of such occupancy or use to the
builder’s risk insurer, and obtain an endorsement consenting to the continuation of
coverage prior to commencing such partial occupancy or use.
E. Insurance of Other Property; Additional Insurance: If the express insurance provisions of
the Contract do not require or address the insurance of a property item or interest, then
the entity or individual owning such property item will be responsible for insuring it. If
Contractor elects to obtain other special insurance to be included in or supplement the
builder’s risk or property insurance policies provided under this Paragraph 6.04, it may
do so at Contractor’s expense.
6.05 Property Losses; Subrogation
A. The builder’s risk insurance policy purchased and maintained in accordance with
Paragraph 6.04 (or an installation floater policy if authorized by the Supplementary
Conditions), will contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss
or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery against any insureds thereunder,
or against Engineer or its consultants, or their officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors.
1. Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and the respective officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors
of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of, or
resulting from any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss covered by such policies and
any other property insurance applicable to the Work; and, in addition, waive all such
rights against Engineer, its consultants, all individuals or entities identified in the
Supplementary Conditions as builder’s risk or installation floater insureds, and the
officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and
subcontractors of each and any of them, under such policies for losses and damages
so caused.
2. None of the above waivers extends to the rights that any party making such waiver
may have to the proceeds of insurance held by Owner or Contractor as trustee or
fiduciary, or otherwise payable under any policy so issued.
B. Any property insurance policy maintained by Owner covering any loss, damage, or
consequential loss to Owner’s existing structures, buildings, or facilities in which any
part of the Work will occur, or to which any part of the Work will attach or adjoin; to
adjacent structures, buildings, or facilities of Owner; or to part or all of the completed or
substantially completed Work, during partial occupancy or use pursuant to
Paragraph 15.04, after Substantial Completion pursuant to Paragraph 15.03, or after
final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06, will contain provisions to the effect that in
the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurer will have no rights of recovery
against any insureds thereunder, or against Contractor, Subcontractors, or Engineer, or
the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or
subcontractors of each and any of them, and that the insured is allowed to waive the
insurer’s rights of subrogation in a written contract executed prior to the loss, damage,
or consequential loss.
1. Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, and Engineer, and the
officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants and
subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages caused by,

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 30
arising out of, or resulting from fire or any of the perils, risks, or causes of loss
covered by such policies.
C. The waivers in this Paragraph 6.05 include the waiver of rights due to business
interruption, loss of use, or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical
loss or damage to Owner’s property or the Work caused by, arising out of, or resulting
from fire or other insured peril, risk, or cause of loss.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that each Subcontract contains provisions
whereby the Subcontractor waives all rights against Owner, Contractor, all individuals
or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as insureds, the Engineer and its
consultants, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them, for all losses and damages
caused by, arising out of, relating to, or resulting from fire or other peril, risk, or cause of
loss covered by builder’s risk insurance, installation floater, and any other property
insurance applicable to the Work.
6.06 Receipt and Application of Property Insurance Proceeds
A. Any insured loss under the builder’s risk and other policies of property insurance
required by Paragraph 6.04 will be adjusted and settled with the named insured that
purchased the policy. Such named insured shall act as fiduciary for the other insureds,
and give notice to such other insureds that adjustment and settlement of a claim is in
progress. Any other insured may state its position regarding a claim for insured loss in
writing within 15 days after notice of such claim.
B. Proceeds for such insured losses may be made payable by the insurer either jointly to
multiple insureds, or to the named insured that purchased the policy in its own right and
as fiduciary for other insureds, subject to the requirements of any applicable mortgage
clause. A named insured receiving insurance proceeds under the builder’s risk and other
policies of insurance required by Paragraph 6.04 shall maintain such proceeds in a
segregated account, and distribute such proceeds in accordance with such agreement as
the parties in interest may reach, or as otherwise required under the dispute resolution
provisions of this Contract or applicable Laws and Regulations.
C. If no other special agreement is reached, Contractor shall repair or replace the damaged
Work, using allocated insurance proceeds.
ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
7.01 Contractor’s Means and Methods of Construction
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences,
and procedures of construction.
B. If the Contract Documents note, or Contractor determines, that professional engineering
or other design services are needed to carry out Contractor’s responsibilities for
construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures, or for Site safety,
then Contractor shall cause such services to be provided by a properly licensed design
professional, at Contractor’s expense. Such services are not Owner-delegated
professional design services under this Contract, and neither Owner nor Engineer has
any responsibility with respect to (1) Contractor’s determination of the need for such
services, (2) the qualifications or licensing of the design professionals retained or
employed by Contractor, (3) the performance of such services, or (4) any errors,
omissions, or defects in such services.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 31
7.02 Supervision and Superintendence
A. Contractor shall supervise, inspect, and direct the Work competently and efficiently,
devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be
necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. At all times during the progress of the Work, Contractor shall assign a competent
resident superintendent who will not be replaced without written notice to Owner and
Engineer except under extraordinary circumstances.
7.03 Labor; Working Hours
A. Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out
the Work and perform construction as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor
shall maintain good discipline and order at the Site.
B. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of
Contractor’s employees; of Suppliers and Subcontractors, and their employees; and of
any other individuals or entities performing or furnishing any of the Work, just as
Contractor is responsible for Contractor’s own acts and omissions.
C. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or
property at the Site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise stated in the Contract
Documents, all Work at the Site will be performed during regular working hours, Monday
through Friday. Contractor will not perform Work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal
holiday. Contractor may perform Work outside regular working hours or on Saturdays,
Sundays, or legal holidays only with Owner’s written consent, which will not be
unreasonably withheld.
7.04 7.04 Services, Materials, and Equipment
A. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and
assume full responsibility for all services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation,
construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat,
telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and
incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start up, and completion of the Work,
whether or not such items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents.
B. All materials and equipment incorporated into the Work must be new and of good
quality, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. All special warranties
and guarantees required by the Specifications will expressly run to the benefit of Owner.
If required by Engineer, Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports
of required tests) as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment.
C. All materials and equipment must be stored, applied, installed, connected, erected,
protected, used, cleaned, and conditioned in accordance with instructions of the
applicable Supplier, except as otherwise may be provided in the Contract Documents.
7.05 “Or Equals”
A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Whenever an item of equipment or material is
specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the names of one or more
proprietary items or specific Suppliers, the Contract Price has been based upon
Contractor furnishing such item as specified. The specification or description of such an
item is intended to establish the type, function, appearance, and quality required. Unless
the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like,
equivalent, or “or equal” item is permitted, Contractor may request that Engineer

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 32
authorize the use of other items of equipment or material, or items from other proposed
Suppliers, under the circumstances described below.
1. If Engineer in its sole discretion determines that an item of equipment or material
proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar
so that no change in related Work will be required, Engineer will deem it an “or
equal” item. For the purposes of this paragraph, a proposed item of equipment or
material will be considered functionally equal to an item so named if:
a. in the exercise of reasonable judgment Engineer determines that the proposed
item:
1) is at least equal in materials of construction, quality, durability,
appearance, strength, and design characteristics;
2) will reliably perform at least equally well the function and achieve the
results imposed by the design concept of the completed Project as a
functioning whole;
3) has a proven record of performance and availability of responsive service;
and
4) is not objectionable to Owner.
b. Contractor certifies that, if the proposed item is approved and incorporated
into the Work:
1) there will be no increase in cost to the Owner or increase in Contract
Times; and
2) the item will conform substantially to the detailed requirements of the
item named in the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed “or
equal” item at Contractor’s expense.
C. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each “or-equal” request. Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional
data about the proposed “or-equal” item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability.
No “or-equal” item will be ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s
review is complete and Engineer determines that the proposed item is an “or -equal,”
which will be evidenced by an approved Shop Drawing or other written communication.
Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative determination.
D. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: Neither approval nor denial of an “or-equal” request
will result in any change in Contract Price. The Engineer’s denial of an “or-equal” request
will be final and binding, and may not be reversed through an appeal under any provision
of the Contract.
E. Treatment as a Substitution Request: If Engineer determines that an item of equipment
or material proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an “or-equal” item, Contractor
may request that Engineer consider the item a proposed substitute pursuant to
Paragraph 7.06.
7.06 Substitutes
A. Contractor’s Request; Governing Criteria: Unless the specification or description of an
item of equipment or material required to be furnished under the Contract Documents
contains or is followed by words reading that no substitution is permitted, Contractor

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 33
may request that Engineer authorize the use of other items of equipment or material
under the circumstances described below. To the extent possible such requests must be
made before commencement of related construction at the Site.
1. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as provided below to allow Engineer
to determine if the item of material or equipment proposed is functionally
equivalent to that named and an acceptable substitute therefor. Engineer will not
accept requests for review of proposed substitute items of equipment or material
from anyone other than Contractor.
2. The requirements for review by Engineer will be as set forth in Paragraph 7.06.B, as
supplemented by the Specifications, and as Engineer may decide is appropriate
under the circumstances.
3. Contractor shall make written application to Engineer for review of a proposed
substitute item of equipment or material that Contractor seeks to furnish or use.
The application:
a. will certify that the proposed substitute item will:
1) perform adequately the functions and achieve the results called for by the
general design;
2) be similar in substance to the item specified; and
3) be suited to the same use as the item specified.
b. will state:
1) the extent, if any, to which the use of the proposed substitute item will
necessitate a change in Contract Times;
2) whether use of the proposed substitute item in the Work will require a
change in any of the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other
direct contract with Owner for other work on the Project) to adapt the
design to the proposed substitute item; and
3) whether incorporation or use of the proposed substitute item in
connection with the Work is subject to payment of any license fee or
royalty.
c. will identify:
1) all variations of the proposed substitute item from the item specified; and
2) available engineering, sales, maintenance, repair, and replacement
services.
d. will contain an itemized estimate of all costs or credits that will result directly
or indirectly from use of such substitute item, including but not limited to
changes in Contract Price, shared savings, costs of redesign, and claims of other
contractors affected by any resulting change.
B. Engineer’s Evaluation and Determination: Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to
evaluate each substitute request, and to obtain comments and direction from Owner.
Engineer may require Contractor to furnish additional data about the proposed
substitute item. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptability. No substitute will be
ordered, furnished, installed, or utilized until Engineer’s review is complete and
Engineer determines that the proposed item is an acceptable substitute. Engineer’s
determination will be evidenced by a Field Order or a proposed Change Order accounting

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 34
for the substitution itself and all related impacts, including changes in Contract Price or
Contract Times. Engineer will advise Contractor in writing of any negative
determination.
C. Special Guarantee: Owner may require Contractor to furnish at Contractor’s expense a
special performance guarantee or other surety with respect to any substitute.
D. Reimbursement of Engineer’s Cost: Engineer will record Engineer’s costs in evaluating a
substitute proposed or submitted by Contractor. Whether or not Engineer approves a
substitute so proposed or submitted by Contractor, Contractor shall reimburse Owner
for the reasonable charges of Engineer for evaluating each such proposed substitute.
Contractor shall also reimburse Owner for the reasonable charges of Engineer for
making changes in the Contract Documents (or in the provisions of any other direct
contract with Owner) resulting from the acceptance of each proposed substitute.
E. Contractor’s Expense: Contractor shall provide all data in support of any proposed
substitute at Contractor’s expense.
F. Effect of Engineer’s Determination: If Engineer approves the substitution request,
Contractor shall execute the proposed Change Order and proceed with the substitution.
The Engineer’s denial of a substitution request will be final and binding, and may not be
reversed through an appeal under any provision of the Contract. Contractor may
challenge the scope of reimbursement costs imposed under Paragraph 7.06.D, by timely
submittal of a Change Proposal.
7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers
A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the
Work. Such Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. The
Contractor’s retention of a Subcontractor or Supplier for the performance of parts of the
Work will not relieve Contractor’s obligation to Owner to perform and complete the
Work in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Contractor shall retain specific Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of
designated parts of the Work if required by the Contract to do so.
C. Subsequent to the submittal of Contractor’s Bid or final negotiation of the terms of the
Contract, Owner may not require Contractor to retain any Subcontractor or Supplier to
furnish or perform any of the Work against which Contractor has reasonable objection.
D. Prior to entry into any binding subcontract or purchase order, Contractor shall submit
to Owner the identity of the proposed Subcontractor or Supplier (unless Owner has
already deemed such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier acceptable during the bidding
process or otherwise). Such proposed Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed
acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 5
days.
E. Owner may require the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier. Owner also may
require Contractor to retain specific replacements; provided, however, that Owner may
not require a replacement to which Contractor has a reasonable objection. If Contractor
has submitted the identity of certain Subcontractors or Suppliers for acceptance by
Owner, and Owner has accepted it (either in writing or by failing to make written
objection thereto), then Owner may subsequently revoke the acceptance of any such
Subcontractor or Supplier so identified solely on the basis of substantive, reasonable
objection after due investigation. Contractor shall submit an acceptable replacement for
the rejected Subcontractor or Supplier.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 35
F. If Owner requires the replacement of any Subcontractor or Supplier retained by
Contractor to perform any part of the Work, then Contractor shall be entitled to an
adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times, with respect to the replacement; and
Contractor shall initiate a Change Proposal for such adjustment within 30 days of
Owner’s requirement of replacement.
G. No acceptance by Owner of any such Subcontractor or Supplier, whether initially or as a
replacement, will constitute a waiver of the right of Owner to the completion of the Work
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
H. On a monthly basis, Contractor shall submit to Engineer a complete list of all
Subcontractors and Suppliers having a direct contract with Contractor, and of all other
Subcontractors and Suppliers known to Contractor at the time of submittal.
I. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of
Subcontractors and Suppliers.
J. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings
do not control Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or in
delineating the Work to be performed by any specific trade.
K. All Work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier must be pursuant to
an appropriate contractual agreement that specifically binds the Subcontractor or
Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract for the benefit of Owner
and Engineer.
L. Owner may furnish to any Subcontractor or Supplier, to the extent practicable,
information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work performed for Contractor by the
Subcontractor or Supplier.
M. Contractor shall restrict all Subcontractors and Suppliers from communicating with
Engineer or Owner, except through Contractor or in case of an emergency, or as
otherwise expressly allowed in this Contract.
7.08 Patent Fees and Royalties
A. Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use
in the performance of the Work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention,
design, process, product, or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights
held by others. If an invention, design, process, product, or device is specified in the
Contract Documents for use in the performance of the Work and if, to the actual
knowledge of Owner or Engineer, its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling
for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights will
be disclosed in the Contract Documents.
B. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Owner shall indemnify and hold
harmless Contractor, and its officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents,
consultants, and subcontractors, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages
(including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and
other professionals, and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising
out of or relating to any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use
in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any
invention, design, process, product, or device specified in the Contract Documents, but
not identified as being subject to payment of any license fee or royalty to others required
by patent rights or copyrights.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 36
C. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and
hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from and
against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and
charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or
arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to any
infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the
Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process,
product, or device not specified in the Contract Documents.
7.09 Permits
A. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain and pay
for all construction permits, licenses, and certificates of occupancy. Owner shall assist
Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay
all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work
which are applicable at the time of the submission of Contractor’s Bid (or when
Contractor became bound under a negotiated contract). Owner shall pay all charges of
utility owners for connections for providing permanent service to the Work.
7.10 Taxes
A. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid
by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the place of the Project
which are applicable during the performance of the Work.
7.11 Laws and Regulations
A. Contractor shall give all notices required by and shall comply with all Laws and
Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Neither Owner nor Engineer
shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor’s compliance with any Laws or
Regulations.
B. If Contractor performs any Work or takes any other action knowing or having reason to
know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all resulting costs
and losses, and shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of
each and any of them, from and against all claims, costs, losses, and damages (including
but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other
professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out
of or relating to such Work or other action. It is not Contractor’s responsibility to make
certain that the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws
and Regulations, but this does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under
Paragraph 3.03.
C. Owner or Contractor may give written notice to the other party of any changes after the
submission of Contractor’s Bid (or after the date when Contractor became bound under
a negotiated contract) in Laws or Regulations having an effect on the cost or time of
performance of the Work, including but not limited to changes in Laws or Regulations
having an effect on procuring permits and on sales, use, value -added, consumption, and
other similar taxes. If Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on
the amount or extent, if any, of any adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times
resulting from such changes, then within 30 days of such written notice Contractor may
submit a Change Proposal, or Owner may initiate a Claim.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 37
7.12 Record Documents
A. Contractor shall maintain in a safe place at the Site one printed record copy of all
Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders, Work Change Directives, Field
Orders, written interpretations and clarifications, and approved Shop Drawings.
Contractor shall keep such record documents in good order and annotate them to show
changes made during construction. These record documents, together with all approved
Samples, will be available to Engineer for reference. Upon completion of the Work,
Contractor shall deliver these record documents to Engineer.
7.13 Safety and Protection
A. Contractor shall be solely responsible for initiating, maintaining, and supervising all
safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Such responsibility does
not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in
the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and
Regulations.
B. Contractor shall designate a qualified and experienced safety representative whose
duties and responsibilities are the prevention of Work-related accidents and the
maintenance and supervision of safety precautions and programs.
C. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the
necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to:
1. all persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work;
2. all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in
storage on or off the Site; and
3. other property at the Site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks,
pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and
Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in
the course of construction.
D. All damage, injury, or loss to any property referred to in Paragraph 7.13.C.2 or 7.13.C.3
caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor,
Supplier, or any other individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them
to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be
remedied by Contractor at its expense (except damage or loss attributable to the fault of
Drawings or Specifications or to the acts or omissions of Owner or Engineer or anyone
employed by any of them, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, and not
attributable, directly or indirectly, in whole or in part, to the fault or negligence of
Contractor or any Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity directly or
indirectly employed by any of them).
E. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety
of persons or property, or to the protection of persons or property from damage, injury,
or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and
protection.
F. Contractor shall notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property; the owners of
Underground Facilities and other utilities (if the identity of such owners is known to
Contractor); and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to
the Site, in writing, when Contractor knows that prosecution of the Work may affect
them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and
replacement of their property or work in progress.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 38
G. Contractor shall comply with the applicable requirements of Owner’s safety programs, if
any. Any Owner’s safety programs that are applicable to the Work are identified or
included in the Supplementary Conditions or Specifications.
H. Contractor shall inform Owner and Engineer of the specific requirements of Contractor’s
safety program with which Owner’s and Engineer’s employees and representatives must
comply while at the Site.
I. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will continue until all
the Work is completed, Engineer has issued a written notice to Owner and Contractor in
accordance with Paragraph 15.06.C that the Work is acceptable, and Contractor has left
the Site (except as otherwise expressly provided in connection with Substantial
Completion).
J. Contractor’s duties and responsibilities for safety and protection will resume whenever
Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or
correction obligations, or to conduct other tasks arising from the Contract Documents.
7.14 Hazard Communication Programs
A. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating any exchange of safety data sheets
(formerly known as material safety data sheets) or other hazard communication
information required to be made available to or exchanged between or among
employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations.
7.15 Emergencies
A. In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at
the Site or adjacent thereto, Contractor is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury, or
loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that
any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have
been caused by an emergency, or are required as a result of Contractor’s response to an
emergency. If Engineer determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required
because of an emergency or Contractor’s response, a Work Change Directive or Change
Order will be issued.
7.16 Submittals
A. Shop Drawing and Sample Requirements
1. Before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall:
a. review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings
and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract
Documents;
b. determine and verify:
1) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance and
design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and
similar information with respect to the Submittal;
2) the suitability of all materials and equipment offered with respect to the
indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly,
and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and
3) all information relative to Contractor’s responsibilities for means,
methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and
safety precautions and programs incident thereto;

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 39
c. confirm that the Submittal is complete with respect to all related data included
in the Submittal.
2. Each Shop Drawing or Sample must bear a stamp or specific written certification
that Contractor has satisfied Contractor’s obligations under the Contract Documents
with respect to Contractor’s review of that Submittal, and that Contractor approves
the Submittal.
3. With each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written
notice of any variations that the Submittal may have from the requirements of the
Contract Documents. This notice must be set forth in a written communication
separate from the Submittal; and, in addition, in the case of a Shop Drawing by a
specific notation made on the Shop Drawing itself.
B. Submittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples: Contractor shall label and submit
Shop Drawings and Samples to Engineer for review and approval in accordance with the
accepted Schedule of Submittals.
1. Shop Drawings
a. Contractor shall submit the number of copies required in the Specifications.
b. Data shown on the Shop Drawings must be complete with respect to quantities,
dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials, and similar
data to show Engineer the services, materials, and equipment Contractor
proposes to provide, and to enable Engineer to review the information for the
limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C.
2. Samples
a. Contractor shall submit the number of Samples required in the Specifications.
b. Contractor shall clearly identify each Sample as to material, Supplier, pertinent
data such as catalog numbers, the use for which intended and other data as
Engineer may require to enable Engineer to review the Submittal for the
limited purposes required by Paragraph 7.16.C.
3. Where a Shop Drawing or Sample is required by the Contract Documents or the
Schedule of Submittals, any related Work performed prior to Engineer’s review and
approval of the pertinent submittal will be at the sole expense and responsibility of
Contractor.
C. Engineer’s Review of Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Engineer will provide timely review of Shop Drawings and Samples in accordance
with the accepted Schedule of Submittals. Engineer’s review and approval will be
only to determine if the items covered by the Submittals will, after installation or
incorporation in the Work, comply with the requirements of the Contract
Documents, and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as
a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents.
2. Engineer’s review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques,
sequences, or procedures of construction, or to safety precautions or programs
incident thereto.
3. Engineer’s review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval
of the assembly in which the item functions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 40
4. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve
Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the
Contract Documents unless Contractor has complied with the requirements of
Paragraph 7.16.A.3 and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation
by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop
Drawing or Sample. Engineer will document any such approved variation from the
requirements of the Contract Documents in a Field Order or other appropriate
Contract modification.
5. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample will not relieve
Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of
Paragraphs 7.16.A and B.
6. Engineer’s review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample, or of a variation from
the requirements of the Contract Documents, will not, under any circumstances,
change the Contract Times or Contract Price, unless such changes are included in a
Change Order.
7. Neither Engineer’s receipt, review, acceptance, or approval of a Shop Drawing or
Sample will result in such item becoming a Contract Document.
8. Contractor shall perform the Work in compliance with the requirements and
commitments set forth in approved Shop Drawings and Samples, subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 7.16.C.4.
D. Resubmittal Procedures for Shop Drawings and Samples
1. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer and shall return the
required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit, as required, new
Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in
writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous
Submittals.
2. Contractor shall furnish required Shop Drawing and Sample submittals with
sufficient information and accuracy to obtain required approval of an item with no
more than two resubmittals. Engineer will record Engineer’s time for reviewing a
third or subsequent resubmittal of a Shop Drawing or Sample, and Contractor shall
be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for such time. Owner may impose
a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure reimbursement for such
charges.
3. If Contractor requests a change of a previously approved Shop Drawing or Sample,
Contractor shall be responsible for Engineer’s charges to Owner for its review time,
and Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor to secure
reimbursement for such charges, unless the need for such change is beyond the
control of Contractor.
E. Submittals Other than Shop Drawings, Samples, and Owner-Delegated Designs
1. The following provisions apply to all Submittals other than Shop Drawings, Samples,
and Owner-delegated designs:
a. Contractor shall submit all such Submittals to the Engineer in accordance with
the Schedule of Submittals and pursuant to the applicable terms of the Contract
Documents.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 41
b. Engineer will provide timely review of all such Submittals in accordance with
the Schedule of Submittals and return such Submittals with a notation of either
Accepted or Not Accepted. Any such Submittal that is not returned within the
time established in the Schedule of Submittals will be deemed accepted.
c. Engineer’s review will be only to determine if the Submittal is acceptable under
the requirements of the Contract Documents as to general form and content of
the Submittal.
d. If any such Submittal is not accepted, Contractor shall confer with Engineer
regarding the reason for the non-acceptance, and resubmit an acceptable
document.
2. Procedures for the submittal and acceptance of the Progress Schedule, the Schedule
of Submittals, and the Schedule of Values are set forth in Paragraphs 2.03. 2.04, and
2.05.
F. Owner-delegated Designs: Submittals pursuant to Owner-delegated designs are
governed by the provisions of Paragraph 7.19.
7.17 Contractor’s General Warranty and Guarantee
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that all Work will be in accordance with
the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Engineer is entitled to rely on
Contractor’s warranty and guarantee.
B. Owner’s rights under this warranty and guarantee are in addition to, and are not limited
by, Owner’s rights under the correction period provisions of Paragraph 15.08. The time
in which Owner may enforce its warranty and guarantee rights under this
Paragraph 7.17 is limited only by applicable Laws and Regulations restricting actions to
enforce such rights; provided, however, that after the end of the correction period under
Paragraph 15.08:
1. Owner shall give Contractor written notice of any defective Work within 60 days of
the discovery that such Work is defective; and
2. Such notice will be deemed the start of an event giving rise to a Claim under
Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim must be brought within 30 days of
the notice.
C. Contractor’s warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes defects or damage caused by:
1. abuse, or improper modification, maintenance, or operation, by persons other than
Contractor, Subcontractors, Suppliers, or any other individual or entity for whom
Contractor is responsible; or
2. normal wear and tear under normal usage.
D. Contractor’s obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the
Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of
Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, a release of Contractor’s
obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or a release
of Owner’s warranty and guarantee rights under this Paragraph 7.17:
1. Observations by Engineer;
2. Recommendation by Engineer or payment by Owner of any progress or final
payment;

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 42
3. The issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion by Engineer or any payment
related thereto by Owner;
4. Use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner;
5. Any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal;
6. The issuance of a notice of acceptability by Engineer;
7. The end of the correction period established in Paragraph 15.08;
8. Any inspection, test, or approval by others; or
9. Any correction of defective Work by Owner.
E. If the Contract requires the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract entered
into by Owner, then the specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations
contained in the assigned contract will govern with respect to Contractor’s performance
obligations to Owner for the Work described in the assigned contract.
7.18 Indemnification
A. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, and in addition to any other
obligations of Contractor under the Contract or otherwise, Contractor shall indemnify
and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners ,
employees, agents, consultants and subcontractors of each and any of them, from losses,
damages, costs, and judgments (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals, and all court or arbitration or
other dispute resolution costs) arising from third-party claims or actions relating to or
resulting from the performance or furnishing of the Work, provided that any such claim,
action, loss, cost, judgment or damage is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease,
or death, or to damage to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself),
including the loss of use resulting therefrom, but only to the extent caused by any
negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any
individual or entity directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform any of the
Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable.
B. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer, or any of their officers, directors,
members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, by any employee
(or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or any individual or entity directly or indirectly employed
by any of them to perform any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may
be liable, the indemnification obligation under Paragraph 7.18.A will not be limited in
any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation, or benefits
payable by or for Contractor or any such Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or
entity under workers’ compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee
benefit acts.
7.19 Delegation of Professional Design Services
A. Owner may require Contractor to provide professional design services for a portion of
the Work by express delegation in the Contract Documents. Such delegation will specify
the performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy, and the Submittals
that Contractor must furnish to Engineer with respect to the Owner-delegated design.
B. Contractor shall cause such Owner-delegated professional design services to be
provided pursuant to the professional standard of care by a properly licensed design
professional, whose signature and seal must appear on all drawings, calculations,

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 43
specifications, certifications, and Submittals prepared by such design professional. Such
design professional must issue all certifications of design required by Laws and
Regulations.
C. If a Shop Drawing or other Submittal related to the Owner-delegated design is prepared
by Contractor, a Subcontractor, or others for submittal to Engineer, then such Shop
Drawing or other Submittal must bear the written approval of Contractor’s design
professional when submitted by Contractor to Engineer.
D. Owner and Engineer shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and
completeness of the services, certifications, and approvals performed or provided by the
design professionals retained or employed by Contractor under an Owner-delegated
design, subject to the professional standard of care and the performance and design
criteria stated in the Contract Documents.
E. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.19, Engineer’s review, approval, and other determinations
regarding design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, and other
Submittals furnished by Contractor pursuant to an Owner-delegated design will be only
for the following limited purposes:
1. Checking for conformance with the requirements of this Paragraph 7.19;
2. Confirming that Contractor (through its design professionals) has used the
performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents; and
3. Establishing that the design furnished by Contractor is consistent with the design
concept expressed in the Contract Documents.
F. Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of performance or design criteria
specified by Owner or Engineer.
G. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable
Laws and Regulations.
ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
8.01 Other Work
A. In addition to and apart from the Work under the Contract Documents, the Owner may
perform other work at or adjacent to the Site. Such other work may be performed by
Owner’s employees, or through contracts between the Owner and third parties. Owner
may also arrange to have third-party utility owners perform work on their utilities and
facilities at or adjacent to the Site.
B. If Owner performs other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or
through contracts for such other work, then Owner shall give Contractor written notice
thereof prior to starting any such other work. If Owner has advance information
regarding the start of any third-party utility work that Owner has arranged to take place
at or adjacent to the Site, Owner shall provide such information to Contractor.
C. Contractor shall afford proper and safe access to the Site to each contractor that
performs such other work, each utility owner performing other work, and Owner, if
Owner is performing other work with Owner’s employees, and provide a reasonable
opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment and the
execution of such other work.
D. Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work that may be required to
properly connect or otherwise make its several parts come together and properly

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 44
integrate with such other work. Contractor shall not endanger any work of others by
cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering such work; provided, however, that Contractor
may cut or alter others' work with the written consent of Engineer and the others whose
work will be affected.
E. If the proper execution or results of any part of Contractor’s Work depends upon work
performed by others, Contractor shall inspect such other work and promptly report to
Engineer in writing any delays, defects, or deficiencies in such other work that render it
unavailable or unsuitable for the proper execution and results of Contractor’s Work.
Contractor’s failure to so report will constitute an acceptance of such other work as fit
and proper for integration with Contractor’s Work except for latent defects and
deficiencies in such other work.
F. The provisions of this article are not applicable to work that is performed by third-party
utilities or other third-party entities without a contract with Owner, or that is performed
without having been arranged by Owner. If such work occurs, then any related delay,
disruption, or interference incurred by Contractor is governed by the provisions of
Paragraph 4.05.C.3.
8.02 Coordination
A. If Owner intends to contract with others for the performance of other work at or adjacent
to the Site, to perform other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s employees, or
to arrange to have utility owners perform work at or adjacent to the Site, the following
will be set forth in the Supplementary Conditions or provided to Contractor prior to the
start of any such other work:
1. The identity of the individual or entity that will have authority and responsibility
for coordination of the activities among the various contractors;
2. An itemization of the specific matters to be covered by such authority and
responsibility; and
3. The extent of such authority and responsibilities.
B. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Owner shall have sole
authority and responsibility for such coordination.
8.03 Legal Relationships
A. If, in the course of performing other work for Owner at or adjacent to the Site, the
Owner’s employees, any other contractor working for Owner, or any utility owner that
Owner has arranged to perform work, causes damage to the Work or to the property of
Contractor or its Subcontractors, or delays, disrupts, interferes with, or increases the
scope or cost of the performance of the Work, through actions or inaction, then
Contractor shall be entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or the
Contract Times. Contractor must submit any Change Proposal seeking an equitable
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times under this paragraph within 30
days of the damaging, delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. The entitlement to, and
extent of, any such equitable adjustment will take into account information (if any)
regarding such other work that was provided to Contractor in the Contract Documents
prior to the submittal of the Bid or the final negotiation of the terms of the Contract, and
any remedies available to Contractor under Laws or Regulations concerning utility
action or inaction. When applicable, any such equitable adjustment in Contract Price will
be conditioned on Contractor assigning to Owner all Contractor’s rights against such
other contractor or utility owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 45
interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Contractor’s entitlement to an
adjustment of the Contract Times or Contract Price is subject to the provisions of
Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
B. Contractor shall take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damaging, delaying,
disrupting, or interfering with the work of Owner, any other contractor, or any utility
owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site.
1. If Contractor fails to take such measures and as a result damages, delays, disrupts,
or interferes with the work of any such other contractor or utility owner, then
Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor, and assign to such
other contractor or utility owner the Owner’s contractual rights against Contractor
with respect to the breach of the obligations set forth in this Paragraph 8.03.B.
2. When Owner is performing other work at or adjacent to the Site with Owner’s
employees, Contractor shall be liable to Owner for damage to such other work, and
for the reasonable direct delay, disruption, and interference costs incurred by
Owner as a result of Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures
with respect to Owner’s other work. In response to such damage, delay, disruption,
or interference, Owner may impose a set-off against payments due Contractor.
C. If Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of any other
contractor, or any utility owner performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, through
Contractor’s failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid such impacts,
or if any claim arising out of Contractor’s actions, inactions, or negligence in performance
of the Work at or adjacent to the Site is made by any such other contractor or utility
owner against Contractor, Owner, or Engineer, then Contractor shall (1) promptly
attempt to settle the claim as to all parties through negotiations with such other
contractor or utility owner, or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other
dispute resolution proceeding or at law, and (2) indemnify and hold harmless Owner and
Engineer, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants
and subcontractors of each and any of them from and against any such claims, and
against all costs, losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of
engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals and all court or arbitration or
other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to such damage, delay,
disruption, or interference.
ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
9.01 Communications to Contractor
A. Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, Owner shall issue all
communications to Contractor through Engineer.
9.02 Replacement of Engineer
A. Owner may at its discretion appoint an engineer to replace Engineer, provided
Contractor makes no reasonable objection to the replacement engineer. The
replacement engineer’s status under the Contract Documents will be that of the former
Engineer.
9.03 Furnish Data
A. Owner shall promptly furnish the data required of Owner under the Contract
Documents.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 46
9.04 Pay When Due
A. Owner shall make payments to Contractor when they are due as provided in the
Agreement.
9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports, Tests, and Drawings
A. Owner’s duties with respect to providing lands and easements are set forth in
Paragraph 5.01.
B. Owner’s duties with respect to providing engineering surveys to establish reference
points are set forth in Paragraph 4.03.
C. Article 5 refers to Owner’s identifying and making available to Contractor copies of
reports of explorations and tests of conditions at the Site, and drawings of physical
conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site.
9.06 Insurance
A. Owner’s responsibilities, if any, with respect to purchasing and maintaining liability and
property insurance are set forth in Article 6.
9.07 Change Orders
A. Owner’s responsibilities with respect to Change Orders are set forth in Article 11.
9.08 Inspections, Tests, and Approvals
A. Owner’s responsibility with respect to certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set
forth in Paragraph 14.02.B.
9.09 Limitations on Owner’s Responsibilities
A. The Owner shall not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, nor be
responsible for, Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of
construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure
of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the
Work. Owner will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition
A. Owner’s responsibility in respect to an undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition
is set forth in Paragraph 5.06.
9.11 Evidence of Financial Arrangements
A. Upon request of Contractor, Owner shall furnish Contractor reasonable evidence that
financial arrangements have been made to satisfy Owner’s obligations under the
Contract (including obligations under proposed changes in the Work).
9.12 Safety Programs
A. While at the Site, Owner’s employees and representatives shall comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Contractor’s safety programs of which Owner has been
informed.
B. Owner shall furnish copies of any applicable Owner safety programs to Contractor.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 47
ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
10.01 Owner’s Representative
A. Engineer will be Owner’s representative during the construction period. The duties and
responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Engineer as Owner’s representative
during construction are set forth in the Contract.
10.02 Visits to Site
A. Engineer will make visits to the Site at intervals appropriate to the various stages of
construction as Engineer deems necessary in order to observe, as an experienced and
qualified design professional, the progress that has been made and the quality of th e
various aspects of Contractor’s executed Work. Based on information obtained during
such visits and observations, Engineer, for the benefit of Owner, will determine, in
general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents. Engineer
will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections on the Site to check
the quality or quantity of the Work. Engineer’s efforts will be directed toward providing
for Owner a greater degree of confidence that the completed Work will conform
generally to the Contract Documents. On the basis of such visits and observations,
Engineer will keep Owner informed of the progress of the Work and will endeavor to
guard Owner against defective Work.
B. Engineer’s visits and observations are subject to all the limitations on Engineer’s
authority and responsibility set forth in Paragraph 10.07. Particularly, but without
limitation, during or as a result of Engineer’s visits or observations of Contractor’s Work,
Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or
the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work.
10.03 Resident Project Representative
A. If Owner and Engineer have agreed that Engineer will furnish a Resident Project
Representative to represent Engineer at the Site and assist Engineer in observing the
progress and quality of the Work, then the authority and responsibilities of any such
Resident Project Representative will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions,
and limitations on the responsibilities thereof will be as provided in the Supplementary
Conditions and in Paragraph 10.07.
B. If Owner designates an individual or entity who is not Engineer’s consultant, agent, or
employee to represent Owner at the Site, then the responsibilities and authority of such
individual or entity will be as provided in the Supplementary Conditions.
10.04 Engineer’s Authority
A. Engineer has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 14.
B. Engineer’s authority as to Submittals is set forth in Paragraph 7.16.
C. Engineer’s authority as to design drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications
and other Submittals from Contractor in response to Owner’s delegation (if any) to
Contractor of professional design services, is set forth in Paragraph 7.19.
D. Engineer’s authority as to changes in the Work is set forth in Article 11.
E. Engineer’s authority as to Applications for Payment is set forth in Article 15.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 48
10.05 Determinations for Unit Price Work
A. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work
performed by Contractor as set forth in Paragraph 13.03.
10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work
A. Engineer will render decisions regarding the requirements of the Contract Documents,
and judge the acceptability of the Work, pursuant to the specific procedures set forth
herein for initial interpretations, Change Proposals, and acceptance of the Work. In
rendering such decisions and judgments, Engineer will not show partiality to Owner or
Contractor, and will not be liable to Owner, Contractor, or others in connection with any
proceedings, interpretations, decisions, or judgments conducted or rendered in good
faith.
10.07 Limitations on Engineer’s Authority and Responsibilities
A. Neither Engineer’s authority or responsibility under this Article 10 or under any other
provision of the Contract, nor any decision made by Engineer in good faith either to
exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise, or
performance of any authority or responsibility by Engineer, will create, impose, or give
rise to any duty in contract, tort, or otherwise owed by Engineer to Contractor, any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other individual or entity, or to any surety for or
employee or agent of any of them.
B. Engineer will not supervise, direct, control, or have authority over or be responsible for
Contractor’s means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or
the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to
comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. Engineer
will not be responsible for Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with
the Contract Documents.
C. Engineer will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any
Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other individual or entity performing any of the
Work.
D. Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation, and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees,
bonds, certificates of inspection, tests and approvals, and other documentation required
to be delivered by Contractor under Paragraph 15.06.A, will only be to determine
generally that their content complies with the requirements of, and in the case of
certificates of inspections, tests, and approvals, that the results certified indicate
compliance with the Contract Documents.
E. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this Paragraph 10.07 also
apply to the Resident Project Representative, if any.
10.08 Compliance with Safety Program
A. While at the Site, Engineer’s employees and representatives will comply with the specific
applicable requirements of Owner’s and Contractor’s safety programs of which Engineer
has been informed.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 49
ARTICLE 11 – CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT
11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract
A. The Contract may be amended or supplemented by a Change Order, a Work Change
Directive, or a Field Order.
B. If an amendment or supplement to the Contract includes a change in the Contract Price
or the Contract Times, such amendment or supplement must be set forth in a Change
Order.
C. All changes to the Contract that involve (1) the performance or acceptability of the Work,
(2) the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), or (3) other
engineering or technical matters, must be supported by Engineer’s recommendation.
Owner and Contractor may amend other terms and conditions of the Contract without
the recommendation of the Engineer.
11.02 Change Orders
A. Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders covering:
1. Changes in Contract Price or Contract Times which are agreed to by the parties,
including any undisputed sum or amount of time for Work actually performed in
accordance with a Work Change Directive;
2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from an Owner set-off, unless Contractor has
duly contested such set-off;
3. Changes in the Work which are: (a) ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.05,
(b) required because of Owner’s acceptance of defective Work under
Paragraph 14.04 or Owner’s correction of defective Work under Paragraph 14.07,
or (c) agreed to by the parties, subject to the need for Engineer’s recommendation
if the change in the Work involves the design (as set forth in the Drawings,
Specifications, or otherwise) or other engineering or technical matters; and
4. Changes that embody the substance of any final and binding results under:
Paragraph 11.03.B, resolving the impact of a Work Change Directive;
Paragraph 11.09, concerning Change Proposals; Article 12, Claims;
Paragraph 13.02.D, final adjustments resulting from allowances;
Paragraph 13.03.D, final adjustments relating to determination of quantities for
Unit Price Work; and similar provisions.
B. If Owner or Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed
under the terms of Paragraph 11.02.A, it will be deemed to be of full force and effect, as
if fully executed.
11.03 Work Change Directives
A. A Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times but is
evidence that the parties expect that the modification ordered or documented by a Work
Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order, following
negotiations by the parties as to the Work Change Directive’s effect, if any, on the
Contract Price and Contract Times; or, if negotiations are unsuccessful, by a
determination under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments,
expressly including Paragraph 11.07 regarding change of Contract Price.
B. If Owner has issued a Work Change Directive and:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 50
1. Contractor believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is
necessary, then Contractor shall submit any Change Proposal seeking such an
adjustment no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the
Work Change Directive.
2. Owner believes that an adjustment in Contract Times or Contract Price is necessary,
then Owner shall submit any Claim seeking such an adjustment no later than 60 days
after issuance of the Work Change Directive.
11.04 Field Orders
A. Engineer may authorize minor changes in the Work if the changes do not involve an
adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Times and are compatible with the
design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the
Contract Documents. Such changes will be accomplished by a Field Order and will be
binding on Owner and also on Contractor, which shall perform the Work involved
promptly.
B. If Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or
Contract Times, then before proceeding with the Work at issue, Contractor shall submit
a Change Proposal as provided herein.
11.05 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work
A. Without invalidating the Contract and without notice to any surety, Owner may, at any
time or from time to time, order additions, deletions, or revisions in the Work. Changes
involving the design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise) or other
engineering or technical matters will be supported by Engineer’s recommendation.
B. Such changes in the Work may be accomplished by a Change Order, if Owner and
Contractor have agreed as to the effect, if any, of the changes on Contract Times or
Contract Price; or by a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document,
Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved; or, in the case of a deletion
in the Work, promptly cease construction activities with respect to such deleted Work.
Added or revised Work must be performed under the applicable conditions of the
Contract Documents.
C. Nothing in this Paragraph 11.05 obligates Contractor to undertake work that Contractor
reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor’s
safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations.
11.06 Unauthorized Changes in the Work
A. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the
Contract Times with respect to any work performed that is not required by the Contract
Documents, as amended, modified, or supplemented, except in the case of an emergency
as provided in Paragraph 7.15 or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in
Paragraph 14.05.C.2.
11.07 Change of Contract Price
A. The Contract Price may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an
adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.09.
Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of
Article 12.
B. An adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 51
1. Where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents, then by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items
involved (subject to the provisions of Paragraph 13.03);
2. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents, then by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance
for overhead and profit not necessarily in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2); or
3. Where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract
Documents and the parties do not reach mutual agreement to a lump sum, then on
the basis of the Cost of the Work (determined as provided in Paragraph 13.01) plus
a Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit (determined as provided in
Paragraph 11.07.C).
C. Contractor’s Fee: When applicable, the Contractor’s fee for overhead and profit will be
determined as follows:
1. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or
2. If a fixed fee is not agreed upon, then a fee based on the following percentages of the
various portions of the Cost of the Work:
a. For costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2, the Contractor’s
fee will be 15 percent;
b. For costs incurred under Paragraph 13.01.B.3, the Contractor’s fee will be 5
percent;
c. Where one or more tiers of subcontracts are on the basis of Cost of the Work
plus a fee and no fixed fee is agreed upon, the intent of Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a
and 11.07.C.2.b is that the Contractor’s fee will be based on: (1) a fee of 15
percent of the costs incurred under Paragraphs 13.01.B.1 and 13.01.B.2 by the
Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, at whatever tier, and (2) with
respect to Contractor itself and to any Subcontractors of a tier higher than that
of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work, a fee of 5 percent of the
amount (fee plus underlying costs incurred) attributable to the next lower tier
Subcontractor; provided, however, that for any such subcontracted Work the
maximum total fee to be paid by Owner will be no greater than 27 percent of
the costs incurred by the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work;
d. No fee will be payable on the basis of costs itemized under
Paragraphs 13.01.B.4, 13.01.B.5, and 13.01.C;
e. The amount of credit to be allowed by Contractor to Owner for any change
which results in a net decrease in Cost of the Work will be the amount of the
actual net decrease in Cost of the Work and a deduction of an additional amount
equal to 5 percent of such actual net decrease in Cost of the Work; and
f. When both additions and credits are involved in any one change or Change
Proposal, the adjustment in Contractor’s fee will be computed by determining
the sum of the costs in each of the cost categories in Paragraph 13.01.B
(specifically, payroll costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.1; incorporated materials and
equipment costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.2; Subcontract costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.3;
special consultants costs, Paragraph 13.01.B.4; and other costs,
Paragraph 13.01.B.5) and applying to each such cost category sum the
appropriate fee from Paragraphs 11.07.C.2.a through 11.07.C.2.e, inclusive.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 52
11.08 Change of Contract Times
A. The Contract Times may only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for
an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of
Paragraph 11.09. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with
the provisions of Article 12.
B. Delay, disruption, and interference in the Work, and any related changes in Contract
Times, are addressed in and governed by Paragraph 4.05.
11.09 Change Proposals
A. Purpose and Content: Contractor shall submit a Change Proposal to Engineer to request
an adjustment in the Contract Times or Contract Price; contest an initial decision by
Engineer concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the
acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; challenge a set-off against
payment due; or seek other relief under the Contract. The Change Proposal will specify
any proposed change in Contract Times or Contract Price, or other proposed relief, and
explain the reason for the proposed change, with citations to any governing or applicable
provisions of the Contract Documents. Each Change Proposal will address only one
issue, or a set of closely related issues.
B. Change Proposal Procedures
1. Submittal: Contractor shall submit each Change Proposal to Engineer within 30 days
after the start of the event giving rise thereto, or after such initial decision.
2. Supporting Data: The Contractor shall submit supporting data, including the
proposed change in Contract Price or Contract Time (if any), to the Engineer and
Owner within 15 days after the submittal of the Change Proposal.
a. Change Proposals based on or related to delay, interruption, or interference
must comply with the provisions of Paragraphs 4.05.D and 4.05.E.
b. Change proposals related to a change of Contract Price must include full and
detailed accounts of materials incorporated into the Work and labor and
equipment used for the subject Work.
The supporting data must be accompanied by a written statement that the
supporting data are accurate and complete, and that any requested time or
price adjustment is the entire adjustment to which Contractor believes it is
entitled as a result of said event.
3. Engineer’s Initial Review: Engineer will advise Owner regarding the Change
Proposal, and consider any comments or response from Owner regarding the
Change Proposal. If in its discretion Engineer concludes that additional supporting
data is needed before conducting a full review and making a decision regarding the
Change Proposal, then Engineer may request that Contractor submit such additional
supporting data by a date specified by Engineer, prior to Engineer beginning its full
review of the Change Proposal.
4. Engineer’s Full Review and Action on the Change Proposal: Upon receipt of
Contractor’s supporting data (including any additional data requested by Engineer),
Engineer will conduct a full review of each Change Proposal and, within 30 days
after such receipt of the Contractor’s supporting data, either approve the Change
Proposal in whole, deny it in whole, or approve it in part and deny it in part. Such
actions must be in writing, with a copy provided to Owner and Contractor. If

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 53
Engineer does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days, then either
Owner or Contractor may at any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party
indicating that as a result of Engineer’s inaction the Change Proposal is deemed
denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the denial under Article 12.
5. Binding Decision: Engineer’s decision is final and binding upon Owner and
Contractor, unless Owner or Contractor appeals the decision by filing a Claim under
Article 12.
C. Resolution of Certain Change Proposals: If the Change Proposal does not involve the
design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability of the
Work, or other engineering or technical matters, then Engineer will notify the parties in
writing that the Engineer is unable to resolve the Change Proposal. For purposes of
further resolution of such a Change Proposal, such notice will be deemed a denial, and
Contractor may choose to seek resolution under the terms of Article 12.
D. Post-Completion: Contractor shall not submit any Change Proposals after Engineer issues
a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to Paragraph 15.06.B.
11.10 Notification to Surety
A. If the provisions of any bond require notice to be given to a surety of any change affecting
the general scope of the Work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including,
but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Times), the giving of any such notice will
be Contractor’s responsibility. The amount of each applicable bond will be adjusted to
reflect the effect of any such change.
ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS
12.01 Claims
A. Claims Process: The following disputes between Owner and Contractor are subject to the
Claims process set forth in this article:
1. Appeals by Owner or Contractor of Engineer’s decisions regarding Change
Proposals;
2. Owner demands for adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other
relief under the Contract Documents;
3. Disputes that Engineer has been unable to address because they do not involve the
design (as set forth in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise), the acceptability
of the Work, or other engineering or technical matters; and
4. Subject to the waiver provisions of Paragraph 15.07, any dispute arising after
Engineer has issued a written recommendation of final payment pursuant to
Paragraph 15.06.B.
B. Submittal of Claim: The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other
party to the Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the
event giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30
days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish a
copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim
rests with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor seeking an
increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, Contractor shall certify that the Claim
is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and complete, and that to the

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 54
best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of time or money requested
accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is entitled.
C. Review and Resolution: The party receiving a Claim shall review it thoroughly, giving full
consideration to its merits. The two parties shall seek to resolve the Claim through the
exchange of information and direct negotiations. The parties may extend the time for
resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. All actions taken on a Claim will be stated in
writing and submitted to the other party, with a copy to Engineer.
D. Mediation
1. At any time after initiation of a Claim, Owner and Contractor may mutually agree to
mediation of the underlying dispute. The agreement to mediate will stay the Claim
submittal and response process.
2. If Owner and Contractor agree to mediation, then after 60 days from such
agreement, either Owner or Contractor may unilaterally terminate the mediation
process, and the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of
the termination. If the mediation proceeds but is unsuccessful in resolving the
dispute, the Claim submittal and decision process will resume as of the date of the
conclusion of the mediation, as determined by the mediator.
3. Owner and Contractor shall each pay one-half of the mediator’s fees and costs.
E. Partial Approval: If the party receiving a Claim approves the Claim in part and denies it
in part, such action will be final and binding unless within 30 days of such action the
other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for final resolution of disputes.
F. Denial of Claim: If efforts to resolve a Claim are not successful, the party receiving the
Claim may deny it by giving written notice of denial to the other party. If the receiving
party does not act on the Claim within 90 days, then either Owner or Contractor may at
any time thereafter submit a letter to the other party indicating that as a result of the
inaction, the Claim is deemed denied, thereby commencing the time for appeal of the
denial. A denial of the Claim will be final and binding unless within 30 days of the denial
the other party invokes the procedure set forth in Article 17 for the final resolution of
disputes.
G. Final and Binding Results: If the parties reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim,
whether through approval of the Claim, direct negotiations, mediation, or otherwise; or
if a Claim is approved in part and denied in part, or denied in full, and such actions
become final and binding; then the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will
be incorporated in a Change Order or other written document to the extent they affect
the Contract, including the Work, the Contract Times, or the Contract Price.
ARTICLE 13 – COST OF THE WORK; ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK
13.01 Cost of the Work
A. Purposes for Determination of Cost of the Work: The term Cost of the Work means the sum
of all costs necessary for the proper performance of the Work at issue, as further defined
below. The provisions of this Paragraph 13.01 are used for two distinct purposes:
1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the
Contract Price, under cost-plus-fee, time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms;
or

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 55
2. When needed to determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim,
set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. When the value of any such
adjustment is determined on the basis of Cost of the Work, Contractor is entitled
only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the
Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment.
B. Costs Included: Except as otherwise may be agreed to in writing by Owner, costs included
in the Cost of the Work will be in amounts no higher than those commonly incurred in
the locality of the Project, will not include any of the costs itemized in Paragraph 13.01.C,
and will include only the following items:
1. Payroll costs for employees in the direct employ of Contractor in the performance
of the Work under schedules of job classifications agreed upon by Owner and
Contractor in advance of the subject Work. Such employees include, without
limitation, superintendents, foremen, safety managers, safety representatives, and
other personnel employed full time on the Work. Payroll costs for employees not
employed full time on the Work will be apportioned on the basis of their time spent
on the Work. Payroll costs include, but are not limited to, salaries and wages plus
the cost of fringe benefits, which include social security contributions,
unemployment, excise, and payroll taxes, workers’ compensation, health and
retirement benefits, sick leave, and vacation and holiday pay applicable thereto. The
expenses of performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Saturday,
Sunday, or legal holidays, will be included in the above to the extent authorized by
Owner.
2. Cost of all materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work,
including costs of transportation and storage thereof, and Suppliers’ field services
required in connection therewith. All cash discounts accrue to Contractor unless
Owner deposits funds with Contractor with which to make payments, in which case
the cash discounts will accrue to Owner. All trade discounts, rebates, and refunds
and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment will accrue to Owner, and
Contractor shall make provisions so that they may be obtained.
3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by
Subcontractors. If required by Owner, Contractor shall obtain competitive bids
from subcontractors acceptable to Owner and Contractor and shall deliver such bids
to Owner, which will then determine, with the advice of Engineer, which bids, if any,
will be acceptable. If any subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid
on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee, the Subcontractor’s Cost of the Work and
fee will be determined in the same manner as Contractor’s Cost of the Work and fee
as provided in this Paragraph 13.01.
4. Costs of special consultants (including but not limited to engineers, architects,
testing laboratories, surveyors, attorneys, and accountants) employed or retained
for services specifically related to the Work.
5. Other costs consisting of the following:
a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses
of Contractor’s employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the
Work.
b. Cost, including transportation and maintenance, of all materials, supplies,
equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site,
which are consumed in the performance of the Work, and cost, less market

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 56
value, of such items used but not consumed which remain the property of
Contractor.
1) In establishing included costs for materials such as scaffolding, plating, or
sheeting, consideration will be given to the actual or the estimated life of
the material for use on other projects; or rental rates may be established
on the basis of purchase or salvage value of such items, whichever is less.
Contractor will not be eligible for compensation for such items in an
amount that exceeds the purchase cost of such item.
c. Construction Equipment Rental
1) Rentals of all construction equipment and machinery, and the parts
thereof, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner as to
price (including any surcharge or special rates applicable to overtime use
of the construction equipment or machinery), and the costs of
transportation, loading, unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal
thereof. All such costs will be in accordance with the terms of said rental
agreements. The rental of any such equipment, machinery, or parts must
cease when the use thereof is no longer necessary for the Work.
2) Costs for equipment and machinery owned by Contractor or a Contractor-
related entity will be paid at a rate shown for such equipment in the
equipment rental rate book specified in the Supplementary Conditions. An
hourly rate will be computed by dividing the monthly rates by 176. These
computed rates will include all operating costs.
3) With respect to Work that is the result of a Change Order, Change Proposal,
Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price (“changed Work”),
included costs will be based on the time the equipment or machinery is in
use on the changed Work and the costs of transportation, loading,
unloading, assembly, dismantling, and removal when directly attributable
to the changed Work. The cost of any such equipment or machinery, or
parts thereof, must cease to accrue when the use thereof is no longer
necessary for the changed Work.
d. Sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work, and for which
Contractor is liable, as imposed by Laws and Regulations.
e. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor,
or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any
of them may be liable, and royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses.
f. Losses and damages (and related expenses) caused by damage to the Work, not
compensated by insurance or otherwise, sustained by Contractor in connection
with the performance of the Work (except losses and damages within the
deductible amounts of builder’s risk or other property insurance established in
accordance with Paragraph 6.04), provided such losses and damages have
resulted from causes other than the negligence of Contractor, any
Subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them or for
whose acts any of them may be liable. Such losses include settlements made
with the written consent and approval of Owner. No such losses, damages, and
expenses will be included in the Cost of the Work for the purpose of
determining Contractor’s fee.
g. The cost of utilities, fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 57
h. Minor expenses such as communication service at the Site, express and courier
services, and similar petty cash items in connection with the Work.
i. The costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance that Contractor is required
by the Contract Documents to purchase and maintain.
C. Costs Excluded: The term Cost of the Work does not include any of the following items:
1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor’s officers, executives, principals,
general managers, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors,
accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, timekeepers, clerks,
and other personnel employed by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor’s
principal or branch office for general administration of the Work and not specifically
included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in
Paragraph 13.01.B.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 13.01.B.4. The payroll
costs and other compensation excluded here are to be considered administrative
costs covered by the Contractor’s fee.
2. The cost of purchasing, renting, or furnishing small tools and hand tools.
3. Expenses of Contractor’s principal and branch offices other than Contractor’s office
at the Site.
4. Any part of Contractor’s capital expenses, including interest on Contractor’s capital
employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments.
5. Costs due to the negligence of Contractor, any Subcontractor, or anyone directly or
indirectly employed by any of them or for whose acts any of them may be liable,
including but not limited to, the correction of defective Work, disposal of materials
or equipment wrongly supplied, and making good any damage to property.
6. Expenses incurred in preparing and advancing Claims.
7. Other overhead or general expense costs of any kind and the costs of any item not
specifically and expressly included in Paragraph 13.01.B.
D. Contractor’s Fee
1. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of cost-plus-a-fee, then:
a. Contractor’s fee for the Work set forth in the Contract Documents as of the
Effective Date of the Contract will be determined as set forth in the Agreement.
b. for any Work covered by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or
other adjustment in Contract Price on the basis of Cost of the Work,
Contractor’s fee will be determined as follows:
1) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a percentage of the Cost of the
Work, the fee will automatically adjust as the Cost of the Work changes.
2) When the fee for the Work as a whole is a fixed fee, the fee for any additions
or deletions will be determined in accordance with Paragraph 11.07.C.2.
2. When the Work as a whole is performed on the basis of a stipulated sum, or any
other basis other than cost-plus-a-fee, then Contractor’s fee for any Work covered
by a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract
Price on the basis of Cost of the Work will be determined in accordance with
Paragraph 11.07.C.2.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 58
E. Documentation and Audit: Whenever the Cost of the Work for any purpose is to be
determined pursuant to this Article 13, Contractor and pertinent Subcontractors will
establish and maintain records of the costs in accordance with generally accepted
accounting practices. Subject to prior written notice, Owner will be afforded reasonable
access, during normal business hours, to all Contractor’s accounts, records, books,
correspondence, instructions, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, and similar
data relating to the Cost of the Work and Contractor’s fee. Contractor shall preserve all
such documents for a period of three years after the final payment by Owner. Pertinent
Subcontractors will afford such access to Owner, and preserve such documents, to the
same extent required of Contractor.
13.02 Allowances
A. It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so
named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be performed
for such sums and by such persons or entities as may be acceptable to Owner and
Engineer.
B. Cash Allowances: Contractor agrees that:
1. the cash allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade
discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered
at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and
2. Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation,
overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have
been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances, and no demand for
additional payment for any of the foregoing will be valid.
C. Owner’s Contingency Allowance: Contractor agrees that an Owner’s contingency
allowance, if any, is for the sole use of Owner to cover unanticipated costs.
D. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by
Engineer to reflect actual amounts due Contractor for Work covered by allowances, and
the Contract Price will be correspondingly adjusted.
13.03 Unit Price Work
A. Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price
Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an
amount equal to the sum of the unit price for each separately identified item of Unit Price
Work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement.
B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely
for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price.
Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work will be based on actual quantities.
C. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be
adequate to cover Contractor’s overhead and profit for each separately identified item.
D. Engineer will determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work
performed by Contractor. Engineer will review with Contractor the Engineer’s
preliminary determinations on such matters before rendering a written decision
thereon (by recommendation of an Application for Payment or otherwise). Engineer’s
written decision thereon will be final and binding (except as modified by Engineer to
reflect changed factual conditions or more accurate data) upon Owner and Contractor,

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 59
and the final adjustment of Contract Price will be set forth in a Change Order, subject to
the provisions of the following paragraph.
E. Adjustments in Unit Price
1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect
to an item of Unit Price Work if:
a. the quantity of the item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs
materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated
in the Agreement; and
b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed
materially and significantly as a result of the quantity change.
2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related
changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform
such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable
to Owner and Contractor.
3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item.
ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
14.01 Access to Work
A. Owner, Engineer, their consultants and other representatives and personnel of Owner,
independent testing laboratories, and authorities having jurisdiction have access to the
Site and the Work at reasonable times for their observation, inspection, and testi ng.
Contractor shall provide them proper and safe conditions for such access and advise
them of Contractor’s safety procedures and programs so that they may comply with such
procedures and programs as applicable.
14.02 Tests, Inspections, and Approvals
A. Contractor shall give Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work (or specific parts
thereof) for all required inspections and tests, and shall cooperate with inspection and
testing personnel to facilitate required inspections and tests.
B. Owner shall retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing
laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform all inspections and tests
expressly required by the Contract Documents to be furnished and paid for by Owner,
except that costs incurred in connection with tests or inspections of covered Work will
be governed by the provisions of Paragraph 14.05.
C. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part
thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other
representative of such public body, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for
arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests, or approvals, pay all costs in connection
therewith, and furnish Engineer the required certificates of inspection or approval.
D. Contractor shall be responsible for arranging, obtaining, and paying for all inspections
and tests required:
1. by the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate
responsibility for a specific inspection or test to Owner;

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 60
2. to attain Owner’s and Engineer’s acceptance of materials or equipment to be
incorporated in the Work;
3. by manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents;
4. for testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment
to be incorporated into the Work; and
5. for acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior
to Contractor’s purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work.
Such inspections and tests will be performed by independent inspectors, testing
laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to Owner and
Engineer.
E. If the Contract Documents require the Work (or part thereof) to be approved by Owner,
Engineer, or another designated individual or entity, then Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for arranging and obtaining such approvals.
F. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered
by Contractor without written concurrence of Engineer, Contractor shall, if requested by
Engineer, uncover such Work for observation. Such uncovering will be at Contractor’s
expense unless Contractor had given Engineer timely notice of Contractor’s intention to
cover the same and Engineer had not acted with reasonable promptness in response to
such notice.
14.03 Defective Work
A. Contractor’s Obligation: It is Contractor’s obligation to assure that the Work is not
defective.
B. Engineer’s Authority: Engineer has the authority to determine whether Work is defective,
and to reject defective Work.
C. Notice of Defects: Prompt written notice of all defective Work of which Owner or
Engineer has actual knowledge will be given to Contractor.
D. Correction, or Removal and Replacement: Promptly after receipt of written notice of
defective Work, Contractor shall correct all such defective Work, whether or not
fabricated, installed, or completed, or, if Engineer has rejected the defective Work,
remove it from the Project and replace it with Work that is not defective.
E. Preservation of Warranties: When correcting defective Work, Contractor shall take no
action that would void or otherwise impair Owner’s special warranty and guarantee, if
any, on said Work.
F. Costs and Damages: In addition to its correction, removal, and replacement obligations
with respect to defective Work, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages
arising out of or relating to defective Work, including but not limited to the cost of the
inspection, testing, correction, removal, replacement, or reconstruction of such defective
Work, fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because the Work is
defective, and the costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from
defective Work. Prior to final payment, if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as
to the measure of such claims, costs, losses, and damages resulting from defective Work,
then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 61
14.04 Acceptance of Defective Work
A. If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, Owner
prefers to accept it, Owner may do so (subject, if such acceptance occurs prior to final
payment, to Engineer’s confirmation that such acceptance is in general accord with the
design intent and applicable engineering principles, and will not endanger public safety).
Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses, and damages attributable to Owner’s
evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work (such costs to be
approved by Engineer as to reasonableness), and for the diminished value of the Work
to the extent not otherwise paid by Contractor. If any such acceptance occurs prior to
final payment, the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the
Work will be incorporated in a Change Order. If the parties are unable to agree as to the
decrease in the Contract Price, reflecting the diminished value of Work so accepted, then
Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 15. If the
acceptance of defective Work occurs after final payment, Contractor shall pay an
appropriate amount to Owner.
14.05 Uncovering Work
A. Engineer has the authority to require additional inspection or testing of the Work,
whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed, or completed.
B. If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Engineer, then Contractor shall,
if requested by Engineer, uncover such Work for Engineer’s observation, and then
replace the covering, all at Contractor’s expense.
C. If Engineer considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by
Engineer or inspected or tested by others, then Contractor, at Engineer’s request, shall
uncover, expose, or otherwise make available for observation, inspection, or testing as
Engineer may require, that portion of the Work in question, and provide all necessary
labor, material, and equipment.
1. If it is found that the uncovered Work is defective, Contractor shall be responsible
for all claims, costs, losses, and damages arising out of or relating to such
uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, and testing, and of satisfactory
replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or
replacement of work of others); and pending Contractor’s full discharge of this
responsibility the Owner shall be entitled to impose a reasonable set-off against
payments due under Article 15.
2. If the uncovered Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an
increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, directly
attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing,
replacement, and reconstruction. If the parties are unable to agree as to the amount
or extent thereof, then Contractor may submit a Change Proposal within 30 days of
the determination that the Work is not defective.
14.06 Owner May Stop the Work
A. If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable
materials or equipment, or fails to perform the Work in such a way that the completed
Work will conform to the Contract Documents, then Owner may order Contractor to stop
the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated;
however, this right of Owner to stop the Work will not give rise to any duty on the part
of Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 62
Supplier, any other individual or entity, or any surety for, or employee or agent of any of
them.
14.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work
A. If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Engineer to correct
defective Work, or to remove and replace defective Work as required by Engineer, then
Owner may, after 7 days’ written notice to Contractor, correct or remedy any su ch
deficiency.
B. In exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07, Owner shall proceed
expeditiously. In connection with such corrective or remedial action, Owner may
exclude Contractor from all or part of the Site, take possession of all or part of the Work
and suspend Contractor’s services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all
materials and equipment stored at the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but
which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner’s representatives,
agents and employees, Owner’s other contractors, and Engineer and Engineer’s
consultants access to the Site to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under
this paragraph.
C. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the
rights and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07 will be charged against Contractor as
set-offs against payments due under Article 15. Such claims, costs, losses and damages
will include but not be limited to all costs of repair, or replacement of work of others
destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor’s defective
Work.
D. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of any delay
in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by Owner of Owner’s rights
and remedies under this Paragraph 14.07.
ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR; SET-OFFS; COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD
15.01 Progress Payments
A. Basis for Progress Payments: The Schedule of Values established as provided in Article 2
will serve as the basis for progress payments and will be incorporated into a form of
Application for Payment acceptable to Engineer. Progress payments for Unit Price Work
will be based on the number of units completed during the pay period, as determined
under the provisions of Paragraph 13.03. Progress payments for cost-based Work will
be based on Cost of the Work completed by Contractor during the pay period.
B. Applications for Payments
1. At least 20 days before the date established in the Agreement for each progress
payment (but not more often than once a month), Contractor shall submit to
Engineer for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor
covering the Work completed as of the date of the Application and accompanied by
such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents.
2. If payment is requested on the basis of materials and equipment not incorporated
in the Work but delivered and suitably stored at the Site or at another location
agreed to in writing, the Application for Payment must also be accompanied by: (a)
a bill of sale, invoice, copies of subcontract or purchase order payments, or other
documentation establishing full payment by Contractor for the materials and
equipment; (b) at Owner’s request, documentation warranting that Owner has

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 63
received the materials and equipment free and clear of all Liens; and (c) evidence
that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance, a
warehouse bond, or other arrangements to protect Owner’s interest therein, all of
which must be satisfactory to Owner.
3. Beginning with the second Application for Payment, each Application must include
an affidavit of Contractor stating that all previous progress payments received by
Contractor have been applied to discharge Contractor’s legitimate obligations
associated with prior Applications for Payment.
4. The amount of retainage with respect to progress payments will be as stipulated in
the Agreement.
C. Review of Applications
1. Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of each Application for Payment,
including each resubmittal, either indicate in writing a recommendation of payment
and present the Application to Owner, or return the Application to Contractor
indicating in writing Engineer’s reasons for refusing to recommend payment. In the
latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the
Application.
2. Engineer’s recommendation of any payment requested in an Application for
Payment will constitute a representation by Engineer to Owner, based on Engineer’s
observations of the executed Work as an experienced and qualified design
professional, and on Engineer’s review of the Application for Payment and the
accompanying data and schedules, that to the best of Engineer’s knowledge,
information and belief:
a. the Work has progressed to the point indicated;
b. the quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents
(subject to an evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole prior to or upon
Substantial Completion, the results of any subsequent tests called for in the
Contract Documents, a final determination of quantities and classifications for
Unit Price Work under Paragraph 13.03, and any other qualifications stated in
the recommendation); and
c. the conditions precedent to Contractor’s being entitled to such payment appear
to have been fulfilled in so far as it is Engineer’s responsibility to observe the
Work.
3. By recommending any such payment Engineer will not thereby be deemed to have
represented that:
a. inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been
performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in
progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work beyond the
responsibilities specifically assigned to Engineer in the Contract; or
b. there may not be other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle
Contractor to be paid additionally by Owner or entitle Owner to withhold
payment to Contractor.
4. Neither Engineer’s review of Contractor’s Work for the purposes of recommending
payments nor Engineer’s recommendation of any payment, including final payment,
will impose responsibility on Engineer:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 64
a. to supervise, direct, or control the Work;
b. for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction,
or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto;
c. for Contractor’s failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to
Contractor’s performance of the Work;
d. to make any examination to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has
used the money paid by Owner; or
e. to determine that title to any of the Work, materials, or equipment has passed
to Owner free and clear of any Liens.
5. Engineer may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment if, in
Engineer’s opinion, it would be incorrect to make the representations to Owner
stated in Paragraph 15.01.C.2.
6. Engineer will recommend reductions in payment (set-offs) necessary in Engineer’s
opinion to protect Owner from loss because:
a. the Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
b. the Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
c. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with
Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental
Condition for which Contractor is responsible; or
e. Engineer has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events that
would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for
cause under the Contract Documents.
D. Payment Becomes Due
1. Ten days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with
Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended (subject to any Owner set-
offs) will become due, and when due will be paid by Owner to Contractor.
E. Reductions in Payment by Owner
1. In addition to any reductions in payment (set-offs) recommended by Engineer,
Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on any of the following:
a. Claims have been made against Owner based on Contractor’s conduct in the
performance or furnishing of the Work, or Owner has incurred costs, losses, or
damages resulting from Contractor’s conduct in the performance or furnishing
of the Work, including but not limited to claims, costs, losses, or damages from
workplace injuries, adjacent property damage, non-compliance with Laws and
Regulations, and patent infringement;
b. Contractor has failed to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid
damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to
the Site;
c. Contractor has failed to provide and maintain required bonds or insurance;
d. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental
Condition for which Contractor is responsible;

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 65
e. Owner has incurred extra charges or engineering costs related to submittal
reviews, evaluations of proposed substitutes, tests and inspections, or return
visits to manufacturing or assembly facilities;
f. The Work is defective, requiring correction or replacement;
g. Owner has been required to correct defective Work in accordance with
Paragraph 14.07, or has accepted defective Work pursuant to Paragraph 14.04;
h. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders;
i. An event has occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor and
therefore justify a termination for cause;
j. Liquidated or other damages have accrued as a result of Contractor’s failure to
achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or final completion of the Work;
k. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor
has delivered a specific bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction
and discharge of such Liens; or
l. Other items entitle Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended.
2. If Owner imposes any set-off against payment, whether based on its own knowledge
or on the written recommendations of Engineer, Owner will give Contractor
immediate written notice (with a copy to Engineer) stating the reasons for such
action and the specific amount of the reduction, and promptly pay Contractor any
amount remaining after deduction of the amount so withheld. Owner shall
promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed
to by Owner and Contractor, if Contractor remedies the reasons for such action. The
reduction imposed will be binding on Contractor unless it duly submits a Change
Proposal contesting the reduction.
3. Upon a subsequent determination that Owner’s refusal of payment was not justified,
the amount wrongfully withheld will be treated as an amount due as determined by
Paragraph 15.01.D.1 and subject to interest as provided in the Agreement.
15.02 Contractor’s Warranty of Title
A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials, and equipment
furnished under the Contract will pass to Owner free and clear of (1) all Liens and other
title defects, and (2) all patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations, no later than
7 days after the time of payment by Owner.
15.03 Substantial Completion
A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall
notify Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and
request that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Contractor shall at
the same time submit to Owner and Engineer an initial draft of punch list items to be
completed or corrected before final payment.
B. Promptly after Contractor’s notification, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer shall make an
inspection of the Work to determine the status of completion. If Engineer does not
consider the Work substantially complete, Engineer will notify Contractor in writing
giving the reasons therefor.
C. If Engineer considers the Work substantially complete, Engineer will deliver to Owner a
preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the date of Substantial

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 66
Completion. Engineer shall attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed
or corrected before final payment. Owner shall have 7 days after receipt of the
preliminary certificate during which to make written objection to Engineer as to any
provisions of the certificate or attached punch list. If, after considering the objections to
the provisions of the preliminary certificate, Engineer concludes that the Work is not
substantially complete, Engineer will, within 14 days after submission of the preliminary
certificate to Owner, notify Contractor in writing that the Work is not substantially
complete, stating the reasons therefor. If Owner does not object to the provisions of the
certificate, or if despite consideration of Owner’s objections Engineer concludes that the
Work is substantially complete, then Engineer will, within said 14 days, execute and
deliver to Owner and Contractor a final certificate of Substantial Completion (with a
revised punch list of items to be completed or corrected) reflecting such changes from
the preliminary certificate as Engineer believes justified after consideration of any
objections from Owner.
D. At the time of receipt of the preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion, Owner and
Contractor will confer regarding Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work following
Substantial Completion, review the builder’s risk insurance policy with respect to the
end of the builder’s risk coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work
under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner. Unless Owner and
Contractor agree otherwise in writing, Owner shall bear responsibility for security,
operation, protection of the Work, property insurance, maintenance, heat, and utilities
upon Owner’s use or occupancy of the Work.
E. After Substantial Completion the Contractor shall promptly begin work on the punch list
of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. In appropriate cases
Contractor may submit monthly Applications for Payment for completed punch list
items, following the progress payment procedures set forth above.
F. Owner shall have the right to exclude Contractor from the Site after the date of
Substantial Completion subject to allowing Contractor reasonable access to remove its
property and complete or correct items on the punch list.
15.04 Partial Use or Occupancy
A. Prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work, Owner may use or occupy any
substantially completed part of the Work which has specifically been identified in the
Contract Documents, or which Owner, Engineer, and Contractor agree constitutes a
separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by Owner for its
intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor’s performance of the
remainder of the Work, subject to the following conditions:
1. At any time, Owner may request in writing that Contractor permit Owner to use or
occupy any such part of the Work that Owner believes to be substantially complete.
If and when Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete,
Contractor, Owner, and Engineer will follow the procedures of Paragraph 15.03.A
through 15.03.E for that part of the Work.
2. At any time, Contractor may notify Owner and Engineer in writing that Contractor
considers any such part of the Work substantially complete and request Engineer to
issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work.
3. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, and Engineer
shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of
completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 67
complete, Engineer will notify Owner and Contractor in writing giving the reasons
therefor. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete,
the provisions of Paragraph 15.03 will apply with respect to certification of
Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in
respect thereof and access thereto.
4. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to
compliance with the requirements of Paragraph 6.04 regarding builder’s risk or
other property insurance.
15.05 Final Inspection
A. Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof
is complete, Engineer will promptly make a final inspection with Owner and Contractor
and will notify Contractor in writing of all particulars in which this inspection re veals
that the Work, or agreed portion thereof, is incomplete or defective. Contractor shall
immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy
such deficiencies.
15.06 Final Payment
A. Application for Payment
1. After Contractor has, in the opinion of Engineer, satisfactorily completed all
corrections identified during the final inspection and has delivered, in accordance
with the Contract Documents, all maintenance and operating instructions,
schedules, guarantees, bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance,
certificates of inspection, annotated record documents (as provided in
Paragraph 7.12), and other documents, Contractor may make application for final
payment.
2. The final Application for Payment must be accompanied (except as previously
delivered) by:
a. all documentation called for in the Contract Documents;
b. consent of the surety, if any, to final payment;
c. satisfactory evidence that all title issues have been resolved such that title to all
Work, materials, and equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of any
Liens or other title defects, or will so pass upon final payment.
d. a list of all duly pending Change Proposals and Claims; and
e. complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to Owner) of all
Lien rights arising out of the Work, and of Liens filed in connection with the
Work.
3. In lieu of the releases or waivers of Liens specified in Paragraph 15.06.A.2 and as
approved by Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an
affidavit of Contractor that: (a) the releases and receipts include all labor, services,
material, and equipment for which a Lien could be filed; and (b) all payrolls, material
and equipment bills, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which
Owner might in any way be responsible, or which might in any way result in liens
or other burdens on Owner's property, have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any
Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor
may furnish a bond or other collateral satisfactory to Owner to indemnify Owner

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 68
against any Lien, or Owner at its option may issue joint checks payable to Contractor
and specified Subcontractors and Suppliers.
B. Engineer’s Review of Final Application and Recommendation of Payment: If, on the basis
of Engineer’s observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and
Engineer’s review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying
documentation as required by the Contract Documents, Engineer is satisfied that t he
Work has been completed and Contractor’s other obligations under the Contract have
been fulfilled, Engineer will, within 10 days after receipt of the final Application for
Payment, indicate in writing Engineer’s recommendation of final payment and present
the final Application for Payment to Owner for payment. Such recommendation will
account for any set-offs against payment that are necessary in Engineer’s opinion to
protect Owner from loss for the reasons stated above with respect to progress payments.
Otherwise, Engineer will return the Application for Payment to Contractor, indicating in
writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor
shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment.
C. Notice of Acceptability: In support of its recommendation of payment of the final
Application for Payment, Engineer will also give written notice to Owner and Contractor
that the Work is acceptable, subject to stated limitations in the notice and to the
provisions of Paragraph 15.07.
D. Completion of Work: The Work is complete (subject to surviving obligations) when it is
ready for final payment as established by the Engineer’s written recommendation of final
payment and issuance of notice of the acceptability of the Work.
E. Final Payment Becomes Due: Upon receipt from Engineer of the final Application for
Payment and accompanying documentation, Owner shall set off against the amount
recommended by Engineer for final payment any further sum to which Owner is entitled,
including but not limited to set-offs for liquidated damages and set-offs allowed under
the provisions of this Contract with respect to progress payments. Owner shall pay the
resulting balance due to Contractor within 30 days of Owner’s receipt of the final
Application for Payment from Engineer.
15.07 Waiver of Claims
A. By making final payment, Owner waives its claim or right to liquidated damages or other
damages for late completion by Contractor, except as set forth in an outstanding Claim,
appeal under the provisions of Article 17, set-off, or express reservation of rights by
Owner. Owner reserves all other claims or rights after final payment.
B. The acceptance of final payment by Contractor will constitute a waiver by Contractor of
all claims and rights against Owner other than those pending matters that have been
duly submitted as a Claim, or appealed under the provisions of Article 17.
15.08 Correction Period
A. If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion (or such longer period of time
as may be prescribed by the Supplementary Conditions or the terms of any applicable
special guarantee required by the Contract Documents), Owner gives Contractor written
notice that any Work has been found to be defective, or that Contractor’s repair of any
damages to the Site or adjacent areas has been found to be defective, then after receipt
of such notice of defect Contractor shall promptly, without cost to Owner and in
accordance with Owner’s written instructions:
1. correct the defective repairs to the Site or such adjacent areas;

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 69
2. correct such defective Work;
3. remove the defective Work from the Project and replace it with Work that is not
defective, if the defective Work has been rejected by Owner, and
4. satisfactorily correct or repair or remove and replace any damage to other Work, to
the work of others, or to other land or areas resulting from the corrective measures.
B. Owner shall give any such notice of defect within 60 days of the discovery that such Work
or repairs is defective. If such notice is given within such 60 days but after the end of the
correction period, the notice will be deemed a notice of defective Work under
Paragraph 7.17.B.
C. If, after receipt of a notice of defect within 60 days and within the correction period,
Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of Owner’s written instructions, or
in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, Owner ma y
have the defective Work corrected or repaired or may have the rejected Work removed
and replaced. Contractor shall pay all costs, losses, and damages (including but not
limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals
and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) arising out of or relating to
such correction or repair or such removal and replacement (including but not limited to
all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). Contractor’s failure to pay such
costs, losses, and damages within 10 days of invoice from Owner will be deemed the start
of an event giving rise to a Claim under Paragraph 12.01.B, such that any related Claim
must be brought within 30 days of the failure to pay.
D. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous
service before Substantial Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item
may start to run from an earlier date if so provided in the Specifications.
E. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been
corrected or removed and replaced under this paragraph, the correction period
hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one
year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily
completed.
F. Contractor’s obligations under this paragraph are in addition to all other obligations and
warranties. The provisions of this paragraph are not to be construed as a substitute for,
or a waiver of, the provisions of any applicable statute of limitation or repose.
ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
16.01 Owner May Suspend Work
A. At any time and without cause, Owner may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for
a period of not more than 90 consecutive days by written notice to Contractor and
Engineer. Such notice will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall
resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be entitled to an adjustment in
the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times directly attributable to any such
suspension. Any Change Proposal seeking such adjustments must be submitted no later
than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work.
16.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause
A. The occurrence of any one or more of the following events will constitute a default by
Contractor and justify termination for cause:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 70
1. Contractor’s persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers
or suitable materials or equipment, or failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule);
2. Failure of Contractor to perform or otherwise to comply with a material term of the
Contract Documents;
3. Contractor’s disregard of Laws or Regulations of any public body having
jurisdiction; or
4. Contractor’s repeated disregard of the authority of Owner or Engineer.
B. If one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 16.02.A occurs, then after giving
Contractor (and any surety) 10 days’ written notice that Owner is considering a
declaration that Contractor is in default and termination of the Contract, Owner may
proceed to:
1. declare Contractor to be in default, and give Contractor (and any surety) written
notice that the Contract is terminated; and
2. enforce the rights available to Owner under any applicable performance bond.
C. Subject to the terms and operation of any applicable performance bond, if Owner has
terminated the Contract for cause, Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take
possession of the Work, incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at
the Site or for which Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and
complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient.
D. Owner may not proceed with termination of the Contract under Paragraph 16.02.B if
Contractor within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate begins to correct its
failure to perform and proceeds diligently to cure such failure.
E. If Owner proceeds as provided in Paragraph 16.02.B, Contractor shall not be entitled to
receive any further payment until the Work is completed. If the unpaid balance of the
Contract Price exceeds the cost to complete the Work, including all related claims, costs,
losses, and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers,
architects, attorneys, and other professionals) sustained by Owner, such excess will be
paid to Contractor. If the cost to complete the Work including such related claims, costs,
losses, and damages exceeds such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to
Owner. Such claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred by Owner will be reviewed by
Engineer as to their reasonableness and, when so approved by Engineer, incorporated
in a Change Order. When exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph, Owner
shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed.
F. Where Contractor’s services have been so terminated by Owner, the termination will not
affect any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor then existing or which may
thereafter accrue, or any rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or any sure ty
under any payment bond or performance bond. Any retention or payment of money due
Contractor by Owner will not release Contractor from liability.
G. If and to the extent that Contractor has provided a performance bond under the
provisions of Paragraph 6.01.A, the provisions of that bond will govern over any
inconsistent provisions of Paragraphs 16.02.B and 16.02.D.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 71
16.03 Owner May Terminate for Convenience
A. Upon 7 days’ written notice to Contractor and Engineer, Owner may, without cause and
without prejudice to any other right or remedy of Owner, terminate the Contract. In such
case, Contractor shall be paid for (without duplication of any items):
1. completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract
Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable
sums for overhead and profit on such Work;
2. expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services
and furnishing labor, materials, or equipment as required by the Contract
Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums
for overhead and profit on such expenses; and
3. other reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs
incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal.
B. Contractor shall not be paid for any loss of anticipated profits or revenue, post-
termination overhead costs, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such
termination.
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
A. If, through no act or fault of Contractor, (1) the Work is suspended for more than 90
consecutive days by Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or (2)
Engineer fails to act on any Application for Payment within 30 days after it is submitted,
or (3) Owner fails for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due,
then Contractor may, upon 7 days’ written notice to Owner and Engineer, and provided
Owner or Engineer do not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate
the contract and recover from Owner payment on the same terms as provided in
Paragraph 16.03.
B. In lieu of terminating the Contract and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if
Engineer has failed to act on an Application for Payment within 30 days after it is
submitted, or Owner has failed for 30 days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined
to be due, Contractor may, 7 days after written notice to Owner and Engineer, stop the
Work until payment is made of all such amounts due Contractor, including interest
thereon. The provisions of this paragraph are not intended to preclude Contractor from
submitting a Change Proposal for an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or
otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor’s stopping the
Work as permitted by this paragraph.
ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES
17.01 Methods and Procedures
A. Disputes Subject to Final Resolution: The following disputed matters are subject to final
resolution under the provisions of this article:
1. A timely appeal of an approval in part and denial in part of a Claim, or of a denial in
full, pursuant to Article 12; and
2. Disputes between Owner and Contractor concerning the Work, or obligations under
the Contract Documents, that arise after final payment has been made.
B. Final Resolution of Disputes: For any dispute subject to resolution under this article,
Owner or Contractor may:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 72
1. elect in writing to invoke the dispute resolution process provided for in the
Supplementary Conditions;
2. agree with the other party to submit the dispute to another dispute resolution
process; or
3. if no dispute resolution process is provided for in the Supplementary Conditions or
mutually agreed to, give written notice to the other party of the intent to submit the
dispute to a court of competent jurisdiction.
ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS
18.01 Giving Notice
A. Whenever any provision of the Contract requires the giving of written notice to Owner,
Engineer, or Contractor, it will be deemed to have been validly given only if delivered:
1. in person, by a commercial courier service or otherwise, to the recipient’s place of
business;
2. by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the recipient’s place of business;
or
3. by e-mail to the recipient, with the words “Formal Notice” or similar in the e-mail’s
subject line.
18.02 Computation of Times
A. When any period of time is referred to in the Contract by days, it will be computed to
exclude the first and include the last day of such period. If the last day of any such period
falls on a Saturday or Sunday or on a day made a legal holiday by the law of the applicable
jurisdiction, such day will be omitted from the computation.
18.03 Cumulative Remedies
A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and
remedies available hereunder to the parties hereto are in addition to, and are not to be
construed in any way as a limitation of, any rights and remedies available to any or all of
them which are otherwise imposed or available by Laws or Regulations, by special
warranty or guarantee, or by other provisions of the Contract. The provisions of this
paragraph will be as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in
connection with each particular duty, obligation, right, and remedy to which they apply.
18.04 Limitation of Damages
A. With respect to any and all Change Proposals, Claims, disputes subject to final resolution,
and other matters at issue, neither Owner nor Engineer, nor any of their officers,
directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, or subcontractors, shall
be liable to Contractor for any claims, costs, losses, or damages sustained by Contractor
on or in connection with any other project or anticipated project.
18.05 No Waiver
A. A party’s non-enforcement of any provision will not constitute a waiver of that provision,
nor will it affect the enforceability of that provision or of the remainder of this Contract.
18.06 Survival of Obligations
A. All representations, indemnifications, warranties, and guarantees made in, required by,
or given in accordance with the Contract, as well as all continuing obligations indicated

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 73
in the Contract, will survive final payment, completion, and acceptance of the Work or
termination of the Contract or of the services of Contractor.
18.07 Controlling Law
A. This Contract is to be governed by the law of the state in which the Project is located.
18.08 Assignment of Contract
A. Unless expressly agreed to elsewhere in the Contract, no assignment by a party to this
Contract of any rights under or interests in the Contract will be binding on the other
party without the written consent of the party sought to be bound; and, specifically but
without limitation, money that may become due and money that is due may not be
assigned without such consent (except to the extent that the effect of this restriction may
be limited by law), and unless specifically stated to the contrary in any written consent
to an assignment, no assignment will release or discharge the assignor from any duty or
responsibility under the Contract.
18.09 Successors and Assigns
A. Owner and Contractor each binds itself, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives
to the other party hereto, its successors, assigns, and legal representatives in respect to
all covenants, agreements, and obligations contained in the Contract Documents.
18.10 Headings
A. Article and paragraph headings are inserted for convenience only and do not constitute
parts of these General Conditions.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 70 00 - 74
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 1
SECTION 00 73 00
SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

This document is a MODIFIED version of EJCDC® C-800, Copyright © 2018 by the National Society of Professional
Engineers, American Society of Civil Engineers, and American Council of Engineering Companies, or is based in part on
excerpts from EJCDC documents. Those portions of the text that originated in published EJCDC documents remain subject
to the copyright.
These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement EJCDC® C 700, Standard General
Conditions of the Construction Contract (2018). The General Conditions remain in full force and
effect except as amended.
The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General
Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated
below, which are applicable to both the singular and plural thereof.
The address system used in these Supplementary Conditions is the same as the address system
used in the General Conditions, with the prefix "SC" added—for example, “Paragraph SC 4.05.”

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
ARTICLE 1 – Definitions And Terminology .................................................................................................................. 3
1.01 Defined Terms ............................................................................................................................................... 3
ARTICLE 2 – Preliminary Matters..................................................................................................................................... 3
2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance ................................. 3
2.02 Copies of Documents .................................................................................................................................. 3
2.06 Electronic Transmittals ............................................................................................................................. 3
ARTICLE 3 – Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse........................................................................ 9
3.01 Intent ................................................................................................................................................................. 9
ARTICLE 4 – Commencement and Progress of The Work ...................................................................................... 9
4.05 Delays in Contractor’s Progress ............................................................................................................. 9
ARTICLE 5 – Site, Subsurface And Physical Conditions, Hazardous Environmental Conditions ........... 9
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions .................................................................................................... 9
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions .................................................................................... 9
5.05 Underground Facilities ............................................................................................................................ 10
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site ................................................................................ 10
ARTICLE 6 – Bonds And Insurance ................................................................................................................................ 10
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds ........................................................................................ 10
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions ........................................................................................................... 10
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance ............................................................................................................................ 10
6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance ................................................................................ 13
ARTICLE 7 – Contractor’s Responsibilities ................................................................................................................. 15
7.03 Labor; Working Hours ............................................................................................................................. 15

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 2
7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers ...................................................................................... 15
7.10 Taxes ............................................................................................................................................................... 16
7.13 Safety and Protection ............................................................................................................................... 16
ARTICLE 8 – Other Work At The Site ............................................................................................................................ 16
8.02 Coordination ................................................................................................................................................ 16
ARTICLE 9 – Owner’s Responsibilities ......................................................................................................................... 16
9.13 Owner’s Site Representative ................................................................................................................. 16
ARTICLE 10 – Engineer’s Status During Construction ........................................................................................... 16
10.03 Resident Project Representative ......................................................................................................... 16
ARTICLE 11 – Changes to The Contract ....................................................................................................................... 17
ARTICLE 12 – Claims ............................................................................................................................................................ 17
12.01 Claims.............................................................................................................................................................. 17
ARTICLE 13 – Cost of Work; Allowances, Unit Price Work .................................................................................. 18
13.01 Cost of the Work ......................................................................................................................................... 18
13.03 Unit Price Work .......................................................................................................................................... 18
ARTICLE 14 – Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work ........... 19
ARTICLE 15 – Payments to Contractor, Set Offs; Completions; Correction Period .................................... 19
15.01 Progress Payments .................................................................................................................................... 19
15.03 Substantial Completion ........................................................................................................................... 19
15.08 Correction Period ....................................................................................................................................... 20
ARTICLE 16 – Suspension of Work And Termination ............................................................................................ 20
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate ........................................................................................ 20
ARTICLE 17 – Final Resolutions of Disputes .............................................................................................................. 20
17.02 Arbitration .................................................................................................................................................... 20
17.03 Attorneys’ Fees ........................................................................................................................................... 21
ARTICLE 18 – Miscellaneous ............................................................................................................................................ 21
18.08 Assignment of Contract ........................................................................................................................... 21
18.11 Title to Materials Found on the Site ................................................................................................... 21

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 3
ARTICLE 1 – DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY
1.01 Defined Terms
SC-1.01 Supplement Paragraph 1.01.A.42 of the General Conditions as follows:
Substantial Completion is further defined as (i) that degree of completion of the Project’s
operating facilities or systems sufficient to provide Owner with the full-time,
uninterrupted, and continuous beneficial operation of the Work; and (ii) all required
functional, performance, and acceptance or startup testing has been successfully
demonstrated for all components, devices, equipment, and instrumentation and control
to the satisfaction of Engineer in accordance with the requirements of the Specifications;
and (iii) all inspections required have been completed and identified defective Work
replaced or corrected.
ARTICLE 2 – PRELIMINARY MATTERS
2.01 Delivery of Performance and Payment Bonds; Evidence of Insurance
SC-2.01 Delete Paragraphs 2.01.B. and C. in their entirety and insert the following in their place:
B. Evidence of Contractor’s Insurance: When Contractor delivers the signed counterparts of
the Agreement to Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to Owner copies of the policies
(including all endorsements, and identification of applicable self-insured retentions and
deductibles) of insurance required to be provided by Contractor in this Contract.
Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information
contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this provision.
C. Evidence of Owner’s Insurance: After receipt from Contractor of the signed counterparts
of the Agreement and all required bonds and insurance documentation, Owner shall
promptly deliver to Contractor copies of the policies of insurance to be provided by
Owner in this Contract (if any). Owner may block out (redact) any confidential premium
or pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this
provision.
2.02 Copies of Documents
SC-2.02 Amend the first sentence of Paragraph 2.02.A. to read as follows:
Owner shall furnish to Contractor 1 printed copies of the Contract Documents
(including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement), and one copy in electronic
portable document format (PDF).
SC-2.02 Delete Paragraph 2.02.A in its entirety and insert the following new paragraph in its place:
A. Owner shall furnish to Contractor 1 printed copies of conformed Contract Documents
incorporating and integrating all Addenda and any amendments negotiated prior to the
Effective Date of the Contract (including one fully signed counterpart of the Agreement),
and one copy in electronic portable document format (PDF). Additional printed copies
of the conformed Contract Documents will be furnished upon request at the cost of
reproduction.
2.06 Electronic Transmittals
SC-2.06 Delete Paragraphs 2.06.B and 2.06.C in their entirety and insert the following in their
place.
B. Electronic documents protocol:
1. Basic Requirements

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 4
a. The parties agree to and will transmit and accept electronic documents in an
electronic or digital format using the procedures described in this protocol. Use
of the electronic documents and any information contained therein is subject
to the requirements of this Protocol and other provisions of the Contract.
b. The contents of the information in any electronic document uploaded into the
system will be the responsibility of the transmitting party. Data entered in a
collaborative mode (entered with the intent to share as determined by
permissions and workflows of this Protocol) by all parties will be owned by
Engineer but maintained and operated collaboratively by members of the
Project team.
c. Electronic documents as exchanged by this protocol may be used in the same
manner as the printed versions of the same documents that are exchanged
using non-electronic format and methods, subject to the same governing
requirements, limitations, and restrictions, set forth in the Contract
Documents.
d. Except as otherwise explicitly stated herein, the terms of this protocol will be
incorporated into any other agreement or subcontract between a party and any
third party for any portion of the Work on the Project, or any Project-related
services, where that third party is, either directly or indirectly, required to
exchange electronic documents with a party or with Engineer. Nothing herein
will modify the requirements of the Contract regarding communications
between and among the parties and their subcontractors and consultants.
e. When transmitting electronic documents, the transmitting party makes no
representations as to long term compatibility, usability, or readability of the
items resulting from the receiving party’s use of software application packages,
operating systems, or computer hardware differing from those established in
this protocol.
f. Nothing herein negates any obligation 1) in the Contract to create, provide, or
maintain an original printed record version of Drawings and Specifications,
signed and sealed according to applicable Laws and Regulations; 2) to comply
with any applicable Law or Regulation governing the signing and sealing of
design documents or the signing and electronic transmission of any other
documents; or 3) to comply with the notice requirements of Paragraph 18.01
of the General Conditions.
2. Automated system notification and audit log tracking:
a. Review comments made (or lack thereof) by Engineer or Owner on Contractor
submitted documentation does not relieve Contractor from compliance with
requirements of the Contract Documents.
b. Contractor is responsible for managing, tracking, and documenting Work to
comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
c. Engineer’s or Owner’s acceptance via automated system notifications or audit
logs extends only to the face value of the submitted documentation and does
not constitute validation of Contractor’s submitted information.
3. System infrastructure for electronic document Exchange
a. Owner or Engineer will operate an electronic Project Management System (also
referred to in this EDP as “Project Website”) for use of Owner, Engineer and
Contractor during the Project for exchange and storage of Project-related

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 5
communications and information. Except as otherwise provided in this EDP or
the General Conditions, use of the Project Website by the parties as described
in this Paragraph will be mandatory for exchange of Project documents,
communications, submittals, and other Project-related information. The
following conditions and standards will govern use of the Project Website:
1) The Project website will utilize the following software: VPO, by The
Simplex Group, Inc..
2) Project Website will be available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week, except
during maintenance times identified by the software authors.
3) Ensure that connectivity to the Project Website is accomplished through
DSL, T-1, fiber optic, or wireless communications systems. Minimum
bandwidth requirements are 128 kb/s. It is recommended that a faster
connection be used for uploading pictures, videos, and data files into the
system.
4) Before upgrading any computer software or hardware, verify that such
upgrades are compatible with the latest version of the Project Website
software at no additional cost to the Engineer or Owner.
5) Utilize the full version of Adobe Acrobat (or equal) so that Portable
Document Format (PDF) submittals can be assembled into single files and
organized appropriately. Obtaining and utilizing this software will be at
no additional cost to Engineer or Owner.
6) Project Website will be the “Official Records” for the project and will
provide document archives of the information uploaded thereto.
7) User connectivity
i) Provide a list of Contractor’s key personnel requiring access to the
Project Website for the Engineer’s acceptance.
ii) At the preconstruction meeting, provide a list of Contractor’s key
personnel requiring access to the Project Website utilizing the form in
Exhibit B to this EDP. Engineer will use this information for no other
purpose than to establish the necessary accounts for use by each
individual.
iii) Specifically identify Contractor’s administrator on the list.
iv) Personnel shall have sufficient computer skills required to access the
internet, log on to the Project Website, and utilize the system.
8) User access limitations:
i) Engineer will control access to the Project Website by allowing access
and assigning user profiles to accepted personnel.
i) Engineer reserves the right to perform a security check on all
potential users.
ii) User profiles will define levels of access into the website, determine
assigned function-based authorizations, and user privileges.
iii) Subcontractors and suppliers will be given access to the website by
and through Engineer. Entry of information exchanged and

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 6
transferred between Contractor and subcontractors and suppliers
will be the responsibility of Contractor.
iv) Contractor will be allowed to add additional personnel and
subcontractors to the Project Website.
9) Training:
i) Engineer will provide a single training session to assist Contractor in
the use of the Project Website. Time cost of the training session will
be borne by the attendees.
ii) Make applicable staff available for an initial 2-hour training session to
be scheduled at a mutually agreeable time and place within 21 days of
Notice to Proceed.
iii) Training may consist of web-based seminar(s) in conjunction with a
conference call.
iv) Contractor may request Engineer to provide additional training and
technical support for use of the Project Website. Time cost of the
training session will again be borne by the attendees.
b. Each party will provide hardware, operating system(s) software, internet, e-
mail, and large file transfer functions (“System Infrastructure”) at its own cost
and sufficient for complying with the EDP and Project Website requirements.
As recommendations are modified by authors of the Project Website software,
upgrade hardware and software system(s) to meet or exceed their
recommendations. Except for minimum standards set forth in this EDP, and
any explicit system requirements specified by attachment to thi s EDP, it is the
obligation of each party to determine, for itself, its own System Infrastructure.
1) The maximum size of an email attachment for exchange of electronic
documents under this EDP is 10 MB. Attachments larger than that may be
exchanged using large file transfer functions or physical media.
2) Each Party assumes full and complete responsibility for all its own costs,
delays, deficiencies, and errors associated with converting, translating,
updating, verifying, licensing, or otherwise enabling its System
Infrastructure, including operating systems and software, for use with
respect to this EDP.
c. Each party is responsible for its own system operations, security, back-up,
archiving, audits, printing resources, and other Information Technology (“IT”)
for maintaining operations of its System Infrastructure during the Project,
including coordination with the party’s individual(s) or entity responsible for
managing its System Infrastructure and capable of addressing routine
communications and other IT issues affecting the exchange of electronic
documents.
d. Each party will operate and maintain industry-standard, industry-accepted,
ISO standard, commercial-grade security software and systems that are
intended to protect the other party from: software viruses and other malicious
software like worms, trojans, adware; data breaches; loss of confidentiality;
and other threats in the transmission to or storage of information from the
other parties, including transmission of electronic documents by physical
media such as CD/DVD/flash drive/hard drive. To the extent that a party

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 7
maintains and operates such security software and systems, it shall not be
liable to the other party for any breach of system security.
e. In the case of disputes, conflicts, or modifications to the EDP required to
address issues affecting System Infrastructure, the parties shall cooperatively
resolve the issues; but, failing resolution, the Owner is authorized to make and
require reasonable and necessary changes to the EDP to effectuate its original
intent. If the changes cause additional cost or time to Contractor, not
reasonably anticipated under the original EDP, Contractor may seek an
adjustment in price or time under the appropriate process in the Contract.
f. Each party is responsible for its own back-up and archive of documents sent
and received during the term of the contract under this EDP, unless this EDP
establishes a Project document archive, either as part of a mandatory Project
website or other communications protocol, upon which the parties may rely for
document archiving during the specified term of operation of such Project
document archive. Further, each party remains solely responsible for its own
post-Project back-up and archive of Project documents after the term of the
Contract, or after termination of the Project document archive, if one is
established, for as long as required by the Contract and as each party deems
necessary for its own purposes.
g. If a receiving party receives an obviously corrupted, damaged, or unreadable
electronic document, the receiving party will advise the sending party of the
incomplete transmission.
h. The parties will bring any non-conforming electronic documents into
compliance with the EDP. The parties will attempt to complete a successful
transmission of the electronic document or use an alternative delivery method
to complete the communication.
C. Software Requirements for Electronic Document Exchange; Limitations
1. Each party will acquire the software and software licenses necessary to create and
transmit electronic documents and to read and to use any electronic documents
received from the other party (and if relevant from third parties), using the software
formats required in this section of the EDP.
a. Prior to using any updated version of the software required in this section for
sending electronic documents to the other party, the originating party will first
notify and receive concurrence from the other party for use of the updated
version or adjust its transmission to comply with this EDP.
2. The parties agree not to intentionally edit, reverse engineer, decrypt, remove
security or encryption features, or convert to another format for modification
purposes any electronic document or information contained therein that was
transmitted in a software data format, including Portable Document Format (PDF),
intended by sender not to be modified, unless the receiving party obtains the
permission of the sending party or is citing or quoting excerpts of the electronic
document for Project purposes.
3. Software and data formats for exchange of electronic documents will conform to the
requirements set forth in Exhibit A to this EDP, including software versions, if listed.
SC-2.06 Supplement Paragraph 2.06 of the General Conditions by adding the following paragraph:
D. Requests by Contractor for Electronic Documents in Other Formats

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 8
1. Release of any electronic document versions of the Project Documents in formats
other than those identified in the electronic documents Protocol (if any) or
elsewhere in the Contract will be at the sole discretion of Owner.
2. To the extent determined by Owner, in its sole discretion, to be prudent and
necessary, release of electronic documents versions of Project documents and other
Project information requested by Contractor (“Request”) in formats other than
those identified in the electronic documents Protocol (if any) or elsewhere in the
Contract will be subject to the provisions of the Owner’s response to the Request,
and to the following conditions to which Contractor agrees:
a. The content included in the electronic documents created by Engineer and
covered by the Request was prepared by Engineer as an internal working
document for Engineer’s purposes solely and is being provided to Contractor
on an “AS IS” basis without any warranties of any kind, including, but not
limited to any implied warranties of fitness for any purpose. As such,
Contractor is advised and acknowledges that the content may not be suitable
for Contractor’s application or may require substantial modification and
independent verification by Contractor. The content may include limited
resolution of models, not-to-scale schematic representations and symbols, use
of notes to convey design concepts in lieu of accurate graphics, approximations,
graphical simplifications, undocumented intermediate revisions, and other
devices that may affect subsequent reuse.
b. Electronic documents containing text, graphics, metadata, or other types of
data that are provided by Engineer to Contractor under the request are only for
convenience of Contractor. Any conclusion or information obtained or derived
from such data will be at the Contractor’s sole risk and the Contractor waives
any claims against Engineer or Owner arising from use of data in electronic
documents covered by the Request.
c. Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner and Engineer and their
subconsultants from all claims, damages, losses, and expenses, including
attorneys' fees and defense costs arising out of or resulting from Contractor’s
use, adaptation, or distribution of any electronic documents provided under the
Request.
d. Contractor agrees not to sell, copy, transfer, forward, give away or otherwise
distribute this information (in source or modified file format) to any third party
without the direct written authorization of Engineer, unless such distribution
is specifically identified in the Request and is limited to Contractor’s
subcontractors. Contractor warrants that subsequent use by Contractor’s
subcontractors complies with all terms of the Contract Documents and Owner’s
response to Request.
3. In the event that Owner elects to provide or directs Engineer to provide to
Contractor any Contractor-requested electronic document versions of Project
information that is not explicitly identified in the Contract Documents as being
available to Contractor, the Owner shall be reimbursed by Contractor on an hourly
basis (at $ 125 per hour) for any engineering costs necessary to create or otherwise
prepare the data in a manner deemed appropriate by Engineer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 9
ARTICLE 3 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE
3.01 Intent
No Supplementary Conditions in this Article.
ARTICLE 4 – COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
No supplementary conditions in this Article.
ARTICLE 5 – SITE, SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL
CONDITIONS
5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions
SC-5.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.03.D:
E. The following table lists the reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at
or adjacent to the Site that contain Technical Data, and specifically identifies the
Technical Data in the report upon which Contractor may rely:
Report Title Date of Report Technical Data
Geotechnical Design
Recommendations 2/15/2022
Information gathered from one
test hole drilled at the project
location to a depth of 42 feet.
South Weber Well No. 2 Initial
Evaluation and Recommendations
for Further Investigations
4/2/2021 Summary of well construction
history and pump test data.

F. The following table lists the drawings of existing physical conditions at or adjacent to the
Site, including those drawings depicting existing surface or subsurface structures at or
adjacent to the Site (except Underground Facilities), that contain Technic al Data, and
specifically identifies the Technical Data upon which Contractor may rely:
Drawing Title Date of
Drawing
Technical Data
C-501 (CRS) 9/11/2012 Record drawing of pipes and
valves located east of the building.
US BOR, South Weber Well No.2
Pumping Plant 4/3/1963
Plan and section of mechanical
piping, vaults, concrete
foundations that were designed for
the site.

G. Contractor may examine copies of reports and drawings identified in SC 5.03.E and SC
5.03.F that were not included with the Bidding Documents at offices of Owner during
regular business hours or may request copies from Engineer.
5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions
SC-5.04 Delete Paragraph 5.04.E.2.c in its entirety and replace with the following:
c. Contractor failed to give written notice of differing site conditions required by
Paragraph 5.04.A within 14 days of discovery and before conditions are
disturbed. Failure to provide such written notice constitutes a waiver of all
claims in connection therewith, whether direct or consequential in nature.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 10
5.05 Underground Facilities
SC-5.05 Add the following paragraph 5.05.A.6:
6. providing work and assistance (including labor, equipment, and materials) to
representatives of underground utility companies associated with relocating or
looping underground service lines impacted by the Project.
5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site
SC-5.06 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 5.06.A.3:
4. The following table lists the reports known to Owner relating to Hazardous
Environmental Conditions at or adjacent to the Site, and the Technical Data (if any)
upon which Contractor may rely:
Report Title Date of Report Technical Data
None.

5. The following table lists the drawings known to Owner relating to Hazardous
Environmental Conditions at or adjacent to the Site, and Technical Data (if any)
contained in such Drawings upon which Contractor may rely:
Drawing Title Date of Drawing Technical Data
None.

ARTICLE 6 – BONDS AND INSURANCE
6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds
SC-6.01 Add the following paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 6.01.A:
1. Required Performance Bond Form: The performance bond that Contractor
furnishes will be in the form given in Section 00 61 14 of these Specifications.
2. Required Payment Bond Form: The payment bond that Contractor furnishes will be
in the form given in Section 00 61 15 of these Specifications.
6.02 Insurance—General Provisions
6.03 Contractor’s Insurance
SC-6.03 Supplement Paragraph 6.03 with the following provisions after Paragraph 6.03.C:
D. Other Additional Insureds: As a supplement to the provisions of Paragraph 6.03.C of the
General Conditions, the commercial general liability, automobile liability, umbrella or
excess, pollution liability, and unmanned aerial vehicle liability policies must include as
additional insureds (in addition to Owner and Engineer) the following: South Weber City.
E. Workers’ Compensation and Employer’s Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain
workers’ compensation and employer’s liability insurance, including, as applicable,
United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers’ Compensation Act, Jones Act, stop-
gap employer’s liability coverage for monopolistic states, and foreign voluntary workers’

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 11
compensation (from available sources, notwithstanding the jurisdictional requirement
of Paragraph 6.02.B of the General Conditions).
Workers’ Compensation and Related Policies Policy limits of not
less than:
Workers’ Compensation
State Statutory
Applicable Federal (e.g., Longshoreman’s) Statutory
Foreign voluntary workers’ compensation (employer’s
responsibility coverage), if applicable
Statutory
Jones Act (if applicable)
Bodily injury by accident—each accident $
Bodily injury by disease—aggregate $
Employer’s Liability
Each accident $
Each employee $
Policy limit $
Stop-gap Liability Coverage
For work performed in monopolistic states, stop-gap liability
coverage must be endorsed to either the worker’s
compensation or commercial general liability policy with a
minimum limit of:
$
F. Commercial General Liability – Claims Covered: Contractor shall purchase and maintain
commercial general liability insurance, covering all operations by or on behalf of
Contractor, on an occurrence basis, against claims for:
1. damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other
than Contractor’s employees,
2. damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage, and
3. damages because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located,
including loss of use resulting therefrom.
G. Commercial General Liability – Form and content: Contractor’s commercial liability
policy must be written on a 1996 (or later) Insurance Services Organization, Inc. (ISO)
commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages
and endorsements:
1. Products and completed operations coverage.
a. Such insurance must be maintained for three years after final payment.
b. Contractor shall furnish Owner and each other additional insured (as identified
in the Supplementary Conditions or elsewhere in the Contract) evidence of
continuation of such insurance at final payment and three years thereafter.
2. Blanket contractual liability coverage, including but not limited to coverage of
Contractor’s contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.18.
3. Severability of interests and no insured-versus-insured or cross-liability exclusions.
4. Underground, explosion, and collapse coverage.
5. Personal injury coverage.
6. Additional insured endorsements that include both ongoing operations and
products and completed operations coverage through ISO Endorsements CG 20 10

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 12
10 01 and CG 20 37 10 01 (together). If Contractor demonstrates to Owner that the
specified ISO endorsements are not commercially available, then Contractor may
satisfy this requirement by providing equivalent endorsements.
7. For design professional additional insureds, ISO Endorsement CG 20 32 07 04
“Additional Insured—Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the
Named Insured” or its equivalent.
H. Commercial General Liability – Excluded Content: The commercial general liability
insurance policy, including its coverages, endorsements, and incorporated provisions,
must not include any of the following:
1. Any modification of the standard definition of “insured contract” (except to delete
the railroad protective liability exclusion if Contractor is required to indemnify a
railroad or others with respect to Work within 50 feet of railroad property).
2. Any exclusion for water intrusion or water damage.
3. Any provisions resulting in the erosion of insurance limits by defense costs other
than those already incorporated in ISO form CG 00 01.
4. Any exclusion of coverage relating to earth subsidence or movement.
5. Any exclusion for the insured’s vicarious liability, strict liability, or statutory liability
(other than worker’s compensation).
6. Any limitation or exclusion based on the nature of Contractor’s work.
7. Any professional liability exclusion broader in effect than the most recent edition of
ISO form CG 22 79.
I. Commercial General Liability—Minimum Policy Limits
Commercial General Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
General Aggregate $ 3,000,000
Products—Completed Operations Aggregate $ 2,000,000
Personal and Advertising Injury $ 1,000,000
Bodily Injury and Property Damage—Each Occurrence $ 2,000,000
J. Automobile Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain automobile liability
insurance for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property
damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance, or use of any motor vehicle. The
automobile liability policy must be written on an occurrence basis.
Automobile Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
Bodily Injury
Each Person $ 2,000,000
Each Accident $ 2,000,000
Property Damage
Each Accident $ 2,000,000
[or]
Combined Single Limit
Combined Single Limit (Bodily Injury and Property Damage) $ 2,000,000
K. Umbrella or Excess Liability: Contractor shall purchase and maintain umbrella or excess
liability insurance written over the underlying employer’s liability, commercial general

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 13
liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the Paragraphs above. The
coverage afforded must be at least as broad as that of each and every one of the
underlying policies.
Excess or Umbrella Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
Each Occurrence $ 3,000,000
General Aggregate $ 3,000,000
L. Using Umbrella or Excess Liability Insurance to Meet CGL and Other Policy Limit
Requirements: Contractor may meet the policy limits specified for employer’s liability,
commercial general liability, and automobile liability through the primary policies alone,
or through combinations of the primary insurance policy’s policy limits and partial
attribution of the policy limits of an umbrella or excess liability policy that is at least as
broad in coverage as that of the underlying policy, as specified herein. If such umbrella
or excess liability policy was required under this Contract, at a specified minimum policy
limit, such umbrella or excess policy must retain a minimum limit of $3,000,000 after
accounting for partial attribution of its limits to underlying policies, as allowed above.
M. Contractor’s Pollution Liability Insurance: Contractor shall purchase and maintain a
policy covering third-party injury and property damage, including cleanup costs, as a
result of pollution conditions arising from Contractor’s operations and completed
operations. This insurance must be maintained for no less than three years after final
completion.
Contractor’s Pollution Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
Each Occurrence/Claim $ 1,000,000
General Aggregate $ 1,000,000
N. Contractor’s Professional Liability Insurance: If Contractor will provide or furnish
professional services under this Contract, through a delegation of professional design
services or otherwise, then Contractor shall be responsible for purchasing and
maintaining applicable professional liability insurance. This insurance must cover
negligent acts, errors, or omissions in the performance of professional design or related
services by the insured or others for whom the insured is legally liable. The insurance
must be maintained throughout the duration of the Contract and for a minimum of two
years after Substantial Completion. The retroactive date on the policy must pre-date the
commencement of furnishing services on the Project.
Contractor’s Professional Liability Policy limits of not
less than:
Each Claim $ 1,000,000
Annual Aggregate $ 1,000,000
6.04 Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance
SC-6.04 Delete Paragraph 6.04.A and insert the following in its place:
A. Owner shall purchase and maintain builder’s risk insurance upon the Work on a
completed value basis, in the amount of the Work’s full insurable replacement cost
(subject to such deductible amounts as may be provided in the Supplementary
Conditions or required by Laws and Regulations). The specific requirements applicable
to the builder’s risk insurance are set forth in the Supplementary Conditions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 14
SC-6.04 Supplement Paragraph 6.04 of the General Conditions with the following provisions:
F. Builder’s Risk Requirements: The builder’s risk insurance must:
1. be written on a builder’s risk “all risk” policy form that at a minimum includes
insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework,
and materials and equipment stored and in transit, and must not exclude the
coverage of the following risks: fire; windstorm; hail; flood; earthquake, volcanic
activity, and other earth movement; lightning; riot; civil commotion; terrorism;
vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical
breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; collapse;
explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and
Regulations; and water damage (other than that caused by flood).
a. Such policy will include an exception that results in coverage for ensuing losses
from physical damage or loss with respect to any defective workmanship,
methods, design, or materials exclusions.
b. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially
generated electric current; earthquake, volcanic activity, and other earth
movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder’s risk
policies, by endorsement or otherwise, such insurance will be provided
through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor.
2. cover, as insured property, at least the following: (a) the Work and all materials,
supplies, machinery, apparatus, equipment, fixtures, and other property of a similar
nature that are to be incorporated into or used in the preparation, fabrication,
construction, erection, or completion of the Work, including Owner-furnished or
assigned property; (b) spare parts inventory required within the scope of the
Contract; and (c) temporary works which are not intended to form part of the
permanent constructed Work but which are intended to provide working access to
the Site, or to the Work under construction, or which are intended to provide
temporary support for the Work under construction, including scaffolding, form
work, fences, shoring, falsework, and temporary structures.
3. cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property
(including but not limited to fees and charges of contractors, engineers, and
architects).
4. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in temporary storage at
the Site or in a storage location outside the Site (but not including property stored
at the premises of a manufacturer or Supplier). If this coverage is subject to a
sublimit, such sublimit will be a minimum of $ 3,000,000.
5. extend to cover damage or loss to insured property while in transit. If this coverage
is subject to a sublimit, such sublimit will be a minimum of $ 500,000.
6. allow for the waiver of the insurer’s subrogation rights, as set forth in this Contract.
7. allow for partial occupancy or use by Owner by endorsement, and without
cancellation or lapse of coverage.
8. include performance/hot testing and start-up, if applicable.
9. be maintained in effect until the Work is complete, as set forth in Paragraph 15.06.D
of the General Conditions, or until written confirmation of Owner’s procurement of
property insurance following Substantial Completion, whichever occurs first.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 15
10. include as named insureds the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors (of every tier),
and any other individuals or entities required by this Contract to be insured under
such builder’s risk policy. For purposes of Paragraphs 6.04, 6.05, and 6.06 of the
General Conditions, and this and all other corresponding Supplementary
Conditions, the parties required to be insured will be referred to collectively as
“insureds”. In addition to Owner, Contractor, and Subcontractors of every tier,
include as insureds the following:
11. include, in addition to the Contract Price amount, the value of the following
equipment and materials to be installed by the Contractor but furnished by the
Owner or third parties:
a. Transformer ‘HT1’, Medium Voltage Metering Cabinet, Medium Voltage Switch
‘MVS’, Transformer ‘HT2’, and Medium Voltage VFD for a total of $690,000.
12. if debris removal in connection with repair or replacement of insured property is
subject to a coverage sublimit, such sublimit will be a minimum of $ 250,000.

SC-6.04 Supplement Paragraph 6.04 of the General Conditions with the following provision:
G. Coverage for Completion Delays: The builder’s risk policy will include, for the benefit of
Owner, loss of revenue and soft cost coverage for losses arising from delays in
completion that result from covered physical losses or damage. Such coverage will
include, without limitation, fixed expenses and debt service for a minimum of 12 months
with a maximum deductible of 30 days, compensation for loss of net revenues, rental
costs, and attorneys’ fees and engineering or other consultants’ fees, if not otherwi se
covered.
SC-6.04 Supplement Paragraph 6.04 of the General conditions with the following provisions:
H. Builder’s Risk and Other Property Insurance Deductibles: The purchaser of any required
builder’s risk or other property insurance will be responsible for costs not covered
because of the application of a policy deductible.
ARTICLE 7 – CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITIES
SC-7.04 Add the following new paragraph immediately after Paragraph 7.03.C
D. Contractor shall be responsible for the cost of any overtime pay or other expense
incurred by the Owner for Engineer’s services (including those of the Resident Project
Representative, if any), Owner's representative, and construction observation services,
occasioned by the performance of Work on Saturday, Sunday, any legal holiday, or as
overtime on any regular workday. If Contractor is responsible but does not pay, or if the
parties are unable to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable
set-off against payments due under Article 15.
1. For purposes of administering the foregoing requirement, additional overtime costs
are defined as $ 75 per overtime hour.
7.07 Concerning Subcontractors and Suppliers
SC-7.07 Supplement Paragraph 7.07.A by adding the following sentence after the first sentence of
the paragraph:
Contractor shall perform not less than 50 percent of the Work with its own forces (i.e.,
without subcontracting) without Owner’s prior written approval. This requirement is

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 16
understood to refer to installing, performing, and constructing Work, exclusive of the
supply of materials and equipment for the Project.
ARTICLE 8 – OTHER WORK AT THE SITE
No supplementary conditions in this Article.
ARTICLE 9 – OWNER’S RESPONSIBILITIES
No supplementary conditions in this Article.
SC-9.04
ARTICLE 10 – ENGINEER’S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION
10.03 Resident Project Representative
SC-10.03 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 10.03.B:
C. The Resident Project Representative (RPR) will be Engineer's representative at the Site.
RPR's dealings in matters pertaining to the Work in general will be with Engineer and
Contractor. RPR's dealings with Subcontractors will only be through or with the full
knowledge or approval of Contractor. The RPR will:
1. Conferences and Meetings: Attend meetings with Contractor, such as
preconstruction conferences, progress meetings, job conferences, and other
Project-related meetings (but not including Contractor’s safety meetings), and as
appropriate prepare and circulate copies of minutes thereof.
2. Safety Compliance: Comply with Site safety programs, as they apply to RPR, and if
required to do so by such safety programs, receive safety training specifically
related to RPR’s own personal safety while at the Site.
3. Liaison
a. Serve as Engineer’s liaison with Contractor. Working principally through
Contractor’s authorized representative or designee, assist in providing
information regarding the provisions and intent of the Contract Documents.
b. Assist Engineer in serving as Owner’s liaison with Contractor when
Contractor’s operations affect Owner’s on-Site operations.
c. Assist in obtaining from Owner additional details or information, when
required for Contractor’s proper execution of the Work.
4. Review of Work; Defective Work
a. Conduct on-Site observations of the Work to assist Engineer in determining, to
the extent set forth in Paragraph 10.02 if the Work is in general proceeding in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
b. Observe whether any Work in place appears to be defective.
c. Observe whether any Work in place should be uncovered for observation, or
requires special testing, inspection or approval.
5. Inspections and Tests

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 17
a. Observe Contractor-arranged inspections required by Laws and Regulations,
including but not limited to those performed by public or other agencies having
jurisdiction over the Work.
b. Accompany visiting inspectors representing public or other agencies having
jurisdiction over the Work.
6. Payment Requests: Review Applications for Payment with Contractor.
7. Completion
a. Participate in Engineer’s visits regarding Substantial Completion.
b. Assist in the preparation of a punch list of items to be completed or corrected.
c. Participate in Engineer’s visit to the Site in the company of Owner and
Contractor regarding completion of the Work and prepare a final punch list of
items to be completed or corrected by Contractor.
d. Observe whether items on the final punch list have been completed or
corrected.
D. The RPR will not:
1. Authorize any deviation from the Contract Documents or substitution of materials
or equipment (including “or-equal” items).
2. Exceed limitations of Engineer’s authority as set forth in the Contract Documents.
3. Undertake any of the responsibilities of Contractor, Subcontractors, or Suppliers.
4. Advise on, issue directions relative to, or assume control over any aspect of the
means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction.
5. Advise on, issue directions regarding, or assume control over security or safety
practices, precautions, and programs in connection with the activities or operations
of Owner or Contractor.
6. Participate in specialized field or laboratory tests or inspections conducted off-site
by others except as specifically authorized by Engineer.
7. Authorize Owner to occupy the Project in whole or in part.
ARTICLE 11 – CHANGES TO THE CONTRACT
No Supplementary Conditions in this Article.
ARTICLE 12 – CLAIMS
12.01 Claims
SC-12.01 Delete Paragraph 12.01.B in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
B. Submittal of Claim:
1. The party submitting a Claim shall deliver it directly to the other party to the
Contract promptly (but in no event later than 30 days) after the start of the event
giving rise thereto; in the case of appeals regarding Change Proposals within 30
days of the decision under appeal. The party submitting the Claim shall also furnish
a copy to the Engineer, for its information only. The responsibility to substantiate a
Claim rests with the party making the Claim. In the case of a Claim by Contractor
seeking an increase in the Contract Times or Contract Price, Contractor shall certify

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 18
that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data are accurate and
complete, and that to the best of Contractor’s knowledge and belief the amount of
time or money requested accurately reflects the full amount to which Contractor is
entitled.
2. If Contractor submits a claim to Owner for additional compensation, Owner shall
have the right, as a condition to considering the claim, and as a basis for evaluation
of the claim, and until the claim has been settled, to audit Contractor's books. This
right shall include the right to examine books, records, documents, and other
evidence and accounting procedures and practices, sufficient to discover and verify
all direct and indirect costs of whatever nature claimed to have been incurred or
anticipated to be incurred and for which the claim has been submitted. The right to
audit shall include the right to inspect Contractor's plants, or such parts thereof, as
may be or have been engaged in the performance of the Work. Contractor further
agrees that the right to audit encompasses all subcontracts and is binding upon
subcontractors. The right to examine and inspect herein provided for shall be
exercisable through such representatives as Owner deems desirable during
Contractor's normal business hours at the office of Contractor. Contractor shall
make available to Owner for auditing, all relevant accounting records and
documents, and other financial data, and upon request, shall submit true copies of
requested records to Owner.
ARTICLE 13 – COST OF WORK; ALLOWANCES, UNIT PRICE WORK
13.01 Cost of the Work
SC-13.01 Supplement Paragraph 13.01.B.5.c.(2) by adding the following sentence:
The equipment rental rate book that governs the included costs for the rental of
machinery and equipment owned by Contractor (or a related entity) under the Cost of
the Work provisions of this Contract is the most current edition of Rental Rate Blue Book
for Construction Equipment.
SC-13.01 Supplement Paragraph 13.01.C.2 by adding the following definition of small tools and
hand tools:
a. For purposes of this paragraph, “small tools and hand tools” means any tool or
equipment whose current price if it were purchased new at retail would be less
than $500.
13.03 Unit Price Work
SC-13.03 Delete Paragraph 13.03.E in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
E. Adjustments in Unit Price
1. Contractor or Owner shall be entitled to an adjustment in the unit price with respect
to an item of Unit Price Work if:
a. the extended price of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 10
percent or more of the Contract Price (based on estimated quantities at the time
of Contract formation) and the variation in the quantity of that particular item
of Unit Price Work actually furnished or performed by Contractor differs by
more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the
Agreement; and
b. Contractor’s unit costs to perform the item of Unit Price Work have changed
materially and significantly because of the quantity change.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 19
2. The adjustment in unit price will account for and be coordinated with any related
changes in quantities of other items of Work, and in Contractor’s costs to perform
such other Work, such that the resulting overall change in Contract Price is equitable
to Owner and Contractor.
3. Adjusted unit prices will apply to all units of that item.
ARTICLE 14 – TESTS AND INSPECTIONS; CORRECTION, REMOVAL, OR ACCEPTANCE OF
DEFECTIVE WORK
No Supplementary Conditions in this Article.
ARTICLE 15 – PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR, SET OFFS; COMPLETIONS; CORRECTION PERIOD
15.01 Progress Payments
SC-15.01 Delete Paragraph 15.01.D.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place:
1. Forty five (45) days after presentation of the Application for Payment to Owner with
Engineer’s recommendation, the amount recommended will (subject to the
provisions of Paragraph 14.02.E) become due, and when due will be paid by Owner
to Contractor.
SC-15.01 Add the following new Paragraph 15.01.F:
F. For contracts in which the Contract Price is based on the Cost of Work, if Owner
determines that progress payments made to date substantially exceed the actual
progress of the Work (as measured by reference to the Schedule of Values), or present a
potential conflict with the Guaranteed Maximum Price, then Owner may require that
Contractor prepare and submit a plan for the remaining anticipated Applications for
Payment that will bring payments and progress into closer alignment and take into
account the Guaranteed Maximum Price (if any), through reductions in billings, increases
in retainage, or other equitable measures. Owner will review the plan, discuss any
necessary modifications, and implement the plan as modified for all remaining
Applications for Payment.
15.03 Substantial Completion
SC-15.03 Add the following new subparagraph to Paragraph 15.03.B:
1. If some or all the Work has been determined not to be at a point of Substantial
Completion and will require re-inspection or re-testing by Engineer, the cost of such
re-inspection or re-testing, including the cost of time, travel and living expenses, will
be paid by Contractor to Owner. If Contractor does not pay, or the parties are unable
to agree as to the amount owed, then Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against
payments due under this Article 15.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 20
ARTICLE 16 – SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION
16.04 Contractor May Stop Work or Terminate
SC-16.04 In Paragraph B, delete the two “30 days” callouts and replace both with “45 days”.
ARTICLE 17 – FINAL RESOLUTIONS OF DISPUTES
17.02 Arbitration
SC-17.02 Add the following new paragraphs immediately after Paragraph 17.01.
17.02 Arbitration
A. All matters subject to final resolution under this Article will be settled by arbitration
administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its
Construction Industry Arbitration Rules (subject to the conditions and limitations of this
Paragraph SC 17.02). Any controversy or claim in the amount of $100,000 or less will be
settled in accordance with the American Arbitration Association’s supplemental rules
for Fixed Time and Cost Construction Arbitration. This agreement to arbitrate will be
specifically enforceable under the prevailing law of any court having jurisdiction.
B. The demand for arbitration will be filed in writing with the other party to the Contract
and with the selected arbitration administrator, and a copy will be sent to Engineer for
information. The demand for arbitration will be made within the specific time required
in Article 17, or if no specified time is applicable within a reasonable time after the
matter in question has arisen, and in no event will any such demand be made after the
date when institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on such matter in question
would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations.
C. The arbitrator(s) must be licensed engineers, contractors, attorneys, or construction
managers. Hearings will take place pursuant to the standard procedures of the
Construction Arbitration Rules that contemplate in-person hearings. The arbitrators
will have no authority to award punitive or other damages not measured by the
prevailing party's actual damages, except as may be required by statute or the Contract.
Any award in an arbitration initiated under this clause will be limited to monetary
damages and include no injunction or direction to any party other than the direction to
pay a monetary amount.
D. The Arbitrators will have the authority to allocate the costs of the arbitration process
among the parties but will only have the authority to allocate attorneys' fees if a specific
Law or Regulation or this Contract permits them to do so.
E. The award of the arbitrators must be accompanied by a reasoned written opinion and a
concise breakdown of the award. The written opinion will cite the Contract provisions
deemed applicable and relied on in making the award.
F. The parties agree that failure or refusal of a party to pay its required share of the deposits
for arbitrator compensation or administrative charges will constitute a waiver by that
party to present evidence or cross-examine witness. In such event, the other party shall
be required to present evidence and legal argument as the arbitrator(s) may require for
the making of an award. Such waiver will not allow for a default judgment against the
non-paying party in the absence of evidence presented as provided for above.
G. No arbitration arising out of or relating to the Contract will include by consolidation,
joinder, or in any other manner any other individual or entity (including Engineer, and

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 21
Engineer’s consultants and the officers, directors, partners, agents, employees or
consultants of any of them) who is not a party to this Contract unless:
1. the inclusion of such other individual or entity will allow complete relief to be
afforded among those who are already parties to the arbitration;
2. such other individual or entity is substantially involved in a question of law or fact
which is common to those who are already parties to the arbitration, and which will
arise in such proceedings;
3. such other individual or entity is subject to arbitration under a contract with either
Owner or Contractor, or consents to being joined in the arbitration; and
4. the consolidation or joinder is in compliance with the arbitration administrator’s
procedural rules.
H. The award will be final. Judgment may be entered upon it in any court having jurisdiction
thereof, and it will not be subject to modification or appeal, subject to provisions of the
Laws and Regulations relating to vacating or modifying an arbitral award.
I. Except as may be required by Laws or Regulations, neither party nor an arbitrator may
disclose the existence, content, or results of any arbitration hereunder without the prior
written consent of both parties, with the exception of any disclosure required by Laws
and Regulations or the Contract. To the extent any disclosure is allowed pursuant to the
exception, the disclosure must be strictly and narrowly limited to maintain
confidentiality to the extent possible.
ARTICLE 18 – MISCELLANEOUS
18.11 March 24, 2022Title to Materials Found on the Site
SC-18.11 Add the following new Paragraph 18.11.
18.11 Title to Materials Found on the Site
A. Owner reserves the right to retain title to all soils, stone, sand, gravel, and other materials
developed and obtained from excavations and other operations connected with the
Work. Unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents, neither Contractor nor any
Subcontractor have any right, title, or interest in or to any such materials. Contractor
will be permitted to use these materials in the Work, without charge, subject to any such
materials meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 22
EXHIBIT A—SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRONIC DOCUMENT EXCHANGE
Item Electronic Documents Transmittal
Means
Data
Format
Note
(1)
a.1 General communications, meeting notices and responses to
general information requests for which there is no specific
prescribed form.
Email Email
a.2 Meeting agendas, meeting minutes, Inspection requests and
reports, RFI’s and responses to RFI’s, and Contract forms.
Project
Website
PDF (2)
a.3 Record and Closeout Submittals (Shop Drawings, “or equal”
requests, substitution requests, documentation accompanying
Sample submittals and other submittals) to Owner and Engineer,
and Owner’s and Engineer’s responses to Contractor’s
Submittals, Shop Drawings, correspondence, and Applications
for Payment.
Project
Website
PDF and
EXC for
Payment
App

a.4 Correspondence; milestone and final version Submittals of
reports, layouts, Drawings, maps, calculations and spreadsheets,
Specifications, Drawings and other Submittals from Contractor
to Owner or Engineer and for responses from Engineer and
Owner to Contractor regarding Submittals.
Project
Website
PDF
a.5 Photographs with dates Project
Website
JPEG or
JPEG2000

a.6 Videos with dates Project
Website
WMV
a.7 Layouts and drawings to be submitted to Owner for future use
and modification.
Email w/
Attachment
or LFE
DWG
a.8 Correspondence, reports, and Specifications to be submitted to
Owner for future word processing use and modification.
Email w/
Attachment
or LFE
DOCX
a.9 Spreadsheets and data to be submitted to Owner for future data
processing use and modification.
Email w/
Attachment
or LFE
EXC
a.10 Database files and data to be submitted to Owner for future data
processing use and modification.
Email w/
Attachment
or LFE
DB
Notes
(1) All exchanges and uses of transmitted data are subject to the appropriate provisions of Contract
Documents.
(2) Transmittal of written notices is governed by Paragraph 18.01 of the General Conditions.
Key
Email Standard Email formats (.htm, .rtf, or .txt). Do not use stationery formatting or other features that
impair legibility of content on screen or in printed copies
LFE Agreed upon Large File Exchange method (FTP, CD, DVD, hard drive)
PDF Portable Document Format readable by Adobe® Acrobat Reader Version 11 or later
DWG Autodesk® AutoCAD .dwg format Version 2018 or later
DOC Microsoft® Word .docx format Version 2019 or later
EXC Microsoft® Excel .xlsx or .xml format Version 2019 or later
DB Microsoft® Access .accdb format Version 2016 or later

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 23
EX
H
I
B
I
T

B
—PR
O
J
E
C
T

W
E
B
S
I
T
E

U
S
E
R

L
I
S
T

EP
M

S
y
s
t
e
m

U
s
e
r

L
i
s
t

Zi
p

Co
d
e

At
t
a
c
h

a
d
d
i
t
i
o
n
a
l

p
a
g
e
s

a
s

n
e
e
d
e
d

St
a
t
e

Ci
t
y

Ad
d
r
e
s
s

Pr
i
m
a
r
y

P
h
o
n
e

Co
m
p
a
n
y

E-ma
i
l

A
d
d
r
e
s
s

Pr
o
j
e
c
t

R
o
l
e

Na
m
e

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 00 73 00 - 24
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

DIVISION 01
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 11 00 - 1
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Work to be performed under this Contract consists of furnishing all plant, tools,
equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles and furnishing all labor,
transportation, and services, including fuel, power, water, and essential communications, and
performing all Work, or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract in strict
accordance with the Contract Documents. The Work shall be complete, and all Work,
materials, and services not expressly indicated or called for in the Contract Documents, which
may be necessary for the complete, safe, and proper construction of the Work in good faith
shall be provided by Contractor as though originally so indicated, at no increase in cost to
Owner.
1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
A. The Work of this Contract comprises the construction of a well house structure and
improvements necessary to equip an existing groundwater well. The well, with a design
flowrate of 4,500 gpm will be pumped with a 1,250 horsepower, medium voltage motor and
variable frequency drive. The CMU building will house electrical equipment and mechanical
piping. Site improvements include the demolition of existing structures, pavement, piping;
and the construction of a six-foot retaining wall, new fencing, gates, pavement, and
connections to existing water lines. Major electrical equipment has been pre-purchased by
the Owner and will be installed by the Contractor.
B. The Work is located in South Weber City, Davis County, Utah as indicated on the Drawings.
1.3 CONTRACT METHOD
A. The Work hereunder will be constructed under a single lump-sum contract.
1.4 STREAMLINED SPECIFICATIONS
A. These specifications are written in streamlined or declarative style, often using incomplete
sentences. This imperative language is directed to Contractor unless specifically noted
otherwise.
B. Omissions of such words and phrases as “Contractor shall,” “in conformity therewith,” “shall
be,” “as shown on the Drawings,” “a,” “an,” “the,” and “all” are intentional in streamlined
sections.
1. Omitted words shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as when a note
appears on the Drawings.
2. Omission of such words shall not relieve Contractor from providing the items and
work described herein or indicated on the Drawings.
3. Words “shall be” are included by inference where a colon (:) is used within sentences
or phrases.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 11 00 - 2
1.5 EQUIPMENT PROCURED BY OWNER
A. Contractor is responsible for coordinating transfer of equipment purchased by Owner from
the Owner’s storage into the Contractor’s care. Contractor shall be responsible for the
loading, unloading, transport, installation, and startup of prepurchased equipment.
B. Components furnished by the Owner, expected delivery dates, and description of Contractor
tasks, are enumerated in the Owner Furnished Equipment Schedule located on sheet E-03 of
the contract documents.
C. Contractor shall install a temporary transformer ‘HT2’, provided by Owner, prior to
commissioning and substantial completion. The permanent transformer ‘HT2’ has been
prepurchased and is expected to be delivered to the Owner’s yard in June 2025, after
Substantial Completion. Contractor is responsible for receiving the permanent transformer
at the Owner’s yard, transporting to the site, mobilizing necessary equipment and labor to
remove the temporary transformer, install the permanent, and transport the temporary back
to the Owner’s yard.
1.6 WORK SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING CONSTRAINTS
A. Schedule and perform the Work in such a manner as to result in the least possible disruption
to the public's use of roadways, driveways, and utilities. Utilities shall include but not be
limited to water, sewerage, drainage structures, ditches and canals, gas, electric, cable
television, and telephone. Refer to Utility Adjustment and other plan and profile sheets for
approximate location of utilities. However, there is no guarantee as to accuracy or
completeness. Contractor shall incorporate as-built locations on the reproducible record
plans, in red ink, showing proper location on each sheet where these utilities are located.
B. Access to the site is limited to the hours of 6:00 am to 7:00 pm Monday through Friday.
1.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF PROJECT SITE
A. Use of the Project Site shall be limited to construction operations, including on -Site storage
of materials, on-Site fabrication facilities, and field offices.
B. Do not use the indicated portion of the site until Notice to Proceed is awarded for any of its
construction or staging operations unless written permission from the Owner is secured.
1.8 OWNER USE OF THE PROJECT SITE
A. Owner may utilize the Fluoride Building. Cooperate and coordinate with Owner to facilitate
Owner's operations and projects and to minimize interference with Contractor's operations
at the same time. In any event, Owner shall be allowed safe access to the Project Site during
the period of construction.
1.9 CONTRACTOR’S WORKING HOURS
A. Perform work within Owner’s regular working hours from 7:00 am to 5:00 pm. If Contractor
desires to work overtime or work on a Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday, obtain prior
approval from Owner and Engineer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 11 00 - 3
1.10 STORAGE
A. Storage conditions shall be acceptable to Owner for all materials and equipment not
incorporated into the Work but included in Applications for Payment. Such storage
arrangements and conditions shall be presented in writing for Owner’s review and approval
and shall afford adequate and satisfactory security and protection. Off-site storage facilities
shall be accessible to Engineer. The stored materials shall be insured for full value.
Certificates of liability insurance coverage must be submitted to Engineer with the request
for payment by Contractor. All arrangements and costs for storage facilities shall be paid by
Contractor, unless specifically designated in the Contract Documents to be furnished by
Owner.
1.11 NOTICES TO OWNERS OF ADJACENT PROPERTIES AND UTILITIES
A. Notify Owners of adjacent property and utilities when prosecution of the Work may affect
them.
B. When it is necessary to temporarily deny access by owners or tenants to their property, or
when any utility service connection must be interrupted, Give notices sufficiently in advance
to enable the affected person(s) to provide for their needs. Notices shall conform to any
applicable local ordinance and, whether delivered orally or in writing, shall include
appropriate information concerning the interruption and instructions on how to limit any
resulting inconvenience.
C. Utilities and other concerned agencies shall be contacted at least seven days prior to cutting
or closing streets or other traffic areas or excavating near underground utilities or pole lines.
D. Review with the various utility companies the construction methods, safety procedures, and
Work to be done in the vicinity of utilities. When temporary relocation of utilities is
necessary, provide sufficient advance notice to the utility involved.
1.12 LINES AND GRADES
A. Perform all Work to the lines, grades, and elevations shown on the Drawings.
B. Basic horizontal and vertical control points will be established or designated as provided in
General Conditions paragraphs. Use these points as datum for the Work. Perform any
additional survey, layout, or measurement work needed for proper construction of the Work
as a part of the Work at no additional cost to Owner.
C. Employ experienced instrument personnel, competent assistants, and such instruments,
tools, stakes, and other materials required to complete the survey, layout, and measurement
work. In addition, furnish, without additional charge, competent personnel and such tools,
stakes, and other materials as Engineer may require in establishing or designating control
points or in checking survey, layout, and measurement of Work performed.
D. Keep Engineer informed, a reasonable time in advance, of the times and places at which Work
is to be done, so that horizontal and vertical control points may be established, and any
checking deemed necessary by Engineer may be done with minimum delay to the Project.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 11 00 - 4
E. Remove and reconstruct Work, which is improperly located.
1.13 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Preconstruction Conference
1. Prior to the commencement of Work at the Site, a preconstruction conference will be
held at a mutually agreed time and place which shall be attended by Contractor's
Project Manager, its Superintendent, its Safety Representative, and its Subcontractors
as Contractor deems appropriate. Other attendees will be:
a. Engineer
b. Representatives of Owner
c. Governmental representatives as appropriate
d. Others as requested by Contractor, Owner, or Engineer
e. Engineer’s Representative
2. Bring to the conference, any submittals so indicated in Section 01 33 20 - Contractor
Submittals.
3. The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel, discuss contract
requirements and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination
will be discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The
complete agenda will be furnished by Engineer prior to the meeting date. However,
be prepared to discuss all the items listed below.
a. Contractor's assignments for safety and first aid, including Designated
Competent person(s) and Contractor's safety Representative.
b. Status of Contractor's insurance and bonds.
c. Contractor's tentative schedules.
d. Transmittal, review, and distribution of Contractor's submittals.
e. Processing applications for payment.
f. Maintaining record documents.
g. Critical Work sequencing.
h. Field decisions and Change Orders.
i. Use of project site, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and
Owner's needs.
j. Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
k. Permits required for construction.
l. Utilities required for construction.
m. Contract Owner and channels of communication.
n. Coordination with others.
4. Engineer will preside at the preconstruction conference and will arrange for keeping
and distributing the minutes to all persons in attendance.
B. Progress Meetings
1. Engineer will schedule and hold regular on-Site progress meetings at least weekly
and at other times as deemed necessary by Engineer or as required by progress of the
Work. Contractor, Engineer, and all Subcontractors active on the Site must attend
each meeting. Contractor may at its discretion request attendance by representatives
of its Suppliers, manufacturers, and other Subcontractors.
2. Engineer will preside at the meetings and will arrange for keeping and distributing
the minutes. The purpose of the meetings will be to review the progress of the Work,
discuss safety, maintain coordination of efforts, discuss commercial issues, discuss
changes in scheduling, and resolve other problems, which may develop. During each

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 11 00 - 5
meeting, all parties are required to present any issues, which may impact its Work,
with a view toward resolving these issues expeditiously.
1.14 AVAILABLE SUPPLEMENTAL REPORTS
A. Geotechnical Report: Geotechnical data referenced in these Contract Documents are based
upon the report titled “Geotechnical Design Recommendations, Weber Basin Water
Conservancy District (WBWCD) South Weber Well No. 2 Wellhouse“, prepared by Gerhart
Cole, Inc., dated February 15, 2022. Report is available from Owner upon request.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUMMARY OF WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 11 00 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION AND SCHEDULE RESTRAINTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 14 40 - 1
SECTION 01 14 40
CONSTRUCTION AND SCHEDULE RESTRAINTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Schedule, sequence, and perform the Work in a manner, which minimizes disruption to the
public and to the operation and maintenance of existing facilities.
B. Allow for construction and schedule constraints in preparing the construction schedules
required under Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress Schedule. Include all the activities
necessary to satisfy all constraints included and referenced in the Contract Documents.
1.2 PERMITS
A. Abide by the conditions of all permits, easements, and private agreements made and obtain
written acceptance of the constructed conditions from each issuer of the permit, easement,
or private agreement prior to acceptance of Work by Owner, at no additional expense to
Owner.
1.3 COORDINATION WITH OTHER CONSTRUCTION
A. Be responsible for coordinating the Work depicted in the Contract Documents with Owner,
Engineer, and all other contractors or suppliers working at, or near the Project Site in
accordance with the General Conditions and Supplementary General Conditions.
1.4 SCHEDULE CONSTRAINTS
A. Be responsibility to coordinate and plan the construction activities to integrate each schedule
constraint into performance of the overall Work.
B. The listing of schedule constraints below does not mean that all constraints or special
conditions have been identified. The list is not a substitute for the duty to coordinate and
plan for completion, all Work by the Substantial/Contract Completion Dates specified in the
Contract Documents.
C. Special Listing: The following constraints affect the construction schedule.
1. Improvements to the pump-to-waste discharge, at the Davis and Weber Counties
Canal, shall occur outside the irrigation season (typically April 15 to October 15).
Canal should be cored soon after November 1st when the canal is pumped empty.
Coordinate timing with Monte Byram ([e-mail]) prior to initiating
this work.
2. Shutdown of the District's waterline for connecting the well house to the existing
distribution system must occur between October 15 and April 15.
3. Transformer ‘HT1’ will be delivered and installed by Owner by the end of May 2024.
Contractor to cooperatively provide access to existing substation pad. Refer to E-03.
4. Estimated delivery times for Owner procured equipment and descriptions of
Contractor’s responsibilities are listed on plan sheet E-03.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION AND SCHEDULE RESTRAINTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 14 40 - 2

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 20 00 - 1
SECTION 01 20 00
MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
A. Lump Sum Bid Items
1. All Work Required by the Contract Documents
a. Payment for Work under this Bid item will be based on the breakdown of
costs for each scheduled activity in the Construction Schedule and the
percentage of completion for each activity in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
b. Payment for mobilization, as defined in Section 01 71 00 – Mobilization, as
part of the lump sum price named in the Bid Schedule shall equal six percent
(6.0%) of the total lump sum price bid for the Work. The payment for
mobilization is not in addition to, but is part of the lump sum price for the
Work. Include a separate activity for mobilization in the Construction
Schedule and in the Schedule of Values. This activity shall include all principal
items and all submittals specified in Section 01 71 00 – Mobilization, as
applicable. The remaining lump sum, except as otherwise required by this
Agreement, shall be appropriately distributed among the remaining work
activities that make up the total lump sum price. Payment for mobilization
will be approved in accordance with the status of completion of each
mobilization component as defined in the approved mobilization plan
required in Section 01 71 00; except that no payment for mobilization will be
approved until Items 1, 2, 8, 9, 10, and 11 of paragraph 3.1.A of Section 01 71
00 are complete. No more than one-half of the payment for mobilization will
be paid until all submittals required by paragraph 3.2 of Section 01 71 00 have
been approved by Engineer.
c. Payment for each approved Operations & Maintenance (O & M) Manual, as
defined in Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals, as part of the total lump
sum price named in the Bid Schedule shall equal 10% of the value of the piece
of equipment or group of like-kind pieces of equipment that it represents. The
payment for each O & M Manual is not in addition to but is part of the lump
sum price for the Work. A separate activity for each O & M Manual shall be
included in the Construction Schedule and in the Schedule of Values. The
remaining lump sum price, except as otherwise required by this Contract,
shall be appropriately distributed among the remaining work activities that
make up the total lump sum price.
B. Unit Price Bid Items
1. Bid Item No. 1 – Mobilization, Demobilization, Temporary Facilities, and
Administrative Items
a. Measurement: Mobilization, Demobilization, Temporary Facilities,
Administrative Items, materials testing, and permitting; and will be measured
and paid for on a Lump Sum basis. Payment shall be made on a percent
complete basis as described below.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 20 00 - 2
b. Payment: Cost of mobilization and demobilization including, but not limited
to: bonds and insurance; contract administration; mobilization;
demobilization; videotaping site conditions prior to construction; furnishing
and erecting temporary construction facilities; project signs, obtaining any
additional permits not already obtained by the OWNER, and material testing
as required in 01 45 00 Quality Control. This pay item shall constitute full
compensation for all labor, equipment, tools, supplies and materials required
to complete this portion of the Work for this construction project.
c. For purposes of payment, this bid item shall be paid for on a percent complete
basis. The lump sum bid price for this bid item shall not exceed 6 percent of
the total bid price. Any bid proposal for mobilization, demobilization,
temporary facilities, and administration items that is greater than 6 percent
will be adjusted to the maximum amount of 6 percent of the total bid. The bid
item so adjusted will be the Contractor’s bid for that item, and the Contractor’s
bid for the project will be recalculated and the revised total used to compare
with other bidders to determine the low bid. The OWNER will pay the
adjusted lump sum price. Bid item will be paid on a percent complete basis
as summarized in the following table:

Partial
Payment

Amount

When Paid
1st 50 percent of bid item lump sum. With 1st pay request
2nd 40 percent of bid item lump sum. With 1st pay request following
completion of 10 percent of contract
3rd 10 percent of bid item lump sum (for
demobilization).
With 1st pay request following
completion of 90 percent of contract

2. Bid Item No. 2 – Demolition
a. Measurement: Measurement will be made on a Lump Sum basis.
b. Payment: Payment includes all work necessary for permitting, demolition
and hauling of all existing building materials, mechanical equipment,
electrical gear, civil/site improvements, tree trimming, and all other items
scheduled for demolition, removal, and/or salvage as shown on the plans.
3. Bid Item No. 3 – Onsite Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System
a. Measurement: Measurement will be made on a Lump Sum basis.
b. Payment: Payment includes furnishing and installing a complete and operable
Onsite Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System including but not limited to
all necessary equipment, tanks, plumbing, valves, wiring, and programming
as described in the plans and specifications.
4. Bid Item No. 4 – Balance of Work – Construction of New South Weber Well No. 2
a. Measurement: Measurement of the Balance of Work associated with
construction of the new South Weber Well No. 2, including all items not
specifically described in the above Bid Items, will be made on a Lump Sum
basis.
b. Payment: Balance of all work including site preparation, civil improvements,
yard piping, connection to existing piping, architectural, structural,
mechanical, electrical, HVAC, instrumentation, and all work other than tasks
described in Items 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10 as necessary to complete the project

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 20 00 - 3
as described in the plans and specifications and to create a complete and
operable well house.
5. Bid Item No. 5 – Asphalt Pavement
a. Measurement: Measurement will be made on a Square Yard basis. Extent of
proposed asphalt and removal/replacement of existing asphalt to be
established/staked by Contractor and verified/agreed to by Engineer and
prior to execution of work.
b. Payment: Payment for Asphalt Pavement shall include all material, labor,
equipment, necessary for the removal and disposal of existing asphalt
pavement and placement of new asphalt pavement, subbase, preparation of
subgrade.
6. Bid Item No. 6 – Type “G” Material for Ground Cover
a. Measurement: Measurement will be made on a by Ton basis as evidenced by
a combination of load tickets and computing weight from measured in-place
or stockpile volumes using a unit weight of 130 lbs per cubic foot. Engineer’s
RPR will coordinate quantity with Contractor’s superintendent at the end of
each day in which material is placed for this purpose. Contractor to maintain
log of delivery load tickets indicating delivered weights.
b. Payment: Payment for Type “G” Material for Ground Cover shall include all
material, labor, equipment, necessary for subgrade preparation, placement,
spreading, and rolling the material.
7. Bid Item No. 7 – Contractor Services Related to Owner Provided Medium
Voltage Metering Cabinet
a. Measurement: Measurement will be made by Each.
b. Payment: Payment will be made for activities described on drawing sheet E-
03 to include receiving the equipment at the Owner’s yard, transportation to
the site, and installation.
c. For purposes of payment, this bid item shall be paid as follows at the defined
milestones: 40% upon receiving equipment and transporting to site; 40%
upon installation; and 20% upon successful equipment startup.
8. Bid Item No. 8 – Contractor Services Related to Owner Provided Medium
Voltage Switch ‘MVS’
a. Measurement: Measurement will be made by Each.
b. Payment: Payment will be made for activities described on drawing sheet E-
03 to include receiving the equipment at the Owner’s yard, transportation to
the site, and installation.
c. For purposes of payment, this bid item shall be paid as follows at the defined
milestones: 40% upon receiving equipment and transporting to site; 40%
upon installation; and 20% upon successful equipment startup.
9. Bid Item No. 9 – Contractor Services Related to Owner Provided Transformer
‘HT2’
a. Measurement: Measurement will be made by Each.
b. Payment: Payment will be made for activities described on drawing sheet E-
03 to include receiving the equipment at the Owner’s yard, transportation to
the site, and installation. Delivery of transformer to Owner’s yard is expected
in June 2025, after substantial completion.
c. For purposes of payment, this bid item shall be paid as follows at the defined
milestones: 40% upon receiving equipment and transporting to site; 40%
upon installation; and 20% upon successful equipment startup.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 20 00 - 4
10. Bid Item No. 10 – Contractor Services Related to Owner Provided Medium
Voltage VFD
a. Measurement: Measurement will be made by Each.
b. Payment: Payment will be made for activities described on drawing sheet E-
03 to include receiving the equipment at the Owner’s yard, transportation to
the site, and installation.
c. For purposes of payment, this bid item shall be paid as follows at the defined
milestones: 40% upon receiving equipment and transporting to site; 40%
upon installation; and 20% upon successful equipment startup.
1.2 GENERAL PROGRESS PAYMENT REQUIREMENTS
A. A Payment for Work performed shall be in accordance with installed quantities as assessed
in comparison to the Schedule of Values and the Construction Schedule. Engineer will verify
measurements and quantities. Each activity necessary to manage and complete the Work is
identified on the Contract schedules. Each activity will be assigned its respective value, a
portion of the Contract Price, as shown on the Schedule of Values (Roll-up), and detailed cost
loaded activity schedule.
B. Payment for all lump sum costs and services incurred on this Agreement shall be based on
the earned value of Work accomplished during the reporting period. Earned value is
determined by the completion percentage of each activity as determined by the Schedule of
Values and the Construction Schedule applied to the total value of the activity. No
construction activity shall be deemed 100 percent complete until Contractor has completed
the physical check out and inspection of the completed Work and has submitted the signed
inspection form to Engineer.
C. Earned value is derived from the current status of Contractor Construction Schedule as
determined by the monthly schedule status submittals. Each schedule status submittal is
reviewed and approved by Engineer prior to Contractor obtaining approval for the Summary
of Earned Values or quantities installed and the Application for Payment.
1.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Submit application for payment on Owner’s form and be certified by signature of an
Authorized Officer of Contractor.
B. The Application for Payment shall contain all necessary references and attachments that
substantiate the invoice for progress payment (e.g., certified payrolls, labor reports, progress
schedule data, and Summary of Earned Values). It shall substantiate the invoice for progress
payment and shall be preceded or accompanied by the schedule and status data as a condition
of payment, in accordance with the Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Values.
1.4 REVIEWS/APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT
A. Review meetings between Contractor and Engineer will be held weekly and within 7 Days
prior to the payment application date designated by Engineer. Three Days prior to the last
review meeting of the month, submit an updated schedule and a signed application for
payment showing a Summary of Earned Values for the reporting and payment period so that
Engineer can compare earned values to available status data. Make any adjustments to the

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 20 00 - 5
Master Record Documents, updated schedule, and payment applications required by
Engineer. Upon completion of the adjustments, Engineer will sign the payment request and
forward it to Owner. Engineer will determine payment amounts if agreement with
Contractor is not reached.
1.5 PAYMENT FOR SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS
A. Payment based on the actual cost of supplies, materials and equipment on hand shall be made
by Owner with or without a paid invoice. "Actual cost" of materials shall be the invoice
amount, whether paid or not, and shall not include any costs associated with installation,
testing, etc. Contractor shall be entitled to payment of the actual cost of supplies, materials,
and equipment only if it (1) presents an invoice to Owner with the application for payment
and (2) states in the application for payment that the materials have been delivered and
stored in the time and manner specified in the contract between Contractor and his Supplier
or Subcontractor. If Contractor fails to comply with those conditions, Owner may withhold
payment in accordance with the provisions. Owner expressly reserves the right to withhold
retention until Contractor presents to Owner a paid invoice, or some other proof of payment
satisfactory to Owner, for Owner’s use in verifying the accuracy of the actual cost of the
supplies, materials or equipment. If the amount paid does not match the actual cost, Owner
will adjust the amount of retention accordingly. Payment for supplies, materials or
equipment on hand does not alter the responsibility of Contractor for all supplies, materials
and equipment until Final Acceptance of the Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 20 00 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND
SUBSTITUTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 25 10 - 1
SECTION 01 25 10
PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, ANDSUBSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for delivery and storage of
products and materials specified for use in the Project. It also includes requirements for
handling requests for equals and substitutions made after award of the Contract.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 32 00 – Electronic Project Management System
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions in this Article are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used in the
Contract Documents, including "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes," "accessories,"
"furnishings," “special construction," and similar terms, which are self-explanatory and have
recognized meanings in the construction industry.
B. The word "Products," as used herein, is defined to include purchased items for incorporation
into the Work, regardless of whether specifically purchased for the Project or taken from
stock of previously purchased products.
C. The word "Materials," is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped,
worked, mixed, finished, refined, or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed, or applied to
form units of work.
D. The word "Equipment" is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether
motorized or manually operated, and particularly including products with service
connections (wiring, piping, and other like items).
E. Neither "Products" nor "Materials" nor "Equipment" includes machinery and equipment used
for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, provide products,
materials, and equipment of a singular generic kind from a single source.
B. Compatibility of Options: Where more than one choice is available as options for selection of
a product, material, or equipment, select an option, which is compatible with other products,
materials, or equipment. Compatibility is a basic general requirement of product, material,
and equipment selections.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND
SUBSTITUTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 25 10 - 2
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Delivery and Acceptance
1. Deliver and store products, materials, and equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's written recommendations and by methods and means which will
prevent damage, deterioration, and loss including theft.
2. Manage delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage of products at Site and
overcrowding of construction spaces. Ensure coordination to minimize holding or
storage times for flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive materials to
deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss.
B. Transportation and Handling
1. Transport products by methods to avoid damage. Deliver in undamaged condition in
manufacturer's unopened containers and packaging.
2. Furnish equipment and personnel to handle products, materials, and equipment,
including those provided by Owner, by methods to prevent soiling and damage.
3. Provide additional protection during handling to prevent marring and otherwise
damaging products, packaging, and surrounding surfaces.
C. Storage and Protection
1. Products shall be stored in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
with seals and labels intact and legible. Sensitive products shall be stored in weather-
tight climate-controlled enclosures and temperature and humidity ranges shall be
maintained within tolerances required by manufacturer's recommendations.
2. For exterior storage of fabricated products, products shall be placed on sloped
supports above ground. Products subject to deterioration shall be covered with
impervious sheet covering and ventilation shall be provided to avoid condensation.
3. Loose granular materials shall be stored on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area
and shall be prevented from mixing with foreign matter.
4. Storage shall be arranged to provide access for inspection. Periodically inspect to
assure products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.
5. Storage shall be arranged in a manner to provide access for maintenance of stored
items and for inspection.
D. Maintenance of Storage
1. Periodically inspect stored products on a scheduled basis. Maintain a log of
inspections and make the log available on request.
2. Comply with manufacturer's product storage requirements and recommendations.
3. Maintain manufacturer-required environmental conditions continually.
4. Ensure that surfaces of products exposed to the elements are not adversely affected
and that weathering of finishes does not occur.
5. For mechanical and electrical equipment, provide a copy of the manufacturer's
service instructions with each item and the exterior of the package shall contain
notice that instructions are included.
6. Service products on a regularly scheduled basis. Maintain a log of services and submit
as a record document prior to acceptance by Owner in accordance with the Contract
Documents.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND
SUBSTITUTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 25 10 - 3
1.6 PROPOSED SUBSTITUTIONS AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS
A. Substitution and “or equal” determination shall be submitted and evaluated per the General
Conditions included in the Contract Documents.
B. When proposing a substitution, transmit all documents to Engineer in electronic format
(single PDF), via web-based construction management software as specified in Section 01 32
00 – Electronic Project Management System.
C. Unless otherwise provided by law or authorized in writing by Engineer, submit the
"Substitution Request Form(s)" within 35 days after award of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRODUCTS, MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, AND
SUBSTITUTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 25 10 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CE1006 PAGE 1
REV 10/00

SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

To: Project:
Date:
Owner:

Specified Item:

Section Page Paragraph Description

The undersigned requests consideration of the following:

Proposed Substitution:

Attached data includes product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate
for evaluation of the request. Applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.

The undersigned states that the following paragraphs, unless modified on attachments, are correct:

1. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings and will not require a change in any of the
Contract Documents.

2. The undersigned will pay for changes to the design, including engineering design, detailing, and construction costs
caused by the request substitution which is estimated to be $ .

3. The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other contractors, the construction schedule (specifically
the date of substantial completion), or specified warranty requirements.

4. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.

5. The incorporation or use of the substitute in connection with the work is not subject to payment of any license fee or
royalty.

The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or
superior to the specified item.

Submitted by Contractor: Reviewed by Engineer:
Firm: ☐ Accepted as Submitted ☐ Accepted as Noted
By: ☐ Not Accepted ☐ Received too Late
Signature: By:
Telephone: Title:
Attachments: Date:
Comments: Comments:

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 26 13 - 1
SECTION 01 26 13
REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes procedures for submitting Requests for Interpretation (RFI) and limitations
on use of RFI to obtain interpretation and clarification.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 25 10 – Products, Materials, Equipment, and Substitutions.
B. Section 01 32 00 – Electronic Project Management System.
C. Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Request for Interpretation: A document submitted to Engineer by Contractor, requesting
clarification of a portion of the Contract Documents, hereinafter referred to as an RFI.
1.4 CONTRACTOR’S REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
A. Contractor's Requests for Interpretation (RFI): Should Contractor be unable to determine
from the Contract Documents, the exact material, process, or system to be installed; or when
the elements of construction are required to occupy the same space (interference); or when
an item of Work is described differently at more than one place in the Contract Documents;
request that Engineer make an interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents
to resolve such matters. Comply with procedures specified herein to make Requests for
Interpretation (RFI).
B. Submission of RFI: Prepare RFI and submit electronically utilizing the Electronic Project
Management System. Refer to Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
1. Fill in transmittal form completely, and if supplemental drawings or other
information is prepared by hand, it shall be fully legible and attached with the
transmittal form.
2. The Project Management System will automatically assign each RFI a discrete,
consecutive number. Include this number in the title of the RFI. For instance,
Revision #1 to RFI 029 should be noted in the title as “original title name, Rev 1”.
3. Each page of the RFI and each attachment to the RFI shall bear Owner’s project name,
project number, date, RFI number and a descriptive title. Merge all into a single PDF
document for attachment in the system.
4. Clearly and concisely set forth the issue for which clarification or interpretation is
sought and why a response is needed. In the RFI, indicate presumed interpretation
or understanding of the requirement along with reasons for such understanding.
Include proposed solutions that may be set forth to complete the Work with
associated cost and schedule impact, if any.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 26 13 - 2
5. Engineer will review all RFI to determine whether they are RFI within the meaning of
the term. If Engineer determines that the transmittal is not an RFI, it will be returned,
unreviewed as to content, for resubmittal in the proper manner.
6. Frivolous RFI or simply passing on the RFI without first vetting the RFI will be subject
to reimbursement from Contractor to Owner for fees charged by Engineer and other
design professionals engaged by Owner.
C. Subcontractor-Initiated and Supplier-Initiated RFI: RFI from subcontractors and material
suppliers shall be submitted through, be reviewed by, and be attached to an RFI prepared,
signed, and submitted by Contractor. RFI submitted directly by subcontractors or material
suppliers will be returned unanswered to Contractor.
1. Review all subcontractor- and supplier-initiated RFI and take actions to resolve
issues of coordination, sequencing, and layout of the Work. Coordination of the work,
sequence, and layout are not the responsibility of Owner or Engineer.
2. RFI submitted to request clarification of issues related to means, methods,
techniques, and sequences of construction or for establishing trade jurisdictions and
scopes of subcontracts will be returned without interpretation. Such issues are solely
Contractor's responsibility.
D. Requested Interpretation: Carefully study the Contract Documents to ensure that
information sufficient for interpretation of requirements of the Contract Documents is not
included therein. RFI that request interpretation of requirements clearly indicated in the
Contract Documents will be returned without interpretation.
1. In all cases in which RFI are issued to request clarification of issues related to means,
methods, techniques and sequences of construction; for example, pipe and duct
routing, clearances, specific locations of Work shown diagrammatically, apparent
interferences and similar items, furnish all information required for Engineer or
Owner to analyze and/or understand the circumstances causing the RFI and prepare
a clarification or direction as to how to proceed.
2. If information included with this type of RFI is insufficient, the RFI will be returned
unanswered.
E. Unacceptable Uses for RFI: RFI shall not be used to request the following:
1. Approval of submittals (use procedure specified in Section 01 33 20 - Submittal
Procedures).
2. Approval of substitutions (refer to Section 01 25 10 – Products, Materials, Equipment
and Substitutions).
3. Changes that entail change in Contract Time and Contract Sum (comply with
provisions of the Contract General Conditions).
4. Different methods of performing Work than those indicated in the Contract Drawings
and Specifications (comply with provisions of the Contract General Conditions).
F. Disputed Requirements: If Engineer’s response to an RFI is believed to cause a change to the
requirements of the Contract Documents, immediately give written notice to Engineer stating
why this is believed to be true. Failure to give such written notice immediately shall waive
any right to seek additional time or compensation under the Contract.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 26 13 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFI)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 26 13 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SCHEDULE OF VALUES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 29 73 - 1
SECTION 01 29 73
SCHEDULE OF VALUES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. This Section defines the process whereby the Schedule of Values shall be developed and
incorporated into the Construction Progress Schedule as specified in Section 01 32 16 –
Construction Progress Schedule. Monthly progress payment amounts shall be determined
from the weekly progress updates of the scheduled activities. The schedule of values shall,
as a minimum, list the value of every activity on the schedule, and shall include such
additional breakdowns as required herein. The values in the Schedule of Values do not
establish a commitment by either Contractor or Owner when negotiating changes to the
Contract Documents.
1.2 DETAILED SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Prepare and submit a detailed Schedule of Values to Engineer as part of the Construction
Progress Schedule submittal. Because the ultimate requirement is to develop a detailed
Schedule of Values sufficient to determine appropriate monthly progress payment amounts,
sufficient detailed breakdown shall be provided to meet this requirement. The Schedule of
Values shall have a one-to-one relationship to the work activities of the Construction Progress
Schedule even though additional detailed breakdowns for the Schedule of Values may be
required. Engineer will be the sole judge of acceptable breakdowns, details, and descriptions
of the values established. If, in the opinion of Engineer, a greater number of Schedule of
Values items than proposed is necessary, add the additional items so identified.
B. The minimum details of a breakdown of the major Work components are indicated below.
Provide greater detail when directed by Engineer.
1. Mobilization: Six percent of Contract Price..
2. Construction Progress Schedule shall be broken down by initial submittal and
monthly updates.
3. Break down Civil site Work into roadways/driveways, individual drainage systems,
site concrete, paving, excavation cut and fill, clearing and grubbing and any other
items determined to be necessary for the establishment of pay and activity items.
4. Break down concrete structures into excavation, subgrade preparation, and
appurtenant pre-foundation Work, concrete foundation construction, slabs on grade,
walls, etc. (provide sufficient breakdown to accommodate necessary schedule detail.
5. Break down mechanical Work to identify individual piping systems, equipment
installation by equipment name and number, and equipment testing and checkout.
6. Break down purchase price and installation of the Onsite Sodium Hypochlorite
Generation System.
7. Break down electrical and Instrumentation Work to identify individual systems,
equipment installation by equipment name and number, and equipment testing and
checkout.
8. Break down protective coating Work by system. Where specific coating Work may be
critical to performing the Work to meet milestone and schedule dates, such Work
shall be included as individual pay and activity items.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SCHEDULE OF VALUES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 29 73 - 2
9. Break down utility relocation Work into individual pipelines running from and to
termination points. Each pipeline shall be an individual pay item unless otherwise
allowed by the Engineer.
10. Break down Contractor Services to identify costs associated with handling/storage
versus installation of Owner furnished equipment.
11. Operations and Maintenance (O & M) Manuals shall be broken down into one O & M
Manual per piece of equipment or one O & M Manual per group of like-kind pieces of
equipment for establishment of pay and schedule activity items.
12. Break down all other Work not specifically included in the above items as necessary
for establishment of pay and schedule activity items.
C. After submittal of the Schedule of Values, as part of the Construction Progress Schedule
submittal, meet with Engineer and jointly review the schedules. Review the value allocations
and extent of detail to determine any necessary adjustments to the values and to determine
if sufficient detail has been proposed. Make adjustments deemed necessary to the value
allocation or level of detail and submit a revised detailed Schedule of Values within 5 work
days from receipt of comments from Engineer.
1.3 CHANGES TO SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. Assign values, approved by Engineer, for changes to the Construction Schedule which add
activities not included in the original Construction Schedule but are included in the original
Work (schedule omissions). Reduce other activity values to provide equal value adjustment
increases for added activities as approved by Engineer.
B. If Contractor and Engineer agree to adjust the original Schedule of Values because of
inequities discovered in the original accepted detailed Schedule of Values, increases, and
equal decreases to values for activities may be made. Engineer may direct changes to the
schedule when inequities are discovered and agreement on the reallocation cannot be
achieved.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SAFETY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 31 30 - 1
SECTION 01 31 30
SAFETY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contractor’s safety program shall conform to the requirements specified in the General
Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. For the purposes of this Section, an “active construction area” is any area where construction
activities are occurring, or construction activities could be considered a potential hazard to
people.
B. A “Designated Safety Officer” or “Safety Representative” for the purposes of this Contract,
means anyone who can identify the existing and predictable hazards in the areas surrounding
a construction project or those working conditions at a construction project that are
unsanitary or dangerous to employees. A “Designated Safety Officer” has the authority to
make prompt corrective measures to eliminate those hazards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Demonstrate compliance action with the stipulations of Utah Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA), Mine Safety and Health Administration (MSHA), and other applicable
local, state, and federal safety requirements by submitting to Engineer a copy of all safety
plans, programs, and permits. Such plans and programs shall include, but are not limited to:
1. Hazard Analysis Prior to Major Activities (job safety analysis, JSA).
2. Emergency Plan.
3. Rigging and Hoisting Plans.
4. Excavation and Trenching Plans.
5. Respiratory Protection Program.
6. Fire Protection Plan.
7. Confined Space Entry Program.
8. Electrical Safety (drop cords, temporary power, GFCI’s, etc.)
9. Lock Out/Tag Out.
10. Fall Protection.
11. Heavy Equipment Operations.
12. Burning and Welding Operations.
13. Training Plan.
14. Project Site Rules and Regulations (hazard protection plan).
15. Material Handling (storage-disposal).
16. Fuel Storage and Refueling.
17. Hazard Communication/Right to Know.
18. Subcontractor Requirements.
19. Ventilation.
20. Personal Protective Equipment (hearing, eye, face).
21. Power Transmission/Distribution (temporary and/or permanent).

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SAFETY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 31 30 - 2
22. Environmental Controls.
23. Safety Meetings.
24. Spill Control Plan.
25. First Aid Facilities.
B. Engineer’s receipt of safety plans or programs will not relieve Contractor in any way from the
full and complete responsibility for safety and training of its personnel, and the onsite
personnel of Owner, Engineer, and other visitors to areas of active construction areas. Daily,
inform Engineer of changes to the boundaries of the active construction areas.
C. Be responsible for safety training all personnel who will have access to the active
construction areas to meet state, federal, local and Contractor requirements. Maintain
reasonable, regularly scheduled training sessions in mutually accessible facilities through
entire Contract. Training costs for all personnel and visitors, except those costs associated
with training personnel of Contractor, subcontractors, suppliers, and visitors will be
considered incidental to other lump-sum portions of the Work and no additional
compensation for such training will be provided.
D. Safety Program Requirements:
1. Safety Representative Requirements:
a. Assign a full-time Safety Representative as defined in the General Conditions
of the Contract.
b. The Safety Representative’s duties and responsibilities will be hazard
recognition, accidents prevention, new employee orientation (including
subcontractors), and the maintaining and supervising of safety precautions
and program. This person shall have no other duties. The Safety
Representative or a qualified and approved deputy shall be onsite at all times
while Work is ongoing.
c. Qualifications of the Safety Representative and assigned deputies shall be
submitted to Engineer for review. Acceptance of their qualifications by
Engineer is required prior to the start of any activity on the Project. The
Safety Representative will, as a minimum, meet the requirements of
regulations for the Utah Occupational Safety & Health Enforcement Program.
2. Hazardous Substances:
a. Provide Engineer with a list of all hazardous substances anticipated to be
brought on-site.
b. Maintain on site Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) prior to arrival of any
hazardous substances on the Project.
c. Use storage area(s) as outlined in the spill control plan.
3. Job Safety Analysis (JSA):
a. Outline the sequence of the Work, equipment to be used, identify hazards that
may exist or may be created and what procedures and/or safety equipment
will be used to eliminate or reduce these hazards. A Scope of Work JSA shall
be prepared and provided to the Engineer prior to the start of unusual,
hazardous, or have risk potential activities on the Project. The name of the
competent person assigned to this activity will be included on the JSA.
b. Complete a JSA for any activity, which may be of an unusual nature or involves
unique hazards.
4. Reports
a. Provide to Engineer copies of Contractor’s and subcontractor’s:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SAFETY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 31 30 - 3
1) First aid, recordable, lost time and near miss, monthly logs.
2) OSHA 200 injury log (annually).
3) Safety meeting reports and topics (weekly).
4) List of competent persons as required by OSHA and the Project Health
and Safety Manual for each required task and their qualification as
such.
5) Injury and accident reports will be submitted to Engineer within 24
hours of any incident. Immediate notification to Engineer of an
accident is required. Full cooperation with Engineer in accident
investigation is required.
b. Conduct weekly safety inspections. Corrective actions shall be taken within
24 hours to address all deficiencies identified during inspections. Deficiency
reports shall be prepared and submitted to Engineer within 48 hours
indicating corrective actions taken. Failure to comply with required
corrective measures identified in the safety inspection will result in the
delayed signing of the monthly application for progress payment by Engineer.
c. Provide Engineer with a report of any periodic audit of Contractor’s safety
performance and/or records.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SAFETY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 31 30 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 32 16 - 1
SECTION 01 32 16
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Employ a bar chart schedule for the planning and scheduling of all Work required under the
Contract Documents.
B. In addition to the scheduling aspect, the same chart shall show an “S” curve for scheduled
dollar expenditures versus time.
C. In the process of preparing baseline schedule and monthly updates, consult with all key
subcontractors and suppliers to assure concurrence with the feasibility and achievability of
planned start dates, sequencing, durations, and completion dates.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 20 00 – Measurement and Payment
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Demonstrate competence through the submission of a fully compliant Construction Progress
Schedule with the initial schedule submission. Upon failure to so demonstrate competence
in scheduling, Engineer may direct Contractor to employ the services of a scheduler that can
demonstrate competence. Comply with such directives.
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Submittal Requirements
1. Submit Construction Progress Schedule on a standard drawing sheet, size 24 inches
by 36 inches.
2. The time scale (horizontal) shall be in weeks. The activities shall be listed on the left-
hand side (vertical).
3. Break down activities into sufficient detail to show all work activities. The listing
from top to bottom shall be in a logical manner of which the Work will be
accomplished. Provide space between activities or within bars to allow for marking
of actual progress.
4. Provide a written narrative of the planning logic along with a description of Work and
quantities included in each activity of the bar chart schedule.
5. Duration: The duration indicated for each activity shall be in units of whole working
days and shall represent the single best time considering the scope of the Work and
resources planned for the activity, including time for holidays and inclement weather.
The calendar for the network shall be in calendar days. Except for certain non-labor
activities, such as curing concrete or delivering materials, activity durations shall not
exceed 14 days, be less than one day, nor exceed $ 50,000 in value unless otherwise
accepted by Engineer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 32 16 - 2
B. Time of Submittals
1. Submit the bar chart schedule with “S” curves and narrative within fifteen (15)
working days after Notice to Proceed for review by Engineer. The schedule submitted
shall indicate a project completion date the same as the contract completion date.
2. Submit a copy of the schedule, clearly showing progress made and actual “S” curves,
on a two or four week basis depending on the duration of the project and reporting
time agreed to in the preconstruction meeting.
C. Acceptance
1. The bar chart schedule and “S” curves, when accepted by Engineer, constitute the
Construction Progress Schedule unless a revised schedule is required due to one or
more of the following:
a. Substantial changes in the Work scope.
b. A change in Contract time.
c. Delinquency by Contractor that requires a recovery schedule.
2. Owner’s review and acceptance of the Construction Progress Schedule is for
conformance to the requirements of the Contract Documents only. Review and
acceptance by Owner of Contractor’s Construction Progress Schedule does not relieve
Contractor of any of its responsibility whatsoever for the accuracy or feasibility of the
Construction Progress Schedule, or of Contractor’s ability to meet interim milestone
dates and the Contract completion date, nor does such review and acceptance
expressly or impliedly warrant, acknowledge, or admit the reasonableness of the
logic and durations of the Construction Progress Schedule.
1.5 SCHEDULE UPDATES
A. The Construction Progress Schedule shall be updated to reflect the as-built conditions of the
Work and to accurately forecast the status of incomplete activities. Provide progress reports
at each weekly progress meeting, stating actual percent earned versus percent planned.
Submit Construction Progress Schedule updates to Engineer with each payment request,
including approved changes in the Work and accurately depicting the current status and
sequence of all activities.
B. Submit the updated Construction Progress Schedule in the form, sequence, and number of
copies requested for the initial schedule.
C. Engineer will review each submitted Construction Progress Schedule update and provide
comments within seven days of the submittal. Revise and resubmit the schedule within five
days of receipt of comments from Engineer. Engineer will review the re-submittal within five
days and provide comments if the schedule update is still unacceptable. Revise and resubmit
the schedule within five days of receipt of comments from Engineer.
1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS AND LOOK-AHEAD SCHEDULES
A. For the weekly progress meetings, submit a look-ahead schedule. This schedule will cover
four weeks: the immediate past week, the current week, and the forthcoming two weeks. List
all activities from the accepted Construction Progress Schedule, which are complete, are
scheduled for Work during the period, are currently planned to be worked, even if out of
sequence, and Work which is unfinished but scheduled to be finished. Provide actual start

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 32 16 - 3
and completion dates for the Work that has been completed the prior week. Forecast early
start and early finish dates for the Work that is in process or upcoming.
B. Identify each activity noted above by activity number corresponding to the accepted
Construction Progress Schedule and detailed description of the activity.
C. Deliver the look-ahead schedule to Engineer 24 hours prior to the weekly progress meeting
in a format approved by Engineer.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE REVISIONS
A. Engineer may direct and, if so directed, Contractor shall propose, revisions to the
Construction Progress Schedule upon occurrence of any of the following instances:
1. The actual physical progress of the Work falls more than five percent (5%) behind the
accepted Construction Progress Schedule, as demonstrated by comparison to the
accepted monthly Construction Progress Schedule updates or as determined by
Engineer if a current accepted Construction Progress Schedule does not exist.
2. Engineer considers milestone or completion dates to be in jeopardy because of
“activities behind schedule”. “Activities behind schedule” are all activities that have
not or cannot be started or completed by the dates shown in the Construction
Progress Schedule.
3. A Change Order has been issued that changes, ads, or deletes scheduled activities , or
affects the time for completion of scheduled activities.
B. When instances requiring revision to the Construction Progress Schedule occur, submit the
proposed revised Construction Progress Schedule within ten (10) working days after
receiving direction from Engineer to provide such schedule. No additional payment will be
made for preparation and submittal of proposed revised Construction Progress Schedules.
However, if Engineer accepts the proposed revised Construction Progress Schedule, it shall
replace and supersede all previous Construction Progress Schedules and substitute for the
next monthly Construction Progress Schedule update that would otherwise be required.
C. Revisions to the Construction Progress Schedule shall comply with all the same requirements
applicable to the original schedule.
1.8 SCHEDULE RECOVERY
A. If a revised Construction Progress Schedule accepted by Engineer requires additional
manpower, equipment, hours of work or work shifts, or to accelerate procurement of
materials or equipment, or any combination thereof, as schedule recovery measures to meet
Contract milestones, implement such schedule recovery measures without additional charge
to Owner.
1.9 EARLY COMPLETION SCHEDULES
A. Early completion schedules are generally not acceptable to Owner but may be accepted as a
convenience to Contractor and under the following conditions.
1. Submit a specific written request outlining the specific reasons for using the early
completion schedule.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 32 16 - 4
2. Acknowledge and agree in writing that the proposed reduction in time represents
Project time already paid for by Owner as part of the Bid Price, and available to both
Contractor and Owner for the mitigation of impacts to the Project from any source.
Contractor is not entitled to any increase in Contract price for failure to achieve the
early completion and waives all claim to same.
3. Early completion schedules shall not be based upon or rely on expedited approvals
by Owner or Engineer.
4. Early completion schedules must meet all other requirements of the Contract.
B. Revise early completion schedules, which have activities behind schedule, when and as
requested by Engineer.
1.10 BASIS OF SCHEDULE NARRATIVES
A. Furnish a basis of schedule narrative to Engineer with each Application for Payment. If the
Work falls behind schedule, submit additional narrative at such intervals as Engineer may
request.
B. In each narrative, include a summary of progress for the month, description of any current
and anticipated delaying factors, a variance analysis for varying activities, impacts on the
construction schedule, and proposed corrective actions. Any Work reported complete, but
which is not readily apparent to Engineer, must be substantiated with satisfactory evidence.
C. In each narrative, include a list of the activities completed during the preceding month and a
list of the activities started during the month but not yet completed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 1
SECTION 01 33 20
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required in
performance of the Work, including shop drawings, schedules, surveys, reports, samples,
plans, lists, drawings, documents, warranties, certifications, findings, programs, manuals,
data sheets, or any other item of information required by the Contract Documents to be
submitted in accomplishing the Work.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Action Submittal: Written and graphic information submitted by Contractor that requires
Engineer’s approval for inclusion in the Work.
B. Deferred Submittal: Information in accordance with the applicable Building Code, submitted
by Contractor for portions of the design that are to be submitted to permitting agency after
the time of permit application and prior to installation of that portion of Work. Deferred
Submittals must include Engineer’s review documentation stating that submittal has been
found to be in general conformance with overall Project design.
C. Informational Submittal: Information submitted by Contractor to represent compliance with
Contract Requirements included in the Work, but which are not part of the Work itself.
Informational Submittals must be submitted to Engineer for information and for
determination that submitted information is in accordance with Contract requirements.
D. Shop Drawing: The term “Shop Drawing” as used herein shall be understood to include detail
design calculations, shop drawings, fabrication and installation drawings, erection drawings,
lists, graphs, and similar items.
E. PDF: Abbreviation for “Portable Document Format”, used for transmittal of electronic
documents.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Whenever submittals are required hereunder, transmit all documents to Engineer in
electronic format, via web-based construction management software as specified in Section
00 73 00 – Supplementary Conditions. Contact information for the web-based project
management software is as follows:

Brian Mecham, P.E.
Bowen Collins & Associates
[e-mail]
Office: [phone]
Cell: [phone]

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 2
B. Be responsible for the accuracy, completeness, and coordination of all submittals. Do not
delegate this responsibility in whole or in part to any subcontractor. Submittals may be
prepared by Contractor, subcontractor, or supplier, but Contractor shall ascertain that each
submittal meets the requirements of the Contract and the Project. Ensure that there is no
conflict with other submittals and notify Engineer in each case where a submittal may affect
the work of another contractor or Owner.
C. Coordination
1. Ensure coordination of submittals of related crafts and subcontractors.
2. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of
construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently ahead of performance of
related construction activities to avoid delay.
3. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the
Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently
for coordination. Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal
requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.
4. Carefully review all submittals prior to submission. Sign and date each transmittal
with a direct statement acknowledging that the equipment or material in the
submittal meets all the requirements specified or shown in the Contract Documents
without exception. No consideration or review of any submittals will be made for any
items, which have not been so certified. All non-certified submittals will be returned
without action taken, and any delays caused thereby shall be the total responsibility
of Contractor. Submittals which cannot bear this certification because they contain
an exception or deviation to the Contract Documents shall be so noted in the
electronic transmittal and shall only be submitted in accordance with Section 01 25
10 – Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
D. Processing: Allow sufficient review time so that installation will not be delayed because of
the time required to process submittals, including time for resubmittals.
1. Except as may otherwise be indicated herein, Engineer will return each submittal,
with comments noted thereon, within 30 calendar days following receipt by Engineer.
2. For resubmittal, Engineer will be allowed the same review period as for the original
submittal.
3. It is considered reasonable that Contractor will make a complete and acceptable
submittal to Engineer by the second submission of an item. Owner reserves the right
to withhold monies due Contractor to cover additional costs of any review beyond the
second submittal.
4. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent
submittals. Engineer will promptly advise Contractor when a submittal being
processed must be delayed for coordination.
5. If an intermediate submittal is necessary, process the same as the initial submittal.
6. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized resulting from non-compliant
submittals or failure to transmit submittals to Engineer sufficiently in advance of the
Work to permit processing.
7. If an incomplete submittal is made, the submittal may be returned without review. A
complete submittal will contain sufficient data to demonstrate that the items
contained therein comply with the Contract Documents, meet the minimum
requirements for submittals as described in the Contract Documents, and include all
corrections as required from previous submittals.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 3
E. Submittal Schedule
1. Within 30 days of the Notice to Proceed, submit a complete list of anticipated
submittals, which includes Specification and Drawing references.
a. Coordinate submittal schedule with any subcontracts, schedule of values, the
list of products, and Contractor’s construction schedule.
b. Prepare schedule in chronological order.
c. Update the list with “early start” submittal dates within 15 days of submittal
of the Construction Progress Schedule.
d. Update submittal dates whenever the schedule is updated and include any
additional submittals identified after the initial submittal in the updates.
F. Unsolicited Submittals: Unsolicited submittals may be returned without being reviewed.
G. Changes in Work: Changes in the Work will not be authorized by submittal review actions.
No review action, implicit or explicit, will be interpreted to authorize changes in the Work.
Changes will only be authorized by separate written direction from Owner, in accordance
with the General Conditions.
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data:
1. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or
system. Product Data includes printed information such as manufacturer's
installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams
and templates, standard wiring diagrams and performance curves. Where Product
Data must be specially prepared because standard published data is not suitable for
use, submit as "Shop Drawings."
2. Mark each data sheet to show applicable choices and options pertinent to the Project.
Where printed Product Data includes information on several products, some of which
are not required for the Project, mark the data sheets to indicate the applicable
information. Include the following information:
a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations.
b. Compliance with recognized trade association standards.
c. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards.
d. Application of testing agency labels and seals.
e. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.
f. Notation of coordination requirements.
3. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract
Documents has been confirmed.
B. Samples
1. Whenever in the Specifications, samples are required, submit not less than 3 samples
of each item or material to Engineer for acceptance at no additional cost to Owner.
2. Submit full-size, fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and
physically identical with the material or product proposed. Samples include partial
sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials,
color range sets, and swatches showing color, texture, and pattern.
3. Submit samples for acceptance, a minimum of 21 days prior to ordering such material
for delivery to the jobsite. Submit in an orderly sequence so that dependent materials
or equipment can be assembled and reviewed without causing delays in the Work.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 4
4. Transmit a submittal as a single PDF document with list of samples via the web-based
project management software.
5. Individually and indelibly label and tag all samples to indicate all specified physical
characteristics and Manufacturer's name for identification. Upon receiving
acceptance by Engineer, one set of the samples will be stamped, dated, and returned.
One set of samples will be retained by Engineer, and one set of samples will remain
at the Project site until completion of the Work.
6. Unless indicated otherwise, all colors and textures of specified items presented in
sample submittals shall be from the manufacturer's standard colors and standard
materials, products, or equipment lines. If the samples represent non-standard
colors, materials, products, or equipment lines and their selection will require an
increase in Contract time or Price, clearly indicate this information in the submittal.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Wherever called for in the Contract Documents, or where required by Engineer,
transmit an electronic Shop Drawing Submittal to Engineer for review, using the web-
based project management software. Whenever required to submit design
calculations as part of a Submittal, such calculations shall bear the signature and seal
of a professional engineer registered in the appropriate discipline in the state of Utah
unless otherwise directed.
2. Organization
a. Prepare a single shop drawing submittal for each item or class of material or
equipment for which submittal is required. At a minimum, separate
submittals are required for different Specification Sections except as follows.
A single submittal covering multiple sections will not be accepted unless the
primary specification references other sections for components. Example: If
a pump section references other sections for the motor, protective coating,
anchor bolts, local control panel, and variable frequency drive, a single
submittal would be accepted; a single submittal covering vertical turbine
pumps and horizontal split case pumps would not be acceptable.
b. Index the components for the submittal and reference the specification
sections and paragraph numbers for all components in the description field
of the electronic submittal. Relate the submittal components to drawing
number, detail number, schedule title, or room number and building name, as
applicable.
c. Unless indicated otherwise, terminology and equipment names and numbers
used in submittals shall match the Contract Documents.
d. Engineer will assign a single review action to each submittal, which action
shall pertain to every part of the submittal as a whole.
e. Disorganized submittals, which do not meet the requirements specified
herein will be returned without review.
3. Format
a. Assemble submittals into a single PDF file for each transmittal. Except for
templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on
PDF sheets at least 8-1/2” x 11” and no larger than 36” X 48”
b. Where product data from a manufacturer is submitted, clearly mark which
model is proposed, with all pertinent data, capacities, dimensions, clearances,
diagrams, controls, connections, anchorage, and supports. Present sufficient
level of detail for assessment of compliance with the Contract Documents.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 5
c. Assign each Submittal a unique number, including the specification section
under which it is submitted. Number all submittals sequentially within the
applicable specification section. Original submittals will be assigned a
numeric submittal number. Resubmittals shall be numbered with a revision
number in addition to the original submittal number.
D. Engineer’s Action
1. If submittal is returned to Contractor marked “NO ACTION TAKEN”, indicating that
the submittal has been received and is being retained for record-keeping purposes.
Formal revision and resubmission of said submittal will not be required.
2. If submittal is returned to Contractor marked “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN”, formal
revision and resubmission of said Submittal will not be required and construction
may proceed.
3. If submittal is returned to the Contractor marked “MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED”,
formal revision and resubmission of said submittal will not be required but
construction must proceed according to the review comments included with the
submittal.
4. If submittal is returned marked “REVISE AND RESUBMIT”, revise said submittal and
resubmit. Construction may not proceed.
5. If submittal is returned marked “REJECTED-RESUBMIT”, revise said submittal and
resubmit. Construction may not proceed.
6. Resubmittal of portions of multi-page or multi-drawing submittals will not be
allowed. For example, if a Shop Drawing Submittal that consists of ten drawings
contains only one drawing that needs to be amended and resubmitted, the submittal
as a whole is deemed as “REVISE AND RESUBMIT”, and all ten drawings included in
the submittal are required to be resubmitted.
7. On resubmittals, flag any changes made, other than those made or requested by
Owner or Engineer.
E. Commence fabrication of an item only after Engineer has reviewed the pertinent submittals
and Engineer has assigned action as either “NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN” or “MAKE
CORRECTIONS NOTED”. Corrections indicated on submittals are considered as changes
necessary to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents and shall not be taken as the
basis for changes to the Contract requirements.
F. Owner’s and/or Engineer’s review of shop drawing submittals does not relieve Contractor of
the responsibility for correctness of details and dimensions and for compliance with the
Contract Documents. Assume responsibility and risk for misfits due to errors in submittals.
Be responsible for dimensions and design of adequate connections and details.
G. Deferred Design Submittals: Items noted on the Contract Documents as “Deferred
Submittals” must be submitted to Engineer, who will review them and forward them to the
building official with a notation indicating that the deferred submittal documents have been
reviewed and found to be in general conformance with the design of the Project. Do not install
Deferred Submittal items until the deferred submittal documents have been approved by the
permitting agency.
H. Test and Evaluation Reports: Submit technical data, test reports, calculations, surveys, and
certifications based on field tests and inspections by independent inspection and testing
agency and by authorities having jurisdiction.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 6
1. Reports of results of inspections and tests will not be considered Contract Documents.
2. Refer to Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control for additional requirements.
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE SUBMITTALS
A. At the preconstruction conference referred to in Section 01 11 00 - Summary of Work, submit
the following items to Engineer for review:
1. A preliminary schedule of Shop Drawings, Samples, and proposed Substitute
("Or-Equal") submittals listed in the Bid.
2. A list of all permits and licenses to be obtained, indicating the agency required to
grant the permit, the expected date of submittal for the permit, and required date for
receipt of the permit.
3. A preliminary Schedule of Values in accordance with Section 01 29 73 – Schedule of
Values.
4. A preliminary Construction Project Schedule in accordance with requirements of
Section 01 32 16 – Construction Progress Schedule.
5. The name and qualifications of the Designated Safety Representative in accordance
with requirements of Section 01 31 30 - Safety.
1.6 SITE CONDITION SURVEYS
A. Submit the site conditions survey data as required in Section 01 71 30 – Site Conditions
Surveys.
1.7 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS REPORTS
A. Transmit a progress report to Engineer with each Application for Payment. If the Work falls
behind schedule, submit additional progress reports at such intervals as Engineer may
request.
B. In each progress report, include sufficient narrative to describe any current and anticipated
delaying factors, effect on the construction schedule, and proposed corrective actions. Any
Work reported complete, but which is not readily apparent to Engineer, must be
substantiated with satisfactory evidence.
C. In each progress report, include a list of the activities completed with their actual start and
completion dates, a list of the activities currently in progress, and the number of working days
required to complete each.
1.8 SURVEY DATA
A. Make available for examination throughout the construction period, all field books, notes, and
other data developed while performing the surveys required by the Work and submit all such
data to Engineer with documentation required for final acceptance of the Work.
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE/QUALITY CONTROL PLAN
A. Prepare and submit a Quality Assurance/Quality Control Plan for the Work contained in the
Contract in accordance with Section 01 41 10 – Quality Control.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 7
1.10 CONTRACTOR DAILY REPORT
A. Submit to Engineer, or designee, a daily report. Upload report not later than 9:00 A.M. of the
workday following the report date and include the following:
1. Day of week, date, Contractor name and Report number.
2. Summary of work in process (segregated by Contractor and Subcontractor).
3. Details of work accomplished including quantities of Work installed.
4. Summary of equipment working and where working.
5. Summary of manpower by work element and Subcontractor.
6. Receipt of major equipment or materials.
7. All required testing performed and, if available, documented results.
8. Notification of percent of Work delayed by abnormal weather conditions.
9. Notification of percent of Work delayed by other utility conflicts or conditions.
1.11 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Manual
1. Submit technical operation and maintenance information for each item of mechanical,
electrical and instrumentation equipment in an organized manner in the Operations
and Maintenance Manual, written so that it can be used and understood by the
Owner’s operation and maintenance staff.
2. Furnish initial submittal of the Operations and Maintenance Manual to Engineer upon
delivery of the respective equipment.
3. Subdivide the Operations and Maintenance Manual first by Specification Section
number; second, by equipment item; and last, by "Part." Conform "Parts" to the
following (as applicable):
a. Part 1 – Equipment Summary:
1) Summary: In a summary table, indicate the equipment name,
equipment number, and process area in which the equipment is
installed.
2) Form: Furnish an Equipment Summary Form for each item of
mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment in the Work.
Fill in the relevant information on the form and include it in Part 1.
b. Part 2 – Operational Procedures:
1) Procedures: Include manufacturer-recommended procedures on the
following in Part 2:
a) Installation
b) Adjustment
c) Startup
d) Location of controls, special tools, equipment required, or
related instrumentation needed for operation
e) Operation procedures
f) Load changes
g) Calibration
h) Shutdown
i) Troubleshooting
j) Disassembly
k) Reassembly
l) Realignment
m) Testing to determine performance efficiency

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 8
n) Tabulation of proper settings for all pressure relief valves, low
and high- pressure switches, and other protection devices
o) List of all electrical relay settings including alarm and contact
settings
p) Lubrication.
c. Part 3 – Preventive Maintenance Procedures:
1) Procedures: Preventive maintenance procedures shall include all
manufacturer-recommended procedures to be performed on a
periodic basis, both by removing and replacing the equipment or
component, and by leaving the equipment in place.
2) Schedules: Include recommended frequency of preventive
maintenance procedures. Cover lubrication schedules, including
lubricant SAE grade, type, and temperature ranges.
d. Part 4 – Parts List:
1) Parts List: Furnish a complete parts list, including a generic
description and manufacturer's identification number for each part.
Include addresses and telephone numbers of the nearest supplier and
parts warehouse.
2) Drawings: Include cross-sectional or exploded view drawings with
the parts list.
e. Part 5 – Wiring Diagrams:
1) Diagrams: In this part, include complete internal and connection
wiring diagrams for electrical equipment items.
f. Part 6 – Shop Drawings:
1) Drawings: In this part, include approved shop or fabrication
drawings, complete with dimensions.
g. Part 7 – Safety:
1) Procedures: This part describes the safety precautions to be taken
when operating and maintaining the equipment or working near it.
h. Part 8 – Documentation:
1) Place all equipment warranties, affidavits, and certifications required
by the Technical Specifications in this part.
4. Transmit to Engineer, one copy of the Operations and Maintenance Manual in digital
format. In addition to the digital copy, furnish Engineer with four identical hard
copies of the Operations and Maintenance Manual. Each set shall consist of one or
more volumes, each of which shall be bound in a standard size, 3-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl
plastic hard cover binder suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder ring size shall not
exceed 2.5 inches. Prepare a table of contents indicating all equipment in the
manuals. Display the title of each volume on the cover and spine.
5. Submit Operations and Maintenance Manuals in final form, not later than the 75
percent of construction completion date. Correct all discrepancies found by Owner
or Engineer in the Operations and Maintenance Manual within 30 days from the date
of written notification.
6. Incomplete or unacceptable Operations and Maintenance Manuals at the 75 percent
construction completion point constitute sufficient justification to withhold the
amount stipulated in paragraph "Operations and Maintenance Manual Submittals" of
Section 01 70 10 – Project Closeout, from any monies due.
B. Certificates

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 9
1. When specified in individual specification sections, submit manufacturers'
certificates to Engineer for review as specified.
2. Submit in form of letter or company standard forms, signed by officer of
manufacturer.
3. Include the following with each certification
a. Project name and location.
b. Contractor's name and address.
c. Quantity and date or dates of shipment or delivery to which certificate
applies.
d. Manufacturer's name.
e. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.
Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as
appropriate.
f. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or product but
must be acceptable to Engineer.
C. Record Documents
1. Prepare and maintain one set of record documents at the Project Site per the
requirements of Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents. Submit to Engineer
at close of Project.
1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
A. Spare Parts: Submit list of spare parts information for all mechanical, electrical, and
instrumentation equipment. Include the current list price of each spare part. Limit the spare
parts list to those spare parts which each manufacturer recommends be maintained by
Owner in inventory at the plant site. Each manufacturer or supplier shall indicate the name,
address, and telephone number of its nearest outlet of spare parts to facilitate Owner in
ordering. Cross-reference all spare parts lists to the equipment numbers designated in the
Contract Documents. In addition to electronic submittal, bind the spare parts lists in standard
size, 3-ring, loose-leaf, vinyl plastic hard cover binders suitable for bookshelf storage. Binder
ring size not to exceed 2.5 inches.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 33 20 - 10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SECURITY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 35 53 - 1
SECTION 01 35 53
SECURITY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Protect the active construction areas of the Work, including all material, equipment, field
office trailers, and their contents from theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. For the purposes of this Section, an “active construction area” is any area where construction
activities are occurring, or construction activities could be considered a potential hazard to
people.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 01 57 19 – Temporary Environmental Controls
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Prior to performance of any work at the Project Site, submit to Engineer for record only, two
copies of the security plan commensurate with the needs of the Project, signed by officer of
Contractor. Be solely responsible for adequacy of the security plan.
B. Provide Engineer with drawing and data showing temporary fencing and gate locations, along
with materials to be used.
C. Provide Engineer with a list of 24-hour emergency phone numbers for Contractor personnel.
D. Submit to Engineer an updated progressive inventory of materials and equipment received
on-site.
E. Submit log of workmen and visitors to Project Site.
1.5 SECURITY PROGRAM
A. Protect Work and existing premises, including the field office trailers and their contents, from
theft, vandalism, and unauthorized entry during working and non-working hours.
B. Accept sole responsibility for Project Site security and protection of the Work.
C. Initiate the security program at job mobilization and maintain the security program
throughout construction period.
D. Limit lighting to basic safety and security requirements, and shield when possible.
E. Be responsible for the security of storage compound and lay down area, and for all plant
material, equipment, and tools always.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SECURITY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 35 53 - 2
F. Prohibit firearms for the Project Site.
G. Prohibit dogs from the Project Site, except for those clearly used for security purposes within
fenced areas.
H. Erect and maintain temporary security fencing as required to protect the Work, the Project
Site, and existing facilities on the Project Site. The location of all temporary security fencing
shall be approved in advance by Engineer.
1. Fence Height: 6 feet
2. Fence Material: chain link
I. Erect and maintain temporary tortoise-proof fencing as described in Section 01 57 19 –
Temporary Environmental Controls.
1.6 ENTRY CONTROL
A. Entry control shall not unreasonably limit the personnel of Owner, Engineer, and their
operations and maintenance groups from performing assigned duties. Temporary access
limitations will be identified to Engineer and the operations and maintenance groups at least
24 hours prior to such limitation.
B. Restrict entry of unauthorized persons and vehicles into Project Site.
C. Allow entry only to authorized persons with proper identification.
D. When requested by Owner, implement a security badge system for the Project Site, approved
by Owner.
E. Maintain a log of workmen and visitors and make log available to Owner on request. This log
shall be submitted to Engineer biweekly or as necessary.
F. Require all visitors to sign the visitor log acknowledgment of the project rules included in this
Section. A copy of the project rules shall be given to each visitor. Submit copies of these forms
to Engineer biweekly.
G. Contractor has the right to refuse access to the Project Site or require that a person or vehicle
be removed from the Project Site if found violating any of the project rules.
H. Give jobsite security orientation training to all affected employees, including subcontractor
employees. Employee participation in the security orientation shall be acknowledged by
their respective individual signatures affixed to an orientation roster.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PERMITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 41 26 - 1
SECTION 01 41 26
PERMITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Obtain permits required for the execution of Work in accordance with the Contract
Documents. Provide copies of these permits to Owner.
B. The intent of this Section is to furnish the known list of required permits for the Work under
the Contract Documents. Owner does not guarantee that this list is complete. Be responsible
for determining and verifying the extent of all permits required and for obtaining such
permits.
C. In the Bid Price, include costs for obtaining all necessary permits, including application fees
and other costs, and the costs of complying with the conditions of all permits. Any fees listed
in this section are estimates and are for information only. Verify and pay all actual fees.
D. Within 30 Days of the Limited Notice to Proceed, submit a list of all permits and licenses to
be obtained, indicating the agency required to grant the permit, the expected date of
submittal for the permit, and required date for receipt of the permit.
1.2 SUMMARY OF PERMITS TO BE OBTAINED BY CONTRACTOR
A. Obtain the following permits. Submit copies of these permits to Engineer and maintain copies
on-site. Comply with all conditions of the permits.
1. Utah Occupational Safety and Health Administration:
a. Construction Permit: Covers worker safety and health for all project features.
2. Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Water Quality:
a. UPDES General Permit for Construction Dewatering/Hydrostatic Testing of
Pipelines: Covers discharge waters associated with dewatering operations
and hydrostatic testing of pipelines.
1) Agency: Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of
Drinking Water
2) Contact Person: Harry Campbell
3) Telephone No.: [phone]
4) Email: [e-mail]
b. Notification of Chlorinated Water Discharge: This notification provides 30
days’ notice prior to disinfection of pipeline and discharge of pipeline and
discharge of chlorinated water.
3. Utah Division of Environmental Protection, Bureau of Water Pollution Control
a. Temporary Groundwater Discharge Permit is necessary if groundwater is
present.
4. Utah Division of Environmental Protection, General Storm Water Permit for
Construction Activities:
a. As a condition of contract award, sign a certification of agreement to comply
with the terms and conditions of the permit. Permit not required if area of
disturbance is less than one acre.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PERMITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 41 26 - 2
b. Agency and Contact Person:
1) Agency: Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of
Drinking Water
2) Contact Person: Tom Rushing
3) Address: 288 North 1460 West (Cannon Building) 3rd Floor, PO Box
144870, Salt Lake City, Utah 84114-4870
4) Telephone No.: [phone]
5) Email: [e-mail]
5. Utah State Division of Health:
a. Letter of Approval to Construct: Letter and Certificate are required for
construction and operations of a water supply system.
6. South Weber City
a. Building Permit. Other permits may be required such as Excavation or Traffic
Control.
1) Permits are processed through a third party.
2) General inquiry email: [e-mail]
1.3 SUMMARY OF PERMITS OBTAINED BY OWNER
A. The following permits have been or will be obtained by Owner for this Project. Verify and
comply with conditions of said permits.
1. Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of Drinking Water
a. Project Notification Form and Plan Review/Construction Approval
1) Agency: Utah Department of Environmental Quality, Division of
Drinking Water
2) Contact Person: Robert Hart
3) Telephone No.: [phone]
4) Email: [e-mail]
5)
PART 2 - MATERIALS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 42 13 - 1
SECTION 01 42 13
ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
A. Wherever in the Contract Documents, references are made to the standards, specifications,
or other published data of the various international, national, regional, or local organizations,
such organizations may be referred to by their acronym or abbreviation only. As a guide to
the reader, the following acronyms or abbreviations which may appear in the Contract
Documents shall have the meanings indicated herein.
1.2 ABBREVIATIONS
AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturer's Association
AAR Association of American Railroads
AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation
Officials
ACI American Concrete Institute
AFBMA Anti-Friction Bearing Manufacturer's Association, Inc.
AGA American Gas Association
AGMA American Gear Manufacturers Association
AI The Asphalt Institute
AIA American Institute of Architects
AISC American Institute of Steel Construction
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute
AITC American Institute of Timber Construction
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
ANSI American National Standards Institute, Inc.
APA American Plywood Association
API American Petroleum Institute
APWA American Public Works Association

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 42 13 - 2
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air
Conditioning Engineers
ASLE American Society of Lubricating Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASQC American Society for Quality Control
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineers
ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturer's Association
CGA Compressed Gas Association
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturer's Institute
CLSI Clinical and Laboratory Standards Institute
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
EIA Electronic Industries Association
ETL Electrical Test Laboratories
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
FM Factory Mutual System
FPL Forest Products Laboratory
HI Hydronics Institute
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
Officials
IBC International Building Code
ICC International Code Council
ICEA Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 42 13 - 3
IES Illuminating Engineering Society
IP Institute of Petroleum (London)
IPC Institute of Printed Circuits
ISA Instrument Society of America
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ITE Institute of Traffic Engineers
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association
MPTA Mechanical Power Transmission Association
MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society
MTI Marine Testing Institute
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturer's
NACE National Association of Corrosion Engineers
NBS National Bureau of Standards
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association
NFPA National Forest Products Association
NLGI National Lubricating Grease Institute
NSF NSF International
NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers Association
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PCA Portland Cement Association
PPI Plastics Pipe Institute
RWMA Resistance Welder Manufacturer's Association
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ABBREVIATIONS OF INSTITUTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 42 13 - 4
SAMA Scientific Apparatus Makers Association
SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association
SPI Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.
SPR Simplified Practice Recommendation
SSPC Society for Protective Coatings
SSPWC Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction
TIA Telecommunications Industry Association
UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
WEF Water Environment Federation
WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute, Inc.
WWPA Western Wood Products Association
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (WWPA)
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT REFERENCE STANDARDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 42 19 - 1
SECTION 01 42 19
REFERENCE STANDARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Titles of Sections and Paragraphs: Captions accompanying Specification Sections and
Paragraphs are for convenience of reference only, and do not form a part of the Specifications.
B. Applicable Publications: Whenever in these Specifications, references are made to published
specifications, codes, standards, or other requirements, it shall be understood that wherever
no date is specified, only the latest specifications, standards, or requirements of the
respective issuing agencies, which have been published as of the date that the Work is
advertised for bids, shall apply; except to the extent that said standards or requirements may
be in conflict with applicable laws, ordinances, or governing codes. No requirements set forth
herein or shown on the Drawings shall be waived because of any provision of, or omission
from, said standards or requirements.
C. Specialists, Assignments: In certain instances, Specification text requires (or implies) that
specific Work is to be assigned to specialists or expert entities, who must be engaged for the
performance of that Work. Such assignments shall be recognized as special requirements
with no choice or option. These requirements shall not be interpreted so as to conflict with
the enforcement of building codes and similar regulations governing the Work; also they are
not intended to interfere with local union jurisdiction settlements and similar
conventions. Such assignments are intended to establish which party or entity involved in a
specific unit of Work is recognized as "expert" for the indicated construction processes or
operations. Nevertheless, accept the final responsibility for fulfillment of the entire set of
contract requirements.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of the Specifications, all Work specified
herein shall conform to or exceed the requirements of applicable codes and the applicable
requirements of the following documents.
B. References herein to "Building Code", “Plumbing Code”, “Mechanical Code”, “Fuel Gas Code”,
or “Fire Code” shall mean the latest adopted version of the International Building Code (IBC),
the International Plumbing Code (IPC), the International Mechanical Code (IMC), the
International Fuel Gas Code (IFGC), and the International Fire Code (IFC) as published by the
International Code Council (ICC). Similarly, references to the "Uniform Mechanical Code" or
the "Uniform Plumbing Code" shall mean the Uniform Mechanical Code or the Uniform
Plumbing Code as published by the International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical
Officials (IAPMO) References to the "Electric Code" or "National Electric Code (NEC)" shall
mean the National Electric Code of the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). The
latest edition of any “building” code as approved by the Municipal Code and adopted by the
authority having jurisdiction, shall apply to the Work herein, including all addenda,
modifications, amendments, or other lawful changes thereto.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT REFERENCE STANDARDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 42 19 - 2
C. In case of conflict between codes, reference standards, Drawings and the other Contract
Documents, the most stringent requirements shall govern. Bring all conflicts to the attention
of Engineer for clarification and directions prior to ordering or providing any materials or
furnishing labor. Bid the most stringent requirements.
D. Construct the Work indicated herein in accordance with the requirements of the Contract
Documents and the referenced portions of those referenced codes, standards, and
specifications listed herein.
E. Applicable Standard Specifications: References in the Contract Documents to the "Standard
Specifications" shall mean the Manual of Standard Specifications (APWA), latest version.
F. References herein to "OSHA Regulations for Construction" shall mean Title 29, Part 1926,
Construction Safety and Health Regulations, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all
changes and amendments thereto.
G. References herein to "OSHA Standards" shall mean Title 29, Part 1910, Occupational Safety
and Health Standards, Code of Federal Regulations (OSHA), including all changes and
amendments thereto.
H. References herein to “UDOT Standards” shall mean Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction.
I. References herein to “MSHA Standards” shall mean Mine Safety and Health Administration
Standards, latest version.
1.3 REGULATIONS RELATED TO HAZARDOUS MATERIALS
A. Be responsible that all Work included in the Contract Documents, whether shown or not,
complies with all EPA, OSHA, RCRA, NFPA, and any other Federal, State, and Local Regulations
governing the storage and conveyance of hazardous materials, including petroleum products.
B. Where no specific regulations exist, all chemical, hazardous, and petroleum product piping
and storage in underground locations must be installed with double containment piping and
tanks, or in separate concrete trenches and vaults, or with an approved lining which cannot
be penetrated by the chemicals, unless waived in writing by Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 50 10 - 1
SECTION 01 50 10
SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
A. U.S. Dept. of Transportation, Federal Highway Administration (FHWA) standards.
MUTCD Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices
B. U.S. Dept. of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) standards.
Subpart G, Part 1926 Safety and Health Standards for Construction
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide design and engineering calculations for custom temporary bridges or steel plates to
be employed.
B. Submit hazardous materials storage plan.
C. Submit the EPA issued number for wastes generated at the site.
1.3 ROADWAY AND TRAFFIC LIMITATIONS
A. Investigate the condition of available public and private roads and of clearances, restrictions,
bridge load limits, and other limitations affecting transportation and ingress and egress to
the site of the Work. Comply with the provisions specified in the Traffic Management Plan.
Accept responsibility to construct and maintain any haul roads required for construction
operations.
B. Maintain a maximum speed limit of 25 mph while on the Project Site.
C. Confine all vehicles to the designated construction area. Cross-country travel is prohibited.
1.4 TEMPORARY CROSSINGS
A. General: Provide continuous, unobstructed, safe, and adequate pedestrian and vehicular
access to fire hydrants, commercial and industrial establishments, churches, schools, parking
lots, service stations, motels, fire and police stations, and hospitals. Provide safe and
adequate public transportation stops and pedestrian crossings at intervals not exceeding 300
feet. Cooperate with parties involved in the delivery of mail and removal of trash and garbage
to maintain existing schedules for such services. Maintain vehicular access to residential
driveways to the property line except when required construction precludes such access for
reasonable periods of time.
B. Temporary Bridges: Wherever necessary, provide suitable temporary bridges or steel plates
over unfilled excavations, except where written consent of the individuals or authorities
concerned to omit such temporary bridges or steel plates has been secured. Any such

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 50 10 - 2
obtained written consent shall be delivered to Engineer prior to excavation. Maintain all such
bridges or steel plates in service until access is provided across the backfilled excavation.
Temporary bridges or steel plates for street and highway crossing shall conform to the
requirements of the authority having jurisdiction in each case. Adopt designs furnished by
said authority for such bridges or steel plates, or submit designs to said authority for
approval, as may be required. New designs shall be stamped and signed by a professional
engineer, licensed to practice in Utah.
C. Street Use: Nothing herein shall be construed to entitle Contractor to the exclusive use of any
public street, alleyway, or parking area during the performance of the Work hereunder.
Conduct operations so as not to interfere unnecessarily with the authorized work of utility
companies or other agencies in such streets, alleyways, or parking areas. No street shall be
closed to the public without first obtaining permission of Engineer and proper governmental
authority. Where excavation is being performed in primary streets or highways, always
maintain one lane in each direction open to traffic unless otherwise indicated. Provide toe
boards to retain excavated material if required by Engineer or the agency having jurisdiction
over the street or highway. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the Work shall always BE kept
accessible to fire-fighting equipment. Temporary provisions shall be made to assure the use
of sidewalks and the proper functioning of all gutters, storm drain inlets, and other drainage
facilities.
D. Traffic Control: For the protection of traffic in public or private streets and ways, provide,
place, and maintain all necessary barricades, traffic cones, warning signs, lights, and other
safety devices in accordance with the requirements of the MUTCD, Part VI - Traffic Controls
for Street and Highway Construction and Maintenance Operations."
E. Take all necessary precautions for the protection of the Work and the safety of the public. All
barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated at night, and all lights shall be kept burning
from sunset until sunrise. Station such guards or flaggers and conform to such special safety
regulations relating to traffic control as may be required by the public authorities within their
respective jurisdictions. All signs, signals, and barricades shall conform to OSHA Safety and
Health Standards for Construction.
F. Temporary Street Closure: If closure of any street is required during construction, apply in
writing to the authority having jurisdiction at least 30 days in advance of the required closure
for signage and detour requirements.
G. Temporary Driveway Closure: Notify property owner or occupant (if not owner-occupied)
of the closure of the driveways to be closed more than one eight-hour workday at least three
working days prior to the closure. Minimize the inconvenience and minimize the time that
the driveways will be closed. Fully explain to the owner/occupant how long the work will
take and when closure is to start.
1.5 WORK AND STORAGE AREA
A. All space within the limits of disturbance, as shown in project drawings, is available for
Contractor staging. Contractor shall access site via 850 East. Provide a plot plan of intended
storage/work area use to Engineer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 50 10 - 3
B. Make independent arrangements for any necessary off-site storage or shop areas necessary
for the proper execution of the Work.
C. Lands to be furnished by Owner for construction operation and other purposes are indicated.
Should it be necessary to use any additional land for staging or for other purposes during the
construction of the Work, independently arrange for the use of such lands and pay any
required rental or use fees. Unless otherwise shown, specified, or agreed, all sites shall be
returned to their original condition or better upon completion of the Work.
D. Nothing herein shall imply granting an exclusive use of roadways or public and/or private
land employed to perform the Work.
E. Temporary Storage Buildings and Enclosures
1. Provide environmental control systems that meet recommendations of
manufacturers of equipment and materials to be stored therein.
2. Arrange and partition to provide security of contents and ready access for inspection
and inventory.
F. Construct and use a separate storage area with adequate spill containment for hazardous
materials used in constructing the Work.
1. For the purpose of this paragraph, hazardous materials to be stored in the separate
area are all products labeled with any of the following terms: Warning, Caution,
Poisonous, Toxic, flammable, Corrosive, Reactive, or Explosive. In addition, whether
or not so labeled, the following materials shall be stored in the separate area: diesel
fuel, gasoline, new and used motor oil, hydraulic fluid, cement, paints and paint
thinners, two-part epoxy coatings, sealants, asphaltic products, glues, solvents, wood
preservatives, sand blast materials, and spill absorbent.
2. Hazardous materials shall be stored in groupings according to the Material Safety
Data Sheets.
3. Develop and submit to Engineer a plan for storing and disposing of the materials
above.
4. The separate storage area shall meet the requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction over the storage of hazardous materials.
5. Hazardous materials which are delivered in containers, shall be stored in the original
containers until use. Hazardous materials which are delivered in bulk, shall be stored
in containers which meet the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
6. Obtain and submit to Engineer a single EPA number for wastes generated at the site.
7. The separate storage area shall be inspected by the proper authorities prior to
construction of the area, upon completion of construction of the area, and upon
cleanup and removal of the area.
G. In the event machinery and equipment need servicing on site, be responsible to clean
environmentally hazardous materials from the site immediately.
1.6 PARKING
A. Provide temporary on-site parking areas for Engineer and Owner:
1. Two spaces for Engineer.
2. Two spaces for Owner.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE ACCESS AND STORAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 50 10 - 4
B. Employees shall park within the limits of disturbance as shown on the drawings.
C. Traffic and parking areas shall be maintained in a sound condition, free of excavated material,
construction equipment, mud, and construction materials. Repair breaks, potholes, low areas,
which collect standing water, and other deficiencies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 57 19 - 1
SECTION 01 57 19
TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING
A. The use of explosives on the Work will not be permitted.
1.2 DUST ABATEMENT
A. Furnish all labor, equipment, and methods required to prevent, control, and mitigate fugitive
dust from the construction activities. In complying with this requirement, conform to all local
requirements in all circumstances. Be responsible for damage resulting from dust generated
by its activities. Dust abatement measures shall be continued until Engineer directs
otherwise.
1. Unpaved Roads: Apply liquid dust palliative as appropriate for traffic areas as
approved by Engineer.
2. All other Non-Paved Work Areas: Apply a liquid dust palliative (soil stabilizer type)
derived from natural organic plant sources and containing no growth – or
germination – inhibiting materials as approved by Engineer. Application shall be
effective for dust suppression according to applicable County Health District Air
Pollution Control Division dust regulations. Do not allow movement of vehicles or
storage of materials on treated areas.
1.3 RUBBISH CONTROL
A. Prepare a trash abatement program and submit to Engineer for review. The program shall
include placing all litter, trash, garbage, construction debris, and refuse in scavenger-proof,
resealable containers. Trash includes, but is not limited to, cigarettes, cigars, gum wrappers,
tissue, cans, paper, and bags. During the progress of the Work, keep the Project Site and other
areas used by it in a neat and clean condition, and free from any accumulation of rubbish.
Dispose of all rubbish and waste materials of any nature occurring at the Project Site,
establish regular intervals of collection and disposal of such materials and waste. Keep haul
roads free from dirt, rubbish, and unnecessary obstructions resulting from construction
operations. Disposal of all rubbish and surplus materials shall be off the Site in accordance
with local codes and ordinances governing locations and methods of disposal, and in
conformance with all applicable safety laws, and to the requirements of Part 1926 of the
OSHA Safety and Health Standards for Construction.
B. Clean up and properly dispose of any oil, fuel, and other equipment leaks at the time of
occurrence. Service and maintenance vehicles shall carry a bucket and pads to absorb leaks
and spills. Notify Engineer of any spills or leaks at the time of occurrence.
1.4 SANITATION
A. Toilet Facilities: Provide fixed or portable chemical toilets wherever needed for the use of
employees. Toilets at construction job sites shall conform to the requirements of Part 1926
of the OSHA Standards for Construction.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 57 19 - 2
B. Sanitary and Other Organic Wastes: Establish a regular collection of all sanitary and organic
wastes. All wastes and refuse from sanitary facilities or organic material wastes from any
other source related to the construction operations shall be disposed of away from the Site in
a manner satisfactory to Engineer and in accordance with all laws and regulations pertaining
thereto.
1.5 CHEMICALS
A. All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project operation, whether
soil sterilant, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant or of other classification, shall show
approval of either the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the U.S. Department of
Agriculture. Use of all such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict accordance
with the printed instructions of the manufacturer.
1.6 CULTURAL RESOURCES
A. Direct attention to the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 (16 U.S.C. 470) and 36 CFR
800, which provide for the preservation of potential historical architectural, archaeological,
or cultural resources (hereinafter called "cultural resources").
B. Conform to the applicable requirements of the National Historic Preservation Act of 1966 as
it relates to the preservation of cultural resources.
C. In the event potential cultural resources are discovered during subsurface excavations at the
Site of construction, institute the following procedures:
1. Engineer will issue a Field Order directing the cessation all construction operations
at the location of such potential cultural resources find. Mark the area in an
appropriate manner to ensure that all construction equipment, activities, and
personnel remain clear of the area until further notice.
2. Field Order shall be effective until such time as a qualified archaeologist can be called
to assess the value of these potential cultural resources and make recommendations
to the State Historic Preservation Office.
D. If the archaeologist determines that the potential find is a bona fide cultural resource, at the
direction of the State Historic Preservation Office, suspend work at the location of the find
under the provisions for changes contained in Articles 10, 11, and 12 of the General
Conditions.
1.7 AIR QUALITY
A. Maintain all vehicles and equipment in proper tune.
B. Use Best Available Control Technology on construction equipment, including a timing
retardation.
C. Use natural-gas powered construction equipment where possible.
D. Encourage employee car-pooling.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 57 19 - 3
1.8 NOISE
A. Comply with the hours of work as allowed by the local jurisdiction or land management
agency.
B. Noise limits on construction equipment will comply with the noise limits of the local
jurisdiction or land management agency. All construction equipment shall be equipped with
manufacturer’s standard noise control devices (i.e., mufflers, acoustical lagging, and/or
engineer enclosures). Take special care not to throttle the engine excessively and keep
engine speed as low as possible. Do not leave the equipment running or idling needlessly,
especially when near noise-sensitive land uses. Noise-sensitive land uses include, but are not
limited to, residences, schools, hospitals, libraries, retirement and elderly care centers,
religious and worship facilities, courts of law, certain noise-sensitive professional offices, and
quiet recreational areas such as campgrounds and hiking trails.
C. Use newer equipment whenever possible. Inspect all construction equipment at periodic
intervals to ensure proper maintenance and the presence of noise control devices (i.e.,
mufflers and shrouding, etc.)
D. Keep heavy, noisier equipment a minimum of 100 feet away from the property line of any
noise-sensitive land use for any length of time. Avoid coming closer than 200 feet if multiple
pieces of equipment are operating simultaneously. If such cases are unavoidable, avoid
throttling the engine excessively or leaving the equipment running needlessly. Heavy
equipment shall be operated in a manner to comply with the jurisdiction’s noise ordinance
and vibration performance standard. To comply with these requirements, it may be
necessary to operate heavy equipment only 30 minutes out of each one-hour period at
distances closer than 200 feet from an occupied property. During the remaining 30 minutes,
the equipment should move further away or be shut down, but may resume 30 minutes later.
E. Locate stationary noisy equipment away from construction boundaries that are near noise-
sensitive uses.
F. Concrete trucks shall perform initial mixing and other activities that require high revving of
the truck engine a minimum of 600 feet from noise-sensitive land uses. Keep engine
revolutions per minute as low as possible at closer distances.
G. Whenever possible, use electric hand tools rather than gas-powered tools.
H. If operation of dewatering pumps and generators is required between the hours of 6 p.m. and
7 a.m. and within 600 feet of a noise-sensitive land use, they shall be treated with acoustical
noise control measures (e.g., mufflers, shrouding, and/or enclosures) so as not to exceed 56
dba at 50 feet or other appropriate requirements of the local jurisdiction.
I. If requested by the Engineer, install temporary noise barriers for construction acti vities,
including staging areas that occur closer than 100 feet from noise-sensitive land uses. Noise
barriers can be made of plywood, heavy vinyl curtain material, natural or temporary earth
berms, or stockpiles of construction material.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 57 19 - 4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 58 13 - 1
SECTION 01 58 13
TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide two project identification signs, complete, in accordance with the Contract
Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SIGN CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct each sign of 3/4-inch painted, exterior grade plywood with 4 inch by 4 inch
supports and 2 inch by 4 inch cross bracing capable of withstanding 15 psf wind loads.
B. Each sign face shall be 4 feet vertical by 8 feet horizontal.
C. Design sign for professional appearance.
2.2 COLORS
A. Face: White.
B. Lettering: Black, block letter style.
2.3 SIGN CONTENT
A. The content and appearance of the project sign shall be as directed by Owner. Content shall
include Project Title, Owner, Contractor, Engineer, and scheduled completion date.
B. Submit a drawing to illustrate proposed sign content to Engineer for approval prior to
construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SIGN LOCATION
A. Locate sign on the Project Site as directed by Engineer.
B. Set the sign 4 feet above the ground, measured from grade to the lower edge of the plywood
sheet.
C. If the sign will be located outside of an Owner-acquired right-of-way or easement, secure
written permission from the owner of the property where the sign will be located and submit
to Engineer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TEMPORARY PROJECT SIGNAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 58 13 - 2
3.2 REMOVAL
A. Remove the project sign upon Substantial Completion of the Work.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOBILIZATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 00 - 1
SECTION 01 71 00
MOBILIZATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Organization and mobilization of the forces.
B. Transporting construction plant and equipment to the jobsite and setting up of same.
C. Transporting various tools, materials, and equipment to the jobsite.
D. Erection of temporary buildings and facilities as required for field offices, staging, storage,
and construction operations.
1.2 PAYMENT FOR MOBILIZATION
A. Payment for mobilization shall be as described in Section 01 20 00 – Measurement and
Payment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Mobilization shall include the following principal items:
1. Provide all required insurance certificates and bonds.
2. Move onto the site, or portion of site as available, of all plant and equipment required
for first month’s operations including office and storage trailers.
3. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
4. Develop construction water supply.
5. Provide all on-site communication facilities, including telephones, cordless phone
antenna, and radio pagers.
6. Provide on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities.
7. Arrange for and erection of work and storage yard.
8. Construct and implement security features and requirements complying with Section
01 31 30 – Safety and Security Program.
9. Obtain all required permits.
10. Post all OSHA required notices and establish safety programs.
11. Provide Superintendent at the job site full time.
3.2 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The following submittals are due by the day indicated and must be approved by Owner as a
condition precedent to completion of mobilization.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOBILIZATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 00 - 2
No. Submittal Specification Section
1. Quality Assurance / Control Plan 01 45 00
2. Mobilization Plan 01 71 00
3. Safety Program 01 31 30
4. Concrete Mix Designs 03 30 00
5. List of Permits and Licenses 01 41 26
6. Schedule of Submittals 01 33 20
3.3 MOBILIZATION PLAN
A. Within 15 Days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed, submit a mobilization plan to Engineer
for approval, which shall include a breakdown showing the estimated value of each
component of mobilization as described in paragraphs 3.1 and 3.2 herein.
B. Include a bar chart schedule showing each item of mobilization listed in paragraphs 3.1 and
3.2 herein and include scheduled start date, finish dates, and total duration. The plan shall
also list each activity to be initiated in the first 90 Days following Notice to Proceed, complete,
with scheduled start date, finish date, and total duration.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE CONDITIONS SURVEYS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 30 - 1
SECTION 01 71 30
SITE CONDITIONS SURVEYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes requirements to document conditions of the Project Site and adjacent
properties before construction begins and after completion of the Work. Methods include
still photographs, digital video recordings, and topographic surveys.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit all photographs, digital videos, and topographic survey data of the preconstruction
conditions to Engineer for record purposes prior to, but not more than three weeks before,
commencement of any construction activities.
1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Complete and submit all digital videos, still photographs, mapping, and survey data of the
postconstruction conditions to Engineer prior to final inspection by Owner and Engineer.
B. Provide postconstruction survey data to Engineer as follows:
1. Submit topographic mapping for each site hereinbefore identified for topographic
mapping and surveys as a separate electronic map (drawing) in AutoCAD Release
2018, or later.
2. Also submit each AutoCAD site map in hard copy plot format (six copies).
3. Engineer will review hardcopy plots for accuracy relative to the specified
requirements.
4. Amend mapping files, as required, based on review of the hardcopy plots by Engineer.
5. The electronic mapping files shall be produced using field survey techniques with
sufficient accuracy for reproduction and use as base maps at a scale of 1"=20'
horizontal and 2-foot contour intervals as specified for National Map Accuracy
Standards.
6. All electronic mapping files shall be three-dimensional.
7. Submit lists of survey points for all topographic surveys in ASCII text file format.
8. Provide mapping and points files on one or more compact discs in a format acceptable
to Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Conduct thorough preconstruction and postconstruction Site conditions surveys of the entire
Project. Site conditions surveys shall consist of photographs, digital video recordings, and
topographic mapping. Provide and submit sufficient photographs, supplemented by digital

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE CONDITIONS SURVEYS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 30 - 2
video, to Engineer to resolve any damage claims, which may arise due to the construction of
this Project. Develop topographic mapping using the Project coordinates and referenced to
the Project base lines and benchmarks. Mapping shall be adequate to ascertain
preconstruction and postconstruction conditions (including elevations) of all public and
private property within and adjacent to the construction limits.
B. Digital video or photographic surveys shall include, but not be limited to, all access roads used
to transport material or equipment to and from the Site and elevation of roadways, drives,
walks, and buildings. Use spot elevation surveys to document the elevation on abutting
roadways, drives, and walks, taken at approximately 20-foot intervals and at the point of
juncture with any structure to which they are attached or otherwise influenced by the Work.
In addition, take elevations of all building slabs along the Project route. Provide topographic
mapping as specified herein.
C. Digital video recordings required as part of this Section and by Section 31 10 00 – Site
Preparation and Restoration and Section 31 23 00 - Earthwork may be combined into a single
set of media provided the requirements for videos specified in both Sections are met.
D. As a minimum, note preconstruction and postconstruction conditions and perform digital
video surveys of the following:
1. Areas used to access the Site or haul materials and equipment to the Site.
2. The access road, both original and relocated locations and ultimately to the Site.
3. All Work areas, including, but not limited to, access corridors, disposal areas, and
staging areas.
4. Any work completed by other contractors at the Site that will be impacted or
otherwise affected by Work of this Project.
E. Supplement digital video surveys with still photographs and spot elevation surveys as
required to document the original condition and location of existing features and facilities.
F. Provide digital video records in DVD-R format.
G. Conduct topographic mapping to document the post-construction topography of the project
Site within the limits of disturbance as indicated on drawings..

END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING
FACILITIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 50 - 1
SECTION 01 71 50
PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Protect all existing utilities and improvements not designated for removal and restore
damaged or temporarily relocated utilities and improvements to a condition equal to or
better than they were prior to such damage or temporary relocation, in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
B. Call Blue Stakes before commencing any digging for location of underground utility lines and
cable locations. The number is 811 or [phone].
C. Provide temporary 6-foot chain link fencing panels for protection of all open excavations and
trenches within public streets, residential areas, and all other locations except for
unimproved open areas where excavations and/or pipeline trenches that can be safely sloped
in accordance with current OSHA standards to provide safe access without the use of shoring
devices. Temporary fencing panels shall fully enclose open excavations and trenches and
shall remain in place during all non-working hours.
D. Provide temporary caps over all large diameter pipe during non-working hours to prevent
unauthorized access.
1.2 RIGHTS-OF-WAY
A. Do not perform any work that would affect any oil, gas, sewer, or water pipeline; any
telephone, telegraph, or electric transmission line; any fence; or any other structure. Do not
enter upon the rights-of-way involved until notified by Engineer that Owner has secured
authority therefore from the proper party.
B. After authority has been obtained, give said party due notice of intention to begin work, if
required by said party, and remove, shore, support or otherwise protect such pipeline,
transmission line, ditch, fence, or structure or replace same.
C. When two or more contracts are being executed at one time on the same or adjacent land in
such manner that work on one contract may interfere with that on another, Owner will
determine the sequence and order of the Work. When the territory of one contract is the
necessary or convenient means of access for the execution of another contract, such privilege
of access or any other reasonable privilege may be granted by Owner to Contractor so
desiring, to the extent, amount, in the manner, and at the times permitted and in full
conformance with the conditions of the Contract Documents.
D. No such decision as to the method or time of conducting the Work or the use of territory shall
be made the basis of any claim for delay or damage, except as provided for temporary
suspension of the Work in the General Conditions of the Contract.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING
FACILITIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 50 - 2
1.3 PROTECTION OF STREET OR ROADWAY MARKERS
A. Do not destroy, remove, or otherwise disturb any existing survey markers or other existing
street or roadway markers without proper authorization. Do not begin pavement breaking
or excavation until all survey or other permanent marker points that will be disturbed by the
construction operations have been properly referenced. Accurately replace survey markers
or points disturbed after all street or roadway resurfacing has been completed.
1.4 RESTORATION OF PAVEMENT
A. General: Replace all paved areas cut or damaged during construction with similar materials
of equal thickness to match the existing adjacent undisturbed areas, except where specific
resurfacing requirements have been called for in the Contract Documents or in the
requirements of the agency issuing a permit. The pavement restoration requirement to
match existing sections applies to all components of existing sections, including sub-base,
base and pavement. Conform temporary and permanent pavement to the requirements of
the affected jurisdictional agency. Neatly saw cut pavements, which are subject to partial
removal, in straight lines. Refer to Division 02 for specific pavement restoration
requirements.
B. Temporary Resurfacing: Wherever required by the public authorities having jurisdiction ,
place temporary surfacing promptly after backfilling and maintain such surfacing for the
period of time fixed by said authorities before proceeding with the final restoration of
improvements.
C. Permanent Resurfacing: In order to obtain a satisfactory junction with adjacent surfaces, saw
cut back and trim the edge to provide a clean, sound, vertical joint before permanent
replacement of an excavated or damaged portion of pavement. Damaged edges of pavement
along excavations and elsewhere shall be trimmed back by saw cutting in straight lines. All
pavement restoration and other facilities restoration shall be constructed to finish grades
compatible with adjacent undisturbed pavement. Refer to plans for minimum dimension of
T-patch replacement width over disturbed pipeline trenches in paved areas.
D. Pavement Crown: In areas where pipeline trenching impacts an existing crown of asphalt,
survey, and submit to Engineer documentation showing the pre-construction location of the
crown prior to trenching. Replace the crown of asphalt to its pre-construction location to the
satisfaction of the governing agency and Engineer.
E. Restoration of Sidewalks or Private Driveways: Wherever sidewalks or private roads have
been removed for purposes of construction, place suitable temporary sidewalks or roadways
promptly after backfilling and maintain them in satisfactory condition for the period fixed by
the authorities having jurisdiction over the affected portions before proceeding with the final
restoration. If no such period of time is so fixed, maintain said temporary sidewalks or
roadways until the final restoration thereof has been made.
F. Restoration of Curb and Gutter: Wherever curb and gutter, including driveway and sidewalk
approaches, have been removed for purposes of construction, replace these improvements
following construction to the specific dimension and requirements of the authority having

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING
FACILITIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 50 - 3
jurisdiction. Replace improvements, including required ADA access details to the latest
version of the authoritative standard regardless of their preconstruction condition.
1.5 EXISTING UTILITIES AND IMPROVEMENTS
A. General. Protect underground utilities and other improvements, which may be impaired
during construction operations, regardless of whether the utilities are indicated on the
Drawings. Take all possible precautions for the protection of unforeseen utility lines to
provide for uninterrupted service and to provide such special protection as may be necessary.
B. Except for utilities specifically located on the Drawings, be responsible for exploratory
excavations (potholing) as deemed necessary to determine the exact locations and depths of
utilities, which may interfere with the Work. Perform all such exploratory excavations as
soon as practicable after Notice to Proceed and, in any event, a sufficient time in advance of
construction to avoid possible delays to the Work’s progress. When such exploratory
excavations show the utility locations as shown on the Drawings to be in error, so notify
Engineer. Refer to plans for minimum advance distance that potholing must be performed
prior to pipeline trenching work.
C. The number of exploratory excavations required shall be that number which is sufficient to
determine the alignment and grade of the utility.
D. Utilities to be Moved: In case it becomes necessary to move the property of any public utility
or franchise holder, such utility company or franchise holder will, upon request of Contractor,
be notified by Owner to move such property within a specified reasonable time. When utility
lines that are to be removed are encountered within the area of operations, notify Engineer a
sufficient time in advance for the necessary measures to be taken to prevent interruption of
service.
E. Utilities to be Removed: Where the proper completion of the Work requires temporary or
permanent removal and/or relocation of an existing utility or other improvement which is
indicated, remove and, without unnecessary delay, temporarily replace or relocate such
utility or improvement in a manner satisfactory to Engineer and the owner of the facility. In
all cases of such temporary removal or relocation, restoration to the former location shall be
accomplished in a manner that will restore or replace the utility or improvement as nearly as
possible to its former locations and to as good or better condition as found prior to removal.
F. Owner’s Right of Access: Owner and owners of public utilities and franchises reserve right to
enter at any time upon any public street, alley, right-of-way, or easement for the purpose of
making changes in their property made necessary by the Work of this Contract.
G. Underground Utilities Indicated: Existing utility lines that are indicated or the locations of
which are made known prior to excavation and that are to be retained, and all utility lines
that are constructed during excavation operations shall be protected from damage during
excavation and backfilling and, if damaged, shall be immediately repaired or replaced unless
otherwise repaired by the owner of the damaged utility. If the owner of the damaged facility
performs its own repairs, reimburse said owner for the costs of repair.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING
FACILITIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 50 - 4
H. Underground Utilities Not Indicated: In the event of damage to existing utility lines that are
not indicated or the locations of which are not made known prior to excavation, make a verbal
report of such damage immediately to Engineer and a written report thereof promptly
thereafter. Notify the utility owner of the damage. If directed by Engineer, repairs shall be
made under the provisions for changes and extra work contained in the General Conditions.
I. Damages. Costs of locating and/or repairing damage not due to failure to exercise reasonable
care, and removing or relocating such utility facilities not indicated in the Contract
Documents with reasonable accuracy, and for equipment on the project which was actually
working on that portion of the Work which was interrupted or idled by removal or relocation
of such utility facilities, and which was necessarily idled during such Work will be paid for as
extra Work in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions.
J. Approval of Repairs: All repairs to a damaged utility or improvement are subject to
inspection and approval by an authorized representative of the utility or improvement owner
before being concealed by backfill or other work.
K. Fire Hydrants: Keep all fire hydrants and water control valves free from obstruction and
available for use at all times.
L. Maintaining in Service: Unless indicated otherwise, all oil and gasoline pipelines, power, and
telephone or the communication cable ducts, gas and water mains, irrigation lines, sewer
lines, storm drain lines, poles, and overhead power and communication wires and cables
encountered along the line of the Work shall remain continuously in service during all the
operations under the Contract, unless other arrangements satisfactory to the Engineer are
made with the owner of said pipelines, duct, main, irrigation line, sewer, storm drain, pole, or
wire or cable. Be responsible for and repair all damage due to construction operations. The
provisions of this Section shall not be abated even in the event such damage occurs after
backfilling or is not discovered until after completion of the backfilling.
M. Utility Service Laterals: Utility service laterals are not shown on the plans. Anticipate that
there are no less service laterals than there are homes where project trenches are located in
the vicinity of a street between a home and the utility main. Protect in place, or remove and
replace to the satisfaction of the utility owner, all utility service laterals encountered during
construction. Duration of utility service outages and public notification procedures shall
conform to the standards of the controlling agency and these Contract documents.
1.6 TREES OR SHRUBS WITHIN STREET RIGHTS-OF-WAY AND PROJECT LIMITS
A. General: Except where trees or shrubs are indicated to be removed, exercise all necessary
precautions so as not to damage or destroy any trees or shrubs, including those lying within
street rights-of-way and project limits. Do not trim or remove any trees unless such trees
have been approved for trimming or removal by the jurisdictional agency or Owner. Trim or
replace existing trees and shrubs which are damaged during construction using the services
of a certified tree company under permit from the jurisdictional agency and/or Owner.
B. Trimming; symmetry of the tree shall be preserved; no stubs or splits or torn branches left;
clean cuts shall be made close to the trunk or large branch. Do not use spikes for climbing
live trees. Cuts over 1-1/2 inches in diameter shall be coated with a tree paint product that

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING
FACILITIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 50 - 5
is waterproof, adhesive, and elastic, and free from kerosene, coal tar, creosote, or other
material injurious to the life of the tree.
C. Replacement: Immediately notify the jurisdictional agency and/or Owner if any tree or shrub
is damaged by construction operations. If, in the opinion of said agency or Owner, the damage
is such that replacement is necessary, replace the tree or shrub at no additional expense to
Owner. The tree or shrub shall be of a like size and variety as the one damaged, or, if of a
small size, the pay to the owner of said tree a compensatory payment acceptable to the tree
or shrub owner, subject to the approval of the jurisdictional agency or Owner. The size of the
tree or shrub shall not be less than 1-inch diameter nor less than 6 feet in height. Planting of
replacement trees and shrubs shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the
nursery furnishing the plants. Unless otherwise indicated, water and maintain the
replacement trees and shrubs for 6 months after planting.
1.7 LAWN AREAS
A. Repair lawn or landscaped areas damaged during construction to match the pre-construction
condition to the satisfaction of the landowner and Owner. Use high quality sod to restore all
lawn areas. Location and quality of irrigation system equipment shall be confirmed prior to
construction. Where lawn irrigation systems have been removed or damaged during
construction, be responsible for replacement of systems in kind to the satisfaction of the
landowner. Anticipate that pressurized irrigation systems are present in all maintained lawn
areas that will be impacted by construction. Verify proper operation of the irrigation system
with landowner as required for maintenance of newly installed sod prior to transferring of
watering responsibilities.
1.8 UNIMPROVED AREAS
A. Remove and stockpile topsoil prior to construction in accordance with Division 01
specifications. Replace topsoil prior to restoration of unimproved areas.
B. Unimproved areas, including unclassified open spaces, fields, and unimproved rights-of-way,
damaged during construction shall be repaired to match pre-construction conditions to the
satisfaction of the land owner and Owner. At a minimum, unimproved areas shall be
smoothed and finished graded with topsoil to match preconstruction topography, and
reseeded using a native seed mix acceptable to the land owner and Owner.
C. All slopes greater than 2H : 1V shall be protected with erosion control matting prior to
reseeding.
1.9 OTHER SURFACE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Conduct a pre-construction survey of all properties that will be impacted by construction
operations. All improvements that have the potential to be impacted by construction,
including but not limited to fencing, landscaping, boulders, retaining walls, irrigatio n
systems, and other public and/or private improvements, shall be protected in place, or if
necessary, removed and replaced with like kind or better quality following construction.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTION AND RESTORATION OF EXISTING
FACILITIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 71 50 - 6
1.10 NOTIFICATION BY CONTRACTOR
A. Prior to any excavation in the vicinity of any existing underground facilities, including all
water, sewer, storm drain, gas, petroleum products, or other pipelines; all buried electric
power, communications, or television cables; all traffic signal and street lighting facilities; and
all roadway and state highway rights-of-way, notify the owners or agencies responsible for
such facilities not less than three days nor more than seven days prior to excavation so that
a representative of said owner or agencies can be present during such Work if they so desire.
B. When it is necessary to temporarily deny access to property, or when any utility service
connection must be interrupted, give notices sufficiently in advance to enable the affected
persons to provide for their needs. Notices shall conform to any applicable local ordinance
and, whether delivered orally or in writing, shall include appropriate information concerning
the interruption and instructions on how to limit inconvenience caused thereby.
C. Contact, cooperate with, and provide written notice (including Contractor’s phone number)
at least seven days prior to beginning Work on each street. The written notice shall include
the approximate schedule and explanation of Work and shall be given to each homeowner,
business, all emergency agencies, schools, and residents, which will be affected by the project;
particularly in reference to temporary interruptions to vehicular access. At least twenty-four
hours prior to initiation of Work, provide a second notice to confirm the scope of scheduled
Work. Submit a copy of the notifications to Engineer, for approval, prior to the start of
construction. Make verbal door-to-door communication prior to construction to remind all
affected parties of the construction to take place. In addition, be responsible to answer and
resolve any conflicts that may arise between a homeowner or business owner and the
construction personnel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DISPOSAL OF WATER
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 74 19 - 1
SECTION 01 74 19
DISPOSAL OF WATER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Prepare a detailed listing of all discharges and overflows that will occur during the
disinfection procedure.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards, latest edition.
AWWA C651 Disinfection Water Mains
AWWA C652 Disinfection of Water Storage Facilities
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit a listing of every significant discharge from a drain valve, pump well, overflow, drain
piping, and from all related appurtenances. “Significant discharge” is defined as a volume
that is greater than that required to exercise or fill piping with chlorinated water and briefly
flush. The listing shall be utilized as input for the Construction Progress Schedule to identify
the volume and duration for every discharge that must be accounted for. Very minor
discharges for air-release piping or drains that are exercised briefly to ensure disinfection do
not need to be identified on the Construction Progress Schedule for dechlorination or
discharge.
B. Include the proposed method and equipment for dechlorination, including type of agent,
temporary feed pumps, and appurtenant feed equipment.
C. Final Report: Submit to Engineer a final report of each significant discharge, its locations,
dates sampled for effectiveness of dechlorination, and the test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS FOR DECHLORINATION
A. Where dechlorination of water released back to the environment is required, use a sodium
bisulfate or equivalent dechlorinator. Sodium bisulfite, if used, shall be applied at a ratio of
at least 1.47 parts per every part of chlorine to be removed. This is to remove all the free
active chlorine. Since the reaction produces a byproduct of hydrochloric acid, it will also tend
to lower the pH of the water and remove calcium carbonate from the water. If the pH drops
below 6.0, add calcium carbonate back into the water during the dechlorination process to
restore the pH to an acceptable level of at least 6.0.
B. The process of dechlorination consists of utilizing a chemical metering pump to inject a 44
percent (or less) solution of sodium bisulfite into a temporary discharge pipe with a static

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DISPOSAL OF WATER
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 74 19 - 2
mixer and after a few seconds (plus or minus three) withdrawing sample for a chlorine
residual analyzer. Based on the results, the analyzer shall send a signal to adjust the chemical
feed rate.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAJOR DISCHARGES, PUMP WELLS, OVERFLOWS
A. General: List each drain valve, pump well, and overflow, along with proposed volume and
duration of discharge during the disinfection procedure. Locations requiring dechlorination
shall be indicated. Refer to Drawings to obtain detailed information on size, location, and
layout of facilities and access conditions. Review the site of each proposed discharge for the
conditions at the proposed discharge.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 77 00 - 1
SECTION 01 77 00
PROJECT CLOSEOUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Contract closeout, including final cleaning, preparation, and submittal of closeout documents,
warranties and bonds, and final completion certification.
B. Closeout submittals and submittal forms in both hard copy and electronic format.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Closeout Documents: Submit the following closeout documents prior to making a written
request for Final Completion.
1. Project record drawings and documents per Section 01 78 39 – Project Record
Documents.
2. Shop drawings.
3. Keys and keying schedule.
4. Post construction survey record documents, where required.
5. Quality Control reports per Section 01 45 00 – Quality Control.
6. Final Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
7. Maintenance stock items; spare parts and special tools.
8. Written warranties and bonds where required.
9. Bonds for roofing or maintenance, if indicated.
10. Access Badges and Parking Permits.
11. Release of liens or release of claims forms submitted by all subcontractors and
suppliers, if requested by Owner
B. Evidence of Compliance With Inspections and Other Requirements of Governing Authorities:
Submit the following:
1. Special Inspection Reports.
2. Certificate of Occupancy, if applicable.
3. Release from each affected property owner or agency indicating final acceptance.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1. One percent of the contract price will be withheld from any monies due as progress
payments, if at the 75 percent construction completion point, the approved
Operations and Maintenance Manual complying with Section 01 33 20- Contractor
Submittals has not been submitted. The aforementioned amount will be withheld by
Owner as the agreed, estimated value of the approved Operations and Maintenance
Manuals. Any such retention of money for failure to submit the approved Operations
and Maintenance Manuals on or before the 75 percent construction completion point
shall be in addition to the retention of any payments due under General Conditions of
the Contract.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 77 00 - 2
D. Final Change Order: A final Change Order shall be submitted and processed if required. Final
payment and close-out procedures shall comply with requirements of the Contract
Documents.
1.3 CLOSEOUT TIMETABLE
A. Establish dates for equipment testing, acceptance periods, and on-site instructional periods
as required under the Contract Documents. Such dates shall be established not less than one
week prior to beginning any of the required activities, to allow Owner, Engineer, and their
authorized representatives sufficient time to schedule attendance at such activities.
1.4 COMPLETION PROCEDURES
A. When Contractor considers the entire Work ready for its intended use Contractor shall notify
Owner and Engineer in writing that the entire Work is substantially complete and request
that Engineer issue a certificate of Substantial Completion. Prior to making such request, the
following must be complete:
1. Work necessary for the safe, proper, and complete use or operation of the facility as
intended.
2. Punch list of items remaining to be completed, for submission with the request for
issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion.
3. Submit and receive acceptance of accurate record drawings for all work completed to
date.
4. Submit and receive acceptance of all specified warranties, bonds, guarantees and
operation and Operations and Maintenance Manuals.
5. Complete all required vendor training, testing, and where required, start-up.
6. Deliver all required spare parts, maintenance stock items, and special tools.
7. Complete equipment and communications system testing successfully.
B. Upon receipt of the request, Engineer and designated representatives will review the request,
the Work, and the above requirements to determine whether Substantial Completion has
been achieved. If this review fails to support Substantial Completion, Engineer will notify
Contractor in writing citing the reasons for rejection. If Engineer determines that Substantial
Completion has been achieved, the following procedures will be followed:
1. Engineer, his/her representative, and user representatives will review the Work and
the punch list to assure all deficiencies are noted on a final punch list.
2. Engineer will schedule and conduct a pre-final walk-through of the facility with
representatives of Owner, Engineer, Contractor, and others, for the purpose of
formally reviewing the Work, the final punch list, and the readiness of the Work for
use. A copy of the final punch list will be furnished to all participants and any
additional items noted during the walk-through will be added to the list.
3. Upon completion of the pre-final walk-through, Engineer will deliver to Owner a
preliminary certificate of Substantial Completion which will fix the date of Substantial
Completion as the date of the walk-through, provided the walk-through has verified
that the Work is in fact ready for use and occupancy by Owner for its intended
purpose. Engineer will attach to the certificate a punch list of items to be completed
or corrected before final payment. In accordance with the General Conditions of the
Contract, upon approval of this request by Owner, the facility will be considered
Substantially Complete.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 77 00 - 3
C. When Contractor deems that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete,
Contractor shall notify Engineer and Owner in writing that the entire Work is complete. Final
Completion will be deemed to have occurred when Work is completed including the
following:
1. All final punch list items have been corrected, signed off by Contractor and Engineer,
and demonstrated to Owner during a final walk-through.
2. All updates to record drawings, and Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been
made.
3. Demobilization and site cleanup are complete.
4. Facilities and/or equipment have been properly demonstrated to be functioning as
required.
5. Owner has received releases from all parties who are entitled to claims against the
subject project, property, or improvement pursuant to the provisions of law.
6. New permanent cylinders and key blanks for all locks have been provided to Owner.
D. Final Inspection and Payment
1. When all items have been completed or corrected, Engineer, Contractor, and Owner
will promptly make a final inspection to verify completion. Final payment and
Engineer’s Notice of Acceptability will then be processed in accordance with the
General Conditions of the Contract.
1.5 CLOSE-OUT PROCEDURE
A. Engineer and Contractor shall meet and resolve all outstanding issues including, but not
limited to:
1. Claims and adjustments for time or costs
2. Outstanding, unused allowances
3. Procedures for handling warranty issues.
B. A Final Change Order shall be processed if required. Final payment and close out procedures
shall comply with all requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.6 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE
A. Comply with the maintenance and guarantee requirements contained in General Conditions
of the Contract.
B. Replacement of earth fill or backfill, where it has settled below the required finish elevations,
shall be considered as a part of such required repair work, and any repair or resurfacing
which becomes necessary by reason of such settlement shall likewise be considered as a part
of such required repair work unless Contractor has obtained a statement in writing from the
affected private authority or public agency releasing Owner from further responsibility in
connection with such repair or resurfacing. Submit such release(s) to Engineer.
C. Make all repairs and replacements promptly upon receipt of written order from Owner. If
Contractor fails to make such repairs or replacements promptly, Owner reserves the right to
do the Work and Contractor, and his surety shall be liable to Owner for the cost thereof.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 77 00 - 4
1.7 BOND
A. Furnish a Performance Bond as required by General Conditions of the Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FINAL CLEANING
A. Certificate of Final Completion of the Work by Owner will be withheld until requirements for
final cleanup of the Project Site are complete as follows:
1. Perform final cleaning prior to inspections for final acceptance.
2. Employ skilled workers who are experienced in cleaning operations.
3. Use cleaning materials that are recommended by manufacturers of surfaces to be
cleaned.
4. Avoid scratching, discoloring, and otherwise damaging surfaces being cleaned.
5. Clean roofs.
6. Broom clean and power wash exterior paved surfaces and rake clean other surfaces
of sitework. Police yards and grounds to keep clean.
7. Remove dust, cobwebs, and traces of insects and dirt.
8. Clean grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, fingerprints, paint, blemishes,
sealants, plaster, concrete, and other foreign materials from sight-exposed surfaces,
fixtures, and Equipment.
9. Remove nonpermanent protection and labels.
10. Polish finish hardware.
11. Wash and shine mirrors.
12. Polish glossy surfaces to clear shine.
13. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils when units were operated without filters during
construction.
14. Clean light fixtures and replace burned-out or dim lamps.
3.2 WASTE DISPOSAL
A. Remove temporary structures and facilities and arrange for and dispose of surplus materials,
waste products, and debris as follows:
1. Prior to making disposal on private property, obtain written permission from owner
of such private property.
2. Do not fill ditches, washes, or drainage ways which may create drainage problems.
3. Do not create unsightly or unsanitary nuisances during disposal operations.
4. Maintain disposal site in safe condition and good appearance.
5. Complete leveling and clean-up prior to final acceptance of the Work.
3.3 TOUCH-UP AND REPAIR
A. Touch up or repair finished surfaces on structures, equipment, fixtures, and installations that
have been damaged prior to inspection for final acceptance.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 77 00 - 5
B. Refinish or replace entire surfaces that cannot be touched-up or repaired satisfactorily.
3.4 DEMOBILIZATION
A. Demobilization shall include moving plant and equipment, field trailers, construction
materials, debris, and so forth from the Site as well as performing final cleanup.
1. Disturbed areas shall be restored to their original state or better.
2. Permanent improvements damaged during construction operations shall be repaired
or replaced at no additional cost to Owner.
3. Remove all equipment, materials, waste, and debris from the site and restore site to
original condition upon completion of construction.
4. The work area shall be restored to its original or better condition and shall be
inspected and approved by Engineer.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT CLOSEOUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 77 00 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 78 39 - 1
SECTION 01 78 39
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Maintain at the Site for Owner, one record copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Operation
and Maintenance manuals, coordination drawings, and Shop Drawings that are clearly
marked with a red pen to indicate all changes and or revisions resulting from, but not limited
to, the following:
1. Actual Project as constructed.
2. Addenda.
3. Change Orders and other modifications.
4. Engineer's instructions.
5. Field revisions.
6. Requests for Information (RFI).
7. All other changes.
B. Give special attention to recording the horizontal and vertical location of all buried utilities
that differ from the locations indicated, or which were not indicated on the Contract
Drawings.
C. Record drawings shall be supplemented by any detailed sketches as necessary or directed to
fully indicate the Work, as actually constructed.
D. Section Includes:
1. Maintenance of Documents and Samples
2. Marking Devices.
3. Recording.
4. Close-out Submittal Delivery.
1.2 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES
B. Store documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction.
C. Provide files and racks for storage of documents.
D. Provide locked cabinet or secure storage space for storage of samples.
E. Maintain documents in clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Keep record
documents separate from those used for construction.
F. Always make documents and samples available for reference by Engineer and Owner.
G. In the case of those drawings which depict the detail requirement for equipment to be
assembled and wired in the factory, such as motor control centers and the like, the record
drawings shall be updated by indicating those portions which are superseded by change
order drawings or final shop drawings, and by including appropriate reference information

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 78 39 - 2
describing the change orders by number and the shop drawings by manufacturer, drawing,
and revision numbers.
H. During progress meetings, record documents may be reviewed to ascertain that changes have
been recorded.
I. Updated Drawings, when provided by Engineer, will be substituted for the hand markups
provided Contractor prints the applicable Drawings and inserts them into the record set each
month.
J. Copies of the record drawings will be audited regularly by Engineer after the month in which
the Notice to Proceed is given as well as on completion of the Work. Failure to properly
maintain record drawings in a up-to-date condition may result in the withholding of
payments due at the sole discretion of Owner.
1.3 MARKING DEVICES
A. Use a red color pen for recording all information to all documents defined herein.
1.4 RECORDING
A. Label each document "CONFORMING TO CONSTRUCTION RECORD" in neat large red printed
letters.
B. Record information concurrently with construction progress, at the time the material or
equipment is installed. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded.
C. Drawings shall be legibly marked to record actual construction per the following:
1. Record actual depths of various elements of foundations in relation to finish first floor
datum.
2. Record actual as-built depths, horizontal and vertical location, (at every direction
change and a maximum of 100 feet intervals on straight runs), of underground pipes,
duct banks, and other buried utilities. Reference horizontal location to Project
coordinate system and vertical elevations to Project datum.
3. Identify and record specific details of pipe connections, location of existing buried
features and utilities located during excavation, and the final locations of piping,
equipment electrical conduits, manholes, and pull boxes (horizontal coordinates and
vertical elevation).
4. Identify and record location of spare conduits including beginning, ending, and
routing through pull boxes, and manholes. Record spare conductors, including
number and size, within spare conduits, and filled conduits.
5. Record actual schedules, lists, layout drawings, and wiring diagrams.
6. Record field changes of dimension and detail.
7. Record changes made by instruction from Engineer or by Change Order.
8. Record details not on original Contract Drawings.
D. Specifications and Addenda shall be legibly marked to record:
1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier for each product and item of
equipment installed.
2. Changes made by instruction from Engineer or by Change Order.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 78 39 - 3
E. Record potholing data and installation of marker balls.
F. All surveying for record documents shall be performed by a licensed surveyor.
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. At Contract closeout, deliver complete record documents to Engineer as required in Section
01 77 00 - Project Closeout. Final payment will not be acted upon until the record drawings
have been prepared and delivered to Engineer.
B. The information submitted will be incorporated by Engineer into final drawings to be
provided to Owner. Be responsible for the accuracy of submitted construction information.
Engineer will assume that the information provided by Contractor is correct and faithfully
represents actual construction.
C. This submittal shall include the record paper set along with 2 CDs. Each CD shall contain .pdf
files and .dwg files of each drawing.
D. Prepare submittal with transmittal letter containing:
1. Date.
2. Project title and number.
3. Contractor's name and address.
4. Title and number of each record as-built document.
5. Signature of Contractor's authorized representative and a statement that certifies
that the record documents are accurate and reflect what was installed during
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 78 39 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 81 10 - 1
SECTION 01 81 10
SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section Includes seismic design criteria for the following:
1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment and piping.
2. Seismic design of tanks and anchorage of tanks.
3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. International Code Council (ICC) documents as follows:
IBC International Building Code, 2021 Edition with Utah state
amendments
B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) documents as follows:
ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,
2016 Edition
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Calculations: Submit shop drawings and structural calculations in
accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures. All drawings and calculations shall
be signed and sealed by a licensed Civil or Structural engineer as required below under
“Qualifications”.
B. ICC-ES reports for concrete anchors.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Licensed Professionals: Design of items required by this Section and other items not
specifically shown in the Contract Documents shall be performed by a Civil or
Structural Engineer licensed to practice in the state of Utah.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Criteria: Design in accordance with the requirements of the International Building
Code and ASCE 7.
1. Seismic acceleration variables to be used in design are as follows:
a. The design 5 percent damped spectral response acceleration at short periods,
SDS = 1.08g.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 81 10 - 2
b. Soil Site Class = E.
c. Seismic Design Category = D.
2. Seismic Importance Factor for Anchorage of Mechanical and Electrical Equipment:
1.50.
3. Seismic Importance Factor for the Design of Tanks and the Anchorage of Tanks: 1.50.
4. Do not use friction to resist sliding due to seismic forces.
5. Use only headed anchor bolts, adhesive anchors, or welded studs for anchors resisting
seismic forces. Embedded anchor bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a
standard hex bolt head.
a. Adhesive anchors must have current ICC-ES reports showing that the anchors
meet IBC requirements when installed in cracked substrates.
b. Do not use other types of anchors unless indicated on the Drawings or
approved in writing by Engineer.
c. Seismic forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to
resist seismic forces. Do not use connections which use friction to resist
seismic forces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WIND DESIGN CRITERIA
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 82 11 - 1
SECTION 01 82 11
WIND DESIGN CRITERIA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section Includes design criteria for the following when exposed to wind forces:
1. Anchorage of mechanical and electrical equipment and piping.
2. Design of tanks and anchorage of tanks.
3. Other structures or items as specified or indicated on the Drawings.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. International Code Council (ICC) documents as follows:
IBC International Building Code, 2021 Edition with Utah state
amendments
B. American Society of Civil Engineers (ASCE) documents as follows:
ASCE 7 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures,
2016 Edition
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Calculations: Submit shop drawings and structural calculations in
accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures. All drawings and calculations shall
be signed and sealed by a licensed Civil or Structural engineer as required below under
“Qualifications”.
B. ICC-ES reports for concrete anchors.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Licensed Professionals: Design of items not specifically shown in the Contract
Documents shall be performed by a professional Civil or Structural Engineer licensed
to practice in the state of Utah.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design Criteria: Design in accordance with the requirements of the International Building
Code and ASCE 7.
1. Basic Wind Speed: 115 miles per hour
2. Risk Category: IV
3. Exposure: C

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WIND DESIGN CRITERIA
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 82 11 - 2
4. Topographic Factor: 1.0
5. Use only headed anchor bolts, adhesive anchors, or welded studs for anchors resisting
wind forces. Embedded anchor bolts used to resist seismic forces shall have a
standard hex bolt head.
a. Adhesive anchors must have current ICC-ES reports showing that the anchors
meet IBC requirements.
b. Do not use other types of anchors unless indicated on the Drawings or
approved in writing by the Engineer.
c. Wind forces must be resisted by direct bearing on the fasteners used to resist
wind forces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 91 14 - 1
SECTION 01 91 14
EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Equipment testing and startup are required for satisfactory completion of the Contract and,
therefore, shall be completed within the Contract Time.
B. Section Includes:
1. Startup Plan
2. Certificates of Installation and Startup Services
3. Record Keeping
4. Factory Performance Testing
5. Field Performance Testing
6. Special Tools and Lubricating Equipment
7. Startup
8. Lubrication
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Component Test and Check Out is the verification that each component of the Work complies
with the Contract Documents and is ready to perform its intended function.
B. Subsystem Test and Startup is the verification that a discrete group of related components is
functioning as intended within itself and is ready to perform its intended function in the
overall system.
C. System End-To-End Test and Startup is the operation and verification that all related
components and subsystems are functioning as intended and are ready for final
commissioning and operation.
D. Commissioning is placing a complete system or project into service.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit startup plan a minimum of 90 days prior to beginning startup procedures.
1. Submit and have an approved detailed and coordinated startup plan for each piece of
equipment, subsystem, and the entire system.
2. The Plan and Progress Schedule shall include the following activities:
a. Manufacturer's services and startup dates.
b. Submittal dates for certificates of installation and startup services.
c. Operator training dates for each phase.
d. Submittal of operation and Maintenance manuals.
e. Functional test dates.
f. Operational performance test dates.
g. Post operational performance test dates.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 91 14 - 2
3. The plan shall include test logs for each item of equipment and each system. Include
testing of alarms, control circuits, capacities, speeds, flows, pressures, vibrations,
sound levels, and other parameters.
4. Provide summary of shutdown requirements for existing systems which are
necessary to complete startup of new equipment and systems.
5. Revise and update startup plan based upon review comments, actual progress, and to
accommodate changes in the sequence of activities.
6. System startup plan shall be coordinated with Owner’s operations staff and Engineer
to ensure operational intent is achieved.
B. Submit certified copies of factory test reports.
C. Startup Records:
1. Maintain and submit the following records generated during each phase of startup
defined above in article titled Definitions:
a. Daily logs of equipment testing identifying all tests conducted and outcome.
b. Logs of time spent by manufacturer's representatives performing services on
the Site.
c. Equipment lubrication records.
d. Electrical phase, voltage, and amperage measurements.
e. Insulation resistance measurements.
f. Data sheets of control loop testing, including testing and calibration of
instrumentation devices and setpoints.
g. Detailed, point-by-point, sensor/controlled device/field device to PLC to HMI
screen witnessed validation checklist for all telemetry and SCADA tags
utilizing a fully functional network or other telemetry system available at the
Owner’s plant or other Owner-designated facility.
D. Certificates of Installation and Startup Services
1. At completion of installation and functional testing, furnish Certificate of Installation
and Startup Services, signed by manufacturer, Contractor, and Owner’s authorized
representatives. Each form shall be completed for individual pieces of equipment in
a timely manner as construction proceeds.
2. Submit 3 original copies of each completed form to Engineer.
3. Certify that:
a. Equipment has been properly installed, adjusted, aligned, and lubricated.
b. Equipment is free of any stresses imposed by connecting piping or anchor
bolts.
c. Equipment is suitable for satisfactory full-time operation under full load
conditions.
d. Equipment operates within the allowable limits for vibration.
e. Controls, protective devices, instrumentation, and control panels furnished as
part of the equipment package are properly installed, calibrated, and
functioning.
f. Control logic for startup, shutdown, sequencing, interlocks, and emergency
shutdown has been tested and is properly functioning.
g. For remotely monitored and controlled devices, functionality shall not be
certified until indication and controls are tested using local and remote
SCADA based indications.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 91 14 - 3
4. Sign and submit for acceptance the forms and field manufacturer reports along with
the manufacturer's representative prior to proceeding with System End-To-End Test
and Startup.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FACTORY PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Test equipment for proper performance at the point of manufacture or assembly.
B. Demonstrate equipment meets specified performance requirements.
C. Submit certified copies of factory test results to Engineer for review and approval.
D. Do not ship equipment until certified copies of factory test reports have been approved by
Engineer. Written acceptance of factory test results does not constitute final acceptance.
2.2 FIELD PERFORMANCE TESTING
A. Furnish the services of an experienced and authorized representative of the manufacturer of
each item of equipment indicated in the equipment schedules (excluding manually-operated
valves smaller than 24 inches in size, injectors, tanks, batch-type disc meters, and rotameters,
and any other minor items of equipment specifically exempted by Engineer in writing), who
shall visit the site of the Work and inspect, check, adjust if necessary, and approve the
equipment installation. In each case, arrange to have the manufacturer's representative
revisit the job site as often as necessary until all trouble is corrected, and the equipment
installation and operation are satisfactory to Engineer.
B. Require that each manufacturer's representative furnish to Engineer a written report
addressed to Owner certifying that the equipment has been properly installed and lubricated,
is in accurate alignment, is free from any undue stress imposed by connecting piping or
anchor bolts and has been operated satisfactorily under full-load conditions.
C. Be responsible for scheduling all operations testing, including the End-To-End Testing
performed with other contractors associated with the RTU controls and communications. Be
advised that Engineer and Owner's operating personnel will witness operations testing and
that the manufacturer's representative shall be required to instruct Owner's operating
personnel in correct operation and maintenance procedures. Such instruction shall be
scheduled at a time arranged with Owner at least two weeks in advance and shall be
performed while the respective manufacturer's equipment is fully operational. On-site
instruction shall be given by qualified persons who have been made familiar in advance with
the equipment and systems. Prior to scheduling any operations test ing, furnish Operations
and Maintenance Manuals required by the Contract Documents.
D. Notify the Engineer at least three Workdays in advance of each equipment test.
E. Furnish all personnel, power, water, chemicals, fuel, oil, grease, and all other necessary
equipment, facilities, and services required for conducting the tests.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 91 14 - 4
2.3 SPECIAL TOOLS AND LUBRICATING EQUIPMENT
A. Furnish, according to manufacturer's recommendations, special tools required for checking,
testing, parts replacement, and maintenance. Special tools are those which have been
specially designed or adapted for use on parts of the equipment, and which are not
customarily and routinely carried by maintenance mechanics, including valve keys and
stems.
B. Time of Delivery: Submit special tools and lubricating equipment to Engineer when unit is
placed into operation and after operating personnel have been properly instructed in
operation, repair, and maintenance of equipment.
C. Quality: Provide tools and lubricating equipment of a quality comparable to what the
equipment manufacturer uses.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STARTUP
A. Startup is a highly complex operation requiring the combined technical expertise of
Contractor, manufacturers, subcontractors, Engineer, and Owner. Coordinate all parties
necessary for the successful plant startup.
B. Be responsible for the complete test, check out, startup, and commissioning of all elements of
the Project. Verify these activities through daily inspection reports, test records, on-site
vendor certifications, and by other appropriate means. The test and startup requirements
specified in this Section are complementary to those indicated elsewhere in the Contract
Documents.
C. Conduct all test, check out, and startup requirements indicated in the Contract Documents
and provide documentation of same to Engineer prior to commissioning. Where vendor on-
site inspections are required prior to or during startup, require vendor to provide a written
statement that the installation and check out is complete and proper and that the item(s) are
ready for startup and/or commissioning.
D. It is not the intent of Engineer to instruct Contractor in the startup; however, Engineer will
be available prior to and during startup to provide technical support to the Contractor.
E. Perform a 7-day functional test of the facility. The intent of the 7-day functional test is to
demonstrate that all the components and systems that have been constructed and installed
function individually and collectively in accordance with the Contract Documents. The 7-day
functional test shall demonstrate the ability of the entire facility to operate continuously f or
7-days without failure. In the event of a failure of any of the facility components, the cause of
the failure shall be determined and repaired, and the 7-day functional test shall be restarted
from time zero.
1. Prepare a plan that details the procedures of the 7-day functional test. The plan shall
indicate start and stop times of each of the pumping units, capacity to be pumped
during each period, the number of pumps to be operated during each period, auxiliary
systems that will be needed during each period, and starting and stopping sequences

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 91 14 - 5
of each facility subsystem to be operated during each period. Provide adequate detail
in the plan to determine personnel needed to operate and monitor all components to
be evaluated during each period but the increments of the schedule shall not be
greater than 2 hours. In the plan, identify by name all personnel needed to complete
the 7-day functional test and identify the shift that each person will work during the
test.
2. As part of the plan for the 7-day test, define, subject to Engineer’s approval, what will
constitute a failing test. At a minimum, a test shall be considered to have failed if any
of the following events occur at any time during the 7-day functional test.
a. Failure of a pumping unit or motor.
b. Performance of a pumping unit (including pump and motor) outside of its
specified acceptable ranges for vibration, noise, temperature, cavitation,
efficiency, and capacity.
c. A failure of any ancillary component or system that cannot be returned to
service within 30 minutes of failure.
d. Three failures of an ancillary component or system regardless of the amount
of time it takes to return it to service and regardless of whether or not the
failures are due to the same cause.
e. Three failures of equipment of the same model, regardless of the amount of
time it takes to return each to service and regardless of whether or not the
failures are due to the same cause.
3. During the performance of the 7-day functional test, it shall not be acceptable to
bypass, deactivate, or in any way disable a protective device, alarm, or control to
facilitate completion of the test.
4. If variable speed pumps are provided as part of the construction, each pump shall be
run under automatic control during the 7-day functional test to verify the ability to
operate as required by the Contract Documents provided the communications system
is available. If the communication is not available, Engineer will prescribe the method
and flow rates at which the 7-day functional test will be performed.
5. Provide adequate staff on Site to operate the facility and make factory personnel
available to assist in resolving problems as needed at no additional cost to Owner.
6. Take readings every hour of the 7-day functional test to record equipment operation,
operating speeds, flow rates, temperature of equipment components, system
pressures, operating voltage, current, power draw of each operating unit, and any
problems encountered during the previous hour. Provide readings to Engineer each
morning for the previous day’s run for evaluation and acceptance of the preceding
day as being satisfactorily completed for the 7-day functional test.
F. Furnish operating personnel for the duration of the startup. Additionally, furnish all water,
power, chemicals, and other consumables required for the test.
G. Facility startup shall not be commenced until Component Test and Check Out, Subsystem
Tests, and System End-To-End Tests, with associated control systems in place and
functioning, all have been completed to the satisfaction of Engineer.
H. All defects in materials or workmanship, which appear during this test period, shall be
immediately corrected. Time lost for equipment repairs, wiring corrections, control point
settings, or other reasons, which interrupt the startup may, at the discretion of Engineer, be
justifiable cause for extending startup test duration.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EQUIPMENT TESTING AND STARTUP
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 01 91 14 - 6
I. During startup, furnish the services of authorized representatives of the manufacturers, in
addition to those services required under operations testing, as necessary, to correct faulty
equipment operation.
J. During startup, keep records of the operations in accordance with the instructions of
Engineer.
3.2 LUBRICATION
A. Where lubrication is required for proper operation of equipment, incorporate the necessary
provisions in accordance with the manufacturer's requirements. Where possible, make
lubrication automated and positive.
B. Upon completion System End-To-End Tests and Startup, a qualified manufacturer's
representative shall perform preventive maintenance, such as change break-in lubrication,
complying with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Oil Reservoirs: Where oil is used, provide a reservoir of sufficient capacity to lubricate the
unit for a 7-day period.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 02
EXISTING CONDITIONS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 41 00 - 1
SECTION 02 41 00
DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall demolish, salvage and reconstruct existing civil, landscaping, structural,
architectural, mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and instrumentation facilities as indicated, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall carefully coordinate the Work in areas where existing facilities are
interconnected with new facilities and where existing facilities remain operational. The
Work as indicated is not all inclusive, and the Contractor shall be responsi ble to perform the
reconstruction indicated plus that which can be reasonably inferred from the Contract
Documents as necessary to complete the Project. The Specifications and Drawings identify
the major facilities that shall be demolished and reconstructed, but auxiliary utilities such as
water, air, chemicals, drainage, lubrication, fluid power, electrical wiring, controls, and
instrumentation are not necessarily shown. The Contractor shall comply with sequencing
requirements in Section 01 14 40 - Construction and Schedule Constraints.
B. The Contractor shall note that the Drawings used to indicate demolition and reconstruction
are based on record drawings of the existing facilities. These record drawings have been
reproduced to show existing conditions and to clarify the scope of Work as much as possible.
Prior to bidding, the Contractor shall conduct a comprehensive survey at the Site to verify the
correctness and exactness of the Drawings, the scope of Work, and the extent of auxiliary
utilities. A complete set of record drawings is available for review at the Project site.
C. While demolition and reconstruction are being performed, the Contractor shall provide
adequate access for the continued access, operation and maintenance of equipment and
facilities at the site. The Contractor shall erect and maintain fences, warning signs,
barricades, and other devices around the reconstruction as required for the protection of the
Contractor's employees and other personnel. The Contractor shall remove such protection
when reconstruction activities are complete, or as work progresses, or when directed by the
Engineer.
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Demolition and reconstruction activities and procedures, including operational sequence,
shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. The procedures shall provide for safe
conduct of the Work, careful removal and disposition of materials and equipment, protection
of existing facilities which are to remain undisturbed, coordination with existing facilities to
remain in service, and timely disconnection and reconnection of utility services. The
procedures shall include a detailed description and time schedule of the methods and
equipment to be used for each operation and the sequence of operation. A storage plan for
salvaged items shall be included.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 41 00 - 2
1.4 DEMOLITION AND ABANDONMENT
A. Existing pavement, concrete, retaining walls, curb and gutter, sidewalks, buildings, yard
structures, equipment, piping, valves, ductwork, duct banks, electrical gear, instrumentation,
utilities, and related appurtenances such as anchors, supports, and hardware indicated or
required to be demolished as part of the Work shall be removed and disposed of unless
otherwise indicated. Removal of buried structures, utilities, and appurtenances includes the
related excavation and backfill as required. Removed items shall be disposed of offsite by the
Contractor.
1.5 SALVAGE
A. Items of existing equipment, piping, valves, electrical gear, instrumentation, utilities, and
appurtenances indicated to be salvaged shall be removed without any degradation in
condition from that prior to removal. Salvaged items shall be stockpiled and protected on the
Site at a location directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible to properly
safeguard the salvaged items against damage and loss during removal and handling.
1.6 REHABILITATION
A. Existing civil, landscaping, structural, architectural, mechanical, HVAC, electrical, and
instrumentation Work disturbed or damaged by reconstruction activities shall be repaired
and rehabilitated as indicated.
B. Damaged items shall be repaired or replaced with new items to restore items or surfaces to
a condition equal to and matching that existing prior to damage.
C. DISPOSAL
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the offsite disposal of debris resulting from
reconstruction in compliance with local, state, and federal codes and requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. GENERAL
B. The Contractor shall coordinate demolition and reconstruction Work with the Owner and
Engineer. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall be responsible for the sequence
of activities. Work shall be performed in accordance with applicable safety rules and
regulations.
C. The Contractor shall verify that any utilities connected to structures, equipment, and facilities
to be removed, relocated, salvaged, replaced, or abandoned are rendered inoperable,
replaced with new utilities, or adequately bypassed with temporary utilities before
proceeding with demolition and reconstruction.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 41 00 - 3
D. The Contractor shall take precautions to avoid damage to adjacent facilities and to limit the
Work activities to the extent indicated. If reconstruction beyond the scope indicated is
required, the Contractor shall obtain approval from the Engineer prior to commencing.
3.2 PROTECTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
A. Before beginning any reconstruction, the Contractor shall carefully survey the existing
facilities and examine the Specifications and Drawings to determine the extent of
reconstruction and coordination with the Work. Existing facilities not subject to
reconstruction shall be protected and maintained in accordance with Section 01 71 50 –
Protection and Restoration of Existing Facilities. Damaged existing facilities shall be repaired
to the previous condition or replaced.
B. Persons shall be afforded safe passages around areas of demolition.
C. Structural elements shall not be overloaded. The Contractor shall be responsible for shoring,
bracing, or adding new supports as may be required for adequate structural support as a
result of Work performed under this Section. The Contractor shall remove temporary
protection when the Work is complete or when so authorized by the Engineer.
D. The Contractor shall carefully consider bearing loads and capacities before placement of
equipment and material on Site. In the event of any questions as to whether an area to be
loaded has adequate bearing capacity, the Contractor shall consult with the Engineer prior to
the placement of such equipment or material.
3.3 DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RELOCATION
A. The Contract Documents indicate existing facilities to be demolished, salvaged, and/or
relocated. Auxiliary utilities including such services as water, air, chemicals, drainage,
lubrication, fluid power, electrical wiring, controls, and instrumentation are not necessarily
indicated. The Contractor shall verify the scope of the Work to remove the equipment
indicated; coordinate its shutdown, removal, replacement, or relocation; and submit an
outage plan in accordance with Section 01 14 40 - Construction and Schedule Constraints.
The removal of existing facilities for demolition, salvage, and relocation shall include the
following requirements:
1. Equipment supports, including concrete pads, baseplates, mounting bolts, and
support hangers, shall be removed. Damage to the existing structure shall be repaired
as indicated.
2. Exposed piping including vents, drains, and valves shall be removed. Where exposed
piping penetrates existing floors and walls, the piping, including wall thimbles, shall
be removed to a minimum depth of 2-inches. Resultant openings in the structure
shall be repaired as indicated.
3. Electrical control panels, junction boxes, motor control centers, and local switches
and pushbuttons shall be removed.
4. Exposed electrical conduits and associated wiring shall be removed. Resultant
openings in structures shall be repaired as indicated.
5. Connections to embedded electrical conduits shall be removed a minimum of
2-inches inside the finished surface of the existing structure. Wiring shall be removed
and the resulting openings shall be repaired as indicated.
6. Associated instrumentation devices shall be removed.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 41 00 - 4
7. Auxiliary utility support systems shall be removed.
8. The area shall be thoroughly cleaned such that little or no evidence of the previous
equipment installation will remain.
9. Asphalt and concrete pavement, curbs, and gutters shall be removed as necessary to
perform reconstruction. The limits of removal shall be sawcut. When the required
improvements have been constructed, new asphalt and concrete pavement, curbs,
and gutters shall be placed to match the original unless otherwise indicated.
10. Footings, foundation walls, below-grade construction and concrete slabs on grade
shall be demolished and removed to a depth, which will not interfere with new
construction, but not less than 36-inches below existing ground surface or future
ground surface, whichever is lower.
11. Below-grade areas and voids resulting from demolition of structures shall be
completely filled. Fill and compaction shall be in accordance with Section 31 23 00 -
Earthwork. After fill and compaction, surfaces shall be graded to meet adjacent
contours and to provide flow to surface drainage structures, or as indicated.
12. When existing pipe is removed, the Contractor shall plug the resulting open ends
whether or not so indicated. Where removed piping is exposed, the remaining piping
shall be blind-flanged or fitted with a removable cap or plug.
13. When existing piping is removed from existing structures, the Contractor shall fill
resulting openings in the structures and repair any damage such that the finished
rehabilitated structure shall appear as a new homogeneous unit with little or no
indication of where the new and old materials join. The openings in water-bearing
structures shall be filled with non-shrink grout to be watertight and reinforced as
required or indicated. In locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to
view, the grout shall be recessed approximately 1/2-inch and the recessed area filled
with cement mortar grout.
14. Electrical reconstruction shall be conducted by the Contractor in a safe and proper
manner to avoid injury from electrical shock to the Owner's and Contractor's
personnel. Electrical equipment to be shut off for a period of time shall be tagged,
locked out, and sealed with a crimped wire and lead seal and made inoperable. At no
time shall electrical wiring or connections, which are energized or could become
energized be accessible to Contractor, Owner, or other personnel without suitable
protection or warning signs.
B. The Contractor shall perform a functional test of existing equipment that is relocated and
reinstalled to ensure the equipment functions in the manner documented during the initial
inspection. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer in writing a minimum of 5 Days prior
to the functional testing in order for the Owner and Engineer to witness the test. If, in the
opinion of the Engineer, the relocated equipment does not function in a satisfactory manner,
the Contractor shall make repairs and modifications necessary to restore the equipment to
its original operating condition at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.4 ABANDONMENT
A. Existing facilities to be abandoned shall be prepared as indicated. Where existing buried
piping is to be abandoned, the Contractor shall remove the abandoned pipe for a distance of
5-feet from any connecting structures. Openings at the existing structures shall be repaired.
The remaining pipe shall be capped at both ends prior to backfill. Buried piping, 12-inches
diameter or greater shall be completely sand-filled prior to closure of the piping ends.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 41 00 - 5
3.5 REHABILITATION
A. Certain areas of existing structures, piping, conduits, and the like will be affected by Work
necessary to complete modifications under this Contract. The Contractor shall be responsible
to rehabilitate those areas affected by its construction activities.
B. Where new rectangular openings are to be installed in concrete or concrete masonry walls
or floors, the Contractor shall score the edges of each opening (both sides of wall or floor slab)
by saw-cutting clean straight lines to a minimum depth of 1-inch and then chipping out the
concrete. Alternately, the sides of the opening (not the corners) may be formed by saw
cutting completely through the slab or wall. Saw cuts deeper than 1-inch (or the depth of
cover over existing reinforcing steel, whichever is less) shall not be allowed to extend beyond
the limits of the opening. Corners shall be made square and true by a combination of core
drilling and chipping or grinding. Necessary precautions shall be taken during removal of
concrete to prevent debris from falling into or entering adjacent tanks in service or from
damaging adjacent equipment or piping. Saw cuts allowed to extend beyond the opening
shall be repaired by filling with non-shrink grout. The concrete around any exposed
reinforcement steel shall be chipped back and exposed reinforcement steel cut a minimum of
2-inches from the finished face of the new opening and be painted with epoxy paint. The
inside face of the new opening shall be grouted with an epoxy cement grout to fill any voids
and cover the exposed aggregate and shall be trowel-finished to provide a plumb and square
opening.
C. Where new piping is installed in existing structures, the Contractor shall accurately position
core-drilled openings in the concrete as indicated or otherwise required. Openings shall be
of sufficient size to permit a final alignment of pipelines and fittings without deflection of any
part and to allow adequate space for satisfactory packing where pipe passes through the wall
to provide watertightness around openings so formed. The boxes or cores shall be provided
with continuous keyways to hold the filling material in place, and they shall have a slight flare
to facilitate grouting and the escape of entrained air during grouting. Before placing the non-
shrink grout, concrete surfaces shall be sandblasted, thoroughly cleaned of sand and any
other foreign matter, and coated with epoxy bonding compound.
D. Pipes, castings, or conduits shall be grouted in place by pouring in grout under a head of at
least 4-inches. The grout shall be poured or rammed or vibrated into place to fill completely
the space between the pipes, castings, or conduits, and the sides of the openings so as to
obtain the same watertightness as through the wall itself. The grouted casings shall then be
water cured.
E. In locations where the surface of the grout will be exposed to view, the non-shrink grout shall
be recessed approximately 1/2-inch and the recessed area filled with cement mortar grout.
F. When new piping is to be connected to existing piping, the existing piping shall be cut square
and ends properly prepared for the connection. Any damage to the lining and coating of the
existing piping shall be repaired. Dielectric insulating joints shall be installed at
interconnections between new and existing piping.
G. Where existing equipment, piping, and supports, electrical panels and devices, conduits, and
associated appurtenances are removed, the Contractor shall rehabilitate the affected area
such that little or no evidence of the previous installation remains. Openings in concrete

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 41 00 - 6
floors, walls, and ceilings from piping, conduit, and fastener penetrations shall be filled with
non-shrink grout and finished to match the adjacent area. Concrete pads, bases associated
with equipment, supports, and appurtenances shall be removed by chipping away concrete
and cutting any exposed reinforced steel and anchor bolts a minimum of 2 -inches below
finished grade and be painted with epoxy paint. The area of concrete to be rehabilitated shall
be scored by saw cutting clean, straight lines to a minimum depth of 1-1/2 inches, and
concrete within the scored lines removed to a depth of 1-1/2 inches (or the depth of cover
over reinforcing steel, whichever is less). The area within the scored lines shall be patched
with non-shrink grout to match the adjacent grade and finish. Abandoned connections to
piping and conduits shall be terminated with blind flanges, caps, and plugs suited for the
material, type, and service of the pipe or conduit.
H. Existing reinforcement to remain in place shall be protected, cleaned, and extended into new
concrete. Existing reinforcement not to be retained shall be cut-off as follows:
1. Where new concrete joins existing concrete at the removal line, reinforcement shall
be cut-off flush with the concrete surface at the removal line.
2. Where the concrete surface at the removal line is the finished surface, the
reinforcement shall be cut back 2-inches below the finished concrete surface, the ends
painted with epoxy paint and the remaining holes patched with a cement mortar
grout.
I. Where existing handrailing is removed, post embedments and anchors shall be removed and
post holes shall be filled with non-shrink grout flush to the floor surface. At the point of
continuation of existing handrailing, a new post with rail connections matching the existing
handrailing system shall be installed. New posts in existing concrete floors shall be installed
in core-drilled socket holes and the annular space between the post and hole filled with non-
shrink grout.
J. Where reconstruction activities damage the painting and coating of adjacent or nearby
facilities, the damaged areas shall be surface prepared and coated in accordance with Section
Division 9 to match the original painting and coating with a compatible system. Surfaces of
equipment items that are to be relocated shall be prepared and be coated in accordance with
Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.
3.6 DISPOSAL
A. Demolition and removal of debris shall minimize interference with roads, streets, walks, and
other adjacent occupied or used facilities, which shall not be closed or obstructed without
permission from the Owner. Alternate routes shall be provided around closed or obstructed
traffic ways.
B. Site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from reconstruction operations shall be
legally removed and disposed of. Structures and equipment to be demolished shall be
cleaned prior to demolition and the wash water properly disposed of. No trace of these
structures shall remain prior to placing of backfill in the areas from which structures were
removed.
C. Refuse, debris, and waste materials resulting from demolition and clearing operations shall
not be burned.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 41 00 - 7
3.7 OCCUPANCY AND POLLUTION CONTROL
A. Water sprinkling, temporary enclosures, chutes, and other suitable methods shall be used to
limit dust and dirt rising and scattering in the area. The Contractor shall comply with
government regulations pertaining to environmental protection.
B. Water shall not be used if it creates hazardous or objectionable conditions such as ice,
flooding, or pollution.
3.8 CLEANING
A. During and upon completion of Work, the Contractor shall promptly remove tools and
equipment, surplus materials, rubbish, debris, and dust and shall leave areas affected by
Work in a clean, approved condition.
B. Adjacent structures shall be cleaned of dust, dirt, and debris caused by reconstruction, as
directed by the Engineer or governing authorities, and adjacent areas shall be returned to
condition existing prior to start of Work.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEMOLITION, SALVAGE, AND RECONSTRUCTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 02 41 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

DIVISION 03
CONCRETE

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 11 00 - 1
SECTION 03 11 00
CONCRETE FORMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish, fabricate, and install concrete formwork, bracing, shoring, supports, and falsework
in accordance with Contract Documents.
B. Work shall include installation of form ties, clips, supports and other appurtenances
necessary to meet Specifications and produce finished concrete structures.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions:
ACI 317 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
ACI 347 Formwork for Concrete
B. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST)
standards, latest editions:
PS 1 Structural Plywood
PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard (ASLS)
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Be responsible for the design, engineering, construction, maintenance, and safety of all
falsework, including staging, walkways, forms, ladders, and similar appurtenances, which
shall equal or exceed the applicable requirements of the provisions of the OSHA Safety and
Health Standards for Construction, and the requirements specified herein.
B. Design and construct falsework to provide the necessary rigidity and to support the loads.
Falsework for the support of a superstructure shall be designed to support the loads that
would be imposed if the entire superstructure were placed at one time.
C. Falsework Calculations and Drawings: All falsework or vertical shoring installations where
the height of the falsework or vertical shoring, as measured from the top of the sills to the
soffit of the superstructure, exceeds 14 feet, or where individual horizontal span lengths
exceed 16 feet, or provision for vehicular or railroad traffic through falsework or vertical
shoring is made, shall be approved and signed by a civil or structural engineer, registered in

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 11 00 - 2
the State of Utah. Always maintain a current copy of the falsework plan or shoring layout on
the job site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Except as otherwise expressly accepted by Engineer, all lumber brought on the job site for
use as forms, shoring, or bracing shall be new material. All forms shall be smooth surface
forms and shall be of the following materials:
1. Walls: Steel or plywood panel.
2. Columns: Steel, plywood or fiberglass.
3. Roof and Floor: Plywood.
4. All Other Work: Steel panels, plywood or tongue and groove lumber
B. Form materials which may remain or leave residues on or in the concrete that is in contact
with potable water shall be classified as acceptable for potable water under NSF 61 within
30 days of application or use.
2.2 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Form ties (general):
a. Burke Penta-Tie, Burke Company.
b. Richmond Snap-Tys, Richmond Screw Anchor Company.
c. Gates Ties, Gates and Sons, Inc.
d. Engineer approved equal.
2. Form ties (water retaining structures):
a. Burke Taper-Tie, Burke Company.
b. Taper-Ty, Richmond Screw Anchor Company.
c. Engineer approved equal.
2.3 FORM AND FALSEWORK MATERIALS
A. Materials for concrete forms, formwork, and falsework shall conform to the following
requirements:
1. Lumber shall be Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine, construction grade or better, in
conformance with U.S. Product Standard PS 20.
2. Plywood for concrete formwork shall be new, waterproof, synthetic resin-bonded,
exterior type Douglas Fir or Southern Yellow Pine plywood manufactured especially
for concrete formwork and shall conform to the requirements of PS 1 for Concrete
Forms, Class I, and shall be edge sealed.
3. Form materials shall be metal, wood, plywood, or other approved material that will
not adversely affect the concrete and will facilitate placement of concrete to the
shape, form, line, and grade shown. Metal forms shall be an approved type that will
accomplish such results. Wood forms for surfaces to be painted shall be Medium
Density Overlaid plywood, MDO Ext. Grade.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 11 00 - 3
B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exterior corners in concrete members with 3/4-inch
chamfers. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have fillets unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Forms and falsework to support the roof and floor slabs shall be designed for the total dead
load, plus a live load of 50 psf (minimum). The minimum design load for combined dead and
live loads shall be 100 psf.
2.4 FORM TIES
A. Provide form ties with integral waterstops with a plastic cone on both sides of walls, or other
suitable means for forming a conical hole to ensure that the form tie may be broken off back
of the face of the concrete. The maximum diameter of removable cones for rod ties, or of
other removable form-tie fasteners having a circular cross-section, shall not exceed 1-
1/2 inches; and all such fasteners shall be such as to leave holes of regular shape for reaming.
B. Form ties for water-retaining structures shall have an integral waterstop that tightly fits the
form so that it cannot be moved from the midpoint of the tie. Removable taper ties may be
used when approved by Engineer. A preformed neoprene or polyurethane tapered plug sized
to seat at the center of the wall shall be inserted in the hole left by the removal of the taper
tie.
2.5 FABRICATION
A. Tolerances: The variation from established grade or lines shall not exceed 1/4-inch in 10 feet
and there shall be no offsets or visible waviness in the finished surface. All other tolerances
shall be within the tolerances of ACI 117.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Forms to confine the concrete and shape it to the required lines shall be used wherever
necessary. Assume full responsibility for the adequate design of all forms, and any forms
which are unsafe or inadequate in any respect shall promptly be removed from the Work and
replaced at no increased cost to Owner. Provide worker protection from protruding
reinforcement bars in accordance with applicable safety codes. Provide sufficient number of
forms of each kind to permit the required rate of progress to be maintained. The design and
inspection of concrete forms, falsework, and shoring shall comply with applicable local, state
and Federal regulations.
B. Install plumb and string lines before concrete placement and maintain during placement.
Such lines shall be used by both Contractor and Engineer and shall be in sufficient number
and properly installed. During concrete placement, continually monitor plumb and string
line form positions and immediately correct deficiencies.
C. Concrete forms shall conform to the shape, lines, and dimensions of members as called for on
the Drawings, and shall be substantial, free from surface defects, and sufficiently tight to
prevent leakage. Forms shall be properly braced or tied together to maintain their position

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 11 00 - 4
and shape under a load of freshly placed concrete. If adequate foundation for shores cannot
be secured, trussed supports shall be provided.
3.2 FORM CONSTRUCTION
A. Construct forms in conformance with ACI 347.
B. All forms shall be true in every respect to the required shape and size, shall conform to the
established alignment and grade, and shall be of sufficient strength and rigidity to maintain
their position and shape under the loads and operations incident to placing and vibrating the
concrete. Provide suitable and effective means on all forms for holding adjacent edges and
ends of panels and sections tightly together and in accurate alignment so as to prevent the
formation of ridges, fins, offsets, or similar surface defects in the finished concrete. Plywood,
5/8-inch and greater in thickness, may be fastened directly to studding if the studs are spaced
close enough to prevent visible deflection marks in the concrete. The forms shall be tight to
prevent the loss of water, cement and fines during placing and vibrating of the concrete.
Specifically, the bottom of wall forms that rest on concrete footings or slabs shall be provided
with a gasket to prevent loss of fines and paste during placement and vibration of co ncrete.
Such gasket may be a 1 to 1-1/2-inch diameter polyethylene rod held in position to the
underside of the wall form. Adequate clean-out holes shall be provided at the bottom of each
lift of forms. The size, number, and location of such clean-outs shall be as acceptable to the
Engineer. Whenever concrete cannot be placed from the top of a wall form in a manner that
meets the requirements of the Contract Documents, form windows shall be provided in the
size and spacing needed to allow placement of concrete to the requirements of Section 03 30
00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. The size, number, and location of such form windows shall be as
acceptable to Engineer.
C. Vertical Surfaces: All vertical surfaces of concrete members shall be formed, except where
placement of the concrete against the ground is shown. Not less than 1 inch of concrete shall
be added to the thickness of the concrete member as shown where concrete is permitted to
be placed against trimmed ground in lieu of forms. Such permission will be granted only for
members of comparatively limited height and where the character of the ground is such that
it can be trimmed to the required lines and will stand securely without caving or sloughing
until the concrete has been placed.
D. Construction Joints: Concrete construction joints will not be permitted at locations other
than those shown or specified, except as may be acceptable to Engineer. When a second lift
is placed on hardened concrete, special precautions shall be taken in the way of the number,
location, and tightening of ties at the top of the old lift and bottom of the new to prevent any
unsatisfactory affect whatsoever on the concrete. Pipe stubs and anchor bolts shall be set in
the forms where required.
E. Form Ties
1. Embedded Ties: Holes left by the removal of form tie cones shall be reamed with
suitable toothed reamers to leave the surface of the holes clean and rough before
being filled with mortar as specified for finish of concrete surfaces in Section 03 30
00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Wire ties for holding forms will not be permitted. No
form-tying device or part thereof, other than metal, shall be left embedded in the
concrete. Do not remove ties in such manner as to leave a hole extending through the
interior of the concrete members. The use of snap-ties which cause spalling of the
concrete upon form stripping or tie removal will not be permitted. If steel panel forms

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 11 00 - 5
are used, provide rubber grommets where the ties pass through the form in order to
prevent loss of cement paste. Where metal rods extending through the concrete are
used to support or to strengthen forms, the rods shall remain embedded and shall
terminate not less than 2 inches back from the formed face or faces of the concrete.
2. Removable Ties: Where taper ties are approved for use, the larger end of the taper
tie shall be on the wet side of walls in water retaining structures. After the taper tie
is removed, thoroughly clean the hole and roughen for bond. A precast neoprene or
polyurethane tapered plug shall be located at the wall centerline. Fill the hole
completely with nonshrink grout for water bearing and below-grade walls. The hole
shall be completely filled with nonshrink or regular cement grout for above-grade
walls which are dry on both sides. Exposed faces of walls shall have the outer 2 inches
of the exposed face filled with a cement grout which shall match the color and texture
of the surrounding wall surface.
3.3 REMOVAL OF FORMS
A. Careful procedures for the removal of forms shall be strictly followed, and this Work shall be
done with care to avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading on green concrete will be
permitted. In the case of roof slabs and above-ground floor slabs, forms shall remain in place
until test cylinders for the roof concrete attain a minimum compressive strength of
75 percent of the 28-day strength specified in Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete;
provided, that no forms shall be disturbed or removed under an individual panel or unit
before the concrete in the adjacent panel or unit has attained 75 percent of the specified 28-
day strength and has been in place for a minimum of 7 days. The time required to establish
said strength shall be as determined by Engineer who will make several test cylinders for this
purpose from concrete used in the first group of roof panels placed. If the time so determined
is more than the 7-day minimum, then that time shall be used as the minimum length of time.
Forms for all vertical walls and columns shall remain in place at least 2 days after the concrete
has been placed. Forms for all parts of the Work not specifically mentioned herein shall
remain in place for periods of time as determined by Engineer and ACI 347.
3.4 REUSE OF FORMS
A. Forms may be reused only if in good condition and only if acceptable to Engineer. Light
sanding between uses will be required wherever necessary to obtain uniform surface texture
on all exposed concrete surfaces. Exposed concrete surfaces are defined as surfaces which
are permanently exposed to view. In the case of forms for the inside wall surfaces of
hydraulic/water retaining structures, unused tie rod holes in forms shall be covered with
metal caps or shall be filled by other methods acceptable to Engineer.
3.5 MAINTENANCE OF FORMS
A. Forms shall be maintained at all times in good condition, particularly as to size, shape,
strength, rigidity, tightness, and smoothness of surface. Forms, when in place, shall conform
to the established alignment and grades. Before concrete is placed, the forms shall be
thoroughly cleaned. The form surfaces shall be treated with a non-staining mineral oil or
other lubricant acceptable to the Engineer. Any excess lubricant shall be satisfactorily
removed before placing the concrete. Where field oiling of forms is required, the Contractor
shall perform the oiling at least 2 weeks in advance of their use. Exercise care to keep oil off
the surfaces of steel reinforcement and other metal items to be embedded in concrete.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE FORMING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 11 00 - 6
3.6 FALSEWORK
A. Place falsework on a solid footing, safe against undermining, and protected from softening.
When the falsework is supported on timber piles, the maximum calculated pile loading shall
not exceed 20 tons. When falsework is supported on any portion of the structure which is
already constructed, the load imposed by the falsework shall be spread, distributed, and
braced in such a way as to avoid any possibility of damage to the structure.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 20 00 - 1
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish, fabricate and install reinforcing steel as shown on Contract Documents.
B. Work includes installation of tie wires, clips, supports, and other appurtenances necessary to
meet Specifications and produce finished concrete structures.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions:
ACI 315 Details of Concrete Reinforcement
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete
ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures
B. American Welding Society (AWS):
D1.4 Structural Welding Code – Reinforcing Steel
C. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM A615 Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A706 Standard Specification for Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for
Concrete Reinforcement
ASTM A775 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel
Bars
ASTM A1064 Standard Specification for Carbon-Steel Wire and Welded
Wire Reinforcement, Plain and Deformed, for Concrete
D. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) standards, most recent editions:
Placing Reinforcing Bars
Manual of Standard Practice

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 20 00 - 2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Submit details of the concrete reinforcement steel and concrete inserts at the earliest possible
date after receipt of the Notice to Proceed.
C. Include, but not limit to, the following:
1. Complete bar schedule, bar details and erection drawings to conform to ACI 315.
2. Each type of bar marked with identification corresponding to identification tag on
bar.
3. Length, type, and location of all splices.
4. Erection drawings shall be clear, easily legible and to a minimum scale of:
a. 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
b. 1/8 inch = 1 foot if bars in each face are shown in separate views.
5. Size and location of openings.
D. Furnish a certified Affidavit of Compliance issued by steel manufacturer that reinforcing steel
furnished for project meets requirements of ASTM standards referenced herein, as
applicable.
E. Do not use Contract Documents as erection drawings.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications
1. Welding operators, processes, and procedures to be qualified in accordance with AWS
D1.4.
2. Welding operators to have been qualified during the previous 12 months prior to
commencement of welding.
B. Certifications
1. Submit manufacturer’s certification that products submitted meet requirements of
standards referenced.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Store reinforcing steel on wood supports in a manner that prevents it from coming in contact
with the ground.
C. Store only bars with same identifying label in same stack.
D. Cover epoxy coated reinforcement for protection against both moisture and ultraviolet light
and so that condensation does not form on the bars.
E. When handling coated bars, use systems with padded contact areas.
F. Thoroughly inspect coated steel after delivery to the job site and again after installation to
ensure that it is not damaged.
1. Repair damage with patching material meeting manufacturer’s requirements.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 20 00 - 3
2. Promptly patch sheared ends and other cuts or exposed areas before detrimental
oxidation occurs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Mechanical Couplers:
a. Lenton Form Saver by Erico Products.
b. Dowel Bar Splicer System by Richmond Screw Anchor Company.
c. Engineer-approved equal.
2.2 REINFORCEMENT STEEL
A. Materials:
1. Reinforcing bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60.
2. Reinforcing bars to be welded: ASTM A706.
3. Smooth dowels: ASTM A615, Grade 60 plain billet steel bars epoxy coated in
accordance with ASTM A775. Provide slip dowel sleeves to allow longitudinal
movement equal to joint width plus 1/4 inch.
4. Slip Dowel Sleeve: One or two component Speed Dowel System as manufactured by
Greenstreak, inc, to accept 3/4-inch diameter x 12-inch long slip dowels, including
epoxy coating when specified herein or shown on Drawings.
5. Welded wire fabric: ASTM A1064 and the details indicated; provided, that welded
wire fabric with longitudinal wire of W4 size wire and smaller shall be either provided
in flat sheets or in rolls with a core diameter of not less than 10 inches; and provided
further, that welded wire fabric with longitudinal wires larger than W4 size shall be
provided in flat sheets only.
6. Spiral reinforcement: Cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of
ASTM A1064.
7. Welding Electrodes: E90 meeting requirements of AWS D1.4.
B. Fabrication of Bars:
1. Fabricate with cold bends conforming to recommended dimensions shown in
ACI 318.
2. Field fabrication will be allowed only if Contractor has equipment to properly
fabricate steel to same tolerances as for shop fabrications.
3. Attach identification tags with identifying mark.
4. Contractor may at his option continue steel reinforcement through openings in walls
and slabs, then field cut opening.
2.3 BOLSTERS, CHAIRS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Conform to ACI 315 and CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Provide spacers, bolsters, chairs, ties and other devices necessary to properly space, place,
support, and fasten steel reinforcement in place during concrete placement.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 20 00 - 4
C. Metal accessories shall be stainless steel with plastic coated tips where legs will be exposed
in finished concrete surfaces. Color of plastic shall be grey to match concrete color.
D. Do not use rocks, broken bricks, wood blocks, or concrete fragments for support of steel
reinforcement.
E. Support between Reinforcing Steel and Formed Exposed Surfaces: Metal bar chairs.
2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE BLOCK BAR SUPPORTS (DOBIES)
A. Supports between Reinforcing Steel for Roof Slabs: Concrete block prohibited.
B. Minimum Compressive Strength of Blocks: 5,000 psi in seven days.
C. Minimum Bearing Area: 9 square inches. Place as required to maintain specified clearances.
D. Wire ties shall be embedded in concrete block bar supports.
2.5 MECHANICAL COUPLERS
A. Provide mechanical couplers where shown and where approved by Engineer and in
accordance with ACI building code standards. The couplers shall develop the full tensile
strength of the bars being spliced at each splice (Type 2).
B. Where the type of coupler used is composed of more than one component, supply all
components required for a complete splice. This shall apply to all mechanical splices,
including those splices intended for future connections.
2.6 EPOXY GROUT
A. Epoxy for grouting reinforcing bars shall be specifically formulated for such application, for
the moisture condition, application temperature, and orientation of the hole to be filled.
Epoxy grout shall meet the requirements found in Section 03 60 00 - Grouting.
2.7 FABRICATION
A. Tolerances:
1. Sheared lengths: plus or minus 1 inch.
2. Overall dimensions of stirrups, ties, and spirals: plus or minus ½ inch.
3. All other bends: +0 inch, -½ inch.
B. Minimum diameter of bends measured on the inside of the rebar to be as indicated in ACI
318.
C. Ship all reinforcement to job site with attached plastic or metal tags.
1. Place on each tag the mark number of the reinforcement corresponding to the mark
number indicated on the shop drawings.
2. Mark numbers on tags to be so placed that the numbers cannot be removed.
2.8 TESTING
A. Perform at mill for each heat.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 20 00 - 5
B. If requested by Engineer, furnish samples of each type of welded splice used in the Work in a
quantity and of dimensions adequate for testing.
C. At the discretion of Engineer, radiographic testing of direct butt-welded splices will be
performed. Provide assistance necessary to facilitate testing. Repair any weld which fails to
meet the requirements of AWS D1.4. The costs of testing will be paid by Owner; except, the
costs of all tests which fail to meet specified requirements shall be paid by Contractor at no
increase in cost to Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Tolerances:
1. Rebar Placement:
a. Clear distance to formed surfaces: plus or minus ¼ inch.
b. Minimum spacing between bars: ¼ inch.
c. Top bars in slabs and beams:
1) Members 8 inches deep or less: plus or minus ¼ inch.
2) Members between 8 inches and 2 feet deep: plus or minus ¼ inch.
3) Members more than 2 feet deep: plus or minus ¾ inch.
d. Crosswise of members: Spaced evenly within plus or minus 1 inch.
e. Lengthwise of members: plus or minus 2 inches.
2. Minimum clear distance between rebars:
a. Beams, walls, and slabs: Distance equal to rebar diameter or 1 inch,
whichever is greater.
b. Columns: Distance equal to 1-1/2 times the rebar diameter or 1½ inch,
whichever is greater.
c. Beam and slab rebars shall be threaded through the column vertical rebars
without displacing the column vertical rebars and still maintaining the clear
distances required for the beam and slab rebars.
B. Minimum concrete protective covering for reinforcement, unless indicated otherwise on
Contract Documents:
1. Concrete deposited against earth: 3 inches.
2. Formed surfaces exposed to weather or in contact with earth:
a. 2 inches for reinforcing bars #6 or larger.
b. 1½ inch for reinforcing bars less than #6.
3. Formed surfaces exposed to any liquid: 2 inches for all rebar sizes.
4. Interior surfaces:
a. 1½ inch for beams, girders, and columns.
b. ¾ inch for slabs, walls, and joists.
C. Splice steel to conform to Chapter 12 of ACI 318 or ACI 350 as applicable. Unless indicated
otherwise on Contract Documents, provide splices for reinforcing as follows:
1. Rebar:
a. Lapped splices shall be not less than a Class B splice for reinforcement unless
otherwise indicated.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 20 00 - 6
b. Mechanical splices shall be used whenever shown on the Contract Documents
and may be used at other locations at Contractor’s option. Such locations shall
be shown specifically on the rebar shop drawings.
c. Welding:
1) Perform welding of rebars in accordance with requirements of AWS
D1.4.
2) Have each welder place an approved identifying mark near each
completed weld.
2. Welded wire fabric: Splice lap length measured between outermost cross wires of
each fabric sheet shall not be less than 1 spacing of cross wires plus 2 inches, or less
than 1.5 times the development length, nor less than 6 inches. Development length
shall be as required for the basic development length for the specified fabric yield
strength in accordance with Section 12 of ACI 318 or ACI 350.
3. Provide splices of reinforcing not specifically indicated or specified subject to
approval of Engineer.
D. Placing Rebars
1. Assure that reinforcement at time concrete is placed is free of mud, oil, or other
materials that may affect or reduce bond.
2. Reinforcement with rust, mill scale, or a combination of both will be accepted as being
satisfactory without cleaning or brushing provided dimensions and weights including
heights of deformations on a cleaned sample are not less than required by applicable
ASTM specifications that govern the rebar supplied.
3. Rebar support:
a. Support rebars and fasten together to prevent displacement by construction
loads or placing of concrete.
b. On ground, provide supporting concrete blocks.
c. Over formwork, provide plastic-coated metal chairs, runners, boosters,
spacers, hangers, and other rebar support. Only tips in contact with the forms
need to be plastic coated.
d. Bars additional to those shown on the Contract Documents, which may be
found necessary or desirable by Contractor for the purpose of securing
reinforcement in position, shall be provided by Contractor at his own expense.
e. Tie securely at minimum of 33% of intersections with 16-gage or larger
annealed iron wire.
f. Accommodate placement of formed openings.
g. Where parallel horizontal reinforcement in beams in indicated to be placed in
two or more layers, rebars in the upper layers shall be placed directly above
rebars in the bottom layer with clear distance between layers to be 1 inch.
Place spacer rebars at 3 feet maximum centers to maintain the required 1-
inch clear distance between layers.
h. Extend reinforcement to within 2 inches of concrete perimeter edges. If
perimeter edge is earth formed, extend reinforcement to within 3 inches of
the edge.
i. To insure proper placement, furnish templates for all column vertical bars
and dowels.
j. Provide splices of reinforcement not specifically indicated or specified subject
to Engineer’s approval.
k. Do not bend reinforcement after embedding in hardened concrete unless
approved by Engineer. Do not bend reinforcing by means of heat.
l. Tie wires shall be bent away from form surfaces.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 20 00 - 7
m. Do not tack-weld reinforcement.
E. Ensure that steel reinforcement and embedments do not exceed 160 Degrees F at time of
concrete placement.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Reinforcement Congestion and Interfaces:
1. Notify Engineer whenever the specified clearances between rebars cannot be met.
2. Do not place any concrete until Engineer submits a solution to rebar congestion
problem.
3. Rebars may be moved slightly to avoid interference with other reinforcement steel,
conduits, or embedded items.
4. If rebars are moved more than 1 bar diameter, or enough to exceed above tolerances,
obtain Engineer’s approval of resulting arrangement of rebars.
5. No cutting of rebars shall be done without written approval of Engineer.
B. Employ a testing laboratory to perform and report following:
1. Review and approve Contractor proposed welding procedures and processes for
conformance with AWS D1.4.
2. Qualify welders in accord with AWS D1.4.
3. Test three samples of each bar size and each type of weld in accord with AWS D1.4.
The tensile strength of each test shall be not less than 125 percent of the required
yield strength of the rebar tested.
4. Conduct nondestructive field tests (radiographic or magnetic particle) on not less
than one random sample for each 10 welds. In addition, if any welds are found
defective, test five previous welds performed by the same welder.
5. Visually inspect each weld for presence of cracks, undercuts, inadequate size, and
other visible defects.
3.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordination with placement of formwork, formed openings, embedded items, and other
Work.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE REINFORCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 20 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 1
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide cast-in-place concrete work as shown on Contract Drawings and as specified herein.
B. Section includes:
1. Concrete Materials.
2. Proportioning and Mixing.
3. Ready Mixed Concrete.
4. Curing Materials.
5. Expansion Joint Filler.
6. Elastomeric Bearings.
7. Waterstops.
8. Liquid Floor Hardener.
9. Preparing for Concreting.
10. Placing of Concrete.
11. Finishing.
12. Curing.
13. Field Quality Control.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 11 00 – Concrete Forming.
B. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing.
C. Section 03 60 00 – Grouting.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions:
ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
ACI 211 Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Concrete
ACI 212 Chemical Admixtures
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings
ACI 305 Recommended Practice for Hot Weather Concreting
ACI 306 Recommended Practice for Cold Weather Concreting
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 2
ACI 350 Code Requirements for Environmental Engineering Concrete
Structures
B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM C31 Standard Specification Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field
ASTM C33 Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C39 Test for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete
Specimens
ASTM C42 Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores
and Sawed Beams of Concrete
ASTM C94 Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C138 Standard Test Method for Density (Unit Weight), Yield, and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Concrete
ASTM C143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete
ASTM C172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C309 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming
Compounds for Curing Concrete
ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C586 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of
Carbonate Rocks as Concrete Aggregates (Rock-Cylinder
Method)
ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete
ASTM C827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM C1077 Standard Practice for Agencies Testing Concrete and Concrete
Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Testing
Agency Evaluation

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 3
ASTM C1260 Standard Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of
Aggregates (Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM C1293 Standard Test Method for Determination of Length Change of
Concrete Due to Alkali-Silica Reaction
ASTM C1567 Standard Test Method for Determining the Potential Alkali-
Silica Reactivity of Combinations of Cementitious Materials
and Aggregate (Accelerated Mortar-Bar Method)
ASTM D412 Test Methods for Rubber Properties in Tension
ASTM D624 Standard Test Method for Tear Strength of Conventional
Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Elastomers
ASTM D746 Test Method for Brittleness Temperature of Plastics and
Elastomers by Impact
ASTM D1751 Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Fillers for
Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Nonextruding
and Resilient Bituminous Types)
ASTM D1752 Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and
Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving and
Structural Construction
ASTM D2419 Standard Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and
Fine Aggregate
C. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) standards, latest editions:
Guideline No 310.1R Guide for Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated
Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion
Guideline No 320.2R Guide for selecting and specifying Materials for repair of
Concrete Surfaces
D. U. S. Army Corps of Engineers standards, most recent editions:
CRD-C 572 PVC Waterstops
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Construction Joints: Fresh concrete placed against a hardened concrete surface; joint
between two pours is called a construction joint. Unless otherwise indicated, provide
construction joints with a waterstop and sealant groove of the shape indicated.
B. Expansion Joints: To allow concrete to expand freely, space provided between two pours,
formed as indicated. Space is made by placing filler joint material against the first pour; acts
as a form for the second pour.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 4
C. Control Joints: Provide weakened plane in concrete, where shrinkage cracks will likely occur.
A groove, shape and dimensions indicated in Drawings, formed or saw-cut in concrete.
Groove is filled with joint sealant material.
D. Laitance: In placement of concrete, accumulation of small inert particles of cement and
aggregate on surface, caused by excess of water that, when it evaporates, leaves a thin layer,
causing weakened plane for subsequent pour.
E. Alkalis: Term "alkalis" referred to herein is defined as sum of percentage of sodium oxide
and 0.658 times percentage of potassium oxide (Na20+0.658K20). These oxides shall be oxide
content determined in accordance with ASTM C114.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Product data:
1. Concrete mix design(s) proposed for use. Proposed concrete mix design submittal to
include the following information:
a. Sieve analysis and source identification of fine and coarse aggregates. Include
sand equivalency.
b. Source test results for aggregate organic impurities.
c. Source test results for deleterious aggregate per ASTM standards.
d. Proportioning of all materials.
e. Type of cement with mill certificate for cement.
f. Slump.
g. Air Content.
h. Brand, type, ASTM designation, and quantity of each admixture proposed for
use.
i. 28-day cylinder compressive test results of trial mixes per ACI 350 and as
indicated herein.
j. Shrinkage test results.
k. Standard deviation value for concrete production facility.
2. Manufacturer and type of joint filler, joint sealant, curing agent, finishing aid, and
chemical floor hardener.
3. Waterstops:
a. Provide manufacturer’s current test reports with written material
certification.
b. Provide samples of extruded or molded sections of each size or shape to be
used in the Work. Samples shall represent in all aspects, the material to be
furnished under this Contract.
c. Provide sample of fabricated cross-construction of each size or shape of
waterstop to be used. Fabricate samples so that material and workmanship
represent the materials to be furnished in the Work.
d. Provide manufacturer's written certification as an integral part of the
shipping form, to show that the material shipped to Work meets or exceeds
the physical property requirements specified.
4. Manufacturer and type of bonding and patching mortar and bonding adhesive used
at construction joints.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 5
5. Pour plan for concrete pour sequence.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Preconstruction Testing: Perform all preliminary and trial batch laboratory tests on cement,
aggregates, and concrete.
B. Testing Agencies: The testing laboratory shall meet or exceed the requirements of
ASTM C1077.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Mixing, transporting, handling, placing, curing and testing of concrete in accordance with
applicable ACI and ASTM specifications and as specified.
C. Storage of material:
1. Cement:
a. Protect cement from exposure to moisture until used.
b. Do not use if caked or lumpy.
c. Store sacked cement to permit access for inspection and sampling.
2. Aggregate:
a. Store to prevent segregation and contamination with other sizes or foreign
materials.
b. Obtain samples for testing from aggregates at point of batching.
c. Do not use frozen or partially frozen aggregates.
d. Do not use the bottom 6 inches of stockpiles in contact with ground.
e. Allow sand to drain until moisture content is uniform prior to use.
3. Admixtures:
a. Protect from contamination, evaporation, freezing, or damage.
b. Maintain within temperature range recommended by manufacturer.
c. Completely mix solutions and suspensions prior to use.
D. Delivery:
1. Prepare a delivery ticket for each load of ready-mix concrete delivered to the project.
Truck operator shall hand ticket to Engineer at time of delivery, which shows the
following information for each load:
a. Mix identification mark.
b. Quantity delivered (by volume).
c. Amount of each material in batch.
d. Outdoor temperature in the shade.
e. Time at which cement was added.
f. Amount of water added at jobsite by Contractor.
g. Amount of superplastisizer added where applicable.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 6
1.8 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. When temperature is below 40F or is likely to fall below 40F during 24-hour period after
placing concrete, heat materials, (not in excess of 140F) including both water an aggregates
and protect concrete so that temperature of the concrete is between 50F and 90F for
24-hour period after placing concrete.
B. During hot weather, shade materials from sun and use cool water so temperature of concrete
does not exceed 90F at time of placing concrete.
C. Placing of concrete is not permitted where, in opinion of Engineer, wind, rain or inadequate
facilities furnished by Contractor prevents proper finishing or curing of concrete.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordination with placement of reinforcing steel, embedded items, and other Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Expansion joint fillers:
a. Ceramar, WR Meadows, Inc.
b. Rubberite Cypress Sponge Corporation
c. Williams Products, Inc.
d. Engineer approved equal.
2. Membrane Curing Compound.
a. 1100-Clear, WR Meadows, Inc.
b. Dry-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W), Dayton Superior.
c. L&M Cure R, L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc
d. Engineer approved equal.
3. Evaporation Retardant:
a. AquaFilm (J74), Dayton Superior.
b. Eucobar, Euclid Chemical Company.
c. MasterKure ER50 by Master Builders.
d. Engineer approved equal.
4. Waterstops, Plastic Serrated Type:
a. Sika Vinylex Corporation.
b. Sika Greenstreak, Inc.
c. W. R. Meadows, Inc.
d. Engineer approved equal.
5. Waterstops, Plastic Adhesive Type:
a. Synko-Flex, Henry Company.
b. Engineer approved equal.
6. Waterstops, Hydrophilic Type
a. Ultraseal, Adeka, Inc.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 7
b. Adcor ES, WR Grace,
c. Hydro-Flex, Henry Company.
d. Hydrotite, Sika Greenstreak, Inc.
e. Engineer approved equal.
7. Bonding agent:
a. Armatek 110 EpoCem, Sika Corporation
b. Engineer approved equal.
8. Set Controlling Admixtures
a. Set-retarding and hydration control:
1) MasterSet Delvo, Master Builders.
2) Recover, GCP Applied Technologies.
3) SikaTard 440, Sika Corporation.
4) Engineer approved equal.
b. Non-corrosive set accelerating:
1) Daraset 400, GCP Applied Technologies.
2) MasterSet FP 20, Master Builders.
3) Plastocrete 161FL by Sika Corporation.
4) Engineer approved equal.
9. Air-entraining Agent:
a. Micro-Air, Master Builders.
b. Daravair 1000, WR Grace.
c. Sika AEA-15, Sika Corporation.
d. Engineer approved equal.
10. Finishing Aids:
a. Day1 Finishing Aid, Solomon Colors.
b. Slab Assist, TK Products.
c. Engineer approved equal.
11. Crystalline Waterproofing Repair Grout:
a. Mortar IC, AquaFin, Inc.
b. Penecrete Mortar, Penetron International, LTD.
c. Concentrate Dry Pac, Xypex Chemical Corporation.
d. Engineer approved equal.
12. Pigments for Underground Conduit Banks:
a. Arizona Oxides, #1835.
b. Bayer, Bayferrox #130.
c. Davis, #117.
d. As currently approved by Rocky Mountain Power Company.
13. Liquid Chemical Floor Hardener:
a. Surfhard, Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, Ohio.
b. Burke-O-Lith, EDOCO.
c. Solidus Hardener, Lambert Corporation.
d. Engineer-approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Blended Hydraulic Cement: Comply with ASTM C595, Type IL (10) (MS), grey color.
1. Cement shall not contain more than 0.60 percent equivalent alkalis.
2. Limestone content is limited to 10 percent.
3. Single brand of cement used throughout Work; brand approved by Engineer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 8
B. Fly Ash: ASTM C618, Class F including supplementary optional requirements relating to
reactive aggregates and alkalis, and loss on ignition (LOI) not to exceed 5 percent
1. Maximum of 25 percent replacement at 1.0 pounds of fly ash per pound of cement
replaced.
C. Coarse Aggregate: Conforming to ASTM C33 and as noted below.
1. Clean, hard, durable gravel, crushed gravel, crushed rock or combination thereof.
2. Reactivity: Non-reactive or below innocuous behavior level.
3. Prepare and handle coarse aggregates in two or more size groups for combined
aggregates with maximum size greater than 3/4 inch.
4. When aggregates are proportioned for each batch of concrete, combine the
size groups.
5. Obtain coarse aggregates from sources approved by Engineer.
D. Combined Aggregates: Well graded from course to fine sizes; uniformly graded between
screen sizes to produce a concrete that has optimum workability and consolidation
characteristics. Where a trial batch is required for a mix design, the final combined aggregate
gradation will be established during the trial batch process.
E. Fine Aggregates: Natural or combination of natural and manufactured sand that is hard and
durable.
1. Lightweight Sand for Fine Aggregate: Not permitted.
2. Sand Equivalency: Tested in accordance with ASTM D2419; not less than 80 percent
for an average of 3 samples; not less than 80 percent for an individual test.
3. Gradation: In accordance with ASTM C33; 15 to 30 percent passing number 50
screen; 5 to 10 percent passing number 100 screen.
4. Fineness Modulus: Not over 3.00.
5. Reactivity: Non-reactive or below innocuous behavior level.
6. Obtain fine aggregates from sources approved by Engineer
F. Water: Clean and free from objectionable quantities of organic matter, alkali, salts and other
impurities, as determined by Engineer.
G. Admixtures:
1. Maximum total water soluble chloride ion content contributed from all ingredients of
concrete including water, aggregates, cementitious materials, and admixtures by
weight percent of cement:
a. 0.06 For prestressed concrete.
b. 0.10 For all other concrete.
2. Do not use calcium chloride.
3. Provide admixtures of same type, manufacturer, and quantity as used in establishing
required concrete proportions in the mix design.
4. Air entraining admixtures: ASTM C260.
5. Water reducing admixtures:
a. Comply with ASTM C494, Type A.
b. Concrete not to contain more than one water-reducing admixture.
c. Conform to applicable provisions of ACI 212.3R.
d. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 9
e. Use chloride free admixtures only.
6. Set controlling admixtures with or without water-reducing properties.
a. ASTM C494, Types B through E.
b. Conform to applicable provisions of ACI 212.3R.
c. Do not use retarding or accelerating admixtures unless specifically approved
in writing by Engineer and at no additional cost to Owner.
d. Follow manufacturer’s instructions.
e. Use chloride free admixtures only.
7. High Range Water Reducers:
a. In accordance with ASTM C494, Type F.
b. Conform to applicable provisions of ACI 212.3R.
c. Locations for use of high range admixtures shall be as shown on the Contract
Drawings. Do not use high range admixtures in other locations unless
specifically approved by Engineer and at no additional cost to Owner.
d. Add to concrete at the jobsite after all other ingredients have been mixed and
initial slump has been verified.
e. Added by a technician certified by manufacturer of the product.
f. Added at the site unless written permission is given by Engineer to add the
product at plant.
g. Mixing: Minimum 70 revolutions or 5 minutes after addition of high-range
water reducer.
h. Slump before Addition: Maximum 2 inches.
i. Slump after Addition: Minimum of 6 inches and maximum of 10 inches.
8. Pigments for Underground Conduit Banks: Pigment shall be added to concrete
encasing electrical duct banks as required by governing agency.
H. Curing Materials
1. Polyethylene sheet for use as concrete curing blanket shall be white and shall have a
nominal thickness of 6 mils. The loss of moisture when determined in accordance
with the requirements of ASTM C156 shall not exceed 0.055 grams per square
centimeter of surface.
2. Polyethylene-coated waterproof paper sheeting for use as concrete curing blanket
shall consist of white polyethylene sheeting free of visible defects, uniform in
appearance, having a nominal thickness of 2 mils and permanently bonded to
waterproof paper conforming to the requirements of Federal Specification UU B 790A
(1) (2). The loss of moisture, when determined in accordance with the requirements
of ASTM C156, shall not exceed 0.055 gram per square centimeter of surface.
3. Polyethylene-coated burlap for use as concrete curing blanket shall be 4 mils thick,
white opaque polyethylene film impregnated or extruded into one side of the burlap.
Burlap shall weigh not less than 9 ounces per square yard. The loss of moisture, when
determined in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C156, shall not exceed
0.055 gram per square centimeter of surface.
4. Membrane Curing Compound (with fugitive dye added): ASTM C309, Type 1-D, Class
B. Sodium silicate compounds shall not be allowed.
I. Expansion Joint Filler
1. Provide expansion joints in concrete construction where shown on Contract
Drawings.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 10
2. Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed, non-extruding, resilient type, constructed of
cellular sponge rubber, extending full thickness of slab, in accordance with
ASTM D1751 or ASTM D1752, Type I.
J. Grout: As specified in Section 03 60 00 – Grouting.
K. Liquid Chemical Floor Hardener:
1. Colorless, aqueous solution of containing magnesium fluosilicate combined with a
wetting agent.
a. Premeasured, premixed, and packaged at the factory
b. Not less than 2 pounds fluosilicate per gallon.
c. Provide material which does not react with, inhibit, or otherwise interfere
with adhesives and bonding of future floor finishes.
L. Finishing Aids:
1. Topically applied colloidal silica compound.
2. Do not use as a curing compound.
3. Only to be used to assist in finishing by working into the surface immediately after
application.
M. Waterproofing: Refer to Section 07 14 00 – Fluid-Applied Waterproofing.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Concrete Pumps:
1. Provide pumping equipment with two cylinders, designed to operate with only one
cylinder in case one is not functioning. In lieu of this requirement, provide a standby
pump on the site during pumping.
a. Minimum Diameter of Hose (conduit): 4 inches.
b. Aluminum conduits for conveying the concrete will not be permitted.
B. Vibrators:
1. Internally vibrated, high speed power vibrators of an approved immersion type. In
sufficient numbers with standby units as required.
C. Truck Mixers:
1. At the Contractor's option, ready-mixed concrete may be used meeting the
requirements as to materials, batching, mixing, transporting, and placing as specified
herein and in accordance with ASTM C94, including the following supplementary
requirements.
2. Ready-mixed concrete shall be delivered to the site of the Work, and discharge shall
be completed within 90 minutes after the addition of the cement to the aggregates.
3. Truck mixers shall be equipped with electrically-actuated counters by which the
number of revolutions of the drum or blades may be readily verified. The counter
shall be of the resettable, recording type, and shall be mounted in the driver's cab.
The counters shall be actuated at the time of starting mixers at mixing speeds.
4. Mix each batch of concrete in a truck mixer for not less than 70 revolutions of the
drum or blades at the rate of rotation designated by the manufacturer of equipment.
Additional mixing, if any, shall be at the speed designated by the manufacturer of the

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 11
equipment as agitating speed. All materials including mixing water shall be in the
mixer drum before actuating the revolution counter for determining the number of
revolutions of mixing.
5. Truck mixers and their operation shall be such that the concrete throughout the
mixed batch as discharged is within acceptable limits of uniformity with respect to
consistency, mix, and grading. If slump tests taken at approximately the 1/4 and
3/4 points of the load during discharge give slumps differing by more than one inch
when the specified slump is 3 inches or less, or if they differ by more than 2 inches
when the specified slump is more than 3 inches, the mixer shall not be used on the
Work unless the causing condition is corrected and satisfactory performance is
verified by additional slump tests. All mechanical details of the mixer, such as water
measuring and discharge apparatus, condition of the blades, speed of rotation,
general mechanical condition of the unit, and clearance of the drum, shall be checked
before a further attempt to use the unit will be permitted.
6. The use of non-agitating equipment for transporting ready-mixed concrete will not
be permitted. Combination truck and trailer equipment for transporting ready-mixed
concrete will not be permitted. The quality and quantity of materials used in ready-
mixed concrete and in batch aggregates shall be subject to continuous inspection at
the batching plant by the Engineer.
2.4 REINFORCEMENT STEEL
A. Provide in accordance with Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing.
2.5 CONCRETE MIXES
A. General: Concrete shall be composed of cement, admixtures, aggregates, and water. These
materials shall be of the qualities specified and in accordance with ACI 301 specifications.
The exact proportions in which these materials are to be used for different parts of the Work
will be determined during the trial batch. In general, the mix shall be designed to produce a
concrete capable of being deposited so as to obtain maximum density and minimum
shrinkage and, where deposited in forms, to have good consolidation properties and
maximum smoothness of surface. The aggregate gradations shall be formulated to provide
fresh concrete that will not promote rock pockets around reinforcing steel or embedded
items. The proportions shall be changed whenever necessary or desirable to meet the
required results at no additional cost to the Owner. All changes shall be subject to review by
the Engineer.
B. Fine Aggregate Composition:
1. In mix designs for structural concrete, the percentage of fine aggregate in total
aggregate by weight shall be as indicated in the following table:

Fineness
Modulus
Maximum
Percent
2.7 or less 41
2.7 to 2.8 42
2.8 to 2.9 43
2.9 to 3.1 44

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 12
2. In all other concrete, the maximum percentage of fine aggregate of total aggregate, by
weight, shall not exceed 50.
C. Concrete compressive strength, aggregate size and slump in accordance with the following:

Type of Construction
Compressive
Strength
(psi)
Aggregate
Gradation
(ASTM C33)
Slump
in
Inches
(Max.)
Max W/C
Ratio
(by
Weight)
Structure walls. 4,000 #67 (3/4”) 4 0.45
Structure footing 4,000 #467 (1-1/2”) 4 0.45
Reinforced concrete
encasements; thrust blocks 4,000 #467 (1-1/2”) 4 0.50
Site Slabs; Curb and gutter 4,500 #67 (3/4”) 4 0.50
Lean Concrete 3,000 #467 (1-1/2”) 5 0.60
Site underground conduit
banks: Min. 3 lbs. red
pigment/sack cement 3,000 #8 (3/8”) 5 0.60

1. Compressive Strength: minimum at 28 days of age.
2. Slump as shown above shall be plus or minus 1 inch.
a. Slump to be measured before addition of any plasticizing agents at the job site.
Slump may exceed the maximum listed above if plasticizing agents are added
at the batchplant. Consult with Engineer.
b. Measure at discharge from the concrete truck.
c. Concrete of lower than maximum slump may be used provided it can be
properly placed and consolidated.
d. For pumped concrete, provide additional water at batch plant to allow for
slump loss due to pumping. Provide only enough additional water so that
slump of concrete at discharge end of pump hose does not exceed maximum
slump specified above.
3. Minimum cement content:
a. Reinforced Concrete: Six sacks Portland Cement per cubic yard.
b. Unreinforced Concrete: Five sacks Portland Cement per cubic yard.
4. Air content: Provide air entrainment resulting in a total air content of 4 to 7 percent
for exterior concrete subject to freeze thaw cycles and deicing salt, i.e. exterior slabs
on grade, curb and gutter. .
a. Air content to be measured in accordance with ASTM C231, ASTM C173, or
ASTM C138.
D. Selection of Proportions:
1. General: Proportion ingredients to produce proper workability, durability, strength,
and other required properties. Prevent segregation and collection of excessive free
water on the surface.
2. Submit mix design data for approval as required by this specification Section.
3. Proportion mixture to provide desired characteristics using one of the methods
described below:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 13
a. Method 1 (Trial Mix): Per ACI 350, Chapter 5, except as modified herein.
1) Air content within range specified above.
2) Record and report the temperature of trial mixes.
3) Proportion trial mixes per ACI 211.1.
b. Method 2 (Field Experience): Per ACI 350, Chapter 5, except as modified
herein.
1) Field test records must be acceptable to Engineer to use this method.
2) Test records shall represent materials, proportions, and conditions
similar to those specified herein.
c. Required average strength to exceed the specified 28-day compressive
strength by the amount determined or calculated in accordance with the
requirements of ACI 350, using the standard deviation of the proposed
concrete production facility.
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Trial Batch: Based on submitted concrete mixes for each class of concrete.
B. Aggregates:
1. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1260 or ASTM
C1293 to show compliance with ASTM C33 for alkali-silica reactivity and the
aggregates shall be non-reactive.
2. Fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C1260 or ASTM
C1293 to show compliance with ASTM C33 for alkali-silica reactivity and shall be non-
reactive unless employing the following additional measures:
a. When the above test results show the aggregates to be reactive, and fly ash or
other supplementary cementing material (SCM) is approved for use in order
to control alkali-aggregate reactivity, the proposed concrete mixture shall be
tested in accordance with ASTM C1567 and produce expansion results of less
than 0.10 percent at 14 days.
b. When a lithium admixture is approved for use in order to control alkali-
aggregate reactivity, the proposed concrete mixture shall be tested in
accordance with ASTM C1293 and produce expansion results of less than 0.04
percent at one year.
3. The fine and coarse aggregates shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C586 to show
compliance with ASTM C33 for alkali-carbonate reactivity and shall be non-reactive.
4. The fine aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C40 to show compliance
ASTM C33 for organic impurities.
5. The fine and coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C88 to show
compliance with ASTM C33.
6. The fine and coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C142 to show
compliance with ASTM C33.
7. The fine and coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C123 to show
compliance with ASTM C33.
8. The fine and coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C117 to show
compliance with ASTM C33.
9. The coarse aggregate shall be tested in accordance with ASTM C131 to show
compliance with ASTM C33.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 14
10. In addition to initial aggregate testing, each type of aggregate shall be tested at no
increased cost to the Owner for conformance to ASTM C33 under any of the following
conditions:
a. Concrete placement extending longer than six months.
b. There is a noticeable change in aggregate appearance, consistency, or ease of
excavation.
c. The aggregate supplier changes pits, or locations in the original pit.
11. If the test results fail to meet the requirements of ASTM C33 and this Section, the
Engineer may stop the placement of concrete, and may require additional testing of
aggregates or field and trail batch testing of concrete to verify conformance to ASTM
C33 and the strength and shrinkage requirements of this Section.
12. The Engineer may conduct any additional testing of aggregates at any time during the
concrete placement period. Depending on the test results, testing cost shall be paid
by the Contractor or Owner, according to the General Conditions. If test data fails to
conform to ASTM C33, the Engineer may stop the placement of concrete or take
corrective actions as indicated above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARING FOR CONCRETING
A. Earth surfaces shall be thoroughly wetted by sprinkling, prior to the placing of any concrete,
and these surfaces shall be kept moist by frequent sprinkling up to the time of placing
concrete thereon. Surface shall be free from standing water, mud and debris at the time of
placing concrete.
B. Construct forms to the shape, lines and dimensions of members shown on Drawings and
sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar. Take special care when forming concrete
containing high range water reducing agents. Brace and tie forms to maintain posi tion and
shape.
1. Before placing concrete containing superplastisizing agents, Contractor shall submit
a Pour Plan to Engineer for approval. The Engineer may require additional
manpower or equipment for these pours as required to limit defects in the concrete.
The Pour Plan shall include the following:
a. Number of crew members and assignment of each.
b. Number of vibrators to be used.
c. Number of vibrators in reserve.
d. Time of day and anticipated duration of pour.
e. Type and capacity of pumping equipment if used.
C. Provide slabs and beams of minimum indicated depth when sloping foundation base slabs or
elevated floor slabs to drains.
1. For slabs on grade, slope top of subgrade to provide floor slabs of minimum uniform
indicated depth.
2. Do not place floor drains through beams.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 15
D. Unless otherwise indicated, provide exterior corners in concrete members with 3/4-inch
chamfers. Re-entrant corners in concrete members shall not have fillets unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Complete all formwork, installation of parts to be embedded, reinforcement and surface
preparation prior to placing concrete.
1. Use setting diagrams, templates, and instructions for locating and setting
embedments and attachments.
2. Prior to placing concrete, position and support pipe, conduit, dowels, and other
ferrous items required to be embedded, to ensure clearance between items and any
part of concrete reinforcement as specified below.
3. Securing such items in position by welding to reinforcement is prohibited.
4. Embedded electrical conduits and piping:
a. Install pipe, conduits and their sleeves passing through slabs or walls so as
not to impair the strength of the concrete member.
b. Pipes and conduits larger than 3 inches in diameter may be embedded in
structural concrete only after submittal and review of location and
reinforcement details.
c. Pipes and conduits may be installed without the specific permission noted in
paragraph b. above as follows:
1) They are 3 inches or less in diameter, are spaced not less than 3
diameters on center (horizontally and vertically) and conform to
paragraph 2) and 3) below.
2) Pipes and conduits, including their fittings, which are embedded
within a column, do not displace more than 4% of the cross-sectional
area within the reinforcing steel cage.
3) Pipes, conduits, and their sleeves embedded within a wall or slab are
not larger (outside dimension) than 1/3 the overall thickness of the
wall or slab in which they are embedded.
4) There is a minimum of 2 inches between the pipe or conduit and
surface of the slab or wall.
d. In walls and slabs with 2 layers of reinforcement, install pipes and conduits
between layers of reinforcement as close to the middle of the concrete as
practical without disturbing the reinforcement. Outside diameter of the pipe
or conduit shall not exceed 1/3 the slab or wall thickness. Do not space
parallel and crossing runs of pipe or conduit closer than 3 diameters on
center, except at cabinet and outlet box locations.
e. In slabs with a single layer of reinforcement, install under reinforcement steel
with a minimum of 2 inches clear to the concrete surface.
F. Provide openings in formwork to accommodate other trades. Accurately place and securely
support all items built into forms.
G. Construction, Expansion, and Contraction Joints:
1. Provide at locations indicated or as approved by Engineer.
2. Install construction joints in beams, slabs, and girders perpendicular to the planes of
their surfaces.
3. At least 48 hours shall elapse between placing of adjoining concrete construction.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 16
4. Before new concrete is placed against existing concrete, coat all construction joints
with an approved bonding adhesive used and applied in accordance with
manufacturer’s instructions.
H. Thoroughly clean surfaces of metalwork to be in contact with concrete immediately before
concrete is placed.
I. Remove ponded water from the excavation and moisten fill.
J. Remove laitance, tighten forms, roughen, clean, wet and slush hardened concrete with
cement grout prior to placing fresh concrete at construction joints. Coat form surfaces with
form release agents prior to placing reinforcing bars in forms.
3.2 CYLINDER STORAGE DEVICE
A. Provide and maintain a cylinder storage device at a protected location on the Site, acceptable
to Engineer and as follows:
1. Maintain concrete test cylinders at a temperature range of 60 degrees F to 80 degrees
F for the initial 24-hour curing period.
2. Once placed in the storage device, do not move the cylinders during this period.
3. Equip the storage device with an automatic 24-hour temperature recorder that
continuously records on a time/temperature chart with an accuracy of ±1 degree F.
4. Have the storage device available at the point of use at least 24 hours before concrete
placement.
5. A 24-hour test run may be required before placement of concrete.
B. Engineer may stop placement of concrete if the storage device cannot accommodate the
required number of test cylinders.
C. Use water containing hydrated lime if water is to be in contact with cylinders.
3.3 PLACING OF CONCRETE
A. Notify Engineer not less than 24 hours in advance of the times and places at which Contractor
intends to place concrete.
B. Place concrete in compliance with ACI Specifications and requirements of this Section.
C. Place concrete only in presence of duly authorized representative of Engineer.
D. Ready Mix Equipment:
1. Do not exceed manufacturer’s rated capacity of the mixer.
2. Ensure sufficient mixing time for uniform distribution of materials.
3. Discharge all concrete from mixer prior to mixing new batch.
4. In accordance with ASTM C94.
E. Transporting:
1. Transport concrete from mixer to place of deposit by methods, which prevent
segregation or loss of material.
2. Provide runways when wheelbarrows are used to transport concrete.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 17
3. Do not wheel conveying equipment over reinforcement or support runways on
reinforcement.
F. Placing:
1. Deposit concrete in continuous manner and as rapidly as possible within planned
joints or sections.
2. Do not use concrete that has attained initial set or contained mixing water for more
than 1 hour.
3. Uniformly distribute concrete during process of depositing and in no case move
deposited concrete in forms more than 6 feet in horizontal direction.
4. Do not drop freely more than 5 feet in unexposed work or more than 3 feet in exposed
work; where greater drops are required, use duct or other approved method.
5. Do not place concrete against icy or frost covered earth surfaces.
G. Compacting:
1. Compact by internal type vibrators supplemented by rodding and tamping as
necessary, to maximum practicable density, free from pockets of coarse aggregate in
such a manner that surfaces are smooth and free from voids.
2. Avoid excessive vibration of concrete; avoid segregation of aggregates.
3. Avoid disturbance of previous lifts where initial set has taken place.
4. Use of form vibrators or tapping of forms is prohibited.
H. Finishing/Trowel Aid:
1. Use finishing/trowel aid on horizontal surfaces where identified on Drawings. The
product may also be used on other horizontal surfaces at Contractor’s option.
2. Apply finishing/trowel aid directly in front of float or trowel operations and
immediately finish into the concrete surface.
I. Protection:
1. Protect all concrete against physical injury until final acceptance by Owner.
2. Protect concrete from reduced strength due to weather extremes.
3. When the temperature is below 40 Degrees F, or is likely to fall below 40 Degrees F
during the 24-hour period after placing the concrete, use an approved non-corrosive
set accelerator and follow the recommendations of ACI 306R, except as modified
herein.
a. Do not place concrete on frozen ground or in contact with forms or reinforcing
bars coated with frost, ice, or snow.
b. Minimum concrete temperature at the time of mixing:

Outdoor Temperature at Placement
(In shade)
Concrete Temperature
(At mixing)
Below 30 Degrees F 65 Degrees F
Between 30 and 45 Degrees F 60 Degrees F
Above 45 Degrees F 50 Degrees F

c. Do not place heated concrete that is warmer than 80 Degrees F.
d. If freezing temperatures are expected during curing, maintain the concrete
temperature at or above 50 Degrees F for 72 hours, with additional
requirements listed under Article 3.3 - Curing below.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 18
e. Do not allow concrete to cool suddenly.
f. Calcium chloride will not be permitted as a concrete accelerator or to thaw
frozen subgrade prior to concrete placement.
4. When the temperature is 90 Degrees F or above, or is likely to rise above 90 Degrees
F within the 24-hour period after concrete placement; or when there is any
combination of high air temperature, low relative humidity, and wind velocity
resulting in an evaporation rate exceeding 0.2 lbs/sf/hr, use an approved set-
retarding hydration control admixture and follow the recommendations of ACI 305R
and the following:
a. Keep concrete as cool as possible during placement and curing.
b. Do not allow concrete temperature to exceed 90 Degrees F at placement.
c. Prevent plastic shrinkage cracking due to rapid evaporation of moisture.
d. Dampen subgrade and forms with cool water immediately prior to placement
of concrete.
e. Apply an evaporation retardant per manufacturer’s instructions between
placement and finishing operations.
f. Protect the concrete with temporary wet covering during any appreciable
delay between placement and finishing.
3.4 CURING
A. Cure concrete for not less than 14 days after placing.
B. Leave forms in place at least 14 days, or until concrete has attained specified 28-day strength,
unless otherwise approved by Engineer. If forms are allowed to be removed within 14 days
of placing concrete, continue curing in accordance with other methods specified herein or as
directed by Engineer.
C. Strictly follow careful procedures for the removal of forms and perform with care so as to
avoid injury to the concrete. No heavy loading on green concrete will be permitted.
D. Keep encasement concrete, concrete cradles and anchor blocks moist until covered. The
surface shall be covered with moist earth not less than 4 hours, or more than 24 hours, after
the concrete is placed. Earthwork operations that may damage the concrete shall not begin
until at least 7 days after placement of concrete.
E. Concrete slabs may be cured by either of the following two methods:
1. Method 1:
a. After finishing slab, wet surface with a fine spray of water and cover with
polyethylene-bonded waterproof paper sheeting.
b. Lap sheets 4 inches at sides and ends and seal with adhesive tape to form a
continuous watertight joint.
c. Weigh sheeting down with wood planks to keep sheeting in contact with
concrete.
d. Repair or replace sheets immediately if damage occurs.
2. Method 2:
a. Cover concrete with water-saturated polyethylene-coated burlap curing mats
and keep continuously wet for curing period.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 19
b. Lap sheets 4 inches at sides and ends and seal with adhesive tape to form a
continuous watertight joint.
c. Weigh sheeting down with wood planks to keep sheeting in contact with
concrete.
d. Repair or replace sheets immediately if damage occurs.
F. As an alternate to above referenced curing methods for formed and slab concrete, spray
surface with liquid curing compound that does not affect bond of paint to concrete surface.
1. Apply curing compound in accordance with manufacturer's instructions as soon as
the concrete has hardened enough to prevent marring on unformed surfaces, and
within 2 hours after completion of finish or stripping of forms, if stripped in less than
14 days.
a. Maximum coverage rate of 200 square feet per gallon, applied in such a
manner as to cover surface with a uniform film to seal thoroughly.
2. Curing vertical surfaces with a curing compound:
a. Cover vertical surfaces with a minimum of two coats of the curing compound.
b. Apply the first coat of curing compound immediately after form removal.
Vertical surface at the time of receiving the first coat shall be damp with no
free water on the surface.
c. Allow the preceding coat to completely dry prior to applying the next coat.
d. Vertical surface is defined as any surface steeper than 1 vertical to 4
horizontal.
3. Curing Compound: As specified herein.
4. Take care to avoid damage to seal during curing period.
5. Repair broken or damaged seals occurring before expiration of curing period by
application of additional curing compound over damaged portion.
6. Do not use curing film method where construction joints are to be made.
G. In hot weather, follow curing procedures outlined in ACI 305R and the following:
1. Begin curing unformed surfaces immediately after finishing and continue for 24
hours. Curing shall consist of application and maintenance of water saturated
material to all exposed surfaces; horizontal, vertical, and otherwise. After 24-hour
interval, continue curing, using one of the following methods:
a. Moist cure for six more days.
b. Application of curing compound as specified above.
2. Begin curing formed concrete immediately after placing. Curing shall consist of
keeping forms continuously wet for 24 hours. Thereafter, continue curing, using one
of the following methods:
a. Loosen forms and position soaker hose so that water runs down along
concrete surfaces. Continue for six more days.
b. Strip forms and apply during compound as specified for vertical surfaces
above. Do not allow concrete surfaces to dry prior to application of curing
compound.
H. In Cold Weather, following curing procedures outlined in ACI 306R and the following:
1. Water curing of concrete may be reduced to 6 days during periods when the mean
daily temperature in the vicinity of the worksite is less than 40 degrees F; provided
that, during the prescribed period of water curing, when temperatures are such that
concrete surfaces may freeze, water curing shall be temporarily discontinued.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 20
2. Concrete cured by an application of curing compound will require no additional
protection from freezing if the protection at 50 Degrees F for 72 hours is obtained by
means of approved insulation in contact with the forms or concrete surfaces;
otherwise, the concrete shall be protected against freezing temperatures for 72 hours
immediately following 72 hours protection at 50 Degrees F. Concrete cured by water
curing shall be protected against freezing temperatures for 72 hours immediately
following the 72 hours of protection at 50 Degrees F.
3. Discontinuance of protection against freezing temperatures shall be such that the
drop in temperature of any portion of the concrete will be gradual and will not exceed
40 Degrees F in 24 hours. In the spring, when the mean daily temperature rises above
40 Degrees F for more than 3 successive days, the specified 72-hour protection at a
temperature not lower than 50 degrees F may be discontinued for as long as the mean
daily temperature remains above 40 Degrees F; provided, that the concrete shall be
protected against freezing temperatures for not less than 48 hours after placement.
4. Where artificial heat is employed, special care shall be taken to prevent the concrete
from drying. Use of unvented heaters will be permitted only when unformed surfaces
of concrete adjacent to the heaters are protected for the first 24 hours from an
excessive carbon dioxide atmosphere by application of curing compound; provided,
that the use of curing compound for such surfaces is otherwise permitted by these
Specifications.
3.5 TREATMENT OF SURFACE DEFECTS
A. As soon as forms are removed, all exposed surfaces shall be carefully examined, and any
irregularities shall be immediately rubbed or ground in a satisfactory manner in order to
secure a smooth, uniform, and continuous surface. Plastering or coating of surfaces to be
smoothed will not be permitted. No repairs shall be made until af ter inspection by the
Engineer. In no case will extensively patching honeycombed concrete be permitted. Concrete
containing minor voids, holes, honeycombing, or similar depression defects shall have them
repaired as specified herein. Concrete containing extensive voids, holes, honeycombing, or
similar depression defects, shall be completely removed and replaced. All repairs and
replacements herein specified shall be promptly executed by the Contractor at its own
expense.
B. All repairs shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and
with ICRI Guideline No 310.1R and Guideline No 320.2R. These guidelines shall be followed
for removal geometry, exposing and undercutting of reinforcing steel, cleaning and repair of
reinforcing steel, and edge and surface condition of concrete and shall be followed regardless
of the amount of corrosion present or not present in the reinforcing steel.
1. Remove unsound deteriorated concrete from Work by high pressure water blasting
machines capable of scoring concrete surfaces to minimum amplitude roughness of
3/16-inch. Remove to provide for minimum thickness specified for mortar. If
reinforcing is exposed in this process, then additional concrete shall be removed until
the surface is a minimum of 1-inch or 1 bar diameter behind the exposed reinforcing.
2. Clean exposed reinforcing bars of rust and other deleterious materials which may
prevent bonding of the repair product.
3. Keep surface at saturated surface dry (SSD) condition for a minimum of 24-hours
prior to placement of repair material.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 21
4. Place and cure repair grout as specified in Section 03 60 00 – Grouting and in
accordance with manufacturer’s written recommendations.
5. For exposed walls, the cement shall contain such a proportion of white Portland
cement as is required to make the color of the patch match the color of the
surrounding concrete.
C. Holes left by tie-rod cones shall be reamed with suitable toothed reamers so as to leave the
surfaces of the holes clean and rough. These holes then shall be repaired in an approved
manner with dry-packed cement grout specified in Section 03 60 00 - Grouting. Holes left by
form-tying devices having a rectangular cross-section, and other imperfections having a
depth greater than their least surface dimension, shall not be reamed but shall be repaired in
an approved manner with dry-packed cement grout specified in Section 03 60 00 - Grouting.
D. All repairs shall be built up and shaped in such a manner that the completed Work will
conform to the requirements of this Section, as applicable, using approved methods which
will not disturb the bond, cause sagging, or cause horizontal fractures. Surfac es of said
repairs shall receive the same kind and amount of curing treatment as required for the
concrete in the repaired section.
E. Prior to filling any structure with water, all cracks that may have developed shall be grooved
and filled as shown on the Drawings. This repair method shall be done on the water bearing
face of members. Prior to backfilling, faces of members in contact with fill, which are not
covered with a waterproofing membrane, shall also have cracks repaired as specified herein.
3.6 PATCHING HOLES IN CONCRETE
A. Patching Small Holes
1. Holes which are less than 12 inches in their least dimension and extend completely
through concrete members, shall be filled as specified herein.
2. Small holes in members which are water-bearing or in contact with soil or other fill
material, shall be filled with nonshrink grout specified in Section 03 60 00 - Grouting.
Where a face of the member is exposed to view, the nonshrink grout shall be held
back 2 inches from the finished surface. The remaining 2 inches shall then be patched
according to the paragraph in Part 3 entitled "Treatment of Surface Defects."
3. Small holes through all other concrete members shall be filled with nonshrink grout,
with exposed faces treated as above.
B. Patching Large Holes
1. Holes which are larger than 12 inches in their least dimension, shall have a keyway
chipped into the edge of the opening all around, unless a formed keyway exists. The
holes shall then be filled with concrete as specified herein.
2. Holes which are larger than 24 inches in their least dimension and which do not have
reinforcing steel extending from the existing concrete, shall have reinforcing steel set
in drilled holes and epoxy grout as specified in Section 03 60 00 – Grouting. The
reinforcing added shall match the reinforcing in the existing wall unless shown.
3. Large holes in members which are water bearing or in contact with soil or other fill,
shall have either a hydrophilic type or a plastic adhesive type waterstop material
placed around the perimeter of the hole as specified herein, unless there is an existing
waterstop in place.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 22
3.7 CONCRETE FINISH
A. General: Surfaces shall be free from fins, bulges, ridges, offsets, honeycombing, or roughness
of any kind, and shall present a finished, smooth, continuous hard surface. Allowable
deviations from plumb or level and from the alignment, profiles, and dimensions shown are
defined as tolerances and are specified herein. These tolerances are to be distinguished from
irregularities in finish as described herein.
B. Aluminum finishing tools shall not be used.
C. Formed Surfaces:
1. Exterior buried surfaces require no treatment after form removal except for curing,
repair of defective concrete, and treatment of surface defects.
2. Surfaces exposed to view shall be finished as specified under "Architectural Concrete
Finish" below.
D. Surface holes larger than 1/2 inch in diameter or deeper than 1/4-inch are defined as surface
defects in basins and exposed walls.
E. Unformed Surfaces: After proper and adequate vibration and tamping, all unformed top
surfaces of slabs, floors, walls, and curbs shall be brought to a uniform surface with suitable
tools. Immediately after the concrete has been screeded, it shall be treated with a liquid
evaporation retardant. The retardant shall be used again after each Work operation as
necessary to prevent drying shrinkage cracks. The classes of finish specified for unformed
concrete surfaces are designated and defined as follows:
1. Finish U1 – Sufficient leveling and screeding to produce an even, uniform surface with
surface irregularities not to exceed 3/8 inch. No further special finish is required.
2. Finish U2 After sufficient stiffening of the screeded concrete, surfaces shall be float
finished with wood or metal floats or with a finishing machine using float blades.
Excessive floating of surfaces while the concrete is plastic and dusting of dry cement
and sand on the concrete surface to absorb excess moisture will not be permitted.
Floating shall be the minimum necessary to produce a surface that is free from screed
marks and is uniform in texture. Surface irregularities shall not exceed 1/4 -inch.
Joints and edges shall be tooled where shown or as determined by the Engineer.
3. Finish U3 After the floated surface (as specified for Finish U2) has hardened
sufficiently to prevent excess of fine material from being drawn to the surface, steel
troweling shall be performed with firm pressure such as will flatten the sandy texture
of the floated surface and produce a dense, uniform surface free from blemishes,
ripples, and trowel marks. The finish shall be smooth and free of all irregularities.
4. Finish U4 Steel trowel finish (as specified for Finish U3) without local depressions
or high points. In addition, the surface shall be given a light broom finish with broom
lines perpendicular to drainage unless otherwise shown. The resulting surface s hall
be rough enough to provide a nonskid finish.
F. Floor Hardener:
1. Apply to all exposed concrete floor surfaces.
2. Apply after concrete has cured minimum 7 days.
3. Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 23
4. Keep floors covered and free of traffic and loads for a minimum of 10 days after
completion.
3.8 ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE FINISH
A. General: Architectural finish shall be required for permanently exposed concrete surfaces
and in other locations where specifically called out on the Drawings.
1. Immediately after the forms have been stripped, the concrete surface shall be
inspected and any poor joints, voids, rock pockets, or other defective areas shall be
repaired, and all form-tie holes filled as indicated herein.
2. Architectural finishes shall not be applied until the concrete surface has been
repaired as required and the concrete has cured at least 14 days.
3. All architecturally treated concrete surfaces shall conform to the accepted sample
required herein in texture, color, and quality. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to maintain and protect the concrete finish.
B. Smooth Concrete Finish
1. The concrete surface shall be wetted, and a grout shall be applied with a brush. The
grout shall be made by mixing one part Portland cement and one part of fine sand that
will pass a No. 16 sieve with sufficient water to give it the consistency of thick paint.
The cement used in said grout shall be 1/2 gray and 1/2 white Portland cement, as
determined by the Engineer. The freshly applied grout shall be vigorously rubbed
into the concrete surface with a wood float filling all small air holes. After all the
surface grout has been removed with a steel trowel, the surface shall be allowed to
dry and, when dry, shall be vigorously rubbed with burlap to remove completely all
surface grout so that there is no visible paint-like film of grout on the concrete. The
entire cleaning operation for any area shall be completed the day it is started, and no
grout shall be left on the surface overnight.
2. Cleaning operations for any given day shall be terminated at panel joints. It is
essential that the various operations be carefully timed to secure the desired effect
which is a light-colored concrete surface of uniform color and texture without any
appearance of a paint or grout film.
3. In the event that improper manipulation results in an inferior finish, rub such inferior
areas with carborundum bricks.
4. Before beginning any of the final treatment on exposed surfaces, treat in a satisfactory
manner a trial area of at least 200 square feet in some inconspicuous place selected
by the Engineer and shall preserve said trial area undisturbed until the completion of
the job.
3.9 TOLERANCES:
A. Construction Tolerances: Set and maintain concrete forms and perform finishing operations
so as to ensure that the completed Work is within the tolerances specified herein. Surface
defects and irregularities are defined as finishes and are to be distinguished from tolerances.
Tolerance is the specified permissible variation from lines, grades, or dimensions shown.
Where tolerances are not stated in the Specifications, permissible deviations will be in
accordance with ACI 117.
1. The following non-cumulative construction tolerances are hereby established and
apply to finished walls and slab unless otherwise shown:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 24

Item Tolerance
Variation of the constructed linear outline
from the established position in plan.
In 10 feet: 1/4 inch
In 20 feet or more: 1/2 inch
Variation from the level or from the grades
shown.
In 10 feet: 1/4 inch
In 20 feet or more: 1/2 inch
Variation from plumb.
In 10 feet: 1/4 inch
In 20 feet or more: 1/2 inch
Variation in the thickness of slabs and walls.
Minus 1/4 inch
Plus 1/2 inch
Variation in the locations and sizes of slabs
and wall openings. Plus or minus 1/4 inch
3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General
1. Tests on component materials and for slump, temperature, air content, unit weight,
compressive strength and shrinkage of concrete will be performed as specified
herein.
2. The cost of all laboratory tests for qualification of mix designs on cement, aggregates,
and concrete, including strength and shrinkage testing will be borne by Contractor.
The cost of all field-testing during construction, including slump, temperature, air,
strength, will be borne by Owner. However, Contractor will be charged for the cost
of any additional tests and investigation on work performed which does not meet the
Specifications. Contractor’s testing laboratory must meet or exceed the requirements
of ASTM C1077.
3. Provide access for Engineer to aggregate stockpiles for concurrent sampling during
construction.
4. Provide access for Engineer to batch plant for monitoring batching procedures during
construction.
5. Concrete for testing shall be supplied by Contractor at no additional cost to Owner,
and Contractor shall aid Engineer in obtaining samples, and disposal and cleanup of
excess material.
6. Composite samples of concrete placed in the Work shall be taken in accordance with
ASTM C172 from the first placement of each class of concrete and at the following
minimum frequency for each class:
a. Not less than one sample per day on which concrete it placed.
b. Not less than one sample for each 50 cubic yards of concrete placed.
c. Not less than one sample for each 1,000 square feet of surface area for slabs
or walls.
d. Not less than 5 samples from randomly selected batches for the Work.
B. Slump Tests
1. Perform in accordance with requirements of ASTM C143 at frequency indicated for
sampling above.
C. Temperature Tests
1. Test concrete temperature per ASTM C1064 at frequency indicated for sampling
above.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 25
D. Air Content Tests
1. Test air content per ASTM C231 at frequency indicated for sampling above.
E. Unit Weight
1. Test unit weight per ASTM C138 at frequency indicated for sampling above.
F. Field Compression Tests
1. Field compression test specimens will be made at the frequency indicated for
sampling above.
2. Each set of test specimens will be a minimum of five cylinders.
3. Compression test specimens for concrete shall be made in accordance with
ASTM C31. Specimens shall be 6-inch diameter by 12-inch high cylinders.
4. Compression tests shall be performed in accordance with ASTM C 39. One test
cylinder will be tested at 7 days and two at 28 days. The remaining cylinders will be
held to verify test results, if needed.
G. Evaluation and Acceptance of Concrete
1. Evaluation and acceptance of the compressive strength of concrete shall be according
to the requirements of ACI 350 and as specified herein.
2. A statistical analysis of compression test results will be performed according to the
requirements of ACI 214. The standard deviation of the test results shall not exceed
640 psi, when ordered at equivalent water content as estimated by slump.
3. If any concrete fails to meet these requirements, immediate corrective action shall be
taken to increase the compressive strength for all subsequent batches of the type of
concrete affected.
4. When the standard deviation of the test results exceeds 640 psi, the average strength
for which the mix is designed shall be increased by an amount necessary to satisfy the
statistical requirement that the probability of any test being more than 500 psi below
or the average of any three consecutive tests being below the specified compressive
strength is 1 in 100. The required average strength shall be calculated by Criterion
No. 3 of ACI 214 using the actual standard of deviation.
5. All concrete which fails to meet the ACI requirements and these Specifications, is
subject to removal and replacement at no increase in cost to the Owner.
3.11 APPLICATION OF LOADS
A. Do not allow traffic, construction equipment, or materials of any kind to be placed on elevated
concrete slabs until the concrete has attained a minimum age of 7 days and 80% of the
minimum specified 28-day strength as proven by concrete strength tests.
B. Do not place backfill against cantilevered walls until the concrete has attained a minimum
age of 7 days and 100% of the minimum specified 28-day concrete strength as proven by
concrete strength tests.
C. Do not place backfill against walls that are tied to elevated slabs or decks until the both the
slabs and walls have attained a minimum age of 7 days and 80% of the minimum specified
28-day strength as proven by concrete strength tests.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 30 00 - 26
3.12 SCHEDULES
A. Grout: As specified in Section 03 60 00 – Grouting.
B. Unformed Concrete Surfaces: Apply finish as follows.

Area Finish
Grade slabs and foundations to be covered with concrete or fill material U1
Floors to be covered with grouted tile or topping grout U2
Slabs not water bearing U4
Slabs to be covered with built-up roofing U2
Interior and exterior slabs where Drawings require only light broom finish U4
Interior slabs and finished floors with architectural finishes U3
Top surface of walls U3

END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 35 11 - 1
SECTION 03 35 11
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Surface treatments for concrete floors and slabs.
B. Clear coatings.
C. Clear penetrating sealers.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Finishing of concrete surface to tolerance; floating,
troweling, and similar operations; curing.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's sealed packaging, including application instructions.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective work within a two-year period commencing on the Date of Substantial
Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE FLOOR FINISH APPLICATIONS
A. Penetrating Clear Sealer:
B. Clear Coating:
2.2 COATINGS
A. High Gloss Clear Coating: Transparent, nonyellowing, acrylic polymer-based coating.
1. Composition: Solvent-based.
B. Penetrating Sealer: Transparent, nonyellowing, water- or solvent-based coating.
1. Composition: Siloxane.
a. Products:
1) Concrete Sealers USA: www.concretesealersusa.com/#sle.
2) SureCrete Design Products: www.surecretedesign.com/#sle.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 35 11 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that floor surfaces are acceptable to receive the work of this section.
B. Verify that flaws in concrete have been patched and joints filled with methods and materials
suitable for further finishes.
3.2 GENERAL
A. Apply materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3 COATING APPLICATION
A. Verify that surface is free of previous coatings, sealers, curing compounds, water repellents,
laitance, efflorescence, fats, oils, grease, wax, soluble salts, residues from cleaning agents, and
other impediments to adhesion.
B. Protect adjacent non-coated areas from drips, overflow, and overspray; immediately remove
excess material.
C. Apply coatings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, matching approved mock-
ups for color, special effects, sealing and workmanship.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 1
SECTION 03 40 00
PRECAST CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work includes precast and precast prestressed structural concrete construction as shown on
the Contract Drawings, specified herein, and needed for complete and proper installation.
B. Section Includes:
1. Design not shown on Contract Drawings.
2. Erection drawings and production drawings.
3. Plant inspection and testing.
4. Fabrication of specified precast concrete members and components.
5. Handling, storage, and protection of precast concrete components.
6. Transportation of precast concrete components to the Project site.
7. Erection of precast concrete components including all bearing pads, base plates,
inserts, clamps, nuts, bolts, and other necessary appurtenances, and other hardware
items for connections between cast-in-place concrete and precast components and
tolerances for the placement of these components.
C. Related Sections
1. Section 03 20 00 – Reinforcement Steel
2. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO):
Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges, 17th edition, 2002
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions:
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel
ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products
ASTM A153 Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware
ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60
000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel Heat Treated, 120/105
ksi Minimum Tensile Strength

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 2
ASTM A416 Standard Specification for Steel Strand, Uncoated Seven-Wire
for Prestressed Concrete
ASTM A496 Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete
Reinforcement
ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
ASTM B766 Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of
Cadmium
ASTM C33 Standard Specifications for Concrete Aggregates
ASTM C94 Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C260 Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C330 Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for
Structural Concrete
ASTM C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout
ASTM C494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete
ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM C618 Standard Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland
Cement Concrete
ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM C1240 Standard Specification for Silica Fume Used in Cementitious
Mixtures
ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection and/or Testing.
D. American Welding Society (AWS):
D1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel.
D1.4 Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel.
E. Precast Concrete Institute (PCI) standards, most recent editions:
PCI MNL 116 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
Structural Precast Concrete Products.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 3
PCI MNL 117 Manual for Quality Control for Plants and Production of
Architectural Precast Concrete Products.
PCI MNL 120 Precast Design Handbook, Precast and Prestressed Concrete.
F. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) standards, most recent editions:
SSPC Paint 20 Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, Inorganic, and Type II, Organic).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed drawings and calculations as specified below in Section 2.1,
Design Requirements and as follows:
1. Erection drawings:
a. Member piece marks and completely dimensioned size and shape of each
member.
b. Plans and/or elevations locating and defining all products furnished by the
manufacturer.
c. Sections and details showing connections, cast-in items, and their
relationship to the structure.
d. Relationship of manufacturer's product to adjacent materials.
e. Joints and openings between members and between members and adjacent
structure.
f. Description of all loose, cast-in, and field hardware.
g. Field installed anchor location drawings.
h. Erection sequences, when required to satisfy stability, and handling
requirements.
i. All dead, live, and other applicable loads used in the design of members.
j. Indicate sizes and locations of blockouts required for devices recess mounted
within the panels which will be installed by other trades.
k. Shop drawings shall be stamped, and signed by the design professional
engineer.
2. Production drawings:
a. Elevation view of each member.
b. Sections and details to indicate quantities and position of reinforcing steel,
anchors, inserts, etc.
c. Handling devices.
d. Member dimensions and finishes.
e. Prestress force for strand and calculated losses.
f. Concrete strengths at initial and final stages.
g. Estimated cambers.
3. Concrete mix design:
a. The manufacturer shall submit sources and proportions of all constituent
materials and mixture characteristics for all designs of Portland cement
concrete.
b. Submit manufacturer's laboratory or field data documenting required
strength in accordance with ACI 318. Separate design is required for each
strength and class of concrete.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 4
c. Data for each mix shall include the following:
1) Mix identification.
2) Specified initial and final strength.
3) Intended use.
4) Method used to determine mix proportions.
5) Gradation of fine and coarse aggregates and combined gradation.
6) Sources of all constituent materials.
7) Proportions of all constituent materials.
8) Ratio of water to cementitious materials.
9) Design slump and tolerance.
10) Air content.
11) Certification of chloride content.
12) Design unit weight.
4. Concrete test reports:
a. Submit test reports during production of precast components. Reports shall
be made in accordance with PCI MNL 116. Reports showing 28-day
compressive strength results representing concrete placed in components
shall be submitted to the Engineer.
b. Submit evidence of manufacturer's testing facility compliance with ASTM
E329.
5. Approvals
a. Erection may not proceed without approval by the Engineer of the
appropriate drawing and design calculations.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer qualifications
1. The manufacturer shall have a minimum of 5 years proven experience in the design
and manufacture of precast concrete and prestressed components, and having
adequate finances, equipment, plant, and skilled personnel to expeditiously design,
detail, fabricate and install the Work as required by the Contract Drawings and
Specifications.
2. The Manufacturer shall be a producer/member of the PCI Plant Certification Program
at the date of bid submittal.
a. Certifications: A1, C4.
B. Engineering qualifications:
1. The manufacturer shall show evidence of an in-house engineering department
managed by a licensed professional engineer.
2. The manufacturer's professional engineer shall be currently licensed to practice in
the state of Utah. In the event the manufacturer's professional engineer is not
licensed to practice in Utah, the manufacturer shall contract with a professional
engineer who is licensed to practice in Utah for the required design and engineering
work.
C. Erector qualifications: Shall have been regularly engaged for a period not less than 5 years in
the erection of precast components similar to those required for this Project.
D. Welder qualifications: Certified in accordance with AWS D1.1

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 5
E. Concrete testing:
1. Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, concrete testing shall be performed by the
manufacturer in accordance with PCI MNL 116.
2. If inspection discloses improper workmanship or inferior material, any subsequent
inspection or test deemed necessary by the Engineer shall be at no cost to Owner.
F. Plant inspection may be required by Owner at Owner's own expense and option.
1. Furnish ample notice to Engineer prior to the beginning of fabrication work so that
inspection may be provided.
2. Furnish all facilities for the inspection of materials and workmanship in the plant and
allow inspectors free access to the necessary parts of the Work.
3. Inspectors shall have the authority to reject materials and Work that does not meet
Specifications.
4. Inspection at the plant is intended to facilitate the Work and avoid errors, but will in
no way relieve Contractor from the responsibility for providing proper materials and
workmanship under this Specification.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Components shall not to shipped until the compressive strength of test specimens
representing the component have developed a compressive strength of 80% of the specified
compressive strength or until the component can safely support the superimposed dead load
of other precast components, whichever is greater.
C. Precast components shall be lifted and supported during manufacturing and yard handling
only at the lifting and supporting points or both, as shown on the shop drawings and with
appropriate lifting devices.
D. Precast components shall be stored in a manner to minimize cracking, distortion, warping,
staining, or other physical damage. Components shall be stored on properly cushioned
supports to protect the edges.
E. Units shall not be placed in contact with earth or other staining influences or to rest on
corners.
F. All holes and reglets shall be protected against water and ice in freezing weather.
G. Precast components shall be delivered to the project site in such quantities and at such times
to assure continuous flow of the Work. Components shall be transported with proper
equipment, methods and with qualified personnel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. General

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 6
1. Precast components: Complete the design, including calculations and detailing, for
all precast components specified on the Contract Drawings. Design shall be based on
design criteria and conditions provided on the Contract Drawings and in these
Specifications. Provide the complete design assuring that the manufacturing,
transportation, and erection processes are compatible with the Contract Drawings
and Specification.
2. Erection: Consider erection of the precast components including calculations and
details for guying, staying, and shoring all precast components to assure structural
stability during the construction stage and before all permanent structural
connections are completed. Provide in the erection plan for removal, replacement,
and relocation of guying, bracing, and shoring before all permanent precast structural
connections are completed. The manufacturer's licensed professional engineer
retains responsibility for the erection design.
3. Design precast components and connections under the direct supervision of the
manufacturer's professional engineer, licensed to practice in the state of Utah. All
calculations and drawings prepared by the manufacturer for the Project shall bear
the seal and signature of the manufacturer's licensed engineer.
B. Design Criteria:
1. Design loads:
a. All dead loads per conditions depicted on the Contract Drawings.
b. All Live loads specified on the Contract Drawings in loading diagrams.
c. All other loads specified for components, where applicable.
d. Initial handling and erection stress limits
2. All precast components and connections to non-precast elements shall be designed
in accordance with the PCI Design Handbook.
3. All precast components shall have minimum reinforcing in accordance with ACI 318.
Analysis of prestressed components shall include a check of the shear reinforcing
requirements at 0.1L, 0.2L, 0.25L, and 0.3L, where L is the component length.
4. Modifications: All proposed modifications to the Contract Drawings and
Specifications shall be submitted to the Engineer with complete design calculations
and drawings for backup.
5. Lifting devices shall be designed and cast into the components to ensure safe and
efficient handling. Lifting devices shall be so arranged that they do not have to be
removed; or, if they must be removed, they shall be arranged so that they are readily
removed and any planned depressions in the concrete can be readily filled.
6. Lift loops and erection inserts shall be located so they are not objectionable in the
completed structure with a minimum concrete or grout cover as specified in ACI 318
and PCI MNL 120. Inserts located in areas exposed to view shall be recessed and
patched with non-shrink, non-staining grout to match surrounding concrete, or cover
and protect in an approved manner.
7. Precast wall panels are to be insulted composite sandwich panels, 11⅝ inches in total
thickness (7⅝ inches of concrete on inner, 2 inches of concrete outer wythe and 2
inches of insulation). Minimum R value of 10 for the insulation not considering the
rest of the system.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Materials:
1. Blended Hydraulic Cement: Comply with ASTM C595, Type IL (10) (MS), grey color.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 7
a. Cement shall not contain more than 0.60 percent equivalent alkalis.
b. Limestone content is limited to 10 percent.
c. Single brand of cement used throughout Work; brand approved by Engineer.
2. Fly Ash: ASTM C618.
3. Silica fume: ASTM C1240.
B. Aggregates
1. Normal Weight Aggregates: ASTM C33.
2. Provide aggregates from a single source.
C. Lightweight Aggregates: ASTM C330.
D. Admixtures:
1. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C260.
2. Water reducing admixtures: ASTM C494 or ASTM C1017.
a. Use in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions.
b. Admixtures to increase cement dispersion, or provide increased workability
for low slump concrete, may be used subject to Engineer's acceptance.
c. Use amounts as recommended by admixture manufacturer for climatic
conditions prevailing at time of placing.
d. Adjust quantities of admixtures as required to maintain quality control.
E. Water: Potable, clean and free of oils, acids, and organic matter.
F. Reinforcement Steel: Refer to Section 03 20 00 - Reinforcement Steel.
G. Prestressing Strand:
1. 7-wire, low-relaxation strand conforming to ASTM A416, Grade 250 or 270.
H. Anchors and inserts:
1. Structural steel shall be of new material conforming to ASTM A36.
2. Bolts: ASTM A307 or A325.
3. Welded headed studs: AWS D1.1, Type B.
4. Deformed bar anchors: ASTM A496.
5. Double tee flange-to-flange shear connectors: galvanized or stainless steel
conforming to ATM A666, Type 316.
6. Rod anchor bars: high strength coil rod, or approved equal
7. Anchor finish:
a. Shop primer: Manufacturer's standards.
b. Hot-dip galvanized: ASTM A123 and ASTM A153.
c. Zinc Rich Coating: Conforming to SSPC paint 20. Self-curing, one component,
sacrificial.
d. Cadmium plated: ASTM B766.
I. Forms:
1. To be constructed of approved concrete, steel, wood or fiberglass reinforced plastic
or high density overlaid plywood to obtain the quality of the finish specified. Forms
shall be designed to withstand vibration and anticipated lateral forces.
2. Forms shall be of such rigidity as to ensure sectional dimensions as outlined in PCI
MNL 116.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 8
3. Parting Compound: Non-oil base.
J. Grout:
1. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C595, Type IL and clean, natural sand, ASTM
C404.
a. Mix at ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3 parts sand, by volume, with minimum
water required for placement and hydration.
2. Non-metallic, non-corrosive, non-staining product containing selected silica sands,
Portland cement, shrinkage compensating materials, water-reducing admixtures,
complying with ASTM C1107.
K. Bearing Pads:
1. Chloroprene (Neoprene).
2. Conform to Division II, Section 18 of AASHTO Standard Specification for Highway
Bridges.
3. 60 durometer hardness.
L. Concrete Mixes:
1. General: Concrete mixes shall be proportioned to develop the required strength using
either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 318,
Chapter 5.
2. Concrete shall be air entrained to produce total air content in accordance with ACI
318, Chapter 4.
3. Compressive strength: The 28-day specified compressive strength of the concrete to
be incorporated into each component shall be shown on the shop drawings.
a. Minimum 28-day compressive strength: 5000 psi.
b. Minimum release strength: 4,000 psi.
4. The ratio of the water to cementitious materials shall not exceed 0.40 by weight.
5. Chloride content: The water soluble chloride ion content in concrete to be
incorporated into prestressed components shall not exceed 0.06 percent by weight of
cement. For all other precast components, the water soluble chloride ion content
shall not exceed 0.10 percent by weight of cement.
6. Do not begin fabrication of units until concrete mix design(s) have been approved by
Engineer.
2.3 MANUFACTURE
A. General
1. Concrete for the precast components shall be batched in accordance with ASTM C94.
2. Precast components shall be fabricated in accordance with PCI MNL 116 and ACI 318.
3. Dimensional tolerances shall be in accordance with PCI MNL 116.
4. Forms shall be cleaned between casting concrete. Parting compound shall be applied
to forms to insure against discoloration and keep surface imperfections to a
minimum.
5. When approved by the Engineer, limited warp is permitted to facilitate water
drainage.
6. Components shall be cured after form removal in a moist condition and at a minimum
temperature of 50 degrees F until field molded specimens cured under similar
conditions have developed a minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 9
7. Lift loops and erection inserts shall be furnished cast as shown on the production
drawings.
8. Components shall be identified with a number on back face or other exposed area that
identifies the orientation of the component in its final position.
9. Coat exposed ends of prestressing strands in all prestressed components to protect
against corrosion.
B. Welding:
1. Welding shall be performed in accordance with AWS D1.1.
2. Manufacturer shall furnish fit up plates or angles to compensate for deviations,
alignment or location of inserts.
3. Welding shall not reduce cross-section of concrete reinforcement and cause tearing
at end of the weld and progressive failure.
C. Finishes:
1. Double tees and slabs shall have a normal, plant run finish on the underside resulting
from casting against approved forms using good industry practice, and an unformed
surface with the designated finish.
2. Wall panels, spandrels, and columns to have the specified trowel, broom or float finish
on the unformed surface.
3. Exterior precast components required to have an architectural finish shall be as
designated by the architectural Contract Drawings.
D. Patching:
1. Use cement grout mixture to fill all air pockets and voids and to repair chipped edges.
2. Finish all repairs smooth and to match adjacent surface texture and color.
E. Fasteners:
1. Manufacturer shall cast in structural inserts plates, angles, and bolts as detailed and
required by the Contract Drawings and shop drawings.
2. Make provisions for support of suspended lighting fixtures, ducts, piping, conduits,
and other items.
a. When drilled expansion bolts or powder-driven fasteners are approved for
use, coordinate prestressing strand location with prestressed concrete
member supplier so that drilled expansion bolts or powder-driven fasteners
do not hit, drill, or drive into prestressing strands.
b. Install powder-driven fasteners by means of a low velocity powder actuated
tool complying with requirements of OSHA
3. Assure that the load to be supported by each in-place drilled expansion bolt or
powder-driven fastener does not exceed the maximum allowable load recommended
by the bolt or fastener manufacturer for the concrete strength encountered and for
the type, size, and embedment length of expansion bolt or driven fastener installed.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. During production of precast concrete units, conduct strength tests of concrete placed in
units as required in Section 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete for concrete placed during
fabrication. Results of these strength tests to be sent immediately to Engineer, Contractor,
and Owner. Test reports to indicate units they represent.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 10
B. When approved by the Engineer, strength tests may be made by the precast manufacturer
after submitting certification that manufacturer's testing facilities meet the requirements of
ASTM E329.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERPARATION
A. Verify acceptability and location of supports to receive units. Check bearing surfaces to
determine that they are level and uniform.
B. Verify compressive strengths of concrete and masonry supports. Do not start erection of
units until supports have reached their 28-day required compressive strengths.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Erection equipment and safety:
1. The erection contractor shall be responsible for safe erection and complying with
applicable local and state safety regulations. Components shall be lifted by means of
suitable lifting devices at points provided by the manufacturer.
2. The erection contractor shall be responsible for becoming familiar with the Contract
drawings, Specifications, and erection drawings.
3. Each component shall be safely and adequately secured in position by positive
mechanical connections.
4. Temporary bracing shall be sufficient to brace work adequately. Give consideration
to possible lack of stability or capacity of partially completed frame or structure.
5. Connections are to be completed as erection progresses.
6. Erection equipment shall not be bent, twisted, warped or damaged in any way. All
wire ropes for cranes or lifting bars shall be of full sections -- not bent, twisted, kinked,
torn or stretched. The lifting capacity of all lifting beams, platforms and trusses shall
be posted.
B. Installation:
1. Place each leg of all double tees on a 3/8 inch thick bearing pad held a minimum of 1
inch back from edge of support. Pad dimensions to be per manufacturer's design and
shown on the shop drawings.
2. After erection, verify that there is no direct contact between bottom of units and
supporting members. Where direct contact occurs, install additional layers of bearing
material to raise units off supports.
3. Weld steel shapes and plates per AWS D1.1 and reinforcing per AWS D1.4.
4. Fill all keyways between precast units with concrete grout.
5. After all precast units are erected and all precast unit connections have been made,
coat all exposed surfaces of the connections with the same prime and finish paints as
required on the adjacent precast concrete units.
C. Alignment:
1. Members shall be properly aligned and leveled as required by the approved shop
drawings. Variations between adjacent members shall be leveled out by jacking,

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 11
loading, or any other feasible method as recommended by the manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer.
3.3 CLEANING
A. As Work progresses, all excess or foreign materials which would become difficult to remove
from finished surfaces, or which would harden on finished surfaces shall be removed.
B. On completion of the Work, all surplus materials, tools, equipment and debris, leaving the
structure in a clean condition shall be removed to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Final inspection of erected precast components shall be made by Engineer to verify
conformance with plans and specifications. Causes for rejection of units include, but ar not
necessarily limited to the following:
1. Cracked units.
2. Chipped, broken, or spalled edges.
3. Units not within allowable casting tolerances.
4. Voids or air pockets which, in opinion of Engineer, are too numerous or too large.
5. Non-uniform finish or appearance.
6. Low concrete strength.
7. Improperly placed embedded items and/or openings.
8. Exposed wire mesh, reinforcing, or prestressing strands.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRECAST CONCRETE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 40 00 - 12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 1
SECTION 03 60 00
GROUTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work includes various types of cementitious grout to be provided and installed per the
Contract Documents
B. Section includes the following types of grout:
1. Cement grout.
2. Nonshrink grout.
3. Epoxy grout.
4. Grout for repair of concrete.
5. Pump and motor grout.
6. Concrete topping gout and concrete fill.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions:
ACI 318 Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete
ACI 308 Standard Practice for Curing Concrete
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM C78 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Concrete
(Using Simple Beam with Third-Point Loading)
ASTM C94 Standard Specifications for Ready-Mixed Concrete
ASTM C109 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Hydraulic
Cement Mortars (Using 2-in. or [50-mm] Cube Specimens)
ASTM C307 Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-
Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings
ASTM C348 Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Hydraulic-
Cement Mortars
ASTM C469 Standard Test Method for Static Modulus of Elasticity and
Poisson's Ratio of Concrete in Compression
ASTM C531 Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of
Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts,
Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 2
ASTM C579 Standard Test Methods for Compressive Strength of Chemical-
Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer
Concretes.
ASTM C827 Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early Ages of
Cylindrical Specimens of Cementitious Mixtures
ASTM C882 Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin
Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear
ASTM C884 Standard Test Method for Thermal Compatibility Between
Concrete and an Epoxy-Resin Overlay
ASTM C939 Standard Test Method for Flow of Grout for Preplaced-
Aggregate Concrete (Flow Cone Method)
ASTM C1090 Standard Test Method for Measuring Changes in Height of
Cylindrical Specimens of Hydraulic-Cement Grout
ASTM C1107 Packaged Dry, Hydraulic Cement Grout (Nonshrink)
ASTM C1181 Standard Test Methods for Compressive Creep of Chemical-
Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts
ASTM C1202 Standard Test Method for Electrical Indication of Concrete's
Ability to Resist Chloride Ion Penetration
ASTM C1339 Standard Test Method for Flowability and Bearing Area of
Chemical-Resistant Polymer Machinery Grouts
ASTM D638 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
ASTM D696 Standard Test Method for Coefficient of Linear Thermal
Expansion of Plastics Between -30°C and 30°C With a Vitreous
Silica Dilatometer
ASTM E329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection and/or Testing
C. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) standards, latest editions:
Guideline No 310.1R Guide for Surface Preparation for the Repair of Deteriorated
Concrete Resulting from Reinforcing Steel Corrosion
Guideline No 320.2R Guide for selecting and specifying Materials for repair of
Concrete Surfaces

1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 3
B. Product Data:
1. Submit certified test results verifying the compressive strength, shrinkage, and
expansion requirements indicated herein.
2. Submit manufacturer's literature containing instructions and recommendations on
the mixing, handling, placement and appropriate uses for each type of nonshrink and
epoxy grout used in the Work.
C. Certification:
1. Provide manufacturer’s independent certification of compliance with ASTM C1107
without modification to the standard methods certifying that the Class B or C grout's
post-hardening non-shrink properties are not based on gas expansion.
2. Provide Manufacturer's certification that grouts have strengths of 3500 psi at 1 day,
6500 psi at 3 days and 7500 psi at 28 days when cured at 72 degrees F as well as
meeting the 3, 7, and 28-day strengths when tested and cured at the 45 degree F and
95 degree F limits and all other requirements of ASTM C1107.
3. The Contractor shall engage an independent testing laboratory to run a 24-hour grout
evaluation in accordance with ASTM C1107 of each grout submitted for approval
showing compliance with all aspects of the evaluation. Submit results to the Engineer
for review.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Maintain all materials clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign
matter.
1. Store non-shrink grout materials in temperature controlled environments above 40
degrees F and below 90 degrees F.
2. Store epoxy grout components in temperature controlled environments above 60
degrees F and below 90 degrees F.
C. Deliver epoxy resin, hardener, and aggregate in sealed pre-measured containers, palletized
and shrink-wrapped to prevent shipping damage.
D. Immediately remove from the Project site any cement-based grout material which becomes
damp or otherwise defective.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Nonshrink, nonmetallic grout:
a. 5 Star Grout, Five Star Products, Inc.
b. Masterflow 928, BASF Building Systems, Inc.
c. NS Grout, Euclid Chemical Company.
d. Sika Grout 212, Sika Corporation.
e. Engineer approved equal.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 4
2. Epoxy grout:
a. HP Epoxy Grout, Five Star Products, Inc.
b. Masterflow 648 CP Plus, BASF Building Systems, Inc.
c. E3-Flowable, Euclid Chemical Company.
d. Sikadur 42 Grout-Pak, Sika Corporation.
e. Engineer approved equal.
3. Grout for pumps and motors:
a. Escoweld, ITW Polymer Technologies.
b. Chockfast Red, ITW Polymer Technologies.
c. DP Epoxy Grout, Five Star Products, Inc.
d. Engineer approved equal.
2.2 CEMENT GROUT
A. Cement grout shall be composed of one-part cement, three parts sand, and the minimum
amount of water necessary to obtain the desired consistency. Where needed to match the
color of adjacent concrete, white Portland cement shall be blended with regular cement as
needed. The minimum compressive strength at 28 days shall be 4,500 psi.
B. Cement grout materials shall be as specified in Section 03300 – Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2.3 NONSHRINK GROUT
A. Non-shrink grout shall be a prepackaged, inorganic, non-gas-liberating, non-metallic,
cement-based grout requiring only the addition of water.
B. Cement from kilns burning metal-rich hazardous waste fuel shall not be used.
C. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed on each bag or other container in which the
materials are packaged. The specific formulation for each class of non-shrink grout herein
shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular applicatio n. All grouts
(Grade B or C) shall be tested for height change of the hardened grout at 1, 3, 14, and 28 days
in accordance with ASTM C1090 and shall be tested for compression at 1, 3, 7, and 28 days in
accordance with the modified ASTM C109 testing procedure.
D. Class A non-shrink grouts: Not used.
E. Class B or C high precision, fluid, extended working time, non-shrink grouts:
1. Minimum 28-day compressive strength of 7500 PSI.
2. No shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum of 4.0 percent expansion in the plastic
state when tested in accordance with ASTM C827.
3. No shrinkage (0.0 percent) and a maximum of 0.2 percent expansion in the hardened
state
4. When mixed to a fluid consistency of 20 to 30 seconds per ASTM C939 at temperature
extremes of 45 to 90 degrees F shall have an extended working time of 30 minutes
when tested in accordance with ASTM C1107.
F. Application:
1. Class B or C non-shrink grout shall be used for grouting under all base plates for
structural steel members, grouting under all equipment base plates except for pumps

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 5
and motors, and at all locations where grout is required by the Contract Documents
except where epoxy grout or grout for pumps and motors is specifically required.
Class B or C non-shrink grout shall be used in place of Class A non-shrink grout for all
applications. Class B or C non-shrink grout shall not be used for dry packing
applications or repair of concrete.
2.4 EPOXY GROUT
A. Epoxy grout shall be a pourable, nonshrink, 100 percent solids system. The epoxy grout
system shall have three components: resin, hardener, and specially blended aggregate, all
premeasured and prepackaged. The resin component shall not contain any nonrea ctive
diluents. Resins containing butyl glycidyl ether (BGE) or other highly volatile and hazardous
reactive diluents are not acceptable. Variation of component ratios is not permitted unless
specifically recommended by the manufacturer. Manufacturer's instructions shall be printed
on each container in which the materials are packaged. The chemical formulation of the
epoxy grout shall be that recommended by the manufacturer for the particular application.
B. The mixed epoxy grout system shall have a minimum working life of 45 minutes at 75 degrees
F.
C. The epoxy grout shall develop a compressive strength of 5,000 psi in 24 hours and 10,000 psi
in 7 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C579, Method B. There shall be no shrinkage
(0.0 percent) and a maximum 4.0 percent expansion when tested in accordance with ASTM
C827.
D. The epoxy grout shall exhibit a minimum effective bearing area of 95 percent. This shall be
determined by testing in accordance with ASTM C1339, for bearing area and flow.
E. The peak exotherm of a 2-inch diameter by 4-inch high cylinder shall not exceed 95 degrees
F when tested with 75 degree F material at laboratory temperature. The epoxy grout shall
exhibit a maximum thermal coefficient of 30 x 10-6 inches/inch/degree F when tested
according to ASTM C531 or ASTM D696.
F. Application:
1. Epoxy grout shall be used to embed all anchor bolts and reinforcing steel required to
be set in grout and for all other applications in the Contract Documents where grout
type is not specifically indicated.
2.5 GROUT FOR REPAIR OF CONCRETE
A. Vertical, overhead, and shotcrete applications:
1. Shall not produce a vapor barrier.
2. One component, reoplastic, cement based, shrinkage compensated, non-expansive,
gray concrete product.
3. Sprayable, extremely low permeability, sulfate resistant, easy to use and requiring
only the addition of water.
4. Free of chlorides and other chemicals causing corrosion with the following
properties:
a. Minimum Slant Shear Bond Strength: 2500 PSI at 28 days when tested in
accordance with ASTM C882.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 6
b. Minimum Compressive strength: 6,500 PSI at 28 days when tested in
accordance with ASTM C109.
c. Minimum Tensile Bond Strength: 200 PSI at 28 days per ASTM C307.
d. Minimum Flexural Strength: 1,200 PSI when tested in accordance with ASTM
C348.
e. Modulus of Elasticity: 3.6E6 PSI when tested in accordance with ASTM C469.
f. Maximum Rapid Chloride Permeability: 772 coulombs when tested in
accordance with ASTM C1202.
B. Horizontal and formed applications:
1. Shall not produce a vapor barrier.
2. One component, reoplastic, cement-based, shrinkage compensated, non-expansive,
gray concrete product.
3. Flowable, extremely low permeability, sulfate resistant, easy to use and requiring
only the addition of water.
4. Free of chlorides and other chemicals causing corrosion with the following
properties:
a. Minimum Shear Bond Strength: 2150 PSI at 7 days.
b. Minimum Compressive Strength: 6000 PSI at 7 days when tested in
accordance with ASTM C109.
c. Minimum Flexural Strength: 770 PSI at 28 days when tested in accordance
with ASTM C78.
d. Maximum Chloride Permeability: 1,000 coulombs when tested in accordance
with ASTM C1202.
e. Modulus of Elasticity: 4.8E6 PSI when tested in accordance with ASTM C469.
2.6 GROUT FOR PUMPS AND MOTORS
A. Grout for pumps and motors shall be epoxy grouts meeting the following minimum
requirements:
1. Creep shall be less than 0.005 in/in when tested by ASTM C1181 method. The test
shall be at 70 degrees F and 140 degrees F with a load of 400 PSI.
2. Linear shrinkage shall be less than 0.080 percent and thermal expansion less than
17E-6 in/in/degree F when tested by ASTM C531.
3. The compressive strength shall be a minimum of 12,000 PSI in 7 days when tested by
ASTM C579 Method B, modified.
4. Bond strength of grout to Portland cement concrete shall be greater than 2,000 PSI
when using ASTM C882 test method.
5. Grout shall pass the thermal compatibility test when overlaid on Portland cement
concrete using test method ASTM C884.
6. Tensile strength and modulus of elasticity shall be determined by ASTM D638. The
tensile strength shall not be less than 1,700 PSI and the modulus of elasticity shall not
be less than 1.8E6 PSI.
7. Peak exothermic temperature shall not exceed 110 degrees F when a specimen 6
inches in diameter by 12 inches high is used. Gel time shall be at least 150 minutes.
8. The grout shall be suitable for supporting precision machinery subject to high impact
and shock loading in industrial environments while exposed to elevated
temperatures as high as 150 degrees F, with a load of 2,000 PSI.
B. Primer, if required, shall conform to the written recommendations of the grout manufacturer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 7
C. Surface preparations shall conform to the written recommendations of the grout
manufacturer.
D. Placement and Curing
1. Placement and curing procedures shall be in accordance with the written
recommendations of the grout manufacturer.
2. A grouting performance demonstration/training session shall be conducted by the
grout manufacturer’s representative prior to foundation and baseplate preparation
and the first grouting on site. This training session shall demonstrate proper
preparation and installation methods and that the grouting material meets the
strength requirements.
2.7 CONCRETE TOPPING GROUT AND CONCRETE FILL
A. Grout for topping of slabs and concrete fill for built up surfaces of tank, channel, and basin
bottoms shall be composed of cement, fine aggregate, coarse aggregate, water, and
admixtures as necessary, with strength as specified above.
B. Where concrete topping is deeper than 6 inches, it will be considered “Concrete Fill” and may
be placed using either grout as specified herein or "lean concrete", as specified in Section
03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete, when approved by Engineer.
2.8 CURING MATERIALS
A. Curing materials shall be as specified in Section 03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete for cement
grout and as recommended by the grout manufacturer for prepackaged grouts.
2.9 CONSISTENCY
A. Use grouts with the consistency necessary to completely fill space to be grouted for the
particular application. Where "dry pack" is called for in the Contract Documents, use grout
with a consistency such that the grout is plastic and moldable but will not flow.
B. Regardless of consistency called for on the Contract Documents, the type of grout to be used
shall be as indicated herein for the particular application.
2.10 MEASUREMENT OF INGREDIENTS
A. Measurements for cement grout shall be made accurately by volume using containers. Shovel
measurement will not be allowed.
B. Prepackaged grouts shall have ingredients measured by means recommended by the grout
manufacturer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PERPARATION
A. All surface preparation, curing, and protection of cement grout shall be as indicated in Section
03300 – Cast-In-Place Concrete. The finish of the grout surface shall match that of the
adjacent concrete.
B. Do not place grout on concrete or masonry substrates until those substrate materials have
attained 28-day design strength unless authorized by Engineer.
3.2 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES
A. The manufacturer of nonshrink grout and epoxy grout shall provide onsite technical
assistance upon request.
B. Coordinate with the manufacturer all demonstrations, training sessions, and applicable site
visits. The grout manufacturer shall conduct onsite, demonstration and training sessions for
bleed tests, mixing, flow cone measurements, cube testing, application, and curing for each
category and type of grout.
C. Training by the manufacturer is required for all types of grout installations. Grout
manufacturer’s representative shall train Contractor to perform the grout Work including
mixing of grouts to required consistency, testing, placing, and curing on actual project base
plates, tie holes, rock pockets, and other applications.
3.3 GROUTING PROCEDURES
A. Prepackage Grouts: All mixing, surface preparation, handling, placing, consolidation, curing,
and other means of execution for prepackaged grouts shall be done according to the
instructions and recommendations of the manufacturer.
B. Base Plate Grouting:
1. For base plates, the original concrete shall be blocked out or finished off a sufficient
distance below the plate to provide for a 1 inch thickness of grout or a thickness as
indicated on the Contract Drawings.
2. After the base plate has been set in position at the proper elevation by steel wedges
or double nuts on the anchor bolts, the space between the bottom of the plate and the
original pour of concrete shall be filled with non-shrink-type grout. The mixture shall
be of a trowelable consistency and tamped or rodded solidly into the space between
the plate and the base concrete. A backing board or stop shall be provided at the back
side of the space to be filled with grout. Where this method of placement is not
practical or where required by Engineer, alternate grouting methods shall be
submitted for acceptance by Engineer.
C. Concrete Topping Grout:
1. All mechanical, electrical, and finish Work shall be completed prior to placement of
concrete topping or concrete fill. The base slab shall be given a roughened textured
surface by sandblasting or hydroblasting exposing the aggregates to ensure bonding
to the base slab.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 9
2. The minimum thickness of grout topping and concrete fill shall be one inch. Where
the finished surface of concrete fill is to form an intersecting angle of less than 45
degrees with the concrete surface it is to be placed against, a key shall be formed in
the concrete surface at the intersection point. The key shall be a minimum of 6-inches
wide by 1-1/2 inches deep.
3. The base slab shall be thoroughly cleaned and wetted prior to placing topping and fill.
No topping concrete shall be placed until the slab is complete free from standing pools
or ponds of water. A thin coat of neat Type II cement grout shall be broomed into the
surface of the slab just before topping of fill placement. The topping and fill shall be
compacted by rolling or tamping, brought to established grade, and floated. Grouted
fill for tank and basin bottoms where scraping mechanisms are to be insta lled shall
be screeded by blades attached to the revolving mechanism of the equipment in
accordance with the procedures outlined by the equipment manufacturer after the
grout is brought to the established grade.
4. Concrete topping grout placed on sloping slabs shall proceed uniformly from the
bottom of the slab to the top, for the full width of the placement.
5. The surface shall be tested with a straight edge to detect high and low spots which
shall be immediately eliminated. When the topping and fill has hardened sufficiently,
it shall be steel troweled to a smooth surface free from pinholes and other
imperfections. An approved type of mechanical trowel may be used as an assist in
this operation, but the last pass over the surface shall be by hand-troweling. During
finishing, no water, dry cement or mixture of dry cement and sand shall be applied to
the surface.
D. Grout for Repair of Concrete
1. All repairs shall be performed in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations and with ICRI Guideline No 310.1R and Guideline No 320.2R.
These guidelines shall be followed for removal geometry, exposing and undercutting
of reinforcing steel, cleaning and repair of reinforcing steel, and edge and surface
condition of concrete and shall be followed regardless of the amount of corrosion
present or not present in the reinforcing steel.
2. Remove unsound deteriorated concrete from Work by high pressure water blasting
machines capable of scoring concrete surfaces to minimum amplitude roughness of
3/16-inch. Remove to provide for minimum thickness specified for mortar. If
reinforcing is exposed in this process, then additional concrete shall be removed until
the surface is a minimum of 1-inch or 1 bar diameter behind the exposed reinforcing.
3. Clean exposed reinforcing bars of rust and other deleterious materials which may
prevent bonding of the repair product.
4. Keep surface at saturated surface dry (SSD) condition for a minimum of 24-hours
prior to placement of repair material.
5. Place material in accordance with Manufacturer’s written recommendations.
6. Cure material continuously for 7-days with water fog nozzles or other applications
which provide a continuous wet curing of the repaired area in accordance with ACI
308.
E. CONSOLIDATION
1. Grout shall be placed in such a manner, for the consistency necessary for each
application, so as to assure that the space to be grouted is completely filled.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 03 60 00 - 10
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 04
MASONRY

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT MASONRY CLEANING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 01 20 - 1
SECTION 04 01 20
MASONRY CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work includes cleaning exposed masonry surfaces.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Provide a letter stating that Contractor has a minimum of 5 years' experience in this type of
masonry cleaning.
C. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer's instructions, including application rates.
2. Manufacturer's recommendations for neutralizing rinse after cleaning.
D. Samples for Verification:
1. Prior to erecting mock-up, procure and clean two samples of each type of masonry
used in Work. Cleaned samples shall be submitted to Engineer for review of
aesthetics and effectiveness.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Manufacturer: Engaged in producing masonry cleaners that have been used for
similar applications with successful results for a minimum or five years, and with
factory-trained representatives who are available for consultation and site inspection
and assistance at no additional cost to the Owner.
2. Applicator: Trained, approved, and accepted by the cleaning compound
manufacturer. Application personnel shall have at least two years of experience with
the particular materials being applied.
B. Mock-ups:
1. Clean an area approximately 10 to 20 square feet or larger as required to demonstrate
effectiveness of cleaner on each type of masonry unit used. Upon approval of
Engineer, cleaner may be applied to mock-up panels.
a. Prepare mock-ups on existing walls under same weather conditions to be
expected during remainder of Work.
b. Test cleaners and methods on samples of adjacent non-masonry materials for
possible adverse reactions. Samples of tested materials shall be available for
Engineer's review upon request.
c. Allow a waiting period of not less than seven days after completion of sample
cleaning to permit a study of sample panels for negative reactions.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT MASONRY CLEANING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 01 20 - 2
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened containers, labeled with
manufacturer's name, batch number, and type of materials
C. Store materials in original, unopened containers in compliance with manufacturer's printed
instructions.
D. Do not store in areas where temperature will fall below 20 degrees F or rise above 100
degrees F.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Schedule application of products such that temperature and humidity levels conform to
manufacturer's requirements during and after application.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Cleaning solution: Detergent type.
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; "202 New Masonry Detergent."
b. Elgene; "Florok 700 Masonry Detergent."
c. PROSOCO, Inc.; "Sure Klean #600 Detergent."
d. Engineer approved equal.
2. Cleaning solution for manganese and vanadium stained masonry:
a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc.; "202V Vana-Stop Mew Masonry."
b. Elgene "960 Masonry Cleaner."
c. PROSOCO "Ferrous Stain Remover."
d. Engineer approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Water for Cleaning: Potable
B. Detergent Type Cleaning Solution:
1. Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar and grout
stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without
discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use products expressly approved for
intended use by cleaning solution manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units
being cleaned.
2. Cleaner shall be a solution of blended liquid acids, heavily inhibited and emulsified
and in combination with special wetting systems.
3. Specific product selection shall be dependent upon substrate as recommended by the
cleaning solution manufacturer.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT MASONRY CLEANING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 01 20 - 3
4. Muratic acid will not be acceptable as a cleaning solution for new masonry.
C. Cleaning Solution for Manganese or Vanadium Stained Masonry:
1. Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing vanadium,
manganese, and other metallic stains without discoloring or damaging masonry
surfaces. Use products expressly approved for intended use by cleaning solution
manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.
2. Cleaner shall be a solution of blended liquid acids, heavily inhibited and emulsified
and in combination with special wetting systems.
3. Specific product selection shall be dependent upon substrate as recommended by the
cleaning solution manufacturer.
4. Muratic acid will not be acceptable as a cleaning solution for new masonry.
D. Neutralizing rinse: Rinse to be as required by the manufacturer of the cleaners used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Allow 7 to 28 days after completion of masonry work before start of cleaning.
B. Protection:
1. Protect surrounding surfaces and installed Work from run-off, overspray, and
splashing. Erect temporary protective covers and walkways at points of pedestrian
and vehicular entrance and exit that must remain in service during course of cleaning.
2. Comply with cleaning solution manufacturer's written instructions for protecting
building and other surfaces against damage from exposure to its products. Prevent
cleaning solutions from coming into contact with pedestrians, motor vehicles,
landscaping, buildings, and other surfaces that could be harmed by such contact.
a. Cover adjacent surfaces with materials that are proven to resist the cleaning
solutions used. Use materials that contain only waterproof, UV-resistant
adhesives. Apply masking agents to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions. Do not apply liquid masking agent to painted or porous surfaces.
Promptly remove masking after cleaner application to prevent adhesive
staining.
b. Keep wall wet below area being cleaned to prevent streaking from runoff.
c. Do not clean masonry during winds of sufficient force to spread cleaning
solutions to unprotected surfaces.
d. Dispose of runoff from cleaning operations by legal means and in a manner
that prevents soil erosion, undermining of paving and foundations, damage to
landscaping, and water penetration into building interiors.
C. Surface Preparation:
1. Prepare surfaces in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
2. Remove excess mortar using wooden paddles and scrapers. Do not scratch or chip
masonry surface.
3. Point up cracks, other than hairline cracks
4. Defective mortar joints shall be routed out, pointed with mortar, and tooled.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT MASONRY CLEANING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 01 20 - 4
5. Before beginning general cleaning, remove extraneous substances that are resistant
to cleaning methods being used. Extraneous substances include paint, calking,
asphalt, and tar.
6. Remove paint and calking with approved alkaline or solvent paint remover.
a. Comply with requirements for paint removal
b. Repeat application up to two times if needed.
7. Remove asphalt and tar with approved asphalt and tar remover solution.
a. Apply only to asphalt and tar by brush without prewetting.
b. Allow asphalt and tar remover to remain on surface for 10 to 30 minutes.
c. Rinse off with water using low pressure spray.
d. Repeat application if needed.
3.2 CLEANER APPLICATION
A. Apply cleaner in strict accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
1. Do not use wire brushes or brushes that are not resistant to cleaning solution being
used.
2. Use spray equipment that provides controlled application at volume and pressure
recommended by manufacturer, measured at spray tip. Adjust pressure and volume
to ensure that cleaning methods do not damage masonry.
3. Cleaning solution application:
a. In accordance with manufacturer's instructions, apply cleaning solution to
masonry surfaces using brush or spray application methods, at Contractor's
option.
b. Use low-pressure tank or chemical pump suitable for cleaner indicated,
equipped with cone-shaped spray tip.
c. Do not spray apply at pressures exceeding 50 psi.
d. Do not allow solution to remain on surface for periods longer than those
indicated or recommended by manufacturer.
e. Reapply cleaner as recommended by manufacturer prior to removing excess
mortar.
4. Water application:
a. Water soak application:
1) Soak masonry surfaces by applying water continuously and uniformly
to limited area for time indicated. Apply water at low pressures and
low volumes in multiple fine sprays using perforated hoses or
multiple spray nozzles.
2) Erect a protective enclosure constructed of polyethylene sheeting to
cover area being sprayed.
b. Spray Applications:
1) Use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of 25 to 50
degrees.
2) Unless otherwise indicated, hold spray nozzle at least six inches from
surface of masonry and apply water in horizontal back and forth
weeping motion, overlapping previous strokes to produce uniform
coverage.
5. High-pressure water spray application:
a. Use fan-shaped spray tip that disperses water at an angle of at least 40
degrees.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT MASONRY CLEANING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 01 20 - 5
B. Perform cleaning method indicated in a manner that results in uniform coverage for all
surfaces, including corners, moldings, and interstices, and that produces an even effect
without streaking or damaging masonry surfaces.
C. Rinse off chemical residue and soil by working upward from bottom to top of each treated
area at each stage or scaffold setting. Periodically during each rinse, test pH of rinse water
running off of cleaned area to determine that cleaning solution is completely removed. Apply
neutralizing agent and repeat rinse, if necessary, to produce tested pH of between 6.7 and 7.5.
D. After cleaning is complete, remove protection no longer required. Remove tape and adhesive
marks.
3.3 FINAL CLEANING
A. Wash adjacent woodwork and other nonmasonry surfaces. Use detergent and soft brushes
or cloths.
B. Clean mortar and debris from roof. Remove debris from gutters and downspouts. Rinse off
roof and flush gutters and downspouts.
C. Sweep and rake adjacent pavement and grounds to remove mortar and debris. Where
necessary, pressure wash surfaces to remove mortar, dust, dirt, and stains.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT MASONRY CLEANING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 01 20 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MORTAR AND GROUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 05 12 - 1
SECTION 04 05 12
MORTAR AND GROUT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install mortar and grout for masonry construction in accordance with Contract
Documents.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM C5 Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes
ASTM C109 Compressive Strength of Hydraulic Cement Mortars
ASTM C144 Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar
ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement
ASTM C207 Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry
Purposes
ASTM C270 Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry
ASTM C404 Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout
ASTM C476 Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry
ASTM C1019 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout
ASTM E514 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage
Through Masonry
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Coarse grout and fine grout are defined by the aggregate size used in accordance with ASTM
C476.
B. Coarse aggregate and fine aggregate are defined in ASTM C404, Table 1.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MORTAR AND GROUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 05 12 - 2
B. Submit proposed grout mix design including aggregate data to show conformance to these
specifications, including cement data to show conformance to these specifications and ASTM
C150. Submit the proposed method of placing grout.
C. Submit proposed mortar mix design including aggregate data to show conformance to these
specifications, including cement data to show conformance to these specifications and ASTM
C150.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Maintain all materials clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign
matter.
C. Store sand only on smooth, well-drained ground free from dust, mud and debris.
D. Do not use bottom 6 inches of pile in mortar.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Integral mortar water repellent:
a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.: RainBloc.
b. BASF/Master Builders; MasterPel 240MA.
c. Grace Construction Products; Dry Block.
d. Krete Industries, Inc.; Gard Mortar Mix.
e. Engineer approved equal.
2. Admixtures for grout
a. BASF/Master Builders; Pozzolith.
b. Sika Corporation; SikaGrout Aid Type II.
c. Engineer approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type II, natural color.
B. Mortar Aggregate: ASTM C144, standard masonry type.
C. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
D. Quicklime: ASTM C5, non-hydraulic type.
E. Grout Aggregate: ASTM C404.
F. Mixing Water: Potable.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MORTAR AND GROUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 05 12 - 3
G. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with
concrete masonry units that also contain integral water repellent by same manufacturer.
H. Admixtures for Mortar:
1. Admixtures may be used to obtain the desired or required workability and may be
used instead of lime.
2. The admixture shall not be detrimental to bonding characteristics nor increase the
efflorescence.
I. Admixtures for Grout:
1. Admixtures for grout may be used only when approved by Engineer. If used, they
shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's published recommendations and
included in the proposed grout mix submittal.
J. Color: When colored masonry is specified, mortar for use with colored masonry units shall
have integral color as approved by Architect/Engineer. Color shall match block color.
2.3 MORTAR MIXES
A. ASTM C270, Type M or S mortar mix shall be used. Use the Property Method.
B. Whenever a fire-resistance classification or rating is shown for unit masonry construction,
provide mortar of type which has been tested and listed by UL for construction indicated.
C. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance
with ASTM C270.
D. Mix materials a minimum of 3 minutes.
E. Do not use masonry cement.
F. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of mortar.
G. Provide water repellant treated mortar per water repellant manufacturer's recommended
rate. When tested as a wall assembly made with CMU containing integral water repellent
manufacturer’s block additive according to ASTM E514, with test period extended to 24
hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen.
2.4 GROUT MIXES
A. Thoroughly mix mortar ingredients in quantities needed for immediate use in accordance
with ASTM C476.
B. Grout strength: For regular masonry units, 2000 psi strength at 28 days and for Hi-R masonry
units, 2000 psi strength at 28 days when tested in accordance with ASTM C1019, 8-10 inches
slump.
C. Do not use anti-freeze compounds to lower the freezing point of grout.
D. Mix materials a minimum of 5 minutes.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MORTAR AND GROUT
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 05 12 - 4
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform laboratory test on mortar and grout in accordance with ASTM C109 using the same
mix design as proposed for the Work.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Plug cleanout holes with block masonry units to prevent leakage of grout materials. Brace
masonry for wet grout pressure.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install mortar and grout per requirements of Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry.
B. Use coarse grout in spaces with least dimension over 2 inches.
C. Use fine grout for grouting door and window frames in masonry.
D. Remove excess mortar from grout spaces.
E. Work grout into masonry cores and cavities to eliminate voids.
F. Do not displace reinforcement while placing grout.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field quality control for masonry mortar and grout will be performed in conjunction with
masonry prism testing specified in Section 04 22 00 – Concrete Unit Masonry. Separate tests
for grout and mortar will not be required.
B. Do not use mortar after it has begun to set. No mortar shall be used beyond 2½ hours after
initial mixing.
C. Use grout within 2 hours after initial mixing. Use no grout after it has begun to set.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 1
SECTION 04 22 00
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install concrete masonry in accordance with Contract Documents.
B. Work shall include installation of ties, spacers, supports and other appurtenances necessary
to meet Specifications and produce finished masonry structures.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing.
B. Section 04 05 12 – Mortar and Grout.
C. Section 04 01 20 – Masonry Cleaning.
D. Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Concrete Institute (ACI) standards, most recent editions.
ACI SP-66 ACI Detailing Manual
ACI 530 Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures
B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM A36 Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel
ASTM A123 Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings
on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware
ASTM C55 Concrete Building Brick
ASTM C90 Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units
ASTM C140 Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related
Units
ASTM C150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 2
ASTM C1314 Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Masonry
Prisms
ASTM D1056 Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials—
Sponge or Expanded Rubber
ASTM D1752 Preformed Sponge Rubber and Cork Expansion Joint Fillers
for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
ASTM D2000 Standard Classification System for Rubber Products in
Automotive Applications
ASTM D2240 Standard Test Method for Rubber Property—Durometer
Hardness
ASTM E514 Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage
Through Masonry
ASTM C 578 Specification for Rigid Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C 272 Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Core Materials
for Structural Sandwich Constructions
ASTM E 84 Flame Spread Characteristics
ASTM C 303 Test Method for Density of Preformed Block-type Thermal
Insulation
ASTM E 119 Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Building Construction and
Materials
C. International Code Council (ICC)
IBC International Building Code, 2012 edition
ICC-ES Report ESR-3508 (For Hi-R Block and Insulation Inserts)
D. The Masonry Society (TMS)
TMS 402/602-16 Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry
Structures
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
Building Materials Directory
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide masonry with a compressive strength, f'm, of 1500 psi minimum at 28 days of age.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 3
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data
1. Submit masonry accessory product data.
2. Submit Hi-R Masonry Data.
C. Shop Drawings: Include, but not limit to, the following:
1. Complete bar schedule, bar details and erection drawings to conform to ACI SP-66.
2. Each type of bar marked with identification corresponding to identification tag on
bar.
3. Length, type, and location of all splices.
4. Erection drawings shall be clear, easily legible and to a minimum scale of:
a. 1/4 inch = 1 foot.
b. 1/8 inch = 1 foot if bars in each face are shown in separate views.
5. Size and location of openings.
6. Contract Documents shall not be used as erection drawings.
7. Block layout details at corners and openings for the Hi-R Block showing how the
reinforcement and insulation is continuous at these locations.
D. Samples
1. Submit samples of concrete masonry unit colors with texture ranges for selection of
color. Full size samples of the blocks selected shall be submitted for final approval by
the Engineer after color selection, if requested. If the material specified is a colored
and textured unit, the samples submitted shall be colored and textured units.
Samples of mortar colors shall be submitted for color selection by the Engineer.
E. Test Reports
1. Submit test reports from testing proposed concrete block masonry units showing
compliance with ASTM C90 and IBC Table 2105.2.2.1.2, including aggregate data to
show conformance to these specifications and cement data to show conformance to
ASTM C 150.
2. Submit test reports from testing masonry prisms.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements
1. Concrete masonry shall conform to the International Building Code and TMS
402/602-16, Building Code Requirements and Specification for Masonry Structures
and other applicable codes and standards of the governing authorities.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Warrant that Hi-R inserts are free of defects and are manufactured to meet physical
properties and material specifications.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 4
B. Maintain all materials clean, dry and protected against dampness, freezing and foreign
matter.
C. Store masonry units on pallets and protect from contamination and staining. Keep masonry
units covered at all times.
1.9 PROJECT ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Protect masonry from excessive loading during construction. Provide shoring as
necessary.
2. At the end of each day, or at shutdown, cover tops of all walls not enclosed or
otherwise sheltered to protect masonry from weather.
B. Temporary Facilities:
1. Construct and maintain temporary protection required to permit continuous and
orderly progress of the Work.
2. In cold weather, provide and maintain heat sufficient to assure temperature above 32
degrees F within the protected areas.
3. In hot weather, provide and maintain shade to protect materials and mixing
equipment from direct sunlight.
4. Remove all temporary facilities after completion of the Work.
C. Cold Weather Construction:
1. Procedures prior to and during installation:
a. Air temperature: 30 to 40 degrees F.
1) Heat mixing water and aggregate to produce mortar temperatures
between 40 and 120 degrees F at the time of mixing.
b. Air temperature: 25 to 30 degrees F.
1) Heat mixing water and aggregate to produce mortar temperatures
between 40 and 120 degrees F at time of mixing.
2) Maintain mortar temperatures above freezing until used.
3) Heat grout water and aggregate to produce grout temperatures
between 70 and 120 degrees F at the time of mixing.
4) Maintain grout temperatures above 70 degrees F until placed.
c. Air temperature: Below 25 degrees F.
1) Do not place masonry.
2. Procedures after installation:
a. Air temperature: 32 to 40 degrees F.
1) Protect from rain or snow for not less than 24 hours by covering with
weather-resistant membrane.
b. Air temperature: 25 to 32 degrees F.
1) Completely cover with weather-resistant covering for not less than 48
hours.
c. Air temperature: 20 to 25 degrees F.
1) Completely cover with weather-resistant insulating blankets for not
less than 48 hours or provide other protection approved by Engineer.
d. Air temperature: Below 20 degrees F.
1) Provide enclosed shelters and heating to maintain air temperature on
each side of wall above 32 degrees F. for 48 hours.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 5
2) Do not allow rapid drop in temperature after removal of heat.
D. Hot Weather Construction:
1. Procedures prior to and during installation:
a. Air temperature: Above 100 degrees F or above 90 degrees F with a wind
velocity greater than 8 mph.
1) Maintain aggregate piles in damp and loose condition.
2) Produce mortar having a temperature below 120 degrees F.
3) Flush mixer, mortar transport container, and mortar boards with cool
water before they come into contact with mortar.
4) Retemper mortar with cool water to maintain proper consistency.
5) Use mortar within 2 hours of initial mixing.
b. Air temperature: Above 115 degrees F or above 105 degrees F with a wind
velocity greater than 8 mph.
1) Implement requirements above plus provide shade for materials and
mixing equipment to protect from direct sunlight.
c. Air temperature: Above 120 degrees F.
1) Do not place masonry.
2. Procedures after installation:
a. Air temperature: Above 100 degrees F or above 90 degrees F with a wind
velocity greater than 8 mph.
1) Fog spray newly constructed masonry until damp, at least three times
each day until the masonry is three days old.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Integral masonry water repellent:
a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc.
b. BASF/Master Builders; MasterPel 240.
c. Grace Construction Products; Dry Block.
d. Krete Industries, Inc.; Krete HQ (S) Plus
e. Engineer approved equal.
2. Masonry accessories and horizontal joint reinforcing:
a. AA Wire Products Co.
b. Dayton Superior; Dur-O-Wall.
c. Heckman Building Products, Inc.
d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.
e. Engineer approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Hollow Load Bearing Concrete Masonry Unit (CMU): ASTM C90, medium weight, color and
face as shown on Drawings.
1. Sizes and shapes as indicated on Drawings or as required for conditions.
2. Face shell and web thickness: ASTM C90, Table 1.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 6
3. Water Absorption: ASTM C90, Table 2.
4. Fire resistive units: UL rated.
5. Special shapes and faces:
a. For insulated block use Hi-R Masonry Units as licensed from Concrete
Products Group.
b. Closed cell bond beam units over openings.
c. Deep knock-out blocks for bond beams in field of the wall.
d. Sash units for control joints
e. Architectural faces as shown on the Drawings.
B. Concrete Brick Units:
1. ASTM C55, of same type and weight as Hollow Load Bearing CMU.
C. Integral Water Repellent: Provide units made with liquid polymeric, integral water-repellent
admixture that does not reduce flexural bond strength. Units made with integral water
repellent, when tested as a wall assembly made with mortar containing integral water
repellent manufacturer's mortar additive according to ASTM E514, with test period extended
to 24 hours, show no visible water or leaks on the back of the test specimen.
D. Mortar and Grout: Refer to Section 04 05 12 – Mortar and Grout.
E. Steel Reinforcement: Refer to Section 03 20 00 – Concrete Reinforcing, and as indicated on
Drawings.
F. Hi-R® Concrete Masonry Insulation
1. Description: Inserts complying with ASTM C 578; Standard Type X.
2. Performance Requirements:
a. Moisture Absorption: ASTM C 272 – < 1.0% by volume
b. Flame Spread Characteristics: ASTM E 84 – Flame Spread < 5
c. Thermal Resistance (R) per inch of thickness at 75° = 5.00
d. Drainage: Allows full drainage of water in cores of masonry units.
e. Rot & Vermin Resistance: Produced from expanded polystyrene – fully
resistant to rot; does not attract vermin, termites or rodents.
f. Density: ASTM C 303 – 1.3 lb./cu. Ft.
g. Components: Insulation shall contain no fluorocarbons and no formaldehyde.
h. Hourly Rating: ASTM E 119 Insert shall cause no reduction in hourly rating.
i. Shape: Two-piece, interlocking insert shall overlap at both head & bed joints
with edges of adjacent inserts of the same type. Keyway shall be provided for
butt welded cross-rods of 400 mm (16") o.c. ladder type horizontal wall
reinforcement.

3. Product: Hi-R® inserts manufactured by Concrete Block Insulating Systems &
available exclusively from Concrete Masonry Block Producers.
G. Sealants: Refer to Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.
H. Bond Breaker Strips: 15-pound asphalt saturated felt.
I. Compressible Joint Filler:
1. Oversized 50 percent to joint width.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 7
2. Closed Cell foam confirming to ASTM D1752, Type I.
J. Back-up Rod:
1. 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width.
2. Conform to ASTM D1056, round, closed cell foam.
K. Control Joints:
1. Solid rubber section 5/8 inch thick with 5/16 inch flange conforming to ASTM D2000.
2. Durometer hardness of 80 when tested in accordance with ASTM D2240.
3. Fit neatly, without forcing, in masonry jamb sash grooves.
L. Embedded Flashing Materials: Reinforced plastic flashing of manufacturer's standard
composite plastic flashing as described below.
1. Metal foil, 0.33 mil thick, encapsulated between polyester film and bonded to
fiberglass scrim reinforcement, with a total thickness of 7 mil, Dur-O-Wal, “FiberWeb
300", or equal.
2. Joint tape: Reinforced plastic flashing manufacturer's standard polyester tape, 2
inches (50 mm) wide by 2.0 mils thick.
3. Application: Use where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.
4. Adhesive for flashings: Of type recommended by manufacturer of flashing material
for use indicated.
M. Steel Lintels, Shelf Angles, and Miscellaneous Steel Shapes:
1. Steel shapes used in masonry construction shall conform to ASTM A36. Lintels and
shelf angles shall be provided when shown on the Drawings. These steel members
shall be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A123.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. For Hi-R® block, examine conditions, with installer present, for compliance with
requirements, for installation tolerances and other specific conditions, and other conditions
affecting performance of unit masonry.
B. Verify that anchors and flashings are correct and in proper location for roughing into
masonry work. Beginning of installation means that mason accepts existing conditions.
C. Lay out walls in advance for uniform and accurate spacing of bond patterns and joints.
Properly locate openings, embedded items, movement type joints, returns, and offsets.
D. Verify that built-in items are in proper location and ready for roughing into masonry work.
E. Provide temporary bracing during installation of masonry work as required. Maintain in
place until building structure provides permanent bracing for the walls.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 8
B. General:
1. Build walls to thickness indicated on Drawings.
2. Build single-wythe walls to actual thickness of masonry units.
3. Build in flashing, reinforcing, weeps, and related items.
4. Perform all cutting with masonry saws.
5. Drill holes with power drills when required for piping, conduit, etc.
6. Install all block in running bond. Protect from displacement.
7. Cut as required to maintain bond pattern.
8. Avoid use of less than half-size units, whenever possible.
9. Do not use chipped, cracked, spalled, stained, or otherwise imperfect units exposed
in finish work.
10. Build chases and recesses as indicated and required for work of other trades. Provide
not less than 8 inches of masonry between chase or recess and jamb of openings, and
between adjacent chases and recesses.
C. For Hi-R® Concrete Masonry Insulation Inserts:
1. General: Inserts shall be pre-installed by CMU manufacturer prior to delivery to
jobsite.
2. Unless otherwise indicated on Construction Documents, inserts shall be left in place
when grouting.
D. Concrete Masonry Lintels and Sills:
1. For openings which do not show precast concrete or steel lintels, use concrete
masonry lintel units and reinforced concrete fill as shown on Drawings.
E. Laying and Tooling:
1. Lay masonry units with face shells in completely filled bed and head joints.
a. Butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place.
b. Do not slush head joints.
2. Head joints in lintels shall be mortared solid for full thickness of the wall.
3. Maintain nominal 3/8 inch joint widths.
a. Tool all joints concave.
b. During tooling of joints, enlarge any voids or holes and completely fill with
mortar.
4. Point-up all joints at corners, openings, and adjacent work to provide neat and
uniform appearance.
5. Remove any masonry that is disturbed after laying.
a. Clean and relay in fresh mortar.
b. Do not pound units to fit.
c. If adjustments are required, remove units, clean, and reset in fresh mortar.
6. Toothing of masonry units will not be permitted.
7. Where work is stopped and later resumed, rack back 1/2 masonry unit length in each
course.
a. Remove loose units and mortar prior to laying fresh masonry.
8. As work progresses, build in items indicated on Drawings and specified.
a. Fill in solidly with mortar around built-in items.
b. Grout-fill space between door frames and masonry.
F. Reinforcing:
1. Provide continuous horizontal joint reinforcing where indicated on Drawings.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 9
a. Embed longitudinal side rods in mortar for entire length with minimum cover
of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls and 1/2" at other locations.
b. Lap reinforcement minimum 12 inches at ends.
c. Do not bridge control and expansion joints with joint reinforcing.
d. Make corners and wall intersections by use of prefabricated "L" and "T"
sections.
e. Cut and bend as required.
f. Install joint reinforcing at 16 inches on center vertically unless noted
otherwise on Drawings.
g. Place masonry joint reinforcement in first and second horizontal joints above
and below openings. Extend minimum 24-inches each side of opening, unless
otherwise shown on Drawings.
2. Install vertical and horizontal reinforcing bars where indicated on Drawings.
a. Support and secure reinforcing bars from displacement.
1) Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of each
bar and at intervals not exceeding 160 bar diameters.
b. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the reinforcing bars shall be located
as follows:
1) Single vertical bar; centered in cell.
2) Double vertical bars; 2-3/4 inches from face of masonry.
3) Horizontal bars; 4 inches above the bottom of the masonry unit.
c. Reinforce horizontal bond beams with 2-#4 bars unless otherwise shown on
the Drawings.
d. Lap splices a minimum of 54 bar diameters unless otherwise shown on the
Drawings.
3. Bar clearances:
a. The clear distance between the surface of a bar and any surface of a masonry
unit shall not be less than ¼-inch for fine grout and ½-inch for coarse grout.
Cross webs of hollow units may be used as support for horizontal
reinforcement. All reinforcing bars, except joint reinforcing, shall be
completely embedded in mortar or grout and have a minimum cover,
including the masonry unit, of at least ¾-inch when not exposed to weather
or soil, 1½-inches of cover when exposed to weather, and 2-inches of cover
when exposed to soil.
G. Grout Placement:
1. For masonry grout lifts 4 feet and higher, cure all masonry for a minimum or 24 hours
after placement before beginning grouting operations. Grout lifts less than 4 feet may
be placed immediately after setting masonry.
2. Grout spaces less than 2 inches in width with fine grout using low lift grouting
techniques.
3. Grout spaces 2 inches or greater in width with coarse grout using high or low lift
grouting techniques.
4. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout 1-1/2 inch below
top of upper masonry unit to form a positive key for subsequent grout placement.
5. Low lift grouting:
a. Place first lift of grout to a height of 16 inches and rod for grout consolidation.
b. Place subsequent lifts in 8 inch increments and rod for grout consolidation.
6. High lift grouting:
a. Clean out masonry cells and cavities.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 10
b. Pump grout into spaces. Maintain water content in grout to intended slump
without aggregate segregation.
c. Limit grout lift to 48 inches and vibrate or rod for grout consolidation.
d. Wait 60 minutes before placing next lift.
7. Fill all cells and cavities for solid grout construction.
H. Lintels, Control Joints, and Sealants.
1. Provide vertical expansion, control, and isolation joints where indicated on the
Drawings.
2. Refer to Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants, for sealant installation requirements.
a. Seal all control and expansion joints.
b. Provide reinforced masonry lintels whenever openings more than 12 inches
wide are indicated on the Drawings without other structural support or other
supporting lintels.
1) Allow masonry lintels to attain specified strength before removing
temporary supports.
3.3 SITE TOLERANCES
A. Maximum variation from plumb in vertical lines and surfaces of columns, walls, and arises:
1. 1/4 inch in 10 feet.
2. 3/8 inch in a story height not to exceed 20 feet.
3. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.
B. Maximum variation from plumb for external corners, expansion joints, and other conspicuous
lines:
1. 1/4 inch in any story or 20 feet maximum.
2. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.
C. Maximum variation from level of grades for exposed lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal
grooves, and other conspicuous lines:
1. 1/4 inch in any bay or 20 feet.
2. 1/2 inch in 40 feet or more.
D. Maximum variation from plan location of related portions of columns, walls, and partitions:
1. 1/2 inch in any bay or 20 feet.
2. 3/4 inch in 40 feet or more.
E. Maximum variation in cross-sectional dimensions of columns and thicknesses of walls from
dimensions shown on the Drawings:
1. Minus 1/4 inch.
2. Plus 1/2 inch.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection:
1. Masonry construction shall be inspected by a Special Inspector selected by Engineer
and approved by the local Building Official having jurisdiction. Items subject to
Special Inspection shall be inspected in accordance with Chapter 17 of the
International Building Code (IBC) at the specific frequency listed on the Drawings.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 11
The Special Inspector shall work under the direct supervision of Engineer. All costs
of such inspection will be borne by Owner.
2. The Special Inspector will observe the Work for conformance with the design
drawings and specifications in accordance with Paragraph 1705.4 of the IBC.
B. Site Tests:
1. Concrete block masonry units shall be sampled and tested in accordance with ASTM
C140.
a. Provide test results minimum of 5 days prior to start of masonry construction.
b. Remove CMU immediately from site if CMU fails test requirements.
2. Testing of masonry prisms:
a. Testing of Masonry Prisms: Engineer shall have masonry prisms tested to
assure compliance with the Specifications and the governing codes by a
recognized testing laboratory.
1) Tests shall be made in accordance with IBC Section 2105 at the
following times:
a) At the time of the construction of the sample panel, at least 5
masonry prisms shall be made for each type of block indicated
herein; except, separate prisms are not required for block
which only varies by texture.
b) At any change in materials during construction, at least 5
masonry prisms shall be made for each type of block affected.
c) Minimum of one set of at least 5 masonry prisms shall be made
for each masonry structure, besides the structure that the
sample panel is part of, or for each week in which block is laid,
for each type of block involved; whichever occurs first.
d) Additional sets of at least 5 masonry prisms may be required
whenever, in the judgment of Engineer, additional tests are
necessary to determine the quality of the materials.
2) The prisms shall be constructed by Contractor in the presence of
Engineer or Engineer’s representative. The same personnel who are
laying the block in the structure shall construct the masonry prism.
3) The masonry prisms shall be constructed and tested as specified in
ASTM C1314. The prism shall be grouted after the required 24 hour
minimum cure period, using the same grout used in the walls.
4) Compression tests made on sets of specimens made during
construction shall include 2 prisms tested at 7 days after grouting and
3 prisms tested at 28 days after grouting.
5) The average compressive strength of prisms tested at 28 days after
grouting, shall not be less than the specified masonry compressive
strength.
3. Corrective Actions: If the compressive strength of the prisms, made during
construction of the sample panel and tested as indicated, fails to meet or exceed the
strength required, adjustments shall be made to the mix designs for the mortar, or
grout, or both, as needed to produce the specified strength. The masonry units shall
also be retested to verify compliance to the requirements of ASTM C 90.
4. If the compressive strength of the prism, made during construction and tested as
indicated, fails to meet or exceed that required, prisms or cores shall be cut from the
walls constructed in sufficient numbers and in sufficient locations to adequately
determine the strength of the walls in accordance with IBC Section 2105. Those

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 04 22 00 - 12
portions of the walls represented by specimens failing to meet the required
compressive strength are subject to being removed and replaced. Corrective actions
as indicated above shall be taken.
5. The costs of tests and test reports except for additional tests requested by Engineer
shall be paid by Owner. The costs of the additional tests and reports, when reports
verify compliance with the Contract Documents will also be paid by Owner. When
tests or reports do not verify compliance, the cost of all additional tests and reports
shall be paid by Contractor at no increased cost to Owner.
6. Test samples shall be stored in a moist environment until tested, unless directed
otherwise by Engineer or the testing laboratory.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect the exposed faces of the masonry from staining by mortar, grout, weather, or other
conditions and materials.
B. When moisture protection is required, use light fog spray nozzles to cure mortar.
C. Protect tops of walls at all times. Cover tops of walls with waterproof paper when rain is
imminent and when Work is discontinued.
D. Adequately brace walls until walls and roof are completed. Below grade walls shall not be
backfilled until top decks and roofs are in place
E. Provide sufficient bracing to protect walls against damage from elements, including wind and
rain.
F. Protect masonry against freezing for a minimum of 72 hours after being laid.
G. Protect masonry from damage until final acceptance of Work. Damaged units will not be
accepted.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean masonry in accordance with section 04 01 20 Masonry Cleaning.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 05
METALS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 1
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Furnish, fabricate, and install metal fabrications in accordance with Contract Documents.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 72 00 – Roof Accessories
B. Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM A6 Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled
Structural Steel Bars, Plates, Shapes, and Sheet Piling
ASTM A36 Specification for Structural Steel
ASTM A47 Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings
ASTM A53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless
ASTM A123 Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
ASTM A276 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes
ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A325 Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel Heat Treated, 120/105
ksi Minimum Tensile Strength
ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
ASTM A563 Specification for Carbons and Alloy Steel Nuts
ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 2
ASTM A666 Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked
Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar
ASTMA668 Standard Specification for Steel Forgings, Carbon and Alloy,
for General Industrial Use
ASTM A780 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas
of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings
ASTM A992 Standard Specification for Steel for Structural Shapes for Use
in Building Framing
ASTM A1085 Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded Carbon Steel
Hollow Structural Sections (HSS)
ASTM B209 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Sheet and Plate
ASTM B211 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Bar, Rod, and Wire
ASTM B221 Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy
Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes
ASTM B308 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy 6061-T6 Standard
Structural Profiles
ASTM B429 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Alloy Extruded
Structural Pipe and Tube
ASTM F593 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap
Screws, and Studs
ASTM F594 Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Nuts
ASTM F1554 Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-
ksi Yield Strength
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards, most recent editions:
ANSI A14.3 Standard for Ladders - Fixed - Safety Requirements
C. American Welding Society (AWS) Standards, most recent editions:
AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel
AWS D1.2 Structural Welding Code – Aluminum
AWS D1.6 Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel
AWS QC1 Specification for AWS Certification of Welding Inspectors

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 3
AWS Welding Handbook
D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards, most recent editions:
AWWA C105 American National Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for
Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems
AWWA C217 Petrolatum and Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings for the Exterior
of Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines
E. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), most recent edition:
NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components, Health Effects.
F. Federal Specifications:
MIL-A-907E Anti-seize Thread Compound, High Temperature
G. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), most recent editions:
OSHA 1910.27 Fixed Ladders
H. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC):
SSPC-PA 1 Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Metal Fabrications: Defined as items to be fabricated from metal shapes, plates, or bars and
their products.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of all metal fabrications to the Engineer for review.
1. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and erection of each metal fabrication indicated.
Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items. Provide templates for anchors
and bolts specified for installation under other Sections.
2. Submit layout drawings for grating showing the direction of span, type and depth of
grating, size and shape of grating panels, seat angle details, and details of grating hold
down fasteners. Submit load and deflection tables for each style and depth of grating
used.
C. Submit ICC-ES report listing the ultimate load capacity in tension and shear for each size and
type of concrete anchor submitted. Submit manufacturer’s recommended installation
instructions and procedures for adhesive anchors. Upon review, by Engineer, these
instructions shall be followed specifically.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 4
D. No substitution for the indicated adhesive anchors will be considered unless accompanied by
an ICC-ES report verifying strength and material equivalency, including temperature at which
load capacity is reduced to 90 percent of that determined at 75 degrees F.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All weld procedures and welder qualifications shall be available in the Contractor’s field office
for review.
B. Qualification of Welders: Use welders with current certifications (previous 12 months) for
the material, type, and position of welding used. Certify in accordance with AWS
Specifications according to the following:
1. AWS D1.1, Structural Welding Code – Steel.
2. AWS D1.2, Structural Welding Code – Aluminum.
3. AWS D1.6, Structural Welding Code – Stainless Steel.
C. All welding shall be inspected by a Contractor-furnished inspector qualified in accordance
with AWS requirements and approved by the Engineer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Metal fabrications shall be loaded for transport in such a manner that they may be
transported and unloaded without being excessively stressed, deformed, or otherwise
damaged.
C. Protect metal fabrications from corrosion and deterioration.
D. Store material in a dry area and do not place in direct contact with the ground.
1. Do not place materials on the structure in a manner that might cause distortion or
damage to the members or supporting structures.
2. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Check actual locations of walls and other construction to which metal fabrications must fit by
accurate field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on final shop
drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the
Work.
1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, guarantee
dimensions and proceed with fabricating products without field measurements.
Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to guaranteed
dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Concrete and masonry anchors:
a. Hilti, Inc.
b. ITW Ramset/Redhead.
c. Simpson Strong Tie Company, Inc.
d. Engineer approved equal.
2. Castings, trench covers, and accessories:
a. D&L Foundry and Supply
b. Deeter Foundry company.
c. Neenah Foundry Company.
d. Engineer approved equal.
3. All purpose metal framing
a. Allied Tube and conduit.
b. B-Line Systems.
c. Unistrut Building Systems.
d. Engineer approved equal.
4. Steel Ladder Rungs:
a. Perforated “Traction Tread”; McNichols, Co.
b. Engineer approved equal.
5. Roof hatches:
a. Babcock Davis Associates.
b. Bilco Company.
c. Dur-Red Products.
d. Engineer approved equal.
6. Anti-seize lubricant:
a. AS-470 by Dixon Ticonderoga
b. PURE WHITE by Anti-Seize Technology
c. Engineer approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Steel:
1. Wide flange steel shapes shall be ASTM A992. Other steel shapes, plates, and bars
shall be in accordance with ASTM A6 and ASTM A36, unless otherwise shown.
2. Structural steel pipe shall be ASTM A53, Type E or S, Grade B.
3. Structural tubing shall be ASTM A1085. Furnish members full length without splices
unless otherwise noted or approved by Engineer.
4. Welded anchor studs shall be headed concrete anchor studs (HAS), or deformed bar
anchors (DBA), or threaded studs (TAS), as indicated in the Contract Documents.
B. Aluminum: Alloy 6061 – T6 conforming to the following specifications:
1. Sheet and plate: ASTM B209.
2. Rolled Bars and Rods: ASTM B211.
3. Extruded bars, rods, shapes, and tubes: ASTM B221.
4. Rolled or extruded structural shapes: ASTM B308.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 6
5. Extruded structural pipe and tube: ASTM B429.
C. Iron:
1. Ductile iron: ASTM A536.
D. Bolts and Anchors:
1. Standard Service (non-corrosive applications): Unless otherwise indicated, bolts,
anchor bolts, washers, and nuts shall be steel as indicated herein. Threads on
galvanized bolts and nuts shall be formed with suitable taps and dies such that they
retain their normal clearance after hot-dip galvanizing. Except as otherwise
indicated, steel for bolt material, anchor bolts, and cap screws shall be in accordance
with the following:
a. Anchor bolts: ASTM F1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated, with nuts
conforming to ASTM A563 and flat washers where indicated.
b. Install high-strength structural connections using ASTM A325 bolts and nuts
per ASTM A563, coated to match material being connected.
2. Corrosive Service: All bolts, nuts, and washers in the locations listed below shall be
stainless steel.
a. All buried locations except as noted below for pipe flange, fitting and coupling
connections.
b. All submerged locations.
c. Inside hydraulic structures, below the top of the structure.
d. Inside buried vaults, manholes, and structures that do not have a forced-air
ventilation system and either a gravity drain or a sump with a sump pump.
e. All chemical handling areas.
f. Other locations indicated by the Contract Documents or designated by the
Engineer to be provided with stainless steel bolts.
3. Stainless steel bolts, anchor bolts, nuts, and washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel,
conforming to ASTM F593 for bolts and to ASTM F594 for nuts. Protect all threads on
stainless steel bolts with an anti-seize lubricant suitable for submerged stainless steel
bolts, to meet government specification MIL-A-907E and classified as acceptable for
potable water use by NSF. Buried bolts in poorly drained soil shall be coated the same
as the buried pipe.
4. Pipe Flange, Fitting and Coupling Connection Applications: Unless otherwise noted,
all pipe flange, fitting and coupling connection bolts shall be carbon steel per ASTM
A307, Grade A hex bolts, with nuts per ASTM A563. All bolts, nuts and washers shall
be zinc plated. Protect all threads on bolts and nuts with anti-seize lubricant.
a. Exposed Connections: For exposed pipe connections in buried vaults,
manholes, and structures with forced-air ventilation and which drain through
a gravity sewer or to a sump with a pump, prepare and coat bolts and nuts
after installation with the same system as the adjacent flanged piping, in
accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.
b. Buried Connections: All bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel. Coat
all buried connections in accordance with Section09 90 00 – Painting and
Coating. Provide wax tape coating per AWWA C217 for all buried pipe
connections, including flanges, MJ joints, sleeve couplings, and restrained
sleeve couplings as follows:
c. Three Part Wax Tape Coating: Wax tape material shall be manufactured in
accordance with the following requirements:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 7
i. The wax tape coating system shall be three-part, cold-applied,
consisting of primer, wax tape and tape outerwrap in accordance with
AWWA C217.
ii. Part 1 Primer: Description- Blend of petrolatums, plasticizers and
corrosion inhibitors having a paste-like consistency. Acceptable
Materials: Trenton Wax-Tape Primer or Denso Paste.
iii. Part 2 Wax Tape: Description- Non-woven, non-stitch bonded synthetic
fabric saturated with a blend of petrolatums, plasticizers and corrosion
inhibitors forming a tape-coating that is easily formable over irregular
surfaces.
iv. Part 3 Tape Outerwrap: Description- Plastic wrapper consisting of three
membranes of 0.5-mil, clear, 50 gauge plies wound together as a single
sheet. Acceptable Materials: Trenton Poly-Ply or Denso Poly-wrap.
v. The wax tape coating system is for coating all buried pipe
appurtenances, including but not limited to connections, valves, fitting
and bolts.
vi. All parts of the wax tape coating system shall be from a single
manufacturer.
vii. Coating system shall be applied according to the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
viii. Filler mastic shall be used to smooth all irregular angles around flanged
and mechanical joint fittings.
5. Bolt Requirements:
a. The bolt and nut material shall be free-cutting steel.
b. The nuts shall be capable of developing the full strength of the bolts.
c. Threads shall be Coarse Thread Series conforming to the requirements of the
American Standard for Screw Threads.
d. Provide bolts with hexagon heads. Provide nuts conforming to Heavy
Hexagon Series.
e. Install all bolts and nuts with washers fabricated of material matching the
base material of bolts, except that hardened washers for high strength bolts
shall conform to the requirements of the AISC Specification.
f. Install lock washers with washers where indicated and fabricated of material
matching the bolts.
E. Provide bolts of length such that after joints are made up, each bolt shall extend through the
entire nut, but in no case more than 1/2-inch beyond the nut.
F. Epoxy Anchors: Unless otherwise indicated, all drilled concrete or masonry anchors shall be
epoxy anchors. No substitutions will be considered unless accompanied with ICC-ES reports
verifying strength and material equivalency.
1. Epoxy anchors are required for drilled anchors where exposed to weather, in
submerged, wet, splash, overhead, and corrosive conditions, and for anchoring
handrails, pumps, mechanical equipment, and reinforcing bars. Provide threaded
stainless steel rod, Type 316.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, epoxy anchors will also be permitted in locations not
indicated above.
3. Products for concrete anchorage:
a. HIT-RE 500-V3, Hilti.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 8
b. Set XP, Simpson Strong-Tie.
c. Red Head C6+, ITW Ramset/Redhead.
d. Engineer approved equal.
4. Products for masonry anchorage:
a. HIT-HY 270, Hilti.
b. Set XP, Simpson Strong-Tie.
c. Red Head C6+, ITW Ramset/Redhead.
d. Engineer approved equal.
G. Expansion Anchors: Expansion anchors will only be permitted when specifically approved
by the Engineer. Expansion anchors that are to be fully encased in grout may be carbon steel.
For non-encased buried or submerged anchors, provide stainless steel anchors. When
expansion anchors are indicated or permitted, provide the following:
1. Kwik-Bolt TZ, Hilti.
2. Strong-Bolt 2, Simpson Strong-Tie.
3. Trubolt, ITW Ramset/Redhead.
4. Engineer approved equal.
H. Corrosion Protection:
1. Hot-dip galvanize all miscellaneous steel metalwork after fabrication.
a. Galvanizing: ASTM A123 or A653 with minimum coating of 1.5 ounce per
square foot.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Handrails and Guardrails: Refer to Section 05 52 13 – Pipe and Tube Railings.
B. Bollards:
1. Standard weight steel pipe, diameter as shown on Drawings.
2. Minimum 48 inches projection above finish grade.
3. Minimum 42 inches embedment in concrete.
4. Fabricate sleeves for removable bollards from steel pipe with 1/4-inch thick steel
plate welded to bottom of sleeve.
C. Ladders:
1. Ladders shall be of stainless steel or galvanized steel as shown on the Contract
Documents. When material is not specifically noted, material shall be stainless steel.
2. Design to support minimum 300-pound concentrated vertical load with 150-pound
concentrated horizontal load.
a. Maximum allowable stresses per AISC manual.
b. Maximum lateral deflection: Side rail span/300.
c. Design in accordance with OSHA standards.
3. Fabricate ladders for the locations shown, with dimensions, spacings, details, and
anchorages as indicated. Comply with requirements of ANSI A14.3.
4. Side rails, minimum sizes: Continuous, 1 1/2-inch nominal diameter pipe. Fabricate
with eased edges, spaced 18 inches apart.
5. Rungs: 1-1/8 inch by 1-5/8 inch by 14 gage perforated “traction tread” rungs.
a. Top rung level with top platform.
6. Fit rungs in centerline of side rails, plug weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 9
7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and at intermediate points spaced not more
than 4 feet on center with welded or bolted steel brackets.
8. Size brackets to support design dead and live loads indicated and to hold centerline
of ladder rungs clear of the wall surface by not less than 9 inches.
9. When required by Drawings, every ladder that does not have an exterior handhold
shall be equipped with a pop-up extension. Pop-up extension device shall be
manufactured of the same material and finish as the ladder with telescoping tubular
section that locks automatically when fully extended. Upward and downward
improvement shall be controlled by stainless steel spring balancing mechanisms.
Units shall be completely assembled with fasteners for securing to the ladder rungs
in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
D. Metal Grating:
1. Metal grating shall be of the design, sizes, and types indicated. Completely band at all
edges and cutouts using material and cross section equivalent to the bearing bars.
Such banding shall be welded to each cut bearing bar. Support grating at bearings by
support members. Where grating is supported on concrete, embedded support
angles matching grating material shall be used unless indicated otherwise. Such
angles shall be mitered and welded at corners.
2. Bearing Bars:
a. Type: Rectangular bar.
b. Thickness: 3/16 inch minimum.
c. Depth: 1-1/2 inch unless otherwise indicated on Contract Documents.
d. Spacing: 1 3/16 inch maximum.
e. Configuration of top surface: Plain unless otherwise indicated on Contract
Documents.
3. Cross Bars:
a. Cross bars shall be welded or mechanically locked tightly into position so that
there is no movement allowed between bearing and cross bars.
b. Spacing: 4 inches maximum.
4. All pieces of grating shall be fastened in at least two locations to each support.
5. Where grating forms the landing at the top of a stairway, the edge of the grating,
which forms the top riser, shall have an integral non-slip nosing, width equal to that
of the stairway.
6. Where grating depth is not given, grating shall be provided which will be within
allowable stress levels, and which shall not exceed a deflection of ¼-inch or the span
divided by 180, whichever is less. For standard duty plank, and safety grating, the
loading to be used for determining stresses and deflections shall be the uniform live
load of the adjacent floor or 100 psf, whichever is greater or a concentrated moving
load of 1000 pounds.
7. Material:
a. Galvanized Steel: Except where indicated otherwise, bar grating shall be
fabricated entirely of hot-dip galvanized carbon steel.
b. Aluminum: Bearing and banding bars, alloy 6063-T5.
c. Grating which may be partially or wholly submerged shall be fabricated
entirely of stainless steel.
8. No single piece of grating shall weigh more than 80 pounds or be wider than 3 feet,
unless indicated otherwise on Contract Documents.
E. Roof Hatches:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 10
1. Where indicated on Contract Drawings, hatches mounted on a roof surface of
whatever material shall be the integral raised curb type as indicated in Section 07 72
00 – Roof Accessories.
F. Iron Castings:
1. Iron castings shall be of uniform quality, free from blowholes, porosity, hard spots,
shrinkage, distortion, or other defects. They shall be smooth and well cleaned by shot
blasting. Castings shall be prefabricated, conforming to ASTM A48 or A536.
2. Covers and grates shall fit together evenly, so that the cover fits flush with the
surrounding finished surface and so that the cover does not rock or rattle when
loading is applied. Round covers and frames shall have machined bearing surfaces.
3. Covers and grates with matching frames shall be designed to support the following
loadings:
a. Where located within a structure, the design loading shall match that required
for the adjacent floor area, or, if no floor loading is given, a minimum of 300
pounds per square foot.
b. Exterior covers and grates shall be designed for AASHTO HS-20 loading
unless indicated otherwise.
G. All Purpose Metal Framing:
1. Material: Carbon Steel.
2. Channels and inserts:
a. Minimum 12 gage.
b. Channels to have one side with a continuous slot and inturned lips.
3. Fittings: Hot-rolled steel strip and plate.
4. Nuts: Steel, ASTM A563, with toothed grooves in top of nuts to engage the inturned
lips of channels.
5. Finish: Epoxy coated. Galvanize items which cannot be epoxy coated.
2.4 FABRICATION
A. Verify field conditions and dimensions prior to fabrication.
B. Form metal fabrications from materials of size, thickness, and shapes indicated but not less
than that needed to comply with performance requirements indicated. Work to dimensions
indicated or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use
type of materials indicated or specified for various components of each metal fabrication.
C. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces straight and
sharp edges.
D. Drill and punch holes with smooth edges.
E. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following maximum change (range) in
ambient temperature in the design, fabrication, and installation of installed metal assemblies
to prevent buckling, opening up of joints, and overstressing of welds and fasteners. Base
design calculations on actual surface temperatures of metals due to both solar heat gain and
nighttime sky heat loss.
1. Temperature Range: 0 degrees F minimum to 110 degrees F maximum ambient
temperature.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 11
F. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs.
G. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Form
bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise
impairing work.
H. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed traffic surfaces.
I. Welding
1. Welding shall be by the metal-arc method or gas-shielded arc method as described in
the American Welding Society’s “Welding Handbook” as supplemented by other
pertinent standards of the AWS. Qualification of welders shall be in accordance with
the AWS Standards governing same.
2. In assembly and during welding, the component parts shall be adequately clamped,
supported and restrained to minimize distortion and for control of dimensions. Weld
reinforcement shall be as indicated by the AWS Code. Upon completion of welding,
all weld splatter, flux, slag, and burrs left by attachments shall be removed. Welds
shall be repaired to produce a workmanlike appearance, with uniform weld contours
and dimensions. All sharp corners of material that are to be painted or coated shall
be ground to a minimum of 1/32-inch on the flat.
3. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:
a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength
and corrosion resistance of base metals.
b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
c. Remove welding flux immediately.
d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded
surface matches those adjacent.
J. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners
whenever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type indicated or, if not indicated, Phillips flat -
head (countersunk) screws or bolts. Locate joints where least conspicuous.
K. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and
space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated
loads.
L. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field
splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling
limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark
units for reassembly and coordinated installation.
M. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,
and similar items.
N. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water, or provide
weep holes where water may accumulate.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 12
2.5 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete
construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of the required thickness and bearing
area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Hot-dip galvanize after
fabrication.
2.6 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES
A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than
two integrally welded steel studs for embedding into concrete.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated that are not a part of structural
steel framework as required to complete the Work.
B. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive other adjacent
construction retained by framing and supports.
C. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using
mitered joints for field connection.
D. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and
directions for installing anchorages, including concrete inserts, sleeves, anchor bolts, and
miscellaneous items having integral anchors that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry
construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to Project site.
B. Inspect and verify condition of substrate. Correct any surface defects or conditions which
might interfere with or prevent a satisfactory installation.
C. Set sleeves in concrete with tops flush with finish surface elevations. Protect sleeves from
water and concrete entry.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Set metal work level, true to line, plumb.
B. In fabrication and erection of structural steel, conform to the requirements of the American
Institute of Steel Construction "Manual of Steel Construction."
C. Shim and grout as necessary.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 13
D. To the maximum extent possible, use bolted field connections. Where practicable, conceal
the fastenings. When field welding is warranted, comply with the following requirements:
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and
corrosion resistance of base metals.
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
3. Remove welding flux immediately.
4. At exposed connections, finish/grind exposed welds and surfaces smooth and
blended so that no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface
matches those adjacent.
E. Unless notes or specified otherwise:
1. Connect steel members to steel members with 3/4-inch diameter high strength bolts.
2. Connect aluminum to aluminum with 3/4-inch diameter aluminum bolts.
3. Connect aluminum to structural steel using 3/4-inch diameter stainless steel bolts.
4. Connect aluminum and steel members to concrete and masonry using 3/4-inch
stainless steel epoxy anchors. Provide a minimum of 5 1/2 inches of embedment into
concrete or masonry.
F. Do not field splice fabricated items unless said items exceed standard shipping length or
change of direction requires splicing. Provide fully welded splices where continuity is
required.
G. Provide each fabricated item complete with attachment devices as indicated or required to
install.
H. Anchor metal items so that items will not be distorted nor fasteners overstressed from
expansion and contraction.
I. Install bollards in concrete as detailed. Fill pipe with concrete and round off at top of pipe.
J. Attach grating to end and intermediate supports with grating saddle clips and bolts.
1. Maximum spacing: 2 feet on center with a minimum of two attachments per support.
2. Attach individual units of grating together with clips or attachments at 2 feet on
center maximum with a minimum of two clips per side.
K. Coat ferrous metals in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.
L. Coat surfaces of aluminum that will come in contact with grout, concrete, masonry, wood or
dissimilar metals with the following:
1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.
2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.
3.3 DRILLED ANCHORS
A. Drilled-in anchors and reinforcing bars shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer’s instructions. Holes shall be roughened with a brush on a power drill, cleaned
and dried. Drilled anchors shall not be installed until the concrete has reached the specified
28-day compressive strength. Epoxy anchors shall not be loaded until the adhesive has
reached its indicated strength in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METAL FABRICATIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 05 50 00 - 14
3.4 SETTING LOOSE PLATES
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.
B. Set loose level and bearing plates on wedges or other adjustable devices. After the bearing
members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove
wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before
packing with grout.
1. Use non-shrink grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture.
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids
remain.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop painted surfaces.
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.
B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A780
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 06
WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 1
SECTION 06 10 53
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide and install miscellaneous rough carpentry as shown on the Contract Drawings and
as specified herein.
B. Section Includes:
1. Framing with dimension lumber.
2. Framing with engineered wood products.
3. Glue laminated structural units
4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.
5. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.
6. Wood furring and grounds.
7. Wood sleepers.
8. Plywood backing panels.
9. Fasteners and metal framing connectors
C. Related Sections
1. Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.
2. Section 06 16 00 – Sheathing
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Forest and Paper Association (AFPA) standards, most recent editions:
Manual for Wood Frame Construction
B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) standards, most recent editions:
ASME B18.2.1 Square, Hex, Heavy Hex, and Askew Head Bolts and Hex,
Heavy Hex, Hex Flange, Lobed Head, and Lag Screws (Inch
Series)
ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series)
C. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware
ASTM A307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts, Studs, and
Threaded Rod 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A563 Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 2
ASTM A653 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated
(Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the
Hot-Dip Process
ASTM F1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and
Staples
D. American Wood Council (AWC) standards, most recent editions:
National Design Specification (NDS) for Wood Construction with Commentary
E. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) standards, most recent editions:
AWPA U1 Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood
AWPA M4 Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products
F. International Code Council (ICC):
IBC International Building Code, current for the Project per
Drawings, General Structural Notes.
ESR Evaluation Service Report (Specific to Product)
G. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST)
standards, latest editions:
PS 1 Structural Plywood
PS 20 American Softwood Lumber Standard (ASLS)
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in
least dimension.
C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the
following:
1. ALSC: American Lumber Standard Committee.
2. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.
3. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.
E. ICC-ESR: International Code Council Evaluation Service Report.
F. S4S: Surfaced four sides.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 3
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with
requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative
retained.
2. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
3. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
C. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable
unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved
by the ALSC Board of Review.
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: ICC-ESR reports for the following, showing compliance with
building code in effect for Project:
1. Wood preservative treated wood.
2. Power driven fasteners.
3. Powder actuated fasteners.
4. Expansion anchors.
5. Metal framing anchors.
6. Engineered wood products.
E. GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
1. Qualifications - Fabricator shall be licensed by American or Canadian Institute of
Timber Construction, or American Wood Systems.
2. Certifications - Each beam shall bear AITC, APA-EWS, or CITC quality mark.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitations for Engineered Wood Products: Obtain each type of engineered wood
product through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Deliver wood products bundled or crated to provide adequate protection during transit and
job storage, with required grade marks clearly identifiable. Inspect wood products for
damage upon delivery. Remove and replace damaged materials.
C. Keep materials under cover and dry. Protect from weather and contact with damp or wet
surfaces. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 4
around stacks, and under temporary coverings. For lumber and plywood pressure treated
with waterborne chemicals, place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation.
D. Deliver interior wood materials that are to be exposed to view only after building is enclosed
and weatherproofed, wet work other than painting is dry, and HVAC systems are operating
and maintaining temperature and humidity at occupancy levels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Metal Framing Anchors:
a. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.
b. Engineer approved equal
2. Laminated-Veneer Lumber (LVL):
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific.
c. Weyerhaeuser Company.
d. Engineer approved equal.
3. Wood I-Joists
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Roseburg Forest Products Co.
c. Weyerhaeuser Company.
d. Engineer approved equal.
2.2 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Lumber: Document PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading
agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-
writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency
certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.
B. Factory mark each piece with grade stamp of inspection agency evidencing compliance with
grading rule requirements and identifying grading agency, grade, species, moisture content
at time of surfacing, and mill.
C. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by document PS 20 for
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes
for dry lumber.
D. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.
2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for
which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with
building code in effect for Project.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 5
B. Allowable design stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design
stresses, as published by manufacturer that meet or exceed those indicated in the General
Structural Notes on the Drawings. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from
empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive
testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.
2.4 WOOD PRESERVATIVE TREATED LUMBER
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1, Use Category 2, except that lumber
that is not in contact with the ground and is continuously protected from liquid water may be
treated according to AWPA U1, Use Category 1 with inorganic boron (SBX).
B. Preservative Chemicals: Waterborne preservatives acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium.
C. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations
that do not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect
finishes.
D. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use
material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.
E. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC
Board of Review.
1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back
of each piece.
F. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:
1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar
members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.
2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in
contact with masonry or concrete.
2.5 DIMENSIONAL LUMBER FRAMING
A. Maximum Moisture Content: 19 percent.
B. Wall Studs: Stud or No. 2 grade, Douglas Fir – Larch, WCLIB or WWPA grading rules.
C. Wall Plates: No. 2 or Construction grade, Douglas Fir – Larch, WCLIB or WWPA grading rules.
D. Timber Beams & Headers: No. 1 or better grade, Douglas Fir – Larch, WCLIB or WWPA
grading rules.
E. Framing Other Than Noted Above: No. 2 grade or better, Douglas Fir – Larch, WCLIB or
WWPA grading rules.
F. Exposed Framing: Provide material hand-selected for uniformity of appearance and freedom
from characteristics, on exposed surfaces and edges, that would impair finish appearance,
including decay, honeycomb, knot-holes, shake, splits, torn grain, and wane.
1. Species: Western cedars, No. 1 grade, conforming to WCLIB or WWPA grading rules.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 6
2.6 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS
A. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural
composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to
flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural
capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Roseburg Forest Products Co.
c. Weyerhaeuser Company.
d. Engineer approved equal.
3. Provide I-joists manufactured without urea formaldehyde.
4. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or
DOC PS 2, Exposure 1.
5. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than
those indicated.
6. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark
indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and
compliance with APA standard.
B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with
grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D
5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559 and
containing no urea formaldehyde.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.
b. Georgia-Pacific.
c. Roseburg Forest Products Co.
d. Weyerhaeuser Company.
e. Engineer approved equal.
C. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-
joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.
1. Manufacturer: Provide products by same manufacturer as I-joists.
2. Material: All-veneer product or dimensional lumber cut to match depth requirements
for I-joists.
2.7 GLUE LAMINATED STRUCTURAL UNITS
A. MATERIALS
1. Wood
a. Douglas Fir or Southern Pine.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 7
b. Stress Grade - 24F-V4 for simple span, and 24F-V8 for continuous span or
cantilever
Fb - 2400 psi
Fc perpendicular - 600 psi
Fc parallel (columns) - 1650 psi
Fv - 265 psi
E - 1,800,000 psi
c. Glue-laminated beams for cantilevers, continuous spans, and columns shall
have an Fb value for compression zone equal to Fb value specified for tension
zone (balanced combination).
d. Moisture content - 12 percent maximum for straight, 10 percent maximum
for curved.
e. Appearance - Industrial
f. Seal beam faces with penetrating sealer. Treat beam ends with wood
preservative.

2. Adhesives - Wet-use type.
3. Hardware And Steel Shapes - Meet requirements of ASTM A 36.
B. FABRICATION
1. Fabricate beams in accordance with requirements of ANSI / AITC A 190.1.
2. Camber beams to radius of 2000 ft unless shown otherwise on Drawings.
2.8 SHEATHING
A. Refer to Section 06 16 00 – Sheathing.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of
other construction, including the following:
1. Blocking.
2. Nailers.
3. Cants.
4. Furring.
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber, Douglas Fir
– Larch, 19 percent maximum moisture content.
C. For exposed and concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture
content, Spruce Pine Fir species, Construction or No. 2 Common grade, WCLIB or WWPA
grading rules.
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, provide lumber with 19 percent
maximum moisture content, Douglas Fir – Larch species, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade, WCLIB
or WWPA grading rules. Select pieces and cut to eliminate defects that will interfere with
attachment and purpose.
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 8
2.10 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS
A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: Document PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D
Plugged, fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-
inch nominal thickness.
2.11 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-
preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-
dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A153.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC ESR 1539.
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954, except with wafer heads
and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being
fastened.
F. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.
G. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A307, Grade A; with ASTM A563 hex nuts and, where
indicated, flat washers.
H. Concrete and Masonry Anchors: Refer to Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.
2.12 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS
A. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
indicated on Drawings. Design is based on products of Simpson Strong -Tie Co., Inc.
Substitutions from other manufacturers must include ICC-ESR evaluation reports with test
capacities that equal or exceed those of the Simpson product indicated.
B. Galvanized Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A653, G60
coating designation.
1. Use for interior locations where stainless steel is not indicated.
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, Type 304.
1. Use for exterior locations and where specifically indicated.
2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 9
B. Flexible Flashing Separator Between Preservative-Treated Wood and Metal Decking: Self-
adhesive, rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, polyethylene film to
produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.
C. Adhesives for Gluing Wood to Wood, Concrete, or Masonry: Formulation complying with
ASTM D3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements
for attaching other construction.
B. Where wood preservative treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.
C. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA’s “Manual for Wood Frame Construction,” unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing to comply with manufacturer's written
instructions.
E. Do not splice structural members between supports, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials,
fixtures, specialty items, and trim.
1. Provide metal clips for fastening plywood, gypsum board, or lath at corners and
intersections where framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening
edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16 inches on center.
G. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or
with fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere
with function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints
or optimum joint arrangement.
H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated
lumber.
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.
I. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,
complying with the following:
1. ICC-ESR 1539 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.
J. Use sinker or common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 10
finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without
splitting wood; do not countersink nail heads, unless otherwise indicated.
K. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with
fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.
3.2 WOOD FRAMING, GENERAL
A. Install framing members of size and at spacing indicated.
B. Do not splice structural members between supports.
C. Arrange studs so that wide face of stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and
narrow face is parallel.
D.
E. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2 by 4-inch nominal size wood studs spaced 16
inches o.c., except where otherwise indicated or required.
3.3 ROOF FRAMING
A. Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal framing anchors as indicated on the
Drawings.
B. Double rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support
with metal connectors.
C. Where rafters abut at ridges, place directly opposite each other and attach to ridge with metal
ridge connectors.
D. Provide collar beams (ties) as shown or, if not shown, provide 1 by 6 nominal size boards
between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches o.c. Locate below ridge
member at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters.
E. Rafter ties: Provide tie straps from each roof framing member to exterior studs, posts, or
other supporting members below the roof. Opposing rafters at ridges shall be aligned and
connected with straps.
F. Installation of Glue-Laminated Structural Units -
1. Install work in accordance with Fabricator’s instructions and Glue-Lam Erection
Safety Practices.
2. Adequately support and brace work until tied into building structure to insure against
collapse due to wind or other forces.
3. Maintain protection of beams until roofing has been installed.
G. Installation of Structural Composite Lumber -
1. Install temporary horizontal and cross bracing to hold members plumb and in safe
condition until permanent bracing is installed.
2. Install permanent bracing and related components before application of loads to
members.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 11
H. Installation of Plywood Web Joists -
1. Handle, erect, and brace plywood web joists in accordance with Manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Do not install damaged or broken plywood web joists.
3. Install temporary horizontal and cross bracing to hold members plumb and in safe
condition until permanent bracing is installed.
4. Cut holes through webs at locations or of sizes shown on Drawings and as
recommended by Manufacturer.
3.4 WOOD BLOCKING AND NAILER INSTALLATION
A. Install where indicated on Drawings and where required for attaching other work. Form to
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate
locations with other work involved.
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with
surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 10 53 - 12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEATHING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 16 00 - 1
SECTION 06 16 00
SHEATHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide and install wood sheathing panels as shown on the Contract Drawings and as
specified herein.
B. Section Includes:
1. Roof Sheathing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) standards, most recent editions:
ASME B18.6.1 Wood Screws (Inch Series)
B. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM A153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware
ASTM C208 Standard Specification for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board
ASTM C578 Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal
Insulation
ASTM C846 Standard Practice for Application of Cellulosic Fiber Insulating
Board for Wall Sheathing
ASTM C954 Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the
Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases
to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm)
in Thickness
ASTM C1002 Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws
for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster
Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs
ASTM C1289 Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular
Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board
ASTM C1396 Standard Specification for Gypsum Board
ASTM D226 Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt
Used in Roofing and Waterproofing

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEATHING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 16 00 - 2
ASTM D3498 Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood
to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems
ASTM D5664 Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-
Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on
Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber
ASTM E1677 Standard Specification for Air Barrier (AB) Material or System
for Low-Rise Framed Building Walls
ASTM F1667 Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and
Staples
C. American Wood Protection Association (AWPA) standards, most recent editions:
AWPA U1 Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood
D. International Code Council:
IBC International Building Code, current for the Project per
Drawings, General Structural Notes.
E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) standards, most recent editions:
Fire Resistance Directory
F. U.S. Department of Commerce, National Institute of Standards and Technology, (NIST)
standards, latest editions:
PS 1 Structural Plywood
PS 2 Performance Standard for Wood-Based Structural-Use Panels
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ICC-ESR: International Code Council Evaluation Service Report.
B. S1S: Surfaced 1 side.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals.
B. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment
manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with
requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative
retained.
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and
certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEATHING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 16 00 - 3
Include physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified
independent testing agency.
3. For fire-retardant treatments specified to be High-Temperature (HT) type, include
physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated
temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according
to ASTM D5516.
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture
content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to
Project site.
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of
treatment.
6. For building wrap, include data on air/moisture infiltration protection based on
testing according to referenced standards.
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: ICC-ESR reports for the following, showing compliance with
building code in effect for Project:
1. Preservative treated plywood.
2. Fire retardant treated plywood.
3. Foam plastic sheathing
4. Building wrap.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Fire Test Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire resistance ratings, provide
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per
ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Engineer
1. Fire Resistance Ratings: Indicate by design designations from UL’s “Fire Resistance
Directory.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Stack and store plywood and other panels flat with spacers between each bundle to provide
air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Paper Surfaced Gypsum Wall Sheathing:
a. G-P Gypsum Corporation.
b. National Gypsum Corporation.
c. United States Gypsum Company.
d. Engineer approved equal.
2. Building Wrap:
a. Dow Chemical Company; Styrofoam Weathermate Plus Brand Housewrap.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEATHING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 16 00 - 4
b. DuPont; Tyvek Commercial Wrap.
c. Raven Industries Inc.; Rufco-Wrap.
d. Engineer approved equal
2.2 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS, GENERAL
A. Plywood: Either document PS 1 or document PS 2, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Oriented Strand Board: Document PS 2.
C. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness
indicated on the Drawings.
D. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard.
2.3 PRESERVATIVE TREATED PLYWOOOD
A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1, Use Category UC2.
B. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no
arsenic or chromium.
C. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction.
D. Select first option in paragraph below and delete others if total treatment is required;
otherwise, select second option with or without third option.
E. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or
concrete.
2.4 ROOF SHEATHING
A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I.
1. Span Rating: As required to suit joist or truss spacing indicated on Drawings.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 19/32 inch unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
B. Oriented-Strand-Board Roof Sheathing: Exposure 1, Structural I .
1. Span Rating: As required to suit joist or truss spacing indicated on Drawings.
2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 19/32inch unless noted otherwise on Drawings.
2.5 FASTENERS
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements
specified in this Article for material and manufacture.
1. For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying
with ASTM A153.
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F1667.
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: ICC ESR 1539.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEATHING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 16 00 - 5
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.
E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C954,
except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer
for material being fastened.
1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic polymer or other
corrosion protective coating having a salt spray resistance of more than 800 hours
according to ASTM B117.
F. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws,
in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be
attached, with organic polymer or other corrosion protective coating having a salt spray
resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B117.
1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with ASTM
C1002.
2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, attach sheathing to comply with
ASTM C954.
G. Screws for Fastening Oriented Strand Board Surfaced, Polyisocyanurate Foam Sheathing to
Metal Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing
manufacturer for thickness of sheathing board to be attached, with organic-polymer or other
corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according
to ASTM B117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing/insulation
manufacturer.
2.6 WEATHER RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER
A. Building Paper: ASTM D226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt-saturated organic felt), unperforated.
B. Building Wrap: ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, when tested according to ASTM E84; UV
stabilized; and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Allowable UV Exposure Time: Not less than three months.
C. Building-Wrap Tape: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by building-wrap
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in building wrap.
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL
A. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with ASTM D3498 that
is approved for use with type of construction panel indicated by manufacturers of both
adhesives and panels.
B. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable,
rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film
to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.030 inch.
1. Primer for Flexible Flashing: Product recommended by manufacturer of flexible
flashing for substrate.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEATHING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 16 00 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL
A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small
to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.
B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting
construction, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:
1. ICC ESR 1539 for power-driven fasteners.
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."
D. Use sinker or common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will
not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive
finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.
E. Coordinate wall and roof sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so
these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from
passing through completed assembly.
F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of
structural support elements.
G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so
sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is
forecast.
3.2 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION
A. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below:
1. Wall and Roof Sheathing:
a. Nail to wood framing.
b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing.
c. Space panels 1/8 inch apart at edges and ends.
3.3 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws.
2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.
3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non load-bearing construction abuts
structural elements.
4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that
might retain moisture, to prevent wicking.
B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing boards but do not cut into
facing.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEATHING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 16 00 - 7
C. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges
of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of
board to each stud.
D. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches on center and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from
edges and ends of boards.
3.4 WEATHER RESISTANT SHEATHING PAPER INSTALLATION
A. General: Cover sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper as follows:
1. Cut back barrier 1/2 inch on each side of the break in supporting members at
expansion- or control-joint locations.
2. Apply barrier to cover vertical flashing with a minimum 4-inch overlap, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Building Paper: Apply horizontally with a 2-inch overlap and a 6-inch end lap; fasten to
sheathing with galvanized staples or roofing nails.
C. Building Wrap: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
1. Seal seams, edges, fasteners, and penetrations with tape.
2. Extend into jambs of openings and seal corners with tape.
3.5 FLEXIBLE FLASHING INSTALLATION
A. Apply flexible flashing where indicated to comply with manufacturers written instructions.
1. Prime substrates as recommended by flashing manufacturer.
2. Lap seams and junctures with other materials at least 4 inches, except that at flashing
flanges of other construction, laps need not exceed flange width.
3. Lap flashing over weather-resistant building paper at bottom and sides of openings.
4. Lap weather-resistant building paper over flashing at heads of openings.
5. After flashing has been applied, roll surfaces with a hard rubber or metal roller to
ensure that flashing is completely adhered to substrates.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Paper-Surfaced Gypsum Sheathing: Protect sheathing by covering exposed exterior surface
of sheathing with weather-resistant sheathing paper securely fastened to framing. Apply
covering immediately after sheathing is installed.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEATHING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 06 16 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

DIVISION 07
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WATER REPELLENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 19 00 - 1
SECTION 07 19 00
WATER REPELLENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water repellents applied to exterior, masonry and concrete surfaces.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data: Provide product description, details of tests performed, limitations, and
chemical composition.
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions
requiring special attention; cautionary procedures required during application.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout for additional warranty requirements.
B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acrylic Water Repellents:
1. BASF Construction Chemicals: www.buildingsystems.basf.com/#sle.
2. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle.
3. Rust-Oleum Corporation; OKON W-1 Water Repellent Sealer for Dense Concrete and
Masonry: www.rustoleum.com/#sle.
4. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Water Repellent: Non-glossy, colorless, penetrating, water-vapor-permeable, non-yellowing
sealer, that dries invisibly leaving appearance of substrate unchanged.
1. Applications: Vertical surfaces and non-traffic horizontal surfaces.
2. Number of Coats: Two.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WATER REPELLENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 19 00 - 2
B. Verify joint sealants are installed and cured.
C. Verify surfaces to be coated are dry, clean, and free of efflorescence, oil, or other matter
detrimental to application of water repellent.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Prepare surfaces to be coated as recommended by water repellent manufacturer for best
results.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply water repellent in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, using procedures and
application methods recommended as producing the best results.
B. Apply two coats, minimum.
C. Remove water repellent from unintended surfaces immediately by a method instructed by
water repellent manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 21 00 - 1
SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Board insulation at underneath PT slabs.
B. Batt insulation and vapor retarder in roof construction.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 53 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Supporting construction for batt
insulation.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation;
2014 (Reapproved 2019).
ASTM C665 - Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light
Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2017.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials;
2020.
ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Assessing Combustibility of Materials Using a Vertical
Tube Furnace at 750°C; 2019a.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, and product
limitations.
B. ABAA Manufacturer Qualification: Submit documentation of current evaluation of proposed
manufacturer and materials.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Air Barrier Association of America (ABAA) Evaluated Materials Program (EAP);
www.airbarrier.org/#sle: Use evaluated materials from a single manufacturer regularly
engaged in air barrier material manufacture. Use secondary materials approved in writing by
primary material manufacturer.
1.6 FIELD CONDITIONS
A. Do not install insulation adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental
to successful installation.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 21 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Insulation in Wood Framed Roofs: Batt insulation with separate vapor retarder.
B. Insulation under on Grade Slabs: Mineral Fiberboard Insulation.
2.2 FIBERBOARD INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Mineral Fiberboard Insulation: Rigid mineral fiber, in accordance with ASTM C612.
1. Facing: Aluminum Foil.
2. Flame Spread Index: 25 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance with
ASTM E84.
3. Smoke Developed Index: 50 or less, when tested with facing, if any, in accordance
with ASTM E84.
4. Board Thickness: 2".
5. Products:
a. ROCKWOOL (ROXUL, Inc): ROCKBOARD 40: www.rockwool.com/#sle.
b. Or approved equal.
2.3 BATT INSULATION MATERIALS
A. Where batt insulation is indicated, either glass fiber or mineral fiber batt insulation may be
used, at Contractor's option.
B. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible preformed batt or blanket, complying with ASTM C665;
friction fit.
1. Combustibility: Non-combustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E136,
except for facing, if any.
2. Facing: Aluminum foil, flame spread 25 rated; one side.
C. Mineral Fiber Batt Insulation: Flexible or semi-rigid preformed batt or blanket, complying
with ASTM C665; friction fit; unfaced flame spread index of 0 (zero) when tested in
accordance with ASTM E84.
1. Smoke Developed Index: 0 (zero), when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Specified in Section 07 25 00.
B. Tape: Reinforced polyethylene film with acrylic pressure sensitive adhesive.
1. Application: Sealing of interior circular penetrations, such as pipes or cables.
2. Width: Are required for application.
C. Flashing Tape: Special reinforced film with high performance adhesive.
1. Application: Window and door opening flashing tape.
2. Width: As required for application.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 21 00 - 3
D. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of unfinished steel with washer retainer and clips, to be
adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate,
capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.
E. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that substrate, adjacent materials, and insulation materials are dry and that substrates
are ready to receive insulation.
B. Verify substrate surfaces are flat, free of honeycomb, fins, irregularities, or materials or
substances that may impede adhesive bond.
3.2 BOARD INSTALLATION UNDER CONCRETE SLABS
A. Place insulation under slabs.
B. Cut and fit insulation tightly to protrusions or interruptions to the insulation plane.
C. Prevent insulation from being displaced or damaged.
3.3 BATT INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation and vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install in roof spaces without gaps or voids. Do not compress insulation.
C. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. Insulate miscellaneous gaps and voids.
D. Fit insulation tightly in cavities and tightly to exterior side of mechanical and electrical
services within the plane of the insulation.
E. At wood framing, place vapor retarder on warm side of insulation by stapling at 6 inches (152
mm) on center. Lap and seal sheet retarder joints over face of member.
F. Tape seal tears or cuts in vapor retarder.
G. Extend vapor retarder tightly to full perimeter and items interrupting the plane of the
membrane. Tape seal in place.
H. Coordinate work of this section with requirements for vapor retarder specified in Section 07
25 00.
I. Coordinate work of this section with construction of air barrier seal specified in Section 07
25 00.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT THERMAL INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 21 00 - 4
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Do not permit installed insulation to be damaged prior to its concealment.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYISOCYANURATE ROOFING INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 22 00 - 1
SECTION 07 22 00
POLYISOCYANURATE ROOFING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Flat Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation.
B. Tapered Polyisocyanurate Roof Insulation.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 07 21 00 – Thermal Insulation.
B. Section 07 53 23 – EPDM Thermoset Single-Ply Roofing.
1.3 REFERENCES
ASTM C 209 - Methods of Testing Insulating Board, Structural and Decorative.
ASTM C 518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by
Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus
ASTM C 1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Thermal Insulation Board.
ASTM D 312 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing.
ASTM D 1621 - Test Methods for Compressive Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics.
ASTM D 2126 - Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid
Aging.
ASTM E 84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
ASTM E 96 - Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
ASTM E 108 - Standard Tests Method for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
ASTM E 119 - Standard Test Methods For Fire Tests Of Building Construction and Materials.
FM Approval Guide - FM 4450 Approval Standard - Class I Insulated Steel Roof Decks.
FM Approval Guide - FM 4470 Approval Standard - Class I Roof Covering.
UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
UL 790 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Roof Covering Materials.
UL 1256 - Fire Test of Roof Deck Constructions.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYISOCYANURATE ROOFING INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 22 00 - 2
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements:
1. UL Assemblies:
a. Component of Class A Roof System - UL 790.
b. Hourly Rated P series roof assemblies (UL 263 foam core only) P 225, 230,
232, 259, 508, 510, 514, 519, 701, 713, 717, 718, 719, 720, 722, 723, 724, 727,
728, 729, 730, 732, 734, 735, 739, 801, 814, 815, 818, 819, 823, 824, 826, 827,
828, 832.
2. Factory Mutual:
a. FM 4450 Class I Insulated Steel Roof Decks (Foam Core Only).
b. FM 4470 Approval Standard - Class I Roof Covering (Foam Core Only).
c. FM Class 1 approval for steel roof deck constructions, Class 1 Fire and 1-60
and 1-90 windstorm classification (FM 4450).
B. Physical properties (Foam Core Only):
1. Compressive Strength: ASTM D 1621 and ASTM C 1289, Type II, 20 psi (138 kPa)
minimum for Grade 2 and 25 psi (172 kPa) for Grade 3.
2. Dimensional Stability: ASTM D 2126, 2 percent linear change (7 days).
3. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96, < 1 perm ((57.5ng/(PaĀ•sĀ•m2)).
4. Water Absorption: ASTM C 209, < 1 percent by volume.
5. Service Temperature: Minus 100 degrees to 250 degrees F (Minus 73 degrees C to
122 degrees C).
6. Foam Core R Values: Based on LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) in accordance
with ASTM C 1289.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 20.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation methods.
C. Shop Drawings: Roof plan showing slopes, layout of boards and fastening patterns.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a company that regularly manufactures
polyisocyanurate and fully assembled nailbase insulation panels in-house with no outside
fabrication operations.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store products in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.
B. Store product on a solid flat foundation and elevate a minimum of 4 inches above the finished
surface.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYISOCYANURATE ROOFING INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 22 00 - 3
C. For on-site storage longer than two weeks, slit packaging on 4 sides to allow the product to
breathe, and then completely covered with a breathable tarpaulin.
D. Protect insulation from open flame and keep dry at all times.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
B. Do not install insulation on roof deck when water of any type is present. Do not install
insulation or roofing materials when substrate is damp or wet or when proper adhesive
temperature cannot be maintained.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate work with installation of roof covering and associated roof penetrations and
counter flashings installed by other sections as work of this section proceeds.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Hunter Panels, which is located at: 15 Franklin Street; Portland,
ME 04101; Toll Free Tel: [phone]; Tel: [phone]; Fax: [phone]; Email:
[e-mail]; Web: www.hunterpanels.com
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Roof Board Insulation: Provide products that comply with the following:
1. ASTM standards specified.
2. Factory Mutual (FM) approvals specified.
3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) classifications specified.
B. Flat Foam Roof Insulation with Fiber-Reinforced Facers: H-Shield; closed-cell
polyisocyanurate foam core bonded to fiber-reinforced facers on both sides; conforming to
ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1 with square edges.
1. Blowing Agent: Zero ODP, 3rd generation.
2. Fire Ratings:
a. UL 790 (ASTM E 108), Class A.
3. FM Approval, Wind Uplift Classification: 1-90.
4. Compressive Strength: 20 pounds per square inch (138 kPa) Grade 2.
5. R Value: Provide Insulation with LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) in
accordance with ASTM C 1289. Minimum thickness of panels shall be as follows:
a. Thickness 1.00 inch (25 mm), R Value 5.7.
C. Tapered Foam Roof Insulation with Coated Glass Facers: Tapered H-Shield-CG; sloped closed-
cell polyisocyanurate foam core and bonded to high performance coated glass facers on both
sides, conforming to ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 2 with square edges.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYISOCYANURATE ROOFING INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 22 00 - 4
1. Blowing Agent: Zero ODP, 3rd generation.
2. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, 10, Passed.
3. Fire Ratings:
a. UL 790 (ASTM E 108), Class A.
4. FM Approval, Wind Uplift Classification: 1-90.
5. Compressive Strength: 25 pounds per square inch (172 kPa) Grade 3.
6. R Value: Provide Insulation with LTTR (Long Term Thermal Resistance) in
accordance with ASTM C 1289.
a. Minimum insulation thickness: 2 inches.
7. Slope of tapered board shall be:
a. 1/4 inch (6 mm) per foot.
b. Slope as indicated on the Drawings.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Approved Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by FM Approvals and
system manufacturer; length required for thickness of insulation material and penetration of
deck substrate, with distribution plates if required.
B. Base Ply: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
C. Asphalt Bitumen: ASTM D 312, Type III, or Type IV.
1. Use only on approved board insulation types.
2. Provide with labels indicating flash point, softening point, finished blowing
temperature and equiviscous temperature.
D. Cant Strip and Tapered Edge Strip: Standard machine cut perlite or wood fiberboard strips in
sizes indicated or required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
1. Examine roof deck for suitability to receive insulation. Verify that substrate is dry,
clean, and free of foreign material that will damage insulation installation.
B. Verify that roof drains, scuppers, roof curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents, and other
roof accessories are secured properly and installed in conformance with drawings and
submittals.
C. Verify that deck is structurally sound to support installers, materials, and equipment without
damaging or deforming work.
D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYISOCYANURATE ROOFING INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 22 00 - 5
B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
C. Apply vapor barrier and or retarder, as specified by the Architect or required by the local
building code, to decking prior to installation of insulation.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install specified insulation in accordance with manufacturer's latest printed instructions and
as required by governing codes and Owner's insurance carrier.
B. Do not leave installed insulation exposed to weather. Cover and waterproof immediately after
installation.
C. Seal exposed insulation joints at the end of each day. Remove seal when work resumes.
D. Remove installed insulation that has become wet or damaged and replace with new solid and
dry insulation material.
E. Fully Adhered Single-Ply Systems:
1. Secure each H-Shield panel to the roof deck with Factory Mutual approved fasteners
and plates (appropriate to the deck type).
2. Butt edges and stagger joints of adjacent panels.
3. Multi-layer systems: Adhere subsequent layers with a full mopping of hot steep
asphalt.
4. In multi-layer installations, stagger joints in top and bottom layers. Do not align joints
in insulation.
5. Install the roof covering according to the roof manufacturer's specifications.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove trash and construction debris from insulation before application of roofing
membrane.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Protect installed insulation traffic by use of protective covering materials during and after
installation.
C. Cover the top and edges of unfinished roof panel work to protect it from the weather and to
prevent accumulation of water in the cores of the panels. Only apply enough insulation per
day that can be covered by the finished roofing system.
D. Do not leave panels exposed to moisture. Wet panels shall be removed or allowed to
completely dry prior to application of vapor barrier and/or roof covering.
E. Repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYISOCYANURATE ROOFING INSULATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 22 00 - 6
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EPDM THERMOSET SINGLE-PLY ROOFING - CARLISLE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 53 23 - 1
SECTION 07 53 23
EPDM THERMOSET SINGLE-PLY ROOFING - CARLISLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Adhered roof system with ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM) roofing membrane.
B. Insulation, flat and tapered.
C. Deck sheathing.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads and Associated Criteria for Buildings and Other Structures
Most Recent Edition Cited by Referring Code or Reference
Standard.
ASTM C578 - Standard Specification for Rigid, Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation 2022.
ASTM C1289 - Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal
Insulation Board 2023.
ASTM D4637/D4637M - Standard Specification for EPDM Sheet Used in Single-Ply Roof
Membrane 2015, with Editorial Revision (2022).
FM DS 1-28 - Wind Design 2015, with Editorial Revision (2022).
FM DS 1-29 - Roof Deck Securement and Above-Deck Roof Components 2016, with Editorial
Revision (2022).
UL 790 - Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings Current Edition,
Including All Revisions.
1.3 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 77 00 - Closeout Submittals for additional warranty requirements.
B. Material Warranty: Provide membrane manufacturer's warranty agreeing to replace
material that shows manufacturing defects within 10 years after installation.
C. System Warranty: Provide manufacturer's system warranty agreeing to repair or replace
roofing that leaks or is damaged due to wind or other natural causes.
1. Warranty Term: 20 years.
2. For repair and replacement include costs of both material and labor in warranty.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EPDM THERMOSET SINGLE-PLY ROOFING - CARLISLE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 53 23 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Carlisle SynTec Systems: www.carlisle-syntec.com/#sle.
B. Substitutions: Not permitted.
2.2 ROOFING APPLICATIONS
A. EPDM Membrane Roofing: One ply membrane, ballasted, over insulation.
B. Roofing Assembly Performance Requirements and Design Criteria:
1. Roof Covering External Fire Resistance Classification: Class A when tested per UL
790.
2. Wind Uplift:
a. Designed to withstand wind uplift forces calculated with ASCE 7.
b. Design Wind Speed: In accordance with local building code and authorities
having jurisdiction (AHJ) and Section 01 81 11.
3. Factory Mutual Classification: Class 1 and windstorm resistance in accordance with
FM DS 1-28.
4. Insulation Thermal Resistance (R-Value): Provide R-Value over entire roof deck in
accordance with local building code requirements.
5. Drainage: No standing water within 48 hours after precipitation.
2.3 ROOFING MEMBRANE AND ASSOCIATED MATERIALS
A. Single Source Responsibility: Provide and install products from single source.
B. Membrane:
1. Material: Ethylene propylene diene monomer (EPDM); ASTM D4637/D4637M, Type
I (non-reinforced).
2. Thickness: 45 mil, 0.045 inch (1.1 mm), minimum.
3. Sheet Width: Factory fabricated into largest sheets possible.
4. Color: White on Black.
5. Products:
a. Carlisle SynTec Systems; Sure-White.
C. Seaming Materials: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
D. Flexible Flashing Material: Same material as membrane.
E. Base Flashing: Provide waterproof, fully adhered base flashing system at all penetrations,
plane transitions, and terminations.
2.4 DECK SHEATHING AND COVER BOARDS
A. Deck Sheathing: Polyisocyanurate (ISO) thermal board, complying with ASTM C1289; Type
V - Faced with oriented strand board (OSB) on one major surface of core foam and glass fiber
mat on other major surface, and Grade 2 with 20 psi (138 kPa), minimum, compressive
strength.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EPDM THERMOSET SINGLE-PLY ROOFING - CARLISLE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 53 23 - 3
1. Top Layer Material: 7/16 inch (11.1 mm) thick oriented strand board (OSB).
2. Bottom Layer Material: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) thick polyisocyanurate (ISO) foam.
2.5 INSULATION
A. Extruded Polystyrene (XPS) Board Insulation: Complies with ASTM C578 with natural skin
surface, drainage channels one face.
1. Tapered Board: Slope as indicated; minimum thickness 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricate
of fewest layers possible.
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Prefabricated Flashing Accessories:
1. Corners and Seams: Same material as membrane, in manufacturer's standard
thicknesses.
2. Penetrations: Same material as membrane, with manufacturer's standard cut-outs,
rigid inserts, clamping rings, and flanges.
3. Sealant Pockets: Same material as membrane, with manufacturer's standard
accessories, in manufacturer's standard configuration.
4. Carlisle SynTec Systems; Sure-Seal Pressure-Sensitive Reinforced Universal
Securement Strip (RUSS):
5. Sure-White Pressure-Sensitive Reinforced Universal Securement Strip (RUSS): 6
inches (152 mm) wide, 45 mil, 0.045 inch (1.1 mm) thick, reinforced EPDM
membrane with 3 inches (76 mm) wide, 30 mil, 0.030 inch (0.76 mm) thick cured
synthetic rubber with pressure-sensitive adhesive laminated to one edge.
B. Insulation Fasteners: Appropriate for purpose intended and approved by roofing
manufacturer.
C. Membrane Adhesive: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
1. Carlisle SynTec Systems; Sure-White SecurTAPE: 3-inch (76-mm) or 6-inch (152-
mm) wide splice tape.
2. Carlisle SynTec Systems; Splicing Cement: Butyl-based contact cement.
3. Carlisle SynTec Systems; 90-8-30A Bonding Adhesive: Synthetic rubber.
4. EPDM x 23 Low-VOC Bonding Adhesive.
D. Surface Conditioner for Adhesives: Compatible with membrane and adhesives.
E. Sealants: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.
F. Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard, clear, solvent-based cleaner.
G. Edgings and Terminations: Manufacturer's standard edge and termination accessories.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces and site conditions are ready to receive work.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EPDM THERMOSET SINGLE-PLY ROOFING - CARLISLE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 53 23 - 4
B. Verify deck is supported and secure.
C. Verify deck is clean and smooth, flat, free of depressions, waves, or projections, properly
sloped and suitable for installation of roof system.
D. Verify deck surfaces are dry and free of snow or ice.
E. Verify that roof openings, curbs, and penetrations through roof are solidly set, and cant strips
are in place.
3.2 PREPARATION, GENERAL
A. Clean substrate thoroughly prior to roof application.
3.3 WOOD DECK PREPARATION
A. Verify flatness and tightness of joints of wood decking. Verify that all wood decking edges
are fully supported. Fill knot holes with latex filler or completely cover with securely nailed
sheet metal.
3.4 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Perform work in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Do not apply roofing membrane during unsuitable weather.
C. Do not apply roofing membrane when ambient temperature is outside the temperature range
recommended by manufacturer.
D. Do not apply roofing membrane to damp or frozen deck surface or when precipitation is
expected or occurring.
E. Do not expose materials vulnerable to water or sun damage in quantities greater than can be
weatherproofed the same day.
3.5 INSULATION APPLICATION
A. Attachment of Insulation:
1. Mechanically fasten insulation to deck in accordance with roofing manufacturer's
instructions and Factory Mutual FM DS 1-29 requirements.
B. Lay subsequent layers of insulation with joints staggered minimum 6 inches (152 mm) from
joints of preceding layer.
C. Lay boards with edges in moderate contact without forcing, and gap between boards no
greater than 1/4 inch (6.4 mm). Cut insulation to fit neatly to perimeter blocking and around
penetrations through roof.
D. Do not apply more insulation than can be completely waterproofed in the same day.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EPDM THERMOSET SINGLE-PLY ROOFING - CARLISLE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 53 23 - 5
3.6 MEMBRANE APPLICATION
A. Roll out membrane, free from wrinkles or tears. Place sheet into place without stretching.
B. Shingle joints on sloped substrate in direction of drainage.
C. Overlap edges and ends and seal seams by contact adhesive, minimum 3 inches (76 mm). Seal
permanently waterproof.
D. At intersections with vertical surfaces:
1. Extend membrane over cant strips and up a minimum of 4 inches (102 mm) onto
vertical surfaces.
2. Fully adhere flexible flashing over membrane and up to nailing strips.
E. Coordinate installation of roof drains and sumps and related flashings, locate field splices
away from low areas and roof drains, and lap upslope sheet over downslope sheet.
F. Daily Seal: Install daily seal per manufacturer's instructions at the end of each workday.
Prevent infiltration of water at incomplete flashings, terminations, and at unfinished
membrane edges.
3.7 CLEANING
A. See Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout for additional requirements.
B. Remove wrappings, empty containers, paper, and other debris from the roof daily. Dispose
of debris in compliance with local, State, and Federal regulations.
C. Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
D. In areas where finished surfaces are soiled by work of this section, consult manufacturer of
surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their documented instructions.
E. Repair or replace defaced or damaged finishes caused by work of this section.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed roofing and flashings from construction operations.
B. Where traffic must continue over finished roof membrane, protect surfaces using durable
materials.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EPDM THERMOSET SINGLE-PLY ROOFING - CARLISLE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 53 23 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 62 00 - 1
SECTION 07 62 00
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fabricated sheet metal items, including flashings, counterflashings, gutters, downspouts,
sheet metal roofing, exterior penetrations, and other items indicated in Schedule.
B. Sealants for joints within sheet metal fabrications.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for
Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum
Extrusions and Panels (with Coil Coating Appendix) 2022.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
2023.
ASTM C920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants 2018.
ASTM D4586/D4586M - Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free 2007
(Reapproved 2018).
CDA A4050 - Copper in Architecture - Handbook current edition.
SMACNA (ASMM) - Architectural Sheet Metal Manual 2012.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform work in accordance with SMACNA (ASMM) and CDA A4050 requirements and
standard details, except as otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET MATERIALS
A. Pre-Finished Galvanized Steel: ASTM A653/A653M, with G90/Z275 zinc coating; minimum
24-gauge, 0.0239-inch (0.61 mm) thick base metal, shop pre-coated with PVDF coating.
1. Polyvinylidene Fluoride (PVDF) Coating: Superior performing organic powder
coating, AAMA 2605; multiple coat, thermally cured fluoropolymer finish system.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Form sections true to shape, accurate in size, square, and free from distortion or defects.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 62 00 - 2
B. Form pieces in longest possible lengths.
C. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2 inch (13 mm); miter and seam corners.
D. Form material with flat lock seams, except where otherwise indicated; at moving joints, use
sealed lapped, bayonet-type or interlocking hooked seams.
E. Fabricate corners from one piece with minimum 18-inch (450 mm) long legs; seam for
rigidity, seal with sealant.
F. Fabricate flashings to allow toe to extend 2 inches (50 mm) over roofing gravel. Return and
brake edges.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Fasteners: Galvanized steel, with soft neoprene washers.
B. Primer Type: Zinc chromate.
C. Concealed Sealants: Non-curing butyl sealant.
D. Exposed Sealants: ASTM C920; elastomeric sealant, with minimum movement capability as
recommended by manufacturer for substrates to be sealed; color to match adjacent material.
E. Asphalt Roof Cement: ASTM D4586/D4586M, Type I, asbestos-free.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify roof openings, curbs, pipes, sleeves, ducts, and vents through roof are solidly set,
reglets in place, and nailing strips located.
B. Verify roofing termination and base flashings are in place, sealed, and secure.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Secure flashings in place using concealed fasteners, and use exposed fasteners only where
permitted.
B. Apply plastic cement compound between metal flashings and felt flashings.
C. Fit flashings tight in place; make corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes, and
lines accurate to profiles.
D. Seal metal joints watertight.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ROOF ACCESSORIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 72 20 - 1
SECTION 07 72 20
ROOF ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof curbs.
B. Roof hatches, manual and automatic operation, including smoke vents.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
29 CFR 1910.23 - Ladders Current Edition.
29 CFR 1910.29 - Fall Protection Systems and Falling Object Protection - Criteria and
Practices Current Edition.
ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods,
Wire, Profiles, and Tubes 2021.
ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars,
Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes (Metric) 2021.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. See Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed layout developed for this project and provide dimensioned
location and number for each type of roof accessory.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF CURBS
A. Roof Curbs Manufacturers:
1. AES Industries Inc: www.aescurb.com/#sle.
2. The Pate Company: www.patecurbs.com/#sle.
3. LMCurbs; Roof Curbs: www.lmcurbs.com/#sle.
4. MKT Metal Manufacturing: www.mktduct.com/#sle.
B. Roof Curbs Mounting Assemblies: Factory fabricated hollow sheet metal construction,
internally reinforced, and capable of supporting superimposed live and dead loads and
designated equipment load with fully mitered and sealed corner joints welded or
mechanically fastened, and integral counterflashing with top and edges formed to shed water.
1. Applications: Roof curbs used for roof penetrations/openings as indicated on
drawings.
2. Roof Curb Mounting Substrate: Curb substrate consists of standing seam metal roof
panel system.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ROOF ACCESSORIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 72 20 - 2
3. Sheet Metal Material:
a. Aluminum: 0.080 inch (2.03 mm) minimum thickness, with 3003 alloy, and
H14 temper.
4. Fabricate curb bottom and mounting flanges for installation directly on metal roof
panel system to match slope and configuration of system.
a. Extend side flange to next adjacent roof panel seam and comply with seam
configurations and seal connection, providing at least 6 inch (152 mm)
clearance between curb and metal roof panel flange allowing water to
properly flow past curb.
b. Where side of curb aligns with metal roof panel flange, attach fasteners on
upper slope of flange to curb connection allowing water to flow past below
fasteners, and seal connection.
c. Maintain at least 12 inch (305 mm) clearance from curb, and lap upper curb
flange on underside of down sloping metal roof panel, and seal connection.
d. Lap lower curb flange overtop of down sloping metal roof panel and seal
connection.
5. Provide layouts and configurations indicated on drawings.
2.2 ROOF HATCHES AND VENTS, MANUAL AND AUTOMATIC OPERATION
A. Roof Hatch Manufacturers:
1. Bilco Company; Type TB (various types and special size): www.bilco.com/#sle.
B. Safety Railing System: Roof hatch safety rail system mounted directly to curb without
penetration of roofing system.
1. Railing Size: As indicated on drawings.
2. Railing: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.23 for ladder safety, with a safety factor of two.
3. Self-Closing Gate: Comply with 29 CFR 1910.29 for safe egress and fall protection
through hatch opening.
4. Posts and Rails: Galvanized steel tubing.
5. Gate: Same material as railing; automatic closing with latch.
6. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, factory applied finish.
7. Gate Hinges and Post Guides: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M), 6063 alloy, T5 temper
aluminum.
8. Mounting Brackets: Hot dipped galvanized steel, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick, minimum.
9. Fasteners: Stainless steel, Type 316.
10. Products:
a. BILCO Company; Bil-Guard 2.0: www.bilco.com/#sle.
C. Hardware: Steel, zinc coated and chromate sealed, unless otherwise indicated or required by
manufacturer.
1. Lifting Mechanisms: Compression or torsion spring operator with shock absorbers
that automatically opens upon release of latch; capable of lifting covers despite 10 psf
(475 kPa) load.
2. Hinges: Heavy duty pintle type.
3. Hold open arm with vinyl-coated handle for manual release.
4. Latch: Upon closing, engage latch automatically and reset manual release.
5. Manual Release: Pull handle on interior.
6. Locking: Padlock hasp on interior.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ROOF ACCESSORIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 72 20 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of
unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving acceptable
results for applicable substrate under project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, in manner that maintains roofing
system weather-tight integrity.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ROOF ACCESSORIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 72 20 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 92 00 - 1
SECTION 07 92 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section includes sealant work associated with joints between similar and dissimilar materials
in the Work.
B. Work included consists of, but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Sealing all joints which would otherwise permit penetration of moisture, unless
sealing work is specifically required under other sections.
a. Flashing reglets and retainers.
b. Exterior wall joints.
c. Flooring joints.
d. Isolation joints.
e. Joints between paving and sidewalks and building.
f. Concrete control and expansion joints, exterior and interior.
g. Joints at penetrations of walls, floors, and decks by piping and other services
and equipment.
h. Exterior and interior perimeters of exterior and interior door and window
frames, louvers, grilles, etc.
i. Thresholds at exterior doors.
j. Sealing of plumbing fixtures to floor or wall.
k. Other joints where calking, sealant, or compressible sealant is indicated.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM C920 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants
ASTM C1087 Standard Test Method for Determining Compatibility of
Liquid-Applied Sealants with Accessories Used in Structural
Glazing Systems
ASTM C1193 Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants
ASTM C1247 Standard Test Method for Durability of Sealants Exposed to
Continuous Immersion in Liquids
B. Federal Specification (FS), most recent editions:
TT-S-001543A Sealing Compound: Silicone Rubber Base (for Caulking,
Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other Structures)
TT-S-00230C Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Single Component (For
Calking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other
Structures)

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 92 00 - 2
TT-S-00227E Sealing Compound: Elastomeric Type, Multi-Component (for
Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings and Other
Structures)
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
Building Materials Directory
D. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), most recent edition:
NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components, Health Effects
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Words "calk," "sealant," and "calking" mean sealant Work.
B. "Interior wet areas" mean toilets, showers, sinks, and similar areas.
C. "Applicator" means the individual actually on site performing the installation.
D. "Vertical" means any surface with a slope greater than 1.5 horizontal to 1.0 vertical.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data
1. Letter of certification that products submitted meet requirements of standards
referenced.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
3. Manufacturer's recommendations for joint cleaner, primer, backer rod, tooling, and
bond breaker.
4. Applicator qualifications.
5. Warranty.
6. Certification from sealant manufacturer stating that product being used is
recommended for and is best suited for joint in which it is being applied.
C. Field Samples
1. Cured sample of each color for Engineer's color selection. Color chart not acceptable.
D. Preconstruction field test reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods
resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on preconstruction testing specified
in below in QUALITY ASSURANCE.
E. Product test reports: Based on comprehensive testing of product formulations performed by
a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.
F. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 92 00 - 3
1. Sealant applicator shall have a minimum of five years of experience on projects with
similar scope.
B. Mock-ups:
1. Before calking work is started, a sample of each type of joint shall be calked where
directed by Engineer. The approved samples shall show the workmanship, bond, and
color of calking materials as specified or selected for the Work and shall be the
minimum standard of quality on the entire Project.
C. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing:
1. Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of
materials that will contact of affect joint sealants.
a. Use ASTM C1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint
preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of
joint sealants to joint substrates.
b. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each type of material, including joint
substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous
materials.
c. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying
the Work.
d. For materials failing tests, obtain sealant manufacturer’s written instructions
for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers.
e. Testing will not be required if sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation
data that are based on previous testing of current sealant products for
adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials
matching those submitted.
D. Preconstruction field-adhesion testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their
adhesion to joint substrates found in the Work as follows:
1. Locate test joints where indicated in the Work or, if not indicated, as directed by the
Engineer.
2. Conduct tests for each application indicated below:
a. Each type of elastomeric sealant and joint substrate indicated.
3. Notify Engineer a minimum of 7 days in advance of dates and times when test joints
will be evaluated.
4. Test method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field -Applied Sealant Joint
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 of ASTM C1193.
5. Report whether sealant in joint connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to
joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each
type of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until
satisfactory adhesion is obtained.
6. Evaluation of preconstruction field-adhesion test results: Sealants not evidencing
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere
to joint substrates during testing.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 92 00 - 4
B. Deliver material in manufacturer's original unopened containers with labels intact. Labels
shall indicate contents and expiration date of material.
C. Store all materials off the ground and protect from rain, freezing, or excessive heat until ready
for use.
D. Condition the specified products before use as recommended by the manufacturer.
1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Schedule Work to be performed when temperature and humidity are as recommended by the
sealant manufacturer during and after installation until products are fully cured.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Material and Labor Warranty:
1. Sealant work shall be free of defects for a period of 5 years from date of final
acceptance.
2. Failure of watertightness constitutes defect.
3. Remove any defective work and/or materials and replace with new materials.
4. Warranty must be sighed jointly by applicator and sealant manufacturer.
B. Special installer’s warranty:
1. Installer’s standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric
joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified
herein within specified warranty period.
a. Warranty period: Five years from date of final acceptance.
2. Special warranties herein specified exclude deterioration or failure of elastomeric
joint sealants from the following:
a. Movement of the structure resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding
sealant manufacturer’s written specifications for sealant elongation and
compression caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design.
b. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design
specifications.
c. Mechanical damage by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.
d. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other
atmospheric contaminants.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers are
acceptable:
1. Polyurethane sealants.
a. Pecora.
b. PSI Polymeric Systems, Inc.
c. Sika Chemical Corporation.
d. BASF Master Builders.
e. Engineer approved equal.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 92 00 - 5
2. Silicone sealants:
a. Dow Corning Corporation.
b. General Electric.
c. Tremco
d. Engineer approved equal.
3. Fire Resistant Sealant:
a. 3M Corporation.
b. Dow Corning.
c. Engineer approved equal.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Sealants – General:
1. Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with
one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.
2. Where compound is exposed to view in finished Work, provide colors matching
materials being sealed.
3. Where compound is not exposed to view in finished Work, provide manufacturer's
color with best performance.
4. For joints in potable water reservoirs, provide only 2-component polyurethane
sealant with NSF 61 certification.
5. Provide non sagging sealant for vertical and overhead joints.
6. Sealants for horizontal joints:
a. Self-leveling pedestrian/traffic grade.
7. Suitability for immersion in liquids: Where elastomeric sealants are indicated for
submerged use, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM
C1247 and qualify for the length of exposure indicated by reference to ASTM C920 for
Classes 1 or 2. Liquid used for testing sealants is chlorinated potable water, unless
otherwise noted.
B. Polyurethane Sealant:
1. One or two components.
2. Meet ASTM C920; F.S. TT-S-00230C, Type I or Type II, Class A, or TT-S-00227E, Type
I or Type II, Class A.
a. Pecora Dynatrol I, Dynatrol II, Urexpan NR-200 or NR-201.
b. PSI PSI-270.
c. Sika Sikaflex-1A, Sikaflex-2C.
d. Master Builders MasterSeal NP-1, NP-II, SL-1.
C. Silicone Sealant:
1. One component.
2. Meet F.S. TT-S-001543A, Class A:
a. Dow Corning 790, 795, 786.
b. General Electric Silpruf, Silglaze, Sanitary SCS 1700 sealant.
c. Tremco Spectrem.
D. Bond breaker tape: Polyethylene tape of other plastic tape recommended by sealant
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 92 00 - 6
joint surfaces at back of joint surfaces of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant
failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.
1. Unless specifically shown on the Drawings, bond breaker shall not be used in joints
within the reservoir.
E. Joint Cleaner, Primer, Bond Breaker:
1. As recommended by sealant manufacturer.
F. Sealant Backer Rod: Closed cell polyethylene, polyethylene jacketed polyurethane foam, or
other flexible, non-absorbent, non-bituminous material recommended by sealant
manufacturer to:
1. Control joint depth
2. Break bond of sealant oat bottom of joint
3. Provide proper shape of sealant bead.
G. Fire-Resistant Sealant:
1. One or two component.
2. Furnish sealant which has been tested for use as a fire and smoke penetration seal.
a. 3M Corporation Fire Dam 150.
b. Dow Corning Firestop.
3. UL approved for intended use.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before using any sealant, investigate its compatibility with adjacent joint surfaces, fillers, and
other materials in the joint system.
B. Use only compatible materials.
C. Clean and prime joint surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
1. Limit application to surfaces to receive sealant.
2. Mask off adjacent surfaces.
D. Commencing sealant installation constitutes acceptance of joints and surfaces.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Where finish coating or covering is to be applied to surface, wait until such coating or
covering has been applied before installing sealant; e.g., paint, wall covering, glazed coatings.
C. Make all joints water and air tight.
D. Make depth of sealing compounds not more than one-half width of joint, but in no case less
than 1/4 inch nor more than 5/8 inch.
E. Provide correctly sized backer rod in all joints to proper depth

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 92 00 - 7
F. Apply bond breaker where required.
G. Tool sealants using sufficient pressure to fill all voids.
H. Upon completion, leave sealant with smooth even neat finish.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces free of sealant.
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Protect finished installation.
B. Protect sealants until fully cured.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Furnish sealant as indicated for the following areas:
1. Exterior areas:
a. Joints in concrete and masonry:
1) Use 2-component polyurethane only.
b. All other joints:
1) Single or 2-component Polyurethane or.
2) Silicone.
2. Interior wet areas:
a. Joints in concrete and masonry:
1) Use 2-component polyurethane only.
b. All other joints:
1) Single or 2-component Polyurethane or.
2) Silicone.
3. Interior non-wet, corrosive areas:
a. Joints in concrete and masonry:
1) Use 2-component polyurethane only.
b. All other joints:
1) Single or 2-component Polyurethane or.
2) Silicone.
4. Interior non-wet, drywall and plaster noncorrosive areas:
a. All Joints:
1) Single or 2-component Polyurethane or.
2) Silicone.
5. Fire-rated construction: Fire-resistant sealant.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 07 92 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

DIVISION 08
OPENINGS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 11 13 - 1
SECTION 08 11 13
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Non-fire-rated hollow metal doors and frames.
B. Thermally insulated hollow metal doors with frames.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
ANSI/SDI A250.4 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for Steel
Doors, Frames and Frame Anchors 2022.
ANSI/SDI A250.10 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces
for Steel Doors and Frames 2020.
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or
Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process
2023.
NAAMM HMMA 805 - Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames 2012.
NAAMM HMMA 860 - Guide Specifications for Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 2018.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames:
1. Curries, an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.
2. Republic Doors, an Allegion brand: www.republicdoor.com/#sle.
3. Steelcraft, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/#sle.
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to comply with more
than one type of requirement, comply with the specified requirements for each type; for
instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the
requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two
requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 11 13 - 2
2.3 HOLLOW METAL DOORS
A. Door Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
B. Exterior Doors: Thermally insulated.
1. Based on NAAMM HMMA Custom Guidelines:
a. Comply with guidelines of NAAMM HMMA 860 for Hollow Metal Doors and
Frames.
b. Performance Level 1 - Light Duty, in accordance with NAAMM HMMA 805.
c. Physical Performance Level C, 250,000 cycles; in accordance with ANSI/SDI
A250.4.
d. Door Face Metal Thickness: 20 gauge, 0.032 inch (0.8 mm), minimum.
2. Door Core Material: Manufacturers standard core material/construction and in
compliance with requirements.
3. Door Thickness: 1-3/4 inches (44.5 mm), nominal.
4. Weatherstripping: Refer to Section 087100.
2.4 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES
A. Comply with standards and/or custom guidelines as indicated for corresponding door in
accordance with applicable door frame requirements.
B. Frame Finish: Factory primed and field finished.
C. Exterior Door Frames: Full profile/continuously welded type.
1. Galvanizing: Components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed) in
accordance with ASTM A653/A653M, with A40/ZF120 coating.
2. Frame Metal Thickness: 16 gauge, 0.053 inch (1.3 mm), minimum.
3. Weatherstripping: Separate, see Section 087100.
D. Interior Door Frames, Non-Fire Rated: Full profile/continuously welded type.
2.5 FINISHES
A. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10, door manufacturer's standard.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.
B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.
C. Verify that finished walls are in plane to ensure proper door alignment.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coat inside of frames to be installed in masonry or to be grouted, with bituminous coating,
prior to installation.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 11 13 - 3
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and related
requirements of specified door and frame standards or custom guidelines indicated.
B. Coordinate frame anchor placement with wall construction.
C. Install door hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 11 13 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 33 23 - 1
SECTION 08 33 23
OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Insulated service doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 5 for miscellaneous steel supports.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Delegated Design: Design overhead coiling doors, including comprehensive engineering
analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design
criteria indicated.
1. Deflection Limits: Design overhead coiling doors to withstand design wind load
without evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components.
2.
B. Operation Cycles: Provide overhead coiling door components and operators capable of
operating for not less than number of cycles indicated for each door. One operation cycle is
complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and
returned to the closed position.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory. Include the
following:
1. Construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components,
profiles for slats, and finishes.
2. Rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished
accessories.
3. For fire-rated doors, description of fire-release system including testing and resetting
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or
detailed in manufacturer's product data. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and
attachments to other work.
1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 33 23 - 2
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's finish charts showing full range of colors and
textures available for units with factory-applied finishes.
1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For overhead coiling doors indicated to comply with
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by
the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of seismic restraints.
2. Summary of forces and loads on walls and jambs.
E. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.
F. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For overhead coiling doors, accessories, and components,
from manufacturer.
G. Maintenance Data: For overhead coiling doors to include in maintenance manuals.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and
approved for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain overhead coiling doors from single source from single
manufacturer.
1. Obtain operators and controls from overhead coiling door manufacturer.
C. Sound-Control Doors: Assemblies that have been fabricated and tested to control the passage
of sound and have minimum certified STC rating according to ASTM E 413.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOOR CURTAIN MATERIALS AND CONSTRUCTION
A. Door Curtains: Fabricate overhead coiling-door curtain of interlocking metal slats, designed
to withstand wind loading indicated, in a continuous length for width of door without splices.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide slats of thickness and mechanical properties
recommended by door manufacturer for performance, size, and type of door indicated, and
as follows:
1. Steel Door Curtain Slats: Zinc-coated (galvanized), cold-rolled structural steel sheet;
complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 zinc coating; nominal sheet thickness
(coated) of 0.028 inch and as required to meet requirements.
2. Insulation: Fill slats for insulated doors with manufacturer's standard thermal
insulation complying with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of
75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation completely
within slat faces.
3. Metal Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match metal of exterior curtain-slat face.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 33 23 - 3
B. Endlocks for Service Doors: Malleable-iron casings galvanized after fabrication, secured to
curtain slats with galvanized rivets or high-strength nylon. Provide locks on not less than
alternate curtain slats for curtain alignment and resistance against lateral movement.
C. Bottom Bar for Service Doors: Consisting of two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by
1/8 inch thick; fabricated from manufacturer's standard hot-dip galvanized steel, stainless
steel, or aluminum extrusions to match curtain slats and finish.
D. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer's standard angles or channels and angles of same
material and finish as curtain slats unless otherwise indicated, with sufficient depth and
strength to retain curtain, to allow curtain to operate smoothly, and to withstand loading.
Slot bolt holes for guide adjustment. Provide removable stops on guides to prevent
overtravel of curtain.
2.2 HOOD
A. General: Form sheet metal hood to entirely enclose coiled curtain and operating mechanism
at opening head. Contour to fit end brackets to which hood is attached. Roll and reinforce
top and bottom edges for stiffness. Form closed ends for surface-mounted hoods and fascia
for any portion of between-jamb mounting that projects beyond wall face. Equip hood with
intermediate support brackets as required to prevent sagging.
1. Galvanized Steel: Nominal 0.028-inch- thick, hot-dip galvanized steel sheet with G90
zinc coating, complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
2.3 LOCKING DEVICES
A. Slide Bolt: Fabricate with side-locking bolts to engage through slots in tracks for locking by
padlock, located on both left and right jamb sides, operable from coil side.
B. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.
2.4 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES
A. Weatherseals: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire
perimeter of door for a weathertight installation, unless otherwise indicated.
1. At door head, use 1/8-inch- thick, replaceable, continuous sheet secured to inside of
hood.
2. At door jambs, use replaceable, adjustable, continuous, flexible, 1/8-inch- thick seals
of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene.
2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM
A. General: Counterbalance doors by means of manufacturer's standard mechanism with an
adjustable-tension, steel helical torsion spring mounted around a steel shaft and contained in
a spring barrel connected to top of curtain with barrel rings. Use grease-sealed bearings or
self-lubricating graphite bearings for rotating members.
B. Counterbalance Barrel: Fabricate spring barrel of manufacturer's standard hot-formed,
structural-quality, welded or seamless carbon-steel pipe, of sufficient diameter and wall

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 33 23 - 4
thickness to support rolled-up curtain without distortion of slats and to limit barrel deflection
to not more than 0.03 in./ft. of span under full load.
C. Spring Balance: One or more oil-tempered, heat-treated steel helical torsion springs. Size
springs to counterbalance weight of curtain, with uniform adjustment accessible from
outside barrel. Secure ends of springs to barrel and shaft with cast-steel barrel plugs.
D. Torsion Rod for Counterbalance Shaft: Fabricate of manufacturer's standard cold-rolled
steel, sized to hold fixed spring ends and carry torsional load.
E. Brackets: Manufacturer's standard mounting brackets of either cast iron or cold-rolled steel
plate.
2.6 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS
A. Equip door with manufacturer's recommended manual door operator unless another type of
door operator is indicated.
B. Chain-Hoist Operator: Consisting of endless steel hand chain, chain-pocket wheel and guard,
and gear-reduction unit with a maximum 30 lbf force for door operation. Provide alloy-steel
hand chain with chain holder secured to operator guide.
2.7 DOOR ASSEMBLY 101 (A-02)
A. Insulated Service Door: Overhead coiling door formed with curtain of interlocking metal
slats.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
a. ACME Rolling Doors.
b. Alpine Overhead Doors, Inc.
c. AlumaTek, Inc.
d. C.H.I. Overhead Doors.
e. City-Gates.
f. Cookson Company.
g. Cornell Iron Works, Inc.
h. Dynamic Closures Corp.
i. Lawrence Roll-Up Doors, Inc.
j. Mahon Door Corporation.
k. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc.
l. Metro Door.
m. Overhead Door Corporation.
n. QMI Security Solutions.
o. Raynor.
p. Southwestern Steel Rolling Door Co.
q. Wayne-Dalton Corp.
r. Windsor Door.
B. Operation Cycles: Not less than 10,000.
C. STC Rating: 25.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 33 23 - 5
D. Curtain R-Value: 5.0 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu.
E. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.
F. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of 1-7/8-inch to3-1/4-inch center-to-center height.
1. Insulated-Slat Interior Facing: Metal.
G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Galvanized steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.
H. Hood: Match curtain material and finish.
1. Mounting: Face of wall.
I. Locking Devices: Equip door with slide bolt for padlock and chain lock keeper.
J. Manual Door Operator: Chain-hoist operator.
K. Door Finish:
1. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coated Finish: Color as indicated on drawings.
2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing: Match finish of exterior curtain-slat face.
2.8 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range
of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.
2.9 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked-on finish consisting
of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written
instructions for cleaning, pretreatment, application, and minimum dry film thickness.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the
Work.
B. Examine locations of electrical connections.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OVERHEAD COILING DOORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 33 23 - 6
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,
anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified.
B. Install overhead coiling doors, hoods, and operators at the mounting locations indicated for
each door.
C. Accessibility: Install overhead coiling doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes
in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.
3.3 STARTUP SERVICE
3.4 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of
warp, twist, or distortion.
B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.
C. Adjust seals to provide weathertight fit around entire perimeter.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel
to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 1
SECTION 08 62 23
TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tubular daylighting devices (TDD) and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 06 10 53 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry; Site built wood curbs and nailers.
B. Section 07 53 23 – EPDM Thermoset Single-Ply Roofing.
C. Section 07 62 00 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
D. Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork: Fan vent duct and connections.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and Unit
Skylights; 2011.
B. ASTM International (ASTM):
ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized), by the
Hot Dip Process.
ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-
Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.
ASTM D635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of Self-
Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
ASTM D1929 - Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics.
ASTM D2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or
Decomposition of Plastics.
ASTM F1642 - Standard Test Method for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast
Loading.
ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 2
ASTM E283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the
Specimen.
ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.
ASTM E547 - Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and
Curtain walls by Cyclic Air Pressure Difference.
ASTM E1886 - Standard Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Missiles
and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials.
ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls,
Doors, and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by
Windborne Debris in Hurricane.
ASTM F2912 - Standard Specification for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to Airblast
Loading.
C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):
CFR 47 - Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Rules and Regulations for FCC, FCC Part 15 - Radio
Frequency Devices, Subpart B - Unintentional Radiators,
Section 15.107 - Conducted Limits, and 15.109 - Radiated
Emission Limits
D. Factory Mutual (FM):
FM Standard 4431 - The Approval Standard for Skylights.
E. Federal Emergency Management Agency (FEMA):
FEMA P-361 - Safe Rooms for Tornadoes and Hurricanes.
F. General Services Administration (GSA):
GSA-TS01-2003: Standard Test Method for Glazing and Window Systems Subject to Dynamic
Overpressure Loadings.
G. INTERNATIONAL BUILDING CODE (IBC):
IBC Section 1710 - Load Test Procedure for Wind Load Testing on Rooftop Daylight Collecting
System - Structural Performance Testing - Devised by ATI PE);
2012.
IBC Section 2606.7.2 - Installation - Diffuser Fall Out Test (Devised by PE); 2012.
H. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL):
UL 2108 - Low Voltage Lighting Systems.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 3
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Daylight Reflective Tubes: Spectralight Infinity with INFRAREDuction Technology combines
ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance. Patented
spectrally-selective optical surface yields an average total- and specular-reflectance for the
Visible Light spectrum (400 nm to 700 nm) providing maximized visible light transmission
and less than 25 percent reflectance for Infrared (IR) heat wavelengths (750 nm to 2500 nm)
for minimized heat transmission, resulting in a spectrally-selective Total Solar Spectrum (250
nm to 2500 nm) reflectance less than 37 percent, as measured using a Perkin Elmer Lambda
1050 spectrophotometer with a Universal Reflectance Accessory. Color: a* and b* (defined
by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in
accordance with ASTM E308.
B. BRIGHTEN UP 290 DS (Hard Ceilings)
1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/IS2/A440, Class CW-PG70 size tested 14 inch (350 mm),
Type TDDCC.
a. Air Infiltration Test: Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with
a pressure delta of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with
ASTM E283.
b. Water Resistance Test:
1) Passes water resistance; no uncontrolled water leakage with a
pressure differential of 10.7 psf (512 Pa) or 15 percent of the design
load (whichever is greater) and a water spray rate of 5
gallons/hour/sf for 24 minutes when tested in accordance with ICC-
ES AC-16, ASTM E547 and ASTM E331.
c. Uniform Load Test: All units tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive
pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in
accordance with ASTM E330.
1) No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or
damage to make system inoperable or cause excessive permanent
deflection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of 150 psf
(7.18 kPa) or Negative Load of 60 psf (2.87 kPa) in accordance with
ICC AC-16 Section A, or Negative Load of 70 psf (3.35 kPA) if tested
per ICC AC-16 Section B.
d. Hurricane Resistance:
1) Meets Florida Building Code TAS, 201, TAS, 202 and TAS 203 for
Impact and non-impact components.
2) Meets ASTM E1886 and ASTM E1996 for missile and cyclic pressure
differential testing.
e. Fire Testing:
1) When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire
rating requirements as described in the International Building Code.
2) When used with Dome Edge Protection Band and Rooftop Fire
Glazing, all domes meet prescriptive method of Option 1 of IBC
708A.2.1 and IWUIC 101.2.
3) Self-Ignition Temperature - Greater than 650 degrees F per ASTM
D1929.
4) Smoke Density: Rating no greater than 450 per ASTM E84 in way
intended for use. Classification C.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 4
5) Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min
(62 mm/min) Classification CC-2 per ASTM D635.
6) Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch (25 mm)
Classification CC-1 per ASTM D635.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 33 20.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Data sheets showing roof dome assembly, flashing base, reflective tubes, diffuser
assembly, and accessories.
4. Installation requirements.
C. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components,
including rough opening and framing dimensions, anchorage, roof flashings and accessories.
D. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying compliance
with specified performance requirements.
E. Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed
information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting
requirements, listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories,
and ceiling compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all
proposed features:
1. LED Luminaires: Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test
data.
2. To meet LM-80 lifetime projections, LM-80 Max Drive Current must not be exceeded.
Lumen maintenance and lifetime predictions are valid for drive current and case
temperature conditions used for LM-80 testing as included in the applicable LM-80
test report for these products.
F. LEED Submittals: Provide documentation of how the requirements of Credit will be met:
1. List of Daylight Credits available for the products specified.
2. Data on Energy Optimization Performance Credits for the products specified.
3. Data on Perimeter and Non-Perimeter Controllability of Systems for use of Daylight
Dimmer option with the products specified.
4. Data on potential Innovation in Design Credits which may be available for the
innovative use of the products specified.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied
by a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in the top lighting
industry. Secondary products shall be acceptable to the primary manufacturer.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 5
B. Installer Qualifications: All products shall be installed by a single installer with a minimum of
five years demonstrated experience, with adequate equipment, skilled workers, and practical
experience to meet the project schedule.
C. Skylights shall conform with authorities having jurisdiction and be designed to meet design
criteria of the project location and the following:
1. Skylights must be certified by NFRC.
2. Skylights must be Tested and labeled in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S.2/A440.
3. Skylights must have Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Class Number 4431.
4. On projects which fall under the jurisdiction of the Florida Building Code, Skylights
are required to have a current Florida Building Code (FBC) Number to meet the High
Velocity Hurricane Zone (HVHZ) requirements and are required for acceptance of
Work specified in this section. Skylight must comply with the jurisdictional code
body's submittal data and supporting drawings and documentation. Where the code
body's acceptance criteria differs from these specifications regarding components
and hardware, the code body's requirements shall govern.
5. Meet or exceed OSHA 200 pound (90 kg) Drop Tests expressed in 29 CFR
1910.23(e)(8)
6. Skylights shall provide minimum 69 psf (3.30 kPa) design load.
D. Pre-Installation Meeting: Contractor shall convene a pre-installation meeting on the project
site minimum one week before beginning work of this Section. The meeting shall include the
Architect or Owner's Representative and representatives of all related trades to:
1. Coordinate between the at least the following trades.
a. Roofing to install the flashing, skylight, and LED Light Kit (when specified).
Cut holes in roof deck, and flash curb to deck.
b. Ensure clear paths for TDD units and coordinate with mechanical so not to
interfere with pathways.
c. Electrical to wire components and program lighting controls.
2. Verify project requirements and site logistics.
3. Assess integrity of the roofing system and building structure.
4. Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in a cool dry location protected from the weather and in the manufacturer's
original unopened containers until ready for installation.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate delivery schedule with the Contractor and project schedule to minimize on site
storage.
B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 6
C. Store materials in a dry area, protected from freezing, staining, contamination or damage.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years.
B. Electrical Parts: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 5 years, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solatube International, Inc., which is located at: Solatube
International 2210 Oak Ridge Way; Vista, CA 92081-8341; Toll Free Tel: [phone]; Tel:
760-597-4400 ; Fax: [phone]; Email:[e-mail];
Web:http://www.solatube.com
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01600.
2.2 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and self-
flashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to
interior spaces; complying with ICC AC-16.
B. Brighten Up Series: Solatube Model 290 DS: 14 Inch (350 mm) Daylighting System:
1. Model:
a. Solatube Model 290 DS used for daylighting systems with suspended or hard
ceilings. AAMA Type TDDCC.
2. Capture Zone:
a. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with
flashing base supporting dome and top of tube.
1) Outer Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125 inch (3.25 mm) minimum
thickness impact resistant injection molded acrylic classified as CC2
material; UV inhibiting (100 percent UV C, 100 percent UV B and 98.5
percent UV A), impact modified acrylic blend.
a) Raybender 3000: Variable prism optic molded into outer
dome to capture low angle sunlight and limit high angle
sunlight.
2) Tube Ring: Attached to top of base section; 0.090 inch (2.3 mm)
nominal thickness injection molded high impact acrylic; to prevent
thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel
condensed moisture out of tubing.
3) Dome Seal: Polyethylene foam seal, black, 0.13 inch (3.2 mm) thick by
14.62 (371 mm) diameter, 2 PCF polyethylene foam.
4) LightTracker Reflector, made of aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015 inch
(0.4 mm) with Spectralight Infinity. Positioned in the dome to capture
low angle sunlight.
b. Dome Options:

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 7
1) Dome Edge Protection Band: Type PB, for fire rated Class A, B or C roof
applications. Aluminized steel nominal thickness of 0.028 inches (0.7
mm).
c. Flashings:
1) Roof Flashing Base:
a) One Piece: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing
functioning as base support for dome and top of tube. Sheet
steel, corrosion resistant conforming to ASTM A653/A653M
or ASTM A463/A463M or ASTM A792/A792M, 0.028 inch (0.7
mm) plus or minus .006 inch (.015 mm) thick.
i. Base Style: Type FC, Curb Cap, with inside dimensions
of 27 inches by 27 inches (685 mm by 685 mm) to
cover curb as specified in Section 07600.
2) Flashing Options:
a) Curb Cap Insulation: Type CCI, nominal 1 inch thick thermal
isolation pad to reduce thermal conduction between curb-cap
and tubing and thermal convection between room air and
curb-cap. Rated R-6 (OFxft2xhr/Btu) Insulation is
Polyisocyanurate foam utilizing CFC, HCFC, and HFC free
blowing agent. Type-1 Class-1 per ASTM C 1289; Passes UL
1715 (15-minute thermal barrier per IBC 2603.4); Attic
ventilation may be required per IBC 1203.2(OFxft2xhr/Btu)
3. Transfer Zone:
a. Extension Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.015 inch (0.4 mm).
1) Reflective Tubes:
a) Reflective Extension Tube: Type EXX with total length of run
as indicated on the Drawings.
b) Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity with INFRAREDuction
Technology combining ultra-high Visible Light reflectance
with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance.
c) Color: a* and b* (defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not
exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as determined in
accordance with ASTM E308.
2) Tube Options
a) Extension Tube Angle Adapter: Provide manufacturer's
standard adapters for applications requiring:
i. Type A1 one 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle
adapter.
ii. Type A2 two 0 to 90 degree extension tube angle
adapters.
4. Delivery Zone:
a. Ceiling Ring: Injection molded impact resistant acrylic. Nominal thickness is
0.110 inches (2.8 mm).
b. Ceiling Ring Seal: Polyethylene foam seal, white, 0.25 inch (6.4 mm) wide by
0.19 inch (4.8 mm) high, 2 PCF polyethylene foam with low-tack pressure
sensitive adhesive.
c. Upper glazing: PET GAG plastic with EPDM low density sponge seal to
minimize condensation and bug, dirt, and air infiltration per ASTM E283. The
nominal thickness is 0.039 inches (0.99 mm).
1) Natural Effect Lens: Type LN.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 8
d. Round Diffusers/Decorative Fixtures: Dual Glazed Diffuser Assembly.
1) Lower glazing with integral injection molded acrylic Dress Ring
classified as CC2 material. Nominal thickness is 0.110 inches (2.8 mm)
a) Classic Vusion Diffuser: Type L4, molded acrylic plastic
classified as CC2 material (nominal thickness 0.090 inches
(2.29 mm) with injection molded acrylic Diffuser Trim Ring.
2.3 ACCESSORLES
A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive metal
of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon.
B. Suspension Wire: Steel, annealed, galvanized finish, size and type for application and ceiling
system requirement.
C. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or recommended
by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions.
C. If substrate and rough opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit, and wiring.
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Coordinate installation with substrates, air and vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing
membrane, and flashing to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly, and that
finished installation is weather tight.
1. Install flashing to produce weatherproof seal with curb and overlap with roofing
system termination at top of curb.
2. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
Pack fibrous insulation in rough opening to maintain continuity of thermal barriers.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 9
3. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material.
C. Where metal surfaces of tubular unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive
substrates, including preservative-treated wood, provide permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer
D. Align device free of warp or twist, maintain dimensional tolerances.
E. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each fixture to verify
operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide independent testing and inspection as specified in Section 01 45 23. Inspect
installation to verify secure and proper mounting.
1. Test for water leaks in accordance with AAMA 502 after installation and curing of
sealants but prior to installation if interior finishes.
2. Perform test for total area of each unit skylight.
3. Notify the Architect and the Contractor of any failed tests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up damaged
metal coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other
substances.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 62 23 - 10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 71 00 - 1
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hardware for wood, aluminum, hollow metal, and service doors.
B. Thresholds.
C. Weatherstripping and gasketing.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 53 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood door frames.
B. Section 08 11 13 - Hollow Metal Doors and Frames.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
BHMA A156.1 - Standard for Butts and Hinges 2021.
BHMA A156.4 - Door Controls - Closers 2019.
BHMA A156.13 - Mortise Locks & Latches Series 1000 2022.
BHMA A156.18 - Materials and Finishes 2020.
BHMA A156.21 - Thresholds 2019.
BHMA A156.22 - Standard for Gasketing 2021.
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the manufacture, fabrication, and installation of products that door hardware is
installed on.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. See Section 01 77 00 – Project Closeout for additional warranty requirements.
B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Provide warranty against defects in material and workmanship
for period indicated. Complete forms in Owner's name and register with manufacturer.
1. Closers: Five years, minimum.
2. Exit Devices: Three years, minimum.
3. Locksets and Cylinders: Three years, minimum.
4. Other Hardware: Two years, minimum.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 71 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
A. Provide specified door hardware as required to make doors fully functional, compliant with
applicable codes, and secure to extent indicated.
B. Provide individual items of single type, of same model, and by same manufacturer.
C. Provide door hardware products that comply with the following requirements:
1. Applicable provisions of federal, state, and local codes.
2.2 HINGES
A. Hinges: Comply with BHMA A156.1, Grade 1.
1. Provide hinges on every swinging door.
2. Provide following quantity of butt hinges for each door:
2.3 MORTISE LOCKS
A. Mortise Locks: Comply with BHMA A156.13, Grade 1, Security, 1000 Series.
1. Latchbolt Throw: 3/4 inch (19 mm), minimum.
2. Deadbolt Throw: 1 inch (25.4 mm), minimum.
3. Backset: 2-3/4 inch (70 mm) unless otherwise indicated.
4. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike for each latchset or lockset with
strike box and curved lip extending to protect frame in compliance with indicated
requirements.
a. Finish: To match lock or latch.
2.4 CLOSERS
A. Manufacturers; Surface Mounted:
1. LCN, an Allegion brand: www.allegion.com/us/#sle.
B. Closers: Comply with BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.
1. Type: Surface mounted to door.
2. Provide door closer on each exterior door.
2.5 ASTRAGALS
A. Astragals: Comply with BHMA A156.22.
1. Type: Split, two parts, and with sealing gasket.
2. Material: Aluminum, with neoprene weatherstripping.
3. Provide non-corroding fasteners at exterior locations.
2.6 THRESHOLDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Pemko; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.
B. Thresholds: Comply with BHMA A156.21.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 71 00 - 3
1. Provide threshold at each exterior door, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Type: Flat surface.
3. Material: Aluminum.
4. Threshold Surface: Fluted horizontal grooves across full width.
5. Field cut threshold to profile of frame and width of door sill for tight fit.
6. Provide non-corroding fasteners at exterior locations.
2.7 WEATHERSTRIPPING AND GASKETING
A. Manufacturers:
1. Pemko; an Assa Abloy Group company: www.assaabloydss.com/#sle.
B. Weatherstripping and Gasketing: Comply with BHMA A156.22.
1. Head and Jamb Type: Adjustable.
2. Door Sweep Type: Encased in retainer.
3. Material: Aluminum, with brush weatherstripping.
2.8 FINISHES
A. Finishes: Provide door hardware of same finish, unless otherwise indicated.
1. Primary Finish: 626; satin chromium plated over nickel, with brass or bronze base
material (former US equivalent US26D); BHMA A156.18.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive this work; labeled, fire-rated doors and
frames are properly installed, and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable codes.
B. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer.
C. Do not install surface mounted items until application of finishes to substrate are fully
completed.
D. Set exterior door thresholds with full-width bead of elastomeric sealant at each point of
contact with floor providing a continuous weather seal; anchor thresholds with stainless steel
countersunk screws.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DOOR HARDWARE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 08 71 00 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

DIVISION 09
FINISHES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 1
SECTION 09 90 00
PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 WORK INCLUDED

A. This section covers surface preparation, furnishing, and application of protective
coatings, complete.

B. It is the intent of this specification that all new or existing exposed metal surfaces, shall
be coated with a protective coating, unless specifically excluded.

C. Shop or existing surface preparation methods, cleanliness, and existing paint, rust, and
mill scale removal is not known nor documented. Contractor shall be solely responsible
for determining work effort, abrasive blast requirements, and any other factors that
may affect work productivity as required to provide the specified surface preparation
cleanliness; regardless of prior system preparation or coating application.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as
if called for by all.

B. It is the CONTRACTOR’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing
any of CONTRACTOR’s Work.

C. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of
Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or
otherwise diminish the duty of the CONTRACTOR to see that the completed Work
complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
1. Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures.
2. Section 09 90 10 – Pipeline Coating and Lining

1.03 GENERAL:

A. See section GENERAL CONDITIONS, which contain information and requirements that
apply to the work specified and are mandatory for this project.

1.04 ABBREVIATIONS

ANSI American National Standards Institute
AWWA American Water Works Association
MDFT Minimum Dry Film Thickness
MDFTPC Minimum Dry Film Thickness Per Coat
mil Thousandths of an Inch
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Act
PSDS Paint System Data Sheet

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 2
SFPG Square Feet Per Gallon
SFPGPC Square Feet Per Gallon Per Coat
SP Surface Preparation
SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council

1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. This specification recognizes AWWA, NACE, and SSPC standards as minimum industry
standards and they are referenced for purpose of conformance, except where modified
in this section. The requirements of this specification section have been written to a
higher design standard with the intent of achieving a long-term coating performance of
100 years.

NACE SP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on
Conductive Substrates.
NACE RP-0274 High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to
Installation.
SSPC-SP-1 Solvent Cleaning Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-5 White metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-6 Commercial Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-10 Near White Metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal
SSPC-SP-13 Surface Preparation of Concrete

1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor submittals shall be made in accordance with this Section of these
Specifications and 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.

B. Shop Drawings: Catalog cuts and other information for all products proposed. Provide
copy of approved coating system submittals to the coating applicator.

C. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish the following:
1. Applicator's Experience with list of references substantiating compliance.
2. Coating manufacturer's certification stating the individual coating applicators have
met the qualification certification requirements as specified this section.
3. Coating manufacturer shall provide a copy of the manufacturer’s coating
application quality assurance manual.
4. If the manufacturer of field-applied coating differs from that of the shop applied
primer, provide written confirmation from both manufacturers’ that the two
coating materials are compatible.

D. Product Data: Furnish the following Data Sheets:
1. For each paint system used herein, furnish a Paint System Data Sheet (PSDS),
Technical Data Sheets, and paint colors available (where applicable) for each
product used in the paint system, except for products applied by equipment
manufacturers. A sample PSDS form is appended at the end of this section.
2. The required information shall be submitted on a system-by-system basis.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 3
3. The Contractor shall also provide copies of the paint system submittals to the
coating applicator.
4. Indiscriminate submittal of manufacturer's literature only is not acceptable.

E. Where ANSI/NSF Standard 60 and 61 approvals is required, submit ANSI/NSF
certification letter for each coating in the system indicating product application limits
on size of tank or piping, dry film thickness, number of coats, specific product tested,
colors certified, and approved additives.

F. Provide TCLP test data for lead and other regulated heavy metals in non-recyclable, slag
type abrasive blast media to be used on the project. Acceptable abrasive test data shall
indicate the abrasive manufacturer, location of manufacture, and media gradation and
type. Surface preparation will not be permitted to begin until acceptable test data has
been submitted.

1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Coating Applicator's Experience and Certification:
1. Coating Application Company and coating application supervisor (Certified
Applicator) shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience applying the specified
coating system.
2. Coating application personnel, whom have direct coating application
responsibility, shall have a minimum of 2 years practical experience in application
of the indicated coating system.
3. Coating applicator shall be certified by the coating manufacturer as an approved
applicator.

B. Continuity of Contractor: Contractor's site supervisor shall be coordinated with the
Engineer. Any replacement of the supervisor on site will require notification of
Engineer 72 hours in advance and will be subject to approval by the Owner.

C. Coating and/or lining manufacturer shall provide a technical representative to visit the
jobsite at intervals during surface preparation and painting as may be required for
product application quality assurance, and to determine compliance with
manufacturer's instructions and these Specifications, and as may be nece ssary to
resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with, the manufacturer's products
furnished under this Contract. Sale representatives are not acceptable as a technical
representative unless written authorization from the coating manufacture is provided
which states the sales representative has full authority to act on the behalf of the coating
manufacturer.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. The Contractor and coating manufacturer shall jointly and severally warrant to the
Owner and guarantee the work under this section against defective workmanship and
materials for a period of 2 year(s) commencing on the date of final acceptance of the
work.

1.09 ENGINEER OBSERVATIONS

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 4
A. The Contractor shall give the Owner Representative notice a minimum of 14 days prior
to start of work for scheduling shop or field observation.

B. Provide Owner Representative a minimum 3 days' notice for actual start of surface
preparation and coating application work.

C. Provisions shall be made to allow Owner’s representative full access to facilities and
appropriate documentation regarding coating application.

D. Observation by the Owner’s representative or the waiver of observation of any portion
of the work shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to
perform the work in accordance with these Specifications.

E. Materials shall be subject to testing for conformance with this specification as the
Owner’s representative may elect, prior to or during incorporation into the work.

F. Perform work in the presence of ENGINEER or Owner Representative, unless prior
approval to perform such work is granted. Approval to perform work is limited to the
current day unless specifically noted to extend beyond the completion of the workday.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Coatings and linings will be stored and handled per manufacturer’s written directions.

B. All metallic surfaces shall be prepared and coated in accordance with referenced
standards, written instructions of the coating or lining manufacturer, and these
specifications, whichever is more stringent, unless specified otherwise.

C. Coatings shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Product substitutions during the
project will not be permitted, without ENGINEER approval.

2.02 PAINT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivered paint to the project site in unopened containers that plainly show, at the time
of use, the designated name, date of manufacture, color, and name of manufacturer.

B. Stored paints in a suitable protected area that is heated or cooled as required to
maintain temperatures within the range recommended by the paint manufacturer.

C. Shipping:
1. Where shop finish coated or primed items are to be shipped to the jobsite, protect
coating from damage. Batten coated items to prevent abrasion.
2. Use nonmetallic or padded slings and straps in handling.
3. Items will be rejected for excessive damage.

2.03 PAINT AND COATINGS MANUFACTURERS

A. A manufacturer letter code as follows will be found following the generic descriptions
of materials outlined in the Specifications. Address is that of the general offices. Contact

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 5
these offices for information regarding the location of representative nearest the project
site.

B. MANUFACTURER CODE A - COATINGS MANUFACTURERS (Able to supply most heavy-
duty industrial coatings and architectural paints):

1. Carboline Coatings Company, St. Louis, MO.
2. ICI Devoe Coatings Company, Louisville, KY.
3. International Coatings,
4. Pittsburgh Paints (PPG), Pittsburgh, PA.
5. Sherwin Williams, Cleveland, OH
6. Tnemec Coatings, Kansas City, MO

2.04 PAINT MATERIALS

A. Products shall meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of
volatile organic compounds. Specific information may be secured through the local
office of the Air Pollution Control Officer.

B. Materials Including Primer and Finish Coats: Produced by same paint manufacturer.

C. Thinners, Cleaners, Driers, and Other Additives: As recommended by paint
manufacturer of the coating system. Where coatings are required to meet ANSI/NSF
Standard 60 and 61, addition of thinners, driers, and other paint additives not approved
under the ANSI/NSF certification letter will not be permitted without written approval
from the Engineer.

D. Paint products are listed according to their approximate order of appearance in the
paint systems. The letter designating the manufacturer code refers to Article PAINT
AND COATING MANUFACTURERS.

Products Description
Epoxy, NSF Amine or polyamine epoxy coating, two parts, suitable for
immersion service, 75% volume solids minimum, capable of 4
to 8 MDFT per coat, approved for potable water contact in
conformance to ANSI/NSF Standard 60 and 61, and suitable for
the application temperatures and conditions.
MANUFACTURER CODE: A
Epoxy Polyamine or polyamide epoxy, two parts, suitable for
immersion service, 75% volume solids minimum, capable of 4
to 8 MDFT per coat, and suitable for the application
temperatures and conditions. MANUFACTURER CODE: A
Polysiloxane Acrylic polysiloxane hybrid coating, single component, suitable
for shop or field application at 32 degrees F, minimum, recoat
window of not less than 12 months with preference for
products with unlimited overcoat capability, solids content of

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 6
85% minimum, high gloss, and tintable colors. Tinted colors
shall be capable of storage for 30 days or longer prior to
application. Coating shall be capable of spray, roller, or brush
application on all metal substrates and specified prime and
intermediate coats. MANUFACTURER CODE: A
Inorganic Zinc Primer Solvent or water based, 14 lbs. metallic zinc content per gallon
minimum; unlimited recoat window, conform to
manufacturer’s recommended top coats as specified herein.
MANUFACTURER CODE: A
Wash Primer Vinyl butyral acid or equivalent coating for enhancing finish
coat adhesion to galvanized steel surfaces. MANUFACTURER
CODE: A
Polyurethane Enamel Two-component, aliphatic or acrylic based polyurethane; high
gloss finish, suitable for continuous dry service at 200 degrees
F without discoloration or peeling. MANUFACTURER CODE: A

2.05 COLORS

A. Provide as selected by the Owner.

B. Formulated with colorants free of lead, lead compounds, or other materials which might
be affected by the presence of hydrogen sulfide or other gas likely to be present at the
project.

C. Proprietary identification of colors is for identification only. Any authorized
manufacturer may supply matches.

D. Equipment Colors:
1. Equipment shall be meant to include the machinery or vessel itself plus the
structural supports and fasteners and attached electrical conduits.
2. Paint non-submerged portions of equipment in the same color as the process
piping it serves, except as itemized below:
a. Dangerous parts of equipment and machinery: OSHA Orange
b. Fire protection equipment and Apparatus: OSHA Red
c. Radiation hazards: OSHA Purple
d. Physical hazards in normal operating area: OSHA Yellow
3. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) equipment with an integral colored gel coat
does not require painting, provided the color is as specified.

E. Pipe Identification Painting:
1. Color code non-submerged metal piping except electrical conduit. Paint fittings
and valves the same color as the pipe.
2. Piping color coding: In accordance with the Piping Schedule as shown.
a. Pipe System and Color:
(1) Compressed Air Federal Safety Purple
(2) Drains Black
(3) Fluoride
(4) Natural Gas Federal Safety yellow
(5) Potable Water Light Blue/Safety Blue
(6) Sample Medium Green

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 7
3. On exposed stainless steel piping, apply color 24 inches in length along pipe axis at
all connections to equipment, valves, or branch fittings, at wall boundaries, and at
intervals along the piping not greater than 9 feet on center, with identification
labels applied to each exposed run of pipe as specified herein.
4. Pipe supports: Mild steel, painted No. 70 light gray as specified in ANSI Z35.1.
5. Fiberglass reinforced plastic (FRP) pipe and polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pipe located
outside of buildings and enclosed structures will not require painting, except as
noted.

F. Labels for Piping:
1. Identification labels shall bear the full piping system name as specified in the Piping
Schedule shown.
2. Install separate flow directional arrows with each label.
3. Include black lettering on OSHA safety yellow self-adhesive vinyl or vinyl cloth.
4. Lettering height: Meet ANSI A13.1.
5. Label and Adhesive: Long lasting, resistant to moisture, oils, solvents, and
weathering, meeting OSHA requirements.
6. Locate labels at all connections to equipment, valves, or branch fittings, at wall
boundaries, and at intervals along the piping not greater than 18 feet on center,
with at least one label applied to each exposed run of pipe.
7. Manufacturers:
a. W. H. Brady Co., Milwaukee, WI
b. Seton Nameplate Corp., New Haven, CT
c. or Equal.

2.06 QA/QC TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. General
1. Applicator shall inspect and test the coating system in accordance with referenced
standards and these specifications, whichever is more stringent.
2. Quality control testing as specified in AWWA standards are minimum industry
standards and it is the intent of this specification to provide a higher level of quality
control for the objective of achieving maximum coating performance.
3. If any conflict between this specification and referenced standards occurs, the more
stringent requirement shall apply and any interpretation of this requirement or
results shall be with the objective of achieving maximum coating performance.
4. The frequency of the testing shall be determined by the applicator but shall not be
less than the requirements of this specification.

B. Surface Profile Testing
1. Surface profile of abrasive blasted surfaces to be tested with “Press-O-Film” tester
tape or equivalent in accordance with NACE RP287.
2. Tester tape shall be suitable for the intended profile height.
3. Profile shall be measured to a minimum tolerance of 0.1 mils, maximum.
4. Electronic surface profilometer shall be used, where deemed necessary, to verify
tester tape measurements.

C. Adhesion testing: As specified in Section 09 90 10, where directed by the Engineer for
assessing coating application problems.

D. Holiday Testing

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 8
1. Holiday tests on polyurethane coatings or linings will be conducted on the
completed coating or lining after cure or 24-hours, whichever is less, using a high
voltage spark test in accordance with NACE SP-0188 and these specifications.
2. Coating thickness used for high voltage holiday testing setting shall be the average
dry coating thickness.

E. Dry Film Thickness Testing
1. Coatings shall be tested for dry film thickness using a properly calibrated magnetic
pull off, eddy current, or ultrasonic equipment.
2. Coating thickness measurements shall be conducted as necessary and without
limitation. Testing conformance to the requirements of SSPC PA-2 is specifically
excluded from this specification.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 GENERAL

A. The intention of this specification is for all existing and new, interior and exterior
surfaces are painted, whether specifically mentioned or not, except as modified herein.
Concealed structural steel surfaces shall receive prime coat only unless modified herein.
Exterior concrete surfaces will not be painted unless specifically indicated hereinafter.

B. Surface preparation and coating application shall be in conformance with these
specifications and the coating manufacturer’s written product data sheets and written
recommendations of the manufacturer’s technical representative. Where conflicts
occur between the manufacturer’s recommendations and these specifications, the more
stringent of the two shall apply unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.

C. For coatings subject to immersion, obtain full cure for completed system. Consult
coatings manufacturer's written instructions for these requirements. Do not immerse
coating for any purpose until completion of curing cycle.

3.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Meet federal, state, and local requirements limiting the emission of volatile organic
compounds and worker exposures.

B. Protect workers and comply with applicable federal, state, and local air pollution and
environmental regulations for surface preparation, blast cleaning, disposition of spent
aggregate and debris, coating application and dust prevention including, but not limited
to the following Acts, Regulations, Standards, and Guidelines:
1. Clean Air Act
2. National Ambient Air Quality Standard
3. Resource Conservation and Recovery Act (RCRA)

C. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local regulations for confined space entry.

D. Provide and operate equipment that meets explosion proof requirements.

3.03 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 9
A. Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever the relative humidity exceeds
85 percent, whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees F above the dew point
of the ambient air.

B. Surface preparation power tools and blast equipment shall contain dust collection
equipment that will prevent discharge of dust particles into the atmosphere.

C. Do not apply paint when:
1. Surface temperatures exceeds the maximum or minimum temperature
recommended by the paint manufacturer,
2. In dust, smoke-laden atmosphere, damp or humid weather, or under conditions
which could cause icing on the metal surface.
3. When it is expected that surface temperatures will drop below 5 degrees above
dew point within 8 hours after application of coating.

3.04 DEHUMIDIFICATION

A. Where environmental conditions cannot be met or controlled, Contractor shall provide
and operate desiccant dehumidification equipment to maintain environmental
conditions for 24 hours a day during abrasive blasting and coating application and cure.
Liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying systems will not be acceptable.

B. Contractor shall provide dehumidification equipment sized to maintain dew point
temperature 17 degrees or more below surface temperature of metal surfaces to be
cleaned and coated. System shall provide ventilation within the environmentally
controlled areas as required for the following requirements:
1. One air exchange per hour, minimum,
2. Maintenance of personnel exposures limits (PEL) at 50 percent of OSHA PEL limits
for all chemicals used in the performance of the work, and
3. Maintenance of lower explosive limits (LEL) to less than 50 percent of the most
volatile solvent used in the performance of the work.

C. Dehumidification equipment type, size, air flow, and power requirements shall be
designed by a qualified company knowledgeable in dehumidification equipment, and its
operation based on project requirements and anticipated seasonal weather conditions
for the project schedule. Design to include evaluation of existing conditions, humidity,
and temperature, proper air exchange requirements, ventilation requirements, ducting
requirements for adequate air flow, and any other issues necessary to achieve the
specified performance and environmental conditions throughout the duration of the
project.

D. Contractor to submit written recommendations from dehumidification subcontractor
for bulkhead locations, bulkhead venting, duct work for each bulkhead section, any
secondary ventilation requirements for coating cure, dust collection equipment CFM
requirements, and drying requirements for blast hose compressed air necessary to
maintain environmental control as specified herein.

E. Dehumidification subcontractor shall either operate the equipment or provide training
to Contractor on the proper operation and setup of dehumidification equipment.
Dehumidification subcontractor shall provide a technical representative on site for a
minimum of two 8-hour days to ensure proper operation of the equipment, achievement

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 10
of desired environmental control, and to insure Contractor can properly setup, operate,
monitor, and maintain the equipment.

F. Dehumidification shall be operated in a manner that prevents all condensation or icing
throughout surface preparation and coating application and cure.

G. Reblasting of flash rusted metal surfaces or removal of damaged coatings, as a result of
equipment malfunction, shutdown, or other events that result in the loss of
environmental control, will be at the sole expense of the Contractor. Cleaned metal
surfaces subject to flash rusting shall be cleaned to the same cleanliness as prior to the
flash rust formation and shall be approved by the Engineer.

H. Contractor shall monitor ambient temperature, humidity, dew point temperature, and
pipe surface temperature both outdoors and within the work area at the start, midpoint,
and end of each work shift, minimum, but not greater than 5 hours between
measurements.

I. Daily environmental condition monitoring and maintenance of the equipment shall be
documented in writing and posted near the equipment for review by the Engineer.

3.05 VENTILATION AND ILLUMINATION

A. Adequate illumination shall be provided while work is in progress. Whenever required
by the inspector, the Contractor shall provide additional illumination and necessary
supports to cover all areas to be inspected. The level of illumination for inspection
purposes shall be determined by the inspector.

B. Ventilation shall be used to control potential dust and hazardous conditions within the
tank. Ventilation flow rates shall be in accordance with OSHA regulations and as
required to reduce air contamination to nonhazardous conditions.

3.06 SURFACES NOT REQUIRING PAINTING

A. Unless otherwise stated herein or shown, the following areas or items will not require
painting:
1. Concrete and masonry surfaces
2. Nonferrous and corrosion-resistant ferrous alloys such as copper, bronze, monel,
aluminum, chromium plate, atmospherically exposed weathering steel, and
stainless steel, except where:
a. Required for electrical insulation between dissimilar metals.
b. Aluminum and stainless steel are embedded in concrete or masonry, or
aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry.
c. Color coding of equipment and piping is required.
3. Nonmetallic materials such as glass, PVC, wood, porcelain, and plastic (FRP) except
as required for architectural painting or color coding.
4. Prefinished electrical and architectural items such as motor control centers,
switchboards, switchgear, panel boards, transformers, disconnect switches,
acoustical tile, cabinets, elevators, building louvers, wall panels, etc.; color coding
of equipment is required.
5. Non-submerged electrical conduits attached to unpainted concrete surfaces.
6. Cathodic protection anodes.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 11
7. Items specified to be galvanized after fabrication unless specifically required
elsewhere or subject to immersion.
8. Insulated piping and/or insulated piping with jacket will not require exterior
coating, except as required for architectural painting or color coding.

3.07 PREPARATION OF SURFACES

A. Surface Preparation Inspection:
1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these
Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of paint
manufacturer whose product is to be applied.
2. Provide Engineer minimum 3 days' notice prior to start of surface preparation
work or coating application work.
3. Perform such work only in the presence of Engineer, unless Engineer grants prior
approval to perform such work in Engineer's absence.

B. Metal Surface Preparation:
1. General:
a. Do not perform a surface preparation blast prior to submission of samples.
Workmanship for metal surface preparation as specified shall meet current
Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Specifications as follows:
(1) Solvent Cleaning: SP 1
(2) Hand Tool Cleaning: SP 2
(3) Power Tool Cleaning: SP 3
(4) White Metal Blast Cleaning: SP 5
(5) Commercial Blast Cleaning: SP 6
(6) Brush-Off Blast Cleaning: SP 7
(7) Pickling: SP 8
(8) Near-White Blast Cleaning: SP 10
(9) Bare Metal Power Tool Cleaning: SP 11
b. All surface preparation shall be assumed to be on a SSPC Grade A steel surface
condition, unless specifically noted otherwise.
c. Wherever the words "solvent cleaning", "hand tool cleaning", "wire brushing",
or "blast cleaning", or similar words of equal intent are used in these
Specifications or in paint manufacturer's specifications, they shall be
understood to refer to the applicable SSPC Specifications listed above.
d. Where OSHA or EPA regulations preclude standard abrasive blast cleaning,
wet or vacu-blast methods may be required. Coating manufacturers'
recommendations for wet blast additives and first coat application shall apply.
Wet blasting methods shall be approved by the Engineer.
e. Hand tool clean areas that cannot be cleaned by power tool cleaning.
2. Welds and adjacent areas:
a. Prepared such that there is:
(1) No undercutting or reverse ridges on the weld bead.
(2) No weld spatter on or adjacent to the weld or any other area to be painted.
(3) No sharp peaks or ridges along the weld bead.
b. Grind embedded pieces of electrode or wire flush with the adjacent surface of
the weld bead.
3. Preblast Cleaning Requirements:
a. Remove oil, grease, welding fluxes, and other surface contaminants prior to
blast cleaning.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 12
b. Cleaning methods: Steam, open flame, hot water, or cold water with
appropriate detergent additives followed with clean water rinsing.
c. Clean small isolated areas as above or solvent cleaned with suitable solvents
and clean cloths.
d. Round or chamfered all sharp edges and grind smooth burrs, jagged edges, and
surface defects.
4. Blast Cleaning Requirements:
a. General:
(1) Type of Equipment and Speed of Travel: Designed to obtain specified
degree of cleanliness.
(2) Select type and size of abrasive to produce a surface profile that meets the
coating manufacturer's recommendations for the particular coating to be
applied or not less than 20 percent of the specified coating thickness,
whichever is more stringent.
(3) Meet applicable federal, state, and local air pollution control regulations
for blast cleaning and disposition of spent aggregate and debris.
(4) Do not reuse abrasive, unless abrasive is recyclable steel grit or shot
abrasive.
b. Shop Blasting
(1) Notify Engineer at least 7 days prior to start of shop blast cleaning to allow
for inspection of the work during surface preparation and shop
application of paints. Work shall be subject to the Engineer's approval
before shipment to the jobsite.
(2) Items such as structural steel, metal doors and frames, metal louvers, and
similar items as reviewed by the Engineer may be shop prepared and
primed. Centrifugal wheel blast cleaning is an acceptable alternate to
shop blast cleaning. Blast clean and prime in accordance with these
Specifications.
c. Field Blasting
(1) Perform sandblasting for items and equipment where specified and as
required to restore damaged surfaces previously shop or field blasted and
primed. Materials, equipment, procedures, shall meet requirements of
Steel Structures Painting Council.
(2) Field blasting in areas with electrical or mechanical equipment, within
buildings, or on coated surfaces with lead paint greater than 2,000 mg/L
total lead shall be performed with dustless abrasive systems such as
“Sponge-Jet”, dry ice abrasive blasting.
5. Post-Blast Cleaning and Other Cleaning Requirements:
a. Clean surfaces of dust and residual particles from cleaning operations by dry
(no oil or water vapor) air blast cleaning or other method prior to painting.
Vacuum clean enclosed areas and other areas where dust settling is a problem
and wiped with a tack cloth.
b. Paint surfaces the same day they are sandblasted. Reblast surfaces that have
started to rust before they are painted.

C. Concrete Surface Preparation:
1. Do not begin until 30 days after the concrete has been placed.
2. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials or other foreign
matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 13
3. Clean concrete using mechanical or chemical methods for the degree of cleaning
specified for the coating system in accordance with SSPC SP-13, Surface
preparation of Concrete.
4. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior to
coating.
5. Bug holes, air pockets, and other voids in the concrete will be filled or patched in
chemical exposure areas, secondary containment, and where specifically required.
6. Concrete Surface Preparation Inspection:
a. Adhesion Testing:
(1) Tensile testing of the surface preparation shall be performed by the
Engineer as necessary using Type 4 or Type 5 pneumatic adhesion testing
equipment in accordance with ASTM D4541 using 2-inch diameter dollies
for concrete surface adhesion testing.
(2) Applied coating greater than 20 mils in thickness or with a tensile
strength greater than 2,500 psi shall be scored for concrete adhesion
testing.
(3) Adhesive failure greater than 50 percent of the dolly surface area shall
indicate inadequate surface preparation.
(4) Cohesive failures which results in loss of sound concrete will be
acceptable provided the loss is greater than 50 percent of the dolly surface
area.
(5) Low adhesion cohesive failures with a thin layer of concrete due to weak
concrete or laitance over 50 percent of the dolly surface will be rejected.
b. Concrete Soundness:
(1) Concrete soundness shall be determined using the scratching or hammer
impact methods as defined in SSPC SP-13.
c. Moisture Content:
(1) Moisture shall be tested as Specified in SSPC SP-13 and shall not exceed
the moisture content recommended by the coating manufacturer.

D. Brush-off Blast Cleaning:
1. Equipment, procedure, and degree of cleaning shall meet SSPC-SP 7, Brush-off Blast
Cleaning and shall achieve a profile on the coating equivalent to 80 grit sandpaper
with no exposed metal. Profile shall be uniform over the surface with no glossy
areas visible.
2. Where metal substrate is exposed, Contractor shall apply full coating system as
specified for new metal surfaces.
3. Repair or replace surfaces damaged by blast cleaning, where damage is defined as
visible metal substrate. If less than 5 percent of prepared surface has the metal
substrate visible, the coating shall be repaired by application of a brush applied
intermediate coat. If greater than 5 percent the coating shall be fully removed to
meet the specified surface cleanliness and recoated with the specified coating
system.
4. Abrasive: Either conventional abrasive blasting with sand, grit, or nut shells or
specialized abrasive blasting. Abrasives shall be 60 mesh grit, maximum.
5. Select various surface preparation parameters such as size and hardness of the
abrasive, nozzle size, air pressure, and nozzle distance from the surface such that
the surface is cleaned without pitting, chipping, or other damage.
6. Verify parameter selection by blast cleaning a trial area that will not be exposed to
view.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 14
7. The Engineer shall approve trial blast cleaned area and shall use area as a
representative sample of surface preparation.

E. Solvent Cleaning:
1. Consists of removal of foreign matter such as oil, grease, soil, drawing and cutting
compounds, and any other surface contaminants using solvents, emulsions,
cleaning compounds, steam cleaning, or similar materials and methods which
involve a solvent or cleaning action.
2. Method meets SSPC-SP 1.

3.08 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS NOT TO BE PAINTED

A. Remove, mask, or otherwise protect hardware, lighting fixtures, switch plates,
aluminum surfaces, machined surfaces, couplings, shafts, bearings, nameplates on
machinery, and other surfaces not intended to be painted.

B. Provide drop cloths to prevent paint materials from falling on or marring adjacent
surfaces.

C. Protect working parts of mechanical and electrical equipment from damage during
surface preparation and painting process.

D. Mask openings in motors to prevent paint and other materials from entering the motors.

3.09 PAINT MIXING

A. Multiple-component coatings:
1. Prepare using all the contents of the container for each component as packaged by
the paint manufacturer.
2. No partial batches will be permitted.
3. Do not use multiple-component coatings that have been mixed shall not be used
beyond their pot life.
4. Provide small quantity kits for touchup painting and for painting other small areas.
5. Mix only components specified and furnished by the paint manufacturer.
6. Do not intermix additional components for reasons of color or otherwise, even
within the same generic type of coating.
7. Fast set or plural component products shall be applied using an appropriate
multipart pump that properly mixes both components at the recommended ratio
using equipment recommended by the coating manufacturer. Hot mixing of fast set
or plural component products will not be permitted.

B. Keep paint materials sealed when not in use and provide nitrogen blanket on fast set,
plural, or moisture cured coatings on opened product containers when stored or not in
use more than 8 hours.

C. Where more than one coat of a material is applied within a given system, alternate color
to provide a visual reference that the required number of coats have been applied.

3.10 APPLICATION OF PAINT

A. General:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 15
1. Inspection: Schedule with Engineer in advance for cleaned surfaces and all coats
prior to the succeeding coat.
2. Apply coatings in accordance with the paint manufacturer's recommendations.
Allow sufficient time between coats to assure thorough drying of previously
applied paint.
3. Fusion Bonded Coatings Method Application: Electrostatic, fluidized bed, or
flocking.
4. Paint units to be bolted together and to structures prior to assembly or installation.
5. Shop Primed or Factory Finished Surfaces:
a. Inspection: Schedule with Engineer in advance for shop primed or factory-
finished items delivered to jobsite for compliance with these Specifications.
b. Hand or power sand areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded coating, feathering
the edges. Follow with a spot primer using specified primer.
c. For two-package or converted coatings, consult the coatings manufacturer for
specific procedures as relates to top coating of these products.
d. Prior to application of finish coats, clean shop primed surfaces of dirt, oil, and
grease, and apply a mist coat of specified primer, 1.0 mil dry film thickness.
e. After welding, prepare and prime holdback areas as required for the specified
paint system. Apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
6. Manufacturer Applied Paint Systems:
a. Repair abraded areas on factory-finished items in accordance with the
equipment manufacturer's directions.
b. Carefully blend repaired areas into the original finish.

B. Application Safety
1. Performed painting in accordance with recommendations of the following:
a. Paint manufacturer's instructions.
b. NACE contained in the publication, Manual for Painter Safety.
c. Federal, state, and local agencies having jurisdiction.
2. Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for condition of the project
site, including safety of all persons (including employees) and property during
performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be
limited to normal working hours. Safety provisions will conform to U.S.
Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Act, any equivalent state law,
and all other applicable federal, state, county, and local laws, ordinances, and codes.
3. Contractor will comply with all safety-training requirements promulgated or
required for this project.

C. Film Thickness:
1. Coverage is listed as either total minimum dry film thickness in mils (MDFT) or the
spreading rate in square feet per gallon (SFPG). Per coat determinations are listed
as MDFTPC or SFPGPC.
2. Applied coating system film thickness per coat shall be applied at the specified
coating thickness or the manufacturer’s recommended minimum thickness,
whichever is greater. Where the manufacturer has not specified a minimum
coating thickness on the product data sheets, the minimum recommended coating
application thickness shall apply.
3. Maximum film build per coat shall not exceed the coating manufacturer's
recommendations.

D. Stripe Coats:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 16
1. Surfaces that are subject to immersion, condensing environments, or where
specifically specified shall be stripe coated on all angles, edges, corners, threads,
welds, and similar type surfaces.
2. Stripe coat shall be an extra coat of the intermediate coating material and shall be
applied between the prime and intermediate coats.
3. The stripe coat shall be a separate coat from coats specified under the coating
system.
4. Stripe coats shall be alternated in color like a full coat.

E. Number of coats:
1. Apply specified number of coats, minimum, irrespective of the coating thickness.
2. Additional coats may be required to obtain the minimum required paint thickness,
depending on method of application, differences in manufacturers' products, and
atmospheric conditions.

F. Porous Surfaces, Such as Concrete, Masonry:
1. Prime Coat:
a. May be thinned to provide maximum penetration and adhesion.
b. Type and Amount of Thinning: Determined by the paint manufacturer and is
dependent on surface density and type of coating.
c. Surfaces Specified to Receive Water Base Coating: Damp, but free of running
water, just prior to application of the coating.

G. Existing Coated Surfaces:
1. General:
a. Equipment or components with shop primer or shop finish coated surfaces
shall be reviewed with the Engineer to determine coating damage, repair
methods, surface preparation requirements, and conformance with color
uniformity, where required.
b. All shop primed or finished coated surfaces shall be verified to be chemically
compatible with field applied finish coats.
c. If a cured epoxy, polyurethane, or plural-component material is to be top
coated, contact the coating manufacturer for additional surface preparation
requirements. Existing coated surfaces shall be prepared as follows:
(1) Existing coated surfaces shall be brush-off blasted as specified herein to
remove all gloss and provide a uniform profile on existing coating for
adhesion of subsequent coats.
(2) Power or hand sanding will not be allowed as a surface preparation
procedure for existing coatings, unless reviewed and approved by the
Engineer.
(3) Where coating manufacturer surface preparation recommendations
conflict with this section, the more stringent requirements shall apply.
(4) Profile shall be as specified for by the manufacturer or equivalent of 80
grit sandpaper; whichever is more stringent. Profile shall be visible and
uniform over existing coated surfaces.
d. All existing coated surfaces, where demolition of equipment was specified or
required, shall be surface prepared, touch-up coating repairs completed, and
a cosmetic overcoat applied using the specified coating system on all existing
coated surfaces associated with the demolition work, unless otherwise
specified.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 17
e. Existing coatings on immersed equipment shall be removed to bare metal and
recoated with the specified coating system where demolition work was
specified.
f. Apply sealer/primer where recommended by coating manufacturer for
coating compatibility.
2. To be Recoated or Final Coated:
a. Detergent wash and freshwater rinse.
b. Perform touch-up repairs of existing coating.
c. Asphaltic varnish coated ductile iron pipe will require an application of a seal
coat prior to the application of a cosmetic finish coat.
3. Touch-up Repairs:
a. Clean loose, abraded, or damaged coatings to substrate by Power Tool (SP 3).
b. Feather surrounding intact coating.
c. Apply one spot coat of the specified primer to bare areas overlapping the
prepared existing coating.
d. Apply one full finish coat of the specified primer or finish coat(s) overall.
4. Application of a Cosmetic Coat:
a. The exact nature of shop-applied coatings is not known in all cases.
b. Check compatibility by application to a small area prior to starting the coating.
c. If lifting or other problems occur, request disposition from the Engineer.
d. Cured epoxy, polyurethane, plural component materials or any other coating
system that has exceeded its maximum recoat window shall be prepared as
specified this section.

H. Damaged Coatings, Pinholes, and Holidays:
1. Feather edges and repaired in accordance with the recommendations of the paint
manufacturer.
2. Repair fusion bonded coatings to be as recommended by the original applicator.
Applicator shall provide liquid repair kits for this purpose as recommended by the
coating manufacturer.
3. Apply finish coats, including touchup and damage-repair coats in a manner that will
present a uniform texture and color-matched appearance.

I. Unsatisfactory Application:
1. If the item has an improper finish color, or insufficient film thickness, clean and
topcoat surface with specified paint material to obtain the specified color and
coverage. Obtain specific surface preparation information from the coating
manufacturer.
2. Hand or power sand visible areas of chipped, peeled, or abraded paint and feather
the edges. Follow with primer and finish coat in accordance with the Specifications.
Depending on the extent of repair and its appearance, a finish sanding and topcoat
may be required.
3. Evidence of runs, bridges, shiners, laps, or other imperfections shall be cause for
rejection.
4. Repair defects in coating system per written recommendations of coating
manufacturer.
5. Leave all staging up until the Engineer has inspected the surface or coating. Replace
staging removed prior to approval by Engineer.

3.11 COATING INSPECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 18
A. General
1. Film thickness measurements and electrical inspection of the coated surfaces:
2. Perform with properly calibrated instruments.
3. Recoat and repair as necessary for compliance with the Specifications.
4. All coats will be subject to inspection by the Engineer and the coating
manufacturer's representative.
5. Visually inspect concrete, nonferrous metal, plastic, and wood surfaces to ensure
proper and complete coverage has been attained.
6. Give particular attention to edges, angles, flanges, and other areas where
insufficient film thicknesses are likely to be present and ensure proper milage in
these areas.

B. Coating Thickness Testing:
1. Engineer shall conduct coating thickness testing as necessary and without
limitation. Testing conformance to the requirements of SSPC PA-2 is specifically
excluded from this specification.
2. Measure coating thickness specified in mils with a magnetic type dry film thickness
gauge as specified.
3. Check each coat for the correct milage. Do not make measurement before a
minimum of 8 hours after application of the coating.
4. Tests for concrete coating thickness shall be with a Tooke Gauge, a destructive test.
Contractor shall repair coating after thickness testing.

C. Coating Continuity Testing
1. Holiday detect coatings with high voltage units in accordance with NACE SP-0188.
High voltage detector shall have adjustable voltages in 100 volt increments and
shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and the
specified standard.
2. Use of an electrical holiday detector, low voltage, wet sponge type holiday detector
will be permitted for coating systems less than 20 mils total dry film thickness and
are not for immersion or condensing environments.
3. Holiday detect coatings on pipe for buried application with high voltage spark
tester in accordance with NACE RP0274.

3.12 CLEANUP

A. Place cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard in closed metal containers or
destroyed at the end of each day.

B. Upon completion of the work, remove staging, scaffolding, and containers from the site
or destroyed in a legal manner.

C. Completely remove paint spots, oil, or stains upon adjacent surfaces and floors and
leave entire job clean.

D. Damages due to over spray on buildings, vehicles, trees, or other surfaces not specified
to be painted would be the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.13 MANUFACTURER' SERVICES

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 19
A. Furnish paint manufacturer's representative to visit jobsite at intervals during surface
preparation and painting as may be required for product application quality assurance,
and to determine compliance with manufacturer's instructions and these specifications,
and as may be necessary to resolve field problems attributable to, or associated with,
manufacturer's products furnished under this Contract.

3.14 PROTECTIVE COATING SYSTEMS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE:

A. Unless otherwise shown or specified in these Specifications painted or coated the work
in accordance with the following application schedule.

B. In the event of discrepancies or omissions in the following, request clarification from
the Engineer before starting the work in question.

System No. Title
1 SUBMERGED METAL - IMMERSION
4 EXPOSED METAL – HIGHLY CORROSIVE
5 EXPOSED METAL – ATMOSPHERIC
8 BURIED METAL - MISCELLANEOUS
10 GALVANIZED METAL
21 EPOXY FLOOR, CONCRETE
27 ALUMINUM AND DISSIMILAR METAL INSULATION
29 FUSION BONDED COATING

C. System No. 1 - Submerge Metal, Immersion

1. Surface Preparation and Coating System

Surface Prep. Coating Material Min. Coats, Cover
Abrasive Blast, or
Centrifugal Wheel
Blast (SP 5)
Cement Mortar Prep: see
Interior Linings, this
section
Epoxy, NSF 3 coats, 16 MDFT

2. Application:
a. All metal surfaces subject to immersion or contact with potable water.
b. Use on the following areas:
(1) Lining of Pipe within wellhouse structure
(2) Lining of well column extension, interior of well seal plate
(3) All steel pipe without a cement mortar lining.
3. Material Requirements:
a. Polyamide Epoxy: Amine or polyamine epoxy coating, two parts, suitable for
immersion, application temperatures, and environmental exposures and
conditions, 75% volume solids minimum, capable of 4 to 8 MDFT per coat.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 20
b. Epoxy coating shall be NSF certified for potable water contact in
conformance to ANSI/NSF Standard 60 and 61.
4. Special Requirements:
a. Epoxy coating applied to immersed surfaces that contact potable water shall
be NSF certified for potable water contact.
b. NSF certified fusion bonded epoxy linings will be permitted as alterative lining
for small diameter pipes, valves, and couplings. FBE coating to be applied as
specified for FBE coatings this section and in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations.
c. All welds, angles, edges, and bolted connections shall be stripe coated as
specified this section.

D. System No. 4 - Exposed Metal, Highly Corrosive

1. Surface Preparation and Coating System

Surface Prep. Coating Material Min. Coats, Cover
Abrasive Blast, or
Centrifugal Wheel Blast
(SP 10)
Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer 1 coat, 3.0 to 4.0 DFT

Epoxy

1 coat, 4 MDFT

Polyurethane Enamel
Or
Polysiloxane

2 coats, 6 to 8 DFT

2 coats, 4 to 6 DFT

2. Application:
a. All exposed metal surfaces, new and existing, located inside of vaults or
structures.
b. Contractor choice of top coat material shall not be changed. Only one top
coat materials will be permitted on the project.
3. Special Requirements:
a. Surface preparation and primer shall be shop applied to all surfaces prior to
installation.
b. DFT thicknesses greater than manufacturer’s recommendations shall be
subject to rejection and removal.
c. Intermediate and top coats shall be field applied after installation.
d. All shop primed or finish coated surfaces shall be prepared as an existing
coated surface as specified herein and shall be top coated with intermediate
and/or finish coats as required to provide color uniformity throughout the
vault or structure.
e. Color uniformity requirements shall apply to all components installed within
the vault and visibly part of completed installation regardless of shop
applied coating system.

B. System No. 5 - Exposed Metal, Atmospheric:

1. Surface Preparation and Coating System

Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 21
Abrasive Blast, or Centrifugal
Wheel Blast (SP 10)
Inorganic Zinc Rich Primer 1 coat, 2.5 MDFT
Polysiloxane 2 coats, 6 MDFT

2. Application:
a. Exposed metal surfaces, new and existing, located outside of structures and
exposed to weather and the following specific surfaces unless otherwise
specified.
b. Use on the following items or surfaces:
(1) Exposed surfaces new pump-to-waste piping, unless hot dipped
galvanized.
(2) Exposed surfaces of roof-top piping, unless hot dipped galvanized.
(3) Hollow metal doors per architectural drawings.
3. Special Requirements:
a. All shop primed or finish coated surfaces shall be prepared as an existing
coated surface as specified herein and shall be top coated with intermediate
and/or finish coats as required to provide color uniformity.
b. Color uniformity requirements shall apply to all components visibly part of
the completed installation regardless of shop applied coating system.
c. Galvanized steel surfaces shall be coated per the coating manufacturer’s
requirements.
d. Polysiloxane coating to overlap buried pipe coating a minimum of 4 inches
below top of concrete.
e. Aliphatic polyurethane will not be allowed as a substitute for polysiloxane due
to restrictive overcoat requirements.
f. Dry film coating thickness of polysiloxane, including touch up repairs, shall not
exceed the manufacturer’s recommended maximum film thickness.

C. System No. 8 - Buried Metal, General:

1. Surface Preparation and Coating System

Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
Abrasive Blast or Centrifugal
Wheel Blast (SP 10)
Wax Tape Coating Wax tape as specified in
Section 09 90 10, Pipeline
Coating and Lining

2. Application:
a. All buried miscellaneous pipe, joints, fittings, and other pipe appurtenances
shall be coated as specified under Section 09 90 10, Pipeline Coatings and
Linings.
b. All buried, below grade portions of steel items, except buried stainless steel or
ductile iron, unless otherwise specified.

3. Special Requirements:
a. Metallic air vent pipe, buried, may be coated with System No. 1 at Contractor’s
option.

D. System No. 10 - Galvanized Metal Conditioning:

1. Surface Preparation and Coating System

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 22

Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
Solvent Clean (SP 1)
Followed by Hand Tool (SP
2) or Power Tool (SP 3)
Wash Primer 1 Coat, 0.4 MDFT
Finish Coats to Match
Existing Paint
As Required to Match
Surrounding Area

2. Application:
a. All galvanized surfaces requiring painting and the following specific surfaces
unless otherwise specified.
3. Special Requirements:
a. Sweep blast as specified this section, may be used in lieu of hand or power tool
cleaning of galvanized surfaces provided Contractor can demonstrate that
damage to the zinc coating will not result. Engineer approval of sweep blasting
locations, methods, and surface cleanliness and profile results is required.
b. See applicable coating systems for finish coating system and coating
requirements based on area and/or surface to be coated.

E. System No. 21 Epoxy Floor, Concrete:

1. Surface Preparation and Coating System

Surface Prep. Paint Materials Min. Coats, Cover
Concrete Epoxy 1st coat (thinned)
2 coats (unthinned)
Total system 80 SFPG

2. Application:
a. Use on the following areas:
(1) The floors of all cast-in-place concrete vaults.
(2) All other areas as shown on the Drawings or specified to receive, epoxy
floor coating, concrete.
3. Special Requirements:
a. Epoxy coating to be applied a minimum of 6-inches onto walls, pipe supports,
and any other metallic component attached to the floor or wall within the 6-
inch limit.
b. All areas above the 6-inch limit shall be masked, provide a straight-line
demarking coated versus uncoated areas.
c. Abrasively blast miscellaneous metal surfaces to an SSPC SP-10, near white
blast, as specified this section.
d. Prime coat of epoxy shall be a thinned coat of the epoxy coating to fill and seal
the concrete before the final coats applied, per the coating manufacturer’s
requirements.
e. Apply non-skid aggregate between coats where specified or shown.

A. System No. 27 Aluminum and Dissimilar Metal Insulation:

1. Surface Preparation and Coating System

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 23
Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
Solvent Clean (SP 1) Wash Primer 1 coat, 0.4 MDFT
Epoxy 1 coat, 8 MDFT

2. Application:
a. Use on all non-submerged concrete embedded aluminum surfaces, and the
following specific surfaces unless otherwise specified.
b. Use on the following surfaces:
(1) All concrete embedded components of hatches
(2) All concrete embedded surfaces where electrical isolation from concrete
reinforcement is required.

B. System No. 29 Fusion Bonded Coating:

1. Surface Preparation and Coating System

Surface Prep. Paint Material Min. Coats, Cover
Abrasive Blast, or Centrifugal
Wheel Blast (SP 10) or Acid
Pickling (SP 8)
Fusion Bonded 100% solids
Epoxy or Polyurethane
1 or 2 coats, 10 MDFT

2. Application:
a. Use where specified.
b. Use on the following items or surfaces:
(1) Concrete embedded anchor bolts, except threads.

3. Special Requirements:
a. System 1 may be used as alternative coating system at Contractor’s option

(See PSDS form following this section)

END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 24
This page intentionally blank

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 25

PAINT SYSTEM DATA SHEET

Attached products' Technical Data Sheet (if applicable) to this sheet for each paint system submittal.

Paint System Number (from spec.):
Paint System Title (from spec.):
Coatings Manufacturer:
Representative:
Surface Preparation:
Paint Material (Generic)
Product Name/Number
Proprietary) Min. Coats, Coverage

Additional Information Required (check applicable items):

 ANSI/NSF Certification letter for each paint material listed above requiring ANSI/NSF
Standard 60 and 61 approvals.

 Manufacturer’s minimum and maximum recommended coating thickness per coat and for
total coating system.

 Immersion coating cure requirements from minimum coating application temperature to 100
degrees in 15-degree temperature increments.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PROTECTIVE COATINGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 00 - 26

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 1
SECTION 09 90 10
PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 WORK RESULTS

A. This section covers the work necessary to apply external coating and internal lining on
steel pipe, field coating of joints, and shop and field repair of coating damage, complete.

B. Exposed steel pipe will be shop coated as specified in Section 09 90 00, Protective
Coatings.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS:

A. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as
if called for by all.

B. It is the Contractor’s responsibility for scheduling and coordinating the Work of
subcontractors, suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing
any of Contractor’s Work.

C. The following Sections are related to the Work described in this Section. This list of
Related Sections is provided for convenience only and is not intended to excuse or
otherwise diminish the duty of the Contractor to see that the completed Work
complies accurately with the Contract Documents.
1. Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures.
2. Section 09 90 00 – Protective Coatings

1.3 GENERAL:

A. See section GENERAL CONDITIONS, which contain information and requirements that
apply to the work specified and are mandatory for this project.

1.4 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 20 of these
Specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Catalog cuts and other information for all products proposed. Provide
copy of approved coating system submittals to the coating applicator.

C. Quality Control Submittals: Furnish the following:

1. Applicator's Experience with list of references substantiating compliance.
2. Coating manufacturer's certification stating the individual coating applicators have
met the qualification certification requirements as specified this section.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 2
3. Coating manufacturer shall provide a copy of the manufacturer’s coating
application quality assurance manual.
4. If the manufacturer of field-applied coating differs from that of the shop applied
primer, provide written confirmation from both manufacturers that the two
coating materials are compatible.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Coating Applicator's Experience and Certification:

1. Coating Application Company and coating application supervisor (Certified
Applicator) shall have a minimum of 5 years’ experience applying the specified
coating system.
2. Coating application personnel, who have direct coating application responsibility,
shall have a minimum of 2 years practical experience in application of the indicated
coating system.
3. Coating applicator shall be certified by the coating manufacturer as an approved
applicator.

B. Coating and/or lining manufacturer technical representative shall be present for a
minimum of three days technical assistance and instruction at the start of coating
and/or lining operations within the shop. During this visit, the technical representative
shall observe surface preparation and coating application and conduct tests of the
coating to insure conformance with application instructions, recommended methods,
and conditions.

C. Coating and/or lining manufacturers technical representative shall be onsite for three
working days, minimum, at the start of each construction season to inspect coating
application and procedures in the field. During this visit, the technical representative
shall observe surface preparation and coating application and conduct tests of the
coating to insure conformance with application instructions, recommended methods,
and conditions.

D. Coating and/or lining manufacturer shall include 8 hours per month of field or shop
coating technical support when requested by the Engineer.

E. Technical representative shall provide a written report to the Engineer for each visit.
Report shall include copies of test data collected, description of observations, and all
recommended corrective actions. Report shall be submitted within 5 working days
after the visit. When deemed necessary by the Engineer, work will not be permitted to
proceed until the recommended corrective actions have been implemented. After all
corrective recommendations have been completed, the manufacturer representative
shall return and certify that the application complies with the manufacturer’s coating
application recommendations.

F. Additional visits by the manufacturer’s representative shall be made at sufficient
intervals during surface preparation and coating or lining as may be required for
product application quality assurance, and to determine compliance with

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 3
manufacturer’s instructions, and as may be necessary to resolve problems attributable
to, or associated with, manufacturer’s products furnished for this project.

1.6 ABBREVIATIONS

MDFT Minimum Dry Film Thickness
mil Thousandths of an Inch

1.7 DEFINITIONS

A. MANUFACTURER'S REPRESENTATIVE: Employee of coating manufacturer who is
factory trained and knowledgeable in all technical aspects of their products and
systems. Sales representatives are not acceptable as a technical representative unless
written authorization from the coating manufacturer is provided which states the sales
representative has full authority to act on the behalf of the coating manufacturer.

B. SPECIALS FITTINGS AND CONNECTIONS: Defined as any joint of pipe with turnout,
blowoff, fabricated tee, cross, wye, manhole, mitered angles or elbows, crotch plates,
butt straps, or fabricated pipe that cannot be coated using through put or straight pipe
coating application equipment and the following specific items:
1. All pipe joint sections entering a structure.
2. Pipe joints with weld lead pass through holes.

C. SHOP: A shop is defined as a permanent, fully enclosed building with a concrete floor
that can be power washed with a potable water supply and floor drains.

1.8 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. This specification recognizes AWWA, NACE, and SSPC standards as minimum industry
standards and they are referenced for purpose of conformance, except where modified
in this section. The requirements of this specification section have been written to a
higher design standard with the intent of achieving a long-term coating performance of
100 years.

AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water Pipe-4-
inch and Larger- Shop Applied.
AWWA C210 Liquid-Epoxy Coating Systems for Steel Water Pipelines.
AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipe.
AWWA C215 Extruded Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines.
AWWA C216 Heat-shrinkable Cross-linked Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of
Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.
AWWA C217 Petrolatum and Petroleum Wax Tape Coatings for the Exterior of
Connections and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines.
NACE SP0188 Discontinuity (Holiday) Testing of New Protective Coatings on
Conductive Substrates.
NACE RP-0274 High Voltage Electrical Inspection of Pipeline Coatings Prior to
Installation.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 4
NACE RP0303 Field-Applied Heat-Shrinkable Sleeves for Pipelines: Application,
Performance, and Quality Control
NACE SP0394 Application, Performance and Quality Control for Plant Applied
Single Layer Fusion-Bonded Epoxy External Pipe Coating.
SSPC-SP-1 Solvent Cleaning Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-2 Hand Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-3 Power Tool Cleaning Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-5 White metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-6 Commercial Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-10 Near White Metal Abrasive Blast Surface Preparation
SSPC-SP-11 Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal

1.9 SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. The Contractor and coating applicator shall warrant to the Owner and guarantee the
work under this section against defective workmanship and materials for a period of
two (2) years commencing on the date of final acceptance of the work.

1.10 OBSERVATION OF WORK

A. The Contractor shall give the Owner Representative notice a minimum of 14 days prior
to start of work for scheduling shop or field observation.

B. Provide Owner Representative a minimum 3 days' notice for actual start of surface
preparation and coating application work.

C. Provisions shall be made to allow Owner’s representative full access to facilities and
appropriate documentation regarding coating application.

D. Observation by the Owner’s representative or the waiver of observation of any portion
of the work shall not be construed to relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to
perform the work in accordance with these Specifications.

E. Materials shall be subject to testing for conformance with this specification as the
Owner’s representative may elect, prior to or during incorporation into the work.

PART 2 MATERIALS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Coatings and linings will be stored and handled per manufacturer’s written directions.

B. Exterior and interior pipe and fitting surfaces shall be prepared and coated in
accordance with referenced standards, written instructions of the coating or lining
manufacturer, and these specifications, whichever is more stringent.

C. Pipeline coating or lining shall be the product of a single manufacturer. Product
substitutions during the project will not be permitted without Engineer approval.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 5
2.2 SHOP-APPLIED, BURIED PIPE COATINGS

A. General

1. Buried steel pipe, consisting of straight lengths of pipe, shall be coated with one of
the following coating systems at the Contractors option, except where noted
otherwise.
a. Polyethylene Tape Wrap and cement overcoat (AWWA C214 and C205)
b. Plural Component Epoxy (AWWA C213 C210)
c. Cement Mortar (AWWA C205), only where indicated on Drawings

2. Buried Steel pipe specials, fittings, and other complex shapes shall be coated with
one of the following coating systems.
a. Plural Component Epoxy (AWWA C213 C210)
b. Cement Mortar (AWWA C205), only where indicated on Drawings.
3. Vault or manhole piping and miscellaneous pipeline components, such as coupling
plain ends, access manholes, blowoff piping, or piping less than 12-inches in
diameter, shall be coated as specified under Shop Applied, Atmospheric and
Immersion Coatings, this section.
4. Mortar over coat shall be provided over tape wrap coating system and where
specified. Cement mortar overcoat shall be shop-applied and 1-inch thick, ±1/4-
inch, as specified herein.

5. Buried dielectrically coated pipe and fittings passing through a concrete structure
wall or floor shall be dielectrically coated for a minimum of four (4) inches beyond
the interior wall or floor surface.

6. Exterior surfaces of all butt straps shall be prepared to SP-5, white metal, and
coated with inorganic zinc suitable for temperatures over 750 degrees as specified
for holdback corrosion protection.

B. Polyethylene Tape Wrap:

1. General Coating Requirements:
a. Tape wrap coating system shall be machine applied. Hand applied tape
coatings will not be permitted.
b. Tape width shall be 12-inches maximum. Wider tape will be conditionally
allowed if the coating applicator can demonstrate that proper maintenance of
tension and prevention of mechanical wrinkling throughout the coating
application. If at any time during the pipe fabrication tape quality becomes
inconsistent with wider tape, the Engineer can require the remainder of the
pipe to be coated using the maximum specified tape width.
c. Tape layers shall have adhesive for the full width of the tape. Adhesive shall
have the ability to stick to itself and to the proceeding tape layer or pipe.
d. Each layer shall be a different color or shade with the outer layer white.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 6
e. Outer wrap shall be white and have sufficient ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors to
resist above grade exposure for a minimum of 12 months or the proposed
storage and construction time, whichever is greater.
2. Steel Pipe:
a. Surface Preparation:
(1) Comply with salt contamination and surface cleanliness (dust)
requirements as specified for Quality Control testing.
(2) Steel Pipe: SSPC-SP5, White Metal blast, 2.5 mils blast profile, minimum.
b. Coating System
(1) Pipe shall be coated with an 80 mil (nominal), tape-coating systems
applied in accordance with AWWA C214, except as modified herein.
(2) Steel pipe with cement mortar overcoat shall be coated with 50 mil
(nominal), tape-coating systems applied in accordance with AWWA C214,
except as modified herein.
(3) Primer: Polyken 1019, 1027, 1029, or as recommended by the coating
manufacturer.
(4) Weld Stripe Tape: Polyken 931 (no backing), 25 mils nominal, 4-inches
wide minimum.
(5) Inner Wrap: Polyken 989 YGIII, 20 mils nominal, corrosion protection
layer.
(6) Outer Wrap: Polyken 956 YGIII, 30 mils nominal, mechanical protection
layer.
(7) Mechanical Protection: Cement mortar overcoat in accordance with
AWWA C205, except as modified herein.

C. Plural Component Epoxy:

1. General:
a. Plural component, epoxy coating system shall be applied in accordance with
AWWA C210, and as modified herein.
b. All steel pipe specials, fittings, complex shapes, and other surfaces that are not
suitable for machine applied tape wrap coating application and are below
finished grade or concrete encased shall be coated with this coating system.
c. Plural component epoxy coating system is not suitable for interior of pipe or
where contact with potable water may occur, see Section 09 90 00,
PROTECTIVE COATINGS, for applicable protective coating systems.
2. Shop Surface Preparation:
a. Steel pipe:
(1) Comply with salt contamination and surface cleanliness requirements as
specified for Quality Control Testing.
(2) SSPC-SP5, White Metal blast, 3.00 mil profile, minimum, or as required by
the manufacturer, whichever is greater.
3. Shop Applied Coating Requirements:
a. Thickness: One coat, 35 mils total dry film thickness, minimum, or as required
to meet limits specified for holiday and coating defects, this section.
b. Cement Mortar Overcoat:
(1) Apply cement mortar overcoat on epoxy coated specials when used in
conjunction with tape wrapped steel pipe as specified this section.
(2) Ductile iron pipe does not require a cement mortar overcoat.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 7
4. Product Acceptance:
a. Self-priming, plural component, 100 percent solids, non-extended epoxy,
suitable for burial or immersion, and meeting the requirements of AWWA
C210 and the following, whichever is more stringent:
1) Resistance to Water Immersion (ASTM D870) or Wet Adhesion
a) Acceptance criteria:
(1) Not greater than 10 percent loss of substrate adhesion when
compared to substrate adhesion in an unexposed area of the
same sample with adhesion tests completed within 12 to 24
hours after test termination. Average of three pulls per
exposure area.
(2) No blistering or underfilm corrosion when viewed at 10x
magnification.
b) Adhesion Testing:
(1) Method: ASTM D4541, Method E
(2) Equipment:Type V, Delfesko Automatic AT Positest
(3) Dollies: 20 mm and 14 mm, scored to metal
substrate
(4) Test Speed:100 psi per second (both 14 and 20 mm)
c) Test Duration:30 and 60 days.
2) Cathodic Disbondment (ASTM G95)
a) Acceptance criteria: 8 mm, maximum
b) Potential: -3.00 volts
c) Test Duration: 28 days.
d) Evaluation: Measured from original holiday radius to edge of
staining on metal surface.
3) Water Absorption (ASTM D570)
a) Acceptance Criteria: 1.80 percent, maximum
b) Test Duration:30 day and 60 day
b. Shall be one of the following products:
(1) Tnemec Series 431, Kansas City, MO
(2) Or Engineer approved equal

D. Cement Mortar Coating or Cement Mortar Overcoat

1. Apply cement mortar coating system on steel pipe, where specifically shown on the
Drawings, in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein.
2. Cement mortar overcoat shall be applied over dielectric coating system on all steel
pipe and fittings in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified herein.
3. Holdback:
a. Mortar overcoat shall be held back of dielectric coating a minimum of 3 inches
for overlap of field applied joint coating onto dielectric coating system.
4. Shop Applied Coating System:
a. Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type II.
b. Aggregate shall be silica sand or other aggregate that is not subject to leaching.
Conform to ASTM C33.
c. Cement mortar mixture shall consist of 1-part cement to not more than 3 parts
aggregate.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 8
d. Water for cement mortar: Clean and free from organic matter, strong alkalis,
vegetable matter, and other impurities. Use no more than 4-1/2 gallons of
water per sack of cement.
e. Cement mortar coating: Nominal 1-inch thick coating with permitted
tolerance of ±1/4-inch.
5. Joint Coating:
a. Joints shall be cement mortar overcoated after application of heat shrink
sleeve joint coating system.
b. Joints of cement mortar overcoat dielectrically coated pipe do not require field
application of cement mortar overcoat when properly coated with heat shrink
sleeve joint coating system.

2.3 SHOP-APPLIED INTERIOR LININGS

A. General
1. Clean and cement mortar line steel pipe and fittings 6-inches or greater in diameter
in accordance with AWWA C205.
2. Cement mortar line ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance with C104, provide
double thickness lining. Do not seal coat the cement lining.
3. Apply liquid epoxy coating over cement mortar lining at insulating joints as
specified this section.

B. Cement Mortar Lining:
1. Cement: Conform to ASTM C150, Type II.
2. Shop applied cement mortar lining shall be uniform in thickness over the full length
of the pipe joint.
3. Aggregate shall be silica sand or other aggregate that is not subject to leaching.
Conform to ASTM C33.
4. Water for cement mortar: Clean and free from organic matter, strong alkalis,
vegetable matter, and other impurities.

C. Liquid Applied Epoxy Coating:

1. Epoxy Overcoat of Cement Mortar Lining:
a. Provide liquid epoxy primer and lining in all cement mortar lined metallic pipe
at insulating joints for a minimum of one pipe diameters on each side of the
insulated joint. If other side of joint is an existing pipe, apply epoxy lining for
two pipe diameters in fabricated pipe only.
b. Epoxy lining shall be polyamine or polyamide cured, NSF approved for potable
water contact in accordance with ANSI/NSF Standards 60 and 61, and capable
of achieving full cure before placement in service or exposure to water.
c. Application:
(1) Apply in two coats at equivalent spread rate for 6 mils dry film thickness
per coat.
(2) Epoxy shall be applied over the cement mortar lining where specified for
the pipeline lining material.
(3) Cement mortar shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 15 days prior to
surface preparation and coating application or 7 days with steam curing.
Mortar lining shall be dry when epoxy lining is applied.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 9
(4) Prepare the cement mortar lining by abrasive blasting to remove all
laitance and provide a surface profile equivalent to 80 grit sandpaper.
d. Acceptable manufacturers:
(1) Carboline
(2) ICI Devoe
(3) Tnemec
(4) Sherwin Williams
(5) Or approved equal

2.4 SHOP APPLIED, ATMOSPHERIC OR IMMERSION COATINGS

A. General
1. All atmospherically exposed or vault piping shall be shop primed and field coated
with the applicable Exposed Metal coating system as specified in Section 09 90 00,
Protective Coatings.
2. Interior of pipe or surfaces in contact with potable water shall be coated with
System No. 1.
3. Shop applied inorganic zinc primer shall not be applied at thickness greater than
recommended by manufacturer. Excess primer to be removed using method
recommended by coating manufacturer.
4. Intermediate and finish coats shall be applied in the field after installation, except
where metal surfaces will be concealed after installation.
5. All concealed surfaces of bolted or mechanically secured surfaces shall be finished
coated in the shop.
6. Manufacturer of shop-applied primer shall be coordinated with field application to
provide a completed system by a single manufacturer. Engineer approval of a
coating system with two or more coating manufacturers will require written
approval from all coating manufacturers as to compatibility and acceptance under
warranty.

2.5 FIELD APPLIED COATING SYSTEMS

A. General
1. Miscellaneous Metals
a. All buried miscellaneous metal components installed on the pipeline and that
is supplied bare or with a shop coating system that is not equal to the specified
pipeline coating shall be coated in the field with one of the following coating
systems.
(1) Petrolatum or Wax Tape Coating
(2) Heat Shrink Sleeve
b. Miscellaneous metal components shall include, but not be limited to, all
exposed metals surfaces, including bolts, couplings, flanges, valves, adapters,
pipe spools, and other miscellaneous metal components.
c. Coating system applied shall conform to the manufacturer’s requirements and
shall be applied in accordance with the application requirements of the coating
system.
d. Filler material shall be applied for all field applied coating systems to provide
sufficient transition at welds and other dimensional changes to prevent all

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 10
tenting or voids under the applied coating, regardless of manufacturer’s
recommendations.

2. Pipe Joints General:
a. Pipe joints shall be field coated after pipe assembly with one of the following
coating systems as specified.
(1) Petrolatum or wax tape coating system
(2) Heat Shrink Sleeves.
b. Steel pipe joints shall be coated with a heat shrink coating, unless specified
otherwise.
c. Ductile iron push-on bell and spigot joints may be heat shrink sleeve coated,
provided filler mastic is used to prevent tenting or voids under the sleeve.
d. Joints of cement mortar overcoated tape wrap steel pipe shall be cement
mortar overcoated after application of the specified field applied joint coating,
unless specified otherwise.
e. Flanges, couplings, ductile iron pipe joints, and all bolted or threaded joints are
classified as complex shapes and shall be wax tape coated with filler material
to ensure completed encapsulation and filling of all bolts, crevices, gaps, and
dimensional transitions as required to prevent tenting of the finished coating.

B. Petroleum or Wax Tape Coating:
1. Application:
a. Coating shall be applied in accordance with AWWA C217, except as modified
herein.
b. Wax tape coatings shall be field applied on all buried couplings, thrust
restraint rods and brackets, valves, and on joints, fittings, or irregular shapes
or complex configurations that could cause tenting of heat shrink coating
system.
c. Provide wax filler material for all complex shapes, bolts, flanges, gaps, and
dimensional transitions to completely fill and encapsulate the metal surfaces
and prevent tenting of the applied tape coating.
d. Buried wax tape coated surfaces shall be overcoated with plastic shrink film
as recommended by the manufacturer.
e. Do not use wax tape coating systems on vault piping, atmospherically exposed
piping and appurtenances, or where subject to UV exposures.
f. Use sand backfill to protect wax coating from damage.

2. Surface Preparation: SP11 Power Tool to Bare Metal or SSPC-SP10, near white
abrasive blast.

3. Coating System:
a. Primer: petroleum or petrolatum wax, suitable for wet surfaces.
b. Filler Material:
(1) Filler materials shall be petroleum or petrolatum wax sealer/filler with
closed cell plastic filler.
(2) Provide filler material to fill and smooth all irregular surfaces, such that
no tenting or voids remain under the applied wax tape.
c. Inner Tape: Petroleum or petrolatum wax impregnated fabric, 6-inch width
maximum, 40 mils thick

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 11
d. Outer Wrap: PVC or tape suitable for application to inner tape.
4. Manufacturers: Wax tape coating system shall be as manufactured by:
a. Denso North American
b. Trenton
c. Or approved equal.

C. Heat Shrink Sleeves:
1. Application:
a. Heat shrink sleeves are restricted to pipeline joints and couplings under
buried or concrete encased applications only.
b. Application inside vaults or where exposed to the weather will not be allowed.
c. Provide filler material for all welded joints, rolled or Carnegie joints, and at all
dimensional changes that could result in tenting or voids under the applied
heat shrink sleeve.
d. Pipe joints that have been shop prepared as specified for heat shrink sleeves
and shop coated with holdback primer as specified this section, shall be field
prepared in accordance with SSPC-SP1, solvent cleaning, and SP3, Power tool
cleaning, to remove all dirt, mud, oil, and grease prior to application of heat
shrink sleeve.
e. Filler material shall be applied in a manner and of sufficient thickness that no
tenting or voids remain under the heat shrink sleeve.
f. Contractor to consider sleeve shrinkage and joint profile in determining sleeve
width required. Overlapping of two or more heat shrink sleeves to achieve the
necessary width on pipe joints will not be permitted without Engineer
approval.
2. Surface preparation: As specified for pipe joint surface preparation.
3. Coating System:
a. Filler Material:
(1) Filler material shall adhere to the pipe and heat shrink sleeve. Size and
type shall be as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer for type of pipe
and joint.
(2) Filler materials shall be applied as necessary to prevent all tenting or
voids under the applied heat shrink sleeve, regardless of manufacturer’s
written recommendations.
(3) Filler mastic for joints subject to weld after backfill shall have a melt
temperature exceeding 500 degrees F.
b. Heat Shrink Sleeve:
(1) Heat shrink, cross-linked polyolefin sleeve with a mastic sealant, 85-mil
nominal thickness or greater, suitable for pipeline operating temperature,
as recommended by the manufacturer.
(2) Provide standard recovery sleeve for welded or bell and spigot steel pipe
joints. High recovery sleeves shall be provided for mechanical or bell and
spigot ductile iron pipe, flange joints, and coupling style joints.
(3) Width of heat shrink sleeves shall be sufficient to overlap existing coating
2-inches minimum, except extruded polyolefin coated pipe shall have a
minimum overlap of 3-inches. Overlap on tape coated steel pipe shall be
based on a sequential 2-inch wide step from outer wrap to middle wrap
to inner wrap.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 12
(4) Sleeve shall meet requirements for “Well After Backfill” when procedure
is allowed and approved by Engineer.
4. Coating Manufacturer’s:
a. Canusa,
b. Raychem-Covalence,
c. Or equal.

D. Epoxy Coating:
1. Application:
a. Epoxy coatings shall be NSF approved and suitable for water contact in
accordance with ANSI/NSF Standards 60 and 61, unless otherwise approved
by the Engineer.
b. Contractor shall ensure that epoxy coating selected is suitable for the
application temperatures anticipated and that project schedule will allow
adequate cure time before backfilling or immersion based on surface
temperatures at the time of application.
c. Epoxy coating shall be used to coat concrete embedded pipe penetrations for
6 inches outside of interior and exterior surfaces of concrete walls or floors.
Epoxy coating at concrete penetrations shall be a minimum of 16 mils dry film
thickness.
d. Buried transitions from epoxy to tape wrap coating systems shall be coated
with Heat Shrink Sleeve as specified below. Heat shrink sleeves shall be buried
within 72-hours of application to prevent thermal creep of sleeve. Sleeves
subject wrinkling due to thermal exposure shall be removed and replaced by
the Contractor.
2. Surface Preparation: SP11 Power Tool to Bare Metal or SSPC-SP10, near white
abrasive blast.
3. Coating System:
a. Primer: As required by the coating manufacturer.
b. High Build Epoxy Coating:
(1) Two component, high build polyamide or polyamine cured epoxy coating,
suitable for direct burial or immersion, dries to touch in 2 or more hours,
suitable for immersion or burial after full cure of coating.
(2) Acceptable manufacturers:
(a) ICI Devoe
(b) Sherwin Williams
(c) Carboline
(d) Or approved equal
c. Fast Cure Epoxy Coating:
(1) Two components, 100% solids by volume, fast cure epoxy coating suitable
for direct burial or immersion, dry to touch in less than 1 hour at 72
degrees, capable of curing while immersed or buried.
4. Manufacturers:
a. TC 7010, Tapecoat Inc
b. Protal 7125 or Protal 7200, North American Denso
c. Or approved equal.

E. Cement Mortar Coating or Overcoat:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 13
1. Joints of cement mortar coated or cement mortar overcoated steel pipe shall be
mortar coated as specified herein after application of the specified joint coating
materials, where applicable.
2. Polyethylene foam-lined fabric with steel strapping of sufficient strength to hold
the fresh mortar, resist rodding of the mortar and allow excess water to escape.
a. 100 percent closed-cell
b. Chemically inert, insoluble in water, resistant to acids, alkalis, and solvents.
c. Manufacturer and Product: Dow Chemical Company; Ethafoam 222.
3. Fabric Backing:
a. Cut and sewn into strips wide enough to overlap shop-coated areas by 4 inches
on either side.
b. Strips shall have slots for steel strapping on outer edges.
4. Joint Coating:
a. Joints of cement mortar overcoat dielectrically coated pipe do not require field
application of cement mortar overcoat when properly coated with heat shrink
sleeve or wax tape joint coating system.

2.6 FIELD APPLIED INTERIOR JOINT LINING

A. Epoxy Lining:
1. Surface preparation and field lining of pipe joints shall be with the same coating
system as the shop-applied lining.
2. Field application shall be performed by a qualified contractor with equipment that
meets the application requirements of the coating system and personnel trained
and certified by the coating system manufacturer on the proper application of the
coating system. Qualified field applicator shall have completed at least three other
projects of similar size and magnitude within the last three years using the same or
similar coating system.
3. Coating applicator that does not meet the qualifications requirements can be
rejected by the Engineer.
4. Field coating application requirements shall be the same as the shop-applied
coating requirements. Provide heating and/or dehumidification equipment as
required to meet the environmental conditions necessary for proper coating
application.

B. Mortar Lining:
1. After the backfill has been completed to final grade, the interior joint recess shall
be filled with grout. The grout shall be tightly packed into the joint recess and
trowelled flush with the interior surface. Excess shall be removed.
2. At no point shall there be an indentation or projection of the mortar exceeding
1/16-inch.
3. With pipe smaller than 24-inches in diameter, before the spigot is inserted into the
bell, the bell shall be daubed with grout. The joint shall be completed and excess
mortar on the inside of the joint shall be swabbed out.

2.7 REPAIR OF COATINGS AND LININGS

A. General

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 14
1. Coating or lining repair materials shall be compatible with the shop-applied coating
or lining system and shall be approved by the coating or lining manufacturer.
2. Coating repair materials shall be as required for the coating system and repair
classification as defined this section.

B. Coating Repair Materials
1. Heat Shrink Sleeves (major repair):
a. Filler Mastic: Provide mastic filler to fill tape void as required.
b. Shrink Sleeve: See Field Applied Coatings, Heat Shrink Sleeves, this section.

2. Heat-Applied Patches (minor repair)
a. Heat applied adhesive, polyolefin backed, mastic coated tape, 12-inches
maximum size.
b. Patch shall provide a minimum of 2 inches overlap onto intact pipe coating;
except for extruded polyolefin coated pipe shall have a minimum overlap of 3-
inches in the circumferential direction.
c. CRP patch as manufactured by Canusa, PERP patch as manufactured by
Raychem (Polyken), or equal.

3. Plural Component Epoxy Coating or Lining
a. Major Repairs:
(1) Shop repairs shall be completed using the same material as the pipe
coating. Coating shall be reapplied using plural component spray
equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written requirements.
(2) Field repairs shall be completed using heat shrink sleeves as specified for
field applied coatings, this section.
(3) Shop or field major repairs to NSF linings shall be with single use kits
matching the existing lining.
b. Minor Repairs:
(1) Shop minor repairs shall be single use kits matching the existing coating.
Pinholes, holidays, or adhesion test repairs are classified as minor repairs.
(2) Field minor repairs shall be with fast cure epoxy, such as Protal 7125 as
manufactured by North American Denso, Inc.
(3) Shop or field minor repairs to NSF linings shall be with single use kits
matching the existing lining.

2.8 HOLDBACK CORROSION PROTECTION

A. Primer for corrosion protection of cutbacks or holdbacks shall be compatible with the
specified joint coating system and high heat resistant or weld after backfill
requirements, where applicable.

B. Approved holdback primers are:
1. Tnemec Omnithane – Suitable for all joints, except joints subject to high heat
resistant or weld after backfill
2. Tnemec 90E-92 Ethyl Silicate Inorganic Zinc Primer – suitable for all joints,
including high heat resistant or weld after backfill joints.
3. ICI Devoe Cathacoat 304V Ethyl Silicate Inorganic Zinc Primer – suitable for all
joints including high heat resistant or weld after backfill joints.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 15
4. Polyken Tape Primers – Not allowed

C. Primer shall not result in running or melting of the coating or cause toxic fumes when
heated during welding of “weld after backfill” joints.

D. Application and thickness of holding primer shall be in accordance with the coating
manufacturer’s recommendations, but shall not impair the clearances required for
proper joint installation.

E. Holdback requirements shall be as specified this section.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 ENVIRONMENTAL LIMITATIONS

A. General
1. Products shall comply with federal, state, and local requirements limiting the
emission of volatile organic compounds and worker exposure.
2. Comply with applicable federal, state, and local, air pollution and environmental
control regulations for surface preparation, blast cleaning, disposition of spent
aggregate and debris, and coating application.
3. Do not perform abrasive blast cleaning whenever the relative humidity exceeds
85 percent, whenever surface temperature is less than 5 degrees above the dew
point of the ambient air.
4. Do not apply coatings when:
a. Surface and ambient temperatures exceed the maximum or minimum
temperatures recommended by the coating manufacturer or these
specifications,
b. In dust or smoke-laden atmosphere, blowing dust or debris, damp or humid
weather, or under conditions that could cause icing on the metal surface.
c. When it expected that surface temperatures would drop below 5 degrees
above dew point within 4 hours after application of coating.
d. Whenever relative humidity exceeds 85 percent.
5. Where weather conditions or project requirements dictate, Contractor shall
provide and operate heaters and/or dehumidification equipment to allow pipe
surfaces to be abrasive blasted and coated as specified and in accordance with the
manufacturers coating application recommendations.
6. Work activities can be restricted by the Engineer until adequate temperature and
humidity controls are in place and functioning within the environmental limits
specified.
7. Coating applicator shall provide a monitoring system approved by the coating
manufacturer that constantly records pipe and coating conditions during coating
application. Recorded monitoring parameters shall include pipe temperature, line
speed, holiday test and other parameters applicable to the type of coating.

B. Temperature Control
1. In cold weather or if moisture collects on the pipe, preheat pipe to a temperature
between 45 and 90 degrees or 5 degrees above dew point, whichever is greater.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 16
2. When temperatures are above or below the coating manufacturers recommended
application temperatures, the Contractor will provide temperature controls as
necessary to permit work to precede within the manufacturer’s temperature
limitations.
3. Provide tenting, insulating blankets, baffles, or bulkheads as required to zone and
control heating or cooling effectiveness.
4. Heating shall be with indirect fired heaters that do not increase humidity levels
within the work area. Heaters shall be sized for the area to be heated.

C. Dehumidification
1. Contractor shall provide and operate desiccant dehumidification equipment to
maintain environmental conditions during abrasive blasting and coating
application and cure. Liquid, granular, or loose lithium chloride drying systems
will not be acceptable.
2. Contractor shall provide dehumidification equipment sized to maintain dew point
temperature 17 degrees or more below surface temperature of metal surfaces to
be cleaned and coated. System shall provide ventilation within the
environmentally controlled areas to meet the following requirements:
a. Two air exchanges per hour, minimum,
b. Maintenance of personnel exposure limits (PEL) at 50 percent of OSHA PEL
limits for all chemicals used in the performance of the work, and
c. Maintenance of lower explosive limits (LEL) to less than 50 percent of the
most volatile solvent used in the performance of the work.
3. Dehumidification equipment type, size, air flow, and power requirements shall be
designed by a qualified company knowledgeable in dehumidification equipment,
and its operation based on project requirements and anticipated seasonal
weather conditions for the project schedule. Design to include evaluation of
existing conditions, humidity, and temperature, proper air exchange
requirements, ventilation requirements, ducting requirements for adequate air
flow, and any other issues necessary to achieve the specified performance and
environmental conditions throughout the duration of the project.
4. Contractor to submit written recommendations from dehumidification
subcontractor for enclosure work area size, bulkhead venting, duct work for each
bulkhead section, any secondary ventilation requirements for coating cure, dust
collection equipment CFM requirements, and drying requirements for blast hose
compressed air necessary to maintain environmental control as specified herein.
5. Dehumidification subcontractor shall either operate the equipment or provide
training to Contractor on the proper operation and setup of dehumidification
equipment. Dehumidification subcontractor shall provide a technical
representative on site for a minimum of two 8 hour days to insure proper
operation of the equipment, achievement of desired environmental control, and to
insure Contractor can properly setup, operate, monitor, and maintain the
equipment.
6. Dehumidification shall be operated in a manner that prevents all condensation or
icing throughout surface preparation, coating application, and coating cure.
7. Reblasting of flash rusted metal surfaces or removal of damaged coatings, because
of equipment malfunction, shutdown, or other events that result in the loss of
environmental control, will be at the sole expense of the Contractor. Cleaned

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 17
metal surfaces subject to flash rusting shall be cleaned to the same cleanliness as
prior to the flash rust formation and shall be approved by the Engineer.
8. Contractor shall monitor ambient temperature, humidity, dew point temperature,
and pipe surface temperature (work area only) both outdoors and within the
work area at the start, midpoint, and end of each work shift, minimum, but not
greater than 5 hours between measurements.
9. Daily environmental condition monitoring and maintenance of the equipment
shall be documented in writing and posted near the equipment for review by the
Engineer.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General
1. Inspect and provide substrate surfaces prepared in accordance with these
Specifications and the printed directions and recommendations of coating
manufacturer whose product is to be applied.
2. Visible oil, grease, dirt, and contamination shall be removed in accordance with
SSPC-SP1, solvent cleaning.
3. Surface imperfections such as metal slivers, burrs, weld splatter, gouges, or
delaminations in the metal shall be removed by filing or grinding prior to abrasive
surface preparation.
4. Protect prepared pipe from humidity, moisture, and rain. All flash rust,
imperfections, or contamination on cleaned pipe surface shall be removed by
blasting.
5. Priming and coating of pipe shall be completed the same day as surface
preparation.

B. Weld Surface Preparation
1. Requirements:
a. Spray applied coating systems do not require weld grinding.
b. Grind welds flush on extruded polyolefin coated pipe as specified herein.
c. Welds on tape wrap coated pipe shall be either ground flush or a weld stripe
tape applied over the weld, at the pipe fabricator’s option, unless otherwise
specified.
2. Weld Grinding:
a. Under the weld grinding option, welds higher than 1/32 inch above pipe
surface shall be ground to a tolerance of +1/32 inch to 0-inch above the pipe
surface as measured on the lowest side of the weld.
3. Weld Stripe Tape:
a. Weld stripe tape will be applied to primed metal.
b. Tape will either have no polyethylene backing or will be double sided adhesive
tape to permit adhesion of the inner corrosion protection layer to the weld
stripe tape.
c. Apply tape with a pressure roller to fully conform the tape to the weld surface.
d. Adhesion of the weld stripe tape shall be as specified for the coating system.

C. Salt Contamination Removal

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 18
1. All bare or shop coated or primed surfaces that will be coated in the field shall be
pressure washed with potable water not greater than 8 hours before coating
application, including pipeline joints.
2. Residual soluble salt contamination (SSC) shall be tested as specified under
Quality Control testing.
3. Surfaces to be Abrasive Blasted:
a. Surfaces that fail the soluble salt contamination test prior to abrasive blasting
shall be cleaned by pressure washing and/or abrasive blasting and retested.
b. Surfaces that fail the SSC test after surface preparation shall be recleaned
and/or abrasive blasting and retested.
c. Surfaces which still exceed the specified SSC level after recleaning shall be
subject to determination by the Engineer if addition work will be required.
d. Contractor shall remove all surface rust caused by SSC testing in accordance
with SP-11, Power Tool to Bare Metal or abrasive blasting to the specified
cleanliness.
4. Existing or Shop Primed Surfaces:
a. All previously coated surfaces shall be tested for SCC prior to application of
additional coats.
b. Surfaces exceeding the specified SSC level after pressure washing shall be
subject to additional cleaning as determined by the Engineer.
c. Any coating applied before SCC testing is completed and accepted by the
Engineer will be rejected and removed.

D. Steel Surface Preparation
1. Surface preparation of steel pipe shall be in accordance with SSPC surface
preparation standards utilizing the degree of cleanliness specified for the coating
system to be applied or as specified herein, whichever is more stringent.
2. Grit and/or shot abrasive mixture and gradation shall be as required to achieve the
degree of cleanliness and coating adhesion specified.
3. Pipe cleaned by abrasive blasting with recyclable steel grit and/or shot or other
abrasive shall be cleaned of debris and spent abrasive in an air wash separator.
4. Epoxy coated steel shall have a sharp angular surface profile of the minimum depth
specified.
5. After abrasive blasting surfaces and before coating application, the metal surface
shall be cleaned of residual dust to a minimum of Grade 2 per ISO Standard 8502 -
3, Test for the Assessment of Surface Cleanliness.
6. Work shall be performed in a manner that does not permit the cleaned metal
surface to rust back or flash rust.
7. Rust back or flash rust shall be fully removed with the steel surface cleanliness
equal to the metal surface cleanliness prior to rust back or flash rusting.
Determination of the equivalent surface cleanliness shall be at the Engineer’s sole
discretion.

E. Concrete Surface Preparation:
1. Cement Mortar or Concrete Cure:
a. Cement mortar linings shall be allowed to cure for a minimum of 15 days prior
to surface preparation and coating application or 7 days with steam curing.
b. Concrete surfaces shall be cured 30 days.
2. Preparation Requirements:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 19
a. Remove grease, oil, dirt, salts or other chemicals, loose materials or other
foreign matter by solvent, detergent, or other suitable cleaning methods.
b. Clean concrete using mechanical or chemical methods for the degree of
cleaning specified for the coating system in accordance with SSPC SP-13,
Surface preparation of Concrete.
c. Abrasive blast to remove all laitance and provide a surface profile equivalent
to 80 grit sandpaper.
d. Unless otherwise required for proper adhesion, ensure surfaces are dry prior
to coating.
3. Inspection:
(1) Concrete Soundness: Determined using scratching or hammer impact
methods as defined in SSPC SP-13.
(2) Moisture Content: Moisture shall be tested as Specified in SSPC SP-13
and shall not exceed the moisture content recommended by the coating
manufacturer.

3.3 SHOP -APPLIED COATING APPLICATION

A. Tape Wrap Coating
1. Applicator shall provide a monitoring system approved by the tape manufacturer
that constantly records pipe and tape conditions during coating application.
Recorded monitoring parameters shall include, but not be limited too, pipe
temperature; line speed, primer and tape roll body temperature, and tape tension.
2. Pipe surface temperature shall be between 45 and 120 degrees and 5 degrees
above dew point, whichever is greater.
3. Tape roll temperature shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations, but shall not be less than 55 degrees for the inner wrap and 65
degrees for the outer wraps.
4. Apply a uniform coat of primer as recommended by the manufacturer without
skips, runs, or sags. Allow to properly dry prior to applying the tape as required by
the tape manufacturer and as necessary to achieve maximum tape adhesion. Rug
type application will not be allowed.
5. If welds are not ground flush, apply a weld stripe tape to longitudinal or spiral pipe
welds prior to application of the inner wrap.
6. Tape layers shall be applied continuously with the use of hydro-tension tape
stands. Tension shall be maintained between the manufacturer’s minimum and
maximum tension recommendations or as required to achieve approximately 2.0
percent reduction in tape width.
7. Inner tape wrap shall adhere tightly to the pipe surface. Coating shall be 100
percent adhering to the metal surface and shall not have any visible damage,
wrinkles, voids, disbondment, contamination, or holidays.
8. Tape coating adhesion testing shall be performed on the pipe as specified this
section.
9. Holidays testing shall be conducted on the inner layer tape prior to proceeding with
subsequent tape layers. All holidays detected shall be primed and patch using
coating repair procedures specified herein.
10. Perform coating and lining repairs as specified in this section.

B. Plural Component Epoxy Coating

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 20
1. Applicator Qualifications:
a. Equipment will be certified by the coating manufacturer to meet the
requirements for material mixing, temperature control, application rate, and
ratio control for multi-part coatings.
b. Equipment not meeting the written requirements of the coating manufacturer
shall be rejected for coating application until repairs or replacement of the
equipment is made to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
c. Personnel responsible for the application of the coating system shall have
certification of attendance at the coating manufacturer’s training class within
the last three years. The certified applicator shall be present during all coating
application work and shall have responsibility for controlling all aspects of the
coating application.
2. Pipe surface temperature shall be between 50 and 100 degrees or 5 degrees above
dew point, whichever is greater.
3. Coating application shall be performed in an environmentally controlled shop area
that meets or exceeds the written environmental application requirements of the
coating manufacturer. Application in outdoor conditions will not be acceptable
without adequate environmental shelter, environmental controls, and/or
dehumidification.
4. Coating adhesion and holidays testing shall be tested as specified this section
except adhesion testing is not required on overcoated CCP.
5. Coating manufacturer shall provide to the Engineer a copy of the manufacturer’s
coating application quality assurance manual prior to beginning coating
application. Strict conformance to the requirements of the manual will be required.
Deviation from the requirements of the manual will be grounds for the Engineer to
reject the applied coating.
6. Unacceptable Coating Application
a. Coating applied under improper environmental conditions will be rejected.
b. Pipes that exceed the allowable quantity of coating defects, regardless of size
or cause, shall be rejected.
c. Coating which fails the adhesion or holiday testing as specified this section
shall be rejected.
d. Pipe coating that is subject to off ratio application, blistering, or is not applied
in conformance with the coating manufacturer’s written instructions or
recommendations shall be rejected.
7. Rejected coating shall be removed from the full length of the pipe to bare metal and
reapplied using proper application methods in accordance with the coating
manufacturer’s written instruction and the requirements of these specifications.
8. Perform coating and lining repairs as specified in this section.

C. Cement Mortar Coatings
1. Steel pipe shall have a cement mortar coating applied in accordance with AWWA
C205, except as modified herein.
2. Tape wrap coated steel pipe shall have a cement mortar overcoat applied over the
tape wrap or epoxy coating in accordance with AWWA C205, except as modified
herein.
3. Cement Mortar Coating:
a. Reinforcement:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 21
(1) For pipe and specials smaller than 48 inches in diameter, reinforce
coating with spirally-wound No. 12 gage steel wire spaced at 1-inch
centers or with No. 14 gage steel wire at 1/2-inch centers positioned
approximately in center of mortar coating.
(2) For pipe and specials 48 inches in diameter and larger, reinforce coating
with 2 layers of spirally-wound No. 12 gage wire spaced at 1-inch centers
or with No. 14 gage steel wire spaced at 1/2-inch centers positioned at the
third points of mortar coating.
(3) Lap ends of reinforcement strips 4 inches and tie or loop free ends to
assure continuity of reinforcement.
(4) All steel wire reinforcement placed in the mortar coating shall be
electrically isolated from the pipe. Electrical isolation will be tested using
high voltage spark test by the manufacturer prior to shipment to the
project site. Provide certification that electrical isolation of reinforcement
wire from steel pipe.
b. Special Fittings:
(1) Coating for steel plate specials may be reinforced with 2-inch by 4-inch
No. 13 gage welded wire mesh in lieu of reinforcing specified above.
(2) One layer of mesh shall be positioned approximately in center of coating
for specials smaller than 48 inches in diameter; 2 layers of mesh shall be
positioned at the third points of coating for specials 48 inches in diameter
and larger.
c. Coating Defects:
(1) Coating defects shall be repaired as specified in AWWA C205, except as
specified this section.
4. Cement Mortar Overcoat:
a. Cement mortar overcoat tape wrapped coated steel pipe as specified in AWWA
C205, except mortar coating shall be applied over exterior pipe coating.
b. Mortar coating shall be held back 3 inches, minimum, behind dielectric coating
system cut back at joints.
c. Cement mortar overcoat holdback shall be increased with extruded
polyethylene coating as required to for coating shrinkage and as required to
maintain the minimum overlap specified for joint coating application.
d. Coating Defects:
(1) Cracking in the mortar “armor” coat less than 1/8-inch in width will be
acceptable.
(2) Disbondment of the cement coating over a dielectric coating system
should be anticipated and will not be grounds for repair or rejection of the
pipe.
(3) Losses of cement mortar coating due to impact, movement, or shipping
damage shall be repaired in accordance with C205.
e. Joint Coating:
(1) Joints of cement mortar overcoat dielectrically coated pipe do not require
field application of cement mortar overcoat when properly coated with
heat shrink sleeve joint coating system.

3.4 SHOP-APPLIED LINING APPLICATION

A. Shop-applied Cement Mortar Lining:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 22
1. Place mortar lining used in steel piping and steel plate specials in pipe to thickness
below.

Pipe Diameter,
Inches
Lining Thickness,
Inches
Tolerances,
Inches
4 through 10
11 through 24
24 through 36
Greater than 36
1/4
5/16
3/8
1/2
-1/16, +1/8
-1/16, +1/8
-1/16, +1/8
-1/16, +3/16

2. Centrifugally line straight sections of pipe. Lining of special pieces or fittings shall
be by mechanical, pneumatic, or hand placement. Provide cement mortar lining of
uniform thickness. Finish to a smooth dense surface.
a. Steel plate specials larger than 16 inches in diameter shall have lining
reinforced with 2-inch by 4-inch No. 13-gage welded steel wire mesh.
b. Brace and support pipe during lining application to minimize pipe distortion
or vibration. Bracing and supports shall not damage the pipe, coating, or
lining.
c. Tightly close ends of pipe and fittings with plastic sheet caps. Plastic end caps
shall be of sufficient thickness and strength to resist shipping, handling, and
storage stresses.
d. Damage to the cement mortar lining, including disbondment, cracking, or
blistering, caused by improper curing, shipping, handling, or installation shall
be repaired in accordance with AWWA specifications and to the satisfaction of
the Engineer.
3. Other requirements of mortar lining materials and processes: As specified in
AWWA C205.

B. Liquid Epoxy Lining:
1. Pipe Lining, Direct to Metal
a. Where epoxy lining on steel pipe is specified or shown on drawings or where
the pipe is not cement mortar lined, an epoxy lining shall be applied directly to
the steel surface as specified in Section 09 90 00, Protective Coatings.
b. Immersion System specified in Section 09 90 00, shall be modified to three
coats, minimum, at a total coating thickness of 20 mils dry film thickness.
2. Pipe Lining, Insulating Joints:
a. Coating applied over cement mortar lining shall be applied in a manner that
will minimize gassing and pinholes in the completed lining.
b. Clean and coat the interior of cement mortar lined pipe at insulating joints with
two coats of epoxy coating.
c. Epoxy coating applied at insulating joints shall be applied to both sides of the
insulating joint for a minimum of one pipe diameter. If only one side of the
joint can be coated the coating shall be applied for a minimum of two pipe
diameters.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 23
d. Mortar lining shall be allowed to cure 15 days or steam cured not less than 7
days prior to surface preparation of the mortar and epoxy coating application.
Hand applied mortar lining shall be allowed to cure a minimum of 15 days or
as required to meet the coating manufacturer’s requirements for application
on cement or concrete, whichever is greater.
e. Prepared mortar lining by abrasive blasting to remove all laitance and create
a suitable anchor profile
f. Mortar lining shall be dry during epoxy lining application.

3.5 COATING AND LINING HOLDBACK

A. All coating and lining holdback areas shall be prepared as specified for the pipeline
coating and protected from corrosion during storage and installation with a specified
holdback coating system.

B. Internal holdback for cement mortar lined pipe shall be left unprepared and unprimed.

C. Internal holdbacks for dielectrically lined pipe shall be left bare and prepared and lined
in the field as specified for field lining of joints after joint assembly.

D. External holdbacks shall be as listed below with all dimensions based on end of bell or
spigot. Pipe manufacturer may adjust holdback limits as required for special joint
assemblies, and with consideration for the joint coating provided and joint welding
requirements. All dimensions from end of pipe.

Tape wrap coating
Push-on joint, spigot 1-inch, minimum after centerline of
gasket.
Push-on, bell Flush with bell end
Welded, spigot 1 inches, minimum
Welded, Bell Stab Depth + 2-inches, minimum
Epoxy coating
Push-on joint, spigot 1-inch after centerline of gasket
Push-on, bell Flush with bell end
Welded, spigot 3 inches, minimum
Welded, Bell Stab Depth + 2-inches, minimum
Extruded polyolefin
Welded joints, spigot 3-inch Minimum
Welded joints, Bell Stab Depth + 2-inches, Minimum
Push-on joints Not applied to bell or spigot

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 24
E. Coating holdbacks shall be straight and cut through the full thickness of the coating.

F. Cutbacks shall be completed in a manner that permits field coating of joints in
accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations and as specified herein.

3.6 FIELD COATING JOINTS

A. General:
1. Joint bonds shall be installed before application of joint coating as specified in
Section 26 42 14, CORROSON MONITORING.
2. Joint bonds shall be low profile bonds and all gaps and crevices around the bonds
shall be filled with filler mastic.
3. Filler mastic shall be placed under copper strap bonds and extended ½ inch
minimum beyond edges of bond to allow for sealing with heat shrink sleeve.
4. Contractor to electrically test completed joint coating for holidays with high voltage
spark tester at Engineer’s direction or if damage to the joint coating occurs.

B. Field Surface Preparation:
1. Pipe joints with hold back corrosion protection:
a. Perform salt contamination removal as specified under Surface Preparation.
b. Field prepare joint in accordance with SSPC-SP1, solvent cleaning, and SP3,
Power tool cleaning, to remove all dirt, mud, oil, and grease prior to application
of heat shrink sleeve.
c. Any visible rusting areas shall be spot prepared in accordance with SP-11,
power tool to bare metal.
2. Pipe joints without hold back corrosion protection:
a. Perform salt contamination removal as specified under Surface Preparation.
b. Abrasively blast joint in field in accordance with SSPC-SP5, white metal blast.
c. Sweep blast epoxy coating for 2-inches for 80-grit sandpaper equivalent
profile for coating adhesion.
3. All loose or damage coating shall be removed and repaired per specified coating
repair procedures.

C. Weld After Backfill’ Joint Requirements:
1. Post-welded or ‘Weld after Backfill’ joints are defined as welded pipe joints that
have been coated and backfilled prior to completing interior welds.
2. Post welded joints shall be coated and protected as follows:
a. Joint coating shall be heat shrink joint sleeves only with a minimum coating
thickness over the weld heat affected zone of not less than 120 mils before
welding. Tape wrapped joints or heat resistant tape will not be acceptable.
b. Manufacturer’s recommendations for heat shrink sleeves selection and
application and this specification shall govern WAB joints. If a conflict occurs,
the more stringent requirement shall apply.
c. Hold back primer shall be suitable for post weld conditions as specified this
section and shall not exhibit any binder breakdown in the heat affected zone
that causes loss of joint coating adhesion to the holdback primer.
d. Filler mastic materials shall be high temperature material with 500 degree F
melting point.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 25
e. Joints shall be fully buried prior to welding, with not less than 12-inch soil
cover or flowable fill material on all sides. Sand or flowable fill backfill is
preferred for weld after backfill joints. Crush rock or angular gravel backfill
can be detrimental to the heat shrink sleeve when using WAB procedures.
f. Heat shrink sleeves after WAB shall exhibit no holidays, burn through of
coating, creasing, carbonization of the sleeve adhesive, or disbondment of the
sleeve or holdback primer.
3. Welding of the joints shall be in conformance with Section 33 11 11, Steel Pipe, and
as modified herein:
a. All welding shall be with two or more weld passes as required to meet the
specified AWS qualified welding procedures and maximum coating
temperature limitations. ‘Weld after Backfill’ procedures on wall thicknesses
of ¼ inch or less must be approved by the Engineer based on field testing
demonstrating the welding procedures can comply with the requirements of
this specification.
b. Welding speed, amperage, and voltage shall be as required to maintain a
maximum heat input of 23,000 joules or a maximum surface temperature at
the coating/steel interface of 750 degrees F, whichever is least.
c. Maximum weld temperature and duration shall not result in carbonization of
the joint coating adhesive. Carbonization is defined as the loss of volatile
organic compounds that result in loss of tackiness, adhesion to the steel, and
corrosion protection properties.
d. Finished joint coating shall not have any visual creases or folds in the joint
coating backing material that extends through both the inner protective layer
and outer joint sleeve.
4. If Contractor elects to post-weld any joints, Contractor shall demonstrate that the
joint welding procedures will not significantly damage the coating by fully
excavating the first two joints for evaluation of the joint coating condition.
Engineer will randomly select up to three additional post-welded joints for
excavation by Contractor for evaluation of joint coating condition. Joint coating will
be destructively evaluated by the Engineer. Contractor will remove and replace
joint heat shrink sleeve upon completion of the evaluation.
5. If any excavated post welded joint exhibits any heat related damage as defined
herein, Contractor shall modify and test a new post welding procedure prior to
completing any additional post-welded joints. Contractor shall demonstrate that
the revised joint welding procedure will not significantly damage the coating by
repeating the weld after backfill evaluation requirements defined this Section,
including excavation of the three additional randomly selected joints for
destructive evaluation.

D. Heat Shrink Sleeve Joint Coating:
1. Store, handle, and apply field heat shrink sleeve coatings in accordance with AWWA
C216 and these specifications.
2. Store sleeves in shipping box until use is required. Keep dry and sheltered from
exposure to direct sunlight. Store off the ground or concrete floors and maintain at
a temperature between 60 and 100 degrees as recommended by the sleeve
manufacturer.
3. Joint shall be prepared as specified in Pipe Joint Surface Preparation.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 26
4. Preheat pipe uniformly as recommended by the sleeve manufacturer. Monitor pipe
temperature using a surface temperature gauge, infrared thermometer, or color
changing crayons. Protect preheated pipe from rain, snow, frost, or moisture with
tenting or shields and do not permit the joint to cool.
5. Apply filler material as specified in Field Applied Coating Systems.
6. Apply heat shrink sleeve when sleeve has a minimum temperature of 60 degrees
and while maintaining the pipe temperature above the preheat temperature
specified. Apply sleeve in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and
center the sleeve over the joint to provide a minimum 2-inch overlap onto the
existing pipe coating.
7. Acceptable joint sleeve installations shall meet the following requirements:
a. Shall be fully bonded to the pipe and existing coating surface without tenting
or voids.
b. Mastic beading shall be visible along the full circumference of the sleeve.
c. There shall be no wrinkling or excessive burns on the sleeves.
8. Sleeves that do not meet these requirements shall be removed and the joint
recoated as directed by the Engineer. Minor repairs may be repaired using heat
applied patch material specified for minor coating repairs.
9. Allow the sleeve to cool before backfilling. Water quenching will be allowed if
permitted by the sleeve manufacturer.
10. Heat shrink joint coatings which have become wrinkled or disbonded because of
prolonged exposure to UV light or thermal cycling shall be removed and replaced.
11. Double coating of defective or damaged heat shrink coatings will not be permitted.
Any double coated heat shrink sleeves shall be immediately rejected and
Contractor shall remove the existing coating and recoat the joint.

E. Cement Mortar Overcoat Coating:
1. Joints of cement mortar coated pipe shall be cement mortar coated in accordance
with AWWA C205.
2. Polyethylene Foam Joint Diapers:
a. Cut into strips wide enough to match uncoated field joint area.
b. Slit to thickness of 1/4 inch that will expose a hollow or open cell surface on
one side.
c. Foam liner shall be attached to fabric backing with open or hollow cells facing
towards pipe.
d. Foam strip shall cover full interior circumference of grout band with sufficient
length to permit 8-inch overlap of foam at or near top of joint.
e. Splices to provide continuity of material will be permitted.
f. Protect polyethylene foam material from direct sunlight.
3. Field repair cement mortar coating in accordance with AWWA C205.

3.7 FIELD APPLIED INTERIOR JOINT LINING

A. Mortar Lining:
1. After backfilling pipe, interior joint recess shall be filled with grout.
2. The grout shall be tightly packed into the joint recess and troweled flush with the
interior surface. Excess material shall be removed from pipe.
3. At no point shall there be an indentation or projection of the mortar exceeding
1/16-inch.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 27
4. On pipe smaller than 24-inches in diameter, bell shall be daubed with grout before
the spigot is inserted into the bell. The joint shall be completed and excess mortar
on the inside of the joint shall be swabbed.

3.8 REPAIR OF COATING AND LININGS

A. General:
1. All areas where holidays are detected or coating is visually damaged, such as
blisters, tears, rips, bubbles, wrinkles, cuts, or other defects , shall be repaired.
Areas where no holidays are detected, but are visually damaged shall also be
repaired.
2. Maximum defects allowable shall be as specified herein for the coating system.

B. Tape Wrap Coating Repairs:
1. General:
a. No more than five repairs per joint of pipe will be permitted with tape wrap
coating, excluding adhesion test damage. The coating on any pipe with more
than five coating repairs or with more than two areas of coating damage
greater than five square feet will be rejected.
b. Pipes exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects shall be
stripped, reblasted, and recoated.
c. Pipe arriving in the field with defects or repairs exceeding the maximum
number or size of coating defects will be returned to the shop for recoating at
the Contractor’s expense.
d. The number of layers and total thickness of the tape repair coating shall be the
same as the shop-applied coating; unless heat applied coating materials is
used.
e. Wipe the area to be repaired with solvent for a minimum distance of 4 inches
outside the damaged area.
2. Defect Size:
a. Minor repairs - repairs that are less than 8 inches in the greatest dimension,
measured after cutout of damaged tape layers. Damage to the inner tape layer
will be considered minor only if repairs are made using heat applied patch
materials.
b. Major repairs - repairs that exceed 8-inches in the greatest dimension or
where damage to the inner tape layer has occurred and hand applied tape
repairs will be used.
3. Minor Repairs:
a. Complete minor repairs using a heat applied coating patch material.
b. Cut patch material to overlap onto the undamaged coating a minimum of
2 inches on all sides with 1-inch radius on each corner of the patch.
c. Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife
without cutting or damaging the inner wrap.
d. Cut middle and outer layers in stepped fashion to expose 1-inch or more of the
underlying tape layer for the circumference of the repair.
4. Major Repairs (Over 24-inches Diameter):
a. Cigarette wrap coating repairs shall be with heat shrink sleeves as specified
for joints.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 28
b. Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife
without cutting or damaging the inner wrap.
c. Holiday test the inner wrap and if a holiday is detected cut outer layers back
to fully exposed the holiday(s) and retest for holidays.
d. Cut middle and outer layers in stepped fashion to expose 1-inch or more of the
underlying tape layer for the circumference of the repair.
e. Width of sleeve shall be the width of the damaged area plus 4-inch overlap.
Multiple sleeves may be used for larger repairs, but must be overlapped a
minimum of 2 inches.
5. Major Repairs (24-inch Diameter or Less)
a. Cigarette wrap repairs on pipe less than 24-inches with either hand applied
tape wrap or heat shrink sleeves as specified at the Contractor’s option.
b. Carefully remove damaged layers by cutting the coating with a sharp knife
without cutting or damaging the inner wrap.
c. Holiday test the inner wrap and if a holiday is detected apply one extra layer
of repair tape.
d. Clean surfaces by solvent wiping and applying primer over the inner tape layer
for a minimum of 6-inches onto the outer wrap in all directions.
e. Apply first layer of repair coating, over lapping 1-inch or more onto
undamaged coating in all directions. On larger areas, lap the repair tape within
a minimum of 1-inch overlap, offsetting the overlap from the previous layer
overlap, until the area is properly covered.
f. Repeat for each tape layer damaged with each succeeding layer applied at 90
degrees to the preceding layers and overlapping onto the undamaged coating
a minimum of 2-inches.
g. Apply the last tape layer, use the cigarette wrap method for the full pipeline
circumference covering all previous repair layers and overlapping a minimum
of 2-inches onto undamaged coating. The ends of the cigarette wrap shall be
pointed downward.

C. Epoxy Coating or Lining Repairs
1. General
a. Complete coating or lining repairs in accordance with the coating
manufacturers written instructions and these specifications, whichever is
stricter.
2. Defect Size:
a. Minor repairs - repairs that are less than 8-inches in the greatest dimension.
b. Major repairs - repairs that exceed 8-inches in the greatest dimension.
3. Maximum Quantity of Defects Allowed:
a. Coating or lining repairs on any joint of pipe shall not exceed 1.5 per 100
square feet of surface area.
(1) Two or more minor repairs within a 8-inches diameter circle will be
considered a single repair.
(2) Repairs for adhesion testing will not be included in the total number of
repairs.
b. Major repairs shall not exceed three per pipe joint and the combined area shall
not be greater than 30 percent of the pipe.
c. Pipes exceeding the maximum number or size of coating defects shall be
stripped of coating, reblasted, and recoated.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 29
d. Pipe arriving in the field with defects or repairs exceeding the maximum
number or size of coating defects will be returned to the shop for recoating at
the contractor’s expense.
4. Minor Repairs:
a. Minor repairs
(1) Surface Preparation: Clean and feather the defect by power tool sanding
with 80 grit or coarser sandpaper to roughen the existing coat and feather
the edges of the defect for a minimum of 2-inches around the defect.
(2) Shop repair Materials:
(a) Single use coating kits to match the pipe coating.
(b) Two component, fast cure epoxy coating, in controlled mix ratio
packaging.
a) Protal 7125, North American Denso Inc, or equal
b) Or equal.
(c) Coating Manufacturer’s coating repair products are subject to
Engineer approval.
(3) Field Repair Materials:
(a) Heat applied coating materials; CRP Patch, Canusa; PERP Patch, Tyco
Adhesives, or approved equal.
(b) Two component, fast cure epoxy coating, in controlled mix ratio
packaging.
a) Protal 7125, North American Denso, Inc,
b) Or equal.
(c) Single use coating kits to match pipe coating.
(d) Coating Manufacturer’s coating repair products are subject to
Engineer approval.
(4) Clean and feather the defect by power tool sanding with 80 grit or coarser
sandpaper to roughen the existing coating and feather defect edges
minimum of 2-inches.
(5) Apply a single coat of the specified patch coating material at the specified
coating thickness.
(6) Repair coating adhesion shall be 50 percent of the specified coating
adhesion.
5. Major Repairs:
a. Major repairs:
(1) Surface Preparation:
(a) The metal surface and surrounding coating shall be abrasively
blasted in accordance with SSPC-SP10, near white metal, or to equal
in cleanliness and profile as the original surface preparation.
(b) Existing coating shall be feathered and roughened to the equivalent
of 40 grit sandpaper.
(2) Shop Repair Materials:
(a) Same material as the pipeline coating or lining and shall be applied
by using plural component spray equipment.
(3) Field Repair Materials:
(a) Same material as the pipeline coating or lining and shall be applied
by using plural component spray equipment.
(b) Heat shrink sleeves as specified for pipeline joints.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 30
b. One coat of the specified original coating material shall be applied over the
repaired surface at the specified thickness.
c. Repair adhesion shall be equal to the specified coating adhesion.

D. Cement Mortar Coating
1. Cement mortar coating that is cracked or disbonded shall be repaired in accordance
with AWWA C205, except for mortar overcoat on tape wrapped steel.
2. Disbonded mortar coating shall be removed and patched.
3. Mortar coating with disbondment greater than 25 percent of the pipe surface shall
be rejected and recoated.
4. Cracks in mortar coating shall be repaired in accordance with AWWA C205.

3.9 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. General
1. Applicator shall inspect and test the coating system in accordance with referenced
standards and these specifications, whichever is more stringent.
2. Quality control testing as specified in AWWA standards are minimum industry
standards and it is the intent of this specification to provide a higher level of quality
control for the objective of achieving maximum coating performance. If any conflict
between this specification and referenced standards occurs, the more stringent
requirement shall apply and any interpretation of this requirement or results shall
be with the objective of achieving maximum coating performance.
3. The frequency of the testing shall be determined by the applicator, but shall not be
less than the requirements of this specification.

B. Soluble Salt Contamination (SSC) Testing
1. Residual soluble salt contamination (SSC) shall be verified using an Elcometer
Model E130-TC Salt Contamination Meter before and after surface preparation.
2. Testing after blasting is not required if the preblast test passes the maximum
soluble salt contamination criteria.
3. Maximum soluble salt contamination levels shall be:
a. 2.0 µg/cm2 – Immersion or buried
b. 5.0 µg/cm2 – non-immersion
4. Compliance with SSC limits shall be based on the average of three tests at three
locations, which can be on multiple pipes or components at the Engineer’s
discretion.

C. Surface Profile Testing
1. Surface profile of abrasive blasted surfaces to be tested with “Press-O-Film” tester
tape or equivalent in accordance with NACE RP287.
2. Tester tape shall be suitable for the intended profile height.
3. Profile shall be measured to a minimum tolerance of 0.1 mils, maximum.
4. Electronic surface profilometer shall be used, where deemed necessary, to verify
tester tape measurements.

D. Adhesion Testing
1. General

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 31
a. Adhesion testing shall be conducted at the shop prior to shipment. Pipe
shipped without adhesion testing will be field-tested. Pipe rejected in the field
will be returned to the shop for repair at the sole expense of the Contractor.
b. Coating adhesion testing shall be conducted on each pipe lot coated. The
quantity of coating adhesion tests shall be the greater of the following:
(1) Two pipes will be tested for the first 3,000 square feet of coating
application plus on additional pipe for each. increment of 2,000 square
feet of coating application in excess of the first 3,000 square feet
(2) Not less than 33 percent of each pipe produced within a lot.
c. A pipe lot is defined as the quantity of pipe that is coated by a single crew
within a 12 hour or less work shift.
d. The pipe coating applicator shall repair all coating damage from shop adhesion
testing. Contractor shall be responsible for coating repairs for all field
adhesion testing.
e. Adhesion tests will be performed not less than 24 hours after coating
application. Tests conducted prior to 24-hours will be acceptable only if the
test meets or exceeds the adhesion criteria specified and the test was
requested by the pipe fabricator.
f. Pipe will be randomly selected for adhesion testing.
g. Owner or the Owner’s Representative has the right to conduct additional
adhesion testing as deemed necessary to assure the pipe meets or exceeds the
requirements of this specification at any time and location.
h. Prior to beginning any QA/QC testing, the pipe fabricator, coating
manufacturer, and Engineer shall review dolly attachment procedures,
adhesion test procedures, and data recording requirements for the project and
ensure that test personnel are qualified and capable of performing the testing
in accordance with required test standards and these specifications.
2. Rejection of Pipeline Coating or Lining
a. Each pipe that fails the adhesion criteria, as defined this section, shall be
rejected.
b. If any pipe within a lot that fails to meet the adhesion criteria specified for the
coating type, the pipe coating will be rejected and all pipes within the lot will
be classified as rejected. Each remaining pipe within the rejected pipe lot will
then be individually tested and rejected on a pipe-by-pipe basis in
conformance with the test procedures and criteria specific to the coating type.
c. All rejected pipe shall have the coating fully removed from the pipe and the
pipe abrasive blasted and recoated.
3. Tape Coating Adhesion Testing:
a. Adhesion Acceptance Criteria:
(1) Inner tape coating shall have an adhesion to substrate of 20 pounds per
inch width, minimum, for steel pipe when tape is pulled in a continuous
manner at an angle of 180 degrees to the pipe surface.
(2) Inner tape coating shall have an adhesion to substrate of 15 pounds per
inch width, minimum, for ductile iron pipe when tape is pulled in a
continuous manner at an angle of 180 degrees to the pipe surface.
(3) extruded polyolefin coating shall have an adhesion to substrate of 30
pounds per inch width, minimum, when coating is pulled in a continuous
manner at an angle of 180 degrees to the pipe surface. Adhesion testing

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 32
for extruded polyolefin shall be performed as specified for tape wrap
coating.
b. Test Procedures
(1) Adhesion testing shall be conducted prior to application of the cement
mortar overcoat, where applicable. Pipe that has been mortar coated
prior to adhesion testing shall have the mortar coating removed by the
Contractor as directed by the Engineer and of sufficient dimensional area
to permit the adhesion test to be conducted.
(2) Adhesion tests shall be conducted at temperatures above 60 degrees and
less than 75 degrees.
(3) Pulling tension shall be continuous, without stopping, and monitored
throughout the length of the pull, which shall be not less than 12-inches
in length.
(4) Adhesion test shall be prepared by making two parallel cuts through the
coating, 1-inch apart, of sufficient length for the test pull. Peel the coating
back at one end and attach the tension scale to the coating with a suitable
clamp. Mark the coating at one (1) inch increments from 0 to 12-inches.
(5) The pull tension shall be recorded for each inch of pull. The two highest
and two lowest readings shall be discarded and the remaining values
averaged. Pull speed shall be not less than 5 seconds per inch or greater
than 10 seconds per inch. If significant elongation of the tape backing
occurs, pull speeds may exceed 10 seconds per inch provided the
minimum adhesion rating can still be achieved.
c. Adhesion Pull Records and Evaluation
(1) Failure shall be by cohesive failure of the adhesive only. Delamination
failure, defined as separation of the adhesive from the backing material,
will result in rejection of the tape lot.
(2) Intermittent skip failures will be counted as zero pounds of adhesion and
included in the calculations for average coating adhesion.
(3) Adhesive failure, defined as separation of the adhesive from the metal
substrate, will be rejected.
(4) Pipe that fails the test by delamination will be retested on two other pipes
within the same lot of coated pipe. Failure of any two pipes within the lot
will result in rejection of all pipes coated with the rejected tape lot.
4. Plural Component Epoxy Adhesion Testing:
a. Adhesion testing shall be performed in accordance with this specification
section. Adhesion testing procedures and evaluations per AWWA C210 or
C222 are specifically excluded under this specification.
b. Test Procedures
(1) Coating adhesion testing shall be with self-aligning pneumatic pull off
equipment, such as the Delfesko Positest AT-A, and test procedures in
accordance with ASTM D4541, except as modified in this section.
(a) All adhesion tests shall be performed at an applied load rate of
100 psi per second, plus or minus 10 psi. Automatic adhesion test
equipment shall be used.
(b) Tests shall be performed to coating or glue failure or maximum test
load, whichever is greater.
(c) Adhesion tests shall be based on the ASTM D4541 using standard
20 mm dollies.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 33
(d) Adhesion testing shall be based on three tests. All three tests shall be
conducted by the same person, test equipment, and test procedure,
and must be completed within a 30 minute period.
(e) All adhesion tests shall be conducted within an area not to exceed
6-inches by 6-inches.
(f) All coatings with more than 10 percent elongation or 25 mils thick
shall be scored around dolly to metal substrate using manual
methods and tools, normal to the pipe surface, and in a manner that
does not stress or over heat the coating.
(g)
(h) All adhesion tests shall be performed to coating or glue failure or test
termination, whichever comes first.
(2) Dollies for adhesion testing shall attached to the coating surface using an
two part epoxy or cyanoacrylate glue and allowed to cure for a minimum
of 12 hours before testing or until full cure, whichever is greater. Glue
type used shall be determined by the pipe fabricator and coating
manufacturer for the pipe diameter, temperatures, and environmental
conditions.
(3) Adhesion testing shall be performed at temperatures between 55 and 90
degrees F or at temperatures as recommended by the coating
manufacturer. Testing up to 115 degrees F or below 55 degrees will be
permitted if tests can demonstrate no statistically detectable effect on test
results and with coating manufacturer and Engineer approval.
c. Epoxy Coating and Lining Adhesion Criteria
(1) Coating is acceptable if first dolly pull test exceeds 1,750 psi, minimum.
(2) If first dolly pull is less than 1,750 psi, two additional tests shall be
performed with acceptance based on “Best of Three” evaluation method
as defined herein.
d. Pipe Lot Performance Criteria:
(1) Each lot of coated pipe shall be evaluated for general coating application
based on a median value for all coating or lining adhesion tests performed
on a lot of pipe, which shall be greater than 2,000 psi.
(2) Any pipe lot failing the Pipe Lot Performance Criteria shall be classified as
rejected until 100 percent of the pipe within the pipe lot has been tested
for adhesion. Each pipe that fails the coating adhesion criteria shall be
rejected.
e. Adhesion Test Evaluation and Records
(1) The “Best of three” evaluation method shall be defined as two of three test
values less than the Acceptance Criteria, which shall result in rejection of
the pipe coating.
(2) All adhesion tests shall be considered as valid and suitable for acceptance
or rejection of the coating, except where retesting is allowed.
(3) Adhesion test failure shall be by adhesive or substrate and cohesive
failure as defined below:
(a) Adhesive or substrate failure is defined as a percentage of separation
of the coating from the steel substrate or between distinct coating
layers.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 34
(b) Cohesive failure is defined as a percentage of failure within the
coating, resulting in coating remaining both on the steel substrate
and test dolly.
(4) Retesting of coating adhesion tests will be allowed when any test is glue
failure at 25 percent or more of dolly surface area and the test value is less
than the Acceptance Criteria or the Minimum Criteria.
(5) All coating adhesion retesting shall be within the same 6-inch by 6-inch
test area as the original adhesion testing.
(6) Disputed adhesion tests shall be retested as defined for adhesion
retesting. Dolly attachment and adhesion retesting shall be witnessed by
the Owner’s representative.
(7) Adhesion tests will be conducted on pipe coating and lining
independently and will be accepted or rejected independently.
(8) Records of all adhesion tests shall be maintained in an electronic
spreadsheet that includes the following information:
(a) Pipe identification,
(b) Pipe coating date,
(c) Adhesion test date,
(d) Surface tested (interior or exterior),
(e) Surface temperature at time of test,
(f) Coating thickness,
(g) tensile force applied,
(h) Applied load rate per second,
(i) Mode of failure, and
(j) Percentage of failure types, previously defined, relative to dolly
surface area,
(k) Dolly size and attachment glue used.
(l) If different coatings are tested, the records shall include coating
manufacturer and product number.
f. Adhesion Test Repairs
(1) Fabricator or contractor to complete adhesion repairs as specified this
section.
(2) Repair patches on epoxy coating shall be randomly selected for adhesion
testing in a manner as described herein and at the discretion of the coating
inspector conducting the adhesion tests. Adhesion of repairs shall be as
specified for the type of repair.

E. Holiday Testing
1. Holiday test the inner layer of tape wrap coatings after application and prior to
subsequent tape layer in accordance with AWWA C214 and NACE RP-0274.
2. Holiday test extruded polyolefin coating after application in accordance with
AWWA C215 and NACE Standard RP-0274, whichever is more stringent.
3. Holiday tests on epoxy coatings or linings over 15 mils DFT shall be conducted on
the completed coating or lining after cure or 24-hours, whichever is less, using a
high voltage spark test in accordance with NACE SP0274 and these specifications.
4. Holiday testing on epoxy coatings or linings less than 15 mils DFT shall be high
voltage spark tested in accordance with NACE SP0188, except as modified herein.
5. High voltage setting shall be the average measured coating thickness in mils times
125 volts, minimum.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 35
6. Wet sponge or low voltage holiday testing will not be permitted.

F. Dry Film Thickness Testing
1. Coatings shall be tested for dry film thickness using a properly calibrated magnetic
pull off, eddy current, or ultrasonic equipment.
2. Coating thickness measurements shall be conducted as necessary and without
limitation. Testing conformance to the requirements of SSPC PA-2 is specifically
excluded from this specification.

G. Salt Contamination Testing
1. Engineer shall perform salt contamination testing with an Elcometer Model E130-
TC Salt Contamination meter as defined under Surface Preparation.
2. Quantity of tests performed shall be determined the Engineer based on prevailing
field conditions.
3. Objective is to assess and remove wind borne salts contamination on surfaces to be
coated. Because wind and environmental conditions can change the frequency and
location of testing may need to be varied.
4. At a minimum, tests should be performed daily before and after pressure washing
of surfaces to be coated.
5. Surfaces identified to be excessively contaminated shall be cleaned by the
Contractor to meet the acceptance criteria specified under Surface Preparation.

3.10 HANDLING, TRANSPORTATION, AND STORAGE

A. Pipe shall be handled in such a manner as to protect the pipe and coating from damage.

B. Coated pipe shall not be shipped or installed until coating has developed full adhesion
and cure.

C. During coating application, storage, loading, transportation, unloading, laying and
installation, every precaution shall be taken to protect and prevent damage to pipe,
lining, and coating. Forklift equipment shall have all bearing surfaces padded with
suitable padding material. Lift pipe with web slings a minimum of 12-inch wide and of
a type that will not damage the coating. Metal chains, cable, tongs, forklifts or other
equipment likely to damage the coating will not be permitted. Dragging or skidding of
pipe on grade or in the trench will not be permitted.

D. Provide transportation vehicles with padded bolsters between each layer of pipe and
heavy padding under load ties. Bolsters shall be curved to fit the outside of the pipe and
12 inches wide, minimum. All pipe contact locations shall be heavily padded with carpet
and strips of the outer tape wrap material (adhesive side against the carpet) during
shipment to the project site and from the storage yard to the point of installation.

E. Pipe shall not be stored on rocks, gravel, or other hard materials that might damage the
coating. Provide padded 12-inch wide skids and chucks, sand bags, select loamy or sand
berms, or suspended from cutback ends, where possible, to minimize coating damage.
Pipe shall not be laid on asphalt without suitable padding at all contact points.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPELINE COATINGS AND LININGS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 90 10 - 36
F. Pipe shall be inspected by the Contractor at the project site for damage. Any damage to
the pipe, lining, or coating shall be repaired as directed if, in the opinion of the Engineer,
a satisfactory repair can be made; otherwise, the damaged section shall be replaced at
the sole expense to the Contractor.

G. No metal tools or heavy objects shall be permitted to come into contact unnecessarily
with the finished coating. Workmen shall not be permitted to walk on the coating except
when necessary and approved by the Engineer. When permitted, shoes with rubber or
composition soles and heels or other suitable footwear that will not damage coating
shall be used.

H. Long-term Exposure:
1. Pipe shall either be provided with UV inhibitor for lengthy of above grade exposure
or covered to prevent UV degradation of outer wrap.
2. Amount of UV stabilizers required will depend on the project location, laying
schedule, anticipated length of exposure, and type of coating.
3. Manufacturer shall be consulted for recommended UV inhibitors requirements.
4. Protective covering can be colored plastic sheeting, canvas, or other UV blocking
material. Clear plastic sheets are not acceptable.
5. Areas of coating that display UV degradation shall be removed and repaired at sole
cost of the Contractor.

END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INTERIOR PAINTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 91 23 - 1
SECTION 09 91 23
INTERIOR PAINTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. SURFACE PREPARATION.
B. Field application of paints.
C. Scope: Finish interior surfaces exposed to view, unless fully factory-finished and unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items:
1. Items factory-finished unless otherwise indicated; materials and products having
factory-applied primers are not considered factory finished.
2. Items indicated to receive other finishes.
3. Items indicated to remain unfinished.
4. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels, bar code labels, and
operating parts of equipment.
5. Floors, unless specifically indicated.
6. Glass.
7. Concealed pipes, ducts, and conduits.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
MPI (APSM) - Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual Current
Edition.
SSPC-SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning 2015, with Editorial Revision (2016).
SSPC-SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning 2007.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.
B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand
code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation,
and instructions for mixing and reducing.
C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F (7 degrees C) and a
maximum of 90 degrees F (32 degrees C), in ventilated area, and as required by
manufacturer's instructions.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INTERIOR PAINTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 91 23 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Provide paints and finishes used in any individual system from the same manufacturer; no
exceptions.
B. Paints:
1. Behr Process Corporation: www.behr.com/#sle.
2. PPG Paints: www.ppgpaints.com/#sle.
3. Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com/#sle.
2.2 PAINTS AND FINISHES - GENERAL
A. Paints and Finishes: Ready-mixed, unless intended to be a field-catalyzed paint.
1. Provide paints and finishes of a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and
uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating, with good flow and brushing
properties, and capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.
2. Supply each paint material in quantity required to complete entire project's work
from a single production run.
3. Do not reduce, thin, or dilute paint or finishes or add materials unless such procedure
is specifically described in manufacturer's product instructions.
2.3 PAINT SYSTEMS - INTERIOR
A. Paint I-OP - Interior Surfaces to be Painted, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Including gypsum
board, concrete, concrete masonry units, brick, wood, plaster, uncoated steel, shop primed
steel, galvanized steel, aluminum, and acoustical ceilings.
1. Two top coats and one coat primer.
2. Top Coat(s): High Performance Architectural Interior Latex; MPI #138, 139, 140, 141,
or 142.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
A. PREPARATION
B. Clean surfaces thoroughly and correct defects prior to application.
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
D. Remove or mask surface appurtenances, including electrical plates, hardware, light fixture
trim, escutcheons, and fittings, prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.
E. Seal surfaces that might cause bleed through or staining of topcoat.
F. Gypsum Board: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.
G. Plaster: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. Make
smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high-alkali surfaces.

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INTERIOR PAINTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 91 23 - 3
H. Aluminum: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent according to SSPC-
SP 1.
I. Ferrous Metal:
1. Solvent clean according to SSPC-SP 1.
2. Shop-Primed Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather
edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime
bare steel surfaces. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.
3. Remove rust, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances using methods
recommended in writing by paint manufacturer and blast cleaning according to SSPC-
SP 6 Commercial Blast Cleaning. Protect from corrosion until coated.
J. Wood Surfaces to Receive Opaque Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots,
pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried;
sand between coats. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and
recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual".
B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat
is applied.
C. Apply each coat to uniform appearance in thicknesses specified by manufacturer.
D. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.
E. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just
prior to applying next coat.
F. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings
removed prior to finishing.
END OF SECTION

CRSA
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INTERIOR PAINTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 09 91 23 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

DIVISION 10
SPECIALTIES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 10 44 00 - 1
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire extinguishers.
B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS
A. Section 06 10 53 – Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking product and execution
requirements.
B. Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting: Field paint finish.
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
NFPA 10 - Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers 2022.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Fire Extinguishers:
1. Activar Construction Products Group, Inc. - JL Industries; Cosmic Extinguisher -
Multipurpose Chemical: www.activarcpg.com/#sle.
2. Ansul, a Tyco Business: www.ansul.com/#sle.
3. Kidde, a unit of United Technologies Corp: www.kidde.com/#sle.
2.2 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Fire Extinguishers - General: Comply with product requirements of NFPA 10 and applicable
codes, whichever is more stringent.
B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type Fire Extinguishers: Carbon steel tank, with pressure gauge.
1. Class: A:B:C type.
2.3 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
A. Cabinet Construction: Non-fire rated.
1. Formed primed steel sheet; 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick base metal.
B. Cabinet Configuration: Surface mounted type.
1. Size to accommodate accessories.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 10 44 00 - 2
C. Door: 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) metal thickness, reinforced for flatness and rigidity with nylon
catch. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with two butt hinges.
D. Door Glazing: Acrylic plastic, clear, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, flat shape and set in resilient
channel glazing gasket.
E. Cabinet Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet, with pre-drilled holes for placement of
anchors.
F. Finish of Cabinet Exterior Trim and Door: No.4 - Brushed stainless steel.
G. Finish of Cabinet Interior: White colored enamel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 21
FIRE SUPPRESSION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FACILITY FIRE HYDRANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 21 11 16 - 1
SECTION 21 11 16
FACILITY FIRE HYDRANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide fire hydrants and appurtenances, complete and operable, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. This Section covers the dry-barrel and the wet-barrel types of fire hydrant: however, unless
otherwise indicated, the dry-barrel hydrant shall be provided.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DRY-BARREL FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Construction: Unless otherwise indicated, hydrants shall be the dry-barrel type according to
AWWA C502, with a minimum of one 4-inch or 4-1/2 inch steamer connection, one 2-1/2
inch hose connection, and a 6-inch diameter inlet, except as shown otherwise on the Contract
Drawings. The hose and steamer connections shall be provided with cast iron caps and metal
chains. The barrel shall have a cast iron breakaway section above ground and a lower barrel
of ductile iron, with an elbow or tee-section at the base. The stem shall have a breakaway
coupling, or there shall be some other safety device in case of a fracture. Each hydrant shall
be isolated by an individual buried gate valve with cast iron box and cover. Bolts, nuts, and
washers shall be Type 316 stainless steel, except where otherwise required for structural
reasons.
B. Test Pressures: The hydrants shall be tested to no higher than 80 psig, but shall be designed
and constructed for a suitable working pressure of 150 psig. Interior and exterior surfaces
shall be coated in accordance with AWWA C 550 and Section 9.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. American Flow Control (Darling)
2. American Valve and Hydrant
3. Dresser (M & H Valve Co.)
4. East Jordan Iron Works, Inc.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fire hydrants shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's published
recommendations, AWWA standards, applicable codes, and the applicable provisions of
Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General. Installations shall be to the satisfaction of the local Davis
County Fire, South Weber Fire, and Building departments.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FACILITY FIRE HYDRANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 21 11 16 - 2
B. Hydrant isolating valves with slip joints, friction type, or caulked joint connections shall be
harnessed to the main pipe by means of welded steel harness sets or clamps and steel rods
designed for this purpose. Hydrants with other than flanged inlets shall be installed with a
concrete thrust block, calculated for two times the maximum expected water pressure. Dry-
barrel fire hydrants shall be set on a bed of pea gravel not less than 3-feet deep and 3-feet
square for drainage or as required by local regulations and conditions.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 22
PLUMBING

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 1
SECTION 22 00 00
PLUMBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
SUMMARY
The Contractor shall provide plumbing piping systems, complete and operable, in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
All work shall be in strict accordance with the International Plumbing Code, and codes of the
State of Utah, City of Riverton, and any other authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor
shall have required certifications and be thoroughly familiar with the local codes. The
Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits.
This section covers the following plumbing piping systems and associated accessories:
1. Chemical Waste Piping and Accessories
2. Laboratory Air Piping
3. Natural Gas Piping
4. Sanitary Drains, Vent Piping and Specialties
5. Potable Water Piping
6. Processed Water Piping
This section covers the following plumbing specific items:
1. Hangers and pipe supports
2. Pipe insulation for potable water
3. Oil and Sand Separator
4. Floor drains and cleanouts
5. Transition fittings
6. Access doors and covers
Related sections include: Section 01 33 20 –Submittal Procedures, Section 23 05 00 –
Common Work Results for Plumbing & HVAC, and Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping.
REFERENCE STANDARDS
General Standards
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX
ASME B16 – Standards of Pipes and Fittings
National Fire Protection Agency 70, Article 100
AWS B2.2 – Brazing Procedure and Performance Qualification
ASME B31.3 - Process Piping
Chemical Waste Piping and Accessories:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 2
ASTM D 2665 Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic
Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A 861 Standard Specification for High-Silicon Iron Pipe and Fittings
Potable Water Piping
ASTM B88 Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM A 106/A 106M Standard Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for
High-Temperature Service
CONTACTOR SUBMITTALS
Submit product data for components of each pipe system indicated in accordance with
Section 01 33 20 –Submittal Procedures.
1. Chemical Waste Piping. Provide product data for chemical-waste piping materials,
components, and specialties including:
a. Cleanouts
2. Sanitary Drain, Vent Piping and Specialties. Provide product data for the following
sanitary drain, vent and accessories:
a. Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings
b. Cleanouts
c. Floor drains
3. Potable Water Piping. Provide product data for the following potable water system:
a. Hard and Soft Copper tubing product data.
b. Piping insulation
The Contractor shall submit information on the following items in accordance with Section
01 33 20 –Submittal Procedures.
1. Pipe joining materials
2. Pipe transition fittings including dielectric fittings;
3. Wall sleeves and sleeve sealant systems.
4. Shock Absorbers
5. Pipe hangers.
6. Access doors and covers
The Contractor shall submit information on all valves in accordance with Section 40 05 51 –
Valves, General.

QUALITY ASSURANCE
Source Limitations: Obtain pipe, fittings, and joining materials for each piping system
through one source from a single manufacturer.
Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping," for piping conveying fluid at a pressure of 15 psig
or greater.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 3
1. Exception: Piping from different manufacturers may be used in same system if
indicated and suitable transition fittings matching both piping materials are used.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing laboratory.
Comply with ASME B31.3, "Process Piping."
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
GENERAL
Plumbing piping, fixtures, specialties, and equipment shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer for the intended usage.
CHEMICAL WASTE PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
PVC Drainage Pipe and Fittings: ASTM D 2665, pipe and drainage-pattern fittings.
Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 861; high-silicon iron, with drainage-pattern fittings.
1. Ends: Bell and spigot. Include piping manufacturer's acid-resistant packing and lead
calking materials.
2. Ends: Mechanical joint. Include piping manufacturer's PTFE inner sleeves, CR outer
sleeves, and stainless steel, bolted-clamp couplings.
3. Ends: Flanged. Include piping manufacturer's gaskets, and bolts and nuts.
PTFE-Lined Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 423, pipe and fittings with flanged ends. Include
piping manufacturer's gaskets compatible with system liquid and piping lining, and bolts and
nuts.
PVDF-Lined Steel Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 491, pipe and fittings with flanged ends. Include
piping manufacturer's gaskets compatible with system liquid and piping lining, and bolts and
nuts.
Accessories: Where indicated on the drawings, provide the following accessories for the
chemical waste piping:
1. 1Corrosion-Resistant Traps: P-trap or drum trap; NPS 1-1/2 or NPS 2, as required to
match connected piping.
a. Iron: ASTM A 861, high-silicon iron, with horizontal outlet and bell-and-
spigot or plain ends to match connecting piping.
b. PP: ASTM D 4101, PP resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections.
c. PVDF: ASTM D 3222, PVDF resin, with mechanical-joint pipe connections.
d. Iron Cleanouts: ASTM A 861, high-silicon-iron fitting, with PTFE gasket and
high-silicon-iron closure plug, of design appropriate for piping application.
2. Iron Sink Outlets: ASTM A 861, high-silicon iron, NPS 1-1/2, with clamping device
and 4, 6, or 8 inch high overflow fitting, as indicated.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 4
3. PP Sink Outlets: NPS 1-1/2, with clamping device, stopper, and 7 inch high overflow
fitting.
SANITARY DRAIN, VENT PIPING AND SPECIALTIES
Hub-and-Spigot, Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 74, Service class.
1. Gaskets: ASTM C 564, rubber.
Hubless Cast-Iron Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301.
1. Sovent Stack Fittings: ASME B16.45 or ASSE 1043, hubless, cast-iron aerator and
deaerator drainage fittings.
2. Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-
resistant fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
a. Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel
corrugated shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and
ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
b. Heavy-Duty, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: With stainless-steel shield,
stainless-steel bands and tightening devices, and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
Exposed Cast-Iron Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall conform to ASME A112.36.2M for cast iron for
cleanout test tee.
1. Size: Same as connected drainage piping
2. Body Material: Hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe T-branch, hubless, cast-iron soil
pipe test tee as required to match connected piping.
3. Closure: Countersunk, Countersunk or raised-head.
4. Closure Plug Size: Same as or not more than one size smaller than cleanout size.
5. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group; Specification Drainage Operation.
Cast-Iron Floor Cleanouts: Cleanouts shall conform to ASME A112.36.2M for adjustable
housing, cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule, heavy-duty, adjustable housing, threaded,
adjustable housing cleanout.
1. Size: Same as connected branch.
2. Type: Adjustable housing Cast-iron soil pipe with cast-iron ferrule Heavy-duty,
adjustable housing.
3. Body or Ferrule: Cast iron.
4. Closure: Brass plug with straight threads and gasket, Brass plug with tapered threads,
Cast-iron plug.
5. Adjustable Housing Material: Cast iron with threads, set-screws or other device.
6. Frame and Cover Material and Finish: Nickel-bronze, copper alloy.
7. Frame and Cover Shape: Round.
8. Top Loading Classification: Heavy Duty.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 5
9. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. Sioux Chief Manufacturing Company, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group
Floor Drains: Cast-Iron Floor Drains shall conform to the following, see schedules on
drawings:
1. Top or Strainer Material: Bronze, Gray iron, nickel bronze.
2. Top of Body and Strainer Finish: Nickel bronze, Polished bronze, Rough bronze
3. Top Shape: Round.
4. Top Loading Classification:
5. Trap Material: Cast iron.
6. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
7. Trap Features: Cleanout, Trap-seal primer valve drain connection, Cleanout and trap-
seal primer valve drain connection.
8. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Josam Company; Josam Div.
b. MIFAB, Inc.
c. Smith, Jay R. Mfg. Co.; Division of Smith Industries, Inc.
d. Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
e. Watts Drainage Products Inc.
f. Zurn Plumbing Products Group.
Miscellaneous Sanitary Drainage Piping Specialties
1. Open Drains: Shop or field fabricate from ASTM A 74, Service class, hub-and-spigot,
cast-iron, soil-pipe fittings. Include P-trap, hub-and-spigot riser section; and where
required, increaser fitting joined with ASTM C 564, rubber gaskets. The size shall be
the same as connected waste piping with increaser fitting of size indicated.
2. Floor-Drain, Trap-Seal Primer Fittings: Description: Cast iron, with threaded inlet
and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap-seal primer valve connection. The size shall
be the same as floor drain outlet with NPS 1/2 side inlet.
3. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design.
Include vented hood and setscrews to secure to vent pipe. The size shall be the same
as connected stack vent or vent stack.
4. Air-Gap Fittings: Fittings shall conform to ASME A112.1.2, for fitting designed to
ensure fixed, positive air gap between installed inlet and outlet piping.
a. Body: Bronze or cast iron.
b. Inlet: Opening in top of body.
c. Outlet: Larger than inlet.
d. Size: Same as connected waste piping and with inlet large enough for
associated indirect waste piping.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 6
POTABLE WATER PIPING AND ACCESSORIES
Hard Copper Tube and Fittings: As specified in Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping.
Soft Copper Tube and Fittings: As specified in Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping.
Galvanized-Steel Pipe and Fittings: As specified in Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping.
Solvent Welded PVC Pipe and Fittings: As specified in Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping.
PIPE JOINING MATERIALS
The Contractor shall use pipe joining materials and methods as outlined in Section 23 05 00
Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC.
TRANSITION FITTINGS
Fitting-Type Transition Couplings: Manufactured piping coupling or specified piping system
fitting.
Sleeve-Type Transition Coupling: AWWA C219.
Dielectric Fittings: Install per Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing and
HVAC.
MISCELLANEOUS PIPE FITTINGS
Escutcheons: Manufactured ceiling, floor, and wall escutcheons and floor plates in
accordance with Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC.
Sleeves: Provide sleeves in accordance with Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for
Plumbing and HVAC.
1. Where pipes pass through floors, sleeves shall extend 3 inches above the finished
floor or roof. Where pipes pass through walls, sleeves shall be flush with the wall
surface.
Sleeve Seals: Modular sealing element unit, designed for field assembly, used to fill annular
space between pipe and sleeve in accordance with Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results
for Plumbing and HVAC
PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND MISCELLANEOUS METALWORK
Support plumbing pipe systems in accordance with Section 40 00 01 – Pipe Supports and
Section 23 05 00 Common Work Results for Plumbing and HVAC.
PLASTIC VALVES
Install all plastic valves in accordance with Section 40 00 03 – Mill Piping and respective valve
specifications:
1. Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 7
2. Section 40 05 63 – Ball Valves
3. Section 40 05 64 - Butterfly Valves
4. Section 40 05 65 - Valves for Pump Control and Check Service
METAL VALVES
All water shut off valves shall be the gate type, except on fixture supply piping where globe
valves shall be used.
All interior hose valves shall be provided as indicated. The globe valve shown shall be as
given herein before for valves. The hose nipple shown on the detail shall be a female iron
pipe thread inlet with hose thread outlet. All hose bibbs shall be 3/4-inch in size, except as
noted on the Construction Drawings.
Gate, globe, check, plug, and angle valves shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General
2. Section 40 05 63 – Ball Valves
3. Section 40 05 64- Butterfly Valves
4. Section 40 05 65 - Valves for Pump Control and Check Service
All valves shall open by turning counterclockwise and shall have suitable handwheels or nuts
as required.
ACCESS DOORS AND COVERS
Access doors, where required in ceilings for access to valves, controls, and other equipment,
shall be Karp Assoc., Maspeth, N.Y., Style DSC-210, Inryco-Milcor, Milwaukee, Wisconsin, Style
AT, or equal. Doors shall be of sufficient size to allow access bu t shall be not less than 12
inches by 12 inches. Ceilings with lay-in acoustical tile will not require access panels. Valves
and equipment located above ceiling tile shall have a 3/4-inch diameter blue plastic button
with a letter "V" set in tile.
Floor access covers in unfinished concrete floors not exposed to chemicals shall be galvanized
cast iron with a clear opening of not less than 8 inches by 8 inches, and shall be as
manufactured by Alhambra Foundry Company, Model A-2015; Neenah Foundry Co., No.R-
6687, or equal. In traffic or chemical areas, access covers shall be as manufactured by
Alhambra Foundry Company, Model A-1240; Neenah Foundry Co., Model R-1977, or equal,
with clear opening of not less than 10 inches in diameter.
PAINTING
All ferrous metal, except finished, galvanized and stainless steel surfaces, shall have surfaces
prepared and primed in the shop in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 –
Paintings and Coating. Prime colors shall be compatible with finish coats to be applied in the
field.
Self-contained units such as wall-mounted hose racks shall be supplied with factory applied
finish coats of baked enamel.
All field painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 – Paintings and Coating.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 8
PIPE
Carbon Steel Pipe: Fully annealed, seamless C 1010 carbon steel hydraulic tubing with feroluk
“Bite Type” compression fittings rated at 6,000 psi (minimum) working pressure
manufactured by Parker Hannifan Corp. or Equal.
Size (in) Working Pressure (psi) Wall Thickness
5/8 2550 0.058
3/4 2350 0.065
7/8 2200 0.072
1 2250 0.083
1-1/4 2350 0.109
1-1/2 2450 0.134
SPECIALTY VALVES:
Drain Valves: Bronze ball vales, complying with MSS SP-110 and having outlet connection
according to ASME B1.20.7 for garden-hose thread with cap.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
WORKMANSHIP
Care shall be taken at all times to protect floors, stairways, and walls during the make-up,
erection of piping, and placing of equipment. The Contractor shall remove all stains and
repair all damage before final acceptance of the work.
If, during the construction of this project, the Engineer finds materials that have identifying
marks removed or lack such marks completely, he may reject such items until the Contractor
has furnished proof that said items conform to the Specifications. Adequacy and extent of such
proof shall be determined by the Engineer.
PREPARATION
The Contractor shall coordinate roughing-in with provisions for wall-and floor sleeves, pipe
inserts, cutting of roof and floor penetrations so that drain lines will have the required invert
elevations and slopes.
OPENINGS
The Contractor shall provide all necessary openings in walls, floors, and roofs for the passage
of piping and plumbing equipment within and into the buildings. All openings shall be as
indicated on the Contract Drawings or as required to provide passage for the plumbing work.
Sleeve Installation: Install sleeves for pipes and tubes passing through penetrations in floors,
partitions, roofs, and walls.
1. Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
2. Permanent sleeves are not required for holes formed by removable PE sleeves.
3. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces unless otherwise
indicated.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 9
4. Install sleeves in new partitions, slabs, and walls as they are built.
5. For interior wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe
insulation using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Comply with requirements in Division 7.
6. For exterior wall penetrations above grade, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint. Comply
with requirements in Division 7.
7. For exterior wall penetrations below grade, seal annular space between sleeve and
pipe using sleeve seals specified in this Section.
8. Seal space outside of sleeves in concrete slabs and walls with grout.
9. Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation unless otherwise indicated.
10. Install sleeve materials according to the following applications:
a. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs: Steel pipe Sleeves for
Piping Passing through Concrete Floor Slabs of Mechanical Equipment Areas
or Other Wet Areas: Steel pipe or Stack sleeve fittings.
1) Extend sleeves 2 inches above finished floor level.
2) For pipes penetrating floors with membrane waterproofing, extend
cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure
clamping ring if ring is specified. Secure flashing between clamping
flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2
inches above finished floor level. Comply with requirements in
Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing.
b. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Gypsum-Board Partitions:
1) Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.
2) Galvanized-steel sheet sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.
3) Exception: Sleeves are not required for water supply tubes and waste
pipes for individual plumbing fixtures if escutcheons will cover
openings.
c. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Concrete Roof Slabs: Steel pipe.
d. Sleeves for Piping Passing through Exterior Concrete Walls:
1) Steel pipe sleeves for pipes smaller than NPS 6.
2) Cast-iron wall pipe sleeves for pipes NPS 6 and larger.
3) Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1-inch annular clear
space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation when sleeve seals
are used.
11. Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings,
and floors at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials.
Comply with requirements in Division 7 for firestop materials and installations.
Sleeve Seal Installation: Install sleeve seals in sleeves in exterior concrete walls at water -
service piping entries into building. Select type and number of sealing elements required for
pipe material and size. Position pipe in center of sleeve. Assemble sleeve seal components
and install in annular space between pipe and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates
that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.
INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 10
Install piping indicated to be exposed and in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for removal of ceiling panel,
and coordinate with other services occupying that space.
Where installing piping adjacent to equipment, allow space for service and maintenance of
equipment.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system pressure ratings unless otherwise indicated.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
The Contractor shall provide all plumbing specialties in accordance with manufacturer's
printed instructions.
All pipe shall be arranged in a neat and orderly manner to occupy the minimum amount of
space and so that the pipe will not obstruct passageways and movement of building occupants
or interfere with normal operation and maintenance of any equipment.
All pipe shall be carefully placed and properly sloped and shall be neatly and firmly supported
by hangers or supports.
All piping in buildings shall be as close to the ceilings or walls as possible unless indicated
otherwise.
Screwed joints shall be made with joint compound and be tight and leakproof. A sufficient
number of brass to ferrous metal seat unions shall be placed in lines so that any pipe, valve or
piece of equipment may be easily disconnected.
All drainage and sanitary lines shall be properly run, trapped, and be vented to conform with
Code requirements. All changes in direction shall be made with "Y" branch fittings and shall be
of the same size as the pipe. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings. Minimum
depth of cover shall be 3 feet.
Horizontal soil, vent, drain and waste pipes shall be given a slope of at least 1/4-inch per foot
unless indicated otherwise.
Floor drains and cleanouts shall be installed so the tops of the drains are flush with the finished
floor.
Vent piping passing through the roof shall be flashed. Flashing shall extend a minimum 12
inches from the outer surface of the pipe in all directions. Flashing shall be fabricated from 4-
pound lead sheet. If lead flashing is not allowed by local Plumbing codes, then EDPM rubber
flashing shall be used.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 11
Floor drains or floor sinks shall be provided for all equipment drains. No equipment drains
shall discharge to floor slabs.
SANITARY DRAIN AND VENT PIPING SCHEDULE AND INSTALLATION
Special pipe fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping pressure ratings may be
used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
Flanges and unions may be used on aboveground pressure piping, unless otherwise
indicated.
Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:
1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and
compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and sovent stack fittings; standard, heavy-duty
shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.
Aboveground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 5 and larger shall be the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings and solvent stack fittings; standard, heavy-
duty shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
3. Steel pipe, drainage fittings, and threaded joints.
Underground, soil, waste, and vent piping NPS 4 and smaller shall be the following:
1. Service class, hub-and-spigot, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and
compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, or heavy-duty shielded, stainless-
steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
Underground, soil and waste Piping NPS 5 and larger shall be any of the following:
1. Service class, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; gaskets; and compression joints.
2. Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, or heavy-duty shielded, stainless-
steel couplings; and hubless-coupling joints.
Install cleanouts at grade and extend to where building sanitary drains connect to building
sanitary sewers.
Install cast-iron sleeve with water stop and mechanical sleeve seal at each service pipe
penetration through foundation wall. Select number of interlocking rubber links required to
make installation watertight.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be
used on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-
turn, double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by
side with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 12
Do not change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers
and reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in
direction of flow is prohibited.
Lay buried building drainage piping beginning at low point of each system. Install true to
grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub ends of piping
upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's written instructions for use
of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab in piping and pull
past each joint as completed.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1. Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3
and smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
3. Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if
slab is without membrane waterproofing.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
POTABLE WATER PIPING SCHEDULE AND INSTALLATION
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of
domestic water piping. Indicated locations and arrangements are used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated
unless deviations to layout are approved on Coordination Drawings.
Install copper tubing under building slab according to CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
Install ductile-iron piping under building slab with restrained joints according to
AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.
Install shutoff valve, hose-end drain valve, strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve,
inside the building at each domestic water service entrance.
Install shutoff valve immediately upstream of each dielectric fitting.
Install water-pressure-reducing valves downstream from shutoff valves.
Install domestic water piping level with 0.25 percent slope downward toward drain and
plumb.
Rough-in domestic water piping for water-meter installation according to utility company's
requirements.
Install seismic restraints on piping.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 13
Install piping concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants
unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at
right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically
indicated otherwise.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal, and
coordinate with other services occupying that space.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and specialties to allow service and maintenance.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
Install nipples, unions, special fittings, and valves with pressure ratings the same as or higher
than system pressure rating used in applications below unless otherwise indicated.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
Install unions in copper tubing at final connection to each piece of equipment, machine, and
specialty.
Install pressure gages on suction and discharge piping from each plumbing pump and
packaged booster pump.
Install thermostats in hot-water circulation piping.
Joint Construction:
1. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
2. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and
fittings before assembly.
3. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs
and restore full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
a. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
b. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are
corroded or damaged.
4. Brazed Joints: Join copper tube and fittings according to CDA's "Copper Tube
Handbook," "Brazed Joints" Chapter.
5. Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux to end of tube. Join copper
tube and fittings according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook."
6. Pressure-Sealed Joints: Join copper tube and pressure-seal fittings with tools
recommended by fitting manufacturer.
7. Copper-Tubing, Push-on Joints: Clean end of tube. Measure insertion depth with
manufacturer's depth gage. Join copper tube and push-on-joint fittings by inserting
tube to measured depth.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 14
8. Flanged Joints: Select appropriate asbestos-free, nonmetallic gasket material in size,
type, and thickness suitable for domestic water service. Join flanges with gasket and
bolts according to ASME B31.9.
9. Dissimilar-Material Piping Joints: Make joints using adapters compatible with
materials of both piping systems.
Valve Installation:
1. General-Duty Valves: Comply with requirements in Division 15.
2. Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing
fixtures or equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply
to plumbing fixtures that do not have supply stops. Use ball or gate valves for piping
NPS 2 and smaller. Use butterfly or gate valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
3. Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in
horizontal piping, and where required to drain water piping. Drain valves are
specified in Division 15 Section "Domestic Water Piping Specialties."
a. Hose-End Drain Valves: At low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
b. Stop-and-Waste Drain Valves: Instead of hose-end drain valves where
indicated.
4. Install balancing valve in each hot-water circulation return branch and discharge side
of each pump and circulator. Set balancing valves partly open to restrict but not stop
flow. Use ball valves for piping NPS 2 and smaller and butterfly valves for piping
NPS 2-1/2 and larger. Comply with requirements in Division 15 Section "Domestic
Water Piping Specialties" for balancing valves.
Transition Fitting Installation:
1. Install transition couplings at joints of dissimilar piping.
2. Transition Fittings in Underground Domestic Water Piping:
a. NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Fitting-type coupling.
b. NPS 2 and Larger: Sleeve-type coupling.
3. Transition Fittings in Aboveground Domestic Water Piping NPS 2 and Smaller:
Plastic-to-metal transition fittings or unions.
Dielectric Fitting Installation:
1. Install dielectric fittings in piping at connections of dissimilar metal piping and
tubing.
2. Dielectric Fittings for NPS 2 and Smaller: Use dielectric couplings or nipples.
Connections:
1. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
2. Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
3. Connect domestic water piping to exterior water-service piping. Use transition fitting
to join dissimilar piping materials.
4. Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve; extend and
connect to the following:
a. Water Heaters: Cold-water inlet and hot-water outlet piping in sizes
indicated, but not smaller than sizes of water heater connections.
b. Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but
not smaller than required by plumbing code. Comply with requirements in
Division 15 plumbing fixture Sections for connection sizes.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 15
c. Equipment: Cold- and hot-water supply piping as indicated, but not smaller
than equipment connections. Provide shutoff valve and union for each
connection. Use flanges instead of unions for NPS 2-1/2 and larger.
Escutcheon Installation: Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors.
Escutcheons for New Piping shall conform to the following:
1. Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One piece, deep pattern.
2. Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass
with polished chrome-plated finish or stamped steel with set screw or stamped steel
with set screw or spring clips or stamped steel with spring clips.
3. Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One piece, cast brass with
polished chrome-plated finish or One piece or split casting, cast brass with polished
chrome-plated finish or Split casting, cast brass with polished chrome-plated finish
or One piece, stamped steel with set screw or One piece or split plate, stamped steel
with set screw.
4. Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One piece, cast brass or stamped steel with set
screw or stamped steel with spring clips.
5. Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece floor plate.

FIELD TESTING
Contractor shall make such tests as are required by the local ordinances and codes in the
presence of a local governing authority inspector to show that all piping is tight, leak free and
satisfactory, and shall also perform such tests as the Engineer may direct to ensure that all
fixtures and equipment operate properly. The Contractor shall pay all costs in making such
tests and the costs of making all changes or repairs until the Work is acceptable to the
governing authorities.
Sanitary Drain and Vent: During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24
hours before inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of
authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
2. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
3. Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
5. Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having
jurisdiction.
a. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion
thereof, until satisfactory results are obtained.
b. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
Potable Water Piping Tests:
1. Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air
bound and that piping is full of water.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLUMBING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 22 00 00 - 16
2. Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate
report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
3. Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
4. Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that
must be repaired.
5. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
6. Prepare reports for tests and for corrective action required.
7. Domestic water piping will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and
inspections.
8. Prepare test and inspection reports.
DISINFECTION
After potable water supply lines are tested, they shall be disinfected by introducing into the
line HTH solution, liquid chlorine, or chlorine solution of sufficient strength. Then the line
shall be filled with water and maintained under not less than 10 pounds per square inch
pressure, for not less than 48 hours, during which period all valves on the lines shall be
opened and closed several times, after which it shall be flushed clean, and then tested by the
Owner. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary until the line is pronounced
safe for use, by the Owner. No cross connection between the water mains and any pipe not
yet disinfected will be permitted.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 23
HVAC

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 1
SECTION 23 00 00
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. Sections of other Divisions which relate to mechanical work apply to the work of this section.
See various Sections on sitework, underfloor work, structural work, finish materials, etc.
C. Related Sections: Refer to “Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment” Section in
Division 23 for basic electrical requirements for all mechanical equipment. Special and
specific electrical requirements are specified within each respective equipment specification
section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and includes
requirements common to more than one section of Division 23. It expands and supplements
the requirements of Division 01.
B. This Division does not define, nor is it limited by, trade jurisdictions. All work described
herein is a part of the General Contract and is required of the Contractor regardless.
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT
A. The mechanical work described in these mechanical specifications is for the Weber Basin
Water Conservancy District, South Weber No. 2 Well project located in South Weber, Utah.
Design weather conditions are: 95o F db, 62o F wb, and winter 0o F. Altitude readings, unless
otherwise noted, are for an elevation of 4,500 feet above sea level. Make adjustment to
manufacturer's performance data as needed.
1.4 CODES AND PERMITS, AUTHORITIES HAVING JURISDICTION:
A. Perform the mechanical work in strict accordance with the applicable provisions of the
various codes ordinances and adoptions pertaining to the project location in effect on the
date of invitation for bids. Provide all materials and labor necessary to comply with rules,
regulations, and ordinances. Where the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials or
construction more than code requirements, the drawings and/or specifications govern.
B. Hold and save the Owner and Architect/Engineer free and harmless from liability of any
nature or kind arising from failure to comply with codes and ordinances.
C. Secure all permits necessary for the prosecution of the work under this contract. Owner to
pay all fees including connection fees related to utility hookups.
D. Reference Standards:

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 2
American Welding Society
International Mechanical Code/State Code
International Building Code/State Code
SMACNA Duct Design Standards
Local/State Plumbing Code
Locally enforced NFPA Codes
Local Fuel Utility Regulations
Local Power Utility Regulations
American Gas Association
ASME Codes for Pressure Vessels and Piping
ANSI B31.1 Piping
E. Final inspection by the Architect/Engineer will not be made nor Certificate of Substantial
Completion issued until certificates of acceptability from the Authorities having jurisdiction
are delivered.
1.5 DEFINITION OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS
A. The mechanical drawings at reduced scale show the general arrangement of piping,
ductwork, equipment, etc., and shall be followed as closely as the actual building construction
and the work of other trades will permit. The architectural and structural drawings shall be
considered as part of the work insofar as these drawings furnish the Contractor with
information relating to design and construction of the building. Architectural drawings shall
take precedence over mechanical drawings. Request clarification and participate in
resolution in the event of conflict.
B. Because of the small scale of the mechanical drawings, it is not possible to indicate all offsets,
fittings and accessories which may be required. Investigate the structural and finish
conditions affecting the work and arrange the work, accordingly, providing extensions,
fittings, valves and accessories to meet the conditions as may be required. Some small-scale
work is not shown such as control conduit and piping, incidental piping, specialties. Provide
as directed by note or specification.
C. Examine the actual construction site prior to bidding and obtain an understanding of the
conditions under which the work will be performed. No allowances will be made for failure
to make such an examination.
D. During construction, verify the dimensions governing the mechanical work at the building.
No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed because of differences between actual
dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. Examine adjoining work on which
mechanical work is dependent for perfect efficiency and report any work of other trades

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 3
which must be corrected. No waiver of responsibility for defective work shall be claimed nor
allowed due to failure to report unfavorable conditions affecting the mechanical work.
1.6 ROUGH-IN:
A. Verify final locations for rough ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the
actual equipment to be connected.
B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 26 for rough-in requirements.
1.7 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS:
A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building
components.
B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.
C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow for mechanical
installations.
D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured in
place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.
E. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning
prior to closing in the building.
F. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate installation of
mechanical equipment and materials.
G. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services and
overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.
H. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement of
equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,
with minimum of interference with other installations.
I. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings with
suspension systems, light fixtures, existing structures and other installations.
J. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies. Provide the required connection for each service.
K. Where mechanical work penetrates other trade work such as gypboard walls, etc.,
penetration shall be neatly cut, and walls shall be filled and patched.
1.8 ACCESSIBILITY:
A. Install equipment and materials to provide required access for servicing and maintenance.
Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment and devices requiring access with final

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 4
location of required access panels and doors. Allow ample space for removal of all parts that
require replacement or servicing.
B. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.
C. Establish required clearance to all installation features involving operation and maintenance.
Respect manufacturers recommendations for access and clearance.
1.9 CHANGE ORDERS: SEE GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.10 ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION/SUBSTITUTION
A. These documents outline a way in which the Owner may be delivered a functional and
reliable facility. Drawings and specifications describe reasonable engineering practice for the
Contractor to follow.
B. Coordination between trades may result in periodic needs to adjust the installation from that
indicated, but in no case shall the intended function be compromised.
C. The Contractor may perceive some work methods which differ from those specified which
could save time and effort. These may be presented to the Architect with a breakdown of
possible cost savings for review. Implement only with authorization.
D. Materials substitutions will generally be covered in a review process prior to bidding. After
bidding, substitutions shall be proposed only based on definitive cost accounting and
implemented only with authorization.
1.11 CUTTING AND PATCHING:
A. Lay out the project where new work is involved ahead of time, providing sleeves and block
outs, and have work specifically formed, poured and framed to accommodate mechanical
installations. Cut and patch only as needed.
B. Refer to the Division 7 for additional information and requirements.
C. Refer to Division 26 Section: ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS for requirements for
cutting and patching electrical equipment, components, and materials.
D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cutting and
patching.
E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other and any work damaged because of mechanical
installations.
F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that is
necessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.
G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:
1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work.
2. Remove and replace defective Work.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 5
3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract
Documents.
4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing:
5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures.
H. Upon written instructions from the Architect/Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide
for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work.
I. Cut, remove, and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and
materials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping and other
mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work.
J. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled
to be removed.
K. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread
of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.
1.12 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only from the
Contractor to the Architect. Data submitted from subcontractors and material suppliers
directly to the Architect/Engineer will not be processed. Document each transmittal and sign
and stamp the submittal indicating that it has been reviewed and is in compliance with the
criteria of the project, any exceptions being clearly noted.
B. Shop Drawings: As soon as possible after the contract is awarded, submit to the Architect,
one (1) printed copy and 1 digital copy in PDF format of the descriptive literature covering
all equipment and materials to be used in the installation of mechanical systems for this
project. Written confirmation of acceptable review by the Owner's Representative shall be
obtained before ordering, purchasing, acquiring, or installing any such equipment or
materials for the project. Exceptions allowed, in general, to submit items of a related nature
under a common cover to facilitate and coordinate review.
C. Prepare the submittals in an orderly manner after the order of this specification, contained
in a three-ring looseleaf binder(s) with identification tabs for each item or group of related
items. Submitted literature shall clearly indicate performance, qua lity, utility requirements,
dimensions of size, connection points and other information pertinent to effective review.
D. Equipment must fit into the available space with allowance for operation, maintenance, etc.
The Contractor shall take full responsibility for space and utility requirements for equipment
installed.
E. Factory-wired equipment shall include shop drawings of all internal wiring to be furnished
with the unit.
F. Review of the Architect/Engineer is for general conformance of the submitted equipment of
the project specification; in no way does such approval relieve Contractor of his obligation to
furnish equipment and materials that comply in detail to the specification, nor does it relieve

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 6
the Contractor of his obligation to determine actual field dimensions and conditions which
may affect his work.
G. Record Drawings: During the course of construction, maintain a set of drawings,
specifications, change orders, shop drawings, addenda, etc., for reference and upon which all
deviations from the original layout are recorded. Turn these marked up documents over to
the Architect/Engineer at the conclusion of the work so that the original tracings can be
revised. If the Contractor fails to mark up the prints, reimburse the Architect/Engineer for
time required to do so.
1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE TRAINING:
A. Instruction Of Owner's Personnel: At a time prior to Owner making use of a device or system,
and in general after testing and balance work for a building or major system is complete,
prepare, schedule, and conduct a series of training sessions for Owner's operating and
supervisory personnel. Instructions shall cover each device and system with emphasis on
understanding the purpose and function, the maintenance requirements and the proper
adjustment and operating technique.
B. Instruct building operating staff in operation and maintenance of mechanical systems
utilizing Operation and Maintenance Manual when so doing.
C. Minimum instruction periods shall be as follows:
1. Mechanical - eight hours, total.
2. Temperature Control - eight hours, total. Programming help as needed.
D. Initial instruction periods shall occur after pre-final inspection when systems are working
properly and before final payment is made. Schedule subsequent visits with the Owner’s
Building Operation Personnel throughout the first year.
E. None of these instructional periods shall overlap with another.
F. Vendors for each piece of equipment controls, etc., shall participate along with the
Contractor(s).
1.14 GUARANTEE/WARRANTY
A. The following guarantee is a part of this specification and is binding on the part of the
Contractor and his assigns:
B. "Contractor guarantees that this installation is in accordance with the terms of the Contract
and is free from mechanical defects. He agrees to replace or repair, to the satisfaction of the
Owner's Representative, any part of this installation which may fail or be determined
unacceptable within the period of one (1) year after final acceptance. See also the General
Conditions of these specifications. Failed equipment in the repair or replacement shall be
guaranteed for one full year from the date of recommission."
C. Compile and assemble the warranties required by Division 23 into a separated set of vinyl
covered, insert sheets, tabulated, and indexed for each reference, included in the O & M
Manual.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 7
D. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or equipment to
include date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names,
addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warranty
services.
E. Mechanical systems and equipment shall not be considered for substantial completion and
initiation of warranty until they have performed in service continuously without malfunction
for at least thirty (30) working days.
1.15 TESTS AND CERTIFICATIONS
A. Make all tests required by code or specification in the presence of a representative of the
Owner, with tests recorded and certified by the Contractor and Representative. Involve local
authorities where required.
1.16 PERMITS, FEES, LICENSES: REFER TO GENERAL CONDITIONS. SEE PARAGRAPH 1.4.
1.17 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. For congested areas or areas of great detail, prepare and submit a set of coordination
drawings showing major elements, components and systems of mechanical equipment and
materials in relationship with other building components (structure, fire sprinkler, electrical,
etc.). Prepare drawings to an accurate scale of 1/4" - 1-0" or larger. Indicate the locations of
all equipment and materials, including clearances for installing and maintaining equipment,
servicing, and maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, and similar requirements.
Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into the building during construction.
B. Prepare floor plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusively coordinate and integrate
all installations. Indicate locations where space is limited, and where sequencing and
coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow of the work, including (but
not necessarily limited to) the following:
C. Mechanical equipment areas:
1. Rooftop Units
2. Specialty systems
3. Electrical installations
4. Related structure
D. Work in pipe spaces.
E. Roof penetrations.
F. Areas which contain piping, ductwork, or equipment in congested arrangement. To include
structure, ductwork, piping, fire protection, large electrical conduit, recessed lights, etc.
G. General floor plan layouts with ductwork, conduits, lighting, structure, etc.
H. Use drawings to coordinate all affected trades. Do not work without coordinated drawings.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 8
PART 2 - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 QUALITY OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. All equipment and materials shall be new and shall be the standard products of
manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of plumbing, heating, ventilating and air
conditioning equipment, and shall be the manufacturer's latest design. Specific equipment
shown in schedules on drawings and specified herein is to be the basis for the Contractor's
bid. Provisions for substitute equipment are outlined in the General Conditions. All materials
shall be produced by manufacturing plants located in the United States of America.
B. Furnish and install all major items of equipment specified in the equipment schedules on the
drawings complete with all accessories normally supplied with catalog items listed, and all
other accessories necessary for a complete and satisfactory installation.
2.2 PROTECTION OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT:
A. Close duct openings with caps or plugs to prevent lodgment of dirt or trash during
installation. Cover equipment tightly and protect against dirt, water and chemical or
mechanical injury. At the completion of the work, clean equipment and materials and polish
thoroughly and deliver in a factory dock condition for the Owner's acceptance. Make damage
and defects developing before acceptance of the work good at Contractor's expense.
B. Do not make temporary use of project equipment, new or existing, during construction
without the written consent of the owner. Systems shall not be used for temporary heat.
2.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF WORKMEN:
A. All mechanics shall be capable journeymen, skilled in the work assigned to them. Apprentices
may be used with appropriate direction.
B. Employ no unskilled persons in the work which he is given to do; execute all work in a skillful
and workmanlike manner. All persons employed in this work shall be competent, faithful,
orderly, and satisfactory to the Owner. Should the Owner's Representative deem anyone
employed on the work incompetent or unfit for his duties, and so certify, Contractor shall
dismiss him, and he shall not again be employed upon the work without permission of the
Owner's Representative.
2.4 FOREMAN
A. Dedicate and designate a full-time general mechanical foreman to the Owner's
Representative to be consistently available on site during the life of the project for
consultation. Do not replace this individual without prior approval from the Owner's
Representative.
2.5 USE OF COMMON VENDORS
A. Regardless of subcontract delegations, coordinate purchasing between trades so that
equipment and materials of similar nature come from a single vendor. Do not burden the
Owner with multiple brands of similar equipment unless so directed.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 9
2.6 ROOF/WALL PENETRATIONS FLASHINGS:
A. Flashings:
1. Flash and counter flash around all roof curbs supporting Rooftop Units. See drawings
or Architect/Engineer for additional detail.
2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS (GENERAL):
A. Provide hangers and/or support for all equipment and ductwork. Primary information is
contained in these specifications and on the drawings.
B. Provide hangers and supports to correlate with seismic restraint and vibration isolation.
2.8 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS
A. Install all equipment in strict accordance with directions and recommendations furnished by
the manufacturer. Where such directions conflict with the plans and specifications, report
such conflicts to the Architect who shall direct adjustments as deemed necessary and
desirable.
2.9 LUBRICATION
A. Lubricate equipment at startup. Then, provide all lubricants for the operation of all
equipment until acceptance by the Owner. The Contractor is held responsible for all damage
to equipment and bearings while the equipment is being operated by him consequent to pre-
acceptance operation.
2.10 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONTROL:
A. In general, motor starters, related motor starter equipment and power wiring indicated on
the electrical drawings and control diagrams are to be furnished and installed under Division
26 of this Specification. Items of electrical control equipment specifically mentioned to be
furnished by the Division 23 either in these specifications or on the electrical or mechanical
drawings, shall be furnished and mounted by this Contractor and shall be connected under
and as required by this Division 23 and Division 26 of these specifications.
B. Refer to the control equipment and wiring shown on the diagrams. Any changes or additions
required by specific equipment furnished shall be the complete responsibility of the
contractor.
C. Division must be fully coordinated with Division 26 to ensure that all required components
of the work are included and fully understood. No additional cost shall accrue to the Owner
because of lack of coordination.
D. Where the detailed electrical work is not shown on the electrical drawings, the Mechanical
Contractor shall furnish, install, and wire or have prewired all specified and necessary
controls for air handling equipment specified for this project. The objective of this paragraph
is to make sure a complete operating system is obtained at no additional cost to the Owner
for field wiring required related to the equipment.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 00 00 - 10
2.11 CLEANING OF DUCTS
A. Duct systems shall have all debris removed and fans shall be run to blow out all dust and
foreign matter before grilles or outlets are installed and connected.
B. Wipe with a damp cloth, all ductwork on installation, cap open ducts, cover fan inlets, vacuum
fan plenums and related installation before starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place.
2.12 JOBSITE CLEANUP:
A. Keep site clean during progress of work.
B. At the conclusion of work, clean all installation thoroughly.
1. Leave equipment in a factory dock condition. Correct any damage and touch up or
repaint if necessary.
2. Remove all debris from site.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 01 00 - 1
SECTION 23 01 00
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specifications sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Furnish two sets of bound operation and maintenance manuals. Manuals shall contain
descriptive drawings and data which identify equipment installed at the project and detail
the procedures and parts required to maintain and repair the equipment. Copies of approved
submittals shall be included for all equipment.
1.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS:
A. General:
1. The "Operating and Maintenance Manual" is a bound compilation of drawings and
data that the owner requires for each building or project. These manuals, complete
with drawings and data, shall be furnished to the Owner.
2. The mechanical contractor has overall responsibility to obtain the necessary data and
compile the data as set forth in this specification, including items or equipment
purchased by the Owner and delivered to the contractor for installation.
3. The number of binders (or "volumes") required will depend on the amount of
information to be catalogued. Total "sets" see paragraph 1.2A.
4. Make all information legible and sufficiently marked to indicate the exact size, model,
type, etc., of equipment furnished and installed.
B. Purpose: The Operating and Maintenance Manual is prepared to provide a ready reference
to all important pieces of mechanical and electrical equipment installed on the project. It is
also to provide the necessary operating and maintenance data for use by service personnel.
It is also to provide information required for checking equipment performance or for
planning plant expansion or redesign.
PART 2 - MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 PAGE SIZE
A. All pages shall be standard 8-1/2 x 11 inches size or approximate multiples (preferably 16 x
11 inches) folded to 8-1/2 x 11 inch.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 01 00 - 2
2.2 DRAWINGS
A. All drawings larger than 8-1/2" x 11" shall be folded and inserted in individual 8-1/2" x 11"
manilla pockets, which shall have standard three-ring side punching for insertion in the
binders. The equipment name, drawing description and number shall be written on the face
of each manilla pocket.
2.3 BINDERS
A. Binders shall be 8-1/2 x 11 inch, 3 ring ridged type “D” with clear plastic cover and backbone
for slip in title information 2" to 3" rings as required for the project. The number of binders,
however, shall be based on not filling them beyond 2-1/2" thickness.
B. Place the following information on 8-1/2” x 11” white paper to slip into plastic covers on front
and backbone:
1. "Operation and Maintenance Manual".
2. Project Name (and volume number if more than one volume).
3. Project Number.
4. Architect's name.
5. Engineer's name.
6. General Contractor's name.
7. Mechanical Contractor's name.
8. Items 6 through 8 need not be printed on the backbone.
2.4 CONTENTS AND INDEXING:
A. Manuals shall contain descriptions of the building systems in sufficient detail to adequately
indicate the type of systems installed and the basic details of their operation.
B. All purchased equipment data shall be used to designate the sections. Within each section
additional indexing of component parts may be required.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall fully contain all possible information pertinent to
the equipment. The arrangement and type of information to be filed shall be as follows:
D. COPY OF PURCHASE ORDER CHANGE (IF ANY).
1. Outline drawings, special construction details, “as built” electrical wiring and control
diagrams for all major and supplementary systems.
2. Manufacturer’s test or calculated performance data and certified test curves.
3. Installation, operating, and maintenance instructions, including a complete parts list
and sectional drawing with parts identification numbers. Mark with model, size, and
plan number.
4. Manufacturer’s brochure marked to indicate exact equipment purchased. Brochures
on component parts supplied by a manufacturer with his equipment, but not
manufactured directly by him, shall also be included.
5. The serial numbers of each item of equipment installed are to be listed with the model
numbers and plan symbols.
6. Include a Table of Contents. The contents shall be divided with tabbed index dividers
into the following suggested parts:
a. Part I Building and System Descriptions

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 01 00 - 3
b. Part II Purchased Equipment Data
c. Part III Test Reports and Valve Charts
d. Part IV Start-Up and Operation
e. Part V Preventative Maintenance Recommendations
7. A copy of the approved submittals for each piece of equipment.
8. A copy of all testing, adjusting and balancing reports.
9. Wiring diagrams, marked with model and size and plan symbol.
10. The index shall contain the name and address of the manufacturer and, if different,
where replacement and repair parts may be obtained.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 01 00 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTORS, DRIVES, AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR MECHANICAL WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 13 - 1
SECTION 23 05 13
MOTORS, DRIVES, AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.
B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field installation
and electrical connections are specified in Division 26.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. This section specifies the basic requirements for motors and drives furnished by this Division
and for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment.
Package components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and
disconnect switches, etc.
B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e., horsepower and electrical characteristics) for
mechanical equipment are noted within these documents.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Provide electrical components and materials which are UL labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submit product data for motors, belts, drives, starters, and other electrical components with
submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual
equipment specification sections. Verify project electrical characteristics with submittal.
Confirm suitability for altitude, maintaining full nameplate rating plus service factor. Include
this data in the maintenance manual in accordance with Section "Operation and Maintenance
Manuals".
1.5 REFERENCES:
NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators.
NEMA Standards ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.
NEMA Standards 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.
NEMA Standards KS 1: Enclosed Switches.
Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70).

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTORS, DRIVES, AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR MECHANICAL WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 13 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS:
A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors furnished with the
Rooftop Unit or Unit Heater fans. For special motors, more detailed and specific
requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications.
1. Motor torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven
loads to operating speed within the time limits of the motor rating and of the starting
equipment settings.
2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor
to operate in the service factor range, or above 3300 feet elevation (ACTUAL
ELEVATION OF PROJECT SITE IS 4,500 FEET), will not cause the motor to operate
above the manufacturer’s motor rating for that altitude. Coordinate this requirement
with the conductor and start equipment sizing for each motor.
3. Except for submersible pumps, motors shall be air cooled.
4. Typically provide fractional horsepower, single speed, single phase motors (1/2
horsepower and less) of the permanent split capacitor type. (PSC) This requirement
generally avoids motors of the shaded pole type.
5. For motors 3/4 horsepower and larger, typically furnish polyphase squirrel cage type
units.
6. Furnish two-speed motors with 2 separate polyphase windings. Confirm 2-speed, 2-
winding starter requirements with Division 26.
7. Temperature Rating: at a minimum, rate motors and motor drives for operation 40°
C environment with maximum 90° C temperature rise for continuous duty at full load
(Class H Insulation for altitude, Class B leads allowed).
8. Starting Capability: Frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system,
with not less than 6 evenly timed spaced starts per hour for manually or automatically
controlled motors.
9. Service Factor: For sea level to 3300 feet elevation, 1.15 for poly-phase motors and
1.35 for single phase motors, 1.0 for TEFC motors. Note that above 3300 feet elevation
(ACTUAL ELEVATION OF PROJECT SITE IS 4,500 FEET), motor ratings typically de-
rate the service factor from 1.15 to 1.0.
10. Provide pump motors with an end shield on the motor shaft and with ventilation
openings beneath the motor.
11. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general Purpose, continuous duty, design
"B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.
12. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; T-frame, use driven equipment manufacturer's
standards to suit specific application.
13. Bearings:
a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; for fractional
horsepower, light intermittent/occasional duty motors, sleeve type bearings
will be acceptable.
b. Re-greasable with Zerk type and relief plug fittings, except permanently
sealed where motor is normally inaccessible for regular maintenance.
Lubricate motors at startup and then as recommended by manufacturer.
Where sealed bearings are used, provide bearings with a nominal L10 –
100,000-hour life expectancy.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTORS, DRIVES, AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR MECHANICAL WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 13 - 3
c. Design bearings to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives
produce lateral or axial thrust on the motor.
d. Motors for use with variable frequency drives shall be inverter duty rated,
premium efficiency. Motor bearings shall be electrically isolated from motor
housing. Coordinate motor with Variable Frequency Drive supplier and
equipment.
14. Motor Enclosure Type:
a. Open drip-proof (ODP) motors for indoor use where they can be satisfactorily
housed or remotely located during operation.
b. Guarded drip-proof motors, where exposed to contact by employees or
building occupants.
c. Weather protected type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed.
d. Cooling Tower duty rated for cooling tower applications.
e. Totally enclosed, fan cooled (TEFC) for wet or dirty environments.
f. Explosion Proof (EP) for hazardous rated environments.
15. Overload Protection: built-in thermal overload protection and, where indicated for
large motors, an internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at
starter.
16. Noise Rating: Provide motors which are "Quiet," within the sound power levels
described by NEMA MGI-12.49, and which are commercially dynamically balanced at
the factory.
17. Efficiency: Typically provide "Premium Energy Efficient" motors with a minimum
efficiency as scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If
efficiency is not specified by the standard, motors shall have a higher efficiency than
“average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112. Motors
used with Variable Frequency Drives shall be compatible and designed for use with
Variable Frequency Drives and “Inverter Duty” rated. An “explosion proof” motor for
classified areas, scheduled for use with VFD’s, shall be listed for inverter duty
applications.
18. Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacture: model, rating,
characteristics, construction, special features and similar information.
19. Motors fitted with V-Belt or other tensioned drives shall have a cast iron or welded
steel baseplate, with guided slide rails and adjustable screw tensioners, and rubber
in shear bolt mountings.
20. Motor drives and couplings shall utilize shaft bushings to accommodate various shaft
and drive diameters. Couplings shall be of the Browning Ever-Flex or Dodge “Para-
flex” type, not a toothed gear with rubber insert (jaw) type.
21. Acceptable Manufacturers (subject to review on an individual application basis.)
a. Baldor
b. General Electric
c. Lincoln
d. Magnetek
e. Reliance
f. Siemens
g. Toshiba
h. U.S. Motors

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTORS, DRIVES, AND ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
FOR MECHANICAL WORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 13 - 4
2.2 MOTOR DRIVES:
A. Provide fan/motor drives with cast steel sheaves and V-belt sets of fabric and rubber
construction by Browning, Dodge, Woods. Match multiple belts and adjust to drive the
apparatus properly and to prevent slippage and undue wear in starting. Design drives for
150 percent or more of the specified motor nameplate rating. Bush all drives. Belts shall be
A, B or C section belts. Narrow gauge belts are not acceptable. Adjust drives or replace
sheaves as needed to obtain required capacities.
B. Provide flexible coupled drives for pumps by Browning, Dodge or Woods.
C. Provide a galvanized iron metal guard for each V-belt drive, coupled drive or rotating shaft
constructed around an angle iron frame, securely bolted to the floor or apparatus. Design the
guard to completely enclose drives and pulleys and be constructed to comply with all safety
requirements. Provide hinged access doors of not less than 6" x 6" for access to motor and
fan shaft for test purposes. For double inlet fans, construct the belt guard cover of 1/2" mesh
expanded metal, arranged as not to restrict the air flow into the fan inlet.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND
SEISMIC CONTROL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 48 - 1
SECTION 23 05 48
MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND SEISMIC CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. This section is Division-23 Mechanical Sound, Vibration and Seismic Control section, and is
part of each Division-23 section making reference to mechanical sound, vibration and seismic
control specified herein.
C. Division-23 General Mechanical Requirements apply to work of this section.
D. Specification 01 81 10 – Seismic Design Criteria.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Furnish and install complete seismic restraint and vibration control systems for all work
installed under Division 23. Including owner furnished contractor installed equipment.
Work to be responsive to the intent of the International Building Code, latest adopted edition,
for the respective seismic zone. Zone 3, importance factor of 1.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Engage the services of an independent seismic and vibration
control subcontractor who has the technology, experience, computer capabilities and
manufactured products to prepare the required computations, shop drawings and special
devices to meet the minimum requirements described herein. Select from the following:
1. Amber Booth
2. Kinetics
3. Mason
B. The seismic and vibration control subcontractor shall visit the site during construction at a
minimum of two specific periods.
1. When equipment is set in place, prior to placement of seismic restraint devices for
the purposes of directing the contractor in properly locating and installing the
approved devices.
2. At the completion of the project, prior to final mechanical inspection, for the purpose
of verifying the correctness of the seismic restraint and vibration isolation device
installation and prepare certification of the seismic vibration-isolation work.
C. The seismic subcontractor shall exercise the quality control for this work and shall include,
but not be limited to instructions direct to the Mechanical (Division 23) Contractor
concerning:
1. Anchoring of all mechanical equipment including owner furnished and contractor
installed.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND
SEISMIC CONTROL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 48 - 2
2. Vibration mounting of equipment.
3. Equipment base coordination with restraint requirements.
4. Snubbing of equipment.
5. Bracing and anchoring of ductwork and conduit.
6. Roof curbs to assure proper mounting of restraints and isolators.
7. Vibration isolation of exhaust fans.
D. The subcontractor shall be responsible for identifying the need for the size and location of
steel sole plates and their attachment to structural steel or concrete.
E. The subcontractor shall certify in writing that he has inspected the installation and that all
isolation, anchors and seismic restraint materials are installed correctly and functioning
properly. Certification shall be provided after all corrective work has been completed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Submittal data is required and shall consist of computations, vibration isolation selection,
equipment anchors, anchor bolt sizes, supports, seismic restraints, sole plate data, restraint
locations and type of restraints.
B. Submittal data shall identify dimensions, load deflection data, center of gravity, standard
connections, manufacturer's recommendations, behavior problems including vibrations,
thermal expansion, building expansion joints, etc., associated with equipment, ductwork,
piping, and conduit.
C. Calculations need not be submitted when restraint devices for piping, conduit and ductwork
are proposed in accordance with the SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints.
D. Selection of isolator anchors and restraints shall be clearly made known along with the basis
for selection so that proposed systems can be reviewed.
E. Calculations furnished for anchors, anchor bolts, sole plates and other support steel for
restraining devices shall be signed and stamped by an engineer licensed in one of the United
States.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards: (Latest adopted edition)
International Building Code
NFPA bulletin 90A,
UL Standard 181
B. Guidelines for seismic restraint of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Piping Systems.
Published by the Sheet Metal Industry Fund of Los Angeles, California, and the Plumbing and
Piping Industry Council, Inc., Los Angeles, California.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND
SEISMIC CONTROL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 48 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS:
2.1 MATERIALS – PRODUCTS
A. Restraint devices shall be specially designed to resist seismic forces in all directions.
B. Snubbers: Restraint surfaces which engage under seismic motion shall be cushioned with a
resilient elastomer neoprene (bridge bearing neoprene) to protect equipment. Restraints
shall allow a maximum of 1/4" before engaging and shall not interfere in norm al starting or
stopping operation. Housing shall allow for visual inspection to determine clearances during
system operation. Restraints shall be field adjustable and be positioned for up to 1/4"
clearance both horizontally and vertically. Mountings and snubbers are to be manufactured
under a Quality Assurance (QA) Program.
C. Snubbers and Isolator Combination Devices: Combination unitized devices may be used
where equipment isolation is required. They shall include the requirements listed for
snubbers. The isolation portion shall be stable spring type with combination leveli ng bolt
and equipment fastening device. Base plate shall have adequate means for bolting to
structure. The spring assembly shall be removable and shall fit within a welded steel
enclosure.
D. Conduit and Duct Restraints: Restraint materials for exposed installation shall be standard
fabricated flat steel, angle rod and channel members.
1. Restraint members shall be bolt connected. Cabling materials and methods shall be
used only in chases or concealed ceiling spaces.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINT GUIDELINE:
A. Guidelines for SMACNA seismic restraints for conduit, piping and ductwork are to serve as
the basis for restraint methods. (Exception - no cabling shall be used in the restraint systems
except as noted.)
3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT- CONDUIT:
A. General: All conduit shall be protected in all planes by restraints, designed to accommodate
thermal movement while at the same time restraining seismic motion.
B. Locations of the restraints shall include, but not be limited to:
1. At all drops or risers to equipment connections.
2. At all changes in direction of conduit.
C. At all horizontal runs of conduit to keep it in alignment and prevent sagging with restraints
not to exceed the following:
a. Transverse bracing at 40'-0" O.C. maximum.
b. Longitudinal bracing at 80'-0" O.C. maximum.
D. Exceptions:

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL SOUND, VIBRATION, AND
SEISMIC CONTROL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 48 - 4
1. Conduit under 2-1/2" size need not be additionally seismically restrained except as
follows:
a. Brace all conduit 1-1/4" and larger in boiler rooms, mechanical rooms,
electrical equipment rooms and refrigeration machinery rooms.
3.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT - DUCTWORK:
A. Ductwork, four feet square and larger in cross sectional area or 26" diameter and larger shall
be protected in all places by restraints. Locations shall include, but not be limited to:
1. At all equipment connections.
2. At all duct turns and duct run ends (transverse bracing).
3. Transverse bracing to occur 30'-0" O.C. maximum. Rectangular ducts 61" and larger
in either direction may be braced at 32'-0" O.C.
4. Longitudinal bracing shall occur at 60'-0" O.C. maximum.
B. A group of ducts may be combined in a larger size frame using the overall dimensions with
maximum weight for selection of restraint members.
C. No bracing is required if the top of the duct is suspended 12" or less from supporting member
and attached at the top of the duct as well as sides and bottom.
3.4 VIBRATION ISOLATION:
A. General: Furnish and install devices to isolate moving equipment from the structure. Review
isolation furnished with factory package equipment, require conformance with project
criteria.
B. Basic Criteria: Vibration isolation devices which have natural frequencies approximately
1/10 that of the related driving frequency.
C. Equipment to Include:
1. Rooftop Units.
D. Field Verify: All required devices and installation.
3.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION - DUCTWORK:
A. Furnish and install devices to isolate all ductwork from other moving equipment. Provide
flex connections, spring hangers, etc., as required.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 53 - 1
SECTION 23 05 53
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Label all heating, air conditioning, automatic temperature control equipment (excluding
thermostats and relays), and distribution systems. Also label all electrical switches and
starters for all mechanical equipment. Label all fire dampers, fire smoke dampers, smoke
damper access doors.
PART 2 - GENERAL MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS
2.1 EQUIPMENT, PIPE AND DUCT IDENTIFICATION:
A. Equipment:
1. Use the same identification number and name as that shown on the drawings or in
these specifications. Make equipment nameplates of black face formica with white
engraved lettering 3/16" high or larger, attached securely.
2. Include the following information on equipment nameplates where applicable:
a. Identification name.
b. Identification number.
c. Capacity specified.
d. Actual capacity.
e. Area or zone served.
f. Note operating conditions, including head or static pressure, RPM, motor
horsepower at design conditions, area or zone served, name of lubricant,
frequency of lubrication.
B. Color code all accessible duct and identify with wording and arrows every 50 feet, at each
riser, at each junction, at each access door, and where required to easily identify the medium
transported.
C. Identify duct systems by:
1. Lettering color, and
2. Flow Direction Arrow.
3. Identifying lettering shall be painted or stenciled on duct. Self -adhesive or glue-on
type labels are acceptable. Letters shall be 2" high for duct.
4. Arrows to indicate direction of flow shall be painted or stenciled on the duct in the
same color as the lettering. The arrow shall point away from the lettering. On duct
the “shaft” of the arrow shall be 2" long and 1" wide. Use a double-headed arrow if
the flow can be in either direction.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 53 - 2
5. Duct shall be identified with the following colors:
Medium in Duct Banding Color Lettering Abbreviation and
Lettering Color
Return Air NA RA Duct Black
Exhaust Air NA EA Duct Black
Supply Air NA SA Duct Black
2.2 PANEL IDENTIFICATION:
A. Provide all panel devices on panel faces with engraved black face formica with white
engraved lettering labels.
B. Provide all internal panel components with engraved black face formica labels with white
engraved lettering. Fasten label beneath each device.
C. Numerically or alphabetically code all panel wiring and tubing.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SYSTEM COMMISSIONING, TESTING, AND BALANCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 93 - 1
SECTION 23 05 93
SYSTEM COMMISSIONING, TESTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS:
A. The work of this section shall be subject to the requirements of the General Conditions of this
contract, the General Mechanical Requirements, General Electrical Requirements, and other
sections where this work shares a responsibility.
B. System commissioning and startup of the mechanical systems shall be the responsibility of
the Mechanical Contractor and his subcontractors with the participation of the Electrical
Contractor related to electrical work and the General Contractor related to general
construction items.
C. Testing and Balancing shall be the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor under the
direction of the General Contractor with the full participation of all of the mechanical and
electrical trades employed on the project and shall include the participation of an
independent testing and balance contractor to coordinate all elements of the work and to
perform special technical services outlined herein.
1.2 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING EXTENT OF WORK:
A. The work required by this section includes but is not necessarily limited to the following:
1. The pre startup inspection of all systems and subsequent correction of any incorrect
items.
2. The initial first run inspections.
3. System operations inspection.
B. The intent of this work is to provide proper installation, startup, service and operation of the
mechanical systems in preparation for system balancing.
C. Repair, replacement or adjustment of each item shall be performed by the installation
contractor.
D. Involves all new construction and those elements of existing construction which are affected
by this project.
1.3 TESTING AND BALANCING EXTENT OF WORK:
A. This work incorporates a confirming checkout of construction work, an individual
component activation and an overall system activation into one work program which shall
serve as the transition period from the Contractor's job to Owner's facility.
B. The TAB Contractor shall be skilled in the operation and manipulation of systems and in the
direction of parties involved in the work.
C. Conduct and participate in the startup and shakedown of all mechanical systems installed
and modified in this contract; test adjust and balance these systems to obtain optimum

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SYSTEM COMMISSIONING, TESTING, AND BALANCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 93 - 2
performance at a level which minimizes the required energy input, prepare and submit a
complete report of work done and the final system condition obtained, participate in the
instruction of Owner's personnel in the proper operation of systems and equipment.
D. Involves all new construction and those elements of existing construction which are affected
by this project.
1.4 QUALIFICATIONS OF SYSTEM COMMISSIONING AND TAB TEAM:
A. Representatives of the General Contractor, Mechanical Contractor, etc., and Electrical
Contractor shall be available daily through the commissioning and adjustment period. These
men shall be experienced journeymen with prior experience in system operation and with
specific experience on the construction of this project.
B. Balancing shall be done by an independent firm specializing in this work. A definition of
independent shall mean the firm is not associated with any engineering, contracting, or
manufacturing firm and derives its income solely from testing, adjusting, and balancing
mechanical systems. The approved firms to do this work are Barnett, Inc., Payson, Utah, Bob’s
Test & Balance, Salt Lake City, Utah.
C. The balancing work including air and hydronic portions shall be performed by the same firm
having total responsibility for the final testing, adjusting and balancing of the entire system.
The principal of the firm shall be directly involved in the project.
D. The independent testing and balancing firm shall furnish all necessary tools, scaffolding and
ladders that are required and shall provide all required instruments, take all readings, and
make all necessary adjustments.
E. After all tests and adjustments are made a detailed written report shall be prepared and
submitted for review and shall bear the signature of the professional supervising the work.
Final acceptance of this project will not be made until a complete and satisfactory report is
received. Furnish two copies of the report.
PART 2 - EXECUTION, SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
2.1 PRE STARTUP INSPECTION:
A. The pre startup inspection of all systems shall provide for verifying that each piece of
equipment is properly installed and prepared for startup.
B. All pertinent items shall be checked, including but not necessarily limited to the following:
1. Removal of shipping stops.
2. Vibration isolators properly aligned and adjusted.
3. Flexible connections properly aligned.
4. Belts properly adjusted.
5. Belt guards and safety shields in place.
6. Safety controls, safety valves and high or low limits in operation.
7. All systems properly filled.
8. Filters in place and seal provided around edges.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SYSTEM COMMISSIONING, TESTING, AND BALANCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 93 - 3
9. All test stations and measuring devices installed.
10. Initial lubrication of equipment is complete.
11. Filters are clean.
12. Motor rotations are correct.
13. Voltages match nameplate.
14. The control system is in operation.
15. All interlocks are wired and verified.
16. All controls have been connected and verified.
17. All dampers and operators are properly installed and operating.
18. All ductwork is installed and connected.
19. All other items necessary to provide for proper startup.
2.2 FIRST RUN INSPECTION:
A. Recheck all items outlined in pre startup inspection to insure proper operation.
B. Check the following items:
1. Excessive vibration or noise.
2. Loose components.
3. Initial control settings.
4. Motor amperages.
5. Heat buildup in motors, bearings, etc.
6. The control system is properly calibrated and functioning as required.
C. Correct all items which are not operating properly.
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION:
A. Observe mechanical systems under operating conditions for sufficient time to insure proper
operation under varying conditions, such as day night and heating cooling.
1. Periodically check the following items:
2. Filters.
3. Visual checks of air flow for "best guess" settings for preparation for system air
balancing under section applying.
4. Control operation, on off sequences, system cycling, etc.
5. Cleaning of excessive oil or grease.
6. Dampers close tightly.
7. System leaks.
8. All other items pertaining to the proper operation of the mechanical system whether
specifically listed or not.
PART 3 - EXECUTION TESTING AND BALANCING
3.1 TOTAL MECHANICAL SYSTEM BALANCE:
A. The mechanical systems balance involves elements of the work of the General Contractor, the
Electrical Contractor, the Mechanical Contractor, the Sheet Metal Contractor and the Controls
Contractor. Total system balance requires that all elements be not only i ndividually correct,

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SYSTEM COMMISSIONING, TESTING, AND BALANCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 93 - 4
but also correct as a composite system. Therefore, participation of all parties shall be
required in the test and balance procedure.
B. Prior to beginning work, a written description of the anticipated sequence of action shall be
submitted to the Architect/Owner for review and comment.
C. The testing and balance specialist shall review the contract drawings during the bid period
and shall advise the Architect of any modifications to the layout which may be needed to
facilitate the balance procedure. Modifications will be incorporated into the contract by
Addendum during the bidding period.
D. The test and balance specialist shall visit the project from time to time during the rough
installation making a thorough inspection of those items which will affect his subsequent
work. He shall advise the Contractor in writing with a copy to the Architect of any work
required by the contract which is not being performed adequately. This is in addition to the
regular inspection efforts of the Architect and Engineer. Particularly note needed dampers,
belts and drives, diffuser styles, and filters, etc.
3.2 AIR SYSTEMS BALANCE:
A. Before any adjustments are made, check the systems for such items as dirty filters, duct
leakage, filter leakage, damper leakage, equipment vibrations, correct damper operations,
etc. Adjust all fan systems, major duct sections, registers, diffusers, etc., to deliver design air
quantities within +5%. Individual air outlets, when one of three or more serve a space may
have a tolerance of 10 percent from the average. Design static pressure is based on filters
approximately 50% loaded with dirt. Pressure drop across filters during balancing shall be
simulated to that condition. After balancing is completed check motor amperage with the
filters clean.
B. Adjust supply, exhaust and recirculation air systems towards air quantities shown on
drawings. Establish a proper relationship between supply and exhaust. Follow proportional
balance procedures outlined by AABC and/or SMACNA for such work.
C. The distribution system shall be further adjusted to obtain uniform space temperatures free
from objectionable drafts and noise within the capabilities of the system.
D. Exchange sheaves and/or belts as needed to adjust the RPM of all fans so they handle
specified air quantity.
E. Verify the function of all Variable Frequency Drives and related controls.
3.3 MAJOR EQUIPMENT
A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall work with the Controls Contractor and Electrician
in placing mechanical equipment in operation. The factory representative of the equipment
manufacturer shall also participate in a team effort to place the system(s) in operation, adapt
to all anticipated operating modes and adjust as required to obtain correct operation. The
Design Engineer and the Owner's Representative shall witness the final operating sequences.
B. Use proportional balance techniques.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SYSTEM COMMISSIONING, TESTING, AND BALANCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 93 - 5
3.4 CONTROL SYSTEMS
A. The Testing and Balancing Contractor shall go through the entire control system with the
Controls Contractor verifying proper operation of each device and the proper function of each
system. Certify such effort in the report.
3.5 MISCELLANEOUS:
A. Observe and note all furnished thermal overload protection in the data sheets. If thermal
overload protection is incorrect, the trade which furnished the overload devices shall furnish
and install the correct size overload protection devices. It shall be the responsibility of the
balancing firm to confirm that proper overload protection has been installed at the
completion of the job.
B. Measure and set any special conditions such as minimum air quantities; coordinate outside
air, return air and relief air damper operation; check and adjust outside and return air intakes
so that the system will deliver substantially the same volume on either; make tests and record
data as required in "REPORT" below.
C. All balancing dampers shall be clearly marked as to the final balanced position. Plug all test
holes, replace belt guards.
D. Upon request, based on perceived need, make 24 hour space temperature recordings. Any
required rebalance of the system shall be performed without additional cost.
E. Upon request, a representative of the balancing firm performing the work shall demonstrate
air flow quantities shown in the report by reading back outlets selected specifically or at
random by the Design Engineer. It is understood that the operating mode of the system shall
be the same for read back as it was during balancing.
3.6 REPORT:
A. Provide a bound report in four copies containing a general information sheet listing
instruments used, method of balancing, altitude correction, and manufacturer's grille,
register and diffuser data.
B. Provide equipment data sheets listing make, size, serial number, rating, etc. of all mechanical
equipment including fans, air controllers, pumps, motors, starters, and drives. Operating data
shall include rotational speed, inlet and outlet pressures, pressure drop across filters, coils,
and other system components and measured motor current and voltage.
C. Balancing data sheets shall indicate the required and actual CFM of all supply and return
outlets or inlets, and be totaled and summarized by systems.
D. Include a reduced set of contract drawings with outlets marked for easy identification of the
signation used in the data sheets.
E. Note any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in the above.
F. Keep a daily log of all work performed, with a list of work scheduled for each day and the
workers on the job.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SYSTEM COMMISSIONING, TESTING, AND BALANCING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 05 93 - 6
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 09 00 - 1
SECTION 23 09 00
MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of control systems work required by this section is indicated on drawings and
schedules, and by requirements of these control related sections.
1. Control sequences are specified in this section under: "Sequence of Operation".
B. Refer to other Division 23 sections for installation of instrument wells, valve bodies, and
dampers in mechanical systems.
C. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on controls and/or unit
control panels. Includes starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except
where specified as furnished, or factory installed, by manufacturer.
2. Interlock wiring between electrically operated equipment units; and between
equipment and field installed control devices.
a. Interlock wiring specified as factory installed is work of this section.
D. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with requirements
of Division 26 sections:
1. Control wiring between field installed equipment, controls, indicating devices, and
unit control panels.
2. 120-volt service required by control systems.
E. Participate in "System Commissioning, Testing and Balancing".
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. MANUFACTURER’S QUALIFICATIONS: Manufacturer’s specializing and experienced in
electric control components for not less than 5 years.
B. INSTALLER'S QUALIFICATIONS: Firms and workmen specializing and experienced in electric
control system installations for not less than 5 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each control device
furnished, indicating dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 09 00 - 2
characteristics, finishes of materials, and including installation instructions and start up
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each control system, containing the following
information:
1. Schematic flow diagram of system showing fans, coils, dampers, and control devices,
etc.
2. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control.
3. Indicate all required electrical wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of work
that are factory installed and portions to be field installed. Note contract
responsibility to provide complete system regardless of delegation. Completely
interface with and show existing installation in the existing building.
4. Include verbal written description of sequence of operation. Confirm correct function
of proposed sequences.
C. Samples: Submit sample of each type of proposed thermostat cover.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions and spare parts lists. Include this data,
product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirements
of Section 230100.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products which have been tested, listed and
labeled by UL and comply with NEMA standards.
2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA standards pertaining to components and
devices for electric control systems.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" where applicable to controls and control
sequences.
4. Comply with NEPA 70, "National Electric Code" for all electrical installation.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory shipping cartons for each piece of equipment, and control device. Maintain
cartons through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent equipment damage,
and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment. Store equipment and materials inside
and protected from weather.
1.7 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL: (SEE SECTION 23 00 00)
A. The purpose is to provide a transition of the systems from the Contractor to the Owner,
leaving the Owner's personnel familiar with and well qualified to operate and maintain the
systems.
B. Instruction to cover purpose and function of each system and its components, to show proper
operating technique, to show proper maintenance technique.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 09 00 - 3
C. Prepare an outline of information to be conveyed, list materials available for reference.
Submit to Architect along with a proposed schedule of instruction. Schedule to allow
individual time for each trade and each system.
D. Convey information in formal classroom session. Teachers include qualified contractor
personnel and sales representatives for each major piece of equipment. Go from the
classroom to the actual location to graphically illustrate concepts discussed.
1.8 WARRANTIES:
A. As part of the overall project warranty, furnish individual manufacturer warranties for each
piece of equipment for a period of not less than one year from date of Owner's beneficial use
(substantial completion).
B. Warrant the overall assembly of equipment, materials and labor comprising these systems.
1.9 CLEANING AND LUBRICATION
A. All instruments, control panel and control piping shall be thoroughly cleaned before final
acceptance. Provide lubrication for all furnished equipment.
1.10 TESTING AND ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM:
A. During the system commissioning, testing, and balancing of the various building systems,
have a controls representative(s) present and available to interpret and adjust controls as
needed. Demonstrate and report the integrity and accuracy of each function and control
point.
B. At the termination of the testing period, the Controls representative shall spend one working
day instructing the Owner's operating personnel in the control system operation, and one
working day checking each system for day-night and manual override with the Owner's
operating personnel on each air system. A complete operating booklet shall be provided and
used during the training period. Schedule this training with the Owner and Mechanical
Contractor.
1. Since system performance is partly a function of climatic conditions, the Controls
contractor shall be available during the changing seasons of the warranty period to
make further adjustments and modifications if required. A final complete check of all
systems shall be made at the conclusion of the one-year warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRICAL POWER SUPPLY
A. Obtain power for thermostats from respective unit served.
B. Control Wiring:
1. All Control wiring shall be installed in conduit per National Electric Code. The
installation shall be square with the walls of the buildings.
2. Number and code all wiring.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 09 00 - 4
C. Use no wire smaller than 16-guage, no conduit smaller than ½”.
2.2 ELECTRIC THERMOSTATS:
A. For Electric Unit Heaters:
1. Wall-mounted, line voltage. For loads above device rating, use control circuit with
auxiliary relay switching.
2.3 PROGRAMMABLE THERMOSTATS:
A. Rooftop Unit Programmable Thermostats:
1. General: Provide 7-day programmable thermostats for rooftop units based on
Honeywell Commercial PRO 7000 series.
2.4 FIRESTATS, HI-LIMIT THERMOSTAT:
A. Manual reset, break on rise for protection, make on rise for alarm with relay needed to make
on rise.
B. Honeywell L-4029E.
C. Johnson A25AN-1
2.5 AUXILIARY RELAYS:
A. Light Duty – Functional Devices RIB relay series
2.6 DAMPERS:
A. Verify that Rooftop Unit Vendor provide electric damper actuators of proper size, so that the
actuators will operate against the static pressure of the systems and provide each actuator
with a bracket for attaching to ductwork, building structure or equivalent. Damper actuators
in plenums shall be mounted on damper frames. Do not install actuators in ducts. Modulating
actuators shall be provided with integral mechanical stops for both minimum and maximum
stop.
PART 3 - CONTROL SEQUENCES
3.1 ROOFTOP UNITS (RTU-1 & RTU-2):
A. Each rooftop unit is provided with self-contained controls and is controlled from a wall
mounted programmable thermostat with fan auto-on-off switch.
B. With the fan switch in auto position, on call for cooling as sensed by the wall mounted
thermostat, the respective rooftop unit’s cooling function is enabled to satisfy the space
cooling set point temperature at 75°F (adj.). The respective rooftop unit’s economizer shall
first be enabled to satisfy the cooling setpoint temperature. When that will no longer satisfy
the cooling setpoint temperature, the respective rooftop unit’s compressor shall cycle on
through its stages to satisfy the cooling setpoint temperature. The respective outside air
damper shall modulate to minimum position.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 09 00 - 5
C. When either rooftop unit supply fan is running, its related outside air damper shall open to
minimum position.
D. Built in safeties shut the makeup air unit down should unusual conditions occur.
3.2 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS (EUH-1 & EUH-2):
A. Each Electric Unit Heater operates through its own factory wired controls to provide heating
to the respective space when its respective wall mounted thermostat calls for heating.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MECHANICAL CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 09 00 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 31 00 - 1
SECTION 23 31 00
DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division-23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of
this section.
B. Types of ductworks required for the project include the following:
1. Rectangular
C. Exterior Insulation of metal ductwork is specified in other Division 23 sections and is
included as work of this section.
D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork accessories; not work of this section.
E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for rooftop units; not work of this section.
F. Refer to other Division 23 sections for mechanical controls; not work of this section.
G. Refer to other Division 23 sections for filters; not work of this section.
H. Refer to other Division 23 sections for grilles and diffusers; not work of this section.
I. Refer to other Division 23 sections for system commissioning, testing, and balancing; not
work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of metal
ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in
satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
projects with similar metal ductwork systems to that required for this project.
1. The installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of a sufficient amount
to cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor.
2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice
sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders.
C. SUBMITTALS:

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 31 00 - 2
D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for
metal ductwork materials and products.
E. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including, but
not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor
penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork
and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform
to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and
rigidity are not reduced.
F. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductwork
and ductwork products, in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
G. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materials
and products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings in
maintenance manual, in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.
1.4 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards,
Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume, Chapter 1
"Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork.
3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air
Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation
of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems".
4. International Building Code/International Mechanical Code: Comply with all sections
pertaining to mechanical work.
B. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy of SMACNA
"HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING:
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory fabricated ductwork, accessories and
purchased products from damage during shipping, storage, and handling. Prevent end
damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where necessary
to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DUCTWORK - GENERAL:
A. Standards: All duct fabrications shall comply with standards and techniques detailed by
SMACNA "Duct Construction Manuals" for the appropriate pressure class, and with the
ASHRAE Handbook, 1988 edition, Chapter 1, Duct Construction

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 31 00 - 3
B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet steel
complying with ASTM A 527, lock forming quality, with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with
ASTM A 525; mill phosphatized for exposed locations.
C. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied
spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam
marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those
which would impair painting. Installation of exposed ductwork shall be laid out in advance
and submitted for review. Ductwork shall be hung straight and uniform, points shall be true,
seams shall show continuity.
D. Stainless Steel Assemblies: Fabricate of Type 304 SS or Type 316 SS stainless steel sheet
complying with ASTM A-167 with all welded joints and seams. Provide polished No. 4 satin
finish for all ducts exposed to view, No. 1 finish elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill
applied adhesive protective paper through fabrication and installation.
2.2 FITTINGS AND FABRICATION:
A. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15o
change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45o lateral and
45o elbows for branch take-off connections.
B. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as
applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius
equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where
shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30o for contracting tapers and 20o for
expanding tapers.
C. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent
possible. Refer to Division-23 section "Duct Accessories' for accessory requirements.
D. Offset, transition, adapt ductwork to structural obstacles and work of other trades in a
coordinated effort. Layout work to avoid conflict with piping, etc. With review of conditions,
teardrop around conflicting piping, lights, etc., all at no added cost to the owner.
2.3 LOW PRESSURE RECTANGULAR DUCTWORK: (3" SMACNA PRESSURE CLASS)
A. Rectangular ductwork for use on supply systems up to 2" maximum duct static pressure and
2000 fpm maximum duct velocity shall be constructed of galvanized steel using construction
for nominal 3" SMACNA rated systems. Seal all transverse joints with duct cement or tape
with "Hardcast TA".
B. Use radius elbows or turning vanes with extended trailing edge. Use a true 1 -1/2 time 45o
tapping takeoffs with downstream balance damper.
C. Duct dimensions are inside clear. Increase for acoustical lining.
D. For rectangular exhaust ducts, increase metal gauge by 2 (i.e., 20 to 18) for all sizes. Seal all
joints.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 31 00 - 4
2.4 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS:
A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and,
where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork
system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.
B. Duct Sealing Compound: Duct sealing compound shall be 3M brand number EC-750 or Duro-
Dyne S-2. This material shall be used in making up duct joints or in water proofing, caulking
plenums, etc.
C. All joints, edges and/or surface breaks in the coating of the acoustical lining shall be pointed
up to a smooth surface with adhesive.
D. Duct Cement: Non hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene-based cement (type
applicable for fabrication/ installation detail) as compounded and recommended by
manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in
ductwork.
E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot dipped galvanized
steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK:
A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices
which will achieve airtight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated
over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated
service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at
connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support
ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers, and anchors of type which will hold ducts
true to shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor.
B. All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet metal ducts
for the structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be transformed or divided as may
be required. Whenever this is necessary, the required area shall be maintained. All these
changes, however, must be approved and installed as directed at the project. During the
installation, the open ends of ducts shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from
entering.
C. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-
fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 31 00 - 5
D. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally
and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details,
and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not
obstruct usable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts
close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where furring is shown for enclosure
or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate
insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and
occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall
construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions,
except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts
and similar finished work.
E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not run ductwork through transformer vaults and other
electrical equipment spaces and enclosures. Maintain clearances above and in front of
electrical panels.
F. Ducts At Structural and Architectural Penetrations: Where ducts are shown connecting to or
passing through concrete, gypsum board, masonry openings and along edges of all plenums
at floors and walls, provide a continuous 2" x 2-1/8" galvanized angle iron which shall be
bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by applying caulking compound.
Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the angle iron. Round high velocity ducts in
vertical chases shall be supported with rolled angle rings. Close openings between duct and
structure.
G. Cross Breaking: Rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be cross broken on the four sides of each
4-foot panel. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets, elbows, as well as
4-foot panels of straight sections of ducts shall be cross broken. Cross breaking shall be
applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles; the center of
cross break shall be of the required height to assure surfaces being rigid.
H. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coil
frames, equipment, controls, and other associated work of ductwork system.
I. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards.
1. Related to final installation cleanliness, damp wipe all ductwork on installation. Cap
open duct ends, cover fan inlets, vacuum fan plenums and related installation before
starting fans. Run fans only with filters in place.
3.3 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS:
A. It is essential that all ducts be rigidly supported. Hangers for low velocity ducts up to 18" in
width shall be placed on not more than 10' centers.
B. Low velocity ducts 19" through 35" in width and greater shall be supported on not more than
5' centers. Where vertical ducts pass through floors or roofs, heavy supporting angles shall
be attached to ducts, and to structure. Angles shall be of sufficient size to support the
ductwork rigidly and shall be placed on at least two sides of the duct.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 31 00 - 6
C. Construct hangers for rectangular ductwork from galvanized iron l" x 1/16". Hangers shall
extend down the sides of rectangular ducts the full depth of the duct and shall be bent
underneath the duct 2". Hangers shall be secured to the duct using sheet metal screws or
rivets of appropriate sizes on 6" centers, but not less than two screws in the side and one in
the bottom of each hanger.
D. For rectangular ducts 36" and greater in width construct hangers from galvanized iron 1
1/2" x 1/16". Hangers shall be installed and secured to duct as described in Paragraph B.
3.4 SUPPORTING DAMPERS:
A. Parallel and opposed blade motor operated dampers shall be supported by reinforcing the
ductwork or sheet metal walls at the damper locations to carry the weight of the dampers
and the force exerted on the dampers due to air pressure or shall be supported independent
of ductwork from the ceiling or floor, as conditions at the site determine.
3.5 CONNECTIONS:
A. Connections of high velocity supply and exhaust ducts, fittings, and high velocity mixing boxes
shall be made airtight by coating joints with Minnesota Mining Co. Mastic, Type EC 800,
Benjamin Foster, Sheet Metal Products Co., or approved equal, before joining, and then
sealing the joint with one layer of "Glass Fab" reinforcing tape set in a coating of the above
compound. Tape and sealant shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a smoke development
of 50.
3.6 WELDED JOINTS:
A. Welded ductwork shall have either an angle or a piece of 1/8" steel bar behind each weld to
allow laying of a neat and continuous bead.
3.7 AESTHETIC LAYOUTS:
A. Contractor shall locate all diffusers, grilles, and other exposed items in such a manner as to
fit symmetrically in any grid system or other aesthetic architectural or lighting pattern. Refer
to electrical lighting layouts for additional information. Provide duct offsets or extensions as
required to make a proper installation.
B. Close or cap all duct ends. Use an auxiliary blower with air flow meter to establish a duct
pressure equivalent to the duct pressure class. Inspect all joints in duct system and seal all
identifiable leaks.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is
completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test
Manual. Air leaks which are more than that required to bubble the soap suds (that is, actually
blow the suds away) shall be sealed by additional taping and caulking to reduce the leakage
to a rate not to exceed slow bubbles forming. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage
conforms with Chart of Figure 4-1, Seal Class A, Leakage Class 3 for round/oval, 6 for
rectangular.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 31 00 - 7
3.9 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION:
A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for
each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment
containing rotating machinery.
3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Clean ductwork internally of dust and debris, as follows: With filters in place, operate the
fans at full capacity to blow out dirt and debris from ducts. If it is not practical to use the main
supply blower for this test, the ducts may be blown out in sections by a portable fan.
B. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of
metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint
deterioration.
C. Balancing:
1. Refer to Division 23 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for air distribution
balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. However, the Sheet Metal
Contractor shall participate fully in this work. Seal any leaks in ductwork that become
apparent in balancing process.
2. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment
performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor
and his subcontractors shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified
conditions.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 31 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 33 00 - 1
SECTION 23 33 00
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. RELATED DOCUMENTS:
B. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
C. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to the work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:
1. Dampers.
a. Low pressure manual dampers.
2. Turning vanes.
3. Duct hardware.
4. Flexible connections.
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork
accessories; not work of this section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of ductwork
accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 3 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork
accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings for each type of
ductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fastening
or support, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer's maintenance data including parts lists for each
type of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance
manual, in accordance with requirements of General Conditions.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 33 00 - 2
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards, Metal and Flexible".
Industry Standards: Comply with ASHRAE recommendations pertaining to construction of
ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.
UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555
"Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers".
NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air Conditioning and
Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork
accessories.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory-fabricated accessories and purchased
products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and
prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.
B. Storage: Where possible, store accessories inside and protect from the weather. Where
necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DAMPERS:
A. Control dampers for balance only where tight shutoff is not critical are to be furnished and
installed by this Section. 6" galvanized blade, poly foam blade seals, flexible metal jamb.
Parallel blade operation.
1. Ruskin CD-35
2. Greenheck
3. Pottorff
4. Arrow
2.2 TURNING VANES
A. Turning vanes shall be installed in all square elbows. Turning vanes shall be single blade.
Turning vane spacing shall be per SMACNA. Each blade shall be tack welded or crimped to
the carrier frame to prevent rattling.
2.3 DUCT HARDWARE:
A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project,
for the following:

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 33 00 - 3
1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated,
duct test holes, cover, for instrument tests. Ventlok No. 699 closures shall be provided
and installed for each test hole, with sufficient neck length to penetrate the insulation.
2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft;
and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended
quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.
(Bare duct - Ventlok 620, 635; Insulated duct - Ventlok 627, 628, 637, 638, 629.)
B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one of
the following:
1. Ventfabrics, Inc.
2. Young Regulator Co.
2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS:
A. Extent of Work: Provide flexible connections between ductwork or plenums and equipment,
such as at fan inlets and discharges, and at other places indicated on the drawings or called
for by note or specification.
B. Non-Corrosive Environment or Airstream: Provide material of heavy waterproof woven glass
fabric double coated with neoprene or hypalon equivalent to “Ventglas” for interior locations
and “Ventlon” for exterior locations, fabric not less than 3-1/4" wide clamped between strips
of 24-gauge galvanized iron. Material by Ventfabrics, Inc., Chicago, Ill.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES:
A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions,
with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in
accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended
function.
B. Install hand operated volume dampers at locations and of sizes shown. Volume dampers shall
be controlled by heavy duty locking quadrants mounted on the outside of the duct. Butterfly
dampers may be constructed by the Sheet Metal Contractor. All multi blade hand dampers
shall be the product of one of the manufacturers listed in the Contract Documents. All
operator fittings shall be heavy duty commercial grade.
C. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90-degree elbows in supply and exhaust air
systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 33 00 - 4
D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of
ductwork accessories properly with other work.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test
for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to
obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire
dampers and adjust for proper action.
1. Label access doors in accordance with Division 23 section "Mechanical
Identification".
2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 23 section "Testing,
Adjusting, and Balancing".
3. Cleaning: Clean factory finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces
with manufacturer's touch up paint.
3.5 EXTRA STOCK:
A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature
range; obtain receipt.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 37 13 - 1
SECTION 23 37 13
AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by
requirements of this section.
B. Types of outlets and inlets required for project include the following:
1. Air diffusers and grilles.
C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in conjunction
with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section.
D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this
section.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and
inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
projects with metal ductwork systems like that required for the project.
1. The Installer shall have a publicly registered bonding capacity of sufficient amount to
cover this work and all other work in progress by the Contractor.
2. All workmen on the project shall carry state licenses as journeymen or apprentice
sheet metal workers with additional certification for welders.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets
including the following:
1. Schedule of air outlets and inlets indicating drawing designation, room location,
number furnished, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
2. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating
construction, finish, and mounting details.
3. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration
ability, temperature, and velocity traverses; throw and drop; and noise criteria
ratings. Indicate selections on data.
B. Samples: 3 samples of each type of finish furnished.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 37 13 - 2
C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawing for each type of air
outlet and inlet, indicating materials and methods of assembly of components.
1.5 MAINTENANCE DATA: SUBMIT MAINTENANCE DATA, INCLUDING CLEANING
INSTRUCTIONS FOR FINISHES, AND SPARE PARTS LISTS. INCLUDE THIS DATA, PRODUCT
DATA, AND SHOP DRAWINGS IN MAINTENANCE MANUALS, IN ACCORDANCE WITH
REQUIREMENTS OF GENERAL CONDITIONS.
1.6 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650 "Standard
for Air Outlets and Inlets".
ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ASHRAE 70
"Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of
Outlets and Inlets".
NFPA Compliance: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with NFPA 90A "Standard for
the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory fabricated fiber board type containers.
Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid
crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.
B. Store air outlets and inlets in original cartons and protect from weather and construction
work traffic. Where possible, store indoors; when necessary to store outdoors, store above
grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRILLES AND DIFFUSERS:
A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard air diffusers where
shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components
as indicated, and as required for complete installation.
B. Performance: Provide air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and velocity
traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in
manufacturer's current data.
C. Adjust all grilles and diffusers to fit neatly in the room pattern.
D. Volume Control Dampers: Provide duct mounted dampers of the externally adjustable
opposed blade type where more than one grille or register is on a common duct. Provide
access to each damper adjustment.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 37 13 - 3
E. Sound Level: The diffuser or grille generated noise shall not exceed the following sound
power level curve at a point five feet away from the diffuser or grille.
1. Work Rooms: NC 35-40
2. Storage: NC 35-40
F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grilles and diffusers of one
of the following:
1. Krueger
2. Titus
3. EH Price
G. Types: Provide grilles and diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as
listed on grille and diffuser schedule and as specified herein.
H. Grilles and Diffusers:
1. Sidewall Supply Register (S-1): Krueger Series 880H steel, adjustable, double
deflection airfoil blades, 3/4"maximum blade spacing, appropriate mounting frame,
sponge rubber gasket, baked enamel finish, color selected by Architect, size indicated
on drawings.
2. Perforated Return Register (R-1): Krueger Series 6290. Concealed hinge frame,
sponge rubber gasket, white baked-on enamel, size as indicated on drawing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions
and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended
function.
B. Coordinate with other work, including duct work and duct accessories, as necessary to
interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 37 13 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AIR FILTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 41 16 - 1
SECTION 23 41 16
AIR FILTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements sections apply to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of air cleaning work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules,
and by requirements of this section.
B. Types of air cleaning equipment specified in this section include the following:
1. Filter Holding Systems.
a. Factory fabricated for factory fabricated air handlers.
2. Air Filters.
a. Replaceable (throwaway).
b. Extended surface self-supporting.
3. Filter Gages.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of air cleaning
equipment of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data including, dimensions, weights,
required clearances and access, flow capacity including initial and final pressure drop at rated
air flow, efficiency and test method, fire classification, and installation instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly type shop drawings for filter rack
assemblies indicating dimensions, materials, and methods of assembly of components.
C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of filter and
rack required. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in
maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 15.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
UL Compliance: Comply with UL Standards pertaining to safety performance of air filter
units.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AIR FILTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 41 16 - 2
ASHRAE Compliance: Comply with provisions of ASHRAE Standard 52 for method of testing,
and for recording and calculating air flow rates.
ARI Compliance: Comply with provisions of ARI Standard 850 pertaining to test and
performance of air filter units.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR FILTERS:
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, replaceable filter media and
holding frames shall be a product of one of the following:
1. American Air Filter
2. Continental
3. Farr
4. Flanders/Eco Air
B. Holding Frames: Suitable for filters specified.
1. Field fabricated for built-up system - 16-gauge aluminum minimum. Provide
stiffening pieces as required to with stand 10" pressure differential. Fasteners shall
be stainless steel.
2. Filter bank sizes as shown in drawings.
C. Type 1: Replaceable pleated media type filters.
1. Pleated, medium efficiency in a cardboard holding frame, 2" or 4" thick as scheduled,
0.32" s.p. maximum initial pressure drops at 500 feet/minute, to change out at 0.50".
U.L. Class 2, 25-30% efficiency, 90-95% arrestance per ASHRAE Standard 52-76.
2. Equivalent to Farr 30/30.
D. Type 2: Replaceable minipleat 80-85% efficiency.
1. High efficiency V-bank with an ASHRAE MERV Efficiency rating of 13, extended
surface low pressure drops, minipleat filters.
2. Filter sizes and capacities shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
3. Final filters shall consist of minipleat panels. Each panel shall be constructed of
moisture resistant microfine fiberglass media with polyurethane bead separators or
comparable quality of construction.
4. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.30” at 500 FPM.
5. Media area must equal or exceed that of the specified filter.
6. The average efficiency shall be as determined by ASHRAE Standard 52.2-1999 test
methods.
7. Filters shall be UL Class 2 listed.
8. Equivalent to Flanders “Super Flow-V” or Farr “Durafil 4V”.
E. Filter Gauges:
1. Magnehelic Gauge 0-1" range for flat filters, 0-3" range for high efficiency rigid or lag
filters, other gauges to match filter range.
2. Furnish with mounting bracket, pressure tips, tubing vent/zero valves.
F. Startup Set:

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AIR FILTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 41 16 - 3
1. Install a set of Type 2 filters immediately upon fabrication of any filter bank. Install
scheduled set of filters at completion of construction at the time of testing and
balancing. Second set for replacement at the end of the job.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air filters and filter housings will be installed. Do
not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION:
A. General: Comply with installation requirements as specified elsewhere in these
specifications pertaining to air filters housing/casings and associated supporting devices.
B. Install air filters and holding devices of types indicated, and where shown; in accordance with
air filter manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; to
ensure that filters comply with requirements and serve intended purposes. Filter to be
positioned so as air flow pushes filter into frame.
C. Locate each filter unit accurately in the position indicated, in relation to other work. Position
unit with sufficient clearance for normal service and maintenance. Anchor filter holding
frames securely to substrate, with spring attachment, provide second spring attachment and
seal assembly to fasten prefilter to face of final filter.
D. A vertical galvanized metal strip 2" wide and of a gauge equal to the filter frame shall be
installed between each filter column to increase bank rigidity.
E. Coordinate with other work including ductwork and air handling unit work, as necessary to
interface installation of filters properly with other work.
F. Install filters in proper position to prevent passage of unfiltered air.
G. Install air filter gage pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters to indicate air
pressure drop through air filter. Mount filter gages on outside of filter housing or filter
plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and level inclined gages if any, for proper readings.
H. Install 1" sheet metal strip in bottom of each filter frame. Sheetmetal strip shall have
upturned ends to allow for easy removal of filter media.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Operate installed air filters to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air
leakage of unfiltered air while system is operating. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then
retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise remove and replace them with new units and
proceed with retesting.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT AIR FILTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 41 16 - 4
3.4 EXTRA STOCK:
A. Provide two sets of filters: one for start-up/balancing use; the second for replacement at the
end of the job.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 1
SECTION 23 73 50
PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 General Mechanical Requirements, and General Pipes and Fittings sections apply
to work of this section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Extent of rooftop units work is indicated on drawings, schedules, and by requirements of this
section.
B. Types of packaged air handling units specified in this section include the following:
1. Rooftop units.
C. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work.
1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on units. Include
starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as
furnished, or factory installed.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged air
handling units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been
in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience on
projects with metal ductwork systems like that required for project.
C. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for
Mechanical Refrigeration."
D. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by the adopted version of
ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential
Buildings."
E. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that
are listed and labeled.
1.4 SUBMITTALS:
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air handling units showing
dimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearly

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 2
indicated, motor electrical characteristics, gages and finishes of materials, and installation
instructions.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly type shop drawings showing units dimensions, weight
loadings, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details. Detail
mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordi nating
requirements with roof membrane system.
C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring
to air handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder type wiring diagrams for interlock and
control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory installed and
portions to be field installed.
D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication,
filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data,
product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals; in accordance
with requirements of Division 230900.
1.5 REFERENCES:
A. Codes and Standards:
AMCA Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with AMCA standards.
ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI 430 "Standard for
Central Station Air Handling Units", display certification
symbol on units of certified models.
ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance with ASHRAE 15
"Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".
NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling units internal insulation having flame spread rating
not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher than 50;
and complying with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation
of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems".
NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) as applicable to
installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical
components of air handling units.
International Building Code/International Mechanical Code/International Energy
Conservation Code: Comply with all sections pertaining to
mechanical work.
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Deliver air conditioning units with factory installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack
components in factory fabricated protective containers.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 3
B. Handle air handling units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish.
Do not install damaged components; replace and return damaged components to air handling
units’ manufacturer.
C. Store air handling units in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.
Where necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclosed with waterproof wrapping.
D. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading air handling
units and moving them to final location.
1.7 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs and roof penetrations with roofing contractor.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roof mounted air-
handling unit that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.
1. Warranty Period: 12 Months from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFTOP UNITS (RTU-1 & RTU-2:
A. Furnish as shown on plans, Single zone Cooling Units(s). Units’ performance and electrical
characteristics shall be per the job schedule.
B. Configuration: Fabricate as detailed on prints and drawings:
1. Return plenum / economizer section.
2. Filter section
3. Cooling coil section
4. Supply fan section
5. Condensing units’ section
C. The complete units shall be cULus listed.
D. The units shall be ASHRAE 90.1-2016 compliant and labeled.
E. Units shall be specifically designed for outdoor rooftop application and include a
weatherproof cabinet. The units shall be completely factory assembled and shipped in one
piece. Packaged units shall be shipped fully charged with R-410 Refrigerant and oil.
F. The units shall undergo a complete factory run test prior to shipment. The factory test shall
include a refrigeration circuit run test, the units control system operations checkout, the units
refrigerant leak test and a final unit inspection.
G. All units shall have decals and tags to indicate caution areas and aid units’ service. Units’
nameplates shall be fixed to the main control panel door. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be
attached to the control panels. Installation, operating and maintenance bulletins and start-up
forms shall be supplied with the units.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 4
H. Performance: All scheduled EER, IEER, capacities and face areas are minimum accepted
values. All scheduled amps, kW, and HP are maximum accepted values that allow scheduled
capacity to be met.
2.2 CABINET, CASING, AND FRAME
A. Panel construction shall be double-wall construction for all panels. All floor panels shall have
a solid galvanized steel inner liner on the air stream side of the units to protect insulation
during service and maintenance. Insulation shall be a minimum of 2" thick with an R-value of
13.0 and shall be 2-part injected foam. Panel design shall include no exposed insulation
edges. The unit’s cabinet shall be designed to operate at total static pressures up to 5.0 inches
w.c.
B. Exterior surfaces shall be constructed of painted galvanized steel, for aesthetics and long-
term durability. The paint finish will include a base primer with a high-quality polyester resin
topcoat. Finished, unabraded panel surfaces shall be exposed to an ASTM B117 salt spray
environment and exhibit no visible red rust at a minimum of 3,000 hours exposure. Finished,
abraded surfaces shall be tested per ASTM D1654, having a mean scribe creepage not
exceeding 1/16” at 1,000 hours minimum exposure to an ASTM B117 salt spray environment.
Measurements of results shall be quantified using ASTM D1654 in conjunction with ASTM
D610 and ASTM D714 to evaluate blister and rust ratings.
C. Service doors shall be provided on the fan section, filter section, control panel section, and
heating vestibule in order to provide user access to unit’s components. All service access
doors shall be mounted on multiple, stainless-steel hinges and shall be secured by a latch
system. Removable service panels secured by multiple mechanical fasteners are not
acceptable.
D. The unit’s base shall overhang the roof curb for positive water runoff and shall seat on the
roof curb gasket to provide a positive, weathertight seal. Lifting brackets shall be provided
on the unit’s base to accept cable or chain hooks for rigging the equipment.
2.3 OUTDOOR/RETURN AIR SECTION
A. Units shall be provided with an outdoor air economizer section. The economizer section shall
include outdoor, return, and exhaust air dampers. The economizer operation shall be fully
integral to the mechanical cooling and allow up to 100% mechanical cooling if needed to
maintain the cooling discharge air temperature. The outdoor air hood shall be factory
installed and constructed from galvanized steel finished with the same durable paint finish
as the main units. The hood shall include moisture eliminator filters to drain water away from
the entering air stream. The outside and return air dampers shall be sized to handle 100%
of the supply air volume. The dampers shall be parallel blade design. Damper blades shall be
gasketed with side seals to provide an air leakage rate of 1.5 cfm / square foot of damper area
at 1” differential pressure in according with testing defined in AMCA 500. A barometric
exhaust damper shall be provided to exhaust air out of the back of the units. A bird screen
shall be provided to prevent infiltration of rain and foreign materials. Exhaust damper blades
shall be lined with vinyl gasketing on contact edges. Control of the dampers shall be by a
factory installed direct coupled actuator. Damper actuator shall be of the modulating, spring
return type. A comparative enthalpy control shall be provided to sense and compare enthalpy
in both the outdoor and return air streams to determine if outdoor air is suitable for “free”

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 5
cooling. If outdoor air is suitable for “free” cooling, the outdoor air dampers shall modulate
in response to the unit’s temperature control system.
B. Economizer assembly Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD) shall be 90.1, IECC, and
California Title 24 compliant. MicroTech III controls shall display a warning, and write a
warning to the BAS, if the economizer malfunctions in accordance with 90.1, IECC, and Title
24 specifications.
2.4 FILTERS
A. Units shall be provided with a draw-through filter section. The filter rack shall be designed to
accept a 2” prefilter and a 4” final filter. The unit’s design shall have a hinged access door for
the filter section. The manufacturer shall ship the rooftop units with 2” MERV 8 construction
filters. The contractor shall furnish and install, at building occupancy, the final set of filters
per the contract documents.
2.5 COOLING COIL
A. The indoor coil section shall be installed in a draw-through configuration, upstream of the
supply air fan. The coil section shall be complete with a factory piped cooling coil and an
ASHRAE 62.1 compliant double sloped drain pan.
B. The direct expansion (DX) cooling coils shall be fabricated of seamless high efficiency copper
tubing that is mechanically expanded into high efficiency aluminum plate fins. Coils shall be
a multi-row, staggered tube design with a minimum of 3 rows. All cooling coils shall have an
interlaced coil circuiting that keeps the full coil face active at all load conditions. All coils shall
be factory leak tested with high pressure air under water.
C. The cooling coil shall have an electronic controlled expansion valve. The unit’s controller
shall control the expansion valve to maintain liquid subcooling and the superheat of the
refrigerant system.
D. The refrigerant suction lines shall be fully insulated from the expansion valve to the
compressors.
E. The drain pan shall be stainless steel and positively sloped. The slope of the drain pan shall
be in two directions and comply with ASHRAE Standard 62.1. The drain pan shall have a
minimum slope of 1/8" per foot to provide positive draining. The drain pa n shall extend
beyond the leaving side of the coil. The drain pan shall have a threaded drain connection
extending through the unit’s base.
2.6 SUPPLY FAN
A. Supply fan shall be a single width, single inlet (SWSI) airfoil centrifugal fan. The fan wheel
shall be Class II construction with fan blades that are continuously welded to the hub plate
and end rim. The supply fan shall be a direct drive fan mounted to the motor shaft. Belts and
sheaves are not acceptable due to the additional maintenance.
B. All fan assemblies shall employ solid steel fan shafts. Heavy-duty pillow block type, self-
aligning, grease lubricated ball bearings shall be used. Bearings shall be sized to provide an

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 6
L-50 life at 250,000 hours. The entire fan assembly shall be isolated from the fan bulkhead
with a flexible collar and mounted on 1” spring isolators.
C. All fan assemblies shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory, including a final
trim balance, prior to shipment.
D. Supply fan and motor assembly combinations larger than 8 hp or 22” diameter shall be
internally isolated on 1” deflection, spring isolators and include removable shipping tie
downs.
E. The motor shall be T Frame and open drip proof. Overload protection and speed control is
provided by the factory installed VFD and rooftop unit’s controller. The motor shall have
phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase.
Motors shall be premium efficiency.
F. The supply fan shall be capable of airflow modulation from 30% to 100% of the scheduled
designed airflow. The fan shall not operate in a state of surge at any point within the
modulation range.
2.7 CONDENSING SECTION
A. Outdoor coils shall have seamless copper tubes, mechanically bonded into aluminum plate-
type fins. The fins shall have full drawn collars to completely cover the tubes. A sub -cooling
coil shall be an integral part of the main outdoor air coil. Each outdoor air coil shall be factory
leak tested with high-pressure air under water.
B. Outdoor air coils shall be protected from incidental contact to coil fins by a coil guard. The
coil guard shall be constructed of cross wire welded steel with PVC coating.
C. Fan motors shall be an ECM type motor for proportional control. The unit’s controller shall
proportionally control the speed of the condenser fan motors to maintain the head pressure
of the refrigerant circuit from ambient condition of 0~120°F. Mechanical cooling shall be
provided to 0º F. The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor
in case of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and
prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase.
D. The condenser fan shall be low noise blade design. Fan blade design shall be a dynamic
profile for low tip speed. Fan blades shall be of a composite material.
E. The units shall have scroll compressors. One of the compressors shall be an inverter
compressor providing proportional control. The unit’s controller shall control the speed of
the compressor to maintain the discharge air temperature. The inverter com pressor shall
have a separate oil pump and low oil safety protection.
F. Pressure transducers shall be provided for the suction pressure and head pressure.
Temperature sensor shall be provided for the suction temperature and the refrigerant
discharge temperature of the compressors. All of the above devices shall be an input t o the
unit’s controller and the values be displayed at the unit’s controller.
G. Each circuit shall be dehydrated, and factory charged with R-410A Refrigerant and oil.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 7
2.8 ELECTRICAL
A. Units wiring shall comply with NEC requirements and with all applicable UL standards. All
electrical components shall be UL recognized where applicable. All wiring and electrical
components provided with the units shall be number and color-coded and labeled according
to the electrical diagram provided for easy identification. The units shall be provided with a
factory wired weatherproof control panel. Units shall have a single point power terminal
block for the main power connection. A terminal board shall be provided for low voltage
control wiring. Branch short circuit protection, 115-volt control circuit transformer and fuse,
system switches, and a high temperature sensor shall also be provided with the units. Each
compressor and condenser fan motor shall be furnished with contactors and inherent
thermal overload protection. Supply fan motors shall have contactors and external overload
protection. Knockouts shall be provided in the bottom of the main control panels for field
wiring entrance.
B. A single non-fused disconnect switch shall be provided for disconnecting electrical power at
the units. Disconnect switches shall be mounted internally to the control panel and operated
by an externally mounted handle.
2.9 CONTROLS
A. Provide a complete integrated microprocessor based Direct Digital Control (DDC) system to
control all units’ functions including temperature control, scheduling, monitoring, units’
safety protection, including compressor minimum run and minimum off times, and
diagnostics. This system shall consist of all required temperature sensors, pressure sensors,
controller, and keypad/display operator interface. All MCBs and sensors shall be factory
mounted, wired, and tested.
B. The stand-alone DDC controllers shall not be dependent on communications with any on-site
or remote PC or master control panel for proper units’ operation. The microprocessor shall
maintain existing set points and operate stand-alone if the units lose either direct connection
or network communications. The microprocessor memory shall be protected from voltage
fluctuations as well as any extended power failures. All factory and user set schedules and
control points shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory. No settings shall be lost, even
during extended power shutdowns.
C. The DDC control system shall permit the starting and stopping of the units locally or remotely.
The control system shall be capable of providing a remote alarm indication. The units control
system shall provide for outside air damper actuation, emergency s hutdown, remote heat
enable/disable, remote cool enable/disable, heat indication, cool indication, and fan
operation.
D. All digital inputs and outputs shall be protected against damage from transients or incorrect
voltages. All field wiring shall be terminated at a separate, clearly marked terminal strip.
E. The DDC controller shall have a built-in time schedule. The schedule shall be programmable
from the unit’s keypad interface. The schedule shall be maintained in nonvolatile memory to
ensure that it is not lost during a power failure. There shall be one sta rt/stop per day and a
separate holiday schedule. The controller shall accept up to sixteen holidays each with up to

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 8
a 5-day duration. The units shall also have the ability to accept a time schedule via BAS
network communications.
F. The keypad interface shall allow convenient navigation and access to all control functions.
The units keypad/display character format shall be 4 lines x 20 characters. All control
settings shall be password protected against unauthorized changes. For ease of service, the
display format shall be English language readout. Coded formats with look-up tables will not
be accepted. The user interaction with the display shall provide the following information as
a minimum:
1. Return air temperature.
2. Discharge air temperature.
3. Outdoor air temperature.
4. Space air temperature.
5. Outdoor enthalpy, high/low.
6. Compressor suction temperature and pressure.
7. Compressor head pressure and temperature.
8. Expansion valve position.
9. Condenser fan speed.
10. Inverter compressor speed.
11. Dirty filter indication.
12. Airflow verification.
13. Cooling status.
14. Control temperature (Changeover).
15. VAV box output status.
16. Cooling status/capacity.
17. Units’ status.
18. All time schedules.
19. Active alarms with time and date.
20. Previous alarms with time and date.
21. Optimal start
22. Supply fan and exhaust fan speed.
23. System operating hours.
a. Fan
b. Exhaust fan
c. Cooling
d. Individual compressor
e. Heating
f. Economizer
g. Tenant override
G. The user interaction with the keypad shall provide the following:
1. Controls mode
a. Off manual
b. Auto
c. Heat/Cool
d. Cool only
e. Heat only
f. Fan only
2. Occupancy mode
a. Auto

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 9
b. Occupied
c. Unoccupied
d. Tenant override
3. Units’ operation changeover control
a. Return air temperature.
b. Space temperature
c. Network signal
4. Cooling and heating change-over temperature with dead band
5. Cooling discharge air temperature (DAT)
6. Supply reset options.
a. Return air temperature.
b. Outdoor air temperature
c. Space temperature
d. Airflow (VAV)
e. Network signal
f. External (0-10 vdc)
g. External (0-20 mA)
7. Temperature alarm limits
a. High supply air temperature
b. Low supply air temperature
c. High return air temperature
8. Lockout control for compressors.
9. Compressor interstage timers
10. Night setback and setup space temperature.
11. Building static pressure.
12. Economizer changeover
a. Enthalpy
b. Drybulb temperature
13. Currently time and date
14. Tenant override time
15. Occupied/unoccupied time schedule
16. One event schedule
17. Holiday dates and duration
18. Adjustable set points
19. Service mode
a. Timers normal (all time delays normal)
b. Timers fast (all time delays 20 sec)
H. If the units is to be programmed with a night setback or setup function, an optional space
sensor shall be provided. Space sensors shall be available to support field selectable features.
Sensor options shall include:
1. Zone sensor with tenant override switch
2. Zone sensor with tenant override switch plus heating and cooling set point
adjustment. (Space Comfort Control systems only)
I. To increase the efficiency of the cooling system the DDC controller shall include a discharge
air temperature reset program for part load operating conditions. The discharge air
temperature shall be controlled between a minimum and a maximum discharge air
temperature (DAT) based on one of the following inputs:
1. Airflow

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 10
2. Outside air temperature
3. Space temperature
4. Return air temperature
5. External signal of 1-5 vdc
6. External signal of 0-20 mA
7. Network signal
2.10 ROOF CURB
A. A prefabricated heavy gauge galvanized steel, mounting curb shall be provided for field
assembly on the roof decking prior to unit’s shipment. The roof curb shall be a full perimeter
type with complete perimeter support of the air handling section and condensing section. The
curb shall be a minimum of 14" high and include a nominal 2" x 4" wood nailing strip. A gasket
shall be provided for field mounting between the unit’s base and roof curb.
2.11 MANUFACTURER
A. Aaon
B. Mammoth
C. Greenheck
D. Trane
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which air handling units are to be installed. Do not
proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner
acceptable to the Installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS:
A. General: Install air handling units where indicated, in accordance with equipment
manufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices,
to ensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.
B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor construction, roof
decking, piping, and electrical as necessary to interface installation of air handling units with
other work.
C. Access: Provide access space around air handling units for service as indicated, but in no
case less than that recommended by manufacturer.
D. Mounting: Mount air conditioning units on the 36” high curb, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 11
E. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be
factory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical
Installer.
1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's
submittal and installation requirements of Division 16 sections. Do not proceed with
equipment start up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.
F. Duct Connections: Refer to Division 23 Air Distribution sections. Provide ductwork,
accessories, and flexible connections as indicated.
G. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for air handling units components.
H. Coil Condensate Drain Trap: Provide coil condensate drain trap of proper size and depth for
each side of the rooftop units coil condensate drain pan.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL:
A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of air handling units, start up and operate
equipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correct
malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.
B. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment performance or
improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor and his subcontractors
shall make any changes necessary to obtain the specified conditions.
3.4 EXTRA STOCK:
A. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each air handling unit. Install new filters at
completion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work.
Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed.
END OF SECTION

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PACKAGED ROOFTOP UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 73 50 - 12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TERMINAL ELECTRIC HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 76 00 - 1
SECTION 23 76 00
TERMINAL ELECTRIC HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. Division 23 Motors Drives and Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Systems, General
Mechanical Requirements, and General Pipes and Fittings sections apply to work of this
section.
1.2 SUMMARY:
A. Types of terminal units required for project include the following:
1. Unit heaters, electric
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS (EUH):
A. Corrosion resistant electric unit heater, metal sheathed heating elements brazed with
stainless steel spiral fins molded in a coil configuration. To include a complete assembly with
mounting.
B. House control components in NEMA 4 fiberglass enclosure include power contactors, motor
contactors and fused transformer for control circuit, terminal block for thermostat
connection.
C. Totally enclosed fan and motor assembly, permanently lubricated, ball bearing motor epoxy
coated. The fan shall be aluminum with corrosion coating and dynamically balanced. Provide
sealed thermal delay to allow unit cool down. Provide built-in over temperature protection
with epoxy sealed automatic and manual reset thermal cutouts.
D. 18-gauge, Type 304 stainless steel enclosure with stainless steel hardware and universal
wall/ceiling mounting bracket, adjustable stainless steel outlet louver and stainless steel inlet
screen.
E. Internal Controls: Provide magnetic contactors. The control voltage shall be 24V control.
Provide with control transformer. Over 5kW, the line voltage controls shall be operating the
contactor coil only and draw only 1 Amp.
F. Fusing: Internal circuit fusing shall be provided when the heater ampacity exceeds 48 Amps
to comply with UL standards. A fan delay shall be provided standard on models 12.5-kW and
above to dissipate residual heat from the heating elements.

HEATH
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TERMINAL ELECTRIC HEAT TRANSFER UNITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 23 76 00 - 2
G. Thermostat: Thermostat with fan switch for wall mounting as indicated shall be furnished
with electric unit heaters, include wiring.
H. Approvals: cULus
I. Selection based on King. See equipment schedule for sizes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION:
A. Examine areas and conditions under which terminal units are to be installed. Do not proceed
with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the
installer.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS:
A. General: Install heaters as indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer’s installation
instructions.
B. Locate heaters where indicated.
C. Provide and install hangers and support for heaters.
3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING:
A. General: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to be factory
mounted.
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING:
A. General: After construction is completed, including painting, clean unit exposed surfaces,
vacuum clean terminal coils and inside of unit heater cabinets.
B. Retouch any marred or scratched surfaces of factory-finished unit heater cabinets, using
finish materials furnished by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 26
ELECTRICAL

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 1
SECTION 26 05 00
ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The CONTRACTOR shall provide electrical and appurtenant Work necessary for a complete
and operable electrical system, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Make all field connections and terminations to all motors, switchgear, panels, control
equipment and devices, instruments, and to all vendor-furnished packaged equipment. The
requirements of this Section shall apply to all electrical items indicated in the various Sections
of Division 16 unless otherwise indicated.
C. Provide all materials and incidentals required to complete the electrical work. Typical
materials which may be incidentals are terminal lugs not furnished with vendor -supplied
equipment, compression connectors for cables, splices, junction and terminal bo xes, and all
control wires required by vendor-furnished equipment to interconnect with other equipment
all specifically indicated on the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Codes and Standards
NEC National Electrical Code, latest edition
B. Government Standards
FS W-C-596E/GEN(1) Connector, Plug, Receptacle and Cable Outlet, Electrical Power
FS W-S-896E/GEN(1) Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lode), Flush Mounted (ac)
FS WW-C-581D, E Conduit, Metal, Rigid, And Intermediate; And Coupling, Elbow,
and Nipple, Electrical Conduit: Steel, Zinc Coated
OSHA Safety and Health Standards, 29 CFR 1910 and 29 CFR 1926
as applicable
C. Commercial Standards
ANSI C80.1 Zinc Coated, Rigid Steel Conduit, Specification for
ANSI C80.4 Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing,
Specifications for
ANSI/UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment, Safety Standard for
ASTM B 3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 2
ASTM B 8 Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper
Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, and Soft
ASTM B 33 Specification for Timed Soft or Annealed Cooper Wire for
Electrical Purposes
ICEA S-61-402 Thermoplastic - Insulated Wire and Cable
ICEA S-68-516, NEMA WC8 Ethylene Propylene Rubber Insulated Wire and Cable
NEMA 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1,000 volts maximum)
NEMA PB-1 Panelboards
UL 6 Rigid Metal Electrical Conduit
UL 514 Electrical Outlet Boxes and Fittings
D. All equipment furnished by the CONTRACTOR shall be listed by and shall bear the label of
Underwriters' Laboratories, Incorporated, (UL) or an independent testing laboratory
acceptable to the local Code-enforcement agency having jurisdiction.
E. The construction and installation of all electrical equipment and materials shall comply with
all applicable provisions of the OSHA Safety and Health Standards (29CFR1910 and
29CFR1926, as applicable), State Building Standards, and applicable local codes and
regulations.
1.3 PERMITS AND INSPECTION
A. Permits shall be obtained and inspection fees shall be paid for as indicated in Article 6.06 of
the General Conditions.
1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings and Catalog Data: Submit shop drawings and catalog data submittals in
accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Contractor Submittals.
B. Submit complete material lists for the Work of this Section. Such lists shall state
manufacturer and brand name of each item or class of material. Submit shop drawings for all
grounding work not specifically indicated.
C. Shop drawings are required for materials and equipment listed in other sections. Shop
drawings shall provide sufficient information to evaluate the suitability of the proposed
material or equipment for the intended use, and for compliance with these Speci fications.
The following shall be included:
1. Front, side, rear elevations and top views with dimensional data.
2. Location of conduit entrances and access plates.
3. Component data.
4. Connection diagrams, terminal numbers, wire numbers, internal wiring diagrams,
conductor size, and cable numbers.
5. Method of anchoring, seismic requirement; weight.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 3
6. Types of materials and finish.
7. Nameplates.
8. Temperature limitations, as applicable.
9. Voltage requirement, as applicable.
10. Front and rear access requirements.
D. Catalog data shall be submitted to supplement all shop drawings. Catalog cuts, bulletins,
brochures, or the like or photocopies of applicable pages thereof shall be submitted for mass
produced, noncustom manufactured material. These catalog data sheets shall be stamped to
indicate the project name, applicable Specification section and paragraph, model number,
and options. This information shall be marked in spaces designated for such data in the
stamp.
E. Materials and Equipment Schedules: Furnish within 30 days, a complete list of all materials,
equipment, apparatus, and fixtures proposed for use. The list shall include type, sizes, names
of manufacturers, catalog numbers, and such other information required to identify the items.
F. O&M Manuals: Furnish manuals as part of the shop drawing submittals under "Operation
and Maintenance Manuals" in Section 01 33 20 - Contractor Submittals.
G. Record Drawings: In addition to the record drawings as a part of the record drawing
requirements specified in Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals, show depths and routing
of all duct bank concealed below grade electrical installations. Said set of record drawings
shall be available to the ENGINEER during construction. After final inspection, transfer all
record drawing information using a red pen to a set of drawings which shall then be delivered
to the ENGINEER. In addition, the record drawings shall show all variations between the
Work as actually constructed and as originally shown on the Drawings, based upon
information supplied by the CONTRACTOR.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Field Control of Location and Arrangement: The Drawings diagrammatically indicate the
desired location and arrangement of outlets, conduit runs, equipment, and other items.
Determine exact locations in the field based on the physical size and arrangement of
equipment, finished elevations, and other obstructions. Locations shown on the Drawings,
however, shall be adhered to as closely as possible.
B. All conduit and equipment shall be installed in such a manner as to avoid all obstructions and
to preserve head room and keep openings and passageways clear. Lighting fixtures, switches,
convenience outlets, and similar items shall be located within finished rooms, as shown.
Where the Drawings do not indicate exact locations, such locations shall be obtained from the
ENGINEER. Where equipment is installed without instruction and must be moved, it shall be
moved without additional cost to the OWNER.
C. Workmanship: All materials and equipment shall be installed in accordance with printed
recommendations of the manufacturer which have been reviewed by the ENGINEER. The
installation shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in this type of work and installation
shall be coordinated in the field with other trades so that interferences are avoided.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 4
D. All Work, including installation, connection, calibration, testing, adjustment, and paint
touchup, shall be accomplished by qualified, experienced personnel working under
continuous, competent supervision. The completed installation shall display competent
work, reflecting adherence to prevailing industrial standards and methods.
E. Protection of Equipment and Materials: Furnish adequate means for and shall fully protect
all finished parts of the materials and equipment against damage from any cause during the
progress of the Work and until acceptable by the ENGINEER.
F. All materials and equipment, both in storage and during construction, shall be covered in
such a manner that no finished surfaces will be damaged, marred, or splattered with water,
foam, plaster, or paint. All moving parts shall be kept clean and dry.
G. Replace or have refinished by the manufacturer, all damaged materials or equipment,
including face plates of panels and switchboard sections, at no expense to the OWNER.
H. Tests: Perform all tests required by the ENGINEER or other authorities having jurisdictions.
All such tests shall be performed in the presence of the ENGINEER. Furnish all necessary
testing equipment and pay all costs of tests, including all replacement parts and labor
necessary due to damage resulting from damaged equipment or from test and correction of
faulty installation. The following testing shall be accomplished:
1. Insulation resistance tests under "Wire and Cable," below.
2. Operational testing of all equipment furnished and/or connected in other Sections of
Division 16, including furnishing of support labor for testing.
I. Standard test reports for mass-produced equipment shall be submitted along with the shop
drawing for such equipment. Test reports on testing specifically required for individual
pieces of equipment shall be submitted for review prior to final acceptance of the project.
J. Any test failure shall be corrected in accordance with the industry practices and in a manner
satisfactory to the ENGINEER.
1.6 AREA DESIGNATIONS
A. General: For purposes of delineating electrical enclosure and electrical installation
requirements of this project, certain areas have been classified in the Contract Documents as
defined below. Electrical installations within these areas shall conform to the referenced
code requirements for the area involved.
B. General Purpose Indoor Locations: Electrical work installed in areas which are not otherwise
specifically classified shall be "General Purpose." Workmanship and enclosures shall comply
with the general requirements of these Specifications. Electrical enclosures shall be NEMA
Type 12.
C. Outdoor and Damp Locations: In outdoor locations, raceway shall be PVC-coated GRS
conduit; entrances shall be threaded Hub Style fittings; and conduit fittings shall have
gasketed covers. 90 degree elbows in underground ducts shall be PVC-coated GRS conduits,
wrapping with tape is not allowed. Provisions shall be made to drain the fitting or conduit
system. Threaded fastening hardware shall be stainless steel. Raceway supports such as
hanger rods, clamps, and brackets shall be galvanized. Attachments or welded assemblies

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 5
shall be galvanized after fabrication. Instruments and control cabinets, and panel enclosures
shall be NEMA Type 4X stainless steel. Switchboard and motor control centers shall be
weatherproof NEMA Type 3R. Enclosures shall be mounted 1 inch from walls to provide an
air space. Locations which are indoors and 2 feet below grade elevation or which are
classified as damp locations on the Drawings shall have electrical installations which conform
to the requirements for outdoor locations. "Damp locations" shall include pipe galleries,
tunnels, vaults, and basements. All rooms housing liquid handling equipment are also
classified as damp locations regardless of grade elevation.
D. Vaults with forced air ventilation are not considered “damp locations”. NEMA Type 4X
stainless steel panels will be required in these areas
E. Splash Locations: Areas shown as splashproof shall have electrical installations as described
for "outdoor locations."
1.7 CLEANUP
A. In addition to the requirements of "Cleanup" in Section 01 70 10 - Project Closeout, all parts
of the materials and equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned. Exposed parts shall be
thoroughly clean of cement, plaster, and other materials. All oil and grease spots shall be
removed with a nonflammable cleaning solvent. Such surfaces shall be carefull y wiped and
all cracks and corners scraped out. Paint touchup shall be applied to all scratches on panels
and cabinets. Electrical cabinets or enclosures shall be vacuum cleaned before final
acceptance.
B. During the progress of the Work, clean the premises and leave the premises and all portions
of the site free of debris.
1.8 DEMOLITION AND RELATED WORK
A. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all electrical demolition work as indicated.
1. Electrical equipment and components, terminal and relay cabinets, MCCs, shall be
returned to the OWNER in an orderly fashion to a designated location on the site.
2. Wire, conduit, junction boxes, fittings, supports and miscellaneous hardware
removed a part of the demolition work shall not be reused and shall be returned to
the OWNER for their salvage use.
3. Wires and/or conduits which need to be extended shall be terminated in a new
terminal box with terminal strips. Terminal box shall be properly sized by the
CONTRACTOR unless specified on drawings. Wires and terminals shall be properly
identified before disconnection and after reconnection.
4. Wiring in conduits located in or under slabs shall be removed. The conduit shall be
plugged level with the floor where practical. In other cases, the conduit shall be cut
three inches below the finished floor and the area shall be resurfaced.
5. Openings in walls and platforms created by the removal of conduit or electrical
equipment shall be patched with materials similar to those in surrounding work areas
or as required to provide proper sealed conditions as reviewed and accepted by the
ENGINEER.
6. Electrical demolition works shall be as shown on the Drawings or as required by the
Specifications.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 6
7. Exercise due care in the removal of the equipment made surplus by this project so as
not to impair its resale value or reuse. The OWNER has the right to salvage any wire
or other electrical equipment removed from the project.
8. Contractor shall be responsible for properly disposing of all electrical demolition
materials, except those items to be salvaged to the OWNER as directed by the
ENGINEER.
B. Installation of New Equipment in Existing Structures
1. Certain new equipment and devices' installation are required in existing structures.
Under this phase of the Work the CONTRACTOR shall be required to remove existing
equipment or devices, install new equipment as indicated, remove existing
conductors from existing raceway, and pull new conductors in existing raceway,
reconnect existing conductors or furnish and install new conduit and wires.
2. Visit the site before bidding and carefully examine existing installation so that its
proposal will reflect all the Work necessary to provide a complete installation so that
the resulting installation will function as required. Include in the bid price all costs of
labor and materials necessary to complete installations.
C. Installation of Temporary Equipment
1. To facilitate continuous operation of existing equipment, provide temporary
equipment indicated. Submit installation and connection details for review and
acceptance. All costs associated with these temporary installations shall be part of
the original Bid Documents, and without additional cost to the OWNER.
2. All cables, conduits, and fittings used in temporary connections shall not be reused to
install permanent connections. Return the salvage items to the OWNER.
D. Plant Monitoring Power and Control Shutdowns
1. Continuance of plant operation during this demolition and expansion process is
important. Therefore, carefully examine all Work to be done in, on, or adjacent to
existing equipment. Work shall be scheduled, subject to OWNER’S approval, to
minimize required plant shutdown time. Submit a written request, including
sequence and duration of activities to be performed during plant shutdown.
2. Perform all switching and safety tagging required for plant shutdown or to isolate
existing equipment. In no case shall the CONTRACTOR begin any Work in, on, or
adjacent to existing equipment without written authorization.
E. Modifications to Existing Electrical Facilities
1. Provide all modifications or alterations to existing electrical facilities required to
successfully install and integrate the new electrical equipment. All modifications to
existing equipment, panels, or cabinets shall be made in a professional manner wit h
all coatings repaired to match existing. The total costs for all modifications to existing
electrical facilities required for a complete and operating system shall be included in
the original bid amount and no additional payment for this Work shall be authorized.
Extreme caution shall be exercised in digging trenches in order not to damage existing
underground utilities. Cost of repairs of damages caused during construction shall be
the CONTRACTOR's responsibility.
2. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for verifying all available existing circuit
breakers in lighting panels for their intended use as required by the Drawings. It shall
also be responsible for verifying the available space in substation switchboards to

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 7
integrate new power circuit breakers. Expenses in time for all of this Work shall be
included in the original bid amount.
1.9 PROJECT OR SITE CONDITIONS
A. Site Conditions:
1. Provide an electrical, instrumentation and control system, including all equipment,
raceways and any other components required for a complete installation that meets
the Environmental conditions for the Site as specified in the General Requirements
and below.
2. Seismic Classification:
a. Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for the
seismic requirements for the Site, as specified in section 01 81 10.
3. Wind:
a. Provide all electrical equipment and construction techniques suitable for the
Site wind loading criteria, as specified in section 01 81 11.
4. Altitude:
a. The site is located at approximately 4,600 feet above mean sea level. Provide
all electrical components and equipment fully rated for continuous operation
at this altitude, with no additional derating factors applied.
5. Humidity:
a. The facility is located in an area where the relative humidity is 90 percent
non-condensing. Furnish all components and equipment fully rated for
continuous operation at this relative humidity level.
6. Temperature:
a. The facility is located in an area where the temperature will vary from a
minimum of -20 degrees Fahrenheit to a maximum of 100 degrees Fahrenheit.
b. Provide additional temperature conditioning equipment to maintain all
equipment in non-conditioned spaces subject to these ambient temperatures
10 degrees Fahrenheit above the minimum operating temperature and 10
degrees Fahrenheit below maximum operating temperature as determined
by the equipment Manufacturer’s guidelines.
7. Outdoor installations:
a. Provide all electrical, instrumentation and control equipment installed
outdoors that are suitable for operation in the ambient conditions where the
equipment is located.
b. Provide heating, cooling, and de-humidifying devices incorporated into and
included with electrical equipment, instrumentation and control panels
located outdoors in order to maintain the enclosures within the rated
environmental operating ranges as specified in this Paragraph for the
equipment:
1) Provide all wiring necessary to power these devices.
8. Site Security:
a. Abide by all security and safety rules concerning the Work on the Site.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All equipment and materials shall be new, shall be listed by UL, and shall bear the UL label,
where UL requirements apply. All equipment and materials shall be the products of
experienced and reputable manufacturers in the industry. Similar items in the proj ect shall
be products of the same manufacturer. All equipment and materials shall be of industrial
grade and standard of construction; shall be of sturdy design and manufacture; and shall be
capable of reliable, trouble-free service.
2.2 GROUNDING
A. General: All components of the grounding electrode system shall be manufactured in
accordance with UL 467 and shall conform to the applicable requirements of National
Electrical Code Article 250.
B. Grounding cable shall be copper. Bare copper wire shall be annealed, No. 8 AWG minimum,
if not called out in the Drawings.
C. Ground rods shall conform to ANSI/UL 467 and shall be ¾-inch diameter, 10 feet long copper-
clad steel, sectional type, joined by threaded copper alloy couplings.
1. Grounding connectors shall be high-strength copper alloy suitable for direct burial.
2. Wire connections shall be exothermic weld by Cadweld of Erico Products.
a. Manufacturers of grounding materials shall be Copperweld, Blackburn,
Burndy, or equal.
2.3 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND MANHOLES
A. General: Where an underground distribution system is required, it shall be comprised of
multiple runs of single bore nonmetallic ducts, with underground manholes and pullboxes.
When nonmetallic ducts are required, they shall be rigid Schedule 40 PVC for concrete
encasement or with select backfill as shown on drawings.
1. Manholes and pullboxes shall be of precast concrete and shall be 4’ X 3’ X 3’. Concrete
construction shall be designed for traffic loading.
B. Covers shall be traffic type, except as shown otherwise. Manholes and pullbox covers
designated as "HV" covers shall be identified as "High Voltage Electric," "P" shall be identified
as "Secondary Electric," "C" as "Control" and "S" as "Signal." All covers shall be watertight
after installation.
C. Manholes and pullboxes shall be equipped with pulling-in irons opposite and below each
ductway entrance.
D. Manholes shall have concrete covers with 30--inch diameters lids. All covers and lids shall
be bolted to cast-in-place steel frames with corrosion resistant hardware. Frames shall be
factory-primed; covers shall be cast-iron and shall have pick holes or lifting handles.
1. Manholes and pullboxes shall have cable supports so that each cable is supported at
3-foot intervals within the manhole or pullbox. Cable supports and racks shall be

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 9
fastened with galvanized bolts and shall be fabricated of fiberglass or galvanized steel.
Porcelain insulators for cable racks shall be provided.
2. Manholes and pullboxes shall be Brooks, Quikset, U.S. Precast, or equal.
E. The concrete envelope shall have a compression strength of 4,000 psi in accordance with the
requirements of Section 03 30 53 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
2.4 RACEWAYS
A. General: Raceway shall be manufactured in accordance with UL and ANSI standards and shall
bear UL label as applicable.
B. Rigid nonmetallic conduit shall be Schedule 40 PVC.
1. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings shall be UL listed, sunlight-resistant, and rated for
use with 90 degrees C conductors.
2. Nonmetallic conduits and fittings shall be manufactured by Carlon, Condux, or equal.
C. Flexible metallic conduit shall be fabricated from galvanized interlocked steel strip. Liquid-
tight flexible metallic conduit shall have an extruded PVC covering over the flexible steel
conduit. For conduit sizes 3/4 inch through 1-1/4 inches, flexible conduits shall have
continuous built in copper ground conductor. Flexible conduit shall be American Brass,
Anaconda, Electroflex, or equal.
D. PVC-coated Galvanized Rigid Steel (PVC-coated GRS) raceway system shall conform to
Federal Specification WW-C-581E, ANSI C80.1, and to Underwriter's Laboratories
specifications.
1. The zinc surfaces of the conduits and fittings shall remain intact and undisturbed on
both the inside and the outside of the conduit through the preparation and application
processing.
2. A PVC coating shall be bonded to the galvanized outer surface of the conduit. The
bond between the PVC coating and the conduit surface shall be greater than the
tensile strength of the plastic.
3. The thickness of the PVC coating shall be a minimum of 40 mils.
a. A PVC jacketed coupling shall be furnished with each length of conduit. A PVC
sleeve equal to the OD of the conduit shall extend 1-1/2 inches from each end
of coupling.
b. PVC-coated conduits shall be as manufactured by Robroy, Ocal or equal.
2.5 WIRE AND CABLE
A. General: All conductors, including ground conductors, shall be copper. Insulation shall bear
UL label and the manufacturer's trademark, type, voltage and temperature rating, and
conductor size. Wire and cable shall be products of American, BICC/General, Rome Cable,
Okonite, or equal.
B. Control Cables: All control cables shall be rated for 600 volts and shall meet the following
requirements:
1. Control wires shall consist of No. 14 gage stranded copper conductors and shall be
MTW rated for 90 degrees C at dry locations and 75 degrees C at wet locations.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 10
2. Control wires at panels and cabinets shall be machine tool grade type MTW, UL
approved, rated for 90 degrees C at dry locations.
C. Instrumentation Cables: Shielded instrumentation cables shall be rated at 600 volts and shall
comply with the following requirements:
1. Individual shielded cable shall consist of twisted 2 or 3 No. 16 gage, stranded, color
coded, tinned-coated copper in accordance with ASTM B 33 - Specification for Tinned
Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes and B 8 - Specification for
Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, and Soft. Color
coding shall be black-clear, or black-red-clear.
2. Insulation thickness shall be 32 mils of polyethylene, insulated with 2.3 mils 100
percent aluminum foil/polyester shield and No. 18 stranded tinned copper drain
wire, all under a 32 mil PVC jacket. The shield shall be continuous and shall be
grounded only at the receiving end, or as indicated.
3. Multi-individual shielded pair or triad instrumentation cable shall consist of
individual shielded and twisted pair copper conductors with an ethylene-propylene
insulation, and No. 16 AWG tinned stranded copper drain wire, an overall aluminum
mylar shield and an overall chloro-sulfonated polyethylene compound jacket. The
cables shall be suitable for cable tray installation and shall be flame retardant.
D. Building Wire and Cable: Building wires and cables shall be rated at 600 volts and shall meet
the following requirements:
1. Building wire shall be single conductor copper cable listed by UL as Type XHHW-2
rated 90 degrees C in dry and wet locations.
2. Building wire; all conductors shall be stranded.
3. No wire smaller than No. 12 AWG shall be used unless specifically indicated.
E. Cable Terminations: Cable terminations shall be in accordance with the following:
1. Compression connectors shall be Burndy "Hi Lug", Thomas & Betts "Shure Stake", or
equal. Threaded connectors shall be split bolt type of high strength copper alloy.
2. Spring connectors (wire nuts) shall be 3M "Scotch Lok," "Ideal Wing Nuts", or equal.
3. Preinsulated fork tongue lugs shall be "Thomas & Betts" RC Series, Burndy, or equal.
4. General purpose insulating tape shall be Scotch No. 33, Plymouth "Slip-knot", or
equal. High temperature tape shall be polyvinyl by Plymouth, 3M, or equal.
5. Epoxy resin splicing kits shall be 3M Scotchcoat 82 Series, Burndy Hy Seal, or equal.
6. Stress cone material for makeup of medium voltage shielded cable shall be by 3M- No
substitutions.
7. Motor load termination kits shall be 3M.
2.6 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Outlet and switch boxes for flush-mounting in general purpose locations shall be one-piece,
galvanized, pressed steel. Pull and junction boxes for flush-mounting shall be NEMA 4X
Stainless Steel. Ceiling boxes for flush-mounting in concrete shall be galvanized, pressed
steel.
B. Outlet, switch, pull and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed locations shall be
cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium plating, and enamel finish. Surface
mounted boxes in concealed locations may be pressed steel.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 11
C. Control station, pull and junction boxes, including covers, for installation in corrosive
locations shall meet the NEMA 4X requirements and shall be stainless steel.
D. All cast boxes and pressed steel boxes for flush mounting in concrete shall be fitted with cast,
malleable box covers and gaskets. Covers for pressed steel boxes shall be one-piece pressed
steel, cadmium plated, except that boxes for installation in plastered areas and finished rooms
shall be stainless steel over plaster rings. Stainless steel plates shall be Sierra S-line, Hubbell,
or equal. Cast boxes shall be as manufactured by Crouse-Hinds, Appleton, or equal.
2.7 CONDUIT FITTINGS
A. General: Fittings shall comply with the same requirements as the raceway with which they
will be used. Fittings having a volume less than 100 cubic inches for use with rigid steel
conduit, shall be cast or malleable nonferrous metal. Such fittings large r than one inch shall
be "mogul size." Fittings shall be of the gland ring compression type. Covers of fittings, unless
in "dry" locations, shall be closed with gaskets. Surface-mounted cast fittings, housing wiring
devices in outdoor and damp locations, shall have mounting lugs.
B. Insulated bushings shall be molded plastic or malleable iron with insulating ring, similar to
O-Z Type A and B, equivalent types by Thomas & Betts, Steel City, Appleton, O-Z/Gedney, or
equal.
C. Insulated grounding bushings shall be malleable iron with insulating ring and with ground
lug, - by T & B, - no substitutions.
D. Crouse Hinds UNF or UNY unions shall be used at all points of union between ends of rigid
steel conduits which cannot be coupled. Running threads and threadless couplings shall not
be used.
E. Liquid-tight fittings shall be - manufactured by T & B, no substitutions.
F. Hubs for threaded attachment of steel conduit to sheet metal enclosures shall be similar to
Appleton Type HUB, equivalent types such as manufactured by T & B, Myers Scrutite, or equal.
G. Transition fittings to mate steel to PVC conduit, and PVC access fitting, shall be as furnished
or recommended by the manufacturer of the PVC conduit.
H. Conduit sealant shall be Chico, or equal.
I. Expansion fittings shall be installed wherever a raceway crosses a structural expansion joint.
Such fittings shall be expansion and deflection type and shall accommodate lateral and
transverse movement. Fittings shall be O-Z/Gedney Type "DX," Crouse Hinds "XD," or equal.
These fittings are required in metallic and nonmetallic raceway installations. When the
installation is in a nonmetallic run, a 3-foot length of rigid conduit shall be used to connect
the nonmetallic conduit to the fitting.
2.8 WIRING DEVICES
A. All wiring devices shall be a product of a single manufacturer and shall conform to applicable
NEMA Standards and be UL listed. Devices shall be as manufactured by Hubbell, Sierra, Pass

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 12
& Seymour, or equal. General purpose duplex receptacles and toggle switch handles shall be
brown everywhere except in finished rooms, where they shall be ivory. Special purpose
receptacles shall have a body color as shown. Receptacles and switches shall conform to
Federal Specifications W-C-596E and W-S-896E, respectively.
1. Receptacles
a. General purpose duplex receptacles shall be grounding type, 125-volt, ac, 20-
amperes, backwired NEMA Configuration 5-20R, such as Hubbell 5362, or
equal.
B. Convenience receptacles for installation in outdoor and corrosive areas shall be NEMA 5-20R
configured and shall have stainless steel or nickel plated parts and plastic parts of Melanine.
1. Receptacles at outdoor locations shall be UL-approved for weatherproof locations
with plug inserted. These shall be Crouse-Hinds, Hubbell, Pin and Sleeve Series, or
equal.
2. Receptacles at damp or dry locations shall be Crouse-Hinds DS 23G, Pyle National N-1,
or equal.
3. Receptacles at corrosive locations shall be Hubbell 52CM62 15 ampere, 53CM62 20
ampere, or equal.
C. Ground fault interrupter (GFI) receptacles shall be NEMA 5-20R configured and shall mount
in a standard outlet box. Units shall trip at 5 milliamperes of ground current and shall comply
with NEMA WD-1-1.10 and UL 943. GFI receptacles shall be capable of individual as well as
"downstream" operation. GFI receptacles shall be Hubbell GF 5252, or equal.
1. Switches
a. Switches at outdoor locations shall be Crouse-Hinds DS 128, Mackworth Rees
Style 3845, Joy Flexitite, or equal.
b. Switches at damp locations shall be Mackworth Rees Style 3496, Joy Flexitite,
or equal.
c. Switches at dry locations shall be Crouse-Hinds DS 32G, Pyle National
SCT-10k, or equal.
D. Toggle switches shall be suitable for backwiring and shall conform to the following table, or
equal:

Hubbell No. Bryant No. Hubbell No. Bryant No.
Single Pole 1221 (ivory) 4901 (ivory) 1221I (ivory) 4901I (ivory)
Three Way 1223 4903 1223I 4903I
Momentary 1556 4821 1556I 4821I
Four Way 1224 1224I

2.9 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
A. General: All electrical cabinets and enclosures housing control relays and terminal blocks
shall be manufactured in accordance with NEMA Publications 250, UL Standards 50 and 508.
1. Relay or control, and terminal cabinets shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosures.
Sizes shown on the Drawings are minimum. Provide sufficient terminal blocks to

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 13
terminate 25 percent more conductors than are shown. Interiors of cabinets shall be
finished white including internal back mounting plate.
B. Wiring of terminal cabinets, control or relay cabinets shall be accomplished with stranded
copper conductor rated for 600-volts and UL listed as Type MTW. Wires for annunciator and
indication circuits shall be No. 16 AWG. All others shall be No. 14 AWG. Color coding shall be
as specified elsewhere in this Section. Incoming wires to terminal or relay cabinets shall be
terminated on a master set of terminal blocks. All wiring from the master terminals to
internal components shall be factory-installed and shall be contained in [2] [4]-inch wide by
[2] [4]-inch high plastic wireways having removable covers. Wiring to door-mounted devices
shall be extra flexible and anchored to doors using wire anchors cemented in place. Exposed
terminals of door-mounted devices shall be guarded to prevent accidental personnel contact
with energized terminals.
C. All terminal block requirements shall be as manufactured by Phoenix with screw terminals,
no substitution.
D. Engraving shall be as shown or as directed by the ENGINEER. Characters shall be uniform
block style not smaller than 1/8-inch. Nameplates shall be secured using cadmium plated
steel or other corrosion resistant screws. Adhesive alone is not acceptable.
E. Each relay or control and terminal cabinets shall be completed, assembled, wired, and tested
at the factory. Test shall be in accordance with the latest UL and NEMA Standards. All
cabinets shall bear UL label, as applicable.
2.10 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
A. Unfused and fused disconnect switches shall be externally operated with quick-make/quick-
break mechanisms. The handle shall be interlocked with the switch cover by means of a
defeatable interlock device. The switch shall be padlockable in the "off" position. Switches
shall have nameplates stating manufacturer, rating, and catalog number. Heavy-duty
switches shall have arc suppressors, pin hinges, and shall be horsepower rated at 600-volts.
All switches rated at 100 amperes or larger shall have auxiliary contact for remote status
indication. Heavy-duty switches shall be provided for all motor circuits above 3 horsepower.
In smaller motor circuits switches shall be general duty.
B. Switch rating shall match the horsepower requirements of the load at the particular voltage
if not otherwise shown.
C. Switch enclosure shall be NEMA 4X SS and shall be as manufactured by Square D, Cutler -
Hammer, or equal.
2.11 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
A. Nameplates: Nameplates shall be fabricated from white-letter, black-face laminated plastic
engraving stock, Formica type ES-1, or equal. Each shall be fastened securely, using fasteners
of brass, cadmium plated steel, or stainless steel, screwed into inserts or tapped holes, as
required. Engraved characters shall be block style of adequate size to be read easily at a
distance of 6 feet with no characters smaller than 1/8-inch high.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 14
B. Conductor and Equipment Identification: Conductor and equipment identification devices
shall be either imprinted plastic-coated cloth marking devices such as manufactured by
Brady, Thomas & Betts, or equal, or shall be heat-shrink plastic tubing, imprinted split-sleeve
markers cemented in place, or equal.
C. Identification Tape: Identification tape for protection of buried electrical installation shall be
a 6-inch wide red polyethylene tape imprinted "CAUTION – ELECTRIC UTILITIES BELOW."
2.12 LIGHTING AND POWER PANELBOARDS
A. General: Panelboards shall be dead front factory assembled. Panelboards shall comply with
NEMA PB-1 as well as the provisions of UL 50 and 67. Panelboards used for service
equipment shall be UL labeled for such use. Lighting panelboards shall be rated for 120/208-
volt 3-phase operation or 120/240-volt for single phase operation as shown. Power
panelboards shall be rated for 600 volts, 3-phase operation.
1. Interiors shall have solderless, anti-turn connectors and shall be constructed so that
branch circuit breaker can be replaced without disturbing adjacent units or resorting
to field drilling and tapping. Bus bars and connecting drops shall be copper. Neutral
bar shall be full-sized and shall have one terminal screw for each branch circuit; main
bus bar shall be full-sized for entire length. Spaces shown shall have cross
connections for the maximum sized device that can be fitted.
2. Panelboard box shall be galvanized code grade steel with knockouts, and shall have
removable end walls. All boxes or panelboard enclosures shall have gray baked
enamel finish.
3. All circuit breakers shall be bolt-in type.
B. Lighting Panelboards
1. Cabinets for building panels shall be 20-inch wide minimum, with 4-inch minimum
side gutters and 5-inch minimum top and bottom gutters. Panelboard trim shall be
the same size as cabinet on surface-mounted panels and 3/4-inch larger all around
than cabinet of flush-mounted panels. Doors in trim shall have typed circuit directory
and pocket with protective clear plastic sheet. All trim and cabinets of surface-
mounted panels in general purpose areas shall be phosphate treated, primed and
finished with baked enamel, panels of flush mounted panels shall be finished to match
surrounding wall color.
2. The number of circuit breakers and the ampere ratings shall be in accordance with
panel schedules. Main circuit breaker or main lugs only shall be provided as
indicated. The panelboard circuit breakers shall be group mounted and shall be
molded case with 3- or 2-pole main breakers as required and branch circuit breakers
with 18,000 AIC.
3. Surface mounted cabinets and trim in wet and damp areas shall be galvanized.
Provide control enclosures under common panel trim. All panelboard doors shall be
keyed alike.
2.13 PROCESS CONTROL DEVICES
A. Liquid Level Control: Liquid level controls shall be as indicated. Level settings shall be
determined by Design ENGINEER and received from the ENGINEER.
1. High level flood switches shall be as shown on the drawings.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 15
2.14 CONTROL STATIONS
A. Control stations shall comply with NEMA Standards ICS2-216. All control stations shall be
industrial type, heavy duty, oil-tight, with legend plates.
B. Control stations shall be as follows:
1. Pushbutton Switch: Pushbutton switches shall be momentary type with round or
square button plate. All emergency-stop pushbuttons shall have red button plates.
Lock-out stop shall be momentary pushbutton with locking mechanism.
2. Selector Switches: Selector switches shall be rated 10 amperes at 600 volts and shall
be rotary type with number of position and poles as indicated.
3. Indicating Lights: Pilot lights shall be full-voltage, push to test type and with plastic
color caps: red color for running, green for ready, white for power status, and amber
for failure status.
4. Control station enclosures shall be stainless steel, NEMA 4X in corrosive, outdoor,
below grade, or wet areas.
C. Manufacturers shall be Square D with Class 9001, or equal..
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GROUNDING
A. General: Grounding cable shall be sized in accordance with code requirements when sizes
are not indicated on the Drawings.
B. Equipment Ground: Ground continuity throughout the facility shall be maintained by
installing a grounding conductor in all raceways.
1. Metallic raceway shall be installed with double lock nuts or hubs at enclosures.
Nonmetallic raceway containing dc conductors operating at more than 50 volts to
ground, or any ac conductors, shall contain a copper-grounding conductor either
bare, or green if insulated. Such conductor shall be bonded to terminal and
intermediate metallic enclosures.
2. Metal equipment platforms which support any electrical equipment shall be bonded
to the nearest ground bus or to the nearest switchgear ground bus. This grounding
requirement is in addition to the raceway grounding required in the preceding
paragraph herein.
C. Grounding Electrode System: Install the grounding electrode system with all required
components in accordance with National Electrical Code Article 250.
1. Connection to ground electrodes and ground conductors shall be exothermic welded
where concealed and shall be bolted pressure type where exposed. Bolted connectors
shall be assembled wrench-tight.
2. Insulated grounding bushings shall be employed for all grounding connections to
steel conduits in switchboards, in motor control centers, in pullboxes, and elsewhere
where conduits do not terminate at a hub or a sheet metal enclosure. Where insulated
bushings are required, they shall be installed in addition to double lock-nuts.
3. Copper bonding jumpers shall be used to obtain a continuous metallic ground.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 16
D. Shield Grounding
1. Shielded power cable shall have its shield grounded at each termination in a manner
recommended by the cable manufacturer.
2. Shielded instrumentation cable shall be grounded at one end only; this shall be at the
RTU or otherwise at the "receiving" end of the signal carried by the cable, unless shop
drawings indicate that the shield shall be grounded at both ends.
3. Termination of each shield drain wire shall be on its own terminal screw. All of these
terminal screws in one rack shall be jumpered with No. 16 solid tinned bare copper
wire; connection to ground shall be accomplished with a No. 12 green insulated
conductor to the main ground bus.
3.2 RACEWAYS
A. General: Raceways shall be installed as indicated; however, conduit routings shown are
diagrammatic. Raceway systems shall be electrically and mechanically complete before
conductors are installed. Bends and offsets shall be smooth and symmetrical, and shall be
accomplished with tools designed for the purpose intended. Factory elbows shall be used for
all 3/4-inch conduit. Bends in larger sizes of metallic conduit shall be accomplished by field
bending or by the use of factory elbows. All installations shall be in accordance with the latest
edition of the National Electrical Code.
B. Raceways shall be installed in accordance with the following schedule:
1. Low Voltage Raceway (control and power):
a. Rigid Schedule 40 PVC shall be used for concrete encased duct on earth, but
shall transition to rigid steel PVC-coated conduits on all stub-ups.
b. PVC-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel shall be used for conduits embedded in
concrete slab on grade and above grade.
c. Schedule 40 PVC shall be used for fiber optic data hi-way system concrete
encased on grade.
d. PVC-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel shall be used in exposed installations in
outdoor areas.
2. Analog Signal Raceways
a. PVC-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel conduits shall be used for concrete
encased duct on earth.
b. PVC-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel conduits shall be used on exposed
installations in general purpose areas.
c. PVC-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel shall be used on exposed installations in
outdoor areas.
3. Exposed Raceways
a. Conduits shall be rigidly supported with clamps, hangers, and Unistrut
channels.
b. Intervals between supports shall be in accordance with the National Electric
Code.
4. All underground elbows shall be PVC-Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel.
C. Conduit Terminations
1. Empty conduit terminations not in manholes or pullboxes shall be plugged. Exposed
reaceway shall be installed perpendicular or parallel to buildings except where
otherwise indicated. Conduit shall be terminated with flush couplings at exposed
concrete surfaces. Conduit stubbed up for floor-standing equipment shall be placed

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 17
in accordance with approved shop drawings. Metallic raceways installed below-
grade or in outdoor locations and in concrete shall be made up with a conductive
waterproof compound applied to threaded joints. Compound shall be Zinc Clads
Primer Coatings No B69A45, HTL-4 by Crouse-Hinds, Kopr Shield by Thomas & Betts,
or equal.
2. Both rigid and flexible conduit shall be sealed against water at each entrance to
enclosures. Unless indicated otherwise, rigid and flexible conduit shall enter panels
through the top, shall continue down from the top to the bottom, and shall turn
upward at the bottom.
D. Conduit Installations
1. Conduit may be cast integral with horizontal and vertical concrete slabs, providing
one-inch clearance is maintained between conduit surface and concrete surface. If
said clearance cannot be maintained, the conduit shall be installed exposed below
elevated slabs; provided, that in the case of slabs on grade, conduit shall be installed
below the slab and shall be encased with a minimum cover of 3 inches of concrete.
Maximum size of conduit that can be cast in slab above grade shall be 3 inches, in slab
on grade shall be 1-1/2 inches.
2. Nonmetallic conduit may be cast integral with horizontal slabs with placement
criteria stated above. Non-metallic conduit may be run beneath structures or slabs
on grade, without concrete encasement. In these instances conduit shall be placed at
least 12 inches below the bottom of the structure or slab. Nonmetallic conduit may
be buried 24 inches minimum below grade, with a 3-inch concrete cover, in open
areas or where otherwise not protected by concrete slab or structures. Top of
concrete cover shall be colored red. Nonmetallic conduit shall be permitted only as
required by the Specifications and in concealed locations as described above.
3. Where a run of concealed PVC conduit becomes exposed, a transition to PVC-Coated
Galvanized Rigid Steel conduit is required. Such transition shall be accomplished by
means of a PVC-Coated GRS factory elbow or a minimum 3-foot length of PVC-Coated
Galvanized Rigid Steel conduit, either terminating at the exposed concrete surface
with a flush coupling. Piercing of concrete walls by nonmetallic runs shall be
accomplished by means of a short steel nipple terminating with flush couplings. All
90 degree factory elbows shall be PVC coated GRS.
4. Flexible conduit shall be used at dry locations for the connection of equipment such
as motors, transformers, instruments, valves, or pressure switches subject to
vibration or movement during normal operation or servicing. Flexible conduit may
be used in lengths required for the connection of recessed lighting fixtures; otherwise
the maximum length of flexible conduit shall be 18 inches.
5. In other than dry locations, connections shall be made using flexible liquid-tight
conduit. Equipment subject to vibration or movement which is normally provided
with wiring leads, such as solenoid valves, shall be installed with a cast junction box
for the make-up of connections. Flexible conduits shall be as manufactured by
American Brass, Cablec, Electroflex, or equal.
6. Conduit penetrations on walls, concrete structures, pull boxes, and equipment
cabinets shall be performed in accordance with the following:
a. Seal all raceways entering structures at the first box or outlet with conduit
sealant to prevent the entrance into the structure of gases, liquids, or rodents.
b. Dry pack with nonshrink grout around raceways that penetrate concrete
walls, floors, or ceilings aboveground, or use one of the methods indicated for
underground penetrations.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 18
c. Where an underground conduit enters a structure through a concrete roof or
a membrane waterproofed wall or floor, provide an acceptable, malleable
iron, watertight, entrance sealing device. When there is no raceway concrete
encasement, provide such device having a gland type sealing assembly at each
end with pressure bushings which may be tightened at any time. When there
is raceway concrete encasement indicated, provide such a device with a gland
type sealing assembly on the accessible side. Securely anchor all such devices
into the masonry construction with one or more integral flanges. Secure
membrane waterproofing to such devices in a permanently watertight
manner.
d. Where an underground raceway without concrete encasement enters a
structure through a nonwaterproofed wall or floor, install a sleeve made of
Schedule 40 galvanized pipe. Fill the space between the conduit and sleeve
with a suitable plastic expandable compound, or an oakum and lead joint, on
each side of the wall or floor in such a manner as to prevent entrance of
moisture. A watertight entrance sealing device may be used in lieu of the
sleeve.
7. All underground GRS conduit shall be PVC coated.
3.3 WIRES AND CABLES
A. General: Conductors shall not be pulled into raceway until:
1. Raceway system has been inspected and accepted by the ENGINEER.
2. Plastering and concrete have been completed in affected areas.
3. Raceway system has been freed of moisture and debris.
B. Wire and Cables
1. Conductors of No. 1 size and smaller shall be hand pulled. Larger conductors may be
installed using power winches. Pulling tensions on the cables shall be within the
limits recommended by the cable manufacturer. Wire pulling lubricant, where
needed, shall be UL approved.
2. Wire in panels, cabinets, and gutters shall be neatly grouped using nylon tie straps,
and shall be fanned out to terminals.
C. Splices and Terminations
1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide, install, and terminate the conductors required for
power and controls to electrical equipment instrumentation terminal cabinets,
control and instrumentation equipment except where indicated elsewhere. There
shall be no cable splices in underground manhole or pullboxes. If splices are
necessary, the cables shall be brought aboveground and terminated in a NEMA 4X,
stainless steel terminal or splice cabinet on a concrete pad.
2. Two- and three-conductor shielded cables installed in conduit runs which exceed
2,000 feet may be spliced in pullboxes. These cable runs shall have only one splice
per conductor.
3. Control conductors shall be spliced or terminated only at the locations indicated and
only on terminal strips or terminal lugs of vendor furnished equipment. For the
purposes of the various Sections of Division 16 of the Specifications, "control
conductors" are defined as conductors operating at 120 volts or less in circuits that
indicate equipment status or that control the electric energy delivered to a power
consuming device.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 19
4. All 120/208-volt and 480-volt branch circuit conductors may be spliced in suitable
fittings at locations determined by the CONTRACTOR.
5. Stranded conductors shall be terminated directly on equipment box lugs making sure
that all conductor strands are confined within lug. Use forked-tongue lugs where
equipment box lugs have not been provided.
6. Splices in 600-volt wire which are not pre-insulated shall be insulated with three
layers of tape each half lapped except that splices in below grade pull boxes or in any
box subject to flooding shall be made watertight using an epoxy resin splicing kit.
7. Splices to motor leads in motor terminal boxes shall be wrapped with mastic material
to form a mold and then shall be taped with a minimum of 2 layers of varnished
cambric tape overtaped with a minimum of 2 layers of high temperature tape.
Provide 3M motor load termination kits.
8. Shielded power cable shall be terminated with pre-assembled stress cones in a
manner approved by the cable manufacturer. Submit the proposed termination
procedure as described for shop drawings.
a. Control devices, such as solenoid operated valves that are normally supplied
with conductor pigtails shall be terminated as described for control
conductors.
D. Cable Assembly and Testing: Cable assembly and testing shall comply with applicable
requirements ICEA Publication No. S-68-516 and other relevant ICEA publications. Factory
test results shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Contractor Submittals,
prior to shipment of cable. The following tests shall be the minimum requirements:
1. Insulation resistance shall be obtained and shall not be less than the value
recommended by ICEA.
2. All cables rated at 600 volts shall be tested for insulation resistance between phases
and from each Phase to a ground using a megohmeter.
3. All field testing mentioned above shall be done after cables are installed in the
raceways.
4. Field tests shall be performed by certified test organization acceptable to the
ENGINEER. Test results shall be submitted for review and acceptance.
5. Cables failing in the said tests shall be replaced with a new cable or repaired. Such
kind of repair methods shall be as recommended by the cable manufacturer and shall
be performed by persons certified by the industry.
E. Continuity Test: All control and instrumentation cables shall be tested for continuity,
polarity, undesirable ground, and origination. Such tests shall be performed prior to placing
all cables in service.
3.4 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Pull and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with the requirements of the National
Electrical Code or as shown on drawings.
B. Outlet boxes shall be used as junction boxes wherever possible. Where separate pullboxes
are required, they shall have screw covers.
C. Pullboxes shall be installed when conduit run contains more than three 90-degree bends and
runs exceed 200 feet.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 20
3.5 CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
A. Cabinets shall be set plumb at an elevation that will cause the maximum circuit breaker height
to be less than 5 ft 6 inches. Top edge of trim of adjacent panels shall be at the same height.
Panels which are indicated as flush mounted shall be set so cabinet is flushed and serves as a
"ground" for plaster application.
B. All factory wire connections shall be made at shipping splits, and all field wiring and
grounding connections shall be made after the assemblies are anchored.
3.6 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING
A. Concrete housekeeping pads shall be provided for all floor standing electrical equipment.
Housekeeping pads for all equipment, including future units, shall be 2 inches above
surrounding finished floor or grade and 2 inches larger in both dimensions than the
supported equipment, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Concrete housekeeping curb shall be provided for all conduit stub-up in indoor and outdoor
locations, not concealed by equipment enclosures. Such curb shall be 3 inches above finished
floor or grade.
3.7 EQUIPMENT ANCHORING
A. Freestanding or wall-hung equipment shall be anchored in place by methods that will meet
seismic requirement in the area where project is located. Seismic certified per section 01 81
10. Wall-mounted panels that weigh more than 500 pounds or which are within 18 inches of
the floor shall be provided with fabricated steel support pedestal(s). Pedestals shall be of
welded steel angle sections. If the supported equipment is a panel or cabinet and enclosed
with removable side plates, it shall match supported equipment in physical appearance and
dimensions. Transformers hung from 4-inch stud walls and weighing more than 300 pounds,
shall have auxiliary floor supports.
B. Leveling channels anchored to the concrete pad shall be provided for all switchgear and pad-
mounted transformer installations. Area between the channels shall be grouted perfectly flat.
C. Anchoring methods and leveling criteria specified in the printed recommendations of the
equipment manufacturers are a part of the Work of this Contract. Such recommendations
shall be submitted as required for shop drawings in Section 01 33 20 - Contractor Submittals.
3.8 CABLE AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. General: The completed electrical installation shall be provided with adequate identification
to facilitate proper control of circuits and equipment and to reduce maintenance effort.
B. Cable: Assign each control and instrumentation wire and cable a unique identification
number. Said numbers shall be assigned to all conductors having common terminals and
shall be shown on all shop drawings. Identification numbers shall appear within 3 inches of
conductor terminals. "Control" shall be defined as any conductor used for alarm,
annunciator, or signal purposes:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 21
1. Multiconductor cable shall be assigned a number which shall be attached to the cable
at intermediate pull boxes and at stub-up locations beneath free-standing equipment.
It is expected that the cable number shall form a part of the individual wire number.
All individual control conductors and instrumentation cable shall be identified at pull
points as described above. The instrumentation cable numbers shall incorporate the
loop numbers indicated on the Drawings.
2. All 120/208-volt system feeder cables and branch circuit conductors shall be color
coded as follows: Phase 1-black, Phase 2-red, Phase 3-blue, and Neutral-white. The
480/277-volt system conductors shall be color coded as follows: Phase A-brown,
Phase B-orange, Phase C-yellow, and Neutral-gray. Color-coding tape shall be used
where colored insulation is not available. Branch circuit switch shall be yellow.
Insulated ground wire shall be green, and neutral shall be gray. Color coding and
phasing shall be consistent throughout the site, but bars at panelboards,
switchboards, and motor control centers shall be connected Phase 1-2-3, top to
bottom, or left to right, facing the front of the equipment.
3. General purpose ac control cables shall be pink. General purpose dc control cables
shall be blue.
4. All spare cables shall be terminated on terminal screws and shall be identified with a
unique number as well as with destination.
5. Terminal strips shall be identified by imprinted, varnished, marker strips attached
under the terminal strip.
C. Equipment: Equipment and devices shall be identified as follows:
1. Nameplates shall be provided for all panelboards, panels, starters, switches, and
pushbutton stations. In addition to the name plates shown, control devices shall be
equipped with standard collar-type legend plates.
2. Control devices within enclosures shall be identified similar to the paragraph above.
3. Three-phase receptacles shall be consistent with respect to phase connection of
receptacle terminals. Errors in phasing shall be corrected at the bus, not at the
receptacle.
4. Toggle switches which control loads out of sight of switch, and all multiswitch
locations of more than 2 switches, shall have suitable inscribed finish plates.
5. Empty conduits shall be tagged at both ends to indicate the destination at the far end.
Where it is not possible to tag the conduit, destination shall be identified by marking
an adjacent surface.
6. Provide typewritten circuit directories for panelboards; circuit directory shall
accurately reflect the outlets connected to each circuit.
7. Install identification tape directly above buried unprotected raceway; install tape
8 inches belowgrade and parallel with raceway to be protected. Identification tape is
required for all buried raceway not under buildings or equipment pads except
identification tape is not required for protection of street lighting raceway.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL GENERAL PROVISIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 00 - 22
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 13 - 1
SECTION 26 05 13
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc (AEIC).
B. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM).
C. Code of Federal Regulations.
D. The Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, Inc.
E. Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc.
F. International Electrical Testing Association, NETA.
G. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes cables and related splices, terminations, and accessories for medium-
voltage electrical distribution systems.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division Section 26 00 00 - “Electrical General Provisions”.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.
B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. National Fire Protection Association.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 13 - 2
B. Product Data: For each type of cable indicated. Include splices and terminations for cables
and cable accessories.
C. Qualification Data:
1. Manufacturer Qualifications:
2. Installer Qualifications:
a. Submit cable installers training and work history.
D. Material Certificates: For each cable and accessory type, signed by manufacturers.
E. Shop Drawings:
1. Pull calculations that show expected pulling tensions.
F. Field quality-control test reports.
1. Submit discharge plots of corona discharge tests.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications:
1. Minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing medium voltage 15 kilovolt class
power cables.
B. Installer Qualifications
1. Contactor shall have a cable splicer, trained and certified by splice material
manufacturer, to install, splice, and terminate medium-voltage cable.
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D. Comply with latest standards of IEEE C2, and NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Available Cable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Cables:
a. General Cable Technologies Corporation.
b. Kerite Co. (The).
c. Okonite Company (The).
d. Pirelli Cables & Systems NA.
e. Southwire Company.
f. Or equal.
B. Cable Splicing and Terminating Products and Accessories Manufacturers: Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1. Raychem Corp.; Telephone Energy and Industrial Division; Tyco International Ltd.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 13 - 3
2. Thomas & Betts Corporation/Elastimold.
3. 3M; Electrical Products Division.
2.2 CABLES
A. Cable Type: MV105.
B. Comply with UL 1072, AEIC CS 8, ICEA S-93-639, and ICEA S-97-682.
C. Conductor: Soft drawn annealed copper, with not less than 97 percent conductivity.
D. Conductor Stranding: Compact round, concentric lay, Class B.
E. Conductor Insulation: Ethylene-propylene rubber.
1. Voltage Rating: 15kV.
2. Insulation Thickness: 133 percent insulation level
F. Shielding: Copper tape, helically applied over semiconducting insulation shield.
2.3 SPLICE KITS
A. Connectors and Splice Kits: Comply with IEEE 404; type as recommended by cable or splicing
kit manufacturer for the application.
B. Splicing Products: As recommended, in writing, by splicing kit manufacturer for specific
sizes, ratings, and configurations of cable conductors. Include all components required for
complete splice, with detailed instructions. Contractor may choose one of the following types
of splice kits.
1. Heat-shrink splicing kit of uniform, cross-section, polymeric construction with outer
heat-shrink jacket.
2. Premolded, cold-shrink-rubber, in-line splicing kit.
2.4 SOLID TERMINATIONS
A. Shielded-Cable Terminations: Comply with the following classes of IEEE 48. Insulation class
is equivalent to that of cable. Include shield ground strap for shielded cable terminations.
The termination shall be rated for the application, skirted for outdoor locations. Contractor
may choose one of the following types of termination kits.
1. Class 1 Terminations: Modular type, furnished as a kit, with stress -relief tube;
multiple, molded-silicone rubber, cold-shrink; shield ground strap; and compression-
type connector.
2. Class 1 Terminations: Heat-shrink type; one piece non-tracking tubing with a co-
extruded stress control; shield ground strap; and compression-type connector.
2.5 SEPARABLE INSULATED CONNECTORS
A. Description: Modular system, complying with IEEE 386, with disconnecting, single-pole,
cable terminators and with matching, stationary, plug-in, dead-front terminals designed for
cable voltage and for sealing against moisture.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 13 - 4
B. Terminations at Distribution Points: Modular type, consisting of terminators installed on
cables and modular, dead-front, terminal junctions for interconnecting cables.
C. Load-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type units with 200-A load make/break and
continuous-current rating; coordinated with insulation diameter, conductor size, and
material of cable being terminated. Include test point on terminator body that is capacitance
coupled.
D. Dead-Break Cable Terminators: Elbow-type unit with 600-A continuous-current rating;
designed for de-energized disconnecting and connecting; coordinated with insulation
diameter, conductor size, and material of cable being terminated. Include test point o n
terminator body that is capacitance coupled.
E. Dead-Front Terminal Junctions: Modular bracket-mounted groups of dead-front stationary
terminals that mate and match with above cable terminators. Two-, three-, or four-terminal
units as indicated, with fully rated, insulated, watertight conductor connec tion between
terminals and complete with grounding lug, manufacturer's standard accessory stands,
stainless-steel mounting brackets, and attaching hardware.
1. Protective Cap: Insulating, electrostatic-shielding, water-sealing cap with drain wire.
2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Two-terminal, dead-front junction arranged for
removable mounting on accessory stand of stationary terminal junction.
3. Grounding Kit: Jumpered elbows, portable feed-through accessory units, protective
caps, test rods suitable for concurrently grounding three phases of feeders, and
carrying case.
4. Standoff Insulator: Portable, single dead-front terminal for removable mounting on
accessory stand of stationary terminal junction. Insulators suitable for fully insulated
isolation of energized cable-elbow terminator.
F. Test-Point Fault Indicators: Applicable current-trip ratings and arranged for installation in
test points of load-break separable connectors, and complete with self-resetting indicators
capable of being installed with shotgun hot stick and tested with test tool.
G. Tool Set: Shotgun hot stick with energized terminal indicator, fault-indicator test tool, and
carrying case.
2.6 FAULT INDICATORS
A. Indicators: Manually reset fault indicator with inrush restraint feature, arranged to clamp to
cable sheath and provide a display after a fault has occurred in cable. Instrument shall not be
affected by heat, moisture, and corrosive conditions and shall be recommended by
manufacturer for installation conditions.
B. Resetting Tool: Designed for use with fault indicators, with moisture-resistant storage and
carrying case.
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Manufacturer shall test and inspect cables according to latest standards of ASTM and ICEA S-
97-682 before shipping.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 13 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cables according to IEEE 576.
B. Circuit Conductors:
1. Continuous from origin to termination without splices in intermediate pull boxes.
2. Where splices are necessary, furnish junction box or manholes properly installed and
labeled. Leave sufficient slack at termination to make proper connections.
3. Splice shall not be pulled into conduit
C. Pull Conductors: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions
and sidewall pressure values.
1. Where necessary, use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant that
will not deteriorate conductor or insulation.
2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave cable grips that
will not damage cables and raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment
to cable.
D. Support cables in such a manner that they shall not be damaged.
E. Install "buried-cable" warning tape 12 inches above cables.
F. In manholes, handholes, pull boxes, junction boxes, and cable vaults, train cables around walls
by the longest route from entry to exit and support cables at intervals adequate to prevent
sag.
G. Splices:
1. Splice cables only as required to meet manufacturers pulling tension requirements.
2. Cable splices shall be made by capable rated high voltage cable men and trained to
install the types of splices being used.
3. Splices in manholes and other wet locations shall be weatherproof.
H. Terminations:
1. Make terminations in stress cones. Carefully make up stress relief cones in
accordance with cable manufacturer’s and terminator manufacturer’s instructions.
2. Cable terminations shall be made by capable rated high voltage cable men and trained
to install the types of terminations being used.
3. Terminations outdoors and other wet locations shall be weatherproof.
I. Install separable insulated-connector components as follows:
1. Protective Cap: At each terminal junction, with one on each terminal to which no
feeder is indicated to be connected.
2. Portable Feed-Through Accessory: Three.
3. Standoff Insulator: Three.
J. Seal around cables passing through fire-rated elements.
K. Install fault indicators on each phase where indicated.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 13 - 6
L. Ground shields of shielded cable at terminations, splices, and separable insulated connectors.
Ground metal bodies of terminators, splices, cable and separable insulated-connector fittings,
and hardware.
M. Identify cables according to Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1. Visual and mechanical inspections.
a. Inspect exposed section for physical damage.
b. Verify cable is supplied and connected in accordance with single line diagram.
c. Inspect for shield grounding, cable support, and termination.
d. Visible cable bends shall be checked against IPCEA or manufacturer's
minimum allowable bending radius.
e. Inspect for proper fireproofing in common cable areas.
2. Electrical tests.
a. Perform D.C. high potential test. Magnitude of D.C. voltage shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s recommendation.
1) Each conductor shall be individually tested with all other conductors
grounded. All shields shall be grounded.
2) Terminations shall be properly corona suppressed by guard ring, field
reduction sphere, or other suitable methods.
3) The test voltage shall be applied in at least eight (8) equal increments
until maximum test voltage is reached. D.C. leakage current shall be
recorded at each step after a constant stabilization time consistent
with system charging current decay.
4) A graphic plot shall be made of leakage current (X axis) versus voltage
(Y axis) at each increment.
5) The test conductor shall be raised to a maximum test voltage and held
for a total of ten (10) minutes. Readings of leakage current (Y axis)
versus time (X axis) shall be recorded and plotted on thirty (30)
second intervals for the first two (2) minutes and every minute
thereafter.
6) The applied conductor test potential shall be reduced to zero (0) and
grounds applied for a period adequate to drain all insulation stored
potential.
7) Maximum test voltages shall be in accordance with cable and
termination manufacturer's specifications.
8) During test the cable system must be closely watched and recorded
for any signs of approaching failure.
9) All conductors must be left grounded when not on test during testing
of other conductors and for at least 30 minutes after the removal of
the Direct Current test potential.
b. All conductors and shields must be grounded.
1) The bare portions of the cable ends must be prepared so as to prevent
the escape of ionized air from around the bare conductor thus forming
a captive space charge.
c. Completely tape all bare conductor surfaces with standard electrical
insulating tape.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 13 - 7
d. Enclose the bare portions of both end terminations in Saran Wrap®.
1) On any test in which the cable will not withstand the prescribed test
voltage for the full 10 minute test period without current increase the
cable is considered to have failed the test and is subject to
replacement.
2) Polarization index is to be calculated as the ratio of the leakage
current after 1 minute to the leakage current after 5 minutes at the
maximum voltage level. Anything less than 1.00 is a failure, 1.0 to 1.25
is a marginal pass subject to the Engineer's discretion, above 1.25 is a
pass.
3) If the ratio between resistance of any two conductors in a installation
is in excess of 5:1 for installations less than 1000 feet or 3:1 for
installations greater than 1000 feet the cable system has failed the test
and is subject to replacement.
4) If in the opinion of the Engineer the test results are unacceptable the
Contractor will correct the installation, material or labor at no
additional cost, and to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer.
e. Perform a shield continuity test by ohm meter method. Ohmic value shall be
recorded.
3. Test values.
a. D.C. high potential test results:
1) Step voltage slope should be reasonable linear.
B. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 13 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 1
SECTION 26 05 19
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. 600 Volt Class wire and cable.
2. Instrumentation Class wire and cable.
3. Network cable.
4. Fire alarm wire and cable.
5. Telephone wire and cable.
6. 600 Volt Class Tray cable.
B. Related Sections:
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all divisions and
sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its subcontractors to
review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. B3 – Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire.
2. B8 – Specification for Concentric-Lay Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or
Soft.
B. Insulated Cable Engineers Association (ICEA):
1. IPCEA X-61-402 for thermoplastic insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electrical energy.
2. IPCEA S-61-402 for rubber insulated wire and cable for the transmission and
distribution of electrical energy.
C. National Electrical Code (NEC):
1. Article 250 – Grounding.
2. Article 310 – Conductors for General Wiring.
3. Article 760 – Fire Alarm Systems.
D. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA):
1. Article 72 – National Fire Alarm Code.
2. Article 101 – Life Safety Code.
3. Article 262 – Standard Method of Test for Flame Travel and Smoke or Wires and
Cables for Use in Air-Handling Spaces.
E. Federal Specification J-C 30A.
F. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 2
1. UL 1 277 Subject – Electrical Power and Control Tray Cables with Optional Optical-
fiber Members.
2. UL 1063 – Machine-Tool Wires and Cables.
3. UL 1581 – Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.
4. UL-2196 – Tests for Fire Resistive Cables.
5. UL-1424 – Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits.
6. UL-1569 Metal-Clad Cables.
7. UL-225 Metal-Clad Cables and Cable-Sealing Fittings for Use in Hazardous
(Classified) Locations.
G. Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronics Industry Association (TIA/EIA):
1. TAI/EIA/TSB95 – Additional Transmission Performance Guidelines for 4-pair 100 W
Category 5 Cabling.
2. TIA/EIA-568-A Additional Transmission Performance Specifications for 4-pair 100
W Enhanced Category 5 Cabling.
3. TSB72 - Centralized Optical Fiber Cabling Guidelines, October 1995.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 26 00 00.
B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. NEC: National Electrical Code.
2. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. ICEA: Insulated Cable Engineering Association.
4. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
5. ASTM: American Society of Testing Materials.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install the complete wire can cable system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer of Wire and Cable.
2. Insulation:
a. Type.
b. Voltage class.
3. American Wire Gauge size.
4. Conductor material.
5. Pulling compounds.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Show splice locations.
D. Calculations:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 3
1. Submit cable pulling calculations for all conductor sizes for pulling lengths longer
than 1,000 feet.
E. Test Reports:
1. Submit test reports for meg-ohm tests.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURNACE
A. As specified in Section 26 00 00 and as noted below.
B. Furnish and install all wire and cable in conformance with the applicable standards.
C. All wires and cables shall be UL listed and labeled.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. As specified in Section 26 00 00.
B. Provide new wires and cables manufactured within 1 year of the date of delivery to the site.
C. Delivery conductors to the site in their original unbroken packages or on their original cable
reels.
D. Store conductors out of the weather and where not subject to physical or chemical damage.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. As specified in Section 26 00 00 and noted below.
B. Provide a complete material and installation warranty, for all wires and cables, for a period
of 2 years from substantial completion.
1. During the warranty period, replace any wire or cable found to be defective along
with all other wires and cables in the raceway containing the defective wire or cable.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or Engineer approved equal:
1. 600 Volt Class wire and cable:
a. General Cable.
b. Okonite Company..
c. Rome Cable Corporation.
d. Southwire Company.
2. Instrumentation Class wire and cable:
a. Alpha Wire Company.
b. Belden.
c. General Cable BICC Brand.
d. Okonite Company.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 4
e. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation.
f. Rome Cable Corporation.
3. Network Cables:
a. Belden.
b. General Cables.
c. Lucent.
4. Fire Alarm wire and cable:
a. West Penn Wire.
b. Olympic Wire and Cable.
c. Rockbestos Surprenant Cable Corporation.
d. Draka Lifeline.
5. Telephone wire and cable:
a. American Telephone and Telegraph.
b. West Penn Wire.
c. Olympic Wire and Cable.
d. Superior Essex Inc.
e. Draka Comteq.
f. General Cable.
6. Fiber optic cables.
a. For single mode fiber, Lucent Technologies ACCUMAX LGBC-XXXD-VRX
(indoor applications) where XXX is strand count, or Lucent Technologies
4DNX (outdoor applications) cable, and shall meet the following technical
specifications.
1) Core Diameter: 8.3 (+/- 6) microns
2) Core Eccentricity: 1.5% Nominal- 7.5% Max. Core
3) Ovality: 4% Nominal- 20% Max
4) Cladding Diameter: 125 (+/- 2) microns
5) Cladding Non-Circularity: 2% Max
6) Coating Diameter: 245 (+9/-13) microns
7) Refracting Index Delta: 2.0% (+/- .3%)
8) Numerical Aperture: 0.29
9) Maximum Attenuation/km: 1.0db @ 1300nm .75db @
1550nm
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Conductors:
1. Copper per ASTM B3.
2. Minimum 97% conductivity.
2.3 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. General:
1. Permanently mark each wire and cable with the following at 24-inch intervals.
a. American Wire Gauge (AWG) size.
b. Voltage rating.
c. Insulation type.
d. UL symbol.
e. Month and year of manufacture.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 5
f. Manufacturer’s name.
2. Identify and mark wire and cable as specified in Section 26 05 53:
a. Use integral color insulation for Number 2 AWG and smaller wire.
b. Wrap colored tape around cable larger than Number 2 AWG.
B. 600 Volt Class wire and cable:
1. Provide American Wire Gauge (AWG) or kcmil sizes as indicated on the Drawings or
in the Conduit Schedules:
a. when not indicated on the Drawings, size wire as follows:
1) In accordance with the National Electrical Code:
a) Use 75°C ampacity ratings.
b) Ampacity rating after all derating factors, equal to or greater
than rating of the overcurrent device.
2) Provide Number 12 AWG minimum for power conductors.
3) Provide Number 14 AWG minimum for control conductors.
2. Provide Class B standing per ASTM B8:
a. Provide Class C stranding where extra flexibility is required.
3. Insulation:
a. THWN/THWN-2.
b. 75°C/90°C rating in wet or dry locations, respectively.
4. Multi-conductor Cables:
a. Number and size of conductors as indicated on the Drawings or in the Conduit
Schedules.
b. Individual conductors with THWN/THWN-2 insulation.
c. Overall PVC jacket.
d. Tray Cable rated.
e. Color coding for control wire per ICEA Method 1, E-2.
f. Ground conductor: Insulated, green:
1) Sized per NEC 250-122.
C. Instrumentation class cable:
1. Type TC.
2. Suitable for use in wet locations.
3. Voltage Rating: 600 volts.
4. Temperature Rating: 90° C wet or dry location.
5. Conductors:
a. Insulation:
1) Flame-retardant PVC, 15 mils nominal thickness, with nylon jacket 4
mils nominal thickness.
b. Number 16 AWG stranded and tinned.
c. Color Code:
1) Pair: Black and white.
2) Triad: Black, white and red.
3) Multiple pairs or triads:
a) Color-coded and numbered.
6. Drain Wire:
a. 18 AWG.
b. Stranded, tinned.
7. Jacket:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 6
a. Flame retardant, moisture and sunlight resistant PVC.
b. Rip-cord laid longitudinally under jacket to facilitate removal.
8. Shielding:
a. Individual pair-triad:
1) Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum foil-polyester tape
overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
b. Multiple Pair or Triad Shielding:
1) Group Shield: Minimum 1.35-mil double-faced aluminum
foil/polyester tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
2) Completely isolate group shields from each other.
3) Cable Shield: 2.35 miles double-faced aluminum and synthetic
polymer backed tape overlapped to provide 100 percent coverage.
c. All shielding to be in contact with the drain wire.
D. Network cables:
1. Category 6:
a. Conductors:
1) 23 AWG solid bare annealed copper.
b. Insulation:
1) Polyolefin.
2) 4 twisted pairs.
c. Color code:
1) Blue-Blue/White.
2) Orange-Orange/White.
3) Green-Green/White.
4) Brown-Brown/White.
d. Outer jacket:
1) PVC with ripcord.
e. Electrical characteristics:
1) Frequency range: 1-600 MHz.
2) Attenuation: 51.4 dB.
3) Power sum NEXT: 32.6 dB.
4) Attenuation to Crosstalk ratio: 0.0 dB.
5) Equal Level Far-End Crosstalk (ELFEXT): 15.2 dB.
6) Power-sum ELFEXT: 15.2 dB.
7) Return loss: 17.6 dB.
8) Propagation delay: 548 nanoseconds.
9) Delay skew; 50 nanoseconds.
2. RS-485 Cable:
a. 2-wire:
1) Shielded twisted pair.
2) Tinned, copper conductors minimum with 7 by 30 stranding.
3) AWG #22.
4) Insulation:
a) FHDPE – foam high density polyethylene.
b) 300-volt insulation level.
5) Outer shield:
a) 100 percent coverage.
b) Tape/Braid.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 7
c) Aluminum foil-polyester tape.
d) Tinned copper braid.
6) Outer shield drain wire:
a) Tinned, copper conductor minimum with 7 by 30 stranding.
b) AWG #22
7) Outer Jacket PVC – polyvinyl chloride:
a) Sunlight resistant.
8) UL/CSA flame tested.
9) Minimum bending radius 3.6 inches.
10) Nominal OD 0.356 inch.
E. Telephone cable:
1. Number of Twisted pairs: as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Voltage Rating: 300 volts.
3. Insulation: Thermoplastic, color coded in accordance with telephone industry
standards.
4. Insulation:
a. Non-plenum: high molecular weight polyethylene.
b. Plenum-rated; FEP.
5. Jacket.
a. Non-plenum: PVC.
b. Plenum-rated; Low smoke PVC.
c. Surface-printed with year of manufacture and cable description at maximum
24 inch intervals.
F. Fiber optic cable:
1. All optical fiber cable used shall have the following physical characteristics:
a. Cable Core:
1) Building interior: Air core
2) Building exterior: Filled core stable from -40F to +140F
b. Cable Composition:
1) Building Interior:
a) station:
b) (plenum) OFNP Flouropolymer jacket
c) (non-plenum) OFNR PVC jacket
d) riser: OFNR PVC jacket
2) Building exterior: Non-metallic dielectric
c. Cable Strength: Maximum pulling tension-600 lb.
d. Minimum Bend Radius: (<30% max. pull tension) 10 times cable diameter,
(>30% max. pull tension) 20 times cable diameter.
e. Fiber Identification: Color coding system adequate to unambiguously identify
each fiber. The words “Fiber Optic Cables” shall be imprinted on cable no
more than three feet apart.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Wire Ties:
1. One of the following or equal:
a. T&B “Ty-Rap” cable ties.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 8
b. Panduit cable ties.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Assembly and testing of cable shall comply with the applicable requirements of ICEA
publication No. S-68-516.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Color Coding:
1. Color coding shall be consistent throughout the facility.
2. The following color code shall be followed for all 240/120 Volt and 208/120 Volt
systems:
a. Phase A – Black.
b. Phase B – Red.
c. Phase C – Blue.
d. Single Phase System – Black for one hot leg, red for the other.
e. Neutral – White.
f. Equipment Ground – Green.
3. The following color code shall be followed for all 480/277 Volt systems:
a. Phase A – Brown.
b. Phase B – Orange.
c. Phase C – Yellow.
d. Neutral – Gray or White.
e. Equipment Ground – Green.
4. The following color code shall be followed for all 120 VAC control wiring:
a. Power – Blue.
b. Neutral – White.
5. The following color code shall be followed for all general purpose DC control circuits:
a. Negative – Black.
b. Positive – Red.
6. Switch legs shall be violet. Three-way switch runners shall be pink.
7. Wires in intrinsically safe circuits shall be light blue.
8. Wire colors shall be implemented in the following methods:
a. Wires manufactured of the designed color.
B. Install conductors only after the conduit installation is complete, and all enclosures have been
vacuumed clean, and the affected conduits have been swabbed clean and dry.
1. Install wires only in approved raceways.
2. Do not install wire:
a. In incomplete conduit runs..
b. Until after the concrete work and plastering is completed.
C. Properly coat wires and cables with pulling compound before pulling into conduits and
prevent mechanical damage to conductors during installation:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 9
1. For all Number 4 AWG and larger, use an approved wire-pulling lubricant while cable
is being installed in conduit:
a. Ideal products.
b. Polywater products.
c. 3M Products.
d. Greenlee products.
e. Or equal as recommended by cable Manufacturer.
f. Do not use oil, grease, or similar substances.
D. Cable pulling:
1. For cables Number 1 AWG and smaller, install cables by hand.
2. For cables larger than Number 1 AWG, power pulling winches may be used if they
have cable tension monitoring equipment.
3. Provide documentation that maximum installed cable tension is no more than 75
percent of the maximum recommended level as published by the cable Manufacturer.
If exceeded, the Engineer may, at his discretion, require replacement of the cable.
4. Where approved by Engineer, make splices where cable pulling tension or sidewall
pressure exceeds Manufacturer recommendation for the specified cable size:
a. Make splices in manholes or pull boxes only.
b. Leave sufficient slack to make proper connections.
E. Use smooth-rolling sheaves and rollers when pulling cable into cable tray to keep pulling
tension and bending radius within Manufacturer’s recommendations.
F. Install and terminate al wire n accordance with Manufacturer’s recommendations.
G. Neatly arrange and lace conductors in all switchboards, panelboards, pull boxes, and terminal
cabinets by means of wire tires:
1. Do not lace wires in gutter or panel channel.
2. Install all wire ties with a flush cutting wire tie installation tool:
a. Use a tool with an adjustable tension setting.
3. Do not leave sharp edges on wire ties.
H. Terminate solid conductors at equipment terminal screws with conductor tightly wound
around the screw so that it does not protrude beyond the screw head:
1. Wrap the conductor clockwise so that the wire loop is closed as the loop is tightened.
2. Do not use crimp lugs on solid wire.
I. Terminate stranded conductors on equipment box lugs such that all conductor strands are
confined within the lug:
1. Use ring type lugs if box lugs are not available on the equipment.
J. Provide continuous circuits from origin to termination whenever possible:
1. Except for Number 10 AWG and smaller conductors in lighting and receptacle circuits.
K. Splices:
1. Except for Number 10 AWG and smaller conductors in lighting and receptacle circuits.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 10
2. Where splices are necessary because of extremely long wire or cable lengths that
exceed standard manufactured lengths, make said splices in labeled junction boxes
for power conductor or termination cabinets for control and instrument conductors.
3. Power and control conductors routed in common raceways may be spliced in
common junction boxes.
4. Install NEMA 4X junction and terminal boxes in wet and outdoor locations. Clearly
label junction and terminal boxes containing splices with the word “SPLICE”.
5. Leave sufficient slack at junction boxes and termination boxes to make proper splices
and connections. Do not pull splices into conduits.
6. Install splices with compression type butt splices and insulate using a heat-shrink
sleeve:
a. In wet areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed for submersible
applications.
7. Splices in below grade pull boxes, in any box subject to flooding, and in wet areas shall
be made watertight using:
a. In wet areas, provide heat-shrink sleeves that are listed for submersible.
L. Terminations (600 Volt or Less):
1. Terminate control and instrument conductors on terminal boards with set-screw
pressure connectors, with spade or ring lug connectors.
M. Apply wire markers to all wires at each end after being installed in the conduit and before
meg-ohm testing and termination.
N. Do not use common neutrals for any lighting circuits or receptacle circuits:
1. Use a separate neutral for each phase circuit.
O. Instrumentation Class Cable:
1. Install instrumentation class cables in separate raceway systems from power cables:
a. Install instrument cable in metallic conduit within non-dedicated manholes
or pull boxes.
b. Install cable without splices between instruments or between field devices
and instrument enclosures or panels.
2. Do not make intermediate terminations, except in designated terminal boxes as
indicated on the Drawings.
3. Ground cable shields at only one location, not at field instruments.
P. Multi-conductor Cable:
1. Where cable is not routed in conduit with a separate ground conductor, use one
conductor in the cable as a ground conductor:
a. Use an internal ground conductor, if it is no smaller than as indicated on the
Drawings, and meets NEC requirements for equipment ground conductor
size.
b. Where two parallel cables are used, and the internal ground conductor in each
cable does not meet NEC requirements for the combined circuit, use 4-
conductor cable, with one of the full-sized conductors serving as ground.
Q. LAN Cable Testing:
1. Testing scope: Test all installed LAN cables.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 11
2. Test plan and witnessing: Obtain Engineer’s approval for the test procedures as part
of the submittal process. Arrange for the Engineer to witness all testing. Submit a
request for witness 15 days (minimum) before the proposed test date.
3. Pre-testing:
a. Test individual cables before installation.
1) Before physical placement of the cable, the installer shall test each
cable while on the spool with a LAN certification test device.
2) Before the cable is installed, the installer shall check that the cable
conforms to the Manufacturer’s attenuation specification and that no
damage has been done to the cable during shipping or handling.
3) The test shall be fully documents and the results submitted to the
Engineer, including a hard copy of all the traces, before placement of
the cable.
4) The Engineer shall be notified if a cable fails to meet specification and
the cable shall not be installed unless otherwise directed by the
Engineer.
4. Test Equipment:
a. LAN certification equipment used for the testing shall be capable of testing
Category 6 cable installation to TIA proposed Level III accuracy. Tests
performed shall include:
1) Near End Cross Talk
2) Attenuation
3) Equal Level Far End Cross Talk
4) Return Loss
5) Ambient Noise
6) Effective Cable length
7) Propagation Delay
8) Continuity/Loop Resistance
b. LAN certification test equipment shall be able to store and produce plots of
the test results.
c. Manufacturers – One of the following:
1) Agilent Technologies, WireScope 350.
2) Or approved equal.
R. Telephone cable:
1. Install telephone cables in dedicated metallic raceways.
2. Install telephone cable in conduits with instrumentation cable as indicated on the
Drawings.
S. Signal cable:
1. Separate and isolate electrical signal cables from sources of electrical noise and
power cables by minimum 12 inches.
T. Submersible cable in wet wells:
1. Provide Kellem’s grip or stainless steel wire mesh to support cable weight and avoid
stress on insulation.
U. Wiring Allowances:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND
CABLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 19 - 12
1. Equipment locations may vary slightly from the drawings. Include an allowance for
necessary conductor and terminations for motorized equipment, electrical outlets,
fixtures, communication outlets, instruments, and devices within 10 linear feet of
locations indicated on the Drawings.
2. Locations for pull boxes, manholes, and duct banks may vary slightly from the
drawings. Include an allowance for necessary conductors and related materials to
provide conductors to all pull boxes, manholes, and duct banks within 20 linear feet
of locations indicated on the Drawings.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Testing: As specified in Section 26 08 00.
B. Grounding:
1. As per Section 26 05 26 – Grounding and Bonding.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 26 - 1
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International.
B. Code of Federal Regulations.
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
D. International Electrical Testing Association, NETA.
E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes methods and materials for grounding systems and equipment.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Other Informational Submittals: Plans showing dimensioned as-built locations of the test
wells.
D. Qualification Data:
1. Submit a written resume for the individual who will perform the grounding tests
detailing experience and qualifications.
2. Submit detailed information concerning test instrument, and tester’s qualifications to
perform the specified tests.
E. Field quality-control test reports.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 26 - 2
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Perform work to meet the requirements of legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction.
Comply with the latest editions, amendments, practices, and rulings of the following
documents and organizations, except where these specifications and the drawings are more
stringent:
1. American National Standards Institute
2. National Electrical Code Article 250
3. Local and State Codes.
4. IEEE 81.
C. Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUCTORS
A. Insulated Conductors: Copper wire or cable insulated for 600 V unless otherwise required
by applicable Code or authorities having jurisdiction.
B. Bare Copper Conductors:
1. Solid Conductors: ASTM B 3.
2. Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8.
3. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Conductor shall be sized in accordance with the
National Electrical Code article 250.66 except where these specifications or the
drawings are more stringent.
4. Bonding Conductors and Bonding Jumpers: Shall be sized in accordance with the
National Electrical Code article 250 except where these specifications or the drawings
are more stringent.
2.2 CONNECTORS
A. Listed and labeled by a nationally recognized testing laboratory acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction for applications in which used, and for specific types, sizes, and
combinations of conductors and other items connected.
B. Bolted Connectors for Conductors and Pipes: Copper or copper alloy, bolted pressure-type,
with at least two bolts.
1. Pipe Connectors: Clamp type, sized for pipe.
C. Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welding kits of types recommended by kit manufacturer for
materials being joined and installation conditions.
D. Compression Connectors:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 26 - 3
1. Made of high copper alloy and manufactured specifically for the particular grounding
application.
2. Suitable for direct burial in earth and concrete.
3. Identifying compression die number inscription to be impressed on compression
fitting.
2.3 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel; 3/4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATIONS
A. Bare Copper Conductors: Install solid conductor for, No. 6 and 8 AWG, and stranded
conductors for, No. 4 AWG and larger, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Underground Grounding Conductors: Install bare copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum
or as indicated on the drawings.
1. Bury at least 30 inches below grade.
2. Duct-Bank Grounding Conductor: Bury 12 inches above duct bank when indicated as
part of duct-bank installation.
C. Conductor Terminations and Connections:
1. Pipe and Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Bolted connectors.
2. Underground Connections: Welded connectors, except at test wells and as otherwise
indicated.
3. Connections to Ground Rods at Test Wells: Bolted connectors.
4. Connections to Structural Steel: Welded connectors.
3.2 GROUNDING DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Comply with IEEE C2 grounding requirements.
B. Pad-Mounted Transformers and Switches: Install two ground rods and ground ring around
the pad. Ground pad-mounted equipment and noncurrent-carrying metal items associated
with substations by connecting them to underground cable and grounding electrodes. Install
copper conductor not less than No. 2 AWG for ground ring and for taps to equipment
grounding terminals. Bury ground ring not less than 6 inches from the foundation.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with all feeders and branch circuits.
B. Install insulated equipment grounding conductors with the following items, in addition to
those required by NFPA 70:
1. Feeders and branch circuits.
2. Lighting circuits.
3. Receptacle circuits.
4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 26 - 4
5. Three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
6. Flexible raceway runs.
7. Busway Supply Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor from
grounding bus in the switchgear, switchboard, or distribution panel to equipment
grounding bar terminal on busway.
8. Computer and Rack-Mounted Electronic Equipment Circuits: Install insulated
equipment grounding conductor in branch-circuit runs from equipment-area power
panels and power-distribution units.
C. Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-
mounted electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, heaters,
dampers, humidifiers, and other duct electrical equipment. Bond conductor to each unit and
to air duct and connected metallic piping.
D. Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables: Install a separate insulated
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater and heat-tracing cable. Bond
conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
E. Signal and Communication Equipment: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication equipment, provide No. 4 AWG minimum insulated grounding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet, wiring
closet, and central equipment location.
1. Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate grounding
conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bus.
2. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
F. [Metal] [and] [Wood] Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures: Install grounding
electrode and a separate insulated equipment grounding conductor in addition to grounding
conductor installed with branch-circuit conductors.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated or required by Code. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they
may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage.
B. Ground Rods: Drive rods until tops are 2 inches below finished floor or final grade, unless
otherwise indicated.
1. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductor below grade and as
otherwise indicated. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging coating,
if any.
2. For grounding electrode system, install at least three rods spaced at least one-rod
length from each other and located at least the same distance from other grounding
electrodes, and connect to the service grounding electrode conductor.
C. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install in locations accessible for inspection and maintenance,
except where routed through short lengths of conduit.
1. Bonding to Structure: Bond straps directly to basic structure, taking care not to
penetrate any adjacent parts.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 26 - 5
2. Bonding to Equipment Mounted on Vibration Isolation Hangers and Supports: Install
so vibration is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment.
3. Use exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, but if a disconnect-type
connection is required, use a bolted clamp.
D. Grounding and Bonding for Piping:
1. Metal Water Service Pipe: Install insulated copper grounding conductors, in conduit,
from building's main service equipment, or grounding bus, to main metal water
service entrances to building. Connect grounding conductors to main metal water
service pipes, using a bolted clamp connector or by bolting a lug-type connector to a
pipe flange, using one of the lug bolts of the flange. Where a dielectric main water
fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor on street side of fitting. Bond metal
grounding conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end.
2. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bonding jumpers to electrically bypass water
meters. Connect to pipe with a bolted connector.
3. Bond each aboveground portion of gas piping system downstream from equipment
shutoff valve.
E. Bonding Interior Metal Ducts: Bond metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Install tinned bonding jumper to
bond across flexible duct connections to achieve continuity.
F. Grounding for Steel Building Structure: Install a driven ground rod at base of each corner
column and at intermediate exterior columns at distances not more than 60 feet apart.
G. Ground Ring: Install a grounding conductor, electrically connected to each building structure
ground rod and to each steel column, extending around the perimeter of building. Bury
ground ring not less than 30 inches below the earth’s surface.
1. Install copper conductor not less than No. 2/0 AWG for ground ring and for taps to
building steel.
2. Bury ground ring not less than 24 inches from building foundation.
H. Ufer Ground (Concrete-Encased Grounding Electrode): Fabricate according to NFPA 70,
using a minimum of 20 feet of bare copper conductor not smaller than No. 4 AWG.
1. If concrete foundation is less than 20 feet long, coil excess conductor within base of
foundation.
2. Bond grounding conductor to reinforcing steel in at least four locations and to anchor
bolts. Extend grounding conductor below grade and connect to building grounding
grid or to grounding electrode external to concrete.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Qualified individual shall perform the following tests and inspections and prepare test
reports:
1. After installing grounding system but before permanent electrical circuits have been
energized, test for compliance with requirements.
2. Test completed grounding system at each location where a maximum ground -
resistance level is specified, at service disconnect enclosure grounding terminal, at
ground test wells, and at individual ground rods. Make tests at ground rods before
any conductors are connected.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT GROUNDING AND BONDING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 26 - 6
a. Measure ground resistance not less than two full days after last trace of
precipitation and without soil being moistened by any means other than
natural drainage or seepage and without chemical treatment or other
artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.
b. Perform tests by fall-of-potential method according to IEEE 81.
3. Prepare dimensioned drawings locating each test well, ground rod and ground rod
assembly, and other grounding electrodes. Identify each by letter in alphabetical
order, and key to the record of tests and observations. Include the number of rods
driven and their depth at each location, and include observations of weather and
other phenomena that may affect test results. Describe measures taken to improve
test results.
B. Report measured ground resistances that exceed the following values:
1. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 kVA and Less: 10 ohms.
2. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity 500 to 1000 kVA: 5ohms.
3. Power and Lighting Equipment or System with Capacity More Than 1000 kVA: 3
ohms.
4. Power Distribution Units or Panelboards Serving Electronic Equipment: 3 ohm(s).
5. Substations and Pad-Mounted Equipment: 5 ohms.
6. Manhole Grounds: 10 ohms.
C. Excessive Ground Resistance: If resistance to ground exceeds specified values, notify
Engineer promptly and include recommendations to reduce ground resistance.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 1
SECTION 26 05 33
RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute.
B. ASTM International.
C. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section Includes:
1. Outlet boxes and covers.
2. Conduit bodies.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.
2. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
2. National Fire Protection Association.
a. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide outlet boxes for all devices such as switches, receptacles, telephones, computer
terminals, security systems etc. Materials shall be suitable for environmental conditions at
the location of the box.
1. Dry.
2. Wet.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 2
3. Water -tight.
4. Corrosive.
B. Locate outlet boxes as indicated on the drawings. Adjust locations so as not to conflict with
structural requirements or other trades.
C. All spare and/or empty conduits must terminate in an outlet box.
D. Provide conduit bodies as shown on the plans or as needed to complete the conduit
installation.
E. Provide conduit bodies as needed to facilitate wire pulling or whenever the total amount of
bends in a conduit run exceeds 270 degrees as specified in Section 26 05 34 “Conduits”.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data:
1. Furnish complete manufacturer’s catalog sheets for each product to be used on this
project.
2. Furnish complete manufacturer’s recommended special tools to be used for
installation if required.
C. As-built Drawings:
1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups
with common supports.
3. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
4. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. Outlet boxes must comply with all applicable standards of the:
a. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
b. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
c. Underwriters Laboratories.
d. Joint Industry Conference.
C. Codes and Standards
1. Cast metal boxes.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 3
a. UL Standard 498 and 514.
b. Federal Specification No. W-C-586B.
2. Malleable iron boxes.
a. ASTM A47-77 Grade 32510
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT BODIES, BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Metal Boxes:
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
b. EGS/Appleton Electric.
c. Hoffman.
d. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
2. Plastic and/or fiberglass boxes:
a. Hoffman.
b. Carlon
3. Plastic coated steel boxes:
a. Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
b. OCAL – Blue, Thomas & Betts Corporation.
4. Cast device boxes:
a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
b. EGS/Appleton Electric.
B. Pressed Steel Boxes
1. 1-piece galvanized pressed steel.
2. Knockout type boxes.
3. Minimum size 4" square by 2-1/8" deep.
4. In dry heated areas requiring NEMA 1 enclosures unless otherwise indicated or
required.
5. Solid type gang boxes:
a. For more than 2 devices.
b. For barriered outlets.
C. Concrete Boxes
1. For outlets in concrete construction.
2. Pressed steel construction, concrete tight.
3. Knockout size range 1/2" to 1".
4. Depth as needed.
5. Types:
a. 4" octagon
b. 4" octagon ceiling boxes with hanging bars.
c. Gangable masonry boxes:
1) 3-1/2" deep, 3-3/4" high, length as required.
a) 2-1/2" deep boxes may be used where wall thickness
precludes the use of the deeper boxes.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 4
2) With partitions as needed.
D. Threaded-Hub Boxes
1. Use deep threaded-hub malleable iron or aluminum boxes:
a. Where legally required.
b. Where exposed to the weather.
c. In unheated areas.
d. Where subject to mechanical injury.
1) Here defined as exposed boxes less than 10 (ten) feet above the floor
in areas accessible to anyone other than authorized operating or
maintenance personnel.
e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system.
f. Accommodate wiring devices.
2. Cast conduit fittings may be used instead of boxes, except where boxes contain
devices.
3. Construction:
a. Each box shall contain an internal green ground screw.
b. Each box shall be furnished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d. Conduit size range from 1/2" to 1".
e. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing.
4. Aluminum boxes shall be high strength copper free 4/10 of 1% max. alloy use with
aluminum rigid conduit.
E. Plastic Coated Threaded-Hub Boxes
1. Use deep threaded-hub plastic coated malleable iron boxes in corrosive and NEMA
4X area or when the conduit system is type PCS.
a. Where legally required.
b. Where exposed to the weather.
c. In unheated areas.
d. Where subject to mechanical injury.
1) Here defined as exposed boxes less than 10 (ten) feet above the floor
in areas accessible to anyone other than authorized operating or
maintenance personnel.
e. To act as a pull box for conductors in a conduit system.
f. Accommodate wiring devices.
g. Tapered threaded hubs with integral bushing.
2. Cast conduit fittings may be used instead of boxes, except where boxes contain
devices.
3. Construction:
a. Each box shall contain an internal green ground screw.
b. Each box shall be furnished with a suitable gasketed cover.
c. With integral cast mounting lugs when surface mounted.
d. Conduit size range from 1/2" to 1".
e. Double coated with a nominal 0.002" (2 mil) urethane on both the interior
and exterior prior to application of PVC coating.
f. With a minimum 0.040" (40 mil) PVC coating bonded to exterior
g. With pressure sealing sleeve to protect the connection with conduit.
F. Conduit Bodies

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 5
1. Material consistent with conduit type:
a. Cast iron bodies and covers with type GRC.
b. Cast aluminum bodies and covers with type RAC.
c. PVC bodies with PVC conduit.
d. PVC coated cast iron bodies and covers with type PCS.
e. Cast iron or aluminum bodies with pressed steel or aluminum covers with
EMT conduit.
2. Mogul design conforming to NEC requirements for bending space for large
conductors for trade sizes of 1" and larger with conductors #4 AWG and larger, or
where required for wire bending space.
3. Gasketed covers attached to bodies with stainless steel screws secured to threaded
holes in conduit body.
4. PVC coated cast iron conduit bodies and covers:
a. Bodies prior to coating shall meet requirements for cast iron conduit bodies.
b. 0.040 inch exterior PVC coating and 0.002 inch interior urethane coating as
required for type PCS conduit and fittings.
c. Utilize the PVC coating as an integral part of the gasket design.
d. Stainless steel cover screws heads shall be encapsulated with plastic to assure
corrosion protection.
e. As manufactured by:
1) Robroy REDH2OT form 8 and mogul.
2) OCAL Blue form 8 and mogul.
5. PVC conduit bodies and covers as manufactured by Carlon.
6. Cast iron and cast aluminum bodies and covers as manufactured by:
a. Appleton FM8 and mogul.
b. Crouse-Hinds form 8 and mogul.
G. PVC Molded Junction Boxes
1. Boxes such as: FSE, FSC, FSS, FSCC, etc. will be allowed and compression type splices
only may be made in these enclosures.
a. Integral mounting feet for surface mounting
b. Molded plastic hubs for solvent welded conduit terminations.
c. Conduit range 1/2" to 1".
d. With gasketed covers and stainless steel attachment screws.
e. As manufactured by:
1) Carlon.
2) P W Pipe
2. PVC molded conduit bodies such as: T, LL, LR, LB, C, E, X, etc. will be allowed; however,
no splices may be made in these conduit bodies.
a. Molded plastic hubs for solvent welded conduit terminations.
b. Conduit range 1/2" to 2".
1) Type LB up to 4"
3. With gasketed covers and stainless steel attachment screws.
4. As manufactured by:
a. Carlon.
b. P W Pipe
H. Fiberglass Boxes
1. NEMA 4X, watertight, dust tight, corrosion-resistant, use only with PVC conduit.
2. Constructed of molded fiberglass reinforced polyester.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 6
3. Integral neoprene gasket on cover attached with an oil- resistant adhesive.
4. Enclosures to have internal pads for mounting optional panels and terminal kits.
5. Covers:
a. Screw cover enclosures
1) Covers held in place with captive, stainless steel or monel screws.
2) Covers attached to body with internal zinc-plated steel hinges.
b. Quick release latches covers
1) Corrosion resistant fiberglass hinges
2) Spring loaded fiberglass latches with a monel or stainless steel bail
attached with monel or stainless steel screws.
3) With a 316 stainless steel padlock hasp.
6. With external mounting feet.
7. Meeting the following minimum standards and tests:
a. Physical Property Value ASTM Method
b. Flexural Strength 12,000 PSI D-790
c. Heat Distortion 400°F D-648
d. Water Absorption (24hrs) 0.5% D-570
e. Tensile Strength 5000PSI D-651
f. Specific Gravity 1.8 D-792
g. Flammability 94V-0 UL-94
h. Dielectric Strength 400 V.P.M D-149
i. Arc Resistance 180 Sec D-495
8. All boxes to be supported with a minimum of 0.25” air space between the enclosure
and supporting surface.
9. As manufactured by:
a. Hoffman Engineering TYPE JFG.
b. Stahlin TYPE CL.
I. Formed Steel Enclosures Usage Designed to house electrical controls, terminals, and any
other devices
1. Steel:
a. NEMA 12.
b. Fabricated from 14 gauge steel.
c. All seams continuously welded ground smooth.
d. Door shall have a rolled lip around three sides.
1) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal:
1) Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip.
f. All external removable hardware shall be fabricated from heavy gauge steel
and zinc plated which shall clamp the door to the enclosure body.
g. With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
h. With a removable print pocket.
i. Internal panels:
1) With plated steel shoulder studs for mounting an internal panel.
2) Mounting panels shall be steel.
j. Large enclosures shall have door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
k. With no holes or knockouts.
l. Finish:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 7
1) ANSI-61 gray electrostatically applied polyester powder inside and
out over phosphatized surfaces.
2) White electrostatically applied polyester powder mounting plate.
m. Heavy gauge steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted.
n. Floor stand kit when shown:
1) Fabricated from 12 gauge steel.
2) Bottom plate 11 gauge.
3) Heights:
a) 6".
b) 12".
c) 18".
d) 24".
4) When a floor stand kit is used the box shall not have any external
mounting brackets.
o. As manufactured by:
1) Hoffman.
2) Thomas & Betts.
3) Stahlin.
4) Rittal.
2. Stainless Steel:
a. NEMA 4, NEMA 4X.
b. Fabricated from 14 gauge type 316 stainless steel.
c. All seams continuously welded.
d. Door shall have a rolled lip around three sides:
1) Attached to enclosure by means of a continuous stainless steel hinge
and pin.
e. Neoprene door gasket to provide a watertight seal:
1) Attached with an adhesive.
2) Retained by a retaining strip.
f. All external removable hardware shall be fabricated from heavy gauge
stainless steel which shall clamp the door to the enclosure body.
g. With a hasp and staple for padlocking.
h. With a removable print pocket.
i. Internal panels
1) With stainless steel shoulder studs for mounting an internal panel.
2) Mounting panels shall be stainless steel.
j. Large enclosures shall have door and body stiffeners for extra rigidity.
k. With no holes or knockouts.
l. Finish:
1) Brushed.
m. Stainless steel external mounting brackets when surface mounted
n. Floor stand kit when shown:
1) Fabricated from 12 gauge stainless steel.
2) Bottom plate 11 gauge.
3) Heights:
a) 6".
b) 12".
c) 18".
d) 24".

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 8
4) When a floor stand kit is used the box shall not have any external
mounting brackets.
o. As manufactured by:
1) Hoffman.
2) Thomas & Betts.
3) Stahlin.
4) Rittal.
J. Cast Iron Junction Boxes
1. NEMA 4.
2. Recessed cover boxes.
3. Suitable for use outdoors where subject to rain, dripping, or splashing water.
4. Designed for flush mounting in walls or floors.
a. Can be surface mounded using mounting lugs.
5. Construction:
a. Cast iron box
b. Covers
1) Checkered plate covers suitable for foot traffic.
2) When used in areas subject to vehicular traffic H-20 loading.
c. Hot dip galvanized.
d. Neoprene gasket.
e. Stainless steel screw covers.
6. As manufactured by:
a. Floor boxes shall be OZ Gedney Type YR or approved equal.
b. Surface boxes shall be OZ Gedney type YL or YF, or approved equal.
K. Boxes Serving Fixtures or Devices
1. Use as pull boxes wherever possible.
L. In Finished Areas
1. Provide specific pull or junction boxes only as indicated or directed.
M. Floor type outlet boxes shall be watertight cast iron, semi adjustable.
1. Hubbell Type B25 with S2530 cover plate.
2. Telephone outlets shall be fitted with six (6) inch bushed nipples.
3. Floor outlets in open areas for service to desks shall be similar except that the
Contractor shall provide pedestal housing.
a. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-D for power.
b. Hubbell SC-3098 with plate SS-309-T for telephone.
N. Outlet boxes shall be used as junction boxes wherever possible.
O. Where separate pullboxes are required, they shall have screw covers.
P. Outdoor boxes shall be galvanized and provided with gasketed covers and threaded hubs.
Q. Indoor boxes shall be painted, in accordance with and as identified in the painting schedule.
R. For Boxes Not Indicated

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 9
1. Provide types and mountings as required to suit the equipment and that will be
consistent with the conduit system used or as directed.
2. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes for flush-mounting in general purpose locations
shall be one-piece, galvanized, pressed steel.
3. Ceiling boxes for flush mounting in concrete shall be deep, galvanized, pressed steel.
4. Outlet, switch, and junction boxes where surface mounted in exposed locations shall
be cast ferrous boxes with mounting lugs, zinc or cadmium plating, and enamel finish.
5. Surface mounted boxes in concealed locations may be pressed steel.
6. Outlet, control station, and junction boxes, including covers, for installation in
corrosive locations shall be fiberglass reinforced polyester, stainless steel, or plastic
coated steel to match the conduit system, and shall be furnished with mounting lugs.
7. All cast boxes and pressed steel boxes for flush-mounting in concrete shall be fitted
with cast, malleable box covers and gaskets.
8. Boxes for installation in plastered areas shall be stainless steel over plaster rings.
S. Recessed Boxes
1. Support recessed boxes in suspended ceilings or stud partitions with galvanized steel
box hangers of types made specifically for the purpose or attach directly to wood
members or blocking.
2. Secure hangers or boxes to wood with 1" long cadmium-plated Type A pan head
screws. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are not acceptable.
2.2 HANDHOLES AND BOXES FOR EXTERIOR UNDERGROUND WIRING
A. Description: Comply with SCTE 77.
1. Color of Frame and Cover: Gray.
2. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have [open] [closed]
[integral closed] bottom, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having
structural load rating consistent with enclosure.
4. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.
5. Cover Legend: Molded lettering, "ELECTRIC" or "TELEPHONE" as required for each
service.
6. Conduit Entrance Provisions: Conduit-terminating fittings shall mate with entering
ducts for secure, fixed installation in enclosure wall.
B. Polymer-Concrete Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Cover: Molded of sand and
aggregate, bound together with polymer resin, and reinforced with steel or fiberglass or a
combination of the two.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Armorcast Products Company.
b. Carson Industries LLC.
c. CDR Systems Corporation.
d. NewBasis.
e. <Insert manufacturer's name.>

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 10
C. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes with Polymer-Concrete Frame and Cover: Sheet-molded,
fiberglass-reinforced, polyester-resin enclosure joined to polymer-concrete top ring or
frame.
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Armorcast Products Company.
b. Carson Industries LLC.
c. Christy Concrete Products.
d. Synertech Moulded Products, Inc.; a division of Oldcastle Precast.
e. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
D. Fiberglass Handholes and Boxes: Molded of fiberglass-reinforced polyester resin, with
covers of [polymer concrete] [reinforced concrete] [cast iron] [hot-dip galvanized-steel
diamond plate] [fiberglass].
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, the following:
a. Carson Industries LLC.
b. Christy Concrete Products.
c. Nordic Fiberglass, Inc.
d. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL FOR UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURES
A. Handhole and Pull-Box Prototype Test: Test prototypes of handholes and boxes for
compliance with SCTE 77. Strength tests shall be for specified tier ratings of products
supplied.
1. Strength tests of complete boxes and covers shall be by either an independent testing
agency or manufacturer. A qualified registered professional Engineer shall certify
tests by manufacturer.
2. Testing machine pressure gages shall have current calibration certification complying
with ISO 9000 and ISO 10012, and traceable to NIST standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATON
A. Apply conduit bodies and boxes as required by NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
B. NEMA classification for boxes in specific areas are as specified in section 26 00 00 “Electrical
General Provisions”.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Where Engineer's documents do not dictate location or control, consult with the trades
concerned so that outlets may be symmetrically placed in the finished module.
B. Center outlets horizontally in vertical wall panels and vertically in masonry courses.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 11
C. Use plastic boxes in corrosive areas where the conduit system specified is PVC.
D. In general, boxes shall conform to same materials as conduit system specified.
E. All boxes and or devices mounted on walls of areas classified as wet or corrosive shall be
supported so as to maintain a minimum of 0.25" free air space between the back of the
enclosure and the wall.
1. Use machined spacers to maintain air space, built-up washers are not acceptable.
2. Use stainless steel, steel that is completely electro-galvanized, or nylon materials for
spacers.
F. Use cast malleable iron boxes when box must support other devices.
G. Use plastic coated malleable iron boxes when used with PVC jacketed rigid steel conduit.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND HANDHOLES AND BOXES
A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with
connecting conduits to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded
from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed
earth.
C. Elevation: In paved areas, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers
of other enclosures 1 inch above finished grade.
D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line, <Insert depth of frost line below
grade at Project site> below grade.
E. Install removable hardware, including pulling eyes, cable stanchions, cable arms, and
insulators, as required for installation and support of cables and conductors and as indicated.
Select arm lengths to be long enough to provide spare space for future cables, but short
enough to preserve adequate Working clearances in the enclosure.
F. Field-cut openings for conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions.
Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating
fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RACEWAY AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 33 - 12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 1
SECTION 26 05 34
CONDUITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute:
1. ANSI C80.1 – Rigid Steel Conduit – Zinc Coated.
2. ANSI C80.3 – Electrical Metallic Tubing – Zinc Coated.
B. ASTM International.
C. International Organization for Standardization.
D. National Electrical Contractors Association.
E. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA RN-1 – Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit and Intermediate Steel Conduit.
2. NEMA TC2 – Electrical Plastic Tubing and Conduit.
3. NEMA TC3 – PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing.
4. NEMA TC13 – Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
F. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code:
a. Table 300.5 – Minimum Cover Requirements (0 to 600 volts, Nominal)
b. Table 300.50 – Minimum Cover Requirements (over 600 volts, Nominal)
c. Article 344 – Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC).
d. Article 348 – Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC).
e. Article 350 – Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC)
f. Article 352 – Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC).
g. Article 356 - Liquidtight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit (LFNC).
h. Article 358 – Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)
i. Article 360 – Flexible Metallic Tubing (FMT).
j. Article 362 – Flexible Non-metallic Tubing (ENT).
k. Article 500 – Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
G. Society of Cable Telecommunication Engineers.
H. Underwriters Laboratories Inc:
1. UL 1 – Standard for Safety for Flexible Metal Conduit.
2. UL 6 – Standard for Safety for Rigid Metal Conduit.
3. UL 360 – Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 2
4. UL 651 – Standard for Safety for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit.
5. UL 1660 – Standard for Safety for Liquid-Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit.
6. UL 1653 – Standard for Safety for Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing.
7. UL 94VO – Standard for Vertical Flame Test.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Conduits:
a. Metallic Conduits:
1) Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC).
2) Polyvinyl Chloride Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS).
3) Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC).
4) Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC).
b. Non-metallic Conduits.
1) Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC).
2) Electrical Non-metallic Tubing (ENT).
3) Liquidtight Flexible non-metallic (LFNC).
2. Conduit fittings and accessories.
3. Conduit installation.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions”.
2. Section 26 05 33 “Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems”.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 26 00 00 and noted herein.
B. Abbreviations:
1. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
2. EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
3. FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
4. GRC: Galvanized rigid steel conduit.
5. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
6. NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
7. PCS: PVC coated rigid Steel Conduit.
8. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride rigid nonmetallic conduit.
C. Conduit Bodies:
1. A separate portion of a conduit system that provides access through a removable
cover to the interior of the system at a junction of two or more sections of the system.
Includes, but not limited to: shapes – C, E, LB, T, X, etc.
D. Conduit Fitting:
1. An accessory that serves primarily a mechanical purpose. Includes, but not limited to:
bushings, locknuts, hubs, couplings, reducers, etc.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 3
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install conduits, conduit bodies, fittings, junction boxes and all necessary
components, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, as required, to install a complete
electrical raceway system.
B. The Electrical Plans are Diagrammatic in Nature:
1. Changes in conduit locations that are consistent with the design intent but are
dimensionally different, or routing to bypass obstructions which differ from what is
indicated on the Drawings are not considered a deviation.
2. Relocation of electrical equipment that affects the conduit routing or changes in
routing to bypass obstructions is not considered a change or deviation.
3. The Engineer shall be the sole source in determining whether the change is
constituted as a deviation.
4. Any deviation requires Engineer’s approval.
C. The Contractor shall bear the sole responsibility of any deviations in generation location,
conduit size, routing, or changes to the conduit schedule without the express written
approval or direction by the Engineer.
1. Any changes resulting in additional conduits, or extra work from such deviations
performed by the Contractor.
2. Such deviations made by the Contractor shall be reflected on the Contractor supplied
“As-built Drawings”.
3. Owner shall have the right to deduct the amount of applicable reimbursement,
equivalent to the cost of the engineering effort required to show those unauthorized
changes on Record Drawings.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data: For surface raceways, wireways and fittings, floor boxes, hinged-cover
enclosures, and cabinets.
1. Furnish complete manufacturer’s catalog sheets for each product to be used on this
project.
2. Furnish complete manufacturer’s recommended special tools to be used for
installation if required.
C. As-built Drawings:
1. Structural members in the paths of conduit groups with common supports.
2. HVAC and plumbing items and architectural features in the paths of conduit groups
with common supports.
D. Source quality-control test reports.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 4
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING
A. Do not expose type PVC, FRD, NFC and ENT to direct sunlight.
B. Do not store conduit in direct contact with the ground.
1.9 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. As specified in Section 26 00 00.
1.10 SEQUENCING
A. Before installing any conduit or locating any device box.
1. Examine the complete set of Contract Drawings and Specifications, and all applicable
shop Drawings.
2. Verify all dimensions and space requirements and make any minor adjustments to
the conduit system as required to avoid conflicts with the building structure, other
equipment, or the work of other trades.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Alflex Inc.
3. Allied Tube & Conduit; a Tyco International Ltd. Co.
4. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
5. Electri-Flex Co.
6. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
7. Maverick Tube Corporation.
8. OCAL, Inc.
9. O-Z Gedney; a unit of General Signal.
10. Perma Kote.
11. Robroy Industries.
12. Wheatland Tube Company.
13. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
B. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Couplings (GRC):
1. Shall comply with the following standards:
a. ANSI C80.1 Standard for Rigid Steel Conduit – Zinc Coated.
b. UL-6 Safety Standard for Rigid Metal Conduit.
2. All threads: NPT standard conduit threads with a ¾-inch taper per foot:
a. Running conduit threads are not acceptable.
3. Hot-dip galvanized inside and out, including threads, with chromate final coating..

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 5
a. Electro-galvanizing is not acceptable.
C. PVC-Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS):
1. The steel conduit, before PVC coating, shall be new, unused, hot-dip galvanized
material and shall conform to the requirements for type GRC.
2. Coated conduit conforms to NEMA Standard RN-1, the galvanized coating may not be
disturbed or reduced in thickness during the cleaning and preparatory process.
3. Factory bonded PVC jacket of 0.040-inch minimum thickness.
a. The conduit system to make use of pre-jacketed couplings, elbows etc.
b. PVC coating on conduit and associated fittings shall have no sages, blisters,
lumps, or other surface defects and shall be free of holes and holidays.
4. The PVC adhesive bond on conduit and fittings shall be greater than the tensile
strength of the PVC plastic coating. Confirm bond by certified test results.
5. A urethane coating shall be uniformly and consistently applied to the interior of all
conduit and fittings. This internal coating shall be a nominal thickness of 0.002 inch.
Conduit having areas with thin or no coating shall be unacceptable.
6. The PVC exterior and urethane interior coatings applied to the conduit shall afford
sufficient flexibility to permit field bending without cracking or flaking at
temperature above 30 degrees Fahrenheit (-1 degrees Celsius).
7. The conduit threads shall be hot-dip galvanized or shall be galvanized after
fabrication and coating of the conduit using a method that ensures complete coverage
and heats the zinc and steel to a temperature that ensures the zinc alloys with the
steel over the entire surface. All threads shall be coated with urethane.
8. The exterior galvanized surfaces shall be coated with primer before PVC coating to
ensure a bond between the zinc substrate and the PVC coating.
9. Nominal thickness of the exterior PVC coating shall be 0.040 inches thick except
where part configuration or application of the piece dictated otherwise.
10. PCS Couplings:
a. The conduit coupling, before plastic coating, shall be new, unused material
and shall conform to appropriate UL standards.
b. The PVC Coating on the outside of conduit couplings shall be 0.040 inches
thick and have a series of longitudinal ribs to protect the coating from tool
damage during installation.
c. A PVC sleeve extending 1 pipe diameter or 2 inches, whichever is less, shall
be formed at each female conduit opening of the couplings.
11. The exterior PVC coating and the interior urethane coatings shall be factory supplied
by the same manufacturer.
D. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): ANSI C80.3.
1. Minimum size ¾-inch.
E. Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC):
1. Conforms to the following standards:
a. UL 360.
2. Available in the following configurations:
a. General Purpose:
1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius.
b. Oil Resistant:
1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +60 degrees Celsius.
c. Computer Room:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 6
1) Temperature range -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius.
d. Temperature rated.
3. Sunlight resistant, weatherproof, and watertight.
4. Manufactured from single strip steel, hot dip galvanized on all four sides before
conduit fabrication.
5. Strip steel spiral wound resulting in an interior that is smooth and clean for easy wire
pulling.
6. With an overall polyvinyl chloride jacket.
7. With integral copper ground wire, built in the core, in conduit trade sizes ½-inch
through 1-1/4-inch.
8. Minimum size ½-inch.
F. Flexible Metal Conduit (FMC)
1. Materials:
a. Single strip steel hot-dip galvanized on all four sides before conduit
fabrication.
b. Full wall:
1) Reduced wall thickness not allowed.
2. Interlocking design formed from continuous metal strip for integrity and flexibility.
3. UL conduits through penetration fire wall rating:
a. 3-hour rated for steel.
b. 2-hour rated for aluminum.
4. UL rated for Cable Tray and Environmental Air-Handling Space requirements.
5. Minimum size ¾-inch.
G. Fittings for Conduit (Including all Types and Flexible and Liquidtight), EMT, and Cable:
NEMA FB 1; listed for type and size raceway with which used, and for application and
environment in which installed.
1. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fitting for Exposed Locations:
a. Suitable for use with conduit system being used.
2. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit Expansion Fittings at Structural Exposed Joints:
a. Suitable for use with conduit system being used.
3. Conduit Sleeve:
a. Suitable for use with conduit system being used.
4. Conduit Seals:
a. Installed at locations as indicated on the Drawings, in the specifications and
as required by NEC.
b. Suitable for use with conduit system being used.
5. Conduit Thru-wall Seals:
a. Installed at locations as indicated on the Drawings, in the specifications and
as required by NEC.
b. Suitable for use with conduit system being used.
6. Conduit Fittings for Hazardous (Classified) Locations: Comply with UL 886.
7. Fittings for EMT: Set-screw or compression type.
8. Coating for Fittings for PVC-Coated Conduit: Minimum thickness, 0.040 inch, with
overlapping sleeves protecting threaded joints.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 7
2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
2. Anamet Electrical, Inc.; Anaconda Metal Hose.
3. Arnco Corporation.
4. CANTEX Inc.
5. CertainTeed Corp.; Pipe & Plastics Group.
6. Condux International, Inc.
7. ElecSYS, Inc.
8. Electri-Flex Co.
9. Lamson & Sessions; Carlon Electrical Products.
10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
11. RACO; a Hubbell Company.
12. Thomas & Betts Corporation.
13. <Insert manufacturer's name.>
B. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride Conduit (PVC):
1. Shall be NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Rated for 90 degrees Celsius conductors or cable
C. Liquidtight Flexible Non-metallic Conduit (LFNC):
1. Provide liquid-tight and corrosion resistant flexible-non-metallic conduit and fittings.
2. Fabricated from a hard PVC spiral completely surrounded by flexible PVC:
a. UL listed for sunlight resistance.
b. Suitable for use at conduit temperatures of 80 degrees Celsius dry, 60 degrees
Celsius wet and 60 degrees Celsius oil resistant.
3. Temperature Range -20 degrees Celsius to +80 degrees Celsius.
D. Electrical Non-metallic Tubing (ENT):
1. Corrugated thermoplastic construction.
2. Trades sizes ½-inch through 2-inch.
E. Fittings: NEMA TC 3; match to conduit or tubing type and material.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Connectors and Fittings:
1. Manufactured with compatible materials to the corresponding conduit.
B. Insulated Throat Metallic Bushings:
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron or zinc plated steel when used with steel conduit, with a
positive metallic conduit end stop.
b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150
degrees Celsius.
c. Use fully insulated bushings on non-metallic conduit system made of high
impact 150 degrees Celsius rated non-combustible thermosetting phenolic.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 8
C. Insulated Grounding Bushings:
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron or steel, zinc plated, with a positive metallic end stop.
b. Integrally molded non-combustible phenolic insulated surfaces rated 150
degrees Celsius.
c. Tin plated copper grounding saddle for use with copper or aluminum
conductions.
D. Electrical Unions (Erickson Couplings):
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron hot dip galvanized for use with steel conduit.
b. Aluminum for use with aluminum conduit.
c. Concrete tight, 3-piece construction.
d. Rated for Class 1 Division Group D I hazardous areas.
E. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS) Fittings:
1. All hollow conduit fittings, which serve as part of the PCS conduit system must be
coated with an exterior PVC coating and interior urethane coating as described for
the conduit.
2. The conduit fitting, before plastic coating, shall be new, unused material and shall
conform to appropriate UL standards.
3. A PVC sleeve extending one pipe diameter or two inches, whichever is less, shall be
formed at every female conduit opening on fittings except unions. The inside
diameter of the sleeve shall be the same as the outside diameter of the conduit to be
used.
4. Flexible overlapping sleeves on all hubs and couplings shall provide a vapor and
moisture tight seal at every connection.
F. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) Fittings:
1. Construction:
a. Malleable iron hot dip galvanized.
b. Furnished with locknut and sealing ring.
c. Liquidtight, rain-tight, oil-tight.
d. Insulated throat.
e. Furnish as straight, 45 degree elbows and 90 degree elbows.
f. Designed to prevent sleeving:
1) Verify complete bonding of the raceway jacket to the plastic gasket
seal.
g. Equipped with grounding device to provide ground continuity irrespective of
raceway core construction. Grounding device if inserted into raceway and
directly in contact with conductors shall have rolled over edges for sizes
under 5 inches.
h. Where terminated into a threadless opening using a threaded hub fitting, a
suitable moisture resistant/oil resistant synthetic rubber gasket shall be
provided between the outside of the box or enclosure and the fitting shoulder.
Gasket shall be adequately protected by and permanently bonded to a
metallic retainer.
G. Corrosion Resistant and Outdoor Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit (LFMC) Fittings:
1. Construction:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 9
a. PVC coated liquid-tight fittings with a bonded 0.04 inch thick PVC coating on
the metal connector to form a seal around the SLT conduits.
b. Connectors shall have an insulated throat and an integral sealing ring.
H. Hubs for Threaded Attachment of Steel Conduit to Sheet Metal Enclosures:
1. Construction:
a. Shall have an insulated throat.
b. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated.
c. Bonding locknut.
d. Recessed neoprene o-ring to assure watertight and dust tight connector.
e. 1/2-inch through 1-1/4-inch steel zinc electroplated.
f. 1-1/2-inch through 6-inch malleable iron zinc plated.
g. Aluminum with aluminum conduit.
2. Usage:
a. All conduits in damp, wet, outdoor, and corrosive areas shall use threaded
hubs for connections to sheet metal enclosures.
I. Sealing Fittings:
1. Construction:
a. When used in corrosive areas shall be PVC coated.
b. Malleable ductile iron with steel conduit.
c. Aluminum with aluminum conduit.
d. Crouse-Hinds Type EYD where drains are required.
e. Crouse-Hinds Type EYS where drains are not required.
f. UL listed for use in Class 1, Division 1, Groups A, B, C, D; Class 1, Division 2,
Groups A, B, C, C; Class 2, Divisions 1 and 2; Groups E, F, and G.
J. PVC Fittings:
1. Shall include the following:
a. Couplings.
b. Terminal Adapters.
c. Female Adapters.
d. Caps.
e. Reducer Bushings.
f. Duct Couplings.
g. Eng Bells.
h. Expansion Couplings.
i. Duct Couplings 5 degree.
j. C – Pull Fittings.
k. E – Pull Fittings.
l. LB – Pull Fittings.
m. LL – Pull Fittings.
n. LR – Pull Fittings.
o. T – Pull Fittings.
p. X – Pull Fittings.
2. Materials:
a. All devices shall be made of PVC, using the same materials as used for Type
PVC conduit.
b. All metal hardware shall be stainless steel.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 10
K. Through Wall and Floor Seals:
1. Materials
a. Body.
b. Grommet – neoprene.
c. Pressure rings – PVC coated steel.
d. Disc material – PVC coated steel.
e. Aluminum when used with conduit type RAC.
L. Expansion/Deflection Couplings:
1. Use to compensate for movement in any directions between two conduit ends that
they connect.
2. Shall allow movement of ¾-inch from the normal in all directions.
3. Shall allow angular movement for a deflection of 30 degrees from normal in any
direction.
4. Materials:
a. End couplings – Bronze.
b. Sleeve – Neoprene.
c. Bands – Stainless Steel.
d. Bonding Jumper – Tinned copper braid.
M. Expansion Couplings:
1. Shall allow for expansion and contraction of conduit:
a. Permitting 8-inch movement, 4 inches in either direction.
2. Materials:
a. Head – Malleable or ductile iron.
b. Sleeve – Steel.
c. Insulating Bushing – Phenolic.
d. Finish – Hot dip galvanized.
2.4 METAL WIREWAYS
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Cooper B-Line, Inc.
2. Hoffman.
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
B. Description: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated, NEMA 250, Type shall comply with
area as specified in section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions”, unless otherwise
indicated.
C. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-
down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for
complete system.
D. Wireway Covers: Screw-cover type or as indicated.
E. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION
A. Apply raceway products as required by NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code and as specified
in section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions”
B. Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size.
C. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
1. Rigid and Steel Conduit: Use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. PVC Externally Coated, Rigid Steel Conduits: Use only fittings listed for use with that
material. Patch and seal all joints, nicks, and scrapes in PVC coating after installing
conduits and fittings. Use sealant recommended by fitting manufacturer.
D. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum
raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic
sleeve.
E. Do not install aluminum conduits in contact with concrete.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2
except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.
B. Conduit Installation General:
1. Every installer of PVC coated Aluminum (PCA) or Rigid Steel (PCS) conduits shall be
certified by the manufacturer for installation of the conduit.
2. Install conduit runs in accordance with schematic representation as indicated on the
Drawings and as specified. Modify conduit runs to suit field conditions, as accepted
by the Engineer.
3. Install complete conduit systems between outlets, boxes, and circuit source before
conductors are installed.
4. Install conduit runs for lighting and receptacle circuits, whether or not indicated on
the Drawings.
5. For conduit not specifically identified, i.e., lighting and receptacle conduits in process
areas, the lighting and receptacle conduit materials shall match those selected for the
power and process control systems.
6. Use conduit size and type as identified in the Drawings.
7. Route conduit to avoid drains or other gravity lines. Where conflicts occur, relocate
conduit as required, at no additional cost to the Owner.
8. Adequate clearances from high-temperature surfaces shall be provided for all conduit
runs. Provide clearances as follows:
a. Clearances of 6 inches from surfaces 113 degrees Fahrenheit to 149 degrees
Fahrenheit.
b. Clearances of 12 inches from surfaces greater than 149 degrees Fahrenheit.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 12
c. Keep conduit at least 6 inches from the coverings on hot water and steam
pipes, 18 inches from the coverings on flues and breechings and 12 inches
from fuel lines and gas lines.
d. Where it is necessary to route conduit close to high-temperature surfaces, a
high-reflectance thermal barrier should be installed between the conduit and
the surface.
9. Support conduit runs on water-bearing walls a minimum of 1 inch away from wall on
an accepted channel. Use hot-dip galvanized steel or stainless steel channel,
consistent with type of conduit being installed. Do not run conduit within water-
bearing walls unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
10. Run conduit exposed to view parallel with or at right angles to structural members,
walls, or lines of the building. Install straight and true conduit runs with uniform and
symmetrical elbows, offsets, and bends. Make changes in direction with long radius
bends of with conduit bodies. Turn conduits with neat symmetrical bends.
11. Route all exposed conduit to preserve headroom, access space and work space and to
prevent tripping hazards and clearance problems. Install conduit runs so that runs do
not interfere with proper and safe operation of equipment and not block or interfere
with ingress or egress, including equipment removal hatches.
12. Conduit may be run in concrete members or slabs with permission of the Engineer,
provided the outside diameter does not exceed 1/3 of the thickness of the concrete.
Locate such conduit in the center of the concrete or where the minimum concrete
cover will be 1 conduit diameter. Space conduits at least 3 diameters apart on centers.
As a general rule, conduit may not cross other conduit at pipe in concrete members
or slabs.
13. When installing conduit through existing slabs or walls make provisions for locating
any possible conflicting items where conduit is to penetrate. Use tone signal or X-ray
methods to make certain that no penetrations will be made into existing conduit,
piping, cables, post-tensioning cables etc.
14. Conduit runs between pull boxes or junction boxes:
a. Total bends equaling not more than 270 degrees.
b. Install NEC required pull boxes at locations acceptable for the Engineer.
c. Plug conduits brought into pull boxes, manholes, handholes, and other
openings until used to prevent entrance of moisture.
d. Cap spare conduits and provide plastic pulling tape below threaded cap.
e. Provide bonding bushing and bond wire.
15. Install conduit thruwall seals where indicated on the Drawings.
16. For existing and new 2 inch and larger conduit runs, snake conduits with conduit
cleaner equipped with a cylindrical mandrel of a diameter not less than 85 percent of
nominal diameter of conduit. Remove and replace conduits through which mandrel
will not pass. Clean and make certain that new and existing conduit runs are not
crushed or creased.
17. Conduit Sizes shall be in accordance with the NEC or specified as follows unless
otherwise indicated on the Drawings:
a. Concealed conduit in partitions or accessible ceilings: Minimum ¾ inch.
b. Exposed Conduit: Minimum ¾ inch.
c. Rigid Steel (RGC or PSC) encased in Concrete: Minimum 1 inch.
d. Rigid PVC Encased in Concrete
e. Liquidtite and Flex Conduit Minimum ½-inch.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 13
18. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all sleeves and openings required
for the passage of electrical raceways or cables even when these openings or sleeves
are not specifically shown on the Drawings.
C. Corrosive Areas:
1. Use conduit system as indicated on the Conduit Schedules.
a. Install PCS in corrosive areas where conduit may need to be self-supporting
or where subject to mechanical damage.
b. Use liquid tight flexible conduits (SLT or NFC) and corrosion resistant
connectors.
c. GRC where area and conduit are to be painted using an epoxy based paint.
D. Conduit Usage:
1. General Conditions:
a. Except as otherwise indicated, provide the type of conduit legally permitted
or required for each location or condition.
b. Seal ends of all conduit with approved, manufactured conduit seals, caps or
plugs immediately after installation. Keep ends sealed until immediately
before pulling conductors.
c. Conduit sizes not indicated in the schedule or on the Drawings shall be in
accordance with NEC requirements and shall be sized based on quantities of
sizes of wire installed therein, including the insulated grounding conductor.
d. Conduit types not specified shall be consistent with other conduit systems in
the area, the area classifications, and enclosure requirements.
e. Use insulated metallic bushings for all metallic conduit.
2. Underground and Embedded Conduits:
a. Install minimum 2-inch ductbank conduit, unless otherwise indicated on the
Drawings.
b. Use types and systems as indicated on the Drawings.
1) PVC Schedule 40 in embedded locations and underground in
ductbanks.
c. Use Type PCS or PVC wrapped GRC conduit and elbows for underground and
embedded installations as follows:
1) Stub-up and risers to grade floor or equipment from non-metallic
conduits.
2) Entering and exiting underground conduit runs a minimum 12 inches
above and below grade or finished floor.
3) All 90-degree elbows with a bend radius of 12 inches or less.
d. Install underground conduits in conformance with Section 26 00 00
“Electrical General Provisions”, and as shown or required on the Drawings.
e. Make conduit size transitions at pullboxes and manholes for underground
conduits.
f. Install spare conduits in underground duct banks towards top center of runs
to allow for ease of installation of future cables as conduits enter underground
manholes and pullboxes.
3. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS):
a. Use specifically manufactured or machined threading dies to manufacturer’s
specifications to accommodate the PVC jacket.
b. Use only manufactured approved tools for clamping conduit.
4. Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit (GRC):

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 14
a. Use Type GRC in locations as identified in specification 26 00 00 “Electrical
General Provisions” and as shown or required on the drawings.
b. Conduit shall be cut square and reamed before threading.
5. Flexible Conduit:
a. Use flexible conduit for short lengths for final connections between rigid
conduit and motors, vibrating equipment, instruments, control equipment or
where required for equipment servicing.
b. Maximum length of flexible conduit 36 inches.
c. Use Type LFMC in wet and damp locations, areas exposed to the weather,
corrosive areas where NEMA 4X construction is required and conduit type is
PCS, or as indicated on the Drawings or conduit schedule, provided the jacket
temperature limitations will not be exceeded:
1) Use UL sunlight resistant outdoors and in the presence of ultraviolet
lights.
d. Use type LFNC in all corrosive atmospheres where conduit type is PVC and
where indicated on the plans or conduit schedule.
e. Use explosion proof flexible conduit in Class I Division hazardous areas. In
Class 1, Division 1 areas, flexible fittings must be approved and marked
suitable for Class 1, Division 1, and must also be listed for compatibility with
the Group type atmosphere when used.
f. In Class I, Division 2 areas, use liquidtight metal conduit with approved
fittings.
1) Maximum length of liquidtight metal conduit is 18 inches.
6. Non-Metallic Conduit (PVC):
a. Conduit terminations shall be vi threaded adapters into threaded hubs on the
junction boxes or conduit bodes.
b. Conduit terminations into boxes without threaded hubs shall utilize a
threaded adapter and a flat neoprene washer on the outside of the box. Use a
locknut on the inside of the box to tighten the adapter to the box:
1) Flat washers as manufactured by Carlon, Type E943, DW, EW, FW,
GW, HW, and JW.
c. Install PVC conduit for exposed runs only when indicated on the Drawings.
Route conduit so as to afford it the maximum physical protection. If necessary,
cover conduit to afford additional protection when it cannot be shielded by
the structure or machinery frames:
1) Use schedule 80 where exposed runs may be subject to physical
damage.
d. Use UV resistant conduit where it can be exposed to ultraviolet light and in
exposed outdoor areas.
E. Conduit Joints and Bends:
1. General:
a. Where conduits are underground, under slabs on grade, exposed to the
weather or in wet locations, make joints liquid tight and gas-tight.
b. Keep bends and offsets in conduit runs to an absolute minimum. For the
serving utilities, make large radius ends to meet their requirements.
c. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the
finished slab.
d. Bend conduit to radius as legally required.
e. All bends shall be symmetrical.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 15
f. All of the following conduit systems shall use large radius sweep elbows:
1) Underground conduits.
2) Conduits containing medium voltage cables.
3) Conduits containing shielded cables.
4) Conduits containing fiber optic cables.
2. Threaded Conduit:
a. Cut threads on GRC, IMC, and RAC with a standard conduit cutting die that
provides a ¾-inch per foot taper and to a length such that all bare metal
exposed by the threading operation will be completely covered by the
couplings or fittings used. In addition, cut the lengths of the thread such that
all joints will become secure and wrench tight just preceding the point where
the conduit ends would butt together in couplings or where conduit ends
would butt into the ends or shoulders of other fittings.
b. Thoroughly ream conduit after threads have been cut to remove burrs. Seal
joints with accepted conductive sealant compound and make watertight. Set
up joints tight. Use bushings or conduit fittings at conduit terminations.
c. On exposed conduits, repair scratches and other defects with galvanizing
repair stick, Enterprise Galvanizing “Galvabar” or CRC “Zinc It.”
d. Threaded conduit joints shall be coated with an approved electrically
conductive sealant and corrosion inhibitor that is not harmful to the
conductor insulation.
1) Use KOPR-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of ferrous
conduit.
2) Use AP* ALUMA-Shield as manufactured by T&B on threads of
aluminum conduit.
3) Apply to the male threads and tighten joints securely.
4) Clean excess sealant from exposed threads after assembly.
e. Securely tighten all threaded connections.
f. Any exposed threaded surface must be cleaned and coated with a galvanizing
solution so that all exposed surfaces have a galvanized protective coating
before painting.
g. Provide large radius factory-made bends for 1-1/4-inch trade size or larger
or field-bend the conduit with power bending equipment specifically
intended for the purpose and made so that the conduit is not damaged and
the internal diameter is not effectively reduced.
h. Bends should be made with a radius of not less than the requirements found
in the NEC:
1) The radius must be greater than the minimum bending radius of the
cable.
2) A field bend shall be made with power bending equipment or manual
benders specifically intended for the purpose and made so that the
conduit is not damaged and the internal diameter is not effectively
reduced.
3. Non-Metallic (PVC):
a. Use approved solvent-weld cement specifically manufactured for the
purpose. Spray type cement is not allowed.
4. Apply heat for bends so that conduit does not distort or discolor. Use a spring mandrel
as required to assure full inside diameter at all bends.
F. Support raceways as specified below:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 16
1. General:
a. Provide appropriate hangers, supports, fasteners, and seismic restraints to
suit applications.
b. Support conduit at the intervals required by the NEC.
c. Perforated strap and plumbers tape are not acceptable for conduit supports.
d. Do not install one inch or larger conduits in or through structural members
unless approved by the Engineer.
e. Conduit fittings and supports are not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor
shall provide all fittings and supports required to suit the conditions.
f. Securely fasten exposed conduits with clamps or straps. Run exposed conduit
on walls and ceilings only, parallel to planes of walls or ceilings. Do not run
conduit diagonally.
2. Above Suspended Ceilings:
a. Support conduit on or from the structure, conduit shall not be supported from
hanging wires or suspended ceiling grid.
3. Concealed Conduit on Wood:
a. Use 2-hole galvanized steel straps screwed or nailed to the wood or hammer-
driven supports of the stamped galvanized type having serrated or sawtooth
edges on the driven portion and designed specifically for the size and type of
conduit being supported. Drive these latter supports so that the conduit is
tightly and rigidly supported. Replace any dented or damaged conduit.
4. In Steel Stud Construction:
a. Tie conduit at a maximum 4-foot intervals with No. 16 gauge double annealed
galvanized wire so that conduit cannot move from vibration or other causes.
5. Conduit on Concrete or Masonry:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with metallic or plastic expansion anchors
and screws or support from preset inserts.
b. Use preset inserts in concrete when possible.
c. Use pipe spacers (clamp backs) in wet locations.
d. On plaster or stucco, use 1-hole malleable iron straps with toggle bolts.
6. Conduit on Metal Decking:
a. Use 1-hole malleable iron straps with 1-inch long cadmium-plated Type A
panhead sheet metal screws. Fully or partially hammer-driven screws are not
acceptable.
7. Suspended Conduit:
a. Use malleable iron factory-made split-hinged pipe rings with threaded
suspension rods sized for the weight to be carried (minimum 3/8-inch
diameter), Kindorf, or equal.
b. For grouped conduits, construct racks with threaded rods and tiered angle-
iron or Unistrut cross members. Clamp each conduit individually to a cross
member. Where rods are more than 2 feet long, provide rigid sway bracing.
8. Supports at Structural Steel Members:
a. Use beam clamps.
b. Drilling or welding may be used only as indicated or with approval of the
Engineer.
9. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit (PCS) systems:
a. Right angle beam clamps and U bolts shall be specially formed and sized to
snugly fit the outside diameter of the coated conduit. All “U” bolts shall be
supplied with PVC encapsulated nuts that cover the exposed portions of the
threads.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 17
b. Securely fasten exposed PCS conduits with Type 316 stainless steel clamps or
straps or PVC coated clamps or straps manufactured and supplied by the PCS
conduit supplier.
G. EMT shall only be permitted when concealed within finished walls, and ceilings, of offices and
control rooms unless otherwise indicated.
H. Expansion or Expansion/Deflection Fittings:
1. General:
a. Align expansion coupling with the conduit run to prevent binding.
b. Follow manufacturer’s instructions to set the piston opening.
c. Install expansion fittings across concrete expansion joints and at other
locations where necessary to compensate for thermal or mechanical
expansion and contraction as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Shall be of the same material as the conduit system.
2. For metallic conduit (PCS, GRC and RAC) use expansion or expansion/deflection
couplings, as appropriate, where:
a. Conduit may be affected by dissimilar movements of the supporting
structures or medium or conduit crosses building or structural expansion
joints.
b. These fittings shall be constructed in such a manner that will provide the
continuity of the ground path in each conduit or raceway.
c. Install expansion fittings a minimum of every 200 feet in straight conduit
runs.
3. For PVC use expansion or expansion/deflection couplings, as appropriate, where
length change due to temperature variation exceeds 2 inches:
a. Rigidly fix the outer barrel of the expansion coupling so it cannot move.
b. Mount the conduit connected to the piston loosely enough to allow the
conduit to move as the temperature changes.
I. Empty Conduits:
1. Provide a polyethylene rope rated 250 pounds tensile strength in each empty conduit
more than 10 feet in length.
2. Provide conduit marker tags for each spare conduit.
J. Miscellaneous:
1. Provide flashings and counter flashings or pitch pockets for waterproofing of
raceways, outlets, fittings, and other items that penetrate the roof.
2. Electrical unions shall be used at all points of union between ends of rigid conduit
systems that cannot otherwise by coupled. Running threads and threadless couplings
shall not be used.
3. Transition fittings to mate steel conduit to PVC conduit, and PVC access fittings, shall
be furnished by or as recommended by the manufacturer or the PVC conduit.
4. Where a transition between PVC conduit and rigid conduit systems is required, such
transition shall be accomplished by means of a PCS elbow or a minimum 3 foot length
of PCS conduit.
5. Any conduit installed that the Engineer determines does not meet the best practices
of the trade shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner.
K. Field Conditions and Related Requirements:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 18
1. Underground water table may be near or above the location of new ductbanks.
2. Contractor shall include cost for necessary dewatering, and cleaning equipment to
perform work in underground ductbanks, pull boxes and manholes, before
installation.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT
A. Direct-Buried Conduit:
1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. Prepare
trench bottom with 6” of select backfill below the conduits. Select backfill shall pass
through a ¾” sieve frame and contain less than 30 percent rock solids by volume.
2. Install select backfill around conduits and 18 inches above conduits.
3. Duct shall be assembled using high impact nonmetallic spacers and saddles to provide
conduits with vertical and horizontal separation. Plastic spacers shall be set every 5
feet.
4. The duct shall be laid on a grade line of at least 4 inches per 100 feet, sloping towards
pullboxes or manholes. Duct shall be installed and pullbox and manhole depths
adjusted so that the top of the duct is a minimum of 24 inches below grade or as
shown on the drawings.
5. Couplings shall be staggered at least 6 inches vertically.
6. Each bore of the completed duct bank shall be cleaned by drawing through it a
standard flexible mandrel one foot long and 1/4-inch smaller than the nominal size
of the duct through which the mandrel will be drawn. After passing of the mandrel,
draw a wire brush and swab through.
7. A raceway, in the duct envelope, which does not require conductors, shall have a
1/8-inch polypropylene pull cord installed throughout the entire length of the
raceway.
8. Duct bank penetration through walls of manholes or pullboxes, and on building walls
below grade shall be watertight.
9. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment
and at building entrances through the floor. All underground rigid steel conduit shall
be PVC-coated or taped.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose.
b. For stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel
conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or
foundation. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at
equipment.
10. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 18 inches above direct-buried
conduits. Align tape along the centerline of conduit bank.
B. Concrete-Encased Ducts: Support ducts on duct separators.
1. The type of concrete used is specified in section 26 00 00 “Electrical General
Provisions.
2. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and
deforming of ducts, with not less than 4 spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators
to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators
approximately 6 inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric
straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic
loops around ducts or duct groups.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 19
3. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other
terminations in one continuous operation.
a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and
contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour.
Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written
recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-
contraction damage.
b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane
and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches into concrete
on both sides of joint near corners of envelope.
4. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and
between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of
concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank
assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in
middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating
equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application.
5. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed
earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming
conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups.
6. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-
supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise,
use forms.
7. Minimum Space between Ducts: 3 inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall,
2 inches between ducts for like services, and 4 inches between power and signal
ducts.
8. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not
subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate
traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated.
9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and
equipment and at building entrances through the floor. All underground rigid steel
conduit shall be PVC-coated or taped.
a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose, and
encase coupling with 3 inches of concrete.
C. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts
and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within 3 inches of the centerline of duct bank.
Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a
nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.
3.4 CONDUIT PENETRATIONS:
A. Conduit Penetrations on walls, concrete structures, pull boxes, and equipment cabinets shall
be performed in accordance with the following:
1. Seal all raceways entering structures at the first box or outlet with conduit sealant to
prevent the entrance into the structure of gases, liquids, or rodents.
2. Dry pack with nonshrink grout around raceways that penetrate concrete walls, floors,
or ceilings aboveground, or use one of the methods indicated for underground
penetrations.
3. Where an underground conduit enters a structure through a concrete roof or a
membrane waterproofed wall or floor, provide an acceptable, malleable iron,

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CONDUITS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 34 - 20
watertight, entrance sealing device. When there is no raceway concrete encasement,
provide such device having a gland type sealing assembly at each end with pressure
bushings which may be tightened at any time. When there is raceway concrete
encasement indicated, provide such a device with a gland type sealing assembly on
the accessible side. Securely anchor all such devices into the masonry construction
with one or more integral flanges. Secure membrane waterproofing to such devices
in a permanently watertight manner.
4. Where an underground raceway without concrete encasement enters a structure
through a nonwaterproofed wall or floor, install a sleeve made of Schedule 40
galvanized pipe. Fill the space between the conduit and sleeve with a suitable plastic
expandable compound, or an oakum and lead joint, on each side of the wall or floor in
such a manner as to prevent entrance of moisture. A watertight entrance sealing
device may be used in lieu of the sleeve.
3.5 FIRESTOPPING
A. Apply firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore
original fire-resistance rating of assembly. Firestopping materials are specified in section 26
00 00 "Electrical General Provisions".
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets
are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended
by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 53 - 1
SECTION 26 05 53
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for identifying electrical, instrumentation, and process equipment and
components.
2. Material, manufacturing and installation requirements for identification devices.
B. Related Sections:
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its sub-contractors to
review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.
1.2 REFERENCE
A. Refer to Section 26 00 00 for a list of references.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 26 00 00.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Nameplates:
1. Provide a nameplate for each piece of electrical equipment, process equipment, valve,
pump, mixer, feeder, fan, air-handling unit, motor, switch, receptacle, controller,
instrument transducer, instrument power supply, solenoid, motor control center,
starter, panelboard, switchboard, individually mounted or plug-in type circuit
protector or motor controller, disconnect switch, bus duct tap switch, time switch,
relay and for any other control device or major item of electrical equipment, either
located in the field or within panels.
2. All nameplates shall be of identical style, color, and material throughout the facility.
3. Device nameplates shall include:
a. Designations as shown on the drawings and identified on the Process and
Instrumentation Drawings.
b. Device tag and loop number ID (i.e. EDV-60.0101.01).
c. Circuit ID (i.e. LPA-111).
d. Area served (i.e. Lighting Chemical Building).
e. Black lettering on white background, laminated plastic.
B. Wire Numbers:
1. Coordinate the wire numbering system with all vendors of equipment so that every
field wire has a unique number associated with it for the entire system:
a. Wire numbers shall correspond to the wire numbers on the control drawings
or the panel and circuit numbers for receptacles and lighting.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 53 - 2
b. Wire numbers shall correspond to the terminal block number to which they
are attached in the control panel.
c. Internal panel wires on a common terminal shall have the same wire number.
d. Multiconductor cables shall be assigned a cable number that shall be attached
to the cable at intermediate pull boxes and stub-up locations beneath
freestanding equipment. All multi-conductor and instrumentation cables
shall be identified at pull points as described above:
1) Label armored multiconductor cable using the conduit number as
indicated on the Drawings, following the requirements for conduit
markers in Section 26 05 34 – Conduits.
2. Provide the following wiring numbering schemes throughout the project and used for
field wires between Process Control Module, PCM’s, Vendor Control Panels, VCP’s,
Motor Control Centers, MCC’s, field starters, field instruments.
a. (ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.)/(DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERM.) OR
b. (ORIGIN LOC.)-(ORIGIN TERM.)
c. (DEST. LOC.)-(DEST. TERM.)
3. Where:
a. ORIGIN LOC. = Designation for originating panel or device
b. ORIGIN TERM. = Terminal designation at originating panel or device
c. DEST. LOC. = Designation for destination panel or device
d. DEST. TERM. = Terminal designation at destination panel or device or PLC
I/O address at destination panel.
e. Identify equipment and field instruments as the origin.
f. PCM’s are always identified as the destination.
g. Location is the panel designation for VCP, LCP, or PCM. For connections to
MCC’s, location is the specific starter tag and loop number. Location is the tag
and loop number for motor starts, field instruments and equipment. Any
hyphen in the panel designation or tag and loop number shall be omitted.
h. Terminal designation is the actual number on the terminal block where the
conductor terminates at field devices and vendor control panels. For
multiconductor cables, all terminal numbers shall be shown, separated by
commas.
i. Terminal designations at motor leads shall be the motor manufacturer’s
standard terminal designation (i.e. T1, T2, T3, etc.).
j. Terminal designations at PCM’s where the field conductor connects to a PLC
input or output shall be the PLC Address (Note: the following PLC I/O
numbering scheme is typical for Allen Bradley, the numbering scheme should
be modified to match that of the actual PLC manufacturer used for the
project).
1) Discrete point: W:X:Y/Z
2) Analog point: W:X:Y.Z
4. Where:
a. W = I for input, O for output
b. X = PLC number (1, 2, 3….)
c. Y = Slot number (01, 02, 03….)
d. Z = Terminal number (00, 01, 02…) for a discrete point or a word numbering
for an analog point (1,2,3…)
g. Terminal designations at PCM’s where the conductor does not connect to a
PLC I/O point shall be the terminal number with a “C” prefix (i.e. C0010). For

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 53 - 3
common power after a fuse or neutrals after a switch, the subsequent points
shall have and capital letter suffix starting with “A: (i.e. 0010A).
5. Case 1: Vendor Control Panel (VCP) to Process Control Module (PCM):
a. Field wire number/label: A-B/C-D
1) Vendor Control Panel number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01)
2) Terminal number within VCP (manufacturer’s or vendor’s standard
terminal number)
3) Process Control Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101)
4) Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a
PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if
not connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010)
a) Examples: VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-1:1:01/01
b) VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-0:1:01/10/07
c) VCP60.0101.01-10/PCM60.0101-C0100
6. Case 2: Field Instrument to Process Control Module (PCM):
a. Field wire number/label: E-F/C-D
1) Process Control Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101)
2) Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a
PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if
not connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010)
3) Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen
(EDV60.0101.01)
4) Manufacturer’s standard terminal number within instrument./ Use
both terminal numbers for analog points separated by a comma.
a) Examples: TIT60.0101.01-2,3/PCM60.0101-l:1:01.1
b) TSH60.0101-1/PCM60.01001-l:2:01/00
7. Case 3: Motor Control Center (MCC) to Process Control Module (PCM):
a. Field wire number/label: G-B/C-D
1) Terminal number within Motor Control Center (manufacturer’s or
vendor’s standard terminal number)
2) Process Control Module without hyphen (PCM60.0101)
3) Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a
PLC input or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if
not connected directly to a PLC I/O point (C0010)
4) Actual Starter designation in the Motor Control Center without
hyphen (MMS60.0101)
a) Examples: MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-I:01/01
b) MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-O:1:10/07
c) MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-C0100
8. Case 4: Motor Control Center (MCC) to Vendor Control Panel (VCP):
a. Field wire number/label: G-B/A-B
1) Vendor Control Panel number without hyphen (BCP60.0101.01)
2) Terminal number within motor control center or vendor control
panel
3) (manufacturers or vendors standard terminal number)
4) Actual Starter designation in the Motor Control Center without
hyphen (MMS60.0101)
a) Examples: MMS60.0101-X2/VCP60.0101.01-10
9. Case 5: Motor leads to a Motor Control Center (MCC):
a. Field wire number/label: H-I/G-B

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 53 - 4
1) Terminal number within motor control center (manufacturer’s
standard terminal number)
2) Actual Starter designation in the Motor Control Center without
hyphen (MMS60.0101)
3) Equipment tag and loop number without hyphen (PMP60.0101.01)
4) Motor manufacturer’s standard motor lead identification (T1, T2, T3,
etc.)
a) Examples: PMP-60.0101.01-T3/MMS60.0101.01-T3
10. Case 6: Remote or separately mounted starter or Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) to
Process Control Module (PCM):
a. Terminal number within starter or Variable Frequency Drive (VFD)
(manufacturer’s standard terminal number)
b. Process Control Module number without hyphen (VCP60.0101.01)
c. Either the PLC address if the field terminal is connected directly to a PLC input
or output point or the terminal number with a “C” prefix if not connected
directly to a PLC/I/O point (C0010)
d. Starter or Variable Frequency Drive tag and loop number without hyphen
(MMS60.0101)
a) Examples: MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-I:01/01
b) MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-O:2:10/07
c) MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101-C0010
11. Case 7: Field Bus Trunk Segment:
a. Field cable number/label: C/K-L/M; C/K-L/H; C/K-L/J
1) Process Control Module number without hyphen (PCM60.0101)
2) Field Bus Cable Type
3) Field Bus Segment Number
4) Field Bus Field Network Component without hyphen (PTB1) or
5) Equipment tag and loop number without hyphen (EMV61.1100.01) or
6) J = Starter or Variable Frequency Drive tag and loop
number without hyphen (VFD60.0101)
Examples: PCM60.0101/PA-1A/PTB1
PTB1/PA-1B/PTB2
PCM60.0101/DN-1A/VFD60.0112
PCM60.0101/DP-2A/EMV61.1100.01
10. Case 8: Field Bus Spur (Drop):
Field cable number/label: E/K-L/M
E = Field mounted instrument tag and loop numbers without hyphen
(FIT62.0110.02)
K = Field Bus Cable Type
L = Field Bus Segment Number
M = Field Bus Field Network Component without hyphen (PTB1), identify ports
Examples: FIT62.0110.02/PA-1C/PTB1-1
FIT62.0110.02/PA-1D/PTB1-2
11. All spare conductors shall be terminated on terminal blocks and shall be identified as
required for other field wires with an “S” prefix:
Examples: A MMS60.0101-10/PCM60.0101.01-C011

C. Conduit Numbers:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 53 - 5
1. Number the conduits as shown on the electrical standard detail drawing E-SD-6. See
details E-5044 and E-5045.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.

B. Furnish complete product Data, Schedules, and Record Drawings submittals as specified
below.

C. Nameplates:

1. Product Data:
a. Color.
b. Size:
1) Outside dimensions.
2) Lettering.
c. Material.
d. Mounting means.
2. Nameplate Schedule:
a. Show exact wording for each nameplate.
b. Include nameplate and letter sizes.

D. Wire Numbers;

1. Manufacturer’s catalog data for wire labels and label printer.

E. Record Drawings:

1. Update the conduit schedule to reflect the exact quantity of wire numbers including
spares and destination points for all wires.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Representatives of the Contractor, Owner, and Engineer shall convene before any major
purchases of cable or conductors and before the installation or termination of any cables or
conductors.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 NOT USED

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Nameplates:
1. Fabricated from white-center and black or red face laminated plastic engraving stock:
a. 3/32-inch thick material.
b. 2-ply.
c. With chamfered edges.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 53 - 6
d. Engraved characters shall be of a block style and of adequate size to be read
easily from a distance of 6 feet with no characters smaller than 1/8-inch in
height.

B. Signs:
1. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs.
a. Shall be suitable for exterior use.
b. Shall be in accordance with OSHA regulations.

C. Conductor and Cable Markers:
1. Markers shall consist of machine printed, black characters on white tubing.
2. Characters shall be no smaller than size 10 font.
3. Characters shall be machine printed on tubing.

D. Conduit and Raceway Markers:
1. UV resistant holder and letters.
2. Black letters on yellow background.
3. Minimum ½-inch high letters.

E. Medium Voltage Circuit Raceway Labels:

1. Vinyl plastic.
2. Minimum 1-inch high letters.

2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Nameplates:

1. Provide all nameplates for control panel operator devices (i.e. pushbuttons, selector
switches, pilot lights, etc.) using the same material and of the same color and
appearance as the device nameplates, in order to achieve an aesthetically consistent
and coordinated system.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Nameplates:

1. Attach nameplates to equipment with stainless steel sheet metal screws, approved
waterproof epoxy-based cement or install in metal holders welded to the equipment.
2. In corrosive or wet areas use epoxy-based cement to attach nameplates.
3. Nameplates shall be aligned and level or plumb to within 1/64 inch over the entire
length:
a. Misaligned or crooked nameplates shall be remounted, or new enclosures
shall be provided at the discretion of the Engineer.

B. Signs:

1. Automatic Equipment and High Voltage Signs:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 53 - 7
a. Mount permanent warning signs at mechanical equipment that may be
started automatically from remote locations. Fasten warning signs with
round head stainless steel screws or bolts. Locate and mount warning signs
in a suitable manner that is acceptable to the Engineer.
b. Mount permanent and conspicuous warning signs on the front and back of
equipment, doorways to equipment rooms, pull boxes, and manholes where
the voltage exceeds 600 volts.
c. Place warning signs on equipment that has more than one source of power:
1) Warning sign to identify every power source.
d. Place warning signs on equipment that has a 120 VAC control voltage source
used for interlocking.

C. Conductor and Cable Markers:

1. Apply all conductor and cable markers to termination.
2. Heat-shrinkable Tubing:
a. Tubing shall be shrunk using a heat fun that produces low temperature heated
air.
b. Tubing shall be tight on the wire after it has been heated.
c. Characters shall face the open panel and shall read from left to right or top to
bottom.
d. Marker shall start within 1/32 inch of the end of the stripped insulation point.

D. Conduit Markers:

1. Provide and install conduit markers for every conduit in the electrical system that is
identified in the conduit schedule or part of the process system.
2. Conduits shall be marked at the following locations:
a. Each end of conduits that are greater than 10 feet in length.
b. Where the conduit penetrates a wall or structure.
c. Where the conduit emerges from the ground, slab, etc.
d. The middle of conduits that are ten feet or less in length.
3. Conduits shall be marked after the conduits have been fully painted.
4. Conduit markers shall be positioned so that they are easily read from the floor.
5. Secure all conduit markers with nylon cable ties:
a. Conduit markers exposed to direct sunlight shall be secured with ultraviolet
resistant cable ties.
6. Conduits shall be marked before construction review by Engineer for punch list
purposes.
7. Intrinsically safe conduits shall be labeled in accordance with the requirements of the
National Electrical Code (NEC).

E. Medium Voltage Raceway Labels:

1. Apply at 50 foot intervals stating the voltage level contained within the raceway.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Replace any nameplates, signs, conductor markers, cable markers or raceway labels that in
the sole opinion of the Engineer do not meet the Engineer’s aesthetic requirements.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 53 - 8
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 73 - 1
SECTION 26 05 73
POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and Sections
apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to review all sections
to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes computer-based, fault-current, overcurrent protective device
coordination, and arc flash studies. Protective devices shall be set based on results of the
protective device coordination study.
1. Series-rating of devices is not permitted.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For computer software program to be used for studies.
B. Product Certificates: For coordination-study and fault-current-study computer software
programs, certifying compliance with IEEE 399.
C. Qualification Data: For the Power System Study specialist.
D. Other Action Submittals: The following submittals shall be made after the approval process
for system protective devices has been completed.
1. Input data, including completed computer program input data sheets.
2. Fault Current Study and Equipment Evaluation Reports.
3. Coordination-Study Report.
4. Arc Flash Study Report.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Studies shall use computer programs that are distributed nationally and are in wide use.
Software algorithms shall comply with requirements of standards and guides specified in this
Section. Manual calculations are not acceptable.
B. Coordination-Study Specialist Qualifications: An entity experienced in the application of
computer software used for studies, having performed successful studies of similar
magnitude on electrical distribution systems using similar devices.
1. Professional Engineer, licensed in the state where Project is located, shall be
responsible for the study. All elements of the study shall be performed under the
direct supervision and control of Engineer.
C. Comply with IEEE 242 for short-circuit currents and coordination time intervals.
D. Comply with IEEE 399 for general study procedures.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 73 - 2
E. Comply with IEEE 1584 for Arc Flash Study procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 COMPUTER SOFTWARE PROGRAM REQUIREMENTS
A. Computer software shall be SKM Power Tools for Windows or EasyPower.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine Project overcurrent protective device submittals for compliance with electrical
distribution system coordination requirements and other conditions affecting performance.
Devices to be coordinated are indicated on Drawings.
1. Proceed with coordination study only after relevant equipment submittals have been
assembled. Overcurrent protective devices that have not been submitted and
approved prior to coordination study may not be used in study.
3.2 POWER SYSTEM DATA
A. Gather and tabulate the following input data to support coordination study:
1. Product Data for overcurrent protective devices specified in other Division 26
Sections and involved in overcurrent protective device coordination studies. Use
equipment designation tags that are consistent with electrical distribution system
diagrams, overcurrent protective device submittals, input and output data, and
recommended device settings.
2. Impedance of utility service entrance.
3. Electrical Distribution System Diagram: In hard-copy and electronic-copy formats,
showing the following:
a. Circuit-breaker and fuse-current ratings and types.
b. Relays and associated power and current transformer ratings and ratios.
c. Transformer kilovolt amperes, primary and secondary voltages, connection
type, impedance, and X/R ratios.
d. Generator kilovolt amperes, size, voltage, and source impedance.
e. Cables: Indicate conduit material, sizes of conductors, conductor material,
insulation, and length.
f. Busway ampacity and impedance.
g. Motor horsepower and code letter designation according to NEMA MG 1.
4. Data sheets to supplement electrical distribution system diagram, cross-referenced
with tag numbers on diagram, showing the following:
a. Special load considerations, including starting inrush currents and frequent
starting and stopping.
b. Transformer characteristics, including primary protective device, magnetic
inrush current, and overload capability.
c. Motor full-load current, locked rotor current, service factor, starting time,
type of start, and thermal-damage curve.
d. Generator thermal-damage curve.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 73 - 3
e. Ratings, types, and settings of utility company's overcurrent protective
devices.
f. Special overcurrent protective device settings or types stipulated by utility
company.
g. Time-current-characteristic curves of devices indicated to be coordinated.
h. Manufacturer, frame size, interrupting rating in amperes rms symmetrical,
ampere or current sensor rating, long-time adjustment range, short-time
adjustment range, and instantaneous adjustment range for circuit breakers.
i. Manufacturer and type, ampere-tap adjustment range, time-delay adjustment
range, instantaneous attachment adjustment range, and current transformer
ratio for overcurrent relays.
j. Panelboards, switchboards, motor-control center ampacity, and interrupting
rating in amperes rms symmetrical.
3.3 FAULT-CURRENT STUDY
A. Calculate the maximum available short-circuit current in amperes rms symmetrical at circuit-
breaker positions of the electrical power distribution system. The calculation shall be for a
current immediately after initiation and for a three-phase bolted short circuit at each of the
following:
1. Switchgear and switchboard bus.
2. Motor-control center.
3. Distribution panelboard.
4. Branch circuit panelboard.
5. Transfer switches
6. Equipment control panels.
B. Study electrical distribution system from normal and alternate power sources throughout
electrical distribution system for Project. Include studies of system-switching configurations
and alternate operations that could result in maximum fault conditions.
C. Calculate momentary and interrupting duties on the basis of maximum available fault
current.
D. Calculations to verify interrupting ratings of overcurrent protective devices shall comply
with applicable IEEE sections.
1. Transformers:
a. ANSI C57.12.10.
b. ANSI C57.12.22.
c. ANSI C57.12.40.
d. IEEE C57.12.00.
e. IEEE C57.96.
2. Low-Voltage Circuit Breakers: IEEE 1015 and IEEE C37.20.1.
3. Low-Voltage Fuses: IEEE C37.46.
E. Study Report:
1. Show calculated X/R ratios and equipment interrupting rating (1/2-cycle) fault
currents on electrical distribution system diagram.
F. Equipment Evaluation Report:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 73 - 4
1. For 600-V overcurrent protective devices, ensure that interrupting ratings are equal
to or higher than calculated 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
2. For devices and equipment rated for asymmetrical fault current, apply multiplication
factors listed in the standards to 1/2-cycle symmetrical fault current.
3.4 COORDINATION STUDY
A. Perform coordination study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written
report using results of fault-current study. Comply with IEEE 399.
1. Calculate the maximum and minimum 1/2-cycle short-circuit currents.
2. Calculate the maximum and minimum interrupting duty (5 cycles to 2 seconds) short-
circuit currents.
3. Calculate the maximum and minimum ground-fault currents.
B. Comply with IEEE recommendations for fault currents and time intervals.
C. Transformer Primary Overcurrent Protective Devices:
1. Device shall not operate in response to the following:
a. Inrush current when first energized.
b. Self-cooled, full-load current or forced-air-cooled, full-load current,
whichever is specified for that transformer.
c. Permissible transformer overloads according to IEEE C57.96 if required by
unusual loading or emergency conditions.
2. Device settings shall protect transformers according to IEEE C57.12.00, for fault
currents.
D. Motors served by voltages more than 600 V shall be protected according to IEEE 620.
E. Conductor Protection: Protect cables against damage from fault currents according to
ICEA P-32-382, ICEA P-45-482, and conductor melting curves in IEEE 242. Demonstrate that
equipment withstands the maximum short-circuit current for a time equivalent to the
tripping time of the primary relay protection or total clearing time of the fuse. To determine
temperatures that damage insulation, use curves from cable manufacturers or from listed
standards indicating conductor size and short-circuit current.
F. Coordination-Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of
coordination study:
1. Tabular Format of Settings Selected for Overcurrent Protective Devices:
a. Device tag.
b. Relay-current transformer ratios; and tap, time-dial, and instantaneous-
pickup values.
c. Circuit-breaker sensor rating; and long-time, short-time, and instantaneous
settings.
d. Fuse-current rating and type.
e. Ground-fault relay-pickup and time-delay settings.
2. Coordination Curves: Prepared to determine settings of overcurrent protective
devices to achieve selective coordination. Graphically illustrate that adequate time
separation exists between devices installed in series, including power utility
company's upstream devices. Prepare separate sets of curves for the switching

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 73 - 5
schemes and for emergency periods where the power source is local generation.
Show the following information:
a. Device tag.
b. Voltage and current ratio for curves.
c. Three-phase and single-phase damage points for each transformer.
d. No damage, melting, and clearing curves for fuses.
e. Cable damage curves.
f. Transformer inrush points.
g. Maximum fault-current cutoff point.
h. Completed data sheets for setting of overcurrent protective devices.
3.5 ARC FLASH STUDY
A. Perform arc flash study using approved computer software program. Prepare a written
report using results of fault-current study and in conjunction with protective device
coordination study.
B. Arc flash study should be performed using IEEE1584 equations and NFPA 70E -2018
Standard.
C. Incident energy and arc flash hazard boundary shall be calculated at all significant locations
in the electrical distribution system (all switchboards, panelboards, motor control centers,
and 3-phase industrial control panels).
D. Calculations should be based on the worst case of all available sources.
E. Calculations should be based on actual overcurrent protective device clearing time, with a
maximum arc fault clearing time of 2 seconds.
F. Calculations should be based on results of overcurrent protective device coordination study
recommended settings.
G. Arc Flash Study Report: Prepare a written report indicating the following results of the arc
flash study:
1. Tabular Format for each bus:
a. Arc fault current.
b. Overcurrent protective device clearing time.
c. Calculated incident energy at the working distance.
d. Arc flash protection boundary.
H. Arc Flash Labels shall be provided for installation by the Contractor. Labels should meet the
following Standards and requirements:
1. UL 969 – Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems.
2. ANSI Z535.4 – Product Safety Signs and Labels.
3. Labels should include the following information:
a. System Voltage.
b. Equipment Name and Upstream Protective Device.
c. Arc Flash Protection Boundary.
d. Working Distance.
e. Arc Flash Incident Energy.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POWER SYSTEM STUDIES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 73 - 6
f. Recommended PPE based on NFPA 70E-2018 Annex H.
g. Limited and Restricted approach Shock Hazard Boundaries.
h. Date study was performed.
4. Labels should be printed by thermal transfer type printer, with no field markings.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 83 - 1
SECTION 26 05 83
WIRING CONNECTIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM International.
B. Code of Federal Regulations.
C. International Electrical Testing Association, NETA.
D. National Electrical Manufactures Association.
E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Wiring connecting devices.
2. Terminations.
3. Splices.
B. Related Sections:
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all divisions and
sections apply. It is the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and its Sub-contractors to
review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 26 00 00.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete system of wiring connectors, terminators, fittings, etc. for a complete
wiring system suitable for the cables and conductors used.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 83 - 2
1. Catalog cut sheets.
C. Shop drawings:
1. Drawings showing the installation of junction modules, splices and terminators.
D. Instruction and Operating Manuals:
1. Include drawings and data for medium voltage cable connectors, splices and junction
modules in the operating manuals.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. As specified in Section 26 00 00.
B. All materials shall be UL listed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
A. Control Connections:
1. Use insulated ring type wire terminators for connections to all screw terminals:
a. With chamfered/funneled terminal barrel entry.
b. Deep internal serrations.
c. Long barrel design to reduce electrical resistance and increased
insulator- barrel surface area to ensure that the insulator remains in contact
with the barrel.
d. Electroplated-tin copper conductor.
e. Manufactured by the following or equal:
1) Thomas and Betts, Stakon.
2. For process equipment connections work from manufacturer’s drawings.
B. Joints, Splices, Taps, and Connections:
1. For 600-volt conductors use solderless connectors.
2. Use only plated copper alloy connectors or lugs:
a. Aluminum connectors or lugs are not acceptable for copper conductors.
3. Under those specific conditions where aluminum conductors have been allowed or
are specified then the connectors for aluminum conductors shall be specifically
designed for that purpose.
4. For wire Number 10 AWG and smaller use compression splice caps, with insulating
caps.
a. Manufactured by the following or equal:
1) Buchanan 2006S or 2011S with 2007 or 2014 insulating caps.
5. For wire Number 8 AWG and larger, use heavy duty copper compression connectors:
a. Manufactured by one of the following or equal:
1) Burndy.
2) Thomas and Betts.
6. Where waterproof splices are required:
a. Suitable for indoor, outdoor, weather exposed, direct buried or submersed
applications.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 83 - 3
b. Utilizing an epoxy, polyurethane, and re-enterable compounds.
c. For use with shielded or unshielded plastic- and rubber-jacketed, signal,
control, and power cables rated up to 1 kV.
d. Two-part mold body with tongue and groove seams and built in spacer
webbing.
e. Manufactured by the following or equal:
1) 3M – Scotchcast 72-N
7. Optical Fiber terminations:
a. All multimode optical fiber cable installed shall be terminated with a split-
ferrule alignment sleeve and a precision ceramic tip. All multimode optical
fiber connectors shall meet the following technical specifications:
1) Connector Type: ST
2) Fiber Outside Diameter: 125 microns Nominal
3) Loss Repeat: < 0.2 dB per 100 reconnects
4) Axial Load Minimum: 35 Pounds
5) Temperature Stability: +0.1 dB Maximum from -40°C to 75°C
b. All single mode optical fiber cable installed shall be terminated utilizing a
split-ferrule alignment sleeve and a precision ceramic tip. All single mode
connectors shall meet the following technical specifications:
1) Connector Type: SC
2) Fiber Outside Diameter 125 Microns
3) Loss Repeat: < 0.2 dB per 1000 reconnects
4) Axial Load, min. 30 pounds
5) Temperature Stability: -40°C to 85°C
c. Contractor shall provide multimode optical fiber patch cords. The multimode
optical fiber patch cords shall be Lucent Technologies ML2SC-SC-XX, and shall
meet the following technical specifications:
1) Number of fibers: 2
2) Approximate loss, mean, variance 0.1, 0.1
3) Minimum bandwidth: 160 MHz-km @ 850 nm
d. Contractor shall provide single mode optical fiber patch cords. The single
mode optical fiber patch cords shall be Lucent Technologies MS2SC-SC-XX,
and shall meet the following technical specifications:
1) Number of fibers 2
2) Approximate Loss, mean, variance 0.1dB, 0.7dB
C. Insulating Tape:
1. General purpose insulating tape:
a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape.
b. Suitable for application in an ambient of -18°C
c. (0°F).
d. Operating range up to 105°C (220°F).
e. Flame retardant, hot- and cold- weather resistant, UV resistant.
f. For use as a primary insulation for wire cable splices up to 600 VAC.
g. Meeting and complying with:
1) ASTM D-3005 Type I
2) UL 510
3) CSA C22.2
h. Manufactured by the following or equal:
1) 3M – Scotch Number Super 33+.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 83 - 4
2. General-purpose color-coding tape:
a. Minimum 7 mil vinyl tape.
b. Suitable for application on PVC and polyethylene jacketed cables.
c. For use indoors and outdoors in weather protected enclosures.
d. Available with the following colors;
1) Red.
2) Yellow.
3) Blue.
4) Brown.
5) Gray.
6) White.
7) Green.
8) Orange.
9) Violet.
e. For use as phase identification, marking, insulating, and harnessing.
f. Meeting and complying with:
1) UL 510.
2) CSA C22.2
g. Manufactured by the following or equal:
1) 3M – Scotch Number 35.
3. Fire and Electric Arc Proofing tape:
a. Minimum 30-mil, flexible, elastomer tape that expands in fire to form an
insulating firewall between flame and cable.
b. Bind in place with glass cloth electrical tape.
c. Manufactured by the following or equal:
1) 3M – Scotch Number 77.
4. Glass cloth electrical tape:
a. 7.4-mil thermosetting silicone adhesive that performs at Class H
temperatures 180°C (356°F).
b. Use for the following applications:
1) To secure no-PSA insulations such as glass in high-temperature areas.
2) Splice wire rated at 180°C (356°F).
3) For binding Fire and Electric Arc Proofing Tape.
c. Meeting and complying with:
1) MIL-I-1966C.
2) UL Recognized Component listing for 200°C (392°F) (Guide OANZ2,
File E17385).
3) CSA Accepted Component 180°C (356°F) File LR93411.
d. Manufactured by the following or equal.
1) 3M – Scotch Number 69.
5. Self-fusing Silicone Rubber Tape:
a. 12-mil, high-temperature, track resistant, insulating tape.
b. Composed of fully cured inorganic silicone rubber.
c. Use as a protective overwrap for terminating medium voltage cables.
d. Manufactured by the following or equal:
1) 3M – Scotch Number 70.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 83 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Load connections:
1. Connect loads to the circuits as indicated. Color-code all branch circuits as per Section
26 05 53 “Electrical Identification.”
B. Zero to 600-volt systems:
1. Make all connections with the proper tool and die as specified by the device
manufacturer.
2. Use only tooling and dies manufactured by the device manufacturer.
3. Insulate all connections and splices with Scotch 33+ tape and Scotchfill, or pre-
molded plastic covers, or heat shrink tubing and caps.
4. Number all power and control wires before termination.
C. Motor connections (600 Volts and below):
1. Terminate wires with compression type ring lugs at motors.
2. Connection at both the motor leads and the machine wires are to have ring type
compression lugs.
3. Cover bolted connectors with a heat shrinkable, cross-linked polyolefin material
formed as a single opening boot:
a. In damp and wet locations use a complete kit containing mastic that shall seal
out moisture and contamination.
b. Shrink cap with low heat as recommended by manufacturer.
4. Wire markers shall be readable after boot installation.
5. Manufactured by one of the following or equal:
a. Raychem MCK.
D. Medium voltage systems:
1. See Division 26 Section – Medium-Voltage Cables.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WIRING CONNECTIONS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 05 83 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 1
SECTION 26 08 00
FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for testing the electrical system.
2. Adjusting and calibration.
3. Acceptance Tests.
B. Related Sections:
1. The Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all divisions
and sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its subcontractors to
review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.
C. Copyright information:
1. Some portions of this Specification are copyrighted by the International Electrical
Testing Association Incorporated, (NETA). See NETA publication ATS-2017 for
details.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. International Electrical Testing Association Incorporated:
B. Manufacturer’s testing recommendations and instruction manuals
C. Specifications sections for the electrical equipment being tested.
D. Submitted seismic calculations and installation details.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms are specified in Section 26 00 00 and noted herein.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Switchgear and Switchboard:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding and required clearances.
d. Inspect equipment for cleanliness.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 2
e. Verify that circuit breaker/fuse sizes and types correspond to the approved
submittals.
f. Verify that current and voltage transformer ratios correspond to the
Drawings.
g. Inspect bolted connections by the following methods.
1) Calibrated torque wrench.
a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions of r proper foot-pound
levels or NETA ATS-2017.
2) Thermographic survey.
h. Mechanical and Electrical interlocks:
1) Attempt closure on locked-open devices.
2) Attempt to open locked-closed devices.
3) Make/attempt key-exchanges in all positions.
i. Lubrication requirements.
1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
j. Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces.
k. Verify correct barrier and shutter installation and operation.
l. Exercise all active components.
m. Inspect all indicating devices for correct operation.
n. Verify that filters are in place and/or vents are clear.
o. Perform visual and mechanical inspection of instrument transformers as
specified below.
p. Inspect control power transformers.
1) Inspect for physical damage, cracked insulation, broken leads,
tightness of connections, defective wiring, and overall general
condition.
2) Verify that primary and secondary fuse ratings match the submittal
drawings.
3) Verify correct functioning of drawout disconnecting and grounding
contacts and interlocks.
2. Electrical Tests.
a. Perform electrical tests on instrument transformers as specified below.
b. Perform ground-resistance measurements through bolted connections with
a low-resistance ohmmeter if applicable.
c. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with
a low-resistance ohmmeter if applicable.
d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each bus section, phase-to-phase
and phase-to-ground for one minute.
e. Perform an overpotential test on each bus section, each phase to ground with
phases not under test grounded, in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data or NETA ATS-2017. Apply the test voltage for one minute.
f. Perform insulation-resistance tests on control wiring with respect to ground.
Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable
and 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Apply the test voltage for one
minute.
g. Perform system function tests.
h. Perform current injection tests on the entire current circuit of each
switchgear or switchboard:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 3
1) Perform current tests by secondary injection with magnitudes such
that a minimum current of 1.0 ampere flows in the secondary circuit:
a) Verify the correct magnitude of current at each device in the
circuit.
2) Perform current tests by primary injection with magnitudes such that
a minimum current of 1.0 ampere flows in secondary circuit:
a) Verify the correct magnitude of current at each device in the
circuit.
i. Determine the accuracy of all meters.
j. Perform phasing check on double-ended or dual-source equipment to ensure
correct bus phasing from each source.
k. Control power transformers:
1) Perform insulation resistance tests, winding-to-winding and winding-
to-ground.
a) Test voltages shall be in accordance with NETA ATS-2017 or
as specified by the manufacturer.
2) Perform secondary wiring integrity test:
a) Disconnect transformer at secondary terminals and connect
secondary wiring to a rated secondary voltage source:
i. Verify correct potential at all devices.
3) Verify correct secondary voltage by energizing primary winding with
system voltage.
a) Measure secondary voltage with the secondary wiring
disconnected.
l. Verify operation of space heaters.
3. Test values:
a. Compare bus connection resistances to values of similar connections.
b. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with NETA ATS-2017 or
manufacturer’s specifications.
c. Microhm of millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal
range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data:
1) If manufacturer’s data is not available, investigate any values which
deviate from a similar bus by more than 50 percent of the lowest
value.
2) Insulation-resistance values for bus and control power transformers
shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data:
a) If manufacturer’s data is not available refer to NETA ATS-
2017.
b) Investigate insulation values less than the allowable minimum
c) Do not proceed with overpotential tests until insulation-
resistance values are above minimum values.
d. Bus insulation shall withstand the overpotential test voltage applied.
e. Insulation-resistance values for control wiring shall be a minimum of 2.0
megohms.
B. Dry Type Transformers:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection.
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with the Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding and required clearances.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 4
d. Inspect equipment for cleanliness.
e. Verify that resilient mounts are free and that any shipping brackets have been
removed.
f. Inspect bolted connections by the following methods.
1) Calibrated torque wrench.
a) Refer to manufacturer’s instructions for proper foot-pound
levels or NETA ATS-2017.
2) Thermographic survey.
g. Verify that as-lift tap connections are as specified.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-
resistance ohmmeter if applicable.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests winding-to-winding and each winding-
to- ground:
1) Minimum test voltage shall be 1000 volts dc for 600 volt insulation.
2) Calculate dielectric absorption ration or polarization index.
c. Perform turns ratio tests at all tap positions.
3. Test Values:
a. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with NETA ATS-2017 or
manufacturer’s specifications.
b. Microhm of millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal
range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data:
1) If manufacturer’s data is not available, investigate any values which
deviate from similar connection by more than 50 percent of the lowest
value.
c. Insulation-resistance values at one minute should be:
1) 600 volt insulation: 100 megohms.
d. The dielectric absorption ratio or polarization ratio shall be 1.0 or greater.
e. Turns-ratio results should not deviate more than one-half percent from either
the adjacent coils or calculated ratio.
C. Cables, 600 volts and less:
1. Visual and Mechanical inspection:
a. Compare cable data with the Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect exposed sections of cables for physical damage and correct
connection in accordance with the Drawings.
c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance by the following
methods:
1) Calibrated torque wrench.
2) Thermograph survey.
d. Inspect compression-applied connectors for correct cable match and
indentation.
e. Inspect for correct identification and arrangements.
f. Inspect jacket insulation and condition.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low-
resistance ohmmeter as specified above.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each conductor with respect to round
and adjacent conductors:
1) Applied voltage shall be:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 5
a) 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable.
b) 1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable.
2) Test duration shall be one minute.
c. Perform continuity tests to ensure correct cable connection.
d. Verify uniform resistance of parallel conductors.
3. Test Values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistances to values of similar connections.
b. Bolt-torque level should be in accordance with NETA ATS-2017
c. Microhm of millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal
range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data:
1) If manufacturer’s data is not available, investigate any values which
deviate from similar connections by more than 50 percent of the
lowest value.
d. Insulation-resistance values should not be less than 50 megohms.
e. Investigate deviations.
D. Low Voltage Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage and alignment.
d. Circuit breaker shall be checked for proper mounting, conductor size and
feeder designation.
e. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
f. Check tightness of connection with torque wrench in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units.
2. Electrical tests breakers in excess of 200 Amp trip ratings:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low
resistance ohmmeter.
b. Time-current characteristic tests shall be performed by passing 300 percent
rated current through each pole separately. Trip time shall be determined:
1) Determine long-time pickup.
2) Determine short-time pickup.
c. Instantaneous pickup current shall be determined by run-or pulse method:
1) Clearing times should be within 4 cycles or less.
d. Insulation resistance shall be determined pole to pole, across pole and pole to
ground.
1) Circuit breaker shall be closed.
2) Test voltage shall be 1000 volts dc applied for one minute.
e. Perform adjustments for final setting in accordance with the Short Circuit and
Coordination Study.
3. Test values:
a. Contact resistance shall be compared to adjacent poles and similar breakers:
1) Deviations of more than 50 percent shall be investigated.
b. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 megohms.
c. All trip times shall fall within manufacturer’s published time current curves:
1) Circuit breakers exceeding maximum time shall be replaced.
d. Instantaneous pickup current levels should be within 20 percent of
manufacturer’s published values.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 6
E. Protective Relays:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect relays for physical damage, Remove shipping restraint material.
c. Verify the unit is clean.
d. Tighten case connections. Inspect cover for correct gasket seal. Clean cover
glass. Inspect shorting hardware, connections paddles, and/or knife switches.
Remove any foreign material from the case. Verify target reset.
e. Inspect relay for foreign material, particularly in disk slots of the damping and
electromagnets. Verify disk clearance. Verify contact clearance and spring
bias. Inspect spiral spring convolutions. Inspect disk and contacts for
freedom of movement and correct travel. Verify tightness of mounting
hardware and connections. Burnish contacts. Inspect bearings and/or pivots.
f. Set relays in accordance with the Short Circuit and Coordination Study.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform insulation-resistance test on each circuit-to-frame:
1) Determine allowable procedures for this test from manufacturer’s
published data.
b. Inspect indicators:
1) Verify operation of all light-emitting diode indicators.
2) Set contrast for liquid-crystal display readouts.
3) Determine pick-up and drop-out of electromechanical targets.
c. Perform the following tests on the nominal settings specified by Engineer:
1) Pickup parameters on each operating element.
2) Timing test shall be performed at 3 points on time dial curve.
3) Pickup target and seal in units.
4) Special test as required to check operation of restraint, directional and
other elements per manufacturer’s instruction manual.
d. Perform phase angle and magnitude contributions tests on all differential and
directional type relays after energization to vectorially prove proper polarity
and connection.
F. Grounding Systems:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Inspect ground system for compliance with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage.
2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform fall of potential test per IEEE Standard No. 81, Section 8.2.5 on the
main grounding electrode or system.
b. Perform ground continuity test between main ground system and all major
electrical equipment frames, the system neutral and any derived neutral
points:
1) The test shall be made by passing a minimum of 10 amperes D.C.
current between ground reference system and the ground point to be
tested.
2) Voltage drop shall be measured and resistance calculated by voltage
drop method.
3. Test values:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 7
a. The main ground electrode system resistance to ground should be no greater
than 5 ohms for commercial or industrial systems and 1 ohm or less for
generating or transmission station ground unless otherwise specified by the
Engineer.
b. Investigate point-to-point resistance values that exceed 0.5 ohm.
G. Rotating Machinery:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Drawings and
Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect for proper anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Inspect air baffles, filter media, cooling fans, slip rings, brushes and brush
rigging.
e. Inspected bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the
following:
1) Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2) Calibrated torque wrench.
3) Thermographic survey.
f. Verify correct application of appropriate lubrication and lubrication systems.
g. Verify the absence of unusual mechanical or electrical noise or signs of
overheating during initial test run.
h. Verify that resistance temperature detector (RTD) circuits conform to the
Drawings.
i. Verify that metering or relaying devices utilizing RTD’s have the correct
rating.
j. Special tests as suggested by manufacturer, such as gap spacing and pedestal
alignment shall be made where applicable.
2. Electrical tests:
3. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low resistance
ohmmeter.
4. Perform insulation resistance test in accordance with ANSI/EEE43. Test voltage shall
be as specified by the manufacturer:
a. On motors 200 HP and smaller, test duration shall be one minute. Calculate
dielectric absorption ratio using resistance measurements at 20 seconds and
60 seconds.
b. On motors larger than 200 HP, test duration shall be 10 minutes. Calculate
polarization index using resistance measurements at one minute and 10
minutes.
c. Perform dc overpotential tests on motors rated at 1000 horsepower and
greater and 4000 volts and greater in accordance with ANIS/EEEE95.
d. Perform stator resistance test phase-to-phase.
e. Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests.
f. Perform surge comparison tests.
g. Perform resistance tests on RTD’s.
h. Verify operation of motor space heater.
i. Perform a rotation test to ensure correct shaft direction.
j. Measure no load and full load running current and compare to nameplate.
k. Observe proper operation and sequence of any reduced voltage starters.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 8
l. Perform vibration base line test on motors larger than 200 horsepower.
Amplitude to be plotted vs. frequency.
m. Perform vibration amplitude test on motors 200 HP and smaller.
n. Check all protective devices in accordance with other sections of these
specifications.
o. After start-up of each motor, the current on each phase shall be measured:
1) At no load.
2) At defined load:
a) Record the voltage of each phase to round during this test.
3) Inrush current.
p. Measurements shall be recorded on copies on Form 16 B, contained in this
Section.
5. Test Values:
a. Insulation resistance should be not less than 10 megohms.
b. Dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index readings less than the
manufacturer’s recommended values (not less than three for polarization
index or 1.4 for dielectric absorption ratio) shall be investigated.
c. Motor measured full load current shall not exceed nameplate value.
d. Vibration amplitudes shall not exceed values furnished by manufacturer.
H. Motor Control:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Verify contactors:
1) Verify mechanical operation.
2) Inspect contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are in accordance
with manufacturer’s published data.
f. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods:
1) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.
g. Perform thermographic survey in accordance with manufacturer’s published
data.
h. Lubrication requirements:
1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.
2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low-
voltage resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
b. Perform insulation-resistance tests on each pole, phase-to-phase and phase-
to-ground with starter closed and across each open pole for one minute. Test
voltage shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
c. Measure insulation resistance of each control circuit-to-ground.
d. Perform insulation-resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to
ground. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 9
1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For
units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer’s recommendation.
e. Test motor protection devices in accordance with manufacturer’s published
data.
f. Test circuit breakers in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
g. Perform operational tests by initiating control devices.
3. Test Values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance to values of similar connections.
b. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with manufacturer’s published
data.
c. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal
range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data. If manufacturer’s
data is not available, investigate any values which deviate from similar
connections by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
d. Insulation-resistance values shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.
e. Insulation-resistance values for control wiring shall be a minimum of
2.0 megohms.
f. Motor protection parameters shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.
I. Motor Control, Motor Control Centers, Low Voltage:
1. Test the motor control center bus in accordance with the requirements set forth.
2. Test the motor control center circuit breakers in accordance with the requirements
set forth.
3. Test the motor control centers starters in accordance with the requirements set forth.
J. Adjustable speed drive systems:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Ensure vent path openings are free from debris and that heat transfer
surfaces are clean.
f. Verify correct connections of circuit boards, wiring, disconnects, and ribbon
cables.
g. Motor running protection:
1) Verify drive overcurrent setpoints are correct for their application.
2) If drive is used to operate multiple motors, verify individual overload
element ratings are correct for their application.
3) Apply minimum and maximum speed setpoints. Verify setpoints are
within limitations of the load coupled to the motor.
h. Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of the
following methods.
1) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.
2. Electrical Tests:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 10
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with low-
resistance ohmmeter, if applicable.
b. Test the motor overload relay elements by injecting primary current through
the overload circuit and monitoring trip time of the overload element.
c. Test input circuit breaker by primary injection in accordance with
manufacturer’s published data.
d. Perform insulation resistance tests on all control wiring with respect to
ground. Applied potential shall be 500 volts dc for 300 volt rated cable and
1000 volts dc for 600 volt rated cable. Test duration shall be one minute. For
units with solid-state components, follow manufacturer’s recommendation.
e. Test for the following parameters in accordance with relay calibration
procedures as recommended by the manufacturer:
1) Input phase loss protection.
2) Input overvoltage protection.
3) Output phase rotation.
4) Overtemperature protection.
5) DC overvoltage protection.
6) Overfrequency protection.
7) Drive overload protection.
8) Fault alarm outputs.
9) Slowly vary drive speed between minimum and maximum. Observe
motor and load for unusual noise or vibration.
10) Verify operation of drive from remote start/stop and speed control
signals.
3. Test Values:
a. Compare bolted connection resistance to values of similar connections.
b. Bolt-torque levels should be in accordance with manufacturer’s published
data.
c. Microhm or millivolt drop values shall not exceed the high levels of the normal
range as indicated in the manufacturer’s published data. If manufacturer’s
data is not available, investigate any values which deviate from adjacent poles
or similar switches by more than 50 percent of the lowest value.
d. Overload test trip times at 300 percent of overload element rating shall be in
accordance with manufacturer’s published time-current curve.
e. Insulation-resistance values for control wiring shall be a minimum of
2.0 megohms.
4. Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devises:
a. Visual and Mechanical inspection:
1) Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and
Specifications.
2) Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
3) Inspect anchorage, alignment, grounding, and clearances.
4) Verify the arresters are clean.
5) Inspect bolted electrical connections for high resistance using one of
the following methods:
a) Use of low-resistance ohmmeter.
b) Verify tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by
calibrated torque-wrench method in accordance with
manufacturer’s published data.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 11
6) Verify that the ground lead on each device is individually attached to
a ground bus or ground electrode.
7) Verify that stroke counter is correctly mounted and electrically
connected, if applicable.
8) Record stroke counter reading.
5. Electrical Test:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low
resistance ohmmeter, if applicable, in accordance with manufacturer’s
published data.
b. Perform an insulation-resistance test at voltage levels in accordance with
manufacturer’s published data.
c. Test grounding connection in accordance with manufacturer’s published
data.
d. Perform a watts-loss test.
K. Emergency systems, engine generator and paralleling gear:
1. Visual and Mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specification.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
2. Electrical and Mechanical Tests:
a. Test generator in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
b. Test protective relay devices in accordance with manufacturer’s published
data.
c. Perform phase-rotation test to determine compatibility with load
requirements.
d. Functionally test engine shutdown for low pressure, overtemperature,
overspeed, and other protection features as applicable.
e. Perform vibration test for each main bearing cap.
f. Conduct performance test in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 110.
g. Verify correct functioning of governor and regulator.
3. Test Values
a. Phasing shall meet the requirements of the connected load.
b. Vibration levels shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s published data.
c. Performance tests shall conform to manufacturer’s published data and
ANSI/NFPA 100.
L. Fiber-Optic cables:
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare cable, connector, and splice data with Drawings and Specification.
b. Inspect cable and connections for physical and mechanical damage.
c. Verify that all connectors and splices are correctly installed.
2. Electrical Tests:
a. Perform cable length measurement, fiber fracture inspection, and
construction defect inspection using an optical time domain reflectometer.
b. Perform connector and splice integrity test using an optical time domain
reflectometer.
c. Perform cable attenuation loss measurement with an optical power loss test
set.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 12
d. Perform connector and splice attenuation loss measurement from both ends
of the optical cable with an optical power loss test set.
3. Test Values:
a. The optical time domain reflector signal should be analyzed for excessive
connection, splice, or cable backscatter by viewing the reflected
power/distance graph.
b. Attenuation loss measurement shall be expressed in dB/km. Losses shall be
within the manufacturer’s recommendations when no local site specifications
are available.
M. Fiber and LAN Testing:
1. General:
a. Conduct test of the fiber optic system in accordance with these special
provisions. All test results are to meet or exceed manufacturer specifications.
Any fiber that does not meet or exceed manufacturer specifications will be
replaced at the Contractor’s expense. Tests are to be performed on each cable,
and to be tested for breaks, abnormalities, and overall attenuation
characteristics.
b. Before conducting any tests, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer with
detailed descriptions of test procedures for review and approval. Pre-
installation tests and post-installation tests to be witnessed and signed off by
Engineer and Owner.
c. The Contractor will provide the Engineer with a copy of the manufacturer’s
test procedures and quality assurance procedures for information. If the
Engineer determines that these procedures are not adequate, the Engineer
may require that additional tests be conducted by the Contractor before
installation. Additional testing ordered by the Engineer will be paid for by the
Contractor.
d. Perform testing at 4 separate stages:
1) The Factory.
2) After delivery but before installation.
3) After delivery to the job site but before installation.
4) After installation and as part of final system testing.
e. Provide documentation certifying that the fiber optic cable has passed each
testing stage. Provide separate documentation for each testing stage result.
f. Perform attenuation tests with an Optical Loss Test Set capable and calibrated
to show anomalies of 0.1 dB as a minimum. Test multimode fibers at 850 nm
and 1300 nm. Test single mode fibers at 1310 nm and 1550 nm.
g. OTDR test performed on fiber cables less than 100 meters shall be performed
with the aid of a launch cable. OTDR pulse width settings shall be adjusted to
a maximum setting of 1/1000th of the cable length or 10 nanoseconds.
h. All tests required to ensure the satisfactory installation, adjustment,
operation, and performance of all equipment and materials erected and
installed under this specification, shall be performed by the Contractor.
i. Furnish all test equipment, meters, instruments and miscellaneous
equipment and perform all work required for the tests.
2. Post-installation tests:
a. For all post-installation tests, the Contractor will notify the Engineer two
working weeks in advance. The Contractor will test the fiber optic cable, after

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 13
installation, to ensure that the fiber has been installed without damage and
operates correctly, as follows:
1) After the fiber optic cable has been pulled, but before breakout and
termination, all the fibers shall be tested with an OTDR for fiber
integrity as in paragraph above. Copies of traces and test results shall
be submitted to the Engineer. If the test results are unsatisfactory, the
fiber optic cable segment shall be unacceptable and shall be replaced
with a new segment of cable at the Contractor’s expense. The new
segment of cable shall then be tested to demonstrate acceptability.
Copies of the test results shall be submitted to the Engineer.
2) At the conclusion of all outdoor splices at one location, and before they
are enclosed and sealed, all splices at one location, and before they are
enclosed and sealed, all splices shall be tested with OTDR at the
optimal wavelength (850 and 1300 for multimode, 1310 and 1550 for
single mode), in both directions. All tests shall be conducted in the
presence of an Engineer and Owner. The splices shall be tested for
integrity as well as attenuation. Individual fusion splice losses shall
not exceed 0.1 dB. Measurement results shall be recorded, validated
by trace, and filled with the recorded, validated by trace, and filled
with the records of the respective cable runs. Copies of traces and test
results shall be submitted to the Engineer. If the test results are
unsatisfactory, the splice shall be unacceptable, and shall be replaced
with a new splice at the Contractor’s expense. The new splice shall
then be tested to demonstrate acceptability. Copies of the test results
shall be submitted to the Engineer.
3) When all fiber links have been completely installed, each link shall be
tested with an OTDR and an Optical Loss Test Set. All tests shall be
conducted in the presence of the Engineer and Owner. OTDR traces
shall be from both directions on each fiber at the 2 optimal
wavelengths, 850nm and 1300nm for multimode fibers. Optical loss
testing shall be done with handheld tests sets in one direction at the 2
optimal wavelengths for the appropriate fiber type. Copies of traces
and test results shall be submitted to the Engineer. If the test results
are unsatisfactory, the link shall be unacceptable and shall be
corrected to specification at the Contractor’s expense. The repaired
link shall then be tested to demonstrate acceptability. Copies of the
test results shall be submitted to the Engineer. Test equipment shall
equal or exceed the accuracy and resolution of Agilent/HP 8147 high
performance OTDR.
3. Test Reports:
a. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer three copies of all test reports
showing the results of all tests specified herein. Test forms shall clearly label
the test type, the test location, test date, wavelength, index of refraction, cable
identification, fiber type, fiber number, fiber color, and the result of the value
of the tested parameter. All OTDR traces shall be supplied on printed hard-
copy, and on 3-1/2 inch floppy disk media. Test reports shall state “PASS” or,
“NOT PASSED”.
4. LAN Cable Testing:
a. Testing scope: Test all installed LAN cables.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 14
b. Test plan and witnessing: Obtain Engineer’s approval for the test procedures
as part of the submittal process. Arrange for the Engineer to witness all
testing. Submit a request for witness 15 days (minimum) before the proposed
test date.
c. Pre-testing:
1) Test individually cables before installation:
a) Before physical placement of the cable, the installer shall test
each cable while on the spool with a LAN certification test
device.
b) Before the cable is installed, the installer shall check that the
cable conforms to the Manufacturer’s attenuation
specification and that no damage has been done to the cable
during shipping or handling.
c) The test shall be fully documented and the results submitted
to the Engineer, including a hard copy of all traces, before
placement of the cable.
d) The Engineer shall be notified if a cable fails to meet
specification and the cable shall not be installed unless
otherwise directed by the Engineer.
5. Post-testing:
a. After installing the cable and connectors, test all cables using the LAN
certification to confirm the installation meets the requirements of the
specification.
b. Provide test documentation that includes the cable number, total length of
cable, a permanent hard copy as well as a PDF copy of all traces.
c. After installing connectors:
1) Perform cable end-to-end testing on all installed cables from both
ends of the cable. Test shall include cable system performance tests
and confirm the absence of wiring errors.
2) Submit a signed test report presenting the results of the cable testing.
3) Repair or replace any portions of the system not meeting TIA
standards for a Category 5e installation. Repaired sections shall be
retested.
4) Submit three copies of all final documentation (including trace), using
the approved test form, to the Engineer upon successful completions
of the testing.
6. Test Equipment:
a. LAN Certification equipment used for the testing shall be capable of testing
Category 6 cable installation to TIA proposed Level III accuracy. Tests
performed shall include:
1) Near End Cross Talk.
2) Attenuation.
3) Equal Level Far End Cross Talk.
4) Return Loss.
5) Ambient Noise.
6) Effective Cable Length.
7) Propagation Delay.
8) Continuity/Loop Resistance.
b. LAN certification test equipment shall be able to store and produce plots of
the test results.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 15
c. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Agilent Technologies, WireScope 350.
2) Or approved equal.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FIELD ELECTRICAL ACCEPTANCE TESTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 08 00 - 16
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIQUID FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 12 13 - 1
SECTION 26 12 13
LIQUID FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
(OWNER PROVIDED – FOR REFERENCE ONLY)
PART 1 - GENERAL
The purpose of this specification is to furnish the information pertaining to the pad mount
transformer “HT2” that the owner will pre-purchase and have an electrical contractor install.
Correspondence regarding this project should be limited to the technical questions
concerning this specification and should be addressed to:

Stephen Dellermann
Weber Basin Water Conservancy District
801-771-4357
[e-mail]

All exceptions, clarification or deviations from this specification should be clearly noted and
the reason should be clearly stated in your proposal.
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI).
B. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM).
C. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR).
D. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
E. InterNational Electrical Testing Association (NETA).
F. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
G. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
H. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following types of transformers with medium-voltage primaries:
1. Pad-mounted, liquid-filled transformers.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. N/A

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIQUID FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 12 13 - 2
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. NETA ATS: Acceptance Testing Specification.
B. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE).
2. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals – for Review/Approval.
1. The following information shall be submitted to the Engineer:
a. Master drawing index.
b. Front view elevation and weight.
c. Plan view.
d. Underground primary and secondary conduit stub-up location.
e. Schematic diagrams.
f. Nameplate diagram.
g. Component list.
h. Conduit entry/exit locations.
i. Ratings (on nameplate) including:
1) kVA.
2) Primary and secondary voltage.
3) Taps.
4) Primary and secondary continuous current.
5) Basic Impulse Level.
6) Impedance.
7) Insulation class and temperature rise.
8) Sound level.
j. Cable terminal sizes.
k. Product data sheets.
2. Where applicable the following additional information shall be submitted to the
Engineer:
a. Busway connection.
b. Connection details between close-coupled assemblies.
c. Composite floor plan of close-coupled assemblies.
B. Submittals – for Construction.
1. The following information shall be submitted for record purposes:
a. Final as-built drawings.
b. Wiring diagrams.
c. Certified production test reports.
d. Installation information.
e. Seismic certification.
2. The final (as-built) drawings shall include the same drawings as the construction
drawings and shall incorporate all changes made during the manufacturing process.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: For transformer and accessories to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIQUID FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 12 13 - 3
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. The manufacturer of this equipment shall have produced similar electrical equipment for a
minimum period of five (5) years.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with IEEE C2.
C. Comply with ANSI C57.12.10, ANSI C57.12.28, IEEE C57.12.70, and IEEE C57.12.80.
D. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. One
(1) copy of these instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of shipment.
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: IEEE C37.121, usual service conditions except for the following:
1. Altitudes above 4500 feet.
2. The equipment and major components shall be suitable for and certified to meet all
applicable seismic requirements of the International Building Code (IBC) under
conditions specified in Section 01 81 10 Seismic Design Criteria. Guidelines for the
installation consistent with these requirements shall be provided by the equipment
manufacturer and be based upon testing of representative equipment. The test
response spectrum shall be based upon a 5% minimum damping factor, IBC: a peak
of 2.15g’s (3.2 – 11 Hz), and a ZPA of 0.86g’s applied at the base of the equipment. The
tests shall fully envelop this response spectrum for all equipment natural frequencies
up to at least 35 Hz.
3. Exposure to fumes, vapors, or dust.
4. Exposure to hot and humid climate or to excessive moisture, including steam, salt
spray, and dripping water.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Without additional charge, the Manufacturer shall replace any work or material they have
provided which develops defects within two years from date of acceptance.
B. All materials and equipment shall be guaranteed against defective materials, design, and
workmanship.
C. During the warranty period, the equipment supplier or his authorized dealer will be required
to make the necessary repairs or replacements on site.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIQUID FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 12 13 - 4
D. Warranties which mention that the part must be returned to the factory will not be
acceptable.
E. During the warranty period, the Owner will not accept charges for:
1. Travel time.
2. Mileage.
3. On-site repair labor.
F. Warranty shall list any and all items excluded.
G. If necessary, as determined by the Owner, any repairs must be made on a premium time basis
without cost to the Owner.
1.11 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,
reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in other Division.
B. Coordinate installation of louvers, doors, spill retention areas, and sumps. Coordinate
installation so no piping or conduits are installed in space allocated for medium-voltage
transformers except those directly associated with transformers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
A. MANUFACTURERS
B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the
following:
1. Eaton/Cutler-Hammer
2. Prolec GE
3. Square D; Schneider Electric.
4. ABB.-Hitachi
2.2 PAD-MOUNTED, LIQUID-FILLED TRANSFORMERS
A. Transformer primary connections shall be 200 A deadfront load break wells and inserts for
cable sizes MV-105 #2 gauge. Transformer primary shall have bayonet fusing a each phase.
B. Insulating Liquid: Less flammable, edible-seed-oil based, and UL listed as complying with
NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according to
ASTM D 92. Liquid shall be biodegradable and nontoxic. The insulating fluid shall be certified
PCB free at the time of shipment and the tank shall be so labeled.
C. Insulating Liquid: less flammable, NON-silicone-based dielectric and UL listed as complying
with NFPA 70 requirements for fire point of not less than 300 deg C when tested according
to ASTM D 92. Liquid shall have low toxicity and be nonhazardous. The insulating fluid shall
be certified PCB free at the time of shipment and the tank shall be so labeled.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIQUID FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 12 13 - 5
D. Rating: The rating of the transformer shall be 4,160volt 3-phase delta primary and
480volt 3-phase wye secondary. Transformer shall be 150KVA The transformer shall
carry its continuous rating with average winding temperature rise by resistance that shall
not exceed 55 degrees C, based on average ambient of 30 degrees C over 24 hours with a
maximum of 40 degrees C. The insulation system shall a llow an additional 12% kVA output
at 65 degrees C average winding temperature rise by resistance, on a continuous basis,
without any decrease in normal transformer life. Transformer shall have a radial feed to
connect surge arrestors to on the B side of the high voltage compartment.
E. Basic Impulse Level: Comply with standard basic impulse levels (BIL) for transformer
windings as detailed in IEEE C57.12.00 and UL 1062.
F. Full-Capacity Voltage Taps: Four nominal 2.5 percent taps, 2 above and 2 below rated
primary voltage; with externally operable tap changer for de-energized use and with position
indicator. The tap changer operator shall be located within one of the compartments.
G. Surge Arresters: Distribution class, one for each primary phase; complying with IEEE C62.11
and NEMA LA 1; support from tank wall within high-voltage compartment. Transformers
shall have three arresters for loop-feed circuits.
H. Surge Arresters: Dead-front, elbow-type, metal-oxide-varistor units.
I. Surge Arresters shall be rated for 3,000volts phase to ground on all 3 phases.
J. Impedance: Impedance shall comply with ANSI C57.12.00 standards.
K. Sound Level: The transformer shall be designed to meet the sound level standards for liquid
transformers as defined in NEMA TR1. The measurement procedure shall be as specified in
ANSI C.57.12.90.
L. Windings: High-voltage and low-voltage windings shall be copper. Insulation between layers
of the windings shall be by thermally set insulating paper or equal. The coil windings shall
be designed to reduce losses and manufactured with copper conductor material.
M. Tank Assembly:
1. The assembly shall be individually welded and receive a quality control pressurized
check for leaks. The entire tank assembly shall receive a similar leak test before
tanking. A final six-hour leak test shall be performed.
2. The transformer(s) shall be compartmental-type, self-cooled and tamper-resistant
for mounting on a pad. The unit shall restrict the entry of water (other than flood
water) into the compartments so as not to impair its operation. There shall be no
exposed screws, bolts or other fastening devices which are externally removable.
3. The transformer(s) shall consist of a transformer tank and full-height, bolt-on high-
and low-voltage cable terminating compartments located side-by-side separated by
a rigid metal barrier. Each compartment shall have separate doors, designed to
provide access to the high-voltage compartment only after the low-voltage has been
opened. There shall be at least one additional fastening device accessible only after
the low-voltage door has been opened, which must be removed to open the high-
voltage door. Doors shall be mounted flush with the cabinet frame. The low-voltage

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIQUID FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 12 13 - 6
door shall have a handle-operated, three-point latching mechanism designed to be
secured with a single padlock. A penta-head bolt shall be incorporated into the low-
voltage door latching mechanism. Both high and low-voltage doors shall be
incorporated into the low-voltage door latching mechanism. Both high and low-
voltage doors shall be equipped with stainless steel hinges and door stops to secure
them in the open position.
4. Compartment sills, doors and covers shall be removable to facilitate cable pulling and
installation. The high-voltage door shall be on the left with the low-voltage door on
the right. Compartments shall be designed for cable entry from below.
5. Transformer(s) shall be supplied with a welded or bolted main tank cover and be of
a sealed-tank construction designed to withstand a pressure of 7 psig without
permanent distortion. The tank cover shall be designed to shed water and be supplied
with a tamper-resistant access handhole sized to allow access to internal bushing and
switch connections. Transformers supplied with “less flammable” fluids, (high -
molecular-weight hydrocarbon) NO silicone allowed, shall be manufactured to
withstand 12 psig without rupture. The transformer shall remain effectively sealed
for a top-oil temperature of -5 degrees C to 105 degrees C. When necessary to meet
the temperature rise rating specified, cooling panels shall be provided.
N. Transformer Filling: Transformer shall be vacuum-filled with the appropriate fluid as
indicated above. The process shall be of sufficient vacuum and duration to ensure that the
core and coil assembly is free of moisture prior to filling the tank.
O. Finish: Transformer units shall include suitable outdoor or indoor paint finish. The paint
shall be applied using an electrostatically deposited dry powder system to a minimum of
three (3) mils average thickness. Units shall be painted padmount green, Munsell
No.7GY3.29/1.5.
P. Accessories:
1. Drain valve with sampling device.
2. Dial-type thermometer.
3. Liquid-level gage.
4. Pressure-vacuum gage.
5. Pressure Relief Device: Self-sealing with an indicator.
6. Manual gas pressure test connection.
7. Filling plug and filter press connection.
8. Upper fill/filter press connection or valve.
9. Gas sampling valve.
10. Insulated, low-voltage, neutral bushing with removable ground strap.
11. Instruction nameplate – stainless steel.
12. Rapid pressure rise relay.
2.3 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A. Nameplates: Engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for each transformer, mounted
with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products are specified in Division 26
Section "Electrical Identification."

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIQUID FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 12 13 - 7
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Tests: Perform design and routine tests according to standards specified for
components. Conduct transformer tests according to IEEE C57.12.90.
B. Factory Tests: Perform the following factory-certified tests on each transformer:
1. Resistance measurements of all windings on rated-voltage connection and on tap
extreme connections.
2. Ratios on rated-voltage connection and on tap extreme connections.
3. Polarity and phase relation on rated-voltage connection.
4. No-load loss at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection.
5. Excitation current at rated voltage on rated-voltage connection.
6. Impedance and load loss at rated current on rated-voltage connection and on tap
extreme connections.
7. Applied potential test.
8. Induced potential tests.
All test results shall be submitted to the owner and the engineer upon completion.
C. Insulating oil shall be sampled in accordance with ASTM D-923. Sample shall be laboratory
tested for:
1. Dielectric strength.
2. Acid neutralization number.
3. Interfacial tension.
4. Color.
5. Power factor.
6. PPM water.
7. PCB.
D. Manufacture shall provide test reports as outlined in Submittals with source quality control
test reports.
1. Owner will possibly want to witness all required factory tests. Notify Engineer at
least 14 days before date of tests and indicate their approximate duration. The cost
of transportation, lodging, meals and incidental expenses shall be the owner’s
responsibility.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIQUID FILLED MEDIUM-VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 12 13 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METERING SWITCHGEAR
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 16 00 - 1
SECTION 26 16 00
METERING SWITCHGEAR
(OWNER PROVIDED- FOR REFERENCE ONLY)

PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 APPLICABLE SECTIONS:
A. The General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions, Special Conditions, Alternates
and addenda, applicable drawings and the technical specifications herein shall apply to all
work under this Division 26.
1.2 SCOPE:
A. Provide all operations, methods, labor and equipment and provide and install all materials
and incidentals necessary for the completion of the work as specified herein or included on
the drawings. This switch shall be owner furnished, contractor installed.
1.3 WORK INCLUDE:
A. Shall furnish all components parts of all the systems required for their safe and proper
operation, whether or not specifically mentioned or noted on the drawings, except those
items or articles which are specifically noted hereinafter as being supplied otherwise.
1.4 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS:
A. The latest versions of the documents, standards codes and requirements in effect on the date
of invitation to bid apply to the extent specified herein.
1. ANSI C57.12.28, Pad-Mounted Equipment-Enclosure Integrity
2. ANSI C2, National Electrical Safety Code
3. ANSI C12.11, Instrument Transformers for Revenue Metering
4. PacifiCorp ZG 431, Box Pad-Three-Phase Sectionalizing Cabinet
5. PacifiCorp ZG 531, Padvault-Three-Phase Sectionalizing Cabinet
6. PacifiCorp ZM 004, Instrument Transformers-Bar Coding and Shipping
7. PacifiCorp MC 022, PacifiCorp's General Wire Color Code for Instrument Rated
Metering
8. PacifiCorp Meter Service Equipment List
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHIPMENT:
A. Shipment will be by road and proper measures must be taken to protect the transformer and
accessories during transport and possible temporary storage at site. Shipping papers must
include reference to Customers purchase order number and project number at time of
shipment. A full set of as built drawings must be provided in the control cabinet. Shipping
shall be to job site in South Weber, Utah and shall include off-loading and setting on cribbing

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METERING SWITCHGEAR
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 16 00 - 2
at the job site. The contractor shall offload and store the unit and install. Protect from
moisture within a heated tent/facility.
2.2 GENERAL:
A. The primary metering station will be installed by a Contractor on a contractor provided and
installed vault. Field Coordinate.
2.3 ENCLOSURE CONSTRUCTION:
A. The enclosure shall be tamper resistant, all welded construction utilizing 11 -gauge sheet
steel. Corner plates and braces shall be used as necessary to assure rigidity. The enclosure
top shall be cross kinked to provide watershed and rigidity. The enclosure shall be open
bottom with a 1-inch flange inside, all around. Separate compartments shall be provided for
cable termination and for instrument transformers - each compartment equipped with its
own individual access door(s) furnished with a stainless steel door holder that will latch the
door open 100 degrees and 140 degrees and resist accidental closing. The equipment plate
separating the two compartments shall be full-length constructed with 11-gauge minimum
sheet steel braced to assure rigidity when operating the elbows.
B. A 12" X 12" X 12" junction box w/ terminal blocks shall be attached to the side of the meter
pack as high as practicable. The terminals shall be factory wired and connected to the P.T.'s
within the meter pack. PT’s shall be wired to fuse blocks – 5amp max fuses included. Shorting
blocks shall be provided and connected for the C.T.'s.
2.4 DEAD FRONT CONSTRUCTION:
A. The enclosure shall be designed to be dead-front to comply with paragraph 381G of
NESC,ANSI C2 which states, " access to exposed live parts in excess of 600V shall require two
separate conscious acts. The first shall be the opening of a door or barrier which is locked or
otherwise secured against unauthorized entry. The second act shall be either the opening of
a door or the removal of a barrier.''
2.5 DOORS:
A. The instrument transformer compartment shall be separated from the cable termination
compartment by a steel equipment plate.
B. Separate access shall be provided for each compartment via two entry doors on each side,
opposite one another.
2.6 DOOR LATCH:
A. Each door shall be furnished with a stainless steel door holder that will latch the door open
between 100 degrees and 140 degrees and prevent accidental closing.
2.7 DOOR LOCKS:
A. Each external door on the enclosure shall have a 3-point positive latching mechanism which
includes a padlock shackle and a recessed penta-head bolt as described in ANSI C57.12.28.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METERING SWITCHGEAR
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 16 00 - 3
2.8 HINGES:
A. Hinges shall be stainless steel and shall be bolted or welded using locking nuts to both the
enclosure and to the door to maintain door alignment for the life of the equipment. Doors
shall be removable in the open position only.
2.9 BARRIERS:
A. Access Barrier:
1. Each access shall have a removable clear polycarbonate barrier that shall be 0.25
inches thick, minimum. Each clear polycarbonate barrier shall be provided with two
handles to facilitate easy removal. The handle assemblies shall have no electrically
conductive parts that pass through the barrier. The barriers shall be removable by
lifting up and pulling out.
2. Complete visual inspection of the internal components shall be possible without
removing the barrier.
B. Phase Barrier:
1. Non-conductive barriers separating each phase set of transformers shall be supplied.
C. Phase and ground barriers shall be provided to assure correct phase-to-phase and phase-to-
ground clearances for proper operation at rated voltage. These barriers shall be glass
reinforced polyester (NEMA GPO-3 class material) not less then .01875 inch thick.
D. A removable insulating barrier with a "DANGER-HIGH VOLTAGE" Warning sign, shall be
located inside the door(s) on the transformer compartment as recommended by Rule 381G
of ANSI Standard C2 (National Electrical Safety Code).
2.10 COLOR:
A. The enclosure shall be given a durable, green, outdoor finish (Munsell Notation
7.0GY32911.5).
2.11 LIFTING EYE:
A. Welded nuts with removable hardened steel bolts and lifting eyes shall be provided. The nuts
shall be located on the top four corners of the enclosure.
2.12 LABEL:
A. The line and load sides shall be labeled.
2.13 GROUNDING:
A. Provisions shall be made for grounding in the cable terminating compartment and in the
instrument transformer compartment by means of one continuous copper conductor around
the entire cabinet.
B. Four high conductivity bronze, eyebolt type, ground lugs which accept #6 thru #2/0 copper
conductor shall be installed - two in the cable terminating compartment and two in the
transformer compartment - on each side of the door opening in an accessible position.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METERING SWITCHGEAR
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 16 00 - 4
2.14 BUSHING WELLS:
A. Bushing wells, inserts and parking stands rated for 200 amps shall be supplied with the 200
amp enclosures respectively.
2.15 WIRING DIAGRAMS;
A. A wiring diagram of the metering circuit shall be located on the interior of the instrument
compartment door.
2.16 NAMEPLATE;
A. A permanent manufacturer's nameplate, including the following data listed below, shall be
attached to the outside of the enclosure.
1. manufacturer name
2. manufacturer serial number
3. manufactured date
4. voltage
5. BIL
6. Current
7. Approximate weight
2.17 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER PROVISION:
A. Two instrument mounting plates shall be constructed and reinforced as necessary to provide
proper support for voltage and current instrument transformers. Figure 1 shows the
mounting configurations.
B. Location Supports:
1. One instrument transformer support shall be installed on the three-phase enclosure
ceiling for mounting three standard 15kV or 25kV outdoor voltage transformers. The
other support shall be installed near the bottom for mounting three standard 15kV or
5kV outdoor current transformers.
2. The lower instrument transformer support shall be high enough that the current
transformer secondary junction box will be above the enclosure outer door threshold.
The supports shall be centered and perpendicular to the entry sides of the enclosure.
3. One instrument transformer support shall be installed on the bottom of the single
phase enclosure to mount both the voltage and current instrument transformers.
2.18 MOUNTING HOLES:
A. Instrument transformer mounting holes shall be punched and provided with captive nuts or
drilled and tapped in the instrument transformer supports for 3/8 inch, 16 threads-per-inch
bolts. The four mounting holes for a given instrument transformer shall be in accordance with
Figure 10, Outdoor Current Transformers, 60kV BIL Through 110kV BIL, and Figure 14,
Voltage Transformers, 60kV BIL Through 110kV BIL, in ANSI C12.11. The mounting holes
should be positioned such that at least minimum phase-to-phase clearances are maintained
for standard 15kV and 25kV class outdoor transformers.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METERING SWITCHGEAR
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 16 00 - 5
2.19 INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS:
A. MANUFACTURERS
1. ABB
2. GE
3. ARTECHE
B. PT Ratio = 20:1 2400:120 volt
C. CT Ratio = 200:5 5kV or 15kV rated
D. Rating Factor of 1.5 to 2.
E. Metering Accuracy shall be 3% or better. Include any CT and PT Factory Testing Reports.
2.20 TEST SWITCH:
2.21 WIRING:
A. The installing contractor shall provide wire from the terminal blocks to the SEL Meter’s test
switch located within the building. Wiring shall be done by UAMPS. Metering enclosure and
meter/test switch provided by UAMPS
2.22 CONDUIT:
A. All secondary wiring from the instrument transformers to the meter socket shall be in PVC
conduit. PVC coated GRC 90 deg. Elbows and PVC coated GRC conduit shall be installed
through concrete. Taped GRC will not be accepted.
2.23 BUSHINGS INSERTS AND TERMINALS:
A. Bushings shall be 200 ampere, 15kV Class (15.2kV to ground) Air Insulated Bushing Wells,
95kV BIL, per ANSI/IEEE Standard 386-1985 Fig. 3 (200 A Bushing Well Interface, 8.3kV,
15.2kV and 21.1kV) for use with either 8.3/14.4kV or 15.2/26.3kV separable insulated
connectors (Elastimold, RTE or other approved equal.) The bushings wells shall have a 0.75
inch diameter copper conductor on the air insulated side which is drilled and tapped 0.375-
inch-16 x 1-inch deep to provide direct connection of the bus and/or live parts. Integral
shielding shall be provided to eliminate partial discharge caused by off center mounting and
mounting holes which may have sharp edges or burrs. Bushings wells shall bolt or clamp into
place to allow field replacement with standard tools. Each bushing well shall be tested and
shall meet the requirements for 25kV devices in accordance with the test values of ANSI/IEEE
Standard 386-1985 or latest revision. Each busing well shall be tested in free air, mounted in
a grounded steel plate not less than 10-inches x 10-inches, and with a bushing well plug
(RTE#2604231801 or equal) installed in the well interface to accurately simulate operating
conditions (gas or liquid dielectric in the interface shall not be acceptable for this test). The
bushing well interface shall be free of all voids, holes and heat sinks to assure proper mating
with separable insulated connectors. Bushing inserts shall be provided with metering
cabinet, installed by the contractor with correct torque tool or by manufacturer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT METERING SWITCHGEAR
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 16 00 - 6
2.24 SHOP DRAWINGS: SUBMIT DRAWINGS FOR REVIEW PRIOR TO FABRICATION OR DELIVERY
TO JOB SITE.
2.25 MANUFACTURERS
A. ELLIOT, SPS, SHALLBETTER, S&C
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GUARANTEE
A. The manufacturer shall guarantee that the metering cabinet furnished under this
specification is of first class material and workmanship throughout, that it has tested in
accordance with this specification, and that the results of the tests comply with the
requirements of this specification. The supplier of the transformer shall warrant materials
and parts, this contractor shall warrant all labor for the specified period. The contractor shall
warrant all terminations.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 19 00 - 1
SECTION 26 19 00
MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General requirements for three-phase, form-wound, squirrel cage induction motors
500 hp and larger supplied as part of mechanical systems specified in respective
equipment sections.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) MG-1 – Motors and Generators
1. Form-Wound Squirrel Cage Induction Motors – 5000 Volts or less
2. Vibration, Axial Position, and Bearing Temperature Monitoring Systems
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
1. IEEE Std 85 – Test Procedure for Airborne Sound Measurements on Rotating Electric
Machinery
2. IEEE Std 112 – Test Procedures for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Base product data must indicate general compliance with NEMA MG-1. The following
additional information is required:
1. Torque, current, and power factor vs. speed curves at 80 and 100 percent rated
voltage.
2. Estimated acceleration time curves at 80 and 100 percent rated voltage.
3. Locked rotor current and power factor at 80 and 100 percent rated voltage.
4. Locked rotor withstand time, with the motor at ambient temperature and at its
maximum rated operating temperature, at 70, 80, 90, and 100 percent of rated
voltage.
5. Expected amperes, efficiency, and power factor at ½, ¾, full, and service factor load.
6. Guaranteed power factor and efficiencies at ½, ¾, and full load. State method used
for determining rotor resistance and stray load loss for IEEE 112, Method F
calculations.
7. Motor nameplate data.
8. Sound pressure level at three meters (dBA)
9. Recommended alarm and trip settings in degrees Celsius for the stator winding and
bearing temperature detectors.
10. Complete motor and motor accessory schematic and connection diagrams.
11. Catalog data sheets for motor and motor accessory equipment.
12. Certified factory test reports for all tests specified.
13. Dimensional outline, detail, and cross sectional drawings.
14. Sufficient information to confirm adequate foundation design including loading
diagrams, motor net and erection weights, anchor bolt placement, and location of the
center of gravity.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 19 00 - 2
15. Installation, maintenance, and operating instructions.
16. Recommended spare parts list.
17. Itemized list of special tools required.
18. Bill of material.
19. Statement of guarantee and warranty.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. The motor shall be as manufactured by US Motors or Toshiba.
2.2 GENERAL
A. Motors shall be premium efficiency; squirrel cage induction type with the design,
construction, and performance characteristics described in this Specification, and shall
conform to the latest revision of NEMA MG-1 except where more stringent requirements are
specified herein. Note that not all NEMA MG-1 requirements have been reiterated in this
Specification; it is the motor manufacturer’s responsibility to confirm that all general motor
construction requirements from the Standard, whether indicated or not in this Specification,
have been satisfied.
B. The motor manufacturer shall carefully review the project drawings and specifications to
insure that all required appurtenances are included. The motor manufacturer shall also
review instrumentation, local control panel, medium voltage starters and VFDs and other
portions of these specifications for additional requirements. A signed certificate of such
review from the motor manufacturer shall be provided with motor shop drawings.
C. Motors for use with variable frequency drives shall be suitable for use with the VFD furnished.
The motor manufacturer shall verify the variable speed range (approximately 3:1) and
provide supplemental cooling devices as required to prevent motor overheating.
2.3 BASIC MOTOR DESIGN DATA
A. Motors shall be designed for both continuous operation and long periods of inactivity on a
three-phase, 60 hertz, 4160V power system in accordance with the voltage and frequency
variations dictated by NEMA MG-1.
B. Nameplate horsepower and synchronous rpm shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in
the individual driven equipment specifications.
C. Service factor shall be 1.15. Driven load requirements shall be based on a 1.0 service factor
and not 1.15. If output beyond a 1.0 service factor is required, the next higher motor rating
shall be selected.
D. Form windings, including leads and connections to the windings, shall be epoxy based,
vacuum-pressure-impregnated (VPI), and nonhygroscopic. The thermal rating of the
insulation system shall be a minimum of class F and have inverter grade insulation that meets
NEMA MG-1 Part 31. This includes additional phase paper between coils, extra bracing on

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 19 00 - 3
the end turns, and additional insulation treatments to protect motor winding from damaging
effects that could occur when the motor is used with a VFD.
E. Temperature rise shall be limited to 70 degrees Celsius above 60 degrees Celsius ambient at
a 1.0 service factor as determined by the RTD method. At a 1.15 service factor, the motor
shall be capable of an additional 10 degrees Celsius temperature rise when continuously
operated at service factor horsepower, rated voltage, and rated frequency.
F. Motors shall be designed to tolerate the maximum overspeed dictated by NEMA MG-1
without permanent mechanical deformation to the rotor.
G. Coordinate maximum driven equipment vertical thrust with driven equipment supplier for
thrust bearings. Provide thrust bear that will accommodate the maximum driver vertical
thrust. Bearing shall in insulation type without the need of a cooling coil in bearing housing.
H. Motor shall have grounding provisions on the shaft and the termination box with an Inpro -
MGS or equal for shaft grounding protection and IP55 ingress protection. The bearings shall
also be insulated with shaft grounding device.
I. Motor shall have a no reversing ratchet unless the pump manufacturer will not warranty the
pump.
2.4 SITE DATA
A. See specification section 26 00 00 for reference to the site conditions.
B. Sound pressure shall be measured in accordance with IEEE Std 85. Maximum allowable
sound pressure level shall be 85 dBA at a distance of 3 feet.
2.5 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM CONDITIONS
A. Details regarding the plant electrical system are indicated on the Drawings.
B. Coordinate with entity performing short-circuit study to obtain the maximum ½ cycle RMS
short-circuit amperes at the motor bus that can be delivered by the power system.
Alternatively, the maximum supply switchgear, motor control center, or circuit breaker RMS
short-circuit ampere rating can be used. This information shall be coordinated with motor
control vendor.
C. Coordinate with entity performing short-circuit study to obtain minimum RMS short-circuit
amperes and X/R ratio at the motor terminals.
D. Coordinate I2t let-through energy from fused contactor motor starter with motor control
vendor.
2.6 MOTOR STARTING
A. Torque characteristics shall be as required by the driven load and shall be coordinated with
the driven equipment manufacturer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 19 00 - 4
B. The motor shall normally start and accelerate the driven load with a Medium Voltage Variable
Frequency Drive with an input voltage on the drive of 4,160volts and an output voltage to the
motor of 4,160volts.
C. The motor shall be capable of accelerating its shaft load during locked rotor conditions with
80 percent of its rated voltage applied.
D. Minimum locked rotor time shall be the greater of 150 percent of, or 5 seconds more than,
the time required to accelerate the driven load. Maximum locked rotor current shall not
exceed 650 percent of the full-load current.
E. Minimum number of consecutive or evenly spaced starts shall be as specified in NEMA MG-1.
F. The motor shall be designed and constructed to withstand the starting duties of minimum
5000 full-voltage starts.
2.7 MOUNTING
A. Motor mounting shall be as indicated on the Drawings and in the individual driven equipment
specifications.
B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the motor manufacturer such that all required
mounting plates, jackscrews, shims, anchor bolts, fasteners, lifting lugs, grouting, coatings,
and all other items necessary for frame installation are provided.
2.8 ENCLOSURE
A. Motor enclosure WPII.
B. All the enclosure’s bolts, studs, and other fastening devices shall be made of corrosion -
resistant materials.
2.9 DRIVE SYSTEM
A. All details regarding the driven equipment drive system, including the required motor
rotation, shall be coordinated with the driven equipment manufacturer and the individual
driven equipment specifications.
B. The driven equipment supplier shall perform a steady-state and transient torsional and
stress analysis of the motor and driven equipment for drive trains with speed-increasing
gearboxes to the driven equipment or those supplied by variable frequency drives. Obtain
the necessary physical data for the torsional analysis from the motor supplier.
C. The torsional analysis shall be performed in accordance with the methods outlined in NEMA
MG-1. The driven equipment supplier shall be responsible for the complete and satisfactory
performance of the equipment drive system.
2.10 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT
A. Steady Bushing.
1. Provide steady bushing to eliminate vibration.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 19 00 - 5
B. Winding Temperature Detectors
1. Stator winding RTDs shall be provided per the requirements of NEMA MG-1. Two
RTDs per phase shall be installed and distributed around the circumference in the
motor’s stator winding slots. RTDs shall be platinum, three-wire elements with a
resistance of 100 ohms at 0 degrees Celsius. Motor manufacturer shall coordinate
any additional RTD performance requirements that may be imposed by the motor
protective relay vendor such that RTDs are compatible with the motor protective
relays specified.
2. Provide a separate, common terminal box for stator winding RTD leads. An RTD
connection diagram shall be provided inside the terminal box.
3. Submittal drawings shall show location of RTD sensing element in the motor winding.
C. Bearing Temperature Detectors
1. Bearing RTDs shall be provided per the requirements of NEMA MG-1. Two RTDs per
bearing shall be installed. RTDs shall be platinum, three-wire elements with a
resistance of 100 ohms at 0 degrees Celsius. Motor manufacturer shall coordinate any
additional RTD performance requirements that may be imposed by the motor
protective relay vendor such that RTDs are compatible with the motor protective
relays specified.
2. Bearing RTD terminations shall be in the same terminal box as the stator winding
RTDs. An RTD connection diagram shall be provided inside the terminal box.
D. Lubrication System
1. Provide self-cooled, oil-ring type lubrication system.
2. Bearing housing shall be equipped with constant level sight-feed oilers.
E. Vibration Detectors
1. As recommended and specified by the equipment supplier.
F. Main Conduit Box
1. Box location is as indicated on the Drawings
2. Provide oversized conduit box supplied with the following items:
a. Main supply leads: conductor size, type, insulation, and number per phase are
as indicated on the Drawings and in the Specifications.
b. Surge capacitors: rating as indicated on the Drawings.
c. Surge arresters: metal oxide type with rating as indicated on the Drawings.
d. Space for stress cones.
e. Differential relay and wiring supplied by the Drive Manufacturer
f. Thermal insulation.
g. Removable links to permit isolation of each phase of the motor from the
incoming cable and surge protection.
h. Ground bus.
i. Fault withstand protection shall be coordinated with the I2t let-through
energy of the fused motor contactor.
3. Separate low-voltage wiring of accessory items from medium-voltage motor leads by
a suitable physical barrier to prevent accidental contact.
4. Connection diagrams for all devices shall be provided inside the main conduit box.
G. Space Heaters

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 19 00 - 6
1. Provide low power density, 120V, 60 hertz, single-phase space heater with leads
brought out to a separate terminal box.
2. Provide a terminal box space heater rated 240V/60Hz/single-phase, operated at
120V/60Hz/single-phase. Provide low power density type heaters
3. Provide a terminal box separate from the main conduit box for the space heater leads.
A space heater connection diagram shall be provided inside the terminal box.
H. Nameplate
1. Motor shall have stainless steel nameplate which lists at minimum all data required
by NEMA MG-1.
I. Ground Connector
1. Provide drilled and tapped ground connection points at opposite corners of the
machine frame.
J. Painting
1. The motor shall be finished with the manufacturer’s standard paint finish. The finish
shall be adequate to protect the metal surfaces from corrosion during shipment,
storage, and installation. Surfaces which cannot be painted shall be protected from
corrosion during shipment by a suitable coating or wrapping.
K. Special Tools
1. Provide any special tools required for motor installation, operation, or maintenance.
Package in a heavy-duty box with each tool marked to indicate its intended use.
L. Efficiency and Power Factor
1. The guaranteed motor efficiency at rated voltage and frequency shall not be less than
95.5 percent at full load, 95.5 percent at ¾ load, and 94.8 percent at ½ load.
2. The guaranteed power factor at rated voltage and frequency shall not be less than 88
percent at full load, 86 percent at ¾ load, and 80 percent at ½ load.
3. Power factor correction capacitors shall be provided to raise the power factor to 95%
at full load. Power factor correction capacitors are not required for motors driven by
variable frequency drives.
4. All expected efficiencies shall be determined in accordance with IEEE 112, Method F.
M. Analysis, Shop Inspections, and Tests
1. The following tests shall be performed in accordance with the methods outlined in
NEMA MG-1 and are required on all motors:
a. Manufacturer’s routine test (use polarization index voltage = 2500V for
insulation resistance tests)
b. Lateral critical speed analysis
c. Material certifications on shafts, forgings, and major castings
d. Dynamically balance rotors in minimum of three planes
e. Residual unbalance test
f. Rated room temperature vibration test
g. Bearing inspection (if operating speed is above first mechanical system
resonance)
h. Unbalance response test
2. Submit a final test report which contains the following information:
a. Detailed procedures for all tests.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 19 00 - 7
b. All recorded, measured, and calculated data generated during each individual
test.
c. Acceptance criteria for monitored test parameters.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Surge capacitors shall be the last devices connected to the motor leads before the leads enter
the stator.
B. For motors with integrally mounted terminal boxes: provide a low-impedance ground path
between the surge protection and the stator core by running a copper #4/0 wire in parallel
with the motor leads from the terminal box to the motor core. This bonding wire shall be as
short as possible and shall not be used for motors with separately mounted terminal boxes.
C. For motors with separately mounted terminal boxes: the ground connection in the terminal
box shall be grounded directly to the plant’s ground grid.
D. Terminal box space heaters shall be constantly energized even while the motor is in
operation.
E. Stator winding space heaters shall be immediately connected and energized by the
Contractor upon receipt of the motor at the jobsite.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM-VOLTAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 19 00 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 1
SECTION 26 20 00
LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. General: The Contractor shall provide electric motors, accessories, and appurtenances,
complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section apply to electric motors 600 volts and less.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association (ABMA):
1. ABMA 9 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
2. ABMA 11 – Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE):
1. IEEE 43 – Recommended Practice for Testing Insulation Resistance of Rotating
Machinery.
2. IEEE 112 – Standard Test procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
3. IEEE 114 – Standard Test procedure for Single-Phase Induction Motors.
4. IEEE 303 – Recommended Practice for Auxiliary Devices for Motors in Class 1, Groups
A, B, C, and D, Division 2 Locations.
5. IEEE 841 – Standard for Petroleum and Chemical Industry – Severe Duty totally
Enclosed Fan-Cooled (TEFC) Squirrel Cage Induction Motors – up to and including
500hp.
6. IEEE 1349 – Guide for the Application of Electric Motors in Class I, Division 2
Hazardous (Classified) Locations.
C. National Electrical Manufacturers’ Association (NEMA):
1. MG-1 – Motors and Generators.
2. MG-1 – Safety Standard for Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation, and Use
of Electric Motors and Generators.
D. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL):
1. UL 674 – Electric Motors and Generators for use in Division 1 Hazardous (Classified)
Locations.
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Complete motor data shall be submitted with the driven machinery shop drawings. Motor
data shall include:
1. Machine name and specification number of driven machine.
2. Motor manufacturer.
3. Motor type or model and dimension drawing. Include motor weight.
4. Nominal horsepower.
5. NEMA design.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 2
6. Enclosure.
7. Frame size.
8. Winding insulation class and temperature rise class.
9. Voltage, phase and frequency ratings.
10. Service factor.
11. Full load current at rated horsepower for application voltage.
12. Full load speed.
13. Guaranteed minimum full load efficiency. Also provide nominal efficiencies at 1/2
and 3/4 load.
14. Type of thermal protection or overtemperature protection, if included.
15. Wiring diagram for devices such as motor leak detection, temperature, or zero speed
switches, as applicable.
16. Bearing data. Include recommended lubricants for relubricatable type bearings.
17. If utilized with a variable frequency controller, verify motor is inverter duty type.
Include minimum speed at which motor may be operated for the driven machinery.
18. Power factor at 1/2, 3/4 and full load.
19. Recommended size for power factor correction capacitors to improve power factor
to 0.95 (lagging) when operated at full load.
B. If water cooling is required for motor thrust bearings, the shop drawing submittals shall
indicate this requirement.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation, capable of providing
full motor load, under the following conditions unless otherwise indicated:
1. See [drawing sheet number ???] [section ??? of the specifications] for the project
conditions.
2. Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
3. Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
4. Humidity: Equal to or less than 95 percent (noncondensing).
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Storage and handling of motors shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations. Preferred storage is indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature
to prevent condensation. Protect motors from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive
substances, and physical damage.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All motors shall be UL listed and labeled.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. One of the following or equal:
1. Emerson, US Motors.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 3
2. General Electric.
3. Reliance.
4. Toshiba.
5. Baldor.
2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Electric motors driving identical machines shall be identical.
B. Maximum motor loading shall in all cases be equal to nameplate horsepower rating or less,
exclusive of service factor and as verified with the approved submittal data of the driven
machinery.
1. Minimum Motor Horsepower: All motors shall be sized to carry continuously all loads
which may be imposed through their full range of operation. The motor horsepower
shall be not less than the estimated minimum specified for each driven machine. If
the estimated minimum horsepower specified is not adequate to satisfy the foregoing
restrictions or any other requirements of these Specifications, the motor with the
required horsepower shall be supplied at no additional cost to the Owner. In addition,
any changes caused by increase in motor horsepower shall be made by the Contractor
at no additional cost to the Owner; such changes may involve circuit breakers,
magnetic starters, motor feeder conductors, conduit sizes, etc.
2. Exempt Motors: Motors which are for valve operators, submersible pumps, or motors
which are an integral part of Standard Manufactured Equipment, i.e., non-NEMA
mounting, common shaft with driven element, part of domestic or commercial use
apparatus may be excepted from these Specifications to the extent that such variation
reflects a necessary condition of motor service or a requirement of the driven
equipment.
2.3 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. General: All electric motors shall comply with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motor and Generator.
B. NEMA Design: Electric motors shall be NEMA Design B, (except as indicated in Equipment
Specifications for motors controlled for variable speed operation and other special motors,)
constant speed squirrel-cage induction motors having normal starting torque with low
starting current. In no case shall starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the value
in ANSI/NEMA MG 1. Motors shall be suitable for the starting method indicated on the
Electrical Drawings.
C. Motor Voltage Ratings: Motors shall have voltage ratings in accordance with the following,
unless otherwise indicated:
1. Voltage:
a. All motors ½ hp and larger shall be 460V, 3 phase unless otherwise indicated
on the Drawings.
b. dual voltage motors rated 230/460V, 3 phase are acceptable provided all
leads are brought to the conduit box.
2. Motors driving identical machines shall be identical.
3. All motors 1 hp and larger shall be “Premium Efficiency” motors as defined in NEMA
MG-1.
4. Horsepower as indicated on the Drawings:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 4
a. Horsepower ratings shown on the drawings are based on Vendor’s estimates.
Provide motors sized for the load of the actual equipment furnished.
5. Service Factor:
a. Provide motors rated at 1.15 Service Factor.
b. Provide motors capable of operating continuously at 1.15 Service Factor at
project altitude.
1) Without exceeding Class B temperature rise limits where motors are
provided with Class F insulation.
2) Without exceeding Class F temperature rise limits where motors are
provided with Class H insulation.
6. Torque:
a. Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full speed at
voltage 10 percent less than motor nameplate rating.
b. When started using reduced voltage starters:
1) Provide motors that develop sufficient torque for acceleration to full
speed.
c. NEMA Design B except where driven load characteristics require other than
normal starting torque.
1) In No case shall starting torque or breakdown torque be less than the
values specified in NEMA MG-1.
7. Enclosures:
a. As indicated in the individual equipment Specifications or as specified in this
section.
b. Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled::
1) Cast iron conduit box.
2) Tapped drain holes with Type 316 stainless steel plugs for frames
286T and smaller, and automatic breather and drain devices for
frames 324T and larger.
c. Explosion-Proof:
1) Tapped drain holes with corrosion resistant plugs for frames 286T
and smaller and automatic breather and drain devices for frames
324T and larger.
d. Lifting Devices: All motors weighing 265 pounds (120 kilograms) or more
shall have suitable lifting devices for installation and removal.
8. Manufactured with cast iron frames in accordance with NEMA MG-1.
9. Nameplates:
a. Provide all motors with a permanent, stainless steel nameplate indelibly
stamped or engraved with:
1) NEMA Standard motor data.
2) Bearing description and lubrication instructions.
10. Hardware:
a. Type 316 stainless steel.
11. Conduit Boxes:
a. Cast iron or stamped steel.
b. Split from top to bottom.
c. Provide gaskets at the following interfaces:
1) Frames and conduit boxes.
2) Conduit boxes and box covers.
d. Rotatable through 360 degrees in 90 degree increments.
e. Exceeding the dimensions defined in NEMA MG-1.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 5
f. Provide grounding lugs inside conduit boxes for motor frame grounding.
12. Motor Bearings:
a. Antifriction.
b. Regreasable and initially filled with grease.
c. Pumps Motor ion excess of 100 HP shall have oil lubricated bearings.
d. Bearings and lubrication suitable for ambient temperature and temperature
rise.
e. Suitable for intended application and have ABMA L-10 rating life of 60,000
hours or more.
f. Fit bearings with easily accessible grease/oil supply, flush, drain, and relief
fittings using extension tubes where necessary.
g. Where specified in the equipment specifications, provide split-sleeve type
hydrohdynamic radial bearings. Provide a bearing isolator to protect bearings
from contaminants.
13. Insulation Systems:
a. Motors Installed in Ambient Temperatures of 40 degrees Celsius or less:
1) Provide Class F insulation.
2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class B insulation.
3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 40 degrees Celsius and
at the altitude where the motor will be installed.
b. Motors Installed in Ambient Temperatures of 40 degrees Celsius and 65
degrees Celsius:
1) Provide Class H insulation.
2) Design temperature rise consistent with Class F insulation.
3) Rated to operate at an ambient temperature of 65 degrees Celsius and
at the altitude where the motor will be installed.
14. Motor Leads:
a. Insulated leads with non-wicking, non-hydroscopic material. Class F
insulation.
15. Noise:
a. Maximum operating noise level of 85dB measured as per IEEE 85.
D. Submersible Motors:
1. Enclosures:
a. Totally Enclosed Non-Ventilated (TENV) watertight casing.
b. Smooth outer surface. Cooling fins may clog with solids and are not
acceptable.
c. Inner and outer shaft seals separated by an oil chamber.
2. Cooling:
a. Suitable continuous operation in totally, partially, or nonsubmerged
condition without overheating.
b. Convection cooling only.
c. Water jackets and oil cooling are not acceptable.
3. Electrical Cables:
a. Wire unit without splices. Coordinate with Contractor to ensure cables of
adequate length.
b. Epoxy encapsulated able entry into terminal box.
4. Insulation:
a. Sealed moisture resistant windings.
5. Motor Protection:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 6
a. Provide temperature detection in motor windings.
b. Provide moisture detection in motor housing.
c. Provide associated electronics and relaying in a separate enclosure to be
mounted remotely.
E. Vertical Motors:
1. Enclosures:
a. Weather protected Type II (WPII) where installed outdoors.
b. Weather protected Type I (WPII) where installed indoors.
2. Thrust Bearings:
a. Selected for combined rotor and driven equipment loads.
b. Coordinate with driven equipment supplier for maximum vertical thrust of
driven equipment.
F. Variable Frequency Drive Motors
1. Compatible with the variable frequency drives specified.
2. Inverter duty rated and labeled.
3. Meet the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.
4. Winding insulation meets the requirements of NEMA MG-1 Part 31.4.4.2.
5. Capable of running continuously at 1/10th of full speed, with no harmful effects or
overheating.
6. Service factor of 1.0 when driven by VFD.
G. Motors Installed in Corrosive Environments:
1. Nameplate indicating conformance to IEEE 841.
2. Stator double dipped in varnish and baked.
3. Stator and rotor coated with corrosion resistant epoxy.
4. Frame, brackets, fan guard and conduit box coated with minimum of two coats of
epoxy paint.
5. Withstand salt spray tests as per ASTM B-117.
6. Suitable for hose down areas.
H. Single Phase Motors:
1. Capacitor start type rated for operation at 115 volts, 60 hertz, unless otherwise
specified or as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Totally enclosed, fan cooled motors manufactured in accordance with NEMA MG-1.
3. Ball Bearings: Sealed.
4. ½ Horsepower or Less Fan Motors:
a. Split-phase or shaded pole type when standard for the equipment.
b. Open type when suitably protected from moisture, dripping water, and lint
accumulation.
5. Wound rotor or commutator type single-phase motors only when their specific
characteristics are necessary for application and their use is acceptable to the
Engineer.
6. Integral overload protection.
2.4 ACCESSORIES
A. Space Heaters:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 7
1. Provide all 3 phase motors with belted or cartridge space heaters mounted within the
motor enclosure.
2. Space heater rating shall be 120 volts, single-phase, unless otherwise shown.
3. Power leads for heaters wired into conduit box.
4. Installed within motor enclosure adjacent to core iron.
B. Winding Temperature Detectors:
1. Provide temperature switches with normally closed contacts or resistance
temperature detectors, 2 per each phase, as indicated on the Drawings.
C. Bearing Temperature Detectors:
1. Where required by the driven equipment specification or as indicated on the
Drawings.
2. RTD type and wiring matches the winding RTDs.
D. Vibration Detectors:
1. Where required by the driven equipment specification.
2. In accordance with the driven equipment specification.
2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Factory Testing
1. Perform factory tests in accordance with:
a. IEEE 112 for three phase motors.
b. IEEE 114 single phase motors.
2. Furnish copies of test reports.
3. Include testing of:
a. No load current.
b. Locked rotor current.
c. Winding resistance.
d. High potential.
4. Tests required on motors 250 hp and larger:
a. Manufacturer’s routine test (use polarization index voltage = 5000V for
insulation resistance tests).
b. Efficiency and power factor versus load test performed at rated speed and 50
percent, 75 percent, 90 percent, and 100 percent of rated load. The curves
from the motor tests shall be submitted for information.
c. The maximum allowable residual unbalance in each correction plane
(journal) shall be calculated using the following equation:
1) U = 4 W/N
2) Where:
3) U = residual correction plane unbalance, in ounces-inches
4) W = static correction plane journal loading, in pounds
5) N = maximum specified operating speed, in revolutions per minute

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 8
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install motors in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
B. Electrical work involving connections, controls, switches, disconnects, etc., shall be
performed as provided in the applicable sections of Division 26.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Before start-up perform insulation resistance test on each motor furnished or installed on
this project.
1. Windings energized to 1000 volts D.C. for one minute.
2. Resistance measured at the end of the test, recorded, and submitted to the Engineer
for review.
3. Inform the Engineer of any unusual or unacceptable test results.
3.3 VISUAL AND MECHANICAL INSPECTION FOR MOTORS AND THEIR ROTATING MACHINERY:
A. Compare equipment nameplate information with the Drawings and Specifications.
B. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
C. Inspect for proper anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
D. Inspect air baffles, filter media, cooling fans, slip rings, brushes and brush rigging.
E. Inspected bolted electrical connections for high resistance by one of the following:
1. Use of low resistance ohmmeter.
2. Calibrated torque wrench.
3. Thermographic survey.
F. Verify correct application of appropriate lubrication and lubrication systems.
G. Verify the absence of unusual mechanical or electrical noise or signs of overheating during
initial test run.
H. Special tests as suggested by manufacturer, such as gap spacing and pedestal alignment shall
be made where applicable.
3.4 ELECTRICAL TESTS:
A. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low resistance
ohmmeter.
B. Perform insulation resistance test in accordance with ANSI/IEEE43. Test voltage shall be as
specified by the manufacturer:
1. On motors 200 HP and smaller, test duration shall be one minute. Calculate dielectric
absorption ratio using resistance measurements at 20 seconds and 60 seconds.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 9
2. On motors larger than 200 HP, test duration shall be 10 minutes. Calculate
polarization index using resistance measurements at one minute and 10 minutes.
a. Perform stator resistance test phase-to-phase.
b. Perform insulation power-factor or dissipation-factor tests.
c. Perform surge comparison tests.
d. Verify operation of motor space heater.
e. Perform a rotation test to ensure correct shaft direction.
f. Measure no load and full load running current and compare to nameplate.
g. Observe proper operation and sequence of any reduced voltage starters.
h. Perform vibration base line test. Amplitude to be plotted vs. frequency.
i. Check all protective devices in accordance with other sections of these
specifications.
j. After start-up of each motor, the current on each phase shall be measured:
1) At no load.
2) At defined load:
3) Record the voltage of each phase to round during this test.
4) Inrush current.
C. Measurements shall be recorded and submitted to the Engineer.
3.5 TEST VALUES:
A. Insulation resistance should be not less than 10 megohms.
B. Dielectric absorption ratio or polarization index readings less than the manufacturer’s
recommended values (not less than three for polarization index or 1.4 for dielectric
absorption ratio) shall be investigated.
C. Motor measured full load current shall not exceed nameplate value.
D. Vibration amplitudes shall not exceed values furnished by manufacturer.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 11
MOTOR DATA SHEET

MOTOR NUMBER: MOTOR/EUIPMENT NAME
SPECIFICATION NUMBER OF DRIVEN MACHINE
MOTOR NAMEPLATE DATA
MANUFACTURER MODEL/SERIES MODEL NO.

FRAME ENCLOSURE NEMA DESIGN
HP SERVICE FACTOR RPM
INSULATION CLASS VOLTS FULL LOAD AMPS
AMBIENT TEMP PHASE NO LOAD AMPS
DESIGN TEMP RISE HERTZ LOCK ROTOR AMPS
INRUSH CODE LETTER

100 PERCENT LOAD 75 PERCENT LOAD 50 PERCENT LOAD
GUARANTEED MIN EFFICIENCIES
GUARANTEED MIN POWER FACTOR
MAX SIZE OF POWER FACTOR CORRECTION CAPACITOR KVAR

ACCESSORIES
MOTOR WINDING HEATER VOLTS WATTS
WINDING THERMAL PROTECTION
WINDING TEMP SWITCHES (YES/NO)
RTD TYPE QUALITY PER PHASE # OF WIRES
NOMINAL RESISTANCE NOMINAL TEMP COEFFICIENT
RECOMMENDED ALARM DEGREES C RECOMMENDED
TRIP
DEGREES
C

SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
INVERTER DUTY* (YES/NO) PART WINDING (YES/NO) WYE-DELTA (YES/NO)
2 SPEED, 1 WINDING (YES/NO) 2 SPEED, 2 WINDING (YES/NO)
AREA CLASSIFICATIONS
CLASS DIVISION GROUP TEMP CODE

* Conforms to NEMA MG-1 Part 31.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE AC INDUCTION MOTORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 20 00 - 12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT UTILITY COORDINATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 21 00 - 1
SECTION 26 21 00
UTILITY COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Requirements for coordination with the utility companies to provide service.
2. Contractor’s responsibilities for connecting to utilities and providing utility service to
the facilities.
3. Descriptions of utility services required.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. National Fire Protection Association.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Electrical Service
1. The facility will be served by 46kV overhead high voltage distribution line that feeds
a 2MVA unit substation transformer. The secondary voltatge of the 2MVA unit
substation is 4.16kV medium voltage power and will be primary metered at this
voltage. Once the overhead feed goes the through the 2MVA unit substation the
service will be an underground feeder and metering enclosure owned and furnished
by the WBWCD.
2. The Contractor shall make all necessary arrangements with the electric utility to
arrange for disconnection and reconnection to the electric service.
3. The Contractor shall provide all work and materials and bear all costs for providing
temporary construction power and the permanent electrical service, including but
not limited to:
a. All work and materials not provided by the Utility.
b. All permits and fees required by the Utility.
4. The Contractor shall provide electrical ducts, raceways, conductors and connections
shown on the plans, and all other work and materials required for a complete
electrical service, including but not limited to the following:
a. Electrical service conduits and conductors from the point of utility
termination to the service entrance equipment.
b. Metering conduits from the instrument transformers to the meter.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 26 00 00.
B. Certification

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT UTILITY COORDINATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 21 00 - 2
1. Submit certification that the intended installation has been coordinated with the
utility companies. Certification shall include a narrative description of the utility’s
requirements and points of connection and names and telephone numbers for
contacts at the utilities.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements
1. NEC.
2. Local codes.
3. Local utility standards.
1.6 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Prior to submitting any bid, the Electrical Contractor is responsible for contacting the utilities
to determine the work and materials that will be required from the Contractor, and all fees
and permits that will be required, so that all utility systems furnished by the Contractor will
be included in the Contractor’s bid.
1. No additional charges will be allowed by the Contractor, due to failure to include such
charges in its bid.
B. Prior to start of site work, make arrangements for temporary telephone and electrical service
as required.
C. Prior to commencing work, coordinate complete electric service entrance requirements with
local electric utility to assure that the installation will be complete in accordance with these
specifications.
1. Ensure power transformer size, electrical characteristics and location are consistent
with the design and service voltage provided by the electrical utility coordinated with
other trades.
2. Arrange for electric meter (by Utility) and provide meter bases in accordance with
utility requirements.
3. Furnish and coordinate installation of metering C.T.'s and P.T.'s furnished by Utility.
4. Pay any charges required by the electric utility for connection and turn-on.
D. Prior to commencing work, coordinate complete telephone service.
1. Verify compliance with telephone service utility requirements.
2. Verify exact location of each service point and type of service.
3. Pay any charges required by the telephone service utility for connection and turn-on.
E. Prior to commencing site work, coordinate underground conduit installations with other
work to eliminate conflicts and avoid interferences with other underground piping systems.
F. Coordinate necessary outages with local utility and Owner.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT UTILITY COORDINATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 21 00 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall be furnished in accordance with the applicable requirements of the utilities
and these specifications.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment shall be furnished in accordance with the applicable requirements of the utilities
and these specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT UTILITY COORDINATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 21 00 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 22 00 - 1
SECTION 26 22 00
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Enclosed dry type transformers.
a. Stand alone units.
b. Units located in motor control centers.
c. Units located in packaged power supplies.
2. Rated 1 to 1,000 KVA.
3. Primary voltage 600V and below.
B. Related Sections:
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. American National Standards Institute.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide 3-phase, or 1-phase, 60 hertz, dry type transformers with the voltage ratings, KVA
capacities, and connections as indicated on the Contract Drawings.
B. Overall dimensions not to exceed the limits indicated or the space available.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data
1. Catalog cut sheets.
2. Nameplate data.
3. Weight and overall dimensions.
4. Inrush current.
5. Insulation system and temperature constraints.
6. Number and rating of taps.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 22 00 - 2
1. Meeting all applicable requirements of NEMA ST-20.
2. Sound levels measured and in accordance with ANSI-C89.
3. UL 1561.
4. CSA C22.2.
5. ANSI/NEMA ST-20-1988.
1.6 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. In conformance with the site conditions as identified in Section 26 00 00.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. All transformers shall be fully warranted for a period of two years from the date of substantial
completion.
B. In accordance with the requirements of Section 26 00 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers of standard power transformers:
1. Cutler-Hammer
2. Square D.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Insulation:
1. Transformers 25KVA and smaller: 185°C class.
2. Transformers 30KVA and larger: 220°C class.
3. Non-flammable.
B. Cores of grain-oriented silicon steel.
C. Windings
1. High grade magnet wire.
2. Clearly marked terminal pads shall be attached to a rugged fiberglass termination
strip.
3. Material:
a. Copper only.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Ratings
1. BIL of 10 kv for 600-volt class windings.
2. Sound levels, under ANSI Standard test conditions, not to exceed:
a. 1-9 KVA 40 db.
b. 10-50 KVA 45 db.
c. 51-150 KVA 50 db.
d. 151-300 KVA 55 db.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 22 00 - 3
e. 301-500 KVA 60 db.
3. Impedance, unless indicated otherwise, within the following ranges:
a. 75 through 150 KVA 2.0% to 5.0%.
4. Efficiencies, for full load at 170°C winding temperature, no less than:
a. 30 through 75 KVA 97.0%.
b. Submit test data, if requested, to prove compliance with the above.
5. Daily overload capacities, at rated voltage and without reduction in life, in accordance
with the loading guide as published in ANSI C57.96.
6. Temperature Rise
a. Transformers rated below 15 KVA shall have a maximum temperature rise of
115°C over a 40°C ambient at full load.
b. Transformers rated 15 KVA and above shall be of a low temperature rise
design (temperature rise consistent with the next temperature class below
the insulation provided). The temperature rise, over a 40°C ambient at full
load, shall not exceed the value shown below for the insulation class provided:
1) Insulation Class Temperature Rise
2) 220°C 150°C
B. Taps
1. 3 through 25 KVA.
a. Two 5 percent taps below normal.
2. 30 KVA and above.
a. Four full capacity 2.5% primary taps: two above rated voltage, and two below
rated voltage.
b. Operated by a tap changer handle or tap jumpers accessible through a panel.
C. Terminals, suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors, located at the bottom or
where the temperature at full load in a 40°C ambient will not exceed 60°C.
D. Enclosures for free standing transformers.
1. Heavy gauge steel.
2. Indoor: drip-tight.
3. Louvers to limit coil temperature rise to the value stated above, and case temperature
rise to 50°C.
4. Finish to consist of de-greasing, phosphate cleaning, and an electrodeposit ANSI 61
gray enamel rust inhibiting plaint.
5. Wiring compartment temperature rise less that 35°C.
E. With built-in vibration dampeners to isolate the core and coils from the enclosure.
1. Neoprene vibration pads and sleeves.
F. Nameplates
1. Provide metal nameplates with stamped or engraved markings showing:
a. Connections, including taps.
b. KVA, phases, frequency.
c. Primary and secondary voltages.
d. Percent R, X, and Z.
e. Temperature rise.
f. Insulation class.
g. BIL rating.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 22 00 - 4
h. No load and full load losses.
i. Sound level rating.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Tests
1. Applied voltage test to each winding and from each winding to the core:
a. 600-volt class winding 4 kV.
2. Induced voltage test at 2 times normal voltage and 2 times the frequency for 7,200
cycles.
3. Voltage ratio and polarity.
4. Sound level, performed in a test room with ambient sound level not exceeding 24 db.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Floor, wall, platform, MCC, packaged power supply, or roof mounted, as indicated.
B. Locate where not in direct contact with building structure.
C. Install on Korfund Series F or H double-deflection mounts selected for maximum isolation.
D. Make any necessary connections to the enclosure with liquidtight flexible conduit having
neoprene gaskets and insulated ground bushings.
E. Ground the enclosure:
1. To an equipment ground conductor in the conduit.
2. To the facility ground ring.
F. Install floor mounted transformers on 3-1/2" house keeping pads.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform acceptance tests in accordance with Section 26 08 00.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. In the presence of the Engineer, provide all meters and manpower to set the transformer taps
as directed by the Engineer.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PANELBOARDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 24 16 - 1
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Related Sections:
1. Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Provision.
B. Section Includes: Panelboards serving facility feeder circuits or other utilization equipment
at the following voltage levels:
1. 208Y/120 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.
2. 480Y/277 Volts, 3 phase, 4 wire.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers:
1. IEEE C62.41 – Recommended Practice on Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power
Circuits.
B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:
1. NEMA AB 1 – Molded Case Circuit Breakers and Molded Case Switches.
2. NEMA ICS 2 – Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contractors, and Overload
Relays, Rated Not More Than 2000 Volts AC or 750 Volts DC.
3. NEMA KS 1 – Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switches (600
Volts Maximum).
4. NEMA PB 1 – Panelboards.
5. NEMA PB 1.1 – General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation, and
Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less.
C. International Electrical Testing Association:
1. NETA ATS – Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution
Equipment and Systems.
D. National Fire Protection Association:
1. NFPA 70 – National Electrical Code.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:
1. UL 67 – Safety for Panelboards.
2. UL 1449 – Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Section 01 33 20 – Contractor submittals.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity,
integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and
sizes.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PANELBOARDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 24 16 - 2
C. Product Data: Submit catalog data showing specified features of standard products.
1.4 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents.
B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of panelboards and record actual
circuiting arrangements.
C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit spare parts listing; source and current prices of
replacement parts and supplies; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals.
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with
minimum three years experience.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish and install circuit breaker panelboards as indicated in the panelboard schedules,
one-lines, and where indicated on the Drawings:
1. Service voltage and configuration per the panel schedules.
B. Short circuit rating:
1. Provide panelboards rated as indicated on the Drawings.
2. Testing method per UL 67.
3. Mark panelboards with their maximum short circuit rating at the supply voltage.
4. Panelboards shall be fully rated.
C. Provide panelboards with:
1. Dead front construction.
2. Equipped with thermal magnetic molded-case circuit breakers and/or solid-state trip
circuit breakers, with trip ratings as shown on the panel schedules.
3. Flush, surface, or motor control center mounted as indicated on the Drawings.
D. Provide spares and spaces for future circuit breakers in panels as indicated on the Drawings.
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. As identified in Section 26 00 00.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide manufacturer’s complete two-year parts and labor warranty that begins at final
acceptance of the project.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PANELBOARDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 24 16 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Eaton.
2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
B. Product Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit
panelboard.
C. Bus:
1. General:
a. Silver-plated copper
2. Phase Bus:
a. Phase busing shall be full size and height without reduction.
b. Sized in accordance with UL standards to limit temperature rise on any
current carrying part to a maximum of 50 degrees Celsius:
1) Limit current density to less than 1,000 Amps per square inch.
c. Insulate all current carrying parts from ground and phase-to-phase with a
high dielectric strength insulator.
3. Ground Bus:
a. Solidly bonded system copper.
4. Neutral Bus:
a. Provide as indicated on the Drawings.
5. Provide insulation barriers over the vertical bus behind the dead front shield to
provide increased safety during field service.
D. Lugs:
1. UL listed for copper and aluminum wire:
a. Provide lugs rated for 75 degree Celsius terminations
b. Provide bolted main lug terminations.
E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit
breakers, with common trip handle for all poles, listed as Type SWD for lighting circuits, Type
HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits, Class A ground fault interrupter circuit
breakers as indicated on Drawings. Do not use plug-in and tandem circuit breakers.
F. Cabinet Front: All cabinet front cover shall be door-in-door with piano type hinges and
quarter turn latches. Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal
directory frame, and flush lock keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Enclosure:
1. NEMA Enclosure Type in accordance with section 26 00 00 paragraph 1.9.C.
2. Minimum width: 20 inches.
3. Gutter space in accordance with the National Electric Code.
a. Minimum of 4 inches of gutter space.
4. Dead-front, no live parts when the panelboard is in service.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PANELBOARDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 24 16 - 4
5. Enclosure entire panelboard bus assembly in a corrosion resistant galvanized steel
cabinet.
6. Four-piece front to provide ease of wiring access.
7. Lockable, hinged door over the protective devices with a flush, cylinder tumbler-type
lock with catch and door pull.
a. Minimum 2 keys per each panelboard.
b. Key all panelboard locks alike.
8. Circuit directory frame and card on the inside of the door.
9. Interior design such that replacement of circuit breakers does not require disturbing
adjacent units or removal of the main bus connectors.
10. Provide NEMA 4X enclosures with a NEMA 4X stainless steel outer enclosure, with a
hinged door, and a NEMA 1 interior panelboard.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Surge Protective Devices: As specified in Section 26 43 00 and shown on the Drawings.
B. Provide each panelboard with a nameplate on the outside of the door with panel designation,
voltage, and number of phases. Nameplate shall be attached with panhead screws. Adhesive
attachment not allowed.
1. Panel Designations in ¼-inch high letters above voltage and phase in 1/8-inch high
letters; for example.
PPA-1
480/277V-3PH-4W
C. Circuit Identification Labels:
1. Provide index cards behind heavy clear plastic in cardholders on the inside of the
doors.
2. Type all information on the cards using designations in the panel schedules.
3. Laminated on both sides.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1.
B. Install filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
C. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect
circuiting changes to balance phase loads.
D. Install engraved plastic nameplates in accordance with Section 26 00 00 and 26 05 53.
E. Install spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to accessible location above ceiling.
F. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 00 00 and 26 05 26. Connect
equipment ground bars of panels in accordance with NFPA 70.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PANELBOARDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 24 16 - 5
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Section 01 40 10 – Quality Assurance/Quality Control.
B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS.
C. Perform circuit breaker inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS.
D. Perform switch inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS.
E. Perform controller inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in
panelboard to balance phase loads to within 20 percent of each other. Maintain proper
phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
3.4 SCHEDULES
A. Circuiting with the panelboard shall match the panel schedules as indicated on the Drawings.
B. Provide type-written schedule in each panelboard.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PANELBOARDS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 24 16 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TOGGLE SWITCHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 25 - 1
SECTION 26 27 25
TOGGLE SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
B. National Electrical Contractors Association.
C. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
D. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
E. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. General purpose toggle switches.
2. Special Purpose Switch (press actuated switch) for Corrosive and Wet Areas.
3. Rocker type switches.
4. Single-pole, double throw, three-position switches.
5. Dimmer switches.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section 26 27 26 “Receptacles”.
2. Division 26 Section 26 27 27 “Plates”.
3. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
C. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. National Fire Protection Association.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TOGGLE SWITCHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 25 - 2
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Toggle switches shall be specification grade, back and/or side wired, quiet action, totally
enclosed, rated 20 amperes at 120-277 VAC or as indicated on the plans, and meeting the
latest applicable Federal Specifications.
B. Toggle switches used for programmable panelboards shall be as recommended by the
panelboard manufacturer.
C. Provide switches with the operator style and contact arrangement as shown on the plans and
as required for proper operation.
D. General purpose toggle switches shall be black everywhere except in finished rooms, where
they shall be white. Special purpose switches shall have a color as shown.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Field quality-control test reports.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements.
1. Shall meet all applicable UL and CSA standards.
B. Standards.
1. Federal Specification W-S-896E.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Eaton (Cooper) Wiring Devices.
2. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
3. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
4. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
5. General Electric Co.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TOGGLE SWITCHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 25 - 3
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Comply with NEMA WD 1 and UL 20.
B. Heavy Duty Switches, 120/277 V, 20 A, back wired, Catalog Numbers are for Black Switches:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Eaton (Cooper); AH1221BK (single pole), AH1222BK (two pole), AH1223BK
(three way), AH1224BK (four way).
b. Hubbell; 1221BK (single pole), 1222BK (two pole), 1223BK (three way),
1224BK (four way).
c. Leviton; 1221-2E (single pole), 1222-2E (two pole), 1223-2E (three way),
1224-2E (four way).
d. Pass & Seymour; 20AC1-BK (single pole), 20AC2-BK (two pole), 20AC3-BK
(three way), 20AC4-BK (four way).
C. Light switches in the office areas shall be of the rectangular rocker type design (white):
1. Hubbell; DS120W (single pole), DS220W (two pole), DS320W (three way), DS420W
(four way).
2. Leviton; 5621-2W (single pole), 5622-2W (two pole), 5623-2W (three way), 5624-
2W (four way).
3. Pass & Seymour; 2621-W (single pole), 2622-W (two pole), 2623-W (three way),
2624-W (four way).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verification of Conditions:
1. Verify compliance of wiring device with dry area, wet area, corrosive area, or other
area conditions which may be listed in other sections of the specifications or on the
drawings.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Over 300 Volts
1. Where switches used in systems of more than 300 volts between conductors, are to
be ganged in outlet boxes, provide switches having no exposed live parts or use
barriers between the individual switches.
B. Mount all toggle switches four (4) feet above finished floor unless otherwise noted.
C. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall
finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are
guided by riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete,
dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors,
and cables.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT TOGGLE SWITCHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 25 - 4
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a
joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
D. Conductors:
1. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose.
Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
2. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
3. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large
enough.
E. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to
connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the
last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in
length.
5. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the
manufacturer.
6. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
7. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
8. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.
F. Dimmers:
1. Install dimmers within terms of their listing.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RECEPTACLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 26 - 1
SECTION 26 27 26
RECEPTACLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASME International
B. Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc.
C. InterNational Electrical Testing Association.
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
E. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
F. NFPA 110, Emergency and Standby Power Systems.
G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Receptacles and receptacles with integral GFCI.
2. Isolated-ground receptacles.
3. Data and communications jacks.
4. 480 Volt, three-phase receptacles.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section 26 27 25 “Toggle Switches”.
2. Division 26 Section 26 27 27 “Plates”.
3. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.
B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
C. Pigtail: Short lead used to connect a device to a branch-circuit conductor.
D. RFI: Radio-frequency interference.
E. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RECEPTACLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 26 - 2
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. National Fire Protection Association.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General purpose duplex receptacle shall be black everywhere except in finished rooms,
where they shall be white.
B. Special purpose receptacle shall have a body color as shown.
C. General purpose receptacles shall be rated 20 A at 125 VAC, NEMA configuration 5-20R,
except as otherwise required by the plans or specifications.
D. Receptacles in the following areas shall be of the ground fault interrupter type:
1. Outdoors.
2. Vaults.
3. Pipe galleries.
4. Toilet and Restrooms.
5. Reservoirs.
6. Below grade rooms and areas.
7. Other areas as required by the National Electrical Code.
E. In the office areas of the plant, all receptacles shall be of the rectangular designer type.
F. On 20 A circuits with a single duplex receptacle, outside, in corrosive areas, or as indicated
on the plans, provide receptacles rated 20 A at 125 VAC, NEMA configuration 5-20R.
G. Where a 125 volt, 30 A receptacle is shown on the plans, use NEMA configuration 5-30R.
H. Where a 250 volt, 20, 30 or 50 A receptacle is shown on the plans, use NEMA configuration
6-20R, 6-30R or 6-50R, respectively.
I. Three-phase receptacles shall be of the 3-pole, 4-wire type with a separate grounding contact.
J. 480 Volt receptacles shall be of the weatherproof type with spring door.
K. Furnish one matching plug for each three-phase power receptacle.
L. All receptacles powered from a UPS panelboard or identified as IG (Isolated Ground) shall:
1. Be orange in color.
2. The isolated ground conductor must be a dedicated conductor the runs from the IG
terminal of the receptacle directly to the panelboard.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Field quality-control test reports.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RECEPTACLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 26 - 3
D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For wiring devices to include in all manufacturers' packing
label warnings and instruction manuals that include labeling conditions.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements.
1. Shall meet all applicable UL and CSA standards.
B. Standards.
1. Federal Specification W-C-596.
C. Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment: Match plug configuration.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following
manufacturers' names are used in other Part 2 articles:
1. Eaton (Cooper) Wiring Devices.
2. Crouse-Hinds.
3. General Electric.
4. Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems (Hubbell).
5. Interlink.
6. Leviton Mfg. Company Inc. (Leviton).
7. Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices & Accessories (Pass & Seymour).
8. Russellstol.
9. Woodhead.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Convenience Duplex Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6
configuration 5-20R, and UL 498. Receptacles shall have back wire and side wire option; back
wire option shall have a screw tightened pressure plate to hold the wire (catalog numbers
are for black receptacles).
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Eaton (Cooper); 5352BK.
b. Hubbell; CR5362BK.
c. Leviton; 5352BK.
d. Pass & Seymour; 5362BK.
B. Convenience Receptacles, 250 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6 configuration
6-20R, and UL 498. Receptacles shall have back wire and side wire option; back wire option
shall have a screw tightened pressure plate to hold the wire (catalog numbers are for black
receptacles).

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RECEPTACLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 26 - 4
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Eaton (Cooper); AH5462BK.
b. Hubbell; HBL5462BK.
c. Leviton; 5462BK.
d. Pass & Seymour; 5862BK.
C. [Isolated-Ground, Duplex Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 configuration 5-20R, and UL 498 (catalog numbers are for orange receptacles).
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Hubbell; IG5362
b. Leviton; 5362-IG.
c. Pass & Seymour; IG5362.
3. Description: Straight blade; equipment grounding contacts shall be connected only
to the green grounding screw terminal of the device and with inherent electrical
isolation from mounting strap. Isolation shall be integral to receptacle construction
and not dependent on removable parts.]
D. 30A and 50A, 125V and 250V, single phase, single receptacles: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6, and UL 498 (catalog numbers are for black receptacles).
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Eaton (Cooper); 1233 (30A, 125V, configuration 5-30R), 1234 (30A, 250V,
configuration 6-30R), 1254 (50A, 250V, configuration 6-50R).
b. Hubbell; HBL9308 (30A, 125V, configuration 5-30R), HBL9330 (30A, 250V,
configuration 6-30R), HBL9367 (50A, 250V, configuration 6-50R).
c. Leviton; 5371 (30A, 125V, configuration 5-30R), 5372 (30A, 250V,
configuration 6-30R), 5374 (50A, 250V, configuration 6-50R).
d. Pass & Seymour; 3802 (30A, 125V, configuration 5-30R), 3801 (30A, 250V,
configuration 6-30R), 3804 (50A, 250V, configuration 6-50R).
E. GFCI RECEPTACLES
1. General Description: Straight blade, feed-through type: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6, UL 498, and UL 943, Class A.
a. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A, back and side wired
(catalog numbers are for black receptacles) Products: Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide one of the following:
1) Eaton (Cooper); VGF20BK.
2) Hubbell; GF20BKLA.
3) Pass & Seymour; 2095BK.
b. Duplex GFCI Convenience Receptacles for use in offices and other finished
areas, 125 V, 20 A, back and side wired (catalog numbers are for white
receptacles) Products Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one
of the following:
1) EatonCooper; VGF20W.
2) Hubbell; GF20WLA
3) Pass & Seymour; 2095W.
F. Data and communications Jacks.
1. Process Network Jacks - panel/enclosure mounted

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RECEPTACLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 26 - 5
a. Network Jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA 4 rating (with
closure cap).
b. Mounting of network jacks in control panels shall be accomplished using
bulkhead connectors and environmental enclosure caps, which are
permanently attached to the bulkhead fitting.
c. Network jacks shall have RJ-45 connections on both sides of connector
(bulkhead pass through) allowing for direct connection to the network switch
and computer with standard patch cords. No punch down PC Board PC board
connections shall be allowed.
d. Manufactured by Woodhead Connectivity RJLNXX
2. Process Network Jacks - Conduit Body mounted.
a. Network Jacks located in process areas shall have a NEMA 4 rating (with
closure cap).
b. Mounting of network jacks in conduit bodies’ adapter (with Minifast
connector) shall be accomplished using conduit body insert and
environmental enclosure caps.
c. PC board connections shall not be allowed.
d. Furnish 10 RJ-45 to minifast connector patch cable 3 feet in length.
e. Manufactured by Interlink BT RSS series.
3. Network/Phone Jacks
a. Network Jacks located in computer rooms shall be installed per the
installation details in the drawings.
b. Standard Decora wall plates shall be used with QuickPort modules and
inserts.
c. Plugs shall be color coded as indicated in the installation details in the
drawings.
d. Manufactured by Leviton Quickport series.
G. 480-volt, three-phase, four-wire, 30 A receptacles:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Crouse-Hinds ARE3423.
b. Hubbell Hubbellock® HBL21420.
c. T&B Russellstol™ DF3404FRAB.
H. 480-volt, three-phase, four-wire, 60 A receptacles:
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a. Crouse-Hinds AREA6425.
b. Hubbell Hubbellock® HBL26410 or HBL26420 with HBL26401 box and
HBL26404 adapter.
c. T&B Russellstol™ DF6404FRAB.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Mount all weatherproof outlets horizontally.
B. Mount vertical receptacles with equipment ground opening down.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RECEPTACLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 26 - 6
C. Mount horizontal receptacles with neutral opening up.
D. Three-phase receptacles shall be consistent with respect to phase connection of receptacle
terminals. Errors in phasing shall be corrected at the bus, and not at the receptacle.
E. Mount all receptacles at the following heights unless otherwise noted:
1. Office and finished areas twelve (12) inches above finished floor.
2. Process and production areas four (4) feet above finished floor.
F. Coordination with Other Trades:
1. Take steps to insure that devices and their boxes are protected. Do not place wall
finish materials over device boxes and do not cut holes for boxes with routers that are
guided by riding against outside of the boxes.
2. Keep outlet boxes free of plaster, drywall joint compound, mortar, cement, concrete,
dust, paint, and other material that may contaminate the raceway system, conductors,
and cables.
3. Install device boxes in brick or block walls so that the cover plate does not cross a
joint unless the joint is troweled flush with the face of the wall.
4. Install wiring devices after all wall preparation, including painting, is complete.
G. Conductors:
1. Do not strip insulation from conductors until just before they are spliced or
terminated on devices.
2. Strip insulation evenly around the conductor using tools designed for the purpose.
Avoid scoring or nicking of solid wire or cutting strands from stranded wire.
3. The length of free conductors at outlets for devices shall meet provisions of NFPA 70,
Article 300, without pigtails.
4. Existing Conductors:
a. Cut back and pigtail, or replace all damaged conductors.
b. Straighten conductors that remain and remove corrosion and foreign matter.
c. Pigtailing existing conductors is permitted provided the outlet box is large
enough.
H. Device Installation:
1. Replace all devices that have been in temporary use during construction or that show
signs that they were installed before building finishing operations were complete.
2. Keep each wiring device in its package or otherwise protected until it is time to
connect conductors.
3. Do not remove surface protection, such as plastic film and smudge covers, until the
last possible moment.
4. Connect devices to branch circuits using pigtails that are not less than 6 inches in
length.
5. Use a torque screwdriver when a torque is recommended or required by the
manufacturer.
6. When conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are installed on 15- or 20-A circuits, splice
No. 12 AWG pigtails for device connections.
7. Tighten unused terminal screws on the device.
8. When mounting into metal boxes, remove the fiber or plastic washers used to hold
device mounting screws in yokes, allowing metal-to-metal contact.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RECEPTACLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 26 - 7
I. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
J. Adjust locations of floor service outlets to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Receptacle Identification shall comply with Division 26 Section "Plates”, and conductor
Identification shall comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.
1. Test Instruments: Use instruments that comply with UL 1436.
2. Test Instrument for Convenience Receptacles: Digital wiring analyzer with digital
readout or illuminated LED indicators of measurement.
B. Tests for Convenience Receptacles:
1. Line Voltage: Acceptable range is 105 to 132 V.
2. Percent Voltage Drop under 15-A Load: A value of 6 percent or higher is not
acceptable.
3. Ground Impedance: Values of up to 2Ω are acceptable.
4. GFCI Trip: Test for tripping values specified in UL 1436 and UL 943.
5. Using the test plug, verify that the device and its outlet box are securely mounted.
6. The tests shall be diagnostic, indicating damaged conductors, high resistance at the
circuit breaker, poor connections, inadequate fault current path, defective devices, or
similar problems. Correct circuit conditions, remove malfunctioning units and
replace with new ones, and retest as specified above.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RECEPTACLES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 26 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 27 - 1
SECTION 26 27 27
PLATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. National Electrical Manufacturers Association.
B. NFPA 70, National Electrical Code.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
1.3 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the following:
1. Indoor and outdoor plates for toggle switches.
2. Indoor and outdoor plates for receptacles.
3. Covers for floor boxes.
4. NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X plates.
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Division 26 Section 26 27 25 “Toggle Switches”.
2. Division 26 Section 26 27 26 “Receptacles”.
3. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. National Fire Protection Association.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
C. Engraving Schedule:
1. Description of materials and process used for premarking wall plates.
2. Furnish complete engraving schedule for engraved nameplates.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 27 - 2
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B. Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Use square or rectangular metal plates for all applications unless otherwise indicated. Metal
plates shall be steel hot-dip galvanized, cast aluminum, sherardized, or stainless steel.
B. Use stainless steel type 302 plates, 0.040" thick, in all plant and process areas.
C. Use cast iron or cast aluminum plates for cast device boxes, material to match that of the box.
D. Plates for receptacles installed outdoors or in wet or damp areas shall have gasketed stainless
steel or cast aluminum flip covers. Plates shall be U.L. approved for weatherproof locations
with plug inserted.
1. For standard duplex receptacles:
a. Crouse Hinds WLRD-1.
b. Pass & Seymour WPD8.
2. For GFCI (ground fault) receptacles:
a. Pass & Seymour WPH26.
E. Plates for switches installed outdoors or in wet or damp areas shall have gasketed stainless
steel or cast aluminum flip covers.
1. At outdoor locations shall be rain tight, gasketed:
a. Crouse-Hinds DS185 cast aluminum.
b. Pass & Seymour WP2 stainless steel.
F. Plates for special purpose switches (press action switches) in corrosive and wet areas
requiring NEMA 4 or NEMA 4X enclosures shall be gray neoprene weatherproof.
1. Cooper 2881G.
G. Plates for receptacles installed indoors in dry areas shall be:
1. Stainless steel.
a. Standard Duplex Receptacles Arraignments:
1) Pass & Seymour Type SS8.
2) Pass & Seymour Type SS82.
3) Pass & Seymour Type SS83.
4) Pass & Seymour Type SS84.
5) Pass & Seymour Type SS85.
6) Pass & Seymour Type SS86.
H. Decorator Receptacle Arraignments, for use with GFCI Receptacle:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 27 - 3
1. Pass & Seymour Type SS26.
I. Plates for switches installed indoors in dry areas shall be:
1. Stainless steel.
a. Standard Toggle Switch Arraignments:
1) Pass & Seymour Type SS1.
2) Pass & Seymour Type SS2.
3) Pass & Seymour Type SS3.
4) Pass & Seymour Type SS4.
5) Pass & Seymour Type SS5.
6) Pass & Seymour Type SS6.
b. Decorator Switch Arraignments:
1) Pass & Seymour Type SS26.
J. Nylon plates for receptacles and switches installed indoors in offices and finished areas:
1. Nylon plate shall match color of receptacle or switch.
K. Covers for floor boxes shall be the checker plate type.

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Insure all plates make a firm seal with wall for recessed mounted devices.
1. Outside edges of plates must conform with building lines.
B. Device Plates: Do not use oversized or extra-deep plates. Repair wall finishes and remount
outlet boxes when standard device plates do not fit flush or do not cover rough wall opening.
C. Provide plates for all outlet boxes and fittings of all systems except at outlets where fixture
canopies are used.
3.2 IDENTIFICATION
A. Comply with Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Plates for switches and receptacles shall be engraved where possible.
a. Engraved plates shall be in lieu of separate nameplates.
b. Plates shall be engraved with the following information:
1) Area served.
2) Circuit fed from.
c. Engraving shall be treated to improve visibility and, except for stainless steel
plates, to prevent corrosion.
d. Characters shall be block letter pantograph engraved with a minimum
character height of 1/8".
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PLATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 27 27 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 15 - 1
SECTION 26 28 15
SAFETY SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Enclosed safety switches; fusible and nonfusible.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.
2. Division 26 Section “Electrical Identification”.
3. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. National Fire Protection Association.
B. System Description
1. Furnish and install heavy-duty type safety switches as indicated on the plans and in
the specifications.
2. Provide safety switches with the number of poles, voltage, current, and horsepower
ratings as required by the load.
3. Furnish and install a local horsepower rated safety switch for each and every motor
as identified on the drawings.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data:
1. Catalog Cut Sheets
2. Complete data sheets indicating:
a. Manufacturer.
b. Type of enclosure.
c. Voltage rating.
d. Current rating.
e. Horsepower rating.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 15 - 2
f. Fused or Non-fused.
g. Cross-referenced to device table in drawings.
h. Complete dimensional and weight information.
C. Operating Manuals
1. Furnish complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for
care and maintenance of equipment of every nature furnished and/or installed under
this section.
a. Complete electrical ratings.
b. Complete renewal parts list.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements.
1. All safety switches shall be heavy-duty type and shall comply with the following
standards.
a. NEMA KS1-1990 for Type HD.
b. UL 98.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Eaton.
2. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Switch Interiors
1. With the switch door open, the switchblades shall be fully visible in the "OFF"
position.
2. All current carrying parts shall be completely plated on all surfaces.
3. Arc shields shall be removable to allow access to the movable and stationary contacts.
4. Line and load connections lugs:
a. Front accessible.
b. Front removable.
c. UL listed for 60 or 75 C copper conductors.
B. Switch Mechanism
1. Shall be of the quick make, quick break designs, so that the parting contacts cannot
be prohibited or restrained from moving by the operating handle once the contacts
have started to move in either the "open" or "closed" direction.
2. Operating handle must be an integral part of the enclosure frame and in no way part
of the door or cover.
3. Provisions shall be made for padlocking the switch in either the "ON" or "OFF"
position.
a. "OFF" position as a standard feature with a minimum of three locks.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 15 - 3
b. "ON" position by drilling out a center punched marking in the handle guide
for one lock.
4. Dual cover interlock to prevent opening of the switch door in the "ON" position and
to prevent closing the switch mechanism with the door open.
5. Handle position shall clearly indicate whether the switch is "ON" or "OFF."
C. Ratings
1. All switches shall be UL horsepower rated for AC and/or DC with the rating not less
than the load served.
2. Fused switches.
a. Shall have a UL approved method of field conversion from standard Class H
fuse spacing to Class J fuse spacing.
1) Ratings 100 A thru 600 A at 240 Volts.
2) Ratings 30 A thru 600 A at 600 Volts.
b. Shall accept Class R fuses and shall have a UL listed rejection feature present
to reject all fuses except Class R when Class R fuses are shown on the plans.
c. Minimum UL listed short circuit ratings:
1) 200,000 Amps RMS symmetrical when used with Class R or Class J
fuses.
2) 10,000 Amps RMS symmetrical when used with Class H fuses.
3) 200,000 Amps RMS symmetrical when used with Class L fuses in the
800 and 1200 ampere size.
d. Fuse clips shall be spring reinforced and plated.
D. Enclosures
1. Enclosures must as a minimum meet the requirements for the area designation as
defined and listed:
a. In Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Provisions.
b. On the contract drawings.
c. In case of a conflict, the more stringent enclosure standard shall be used.
2. NEMA 1 enclosures:
a. General purpose enclosures with hinged doors.
b. Sheet steel.
c. Manufacture’s standard gray baked enamel finish electrostatically deposited.
3. NEMA 3R enclosures:
a. Doors shall be securable in the open position.
b. Provisions for bolt on hubs or Meyer hubs.
c. Constructed of galvanized steel.
d. Manufacture’s standard gray baked enamel finish UV resistant
electrostatically deposited.
4. NEMA 12 enclosure.
a. Furnish without knockouts.
b. Hinged covers fully gasketed to assure a dust-tight enclosure.
c. Constructed of galvanized steel.
d. Manufacture’s standard gray baked enamel finish electrostatically deposited.
5. NEMA 4, 4X and 5 enclosures.
a. Furnished without knockouts.
b. Stainless steel enclosures and hardware.
c. Door full gasketed and held closed under pressure by latches.
6. NEMA 7 and 9 enclosures.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SAFETY SWITCHES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 15 - 4
a. Shall be used in Hazardous Areas as indicated on drawings.
b. Shall be rated for the Hazardous Classification indicated.
E. Neutral and Grounding Provisions
1. Provisions shall be made for a field installed insulated groundable neutral kit.
a. The neutral kit shall be furnished where indicated on the contract drawings.
2. Equipment ground kits shall be furnished for each and every switch.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive safety switches for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Provide all mounting brackets, stands, hardware as necessary to completely support the
switches at the locations indicated on the drawings.
1. Finish and provide materials for all brackets, stands and hardware shall match the
switch installed thereon.
B. When possible, mount switches rigidly to exposed building structure or equipment structural
members.
C. When mounting NEMA 4, 4X, 5 enclosures maintain a minimum of 0.25 inch air space
between the enclosure and the supporting surface.
D. Use Meyers hubs or bolt-on hubs for all conduit penetrations on NEMA 3R, 4, 4X, and 5
enclosures.
E. Connect equipment grounding conductors only to the approved equipment ground kit.
F. Furnish and install a nameplate for each and every safety switch.
1. In conformance with Division 26 Section “Electrical Identification”.
2. Shall identify voltage, circuit, fuse size, and equipment served on the nameplate.
G. When mounting switches on Unistrut type channel lagged to walls, channel must be run
vertically behind the switch.
H. Switches must be mounted plumb and level to within ±1/32" over their longest dimension.
3.3 CLEANING
A. All switches must be vacuumed clean after installation and prior to installation of any wire.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 16 - 1
SECTION 26 28 16
LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Requirements for Circuit Breakers.
a. Molded case circuit breakers.
b. Molded case switches.
c. Motor circuit protectors.
d. Low voltage metal enclosed (large air iron frame) circuit breakers.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.
2. Division 26 Section “Electrical Identification”.
3. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers
1. U.L.:
a. U.L. 489 - Branch Circuit and Service Circuit Breakers.
b. U.L. 1087 - Molded Case Switches.
2. NEMA:
a. AB-1 - Standards Publication Molded Case Circuit Breakers.
3. Federal Specifications:
a. WC -375A - Circuit Breaker, Molded Case, Branch Circuit and Service.
B. ANSI Large Air Iron Frame Circuit Breakers
1. NEMA:
a. SG3 - Low Voltage Power Circuit Breakers.
2. ANSI:
a. C37.13 - American National Standards for Low Voltage AC Power Circuit
Breakers used in Enclosures (IEEE Std 20).
b. C37.16 - Preferred Ratings, Related Requirements and Application
Recommendations for Low-Voltage Power Circuit Breakers and AC Power
Circuit Protectors.
c. ANSI C37-50 - Test Procedures for Low-Voltage AC Power Circuit Breakers
used in Enclosures

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 16 - 2
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. NEC: National Electrical Code.
2. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish molded case, insulated case, power type, or motor circuit protector circuit breakers
as indicated on the drawings and connect to form a completed system.
B. Circuit breakers must be of the current and voltage ratings indicated and be capable of
interrupting the available fault current.
C. Where circuit breakers are used as disconnects for miscellaneous over-current protection,
provide automatic type enclosed units with the indicated ratings and complying with
applicable requirements (including manufacturer) for circuit breakers as specified.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data:
1. Catalog Cut Sheets
2. Complete data sheets indicating:
a. Manufacturer.
b. Type of enclosure.
c. Voltage rating.
d. Current rating.
e. Amperage rating.
f. Complete dimensional and weight information.
C. Operating Manuals
1. Furnish complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for
care and maintenance of equipment of every nature furnished and/or installed under
this section.
a. Complete electrical ratings.
b. Complete renewal parts list.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. All circuit breakers shall be 100% warranted for a period of not less than two years from the
date of final acceptance by the ENGINEER.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 16 - 3
1. Eaton.
2. Square D.
3. GE.
4. Siemens.
5. ABB.
6. Cutler-Hammer.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Breakers General
1. All breakers shall have temperature insensitive trips.
B. Molded Case Circuit Breakers
1. Molded case circuit breakers for distribution panelboards and motor control centers.
a. Basic circuit breaker must be trip free with a quick-make, quick-break
mechanism.
b. Trip indicating handle position.
c. Frame sizes:
1) 150 Amp.
2) 400 Amp.
3) 600 Amp.
4) 800 Amp.
5) 1,200 Amp.
d. Trip mechanism as indicated on drawings:
1) Thermal magnetic.
2) Thermal high magnetic.
3) Solid State.
a) Adjustable long time pickup-, ampere setting to determine the
value of current that the breaker will carry indefinitely.
b) Adjustable long time delay- varies the time it will take the
breakers to trip under sustained overload.
c) Adjustable short time pickup- controls the level of high
current the breaker will carry for short periods of time.
d) Adjustable short time delay- controls the length of time the
breaker will carry a high current without tripping.
e) Adjustable instantaneous pickup- controls level at which
immediate tripping of breaker occurs.
i. Instantaneous trip function may be eliminated on
main breakers, refer to drawings.
f) Adjustable ground fault pickup- controls the level at which the
breaker will trip under a ground fault condition (where shown
on the drawings).
g) Adjustable ground fault delay- controls the time that a ground
fault can exist without tripping the breaker (where ground
fault feature is shown on the drawings).
h) Long time pickup indicator- provides a visual indication that
the breaker is experiencing an overload condition.
i) Fault indicators shall be either mechanical or powered from a
separate battery and charger that shall be an integral
component of the switchboard.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 16 - 4
i. Indicator for overload fault trip.
ii. Indicator for short circuit fault trip.
iii. Indicator for ground fault trip.
2. Provide non-automatic trip breakers (molded case switches) only where specifically
indicated on the contract drawings or in the specifications.
C. ANSI Metal Enclosed (Large Air Iron Frame) Circuit Breakers
1. Shall be used exclusively in:
a. 600 V switchgear.
2. The individually mounted low-voltage power circuit breakers shall consist of an
electrically and mechanically trip-free circuit breaker element.
3. The circuit breaker shall be of the draw out type capable of being racked to the
disconnect position with the door closed.
a. Interlocks shall be provided to prevent connecting or disconnecting the
circuit breaker unless the breaker is in the open position.
b. The breaker shall be prevented from being closed during any racking
operation.
c. A test position shall be provided to permit operating the breaker while it is
disconnected from the power circuit.
4. Circuit breakers shall be manually or electrically operated as indicated on the
drawings.
a. Control voltage for electrically operated circuit breakers shall be as indicated
on the drawings.
5. Overcurrent trip device shall be solid-state type with the following functions:
a. Adjustable long time pickup-, ampere setting to determine the value of
current that the breaker will carry indefinitely.
b. Adjustable long time delay- varies the time it will take the breakers to trip
under sustained overload.
c. Adjustable short time pickup- controls the level of high current the breaker
will carry for short periods of time.
d. Adjustable short time delay- controls the length of time the breaker will carry
a high current without tripping.
e. Adjustable instantaneous pickup- controls level at which immediate tripping
of breaker occurs.
1) Instantaneous trip function may be eliminated on main breakers,
refer to drawings.
f. Adjustable ground fault pickup- controls the level at which the breaker will
trip under a ground fault condition (where shown on the drawings).
g. Adjustable ground fault delay- controls the time that a ground fault can exist
without tripping the breaker (where ground fault feature is shown on the
drawings).
h. Long time pickup indicator- provides a visual indication that the breaker is
experiencing an overload condition.
i. Fault indicators shall be either mechanical or powered from a separate
battery and charger that shall be an integral component of the switchboard.
1) Indicator for overload fault trip.
2) Indicator for short circuit fault trip.
3) Indicator for ground fault trip.
6. Each circuit breaker shall be equipped with the following accessories as required for
proper operation of the control system.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 16 - 5
a. Shunt trip.
b. Overload bell alarm.
c. Lockout Device.
d. Auxiliary Switch:
1) Number of contacts as required plus a minimum of one spare.
2) Type “a” normally open.
3) Type “b” normally closed.
7. Minimum insulation, dielectric withstand ratings:
a. Breaker - 2.2 KV.
b. Control wiring - 1.5 KV.
c. Closing motor - 0.9 KV.
8. Available in the following frame sizes:
a. 800 Amps.
b. 1,600 Amps.
c. 2,000 Amps.
d. 3,200 Amps.
e. 4,000 Amps.
f. 5,000 Amps.
9. Operating Times:
a. Electrically closing time from energizing closing circuit until contacts touch, 5
cycles max.
b. Maximum clearing time with instantaneous overcurrent trip 3 cycles.
c. Maximum clearing time with shunt trip 3.5 cycles.
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Enclosures
1. Furnish enclosures consistent with the area classification and NEMA designation as
indicated on the plans and specifications.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive safety switches for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Arrange all breakers to correspond exactly with the schedules.
B. In damp or wet areas, mount the enclosures on Unistrut type mounting channels that run
vertically so that water and moisture may flow freely behind enclosure.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Low Voltage Molded Case and Insulated Case Circuit Breakers:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 16 - 6
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage and alignment.
d. Circuit breaker shall be checked for proper mounting, conductor size and
feeder designation.
e. Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation.
f. Check tightness of connection with torque wrench in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
g. Inspect operating mechanism, contacts, and arc chutes in unsealed units.
2. Electrical tests for breakers in excess of 200 Amp trip ratings:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low
resistance ohmmeter.
b. Time-current characteristic tests shall be performed by passing 300% rated
current through each pole separately. Trip time shall be determined:
1) Determine long-time pickup.
2) Determine short-time pickup.
c. Instantaneous pickup current shall be determined by run-or pulse method:
1) Clearing times should be within 4 cycles or less.
d. Insulation resistance shall be determined pole to pole, across pole and pole to
ground.
1) Circuit breaker shall be closed.
2) Test voltage shall be 1000 volts dc applied for one minute.
e. Perform adjustments for final setting in accordance with the Short Circuit and
Coordination Study.
3. Test values:
a. Contact resistance shall be compared to adjacent poles and similar breakers:
1) Deviations of more than 50% shall be investigated.
b. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 MΩ.
c. All trip times shall fall within manufacturer’s published time current curves:
1) Circuit breakers exceeding maximum time shall be replaced.
d. Instantaneous pickup current levels should be within 20% of manufacturer’s
published values.
B. Low Voltage Air Circuit Breaker ANSI Class Breakers:
1. Visual and mechanical inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage and alignment and grounding.
d. Verity that all maintenance devices are available for servicing and operating
the breaker.
e. Verify the unit is clean.
f. Verify the arc chutes are intact.
g. Perform all mechanical operator and contact alignment tests in accordance
with manufacturer’s instruction manual.
h. Check cell fit and element alignment.
i. Check tightness of connections using a calibrated torque wrench.
j. Verify racking mechanism operation.
k. Lubrications requirements.
1) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current-carrying parts.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 16 - 7
2) Verify appropriate lubrication on moving and sliding surfaces.
2. Electrical tests:
a. Perform resistance measurements through bolted connections with a low
resistance ohmmeter.
b. An insulation resistance test shall be performed on each pole, phase-to-phase
and phase to ground with the circuit breaker closed, and across each open
pole:
1) Test voltage shall be 1000 volts dc applied for one minute.
c. Perform a contact/pole-resistance test.
d. Make adjustments to the trip settings in accordance with the Short Circuit and
coordination study.
e. Minimum pickup current shall be determined by primary current injection.
f. Long time delay shall be determined by primary injection at 300% pickup
current.
g. Short time pickup and time delay shall be determined by primary injection of
current.
h. Instantaneous pickup current shall be determined by primary injection.
i. Trip unit reset characteristics shall be verified.
j. Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup
indicators, zone interlocking, electrical close and trip operation, trip-free,
antipump function, trip unit battery condition, and reset all trip logs and
indicators.
k. Verify operation of charging mechanism.
3. Test Values:
a. Contact resistance shall be determined in micro-ohms:
1) Any values exceeding 200 µΩ or any values which deviate from
adjacent poles or similar breakers by more than 50% should be
investigated.
b. Insulation resistance shall not be less than 50 MΩ.
c. Pickup currents and trip times should fall within manufacturer’s published
time-current characteristic tolerance ban.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LOW-VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 16 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD PAD MOUNT SWTICHGEAR
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 17 - 1
SECTION 26 28 17
MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD PAD MOUNT SWTICHGEAR
(OWNER PROVIDED – FOR REFERECE ONLY)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF MATERIALS
A. The supplier shall provide an S&C PME-113C per the configuration shown below.
1.2 CONSTRUCTION SUBMITTALS – REVIEW OF PROPOSED EQUIPMENT.
A. The manufacturer shall submit prior to construction the following documents for the owner
and the engineer to review.
1. List of drawings included with the submittals. A list of all components with
manufactures model numbers.
2. Front view equipment elevation including entrance, exit, conduits locations and
lockout/tag out locations.
3. Floor plans
4. Foundation termination drawings
5. Top view
6. Control Schematic Diagrams
7. Single Line Diagrams
8. Three-Line Diagrams
9. Nameplate Schematic to include Short Circuit Rating, Voltage, BIL level, & Continuous
Current Rating, Equipment Serial Number and Manufacturers Name, Address and
Date of Assembly.
10. Power and control terminal sizes.

END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MEDIUM VOLTAGE LOAD PAD MOUNT SWTICHGEAR
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 28 17 - 2
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 1
SECTION 26 29 13
MOTOR STARTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section includes the following motor starters rated 600 V and less:
1. Full-voltage magnetic.
2. Contactors.
B. For installation in motor control centers, control panels and as standalone devices.
C. Related Section:
1. Division 26 Section "Variable Frequency Drives" for general-purpose, ac, adjustable-
frequency, pulse-width-modulated drives.
2. Division 26 Section “Low Voltage Motor Control Centers”.
3. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.
4. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. CPT: Control power transformer.
B. MCCB: Molded-case circuit breaker.
C. MCP: Motor circuit protector.
D. N.C.: Normally closed.
E. N.O.: Normally open.
F. SCR: Silicon-controlled rectifier.
G. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
2. National Fire Protection Association.
a. NFPA 70; National Electrical Code.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. General Requirements

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 2
1. Starters shall be incorporated into motor control centers, individual starters,
combination starters, and control panels as reflected on the drawings and noted in
the specifications.
2. Ratings, components, and features shall be as shown on the single-line diagrams,
control diagrams, details and schedules on the drawings.
3. All components shall be newly manufactured and of the latest construction series of
the manufacturer.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 and 26 00 00.
B. Product Data
1. Manufacturer.
2. Technical information.
3. Complete nameplate schedule.
4. Dimensions:
a. Overall length.
b. Overall width.
c. Overall height.
5. Complete Bill of Material.
6. List of recommended spare parts.
7. Painting and finish procedures and materials list.
8. Manufacturer and Amperage rating for the following:
a. Overload relays.
b. Motor circuit protectors.
c. Circuit breakers.
d. Fuses.
e. Protective relays.
9. Confirmation that the overload relay class meets the requirements of the equipment
and motor suppliers for each starter.
10. Confirmation that any reduced voltage solid-state starters are matched to the
respective driven loads at the installed conditions and will reliably accelerate the
driven load.
C. Shop Drawings
1. Layout drawings.
2. Provide fully dimensioned and to scale layout drawings which include:
a. All equipment furnished.
b. Interfaces with other equipment.
c. Allowable top and bottom conduit windows.
d. Nameplate legends.
e. Short-circuit current rating of integrated unit.
3. Elementary schematic diagrams.
4. One diagram for each and every starter and/or contactor.
5. Wiring diagrams showing wire numbers for all internal control wires.
6. Show lug sizes, type, and manufacturer based on the cable size as specified or
indicated on the project drawings.
D. Operation and Maintenance Data

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 3
1. Submit complete operating and maintenance instructions presenting full details for
care and maintenance of equipment of every nature furnished and/or installed under
this section. Manuals shall include the following:
2. Electrical ratings
a. Phase.
b. Wire.
c. Voltage.
d. Ampacity.
3. Complete Bill of Material.
4. Manufacturer’s operating and maintenance instructions for the starters and/or
contactors and all component parts, including;
a. Overload relays and heater elements.
b. Protective devices (fuses, breakers, protective relays, etc.).
c. Pilot devices.
5. Complete renewal parts list.
6. 11” x 17” prints of final as-built record drawings.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements
1. Comply with NFPA 70, National Electric Code.
2. All portions and components of the starters and/or contactors shall bear UL or other
nationally recognized independent testing laboratory labels.
3. Certifications:
a. The manufacturer shall certify that the reduced voltage solid state starter will
reliably control the acceleration and of the driven load at the installed
conditions.
b. Failure of the manufacturer to provide said certification shall be interpreted
as to mean that the manufacturer has agreed that the reduced voltage solid
state starter is matched to the driven load at the installed conditions and will
function without fault. If the reduced voltage solid state starter fails to
perform as desired the manufacturer shall replace or modify the reduced
voltage solid state starter in order to achieve the desired operational
conditions, as directed by the Engineer, at no additional costs to the Owner.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store motor starters indoors in clean, dry space with uniform temperature to prevent
condensation. Protect motor starters from exposure to dirt, fumes, water, corrosive
substances, and physical damage.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Environmental Limitations: The equipment shall withstand the seismic forces defined for
this project as outlined by the Uniform Building Code. The seismic forces defined for this
project and the other project conditions are:
1. See section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions” for the project conditions.
2. Ambient Temperature: See section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions” for the
project conditions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 4
3. Altitude: See section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions” for the project
conditions.
4. Humidity: See section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions” for the project
conditions.
B. Interruption of Existing Electrical Systems: Do not interrupt electrical systems in facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary electrical service according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify [Engineer] [Construction Manager] [Owner] no fewer than [three] <Insert
number> days in advance of proposed interruption of electrical systems.
2. Indicate method of providing temporary utilities.
3. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical systems without [Engineer's]
[Construction Manager's] [Owner's] written permission.
4. Comply with NFPA 70E.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of motor starters with other construction including
conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances
and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete bases with actual equipment provided. Cast
anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are
referenced in Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.
1.10 SCHEDULING
A. Reduced Voltage Soft Starters
1. RVSS start-up and testing by manufacturer after connection to equipment.
2. RVSS training by manufacturer after start-up and testing, and prior to plant
commissioning.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Provide a full two year warranty that shall cover all parts and labor needed to replace any
components associated with the starters and/or contactors for a period of two years from the
complete and final acceptance of the total project.
1. Warranty requirements that require the return of parts and Owner installation of said
parts will not be accepted.
1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents and corresponding
equipment number.
1. Control Power Fuses: Two spare fuses of each size and type.
2. Indicating Lights: Two of each type and color installed.
3. Auxiliary Contacts: Furnish one spare(s) for each size and type of magnetic controller
installed.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 5
4. Power Contacts: Furnish [three] <Insert number> spares for each size and type of
magnetic contactor installed.
5. One of each type of circuit board used in the solid state starters:
a. Control board.
b. Power board.
c. Bridge rectifier.
d. Inverter module.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FULL-VOLTAGE STARTERS AND CONTACTORS
A. General Requirements for Full-Voltage Starters: Comply with NEMA ICS 2, general purpose,
Class A.
B. Magnetic Starters: Full voltage, across the line, electrically held.
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
a. Eaton Electrical Inc.; Cutler-Hammer Business Unit.
b. General Electric Company; GE Consumer & Industrial - Electrical Distribution.
c. Rockwell Automation, Inc.; Allen-Bradley brand.
d. Square D; a brand of Schneider Electric.
e. <Insert manufacturer's name>.
2. Rating: The minimum size shall be a NEMA size 1. Verify motor ratings and
coordinate starter and overload trip rating with actual horsepower and nameplate
current ratings of motor installed.
a. If motors provided are different in horsepower rating than those specified or
indicated on the drawings, provide starters of sufficient size to accommodate
the specific motors furnished.
3. Configuration: Nonreversing or Reversing as required for the application and as
shown on the drawings.
4. Contactor Coils: Pressure-encapsulated type, and with coil transient suppressors as
required for voltage or size of the coil.
a. Operating Voltage: Depending on contactor NEMA size and line-voltage
rating, manufacturer's standard matching control power or line voltage.
5. Power Contacts: Totally enclosed, double-break, silver-cadmium oxide; assembled to
allow inspection and replacement without disturbing line or load wiring.
6. Magnetic contactors shall be factory adjusted and chatter free.
7. Control Circuits: Normally the control voltage will be 120V ac, however 24V dc, may
be used as required for manufacturer’s special applications, and as shown on the
drawings. If other control voltages are used they shall be as shown on the drawings.
a. 120V ac shall be obtained from integral CPT, with primary and secondary
fuses, CPT shall be of sufficient capacity to operate integral devices and
remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.
b. 24V dc shall be obtained from power supply, with primary and secondary
fuses, control power source shall be of sufficient capacity to operate integral
devices and remotely located pilot, indicating, and control devices.
8. Solid-State Overload Relay:
a. Switch or dial selectable for motor running overload protection.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 6
b. Sensors in each phase.
c. Class 10/20 selectable tripping characteristic selected to protect motor
against voltage and current unbalance and single phasing.
d. The overload relay shall be set to protect the motor in the application shown
on the drawings and for the size of the motor shown.
e. Mount extended overload reset buttons to be accessible for operation without
opening door of enclosure.
f. Isolated overload alarm contact for indication and connection to the SCADA
system as shown on drawings.
9. Starter shall be capable of communicating on [DeviceNet] [Other Network] Networks.
As shown on the drawings.
a. Shall provide the following information and/or control on a communications
network.
1) Average current.
2) Percent phase imbalance.
3) Percent thermal capacity used.
4) Trip cause.
5) Full load current setting.
6) Start.
7) Stop.
8) [Reset].
C. Combination Magnetic Starter: Factory-assembled combination of magnetic starter,
overcurrent protective device, and disconnecting means. The type of overcurrent protective
device used shall be as shown on drawings.
1. The overcurrent protective device shall be rated for the short circuit as shown on the
drawings. The overcurrent protective device and the starter shall be rated together
to provide Type 2 coordination for starter protection from very high short circuit
currents.
2. MCP Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply
with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-
mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-
rotor amperes.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle are
required as shown on drawings.
3. MCCB Disconnecting Means: If a molded-case circuit breaker is shown on the
drawings it shall be provided in accordance with the following:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply
with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-
current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip
element for short circuits.
b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame
sizes 250 A and larger.
c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle are
required as shown on drawings.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 7
D. NEMA Contactors
1. Furnished in combination with thermal magnetic circuit breakers.
2. Electrically held, minimum NEMA size 1.
3. Open type, coil voltage, and number of poles as specified or indicated on the drawings.
4. Same as magnetic starters but without overload relays.
5. Installation same as that for starters unless otherwise noted.
E. Combination Reduced-Voltage Solid-State Controller: Factory-assembled combination of
reduced-voltage solid-state controller, overcurrent protective device, and disconnecting
means.
1. The overcurrent protective device shall be rated for the short circuit as shown on the
drawings. The overcurrent protective device and the starter shall be rated together
to provide Type 2 coordination for starter protection from very high short circuit
currents.
2. MCP Disconnecting Means:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply
with available fault currents, instantaneous-only circuit breaker with front-
mounted, field-adjustable, short-circuit trip coordinated with motor locked-
rotor amperes.
b. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
c. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCP handle are
required as shown on drawings.
3. MCCB Disconnecting Means: If a molded-case circuit breaker is shown on the
drawings it shall be provided in accordance with the following:
a. UL 489, NEMA AB 1, and NEMA AB 3, with interrupting capacity to comply
with available fault currents; thermal-magnetic MCCB, with inverse time-
current element for low-level overloads and instantaneous magnetic trip
element for short circuits.
b. Front-mounted, adjustable magnetic trip setting for circuit-breaker frame
sizes 250 A and larger.
c. Lockable Handle: Accepts three padlocks and interlocks with cover in closed
position.
d. Auxiliary contacts "a" and "b" arranged to activate with MCCB handle are
required as shown on drawings.
2.2 ENCLOSURES
A. Motor starters: NEMA ICS 6, to comply with environmental conditions at installed location.
1. For starters in low voltage motor control centers, the enclosure type is specified in
section 26 24 19, “Low Voltage Motor Control Centers”.
2. Enclosures for combination starters shall be the type as specified on the drawings or
in section 26 00 00 “Electrical General Provisions”.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. General Requirements for Control Circuit and Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 5; factory installed in
controller enclosure cover unless otherwise indicated.
1. All pilot devices shall be supplied as specified is section 40 78 00 “Control Panel
Instruments.”

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 8
B. Auxiliary Contacts
1. Contact ratings as per NEMA A600 rating.
2. Auxiliary contacts rated 10 Amps at 600 volts.
3. Provide all contacts shown on the drawings, and any additional contacts required for
proper operation.
4. Provide at least 1 normally open and 1 normally closed spare auxiliary contact with
each starter.
C. Control Relays: Auxiliary relays and adjustable time-delay relays.
1. Control relays shall be supplied as specified is section 40 78 00 “Control Panel
Instruments.”
D. Space heaters, with N.C. auxiliary contacts, to mitigate condensation in enclosures installed
outdoors or in unconditioned interior spaces subject to humidity and temperature swings.
Space heaters shall be installed when specified on the drawings.
E. Power factor correction capacitors shall be sized and provided by the starter manufacturer
when they are shown on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and surfaces to receive motor starters, with Installer present, for compliance
with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.
B. Examine motor starters before installation. Reject motor starters with electronic circuitry
that is moisture damaged or mold damaged.
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. For installation of motor starters in low voltage motor control centers see specification
section 26 24 19 “Low Voltage Motor Control Centers”.
B. Combination Starters shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer recommendations
and as specified in this section.
C. Combination Wall-Mounted Starters: Install motor starters on walls with tops at uniform
height unless otherwise indicated, and by bolting units to wall or mounting on lightweight
structural-steel channels bolted to wall. For starters not at walls, provide freestanding racks
as shown on the drawings.
D. Combination Floor-Mounted Starters: Install motor starters on 3-1/2 inch raised concrete
housekeeping pad, unless otherwise indicated, as shown on the Contract Drawings. Comply
with requirements for concrete referenced in Division 26 Section “Electrical General
Provisions”.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 9
1. Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless otherwise
indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch centers around the full perimeter of concrete
base.
2. For supported equipment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts that extend through
concrete base and anchor into structural concrete floor.
3. Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams,
instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.
4. Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to supported
equipment.
E. Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
F. Comply with NECA 1.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. Identify motor starters, components, and control wiring. Comply with requirements for
identification specified in Division 26 Section "Electrical Identification."
1. Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide
warning signs.
2. Label each enclosure with engraved nameplate.
3. Label each enclosure-mounted control and pilot device.
3.4 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A. Install wiring between motor starters remote devices and control system. Comply with
requirements in Division 26 Section "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables".
B. Bundle, train, and support wiring in enclosures.
C. Connect selector switches and other automatic-control selection devices where applicable as
shown on drawings.
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Perform tests and inspections.
1. Visual and Mechanical Inspection:
a. Compare equipment nameplate data with Drawings and Specifications.
b. Inspect physical and mechanical condition.
c. Inspect anchorage, alignment, and grounding.
d. Verify the unit is clean.
e. Verify contactors:
1) Verify mechanical operation.
2) Inspect contact gap, wipe, alignment, and pressure are in accordance
with manufacturer’s published data.
B. Acceptance Testing Preparation:
1. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed controller, component, connecting
supply, feeder, and control circuit.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 10
2. Test continuity of each circuit.
C. Tests and Inspections:
1. Inspect starters, wiring, components, connections, and equipment installation.
2. Test insulation resistance for each enclosed-controller element, component,
connecting motor supply, feeder, and control circuits.
3. Test continuity of each circuit.
4. Verify that voltages at controller locations are within plus or minus 10 percent of
motor nameplate rated voltages. If outside this range for any motor, notify [Engineer]
[Construction Manager] [Owner] before starting the motor(s).
5. Test each motor for proper phase rotation.
6. Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in
NETA Acceptance Testing Specification. Certify compliance with test parameters.
7. Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
8. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative for
startup and inspection of Reduced-Voltage Solid-State Starters.
9. Test and adjust controls, remote monitoring, and safeties. Replace damaged and
malfunctioning controls and equipment.
D. Motor starters will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
E. Prepare test and inspection reports including a certified report that identifies motor starters
and that describes scanning results. Include notation of deficiencies detected, remedial
action taken and observations after remedial action.
3.6 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable switches, auxiliary relays, time-delay relays, timers, and overload-relay
pickup and trip ranges.
B. Adjust overload-relay heaters or settings if power factor correction capacitors are connected
to the load side of the overload relays.
C. Adjust the trip settings of MCPs and thermal-magnetic circuit breakers with adjustable
instantaneous trip elements. Initially adjust to six times the motor nameplate full-load
ampere ratings and attempt to start motors several times, allowing for motor cooldown
between starts. If tripping occurs on motor inrush, adjust settings in increments until motors
start without tripping. Do not exceed eight times the motor full-load amperes (or 11 times
for NEMA Premium Efficient motors if required). Where these maximum settings do not
allow starting of a motor, notify Engineer and Construction Manager before increasing
settings.
D. Set field-adjustable switches and program microprocessors for required start and stop
sequences in reduced-voltage solid-state starters.
3.7 TRAINING
A. Provide the services of the manufacturer’s technical representative to provide training in
start-up, adjustment, and troubleshooting of the following equipment:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 11
1. Reduced Voltage Solid-State Starters: minimum of 8 hours at the Owner’s facility.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MOTOR STARTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 13 - 12
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 1
SECTION 26 29 25
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
(OWNER PROVIDED – FOR REFERENCE ONLY)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
General: The Owner shall provide a variable frequency drive for installation by the
Contractor. The Contractor shall take full responsibility for the variable frequency drive once
it is received from the owner. The Contractor shall install the variable frequency drive,
accessories, and appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract
Documents and these specifications.
A. Related Sections
1. None.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Refer to this section for references.
B. IEEE519 (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) – Recommended Practices and
Control of Harmonics in Electrical Power Systems
C. IEEE C62.41 (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) - Recommended Practice on
Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits.
D. NEMA FU 1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Fuses.
E. NEMA ICS 3.1 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Safety Standards for
Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive
Systems.
F. NEMA ICS 7 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Industrial Control and Systems:
Adjustable Speed Drives.
G. NEMA 250 (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) - Enclosures for Electrical
Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
H. NESC (National Electrical Safety Code) – Provisions for safeguarding persons from hazards of
Electrical Equipment and Protection.
I. UL-50 Standards for Enclosures for Electrical Equipment
J. UL-508A Standard for Industrial Control Panels.
K. UL-347 A Medium voltage power Conversion Equipment

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Provide 10 hard copies and one electronic pdf copy of submittals.
B. The original Medium Voltage VFD manufacturer shall furnished all needed data, training,
factory testing and instructions to facilitate continuous operation of the equipment as part of
the proposed equipment.
C. Product Data:
1. Manufacturer of the VFD.
2. Manufacturer of all components of the VFD.
3. Dimensions:
a. Height.
b. Width.
c. Depth
4. Weight.
5. Nameplate Schedule.
6. Bill of material.
7. Ratings:
a. Voltage.
b. Phase.
c. Current.
d. Interrupting rating.
e. Momentary current rating.
8. List of spare parts with a separate line item cost per 1.10B.
9. VFD heat load in BTU or kW losses
D. Shop Drawings:
1. Complete plan and elevation drawings showing:
a. All dimensions.
b. Panel, sub-panel and component layout indexed to the Bill of Material.
c. Conduit connections.
d. Required clearance around equipment.
2. Complete schematic, wiring and interconnection diagrams showing connections to
both internal and external devices:
a. Wiring diagrams shall include terminal number and wire numbers.
3. Complete single-line and three-line diagrams including, but not limited to, circuit
breakers, motor circuit protectors, contractors, instrument transformers, meters,
relays, timers, control devices, and other equipment comprising the complete system:
a. Device electrical ratings shall be clearly indicated on the Drawings.
4. Complete calculations indicating IEEE-519-1992 compliance.
a. Point of Common Coupling (PCC) shall be clearly defined in the calculations
as the incoming terminals of the drive.
b. Calculation shall clearly show the value of the Load Current and Fault Current
level at each PCC used for each calculation.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms are specified in this section and noted herein.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 3
B. Point of Common Coupling, (PCC):
1. The point of common coupling for all harmonic calculation and field measurements
for both voltage and current distortions is defined as the input terminals to the VFD.
1.5 RECORD DRAWINGS
A. N/A.
B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Submit instructions complying with NEMA ICS 3.1. Include
procedures for starting and operating controllers, and describe operating limits that may
result in hazardous or unsafe conditions. Include routing preventive maintenance schedule.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: The manufacturer shall specialize in manufacturing of Medium Voltage
Adjustable Frequency Drive products specified in this section with minimum ten years’
experience in the United States.
1.7 STANDARDS
A. The MV-VFD shall be UL 347A listed and offer input power fuses from transformer protection.
All MV-VFD systems shall be designed in accordance with applicable portions of NEMA
standards, and panel build-ups manufactured to comply with UL 508 requirements.
B. The VFD shall be compatible with the installation requirements of interpretive codes such as
National Electric Code (NEC) and Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA).
C. IEEE 1100 – Powering and Grounding Sensitive Electronic Equipment (Emerald Book)
D. NEMA ICS 6 – Industrial Control and Systems Enclosures
E. NEMA ICS 7 – Industrial Control Systems Adjustable Speed Drives
F. NPFA 70 – National Electrical Code (NEC)
G. The VFD shall meet IEC 61200-2 for vibration levels.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.
B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas
or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic.
C. Handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lift only with lugs provided
for the purpose. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. All equipment furnished under this section shall be warranted by the contractor and the
equipment manufacturers for a period of three (5) years from date of purchase.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 4
B. Without additional charge the Manufacturer shall replace any work or material they have
provided which develops defects within (5) years from date of substantial completion of the
project.
C. All materials and equipment shall be warranted against manufacturer’s defect in materials,
design and workmanship.
D. During the warranty period, the Manufacturer or his authorized dealer is required to make
the necessary repairs or replacements on site.
E. During the warranty period, the Owner will not accept charges for:
1. Travel time.
2. Mileage.
3. On-site repair labor.
F. Warranty shall list any and all items excluded.
G. If necessary, as determined by the Owner, any repairs must be made on a premium time basis.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance Service: Manufacturer shall describe the field service system available to
support the proposed variable frequency drive system. As a minimum describe:
1. Type of technical support available (e.g., system engineering and technician).
2. Location of field service personnel.
3. Field service daily rates in dollars per hour and dollars per day.
4. Typical response times to service requests.
B. Spare parts and software: As a minimum, provide the following spare parts as a separate line
item of the proposal:
1. One set of all power and control fuses for each VFD.
2. One set of 8 rectifier fuses.
3. One complete set: control board, terminal board, firing board, main keypad for the
MV-VFD.
4. One spare power cell.
5. One complete communications board.
6. One spare motor protection relay.
7. One spare cooling fan unit for the MV-VFD.
8. Software for programming and monitoring of the drive.
9. Any special dedicated tools for emergency service and troubleshooting.
10. One set of four diodes and DC fuses.
11. One spare power supply for each power supply in the MV-VFD.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONSTRUCTION – NON MCC INSTALLATION
A. A suitable load break fused disconnect shall be inherent in the MV Drive. The Manufacturer
shall include an integral main disconnect device with an interlocked and padlockable handle

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 5
mechanism. Disconnect shall be lockable in the OFF position. The disconnecting device shall
be a medium voltage vacuum contactor with a disconnect switch whose blades are externally
visible from outside the enclosure. The disconnect device and associated fuses shall have a
minimum rating of 350 MVA. A set of distribution class lightning arrestors shall protect the
drive from transient voltages.
B. The inverter enclosure doors shall be supplied with electrically interlocked disconnect device
which isolates power from the drive system.
C. The MV-VFD shall operate in compliance with IEEE 519 and contain an incoming dry type
isolation transformer whose primary voltage 4,160 volts 3-phase. The transformer shall
contain three-phase secondary windings that provide the proper phase shifting to feed a
minimum of a 24-pulse rectification to reduce harmonic currents and voltages reflected to
the primary power system. A converter designed shall include a harmonic study with the
proposal. The transformer shall be copper wound 30 kV BIL and shall have a 220°C insulation
system to operate continuously at 115° C rise at full load conditions. The transformer shall
have an electrostatic shield for protection from voltage transients.
D. A control power transformer (CPT) shall be provided within the enclosure. Depending on the
end user’s needs and specified on the data sheet, the CPT primary shall be rated for the
medium input voltage to the VFD. The KVA rating of the CPT shall be determined by the
manufacturer and shall have a minimum of 25% spare capacity. The CPT secondary voltage
shall be 120 VAC. The CPT primary shall be fused with current limiting fuses with an
interrupting rating no less than 100,000 amperes. The CPT secondary shall be fused and have
one terminal grounded. The CPT shall be powered from the load side of the load break
fused disconnect and be connected to ahead of the line side of the vacuum contactor.
E. A rectification section shall be protected by fuses with blown fuse indication. A soft charge
of the DC bus capacitors shall be accomplished with an input reactor on the primary of the
input transformer. A vacuum contactor rated for drives full load amps will short the reactor
after charge is accomplished. The primary source of rectification shall be with a diode bridge
with a 2200PIV rating.
F. The DC power supply shall be filtered by long lasting liquid filled capacitors. Electrolytic
capacitors are not permitted. Enclosure shall be NEMA Type and in compliance with UL-50,
UL 508A and NEMA 250. Enclosure is rated for a maximum temperature range of 0 - 50°C.
G. The MV VFD inverter section shall consist of three modular power cell assemblies fed from
series DC power supplies. Each DC supply shall be derived from a phase-shifted secondary of
the input transformer that cancels reflected harmonics back to the power line. Each MV
power cell has eight 3300V Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistors (IGBTs) designed in a bridge
connection as a multi-level PWM output to form a 5 level voltage waveform to the motor.
Each cell shall have a minimum rating of 3300V.
H. The PWM IGBTs shall be cooled using a sealed cooling system utilizing modern heat plate
technology. Power cells shall communicate to the controller through optical communications.
A high resistance ground detection circuit at the neutral point shall be inc luded for alarm or
warning in the event the load develops a ground leakage current or fault. The output of the
inverter shall produce harmonic current of not more than 3% over a speed range of 10% to
100% regardless of load. A minimum distance between Motor and Drive of 500’ without the

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 6
use of output reactor. The drive shall have Neutral Point Clamping (NPC) technology . This
technology creating an algorithm of the motors rotating magnetic field emulating the stator
field sin wave forcing the stator fields to shift creating additional current to the rotor when
needed. Voltage source IGBT technology rated at 3300 Volt will have step-less capabilities
output sine wave to better control of zero sequence potential and eliminated voltage rise to
the motor leads. NPC technology uses a zero volt bus to compare the system neutral to the
voltage potential and fires the IGBT’s based on this reference level.
I. The MV VFD enclosure shall be suitable for installation in an indoor, unclassified area.
J. All openings exceeding 0.25 inch (6 mm) width shall be screens to prevent the entrance of
snakes, rodents, etc. Input air filters shall be provided and be a reusable type that can be easily
cleaned. The enclosure shall be front entry and all doors or panels will be fully gasketed and
classified as NEMA 1A. Air exhaust from cooling fans will be top mounted. Fan motors shall
be protected by an input circuit breaker. Fans shall be all metal, squirrel cage ball bearing
three phase with a minimum 10-year design life.
K. Enclosure cooling fans shall have a “loss of cooling” fault signal furnished with the design. In
the event of clogged filters or fan failure, the drive will produce an alarm and then in a
predetermined time shutdown safely without electronic component failure. If specified on
the data sheet, optional redundant fans, shall be provided in the drive design as backup in the
event of fan failure. The maximum noise level of the unit shall not exceed 78 dBA at a distance
of 1 meter from the unit and at a height of 1.5 meters from the floor.
2.2 CONTROL
A. CONFIGURATION
1. The VFD manufacturer shall have a door mounted electronic operator interface (EOI
Keypad) to program, monitor and troubleshoot the drive. The EOI shall have a path
to all MV-VFD diagnostics. In the monitor mode, all contacts, speed reference and
drive operating conditions are displayed in real time. The operator keypad display
shall:
a. Backlit English LCD keypad with a LED indicate the operating mode of the
drive.
1) A menu format for configurable program capabilities.
2) LED’s indicator lights for ”Local / Remote” operation, “Ready / Run”
light. All alarms or faults shall be in easy to read English format and
define the fault.
3) Drive control functions and allow local operation of the motor from
the keypad
4) Local Start / Stop Push Button, Drive Reset Pushbutton.
5) Full access to all parameters and variables.
b. The operator keypad shall be used to read and write parameter data, to
present operational information, to produce fault and device indication, to
show alarms, and to allow metering of parameters, and provide Ethernet
TCP/IP connectivity to the drive software programming tool on the Buyer’s
PC and SCADA system.
c. The operator keypad shall include a level of security lock-out capability.
d. The electronic operator keypad shall monitor all functions of the drive and
motor load conditions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 7
e. In addition to the local key pad VFD shall have local Hand-Off-Remote selector
switch and an Emergency Stop Button.
B. OPERATIONAL CONTROLS
1. The ASD shall include the following basic operating adjustments:
a. Acceleration Time
b. Deceleration time
c. Current Limit
d. Minimum frequency or speed
e. Maximum frequency or speed
f. Selectable skip frequencies
g. Sensor-less Vector parameter settings / Volts per Hertz settings based upon
load conditions.
h. Local/Remote selection
2. The ASD shall include necessary components to protect the ASD and motor against
motor overload, internal faults in either the motor or ASD and disturbances in the
incoming AC line. The overload protection shall function such that allows tailoring
the drive overload for different applications. Addition system protection for the
following conditions:
a. Short circuit on the output of the ASD
b. Instantaneous overcurrent
c. Motor overload
d. Undervoltage or overvoltage on the incoming AC line
e. Single phasing of the AC incoming line
f. Overtemperature of the ASD electronics from a component or ventilation
failure
g. Gate driver power supply or control power supply undervoltage
h. ASD output open circuit during operation
i. Overvoltage or ground fault of the ASD output
j. Cause of individual power cell fault isolated to failed device.
k. Loss of communication / Modbus or Ethernet IP connectivity to the drive.
l. DC bus overvoltage.
3. The ASD shall be equipped with motor tuning capabilities. This function will allow the
drive to be tuned up without the motor being connected.
4. Front panel exit/entry shall be available as required to facilitate installation condition
in a low voltage compartment.
C. HARD WIRED CONTROLS
1. The ASD shall include the following hardwired I/O:
a. 4-20mA input for Speed Control
b. 4-20mA output for Speed Feedback
c. Start/Stop
d. All other control and monitoring shall be accomplished via Ethernet TCP/IP.
2.3 OPERATING CONDITIONS
A. The Drive’s operating ambient temperature range shall be 0°C to 50°C. Storage temperatures
shall be between -40°C to 70°C.
B. The relative humidity range shall be 5-95% non-condensing.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 8
C. The Drive shall be suitable for operation at altitudes up to 4,800 feet without
de-rating.
D. The Drive shall meet IEC 61800-2 for vibration levels.
2.4 STANDARDS
A. The Drive shall be UL and cUL listed.
B. The Drive shall be designed in accordance with applicable portions of NEMA standards.
C. The Drive shall be compatible with the installation requirements of interpretive codes such
as National Electric Code (NEC) and Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA).
2.5 INPUT POWER
A. The Drive shall be rated and labeled for use with an input voltage of 4,160V 60Hz 3-phase to
4,160V 60HZ 3-phase power at 1250 horsepower.
B. The Drive shall be able to withstand voltage variations of -10% to +10% and imbalance no
greater than 2% without tripping or affecting Drive performance.
C. System frequency shall be 60 Hertz with a maximum frequency variation of +.5% of
Maximum Speed with Slip Compensation.
D. The power factor of the ASD including the transformer shall be greater than 95% at loads
greater than 50%.
E. Drive efficiency at rated load shall be 95.6% or greater at Rated Current. MV-VFD system
efficiency shall be calculated as follows:

Efficiency (%) = Power (Load) x 100
Power (Supply)
F. Line notching, transients, and harmonics on the incoming line shall not affect Drive
performance.
2.6 OUTPUT POWER
A. The MV Drive shall be capable of horsepower rating located on the data sheet. It shall also
have an energy saver feature with the capability of selecting a V/Hz automatic control
function that will modify the V/Hz curve based on light load characteristics that will minimize
power consumption.
B. The Drive output shall be 5 level technology and the voltage shall vary with frequency to
maintain a constant volts/hertz ratio up to base speed (60 hertz) output. Constant or linear
voltage output shall be supplied at frequencies greater than base speed (60 hertz).
C. The Drive shall be capable of a minimum of 100% continuous current operation, in
accordance with the requirements of NEC Article 430.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 9
D. The Drive overload current rating shall be 120% of rated current for one minute at site
elevation.
2.7 MOTOR PROTECTION FEATURES
A. Motor Protection Relay shall be a SEL 710 model No. 071001ABA9X72850201. The Drive
shall have a backup motor protection relays to monitor the motors current and the bearing
and stator temperature devices. This device shall have a liquid crystal display (LCD) which
can be configured to display function set points, RTD status and fault conditions. This device
shall be mounted in the low voltage section compartment door and be connected to the drive
auxiliary contacts to trip on fault condition. It shall display text, providing display of:
1. Programming Mode: Function Code Numbers, Set points, and Status.
2. Fault Indication in plain English.
3. RTD set and alarm points and provide analog and digital input/output signal status.
B. The Drive shall display a fault conditions from the motor protection relays and display it in
the EOI.
2.8 TERMINATION
A. The MV-VFD shall provide a mean for termination from top and or bottom of the enclosure.
B. A customer terminal blocks for external wiring terminations with compression type screws,
shall be designed to accommodate stripped insulation crimp feral connections on all wire
ends, and shall accept a minimum of two No. 14 AWG wires each terminal.
C. Connection points for inputs and outputs of different voltage levels shall be segregated to
reduce possibility of electrical noise.
D. Where wiring is run through sheet metal or any barrier, bushings, grommets or other
mechanical protection around the sheet or barrier opening shall be provided.
E. All internal wiring shall be terminated with no more than two (2) conductors per terminal
point.
F. The MV-VFD shall have an internal mechanical ground connection which is suitable for
terminating a stranded copper ground conductor of the same size as the incoming phase
conductors. Ground connections shall be near the incoming and outgoing power cable
termination points and control wiring connections.
G. Minimum wire bending space shall meet or exceed the value shown in NEC Table 430 10(b)
for termination of the power cable.
2.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE & TESTING
A. All Drives shall be factory tested to ensure proper performance upon delivery and shall
include the following:
1. Power semiconductors shall be thermally cycled prior to final assembly into the VFD.
2. Printed circuit boards shall be factory tested prior to assembly into the VFD.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 10
3. Individual power cells shall undergo a visual inspection, an electrical inspection, and
a complete full load test prior to final assembly into the VFD.
4. Mechanical operation tests shall be performed for each VFD to verify satisfactory
operation. These tests shall include checking operating mechanisms and interlock
devices.
5. Electrical function tests shall be performed to ensure proper operation of all devices
and components including operation of the MV drive at full load conditions.
Instrumentation, software, and monitoring tests shall be included.
6. The final assembly testing shall include transformer testing load and voltage testing
verify drive output power to the power line is achieved. An unloaded full voltage
motor shall also be used during testing. The drive will operate between 0 to 66 hertz
unloaded and under load connected to a motor.
7. As an option in the proposal, the original drive manufacturer shall provide in their
proposal for a factory testing for one-owner’s representative and one design engineer
to attend at the manufacturer’s facility. The manufacturer shall provide three (3)
week notification to allow the owner and engineer to plan to monitor and or
observance of all tests. As an option, the proposal shall provide for all normal travel
related expense costs for one–owner’s representative and one-design engineer to and
from Salt Lake City, Utah via standard commercial airline to the manufactures facility
for the standard tests. The bid price associated with this option shall be provided
as a separate line-item cost as listed in the proposal form. All tests shall be
performed during a standard 8 hour work day. The MV drive manufacturer shall
provide for the owner and engineer to observe the following tests.
a. The manufacturer’s standard tests shall be performed. No agent or agent’s
representative shall perform these tests. The original equipment
manufacturer shall have at its site a certified lab (NVLAP) as defined by the
United States Dept. of Commerce National Institute of Standards and
Technology. All certificates shall be up to date and provided to engineer prior
to scheduling witness test.
b. Mechanical operation tests shall be performed on the MV drive to verify
satisfactory operation. These tests shall include checking operating all
mechanical mechanisms and interlock devices.
c. Electrical function tests shall be performed to ensure proper operation of all
devices and components including operation of the MV drive at full load
conditions. Output voltage and frequency shall be recorded and reviewed for
improper firing by the manufacturer. This will be complete prior to the
owner/ engineering coming to the facility.
d. All instrumentation (relays / communication) included in the drive shall
monitored and tested in front of the owner / engineer.
e. The final MV drive assembly will be tested at full load and voltage by a power
back method that returns drive output power to the power line. An unloaded
full voltage motor will also be used during testing.
B. A test record by the MV drive manufacturer for each VFD shall be provided and certified with
the serial number and furnished as part of the final submittal data and records. This test
record shall be provided within three weeks of completion of the tests.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 11
2.10 TRAINING AND FIELD SERVICE START-UP SERVICES
A. A separate line item price for the drive manufacturer shall be provided as an option for two
members of the owner staff for factory acceptance test. These costs shall be included in the
project pricing as a separate line item.
B. All site startup services and training shall be included in the proposal. The Drive
manufacturer shall have factory trained personnel at field site locations convenient to the
installation site, available for trouble shooting and/or startup assistance.
C. The manufacturer shall commission and startup the MV-VFD with use of a certified
engineering field service group. The owner / engineer will require a factory certified field
service engineer to be onsite start-up for one (1) straight time man week (8 hr x 5 days)
during start-up of drive. The contractor will communicate with the manufacturer when a field
service engineer shall be required. A field service engineer shall provide the owner / engineer
a report indicating start of service provided and the MV drives final operational and
protection settings.
D. The manufacturer shall provide a software tool with operational, maintenance and diagnostic
features. Using a Buyer supplied IBM compatible PC, this software shall permit the
programming of parameters, display block diagrams, show bar graphs, report adjustment
data, display trends, provide troubleshooting using first fault data/trace back data/trouble
record, and contain links to system documentation and to system help. In addition, the
software tool shall have the following features:
1. Ethernet TCP/IP interface with drive
2. Animated function block diagrams with real time variables
3. Commissioning
4. Integrated trending window.
E. A field service engineer shall also be available 24 hours per day, 365 days per year and a
factory rate sheet shall be included with the proposal.
F. A list of the field service engineers and their home base location within a 250mile radius of
the project site in Ogden, UT shall be included in the proposal.
2.11 CLOSE-OUT DOCUMENTATION
A. Five (5) sets of all electrical drawings and programming manuals shall be provided at the
time of equipment shipment.
B. Instruction manual, complete with final wiring diagrams, schematics, operating, and
maintenance instructions, final start-up report and drive setting shall be provided to the
owner / contractor within three (3) weeks of final start-up.
C. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows:
1. Toshiba International Corp
2. Rockwell Automation
3. TMEIC Corporation

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 12
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that building environment can be maintained within the service conditions required
by the manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with NEMA ICS 3.1.
B. Tighten accessible connections and mechanical fasteners after placing controller.
C. Provide engraved plastic nameplates.
D. Motor Data: Neatly type label inside controller door identifying motor served, nameplate
horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. Place
label in clear plastic holder.
E. Ground and bond controller per NEC Article 250.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 13
DATA SHEET
MOTOR
MOTOR SUPPLIER USMOTOR or TOSHIBA
TYPE OF MOTOR
Vertical
Hollow Shaft
DRIVE TYPE DIRECT COUPLE
RATED OUTPUT Hp kW
NUMBER OF POLES 4 1250 933
VOLTAGE 4160V
FRAME Please Advise
STARTER TYPE VFD / Voltage Source
METHOD OF OPERATION Variable Frequency
WINDING TEMPERATURE SENSORS (NUMBER & TYPE) 100 Ohm Platinum 3 pr Phase
BEARING TEMPERATURE SENSORS (NUMBER & TYPE) 100 Ohm Platinum 1 pr bearing
MOTOR HEATER Yes
MOTOR HEATER VOLTAGE 120V Single Phase
MOTOR SERVICE FACTOR 1.15
MOTOR DUTY Continuous
BEARING TYPE
Insulated Spherical Roller Bearing
(See Note 1)
BEARING COOLING Oil lube drip system
MOTOR EFFIECIENCY AND POWER FACTOR Premium 94.3 to 95.3
CONTROL EQUIPMENT
RTD's and Vibration switch to
drive then SCADA.
OIL FLOW DETECTOR YES
CONTROLLER (action provided by DCS) Supplied by Owner
MINIMUM/ MAXIMUM MOTOR SPEED TO MAINTAIN BEARING
PROTECTION
66Hz Maximum 30Hz Minimum
(See Note 2)
OIL FLOW FAIL POSITION (OPEN/CLOSED) OPEN
SITE ELEVATION 4800'

DRIVE INFORMATION (Engineering Data Due at Bid)

DRIVE DIMENSIONS 200"W x 120"H x 42"D Max
BTU AIR REQUIREMENTS FOR COOLING 116,060
INPUT VOLTAGE 4,160 VOLTS
MINIMUM FLA OF VFD 155 Amps
NEMA ENCLOSURE RATING 1A
DESIGN RATING 40 degree Celcius
RELAY - TYPE/MODEL FOR RTD's SEL 710
OVERLOAD RATING 110% for 1 minute
DESIGN LIFE 175,000 hours
COMMUNICATION Ethernet TCP/IP
MAXIMUM AIR TEMPERATURE ALLOWED 85 degrees F

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES-MEDIUM VOLTAGE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 29 25 - 14

Notes 1. 10,000lbs down thrust subject to changed based on pump supplier that is
selected. Bearing life shall be 60,000 hours.
2. To be defined by the pump manufacturer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 43 00-1
SECTION 26 43 00
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPDS)

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Scope
1. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Surge Protective Device (SPD) equipment
having the electrical characteristics, ratings, and modifications as specified herein
and as shown on the contract drawings.

B. Related Sections
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to ensure a complete and coordinated project.
2. Division 26 Section “Electrical General Provisions”.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)
1. IEEE C62.41.1 -2002 Guide on the Surge Environment in Low-Voltage
(1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
2. IEEE C62.41.2 – 2002 Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges
in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits
3. IEEE C62.45 – 2002 Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for
Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and
less) AC Power Circuits
B. International Electrical Testing Association (NETA)
1. NETA ATS Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical
Power Equipment and Systems
C. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code
2. NFPA 75 Fire Protection of Information Technology
Equipment
3. NFPA 780 Installation of Lightning Protection Systems
D. Underwriters Laboratories (UL)
1. ANSI/UL 1283 Electromagnetic Interference Filters
2. ANSI/UL 1449 Surge Protective Devices

1.3 DEFINITIONS

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 43 00-2
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. NFPA - National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. National Electrical Testing Association.

B. Specific Definitions:
1. Surge Protective Devices abbreviated as SPDs. (SPDs were previously called out as
Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors, TVSS)

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Electrical Requirements
1. Nominal system operating voltage, phase, configuration, wire, etc. shall be consistent
with the system on which the SPD is to be applied, as indicated on the plans.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

E. Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittals.
F. RSN 26 43 00-1, Approval Data:
1. Complete product data:
a. Unit dimensions.
b. Weight.
c. Field connection locations.
d. Installation instruction details.
e. Mounting provisions.
2. Verification that the SPD complies with the required ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition
listing by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).
G. RSN 26 43 00-2, Test Results:
1. Results of inspection and tests performed after installation and prior to startup of
SPD.
H. RSN 26 43 00-3, Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1. Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents.
I. RSN 26 43 00-4, Spare Parts List:
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 39 – Project Record Documents

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Nominal system operating voltage, phase, configuration, wire, etc. shall be consistent with
the system on which the SPD is to be applied, as indicated on the plans.

B. The system shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the
following codes and standards:
1. IEEE C62.41.1
2. IEEE C62.41.2

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 43 00-3
3. IEEE C62.45
4. NFPA 70
5. NFPA 75
6. NFPA 780
7. ANSI/UL 1449
8. ANSI/UL 1283

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Equipment shall be handled and stored in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. One
(1) copy of manufacturer’s instructions shall be included with the equipment at time of
shipment.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall provide a full ten year warranty in materials or workmanship from
date of shipment against any part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's
written instructions, UL Listing requirements, and any applicable national, state or local
electrical codes.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Square D by Schneider Electric

B. Liebert

C. Eaton Cutler-Hammer

D. ASCO

E. Or equal
2.2 VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSION – GENERAL
A. Electrical Requirements
1. Unit Operating Voltage: Refer to drawings for operating voltage and unit
configuration.
2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): The MCOV shall not be less than
115% of the nominal system operating voltage.
3. The suppression system shall incorporate thermally protected metal-oxide varistors
(MOVs) as the core surge suppression component for the service entrance and all
other distribution levels. The system shall not utilize silicon avalanche diodes,
selenium cells, air gaps, or other components that may crowbar the system voltage
leading to system upset or create any environmental hazards.

4. Protection Modes: The SPD must protect all modes of the electrical system being
utilized. If the neutral is not utilized in a Wye configured system then the line to

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 43 00-4
neutral and neutral to ground modes are not needed. The required protection modes
are indicated by bullets in the following table:

Protection Modes
Configuration L-N L-G L-L N-G
Wye ● ● ● ●
Delta N/A ● ● N/A
Single Split Phase ● ● ● ●
High Leg Delta ● ● ● ●

5. SPD Type: All SPDs installed on the line side of the service entrance disconnect shall
be of Type 1. SPDs installed on the load side of the service entrance disconnect shall
be either Type 1 or Type 2 SPDs.
6. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR): Per NEC 285.6, the short circuit current rating
of the SPD shall be equal to or greater than the available short circuit current at the
point on the system where installed.
7. Nominal Discharge Current (I(n)): All SPDs located at the service entrance of the
distribution system shall have a 20kA I(n) rating regardless of their SPD type (includes
Types 1 and 2) or operating voltage. All other SPDs located downstream of the service
entrance shall have an I(n) rating of not less than 10KA.
8. ANSI/UL 1449 Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): The maximum ANSI/UL 1449 VPR
for grounded WYE configured circuits shall not exceed that specified in the following
table:

Modes 208Y/120 480Y/277 600Y/347
L-N; L-G; N-G 800 1200 1500
L-L 1200 2000 2500

9. ANSI/UL 1449 Voltage Protection Rating (VPR): The maximum ANSI/UL 1449 VPR
for delta configured circuits shall not exceed that specified in the following table:

Modes 240D 480D 600D
L-G; N-G 1200 2000 2500

B. SPD Design
1. Maintenance Free Design: The SPD shall be maintenance free and shall not require
any user intervention throughout its life. SPDs requiring user intervention to test the
unit via a diagnostic test kit or similar device shall not be accepted.
2. Balanced Suppression Platform: The surge current shall be equally distributed to all
MOV components to ensure equal stressing and maximum performance.

3. Electrical Noise Filter: Each unit shall include a high-performance EMI/RFI noise
rejection filter.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 43 00-5
4. Internal Fusing: The SPD shall be designed in a way that it will take itself off -line
before any damaging external effects to the suppressor or surroundings occur.
5. Monitoring Diagnostics – Each SPD shall provide the following integral monitoring
options:
a. Protection Status Indicators - Each unit shall have a green / red solid-state
indicator light that reports the status of the protection on each phase.
1) The absence of a green light and the presence of a red light shall indicate
that damage has occurred on the respective phase or mode. All
protection status indicators must indicate the actual status of the
protection on each phase or mode. If power is removed from any one
phase, the indicator lights must continue to indicate the status of the
protection on all other phases and protection modes. Diagnostics
packages that simply indicate whether power is present on a particular
phase shall not be accepted.
b. Remote Status Monitor – The SPD must include Form C dry contacts (one NO
and one NC) for remote annunciation of its status. Both the NO and NC
contacts shall change state under any fault condition.
c. Audible Alarm and Silence Button – The SPD shall contain an audible alarm
that will be activated under any fault condition. There shall also be an audible
alarm silence button used to silence the audible alarm after it has been
activated.
d. Surge Counter – The SPD shall be equipped with an LCD display that indicates
to the user how many surges have occurred at the location. A reset
pushbutton shall also be standard, allowing the surge counter to be zeroed.

6. Fully Integrated Component Design – All of the SPD’s components and diagnostics
shall be contained within one discrete assembly.
2.3 SYSTEM APPLICATION
A. The main SPD application covered under this section is service entrance locations such as for
switchboards, switchgear, and MCCs. Also if indicated on the drawings the application could
include high exposure roof top locations and branch locations.
B. Surge Current Capacity – The minimum surge current capacity the device is capable of
withstanding shall be as shown in the following table:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 43 00-6
Minimum surge current capacity based on ANSI / IEEE C62.41 location category
CATEGORY Application Per Phase Per Mode
C Service Entrance Locations
(Switchboards, Switchgear, MCC,
Main Entrance)
240 kA 125 kA
B High Exposure Roof Top Locations
(Distribution Panelboards)
160 kA 80 kA
A Branch Locations (Panelboards,
MCCs, Busway)
120 kA 60 kA
2.4 ENCLOSURES
A. All enclosed equipment shall have NEMA 1 general purpose enclosures, unless otherwise
noted. Provide enclosures suitable for locations as indicated on the drawings and as
described below:
1. NEMA 1 – Constructed of a polymer (units integrated within electrical assemblies) or
steel (sidemount units only), intended for indoor use to provide a degree of
protection to personal access to hazardous parts and provide a degree of protection
against the ingress of solid foreign objects (falling dirt).
2. NEMA 4 – Constructed of steel intended for either indoor or outdoor use to provide a
degree of protection against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree of
protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign
objects (dirt and windblown dust); to provide a degree of protection with respect to
the harmful effects on the equipment due to the ingress of water (rain, sleet, snow,
splashing water, and hose directed water); and that will be undamaged by the
external formation of ice on the enclosure. (sidemount units only)
3. NEMA 4X – Constructed of stainless steel providing the same level of protection as
the NEMA 4 enclosure with the addition of corrosion protection. (sidemount units
only)
4. NEMA 12 – Constructed (with knockouts) for indoor use to provide a degree of
protection to personnel against access to hazardous parts; to provide a degree of
protection of the equipment inside the enclosure against ingress of solid foreign
objects (falling dirt and circulating dust, lint, fibers, and flyings); and to provide a
degree of protection with respect to harmful effects on the equipment due to the
ingress of water (dripping and light splashing).

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install SPD devices at service entrance on load side, with ground lead bonded to service
entrance ground.

B. Install SPD devices for panelboards and auxiliary panels with conductors or buses between
suppressor and points of attachment as short and straight as possible. Do not exceed
manufacturer's recommended lead length. Do not bond neutral and ground.
1. Provide a circuit breaker as a dedicated disconnecting means for the SPD. The circuit
breaker shall have the number of poles required to match the power system, so that

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 43 00-7
all hot legs are disconnected at one time. The circuit breaker shall be rated at 30 Amps
or in accordance with the manufacturer recommendations.

C. Special Techniques
1. Twist the SPD input conductors together to reduce input conductor inductance.
2. Follow the SPD manufacturer's recommended installation practices as found in the
installation, operation and maintenance manual and comply with all applicable codes.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Tests and Inspections:
1. Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test stated in NETA ATS,
"Surge Arresters, Low-Voltage Surge Protection Devices" Section. Certify compliance
with test parameters.
2. After installing SPD devices but before electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
3. Complete startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. SPD device will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

C. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICE

A. Do not energize or connect computer equipment or other sensitive equipment to their
sources until SPD devices are installed and connected.

B. Do not perform insulation resistance tests of the distribution wiring equipment with the SPD
installed. Disconnect before conducting insulation resistance tests, and reconnect
immediately after the testing is over.

3.4 DEMONSTRATION

A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to maintain SPD devices.

END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 43 00-8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIGHTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 50 00 - 1
SECTION 26 50 00
LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. The general requirements for luminaries and light poles.
B. Related Sections
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. National Fire Protection Association.
4. Illuminating Engineering Society.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install luminaries, and accessories for all lighting systems,
complete and operable, all in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
B. Individual luminaire types etc. are identified in the plans and on the luminaire schedule.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 26 00 00.
B. Product Data
1. Catalog literature for each luminaire specified cross referenced to the luminaire type
found on the Luminaire Schedule in the plans.
a. Each such submittal shall clearly describe:
1) Materials.
2) Type of diffuser.
3) Hardware.
4) Gasketing.
5) Reflector.
6) Chassis.
7) Finish.
8) Ballast.
2. Complete literature for each luminaire substitutions.
a. Submittals for luminaries shall be sufficient for competent comparison of the
proposed luminaire to the originally specified luminaire.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIGHTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 50 00 - 2
1) Photometric data shall include coefficients of utilization, average
brightness, candle power distribution curves, and lumen output chart.
b. Substitutions for specified luminaires shall be based upon quality of
construction, light distribution, appearance, and maintenance.
3. Support method shall be submitted for interior fixtures weighing more than 50
pounds.
4. Ballast catalog data indicating lamp wattage, input watts, sound rating, power factor,
and type of ballast.
a. Data for outdoor ballast shall be include low temperature starting
characteristics.
5. Photocell data submittal shall indicate switching capacity, the means of adjusting the
lighting pickup level, and enclosure.
6. Pole-mounted luminaries, including complete data on the pole material, finish,
handholes, anchoring, and fixture attachment.
7. Pole height, dimensions, bolt hole circle layout, light supporting rating, and wind
withstand rating based on effective area of luminaries, and hardware.
C. Calculations
1. Provide mounting details for indoor lights with calculations showing that the
installation meets the seismic requirements of the site.
2. Calculations and design must be made by and stamped by a registered professional
engineer registered in the state where the project is being constructed. In light of the
fact that this design is being provided by a professional engineer the submittal will be
reviewed for form and content but not reviewed for technical completeness, methods,
or calculations.
D. Record Drawings
1. The luminaire schedule in the plans must be updated to reflect the acceptable
substitutions, after the substitution has been reviewed and accepted by the Engineer.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Without limiting the generality of other requirements of these specifications, all work
hereunder shall conform to the applicable requirements of the referenced portions of the
following documents, to the extent that the requirements therein are not in conflict with the
provisions of this Section.
1. National Electric Code.
2. Underwriters Laboratories.
3. ANSI C82.1 Specifications for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts.
4. ANSI C84.4 Specifications for High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts (Multiple
Supply Type).
5. Standards of the Certified Ballast Manufacturer's Association.
6. Illuminating Engineering Society (IES).
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Luminaries shall be stored in their original cartons from the manufacturers until the time of
installation.
B. Luminaire poles shall be stored on blocks above grade until the time of installation.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIGHTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 50 00 - 3
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. Seismic and wind withstand ratings in accordance with Section 26 00 00.
1.8 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A. Exterior lighting system operation shall be demonstrated during the hours of darkness.
B. Lighting demonstration shall occur within 2 weeks prior to project acceptance.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. The Contractor shall warrant all luminaries, ballasts, and lamps for a minimum period of one
(1) year from Substantial Completion unless otherwise specified by the General Conditions.
1. Furnish, and replace any defective equipment during that period at no charge to the
Owner.
2. Said warranty shall be independent of any manufacturer infant mortality or normal
failure statistics.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Pre-approved manufacturers are indicated on the Luminaire Schedule, and in notes on the
drawings.
1. This selection of manufacturer's is not intended to be overly restrictive and the
Contractor may make substitutions from the manufacturers listed in the Luminaire
Schedule in order to offer a more advantageous luminaire package.
2. The lighting design and luminaire selection has been based upon the photometrics of
the identified luminaries. It is the Contractor's responsibility to insure and prove to
the Engineer at time of submittal that any substitutions meet the quality and
photometric requirements of the original design.
3. The Engineer shall make final determination if proposed substitutes are acceptable.
a. The Contractor shall furnish the identified luminaries at no additional cost to
the Owner for any luminaire substitutions that in the sole opinion of the
Engineer, are not acceptable.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Luminaries – General
1. All luminaries shall be pre-wired with leads of 18-AWG, minimum, for connection to
building circuits.
2. In general the luminaries furnished shall be as per the Luminaire Schedule. The
specifications apply to those luminaries not described or as an addition or
supplement to the luminaire schedule.
B. Exterior Luminaries

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIGHTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 50 00 - 4
1. Exterior luminaries in combination with their mounting pole and bracket shall be
capable of withstanding winds of levels consistent with the levels identified in Section
26 00 00 without damage.
2. Exterior luminaries shall have corrosion-resistant hardware and hinged doors or lens
retainer.
3. Luminaries specified to be furnished with integral photo-electrical control shall be of
the luminaire manufacturer's standard design.
C. Interior Luminaries
1. Interior fluorescent luminaries without diffusers shall be furnished with end plates.
2. Where diffusers are required, they shall be of high molecular strength acrylic.
a. Minimum thickness of the acrylic shall be 0.125 inches for all diffusers, except
that those on 4-foot square fixtures shall be 0.187 inches thick.
D. Lamps
1. Lamps shall be first-line:
a. General Electric.
b. Westinghouse.
c. Sylvania.
d. Phillips.
2. Fluorescent lamps shall be:
a. As indicated on the luminaire schedule.
3. Incandescent lamps shall be frosted unless a specified lighting control system
requires clear globe lamps.
4. High-pressure sodium lamps shall be of the dual filament design, suitable for use in
standby duty.
a. General Electric - LU400/SBY.
5. Unless otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, lamps shall be suitable for
operation in any burning position.
E. Photo-Electric Cells
1. Photoelectric cells for control of multiple fixtures shall be self-contained,
weatherproof type and shall be provided with time-delay features.
F. Ballasts
1. Ballasts for fluorescent luminaries in office areas shall have a Class "A" sound rating:
a. Such ballasts shall be of the low loss type.
b. All ballasts shall be high power factor, Class P.
c. Primary ballast voltage shall be suitable for use in the branch circuits
indicated in the Contract Documents.
d. Ballast shall be of the electronic design with plug and receptacle type
connectors.
2. In general all ballasts must be:
a. High efficiency.
b. High power factor.
c. High output.
d. Suitable for operation at -20 Deg F for all luminaries not located in office
areas.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIGHTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 50 00 - 5
2.3 COMPONENTS
A. Poles in general:
1. As indicated in the Luminaire Schedule
2. Anchor bolts:
a. Hot dip galvanized, and formed from hot rolled carbon steel bar stock, with
an "L" bend on one end.
b. Complete with leveling shims.
3. Anchor base:
a. Fabricated from structural quality hot rolled carbon steel plate, with a
minimum yield strength of 36,000 psi.
b. Base plate to telescope the pole shaft.
c. Welded top and bottom along the entire perimeter.
d. With slotted bolt holes on the bolt circles as submitted.
4. Handhole:
a. Reinforced handhole located approximately eighteen (18) inches above the
base.
b. Complete with steel cover and attachment screws.
c. With an integral ground connection nut, ½" x 13 UNC welded to the pole for
connection to the grounding system.
5. Pole mounted convenience outlet:
a. Furnish a 120 volt, GFCI protected receptacle integrally mounted in the pole
shaft at twenty four (24) inches above the base. Complete with corrosion
resistant and weather proof cover.
b. In accordance with Section 26 27 26.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Special Techniques
1. Luminaries shall be installed plumb and square with building and wall intersections.
a. Pendant-mounted luminaries which are mounted from sloping ceilings shall
be suspended by ball hangers, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.
b. Luminaries installed in machinery rooms shall be located after machines have
been installed.
2. In all cases, luminaire locations shall be coordinated with work of other trades to
prevent obstruction of light from the fixtures.
3. Luminaries shall be installed in accordance with the architectural reflected ceiling
drawings.
4. Unless otherwise indicated, luminaries shall be centered on ceiling tiles.
5. Luminaries weighing more than 25 pounds shall be supported independently of the
outlet box.
6. Recessed luminaries shall be installed light-tight to the ceiling and shall be provided
with auxiliary safety supports attached directly to the building structure.
a. Said safety supports shall consist of #12 AWG soft drawn galvanized wire.
7. Luminaries installed in suspended grid ceilings shall be supported independently of
the grid.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT LIGHTING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 50 00 - 6
8. All luminaries installed in suspended grid ceilings shall be held in place with seismic
restraint clips.
B. Lighting Poles
1. Poles shall be set on anchor bolts and secured with double nuts on each bolt.
2. After luminaire has been leveled and plumbed, the pole base shall be dry-packed.
3. Poles that are specified as hinged shall have one pole lowering winch furnished for all
of the poles.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. All outdoor luminaries shall be aimed after installation during dark evening hours as directed
by the Engineer.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Lenses, diffusers, and reflectors shall be cleaned just prior to the time specified for the system
demonstrations.
B. Luminaire trim, poles and support brackets, where finish has been damaged, shall be
refinished.
C. All luminaries used during construction for construction lighting shall be cleaned, the lamps
shall be replaced, and the used lamps returned to the Owner.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
A. Exterior lighting system operation shall be observed to indicate that fixtures are properly
focused, photo-cell operation is correct, and that switching functions as intended in
accordance with the drawings.
B. Similar requirements shall apply to interior lighting.
C. Through demonstration, the Contractor shall also verify that panel schedules properly
indicate the lighting outlets connected to each circuit.
3.5 SCHEDULES
A. Refer to the Luminaire Schedules as found in the plans.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT HEAT TRACING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 85 50 - 1
SECTION 26 85 50
HEAT TRACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
B. Manufacturer’s descriptive literature.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOF AND GUTTER HEAT TRACING
A. The standing seam metal roof eaves, gutters, and downspouts shall be heat-traced as
indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. The heat-tracing system shall be UL Listed
and shall include heating cable, components, and controls for keeping the eaves, gutters and
downspouts free of ice and snow.
B. The self-regulating heating cable shall be specifically designed for use with standing seam
metal roofs and shall consist of two 16 AWG nickel coated copper bus wires embedded in a
self-regulating polymer core that varies its power output to respond to temperature along its
length, allowing the cable to be crossed over itself without overheating and allowing the cable
to be cut-to-length in the field. The cable shall have a nominal power output of 12 watts per
foot in snow and ice and 5 watts per foot in air, per IEEE 515. The heating cable shall operate
on a 120 volt, single phase power supply and shall be the “IceStop GM-1XT” as manufactured
by Raychem Corporation, or approved equal.
C. All heating components shall be UL Listed. Component enclosure shall meet NEMA 4X
requirements. The system shall be controlled by an ambient sensing thermostat directly or
through an appropriate contractor. The Contractor shall be a three-pole contractor in a
NEMA 4X enclosure. Accessories shall include mechanical roof clips and adhesive. Refer to
Section 07900 – Sealants for Additional Requirements.
D. The heating cable shall be laid in gutters; shall be suspended in downspouts either as a a
single length and held in place by a downspout hanger; and shall be attached to the roof using
the appropriate roof clip, use sealed tee kits at locations required. The heating system shall
be installed per the manufacturer’s instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General:
1. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions and recommended
practices.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT HEAT TRACING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 26 85 50 - 2
2. Ground metallic structures or materials used for support of heating cable or on which
it is installed in accordance with applicable codes.
3. Wiring between power connection points of heat tracing cable branch lines shall be
provided by heat tracing system supplier.
4. Provide end of circuit lighted end seals in bottom of down spouts.
5. Provide and install thermostat at each circuit to turn the heat trace off in warm
weather.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Test each circuit with 500-volt insulation tester between circuit and ground with neutrals
isolated from ground.
1. Insulation Resistance: Minimum 1,000 megohms per 1,000 feet.
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 31
EARTHWORK

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE PREPARATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 10 00 - 1
SECTION 31 10 00
SITE PREPARATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Work of this Section includes all those measures required during the Contractor's initial
move onto the site to protect existing fences, structures and associated improvements,
streets, and utilities downslope of construction areas from damage due to boulders, trees or
other objects dislodged during the construction process: clearing, grubbing and stripping;
and regrading of areas to receive embankment fill.
B. The Contractor is required to protect and preserve all things designated to remain. Where
Contractor's operation causes damage or injury to trees and plants designated to remain, an
arborist or other qualified professional shall be employed by the Contractor, at no additional
cost to the Owner, to repair the damage or provide adequate replacement to the Owner's
satisfaction where damage is beyond repair.
1.2 SITE INSPECTION
A. Prior to moving onto the Project site, the Contractor shall inspect the site conditions and
review maps of the existing plant site and off-site pipeline routes and facilities delineating
the Owner's property and right-of-way lines.
B. Contractor shall submit photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions
of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be
misconstrued as damage caused by site preparation.
C. The Contractor shall identify and accurately locate utilities and other subsurface structural,
electrical, and mechanical conditions. Existing conditions shall be incorporated into the
record drawings for the project.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. The following definitions apply to the Work of this Section:
1. Clearing is defined as cutting trees, removing fences and posts, removing curbs and
other improvements to prepare the site for grubbing and stripping.
2. Grubbing is defined as the below grade part of clearing to remove roots, small piping,
irrigation systems, etc., to prepare the site for stripping.
3. Stripping is defined as removing a surface layer of soil and organic material, sod,
topsoil, and other unsuitable material as defined in Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork, to
a depth that earthwork can proceed.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE PREPARATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 10 00 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during
construction.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water
runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction.
1. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.
3.2 TREE PROTECTION
A. Erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around
perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Remove fence when construction is
complete.
1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within drip line of
remaining trees.
2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees.
B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and
excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to
expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.
1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly.
2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently
relocated and covered with soil.
3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with an emulsified asphalt
or other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues.
4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. Backfill with
soil as soon as possible.
D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction
operations, in a manner approved by Engineer.
1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where project is located, to
submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs.
2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as
determined by the qualified arborist.
3.3 UTILITIES
A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE PREPARATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 10 00 - 3
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.
B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide
temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:
1. Notify Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions.
2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Engineer’s written permission.
C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.
3.4 PRIMARY PLANT SITE ACCESS
A. Develop any necessary access to the site, including barrier facilities to be installed at the
beginning of construction in order to prohibit entry of unauthorized persons.
B. Utility Interference: Where existing utilities interfere with the Work of this Section, notify
the Engineer and work around the interferences until a directive is issued.
3.5 CLEARING, GRUBBING, AND STRIPPING
A. All construction areas shall be cleared of grass and weeds to at least a depth of six inches and
cleared of structures, concrete or masonry debris, trees, logs, upturned stumps, loose
boulders, and any other objectionable material of any kind which would i nterfere with the
performance or completion of the Work, create a hazard to safety, or impair the Work's
subsequent usefulness or obstruct its operation. Loose boulders within 10 feet of the top of
cut lines shall be incorporated in landscaping or removed from the site. Trees and other
natural vegetation outside the actual lines of construction shall be protected from damage
during construction, as directed by the Engineer.
B. Within the limits of clearing, the areas below the natural ground surface shall be grubbed to
a depth necessary to remove all stumps, roots, buried logs, and all other objectionable
material. Debris or waste shall be totally removed if they are found on the site. All
objectionable material from the clearing and grubbing process shall be removed from the site
and wasted in approved safe locations in compliance with state and federal regulations.
C. The area to be affected by construction that have not been pre-excavated to the subgrade
elevation shall be removed and placed in the designated stockpile areas, and/or incorporated
into landscaped areas or other nonstructural embankments.
D. For all areas that have not been previously disturbed, including staging areas and temporary
construction easements, topsoil-salvaging operation shall immediately follow clearing
operations. The area shall be stripped of topsoil to a depth of 8 inches. Unsuitable materials,
specified in Section 31 23 00, shall not be considered topsoil. The Contractor shall strip to
the depth indicated regardless of the material encountered using a D8 Caterpillar, or equal,
fitted with a standard dozer blade and dual shank rippers. All stripped topsoil shall be
stockpiled within stripped areas in stockpiles not to exceed 15 feet in height. Vegetation shall
be ground or chipped to a mulching consistency and mixed with the stripped soil. Stockpiles
shall be placed away from high construction traffic areas and shall be fenced and signed to
prevent accidental use as fill prior to topsoil replacement.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT SITE PREPARATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 10 00 - 4
E. Upon completion of Work within the construction areas stripped of topsoil, the stored topsoil
shall be respread over the disturbed areas. Topsoil shall be spread in about a 6 -inch layer
using paddlewheel scrapers and front-end wheel loaders. Respread topsoil shall match the
existing terrain as much as possible. Interfaces between restored disturbed areas and
undisturbed areas shall be chain dragged to eliminate obvious edges. All tracks and
equipment marks shall be chain dragged or hand raked away. Replaced topsoil shall be
thoroughly watered for dust control upon completion of the respreading operations. Once
topsoil replacement has been completed, no vehicles or other motorized equipment shall be
allowed to travel on the finished surface.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, native trees larger than three inches in diameter at the base shall
not be removed without the Engineer's approval. The removal of any trees, shrubs, fences,
or other improvements outside of rights-of-way, if not necessary for the Contractor’s choice
of means and methods, shall be arranged with the property owner and be removed and
replaced at no increased cost to the Owner.
G. Except in areas to be excavated, holes and other holes resulting from Work of this section
shall be backfilled with suitable material in accordance with Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork.
3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS
A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to
facilitate new construction.
B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.
1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincides with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut
length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw -cut
faces vertically.
3.7 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished
materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off
Owner’s property.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 1
SECTION 31 23 00
EARTHWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall perform all earthwork indicated and required for construction of the
Work, complete and in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards
29 CFR 1926 OSHA Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
ASTM C595 Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements
ASTM D 422 Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
ASTM D 1556 Test Method for Density of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone
Method
ASTM D 1557 Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified
Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3) (2,700 kN-m/m3)
ASTM D 1633 Test Method for Compressive Strength of Molded Soil-Cement
Cylinders
ASTM D 2419 Test Method for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine
Aggregate
ASTM D 2487 Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
ASTM D 2901 Test Method for Cement Content of Freshly Mixed Soil Cement
ASTM D 2922 Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place
by Nuclear Methods
ASTM D 4253 Test Methods for Maximum Index Density of Soils using a
Vibratory Table
ASTM D4254 Test Method for Minimum Index Density and Unit Weight of
Soils and Calculation of Relative Density
ASTM D 4318 Test Method for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity
Index of Soils
ASTM D4832 Test Method for Preparation and Testing of Controlled Low
Strength Material (CLSM) Test Cylinders

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 2
ASTM D 5971 Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Controlled Low Strength
Material (CLSM)
ASTM D 6023 Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, Cement Content, and Air
Content (Gravimetric) of Controlled Low Strength Material
(CLSM)
ASTM D 6024 Test Method for Ball Drop on Controlled Low Strength
Material (CLSM) to Determine Suitability for Load Application
ASTM D 6103 Test Method for Flow Consistency of Controlled Low Strength
Material (CLSM)
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. The Contractor's attention is directed to the provisions of Subpart P, 29 CFR 1926 of the OSHA
Safety and Health Standards for Construction, which relate to protection of employees in
excavations. The Contractor shall submit, for information to the Engineer, the project
excavation plan and the name of the Contractor's competent person, prior to commencing
any excavation.
B. Submit samples of all materials proposed to be used in the work in accordance with the
requirements in Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures. Sample sizes shall be as
determined by the testing laboratory.
C. Submit dewatering and water removal plan prior to performing any dewatering or water
removal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUITABLE FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. General: Fill, backfill, and embankment materials shall be suitable material.
B. Suitable Materials: Suitable material is defined as selected or processed clean, well graded
earth material, sands and gravels free of excessive fines, less than 20 percent rock and
boulders larger than 4 inches, grass, roots, brush, vegetation, or other deleterious materials.
C. Fill and backfill materials within 6 inches of any structure or pipe shall be smaller than 1 inch
in any dimension.
1. Suitable materials may be obtained from onsite excavations, may be processed onsite
materials, or may be imported. If imported materials are required by this Section or
to meet the quantity requirements of the Project, provide the imported materials at
no additional expense to the Owner, unless a unit price item is included for imported
materials in the bidding schedule. Onsite materials shall be stockpiled and segregated
prior to use.
2. The following types of suitable materials are defined:
Type A (Granular Backfill): Crushed rock or gravel, and sand well graded and readily compacted,
non-plastic, meeting the following gradation requirements:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 3
Sieve Size Percentage Passing

1-inch 100
No. 40 15 - 60
No. 200 0 - 15

Type B (Crushed Rock): Manufactured angular, crushed rock, non-plastic, meeting the following
gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percentage Passing

3/8-inch 100
No. 4 30 - 50
No. 200 0 - 5

Type C (Sand Backfill): Sand non-plastic, meeting the following gradation requirements:
Sieve Size Percentage Passing

3/4-inch 100
No. 4 80 - 100
No. 10 30-50
No. 40 10-30
No. 200 7 - 15

Squeegee is not acceptable as sand backfill.

Type D (Select Backfill): Suitable material that can be readily compacted and meets the
requirements of AASHTO M 145 classification A-1-a, non-plastic, well graded with a maximum
particle size of 2 inches.
Sieve Size Percentage Passing
2-inch 100
No. 10 30-50
No. 40 15-30
No. 200 0 - 15

Type E (Pea Gravel Backfill): Crushed rock or gravel with 100 percent passing a 1/2-inch sieve and
not more than 10 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

Type F (Drainrock): Crushed rock or gravel conforming to one of the following gradation
requirements, as shown on the Drawings or approved by the Engineer:
Percentage Passing
Sieve Size 3-inch Max. 2-inch Max. 3/4-inch Max.
3-inch 100 - -
2-inch 90 - 100 100 -
1-1/2 inch 70 - 100 90 – 100 -
3/4 inch 0 - 50 0 – 15 100
1/2-inch - - 95 - 100
3/8-inch 0 - 10 0 - 5 70 - 100
No. 4 0 - 25 - -
No. 8 0 - 5 - -
No. 200 0 - 3 - 0 - 3

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 4

Type G (Type II Aggregate Base): Well-graded, clean, hard, tough, durable, and sound mineral
aggregates consisting of crushed stone, or crushed gravel, free of organic matter and contamination
from chemical or petroleum products meeting State specification requirements and conforming to
the following Table and gradations:

Aggregate Properties
Aggregate Class A B
Dry Rodded Unit Weight Not less than 75 lb/ft3 AASHTO T 19
Liquid Limit/Plastic Index Non-plastic PI  6 AASHTO T 89
AASHTO 90
Aggregate Wear Not to exceed 50 percent AASHTO T 96
Gradation Table 2 AASHTO T 11
AASHTO T 27
CBR with a 10 lb surcharge measured
at 0.20 inch penetration
70%
Minimum N/A AASHTO T 193
Two Fractured Faces 50% Min N/A AASHTO T 335

Sieve Size Percentage Passing
1 ½ -inch 100
1-inch 90 - 100
3/4-inch 70 - 85
1/2-inch 65 - 80
3/8-inch 55 - 75
No. 4 40 - 60
No. 16 25 - 40
No. 200 8 - 13

Type H (Graded Drainrock): Graded drainrock shall be crushed rock or gravel, durable and free
from slaking or decomposition under the action of alternate wetting and drying. The material shall
be uniformly graded and shall meet the following gradation requirements:

Sieve Size Percentage Passing
1-inch 100
3/4 inch 90 - 100
3/8-inch 40 - 100
No. 4 25 - 40
No. 8 18 - 33
No. 30 5 - 15
No. 50 0 - 7
No. 200 0 - 3

Type I: (Levee Material): Clayey sand to sandy clay obtained from off-site borrow sources or from
onsite excavations, processed to the extent required to produce a material with a maximum size of
4 inches, well-graded from coarse to fine, and free from roots, sticks, organic matter, concrete,
asphalt and other deleterious material. Levee material shall meet the following gradation
requirements:
Sieve Size Percentage Passing

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 5

4-inch 100
No. 4 50 - 70
No. 200 30 - 50

Type J (Cement-Treated Backfill): Material which consists of Type F material, or any mixture of
Types B, C, G, and H materials which has been cement-treated so that the cement content of the
material is not less than 5 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2901. The
ultimate compressive strength at 28 days shall be not less than 400 psi when tested in accordance
with ASTM D 1633.

Type K (Topsoil): Stockpiled topsoil material which has been obtained at the site by removing soil
to a depth as defined in Section 31 10 00 - Site Preparation. Removal of the topsoil shall be done
after the area has been stripped of vegetation and debris.

Type M (Aggregate Subbase): Crushed rock aggregate subbase material non-plastic that can be
compacted readily by watering and rolling to form a stable base. The sand equivalent value shall
not be less than 18 and shall meet one of the following gradation requirements, as shown on the
Drawings or approved by the Engineer:

Percentage Passing
Sieve Size 3-inch Max. 2-inch Max.

3-inch 100 -
2-inch 90 - 100 100
1-1/2 inch - 95 - 100
1-inch 70 - 90 -
No. 4 30 - 65 30 - 65
No. 16 15 - 40 15 - 40
No. 200 2 - 12 2 - 12

Type N (trench plug): Low permeable fill material, a nondispersable clay material having a
minimum plasticity index of 10.

Type O (Controlled Low Strength Material (CLSM)): CLSM shall consist of a mixture of portland
cement, aggregate, fly ash, water, and approved admixtures conforming to the following
requirements:
3. Blended Hydraulic Cement: Comply with ASTM C595, Type IL (10) (MS), grey color.
4. Aggregate: Clean imported sand and gravel or selected material from the excavation,
imported material, or a combination thereof as approved by the Engineer. Maximum
aggregate size shall be 1 to 3 inches. The soluble sulfate content of aggregate in the
mixture shall not exceed 0.3 percent by dry weight.
5. Water: Potable quality.
6. Fly Ash: Class C, ASTM C 618 or approved alternate.
7. The minus 200 sieve fraction shall be nonplastic, as defined by ASTM D 4318. By this
standard, a soil is considered nonplastic if either the liquid or plastic limit cannot be
determined, or if the plastic limit is equal to or greater than the liquid limit.
8. Proportion the CLSM to be a flowable, nonsegregating, self-consolidating low shrink
slurry. The Contractor shall determine the materials and proportions used to meet
the requirements of these Specifications.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 6
9. The unconfined compressive strength at 7 days shall be a minimum of 100 psi and a
maximum of 300 psi. Contractor shall form a minimum of six test cylinders with
proposed materials to confirm design strength and mix design. Four of the cylinders
shall be broken at 7 days in conformance with applicable concrete cylinder
specifications and results provided to Engineer. The remaining two cylinders shall
be broken by Contractor at discretion of Engineer. Initial mix design and cylinder
breaks shall be completed at least 21 days prior to use of the material on the jobsite.
Final mix approval and use of the material shall not occur prior to confirmation of
strength by the cylinder breaks.
10. The temperature of the CLSM discharged into the trench shall be below 90 degrees F.
11. CLSM backfill under concrete structures shall be protected during curing as specified
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
12. CLSM shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4832, ASTM D 5971, ASTM D 6023,
and ASTM D6103

Type P: (Suitable Trench Backfill): Suitable material that can be readily compacted, with less than
35 percent passing the No. 200 sieve and a plasticity index of 10 or less.

2.2 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL
A. Unsuitable materials include but are not limited to the materials listed below.
1. Soils which, when classified under ASTM D 2487 - Classification of Soils for
Engineering Purposes, fall in the classifications of Pt, OH, CH, MH, or OL.
2. Soils which cannot be compacted sufficiently to achieve the density indicated for the
intended use.
3. Materials that contain hazardous or designated waste materials including petroleum
hydrocarbons, pesticides, heavy metals, slag, and any material which may be
classified as hazardous or toxic according to applicable regulations.
4. Soils that contain greater concentrations of chloride or sulfate ions, or have a soil
resistivity or pH less than the existing onsite soils.
5. Topsoil, except as allowed below.
B. All unsuitable excavated material shall be disposed off site.
2.3 USE OF FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIAL TYPES
A. Use the types of materials as designated herein for all required fill, backfill, and embankment
construction hereunder.
B. Where these Specifications conflict with the requirements of any local agency having
jurisdiction or with the requirements of a pipe material manufacturer, notify the Engineer
immediately. In case of conflict between types of pipe embedment backfills, use the agency-
specified backfill material if that material provides a greater degree of support to the pipe, as
determined by the Engineer. In case of conflict between types of trench or final backfill types,
use the agency-specified backfill material if that material provides the greater in-place
density after compaction.
C. Fill and backfill types shall be used in accordance with the following provisions:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 7
1. Embankment fills shall be constructed of Type P material, as defined herein, or any
mixture of Type P and Type A through Type F materials.
2. Pipe zone backfill, as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill" below, shall
consist of the following materials for each pipe material listed below.
a. Mortar coated pipe, concrete pipe, and uncoated ductile iron pipe shall be
provided with Type A or C material in the pipe zone.
b. Coal tar enamel coated pipe, polyethylene encased pipe, tape wrapped pipe,
and other nonmortar coated pipe shall be backfilled with Type C material in
the pipe zone.
c. Plastic pipe and vitrified clay pipe shall be backfilled with Type C material in
the pipe zone.
d. Where pipelines are installed on grades exceeding 4 percent, and where
backfill materials are graded such that there is less than 10 percent passing a
No. 4 sieve, trench plugs of Type J or N material shall be provided at
maximum intervals of 200 feet unless indicated otherwise.
e. Type O material shall be used in the pipe zone where shown on plans,
specified, or required by the Engineer for special crossings or other locations,
or where otherwise approved.
f. Type E material will not be allowed for backfill within the pipe zone.
3. Trench zone backfill for pipelines as defined under "Pipe and Utility Trench Backfill"
shall be Type D backfill material.
4. Final backfill material for pipelines under paved areas, as defined under "Pipe and
Utility Trench Backfill" shall be Type G backfill material. Final backfill under areas
not paved shall be the same material as that used for trench backfill.
5. Trench backfill and final backfill for pipelines under structures shall be Type A or B,
except where concrete encasement is required by the Contract Documents.
6. Aggregate base materials under pavements shall be Type G material constructed to
the thicknesses indicated. Aggregate subbase shall be Type M material.
7. Backfill around structures shall be Type P material, or Types A through Type F
materials, or any mixture thereof, except as shown.
8. Backfill materials beneath structures shall be as follows:
a. Drainrock materials under hydraulic structures or other water retaining
structures with underdrain systems shall be Type H material.
b. Under concrete hydraulic structures or other water retaining structures
without underdrain systems, Types F, G or H materials shall be used.
c. Under structures where groundwater must be removed to allow placement of
concrete, Type F material shall be used. Before the Type F material is placed,
filter type geotextile fabric shall be placed over the exposed foundation.
d. Under all other structures, Type F, G or H material shall be used.
9. Backfill used to replace pipeline trench overexcavation shall be a layer of Type F
material with a 6-inch top filter layer of Type E material or filter fabric to prevent
migration of fines for wet trench conditions or the same material as used for the pipe
zone backfill if the trench conditions are not wet.
2.4 PIPELINE MARKING TAPE
A. Metallic Tape: Tape shall be minimum 5.5 mils thick aluminum foil imprinted on one side,
encased in high visibility inert polyethylene jacket. Tape shall be a minimum of 6 inches wide.
Imprinted lettering shall be 1 inch tall, permanent black, as indicated. Joining clips shall be

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 8
manufacturer's standard tin or nickel coated. Tape shall be as manufactured by Reef
Industries (Terra "D"), Allen (Detectatape), or equal.
B. Plastic Tape: Tape shall be minimum 4-mil thick polyethylene which is impervious to alkalais
acids, and chemicals and solvents which are likely in the soil. Tape shall be a minimum of
6 inches wide and lettering shall be 1-inch tall permanent black on a colored background.
Tape shall be manufactured by Reef Industries (Terra Tape), Allen (Markline), or equal.
C. Warning Tape: Warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground
utilities continuously inscribed with a description of utility, colored as follows:
1. Red; Electric.
2. Yellow; Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials.
3. Orange: Telephone and other communications.
4. Blue: Water Systems.
5. Green: Sewer Systems.
2.5 MATERIALS TESTING
A. All soils testing of samples submitted by the Contractor will be done by a testing laboratory
of the Owner's choice and at the Owner's expense. At its discretion, the Engineer may request
that the Contractor supply samples for testing of any material used in the work.
B. Particle size analysis of soils and aggregates will be performed using ASTM D 422 - Method
for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils.
C. Determination of sand equivalent value will be performed using ASTM D 2419 - Test Method
for Sand Equivalent Value of Soils and Fine Aggregate.
D. Unified Soil Classification System: References in this Section to soil classification types and
standards shall have the meanings and definitions indicated in ASTM D 2487. The Contractor
shall be bound by all applicable provisions of said ASTM D 2487 in the interpretation of soil
classifications.
E. The testing for chloride, sulfate, resistivity, and pH will be done by a testing laboratory of the
Owner's choice and at the Owner's expense.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION – GENERAL
A. General: Except when specifically provided to the contrary, excavation shall include the
removal of all materials of whatever nature encountered, including rock and all obstructions
of any nature that would interfere with the proper execution and completi on of the Work.
The removal of said materials shall conform to the lines and grades indicated or ordered.
Unless otherwise indicated, the entire construction site shall be stripped of all vegetation and
debris, and such material shall be removed from the site prior to performing any excavation
or placing any fill. Furnish, place, and maintain all supports and shoring that may be required
for the sides of the excavations. Excavations shall be sloped or otherwise supported in a safe

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 9
manner in accordance with safety requirements of the requirements of OSHA Safety and
Health Standards for Construction (29CFR1926).
B. Maximum Length of Open Trench: The maximum length of open trench in urban and rural
areas shall not exceed 500-feet at each pipe installation heading beyond the end of the
installed pipeline, or the requirements of the agency with jurisdiction, whichever is lesser.
C. Construction Delays: In the case of any construction delay in excess of five calendar days,
whether Contractor or Owner caused, the Contractor shall backfill the excavation, install
temporary paving including temporary traffic markings, and restore traffic to pre-
construction condition to minimize disruption to traffic and the community at no additional
cost to the Owner.
D. Removal and Exclusion of Water: Remove and exclude water, including storm water,
groundwater, irrigation water, and wastewater, from all excavations. Dewatering wells, well
points, sump pumps, or other means shall be used to remove water and continuously
maintain groundwater at a level at least 2 feet below the bottom of excavations before the
excavation work begins at each location. Water shall be removed and excluded until
backfilling is complete and all field soils testing has been completed.
3.2 STRUCTURE, ROADWAY, AND EMBANKMENT EXCAVATION
A. Excavation Beneath Structures and Embankments: Except where otherwise indicated for a
particular structure or ordered by the Engineer, excavation shall be carried to the grade of
the bottom of the footing or slab. Where indicated or ordered, areas beneath structures or
fills shall be overexcavated. The subgrade areas beneath embankments shall be excavated to
remove not less than the top 6 inches of native material and where such subgrade is sloped,
the native material shall be benched. When such overexcavation is indicated, both
overexcavation and subsequent backfill to the required grade shall be performed. When such
overexcavation is not indicated but is ordered by the Engineer, such overexcavation and any
resulting backfill will be paid for under a separate unit price bid item if such bid item has been
established; otherwise payment will be made in accordance with a negotiated price. After
the required excavation or overexcavation has been completed, the exposed surface shall be
scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought to optimum moisture content, and rolled with heavy
compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density.
B. Excavation Beneath Concrete Reservoirs: Excavation under reservoirs shall extend to the
bottom of the drainrock layer. After such excavation has been completed, the exposed surface
shall be rolled with heavy compaction equipment to 95 percent of maximum density and then
graded to provide a reasonably smooth surface for placement of the drainrock. Areas under
the reservoir upon which fill is to be placed shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches, brought
to optimum moisture content, and compacted to obtain 95 percent of maximum density with
moisture content within plus and minus 2 percent of the optimum moisture content.
C. Excavation Beneath Paved Areas: Excavation under areas to be paved shall extend to the
bottom of the aggregate base or subbase, if such base is called for; otherwise it shall extend
to the bottom of the paving thickness. After the required excavation has been completed, the
top 12 inches of exposed surface shall be scarified, brought to optimum moisture content, and
rolled with heavy compaction equipment to obtain 95 percent of maximum density. The
finished subgrade shall be even, self-draining, and in conformance with the slope of the

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 10
finished pavement. Areas that could accumulate standing water shall be regraded to provide
a self-draining subgrade.
D. Notification of Engineer: Notify the Engineer at least 3 days in advance of completion of any
structure excavation and allow the Engineer a review period of at least 1 day before the
exposed foundation is scarified and compacted or is covered with backfill or with any
construction materials.
3.3 PIPELINE AND UTILITY TRENCH EXCAVATION
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated or ordered, excavation for pipelines and utilities shall
be open-cut trenches with widths as indicated.
B. Trench Bottom: Except when pipe bedding is required, the bottom of the trench shall be
excavated uniformly to the grade of the bottom of the pipe zone. Excavations for pipe bells
and welding shall be made as required.
C. Open Trench: The maximum amount of open trench permitted in any one location shall be
500 feet, or the length necessary to accommodate the amount of pipe installed in a single day,
whichever is greater. All trenches shall be fully backfilled at the end of each day or, in lieu
thereof, shall be protected in accordance with Section 01 71 50 – Protection of Existing
Facilities. The Contractor shall provide temporary 6-foot chain link fencing panels for
protection of all open excavations and trenches within public streets, residential areas, and
all other locations with the exception of unimproved open areas where excavations and/or
pipeline trenches that can be safely sloped in accordance with current OSHA standards to
provide safe access without the use of shoring devices. Temporary fencing panels shall fully
enclose open excavations and trenches, and shall remain in place during all non-working
hours.
D. Trench Overexcavation: Where trenches are indicated to be overexcavated, excavation shall
be to the depth indicated, and backfill shall be installed to the grade of the bottom of the pipe
bedding.
E. Overexcavation: When ordered by the Engineer, whether indicated on the Drawings or not,
trenches shall be overexcavated beyond the depth and/or width shown. Such overexcavation
shall be to the dimensions ordered. The trench shall then be backfilled to the grade of the
bottom of the pipe bedding. Overexcavation less than 6 inches below the limits on the
Drawings shall be done at no increase in cost to the Owner. When the overexcavation ordered
by the Engineer is 6 inches or greater below the limits shown, or wider, additional payment
will be made. Said additional payment will be made under separate unit price bid items for
overexcavation if such bid items have been established; otherwise payment will be made in
accordance with a negotiated price.
F. Where pipelines are to be installed in embankments, fills, or structure backfills, the fill shall
be constructed to a level at least one foot above the top of the pipe before the trench is
excavated.
G. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation operations, the trench width shall be
wider than the shield so that the shield is free to be lifted and then moved horizontally
without binding against the trench sidewalls. If the trench walls cave in or slough, the trench

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 11
shall be excavated as an open excavation with sloped sidewalls or with trench shoring, as
indicated and as required by the pipe structural design.
3.4 OVEREXCAVATION NOT ORDERED OR INDICATED
A. Any overexcavation carried below the grade ordered or indicated, shall be backfilled to the
required grade with the indicated material and compaction. Such work shall be performed
at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.5 EXCAVATION IN LAWN AREAS
A. Where excavation occurs in lawn areas, the sod shall be carefully removed, dampened, and
stockpiled to preserve it for replacement. Excavated material may be placed on the lawn;
provided, that a drop cloth or other suitable method is employed to protect the lawn from
damage. The lawn shall not remain covered for more than 72 hours. Immediately after
completion of backfilling and testing of the pipeline, the sod shall be replaced and lightly
rolled in a manner so as to restore the lawn as near as possible to its original condition.
Provide new sod if stockpiled sod has not been replaced within 72 hours.
3.6 EXCAVATION IN VICINITY OF TREES
A. Except where trees are indicated to be removed, trees shall be protected from injury during
construction operations. No tree roots over 2 inches in diameter shall be cut without express
permission of the Engineer. Trees shall be supported during excavation by any means
previously reviewed by the Engineer.
3.7 BACKFILL – GENERAL
A. Backfill shall not be dropped directly upon any structure or pipe. Backfill shall not be placed
around or upon any structure until the concrete has attained sufficient strength to withstand
the loads imposed. Backfill around water retaining structures sha ll not be placed until the
structures have been tested, and the structures shall be full of water while backfill is being
placed. Structures shall not be constructed on CLSM backfill until the CLSM has obtained a
7-day minimum cure.
B. Except for drainrock materials being placed in overexcavated areas or trenches, backfill shall
be placed after all water is removed from the excavation, and the trench sidewalls and bottom
have been dried to a moisture content suitable for compaction.
C. If a moveable trench shield is used during excavation, pipe installation, and backfill
operations, the shield shall be moved by lifting the shield free of the trench bottom or backfill
and then moving the shield horizontally. Do not drag trench shields along the trench causing
damage or displacement to the trench sidewalls, the pipe, or the bedding and backfill.
D. Immediately prior to placement of backfill materials, the bottoms and sidewalls of trenches
and structure excavations shall have all loose sloughing, or caving soil and rock materials
removed. All materials disturbed from their intact condition that are 4 inches or larger in
least dimension or aggregates of soil material thicker than 4 inches shall be removed from
the excavation walls and base prior to placing pipe or any backfill material. Trench sidewalls

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 12
shall consist of excavated surfaces that are in a relatively undisturbed condition before
placement of backfill materials.
3.8 PLACING AND SPREADING OF BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Backfill materials shall be placed and spread evenly in layers. When compaction is achieved
using mechanical equipment, the layers shall be evenly spread so that the depth of each
uncompacted layer shall not exceed 8 inches of compacted thickness.
B. During spreading, each layer shall be thoroughly mixed as necessary to promote uniformity
of material in each layer. Pipe zone backfill materials shall be manually spread around the
pipe so that when compacted the pipe zone backfill will provide uniform bearing and side
support.
C. Where the backfill material moisture content is below the optimum moisture content, water
shall be added before or during spreading until the proper moisture content is achieved.
D. Where the backfill material moisture content is too high to permit the indicated degree of
compaction the material shall be dried or mixed with drier material until the moisture
content is satisfactory.
3.9 COMPACTION OF EARTH FILL, BACKFILL, AND EMBANKMENT MATERIALS
A. Each layer of Types A, B, C, G, H, I, and K backfill materials as defined herein, where the
material is graded such that at least 10 percent passes a No. 4 sieve, shall be mechanically
compacted to the indicated percentage of density. Equipment that is consistently capable of
achieving the required degree of compaction shall be used and each layer shall be compacted
over its entire area while the material is at the required moisture content.
B. Each layer of Type E and J backfill materials shall be compacted by means of at least 2 passes
from a flat plate vibratory compactor. When such materials are used for pipe zone backfill,
vibratory compaction shall be used at the top of the pipe zone or at vertical intervals of
24 inches, whichever is the least distance from the subgrade.
C. Fill on reservoir and structure roofs shall be deposited at least 30 days after the concrete roof
slab has been placed. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds when loaded shall not
be used on a roof. A roller weighing not more than 8,000 pounds shall be used to compact fill
on a roof.
D. Pipe zone backfill materials that are granular, shall be compacted by using vibratory
compactors.
E. Equipment weighing more than 10,000 pounds shall not be used closer to structure walls
than a horizontal distance equal to the depth of the fill at that time. Hand operated power
compaction equipment shall be used where use of heavier equipment is impractical or
restricted due to weight limitations.
F. Backfill around and over pipelines that is mechanically compacted shall be compacted using
light, hand operated, vibratory compactors and rollers. After completion of at least 2 feet of

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 13
compacted backfill over the top of pipeline, compaction equipment weighing no more than
8,000 pounds may be used to complete the trench backfill.
G. Compaction Requirements: The following compaction test requirements shall be in
accordance with ASTM D 1557, method C. Compaction shall be obtained with the moisture
content within plus or minus 2 percent of the optimum moisture content. Where agency or
utility company requirements govern, the highest compaction standards shall apply.
Location or Use of Fill Percentage of
Maximum Density

Pipe embedment backfill for flexible
pipe 90

Pipe bedding and overexcavated
zones under bedding for flexible
pipe, including trench plugs 90

Pipe embedment backfill for steel
yard piping ---

Pipe embedment backfill for rigid
pipe 90

Pipe zone backfill portion above
embedment for rigid pipe 90

Pipe bedding and overexcavated
zones under bedding for rigid pipe 90

Final backfill, beneath paved areas or
structures 95

Final backfill, not beneath paved
areas or structures 85
Trench zone backfill, beneath paved
areas and structures, including trench
plugs 95

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 14
Trench zone backfill, not beneath
paved
areas or structures, including trench
plugs 90

Embankments and fills 90

Embankments and fills beneath
paved areas
or structures 95

Backfill beneath structures and
hydraulic
structures 95

Backfill and fill around structures on
reservoir or structure roof 90

Topsoil (Type K material) 80

Aggregate base or subbase
(Type G or M material) 95

3.10 PLACEMENT OF CLSM
A. Following placement and anchoring of the pipe, remove all loose soil from trench walls and
floor. Remove any unstable soil at the top of the trench, which might fall into the trench
during placement of the CLSM.
B. Prior to placement of CLSM, the pipeline steel temperature shall be controlled as specified in
Section 02570 - Steel Pipe.
C. Deliver the CLSM to the trench in ready mix trucks and utilize pump or chutes to place the
CLSM in the trench. Direct CLSM to one side of the pipe, taking care not to displace the pipe
at any time. Continue placing CLSM on one side of the pipe until CLSM has gone under the
pipe and up the other side to a depth of 1.5 feet above the pipe bottom. Use at least two hand-
held vibrators to continuously liquefy and move CLSM into all voids. Adjust water in mixture
to maintain fluid consistency but maintain strength requirements. Continue placing CLSM on
both sides of the pipe continuously using two vibrators for every 30 feet of pipe run.
D. Maintain stability of pipe throughout CLSM placement. CLSM will likely require placement in
lifts to prevent pipe flotation. No movement of the pipe caused by flotation will be allowed.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 15
If any movement occurs, the CLSM material shall be removed and the pipe placed back on line
and grade. Any damage to the pipeline system caused by movement of the pipe shall be
removed and/or repaired in full conformance with these Contract Documents at no
additional cost to the Owner. Remove all sloughed material or other debris from top of
previously placed CLSM.
3.11 PIPE AND UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL
A. Pipe Zone
1. The pipe zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section lying
between a plane 6 inches below the bottom surface of the pipe and a plane at a point
12 inches above the top surface of the pipe. The bedding is defined as that portion of
pipe zone backfill material between the bottom of the trench and the bottom of the
pipe. The embedment is defined as that portion of the pipe zone material between
the bedding and a plane at a point 6 inches above the top surface of the pipe.
2. After compacting the bedding, perform a final trim using a string line for establishing
grade, such that each pipe section when first laid will be continually in contact with
the bedding along the extreme bottom of the pipe. Excavation for pipe bells and
welding shall be made as required.
3. The pipe zone shall be backfilled with the indicated backfill material. Exercise care to
prevent damage to the pipeline coating, cathodic bonds, and the pipe itself during the
installation and backfill operations.
4. If a moveable trench shield is used during backfill operations the shield shall be lifted
to a location above each layer of backfill material prior to compaction of the layer. Do
not displace the pipe or backfill while the shield is being moved.
B. Trench Zone: After the pipe zone backfills have been placed, backfilling of the trench zone
may proceed. The trench zone is defined as that portion of the vertical trench cross-section
lying between a plane 12 inches above the top surface of the pipe and a plane at a point
18 inches below the finished surface grade, or if the trench is under pavement, 18 inches
below the roadway subgrade.
C. Marking Tape Installation
1. Continuously install metallic marking tape along the pipe at a depth of 3 feet below
finish grade.
2. Continuously install plastic marking tape along the pipe at the elevation indicated on
the Drawings.
D. Final Backfill: Final backfill is all backfill in the trench cross-sectional area within 18 inches
of finished grade, or if the trench is under pavement, all backfill within 18 inches of the
roadway subgrade.
3.12 FILL AND EMBANKMENT CONSTRUCTION
A. The area where a fill or embankment is to be constructed shall be cleared of all vegetation,
roots and foreign material. Following this, the surface shall be scarified to a depth of 6 inches,
moisture conditioned, and rolled or otherwise mechanically compacted. Embankment and
fill material shall be placed and spread evenly in approximately horizontal layers. Each layer
shall be moistened or aerated, as necessary. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, the
depth of each uncompacted layer shall not exceed 8 inches of compacted thickness. The

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT EARTHWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 00 - 16
embankment, fill, and the scarified layer of underlying ground shall be compacted to
95 percent of maximum density under structures and paved areas, and 90 percent of
maximum density elsewhere.
B. When an embankment or fill is to be made and compacted against hillsides or fill slopes
steeper than 5H:1V, the slopes of hillsides or fills shall be horizontally benched to key the
embankment or fill to the underlying ground. A minimum of 12 inches normal to the slope of
the hillside or fill shall be removed and recompacted as the embankment or fill is brought up
in layers. Material thus cut shall be recompacted along with the new material at no additional
cost to the Owner. Hillside or fill slopes 5H:1V or flatter shall be prepared in accordance with
Paragraph A, above.
C. Where embankment or structure fills are constructed over pipelines, the first 4 feet of fill over
the pipe shall be constructed using light placement and compaction equipment that does not
damage the pipe.
D. The finish graded surface of the drainrock immediately beneath hydraulic structures shall be
stabilized to provide a firm, smooth surface upon which to construct reinforced concrete floor
slabs. Where needed to protect slopes and prevent movement of the drainrock, spray asphalt
on the finished drainrock surface in accordance with Section 02460 - A. C. Pavement and
Base.
3.13 FIELD TESTING
A. General: All field soils testing will be done by a testing laboratory of the Owner's choice at
the Owner's expense except as indicated below.
B. Where soil material is required to be compacted to a percentage of maximum density, the
maximum density at optimum moisture content will be determined in accordance with
Method C of ASTM D 1557. Field density in-place tests will be performed in accordance with
ASTM D 1556 or by such other means acceptable to the Engineer.
C. In case the test of the fill or backfill show noncompliance with the required density, perform
remedies as may be required to ensure compliance. Subsequent testing to show compliance
shall be by a testing laboratory selected by the Owner, paid by the Contractor, at no additional
cost to the Owner.
D. Provide test trenches and excavations including excavation, trench support, and
groundwater removal for the Owner's field soils testing operations. The trenches and
excavations shall be provided at the locations and to the depths required by the Owner. All
Work for test trenches and excavations shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. Frequency of Testing
1. Backfill around structures and in embankments shall be tested every 300 square ft of
each lift of placement.
2. CLSM shall be tested each batch being placed or every 300 cubic yards that is placed.
3. Pipe backfill shall have one test every 20 feet (2 joints) of backfill placed.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEWATERING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 19 - 1
SECTION 31 23 19
DEWATERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes construction dewatering.
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall provide all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to dewater site
excavations, in accordance with the requirement of the Contract Documents.
B. Dewatering Performance: Design, furnish, install, test, operate, monitor, and maintain
dewatering system of sufficient scope, size, and capacity to control ground-water flow into
excavations and permit construction to proceed on dry, stable subgrades.
1. Maintain dewatering operations to ensure erosion control, stability of excavations
and constructed slopes, that excavation does not flood, and that damage to subgrades
and permanent structures is prevented.
2. Prevent surface water from entering excavations by grading, dikes, or other means.
3. Accomplish dewatering without damaging existing buildings adjacent to excavation.
4. Remove dewatering system if no longer needed.
C. To complete this Work, the Contractor shall secure a Utah Pollution Elimination Discharge
System (UPDES) General Permit for Construction Dewatering and Hydrostatic Testing prior
to commencing any dewatering work.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with water disposal requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others
unless permitted in writing by Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary
utility services according to requirements indicated.
B. Project-Site Information: A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is
available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of
geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results
of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner will not be responsible for
interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEWATERING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 19 - 2
1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for
dewatering.
2. The geotechnical report is included elsewhere in the Project Manual.
C. Survey adjacent structures and improvements, employing a qualified professional engineer
or land surveyor, establishing exact elevations at fixed points to act as benchmarks. Clearly
identify benchmarks and record existing elevations.
1. During dewatering, regularly resurvey benchmarks, maintaining an accurate log of
surveyed elevations for comparison with original elevations. Promptly notify
Engineer if changes in elevations occur or if cracks, sags, or other damage is evident
in adjacent construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS – (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused
by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by
dewatering operations.
1. Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from entering excavations,
from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding site and surrounding area.
2. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from softening and damage by rain or water
accumulation.
B. Install dewatering system to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and
other adjacent occupied and used facilities.
1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities
without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide
alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities
having jurisdiction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install dewatering system utilizing wells, well points, or similar methods complete with pump
equipment, standby power and pumps, filter material gradation, valves, appurtenances,
water disposal, and surface-water controls.
B. Before excavating below ground-water level, place system into operation to lower water to
specified levels. Operate system continuously until drains, sewers, and structures have been
constructed and fill materials have been placed, or until dewatering is no longer required.
C. Provide an adequate system to lower and control ground water to permit excavation,
construction of structures, and placement of fill materials on dry subgrades. Install sufficient
dewatering equipment to drain water-bearing strata above and below bottom of foundations,
drains, sewers, and other excavations.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEWATERING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 19 - 3
1. Do not permit open-sump pumping that leads to loss of fines, soil piping, subgrade
softening, and slope instability.
D. Reduce hydrostatic head in water-bearing strata below subgrade elevations of foundations,
drains, sewers, and other excavations.
1. Maintain free water level below bottom of excavation during construction.
E. Dispose of water removed by dewatering in a manner that avoids endangering public health,
property, and portions of work under construction or completed. Dispose of water in a
manner that avoids inconvenience to others. Provide sumps, sedimentation tanks, and other
flow-control devices as required by authorities having jurisdiction.
F. Provide standby equipment on-site, installed and available for immediate operation, to
maintain dewatering on continuous basis if any part of system becomes inadequate or fails.
If dewatering requirements are not satisfied due to inadequacy or failure of dewatering
system, restore damaged structures and foundation soils at no additional expense to Owner.
1. Remove dewatering system from Project site on completion of dewatering. Plug or
fill well holes with sand or cut off and cap wells a minimum of 36 inches below
overlying construction.
G. Damages: Promptly repair damages to adjacent facilities caused by dewatering operations.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DEWATERING
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 31 23 19 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

DIVISION 32
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 1
SECTION 32 12 16
A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall perform all work associated with A.C. Pavement and Base, as shown and
specified herein including all labor, materials, equipment supplies and facilities associated with
providing of finished product satisfying all the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards
AASHTO M 82 Cut-Back Asphalt (Medium Curing Type)
AASHTO M 140 Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO M 208 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
AASHTO M 226 Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement
ASTM D 242 Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 692 Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 977 Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D 1073 Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures
ASTM D 1188 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures Using Paraffin-Coated Specimens
ASTM D 1557 Moisture-Density Relations of Soils and Soil - Aggregate
Mixtures Using 10-lb (4.54-kg) Rammer and 18-in (45-mm)
Drop7
ASTM D 2027 Cutback Asphalt (Medium Curing Type)
ASTM D 2397 Cationic Emulsified Asphalt
ASTM D 2726 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous
Mixtures using Saturated Surface-Dry Specimens.
ASTM D 3381 Viscosity-Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement
Construction
ASTM D 3515 Hot-Mixed, Hot-Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 2
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures. Include
materials testing reports, job-mix formulas, and other pertinent information satisfactory to the
Engineer.
B. Prior to Delivery to Site:
1. Mix Design: Submit current mix design dated within one year of submittal listing:
a. Date of mix design
b. Asphalt cement source, type and chemical composition.
c. Aggregate gradation target.
d. Asphalt cement target percentage, dust to asphalt ratio, moisture sensitivity
(tensile strength ratio), stability, flow and voids in the bituminous mix.
2. Before changing mix design, submit new design to Engineer 10-days prior to placing
pavement for review and evaluation of changes.
3. Type and number of compaction and finish rollers.
C. At Delivery: Supply a batch ticket identifying:
1. Serial Number of ticket.
2. Date and truck number.
3. Job name, location and mix identification.
4. Type, grade and weight of asphalt.
5. Type, grade and weight of aggregate.
6. Mix design method.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Use a laboratory that follows and complies with ASTM D 3666.
B. Do not change aggregate source, asphalt source or mix design without Engineer’s prior written
approval.
C. Reject product and work that does not meet the requirements of this Section.
D. Remove product that is found to be defective after installation and install acceptable product at
no additional cost to the Owner.
E. Foreman of paving crew shall have completed at least five projects of similar size and nature.
1.5 WEATHER
A. Do not pave until air temperature is 45 degrees F and rising.
B. Cease paving if air temperature falls below 50 degrees F.
C. Do not pave is surface is wet or if rain, snow or other precipitation is expected.
D. Do not pave if wind or ground cools the mix material before compaction.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 3
1.6 ACCEPETANCE
A. General: Acceptance is by lot.
B. Materials:
1. Lot is one day’s production.
2. At the source:
a. Aggregate: Verify gradation. Collect sample form the conveyor belt or stockpile
if belt is not accessible.
b. Paving Asphalt: Asphalt shall meet the requirements of this section and shall
satisfy the limits identified in the Utah Department of Transportation’s “Manual
of Instructions – Part 8 Materials”
c. Mix Temperature shall not exceed 325 degrees F in the transport vehicle.
3. At the Site:
a. A sub-lot is 500 tons.
b. Obtain one random sample per sub-lot behind the paver before compaction or
at locations exhibiting non-uniform appearance.
4. At the Laboratory:
a. Air voids shall be evaluated on the basis of laboratory compacted samples.
b. Dust to asphalt ratio.
c. Asphalt content and aggregate gradation.
5. If material does not meet any requirement of the specification, the Engineer may direct
that the sub-lot be removed and replace with a material meeting the specification
requirements at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Installation:
1. Observation of Contractor’s field quality control testing does not constitute acceptance.
2. Opening a paved surface to traffic does not constitute acceptance:
3. Reject any mixes exceeding 325 degree F in transport vehicle.
a. Dispose of cold mix in paver hopper as thin spread underlay.
4. Grade, Cross Slope: Verify that tolerance is not exceeded.
5. Compaction:
a. For compaction a lot is 1,000 square yards or any part thereof.
b. Core Density: A lot is acceptable if the average core density does relative to
ASTM D 2041 is 93 percent, with no individual test less than 89 percent.
c. At least two test locations shall be sampled per ASTM D 3665 and three core
samples shall be collected per each test location per ASTM D 5361. Core
samples shall be full depth.
d. Cores shall be tested per ASTM D 2725 for core density and ASTM D 2041 (Rice)
for maximum theoretical density.
e. Other non-destructive testing methods may be used during placement to aid in
establishing a rolling pattern and determining the required compaction effort.
However, density acceptance will be by core densities.
6. Thickness:
a. For thickness a lot is 1,000 square yards or any part thereof.
b. Core Thickness: A lot is acceptable if the average core thickness is not less than
0.25 inches less than the specified thickness.
c. At least two test locations shall be sampled per ASTM D 3665 and three core
samples shall be collected per each test location per ASTM D 5361. Core
samples shall be full depth.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 4
d. Cores shall be tested per ASTM D 3549 for thickness.
7. Lots that are not acceptable may be rejected and the Engineer may direct that the lot be
removed and replaced at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.1 UNTREATED BASE COURSE
A. The untreated base course shall consist of select material, either natural or crushed and shall
be graded as follows:
Sieve Size Ideal Gradation
3/4 inch 100
3/8-inch 75-95
No. 4 sieve 55-70
No. 16 sieve 30-40
No. 200 sieve 2-10
2.2 TACK COAT
A. Tack coat shall be emulsified asphalt Grade SS-1 or SS-1h, CSS-1 or CSS-1h diluted with one part
water to one part emulsified asphalt, undiluted asphalt Grade RS-1 or CRS-1, or paving asphalt
Grade AR-1000. Emulsified asphalt shall comply with the requirements of AASHTO M 140
(ASTM D 977) or M 208 (ASTM D 2397); paving asphalt shall comply with the requirements of
AASHTO M 226 (ASTM D 3381).
2.3 ASPHALT CEMENT (AC)
A. Petroleum Asphalt that complies with table 2 of ASTM D 3381 except as follows:
1. Replace ductility at 77 deg F. with ductility at 39.2 deg. F. Use the following values:
a. AC - 10: greater than 15
b. AC - 20: greater than 5
2. Delete the loss on heating requirement on the residue from the “Thin-Film Oven Test”.
B. Substitute Performance Graded Asphalt Binder (PGAB)
1. PGAB asphalt meeting the requirements of ASTM D 6373 may be substituted for AC
asphalt cement as follows:
a. AC - 10 – PGAB 58-22 or PGAB 58-28
b. AC - 20 – PGAB 64-22
2.4 AGGREGATE
A. Aggregate shall be clean, hard, durable, angular and sound consisting of crushed stone, crushed
slag, crushed gravel, sand, or a combination of two or more of these materials.
B. Source Suitability: Use the following requirements to determine the suitability of the aggregate
source and not for project control.
1. Coarse Aggregates:
a. Angularity (fractured faces), ASTM D 5281: 50 percent maximum by weight of
particles with at least 2 fractured faces.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 5
b. Hardness (toughness), ASTM C 131: 40 percent minimum wear of aggregate
retained above the No. 4 sieve unless specific aggregates having higher values
are known to be satisfactory.
c. Flat or elongated particles, ASTM D 4791: 20 percent maximum retained above
the 3/8 inch sieve has a 3:1 length to width ratio.
2. Fine Aggregates:
a. Friable Particles, ASTM C 142: 2 percent maximum passing the No. 4 sieve.
b. Plasticity, ASTM D 4318: Aggregate passing the no. 40 sieve shall be non-plastic
even when filler material is added to the aggregate.
1) Liquid Limit: Less than 25
2) Plastic Limit: Less than 6
C. Combinations of aggregates having a history of polishing shall not be used in surface courses.
2.5 ADMIXTURES
A. Mineral filler shall comply with ASTM D 242.
B. Antistrip shall be heat stable cement slurry of lime slurry.
2.6 MIX DESIGN
A. Material Designation:
1. Asphalt Cement shall be AC-20.
2. Aggregate gradation shall be DM-3/4.
3. Traffic Classification shall be medium.
B. Design Aggregate Gradation: The job-mix formula for the asphalt-aggregate surface course
mixture shall be within the following gradation limits as percent passing by weight, ASTM C
136:
Aggregate Gradations
Sieve Size DM-1 DM-3/4N DM-3/4 DM-1/2
1 inch 100
3/4 inch 100 100
1/2 inch 75-91 74-99 100
3/8 inch 69-91 75-91
No. 4 47-61 49-65 46-62 60-80
No. 8 33-47
No. 16 23-33 21-35 22-34 28-42
No. 50 12-22 6-18 11-23 11-23
No. 200 3-7 2-6 3-7 3-7
1. Dry-rodded Unit weight per ASTM C 29 shall be a minimum of 75 pounds per cubic foot.
2. Weight Loss or soundness per ASTM C 88 shall be a maximum of 16 percent using
sodium sulfate.
3. Clay Content or cleanliness per ASTM D 2419shall be determined by the sand
equivalent value after passing through the dryer or prior to the drum mixer at the
following levels:
a. 45 percent minimum for Medium Traffic Classification
b. 60 percent minimum for Heavy Traffic Classification.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 6
C. Design Mixture Test Criteria: Use the Marshall volumetric mix design, AI MS-2: price and
payment procedures
Mix Design Criteria
Criteria Traffic Classification
Light Medium Heavy
Number of Compaction Blows 35 50 75
Stability, lbs. (minimum), ASTM D 5581 750 1200 1800
Flow, in 0.01 inch units, ASTM D 5581 10-18
Voids in Mineral Aggregate (VMA), percent min.,
ASTM D 3203
Nominal Maximum Particle Size
1”
3/4”
1/2”
3/8”

13
14
15
16.5
Voids in Bituminous Mix (percent) 3-5
Dust to Asphalt Ratio 0.8 – 1.6
Moisture Sensitivity, ASTM D 4867 >0.8 with freeze thaw conditioning
and test specimen compacted at 6-8
percent air voids
Notes
Traffic Classifications:
Light – Parking lots, driveways, light traffic residential streets, light traffic farm roads.
(ESAL <104 per year)
Medium – Residential streets, rural farm and residential roads (Class II); Urban minor
collector streets, rural minor collector roads (Class III). (104<ESAL<106 per year)
Heavy – Urban Minor arterial and light industrial streets, rural major collector and minor
arterial highways (Class IV); Urban major arterial and heavy industrial streets, freeways,
expressways, arterial highways, rural interstate, and other principal arterial highways
(Class V). (ESAL > 106 per year)
2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. General: Supplier shall randomly collect samples per ASTM D 3665. The same sample point
shall be used for all samples of a particular material.
1. Aggregate sampling shall be per ASTM D 75.
2. Asphalt Cement sampling shall be per ASTM D 140.
B. Asphalt-aggregate mix shall be sampled per ASTM D 979 and test for:
1. Air Voids per ASTM D 3203.
2. Paving Asphalt Content per ASTM D 6307.
3. Aggregate Gradation per ASTOM D 5444
4. Tensile strength of bitumen-aggregate mixtures per ASTM D 4867.
C. Mixing plant shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3515.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 7
2.8 PAVEMENT MARKING PAINT
A. Pavement marking paint shall be a product specifically formulated for use on asphalt
concrete pavement and shall have a proven record of performance and durability. The paint
striping materials shall conform with the State of Utah Standard Specifications for Road and
Bridge Construction and its addenda.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SUBGRADE PREPARATION
A. The subgrade shall be prepared in accordance with Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork as
applicable to roadways and embankments. The surface of the subgrade after compaction
shall be hard, uniform, smooth and true to grade and cross-section. Subgrade for pavement
shall not vary more than 0.02-foot from the indicated grade and cross section. Subgrade for
base material shall not vary more than 0.04-foot from the specified grade and cross section.
3.2 UNTREATED BASE COURSE
A. Untreated base course shall be provided where shown and to the thickness indicated.
Imported untreated base course shall be delivered to the job site as uniform mixtures and
each layer shall be spread in one operation. Segregation shall be avoided and the base shall
be free of pockets of coarse or fine material. Where the required thickness is 6 inches or less,
the base materials may be spread and compacted in one layer. Where the required thickness
is more than 6 inches; the base material shall be spread and compacted in two or more layers
of approximately equal thickness, and the maximum compacted thickness of any one layer
shall not exceed 6 inches. The relative compaction of each layer of aggregate base shall be
not less than 96 percent of maximum density when measured in accordance with ASTM D
1557 with no test below 92 percent of maximum density. The compacted surface of the
finished aggregate shall be hard, uniform, smooth and at any point shall not vary more than
0.02 foot from the specified grade or cross-section.
3.3 TACK COAT
A. A tack coat shall be applied to existing paved surfaces where new asphalt concrete is to be
placed on existing pavement. It shall also be applied to the contact surfaces of all cold
pavement joints, curbs, gutters, manholes and the like immediately before the adjoining
asphalt pavement is placed. Care shall be taken to prevent the application of tack coat
material to surfaces that will not be in contact with the new asphalt concrete pavement.
Diluted emulsified asphalt shall be applied at the rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal/sq yd. Undiluted
emulsified asphalt shall be applied at the rate of 0.025 to 0.075 gal/sq yd. Paving asphalt
shall be applied at the rate of approximately 0.05 gal/sq yd.
3.4 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A. Lay Down Machine shall have tracks when operating on fabrics, geogrids or pavement mats
hotter than 180 degrees F.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 8
B. Compactors shall be static or vibratory, steel wheel rollers. Pneumatic tire rollers may be
used for intermediate rolling only.
3.5 ASPHALT CONCRETE
A. At the time of delivery to the work site, the temperature of mixture shall not be higher than
320 degrees F, and shall not be less than indicated below:
Minimum Asphalt Concrete Temperature, degrees F
Air
Temperature
Compacted Mat Thickness
3/4 inch 1 inch 1-1/2 inch 2 inch 3 inch 4 inch +
45-50
50-59
60-69
70-79
80-89
90+
-
-
-
285
280
275
-
-
-
285
275
270
-
-
285
280
270
265
-
280
275
270
265
260
280
270
265
265
260
250
265
255
250
250
250
250
B. The asphalt concrete shall be evenly spread upon the subgrade or base to such a depth that,
after rolling, it will be of the required cross section and grade of the course being constructed.
C. The depositing, distributing, and spreading of the asphalt concrete shall be accomplished in a
single, continuous operation by means of a self-propelled mechanical spreading and finishing
machine designed especially for that purpose. The machine shall be equipped with a screed or
strike-off assembly capable of being accurately regulated and adjusted to distribute a layer of
the material to a definite pre-determined thickness. When paving is of a size or in a location
that use of a self-propelled machine is impractical, the Engineer may waive the self-propelled
requirement.
D. Spreading, once commenced, shall be continued without interruption.
E. The mix shall be compacted immediately after placing. If needed, intermediate rolling with a
pneumatic-tired roller shall be done immediately behind the initial rolling. Final rolling shall
eliminate marks from previous rolling. In areas too small for the roller, a vibrating plate
compactor or a hand tamper shall be used to achieve thorough compaction.
F. Compaction shall be completed before temperature drop to 180 degrees F.
G. Do not leave unsafe butt joints if paving operations stop.
H. Barricade or eliminate fall off edges.
I. Joints
1. Construct joints to have the same texture, density and smoothness as other section of
the new pavement course.
2. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat. Ensure continuous bond between old and
new pavement or between successive day’s work.
3. Offset longitudinally joints a minimum of 12 inches in succeeding courses and offset
transverse joints a minimum of 6 feet to avoid a vertical joint through more than one
course. In the tops course restrict longitudinal joints to either side of the lane lines.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 9
4. Prevent traffic, including construction traffic, from crossing vertical edges. Apply tack
coat to vertical edges prior to making another pass with the paver if the mix has
cooled to 90 degrees F.
3.6 TOLERANCES
A. Lift thickness shall not be less than 2 times the maximum aggregate size nor more than 3 inches
(compacted thickness) or the limits established by the pneumatic or vibratory compactor
equipment manufacturer, whichever is less.
B. Upon completion the pavement shall be true to grade and cross-section. When a 10-ft
straightedge is laid on the finished surface parallel to the center of the roadway, the surface
shall not vary from the edge of the straightedge more than 1/8-in except at intersections or
changes of grade. In the transverse direction, the surface shall not vary from the edge of the
straightedge more than 1/4-in.
3.7 BITUMINOUS SURFACE PATCHING
A. Where pits are excavated through bituminous surfaced roads, driveways, parking areas, etc.,
the surface shall be restored and maintained as follows:
1. A temporary gravel surface shall be placed and maintained after the required backfill
and compaction of the trench has been accomplished.
2. The gravel shall be placed to such depth as to provide six inches below the pavement
and shall be brought flush with the paved surface.
3. The area over trenches to be resurfaced shall be graded and rolled with a roller
weighing not less than twelve tons, or with the rear wheels of a five-yard truck loaded
to capacity, until the subgrade is firm and unyielding. Mud or other soft or spongy
material shall be removed and the void filled with gravel and rolled and tamped
thoroughly in layers not exceeding six inches in thickness. The edges of trenches
which are broken down during the making of subgrade shall be removed and
trimmed neatly before resurfacing.
4. Before any permanent resurfacing is placed, the Contractor shall trim the existing
paving to clean, straight lines as nearly parallel to the centerline of the trench as
practicable.
5. Existing bituminous paving shall be cut back a minimum of six inches beyond the
limits of any excavation of cave-in along the trench so that the edges of the new paving
will rest on at least six inches of undisturbed soil.
6. As soon as is practical, weather permitting, the bituminous surface shall be restored
by standard paving practices to the thickness specified herein.
7. Pavement restoration shall include tacking of pavement of edges and subbase with
MC 70-250 bituminous material and placing rolling plant hot mix bituminous
material to the level of the adjacent pavement surfaces.
3.8 PROTECTION AND REPAIR
A. General: All work is at no additional expense to the Owner.
B. Protection:
1. Protect all structures, including curb, gutter, sidewalks, street fixtures, delineators,
signs, guard rails and guide posts.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT A.C.PAVEMENT AND BASE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 12 16 - 10
2. Remove all spatter, over-coat or mar.
3. Do not discharge bituminous materials into borrow pits, roadside ditches, gutters or
other areas.
4. Protect hot pavement from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to become
marked.
5. Protect neighborhood, storm drains and downstream wetland and fish habitats.
C. Repair
1. When thickness is deficient, place additional material over deficient areas. Do not
skin patch. If necessary, mill for inlay.
2. Repair defective seams, edges and joints.
3. Remove and replace unacceptable paving.
3.9 PAVEMENT MARKING
A. Pavement marking paint shall be applied where indicated only when the pavement surface is
dry and clean, and when the air temperature is above 40 degrees F. Pavement marking shall
commence no sooner than 21 days after completion of pavement installation. All equipment
used in the application of pavement marking shall produce stripes and markings of uniform
quality with clean and well-defined edges that conform to the details and dimensions shown.
Drips, overspray, improper markings, and paint material tracked by traffic shall be
immediately removed from the pavement surface by methods previously reviewed by the
Engineer.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 13 73 - 1
SECTION 32 13 73
PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes joint sealants for exterior site concrete pavement work including parking
lots, ,driveways, sidewalks, curbs, curb and gutters, waterways, etc:
1. Joint Void-former
2. Cold-applied joint sealants.
3. Hot-applied joint sealants.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 32 12 16 - "Asphalt Cement Pavement and Base” for constructing joints
between concrete and asphalt pavement.
2. Section 32 16 00 – “Driveways, Sidewalks, Curbs, Gutters, and Other Concrete
Flatwork”
3. Section 07 92 00 - "Joint Sealants" for sealing nontraffic and traffic joints in locations
not specified in this Section.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Provide Manufactures product data and sample for each joint-sealant product
indicated.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.
C. Manufacturer’s instructions for joint preparation, type of cleaning and installation for each
type of joint sealant.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by
joint-sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.
2. When joint substrates are wet.
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for
applications indicated.
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed
from joint substrates.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 13 73 - 2
1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A. Pavement joints include longitudinal and transverse expansion joints, isolation joints,
contraction joints, and crack control joints.
B. Provide joint sealants that maintain watertight and airtight continuous seals.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installation of joint systems shall follow manufacturer’s published instructions.
B. For cold applied joint sealant installation, use installers that are approved by the joint sealant
supplier. Provide written proof on sealant supplier’s approval.
C. Obtain joint sealing materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to the site in original, unopened containers or bundles with labels
identifying manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot
life, cure time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.
B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer’s recommendations to prevent
deterioration; or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants or other
causes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backing materials, and other related materials that are
compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and
application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on testing and field
experience.
2.2 JOINT VOID-FORMER
A. Plastic, with a water stop.
B. ¼ depth of concrete slab thickness.
2.3 COLD-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type NS.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 888.
c. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 13 73 - 3
B. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893, Type SL.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; RoadSaver Silicone SL.
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.
c. Pecora Corporation; 300 SL.
C. Single-Component, Self-Leveling, Polyurethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 5893,
Type SL.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Sikaflex – 1C SL - Polyurethane SL.
D. Multicomponent, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM C 920,
Type M, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-200.
2.4 HOT-APPLIED JOINT SEALANTS
A. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete: ASTM D 3406.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Crafco Inc., an ERGON company; Superseal 444/777.
B. Hot-Applied, Single-Component Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: ASTM D 6690,
Types I, II, and III.
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
a. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight 3405.
b. Right Pointe; D-3405 Hot Applied Sealant.
2.5 JOINT-SEALANT BACKER MATERIALS
A. General: Provide joint-sealant backer materials that are nonstaining; are compatible with
joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications
indicated by joint-sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.
B. Round Backer Rods for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249, Type 1, of
diameter and density required to control sealant depth and prevent bottom-side adhesion of
sealant.
C. Backer Strips for Cold- and Hot-Applied Joint Sealants: ASTM D 5249; Type 2; of thickness
and width required to control joint-sealant depth, prevent bottom-side adhesion of sealant,
and fill remainder of joint opening under sealant.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 13 73 - 4
2.6 PRIMERS
A. Primers: Product recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion
of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-
substrate tests and field tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting
joint-sealant performance.
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
B. Immediately after sawcutting control joints, wash freshly sawed joints with a high pressure
wash to remove saw slurry from the joint faces.
C. Immediately prior to installing joint sealant, remove oil, grease, wax, form-release agents,
curing compounds, bitumens, laitance and old chalking material by sandblast, as
recommended by manufacturer of sealant. Maximum sand blast angle, 25 degrees plus or
minus 5 degrees. Complete two full passes for each joint to be sealed, one blast for each face.
D. Clean and dry with air blast. Do not contaminate air blast with oils or lubricants.
E. Remove frost and moisture in concrete joint substrates before commencing sealing.
F. Install bond breaker tape where needed or required by manufacturer’s recommendations to
ensure that elastomeric sealants will perform properly.
G. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where indicated or where recommended in writing by
joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior
experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.
Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto
adjoining surfaces.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for
products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.
B. Joint-Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use
of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 13 73 - 5
C. Depths: Saw cut joints if necessary to provide the required sealant thicknesses and depth.
Install sealant to the depths indicated or, if not indicated, as recommended by the sealant
manufacturer, but within the following general limitations measured at center (thin) section
of bead:
1. For sidewalks, pavements, and similar joints sealed with elastomeric sealants and
subject to traffic and other abrasion and indentation exposures, fill joints to a depth
equal to 75 percent of joint width, but not more than 5/8 inch deep nor less than 3/8
inch deep.
2. For normal moving joints sealed with elastomeric sealants but not subject to traffic,
fill joints to a depth equal to 50 percent of joint width, but not more than ½ inch deep
nor less than ¼ inch deep.
3. For joints sealed with non-elastomeric sealants and caulking compounds, fill joints
full depth.
D. Install joint-sealant backings of kind indicated to support joint sealants during application
and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants
relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of joint-sealant backings.
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear joint-sealant backings.
3. Remove absorbent joint-sealant backings that have become wet before sealant
application and replace them with dry materials.
E. Install joint sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same
time backings are installed:
1. Place joint sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.
2. Install joint sealants in uniform, continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with
complete bonding of joint surfaces on opposite sides.
3. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration, unless otherwise indicated.
4. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow
optimum sealant movement capability.
5. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint
to form a slight cove so that joint will not trap moisture and dirt.
F. Tooling of Nonsag Joint Sealants: Immediately after joint-sealant application and before
skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to the following requirements to form
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; a nd to ensure
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint:
1. Remove excess joint sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer and
that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.
G. Provide joint configuration to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions
unless otherwise indicated.
H. Spillage: Do not allow poured sealant compound to overflow or spill onto adjoining surfaces
or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces. Clean adjoining surfaces to eliminate evidence
of spillage.
I. Heating: Do not use overheated hot-applied sealants.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PAVEMENT JOINT SEALANTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 13 73 - 6
J. Edges: Unless indicated otherwise, recess exposed edges of gasket and exposed joint filler
slightly behind adjoining surfaces so compressed units will not protrude from joints.
3.4 CURING AND CLEANING
A. Cure joint sealant compounds per manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations to
obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength, and surface durability.
B. Clean off excess joint sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses, by
methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants
and of products in which joints occur.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect joint sealants, during and after curing period, from contact with contaminating
substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so
sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite
such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or
deteriorated joint sealants immediately and replace with joint sealant so installations in
repaired areas are indistinguishable from the original work.
3.6 PAVEMENT-JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE
A. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints within cement concrete pavement.
1. Joint Location:
a. Expansion and isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete pavement.
b. Contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Silicone Joint Sealant for Concrete: Single component, nonsag or Single component,
self-leveling.
3. Urethane Joint Sealant for Concrete: Multicomponent, pourable, traffic-grade.
4. Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete: Single component.
5. Joint-Sealant Color: Color shall match the color of adjacent concrete surfaces
B. Joint-Sealant Application: Joints between cement concrete and asphalt pavement.
1. Joint Location:
a. Joints between concrete and asphalt pavement.
b. Joints between concrete curbs and asphalt pavement.
c. Other joints as indicated.
2. Hot-Applied Joint Sealant for Concrete and Asphalt: Single component.
END OF SECTION
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 1
SECTION 32 16 00
DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS, AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes exterior cement concrete flatwork such as but not limited to the
following:
1. Driveways.
2. Curbs ,gutters and waterways
3. Sidewalks and Walkways.
4. Other exterior site concrete flatwork
B. Related Sections include the following:
1. Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork for subgrade preparation, grading, and base course.
2. Section 32 13 73 – Pavement Joint Sealants for joint sealants of joints in concrete
flatwork and at isolation joints of concrete flatwork with adjacent construction.
3. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete for general building applications of
concrete.
1.3 REFERENCES
AASHTO M 6 Standard Specification for Fine Aggregate for Portland
Cement Concrete
AASHTO M 154 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete
AASHTO M 80 Standard Specification for Coarse Aggregate for Portland
cement Concrete
AASHTO M 182 Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or
Kenaf and Cotton Mats
ACI 117 Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials
ACI 301 Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; American
Concrete Institute International; 1996.
ACI 305 R Hot Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute
International; 1991.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 2
ACI 306 R Cold Weather Concreting; American Concrete Institute
International; 1988.
ACI CP-1(08) Technical Workbook for ACI Certification of Concrete Field
Testing Technician-Grade
ASTM A 307 Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs,
60,000 PSI Tensile Strength
ASTM A 615/A 615M Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel
Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 1996a.
ASTM C 31/C31 M Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test
Specimens in the Field.
ASTM C 33 Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 1993.
ASTM C 39/C39 M Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical
Concrete Specimens; 1996.
ASTM C 94/C94M Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 1996.
ASTM C 143 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement
Concrete
ASTM C 150 Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 1996.
ASTM C 171 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing
Concrete; 1997.
ASTM C 172 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete
ASTM C 231 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed
Concrete by the Pressure Method; 1994a.
ASTM C 260 Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for
Concrete; 1995.
ASTM C 494 Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete.
ASTM C 618 Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined
Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland
Cement Concrete; 1996a.
ASTM C 881 Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding
Systems for Concrete; 1990.
ASTM C 1017/C 1017M Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in
Producing Flowing Concrete
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 3
ASTM C 1059/C1059 M Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh To
Hardened Concrete
ASTM C 1064 Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed
Portland Cement Concrete.
ASTM C 1077 Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and
Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for
Laboratory Evaluation
ASTM D 1751 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler
for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction
(Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 1983
(reapproved 1991).
ASTM D 1752 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork
and Recycled PVC Expansion Joint Fillers for Concrete Paving
and Structural Construction
ASTM E 329 Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in Construction
Inspection and/or Testing
FS TT-P-1952 Pavement Markings
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with fly ash.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Design Mixtures: For each concrete flatwork mixture satisfying the requirements of this
section and Section 03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete. Include alternate mixture designs when
characteristics of materials, project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances
warrant adjustments
1. Mix designs will be approved based on results of trial batches or on past history of
mix design successes from project(s) within the last year.
2. Use the same components in the trial batches that are to be used in the project. The
Contractor assumes responsibility for the compatibility of all admixtures with the mix
design and their potential effects on concrete properties.
3. Personnel performing and witnessing trial batches, and performing compressive and
flexural strength testing, must be performed by an AASHTO accredited laboratory
paid for by Contractor.
4. The Owner or Engineer may witness trial batch preparation and testing.
B. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 4
C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results
for compliance of the following with requirements indicated, based on comprehensive testing
of current materials:
1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion
of concrete due to alkali-aggregate reactivity.
2. For any proposed mix design, provide test results for potential reactivity of coarse
and fine aggregates in accordance with the requirements of this section.
3. When using potentially reactive aggregates in a mix design, provide results from
appropriate testing to determine the ability of the combinations of cementitious
materials and aggregates to control the reactivity
D. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following materials
complies with requirements:
1. Cementitious materials.
2. Steel reinforcement and reinforcement accessories.
3. Fiber reinforcement.
4. Admixtures.
5. Curing compounds.
6. Applied finish materials.
7. Bonding agent or epoxy adhesive.
8. Joint fillers.
E. Joint Layout Plan: Submit plan showing location and type of each joint to be placed in the
concrete flatwork.
F. Proof of finishers’ ACI Certifications
G. Manufactures recommended installation procedures for joint sealing material which, when
accepted by Engineer, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting the actual installation
procedures used in the Work.
H. Delivery tickets per Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer of ready-mixed concrete products who complies
with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1077
and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.
1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing
Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1(08) or an equivalent certification
program.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 5
C. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," unless
modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.
D. Concrete Testing Service: All concrete testing will be done by a testing laboratory of the
Owner’s choice at the Owner’s expense.
E. Do not change concrete Supplier until Engineer accepts new source and new mix design.
F. Remove product found defective after installation and install acceptable product at no
additional cost to Owner.
G. Foreman of paving crew shall have completed at least three (3) projects of similar size and
nature.
1.7 ACCEPTANCE
A. General: Acceptance is by lot. Lot size is specified below for each component.
B. Concrete Mix:
1. Lot size is 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite
sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix. Perform
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.
3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method; one test for each composite sample, but
not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mix.
4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40
deg F and below and when 80 deg F and above, and one test for each omposite sample.
5. For slump, air and temperature reject non-complying batches until 2 consecutive
batches are compliant then continue in random batch testing for acceptance.
C. Strength
1. Lot size is 50 cu. yd. or fraction thereof of each concrete mix placed each day.
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength
tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five
randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.
2. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M; cast and laboratory cure one set of
five standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.
3. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test 1 specimen at 7 days and 2
specimens at 28 days.
4. Strength of each lot will be satisfactory if the average compressive strength from 2
specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at 28 days equals or
exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls
below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.
5. Remaining cylinders shall be held to verify test results, if required.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 6
D. Installation:
1. Grades, finishes, cross-slopes and dimensions of completed pavement shall be
checked for compliance with plan requirements. Standing water in curb and gutter
or “bird baths” in flatwork are not permitted and shall be immediately corrected by
removal of failed areas and replacement per these specifications and directions of the
Engineer at no additional cost to the owner.
E. Test Results: Test results shall be reported in writing to Engineer, concrete manufacturer,
and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall
contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of
concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design
compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive
breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.
F. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be
permitted by Engineer but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.
G. Additional Tests: Engineer may direct testing and inspecting agency to make additional tests
of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or
other requirements have not been met.
H. Remove and replace concrete pavement where test results indicate that it does not comply
with specified requirements.
I. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense will be performed to determine
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Traffic Control: Maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other
construction activities.
B. Weather: Concrete placement shall conform to the requirements of ACI 305 R and ACI 306 R
for hot and cold weather, respectively in addition to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 –
Cast-in-Place Concrete.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 7
2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products
specified.
3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited
to, manufacturers specified.
4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the manufacturers specified.
2.2 FORMS
A. Form Materials: Plywood, metal, metal-framed plywood, or other approved panel-type
materials to provide full-depth, continuous, straight, smooth exposed surfaces.
1. Use flexible or curved forms for curves with a radius 100 feet or less.
B. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of
concrete surfaces.
2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed, epoxy coated
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand,
and source throughout the Project:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II.
2. Do not use cement that contains lumps or is partially set.
3. Do not mix cements originating from different sources.
4. Do not use air-entrained cement.
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 4S coarse aggregate, uniformly graded.
Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10
years' satisfactory service in similar concrete flatwork applications and service conditions
using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 3/4 inch nominal
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.
C. Mixing Water:
1. For standard Type II Cement: ASTM C 94/C 94M
D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 8
E. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with
other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by
mass of cementitious material.
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,
Type G.
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.
2.5 CURING MATERIALS
A. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing
approximately 9 oz. /sq. yd. dry.
B. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene
sheet.
C. Water: Potable.
D. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming; manufactured for
application to fresh concrete. Evaporation Retarder shall not be used as a finishing aid.
2.6 RELATED MATERIALS
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber
or ASTM D 1752, cork or self-expanding cork.
2.7 CONCRETE MIXTURES
A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, for each type and strength of
normal-weight concrete determined by either laboratory trial mixes or field experience.
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed
concrete mixture designs for the trial batch method.
B. Proportion mixtures to provide normal-weight concrete with the following properties:
1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4000 psi.
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.44.
3. Do not exceed water/cementitious ratio.
4. Calculate the water/cementitious ratio (w/c) according to the following formula:
a. W = Water
b. C Cement + Pozzolan
5. Concrete Slump Limits:
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 9
a. For concrete not containing water reducers, 4 inches, plus or minus 1 inch.
b. For concrete containing low range water reducers: 1 inch to 5 inches for all
classes of concrete.
c. For concrete containing high range water reducers: 4 inches to 9 inches for
all classes of concrete.
6. Cement Content: 6.5 bags
C. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in normal-weight
concrete having an air content as follows:
1. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.0 percent for 3/4-inch nominal maximum
aggregate size at point of placement.
2. The range listed represents air content at point of placement. Make necessary
adjustments for impacts to air content due method of placement.
D. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of
cement.
E. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than
portland cement according to ACI 301 requirements for concrete exposed to deicing
chemicals:
2.8 POZZOLAN
A. Fly Ash:
1. Fly ash must conform to ASTM C 618 Class F specifications with the following
modifications:
a. Loss on Ignition (LOI): not to exceed 3 percent.
b. Maximum allowable CaO content: not to exceed 15 percent.
c. Label the storage silo for fly ash to distinguish it from cement.
d. Use different size unloading hoses and fittings for cement and fly ash.
e. When used as partial portland cement replacement, the fly ash may replace
20% of the cement by weight.
2. Fly ash may be sampled and tested for compliance at any time.
2.9 CONCRETE MIXING
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according
to ASTM C 94/C 94M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the
Work.
1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F and 90 deg F, reduce mixing and delivery
time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F, reduce
mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
A. When automatic machine placement is used for placement, submit revised mix design and
laboratory test results that meet or exceed requirements. Produce sidewalks, curbs, curbs
and gutters, and other flatwork to required cross section, lines, grades, finish, and jointing as
specified for formed concrete. If results are not approved, remove and replace with formed
concrete.
1. Compact subbase and prepare subgrade of sufficient width to prevent displacement
of paver machine during operations.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Examine exposed subgrades and base surfaces for compliance with requirements for
dimensional, grading, and elevation tolerances.
B. Proceed with concrete flatwork operations only after nonconforming conditions have been
corrected and subgrade and base is ready to receive flatwork.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Assure the subgrade or base for the concrete has a firm even surface and is compacted
meeting the requirements of Section 31 23 00 – Earthwork.
B. Remove loose material from compacted base surface immediately before placing concrete.
C. Remove sand, leaves, trash, rubbish, topsoil, and other objectionable materials prior to
placing concrete.
D. Coat the surface of street fixtures with oil to prevent bond with concrete flatwork.
E. Notify Engineer a minimum of 48 hours prior to commencing laying operations.
3.4 LAYOUT
A. Curb, Gutter, Curb and Gutter, Waterways: Set lines, forms, screeds, etc to meet the following
requirements:
1. Line: Less than ½ inch variance in 10 feet and not more than 1 inch from true line at
any location.
2. Grade: Not more than ¼ inch variance in 10 feet. Flood curb and gutter and waterway
with water after final cure has been reached. Remove and replace any area where
ponding is found.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 11
B. Sidewalk and Walkways: Set forms, screeds, etc to meet the following requirements:
1. Cross-slope shall not be less than 1.5% nor more than 2%.
2. Landings and doorway aprons shall not slope more than 2% in any direction.
C. Layout shall meet the requirements as given in the construction plans.
3.5 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION
A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides for flatwork to
required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and
so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.
B. Check formwork for grade and alignment variance from the following tolerances:
1. Top of forms shall not be more than ¼ inch from design grade
2. Vertical face on longitudinal axis shall not be more than ¼-inch from true line.
C. Place joint filler in vertical position, in straight lines and secure to formwork during concrete
placement.
D. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from
concrete without damage.
3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT
A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, grade lines,
steel reinforcement, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit
installation of their work. Inspect formwork for line and grade and make corrections as
required.
B. Remove snow, ice, or frost from base surface before placing concrete. Do not place concrete
on frozen surfaces.
C. Obtain Engineer’s review of base, forms, lines, etc. before placing concrete. Engineer’s review
does not relieve the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure all Work is in compliance with the
contract documents and these requirements and correct defective Work as required.
D. At the beginning of concrete placement, test slump, temperature and air entrainment. If
corrections are necessary, placement may proceed after 2 subsequent and consecutive
batches pass testing.
E. Moisten base to provide a uniform dampened condition, without standing water, at time
concrete is placed.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 12
F. Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they are at required finish
elevation, cross-slope and alignment.
G. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, and placing
concrete.
H. Do not add water to concrete during delivery to the Project site.
I. Water may not be added to the delivery truck at the project site prior to discharge unless
approved by the Engineer. If water is added at the project site, record quantity of water added
on delivery ticket.
J. Site-added air-entrainment. (Meet AASHTO M 154)
1. Limit the use of site-added air-entraining agents to one addition (regardless of
quantity) per load
2. Use pre-measured admixtures.
3. Record amount used on batch ticket.
4. Rotate the drum at least 30 revolutions at the mixing speed recommended by the
manufacturer.
K. Do not add water to fresh concrete after testing.
L. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation. Prevent segregation of concrete mix.
If placement operations are interrupted for more than 30 minutes, place a construction joint.
M. Place concrete so time between end of placement and beginning of finishing is less than 15
minutes.
N. Consolidate concrete with vibrator or other acceptable method. Do not use mechanical
vibrators. Prevent dislocation of inserts.
O. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.R and as follows. Protect concrete work from
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low
temperatures.
1. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F, uniformly
heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of
not less than 50 deg F and not more than 80 deg F at point of placement.
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow.
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mix designs.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 13
P. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows when hot-weather conditions
exist:
1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F at
time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control
temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing
water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.
2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not
exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.
3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete.
Keep subgrade moisture uniform without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.
3.7 JOINTS
A. General:
1. Review joint layout plan with Engineer.
B. Isolation/Expansion Joints:
1. Geometrics: ½ inch wide full depth filler that is flush with concrete surface. Do not
place seal over top of filler.
2. Sidewalks, Walkways, Sidewalk Ramps:
a. Place isolation joints to separate sidewalk from utility poles, hydrants,
manhole frames, buildings, abutting sidewalks and other street fixtures or
structures.
b. Place isolation joints between the sidewalk and the back of curb returns and
between the sidewalk and sidewalk ramps.
c. Do not place isolation joints in sidewalk ramp surfaces.
3. Curb, Gutter, Curb and Gutter, Waterway:
a. Do not place longitudinal joints in gutter flow-lines.
b. Where gutter transitions extend beyond the curb return, place expansion
joints at the ends of the gutters transition.
c. Place isolation joints at beginning of curb radius and end of curb radius.
4. Slip Form Work: Expansion joints are not required except at beginning of curb radius,
end of curb radius, structures, street fixtures, inserts, foundations and other
structures.
5. Driveway approach: Do not place isolation joints in curb returns.
C. Contraction Joints: Contraction joints (crack control joints) are scorelines made to force
crack joint location in concrete. Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete
into areas as indicated.
1. Geometrics:
a. Tooled Joints (score lines)
b. Construct contraction joints to a depth equal to at least one-fourth (1/4th) of
the concrete thickness
c. Top radius of joints shall be ½ inch.
d. Saw Cut Joints: Saw joints before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking occurs. Do
not tear or ravel concrete during sawing.
e. Template Joints: 1/8 to 3/16 inch wide, ¼ depth of concrete.
2. Sidewalks.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 14
a. Place contraction joints at intervals equal to the width of the sidewalk and
transverse to the direction of travel.
b. Place radial contraction joints curves and curb returns.
c. Place longitudinal contraction joints in walks when width of walk in feet is
greater the 2 times the walk thickness in inches. (e.g. maximum width of a 4
inch thick walk before placement of a longitudinal contraction joint is 8 feet.)
Make longitudinal joints parallel to, or concentric with, the lines of the walk.
d. In walk returns make one joint radially midway between the beginning of
curb return and end of curb return. Match the longitudinal and transverse
joints with adjacent walks.
3. Curb, Gutter, Curb and Gutter, Waterway.
a. Place joints at intervals not exceeding 12 feet.
b. At curb radius and walk return make the joints radial.
c. Where integral curb and gutter is adjacent to concrete pavement, align the
joints with the pavement joints, where practical.
4. Other Flatwork:
a. Joint Spacing, in feet, shall be twice the slab thickness measured in inches,
unless otherwise indicated. (i.e. Slab thickness is 6-inches, joint spacing shall
be 12-feet.) Joint spacing shall not exceed 15 feet.
b. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with
shatterproof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- wide joints
into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage
surface and before developing random contraction cracks.
c. Keep a minimum of three (3) working power saws on site when concrete
operations are underway.
d. Longitudinal joint spacing shall match the transverse joint spacing.
e. Transverse joints shall extend across the width of the pavement and meet the
joints of the adjoining concrete surfaces (i.e. sidewalk, curb and gutter, etc.).
D. Volunteer Crack Joints: If a volunteer crack joint occurs within any flatwork of this section,
sawcut and remove cracked section at nearest contraction joints and replace the section at
no additional cost to the owner.
3.8 FINISHING
A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.
B. Edging: Tool edges of pavement, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete after initial floating
with an edging tool to a 1/2-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface
finishes. Eliminate tool marks on concrete surfaces.
C. Apply broom finish longitudinal to curb, gutter, curb and gutter, and waterway flowline.
D. Apply broom finish transverse to sidewalk, walkway and other flatwork centerline as follows:
1. Fine hair finish where grades are less than 6 percent.
2. Rough hair finish where grades exceed 6 percent.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 15
E. Remove form marks, tool marks, and other irregularities from finish surfaces.
3.9 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot
temperatures.
B. Comply with ACI 306 R for cold-weather protection.
C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy
conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing
operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding,
and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.
D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete
surface.
E. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by moisture curing, moisture-retaining-cover curing, curing
compound, or a combination of these as follows:
1. Curing Compound: Use a Type ID, Class A (clear with fugitive dye) membrane forming
compound. Apply total coverage in 2 directions after texturing. Recoat areas
subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain
continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.
2. Eliminate thermal shock of concrete by keeping cure temperatures even throughout
extent and depth on concrete slab.
3.10 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION
A. Protect concrete in compliance with requirements of Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place
Concrete. Remove and replace concrete flatwork that is broken, damaged, or defective or that
does not comply with requirements in this Section.
B. Protect concrete from damage. Do not allow steel wheel rollers or steel wheel vehicles on the
concrete flatwork.
C. Exclude traffic from concrete flatwork for at least 14 days after placement or until 100
percent of the design strength has been achieved as demonstrated by concrete cylinder
compression tests.
D. If construction traffic is permitted, maintain concrete flatwork as clean as possible by
removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.
BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT DRIVEWAYS, SIDEWALKS, CURBS, GUTTERS,
AND OTHER CONCRETE FLATWORK
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 16 00 - 16
E. Protect fresh concrete from vandals, damage, pedestrian traffic, etc. Repair damaged section
immediately to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
F. Remove saw-cut dust immediately. Do not allow saw-cut dust to be flushed down storm
drains or into adjacent wetlands or landscaping areas.
G. Maintain concrete flatwork free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material.
Sweep concrete flatwork not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial
Completion inspections.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 13 - 1
SECTION 32 31 13
CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide chain link fencing, three strand barb wire, and swing gates and
appurtenant Work, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Single Manufacturer: Chain link fencing, swing gates, accessories, fittings, and fastenings shall
be products of a single manufacturer.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 32 31 14 – Cantilever Slide Gates and Operators
B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast-in-Place Concrete
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
ASTM A 53 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and
Seamless
ASTM A 123 Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products
ASTM A 153 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and
Steel Hardware
ASTM A 392 Zinc-Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric, Class I
ASTM F 668 Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) - Coated Steel Chain Link Fence
Fabric, Class 2b
1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. The Contractor, at a minimum, shall submit the following information for Engineer approval
prior to installing any chain link fencing:
1. Manufacturer’s technical data, product specifications, standard details, certified
product test results, installation instructions and general recommendations.
2. Scale layout of fencing, pedestrian gates, and accessories. Drawings shall show fence
height, post layout, including sizes and sections; post setting and bracing
configuration, details of gates and corner construction, and other accessories which
may be necessary.
C. Samples: Samples of proposed fence components, at least 12 inches long, to illustrate the
selected color and finish.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 13 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Dimensions indicated herein for roll-formed pipe are outside dimensions, excluding coatings.
B. Fence fabric height shall be 6 feet unless otherwise indicated.
C. All fencing materials shall be hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and coated with either PVC
coating, or powder coating as specified below. The coatings shall be black.
1. All PVC coatings shall be made from virgin PVC resin with plasticizer, stabilizers, and
ultraviolet inhibitor. Coatings shall have a tensile strength of 2500 psi; maximum
elongation of 200 percent, coating thickness shall be at least 7 mils thick and a shore
durometer hardness of 40 to 46 unless specified otherwise.
2. Powder coatings shall be made of 'degassing' grade polyester powder only.
Pretreatment shall be used to ensure surface is perfectly clean and pre-heat work
prior to powder application. Check for correct curing by solvent testing. Adjust pre-
heat and line speed to ensure full cure. Coating thickness shall be at least 3 mils thick.
2.2 STEEL FABRIC
A. Fence fabric shall be No. 9 gauge steel wire, 2-inch mesh, with top selvages knuckled and
bottom selvages twisted and barbed.
B. Fabric Finish: Fabric shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 392 - Zinc-Coated Steel Chain
Link Fence Fabric, 1.2 ounces zinc per square foot of coated surface, followed by a thermally
fusion bonded poly vinyl chloride coating at least 7 mils thick.
1. PVC coating shall comply with ASTM F 668 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) - Coated Steel
Chain Link Fence Fabric, Class 2b, except that the wire core shall measure 9 gauge
prior to application of coating.
2.3 FRAMING AND ACCESSORIES
A. Steel Framework, General: Unless otherwise indicated, framework components shall be
fabricated of galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped,
Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless, or ASTM A 123 - Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on
Iron and Steel Products, with not less than 1.8 ounces zinc per square feet of coated surface.
1. Fittings and accessories shall be galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 153 Zinc
Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware, with zinc weights per Table I of that
standard, except that no coating shall be less than 1.8 ounce zinc per square foot of
coated surface.
a. After galvanizing, posts, braces, top rails, framework, fittings, and accessories
shall be finished with: manufacturer’s standard thermally fusion bonded PVC
finish, not less than 10 mils thick. PVC coating shall comply with ASTM F 668
- Poly (Vinyl Chloride)(PVC) - Coated Steel Chain Link Fence Fabric, Class 2b.
2. Concrete shall completely encase the bottom of the post.
a. At the Contractor’s option, gate frameworks, fittings and accessories may
have a powder coat finish. Powder coatings shall be made of 'degassing' grade
polyester powder only. Pretreatment shall be used to ensure surface is
perfectly clean and pre-heat work prior to powder application. Check for

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 13 - 3
correct curing by solvent testing. Adjust pre-heat and line speed to ensure full
cure. Coating thickness shall be at least 3 mils thick.
B. End, Corner and Pull Posts: Posts shall be one-piece without circumferential welds, 3 inch
schedule 40 pipe, 5.79 pounds per linear foot.
C. Line Posts: Line posts shall be spaced no more than 10 feet on center and shall be Schedule
40, 2-1/2 inch pipe, 3.65 pounds per linear foot.
D. Gate Posts: Gate posts shall be 4 inch schedule 40 pipe, 9.1 pounds per linear foot for leaf
widths up to 13 feet. For leaf widths between 13 and 18 feet, gate posts shall be 6-5/8 inch
schedule 40 pipe, 28.55 pounds per linear foot.
E. Top Rail: Top railing shall be provided in manufacturer’s longest lengths, with expansion type
couplings, approximately 6 inches long, for each joint. Fence design shall provide positive,
secure attachment of top rail to each gate post, corner post, pull post and end post. Top rail
and braces shall be 1-5/8 inch schedule 40 pipe, 2.27 pounds per linear foot, or 1-½ inch “H”
column section, 2.00 pounds per linear foot.
F. Tension Wire: Tension wire shall be located at the bottom of the fabric and shall consist of
No. 7 gauge coated coil spring wire of metal and finish to match fabric. Tension wire shall be
interlaced with the fabric or attached to the fabric along the extreme bottom of the fence.
Tension wire attachment shall be with fabric tie wires at a spacing of no more than 24 inches
apart.
G. Fabric Tie Wires: Fabric tie wires shall be No. 9 gauge galvanized steel wire of the same finish
as the fabric. Aluminum ties shall not be used. Ties shall be spaced 14 inches apart on posts
and 24 inches apart on rails.
H. Post Brace Assembly: Post brace assembly shall be manufacturer’s standard adjustable brace
assembly provided at each end post, gate post and at both sides of each corner post and
intermediate brace post. Material used for brace shall be same as top rail. Truss bracing
between line posts shall be achieved with 0.375-inch diameter rod and adjustable tensioner.
I. Post Tops: Post tops shall be weather-tight closure caps, designed for containment of top rail
and positive permanent attachment to post. One cap shall be provided for each post.
J. Stretcher Bars: Stretcher bars shall be one-piece lengths equal to the full height of the fabric,
with minimum cross-section of 3/16 inch by 3/4 inch. One stretcher bar shall be provided for
each gate and end post, and two for each corner and intermediate brace post.
K. Stretcher Bar Bands: Stretcher bar bands shall be one-piece fabrications designed to secure
stretcher bars to end, corner, intermediate brace, and gate posts. Bands shall have a minimum
cross-section of 1/8 inch by 3/4 inch. Stretcher bar bands shall be spaced no more than 15
inches on center.
L. Barbed Wire Supporting Arms: Supporting arms shall be manufacturer’s standard
fabrication, of metal and finish to match fence framework, with provision for anchorage to
each post and attachment of three rows of barbed wire to each arm. Supporting arms may be
either attached to posts or integral with post top weather cap. Supporting arm shall be single

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 13 - 4
45-degree arm type and shall be capable of withstanding 250 pounds of downward pull at
outermost end.
M. Barbed Wire: Barbed wire shall be three-strand, No. 12-1/2 gauge zinc-coated steel or iron
wire with four-point, 14 gauge barbs spaced no more than 5 inches apart.
2.4 GATES
A. Fabrication: Perimeter frames of gates shall be fabricated from same metal and shall be
finished as specified in paragraph 2.1 - GENERAL. Gate frames shall be assembled by welding.
Welds shall be ground smooth. Horizontal and vertical members shall be provided to ensure
proper gate operation and attachment of fabric.
1. Fabric shall be installed with stretcher bars at all perimeter edges. Stretcher bars shall
be attached to gate frame with stretcher bar bands spaced no more than 15 inches on
center.
2. Each gate shall be diagonally cross-braced with a 3/8-inch diameter adjustable length
truss rod to ensure frame rigidity without sag or twist.
B. Swing Gates: Perimeter frames of swing gates shall be constructed of the same pipe or “H”
column members as the top rails and shall be fabricated by welding. Welds shall be ground
smooth prior to hot-dip galvanizing.
1. Hardware and accessories shall be provided for each gate, galvanized in conformance
with ASTM A 153, and in accordance with the following:
a. Hinges: Hinges shall be of size and material to suit gate size, non-lift-off type,
offset to permit 180-degree gate opening. Three hinges shall be provided for
each leaf 6 feet or more in height.
b. Latch: Latch shall be forked type or plunger-bar type, permitting operation
from either side of the gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch.
c. Keeper: Keeper shall be provided which automatically engages the gate leaf
and holds it in the open position until it is manually released.
2.5 RELATED ITEMS
A. Concrete: Concrete shall be provided according to Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B. Nuts, bolts and screws shall be steel, minimum size 3/8-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication. Upon completion of installation, bolts, nuts and exposed threads shall be
painted to match with an exterior acrylic paint in accordance with Section – 09 90 00 Painting
and Coating.
2.6 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Chain link fencing and gates shall be products of a single
manufacturer which has been successfully engaged in the production of such items for a
period of at least 5 years.
B. Installer’s Qualifications: Installation of the chain link fence shall be by the manufacturer or
by a firm accepted and licensed by the manufacturer.
C. Manufacturers, or equal

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 13 - 5
1. American Fence Company Inc.
2. Mountain States Fence.
3. United Fence Company
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Prior to commencing installation, require Installer to inspect all areas and conditions within
which Work of this Section will be performed. Dimensions and clearances shall be verified.
Final grading shall be completed and all earth, brush, or other obstructions which interfere
with the proper alignment and construction of fencing shall be removed.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, all posts shall be set in concrete. Gate and related posts,
corner posts, and other critical elements shall be provided with concrete foundations which
are designed by an engineer to safely accommodate the loads to which they will be subjected.
The soils report is appended to the Contract Documents and contains information regarding
soil properties in the vicinity of the site.
B. Excavation: Holes for posts shall be drilled or hand excavated to the diameters and spacings
indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Post foundations which are not designed
by an engineer shall comply with the following:
1. Holes shall be excavated to a diameter not less than 12 inches or not less than five
times the largest dimension of the item being anchored, whichever is larger.
2. Depth for holes shall be not less than 42 inches; excavated approximately 6 inches
lower than the post bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below
finish grade surface, or as indicated in the Drawings.
3. Concrete shall completely encase the bottom of the post.
C. Setting Posts: Line posts shall be spaced at not more than 10-foot intervals, measured from
center to center of the posts, parallel to the ground slope. Posts shall be set plumb and shall
be centered in holes, 4 inches above the bottom of the excavation, with posts extending not
less than 36 inches below finish grade surface.
1. Corner posts shall be installed where changes in the fence lines equal or exceed
15 degrees, measured horizontally.
2. Each post shall be properly aligned vertically and its top aligned parallel to the ground
slope. Posts shall be maintained in proper position during placement and finishing
operations.
D. Concrete
1. Concrete for footings may be placed without forms, providing the ground is firm
enough to permit excavation to neat line dimensions. Prior to placing concrete, the
earth around the hole shall be thoroughly moistened.
2. Encasement concrete for footings shall be placed immediately after mixing in a
manner such that there will be no concentration of the large aggregates. The concrete
shall be consolidated by tamping or vibrating.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 13 - 6
3. Concrete footings shall have a neat appearance and shall be extended 2 inches above
grade and troweled to a crown to shed water.
4. A minimum of 7 days shall elapse after placing the concrete footings before the fence
fabric or barbed wire is fastened to the posts.
5. Concrete shall be plant mixed. Use of products that are not mixed (or mixed in the
post hole) is not permitted.
E. Bracing: Bracing shall be provided at all ends, corners, gates, and intermediate brace posts.
Corner posts and intermediate brace posts shall be braced in both directions. Horizontal
brace rails shall be set midway between the top rail and the ground, running from the corner,
end, intermediate brace or gate post to the first line post. Diagonal tension members shall
connect tautly between posts below horizontal braces.
1. Braces shall be so installed that posts remain plumb when diagonal rod is under
proper tension.
F. Intermediate Brace Posts: Where straight runs of fencing exceed 500 feet, intermediate brace
posts shall be installed, spaced equally between ends or corners; with additional posts
provided as required, such that the spacing between intermediate brace posts does not
exceed 500 feet. Intermediate brace posts shall be equivalent in size to corner posts and shall
be braced with horizontal brace rails and diagonal tension members in both directions.
G. Top Rails: Top rails shall be run continuously through post caps, bending to radius for curved
runs. Expansion couplings shall be provided as recommended by the fencing manufacturer.
H. Tension Wire: Continuous bottom tension wire shall be stretched tight with turnbuckles at
end, gate, intermediate, and corner posts. Tension wire shall be installed on a straight grade
between posts, with approximately 2 inches of space between finish grade and bottom
selvage, unless otherwise indicated. Tension wire shall be tied to each post with not less than
6-gauge galvanized wire.
I. Fabric:
1. Chain-link fabric shall be fastened on the secured side of the posts.
2. Fabric shall be stretched and securely fastened to posts. Between posts, top and
bottom edges of the fabric shall be fastened to the top rail and bottom tension wire,
respectively.
3. Fabric shall be stretched and anchored in such a manner that it remains in tension
after the pulling force is released.
J. Tie Wires: Tie wire shall be bent to conform to the diameter of the pipe to which it is attached,
clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least two full turns. Ends of wire shall be
bent back to minimize hazard to persons or clothing.
1. Fabric shall be tied to line posts with tie wires spaced at 12 inches on center.
2. Fabric shall be tied to rails and braces with tie wires spaced at 24 inches on center.
3. Fabric shall be tied to tension wires, with hog rings spaced 24 inches on center.
K. Stretcher Bars: Fabric shall be fastened to end, corner, intermediate brace, and gate posts
with stretcher bars. Bars shall be threaded through or clamped to fabric at 4-inches on center
and secured to posts with stretcher bar bands spaced no more than 14 inches on center.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 13 - 7
L. Fasteners: Nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts shall be installed on the side of fence
opposite the fabric side. Ends of bolts shall be peened or the threads scored to prevent
removal of nuts.
M. Galvanized coating damaged during construction of the fencing shall be repaired by
application of Galvo-Weld; Galvinox; or equal.
N. Damage to PVC coating shall be repaired with material equivalent in color and thickness to
the original coating.
3.3 GROUNDING
A. Fences crossed by power lines of 600 volts or more shall be grounded at or near the point of
crossing and at distances not exceeding 50 feet on each side of the crossing.
B. All fences, gates, and appurtenances enclosing electrical equipment areas, gas yards, or other
hazardous areas shall be electrically continuous and grounded.
C. Ground conductor shall consist of No. 8 AWG solid copper wire. Grounding electrodes shall
be ¾-inch by 10-foot long copper-clad steel rod. Electrodes shall be driven into the earth so
that the top of the electrode is at least 6 inches below the grade.
1. Where driving is impracticable, electrodes shall be buried a minimum of 12 inches
deep and radially from the fence. Top of electrode shall be not less than 2 feet or more
than 8 feet from the fence
3.4 GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for
full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using
tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Gate: Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free of binding, warp, excessive
deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or malfunction, throughout
entire operational range. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely
without forcing or binding.
B. Lubricate hardware, and other moving parts.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CHAIN LINK FENCING AND GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 13 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CANTILEVER SLIDE GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 14 - 1
SECTION 32 31 14
CANTILEVER SLIDE GATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Work in this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, equipment and
appliances necessary to complete installation of horizontal cantilever sliding gates required
for this project in strict accordance with this specification.
B. Install cantilever slide gates where indicated in the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM F 1184-05 Standard Specification for Industrial and Commercial Horizontal Slide
Gates.
B. American Welding Society AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 32 13 31 – Chain Link Fencing and Gates
B. Section 03 30 00 – Cast in Place Concrete.
1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with the provisions of Section 01 33 20
–Submittal Procedures. Submit drawings showing connections to adjacent construction,
range of travel, and all electrical and mechanical connections to the operator. Drawings shall
also show the size and location of the concrete mounting pad. Include complete details of gate
construction, gate height, structural support spacing dimensions and unit weights of
structural components. Include underground electrical runs and inductive vehicle
obstruction and free exit loop locations, and dimensions.
B. Installation instructions: Submit two copies of manufacturer's installation instructions for
this specific project.
C. Submit two (2) copies of operation and maintenance data covering the installed products,
including name, address and telephone number of the nearest fully equipped service center.
D. Provide manufacturer’s catalog cuts and printed literature including detailed sequence of
operation (description of system).
1.5 CERTIFICATIONS
A. The Structural Cantilever Slide Gate must be cycle-tested and certified in accordance with
Section 3.5.1 of this specification.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CANTILEVER SLIDE GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 14 - 2
B. The welders and welding process for gate manufacture must be certified in accordance with
AWS.D1.1
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A minimum of three years experience installing similar equipment, provide proof
of factory technical training within previous three years, or obtain other significant
manufacturer endorsement of technical aptitude.
1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
A. Store products upright in the original shipping containers, covered, ventilated and protected
from all weather conditions.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide a three-year limited warranty against all defects in materials or workmanship.
Defective materials shall be replaced with comparable materials furnished by the
manufacturer, at no additional cost to the owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INDUSTRIAL CANTILEVER SLIDE GATES
A. General: Cantilever Slide Gates shall be fabricated from same metal and shall have the same
finish as specified in Specification Section 32 31 13 paragraph 2.2 - Steel Fabric and
Specification Section 32 31 13 paragraph 2.1 - General. Cantilever gates shall be designed to
span the distance of the opening and offset back one half the distance of the opening. All
joints shall be welded joints and welds shall be ground smooth prior to hot-dip galvanizing.
Gates shall comply with ASTM F 1184 for single and double slide gates.
1. Classification: Type II Cantilever Slide.
2. Metal Pipe and Tubing: Galvanized steel. Comply with ASTM F 1184 for materials
and protective coatings.
B. Frames and Bracing: Fabricate members from round, galvanized steel tubing of sufficient
size and strength to support the weight of the gate as well as any live loadings, including but
not limited to wind, snow and ice loads, with outside dimension and weight according to
ASTM F 1184 and the following minimums:
1. Gate Fabric Height: 6 feet.
2. Gate Opening Width: per plans
3. Frame Members:
a. Tubular Steel: 1.66 inches
4. Bracing Members:
a. Tubular Steel: 1.90 inches round
C. Frame Corner Construction:
1. Welded frame and 5/16-inch diameter, adjustable truss rods for panels 5 feet wide
or wider.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CANTILEVER SLIDE GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 14 - 3
D. Extended Gate Posts and Frame Members: Extend gate posts and frame end members above
top of chain-link fabric at both ends of gate frame 12 inches as required to attach barbed wire
assemblies.
E. Roller Guards: As required per ASTM F 1184 for Type II gates.
F. Hardware
1. Latches permitting operation from both sides of gate, locking devices, hangers, and
stops fabricated from galvanized steel. Fabricate latches with integral eye openings
for padlocking; padlock accessible from both sides of gat. Latches shall permit
operator to catch and align the gate properly when closed.
2. Rollers: Rollers shall be made of nylon. Placement of the rollers on the offset posts
shall be designed to ensure proper alignment of the gate.
G. Manufacturers
1. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Chain link cantilever slide gates shall be products of a
single manufacturer which has been successfully engaged in the production of such
items for a period of at least 5 years.
2. Installer’s Qualifications: Installation of the chain link fence shall be by the
manufacturer or by a firm accepted and licensed by the manufacturer.
3. Manufacturers, or equal
a. United Fence Company
b. Approved Equal
2.2 OPERATION
1. Operation shall be by means of a metal rail passing between a pair of solid metal
wheels with polyurethane treads. All slide gates are manually operated. No more than
10 lbs of pulling force shall be required to open or close the slide gate.
2.3 FACTORY TESTING
A. Fully assemble and test, at the factory, each gate to assure smooth operation.
B. Check all mechanical connections for tightness and alignment. Check all welds for
completeness and continuity. Check welded corners and edges to assure they are square and
straight.
C. Inspect painted finish for completeness. Touch up imperfections prior to shipment.
2.4 RELATED ITEMS
A. Concrete: Concrete shall be provided according to Section 03 30 00 – Cast-In-Place Concrete.
B. Nuts, bolts and screws shall be steel, minimum size 3/8-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized
after fabrication. Upon completion of installation, bolts, nuts and exposed threads shall be
painted to match with an exterior acrylic paint in accordance with Section – 09 90 00 Coatings
and Painting.
C. If called out, PVC slats shall be a PVC material similar to the PVC fabric coating or high-density
virgin polyethylene slats with an ultraviolet inhibitor. The slats shall be a tubular shape with

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CANTILEVER SLIDE GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 14 - 4
a nominal wall thickness of 0.030 inch and installed with a retaining channel top and bottom.
The color shall be black.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE EXAMINATION
A. Make sure that gate is operating smoothly under manual.
B. Prior to commencing installation, gate installer shall inspect all areas and conditions within
which Work of this Section will be performed. Dimensions and clearances shall be verified.
3.2 CANTILIVER SLIDE GATE INSTALLATION
A. Install gates according to manufacturer's written instructions, level, plumb, and secure for
full opening without interference. Attach fabric as for fencing. Attach hardware using
tamper-resistant or concealed means. Install ground-set items in concrete for anchorage.
Adjust hardware for smooth operation and lubricate where necessary.
B. General: Unless otherwise indicated, all posts shall be set in concrete. Gate and related posts,
and other critical elements shall be provided with concrete foundations which are designed
by an engineer to safely accommodate the loads to which they will be subjected. The soils
report is appended to the Contract Documents and contains information regarding soil
properties in the vicinity of the site.
C. Excavation: Holes for posts shall be drilled or hand excavated to the diameters and spacings
indicated, in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Post foundations which are not designed
by an engineer shall comply with the following:
1. Holes shall be excavated to a diameter not less than 12 inches or not less than five
times the largest dimension of the item being anchored, whichever is larger.
2. Depth for holes shall be not less than 42 inches; excavated approximately 6 inches
lower than the post bottom, with bottom of posts set not less than 36 inches below
finish grade surface, or as indicated in the Drawings.
3. Concrete shall completely encase the bottom of the post.
D. Setting Posts: Posts shall be set plumb and shall be centered in holes, 4 inches above the
bottom of the excavation, with posts extending not less than 36 inches below finish grade
surface.
1. Each post shall be properly aligned vertically and its top aligned parallel to the ground
slope. Posts shall be maintained in proper position during placement and finishing
operations.
E. Concrete
1. Concrete for footings may be placed without forms, providing the ground is firm
enough to permit excavation to neat line dimensions. Prior to placing concrete, the
earth around the hole shall be thoroughly moistened.
2. Hand-excavate holes for bases/pads, in firm, undisturbed soil to dimensions and
depths and at locations as required by gate-operator component manufacturer's
written instructions and as indicated.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CANTILEVER SLIDE GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 14 - 5
3. Encasement concrete for footings shall be placed immediately after mixing in a
manner such that there will be no concentration of the large aggregates. The concrete
shall be consolidated by tamping or vibrating.
4. Concrete footings for support posts shall have a neat appearance and shall be
extended 2 inches above grade and troweled to a crown to shed water.
5. A minimum of 7 days shall elapse after placing the concrete footings before gate and
controller installation shall begin.
6. Cast-in-place or precast concrete for controller installation shall extend a minimum 6
inches below frost line, dimensioned and reinforced according to gate-operator
component manufacturer's written instructions or as indicated on Drawings.
F. Bracing: Bracing shall be in accordance with the cantilever slide gate manufacturers
recommendations provided at all ends, gate panels include cross bracing.
G. Fabric:
1. Chain-link fabric shall be fastened on the secured side of the gate frame.
2. Fabric shall be stretched and securely fastened to the gate frame and support
members. Between support members, top and bottom edges of the fabric shall be
fastened to the top, and bottom of the gate frame, respectively.
3. Fabric shall be stretched and anchored in such a manner that it remains in tension
after the pulling force is released.
H. Tie Wires: Tie wire shall be bent to conform to the diameter of the pipe to which it is attached,
clasping pipe and fabric firmly with ends twisted at least two full turns. Ends of wire shall be
bent back to minimize hazard to persons or clothing.
1. Fabric shall be tied to cantilever gate posts with tie wires spaced at 12 inches on
center.
2. Fabric shall be tied to gate frames and braces with tie wires spaced at 24 inches on
center.
I. Stretcher Bars: Fabric shall be fastened to gate posts with stretcher bars. Bars shall be
threaded through or clamped to fabric at 4-inches on center and secured to posts with
stretcher bar bands spaced no more than 14 inches on center.
J. Fasteners: Nuts for tension bands and hardware bolts shall be installed on the side of fence
opposite the fabric side. Ends of bolts shall be peened or the threads scored to prevent
removal of nuts.
K. Galvanized coating damaged during construction of the fencing shall be repaired by
application of Galvo-Weld; Galvinox; or equal.
L. Damage to PVC coating shall be repaired with material equivalent in color and thickness to
the original coating.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The complete system shall be adjusted to assure it is performing properly. Test cantilever
slide gate through a minimum of ten full cycles and adjust to ensure operation without
binding, scraping or uneven motion. Adjust gate to operate smoothly, easily, and quietly, free

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT CANTILEVER SLIDE GATES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 31 14 - 6
of binding, warp, excessive deflection, distortion, nonalignment, misplacement, disruption, or
malfunction, throughout entire operational range.
B. Gate lock shall be aligned properly to lock and unlock without binding. Test gate lock through
a minimum of ten full cycles and verify secure locking.
C. All anchor bolts shall be fully concealed in the finished installation.
D. Lubricate hardware, gate operator, and other moving parts.
E. Ensure the Owner is clear with regard to the safety points concerning the basic operational
guidelines of the safety features of the gate operator system. These safety points are listed in
the operator manual and must be read prior to system use.
F. Owner, or Engineer, shall complete “punch list” with installing contractor prior to final
acceptance of the installation.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 1
SECTION 32 90 01
LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide landscaping and appurtenant work, complete and in place, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Landscaping as referred to herein shall include supplying and placing topsoil, soil
preparation, installation of headers, weed control, finish grading, furnishing and installing
plant materials, seeding, erosion control, cleanup, and maintenance guarantee.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. The terms "plant material" or "plants" refer to all vegetation, including but not limited to seed
and seeded areas, etc.
B. "Quality" refers to general development without consideration of size or condition. "Standard
quality" indicates the least acceptable quality. "Standard quality" seeded and germinated
plants shall be typical of the species and variety of good average uniform growth, shall be well
formed.
C. "Condition" is the factor controlled by vitality and ability to survive and thrive and be
comparable with normal plants of the same species and variety in the vicinity at the same
season of the year. Plants shall be free from physical damage or adverse conditions that would
prevent thriving. "Condition" also sometimes refers to state of growth, i.e., whether "dormant
condition" or "growing condition" and this state shall be comparable to plants of similar
species in the vicinity for leaves, formation of buds, and the like.
1.3 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards:
ASTM D 422 Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils
ANSI Z60.1 Nursery Stock
American Association of Rules and Grading Provisions Nurserymen, Inc.
1.4 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Contractor
Submittals.
B. Product Information
1. Manufacturer's product information on slow-release fertilizer, fertilizer tablets, seed,
and erosion control materials.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 2
2. Topsoil Analysis Report: A report certified by an analytical laboratory which shows
results of analyzing representative samples of topsoil proposed for use. Approval of
the report does not constitute final acceptance of the topsoil. Topsoil report will only
be required if imported topsoil is used for the site. It is anticipated that existing
topsoil will be stripped, stockpiled, and then redistributed across the site after fine
grading is complete.
3. Supplier’s information and testing information on compost for soil amendment.
C. Certificate
1. Certificates shall accompany each product delivery stating source, quantity, and type
of material. All certificates shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect at the time
of delivery.
2. Certificates of inspection of plant material, as may be required by Federal, State, or
other authorities having jurisdiction, which accompany the shipment, shall be
submitted to the Landscape Architect at the time of delivery.
3. Landscaping Subcontractor guarantee to perform seed maintenance and weeding
services during the one-year correction of defects period.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: All plants shall be true to type or name as indicated in the Contract Documents and
shall be tagged in accordance with the standard practice recommended by the Agricultural
Code of the State of Utah however, determination of plant species or variety will be made by
the Landscape Architect.
B. All plants shall comply with Federal and Utah State laws requiring inspection for plant
diseases and infestations.
C. The Contractor shall obtain clearance from the County Agricultural Commissioner, as
required by law, before planting plants delivered from outside the County in which they are
to be planted. Evidence that such clearance has been obtained shall be filed with the Engineer
or Landscape Architect.
D. Inspections will be made by the Engineer or Landscape Architect. The Contractor shall
request inspection at least 24 hours in advance of the time inspection is required. Inspection
is required on the following stages of the Work:
1. During preliminary grading, soil preparation, and initial weeding.
2. When approved, amended topsoil is placed.
3. When finish grading has been completed.
4. When seed is to be applied.
5. Once seed application has been complete and erosion control is in place.
6. When all Work except the maintenance period has been completed.
7. Final inspection before acceptance of the project.
1.6 CLEANUP
A. Upon completion of all planting operations, the portion of the Site used for a work or storage
area by the Contractor shall be cleaned of all debris, superfluous materials, and equipment.
All such materials and equipment shall be entirely removed from the Site in accordance with
Section 01 70 10 – Project Closeout.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 3
B. All walks or pavement shall be swept or washed clean upon completion of the Work of this
Section.
C. During the entire Contract period, plant containers that have been cut or removed from plant
materials shall be removed from the site daily.
D. All fertilizer packaging shall be cleared from the site at the end of every day.
1.7 MAINTENANCE OF LANDSCAPING PLANTING PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE OF PROJECT
A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for protecting and maintaining all seeded areas
until final acceptance of all Work under the Contract.
B. Protection: The Contractor shall provide adequate protection to all newly seeded areas
including the installation of approved temporary fences to prevent trespassing and damage,
as well as erosion control, until the end of the correction of defects period.
C. The Contractor shall replace any materials or equipment that its employees or
Subcontractors have damaged.
D. Partial utilization of the project shall not relieve the Contractor of any of the requirements
contained in the Contract Documents.
E. Seeded areas shall be maintained by weeding, fertilizing, spraying, and other operations
necessary.
F. Maintenance shall include, in addition to the foregoing, cleaning, the repair of erosion, reseed
bare areas, and all other necessary maintenance work. Sidewalks, retaining walls and paved
areas shall be kept clean while seeding and maintenance are in progress.
1.8 FINAL INSPECTION AND GUARANTEE
A. Inspection of all seeded areas will be part of final inspection under the Contract.
B. Written notice requesting inspection shall be submitted to the Landscape Architect at least
10 days prior to the anticipated inspection date.
C. Final acceptance prior to start of the guarantee period of the Contract will be on written
approval by the Engineer or Landscape Architect, on the satisfactory completion of all Work,
including maintenance, but exclusive of the replacement of plant material or reseed areas
that have less than 30% coverage of non-invasive weeds.
D. Any delay in the completion of any item of work in the planting operation which extends the
seeding into more than one season shall extend the correction period in accordance with the
date of completion given above.
E. The Contractor shall reseed, as soon as weather conditions permit, all bare areas or areas that
show less than 30% seed germination which are noted at the end of the one-year correction
period.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 4
F. All Work under this Section shall be left in good order to the satisfaction of the Owner and
the Landscape Architect, and the Contractor shall, without additional expense to the Owner.
1.9 MAINTENANCE AND GUARANTEE FOLLOWING ACCEPTANCE OF PROJECT
A. General: The Contractor shall be responsible for a period of one year after date of acceptance
of the Work of this Section, for maintaining all seeded areas, including fertilizing, controlling
insects and diseases and weeding. During the one-year maintenance and correction period,
areas that show 10% or greater of invasive weed growth shall be treated with an herbicide
or pulled and reseeded. Contractor shall conduct a site visit monthly to monitor invasive and
noxious weed growth. The Contractor shall obtain a written guarantee from the
landscaping Subcontractor embodying the provisions of this paragraph.
B. The Work covered by the maintenance and guarantee portions of this paragraph includes
providing all reseeding of seeding areas for the one year maintenance period or for 2 full
growing seasons if the maintenance periods starts in the fall or winter, labor, materials,
chemicals, equipment, and supplies and in performing all operations in connection with
maintenance and guarantees.
C. The Contractor shall clean-up and remove unused or waste materials from the Site and leave
the area in a neat condition satisfactory to the Owner whenever it performs work during the
maintenance period.
D. Final Inspection: The Owner and Contractor shall make a final inspection at the end of the
one-year maintenance and correction period. Any bare seed areas, or less than 30% coverage
of non-invasive/weed species at time of final inspection, shall be reseeded within a time
agreed upon by both parties. If it is outside of the seeding window for seeding, seeding shall
take place within the next seeding window even though reseeding may run beyond the
maintenance and correction period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All landscaping materials including but not limited to, soil amendments, fertilizer, herbicides,
pesticides, seed mixtures and erosion control materials shall be first-grade, commercial
quality and shall have certificates indicating the source of material, analysis, quantity, or
weight attached to each sack or container or furnished with each delivery. Delivery
certificates shall be given to the Landscape Architect as each shipment of material is
delivered. A list of the materials used, together with typical certificates of each material, shall
be submitted to the Landscape Architect prior to final acceptance.
2.2 TOPSOIL
A. It is anticipated that existing topsoil will be stripped, stockpiled, and then redistributed
across the site after fine grading is complete. If imported is required by the Owner, imported
topsoil shall be obtained from naturally drained areas and shall be fertile, friable loam
suitable for plant growth. Topsoil shall be subject to inspection and approval by the

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 5
Landscape Architect at the source of supply and upon delivery to the site. All laboratory soil
testing shall be ordered and paid by the Contractor.
B. Onsite or imported topsoil shall be of uniform quality, free from toxic substances, subsoil, stiff
or lumpy clay, hard clods, hardpan, rocks, disintegrated debris, plants, roots, seeds, and any
other materials that would be toxic or harmful to plant growth. Topsoil shall contain no
noxious weeds or noxious weed seeds. If stockpiled topsoil contains weeds it must be
sterilized 2 weeks prior to seeding and application of erosion control blanket.
C. Topsoil used for this Work shall meet the following requirements.
1. Soluable salts (EJe) Less than 4 dS/m or mmho/cm
2. ph Between 5.0 and 7.5
3. Sand, silt, clay content Less than 30% clay
a. Less than 70% sand and
b. Less than 70% silt.
4. Soil texture Sand clay loam (SLC)
a. sandy loam (SL)
b. clay loam (CL)
5. Organic matter content (by weight) Minimum 0.5 Percent
6. SAR (sodium absorption ratio) Less than 7
7. Percent coarse fragments (rocks>2mm) Less than 5 percent
8. Nitrate Nitrogen (ppm) Greater than 20
9. Phosphorus (ppm) Greater than 15
10. Potassium (ppm) Greater than 150
11. Iron (ppm) Greater than 10
2.3 FERTILIZER AND AMENDMENTS
A. Fertilizer shall be furnished in bags or other standard containers with name, weight, and
guaranteed analysis of contents clearly marked thereon.
B. Chemical fertilizers shall be a mixed commercial fertilizer with percentages of nitrogen,
phosphoric acid, and potash at 16-16-8 slow release formula. Fertilizers shall be uniform in
composition, dry, and free flowing.
C. Fertilizer tablets shall be 12 grams each 20-10-5 "Agriform," "Lesslie", or equal.
D. Compost: Onsite topsoil shall be amended with one part compost to 5 parts topsoil. Compost
shall consist of composed leaves and yard grass. Compost shall meet the following
requirements:
1. Compost shall be dark brown to black in color,
2. Compost shall have no objectionable odor,
3. Compost shall have a particle size of ½ inch or less,
4. Compost shall have a pH of 5.0 to 7.8,
5. Compost shall have a soluble salt concentration (mmhos/cm or dS/m) of less than 5
and
6. Compost shall have a carbon-to-nitrogen ration of less than 25:1.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 6
2.4 SEED
A. Seed shall conform with applicable City, County, State, Federal regulations and meet Utah
Seed Law. Seed shall be mixed by dealer. The Contractor shall furnish dealer's guaranteed
germination figure for each variety. Grass seed shall not be delivered until samples have been
approved in writing by the Engineer, Landscape Architect or its authorized landscape
representative. Approval of samples, however, shall not affect the right of the Engineer,
Landscape Architect or the authorized landscape representative to reject seed upon or after
delivery. Seed that has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged prior to use will not be
accepted.
B. Grass seed shall be fresh, clean, new-crop seed, composed of the following varieties mixed in
the proportions by weight. Purity and germination percentage shall be the results of testing.
C. Weather Conditions: Fertilizing, seeding, or mulching operations will not be permitted when
wind velocities exceed 5 miles per hour or when the ground is frozen, unduly wet, or
otherwise not in a tillable conditions. Seeding shall not be conducted when temperatures
exceed 75F.
D. Topsoil: Four inches of approved, onsite or imported, amended topsoil shall be placed in all
areas delineated to be seeded. Imported, amended topsoil shall be placed and raked smooth
prior to seeding. Stripped and stockpiled topsoil for wetlands shall be kept in separate piles
from upland stripped and stockpiled topsoil and shall not be intermixed. Contractor shall use
stockpiled wetland stockpile for wetland restoration areas and upland stockpile for upland
areas prior to seeding.
E. Soil Preparation: The ground to be seeded shall be graded in conformance with the Drawings
and shall be loose and reasonably free of large rocks, roots, and other material which will
interfere with the work. The site shall be rough and scraped with the teeth of a track hoe
bucket or similar.
F. Supply seed on a pure live seed (PLS) basis.
G. Obtain seed from lots that have been tested by a state certified seed testing laboratory.
(Association of Seed Analyst (AOSA) or Society of Commercial Seed Technologists (SCST).
Seed germination tests older than 18 months for grass seed, and 9 months for shrub or tree
seed are not acceptable.
H. Do not use wet, moldy or otherwise damaged seed.
I. See the end of this specification for seed mix(s).
J. In disturbed areas, complete all weed removal, final grading, trench settling, surface
preparation and irrigation work (if applicable) before seeding begins.
K. Roughen soil receiving seed.
L. Do not install when seed or soil is saturated or frozen.
M. MAINTENANCE

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 7
1. During the maintenance period the contractor shall be responsible for removing
weeds and maintaining the site to provide as good of conditions as possible for seed
to grow.
2. Contractor shall plan on one re-seeding if the upland and wetland seed has not
established to a minimum of 30% coverage at the end of the warranty period.
2.5 BROADCAST SEED
A. Broadcast seed is not allowed. Only drill or hydroseeding is allowed.
2.6 DRILL SEEDING
A. Drill seeding of the native seed may occur between October 30 and February 28. The actual
seeding period must be approved by the Engineer or Landscape Architect because weather
conditions vary from year to year. No seed shall be conducted until approved.
B. Seeding: Seed shall be uniformly drilled to an average depth of 1/4 to 1/2 inch at the rate
specified using equipment having drills not more than 6-1/2 inches apart. Row markers shall
be used with the drill seeder. Drill seeding shall take place 3 days after application of
herbicide.
C. Rolling: Immediately after seeding, the entire area shall be firmed with a roller not exceeding
90 pounds for each foot of roller width. Areas seeded with drills equipped with rollers shall
not be rolled.
D. Hydromulch: Apply hydromulch over the entire seeded area at a rate of 2000 pounds per
acre. Hydromulching operation shall be conducted as described in Section 3.13
Hydroseeding.
2.7 HYDROSEEDING
A. Hydroseeding shall only be used in areas that are too steep for drill seeding.
B. Hydroseeding of the native seed mix may occur between September 15 to November 15. Fall
seeding is preferred. The actual seeding period must be approved by the Engineer or
Landscape Architect because weather conditions vary from year to year. No seed shall be
conducted until approved.
C. Hydromulch or slurry shall conform to the following:
1. Echofiber or Conwed or approved equal wood fiber mulch, applied at a rate of 2000
pounds per acre.
2. M-binder or Plantego tackifier, applied at a rate of 100 pounds per acre.
3. 16-16-8 slow release fertilizer, applied at a rate of 150 pounds per acre
4. Water at a rate of 4000 gallons per acre.
D. Hydromulch shall be applied using a hydro-seeding equipment manufactured by Finn or
Bowie or approved equal. Machines shall be equipped with heavy duty cast iron pumps and
agitators capable of thoroughly mixing the slurry.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 8
E. Spray of hydromulch shall begin immediately after the tank is full and the slurry components
are mixed.
F. Apply hydromulch in a downward drilling motion using a fam stream nozzle. It is important
to ensure that all of the components enter and mix with the topsoil.
G. Only qualified and trained personnel shall perform hydroseeding to insure the uniformity of
the hyroseeding application.
H. Tracer to allow for visual application and coverage verification.
2.8 EROSION CONTROL BLANKET
A. Erosion Control Blanket shall be AEC Premier Coconut or approved equivalent and placed on
slopes 3:1 or greater.
B. Erosion control blanket shall be keyed in at the top of the slope as per manufacturer
specifications.
C. Anchorage devices shall be 9-inch, two-legged staples furnished by the manufacturer, or
staples of the proper length as recommended by the manufacturer for specific soil conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. The landscape work shall not be performed at any time when it may be subject to damage by
climatic conditions.
B. The Contractor shall carefully scale or otherwise verify all dimensions in the Contract
Documents. Dimensions and plant locations shall be coordinated with Engineer or Landscape
Architect and final location shall be Site-oriented by the planter and Engineer or Landscape
Architect. Any discrepancies or inconsistencies shall be brought to the attention of the
Engineer.
C. In case of conflict between the Plant List totals and total plant count of the Contract
Documents, the Contractor shall provide the higher number of plants.
D. Delivery of materials may begin only after samples and tests have been approved by the
Engineer or Landscape Architect. Materials provided shall be not less quality than the
approved sample.
E. Substitutions for the indicated plant materials may be considered pursuant to the Contract
Documents.
F. The Contractor shall provide temporary fencing, barricades, covering, or other protections to
preserve existing landscaping items indicated to remain and to protect the adjacent
properties and other structures when they may be damaged by the landscape work.
G. Waste materials shall be removed and disposed of off the Site, unless otherwise indicated.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 9
H. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to obtain information regarding utilities in the
area of work and to prevent damage to the same. The Contractor shall protect the utilities as
necessary.
I. Burning of combustible materials on the Site shall not be permitted.
J. The Contractor shall protect structures, sidewalks, pavements, existing irrigation system, and
other facilities that are subject to damage during landscape work. Open excavations shall be
provided with barricades and warning lights which conform to the requirements of
governing authorities and the State's OSHA safety requirements from dusk to dawn each day
and when needed for safety.
K. Planting areas include all areas to be landscaped unless indicated otherwise.
3.2 SOIL PREPARATION
A. The landscape work shall not begin until all other trades have repaired all areas of settlement,
erosion, rutting, etc., and the soils have been re-established, recompacted, and refinished to
finish grades. The Engineer or Landscape Architect shall be notified of all areas that prevent
the landscape work from being executed.
B. Areas requiring grading by the landscaper including adjacent transition areas shall be
uniformly level or sloping between finish elevations to within 0.10-ft above or below required
finish elevations.
C. The landscape work shall not proceed until after walks, roads, vaults, trenching, and reservoir
construction is in place. Work under the Contract shall be completed to a point where the
landscape areas will not be disturbed. The subgrade shall be free of waste materials of all
kinds.
D. During grading, waste materials in the planting areas such as weeds, rocks 3 -inches and
larger, building materials, concrete rubble, wires, cans, glass, lumber, masonry, sticks, etc.,
shall be removed from the Site. All weeds shall be dug out by the roots.
E. Fertilizers, soil additives, seed, etc. subject to moisture damage shall be kept dry in a
weatherproof storage place.
F. After removal of waste materials, the planting and sod area subgrade shall be scarified and
pulverized to a depth of not less than 6 inches, and all surface irregularities below the cover
of topsoil shall be removed.
G. Finish grading shall consist of:
1. Final contouring of the planting areas.
2. Removal of 6 inches of hardpan material and placement of four inches of imported,
amended topsoil over all areas to be planted, deeded or sodded unless indicated
otherwise.
3. Placing all soil additives and fertilizers.
4. Tilling of planting areas.
5. After tilling, bringing areas to uniform grades by floating and/or hand raking.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DIS TRICT LANDSCAPE RESTORATION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 32 90 01 - 10
6. Making minor adjustment of finish grades as directed by the Engineer or Landscape
Architect.
7. Removing waste materials such as stones, roots, weeds or other undesirable foreign
material and raking, disking, dragging, and smoothing soil ready for planting.
8. Finished grades shall be one inch below the top of curbs, sills and walkways in all
areas for seed, one and a half inches for sod and three inches for areas with mulch or
groundcover.
9. Finished grades shall be smoothed to eliminate large puddling or standing water but
rough to keep seed in place.
H. Any unusual subsoil condition that will require special treatment shall be reported to the
Engineer or Landscape Architect.
I. Unless otherwise specified, seeding areas shall receive a minimum of 4 inches of
stockpiled topsoil.
J. Surface drainage shall be provided as indicated by shaping the surfaces to facilitate the
natural run-off of water. Low spots and pockets shall be filled with topsoil and graded to drain
properly.
K. Finish grade of all planting areas shall be 1-1/2 inches below finish grade of adjacent
pavement of any kind.
3.3 SEED MIX PROVIDED BELOW:
A. Application rate for hydroseeding: 25-30 lbs/acre.
B. Upland Mix:
Upland Grass Mix - for above bank line.
20% Wheatgrass
20% Slender Wheatgrass
20% Indian Ricegrass
10% Covar sheep fescue
10% Sandberg bluegrass
5% Fringed sagebrush
5% Douglas rabbitbrush
5% Lewis flax
5% Triticale
Riparian Grass Mix - for within bank line.
20% Basin Wildrye
20% Slender Wheatgrass
20% Blue Joint Reed Grass
10% Tufted Hairgrass
10% Metal Barley
END OF SECTION

DIVISION 33
UTILITIES

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (AWWA C900
AND C905, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 05 07 - 1
SECTION 33 05 07
POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (AWWA C900 AND C905, MODIFIED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide polyvinyl chloride (PVC) pressure pipe, complete in place, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards:
ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.5 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for
Water
ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5 Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Pipe
ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10 Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings 3-in Through 48-in for
Water and Other Liquids
ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11 Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and
Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C600 Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and Appurtenances
ANSI/AWWA C900 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 4-in Through 12-in for
Water Distribution
ANSI/AWWA C905 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pressure Pipe 14-in Through 48-in
for Water Distribution
ASTM D 2584 Test Method for Ignition Loss of Cured Reinforced Resins
PPI Technical Report TR 3/4 Policies and Procedures for Developing Recommended
Hydrostatic Design Stresses for Thermoplastic Pipe Materials
AWWA Manual M23 PVC Pipe - Design and Installation
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: The Contractor shall submit shop drawings of pipe, fittings, and
appurtenances in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 33 20 –Submittal
Procedures. Manufacturer’s literature for metallic locating tape.
1. Showing dimensions and details of pipe joint fittings, fitting specials, valves and
appurtenances.
2. Detailed layout, spool or fabrication drawings showing pipe spools, spacers, adapters,
connectors, fittings and pipe supports not indicated in the Contract Documents.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (AWWA C900
AND C905, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 05 07 - 2
3. Manufacturer’s product data and samples of all materials proposed for use on the
work.
B. Certifications: A certified affidavit of compliance for pipe and other products or materials
under this Section.
C. Test Reports:
1. Hydrostatic proof test reports.
2. Sustained pressure test reports.
3. Burst strength test reports.
D. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing and paying for sampling and testing as
necessary for the certifications.
E. Owner’s Manual
1. Manufacturer’s technical data and installation instructions.
2. Manufacturer’s certificates of compliance indicating that all materials provided under
this Section meet the requirements of the Contract Documents.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: Pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture.
B. During manufacture of the pipe, the Engineer shall be given access to all areas where
manufacturing is in process and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to
confirm compliance with the Specifications.
C. Tests: Materials used in manufacture of the pipe shall be tested in accordance with the
requirements of this Section and the referenced standards, as applicable.
D. The Contractor shall perform said material tests. The Engineer shall have the right to witness
testing; provided that the Contractor's schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the
Engineer.
E. In addition to those tests specifically required, the Engineer may request additional samples
of any material for testing by the Owner. The additional samples shall be furnished as a part
of the Work.
1.5 INSPECTION
A. All pipe may be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture in accordance with the
provisions of the referenced standards as supplemented by the requirements herein. The
Contractor shall notify the District in writing of the manufacturing starting date not less than
14 calendar days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture.
B. During the manufacture of the pipe, the District shall be given access to all areas where
manufacturing is in process and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to
confirm compliance with the Specifications.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (AWWA C900
AND C905, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 05 07 - 3
1.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Except as modified herein, pipe shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of this
Section and AWWA C900 or C905, as applicable.
1. The Contractor shall perform said material tests in accordance with the requirements
of the Contract Documents. The Owner shall have the right to witness all testing
conducted by the Contractor; provided, that the Contractor’s schedule will not be
delayed for the convenience of the Owner.
2. All expenses incurred in obtaining samples for testing shall be borne by the
Contractor at no increased cost to the Owner.
3. In addition to those tests specifically required, the Owner may request additional
samples of any material for testing by the Owner. The additional samples shall be
furnished at no additional cost to the Owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. PVC pressure pipe (4-inch through 12-inch) shall conform to the applicable requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C900 subject to additional requirements herein.
B. PVC pressure pipe (14-inch through 48-inch) shall conform to the applicable requirements
of ANSI/AWWA C905 subject to additional requirements herein.
C. Each piece of pipe and fitting shall be clearly labeled to identify its size, pressure class and
manufacture date.
2.2 PIPE DESIGN CRITERIA
A. General: PVC pressure pipe shall be designed in accordance with the requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C900 and ANSI/AWWA C905.
B. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) pipe shall have outside diameter dimensions conforming to cast
iron pipe and shall be the diameter and class indicated on the plans. The pipe shall meet the
pressure class requirements indicated on the drawings, and shall meet the requireme nts of
Table 2 of AWWA C900 or C905 as applicable.
C. PVC pipe shall be provided in standard 20 foot lengths, unless otherwise specified, detailed
or required on the approved plans. Shorter lengths, up to 10 feet, will be permitted when
authorized by the Engineer. Field cut lengths of pipe used as closures may not be shorter than
2 feet in length, and must be approved by the Engineer.
2.3 PIPE
A. The pipe shall be of the diameter and pressure class specified or shown, shall be furnished
complete with rubber gaskets, and all specials and fittings shall be provided as required in
the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise noted, diameters shown in the Contract
Documents shall refer to Cast-Iron Pipe Equivalent Outside Diameters (CIOD), conforming to
the requirements of AWWA C900 or C905 as appropriate.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (AWWA C900
AND C905, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 05 07 - 4
B. Additives and Fillers: Unless otherwise allowed in alternate qualification procedures of PPI-
TR3, compounds which have a Hydrostatic Design Basis (HDB) of 4000 psi at 73.4 degrees F
and for water shall not contain additives and fillers that exceed the recommended values in
Table 1, Part Y of PPI-TR3 (e.g., allowable content range for calcium carbonate is 0.0-5.0 parts
per hundred of resin). If requested by the Engineer, the additive and filler content shall be
determined using the pyrolysis method as specified in ASTM D 2584.
C. Color: Pipe for use in potable or culinary water systems, or directly attached to potable or
culinary water systems shall be white or blue. Pipe used in irrigation, reuse, utility water or
any other non-potable use shall be purple.
D. Joints: Except where specifically noted or where designated as “fusible PVC,” joints for buried
PVC pipe shall be either an integral bell manufactured on the pipe or a separate coupling both
employing a rubber ring joint. The bell and coupling shall be the same thickness as of the pipe
barrel, or greater thickness. The sealing ring groove in the coupling shall be of the same
design as the groove in cast iron fittings and valves available from local water works supply
distributors. No restrained joint PVC pipe will be allowed. When the spigot end of pipe is to
be inserted into a mechanical joint fitting, the beveled end of the pipe shall be removed prior
to insertion. Solvent weld joints are not permitted.
E. Joint shall be sealed with an elastomeric gasket meeting the requirements of ASTM F 477 and
ASTM D3139. Gaskets and lubricants shall be made from materials that are compatible with
the plastic material and with each other when used together. They shall not support the
growth of bacteria and shall not adversely affect the potable qualities of the water that is to
be transported. One elastomeric gasket shall be furnished with each length of bell-end pipe.
F. Joint Deflection: Deflection at the joint shall not exceed 1.5 degrees or the maximum
deflection recommended by the manufacturer. No deflection of the joint shall be allowed for
joints which are over-belled or not belled to the stop mark.
2.4 FITTINGS
A. Fittings shall be ductile iron fittings meeting the requirements of Section 02565 – Ductile Iron
Pipe and of AWWA C110 and/or AWWA C153. Fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene
encasement per AWWA C-105 and all hardware shall be coated with a non-oxide grease.
B. Where fabricated PVC fittings are specifically required:
1. Fittings (4-inch through 12-inch) shall conform to the applicable requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C900 subject to additional requirements herein.
2. Fittings (14-inch through 48-inch) shall conform to the applicable requirements of
ANSI/AWWA C905 subject to additional requirements herein. All fabricated PVC
fittings 14-inch and larger shall include fiberglass reinforcement permanently
bonded to the outside surfaces of the fitting.
C. All ductile iron fittings shall be lined in accordance with Section 02565 – Ductile Iron Pipe.
Fittings shall be cement-mortar lined ductile, coated with a bituminous material and shall
conform to the requirements of AWWA Standard C110 and C111 with a minimum rated
working pressure of 250 psi. The cement lining shall conform to the requirements of AWWA
Standard C104

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (AWWA C900
AND C905, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 05 07 - 5
D. Each fitting shall be clearly labeled to identify its size and pressure class.
E. All fittings and valves shall be restrained against thrust forces by concrete thrust blocks
furnished and installed as indicated in the Drawings.
2.5 TRACER WIRE
A. Tracer wire shall be N0. 12 AWG copper wire, PVC jacketed for underground services.
2.6 SERVICE SADDLES
A. Bronze bodied saddles with double bronze straps or full circle body clamp double bolted to
each side of the saddle shall be used on pipe sizes 4 inch through 12 inch. The saddle body
shall be manufactured from cast bronze in accordance with ASTM B62 or B584 and AWWA
C800. The single strap shall have double bolts on each end of the strap to connect it to the
bronze saddle. The ears of the strap shall turn inward and rest against the inside of the strap.
The gasket shall be Buna N. The saddle shall be threaded with 1 inch or 2 inch iron pipe
threads.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Laying, jointing, testing for defects and for leakage shall be performed in the presence of the
Engineer, and shall be subject to approval before acceptance. Material found to have defects
will be rejected and the Contractor shall promptly remove such defective materials from the
Site.
B. Installation shall conform to the requirements of AWWA M23, instructions furnished by the
pipe manufacturer, and to the supplementary requirements herein. Wherever the provisions
of this Section and the aforementioned requirements are in conflict, the more stringent
provision shall apply.
C. The Contractor shall install all the pipe closure sections, fittings, valves and appurtenances
shown on the approved plans, including bolts, nuts, gaskets and joining materials.
D. The Contractor shall excavate sufficiently in advance of pipe laying operations to enable the
alignment and profile to be revised to clear existing utilities and to align with existing
connection points.
E. PVC pipe which has been gouged shall not be used. PVC pipe which has received minor
scratches during handling may be used solely at the discretion of the Engineer.
F. The Contractor shall maintain the interior of the pipe clean, sanitary and free from foreign
materials. At all times when the work of installing pipe is not in progress, all openings into
the pipe and the ends of the pipe in the trenches shall be kept tightly closed to prevent the
entrance of animals and foreign materials. To prevent unwanted water intrusion, open ends
of pipe shall be closed temporarily with a watertight bulkhead.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (AWWA C900
AND C905, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 05 07 - 6
G. Do not install any pipe contaminated with a petroleum product (inside or outside).
H. Do not install any pipe that shows evidence of exposure to sunlight, age, surface deterioration,
or other physical damage. The decision of the Engineer shall be final as to the acceptability of
the pipe to be installed.
3.2 HANDLING AND STORAGE
A. Handling: Pipe, fittings and accessories shall be carefully inspected before and after
installation and those found defective shall be rejected. Pipe and fittings shall be free from
fins and burrs. Before being placed in position, pipe, fittings, and accessories shall be cleaned,
and shall be maintained in a clean condition. Proper facilities shall be provided for lowering
sections of pipe into trenches. Under no circumstances shall pipe, fittings or any other
material be dropped or dumped into trenches. The pipe shall be hoisted with mechanical
equipment using a cloth belt sling or a continuous fiber rope which avoids scratching the pipe.
A chain is not permitted. Pipes up to 6 inches in diameter can be lifted by hand.
B. Storage: Pipe should be stored, if possible, at the Site in unit packages provided by the
manufacturer. Caution should be exercised to avoid compression damage or deformation to
bell ends of the pipe. Pipe shall be supported uniformly while being stored in such a way as
to prevent sagging or bending and be protected from exposure to direct sunlight by covering
with an opaque material while permitting adequate air circulation above and around the pipe.
Gaskets should be stored in a cool, dark place out of the direct rays of the sun, preferably in
original cartons.
3.3 TRENCHING AND BACKFILL
A. Trench excavation and backfill shall conform to the requirements of Section 31 23 00 –
Earthwork. Care shall be taken to ensure that pipe zone material is compacted and in full
contact with the haunches of the pipe and that the pipe is fully supported.
3.4 INSTALLATION
A. Bell-and-spigot pipe shall be laid with the bell end pointing in the direction of laying. Pipe
shall be graded in straight lines, taking care to avoid the formation of any dips or low points.
Pipe shall not be laid when the conditions of trench or weather are unsuitable. At the end of
each day’s work, open ends of pipe shall be closed temporarily with wood blocks or
bulkheads.
B. Pipe shall be supported at its proper elevation and grade, care being taken to secure firm and
uniform support. Wood support blocking will not be permitted. The full length of each section
of pipe and fittings shall rest solidly on the pipe bed, with recessed excavation to
accommodate bells, joints, and couplings. Anchors and supports shall be provided where
indicated and where necessary for fastening work into place. Fittings shall be independently
supported.
C. Short lengths of pipe shall be used in and out of each rigid joint or rigid structure. Piping that
does not allow sufficient space for proper installation of jointing material shall be replaced

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (AWWA C900
AND C905, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 05 07 - 7
by one of proper dimensions. Blocking or wedging between bells and spigots will not be
permitted.
D. Joints shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. Trenches shall be
kept free of water until joints have been properly made. The maximum combined deflection
at any coupling shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Pipe shall be cut by means of saws, power driven abrasive wheels, or pipe cutters, which will
produce a square cut. No wedge-type roller cutters will be permitted. After cutting, the end
of the pipe shall be beveled using a beveling tool, portable type sander, or abrasive disc.
F. Pipe end shall be secure at all times and care shall be taken to prevent any foreign object, dirt,
rocks, debris, rubbish, tools, etc from entering the pipe. Pipe end shall be capped at the end
of each days laying operations. Provided required minimum separation from adjacent
utilities are satisfied.
G. Install PVC pipe such that the indelible identification strip markings on each pipe section are
continuously aligned for the total length of the pipeline being installed. Orient the strip
marking upward to the 12 o’clock position (top) of the trench opening.
H. Assemble the pipe joint using the lubricant supplied by the manufacturer. Ensure lubricant
is NSF certified for use in potable water systems. Insert the spigot end into the bell or
coupling to the proper insertion mark. Check that the elastomeric ring has not left the groove
during assembly by passing a feeler gauge around the completed joint.
I. Tapping saddles shall be installed a minimum of 5 feet from the edge of the saddle to any pipe
joint or other saddle. Multiple taps of 6 inches or larger shall not be made in the same length
of pipe without the approval of the Engineer.
3.5 INSTALLATION OF METALLIC LOCATING TAPE
A. Polyvinyl chloride pipelines shall be provided with a metallic locating tape laid along the
centerline of the pipe trench at a depth of 18 inches below finished grade OR above top of
pipe. The Contractor shall furnish manufacturer's literature, completely describing the tape
proposed to be furnished. No tape shall be used prior to receipt of written approval of the
Engineer.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF LOCATOR WIRE
A. Polyvinyl chloride pipelines shall be provided with locator wire secured to the pipe with
surface connections provided at all valve boxes and hydrants and as required to maintain a
maximum distance between connections of no greater than 500 feet. Tracer wire shall be laid
along the top of the pipe and held in place with ties or hitches. The ties or hitches shall be
spaced not more than 10 feet apart. The copper wire is to be used in the future as a means of
locating the pipe with an electronic-type pipe locator.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE (AWWA C900
AND C905, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 05 07 - 8
3.7 FIELD TESTING AND DISINFECTION
A. Field testing shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 13 00 – Water Pipeline Testing
and Disinfection as applicable.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 1
SECTION 33 11 11
STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide mortar-lined steel pipe coated as specified herein, complete, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards: The following standards are listed for convenience only. All specified
standards, whether listed or not, shall apply to the Work.
ANSI/ASTM A 20 General Requirements for Steel Plates for Pressure Vessels
ASTM E 165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination
ASTM A 370 Test Methods and Definitions for Mechanical Testing of Steel
Products
ASTM A 516 Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate- and
Lower-Temperature Service
ANSI/AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe 6 In and Larger
ANSI/AWWA C205 Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating for Steel Water
Pipe - 4 In and Larger - Shop Applied
ANSI/AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
ANSI/AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service 4 in to 144 in
ANSI/AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C209 Cold Applied Tape Coatings for the Exterior of Special
Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel Water Pipelines
ANSI/AWWA C214 Tape Coating Systems for the Exterior of the Steel Water
Pipelines
ANSI/AWWA C215 Extruded Polyolefin Coatings for the Exterior of Steel Water
Pipelines
ANSI/AWWA C216 Heat-Shrinkable Cross-Linked Polyolefin Coatings for the
Exterior of Special Sections, Connections, and Fittings for Steel
Water Pipelines

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 2
ANSI/AWWA C218 Coating the Exterior of Above Ground Steel Water Pipelines
and Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C222 Polyurethane Coatings for the Interior and Exterior of Steel
Water Pipe and Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C602 Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines 4-In (100 mm) and
Larger - In Place
ANSI/ASTM A 36 Carbon Structural Steel
ANSI/ASTM A 283 Low and Intermediate Tensile Strength Carbon Steel Plates
ASTM A 570 Steel Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled Structural Quality
ASTM A 572 High-Strength Low-Alloy Columbium-Vanadium Structural
Steel
ASTM C 150 Portland Cement
ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code – Steel
API Standard 1104 Welding Pipelines and Related Structures
AWWA M-11 Steel Water Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of pipe and fittings in accordance with the
requirements in Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures, and the following supplemental
requirements as applicable. Fittings and specials shall conform to Section 33 11 12 - Steel
Pipe Fabricated Specials. Contractor's submittals for steel pipe and specials shall be
coordinated between the sections.
B. Fabrication Information
a. Pipe/fitting wall construction details which indicate the type and thickness of
cylinder; the position, type, size, and area of reinforcement; manufacturing
tolerances; maximum angular joint deflection limitations; and all other
pertinent information required for the manufacture and installation of the
product.
b. Welded joint details shall be submitted for all joint types, including beveled
ends for alignment conformance and deep bell or butt strap joints required
for control of temperature stresses.
c. Rubber gasket joint design and details complete with dimensions, tolerances,
and performance or test data.
d. Pipe Fabricator's Credentials: Submit the credentials of the pipe
manufacturer/fabricator. Credentials shall include reference names,
telephone numbers, and descriptions of projects for pipe conforming to
AWWA C200 that is of similar diameter, length, and wall thickness to the pipe

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 3
in this project. Project description shall include length, diameter, wall
thickness, steel metallurgy, location of facility where pipe was
manufactured/fabricated, and names of key plant personnel responsible for
the manufacturing process. Submit names and qualifications of current plant
personnel to be responsible for manufacture of the pipe in this project.
e. Manufacturer's Written Quality Assurance/Control Program.
2. Materials: Material lists and steel reinforcement schedules which include and
describe all materials to be utilized. Metallurgical test reports for steel proposed for
use on the project. Submit chemical and physical test reports from each heat of steel
that indicate the steel conforms to the Project Specifications.
3. Line Layout Information
a. Line layout and marking diagrams compatible with the requirements of
AWWA Manual 11 (M-11) and which indicate the specific mark number of
each pipe and fitting and the location of each pipe and the direction of each
fitting in the completed line. In addition, the line layouts shall include: the
pipe station and centerline elevation at all changes in grade or horizontal
alignment; the station and centerline elevation to which the bell end of each
pipe will be laid; all elements of curves and bends, both in horizontal and
vertical alignment. The location of all mitered pipe sections, beveled ends for
alignment conformance, and deep bell or butt strap joints for temperature
stress control shall be clearly indicated on the diagrams.
b. Dimensional drawings of all valves, fittings, and appurtenances as specified in
Section 40 05 00 – Piping, General.
c. Drawings showing the location and details of bulkheads for hydrostatic
testing of the pipeline, and details for removal of test bulkheads and repair of
the lining.
d. Details and locations of closures for length adjustment, temporary access
manways, vents, and weld lead pass holes as indicated and as required for
construction convenience.
4. Welding Information
a. Information regarding location, type, size, and extent of all welds with
reference called out for Welding Procedure Specifications (WPS) numbers
shall be shown on the shop drawings. The shop drawings shall distinguish
between shop and field welds. Shop drawings shall indicate by welding
symbols or sketches the details of the welded joints, and the preparation of
parent metal required to make them.
b. Written welding procedures for shop and field welds, including Welding
Procedure Specifications (WPS's) and Procedure Qualification Records
(PQR's).
c. Written nondestructive testing procedure specifications, and nondestructive
testing personnel qualifications for shop and field welds.
d. Current welder performance qualifications (WPQ's) shall be submitted for
each welder used prior to its performing any Work either in the shop or field.
Qualification testing shall be as specified in Article 1.4 - Quality Assurance,
Paragraph F, in this Section.
e. Submit the credentials of the Contractor's certified welding inspectors
(CWI's) and quality control specialist for review prior to starting any welding
in the shop or field. The credentials shall include, but not be limited to,
American Welding Society QC-1 Certification.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 4
f. Submit all nondestructive testing (NDT) data for each shop-welded and field-
welded joint. This data shall include all testing on each weld joint, including
re-examination of repaired welds, using radiographic, magnetic particle, dye
penetrant examination, ultrasonic, or air test examination methods specified.
Test data shall be reviewed and signed by the welding inspector(s).
g. Submit a welder log for field and shop welding. Log shall list all welders to be
used for the Work and the types of welds each welder is qualified to perform.
h. Submit a welding map showing the sequence of welds for all field welds.
i. Submit a written weld repair procedure for each type of shop and field weld
proposed for use on the Project.
j. Submit a written rod control procedure for shop and field operations
demonstrating how the Contractor intends to maintain rods in good condition
throughout the Work. The rod control procedure shall also demonstrate how
the Contractor intends to ensure that the proper rods are used for each weld.
5. Handling and Support Information: Detail drawings indicating the type, number and
other pertinent details of the slings, strutting and other methods proposed for pipe
support and handling during manufacturing, transport, and installation. Calculations
supporting the handling and support system design shall be submitted. Drawings and
calculations shall be sealed by a registered professional engineer.
6. Control of Temperature Stresses
a. Submit proposed sequencing of events to control temperature stresses in the
pipe wall during installation prior to starting of any field welding.
b. Submit the proposed sequencing of events or special techniques to minimize
distortion of the steel as may result from shop welding procedures.
c. Submit plan for monitoring pipeline temperatures.
7. Field Lining
a. Submit field lining contractor’s credentials.
b. Submit a description of lining equipment and personnel to be used.
c. Submit written procedures for pipe surface preparation, lining application,
and curing.
d. Submit cement mortar mix design.
C. Certifications: Furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and other products,
materials, or related work provided under this Section, as specified in ANSI/AWWA C200,
C205, C602, and C206, respectively, and the following supplemental requirements:
1. Compliance with the additional requirements included in these Contract Documents.
2. Physical and chemical properties of all steel.
3. Hydrostatic test reports.
4. Results of production weld tests.
5. Sand, cement, and mortar tests.
6. Rubber gasket tests.
7. All materials are NSF approved for use with potable water where applicable.
8. Pipe temperature complies with Specifications prior to pouring pipe zone material,
during and between periods of CLSM placement, and prior to and during welding
temperature control joints (including supporting data).
9. All welds were performed in conformance with these documents.
D. All expenses incurred in making samples or collecting data for certification of tests shall be
borne by the Contractor at no increased cost to the Owner.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 5
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: All pipe, linings, welds, coatings, and related work shall be subject to inspection
at the place of manufacture and/or the place the Work is performed in accordance with the
provisions of ANSI/AWWA C200, C205, C206, C602, C209, C214, C215, and C222 as
applicable, as supplemented by the requirements herein. Notify the Engineer in writing not
less than 14 calendar days prior to the start of any phase of the pipe manufacture, welding,
lining, coating, testing, or field operations.
B. Tests: Except as modified herein, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe shall be
tested in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C200, C205, C206, and C602, as
applicable.
1. After the joint configuration is completed and prior to lining with cement-mortar, if
applicable, each length of pipe of each diameter and pressure class shall be shop-
tested and certified to a pressure of at least 75 percent of the minimum yield strength
of the pipe steel. Test pressure shall be maintained for a sufficient time to observe
the weld seams. There shall be no leaks. Any leaks shall be repaired and the pipe
retested.
2. Production weld tests as required in ANSI/AWWA C200, except weld tests shall be
conducted on each 5,000 feet of production welds at a minimum, and at least one set
of tests per operator per work shift shall be performed.
C. Perform said material tests at no additional cost to the Owner. The Engineer shall have the
right to witness all testing conducted by the Contractor; provided, that the Contractor's
schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the Engineer.
D. In addition to those tests specifically required, the Engineer may request additional samples
of any material including mixed concrete and lining and coating samples for testing by the
Owner. The additional samples shall be furnished at no additional cost to the Owner.
E. Welding Procedure Specifications: All welding procedures used to fabricate and install pipe
shall be in accordance with the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code (BPVC) for shop welds
and ANSI/AWS D1.1 for field welds. Written welding procedures shall be required for all
welds, both shop and field. Welds qualified per the ASME BPVC shall include Supplementary
Essential Variables for notch-tough welding. All provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 pertaining to
notch-tough welding shall apply.
F. Welder Performance Qualifications: All welding shall be done by skilled welders, welding
operators, and tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to
be used. Welders shall be qualified by the Contractor under the provisions of ASME BPVC for
shop welds and ANSI/AWS D1.1 for field welds. Furnish all material and bear the expense of
qualifying welders.
G. Shop Nondestructive Testing: Nondestructive testing shall be performed for various weld
categories as specified below. Testing shall include submitting written documentation of
procedures per Section V, and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with Section VIII of
the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
1. Butt Joint Welds: Spot radiographically examine pipe in accordance with
Paragraph UW-52 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII,

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 6
Division 1. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the butt joint welds cannot readily be
radiographed, they shall be 100 percent ultrasonically examined.
2. Fillet Welds: 100 percent examine all fillet welds using the magnetic particle
inspection method.
3. Groove Welds: 100 percent ultrasonically examine all groove welds that cannot be
readily radiographically spot examined.
4. All Welds: Certified welding inspector shall 100 percent visually examine all welds as
a minimum.
5. In addition to weld tests hereinbefore specified, doubler pads shall be air tested as
stated in AWWA C206.
6. Refer to Section 33 13 00 – Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection for field
nondestructive testing.
H. Onsite Observation: The pipe fabricator shall provide an experienced staff member to train
the contractor’s installation crews regarding pipe handling, jointing, and backfilling. Training
shall be provided for a minimum of two weeks at the beginning of the project, and as needed
during construction. The staff member's duties shall include, but not be limited to, the
following:
1. Observe the installation and welding of the pipe and fittings.
2. Report any concerns to the Engineer's onsite observer.
3. Answer questions and provide assistance to the Engineer and the Contractor.
I. Certified Welding Inspector (CWI): Furnish the services of a certified welding inspector(s) for
all shop and field welding as specified in AWWA C200 and C206. The certified welding
inspector(s) shall 100 percent visually inspect all welds, verify proper procedures are being
followed using qualified welders, supervise Contractor's non-destructive testing, and witness
Engineer's non-destructive testing. The welding inspector(s) shall submit written
certification that all welds were performed in conformance with these documents. All shop
weld tests shall be reviewed and signed by the inspector(s).
J. Pipe Manufacturer/Fabricator: The manufacturer or fabricator of the pipe shall be
experienced in fabricating pipe of similar diameters and wall thicknesses required for this
Work and shall have the manufacturing capability to meet the schedule requirements of this
project. Experience shall include successful fabrication to AWWA C200 standards of at least
5,000 linear feet of 24-inch and larger pipe with wall thicknesses 0.375- inch or larger within
the 5-year period preceding the bid date. This experience requirement shall apply to the
fabrication plant facility and responsible personnel, not to the firm which owns the facility or
employs the personnel.
K. Single Manufacturer: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of
design, fabrication, testing, and furnishing of mainline pipe and fabricated specials. Separate
suppliers for mainline pipe and specials will not be allowed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated, steel pipe, linings and coatings shall conform to
ANSI/AWWA C200, C205, C602, C209, C214, C215, C216, and C222, as applicable, subject to

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 7
the following supplemental requirements. The pipe shall be of the diameter and wall
thickness shown, shall be furnished complete with welded or gasket joints, as indicated in the
Contract Documents, and all specials shall be provided as required in Section 33 11 12 - Steel
Pipe Fabricated Specials. For pipe larger than 24 inches in diameter, the inside diameter after
lining shall not be less than the nominal diameter indicated unless otherwise shown. Pipe
24 inches in diameter and smaller may be provided in standard outside diameters.
B. Markings: Legibly mark all pipes and specials in accordance with the laying schedule and
marking diagram. Each pipe shall be numbered in sequence and said number shall appear on
the laying schedule and marking diagram in its proper location for installation. All special
pipe sections and fittings shall be marked at each end with top field centerline. The word
"top" shall be painted or marked on the outside top spigot of each pipe section.
C. Handling and Storage: The pipe shall be handled by use of wide slings, padded cradles, or
other devices, designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe coating/exterior. The
use of chains, hooks, or other equipment which might injure the pipe coating/exterior will
not be permitted. Stockpiled pipe shall be suitably supported and shall be secured to prevent
accidental rolling and to avoid contact with mud, water, or other deleterious materials.
Stockpiled pipe shall be supported on sand or earth berms free of rock exceeding 1 inch in
diameter. The ends of all pipe shall be securely bulkheaded or otherwise sealed during
transport to the jobsite. All pipe handling equipment and methods shall be acceptable to the
Engineer.
D. Pay the cost of replacement or repair of pipe which is damaged at no increased cost to the
Owner.
E. Strutting: Adequate strutting (stulling) shall be provided on all specials, fittings, and straight
pipe so as to avoid damage or distortion to the pipe and fittings during handling, storage,
hauling, and installation. The following requirements shall apply:
1. The strutting shall be placed as soon as practicable after the pipe is fabricated or the
mortar lining has been applied and shall remain in place while the pipe is loaded,
transported, unloaded, installed and backfilled at the jobsite.
2. The strutting materials, size and spacing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor
and shall be adequate to prevent deflection and support the earth backfill plus any
greater loads which may be imposed by the backfilling and compaction equipment.
One strut shall be placed vertical oriented with the top of pipe. One set of struts shall
be set 2 feet from each end of each pipe section and at a maximum interval of 15 feet
in-between
3. Any pipe damaged during handling, hauling, storage, or installation due to improper
strutting shall be repaired or replaced.
F. Laying Lengths: Maximum pipe laying lengths shall not be limited unless specifically
required by the Drawings. Contractor shall select lengths to accommodate the Contractor's
operation.
G. Lining: The pipe lining shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and shall be free from
fractures, excessive interior surface crazing and roughness.
H. Cathodic Protection System: Cathodic protection systems shall be applied to pipelines as
shown on the Drawings. Refer to Section 13 47 13 - Cathodic Protection System.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 8
I. Closures and Correction Pieces: Closures and correction pieces shall be provided as required
so that closures may be made due to different headings in the pipe laying operation and so
that correction may be made to adjust the pipe laying to conform to pipe stationing indicated.
The locations of correction pieces and closure assemblies shall be shown on the pipe layout
diagrams and shall be subject to the Engineer's review. Any change in location or number of
said items shall be approved by the Engineer.
J. Shop-Welded Surfaces: All weld seams on pipe surfaces that will have a flexible tape or
polyolefin coating in accordance with Section 09 90 00 – Protective Coatings and Linings shall
be ground such that the maximum weld bead height will not exceed 1/32 inch. All ground
weld seams shall be smooth and free of all burrs. Do not grind into, or gouge, the adjacent
pipe wall material.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Cement: Cement for mortar shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C205;
provided, that cement for mortar coating shall be Type V, and mortar lining shall be Type II
or V, per ASTM C 150. Fly ash or pozzolan shall not be used as a cement replacement.
B. Steel: Provide steel coils for spiral welded steel pipe or steel plate for straight seam welded
steel pipe per AWWA C200 and as follows:
1. Yield Strength: 36,000 psi minimum. Measured yield strength shall not exceed 85%
of measured tensile strength.
2. Minimum Tensile Strength: 60,000 psi
3. Coils: Steel coils shall be made from the continuous cast process or continuous cast
slabs, fully killed, fine-grain practice conforming to the physical and chemical
characteristics of ASTM A1018/A1018M, SS Grade 36. For sheet steel, the maximum
allowable thickness variation shall be 0.010 inch under or over the nominal thickness.
4. Plate: Steel plate shall be fully killed, conform to ASTM A20, and be manufactured to
fine-grain practice conforming to the physical and chemical characteristics of ASTM
A572/A572M, Grade 50. For plate steel, the maximum allowable thickness variation
shall be 0.010 inch under or over the nominal thickness.
C. Pipe shall be manufactured as fabricated pipe per AWWA C200 as modified herein. ASTM
pipe manufacturing standards referenced in AWWA C200 shall not be used. Pipe sections
shall be fabricated by either of the following methods:
1. Pipe sections may be spirally welded or fabricated from short cylindrical courses
joined circumferentially by complete penetration butt joint welds with not more than
two longitudinal seams per course. Longitudinal seams shall be staggered on both
sides of the pipe.
2. Pipe sections may be rolled or pressed from no more than three sheets the full length
of the pipe and welded with no more than three longitudinal seams. Patching inserts,
overlays, or pounding out of dents will not be permitted. Repair of notches or
laminations on second ends will not be permitted. Damaged ends shall be removed
as a cylinder and the section end properly prepared. Distorted or flattened lengths
shall be rejected. A buckled section shall be replaced as a cylinder.
D. Charpy Tests

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 9
1. General. Steel used in production manufacturing of pipe and specials shall be tested
for notch toughness using Charpy V-Notch tests per ASTM A 370. The test acceptance
shall be 25 foot-pounds at a test temperature of 30 degrees F.
2. Charpy V-Notch tests shall be conducted on all steel used in fabricating pipe and
reinforcement materials 0.5-inch or greater in thickness. Test outside diameter wrap
of two coils minimum per heat lot.
3. The Owner may elect to increase the Charpy testing to include more steel than
indicated above at a negotiated price.
2.3 SPECIALS AND FITTINGS
A. Unless otherwise required, all specials and fittings shall be in accordance with Section 33 11
12 - Steel Pipe Fabricated Specials and shall conform to the dimensions of ANSI/AWWA C208.
2.4 DESIGN OF PIPE
A. General: The pipe shall be steel pipe, mortar-lined and flexible or mortar-coated as shown
on the Drawings, with field welded joints or gasket as indicated. The pipe shall consist of a
steel cylinder, lined with portland cement-mortar as indicated, with an exterior coating as
indicated in Section 09 90 10 – Pipeline Coatings and Linings. Field lining will only be allowed
where specifically indicated on the Drawings.
B. The pipe shall be manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked according to applicable
requirements previously stated and except as hereinafter modified, shall conform to
ANSI/AWWA C200.
C. Pipe Dimensions: The pipe shall be of the diameter and wall thickness shown on the
Drawings. The minimum steel cylinder thickness for each pipe size shall be as indicated.
D. Specials Dimensions: The specials shall be of the diameter and wall thickness indicated on
the Drawings, or as specified in Section 33 11 12 - Steel Pipe Fabricated Specials.
E. Joint Design: Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the standard field joint for steel pipe
shall be single-welded (fully circumferential) lap joint. Mechanically coupled, or flanged
joints shall be required where indicated on the Drawings. Butt-strap joints shall be used only
where required for closures or where indicated. The joints furnished shall have the same or
higher pressure rating as the abutting pipe. Provide air test tapped holes for each double
welded lap joint as defined in Section 33 13 00 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.
F. Lap joints prepared for field welding shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C200. The
method used to form, shape and size bell ends shall be such that the physical properties of
the steel are not substantially altered. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer, bell ends
shall be formed by an expanding press or by the pipe being moved axially over a die in such
a manner as to stretch the steel plate beyond its elastic limit to form a truly round bell of
suitable diameter and shape. The ends shall not be rolled. Faying surfaces of the bell and
spigot shall be essentially parallel, but in no case shall the bell slope vary more than 2 degrees
from the longitudinal axis of the pipe.
G. Moderate deflections and long radius curves may be made by means of beveled joint rings,
by pulling standard joints, by using short lengths of pipe, or a combination of these methods;

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 10
provided that pulled joints shall not be used in combination with bevels and maximum joint
deflections are not exceeded. The maximum total allowable angle for beveled joints shall be
5 degrees per pipe joint. Bevels shall be provided on the bell ends. Mitering of the spigot
ends will not be permitted. The maximum allowable angle for pulled joints shall be 75
percent of the manufacturer’s recommendations or the angle which results from a ¾-inch
pull out from normal joint closure, whichever is less. In no case shall pulled joints result in a
gap between the bell and spigot at the weld location that exceeds 1/8 inch. All horizontal
deflections or fabricated angles shall fall on the alignment, as shown.
H. All vertical deflections shall fall on the alignment within laying tolerance as described in
Section 3.1.
I. Shop-applied interior linings and exterior coatings shall be held back from the ends of the
pipe as indicated or as otherwise acceptable to the Engineer. Holdback areas shall be coated
as hereinafter specified.
J. Temperature Control Lap Joint: A special longer bell end (temperature control lap joint) shall
be provided at a maximum spacing of 400 feet to account for movement of the installed pipe
due to temperature changes. The pipe manufacturer shall determine the length required for
the longer bell as defined by the Contractor's pipe laying procedures and the location of the
special bell. Minimum temperature control lap joint length shall be as shown on the
Drawings.
K. Joint Shop Coating: All holdback areas for welded joints, all butt straps, and all bell and spigot
joint rings for rubber-gasketed joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and given a shop coat of
rust-inhibitive primer. The surface preparation and primer shall be compatible with the
intended finish coating as specified in Section 09 90 00 – Protective Coatings and Linings,
01 – Protective Coatings, Section 09 10 10– Pipeline Coatings and Linings, as applicable.
L. The pipe ends shall be match marked after shop assembly.
2.5 CEMENT-MORTAR LINING
A. Cement-Mortar Lining for Shop Application: Where indicated on the Drawings, interior
surfaces of all steel pipe, fittings, and specials shall be cleaned and lined in the shop with
cement-mortar lining applied centrifugally in conformity with ANSI/AWWA C205. During
the lining operation and thereafter, the pipe shall be maintained in a round condition by
suitable bracing or strutting. The lining machines shall be of a type that has been used
successfully for similar work and shall be approved by the Engineer. Every precaution shall
be taken to prevent damage to the lining. If lining is damaged or found faulty at the delivery
site, or after installation, the damaged or unsatisfactory portions shall be replaced with lining
conforming to these Specifications at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The minimum lining thickness shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 10 Pipeline Coatings
and Lining.
C. The pipe shall be left bare where field joints occur as indicated. Ends of the linings shall be
left square and uniform. Feathered or uneven edges will not be permitted.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 11
D. Defective linings, as determined by the Engineer, shall be removed from the pipe wall and
shall be replaced to the full thickness required. Defective linings shall be cut back to a square
shoulder in order to avoid feather edged joints. Temperature and shrinkage cracks in the
mortar less than 1/16 inch wide need not be repaired. Pipe, specials, or fittings with cracks
wider than 1/16 inch shall be rejected or repaired per C205 at the discretion of the Engineer.
E. The progress of the application of mortar lining shall be regulated in order that all hand work,
including the repair of defective areas is cured in accordance with the provisions of
ANSI/AWWA C205. Cement-mortar for patching shall be the same materials as the mortar
for shop or machine lining, except that a finer grading of sand and mortar richer in cement
shall be used when field inspection indicates that such mix will improve the finished lining of
the pipe.
F. Cement-Mortar Lining: Unless otherwise indicated, all steel pipe shall be mortar-lined. The
materials and design of in-place cement-mortar lining shall be in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C602 and the following supplementary requirements:
1. Pozzolanic material shall not be used in the mortar mix.
2. Admixtures shall contain no calcium chloride.
3. The minimum lining thickness shall be as indicated for shop -applied cement-mortar
lining and finished inside diameter after lining shall be as indicated.
4. Temperature and shrinkage cracks in the mortar less than 1/16 inch wide need not
be repaired. Pipe, specials, or fittings with mortar cracks wider than 1/16 inch shall
be rejected or repaired at the discretion of the Engineer.
5. Field applied mortar lining shall meet the requirements of this Subparagraph F.
6. Grout mixture for field applied joint lining shall include two parts sand to one part
Type II Portland Cement by volume and potable water. NSF approved acrylic latex
admixture (Flex-Con, or equal) shall be added to mortar as needed to make dough like
consistency for hand packing into joint area.
G. Protection of Pipe Lining/Interior: For all pipe and fittings with plant-applied cement-mortar
linings, provide a polyethylene or other suitable bulkhead on the ends of the pipe and on all
special openings to prevent drying out of the lining. All bulkheads shall be substantial enough
to remain intact during shipping and storage until the pipe is installed.
2.6 EXTERIOR COATING OF PIPE
A. Exterior Coating of Steel Pipe: The exterior coating of all steel pipe shall be in accordance
with Section 09 90 00 – Protective Coatings & Linings and 09 9 10– Pipeline Coatings and
Linings.
B. Pipe appurtenances shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 05 00 - Piping,
General.
2.7 PIPELINE MARKING TAPE

A. Plastic tape: Terra Tape Extra Stretch manufactured by Reef Industries, Inc., 9209 Alemeda
Genoa Road, Houston, TX 77075, www.reefindustries.com; or equal, having the following
essential characteristics:
a. Polyolefin or similar chemically inert material unsusceptible to alkalies, acids,
and chemicals and solvents likely in the soil.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 12
b. Thickness: 8.0 mil, minimum.
c. Width: 12 inches minimum.
d. Color: Blue
e. Imprinted on one side, 1-inch-tall, permanent black lettering on a colored
background.
f. Tape shall read for example “WATER”.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPE
A. Handling and Storage: All pipe, fittings, and specials shall be carefully handled and protected
against damage to lining and coating/interior and exterior surfaces, impact shocks, and free
fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe shall not be placed
directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a manner which will protect the pipe
against injury whenever stored at the trench site or elsewhere. Pipe shall be handled and
stored at the trench site in accordance with the requirements stated below. No pipe shall be
installed when the lining or coating/interior or exterior surfaces show cracks or other
damage that may be harmful as determined by the Engineer. Such damaged lining and
coating/interior and exterior surfaces, shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer, or
a new undamaged pipe shall be furnished.
B. All pipe damaged prior to Substantial Completion shall be repaired or replaced by the
Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no damaged portions of the pipe.
Remove or smooth out any burrs, gouges, weld splatter or other small defects prior to laying
the pipe.
D. Before placement of pipe in the trench, each pipe or fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned of any
foreign substance, which may have collected thereon and shall be kept clean at all times
thereafter. For this purpose, the openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall be closed
during any interruption to the Work.
E. Lifting points shall be no closer than the 1/3 and 2/3 points along the length of the Section.
Contractor shall be responsible for selecting lifting points that when used, do not result in
damage to the pipe.
F. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of handling devices after the pipe
is laid. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench section at field joints
to permit adequate access to the joints for field connection operations and for application of
coating on field joints.
G. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or other causes,
the Engineer may change the alignment and/or the grades. Such change shall be made by the
deflection of joints, short lengths of pipe, by the use of beveled joint rings, or by the use of
additional fittings. However, in no case shall the deflection in the joint exceed 75 percent of
the maximum deflection recommended by the pipe manufacturer or the amount that results
in more than a 1/8-inch gap at the weld location, whichever is less. No joint shall be misfit

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 13
any amount which will be detrimental to the strength and water tightness of the finished
joint.
H. Except for short runs which may be permitted by the Engineer, pipes shall be laid uphill on
grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe which is laid on a downhill grade shall be blocked and held
in place until sufficient support is furnished by the following pipe to prevent movement. All
bends shall be properly installed as shown.
I. Pipe struts shall be left in place until backfilling operations have been completed for pipe
42 inches in diameter and larger. Struts in pipe smaller than 42 inches may be removed
immediately after laying, provided, that the deflection of the pipe during and after backfilling
does not exceed that specified. After the backfill has been placed to a minimum of 3-feet, the
struts shall be removed by the Contractor and shall remain the property of the Contractor.
Struts shall not be removed with a torch or any other method that may damage the pipe lining
or coating. The parent pipe material shall not be nicked, gouged, or damaged during strut
removal. All repairs of gouges or nicks in the parent material shall be made using 3/32 -inch
maximum diameter E-6010 welding electrodes with a maximum heat input of 5.6 kj per inch.
Tack welds, stull metal, weld splatter, slag, and burrs that remain attached to the parent metal
surface after cutting shall be ground to within 1/32 inch of the parent metal. Grinding shall
not penetrate the parent metal. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer prior to grinding.
Following grinding, all pipe surfaces at the tack weld shall be visually inspected for defects.
All defects deeper than 1/16 inch shall be repaired by welding in accordance with
ANSI/AWSD.1.1 and AWWA/ANSI C206. All inspection work shall be performed by a
certified welding inspector.
J. For pipe backfilled with CLSM, the pipe shall be laid directly on moist sandbags or other
suitable supports approved by the Engineer in preparation for CLSM pipe zone material.
Sandbags shall be placed to provide at least 6 inches of CLSM below the bottom of the pipe.
Sandbags shall be spaced at a maximum interval of 8 feet and one set shall be placed within
3 feet on both sides of each joint. The Contractor shall provide additional sandbags as needed
to support the pipe on line and grade. For pipe bedded in granular material, no blocking will
be permitted, and the bedding shall be such that it forms a continuous, solid bearing for the
full length of the pipe. Excavations shall be made as needed to facilitate removal of handling
devices after the pipe is laid. Bell holes shall be formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent
point loading at the bells or couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the
normal trench section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field
connection operations and for application of coating on field joints.
K. At all times, means shall be provided to prevent the pipe from floating. Take all necessary
precautions to prevent the pipe from floating due to water entering the trench or from
backfilling with CLSM. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage due to
this cause and shall at its own expense restore and replace the pipe to its specified condition
and grade if it is displaced due to floating. Maintain the inside of the pipe free from foreign
materials and in a clean and sanitary condition until its acceptance by the Owner.
L. Bulkheads
1. Prior to shipment of pipe with cement mortar lining the lining shall be wetted then a
suitable bulkhead shall be attached to each end of the pipe section. This bulkhead
shall remain in place and in good condition through transit to the Project.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 14
2. During construction the openings of all pipe and specials where the pipe and specials
have been cement-mortar lined in the shop shall be protected with suitable bulkheads
to maintain a moist atmosphere and to prevent unauthorized access by persons,
animals, water or any undesirable substance. The bulkheads shall be so designed to
prevent drying out of the interior of the pipe. Introduce water into the pipe as needed
to keep the mortar moist where moisture has been lost due to damaged bulkheads.
M. Pipe Cleanup: As pipe laying progresses, keep the pipe interior free of all debris. Completely
clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter and any other debris following
completion of pipe laying and any necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting
the completed pipeline.
N. Installation Tolerances: Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on
the laying diagram and the following requirements:
1. Each section of pipe having a nominal diameter less than 48 inches shall be laid to line
and grade, within plus or minus 2 inches horizontal deviation and plus or
minus 1 inch vertical deviation.
2. Each section of pipe having nominal diameter 48 inches and larger shall be laid to line
and grade, within plus or minus 5 percent of diameter horizontal deviation and plus
or minus 2.5 percent of diameter vertical deviation.
3. In addition to the horizontal and vertical tolerances above, lay the pipe so that no high
or low points other than those on the laying diagram are introduced.
4. Pipe deflection, after backfill but prior to installation of field-applied cement mortar
lining, if applied, shall not exceed 2.25 percent for flexible coated pipe and 1.5 percent
for cement mortar coated pipe. Deflection shall be measured by the difference in
vertical inside diameter in the installed pipe and the manufactured pipe.
5. Pipe not conforming to these criteria or which otherwise impact the ability to
complete the Work shall be removed and reinstalled in full conformance with the
Contract Documents at no additional cost to the Owner.
6. For each section of pipe, record the invert elevation at the lower end and incorporate
the data on the Record Drawings.
O. Protection of Pipe: At locations where the Contractor proposes to cross the installed pipeline
with heavy equipment, precautions as approved by the Engineer shall be taken to protect the
pipe from damage. Acceptable precautions include: backfilling the pipe trench as necessary
to protect the pipe, concrete encasing the pipe, and placing steel plating over the pipe. Any
damage to the pipe caused by the Contractor's operation or his equipment shall be repaired
at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.2 WELDED JOINTS
A. Welding Procedures, Welding Qualifications, and Testing
1. Field welding procedures, welders, welding operators, and tackers shall be qualified
in accordance with AWS D1.1 and as defined in Section 3 of ANSI/AWWA C206 or
ANSI/AWWA C200, as applicable. All qualifications shall be in accordance with all-
position pipe tests as defined in Section 5 of AWS D1.1.
2. For field welding, the welder qualification testing shall be performed at the site.
Previous qualifications will not be accepted. The Contractor shall obtain the services
of an independent testing laboratory to perform the welder qualification onsite.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 15
Copies of all test data and certifications shall be provided to the Engineer. All costs
for welder qualification testing shall be at no increased cost to the Owner.
3. Upon completion of each field-welded joint, the welding operator shall mark his
regularly assigned identification number and the last two numbers of the year in
which the Work was completed, or the Contractor may have a records system that
traces a welder's work completion to a specific joint. Steel stamping directly on
piping will not be permitted unless "low stress" die stamps, such as interrupted dot
or round nose types, are used.
4. All single welded lap joints will be inspected by the CONTRACTOR in the presence of
the Engineer using magnetic particle or dye penetration methods. Field butt welds
will be inspected by the CONTRACTOR in accordance with the requirements of
API 1104 by the radiographic method and the acceptance criteria of API 1104.
Magnetic particle testing is not required for seal welds.
5. The Contractor shall inform the Engineer before completed weld joints are to be
backfilled so that the joint may be inspected. The Contractor shall assume all costs of
exposing backfilled joints for inspection when backfilling preceded the inspection.
6. Personnel performing visual inspection of welds shall be qualified and currently
certified as Certified Welding Inspectors (CWI) in accordance with AWS QC1,
Standard for Qualification and Certification of Welding Inspectors. Personnel
performing nondestructive tests shall be qualified and certified to the requirements
of SNT-TC-1A.
a. The Engineer may also order nondestructive testing by an independent
testing laboratory in addition to any testing specified herein. Except as
otherwise specified herein, all costs for the independent testing laboratory to
inspect and test field welds will be paid for by the Owner. If the weld is
defective, the inspection costs shall be paid for by the Contractor. Defective
welds shall be repaired and retested at the Contractor's expense.
b. Test reports of all laboratory tests shall be submitted as provided in the
quality control section.
B. Where exterior welds are performed, adequate space shall be provided for welding and
inspection of the joints.
C. Lap Welded Joints: During installation of welded steel pipe in either straight alignment or on
curves, the pipe shall be laid so that at any point around the circumference of the joint there
is a minimum lap as shown on the Drawings.
D. Butt Straps: Where used or required, shall be as shown on the Drawings.
E. After the pipe and pipe joint are properly positioned in the trench, weld and provide external
joint protection for all joints except the special temperature control lap joint hereinafter
specified. The length of pipe between special temperature control joints shall be backfilled
to at least one foot above the top of the pipe as hereinafter specified. The special temperature
control joints shall be welded after the pipe is backfilled to at least one foot above the top of
the pipe for the full distance between the temperature control joints upstream and
downstream. Joint protection shall be provided for special temperature control joints after
completion of the joint welds and tests as specified. Care shall be exercised during the initial
backfilling to prevent movement of the pipe and to prevent any backfill material from being
deposited on the special temperature control joint.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 16
F. Control of Temperature Stresses
1. Control temperature stresses in accordance with AWWA C206, the approved
temperature stress control submittal, and these Specifications. Provide special
temperature control lap joints at intervals of 400 feet or less, unless otherwise
approved by the Engineer.
2. To control temperature stresses, the unbackfilled special temperature control joint
areas of all pipe shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun by the use of properly
supported awnings, umbrellas, tarpaulins, or other suitable materials until the pipe
is backfilled at least 1 foot over the top of the pipe. The "temperature control joint
area" is defined as the entire length of pipe left exposed near a control joint after
placing the pipe backfill between it and the other control joints in each direction. The
term "special temperature control joint area" is defined as the entire length of pipe
left exposed near a control joint after placing the backfill between it and the other
control joints in each direction. Shading materials at the joint area shall not rest
directly on the pipe but shall be supported to allow air circulation around the pipe.
Shading of the pipe joints need not be performed when the ambient air temperature
is below 45 degrees F.
3. At intervals not exceeding 400 feet along welded reaches of the pipeline, at the first
regular lap-welded field joints outside concrete encasements and structures, and
where shown, the pipe shall be supplied with a special temperature control lap joint
and laid with an initial lap of not less than 3 inches greater than the typical lap joint.
Where temperature control lap joints occur in a traveled roadway or other
inconvenient location, the location of the joint may be adjusted, as acceptable to the
Engineer.
4. Provide and install thermocouple temperature gauges to monitor the temperature of
the steel pipe wall on the inside top of the pipe as it lays in the trench. All pipe
temperature requirements specified herein shall be measured at the top inside of the
steel cylinder. Specific temperature requirements for the pipeline steel cylinder shall
be met prior to installation of the controlled low strength material (CLSM), during
and after placement of CLSM, and during welding of the special temperature control
joints. If atmospheric conditions do not allow the conditions to be met, supplemental
cooling shall be required by the Contractor. The following outlines the specific
temperature control requirements.
a. Prior to and during placement of the CLSM, the pipeline steel temperature
shall be at or below 90 degrees F. The specified temperature shall be
maintained for at least three hours after the placement of CLSM. The specified
temperature shall be maintained until the line is fully backfilled. Provide
supplemental cooling as required.
b. Placement of CLSM shall proceed in the direction of pipe laying from one
special temperature control joint to the next. During placement of CLSM, the
lead end of the pipe section (toward the next special temperature control
joint) shall be left unbackfilled or otherwise unrestrained such that the end of
the pipe is free to move in response to expansion or contraction due to
temperature changes. CLSM shall not be placed in a direction which would
result in CLSM placement proceeding in a direction toward previously or
simultaneously placed CLSM without the written permission of the Engineer.
The direction of CLSM placement will not be limited for placement at the short
unbackfilled section immediately adjacent to the special temperature control
joints.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 17
c. During periods between CLSM placement operations, any section of pipeline
that is backfilled with CLSM shall be shaded from the direct rays of the sun by
the use of properly supported awnings, umbrellas, tarpaulins, or other
suitable materials until the pipe is backfilled at least 1 foot over the top of the
pipe. The temperature of the partially backfilled pipe shall not be allowed to
exceed 110 degrees Fahrenheit at any time. Provide supplemental cooling as
required. Shading materials shall not rest directly on the pipe but shall be
supported to allow air circulation around the pipe. Shading of the partially
backfilled pipe need not be performed when the Contractor can demonstrate
to the satisfaction of the Engineer, using thermocouple data, that shading is
not necessary to the Contractor to meet the specified temperature
requirement.
d. Prior to welding the special temperature control joints, the pipeline extending
400 feet each direction from the joint shall be maintained at or below
85 degrees F. Additionally, the pipeline extending 400 feet each direction
from the joint shall be backfilled with CLSM to at least one foot over the top of
the pipe. At the specified temperature, the special temperature control joints
can be welded. Begin and complete the weld during the coolest interval of
suitable length within a 24-hour day. Use the thermocouple temperature data
to demonstrate to the Engineer the coolest interval of the day.
e. After welding any temperature control joint, the pipe temperature for
150 feet in each direction from the control joint shall be maintained below
110 degrees F for a minimum of 24 hours after the temperature control joint
area has been backfilled to at least 1 foot over the top of the pipe. This
requirement is in addition to the shading and CLSM placement temperature
requirements indicated herein.
G. Prior to the beginning of pouring CLSM or beginning the welding procedure, any tack welds
or joint stops used to position the pipe during laying shall be removed. Any annular space
between the faying surfaces of the bell and spigot shall be equally distri buted around the
circumference of the joint by shimming, jacking, or other suitable means. The weld shall then
be made in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C206. Where more than one pass is required, all
dirt, slag, and flux shall be removed before the succeeding bead is applied.
H. Testing of Joints: The pipeline joints shall be tested as specified herein and in Section 33 13
00 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.
I. Following tests of the joint, the exterior joint spaces shall be coated in accordance with these
Specifications after which backfilling may be completed.
J. Joints: The pipe ends shall be cut straight on joints where butt straps are used for
realignment, adjustment, or deflection, and fillet welds shall be made as indicated.
K. Repair of Welds: All welds that are defective shall be repaired by the Contractor to meet the
requirements of this Section at no additional cost to the Owner. Defects in welds or defective
welds shall be removed, and that section of the joint shall then be rewelded. Only sufficient
removal of defective material that is necessary to correct the defect is required. After the
repair is made, the joint shall be checked by repeating the original test procedure. Welds
deficient in size shall be repaired by adding weld metal.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 18
3.3 JOINT COATING AND LINING
A. General: The interior and exterior joint recesses shall be thoroughly wiped clean and all
water, loose scale, dirt and other foreign material shall be removed from the inside surface of
the pipe. The grout for joint coating and lining shall be cement grout in accordance with
Section 03 60 00 - Grouting, except that composition shall be one part cement to two parts
sand and sufficient water for dry-pack consistency
B. Joint Coating: In accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Protective Coatings
and Linings and 09 90 10– Pipeline Coatings and Linings.
C. Joint Lining:
1. Clean joint to remove dirt, debris, and other contaminants.
2. Apply a single application of NSF approved acrylic latex bonding admixture (Flex-Con,
or equal) to wet out joint for the promotion of adhesion.
3. The grout for joint lining shall be cement grout in accordance with Section 03 60 00 –
Grouting, except that composition shall be one part cement to two parts sand and
sufficient water for dry-pack consistency. NSF approved acrylic latex admixture shall
be added to develop a dough like consistency.
4. Mortar mixture is hand packed into the joint area.
5. Joint is troweled smooth to create a uniform transition between existing mortar lined
pipe.
6. Joint area is swept clean of debris.
7. After the backfill has been completed to final grade, the interior joint recess of shop-
lined pipe shall be filled with grout, tightly packed into the joint recess and troweled
flush with the interior surface. All excess shall be removed. At no point shall there be
an indentation or projection of the grout exceeding 1/16 inch. With pipe smaller than
24 inches in diameter, before the spigot is inserted into the bell, the bell shall be
daubed with grout containing one part cement to two parts sand. The spigot end then
shall be forced to the bottom of the bell and excess mortar on the inside of the joint
shall be swabbed out.
3.4 CEMENT-MORTAR LINING, FIELD-APPLIED
A. Unless otherwise indicated, the Contractor shall construct the cement-mortar lining in-place
after the pipeline is backfilled to approximate finished grade. The application of in-place
cement-mortar lining shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C602.
1. The lining machine shall be of a type that has been used successfully for a similar size
of pipe. Perform all Work in a thorough and workmanlike manner by trained
personnel, under the supervision of experienced personnel skilled in machine
application of cement-mortar lining to pipelines of size comparable to this Work.
2. Curing of the in-place cement-mortar lining shall be in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C602, except the Contractor shall be responsible for curing and
maintaining the lining until final acceptance by the Owner. Provide a system to
maintain a suitably moist environment within the pipe to properly cure and maintain
the lining. Provide additional protective devices as required to ensure that the
airtight covers, which maintain a moist condition in the pipeline, are not damaged.
3. Defective areas encompassing the full diameter of the pipe shall be replaced by
machine wherever the length measured along the pipe centerline is greater than
5 feet; otherwise defective areas may be replaced by hand.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 19
3.5 INSTALLATION OF PIPE APPURTENANCES
A. Protection of Appurtenances: Where the joining pipe is concrete or coated with cement
mortar, buried appurtenances shall be coated with a minimum thickness of one inch of
cement mortar having one part cement to not more than two parts plaster sand. Follo wing
coating with cement mortar, the appurtenances shall be coated with a protective overcoat in
accordance with the paragraph entitled "Protective Coating."
B. Installation of Valves: All valves shall be handled in a manner to prevent any injury or damage
to any part of the valve. All joints shall be thoroughly cleaned and prepared prior to
installation. Adjust all stem packing and operate each valve prior to installation to insure
proper operation. Valves (body and seat) shall not be subjected to test pressures greater than
manufacturer's recommendation. In some cases this may require an increase in the valve
pressure class.
C. All buried valves shall be coated and protected in accordance with Section 09 90 00 –
Protective Coatings and Linings.
D. All valves shall be installed so that the valve stems are plumb and in the location indicated.
E. Installation of Flanged Joints: Before the joint is assembled, the flange faces shall be
thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material with a power wire brush. The gasket shall be
centered and the connecting flanges drawn up watertight without unnecessarily stressing the
flanges. All bolts shall be tightened in a progressive diametrically opposite sequence and
torqued with a suitable, approved and calibrated torque wrench. All clamping torque shall
be applied to the nuts only.
F. All buried flanges shall be coated and protected in accordance with Section 09 90 00 –
Protective Coatings and Linings.
G. Flexible Coupled Joints: When installing flexible couplings, care shall be taken that the
connecting pipe ends, couplings and gaskets are clean and free of all dirt and foreign matter
with special attention being given to the contact surfaces of the pipe, gaskets and couplings.
The couplings shall be assembled and installed in conformity with the recommendation and
instruction of the coupling manufacturer.
H. Wrenches used in bolting couplings shall be of a type and size recommended by the coupling
manufacturer. Coupling bolts shall be tightened so as to secure a uniform annular space
between the follower rings and the body of the pipe with all bolts tightened approximately
the same amount. Diametrically opposite bolts shall be tightened progressively and evenly.
Final tightening shall be done with a suitable, approved and calibrated torque wrench set for
the torque recommended by the coupling manufacturer. All clamping torque shall be applied
to the nut only.
I. Upon completion of the coupled joint, the coupling and bare metal of the pipe shall be cleaned,
primed and protected in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Protective
Coatings and Linings and 09 90 10 - Pipeline Coatings and Linings.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 11 - 20
3.6 MARKING TAPE INSTALLATION
A. As shown on the Drawings.
3.7 PIPELINE TESTING
A. The steel pipe shall be hydrostatically tested as specified in Section 33 13 00 – Water Pipeline
Testing and Disinfection.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE FABRICATED SPECIALS (AWWA C200,
MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 12 - 1
SECTION 33 11 12
STEEL PIPE FABRICATED SPECIALS (AWWA C200, MODIFIED)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide all bends, reducers, wyes, tees, crosses, outlets, manifolds and
other steel plate specials, complete in place, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards
ASME B 16.9 Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings
ASTM E 165 Practice for Liquid Penetrant Examination
ANSI/AWWA C200 Steel Water Pipe 6 In and Larger
ANSI/AWWA C205 Cement Mortar Lining and Coating – Shop Applied
ANSI/AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
ANSI/AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks
ANSI/AWWA C208 Dimensions for Fabricated Steel Water Pipe Fittings
ANSI/AWWA C602 Cement-Mortar Lining of Water Pipelines - 4 In (100 mm) and
Larger - In Place
ASTM A234 Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and
Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated Temperatures
ANSI/AWS D.1.1 Structural Welding Code - Steel
API Standard 1104 Welding Pipelines and Related Structures
AWWA M-11 Steel Water Pipe - A Guide for Design and Installation
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including line and layout diagrams of all steel pipe
fabricated specials in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 33 20 – Submittals
Procedures. All submittals required for steel pipe and related work as listed in Section 33 11
11 - Steel Pipe, shall also be required for specials. Shop drawings shall indicate the type, size,
and location of all reinforcement pieces.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE FABRICATED SPECIALS (AWWA C200,
MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 12 - 2
B. Design calculations shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to manufacture of
steel pipe fabricated specials.
C. Certifications: A certified affidavit of compliance with referenced Specifications and these
Contract Documents shall be furnished for all steel pipe fabricated specials and other
products or materials provided under this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: All specials shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacturer/ fabrication
as outlined in Section 33 11 11 - Steel Pipe.
B. Shop Testing of Steel Pipe Fabricated Specials:
1. If steel pipe fabricated specials have been fabricated from untested straight pipe, they
shall be hydrostatically tested with a pressure equal to 1-1/2 times the design
working pressure shown on the Drawings. If steel pipe fabricated specials have been
fabricated from successfully tested straight pipe, no hydrostatic test shall be required
unless otherwise indicated. In no case shall shop test pressure be less than 150 psi.
All tees with crotch plates shall be hydrostatically tested as indicated regardle ss of
whether or not the straight pipe sections used were previously tested.
2. All welds shall be non-destructive tested at the specials fabricator's facility as
specified below for various weld categories. Testing shall include submitting written
documentation of procedures per Section V, and acceptance criteria shall be in
accordance with Section VIII of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.
a. Butt Joint Welds: Spot radiographically examine pipe in accordance with
paragraph UW-52 of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII,
Division 1. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the welds cannot readily be
radiographed, they shall be 100 percent ultrasonically examined.
b. Fillet Welds: 100 percent examine all fillet welds using the magnetic particle
inspection method.
c. Groove Welds: 100 percent ultrasonically examine all groove welds that
cannot be readily radiographically spot examined.
d. Welds on pipe seams for previously successfully tested straight pipe do not
need to be retested.
e. All Welds: Contractor's certified welding inspector shall 100 percent visually
examine all welds as a minimum.
f. In addition to weld tests herein before specified, doubler pads shall be air
tested as stated in AWWA C206.
g. Refer to Section 33 13 00 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection for field
non-destructive testing.
3. Where welded test heads or bulkheads are used, extra length shall be provided to
each opening of the special. After removal of each test head, the special shall be
trimmed back to the design points with all finished plate edges ground smooth,
straight, recoated and prepared for the field joint.
4. Testing shall be performed before pipe and joints have been coated or lined.
5. Perform tests at no additional cost to the Owner. The Engineer shall have the right to
witness all testing conducted by the Contractor, provided that the Contractor's
schedule is not delayed for the convenience of the Engineer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE FABRICATED SPECIALS (AWWA C200,
MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 12 - 3
6. In addition to those tests specifically required, the Engineer may request additional
samples of any material including mixed concrete and lining and coating samples for
testing by the Owner. The additional samples shall be furnished at no additional cost
to the Owner.
C. Field Testing: Field testing shall conform to the requirements of Section 33 13 00 - Water
Pipeline Testing and Disinfection.
D. Welding Procedure Specifications: All welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be in
accordance with Section 33 11 11 - Steel Pipe.
E. Welder Performance Qualifications: All welder performance qualifications shall be in
accordance with Section 33 11 11 - Steel Pipe.
F. Certified Welding Inspector: A certified welding inspector shall be provided for shop
fabricated work and shall have the responsibilities outlined in Section 33 11 11 - Steel Pipe.
G. Fittings and Specials Fabricator:
1. Experienced in fabrication of fittings and specials of similar diameters and wall
thickness required for the Work.
2. Demonstrate current production capability for volume of Work required for the
Project.
3. Experience shall be for project requiring fabrication to AWWA C200/208 standards
of at least 25 fittings , 24-inch or larger pipe, with wall thickness 0.375-inch or larger
within the 5-year period preceding the bid date.
4. Experience requirement shall apply to the fabrication plant facility and responsible
personnel, not the firm which owns the facility or employs the personnel.
5. See Section 33 11 11 – Steel Pipe for qualifications for steel pipe fabricators..
H. Fabrication: All specials shall be fabricated in the shop. No field fabrication of specials will
be allowed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Steel pipe fabricated specials (specials) are defined as fittings, closure pieces, bends, elbows,
reducers, wyes, tees, crosses, outlets, manifolds, steel pipe wall sleeves, and other steel plate
specials wherever located, and all piping above ground or in structures.
2.2 DESIGN
A. Design: Except as otherwise provided herein, specials shall be fabricated from materials or
straight pipe in full conformance with the requirements of Section 33 11 11 - Steel Pipe,
ANSI/AWWA C200, and the dimensions of ANSI/AWWA C208. All fittings and specials shall
be properly reinforced to withstand the internal pressure, with circumferential and
longitudinal, or external loading conditions, whichever is greater. The minimum thickness of

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE FABRICATED SPECIALS (AWWA C200,
MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 12 - 4
plate for pipe from which specials are to be fabricated shall be no less than the thickness of
the adjacent mainline pipe, the thickness shown, or the following, whichever is thicker:

Nominal Pipe
Diameter (in)
Pipe Manifolds, Piping
Above Ground, and Piping in
Structures
Elbows, Bends, and
Reducers
30 and under Standard Weight Standard Weight
Over 30 3/8-inch Same as Adjacent Pipe
B. Pipe installed on saddle supports shall be designed to limit the longitudinal bending stress to
a maximum of 10,000 psi. Design shall be in accordance with the provisions of Chapter 7 of
AWWA M-11, and other applicable industry standards.
C. Joints: All joints and related work for field assembly of the pipe and specials shall conform to
Section 33 11 11 - Steel Pipe. All shop joints shall be complete penetration butt-welds unless
otherwise shown.
2.3 FABRICATION AND MATERIALS
A. General: Reinforcement for wyes, tees, outlets, and nozzles shall be as shown. Shop welding
shall conform to the applicable provisions of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Field
welding shall conform to ANSI/AWS D1.1 and ANSI/AWWA C206. Specials and fittings shall
be equal in pressure design strength and shall have the same lining and coating as the
adjoining pipe. Unless otherwise indicated, the minimum radius of elbows shall be 2.5 times
the pipe diameter and the maximum miter angle on each section of the elbow shall not exceed
11-1/4 degrees resulting in a maximum deflection angle of 22.5 degrees per miter weld as
recommended in AWWA C208.
B. Specials and fittings that cannot be mechanically lined and coated shall be lined and coated
by hand-application, using the same materials as are used for the pipe and in accordance with
the applicable AWWA or ASTM Standards, and as modified in Section 09 90 00 – Protective
Coatings and Linings and 09 90 10 - Pipeline Coatings and Linings, or by other applicable
sections in these Specifications. Coating and lining applied in this manner s hall provide
thickness and protection equal to that specified for the pipe. Fittings may be fabricated from
pipe that has been mechanically lined and/or coated. Areas of lining and coating that have
been damaged by such fabrication shall be removed and reapplied by hand-applications.
C. Access manholes with covers shall be as indicated. All threaded outlets shall be forged steel
suitable for 3,000-psi service, and shall be as manufactured by Vogt or equal.
D. Moderate deflections and long radius curves may be made by means of beveled joint rings,
by pulling standard joints, by using short lengths or pipe, or a combination of these methods;
provided that pulled joints shall not be used in combination with bevels and maximum joint
deflections are not exceeded. The maximum total allowable angle for beveled joints shall be
5 degrees per pipe joint. Bevels shall be provided on the bell ends. Mitering of the spigot
ends will not be permitted. The maximum allowable angle for pulled joints shall be
75 percent of the manufacturer's recommendations or the angle which results from a
3/4-inch pull out from normal joint closure, whichever is less. In no case shall pulled joints

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE FABRICATED SPECIALS (AWWA C200,
MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 12 - 5
result in a gap between the bell and spigot at the weld location that exceeds 1/8 inch. All
horizontal deflections or fabricated angles shall fall on the alignment, as shown.
E. All vertical deflections shall fall on the alignment and at locations adjacent to underground
obstructions, points of minimum earth cover, and pipeline outlets and structures, the pipe
angle points shall match the angle points indicated.
F. Outlets, Tees, Wyes, and Crosses
1. Outlets 14-inch and smaller shall be fabricated from ASTM A 53, Type E or S, Grade B,
standard weight steel pipe in the standard outside diameters, i.e., 14, 12-3/4-inch, 10-
3/4-inch, 8-5/8-inch, 6-5/8-inch, and 4-1/2-inch. Wall thickness and collar
reinforcing shall be as shown.
2. In lieu of collar reinforcement as shown, pipe or specials with outlets may be
fabricated in their entirety of steel plate having a thickness equal to the sum of the
pipe wall plus the required reinforcement.
3. Where required by Manual M-11 or other industry standard, the design procedure for
crotch plate reinforcement, such reinforcement shall be required.
G. Steel Welding Fittings: Steel welding fittings for pipe spools and fittings smaller than
24 inches in diameter shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.9 conforming to ASTM A 234. Use
standard weight. Taper pipe wall at welds at 4:1 for connection to pipe of different wall
thicknesses. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for coordinating the difference in
diameter convention between these specials and AWWA C200/C208 pipe and fittings to
provide complete piping systems as shown.
H. Ends for Mechanical-Type Couplings: Except as otherwise indicated, where mechanical-type
couplings are indicated, the ends of pipe shall be banded with Type C collared ends using
double fillet welds. Where pipe 12-inch and smaller is furnished in standard schedule
thicknesses, and where the wall thickness equals or exceeds the coupling manufacturer's
minimum wall thickness, the pipe ends may be grooved.
I. Lining: All requirements pertaining to thickness, application and curing of cement mortar
lining indicated for straight pipe shall apply to specials, with the following provision. If the
special cannot be lined centrifugally or with field lining equipment, it shall be lined by hand.
In such case, the lining shall be reinforced with welded wire fabric positioned approximately
in the center of the lining and in accordance with AWWA C205 for lining of specials.
J. Coating: All requirements pertaining to thickness, application and curing of coating indicated
for straight pipe shall apply to specials. Unless otherwise indicated the coating on the buried
portion of a pipe section passing through a structure wall shall extend to the center of the
wall, or to the wall flanges, if one is indicated. Pipe above ground or in structures shall be
shop primed and field-painted in accordance with Section 09 90 10 – Pipeline Coatings and
Linings.
K. Marking: A mark indicating the true vertical axis of the special shall be placed on the top and
bottom of the special.
L. Shop Welded Surfaces: All weld seams on pipe surfaces that will have a flexible tape or
polyolefin coating in accordance with AWWA C209, C214, C215, or C216 shall be ground such

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT STEEL PIPE FABRICATED SPECIALS (AWWA C200,
MODIFIED)
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 11 12 - 6
that the maximum weld bead height will not exceed 1/32 inch. All ground weld seams shall
be smooth and free of all burrs.
M. Portions of wall sleeves that penetrate into hydraulic structures and will be embedded into
concrete shall be shop lined and coated in accordance with requirements for submerged
conditions as outlined in Section 09 90 00 – Protective Coatings and Linings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Provide all fittings, closure pieces, elbows, bends, reducers, wyes, tees, crosses, outlets,
manifolds, and other steel plate specials, bolts, nuts, gaskets, jointing materials, and all other
appurtenances as indicated to provide a complete and workable installation. Where pipe
support details are indicated, the supports shall conform thereto and shall be placed as
indicated; provided, that the support for all exposed piping shall be complete and adequate
regardless of whether or not supporting devices are specifically indicated. Where indicated,
concrete thrusts blocks and welded joints shall be provided. At all times when the Work of
installing pipe is not in progress, all openings into the pipe and the ends of the pipe in
trenches or structures shall be kept tightly closed to prevent entrance of animals and foreign
materials.
B. Take all necessary precautions to prevent the pipe from floating due to water entering the
trench or from backfilling with CLSM. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any
damage due to this cause and shall at its own expense restore and repl ace the pipe to its
specified condition and grade if it is displaced due to floating. Maintain the inside of the pipe
free from foreign materials and in a clean and sanitary condition until its acceptance by the
Owner.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, all specials shall be installed in full conformance with Section 33
11 11 - Steel Pipe, and other applicable sections of these Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 13 00 - 1
SECTION 33 13 00
WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall perform flushing and testing of all pressure pipelines and appurtenant
piping and disinfection of all pipelines and appurtenant piping for potable and fire water,
complete.
B. This specification applies to all pipelines requiring hydrostatic tests (water medium)
regardless of the pipeline service medium.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards
ANSI/AWWA B300 Hypochlorites
ANSI/AWWA B301 Liquid Chlorine
ANSI/AWWA C206 Field Welding of Steel Water Pipe
ANSI/AWWA C651 Disinfecting Water Mains
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. A testing schedule, including proposed plans for water conveyance, control, disposal, and
disinfection shall be submitted in writing for approval a minimum of 7 days before testing is
to start.
B. A copy of the Utah Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (UPDES) permit application shall
be submitted a minimum of 30 days prior to the proposed date to start testing. A copy of the
approved UPDES permit shall be submitted prior to the start of testing.
C. Chlorine residual test data and bacteriological test data shall be submitted to document the
results of the pipeline disinfection. Tests shall be conducted 24 hours after the start of
disinfection.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS REQUIREMENTS
A. All test equipment, chemicals for chlorination, temporary valves, bulkheads, or other water
control equipment and materials shall be determined and furnished by the Contractor subject
to the Engineer's review. No materials shall be used which would be injurious to the
construction or its future function.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 13 00 - 2
B. Used pressure gauges shall be recertified prior to testing.
C. Chlorine for disinfection shall be in the form of liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution,
or calcium hypochlorite granules or tablets.
D. Liquid chlorine shall be in accordance with the requirements of ANSI/AWWA B301. Liquid
chlorine shall be used only:
1. In combination with appropriate gas flow chlorinators and ejectors;
2. Under the direct supervision of an experienced technician;
3. When appropriate safety practices are observed.
E. Sodium hypochlorite and calcium hypochlorite shall be in accordance with the requirements
of ANSI/AWWA B300 - Hypochlorite.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Water for testing and disinfecting water pipelines shall be furnished by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for conveying the water from the source to
the points of use, and disposal of the water (and dechlorinating - where applicable).
B. All pressure pipelines shall be tested. Disinfection shall be accomplished by chlorination for
all pipelines providing potable water or connected to a potable water system. All chlorinating
and testing operations shall be performed in the presence of the Engineer.
C. Disinfection operations shall be scheduled as late as possible during the contract time period
so as to assure the maximum degree of sterility of the facilities at the time the Work is
accepted by the Owner. Samples for bacteriological testing shall be collected by the
Contractor, and testing shall be performed by the Owner laboratory and at the expense of the
Contractor. Results of the bacteriological testing shall be satisfactory with the State
Department of Health or other appropriate regulatory agency.
D. Pipeline pressure tests will include the following tests:
1. Air test of double welded lap joints.
2. Hydrostatic pressure test of the complete pipeline, in segments as required to match
pipe pressure class.
3. Contractor shall conduct the discharge in accordance with the Utah Pollutant
Discharge Elimination System (UPDES) permit from the Utah Division of
Environmental Quality (UDEQ). The Contractor shall apply a reducing agent to the
discharged water to neutralize the chlorine residual and meet the chlorine residual
limit required under the permit. The Owner shall conduct the water quality sampling
of the discharge as required by the permit. The Contractor shall notify local agencies,
secure appropriate other permits and approvals, and provide erosion control
measures for any releases as appropriate. Release of water after pipeline testing and
disinfection have been completed shall be only if acceptable to the Engineer.
E. Notification: Notify the Engineer at each of the following stages:
1. Three working days prior to the start of filling the pipeline with water.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 13 00 - 3
2. Three working days prior to the start of chlorination.
3. Twenty-four hours before withdrawing samples for bacteriological testing.
4. Three working days prior to the start of flushing.
3.2 VISUAL INSPECTION
A. All welds shall be 100% visually inspected in accordance with ANSI/AWS D1.1, Table 6.1;
Visual Inspection Acceptance Criteria for Statically Loaded Non-Tubular Connections.
3.3 AIR TEST
A. All double welded lap joint or double gasket Carnegie joint shall be pressure tested to a
minimum of 40-psi air pressure for a period of 10 minutes per AWWA C206. No air leakage
will be allowed.
B. If the test pressure drops below 40 psi, paint the welds with a soap solution. Mark any leaks
indicated by the escaping gas bubbles.
C. Any joints which leak shall be repaired and retested.
3.4 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PIPELINES
A. Prior to hydrostatic testing, all pipelines shall be flushed or blown out as appropriate. Test all
pipelines either in sections or as a unit. No section of the pipeline shall be tested until all field-
placed concrete or mortar has attained an age of 14 days. The test shall be made by closing
valves when available, or by placing temporary bulkheads in the pipe and filling the line
slowly with water. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining that all test bulkheads
are suitably restrained to resist the thrust of the test pressure without damage to or
movement of the adjacent pipe. Any unharnessed sleeve-type couplings, expansion joints, or
other sliding joints shall be restrained or suitably anchored prior to the test, to avoid
movement and damage to piping and equipment. Provide sufficient temporary air tappings
in the pipelines to allow for evacuation of all entrapped air in each pipe segment to be tested.
After completion of the tests, such taps shall be permanently plugged. Care shall be taken to
see that all air vents are open prior to and during filling.
B. The pipeline shall be filled at a rate not to exceed 2-feet per second as calculated by using the
cross-sectional area based on the inside diameter of the pipe and which will not cause any
surges or exceed the rate at which the air can be released through the air valves at a
reasonable velocity and all the air within the pipeline shall be properly purged. After the
pipeline or section thereof has been filled, it shall be allowed to stand under a slight pressure
for at least 24 hours to allow the concrete or mortar lining, as applicable, to absorb what
water it will and to allow the escape of air from any air pocket. No personnel shall be within
or enter any vault or confined space subject to flooding during the initial filling and for a 24
hour period. After the 24 hour period bulkheads, valves, and connections shall be examined
for leaks. If leaks are found, corrective measures satisfactory to the Engineer shall be taken.
C. The hydrostatic test shall consist of holding the test pressure on the pipeline for a period of
4 hours. The test pressure for distribution and transmission pipelines shall be 250 psi in the
pipeline measured at the lowest point of the pipeline section being tested. The test pressure
for yard piping shall be as indicated on the Piping Schedule measured at the lowest point of

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 13 00 - 4
the pipeline section being tested. No pressure test will be required for a reservoir overflow
line. All visible leaks shall be repaired in a manner acceptable to the Engineer.
D. The maximum allowable leakage for distribution and transmission pipelines shall be 10 U.S.
gallons per inch of diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours for pipe with 40-foot or greater
lengths between joints and with rubber-gasketed joints and 20 U.S. gallons per inch of
diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours for pipe with 20-foot or less lengths between joints
and with rubber-gasketed joints. The maximum leakage for yard piping shall be as shown on
the Piping Schedule. Pipe with welded joints shall have no leakage.
E. In the case of pipelines that fail to pass the prescribed leakage test, determine the cause of
the leakage, take corrective measures necessary to repair the leaks, and again test the
pipelines at no additional cost to the Owner.
F. The pipeline shall be drained after successful completion of the hydrostatic test.
3.5 DISINFECTING PIPELINES
A. General: All potable water pipelines shall be disinfected in accordance with the requirements
of ANSI/AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains as modified herein.
B. Prior to disinfecting the pipeline for potable water services and before placing into service
for other water pipelines, flush the pipeline to remove any debris, rocks, or other foreign
material that may have entered the pipe. Flushing shall be carried out such that the velocities
in the pipe exceed 2.5 feet per second. Provide all required material, labor and equipment to
complete flushing. Contractor shall provide the water for flushing. Make appropriate
provision and preparations for disposal of flushing water, satisfying all local, state and federal
rules, laws, regulations and ordinances.
C. Continuous Feed Method: Disinfect in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651 except that:
1. The water in the pipe shall contain 50 mg/l free chlorine.
2. After 24 hours of disinfection, the residual free chlorine shall be at least 25 mg/l at
the pipeline extremities.
D. Slug Feed Method: Disinfect in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C651.
E. Chlorinating Valves: During the process of chlorinating the pipelines, all valves and other
appurtenances shall be operated while the pipeline is filled with the heavily chlorinated
water.
F. Final Flushing: After the applicable retention period, the heavily chlorinated water shall be
flushed from the pipeline until chlorine measurements show that the concentration in the
water leaving the pipeline is no higher than that generally prevailing in the system or is
acceptable for domestic use. If there is any question that the chlorinated discharge will cause
damage to the environment, a reducing agent shall be applied to the water to neutralize
thoroughly the chlorine residual remaining in the water. See the appendix of AWWA C651
for acceptable neutralization methods for heavily chlorinated water.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 13 00 - 5
G. Sampling Ports: The Contractor shall provide sampling ports along the pipeline as defined in
AWWA C651. Taps may be made at manways and air valves to help facilitate the spacing
requirement.
H. Bacteriological Testing: After final flushing and before the pipeline is placed in service, two
consecutive sets of samples shall be collected at least 24 hours apart by the Contractor from
the end of the line and at other locations as designated by the Engineer, and shall be tested
by the Owner for bacteriological quality in accordance with the requirements of AWWA C651.
For this purpose, the pipe shall be refilled with fresh potable water and left for a period of
24 hours before any samples are collected. If the initial disinfection fails to produce
satisfactory bacteriological results or if other water quality is affected, the new main may be
reflushed and shall be resampled. If check samples also fail to produce acceptable results, the
main shall be rechlorinated by the continuous-feed or slug method until satisfactory results
are obtained – that being two consecutive sets of acceptable samples taken 24 hours apart.
3.6 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEM
A. Where connections are to be made to an existing potable water system, the interior surfaces
of all pipe and fittings used in making the connections shall be swabbed or sprayed with a
one percent hypochlorite solution before they are installed. Thorough flushing shall be
started as soon as the connection is completed and shall be continued until discolored water
is eliminated.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT WATER PIPELINE TESTING AND DISINFECTION
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 33 13 00 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

DIVISION 40
PROCESS INTEGRATION

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 1
SECTION 40 05 00
PIPING, GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all piping systems shown and specified, in accordance
with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Each system shall be complete with all
necessary fittings, hangers, supports, anchors, seismic restraints, expansion joints, flexible
connectors, valves, accessories, heat tracing, insulation, lining and coating, testing,
disinfection, excavation, backfill and encasement, to provide a functional installation.
B. The piping shown is intended to define the general layout, configuration, routing, method of
support, pipe size, and pipe type. The mechanical drawings are not pipe construction or
fabrication drawings. It is the Contractor's responsibility to develop the details necessary to
construct all mechanical piping systems, to accommodate the specific equipment provided,
and to provide and install all spools, spacers, adapters, connectors, etc., for a complete and
functional system.
1.2 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES, AND STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards
ANSI/ASME B1.20.1 Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch)
ANSI B16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Steel Nickel Alloy and other
Special Alloys
ANSI/AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Water Works Service, Sizes 4 in through
144 in.
ANSI/AWWA C606 Grooved and Shouldered Joints
ANSI/AWS D1.1 Structural Welding Code
ASTM A 307 Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 6,000 psi
Tensile
ASTM A 325 Specification for High-Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints
ASTM D 792 Test Methods for Specific Gravity and Density of Plastics by
Displacement
ASTM D 2000 Classification System for Rubber Products in Automotive
Applications

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 2
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Submit complete shop drawings and certificates, test reports, affidavits of compliance, of all
piping systems, in accordance with the requirements in Section 01 33 20 – Submittal
Procedures, and as indicated in the individual piping sections. The shop drawings shall
include all necessary dimensions and details on pipe joints, fittings, fitting specials, valves,
appurtenances, design calculations, and material lists. The submittals shall include detailed
layout, spool, or fabrication drawings which show all pipe spools, spacers, adapters,
connectors, fittings, and pipe supports and seismic restraints necessary to accommodate the
equipment and valves provided in a complete and functional system.
B. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests shall be borne by the
Contractor at no increased cost to the Owner.
C. Submit as part of the shop drawings a statement from the pipe fabricator certifying that all
pipes will be fabricated subject to a recognized Quality Control Program. An outline of the
program shall be submitted to the Engineer for review prior to the fabrication of any pipe.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Inspection: All pipe shall be subject to inspection at the place of manufacture. During the
manufacture of the pipe, the Engineer shall be given access to all areas where manufacturing
is in progress and shall be permitted to make all inspections necessary to confirm compliance
with the Specifications.
B. Tests: Except where otherwise indicated, all materials used in the manufacture of the pipe
shall be tested in accordance with the applicable specifications and standards. Welds shall
be tested as indicated. Perform all tests at no additional cost to the Owner.
C. Welding Requirements: All welding procedures used to fabricate pipe shall be prequalified
under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1. Welding procedures shall be required for, but not
necessarily limited to, longitudinal and girth or spiral welds for pipe cylinders, spigot and bell
ring attachments, reinforcing plates and ring flange welds, and plates for lug connections.
D. Welder Qualifications: All welding shall be done by skilled welders, welding operators, and
tackers who have had adequate experience in the methods and materials to be used. Welders
shall be qualified under the provisions of ANSI/AWS D1.1 by an independent local, approved
testing agency not more than 6 months prior to commencing Work on the pipeline. Machines
and electrodes similar to those used in the Work shall be used in qualification tests. Furnish
all material and bear the expense of qualifying welders at no increased cost to the Owner.
E. NSF/ANSI 61 for Drinking Water System Components: All materials that will contact potable
water shall comply with the requirements of the NSF/ANSI 61 Standard.
1.5 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICE REPRESENTATIVE
A. Where the assistance of a manufacturer's service representative is advisable, in order to
obtain perfect pipe joints, supports, or special connections, furnish such assistance at no
additional cost to the Owner.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 3
1.6 MATERIAL DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION
A. All piping materials, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be delivered in a clean and
undamaged condition and stored off the ground, to provide protection against oxidation
caused by ground contact. All defective or damaged materials shall be replaced with new
materials.
1.7 CLEANUP
A. After completion of the Work, all remaining pipe cuttings, joining and wrapping materials,
and other scattered debris, shall be removed from the site. The entire piping system shall be
handed over in a clean and functional condition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be furnished in accordance with the requirements
of the applicable Sections of Divisions 22, 31, 33, 40, 43 and 46 and this Section.
B. Miscellaneous Small Pipes: Miscellaneous small pipes and fittings shall be provided by the
Contractor in accordance with the requirements of Section 40 05 10 - Mill Piping - Exposed
and Buried and this Section.
C. Pipe Supports: All pipes shall be adequately supported in accordance with the requirements
of Section 40 05 07 - Pipe Supports, and as indicated.
D. Lining: All requirements pertaining to thickness, applications, and curing of pipe lining, are
in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Division 9, unless otherwise
indicated.
E. Coating: All requirements pertaining to thickness, application, and curing of pipe coating, are
in accordance with the requirements of the applicable Sections of Divisions 9 and 33, unless
otherwise indicated. Pipes above ground or in structures shall be field-painted in accordance
with Section 09 90 00 Protective Coatings and Linings.
F. Pressure Rating: All piping systems shall be designed for the maximum expected pressure as
defined in Section 33 13 00 - Water Pipeline Testing and Disinfection, or as indicated on the
piping schedule.
G. Grooved Piping Systems: Piping systems with grooved joints and fittings may be provided, if
approved by the Engineer, in lieu of screwed, flanged, welded, or mechanical joint systems
for steel and ductile iron yard piping above and below ground within the property limits of
pump stations, and similar installations. All grooved couplings on buried piping must be
bonded. To assure uniform and compatible piping components, all grooved fittings,
couplings, and valves shall be from the same manufacturer. The Contractor shall make the
coupling manufacturer responsible for the selection of the correct style of coupling and
gasket for each individual location.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 4
H. All exposed piping shall be secured in accordance to seismic and wind design criteria in
Section 01 81 10 Seismic Design Criteria and Section 01 81 11 Wind Design Criteria.
2.2 PIPE FLANGES
A. Flanges: Where the design pressure is 150 psi or less, flanges shall conform to either
ANSI/AWWA C207 Class D or ANSI B16.5 150-pound class. Where the design pressure is
greater than 150 psi, up to a maximum of 275 psi, flanges shall conform to either
ANSI/AWWA C207 Class E, Class F, or ANSI B16.5 150-pound class. However, AWWA flanges
shall not be exposed to test pressures greater than 125 percent of rated capacity. For higher
test pressures, the next higher rated AWWA flange or an ANSI-rated flange shall be selected.
Where the design pressure is greater than 275 psi up to a maximum of 700 psi, flanges shall
conform to ANSI B16.5 300-pound class. Flanges shall have flat faces and shall be attached
with bolt holes straddling the vertical axis of the pipe unless otherwise shown. Attachment
of the flanges to the pipe shall conform to the applicable requirements of ANSI/AWWA C207.
Flanges for miscellaneous small pipes shall be in accordance with the standards specified for
these pipes. Contractor shall coordinate flange class of pipe with adjacent valves and
equipment to ensure compatibility and proper pressure rating.
B. Blind Flanges: Blind flanges shall be in accordance with ANSI/AWWA C207, or with the
standards for miscellaneous small pipes. All blind flanges for pipe sizes 12 inches and over
shall be provided with lifting eyes in form of welded or screwed eye bolts.
C. Flange Coating: All machined faces of metal blind flanges and pipe flanges shall be coated
with a temporary rust-inhibitive coating to protect the metal until the installation is
completed.
D. Flange Bolts: Contractor shall supply all bolts and nuts in conformance with Section 05 50
00 – Metal Fabrications. Studs and bolts shall extend through the nuts a minimum of 1/4 inch.
All-thread studs shall be used on all valve flange connections, where space restrictions
preclude the use of regular bolts.
E. Insulating Flanges: Insulated flanges shall have bolt holes 1/4 inch diameter greater than the
bolt diameter.
F. Insulating Flange Sets: Insulating flange sets shall be provided by the Contractor where
shown. Each insulating flange set shall consist of an insulating gasket, insulating sleeves and
washers and a steel washer. Insulating sleeves and washers shall be o ne piece when flange
bolt diameter is 1-1/2 inches or smaller and shall be made of acetal resin. For bolt diameters
larger than 1-1/2 inches, insulating sleeves and washers shall be two-piece and shall be made
of polyethylene or phenolic. Steel washers shall be in accordance with ASTM A 325.
Insulating gaskets shall be full-face.
G. Insulating Flange Manufacturers, or Equal
1. JM Red Devil, Type E
2. Maloney Pipeline Products Co., Houston
3. PSI Products, Inc., Burbank, California.
H. Flange Gaskets: Contractor shall provide flange gaskets for all pipe flanges. Gaskets for
flanged joints shall be full-faced, 1/16-inch thick compressed sheets of asbestos-free aramid

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 5
fiber base, with nitrile binder and nonstick coating, suitable for temperatures to 700 degrees
F, a pH of 1 to 11, and pressures to 1,000 psig. Blind flanges shall have gaskets covering the
entire inside face of the blind flange and shall be cemented to the blind flange. Ring gaskets
shall not be permitted. Gaskets shall be NSF 61 approved for use in potable water
applications.
I. Flange Gasket Manufacturers, or Equal
1. John Crane, Style 2160.
2. Garlock, Style 3760
2.3 THREADED INSULATING CONNECTIONS
A. General: Threaded insulating bushings, unions, or couplings, as appropriate, shall be used
for joining threaded pipes of dissimilar metals and for piping systems where corrosion
control and cathodic protection are involved.
B. Materials: Threaded insulating connections shall be of nylon, Teflon, polycarbonate,
polyethylene, or other nonconductive materials, and shall have ratings and properties to suit
the service and loading conditions.
2.4 MECHANICAL-TYPE COUPLINGS (GROOVED OR BANDED PIPE)
A. Construction: Cast mechanical-type couplings shall be provided where shown. The couplings
shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/AWWA C606. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the
requirements of Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. All gaskets for mechanical-type
couplings shall be compatible with the piping service and fluid utilized, in accordance with
the coupling manufacturer's recommendations. The wall thickness of all grooved piping shall
conform with the coupling manufacturer's recommendations to suit the highest expected
pressure. To avoid stress on equipment, all equipment connections shall have rigid-grooved
couplings, or harness sets in sizes where rigid couplings are not available, unless thrust
restraint is provided by other means. The Contractor shall have the coupling Manufacturer's
service representative verify the correct choice and application of all couplings and gaskets,
and the workmanship, to assure a correct installation.
B. Couplings for Steel Pipe, Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Victaulic Style 44 with Type D Heavy Duty Grooved Adaptor Ends (Vic Ring Adapters).
C. Ductile Iron Pipe Couplings, Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Gustin-Bacon.
2. Victaulic Style 31 (flexible or rigid grooving).
3. Note: Ductile iron pipe couplings shall be furnished with flush seal gaskets.
D. Couplings for PVC Pipe, Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Gustin-Bacon.
2. Victaulic Style 775.
3. Note: Couplings for PVC pipe shall be furnished with radius cut or standard roll
grooved pipe ends. Grooved end couplings shall be used on PVC pipe only for
Schedule 80 vent piping at the vaults. Grooved end couplings shall not be used for
PVC C905 water pipe.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 6
2.5 SLEEVE-TYPE COUPLINGS
A. Construction: Sleeve-type couplings shall be provided where indicated, in accordance with
ANSI/AWWA C219 unless otherwise indicated, and shall be of steel with steel bolts, without
pipe stop, and shall be of sizes to fit the pipe and fittings. The middle ring shall be not less
than 1/4 inch in thickness and shall be either 5 or 7 inches long for sizes up to and including
30 inches and 10 inches long for sizes greater than 30 inches, for standard steel couplings,
and 16 inches long for long-sleeve couplings. The followers shall be single-piece contoured
mill section welded and cold-expanded as required for the middle rings. They shall be of
sufficient strength to accommodate the number of bolts necessary to obtain adequate gasket
pressures without excessive rolling. The shape of the follower shall be of such design as to
provide positive confinement of the gasket. Bolts and nuts shall conform to the requirements
of Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications. Buried sleeve-type couplings shall be epoxy-coated
at the factory.
B. Pipe Preparation: The ends of the pipe, where indicated, shall be prepared for flexible steel
couplings. Plain ends for use with couplings shall be smooth and round for a distance of 12
inches from the ends of the pipe, with outside diameter not more than 1/64 inch smaller than
the nominal outside diameter of the pipe. The middle ring shall be tested by cold-expanding
a minimum of one percent beyond the yield point, to proof-test the weld to the strength of
the parent metal. The weld of the middle ring shall be subjected to air test for porosity.
C. Gaskets: Gaskets for sleeve-type couplings shall be rubber-compound material that will not
deteriorate from age or exposure to air under normal storage or use conditions. Gaskets for
wastewater and sewerage applications shall be Buna "N," grade 60, or equivalent suitable
elastomer.
1. The rubber in the gasket shall meet the following specifications:
a. Color - Jet Black.
b. Surface - Nonblooming.
c. Durometer Hardness - 74 " 5.
d. Tensile Strength - 1,000 psi Minimum.
e. Elongation - 175 percent Minimum.
2. The gaskets shall be immune to attack by impurities normally found in water or
wastewater. All gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 2000, AA709Z,
meeting Suffix B13 Grade 3, except as noted above. All gaskets shall be compatible
with the piping service and fluid utilized.
D. Insulating Couplings: Where insulating couplings are required, both ends of the coupling
shall have a wedge-shaped gasket which assembles over a rubber sleeve of an insulating
compound in order to obtain insulation of all coupling metal parts from the pipe.
E. Restrained Joints: All sleeve-type couplings on pressure lines shall be harnessed unless
thrust restraint is provided by other means. Harnesses shall be in accordance with the
requirements of the appropriate reference standard, or as shown.
F. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Dresser, Style 38.
2. Ford Meter Box Co., Inc., Style FC1 or FC3.
3. Smith-Blair, Style 411.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 7
4. Baker, Series 200
2.6 FLANGED DISMANTLING JOINTS
A. Dismantling joints for connecting flanged pipe shall be AWWA C219 compliant. Provide studs
and nuts to seal gasket separate and independent from tie-bar restraint system.
B. All dismantling joints shall be the restrained type per AWWA M-11. Tie-bar restraint system
shall conform to ASTM A193-B7 per AWWA M-11 and be designed to withstand the test
pressure shown on the Drawings. Stainless steel 316 tie rods required.
C. All dismantling joints shall use standard flanges in accordance with AWWA C207. The
thickness of the dismantling joint flanges shall be equal to or greater than the class of flange
that is connected to as required by the test pressure as shown on the drawings. Buried
flanges shall be wrapped with petroleum wax tape per AWWA C217.
D. All Restrained Flange coupling adapters shall be epoxy lined and coated with a potable grade
epoxy per Section 09 90 00 Coatings and Linings.
E. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Romac DJ400
2.7 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Flexible connectors shall be installed in all piping connections to engines, blowers,
compressors, and other vibrating equipment, and where shown. Flexible connectors for
service temperatures up to 180 degrees F shall be flanged, reinforced Neoprene or Butyl
spools, rated for a working pressure of 40 to 150 psi, or reinforced, flanged duck and rubber,
as best suited for the application. Flexible connectors for service temperatures above 180
degrees F shall be flanged, braided stainless steel spools with inner, annular, corrugated
stainless steel hose, rated for minimum 150 psi working pressure, unless otherwise shown.
The connectors shall be 9 inches long, face-to-face flanges, unless otherwise shown. The final
material selection shall be approved by the manufacturer. Submit manufacturer's shop
drawings and calculations.
2.8 EXPANSION JOINTS
A. All piping subject to expansion and contraction shall be provided with sufficient means to
compensate for such movement, without exertion of undue forces to equipment or structures.
This may be accomplished with expansion loops, bellow-type expansion joints, or sliding-
type expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be of stainless steel, monel, rubber, or other
materials, best suited for each individual service. Submit detailed calculations and
manufacturer's shop drawings, guaranteeing satisfactory performance of all proposed
expansion joints, piping layouts showing all anchors and guides, and information on
materials, temperature and pressure ratings.
2.9 PIPE THREADS
A. All pipe threads shall be in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 8
2.10 AIR AND GAS TRAPS
A. Air and gas pipes shall be sloping to low points, provided with drip legs, shutoff valves,
strainers and traps. The traps shall be piped to the nearest drain. Air and gas traps shall be
not less than 150-pound iron body float type with copper or stainless steel float. Bracket,
lever, and pins shall be of stainless steel. Drain traps shall have threaded connections.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Armstrong Machine Works.
2. Spirax Sarco, Inc.
2.11 FLANGED END CONNECTORS (FLANGE COUPLING ADAPTERS)
A. Restrained Flange coupling adapters (RFCA), shall be in accordance with AWWA C219.
B. All flange coupling adapters shall be restrained and be designed to withstand the test
pressure shown on the Drawings. Provide studs and nuts to seal gasket separate and
independent from restraint system.
C. All RFCA shall be rated to withstand the specified test pressure. This may require a custom
fabrication or end flange use by coupling manufacturers
D. All RFCA shall use standard flanges in accordance with AWWA C207. The thickness of the
RFCA flanges shall be equal to or greater than the class of flange that is connected to as
required by the test pressure as shown on the drawings. Buried flanges, couplings shall be
wrapped with petroleum wax tape per AWWA C217 and Division 5. Coordinate connection
to adjacent valves and piping.
E. All Restrained Flange coupling adapters shall be epoxy lined and coated with a potable grade
epoxy per Section 09 90 00 Coatings and Linings.
F. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. ROMAC, RFCA

PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. All pipes, fittings, and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the requirements
of the applicable Sections of Division 33 and 40. The lining manufacturer shall take full
responsibility for the complete, final product and its application. All pipe ends and joints at
screwed flanges shall be epoxy-coated, to assure continuous protection.
B. Where core drilling is required for pipes passing through existing concrete, core drilling
locations shall be determined by radiograph of concrete construction to avoid damage to
embedded raceways and rebars.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 9
C. Flanges shall be installed at least 6-inches from a wall. Fittings shall be installed with
sufficient clearance for maintenance and removal and reinstallation.
3.2 FIELD TESTING
A. All piping shall be tested in accordance with applicable standards and the contract
documents.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPING, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 00 - 10
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 1
SECTION 40 05 07
PIPE SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide pipe supports, seismic restraints, hangers, guides, and anchors,
complete, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall include the following information:
1. Drawings of pipe supports, restraints, hangers, anchors, and guides
2. Calculations for special supports and anchors.
3. Seismic and Wind calculations and certifications for anchors and supports.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Code Compliance: Piping systems and pipe connections to equipment shall be properly
anchored and supported to prevent undue deflection, vibration, dislocation due to seismic
events and line pressures, and stresses on piping, equipment, and structures. Supports and
parts thereof shall conform to the requirements of ASME B31.1 – Power Piping, except as
supplemented or modified below. Supports for plumbing piping shall be in accordance with
the latest edition of the applicable plumbing code or local administration requirements.
B. Structural Members: Wherever possible, pipes shall be supported from structural members.
Where it is necessary to frame structural members between existing members, such
supplementary members shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. All
supplementary members shall be in accordance with the requirements of the building code
and the American Institute of Steel Construction and shall be acceptable to the Engineer.
C. Pipe Hangers: Pipe hangers shall be capable of supporting the pipe in all conditions of
operation, allowing free expansion and contraction of the piping, and preventing excessive
stress on equipment. Hangers shall have a means of vertical adjustment after erection.
Hangers shall be designed to prevent becoming disengaged by any movement of the
supported pipe. Hangers subject to shock, seismic disturbances, or thrust imposed by the
actuation of safety valves, shall include hydraulic shock suppressors. Hanger rods shall be
subject to tensile loading only.
D. Hangers Subject to Horizontal Movements: At hanger locations where lateral or axial
movement is anticipated, suitable linkage shall be provided to permit such movement. Where
horizontal pipe movement is greater than 1/2-inch, or where the hanger rod deflection from
the vertical is greater than 4 degrees from the cold to the hot position of the pipe, the hanger

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 2
rod and structural attachment shall be offset in such a manner that the rod is vertical in the
hot position.
E. Spring-Type Hangers: Spring-type pipe hangers shall be provided for piping subject to
vibration or vertical expansion and contraction, such as engine exhausts and similar piping.
Spring-type hangers shall be sized to the manufacturer's printed recommendations and the
loading conditions encountered. Variable spring supports shall be provided with means to
limit misalignment, buckling, eccentric loading, or to prevent overstressing of the spring, and
with means to indicate at all times the compression of the spring. Supports shall be capable
of accommodating at least four times the maximum travel due to thermal expansion.
F. Thermal Expansion: Wherever expansion and contraction of piping is expected, a sufficient
number of expansion loops or joints shall be provided, together with the necessary rolling or
sliding supports, anchors, guides, pivots, and restraints permitting the piping to expand and
contract freely in directions away from the anchored points. Components shall be structurally
suitable to withstand loads imposed.
G. Heat Transmission: Supports, hangers, anchors, and guides shall be so designed and
insulated, that excessive heat will not be transmitted to the structure or to other equipment.
H. Riser Supports: Where practical, risers shall be supported on each floor with riser clamps
and lugs, independent of the connected horizontal piping.
I. Freestanding Piping: Free-standing pipe connections to equipment such as chemical feeders
and pumps shall be firmly attached to steel frames fabricated from angles, channels, or I-
beams anchored to the structure. Exterior, free-standing overhead piping shall be supported
on fabricated pipe stands consisting of pipe columns anchored to concrete footings, with
horizontal, welded steel angles and U-bolts or clamps securing the pipes.
J. Materials of Construction:
1. General: Pipe support assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, shall be
steel construction, galvanized after fabrication, unless otherwise indicated.
2. Submerged Supports: Submerged piping, as well as piping, conduits, and equipment
in hydraulic structures within 24 inches of the water level, shall be supported with
support, assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, constructed of Type
316 stainless steel, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Corrosive: Piping in chemical and corrosive areas shall be supported with support
assemblies, including framing, hardware, and anchors, constructed of Type 316
stainless steel or FRP, unless otherwise indicated.
K. Point Loads: Any meters, valves, heavy equipment, and other point loads on PVC, FRP, and
other plastic pipes, shall be supported on both sides, according to manufacturer's
recommendations to avoid undue pipe stresses and failures. To avoid point loads, a ll
supports on PVC, FRP, and other plastic piping shall be equipped with extra wide pipe saddles
or galvanized steel shields.
L. Noise Reduction: To reduce transmission of noise in piping systems, copper tubes in
buildings and structures shall be wrapped with a 2-inch wide strip of rubber fabric or similar,
suitable material at each pipe support, bracket, clip, or hanger.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 3
2.2 SUPPORT SPACING
A. Supports for piping with the longitudinal axis in approximately a horizontal position shall be
spaced to prevent excessive sag, bending, and shear stresses in the piping, with special
consideration given where components such as flanges and valves impose c oncentrated
loads. Pipe support spacing shall not exceed the maximum spans in the tables below. For
temperatures other than ambient temperatures, or those listed, and for other piping
materials or wall thicknesses, the pipe support spacings shall be modified in accordance with
the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Vertical supports shall be provided to prevent
the pipe from being overstressed from the combination of all loading effects.
1. Support Spacing for Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 Steel Pipe
Nominal Pipe Diameter
(inches) Maximum Span
(feet)
1/2 6
3/4 and 1 8
1 - 1/4 to 2 10
3 12
4 14
6 17
8 and 10 19
12 and 14 23
16 and 18 25
20 and Greater 30
2. Support Spacing for Welded Fabricated Steel Pipe
Maximum Spans for Pipe Supported in Minimum 120 degree contact saddles (feet)
Nominal Pipe
Diameter (inches)

3/16

1/4

5/16

3/8

7/16

1/2

5/8

3/4

7/8

1
24 33 37 41 43 45 47
26 34 38 41 44 46 48
28 34 38 41 44 47 49
30 34 38 42 45 48 49
32 34 39 42 45 48 50
34 35 39 42 46 48 50
36 35 39 43 46 49 51 55
38 35 39 43 46 49 51 55
40 35 40 43 47 49 52 56
42 -- 40 43 47 50 52 56
45 -- 40 44 47 50 53 57
48 -- 40 44 47 50 53 58 61
51 -- 41 44 48 51 53 58 62
54 -- 41 44 48 51 54 58 62
57 -- 41 44 48 51 54 59 63
60 -- 41 45 48 52 54 59 63 67 70
63 -- 41 45 49 52 55 60 64 67 71
66 -- 41 45 49 52 55 60 64 68 71
72 -- 41 45 49 52 55 61 65 69 72

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 2
78 -- 41 45 49 53 56 61 66 69 73
84 -- 41 46 50 53 56 62 66 70 74
90 -- 41 46 50 53 56 62 67 71 74
96 -- 42 46 50 54 57 62 67 71 75
3. For steel pipe sizes not presented in this table, the support spacing shall be designed
so that the stress on the pipe does not exceed 5,000 psi. Maximum deflection of pipe
shall be limited to 1/360th of the span and shall be calculated by using the formula:
D+32t
7500tD=L
Where: t = Thickness (inches)
D = Diameter (inches)
L = Maximum span (feet)

4. Support Spacing for Ductile-Iron Pipe:
Normal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span
(feet)
All diameters
Two supports per
pipe
length or 10 feet
(one of the 2
supports
located at joint)
5. Support Spacing for Copper Tubing:
Normal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span
(feet)
1/2 to 1 - 1/2 6
2 to 4 10
6 and greater 12
6. Support Spacing for Schedule 80 PVC Pipe:
Normal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span at 100 degrees F
(feet)
1/2 4
3/4 4.5
1 5
1 - 1/4 5.5
1 - 1/2 5.75
2 6.25
3 7.5
4 8.25
6 10
8 11
10 12.25
12 13.25
7. Support Spacing for Schedule 80 Polypropylene Pipe:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 3
Normal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span at 100 degrees F
(feet)
1/2 3
3/4 3.5
1 3.75
1 - 1/4 4
1 - 1/2 4.25
2 4.5
3 5.5
4 6
6 7.25
8 8
10 8.75
12 9.5
8. Support Spacing for Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Pipe:
Normal Pipe Diameter
(inches)
Maximum Span at 100 degrees F
(feet)
2 8.8
3 10
4 11
6 12.7
8 13.4
10 14
12 15.4
14 16.2
16 17.3
16 and Greater 18
2.3 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTS
A. Stock Parts: Where not specifically indicated, designs which are generally accepted as
exemplifying good engineering practice and use stock or production parts, shall be utilized
wherever possible. Such parts shall be locally available, new, of best commercial quality,
designed and rated for the intended purpose.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Basic Engineers Inc., Pittsburgh, PA.
2. Bergen-Paterson Pipesupport Corp., Woburn, MA.
3. Grinnell Corp. (Supply Sales Company), Cranston, RI
4. NPS Products, Inc., Westborough, MA.
5. Power Piping Company, Pittsburgh, PA.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PIPE SUPPORTS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 4
2.4 COATING
A. Galvanizing: Unless otherwise indicated, fabricated pipe supports other than stainless steel
or non-ferrous supports shall be blast-cleaned after fabrication and hot-dip galvanized in
accordance with ASTM A 123 - Specifications for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron
and Steel Products.
B. Other Coatings: Other than stainless steel or non-ferrous supports, all supports shall receive
protective coatings in accordance with the requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Coatings and
Linings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Pipe supports, seismic restraints, hangers, brackets, anchors, guides, and inserts
shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed instructions
and ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be
coordinated with the form work.
B. Appearance: Pipe supports and hangers shall be positioned to produce an orderly, neat
piping system. Hanger rods shall be vertical, without offsets. Hangers shall be adjusted to
line up groups of pipes at the proper grade for drainage and venting, as close to ceilings or
roofs as possible, without interference with other work.
3.2 FABRICATION
A. Quality Control: Pipe hangers, supports, and seismic restraints shall be fabricated and
installed by experienced welders and fitters, using the best welding procedures available.
Fabricated supports shall be neat in appearance without sharp corners, burrs, and edges.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 1
SECTION 40 05 10
MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all exposed and buried mill piping (pipe diameter 6
inches and less) as shown and in accordance with Contract Documents. This section applies
to all mechanical Work and associated piping systems. Work related specifically to plumbing
piping systems shall be performed in accordance with Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing.
B. All work shall be in strict accordance with the International Plumbing Code, and codes of the
State of Utah, City of the construction site, and any other authorities having jurisdiction. The
Contractor shall have required certifications and be thoroughly familiar with the local codes.
The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all necessary permits.
C. This section outlines requirements the following small (pipe diameter 6 inches and less)
mechanical piping and associated accessories:
1. Small steel pipe
2. Solvent welded PVC pipe and Valves
3. CPVC pipe and Valves
4. PVDF pipe
D. The Contractor shall furnish hoses, hose racks and signage where indicated on the Drawings
and as indicated herein.
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Commercial Standards
ANSI/ASME B16.3 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings
ANSI/ASME B16.4 Gray Iron Threaded Fittings,
ASMEB16.5 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,
ANSI B16.11 Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded
ANSI B16.12 Cast-Iron Threaded Drainage Fittings
ANSI/ASME B16.15 Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings, Classes 125 and 250
ANSI B16.21 Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges
ANSI B16.22 Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure
Fittings
ASTM A 53 Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-
Coated Welded and Seamless

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 2
ASTM A 74 Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings
ASTM A 105 Specification for Carbon Steel, Forgings for Piping
Applications
ASTM A 106 Specification for Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High
Temperature Service
ASTM A 312 Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless
Steel Pipe
ASTM A 518 Specification for Corrosion-Resistant High-Silicon Iron
Castings
ASTM B 43 Specification for Seamless Red Brass Pipe, Standard Sizes
ASTM B 62 Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings
ASTM B 88 Specifications for Seamless Copper Water Tube
ASTM D 1785 Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40, 80, and 120
ASTM D 2996 Specification for Filament-Wound Reinforced Thermosetting
Resin Pipe
B. Chlorine Institute Pamphlet 6 Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine
1.3 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. For the materials and equipment items supplied under the provisions of this Section, submit
copies of the manufacturer's product specifications and performance details according to the
requirements of Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures.
B. Product information for all valves shall be submitted in accordance with Section 40 05 51 –
Valves, General.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SMALL STEEL PIPE
A. Unless otherwise indicated, galvanized steel pipe and black steel pipe in sizes 6 inches in
diameter and smaller shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A 53 or ASTM A 106, as
called out in the piping schedule and shall be Schedule 40 or 80 as indicated. Galvanized steel
pipe shall not be cement mortar lined unless otherwise indicated. Fittings for galvanized
steel pipe shall be of galvanized malleable iron, with NPT or grooved ends. Black pipe may
have welded joints, with standard or extra strong welding fittings, or fittings indicated. Wall
thickness of wrought-steel pipe shall comply with ASME B36.10M.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with
threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 3
2. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to
ASME B1.20.1.
3. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel.
4. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint,
and threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1. Unions shall be as manufactured by
Henry Valve Company; Vogt Valve Co.; or equal.
5. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
6. Joint Compound and Tape: Suitable for natural gas.
7. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
8. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for natural gas.
2.2 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE
A. Unless otherwise indicated, stainless steel pipe shall be Type 316 Schedule 40 threaded pipe
conforming to ASTM A 312 with stainless steel threaded fittings, or with stainless steel
welding fittings, where indicated. Lightweight stainless steel pipe shall be Type 316 Schedule
10 pipe conforming to ASTM A 312, with stainless steel welding fittings, or fittings as
indicated.
2.3 COPPER TUBING
A. Hard Copper Tube and Fittings: ASTM B 88, Type L and ASTM B 88, Type M water tube,
drawn temper.
1. Cast-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.18, pressure fittings.
2. Wrought-Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure
fittings. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, 95-5 tin antimony.
3. Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends.
4. Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-and-
socket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
5. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following: Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division;
NIBCO INC.; Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in
each end.
c. NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-
rubber O-ring seal in each end.
6. Copper Push-on-Joint Fittings:
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following:
1) NVent LLC.
b. Description: Cast-copper fitting complying with ASME B16.18 or wrought-
copper fitting complying with ASME B 16.22; with stainless-steel teeth and
EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in each end instead of solder-joint ends.
B. Soft Copper Tube and Fittings: ASTM B 88, Type K and ASTM B 88, Type L water tube,
annealed temper.
1. Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ASME B16.22, wrought-copper pressure fittings.
2. Copper Pressure-Seal-Joint Fittings:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 4
a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products
by one of the following: Elkhart Products Corporation; Industrial Division;
NIBCO INC.; Viega; Plumbing and Heating Systems.
b. NPS 2 and Smaller: Wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber O-ring seal in
each end.
c. NPS 3 and NPS 4: Cast-bronze or wrought-copper fitting with EPDM-rubber
O-ring seal in each end.
2.4 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) PRESSURE PIPE, SOLVENT-WELDED
A. PVC pipe shall be made from all new rigid unplasticized polyvinyl chloride and shall be
Normal Impact Class 12454-B, Schedule 80, conforming to ASTM D 1785, unless otherwise
indicated. Fittings shall be of the same material as the pipe. Unless otherwise indicated, joint
design shall be for solvent-welded construction to the pipe manufacturer's specifications.
Threaded joints shall be made with Teflon tape, only.
2.5 HOSE BIBBS AND HYDRANTS
A. All hose bibbs and hydrants in exposed locations subject to freezing shall be the non-freeze
type. Hose bibbs connected to a non-potable water supply shall be provided with plastic or
stainless-steel warning signs "DO NOT DRINK," in clearly legible letters, and permanently
attached at the hose bibb. Hose bibbs shall be provided with vacuum breakers as furnished
by Crane Co., American Standard, or equal.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal:
Dwg.
Callout

Fixture Type

Description
HB-1 Non-freeze Post-type

Exposed bronze hydrant, post-type, depth of bury
to suit local conditions; minimum 4 feet.
1. Woodward Mfg. Co., Model Iowa Y1

HB-2 Non-freeze wall-type Heavy duty bronze hydrant with nickel-bronze
face, hinged cover, recessed box, and key. Length
to suit wall.
1. Josam Mfg. Co., Series 71000
2. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Fig. 5510/5511
3. Zurn Industries, Inc., Fig. Z-1300

HB-3 Hose valves Heavy duty bronze hydrant, with composition
disc, handwheel, cap and chain.
Sizes 1 1/2-inch and 2 1/2 inch:
1. Fire-End and Croker Corp, Model 180
2. James Jones (Watts Regulator Co., Nos.
J-383 and J-344, respectively

Size 1-inch, without cap and chain:
1. Apollo (Conbraco Industries, Inc.), Model
70-805
2. Fire-End and Croker Corp, Model 180

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 5
Size 3/4-inch, without cap and chain:
1. Apollo (Conbraco Industries, Inc.) Model
70-804, or 78-104
2. Chicago Faucet No.7T
3. Ford Meter Box Co., Model B8H-233HB2
4. Woodford Manufacturing Co., Model Y24
or 24P

HB-4 Wall box type Recessed, with nickel-bronze box, hinged cover,
and key.
1. Josam Mfg. Co., Series 71020
2. Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co., Series 5710
3. Zurn Industries, Inc., Fig. Z-1345

2.6 SHOCK ABSORBERS
A. Install shock absorbers in accordance with Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing.
2.7 ACCESS DOORS AND COVERS
A. Install access doors and covers in accordance with Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing.
2.8 WALL-MOUNTED HOSE RACKS
A. The Contractor shall provide wall-mounted hose racks at locations indicated. Racks shall be
all welded steel construction, of minimum 8-gage sheet steel, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication, and shall have a capacity to hold 100 feet of 3/4-inch or 1-1/2-inch hose. Where
racks are located in the open, they shall be supported from two 2- by 2- by 1/4-inch
galvanized steel angle posts set in a concrete base or as indicated.
2.9 HOSES AND NOZZLES
A. The Contractor shall furnish the following lengths of hose:
1. 1 - 50 ft lengths of 3/4-inch diameter hose
2. 1 - 75 ft lengths of 1-inch diameter hose
B. Each length of hose shall be provided with male and female connectors and nozzle. Hoses
shall be seamless extruded rubber with dacron cotton exterior designed for a working
pressure of at least 200 psi.
C. Nozzles shall be capable of complete shut-off and shall produce a solid straight stream and
up to a 90-degree conical fog. Nozzle material shall be polished brass. Nozzles shall have
rubber bumpers.
D. Nozzle Manufacturers, or Equal:
1. W.D. Allen Mfg. Co., Illinois
2. Fire-End and Crocker Corp., New York
3. Halprin Supply Co., Illinois
4. Western Fire Equipment Co., California

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 6
2.10 GASKETS AND BOLTS
A. Except as otherwise indicated, gaskets for flanged joints shall be in accordance with the
requirements of Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General.
B. Except as otherwise indicated, bolts shall conform to the requirements of Section 05 50 00 –
Metal Fabrications.
2.11 INSULATING CONNECTIONS
A. Insulating bushings, unions, couplings or flanges, as appropriate, shall be used for joining
pipes of dissimilar metals, and for piping systems where corrosion control and cathodic
protection are involved, in accordance with the requirements of Section 22 00 00 –Plumbing
Piping and Fittings.
2.12 PIPE INSULATION
A. Hot and cold liquid piping shall be installed in accordance with Section 22 00 00 – Plumbing.
2.13 PIPE SUPPORTS
A. Pipe Supports, hangers, anchors, seismic restraints, and guides shall be in accordance with
the requirements of Section 40 00 01 - Pipe Supports.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Small Steel Pipe: Buried galvanized or black steel pipe shall be coated as specified in Section
09 90 00 – Coatings and Painting or provided with an extruded high density polyethylene
coating with minimum thickness of 35 mils.
B. Plastic Pipe: PVC, CPVC, and FRP pipe joints shall be solvent-welded in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions. Expansion joints or pipe bends shall be provided to absorb pipe
expansion over a temperature range of 100 degrees F, unless otherwise indicated. Care shall
be taken to provide sufficient supports, anchors, and guides, to avoid stress on the piping.
Obtain the services of the pipe manufacturer, to instruct the pipe fitters in the correct way of
making solvent welded and threaded joints. Only clean, fresh primer and solvent shall be
used at all times at the recommended temperatures.
C. Drain Traps: Drain traps shall be installed at low points in air and gas lines or elsewhere
where indicated. Liquid outlets shall be piped to the nearest floor drain or open sump.
D. Couplings: Pipe couplings shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's
printed recommendations, using the correct style coupling and gasket for any given
application.
E. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gaskets shall be in accordance with the requirements of Section
40 05 00 - Piping, General.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 7
F. Insulating Connections: All insulating connections shall be installed in accordance with
manufacturer's printed instructions. Care shall be exercised to prevent damage to insulating
fittings, while making up the joints.
3.2 CONTINUITY BONDS
A. Where required by the Contract Documents, all metallic pipe joints, except field-welded joints
and insulating joints, shall be continuity bonded in accordance with the requirements of
Section 40 05 00 - Piping, General.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MILL PIPING – EXPOSED AND BURIED
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 10 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 50 - 1
SECTION 40 05 50
MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide miscellaneous valves and appurtenances, complete and
operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General, apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 40 05 51.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR-VACUUM AND AIR-RELEASE VALVES
A. Air and Vacuum Valves: Air and vacuum valves shall be capable of venting large quantities of
air while pipelines are being filled, and allowing air to re-enter while pipelines are being
drained. They shall be of the size indicated, with flanged or screwed ends to match piping.
Bodies shall be of high-strength cast iron or ductile iron. The float, seat, and moving parts
shall be constructed of Type 316 stainless steel. Seat washers and gaskets shall be of a
material insuring water tightness with a minimum of maintenance. Valves shall be designed
for minimum 200 psi water-working pressure and 250 psi test pressure unless otherwise
indicated. Valves to be epoxy lined and coated, NSF 61 potable water compliant in accordance
with Section 09 90 00 Coatings and Linings.
B. Air-Release Valves: Air-release valves shall vent accumulating air while system is in service
under pressure and be of the size indicated. Valves shall meet the same general requirements
as indicated for air and vacuum valves except that the vacuum feature will not be required.
Valves shall be designed for a minimum water-working pressure of 200 psi and 250 psi test
pressure, unless otherwise indicated. Valves to be epoxy lined and coated, NSF 61 potable
water compliant in accordance with Section 09 90 00 Coatings and Linings.
C. Combination Air Valves: Combination air valves shall combine the characteristics of air and
vacuum valves and air release valves by exhausting accumulated air in systems under
pressure and releasing or re-admitting large quantities of air while a system is being filled or
drained, respectively. Valves shall have the same general requirements as indicated for air
and vacuum valves.
D. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corporation)
2. Val-Matic (Valve and Manufacturing Corporation)

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 50 - 2
2.2 AIR AND VACUUM VALVES FOR VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS AND WELLS
A. An air and vacuum valve for the vertical turbine pump shall be installed on the pump
discharge pipe indicated. The valve shall vent large quantities of air out through the orifice
when pump starts, close tight when liquid enters, and permit large quantities of air to re-
enter through orifice when pump stops, to prevent vacuum forming in the pump column.
They shall be of the size indicated, with flanged or screwed ends to match piping. Bodies shall
be of high-strength cast iron. The float, seat, and moving parts shall be constructed of Type
316 stainless steel. Seat washers and gaskets shall be of a material insuring water tightness
with a minimum of maintenance. The discharge orifice shall be fitted with a double-acting
throttling device to regulate and restrict air venting, which shall establish a pressure loading
on the rising column of water and eliminate damaging shock to the pump, controls, and valves
during pump start. On pump stop, a double-acting throttling device shall automatically open,
allowing full line unrestricted air re-entry to prevent any vacuum from forming in the pump
column. The valve shall be designed for minimum 200 psig water-working pressure, and 250
psi test pressure. Valves to be epoxy lined and coated, NSF 61 potable water compliant in
accordance with Section 09 90 00 Coatings and Linings.
B. Manufacturer or Equal
1. Val-Matic (Valve and Manufacturing Corporation)
2. APCO (Valve and Primer Corporation)
2.3 BACKFLOW PREVENTER VALVES
A. General: Backflow preventers shall work on the reduced pressure principle. They shall
consist of 2 spring-loaded check valves, automatic differential pressure relief valve, drain
valves, and shut-off valves. The body material shall be bronze or cast iro n for a working
pressure of not less than 200 psi, with bronze or stainless steel trim. Drain lines with air
gaps shall be provided. The backflow preventer valves shall be in accordance with AWWA
C511 standard.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Cla-Val Company
2. Febco (CMB Industries)
3. Hersey Products
4. Watts, ACV
5. Wilkins Regulator Division (Zurn Industries)
2.4 CORPORATION STOPS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, corporation stops shall be made of solid brass for key operation,
with screwed ends with corporation thread or iron pipe thread, as required. Note that
corporation stops on special chemical diffuser ports shall be 316 stainless steel – unless
indicated otherwise.
B. Manufacturer, or Equal
1. Ford Meter Box Company, Inc.
2. James Jones Company (Watts, ACV)
3. Mueller Company

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 50 - 3
2.5 SOLENOID VALVES
A. Solenoid valves shall be of the size, type, and class indicated and shall be designed for not less
than 200 psi water-working pressure. Valves for water, air, or gas service shall have brass or
bronze body with screwed ends, stainless steel trim and spring, Teflon or other resilient seals
with material best suited for the temperature and fluid handled. Unless otherwise indicated,
for chemicals and corrosive fluids, solenoid valves with PVC, polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF),
or Teflon (PTFE) materials of construction, suitable for the specific application shall be
provided. Enclosures shall be NEMA rated in accordance with the area designations of
Section 26 00 00 – Electrical General Provisions. Coil ratings shall be for continuous duty.
For electrical characteristics see the electrical Drawings or Specifications.
B. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. For general duty
a. Automatic Switch Co. (ASCO), Model RED HAT
b. Skinner Valve (Parker Hannifin Corporation)
c. Magnatrol Valve Corporation
d. J. D. Gould Co.
2. Metallic valves for corrosive fluids
a. Valcor Engineering Corporation
3. Plastic valves for corrosive fluids
a. +GF+ Plastic Systems, Inc.
b. Spears Mfg. Co.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Backflow preventers shall be installed in utility water lines where required by applicable
codes or regulations, and where indicated on Contract Drawings.
B. Valves shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's printed recommendations,
and with Section 40 05 51 Valves General.
C. Backflow preventers, as well as air and vacuum release valves, shall have piped outlets to the
nearest acceptable drain, firmly-supported, and installed in such a way as to avoid splashing
and wetting of floors and obstruction of traffic.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT MISCELLANEOUS VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 50 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 51 - 1
SECTION 40 05 51
VALVES, GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide valves, actuators, and appurtenances, complete and operable,
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all valves and valve actuators except where
otherwise indicated. Valves and actuators in particular locations may require a combination
of units, sensors, limit switches, and controls indicated in other Sections of the Specifications.
C. Where a valve is to be supported by means other than the piping to which it is attached, the
Contractor shall obtain from the valve manufacturer a design for support and foundation that
satisfies the criteria in 4005007 Pipe Supports. The design, including drawings and
calculations sealed by an engineer, shall be submitted with the Shop Drawings. When the
design is approved, the support shall be provided.
D. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for coordination of
design, assembly, testing, and furnishing of each valve; however, the Contractor shall be
responsible to the Owner for compliance with the requirements of each valve section. Unless
indicated otherwise, the responsible manufacturer shall be the manufacturer of the valve.
E. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more valves of the same type and size are required, the
valves shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.
1.2 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures
B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawings shall contain the following information:
1. Valve name, size, Cv factor, pressure rating, identification number (if any), and
specification section number.
2. Complete information on valve actuator, including size, manufacturer, model number,
limit switches, and mounting.
3. Cavitation limits for control valves.
4. Assembly drawings showing part nomenclature, materials, dimensions, weights, and
relationships of valve handles, handwheels, position indicators, limit switches,
integral control systems, needle valves, and control systems.
5. Data in accordance with Section 26 19 00 – Medium-Voltage Induction Motors for
electric motor-actuated valves.
6. Complete wiring diagrams and control system schematics.
7. Valve Labeling: A schedule of valves to be furnished with stainless steel tags,
indicating in each case the valve location and the proposed wording for the label.
C. Technical Manual: The Technical Manual shall contain the required information for each
valve.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 51 - 2
D. Spare Parts List: A Spare Parts List shall contain the required information for each valve
assembly, where indicated.
E. Factory Test Data: Where indicated, signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each
valve requiring certification shall be submitted before shipment of the valve. The data shall
also include certification of quality and test results for factory-applied coatings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS
A. General: Valves and gates shall be new and of current manufacture. Shut-off valves 6-inches
and larger shall have actuators with position indicators. Gate valves 18-inches and larger or
where chain wheel is required, shall be furnished with spur gear and hand wheel. Buried
valves shall be provided with valve boxes and covers containing position indicators and valve
extensions. Manual shut-off valves mounted higher than 7-feet above working level shall be
provided with chain actuators.
B. Valve Actuators: Unless otherwise indicated, valve actuators shall be in accordance with
Section 40 05 57 - Valve and Gate Actuators.
C. Protective Coating: The exterior surfaces of all valves and the wet interior surfaces of ferrous
valves of sizes 4-inches and larger shall be coated in accordance with Section 09 90 00 –
Coatings and Linings. The valve manufacturer shall certify in writing that the required
coating has been applied and tested in the manufacturing plant prior to shipment, in
accordance with these Specifications. Flange faces of valves shall not be epoxy coated.
D. Valve Labeling: Except when such requirement is waived by the construction manager in
writing, a label shall be provided on shut-off valves and control valves except for hose bibbs
and chlorine cylinder valves. The label shall be of 1/16-inch plastic or stainless steel,
minimum 2-inches by 4-inches in size, and shall be permanently attached to the valve or on
the wall adjacent to the valve as directed by the construction manager.
E. Valve Testing: As a minimum, unless otherwise indicated or recommended by the reference
Standards, valves 3-inches in diameter and smaller shall be tested in accordance with
manufacturer's standard, and 4-inches in diameter and larger shall be factory tested as
follows:
1. Hydrostatic Testing: Valve bodies shall be subjected to internal hydrostatic pressure
equivalent to twice the water rated pressure of the valve. Metallic valves rating
pressures shall be at 100 degrees F and plastic valves shall be 73 degrees, or at higher
temperature according to type of material. During the hydrostatic test, there shall be
no leakage through the valve body, end joints, or shaft seals, nor shall any part of the
valve be permanently deformed. The duration shall be sufficient time to allow visual
examination for leakage. Test duration shall be at least 10 minutes.
2. Seat Testing: Valves shall be tested for leaks in the closed position with the pressure
differential across the seat equal to the water rated pressure of the valve. The
duration of test shall be sufficient time to allow visual examination for leakage. Test
duration shall be at least 10 minutes. Leakage past the closed valve shall not exceed

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 51 - 3
1 fluid ounce per hour per inch diameter for metal seated valves and drop-tight for
resilient seated valves.
3. Performance Testing: Valves shall be shop operated from fully closed to fully open
position and reverse under no-flow conditions in order to demonstrate the valve
assembly operates properly.
F. Certification: Prior to shipment, the Contractor shall submit for valves 12 -inches and larger
in size, certified, notarized copies of the hydrostatic factory tests, showing compliance with
the applicable standards of AWWA, ANSI, or ASTM.
G. Valve Marking: Valve bodies shall be permanently marked in accordance with MSS SP25 -
Standard Marking Systems for Valves, Fittings, Flanges, and Unions.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. General: Materials shall be suitable for the intended application. Materials in contact with
potable water shall be listed as compliant with NSF Standard 61. Materials not indicated shall
be high-grade standard commercial quality, free from defects and imperfections that might
affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended. Unless
otherwise indicated, valve and actuator bodies shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Cast Iron: Close-grained gray cast iron, conforming to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings,
Class 30, or to ASTM A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings.
2. Ductile Iron: ASTM A 536 - Ductile Iron Castings, or to ASTM A 395 - Ferritic Ductile
Iron Pressure-Retaining Castings for Use at Elevated Temperatures.
3. Steel: ASTM A 216 - Steel Castings, Carbon Suitable for Fusion Welding for High-
Temperature Service, or to ASTM A 515 - Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for
Intermediate- and Higher-Temperature Service.
4. Bronze: ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, and valve stems
not subject to dezincification shall conform to ASTM B 584 - Copper Alloy Sand
Castings for General Applications.
5. Stainless Steel: Stainless steel valve and operator bodies and trim shall conform to
ASTM A 351 - Steel Castings, Austenitic, for High-Temperature Service, Grade CF8M,
or shall be Type 316 stainless steel.
6. PVC: Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover shall conform to
Cell Classification 12454.
7. CPVC: Chlorinated Poly Vinyl Chloride materials for valve body, flanges, and cover
shall conform to Cell Classification 23447.
8. NSF Standard 61: Materials shall be listed for use in contact with potable water.
2.3 VALVE CONSTRUCTION
A. Bodies: Valve bodies shall be cast, molded (in the case of plastic valves), forged, or welded of
the materials indicated, with smooth interior passages. Wall thicknesses shall be uniform in
agreement with the applicable standards for each type of valve, without casting defects,
pinholes, or other defects that could weaken the body. Welds on welded bodies shall be done
by certified welders and shall be ground smooth. Valve ends shall be as indicated, and be
rated for the maximum temperature and pressure to which the valve will be subjected.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 51 - 4
B. Valve End Connections: Unless otherwise indicated, valves 2-1/2 inches diameter and
smaller may be provided with threaded end connections. Valves 3-inches and larger shall
have flanged end connections.
C. Bonnets: Valve bonnets shall be clamped, screwed, or flanged to the body and shall be of the
same material, temperature, and pressure rating as the body. The bonnets shall have
provision for the stem seal with the necessary glands, packing nuts, or yokes.
D. Stems: Valve stems shall be of the materials indicated, or, if not indicated, of the best
commercial material for the specific service, with adjustable stem packing, O-rings, Chevron
V-type packing, or other suitable seal. Bronze valve stems shall conform to ASTM B 584,
except that zinc content shall not exceed 16 percent.
E. Stem Guides: Stem guides shall be provided, spaced 10-feet on centers unless the
manufacturer can demonstrate by calculation that a different spacing is acceptable.
Submerged stem guides shall be 304 stainless steel.
F. Internal Parts: Internal parts and valve trim shall be as indicated for each individual valve.
Where not indicated, valve trim shall be of Type 316 stainless steel or other best suited
material.
G. Nuts and Bolts: Nuts and bolts on valve flanges and supports shall be in accordance with
Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.
2.4 VALVE ACCESSORIES
A. Valves shall be furnished complete with the accessories required to provide a functional
system.
2.5 SPARE PARTS
A. The Contractor shall furnish the required spare parts suitably packaged and labeled with the
valve name, location, and identification number. The Contractor shall also furnish the name,
address, and telephone number of the nearest distributor for the spare parts of each valve.
Spare parts are intended for use by the Owner, after expiration of the correction of defects
period.
2.6 MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Valve manufacturers shall have a successful record of not less
than 5 years in the manufacture of the valves indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE INSTALLATION
A. General: Valves, actuating units, stem extensions, valve boxes, and accessories shall be
installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions and as indicated. Gates
shall be adequately braced to prevent warpage and bending under the intended use. Valves
shall be firmly supported to avoid undue stresses on the pipe.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 51 - 5
B. Access: Valves shall be installed with easy access for actuation, removal, and maintenance
and to avoid interference between valve actuators and structural members, handrails, or
other equipment.
C. Valve Accessories: Where combinations of valves, sensors, switches, and controls are
indicated, the Contractor shall properly assemble and install such items so that systems are
compatible and operating properly. The relationship between interrelated items shall be
clearly noted on Shop Drawing submittals.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 51 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 52 - 1
SECTION 40 05 52
VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide valve and gate actuators and appurtenances, complete and
operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to valves and gates except where otherwise
indicated in the Contract Documents.
C. Unit Responsibility: The valve or gate manufacturer shall be made responsible for
coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of actuators on the valves and
gates; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for compliance of the valves,
gates, and actuators with the Contract Documents.
D. Single Manufacturer: Where 2 or more valve or gate actuators of the same type or size are
required, the actuators shall be produced by the same manufacturer.
E. The requirements of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General Provisions apply to the Work of this
Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 - Submittal Procedures and Section
40 05 51 - Valves, General.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop Drawing information for actuators shall be submitted together with
the valve and gate submittals as a complete package.
C. Calculations: Selection calculations showing dynamic seating and unseating torques versus
output torque of actuator.
D. Technical Manuals: The Contractor shall furnish technical manuals for the butterfly valves,
butterfly valve manual actuators, and butterfly valve electric motor actuators under one
cover and in accordance with the requirements of Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittals.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Unless otherwise indicated, shut-off and throttling valves and externally actuated valves and
gates shall be provided with manual or power actuators. The Contractor shall furnish
actuators complete and operable with mounting hardware, motors, gears, controls, wiring,
solenoids, handwheels, levers, chains, and extensions, as applicable. Actuators shall have the
torque ratings equal to or greater than required for valve seating and dynamic torques,
whichever is greater, and shall be capable of holding the valve in any intermediate position

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 52 - 2
between fully-open and fully-closed without creeping or fluttering. Actuator torque ratings
for butterfly valves shall be determined in accordance with AWWA C504 - Rubber-Seated
Butterfly Valves. Wires of motor-driven actuators shall be identified by unique numbers.
B. Manufacturers: Where indicated, certain valves and gates may be provided with actuators
manufactured by the valve or gate manufacturer. Where actuators are furnished by different
manufacturers, the Contractor shall coordinate selection to have the fewest number of
manufacturers possible.
C. Materials: Actuators shall be current models of the best commercial quality materials and be
liberally-sized for the required torque. Materials shall be suitable for the environment in
which the valve or gate is to be installed.
D. Actuator Mounting and Position Indicators: Actuators shall be securely mounted by means
of brackets or hardware specially designed and sized for this purpose and be of ample
strength. The word "open" shall be cast on each valve or actuator with an arrow indicating
the direction to open in the counter-clockwise direction. Gear and power actuators shall be
equipped with position indicators. Where possible, manual actuators shall be located
between 48- and 60-inches above the floor or the permanent working platform.
E. Standard: Unless otherwise indicated and where applicable, actuators shall be in accordance
with AWWA C 540 - Power-Actuating Devices for Valves and Slide Gates.
F. Functionality: Electric, pneumatic, and hydraulic actuators shall be coordinated with the
power requirements of Division 26 and instrumentation equipment indicated in Section 40
75 01 – Instrumentation List.
G. Fasteners: Fasteners shall be in accordance with Section 05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.
H. Protective Coatings: Protective coatings shall be in accordance with Section 09 90 00 –
Protective Coatings and Linings.
2.2 MANUAL ACTUATORS
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, valves and gates shall be furnished with manual
actuators. Valves in sizes up to and including 4-inches shall have direct acting lever or
handwheel actuators of the manufacturer's best standard design. Larger valves and gates
shall have gear-assisted manual actuators, with an operating pull of maximum 60 pounds on
the rim of the handwheel. Buried and submerged gear-assisted valves, gates, gear-assisted
valves for pressures higher than 250 psi, valves 30-inches in diameter and larger, and where
so indicated, shall have worm gear actuators, hermetically-sealed water-tight and grease-
packed. Other valves 6-inches to 24-inches in diameter may have traveling nut actuators,
worm gear actuators, spur or bevel gear actuators, as appropriate for each valve.
B. Buried Valves: Unless otherwise indicated, buried valves shall have extension stems to grade,
with square nuts or floor stands, position indicators, and cast-iron or steel pipe extensions
with valve boxes, covers, and operating keys. Where so indicated, buried valves shall be in
cast-iron, concrete, or similar valve boxes with covers of ample size to allow operation of the
valve actuators. Covers of valve boxes shall be permanently labeled as required by the local

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 52 - 3
Utility Company or the Engineer. Wrench nuts shall comply with AWWA C 500 - Metal -
Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.
C. Chain Actuator: Manually-activated valves with the stem located more than 7-feet above the
floor or operating level shall be provided with chain drives consisting of sprocket-rim chain
wheels, chain guides, and operating chains provided by the valve manufacturer. The wheel
and guide shall be of ductile iron, cast iron, or steel, and the chain shall be hot-dip galvanized
steel or stainless steel, extending to 5-feet 6-inches above the operating floor level. The valve
stem of chain-actuated valves shall be extra strong to allow for the extra weight and chain
pull. Hooks shall be provided for chain storage where chains interfere with pedestrian traffic.
D. Floor Stands: Valve actuator floor stands shall be cast iron or fabricated steel pedestals. The
centerline of the actuator shall be approximately 42 to 48 inches above the base of the pedestal.
E. Floor Boxes: Hot dip galvanized cast iron or steel floor boxes and covers to fit the slab
thickness shall be provided for operating nuts in or below concrete slabs. For operating nuts
in the concrete slab, the cover shall be bronze-bushed.
F. Tee Wrenches: Buried valves with floor boxes shall be furnished with 2 operating keys or 1
key per 10 valves, whichever is greater. Tee wrenches sized so that the tee handle will be 2
to 4 feet above ground, shall fit the operating nuts.
G. Manual Worm Gear Actuator: The actuator shall consist of a single or double reduction gear
unit contained in a weather-proof cast iron or steel body with cover and minimum 12-inch
diameter handwheel. The actuator shall be capable of 90 degree rotation and shall be
equipped with travel stops capable of limiting the valve opening and closing. The actuator
shall consist of spur or helical gears or worm gearing. The gear ratio shall be self-locking to
prevent "back-driving." The spur or helical gears shall be of hardened alloy steel and the
worm gear shall be alloy bronze. The worm gear shaft and the handwheel shaft shall be of
17-4 PH or similar stainless steel. Gearing shall be accurately cut with hobbing machines.
Ball or roller bearings shall be used throughout. Output shaft end shall be provided with
spline to allow adjustable alignment. Actuator output gear changes shall be mechanically
possible by simply changing the exposed or helical gearset ratio without further disassembly
of the actuator. Gearing shall be designed for a 100 percent overload. The entire gear
assembly shall be sealed weatherproof. Manual worm gear actuators shall be Auma GS Series,
Limitorque HBC Series, no “Or-Equals”.
H. Traveling-Nut Actuator: The actuator shall consist of a traveling-nut with screw (Scotch
yoke) contained in a weatherproof cast iron or steel housing with spur gear and minimum
12-inch diameter handwheel. The screw shall run in 2 end bearings, and the actuator shall
be self-locking to maintain the valve position under any flow condition. The screw and gear
shall be of hardened alloy steel or stainless steel, and the nut and bushings shall be of alloy
bronze. The bearings and gear shall be grease-lubricated by means of nipples. Gearing shall
be designed for a 100 percent overload.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVE AND GATE ACTUATORS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 52 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Field Adjustments: Field representatives of manufacturers of valves or gates with pneumatic,
hydraulic, or electric actuators shall adjust actuator controls and limit-switches in the field
for the required function.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Valve and gate actuators and accessories shall be installed in accordance with Section 40 05
51 - Valves, General. Actuators shall be located to be readily accessible for operation and
maintenance without obstructing walkways. Actuators shall not be mounted where shock or
vibrations will impair their operation, nor shall the support systems be attached to handrails,
process piping, or mechanical equipment.
B. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: An authorized representative of the manufacturer
shall visit the Site and witness the following:
1. Installation of the equipment for not less than two (2) Work Days
2. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment for not less two (2) Work Days.
3. Startup and field-testing for proper operation for not less than two (2) Work Days.
C. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: The authorized service representative shall visit the Site
for not less than 2 Days to instruct the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance
of the equipment including step-by-step troubleshooting procedures with necessary test
equipment.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BALL VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 63 - 1
SECTION 40 05 63
BALL VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide ball valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General apply to this Section.
C. The requirements of Section 40 05 52 - Valve and Gate Actuators apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures and 40 05 51
- Valves, General.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 METAL BALL VALVES (3-INCHES AND SMALLER)
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, general purpose metal ball valves in sizes up to 4-inches
shall have actuators in accordance with Section 40 05 52 - Valve and Gate Actuators.
B. Body: Ball valves up to and including 1.5-inches in size shall have bronze or 316 stainless
steel 2 or 3 piece bodies with screwed ends for a pressure rating of not less than 600 psi WOG.
Valves 2-inches to 3-inches in size shall have bronze or 316 stainless steel 2 or 3 piece bodies
with flanged ends for a pressure rating of 200 psi unless otherwise indicated.
C. Balls: The balls shall be solid chrome-plated brass or bronze, or stainless steel, with standard
port (single reduction) or full port openings.
D. Stems: The valve stems shall be of the blow-out proof design, of bronze, stainless steel, or
other acceptable construction, with reinforced teflon seal.
E. Seats: The valve seats shall be of teflon or Buna-N, for bi-directional service and easy
replacement.
F. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Conbraco Industries, Inc. (Apollo)
2. ITT Engineered Valves
3. Neles-Jamesbury, Inc.
4. Watts Regulator
5. Worcester Controls

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT BALL VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 63 - 2
2.2 PLASTIC BALL VALVES (1.5-INCHES AND SMALLER)
A. General: Plastic ball valves for corrosive fluids shall be made of polyvinyl chloride (PVC),
chlorinated polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), or polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), as recommended
by the manufacturer for the specific fluid application. Valves shall have manual actuators in
accordance with Section 40 05 52 - Valve and Gate Actuators, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Construction: Plastic ball valves shall have true-union ends or flanged ends to mate with ANSI
B 16.5, class 150 flanges for easy removal. The balls shall have full size ports and teflon seats.
Body seals, union O-ring seals, and stem seals shall be in accordance with the corrosion
resistance requirements specific to each chemical. External (without entering into the wetted
area) seat packing adjustment is preferred. Metal reinforced stems to prevent accidental
breakage are preferred. Ball valves for sodium hypochlorite solution service shall be drilled
through the ball or body per valve manufacturer recommendation to relieve offgas and
equalize pressure across the valve. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non-
shock pressure of 200 psi at 73 degrees F for PVC and CPVC, with decreasing ratings for
higher temperatures and other plastics.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. ASAHI-America
2. George Fischer, Inc.
3. NIBCO Inc., (Chemtrol)
4. Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc.
5. Spears Mfg. Co.
6. Watts Regulator
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General. Care shall be
taken that valves in plastic lines are well supported at each end of the valve.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 64.16 - 1
SECTION 40 05 64.16
RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Provide resilient seated double-offset butterfly valves and appurtenances, complete and
operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. Provide valves of the body type, pressure class, end joint, and actuator type as indicated in
the Valve Schedules on the Contract Drawings.
C. Supply only valves conforming to NSF 61 for use in drinking water applications.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General
B. Section 40 05 52 – Valve and Gate Actuators
C. Section 09 90 00 – Protective Coatings and Linings
1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. ASTM International (ASTM) standards, most recent editions:
ASTM A536 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) standards, most recent editions:
ANSI B16.1 Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings
C. American Water Works Association (AWWA) standards, most recent editions:
AWWA C207 Steel Pipe Flanges for Waterworks Service - Sizes 4 in Through
144 in
AWWA C504 Rubber-Seated Butterfly Valves, 3 in Through 72 in
D. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF), most recent edition:
NSF 61 Drinking Water System Components, Health Effects
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Schedule: Valve manufacturer must demonstrate the ability to meet the Project’s
construction schedule. Include estimated delivery date for valves with valve submittal
documents. If manufacturer is unable to meet the Project’s schedule, Engineer will work with
Contractor to identify an alternative manufacturer.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 64.16 - 2
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures and Section 40 05 51 –
Valves, General.
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS / INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings
1. Provide complete Shop Drawings of butterfly valves and actuators.
2. Provide drawings showing valve port diameter complete with dimensions, part
numbers, and materials of construction.
3. Submit a schedule of butterfly valves to be labeled, indicating in each case the valve
location and the proposed wording for the label.
B. Certificates
1. Provide certification of proof-of-design test from the valve manufacturer.
2. Submit written certification from butterfly valve manufacturer, addressed to Owner,
stating that the butterfly valves and the valve operators will efficiently and
thoroughly perform the required functions in accordance with these Specifications
and as shown.
3. Submit written certification from butterfly valve manufacturer, addressed to Owner,
that manufacturer accepts joint responsibility with Contractor for coordination of all
butterfly valves and valve operators, including motors, drives, controls, and services
required for proper installation and operation of the completely assembled and
installed units.
4. Submit coating system certification for approval, titled, signed, and dated by the
manufacturer’s Coating Department Head, its Compliance Officer, or an equal ranking
staff.
C. Manufacturers’ Instructions
1. Provide written instructions for field procedures for erection, adjustments,
inspection, and testing prior to delivery of the butterfly valves and valve operators.
D. Delivery Schedule
1. Provide estimated date of delivery of valves to the Site.
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A. Operation and Maintenance Data
1. Furnish technical manuals for the butterfly valves, manual operators, and electric
motor valve operators under one cover.
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Subject valves to performance, leakage, and hydrostatic tests in accordance with procedures
and acceptance criteria established by AWWA C504.
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Comply with Section 01 25 10 - Products, Materials, Equipment and Substitutions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 64.16 - 3
B. Cover and store valves on elevated supports in a manner that prevents contact with the
ground and exposure to weather.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Subject to compliance with the Contract Documents, the following Manufacturers and
products are acceptable:
1. Resilient seated butterfly valves
a. Av-Tek DEX Double Offset
b. VAG Group, EKN Double Offset
c. No equal.
2. Valve actuators
a. Flowserve Limitorque
b. Rotork Controls, Inc.
c. No equal
2.2 BUTTERFLY VALVES 4-INCH AND LARGER – CLASS 150B AND 250B
A. General:
1. Provide double-offset resilient butterfly valves designed expressly for waterworks
application, whereby the elastomeric seal is not compressed with the valve in the
open position.
2. Zero, single, and API based triple offset butterfly valve designs are not acceptable.
3. For water working pressures up to 250 psi, provide valves conforming to AWWA
C504, Class 150B.
4. For water working pressures greater than 250 psi, provide valves conforming to
AWWA C504, Class 250B.
5. Provide valves of the size and class indicated in the valve schedule on the Contract
Drawings.
6. Unless noted otherwise, size all valves for bi-directional water service, full rated
pressure, line velocity of 16 feet per second, and suitable for higher line break
velocities of 50 fps.
7. Provide lifting lugs for all valves 24-inch and larger.
B. Flanges:
1. Provide ANSI B16.1, Class 125 flanges for Class 150B flanged valves.
2. For sizes up through 48-inch diameter, provide ANSI B16.1, Class 250 flanges for
Class 250B flanged valves unless otherwise noted or if mating to ductile iron pipe.
3. For sizes above 48-inch diameter, provide flange outside diameter, number of bolts,
diameter of bolt circle, and diameter of bolts per AWWA C207, Class E.
C. Body:
1. Ductile iron, per ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 or ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18. Cast
gray iron is not allowed.
2. Provide lay lengths matching AWWA C504 “short body” designation.
3. Include integrally cast support feet top and bottom of valve body.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 64.16 - 4
4. Mechanically equip valve with stainless steel tag stamped or engraved, indicating
manufacturer and reference build data.
5. For valve sizes 54 inch and larger, include two such tags diametrically opposed.
6. Make valve build data available upon request by Owner. Manufacturer to retain same
information for no less than 70 years unless noted longer.
7. Protect the entire valve body and flanges using epoxy corrosion coating, except for
the valve shaft bores.
D. Disc:
1. Ductile iron per ASTM A536, Grade 65-45-12 or ASTM A536, Grade 60-40-18.
2. Coat the entire disc and all its wetted surfaces without exception.
3. Provide Type 316 stainless steel for disc’s elastomeric seal retainer. Neither bronze
nor carbon steel is acceptable.
4. Provide both the disc and elastomeric seal retainer with recesses designed to retain
a dual shouldered seal under extreme localized velocities, at full differential opening
and/or line break closing.
5. Mechanically fasten the disc to the valve shaft using tangential stainless steel shaft
pins of Type 316 or better alloy. Extend disc pins completely through the valve and
mechanically fasten.
6. Coat the entire disc except for the disc shaft bores.
E. Shaft:
1. Dual stub shafts of Type 316 stainless steel.
2. Provide valve shaft material and thickness suitable for the application pressure and
velocity without reduction to its safety factors.
3. Do not turn down shafts to fit drive splines without accompanying torsional strength
reduction calculations and its effect on the safety factor.
F. Elastomeric Seal and Seal Ring:
1. EPDM seal, secured to a completely coated valve disc by a Type 316 stainless steel,
continuous non-segmented seal ring and secured by Type 316 stainless steel
fasteners.
2. When exposed to localized velocities less than 300 fps, the seal must not scallop, cold
flow or tear.
3. Do not penetrate the elastomeric seal with fasteners.
4. Valve must be bi-directionally leak free.
5. Double shoulder the elastomeric seal and extend no greater than 0.25 inch past the
disc edge to seat the valve.
6. Design seal to flex in either flow direction.
7. Provide a small gap on both sides of seal which will allow for pipeline pressurized
media to further expand the seal against the metallic seat when subjected to higher
differential pressure or velocity.
8. The elastomeric seal must be field replaceable and adjustable in line, requiring no
special skills or tools to replace the seat. With access to the seat retaining bolts, the
seat removal, replacement, and readiness for service must be able to be accomplished
in a maximum of 3 hours for all size valves.
9. Seat methods which do not comply, or which use irreplaceable vulcanized seals,
hardened epoxy, or grout in a dovetailed groove are not acceptable.
G. Metallic Seat:

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 64.16 - 5
1. Highly wear-resistant alloy of stainless steel.
2. Locate the metallic valve seat inside the valve body.
3. Allow no gap between the valve body and metallic body seat and consequently no
potential for corrosion or lifting of the seat.
4. Attach seat using a high alloy weld overlay process. Do not use mechanical fasteners
to attach metallic seats.
H. Shaft Seals:
1. Provide multi-O-ring shaft seals protecting both the OD and ID of the shaft bearings ,
and not requiring periodic manual adjustment.
2. Design seals to prevent pressurized system water from entering the uncoated valve
disc hub and valve body shaft bore.
3. The valve shaft must remain non-wetted and unpressurized, with the non-wetted
shaft allowing the actuator to be removed without dewatering the pipeline.
4. Seal design must prevent debris and system pressurized water from entering the
uncoated valve body shaft bore and prevent waters or contaminated media, external
to the valve, from entering through the valve shaft under vacuum/ negative pressure
conditions in the pipeline, or hydrostatic pressure conditions external to the valve.
5. Neither manual pulldown packing glands nor braided packing are allowed.
6. Provide replaceable cartridge-type outer shaft seals, bolted to the valve body.
7. Packing shall not be held in place with an adapter plate or by the valve actuator.
I. Shaft Bearings:
1. Corrosion resistant, self-lubricating sleeve type made of bronze, stainless steel or
stainless steel backed PTFE.
2. Calculate valve input torque requirements including choice of bearing and bearing
friction.
J. Strength:
1. Proportion and size all parts of the valve and actuator to withstand, without failure,
the stresses occurring under the testing and operating conditions.
2. Limit maximum allowable stress in any material to 20 percent of the ultimate tensile
strength or 33 percent of the minimum yield strength.
3. Rate Class 150B valves to receive a pressure test of 150 psi and Class 250B valves to
receive a pressure test of 250 psi applied to one side of the disc with zero pressure
applied to the other side of the disc while in the closed position, without damage or
permanent deformation to any part of the valve, seat, disc, or shaft.
4. Design valve to be capable of withstanding such pressures in both directions.
K. Safety Disc Pinning:
1. Where shown or noted in the Contract Documents, provide an integrated safety
locking device. The valve shall have an externally lockable disc in the closed position.
2. Provide calculations to verify that the disc cannot rotate even with the full stall output
torque of the actuator.
3. Disc to remain in the zero-leak sealed closed position even if the entire actuator is
removed for safety or maintenance.
4. With the actuator and/or the adapter plate removed, the valve must not leak through
the stem.
5. The locking device shall be handwheel operated; stainless steel wetted construction,
pad lockable and suitable for lock out/tag out safety procedures.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 64.16 - 6
L. Valve Actuators:
1. Provide actuators conforming to Section 40 05 52 – Valve and Gate Actuators and to
AWWA C540, subject to the following additional requirements:
2. Manual actuators:
a. Provide self-locking actuators that hold the valve disc in the closed, open, and
any intermediate position without creeping or fluttering.
b. Incorporate a mechanical stop-limiting device to prevent over travel of the
disc.
c. Unless direct-buried or otherwise indicated, equip all manually actuated
butterfly valves with a handwheel and external position indicator. The
number of turns for direct buried valves shall be a minimum of 1.4 times the
nominal valve size with no fewer than 25 turns.
d. Hold the valve manufacturer responsible for mounting and testing the
actuator.
e. Screw-type (traveling nut) actuators are not permitted due to their
inconsistent output torques through the 90 deg stroke.
f. Design manual direct-buried service actuators for 300 foot-pound input
torque against the closed and open travel stops.
g. Owner reserves the right to field verify these design settings.
3. Worm-gear actuators:
a. Equip all valves, including submerged and buried valves, with AWWA worm-
gear actuators, lubricated and sealed to prevent entry of dirt or water into the
housing.
b. Pack buried service valves at 90% or greater grease pack.
c. Pack submerged service valves in potable water applications at 100% grease
filled with FDA approved food grade grease. Submit documentation for the
selected grease for submerged service valves.
d. Owner reserves the right to field verify grease levels.
e. Non-complying gears must be remedied by the gear manufacturer, verified by
the Owner, and signed off by both parties.
M. Hardware:
1. Provide Type 316 Stainless Steel for all fasteners.
N. Paint and coatings:
1. Manufacturer to have and follow a system of valve preparation and coating which
assures a quality holiday-free application, and which maximizes the available multi-
decade protection the coating offers.
2. Manufacturers that do not properly prepare or coat their valves will not be accepted.
3. The manufacturer must provide its written system of valve preparation and coating.
Include the methodologies used (QC) as well as post application review (QA). It must
be based on a professional system of coating and grading such as NACE, SSPC, GSK,
ISO or DIN and must include both text and color photo-documentation. The
manufacturer’s coating system must be documented as well as implemented with a
quality assurance program to prevent unacceptable deviation.
a. Valves 48” and smaller (open-close): Provide all external and internal
surfaces, except for the seating surface, with 400 deg F plus, heat bonded
fusion coating. Properly note and repair all coatings damaged in shipping or
installation to Owner’s satisfaction.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 64.16 - 7
b. Valves 48-inch and smaller (modulating): Provide all external and internal
surfaces, except for the seating surface, with 400 deg F plus, heat bonded
fusion coating. Line internal surfaces with rubber (i.e., ebonite). Properly
note and repair all coatings damaged in shipping or installation to Owner’s
satisfaction.
c. Valves 54-inch and larger: Epoxy line and coat in accordance with System No.
1 per Section 09 90 00 – Protective Coatings. Properly note and repair all
coatings damaged in shipping or installation to Owner’s satisfaction.
d. Valve coating color: Provide white or blue colored coatings. Red Oxide or any
near color to rust is not acceptable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install exposed butterfly valves in a manner whereby the complete valve can be removed
without dismantling the valve or operator. Install in accordance with Section 40 05 51-
Valves General.
B. Lifting and moving valves:
1. Use provided lifting lugs to move all project valves.
2. The use of chains, lifting straps, rope or any type other strapping through the valve
body is strictly prohibited.
3. Be responsible for correct lifting procedures. Consult with the valve manufacturer,
as necessary.
4. Be responsible for all damage and project delays resulting from improper lifting and
moving procedures, including but shall not be limited to, pulling the valve body out
of round, gouges, scratches, displacing the gear box, etc.
C. Butterfly valves 16-inch and larger must be inspected and certified by the manufacturer that
the final installation meets all the manufacturers requirements, and that the actuator and disk
have not changed positions from that which was successfully tested at the factory.
D. Take care to assure valves are not installed under stress. Do not force adjacent mating flanges
into position under any circumstances. Use progressive and proper star cross pattern to
tighten valve flange mating bolts.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field Tests and Inspections
1. Make performance tests on all completely installed valves as follows:
a. Operate each valve 3 times from fully closed to fully opened position, and the
reverse, under a no-flow condition.
b. Hydrostatically test each valve concurrently with the adjacent pipeline.
Verify that there is no visible leakage at the joints.
c. Repair any joints that show signs of leakage prior to final acceptance.
d. Properly protect any special parts of control systems or operators that might
be damaged by the pipeline test.
e. Repair any damage caused by testing.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT RESILIENT SEATED BUTTERFLY VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 64.16 - 8
2. Conduct a leak test to verify that bubble tight shut-off has been achieved in both flow
directions with operating pressure on one side of the disc and atmospheric pressure
on the other. Owner reserves the right to field verify that valve leakage is zero.
3. Failure by Owner to inspect or witness tests at the manufacturer's plant does not
equate to waiving inspection and/or testing upon delivery.
B. Manufacturer Services
1. Cause an authorized service representative of the valve manufacturer to visit the Site
for a minimum of one service day for each two valves which are electrically,
pneumatically, or hydraulically actuated. The representative must certify to Owner
in writing, that the equipment and controls have been properly installed, tested, and
readied for operation.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 65 - 1
SECTION 40 05 65
VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide check valves and appurtenances, complete and operable, in
accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General.
B. For valves 16-inch or greater, submit the flow versus head loss curve for the full range of
flow from 0 to maximum operating flow.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PUMP CONTROL VALVES
A. Function: Pump control valves shall be of the deep well pump control valve type and shall
provide smooth hydraulic performance for pump starting and stopping and minimization of
surges by slow opening and closing feature and diversion of water flow to bypass or
discharge. The pump is started and stopped with the valve in the open position.
B. Operation: The valves shall be hydraulically-operated, with diaphragm action, solenoid pilot-
controlled with adjustable opening and closing rates, and shall be of the globe or angle
pattern as indicated. Necessary repairs shall be possible without removing the valves from
the pipeline.
C. Valve Body: The valve body shall be of Ductile Iron to ASTM A 536. Flanges, and Pipe Fittings,
with 150 lb or 300 lb flanged ends to ANSI/ASME B 16.42 as required for pressure rating.
The valve cover shall be flanged and be the same material as the body. Body shall have
potable water NSF 61 approved fusion bonded epoxy lining and coating. Valve and controls
to have a pressure rating equal or greater to the specified test pressure indicated on the
drawings.
D. Valve Trim: The valve stems with position indication, springs, body seat rings, and bolts, nuts,
and washers shall be of Type 302, 303, or 316 stainless steel. The valve stems shall have top
and bottom guides. Rubber parts shall be Buna-N. The diaphragms shall be of Nylon-
reinforced Buna-N, supported firmly between body and valve cover. The valve pistons and
piston liners shall be bronze to ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
E. Valve Controls: The valve shall be provided with a complete, externally mounted control
system, including speed control needle valves, solenoid valves, strainers, isolation valves,
pressure gauge option and necessary 316 stainless steel connecting tubing, fittings and other

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 65 - 2
features as required. The controls shall be capable of achieving the flow and speed
adjustment required for smooth operation. Valve shall be equipped with back pressure
control valves and features.
F. Factory Tests and Warranty: Valves shall be factory tested with a hydrostatic test and a
functional test and a test certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to delivery of the
valve. The valve shall be warranted for a period of 3 years from the date of shipment to be
free of defects in materials and workmanship.
G. Operating Conditions: The valves shall be designed to operate under the conditions as
specified in the specific Division 43 equipment specification or as identified in the general,
mechanical, electrical and P&ID drawings.
H. Solenoid Control: Solenoid to be 120 V AC
I. Spare Parts: The following spare parts shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33
20:
1. One set of all resilient seals and discs
2. One diaphragm (for diaphragm valves, only)
J. Manufacturer, or approved equal:
1. Cla-Val 61-36
2. Singer Valve S106-DW-R
2.2 SWING CHECK VALVES (2-1/2 INCHES AND SMALLER)
A. General: Swing check valves for steam, water, oil, or gas in sizes 2-1/2 inches and smaller
shall be suitable for a steam pressure of 150 psi and a cold water pressure of 300 psi. Units
shall have screwed ends unless otherwise indicated, and screwed caps.
B. Body: The valve body and cap shall be of bronze conforming to ASTM B 763 - Copper Alloy
Sand Castings for Valve Application, or ASTM B 584 with threaded ends conforming to ASME
B1.20.1 - Pipe Threads, General Purpose (inch).
C. Disc: Valves for steam service shall have bronze or brass discs conforming to ASTM B 16 -
Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar, and Shapes for Use in Screw Machines, and for cold water, oil,
and gas service replaceable composition discs.
D. Hinge Pin: The hinge pins shall be of bronze or stainless steel.
E. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Crane Company
2. Milwaukee Valve Company
3. Stockham Valves and Fittings
4. Wm. Powell Company

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 65 - 3
2.3 INTERNAL SPRING-LOADED CHECK VALVES (GLOBE STYLE – SILENT CHECKS)
A. General: Internal spring-loaded check valves for water pumps, compressors, gas, air, and
steam shall be of the full-flow internal spring-loaded poppet type. The valves shall be
designed for a water-working pressure of not less than 200 psi unless otherwise indicated.
B. Body: The bodies of valves 3-inches and larger shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM A
126 with 125 lb or 300 lb flanged ends conforming to ASME B 16.1 unless otherwise
indicated. Where necessary, there shall be a positive, watertight seal between the removable
seat and the valve body. The stem guide shall be integrally cast with the body or screwed into
the body. Valve to have 200 psi working pressure rating.
C. Valves smaller than 3-inches shall have bronze bodies with screwed ends conforming to
ASME B 1.201, suitable for a minimum working pressure of 200 psi, and a temperature of 250
degrees F, unless otherwise indicated. The type of bronze shall be suitable for the intended
service.
D. Disc and Stem: The disc and stem of all valves in sizes 3-inches and larger shall be 316
stainless steel. The stem shall have 2 point bearings. The downstream bearing shall have a
bronze or other suitable bushing, to provide a smooth operation.
E. Valves smaller than 3-inches shall have discs and retaining rings of Teflon, nylon, or other
suitable material, and stems of bronze, brass, or stainless steel, suitable for the intended
service.
F. Stem Guide: The stem guide shall be either firmly fixed in the valve body to prevent it from
sliding into the adjacent pipe and damaging the pipe lining, or the valve manufacturer shall
provide each valve with one matching flange compatible with the adjacent pipe and its lining
to prevent damage to the lining. The compatible flange shall be part of the Shop Drawing
submittal.
G. Seat: Valves for general service at temperatures up to 250 degrees F shall have bubble-tight
shut-off with resilient seats of Buna-N, Teflon, or other suitable material. Valves for steam
service and temperatures over 250 degrees F shall have metal-to-metal seating of bronze or
stainless steel, as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific service condition.
Resilient seats shall be firmly attached to the seating ring by compression molding or other
acceptable method.
H. Spring: Valves in sizes 3-inches and larger shall have Type 316 stainless steel springs, and
valves smaller than 3-inches shall have stainless steel or beryllium copper springs, as suitable
for the service. The spring tension of the valves shall be designed for the individual pressure
condition of each valve.
I. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. APCO (Valve and Primer Corp.)
2. CPV (Combination Pump Valve Company)
3. Miller Valve Co., Inc.
4. VAL-MATIC (Valve and Manufacturing Corporation)

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 65 - 4
2.4 PLASTIC BALL CHECK VALVES
A. General: Plastic ball check valves for corrosive fluids, in sizes up to 4-inches, shall be used for
vertical up-flow conditions only, unless the valves are provided with spring actions.
B. Construction: The valve bodies and balls shall be of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), chlorinated
polyvinyl chloride (CPVC), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), or polypropylene (PP)
construction, as best suited for each individual service condition. They shall have unions with
socket connections or flanged ends conforming to ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged
Fittings, class 150. Seals shall have Viton O-rings, and valve design shall minimize possibility
of the balls sticking or chattering. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non-
shock pressure of 150 psi at 73 degrees F.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. ASAHI-AMERICA
2. George Fischer, Inc.
3. NIBCO Inc. (Chemtrol Division)
4. Spears Mfg. Co. (PVC, CPVC, AND PP only)
2.5 METAL BALL AND LIFT CHECK VALVES
A. General: Metal ball check valves for saturated steam, oil, water, and gas in sizes 1/2- up to 1-
inch shall be used for horizontal installation only. Lift check valves for LP gas in sizes 1/4 up
to 2-inches shall be used for horizontal installation only.
B. Construction: The ball check valve body and cap shall be bronze ASTM B 584. Ball disc shall
be stainless steel construction, as best suited for each individual service condition. The union
cap shall provide a tight joint and be easily dismantled when necessary. They shall have
screwed connections. The valves shall be suitable for a maximum working non-shock
pressure of 200 psi saturated steam or non-shock cold water, oil, and gas rating of 300 psi.
C. The lift check valve body, and cap shall be leaded bronze ASTM B 763. Disc shall be special
composition, as best suited for petroleum service condition. The disc shall be secured to the
disc by means of a disc retaining nut. To protect against leakage on light oils and gases, the
disc shall be sealed into the holder. The union cap shall provide a tight joint, easily dismantled
when necessary. They shall have screwed connections. The valves shall be suitable for a
maximum working non-shock pressure of 400 psi cold water, oil, gas, LP gases, and volatile
fluids.
D. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. Crane
2.6 PLASTIC SWING OR WYE-CHECK VALVES
A. General: Plastic swing or wye-check valves for corrosive fluids, in sizes up to 8-inches or as
available, may be used for horizontal or vertical up-flow conditions.
B. Construction: The valve bodies and discs or piston shall be of PVC, PP, or PVDF construction
as best suited for each individual service condition. They shall have flanged ends conforming
to ASME B16.5 Class 150, and flanged top access covers and shall shut positively at no-flow

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 65 - 5
conditions. The seats and seals shall be of EPDM, Teflon, or Viton. The PVC valves shall be
rated for a maximum non-shock working pressure of 200 psi at 73 degrees F for sizes 3-
inches and smaller. For larger sizes and other materials and temperatures the pressure
rating may be lower.
C. Manufacturers, or Equal
1. ASAHI-AMERICA
2. George Fischer, Inc.
3. Spears Mfg. Co. (Plastic Swing Check only)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General.
3.2 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The service representative of the valve
manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 1-Day, to assist the Contractor in the installation
and adjustment of the valve(s).
B. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: The training representative of the valve manufacturer
shall be present at the Site for 1-Day to instruct the personnel in the operation, adjustment,
and maintenance of the valve(s).
C. For the purpose of this paragraph, a Day is defined as an 8-hour period, excluding travel time.

END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VALVES FOR PUMP CONTROL AND CHECK SERVICE
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 65 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 69 - 1
SECTION 40 05 69
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide pressure relief valves and appurtenances, complete and
operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 40 05 51 - Valves, General, apply to this Section.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal Procedures and 40 05
51 – Valves, General, including a cavitation study from the valve manufacturer.
1.3 SPECIAL WARRANTY REQUIREMENT
A. The valve shall be warranted for a period of 3 years from the date of shipment to be free of
defects in materials and workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Function: The pressure relief valve shall open when the inlet pressure exceeds a set
maximum level. It shall maintain that level and gradually close as the inlet pressure drops
below the maximum pressure.
B. Operation: The valves shall be hydraulically-operated, with diaphragm or piston direct
action, pilot-controlled, per paragraph 2.2, and shall be of the globe or angle pattern as
indicated. Necessary repairs shall be possible without removing the valves from the
pipeline. The smaller direct-acting valves with threaded ends per paragraph 2.3, shall be
suitable for water or air service and shall be of the globe pattern.
2.2 FLANGED VALVES, SIZES 1-1/2 INCHES THROUGH 42-INCHES
A. Valve Characteristics: The pressure relief valve shall open when the inlet pressure exceeds
a set maximum level. It shall maintain that level and gradually close as the inlet pressure
drops below the maximum pressure. The valve shall be a hydraulically operated,
adjustable, pilot controlled, diaphragm type globe or angle valve as indicated. All necessary
repairs shall be possible without removing the valve from the pipeline.
B. Valve Body: The valve body shall be of cast iron to ASTM A 48 - Gray Iron Castings, or ASTM
A 126 - Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings, with 125 lb flanged ends to
ANSI/ASME B 16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and
800. The valve cover shall be flanged and be the same material as the body. Contractor is to
select the appropriate valve pressure class (200 psi minimum operating pressure, 250 psi
test pressure)as listed in the valve schedule and as recommended by the valve
manufacturer to provide suitable operating service.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 69 - 2
C. Valve Trim: The valve stems with position indication, springs, body seat rings, and bolts,
nuts, and washers shall be of Type 302, 303, or 316 stainless steel. The valve stems shall
have top and bottom guides. Rubber parts shall be Buna-N. The diaphragms shall be of
Nylon-reinforced Buna-N, supported firmly between body and valve cover. The valve
pistons and piston liners shall be bronze to ASTM B 62 - Composition Bronze or Ounce
Metal Castings.
D. Valve Controls: The valve shall be provided with a complete, externally mounted control
system, including speed control needle valves, strainers, check valve, isolation valves, and
necessary 316 stainless steel connecting tubing and fittings. Valve shall be equipped with
limit switch to notify scada system that the relief vlave has opened or closed. (Cla -val X105L
or eqyual). The Valve and controls shall be capable of achieving the flow and speed
adjustment indicated.
1. 5000 gpm
2. Adjustment range 100-300 psi. Anticipated setting 195 psi
E. Factory Tests and Warranty: Valves shall be factory tested with a hydrostatic test and a
functional test and a test certificate shall be submitted to the Engineer prior to delivery of
the valve. The valve shall be warranted for a period of 3 years from the date of shipment to
be free of defects in materials and workmanship.
F. Operating Conditions: The valves shall be designed to operate under the conditions as
specified in the specific equipment specification or as identified in the Contract P&ID
drawings.
G. Spare Parts: The following spare parts shall be furnished in accordance with Section 40 05
51 – Valves, General:
1. One set of all resilient seals and discs
2. One diaphragm (for diaphragm valves, only)
H. Manufacturers, or equal
1. Cla-Val Company
2. Singer Valve, Inc.
2.3 THREADED VALVES, SIZES 1/2 TO 2-1/2 INCHES
A. Valve Body: The valve body shall be bronze to ASTM B 62 or cast steel, with a minimum
pressure rating of 300 psi, and with threaded ends. The valve shall be provided with an
integral or an attached strainer with access cap or plug and a flanged or threaded valve
cover. The valve shall be actuated by a diaphragm or piston.
B. Valve Trim: The valve stems, springs, body seats, and washers shall be of Series 300
stainless steel. The strainers shall be of stainless steel or Monel and the diaphragms shall be
of reinforced neoprene. The valve pistons and piston liners shall be bronze to ASTM B 62.
C. Operating Conditions: The valves shall be designed to operate under the conditions as
specified in the specific Division 11 equipment specification or as identified in the Contract
P&ID drawings.
D. Spare Parts: The following spare parts shall be furnished in accordance with Section 40 05
51 – Valves, General:
1. One complete set of resilient seals and discs
2. One diaphragm (for diaphragm valves, only)

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 69 - 3
E. Manufacturers, or equal
1. Cla-Val Company
2. Fisher Controls
3. GA Industries
4. Watts, ACV
5. Wilkins Regulator Div. (Zurn Industries)
2.4 PLASTIC VALVES, SIZES 1/2 THROUGH 1-1/2 INCHES
A. Plastic pressure reducing valves shall be designed for not less than 200 psi water working
pressure and shall be suitable for the fluid service. For chemicals and corrosive fluids,
solenoid valves shall be PVC, CPVC, polypropylene (PP), polyvinylidene fluoride (PVDF), or
Teflon materials of construction as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific
application.
B. Characteristics: Valves shall open when the outlet pressure drops below a set minimum
value and maintain the pressure and open wide as flow requirements dictate. Valves shall
be spring or hydraulically operated, direct acting, adjustable, diaphragm or piston type as
indicated.
C. Manufacturers, or equal
1. Corrosive Fluids
2. Plast-O-Matic Valves, Inc.
3. George Fisher
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Valves shall be installed in accordance with provisions of Section 40 05 51 – Valves, General.
3.2 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURERS
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The service representative of the valve
manufacturer shall be present at the Site for 1-Day, to assist the Contractor in the
installation and adjustment of the valve(s).
B. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: The training representative of the valve manufacturer
shall be present at the Site for 1-Day to instruct the personnel in the operation, adjustment,
and maintenance of the valve(s).
C. For the purpose of this paragraph, a Day is defined as an 8-hour period, excluding travel
time.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 05 69 - 4
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 71 13 - 1
SECTION 40 71 13
FLOW-MAGNETIC
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Instruments for instrumentation and control systems that are to be permanently
installed.
B. Related Sections
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. All instruments shall comply with the latest edition and standards of the Instrumentation
Systems and Automation Society.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all instruments as identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, Drawings, and
instrument data sheets.
B. Install and connect all instruments as per the manufacturer’s recommendations for the
particular installation.
C. Calibration of instruments shall be performed by the Instrumentation and Control Systems
Contractor.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 20 Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Complete manufacturer’s brochures identify instrument construction, accuracy,
ranges, materials, and options.
2. Completed instrument data sheets including catalog number and source for
determining catalog number.
3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 71 13 - 2
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Mechanical connection diagrams.
2. Sensor transducer mounting requirements with dimensions and elevations.
3. Electrical connection diagrams.
D. Test Reports:
1. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that
require set-up and calibration.
a. Including factory calibration for each instrument with stated accuracy.
E. Operating Manuals:
1. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that
require set-up and calibration.
a. Including factory calibration for each instrument with stated accuracy.
2. Complete installation, calibration, and testing manuals.
F. Record Drawings:
1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span, PLC I/O address, register,
and scaling coefficients.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for proving flow meter operation and 4-
20 ma loop accuracy.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store all instruments in a dedicated van or structure with space conditioning to meet the
recommended storage requirements provided by the manufacturer.
1. Any instruments that are not stored in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation shall be replaced at no additional costs to the Owner.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. All instruments must be compatible for the installed site conditions including but not limited
to material compatibility, site altitude, installed temperature and humidity conditions.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard warranty, modified to agree with the Contract Documents.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide a spare pipe spool for each meter size to be used in the event the meter tube must be
removed.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 71 13 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. As identified on the instrument data sheets and Drawings.
B. Hardware Commonality:
1. All instruments, which utilize a common measurement principle, for example, d/p
cells, pressure transmitters, level transmitters that monitor hydrostatic head, shall be
furnished by a single Manufacturer.
2. All panel-mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance.
3. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class,
and shall be from a single Manufacturer.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Flow Meters:
1. Magnetic Flow Meters.
a. General:
1) Magnetic flowmeter systems shall be of the low frequency
electromagnetic induction type and produce a DC pulsed linear signal
which is directly proportional to the liquid flow rate.
2) Complete zero stability shall be an inherent characteristic of the
flowmeter system.
3) Each magnetic flow metering system shall include:
a) A metering tube.
b) Signal cable.
c) Transmitter.
d) Flow meter grounding rings.
b. Source quality control.
1) Shall be manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of
ISO Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in
Design/Development, Production, Installation, and Servicing.
c. Metering tube:
1) Constructed of carbon steel, with ANSI Class 150 carbon steel flanged
connections, fusion bonded epoxy coating. Liner shall be PTFE.
2) Utilize a minimum of 2 bullet-nosed, 316 Ti Stainless Steel, self-
cleaning electrodes.
3) Liner in conformance with:
a) As identified on the instrument data sheet.
b) Manufacturer’s recommendations for the intended service.
c) Whichever is the more stringent.
4) Electrodes in conformance with:
a) As identified on the instrument data sheet.
b) Manufacturer’s recommendations for the intended service.
c) Whichever is the more stringent.
5) Meter housing NEMA 6 (submersible).
6) Meter coating consisting of epoxy painted finish.
7) Drinking water approved.
8) 100 feet of encapsulated cable.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 71 13 - 4
9) Two grounding rings:
a) Which are in conformance with the Manufacturer’s bore and
material recommendation for the meter’s intended service.
b) Designed to protect and shield from abrasion the liner’s edge
interface at the meter’s end.
d. Transmitter.
1) Microprocessor-based signal converter/transmitter.
2) Utilize DC pulse technique to drive flux-producing coils.
3) Contain a 6 digit display for flow rate, percent of span, and totalizer.
4) Operator interface consisting of keypads which respond to English
text entry.
5) Integral zero return to provide a consistent zero output signal in
response to an external dry contact closure.
6) Integral low flow cut-off zero return.
7) Automatic range change.
8) Programmable parameters including:
a) Meter size.
b) Full scale flow rate.
c) Magnetic field frequency.
d) Time constant.
e) Totalizer.
9) Data retention for a minimum of 5 years without auxiliary main or
battery power.
10) Self diagnostics and automatic data checking.
11) Protected terminals and fuses in a separate compartment which
isolates field connection from electronics.
12) Ambient operating temperature limits of -29 to 60 °C (-20 to 140 °F).
13) Transmitter shall be configured for Hart protocol pulse output for
totalization.
e. Performance requirements:
1) Time constant:
a) 0.5 to 1,000 seconds.
2) Accuracy:
a) 0.25 percent of flow rate from 10 to 100 percent of full scale
for velocities over 3 ft per second.
3) Repeatability:
a) 0.25 percent of full scale.
4) Isolation:
a) Galvanic or.
b) Optical.
5) Power supply:
a) 120 VAC ± 10%.
b) 60 Hz.
c) 30 Watts Max.
6) Output/Input signal:
a) Output signal: Measured range – Current 0/4 to 20 mA;
b) Modbus RS485
7) Submersible rating. All meters in vaults and below ground
installations shall have IP68 submersion rating.
8) Remote readout.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 71 13 - 5
f. Factory testing:
1) Each flow metering system shall be hydraulically calibrated at a
facility which is traceable to the Nation Institute of Testing Standards.
2) The calibration procedure shall conform to the requirements of MIL-
STD-45662A.
3) A real-time computer generated printout of the actual calibration data
indicating apparent and actual flows at 20%, 40%, 60%, 80% and
100% of the calibrated range shall be submitted to the Engineer at
least thirty (30) days prior to shipment of the meters to the project
site.
g. Manufacturer no equal:
1) Endress & Hauser Promag W 400 6 probe
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. All instruments and/or representative instruments shall be calibrated in facilities and with
instruments traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.
1. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration
instruments.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, flowrates, and temperatures
and furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate the installation with all trades to ensure that the mechanical system has all
necessary appurtenances. Weldolets, valves, upstream diameters, downstream diameters,
etc. for proper installation of the instruments.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. All instruments shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacture’s
recommendations.
1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to install all instruments in conformance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Engineer of any installation
conditions that may be shown at variance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Instrumentation and Control Systems Contractor shall calibrate all instruments in the
field during the Calibration and Loop Validation Tests as identified in Section 40 61 00.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. All instruments shall be field calibrated to match the installed conditions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT FLOW-MAGNETIC
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 71 13 - 6
3.6 CLEANING
A. All instrument enclosures shall be vacuumed clean after calibration and before
commissioning.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Performance of all instruments shall be demonstrated to the Engineer prior to
commissioning.
B. All instrument calibration shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative.
C. Each and every instrument shall be tested during the Loop Validation Tests and the Owner’s
Representative shall witness the response in the PLC control system and associated registers.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. All instruments shall be fully protected after installation and before commissioning. The
Contractor shall replace any instruments damaged prior to commissioning.
B. The Engineer shall be the sole party responsible for determining the corrective measures.
3.9 SCHEDULES
A. The following instrument data sheets are included as a guideline for the supply of the
instruments. These sheets are not complete and the instrument selection shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility. Changes may be made to the instrument materials, rang es, etc.
as part of the submittal review. The Contractor shall provide documented evidence for a
differential plus or minus that results from these changes.
B. The Contractor shall supply complete instrument data sheets for each and every instrument
and submit this information in accordance with paragraph 1.05 of this section.
1. Instrument data sheets shall be furnished in both hard copy and electronic format.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE GAUGES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 13 - 1
SECTION 40 73 13
PRESSURE GAUGES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Instruments for instrumentation and control systems that are to be permanently
installed.
B. Related Sections:
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. All instruments shall comply with the latest edition and standards of the Instrumentation
Systems and Automation Society.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. NEC: National Electrical Code.
2. IEEE: Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. ISA: Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society.
4. NFPA: National Fire Protection Association.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all instruments as identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, and instrument data
sheets.
B. Install and connect all instruments as per the manufacturer’s recommendations for the
particular installation.
C. Calibration of instruments will be performed by the Instrumentation and Control Systems
Contractor (ICSC).
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Complete manufacturer’s brochures identify instrument construction, accuracy,
ranges, materials, and options.
2. Completed instrument data sheets including catalog number and source for
determining catalog number.
3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE GAUGES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 13 - 2
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Mechanical connection diagrams.
2. Sensor mounting requirements with dimensions and elevations.
3. Electrical connection diagrams.
D. Test Reports:
1. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that
require set-up and calibration.
a. Including factory calibration for each instrument with stated accuracy.
E. Operating Manuals:
1. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that
require set-up and calibration.
a. Including factory calibration for each instrument with stated accuracy.
2. Complete installation, calibration, and testing manuals.
F. Record Drawings:
1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All instruments of similar nature must be furnished by the same manufacturer.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store all instruments in a dedicated storage structure with space conditioning to meet the
recommended storage requirements provided by the manufacturer.
1. Any instruments that are not stored in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation shall be replaced at no additional costs to the Owner.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. All instruments must be compatible for the installed site conditions including but not limited
to material compatibility, site altitude, installed temperature and humidity conditions.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard warranty, modified to agree with the Contract Documents.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide all necessary materials, fluids, etc. for calibration purposes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Ashcroft 1279 w/ Performance Plus.
B. NoShok 600/700 Series.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE GAUGES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 13 - 3
C. Dwyer Series 765 or Series 7000B.
D. Wika USA XSEL Series.
E. Or, Engineer Approved Equals.
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Pressure, Vacuum, Compound Gauges.
1. General.
a. Furnish and install pressure and vacuum gauges as specified, complete,
including all fittings, snubbers, connections, gaskets, supports, and
accessories in the locations shown or specified, in accordance with the
Contract Documents.
b. Pressure gauges shall be provided whether or not shown on the plans:
1) On suction and discharge connection to all pumps.
2) On discharge connection from blowers and compressors.
3) On each side of pressure reducing valves.
4) In other locations as shown on the P&IDs and/or mechanical plans.
c. Vacuum gauges shall be provided whether or not shown on the plans:
1) On all supply side educator-type chemical feeders.
2) In other locations as shown on the P&IDs and/or mechanical plans.
d. Sleeve pressure gauges.
1) Shall be provided where shown on the plans.
2) Pressure shall be sensed by a flexible sleeve contained in a flanged
cast iron or steel spool or wafer body, and transmitted to the gauge
through a captive fluid.
3) Sleeve shall be of BUNA-A and fabricated so as to isolate the body from
the process liquid.
4) Gauges shall be calibrated to read in applicable units.
5) Accuracy of ±1% - 150% of the working pressure of the system to
which they are connected
2. Construction:
a. Gauges shall be industrial quality type with Type 316 stainless steel
movement.
b. Phenolic case.
c. Liquid filled.
d. Unless otherwise shown or specified, gauges shall have:
1) A 4-1/2-inch dial.
2) 1/2-inch threaded connection.
3) Type pulsation dampener adapter.
a) Pulsation Dampener as manufactured by:
b) Cajon Co.
c) Weksler Instruments, Corp.
d) Ashcroft.
e) Or, Engineered Approved Equal.
4) A block and bleed valve - 1/2 inch national pipe thread process
connection and bleed/calibrate valve between block valve and outlet
port.
e. Gages shall be calibrated to read in applicable engineering units.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE GAUGES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 13 - 4
f. Accuracy of ± 0.5% - 150 % of the working pressure or vacuum of the pipe or
vessel to which they are connected.
g. All gauges shall be vibration and shock resistant.
3. Diaphragm seals:
a. Gauges attached to system involving chemical solutions, corrosive fluids,
sludge, sewage, or other liquids containing solids shall be equipped with
diaphragm seals.
b. In addition diaphragm seals shall be provided and included at the locations
shown.
c. Seals shall have clamped housings.
d. All seals shall have 1/2 inch NPT flushing connection and fluid fill connection.
e. Diaphragm Seals as manufactured by:
1) Ashcroft Type 101.
2) Ametek Type S Series.
3) NoShok Type 10/10H.
4) Or, Engineer Approved Equal.
4. Gauges general as manufactured by:
a. Ashcroft Type 1279 w/ Plus Performance.
b. Dwyer Series 7000B.
c. Wika XSEL Model 212.34 (213.34 as required).
d. Ametek Model 1929.
e. NoShok 700 Series.
f. Or, Engineer Approved Equal.
5. Gauges sleeve pressure as manufactured by:
a. Red Valve Co., Inc.
b. Onyx.
c. NoShok Type 40.
d. Or, Engineer Approved Equal.
6. Snubbers as manufactured by:
a. Ashcroft, Model 311.
b. Dwyer, Series PS.
c. NoShok, Model 5025/5050
d. Or, Engineer Approved Equal.
7. Pulsation dampeners as manufactured by:
a. Cajon Co.
b. Weksler Instruments, Corp.
c. Ashcroft.
d. Or, Engineer Approved Equal.
2.3 ACCESSORIES
A. Gauges shall be liquid filled or have some equivalent anti-vibration/-bounce technology.
2.4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. All instruments and/or representative instruments shall be calibrated to in facilities and with
instruments traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.
1. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration
instruments.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE GAUGES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 13 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and
furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate the installation with all trades to insure that the mechanical system has all
necessary appurtenances. Weld-o-lets, valves, orientation, etc. for proper installation of the
instruments.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. All instruments shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacture’s
recommendations.
1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to install all instruments in conformance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Engineer of any installation
conditions that may be shown at variance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
3. Install two 2-valve instrument manifolds for each gauge pressure transmitter.
4. Bolt 3-valve manifolds at non-flange diaphragm type differential pressure
transmitters in place of standard flange adapters.
5. Install root valves at process taps except insertion elements.
6. Install gauge valves on process connections to instruments where multiple
instruments are connected to one tap or where root valves are not readily accessible.
7. All gauges shall be installed with the face in the vertical position.
8. In strict accordance with the manufacturers printed instructions.
9. At the locations shown on the drawings, when so shown.
10. Care shall be taken to minimize the effect of water hammer or vibrations on the
gauges.
11. In extreme cases, and with the approval of the Engineer, gauges may be mounted
independently, with flexible connectors.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The ICSC shall calibrate all instruments in the field during the Calibration and Loop Validation
Tests as identified in Section 40 61 00.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. All instruments shall be field verified.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION
A. Performance of all instruments shall be demonstrated to the Engineer prior to
commissioning.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE GAUGES
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 13 - 6
3.7 PROTECTION
A. All instruments shall be fully protected after installation and before commissioning. The
Contractor shall replace any instruments damaged prior to commissioning.
1. The Engineer shall be the sole party responsible for determining the corrective
measures.
3.8 SCHEDULES
A. The following instrument data sheets are included as a guideline for the supply of the
instruments. These sheets are not complete and the instrument selection shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility. Changes may be made to the instrument materials, rang es, etc.
as part of the submittal review. The Contractor shall provide documented evidence for a
differential plus or minus that results from these changes.
B. The Contractor shall supply complete instrument data sheets for each and every instrument
and submit this information in accordance with Paragraph 1.5 of this section.
1. Instrument data sheets shall be furnished in both hard copy and electronic format.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE-TRANSMITTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 26 - 1
SECTION 40 73 26
PRESSURE-TRANSMITTERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes
1. Instruments for instrumentation and control systems that are to be permanently
installed.
B. Related Sections
1. Contract Documents are a single integrated document, and as such all Divisions and
Sections apply. It is the responsibility of the Contractor and its Sub-Contractors to
review all sections to insure a complete and coordinated project.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. All instruments shall comply with the latest edition and standards of the Instrumentation
Systems and Automation Society.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. Definitions of terms and other electrical considerations as set forth in the:
1. National Electrical Code.
2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers.
3. Instrumentation Systems and Automation Society.
4. National Fire Protection Association.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Furnish all instruments as identified on the P&IDs, instrument lists, and instrument data
sheets.
B. Install and connect all instruments as per the manufacturer’s recommendations for the
particular installation.
C. Calibration of instruments will be performed by the Instrumentation and Control Systems
Contractor.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Furnish complete submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 20 Submittal Procedures.
B. Product Data:
1. Complete manufacturer’s brochures identify instrument construction, accuracy,
ranges, materials, and options.
2. Completed instrument data sheets including catalog number and source for
determining catalog number.
3. Manufacturer’s installation instructions.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE-TRANSMITTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 26 - 2
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Mechanical connection diagrams.
2. Sensor transducer mounting requirements with dimensions and elevations.
3. Electrical connection diagrams.
D. Test Reports:
1. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that
require set-up and calibration.
a. Including factory calibration for each instrument with stated accuracy.
E. Operating Manuals:
1. Certified factory and field calibration data sheets for instruments and devices that
require set-up and calibration.
a. Including factory calibration for each instrument with stated accuracy.
2. Complete installation, calibration, and testing manuals.
F. Record Drawings:
1. Complete field calibration sheets, including range, span, PLC I/O address, register,
and scaling coefficients.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All instruments of similar nature must be furnished by the same manufacturer.
B. Manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for proving pressure transmitter
operation and 4-20 ma loop accuracy.
C. Instruments shall be manufactured at facilities certified to the quality standards of ISO
Standard 9001 - Quality Systems - Model for Quality Assurance in Design/Development,
Production, Installation, and Servicing.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store all instruments in a dedicated van or structure with space conditioning to meet the
recommended storage requirements provided by the manufacturer.
1. Any instruments that are not stored in strict conformance with the manufacturer’s
recommendation shall be replaced at no additional costs to the Owner.
1.8 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS
A. All instruments must be compatible for the installed site conditions including but not limited
to material compatibility, site altitude, installed temperature and humidity conditions.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Furnish manufacturer’s standard warranty, modified to agree with the Contract Documents.
1.10 MAINTENANCE
A. Provide all necessary materials, fluids, etc. for calibration purposes.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE-TRANSMITTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 26 - 3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. As identified on the instrument data sheets.
B. Hardware Commonality:
1. All instruments, which utilize a common measurement principle, for example, d/p
cells, pressure transmitters, level transmitters that monitor hydrostatic head, shall be
furnished by a single Manufacturer.
2. All panel-mounted instruments shall have matching style and general appearance.
3. Instruments performing similar functions shall be of the same type, model, or class,
and shall be from a single Manufacturer.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Pressure Transmitters Gage
1. General
a. Pressure transmitters shall be 2 wire devices.
b. Continuously adjustable span, zero and damping adjustments.
c. Integral LCD meter scaled in engineering units.
d. Solid state circuitry.
e. Accuracy shall be ± 0.10 percent of span.
f. Process wetted materials as identified on Instrument Data Sheets.
g. Body material as identified on Instrument Data Sheets.
h. Process connections shall be 1/2-inch NPT.
i. Diaphragm seals shall be provided and included at the locations shown.
j. Integral transient protection.
k. Factory calibrated for span and range.
2. Ranges:
a. As noted on the Instrument Data Sheets
3. As manufactured by:
a. Rosemount Model 2088G Series.
b. No equals.
2.3 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A. All instruments and/or representative instruments shall be calibrated to in facilities and with
instruments traceable to the National Bureau of Standards.
1. Provide complete documentation covering the traceability of all calibration
instruments.
2. Provide 3 copies of calibration curve – One with the instrument, one to the engineer
and a third copy in the O&M located with its corresponding ISA data sheet. Calibration
curve shall be matched by instrument tag.
B. Manufacturer’s representative shall be responsible for proving flow meter operation and 4-
20 ma loop accuracy.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE-TRANSMITTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 26 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine the complete set of plans, the process fluids, pressures, and temperatures and
furnish instruments that are compatible with installed process condition.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate the installation with all trades to insure that the mechanical system has all
necessary appurtenances, weld-o-lets, valves, upstream diameters, downstream diameters,
etc. for proper installation of the instruments.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. All instruments shall be installed in strict conformance with the manufacture’s
recommendations.
1. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to install all instruments in conformance with
manufacturer’s recommendations.
2. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to notify the Engineer of any installation
conditions that may be shown at variance with the manufacturer’s recommendations
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. The Instrumentation and Control Systems Contractor shall calibrate all instruments in the
field during the Calibration and Loop Validation Tests as identified in Section 40 61 00.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. All instruments shall be field calibrated to match the installed conditions.
3.6 CLEANING
A. All instrument enclosures shall be vacuumed clean after calibration and before
commissioning.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Performance of all instruments shall be demonstrated to the Engineer prior to
commissioning.
B. All instrument calibration shall be witnessed by the Owner’s Representative.
C. Each and every instrument shall be tested during the Loop Validation Tests and the Owner’s
Representative shall witness the response in the PLC control system and associated registers.
3.8 PROTECTION
A. All instruments shall be fully protected after installation and before commissioning. The
Contractor shall replace any instruments damaged prior to commissioning.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE-TRANSMITTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 26 - 5
1. The Engineer shall be the sole party responsible for determining the corrective
measures.
3.9 SCHEDULES
A. The following instrument data sheets are included as a guideline for the supply of the
instruments. These sheets are not complete and the instrument selection shall be the
Contractor’s responsibility. Changes may be made to the instrument materials, ranges, etc.
as part of the submittal review. The Contractor shall provide documented evidence for a
differential plus or minus that results from these changes.
B. The Contractor shall supply complete instrument data sheets for each and every instrument
and submit this information in accordance with paragraph 1.05 of this section.
1. Instrument data sheets shall be furnished in both hard copy and electronic format.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PRESSURE-TRANSMITTERS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 73 26 - 6
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT INSTRUMENT LIST
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 40 75 01 - 1
SECTION 40 75 01
INSTRUMENT LIST
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 INSTRUMENT LIST
A. Instrument list is shown in the attached table following this section.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)
PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)
END OF SECTION

Ta
g
Lo
c
a
t
i
o
n
De
v
i
c
e
De
s
c
r
i
p
t
i
o
n
FE
/
F
I
T
-
0
0
1
Fl
u
s
h

l
i
n
e

1
0
"

f
l
o
w

m
t
e
r
Fl
o
w
En
d
r
e
s
s
+
H
a
u
s
e
r

P
r
o
m
a
g

W

4
0
0

P
r
o
m
a
g

5
W
4
C
2
F
-
A
A
I
L
N
P
2
D
U
-
A
1
K
-
G
A
FE
/
F
I
T
-
0
0
2
Sy
s
t
e
m

1
6
"

f
l
o
w

m
e
t
e
r
Fl
o
w
En
d
r
e
s
s
+
H
a
u
s
e
r

P
r
o
m
a
g

W
4
0
0

P
r
o
m
a
g

5
W
4
C
4
H
-
A
A
I
L
N
P
2
D
U
-
A
1
K
-
G
A
PI
T
-
0
0
1
We
l
l

L
e
v
e
l
Le
v
e
l
PM
C

M
i
n
i
a
t
u
r
e

M
T
M

3
2
1
3

w
i
t
h

M
P
1
1

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e

b
u
l
b

e
n
c
l
o
s
u
r
e
PI
T
-
1
0
6
Pu
m
p

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
Pr
e
s
s
u
r
e
Ro
s
e
m
o
u
n
t

2
0
8
8
-
G
-
3
-
S
-
2
2
-
A
-
1
-
B
4
-
M
5
PI
T
-
1
0
8
Sy
s
t
e
m

P
r
e
s
s
u
r
e
Pr
e
s
s
u
r
e
Ro
s
e
m
o
u
n
t

2
0
8
8
-
G
-
3
-
S
-
2
2
-
A
-
1
-
B
4
-
M
5
In
s
t
r
u
m
e
n
t

L
i
s
t
Pa
g
e

1

o
f

1

DIVISION 43
GAS LIQUID AND STORAGE

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 20 10 - 1
SECTION 43 20 10
PUMPS, GENERAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 THE REQUIREMENT
A. The Contractor shall provide all pumps and pumping appurtenances, complete and operable,
in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The provisions of this Section shall apply to all pumps and pumping equipment except where
otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents.
C. Unit Responsibility: A single manufacturer shall be made responsible for furnishing the Work
and for coordination of design, assembly, testing, and installation of the Work of each pump
Section; however, the Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for compliance with the
requirements of each pump Section. Unless otherwise indicated, the single Manufacturer
shall be the Manufacturer of the pump.
D. Single Manufacturer: Where two or more pump systems of the same type or size are required,
the pumps shall all be produced by the same Manufacturer.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submittals shall be furnished in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Submittal
Procedures.
B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall contain the following information:
1. Pump name, identification number, and specification Section number.
2. Performance data curves showing head, capacity, horsepower demand, NPSH
required, and pump efficiency over the entire operating range of the pump. The
equipment Manufacturer shall indicate separately the head, capacity, horsepower
demand, overall efficiency, and minimum submergence required at the design flow
conditions and the maximum and minimum flow conditions. A family of performance
curves at intervals of 100 rpm from minimum speed to maximum speed shall be
provided for each centrifugal pump equipped with a variable frequency drive.
3. The Contractor shall require the Manufacturer to indicate on the performance curves
the limits recommended for stable operation without surge, without cavitation, and
without vibration (except vibration within specified allowable limits). The stable
operating range shall be as wide as possible based on actual hydraulic and mechanical
measurements taken during the factory performance tests of the pumps.
4. Assembly and installation drawings including shaft size, seal, coupling, bearings,
anchor bolt plan, part nomenclature, material list, outline dimensions, and shipping
weights.
5. Data, in accordance with Section 26 19 00 - Medium-Voltage Induction Motors, for the
electric motor proposed for each pump.
6. Elevation of proposed Local Control Panel showing panel-mounted devices, details of
enclosure type, single line diagram of power distribution, and current draw of panel,

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 20 10 - 2
and list of all terminals required to receive inputs or to transmit outputs from the
Local Control Panel.
7. Wiring diagram of field connections with identification of terminations between Local
Control Panels, junction terminal boxes, and equipment items.
8. Complete electrical schematic diagram.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manual: The Manual shall contain the required information for
each pump Section.
D. Spare Parts List: A Spare Parts List shall contain the required information for each pump
Section.
E. Factory Test Data: Signed, dated, and certified factory test data for each pump system which
requires factory testing, submitted before shipment of equipment.
F. Certifications
1. Manufacturer's certification of proper installation.
2. Contractor's certification of satisfactory field testing.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Factory Testing: The following tests shall be conducted on each indicated pump system:
1. Motors: All motors of sizes 100 hp and larger shall be assembled, tested, and certified
at the motor factory and the working clearances checked to insure that all parts are
properly fitted. The tests shall be in accordance with ANSI/IEEE 112 - Test Procedure
for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators, and ANSI/IEEE 115 - Test Procedure
for Synchronous Machines, including heat run and efficiency tests. All computations
shall be recorded and certified and dated copies of the test results shall be furnished.
2. Pump Systems: All centrifugal pump systems 100 hp and larger shall be tested at the
pump factory in accordance with the Test Code for Centrifugal Pumps of the
Standards of the Hydraulic Institute, Inc., Performance Acceptance Test Grade 1E
Tests shall be performed using the complete pump system to be furnished, including
the motor.
3. For motors smaller than 100 hp, the Manufacturer's certified test motor shall be
acceptable. Testing of prototype models will not be acceptable. The following
minimum test data shall be submitted:
a. Hydrostatic test data
b. A minimum of five hydraulic test readings between shutoff head and 25
percent beyond the maximum indicated capacity, recorded on data sheets as
defined by the Hydraulic Institute.
c. Pump curves showing head, flow, bhp, efficiency, and NPSH requirements.
d. Certification that the pump horsepower demand did not exceed the rated
motor hp beyond the 1.0 service rating at any point on the curve. not change
unless the style definition is changed.
B. Warranty: Unless otherwise specified, each pump shall be supplied with manufacturer’s
standard warranty of one (1) year from substantial completion.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 20 10 - 3
C. ENGINEERED ANALYSIS: The pumping unit shall be deigned to safely operate free of resonant
frequency. In order to ensure that neither harmful nor damaging vibrations occur to the pump
structure at any speed within the specified operating range, the following analysis shall be
required to be performed by a licensed Professional Engineer using finite element analysis (FEA)
software:

1. Pump manufacturer shall perform a structural frequency analysis of the structural
components utilizing a FEA method to ensure that no structural natural frequencies are
excited to a degree that would cause measured vibration amplitudes at the top of the
discharge head to exceed the requirements of ANSI/HI 9.6.4-2009. When deemed
necessary by the experience of the manufacturer, the below ground structural
components shall also be included in the analysis.

2. A report shall be provided with the submittal showing that the natural frequencies and
mode shapes of the pump and motor have been considered in the design of the discharge
head, and certify that the critical frequency is at least 20% above or below the operating
range.

3. When significant modifications are required to lower the system's natural frequency,
the pump structure's stresses and deflections shall also be reviewed. The design critical
frequency shall be at least 20% above or below the operating range of the pump.

4. Manufacturer to provide documentation of the analysis ensuring that the specified
requirements have been met, that the pump will operate free of resonance frequency
vibration over its full operating range and speeds, and that documentation should be
signed and stamped by the professionally licensed engineer who performed the analysis
work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Compliance with the requirements of the individual pump Sections may necessitate
modifications to the Manufacturer's standard equipment.
B. Performance Curves: All centrifugal pumps shall have a continuously rising curve. In no case
shall the required horsepower at any point on the performance curve exceed the rated
horsepower of the motor or engine, or encroach on the service factor.
C. No cavitation shall be allowed in pumps operating within the stable operating range for the
specified operating conditions. For the purposes of this provision, cavitation shall be
recognized and accepted as being present in a pumping unit if cavitation noi se can be
perceived either by the human ear or by acoustic instruments or devices. The presence or
absence of cavitation noise shall be verified by the Owner during both the factory
performance tests of the pumps and during operation of the pumps up to the end of the
warranty period. To assist in revealing potential cavitation during the factory performance
tests, in addition to all other required tests, the Manufacturer shall force the pumps to operate

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 20 10 - 4
at the specified minimum net positive suction head available for each of the following
conditions: minimum flow rate, design flow rate and head, and maximum flow rate.
D. All components of each pump system provided under the pump Sections shall be entirely
compatible. Each unit of pumping equipment shall incorporate all basic mechanisms,
couplings, electric motors, variable frequency controls if required, necessary mountings, and
appurtenances.
2.2 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. All materials shall be suitable for the intended application; materials not specified shall be
high-grade, standard commercial quality, free from all defects and imperfection that might
affect the serviceability of the product for the purpose for which it is intended, and shall
conform to the following requirements:
1. Cast iron pump casings and bowls shall be of austenitic ductile iron, conforming to
ASTM A 439 - Specification for Austenitic Ductile Iron Castings, or equal.
2. Bronze pump impellers shall conform to ASTM B 62 - Specification for Composition
Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings, or B 584 - Specification for Copper Alloy Sand
Castings for General Applications, where dezincification does not exist.
3. Stainless steel pump shafts shall be Type 416 or 316. Miscellaneous stainless steel
parts shall be of Type 316.
4. All anchor bolts, nuts, and washers that are not buried or submerged shall be hot-dip
galvanized, unless otherwise specified in individual pump Sections. Buried or
submerged bolts, nuts, and washers shall be stainless steel in accordance with Section
05 50 00 – Metal Fabrications.
2.3 PUMP COMPONENTS
A. Flanges: Suction and discharge flanges shall conform to ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe
Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250, and 800 or B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged
Fittings Dimensions.
B. Lubrication: Vertical pump shafts of clean water pumps shall be product water-lubricated,
unless otherwise specified. Deep-well pumps and pumps with dry barrels shall have water-
or oil-lubricated bearings and seals and enclosed lineshafts. Pumps for other process fluids
shall be lubricated as indicated.
C. Handholes: Handholes on pump casings shall be shaped to follow the contours of the casing
to avoid any obstructions in the water passage.
D. Vortex Suppressors: Vertical pumps with marginal submergence shall be provided with
vortex suppressors.
E. Drains: All gland seals, air valves, cooling water drains, and drains from variable frequency
drive equipment shall be piped to the nearest floor sink, or drain, with galvanized steel pipe
or copper tube, properly supported with brackets.
F. Grease Lubrication: For all vertical propeller, mixed-flow, and turbine pumps, other than
deep well pumps, of bowl sizes 10-inches and larger, the Contractor shall provide a stainless
steel tube attached to the column for grease lubrication of the bottom bearing.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 20 10 - 5
G. Stuffing Boxes: Where stuffing boxes are indicated for the pump seal, they shall be of the best
quality, using the Manufacturer's suggested materials best suited for the specific application.
For drainage and liquids containing sediments, the seals shall be fresh-water flushed, using
lantern rings.
1. Unless otherwise specified, the packing material shall be interlaced Teflon braiding,
containing 50 percent ultrafine graphite impregnation to satisfy the following:
a. Shaft speeds - up to 2500 rpm
b. Temperature - up to 500 degrees F
c. pH range - 0 to 14.
2. If fresh water is not available, the seal shall be flushed with product water cleaned by
a solids separator as manufactured by John Crane Co., Lakos (Claude Laval Corp.), or
equal.
H. Mechanical Seals: Mechanical seals shall be fresh water-flushed unless indicated otherwise;
in which case product water cleaned by a solids separator as above shall be used. Mechanical
seals shall be as manufactured by the following, or equal:
Type Manufacturer
Wastewater Pumps Double seals:
John Crane Type L Double;
Borg-Warner Type L Double;
Chesterton
Abrasives, Grit, or
Lime Slurry Pumps
Double seals:
John Crane Type I (hard faces);
Borg-Warner Type L (hard faces);
Chesterton
Chemicals or
Corrosive Liquid
Pumps
Single seals:
John Crane Type 8-1, 9;
Borg-Warner Type Q, QB;
Chesterton
Water Pumps
Hot and Cold
Single seals:
John Crane, Type I, 21;
Borg-Warner Type L;
Chesterton
I. Where indicated, a buffer fluid must be circulated a minimum 20 psi above discharge
pressure, or as required by the Manufacturer, in order to maintain reliable seal performance.
J. Mechanical seals for all services other than chemicals and corrosives shall be equipped with
nonclogging, single coil springs and nonsliding, internal, secondary elastomers. Metal parts
shall be Type 316 stainless steel, Alloy 20, or Hastelloy B or C.
2.4 PUMP APPURTENANCES
A. Nameplates: Each pump shall be equipped with a stainless steel nameplate indicating serial
numbers, rated head and flow, impeller size, pump speed, and Manufacturer's name and
model number. Dimension and flow information shall be in metric units, followed by English
units in parentheses.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 20 10 - 6
B. Solenoid Valves: The pump Manufacturer shall provide solenoid valves on the water or oil
lubrication lines and on all cooling water lines. Solenoid valve electrical ratings shall be
compatible with the motor control voltage.
C. Gauges: all pumps (except sample pumps, sump pumps, and hot water circulating pumps)
shall be equipped with pressure gauges installed at pump discharge lines. Pump suction lines
shall be provided with compound gauges. Gauges shall be located in a represe ntative
location, where not subject to shock or vibrations, in order to achieve true and accurate
readings.
1. Where subject to shock or vibrations, the gauges shall be wall-mounted or attached
to galvanized channel floor stands and connected by means of flexible connectors.
2. Pressure and compound gauges shall be provided in accordance with Section 17205 –
Pressure Gauges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: Where required by the individual pump Sections,
an authorized service representative of the Manufacturer shall visit the site for the number
of days indicated in those Sections to witness the following and to certify in writing that the
equipment and controls have been properly installed, aligned, lubricated, adjusted, and
readied for operation.
1. Installation of the equipment.
2. Inspection, checking, and adjusting the equipment.
3. Startup and field testing for proper operation.
4. Performing field adjustments to ensure that the equipment installation and operation
comply with the specified requirements.
B. Instruction of the Owner’s Personnel
1. Where required by the individual pump Sections, an authorized training
representative of the Manufacturer shall visit the site for the number of days
indicated in those Sections to instruct the Owner’s personnel in the operation and
maintenance of the equipment, including step-by-step troubleshooting with
necessary test equipment. Instruction shall be specific to the models of equipment
provided.
2. The representative shall have at least two years’ experience in training. A resume for
the representative shall be submitted.
3. Training shall be scheduled a minimum of three weeks in advance of the first session.
4. Proposed training material and a detailed outline of each lesson shall be submitted
for review. Comments shall be incorporated into the material.
5. The training materials shall remain with the trainees.
6. The Owner may videotape the training for later use with the Owner personnel.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General: Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's
written recommendations.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 20 10 - 7
B. Alignment: All equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment, operation as
specified, and freedom from binding, scraping, vibration, shaft runout, or other defects. Pump
drive shafts shall be measured just prior to assembly to ensure correct alignment without
forcing. Equipment shall be secure in position and neat in appearance.
C. Lubricants: The Contractor shall provide the necessary oil and grease for initial operation.
3.3 PROTECTIVE COATING
A. Materials and equipment shall be coated as required in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and
Coating.
3.4 FIELD TESTS
A. Where required by the individual pump Sections, each pump system shall be field tested after
installation to demonstrate satisfactory operation without excessive noise, vibration,
cavitation, or overheating of bearings.
B. The following field testing shall be conducted:
1. Startup, check, and operate the pump system over its entire speed range. Vibration
shall be within the amplitude limits recommended by the Hydraulic Institute
Standards at a minimum of four pumping conditions defined by the Engineer.
2. Obtain concurrent readings of motor voltage, amperage, pump suction head, and
pump discharge head for at least four pumping conditions at each pump rotational
speed. Check each power lead to the motor for proper current balance.
3. Determine bearing temperatures by contact type thermometer. A run time of at least
20 minutes shall precede this test, unless insufficient liquid volume is available.
4. Electrical and instrumentation tests shall conform to the requirements of the Sections
under which that equipment is indicated.
C. Field testing will be witnessed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall furnish 5 days advance
notice of field testing.
D. In the event any pumping system fails to meet the test requirements, it shall be modified and
retested as above until it satisfies the requirements.
E. After each pumping system has satisfied the requirements, the Contractor shall certify in
writing that it has been satisfactorily tested and that all final adjustments have been made.
Certification shall include the date of the field tests, a listing of all persons present during the
tests, and the test data.
F. The Contractor shall bear all costs of field tests, including related services of the
Manufacturer's representative, except for power and water which the Owner will bear. If
available, the Owner’s operating personnel will provide assistance in field testing.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT PUMPS, GENERAL
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 20 10 - 8
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 24 03 - 1
SECTION 43 24 03
VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. The Contractor shall provide vertical turbine pumps and drives with associated
appurtenances, complete and operable, in accordance with the Contract Documents.
B. The requirements of Section 43 20 10 – Pumps, General apply to this Section.
C. The Supplier shall examine the Site conditions, intended application, and operation of the
pump system and recommend the pump that will best satisfy the indicated requirements.
1.2 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submittals shall be made in accordance with Section 01 33 20 –Submittal
Procedures and Section 43 20 10 – Pumps, General.
B. Spare Parts List: The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer and submit at the same
time as Shop Drawings a list of manufacturer suggested spare parts for each piece of
equipment specified. The Contractor shall also furnish the name, address and telephone
number for the nearest distributor for each piece of equipment.
C. Factory Test Data, Engineered Structural Frequency Analysis, and Certifications in
accordance with Section 43 20 10 – Pumps, General.
D. Operation and Maintenance Manual: Provide technical operation and maintenance manuals
in accordance with Section 01 33 20 – Contractor Submittal Procedures.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All pumps shall be factory tested in accordance with Section 43 20 10 – Pumps, General.
B. Provide an engineered structural frequency analysis in accordance with Section 43 20 10 –
Pumps, General.
C. Provide pump manufacturer’s standard one-year warranty which starts upon substantial
completion of the project.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Pumps shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in manufacturing pumps for
the intended application. All equipment shall be of heavy duty construction and conform to
related U. S. manufacturing and performance standards. Each pump shall be provided with a
stainless steel nameplate with pump number, manufacturer name, model number, serial

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 24 03 - 2
number, horsepower, flowrate, head capacity, speed, etc. All pumps and motors shall be
capable of operating within specified parameters without permanent damage or excessive
vibration.
B. The complete pumping system consists of the vertical electric motor, vertical turbine pump,
drive shaft, and pump bowls and impellers with related items furnished with each of these
major elements. The pump manufacturer shall furnish all this equipment and any related and
required components and systems under a single source responsibility, and shall coordinate
the selection, design, fabrication and assembly of the complete and integrated pumping
systems.
C. Pumps will be operated by Variable Frequency Drives. The pump manufacturer is not
required to furnish the VFD equipment, but shall ensure that the pumping systems are
compatible with the drives and controls and suited for the intended operation. See applicable
Sections in Divisions 26 and 40.
D. The South Weber Well #2 is a pre-existing well that has recently been cleaned. The Well’s
new pump equipment will pump water from the aquifer directly into the Owners potable
water supply network.
E. Pump Identification:
Pump Name South Weber Well #2
Equipment Number PMP-001
Location South Weber Well House
2.2 OPERATING CONDITIONS
A. The Work of this Section shall be suitable for long term operation under the following
conditions:
Parameter Units Value
Duty Continuous
Drive Variable
Frequency
Ambient environment Indoors
Ambient temperature Deg F 35 to 110
Ambient relative humidity % 20 to 95
Fluid service Potable Water
Fluid temperature Deg F 45 to 65
Fluid pH range 7.0 to 7.8
Fluid specific gravity 1.0
Fluid viscosity absolute centipoises at 60 deg F 1.12
Project site elevation ft, msl 4535
Static water surface elevation in
well
ft, msl 4230
Bottom of Cone Strainer
Elevation
ft, msl 4135

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 24 03 - 3
Top of Well Casing (Discharge
Head Elevation Base Flange
Elevation)
ft, msl 4536.0 +/-
Centerline Discharge Flange
Elevation
ft. msl 4537.5 +/-
Minimum dynamic water surface
in well
ft, msl 4178
2.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Each pump shall meet the following minimum performance requirements:
Parameter Units Value
Design flow capacity gpm 4,500
Design flow head TDH* ft 709
Design flow minimum efficiency % 85
Minimum efficiency at maximum
flow
% 85
Secondary performance point
flow capacity (at reduced VFD
spped)
gpm 2,500
Secondary performance point
head
ft 695
Minimum efficiency at secondary
flow point
% 72
NPSH required ft Not to exceed 20 ft of water
absolute at any condition from
shutoff to minimum pump
head.
Minimum flow head TDH at max
speed
ft, 709
Maximum pump speed rpm 1800
Maximum motor speed rpm 1800
Minimum motor size HP 1250

*Note performance points indicated are for the required flow and head conditions at the
centerline of the discharge flange. Supplier to account for head losses within the column and
Parameter Units Value
Approximate length from base plate to suction bell,
final length determined by manufacturer
ft 400
Minimum column diameter inch 14
Discharge diameter inch 16
Discharge flange rating ANSI psi 275
Minimum column shaft diameter inch 2-15/16
Maximum bowl diameter inch 17

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 24 03 - 4
other internal pump components and the water surface and pump system elevations in the
design of the pump.
B. Pump Dimensions
2.4 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION
A. Each vertical turbine pumps shall conform to the following requirements:
Bowls Cast-iron, ASTM A 48, Class 30 lined with 3 coats of NSF
listed epoxy having a total thickness of 20 mils DFT. The
exterior surfaces of the bowl units shall be coated with 18
mils DFT of NSF epoxy in accordance with Section 09 90 00
– Protective Coatings and Linings
Impeller Bronze, ASTM B 584 Alloy 903 lead free, statically and
dynamically balanced to ISO 1940-1 grade G2.5
Impeller shaft method of
connection
Type 316 stainless steel impeller lock collet
Wear rings Replaceable, Heat Treated 410 stainless steel (or better)–
Nongalling with impeller wear rings heat treated to a
hardness of at least 50 BHN above the bowl wear rings
Bowl shaft Stainless steel, Type 410, 416, or 316
Suction bell Cast iron bell, with bottom bearing and streamlined ribs,
lining and coating , see bowls
Column Steel pipe, ASTM A53 Grade B, not less than Schedule 30,
epoxy-lined and coated 18 MDFT, in maximum 20-ft
lengths, Threaded and reinforced to withstand thrust forces
Line shaft and couplings Type 416 Stainless Steel shaft. The size of the shaft shall be
no less than that determined by ANSI/AWWA Specifications
E101, Section A4.3, paragraph 4.3.3. In no case shall the
line shaft be less than 1 inch in diameter. Shaft coupling
shall be Type 410 stainless steel, threaded or keyed to the
shaft.
Shaft lubrication Mineral Oil, NSF 61
Shaft seal Tube tension assembly bronze
Shaft enclosing tube Shaft enclosing oil tube materials and dimensions shall
conform with ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 80 steel,
machined to AWWA E101 tolerances and pressure tested to
1100 psi, minimum.
Line shaft bearings 70 minimum shore hardness, neoprene, internally spiral
grooved at a maximum spacing of 10 feet on center.
Discharge head Fabricated steel, reinforced to withstand pipe thrust, epoxy-
lined and coated in accordance with Section 09 90 00 –
Protective Coatings and Linings (18 MDFT). With flange(s),
base plate, fully machined bottom base, and Minimum (2) 1-
1/2 inch, 3,000 lb forged steel half-couplings for level
sensors/pressure switch, and ¾-inch NPT drain
connections. connections. Flanges to be compatible with
type and size of adjacent piping.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 24 03 - 5
Motor shaft coupling Adjustable Threaded Shaft Coupling OR Same or similar to
line shaft coupling
Cone Strainer 316 Stainless steel
Bowl and suction case
Bearings
Bronze bearings of ASTM B505 84400 above case bearings
and below each impeller.
B. All materials and components to be compliant with the latest standard of NSF 61 for potable
water requirements.
2.5 LINESHAFT LUBRICATION CONTROL & MONITOTING DEVICE
A. Provide with the pump an active vertical line-shaft lubrication control and monitoring device.
Device to automatically stabilize oil drip rate to comply with pump manufacturers
requirements, to send alarms if oil is low, and to shut down pump if oil is lacking. Coordinate
device with pump lubrication requirements. Connect to 3 gallon SST oil tank with breather
cap and level sight gauge.
B. Equipment: HOFFMANN Dripmaster EDD-4C or Engineer approved equal.
C. Provide sufficient oil for one year of operation: provide 55 gallons.
2.6 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Drive: Each pump shall be provided with a vertical, hollow shaft, high efficiency, high thrust
WP2, 4000 volt, 3-phase, 60-Hertz heavy duty, electric motor in accordance with Section 26
19 00 – Medium-Voltage Induction Motors. Each electric motor shall be designed to accept
the total, unbalanced thrust imposed by the pump. Thrust bearings shall be rated for a
minimum L-10 life of 20,000 hours.
B. Utility Water pumps shall be adjustable speed and Contractor shall coordinate with variable
speed drives supplied in accordance with Division 26.
2.7 CONTROLS & INSTRUMENTATION
A. Pumps shall be controlled in accordance with Division 26.
2.8 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish the following spare parts for a single pump unit of each type specified:
Item Number
Suggest spare parts list to maintain the equipment
in service for a period of 5 years.
1
2.9 MANUFACTURER’S, OR EQUAL:
A. Fairbanks Morse
B. Floway

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 24 03 - 6
C. FlowServe
D. Goulds Pumps, Inc.
E. National Pump LLC
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER
A. Anchor Design: The pump manufacturer shall provide analyses to determine the anchorage
and other requirements necessary to insure that the pumping equipment is adequately
designed, fabricated, installed, and anchored to resist operating forces and meet associated
performance standards. Equipment design and anchorage shall be sufficient to resist pump
dynamic forces without damage or vibration to the equipment (pump, pump can drive shaft
and motor) and the supporting structure. Manufacturer shall determine the location,
number, diameter, anchor embedment, and related requirements for anchor bolts and other
associated elements of the installation.
B. Factory Testing. Factory tests shall be performed on all full-size pumping equipment as
specified in Section 43 20 10.
C. Inspection, Startup, and Field Adjustment: The service representative of the manufacturer
shall be present at the Site for 3 working days, to furnish the services required by Section 43
20 10 – Pumps, General.
D. Instruction of Owner's Personnel: The training representative of the manufacturer shall be
present at the Site for 1 work day to furnish the services required by Section 43 20 10 –
Pumps, General.
E. For the purposes of this paragraph, a work day is defined as an 8 hour period at the Site,
excluding travel time. All on-site work hours shall be coordinated with the Owner and/or
General Contractor.
F. The Engineer may require that the inspection, startup, and field adjustment services above
be furnished in 3 separate trips.

INSTALLATION

A. General: Pumping equipment shall be installed in accordance with the Manufacturer's
written recommendations.

B. Alignment:

1. All equipment shall be field tested to verify proper alignment, operation as specified, and
freedom from binding, scraping, vibration, shaft runout, or other defects. Equipment
shall be secure in position and neat in appearance.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 24 03 - 7
2. Prior to installation, Contractor and Pump Representative shall check if existing cans are
plumb. If cans are not plumb, Contractor shall adjust installation of new cans to achieve
a plumb installation. Contractor to provide measurements to verify installation is plumb
to the satisfaction of the engineer.
C. Lubricants: Necessary lubricants shall be provided for operation of each unit for a minimum
of 8760 hours of continuous running.

3.4 FIELD TESTS

A. Field tests shall be performed and documented test reports provided according to Section 43
20 10, as suited to the pumps provided under this section. Some of the listed requirements
may not be applicable to the particular equipment installed. Provide a written plan
identifying the field tests that will be performed, sequencing, etc.
B. Prior to Owner acceptance and formal pump station start-up, all equipment shall be inspected
for proper alignment, quiet operation, proper connection, and satisfactory performance by
means of a function test in the presence of the Owner and the Engineer. A start up report
showing function testing, motor voltages, and running amperages shall be provided to the
engineer after pump station start-up. The Contractor and manufacturer shall also sign the
certification of proper pump installation attached to this specification.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT VERTICAL TURBINE PUMPS
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 43 24 03 - 8
Certificate of Proper Installation

Project: SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION

Contractor: ________________________________________________________

Pump Manufacturer: __________________________________________________

I hereby certify that:

1. I am an authorized representative of the contractor/manufacturer
2. The pump installation has been made properly in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations.
3. Field testing as specified in Sections 43 20 10 and 43 24 03 has been completed and the
pump has satisfactorily met all performance requirements.

Signatures

Contractor: ______________________________________________________ Date:___________

Manufacturer:____________________________________________________ Date:___________

END OF SECTION

DIVISION 46
WATER AND WASTEWATER EQUIPMENT

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 1
SECTION 46 33 50
ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 WORK INCLUDED

A. This Section covers the work necessary by the General Contractor, Installation Contractor,
and On-Site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System (OSHGS) Supplier to furnish, install,
test, and prepare for operation an On-site Sodium Hypochlorite Generation System. The
OSHGS package includes what is listed in paragraph B below as well as related testing, start-
up, and training services.

B. The OSHGS Supplier shall furnish the following components:

HYPOCHLORITE GENERATOR RACK SYSTEM:

1. Hypochlorite Generator Rack
a. Electrolytic Cell(s)
b. Liquid Flow Control Backboard
c. Junction Box
d. Assembly piping, manual valves, solenoid valve, safety devices and
instruments
e. Brine Proportioning Pump
f. Powder coated carbon steel rack frame.
2. Control Cabinet, PLC, HMI, Network communication capability and associated
components.
3. Rectifier
4. Water Softener and accessories
5. Salt/Brine Storage Tank(s), level control(s) and accessories
a. Auxiliary brine day tank with level controls and brine transfer pump
dedicated for the water softener shall be supplied if the central brine tank is
more than 15 feet away and/or (8) eight feet above the water softener’s
venturi.
6. Sodium Hypochlorite Solution Storage Tank(s), level control(s) and accessories
7. Hydrogen Detector(s) and accessories
8. Sodium Hypochlorite Dosing System consisting of metering pump(s), motor(s),
variable frequency drive(s), pump accessories, and chlorine and pH analyzer(s).
9. Water Heater
10. Bulk Hypochlorite Dilution System
11. OSHGS spare parts kit, metering pump spare parts kits and maintenance kit

C. The OSHGS Supplier shall submit shop drawings and data sheets for all major OSHGS supplied
equipment. The Shop Drawings and data sheets shall be submitted to the General Contractor
for approval.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 2
D. The OSHGS Supplier shall be responsible for programming the OSHGS package control
software.

E. Programming of the OSHGS package control software shall not include Hypochlorite dosing
controls. Hypochlorite dosing shall be controlled by Owners’s SCADA.

F. The OSHGS Supplier shall submit an O&M (Operation and Maintenance) Manual Two (2) hard
copies and One (1) electronic copy.

G. The Installation Contractor shall install the OSHGS, as defined in this specification and in
accordance with the OSHGS Supplier’s submitted and approved shop drawings. The
Installation Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing interconnecting
piping, valves, conduits, cable glands, wiring, cable trays, all supports and associated
hardware and anchor hardware to the OSHGS Supplier’s equipment and its ancillaries
including piping, valves, supports and hardware from the Hypochlorite metering pumps to
the injection points to provide a complete and fully operational OSHGS.

H. After the installation is complete, the Installation Contractor shall provide the OSHGS
Supplier with detail digital pictures of the installation from the start to end of the process as
shown on the approved P&ID and a copy of the completed pre-startup checklist for a courtesy
inspection review. The OSHGS Supplier shall review and provide recommendation if
corrections are needed to ensure compliance with the approved submittals. Only after all
necessary corrections are completed, the OSHGS Supplier shall schedule a technician for
start-up and training.

I. The OSHGS Supplier shall perform start-up testing of the OSHG system in accordance with
the contract documents.

J. The OSHGS Supplier shall train the Owner’s personnel and provide instructions about the
operation and maintenance of the OSHGS.

1.2 GENERAL

A. All electrical, mechanical, metal, painting and instrumentation work included herein shall
conform to the applicable Sections of this specification except as otherwise shown or
specified.

B. The Hypochlorite generator rack/skid shall be shipped as one self-contained unit with all
factory installed piping to input and output connections located at accessible points on the
rack/skid and with all factory wiring as shown on approved P&ID.

C. Power shall be provided by the General Contractor as shown on the OSHGS supplier’s
approved shop drawings. The General Contractor shall be responsible for providing all
conduit and wiring necessary for a complete electrical service to the site location. All wiring
shall comply with the latest edition of the National Electrical Code, and local codes.

D. OSHGS Supplier to provide a complete and workable system.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 3

A. Shop Drawings – The OSHGS Supplier shall submit One (1) electronic set of the documents
listed below to the General Contractor and/or the Engineer for approval.
1. Manufacturer/Supplier's literature, illustrations, and specifications for the major
components: The literature shall include detailed descriptions and specifications of
the component to permit comparison with the technical specifications.
2. Equipment dimensions, materials, size, and weight: Equipment anchor bolts layout
but not including anchor bolts size, length, material, and embedment.
3. Equipment general arrangement drawings with dimensions and locations of inlet and
outlet connections.
4. Electrical documentation shall include panel layouts, schematics, and interconnecting
field wiring diagrams.
5. Hydrogen dilution blower data sheet and performance curve.
6. Pump Data: For each supplied pump, a pump data sheet indicating head, capacity and
horsepower shall be provided.
7. Piping and Instrumentation Diagram.
8. Design Operating Specifications including acceptable range of water pressure, water
and brine flow rates, water temperature, and water quality (hardness, pH, heavy
metals, TOC, etc.) to ClorTec electrolyzers for proper system operation.
9. Evidence of compliance to UL508A by MET Laboratories and NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 &
372 listing.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data - The OSHGS Supplier shall submit One (1) electronic final
copy and One (1) paper final copy of the Operation and Maintenance manual as described
below to the General Contractor and the Engineer for approval:
1. Installation and operating instructions for each major piece of equipment.
2. Explanations for all safety considerations related to operations.
3. Startup Procedures
4. Delivery, Handling and Short & Long-Term Storage Instructions
5. As-built drawings
6. Hypochlorination Building Installation and Design Consideration Guidelines
7. Maintenance Procedures shall include proper instructions required by Owner
personnel to keep equipment properly cleaned, lubricated, and adjusted to
manufacturer’s specifications. The following shall be provided:
a. Preventative Maintenance Schedule Checklist
b. Troubleshooting guide (instructions)
c. Basic Testing Guide
d. Acid Wash Guide
e. Recommended spare parts list

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. OSHGS Supplier’s Qualifications
1. The OSHGS Supplier shall have experience in furnishing equipment of similar capacity
and service capability to the equipment described herein. As part of their submittal
package and prior to bid, the OSHGS supplier shall submit the following:
a. A list of five (5) installations, within UTAH where similar equipment by the
manufacturer is currently in comparable service; include contact name,
telephone number, mailing address of the site installation, engineer, owner,
and date of installation. If five similar installations do not exist in that state, a

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 4
comprehensive list of all installations in that state shall be provided in
addition to a list of twenty (20) similar installations in other states.
b. Current NSF/ANSI/CAN 61 & 372 listing for the Sodium Hypochlorite
generation unit being offered.
c. Evidence of compliance to UL508A by MET Laboratories
d. Engineering Design Consideration Guidelines
e. Current ISO 9001:2015 Certification applicable to Design, Manufacture,
assembly, installation, service and repair of Electrochlorination Systems for
Water and Sewage Treatment and Water Treatment equipment.
2. The generation rack/skid shall be pre-assembled, and factory tested in accordance
with section 1.04.B below.

B. Factory Acceptance Test (FAT)
1. The OSHGS Supplier shall test pre-plumbed assemblies, control panels and junction
boxes prior to shipment.
a. Pre-plumbed Assemblies: The test shall consist of the following:
1) Visual inspection of general workmanship.
2) Visual verification that the arrangement and dimensions of the
assembly matches the fabrication drawings.
3) Visual verification of nameplates information.
4) Hydrostatic Leak test. The OSHGS Supplier shall perform a hydrostatic
leak test on the OSHG Rack or Skid assembly by filling the unit with
water, venting all air, and pressurizing the entire system to 30 psig
and holding it for 15 minutes.
5) Measure the concentration of sodium hypochlorite solution (as
chlorine equivalent) generated by ClorTec system.
6) Document all test data on a Test Record Form.
b. Control panels: The test shall consist of the following.
1) Visual inspection of general workmanship.
2) Visual verification that the panel layout matches the layout and
schematic drawings.
3) Visual verification of nameplates information.
4) Simulation of I/O’s to verify correct wiring and correct software.
5) Continuity test to verify wiring.
6) Confirm and document all instruments’ set-points, system alarms and
faults as shown on the electrical control panel drawings and control
philosophy.
c. Hypochlorite generator rack or skid wiring: The test shall consist of the
following.
1) Visual inspection of general workmanship.
2) Visual verification that the rack or skid wiring matches the electrical
schematic drawings and field wiring diagram.
3) Continuity test to verify wiring.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. The General Contractor shall be responsible for the delivery, storage, and handling of the
OSHGS in accordance with manufacturers’ recommendations.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 5
B. During long-term storage or long shut-down period, the General Contractor shall be
responsible for periodically preserving and maintaining each piece of equipment of the OSHG
system and re-conditioning them prior to startup.

1.6 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS

A. The OSHGS Supplier shall inspect the installation after completion and confirm that the
OSHGS’s supplied equipment and installation is free from faults and defects and is in
conformance with the OSHGS Supplier’s approved submittal drawings and documents. The
first inspection shall be a visual one using the digital pictures and pre-startup checklist
completed by the Installation Contractor. The second inspection shall be done before startup
and shall be a visual site inspection of the mechanical and electrical installation of the OSHGS
Supplier’s provided equipment only.

B. The OSHGS Supplier shall provide the following After Market Services:
1. 24-hour, 365-day toll free service.
2. Standard parts availability
3. Remote Troubleshooting access to the OSHGS site control system via authorization
from Owner Site Operation’s Team. Service and control panel hardware to allow for
remote troubleshooting shall be provided as an Option.

C. The OSHGS shall be warranted against defects in materials and workmanship under normal
use and service of which its products were designed as defined by the manufacturer’s
requirements. The warranty shall be for a period of 18 months after OSHG equipment start-
up and commissioning sign-off by customer or 24 months from shipment of the goods from
the factory, whichever comes first. This warranty only includes parts and does not cover
labor, expenses, consumable maintenance items, “Acts of God”, theft and vandalism,
intentional or accidental abuse, misuse, neglect or operator error, failure to perform
preventative maintenance, abuse by abnormal system conditions, improper storage and long-
term preservation, alteration of equipment/programming, and normal wear and tear.

D. The electrode assembly (bare electrodes) shall be warranted under a prorated 7-year
warranty. The first 3-years are no charge for parts replacement of a failed electrode assembly
(only) followed by 4-years of proration replacement provided the End-User has properly
maintained the electrode assembly per the OSHGS Supplier’s operation and maintenance
manual and maintenance logbook. This warranty shall cover bare electrodes under normal
use and service only and excludes housing or ancillary components. All other cell components
such as cell casing and ancillaries shall be covered per section 1.06.C above.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRE-APPROVED MANUFACTURER

A. The pre-approved OSHGS shall be the ClorTec® Series as manufactured by De Nora Water
Technologies, LLC. No substitutions are allowed.

2.2 GENERAL OSHGS OPERATION

A. The Hypochlorite generator shall require salt, water, and electricity.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 6

B. The Brine tank shall produce a saturated brine solution 26.4% NaCl (% by weight) using
softened water and salt.

C. The water softener resin shall be automatically regenerated with Brine solution from the
Brine tank.

D. Soft water (≤10 ppm) shall be supplied to the brine/salt saturator tank and the hypochlorite
generator system.

E. A constant fully saturated brine solution flow rate shall be mixed with a constant softened
water flow rate to produce a set diluted brine solution concentration. Variable saturated
brine solution flow rate shall not be allowed.

F. Soft water to the hypochlorite generator shall be split in two (2) equal flow rates. Soft water
flow rate #1 shall be mixed with a constant saturated brine flow rate and shall be supplied to
the inlet of the electrolytic cell. Cooler soft water flow rate #2 shall be supplied to the middle
of the electrolytic cell. Splitting the soft water flows to the electrolytic cell shall allow the
increase of hypochlorite production efficiency by lowering salt consumption rates, reducing
hypochlorite output temperature, and minimizing electrolysis side reactions leading to a
reduced production of disinfection by-products (DBPs) such as chlorate, bromate and
perchlorate.

G. The Hypochlorite generator rack/skid shall be equipped with safety devices/instruments
such as electrolytic cell level switch, temperature sensor, and grounding target.

H. A Diluted brine solution shall pass through the electrolytic cell(s) located on the Hypochlorite
generator system and produce a consistent 0.8% (wt) Chlorine equivalent as Sodium
Hypochlorite solution. Recirculation of the Sodium Hypochlorite solution shall not be allowed
to avoid decomposition, reduced and un-consistent concentration of Sodium Hypochlorite,
Hydrogen bubbles entrapment and increased hypochlorite solution temperature leading to
increased concentration of by-products such as chlorate and perchlorate.

I. The Sodium Hypochlorite solution shall flow upward out of the last electrolytic cell assembly
to an elevation about 2 feet above the Hypochlorite Storage Tank highest liquid level and shall
connect to a vertical vent or standpipe where the Hydrogen shall be diluted to 25% below
hydrogen LEL (1% volume) in the air and safely vented to atmosphere.

J. The OSHGS shall have no waste products associated with its use other than hydrogen gas
which shall be vented to atmosphere.

K. Each electrolytic cell shall be vented separately.

L. The 0.8% Sodium Hypochlorite solution shall be stored in chemical resistant storage tank.

M. The Sodium Hypochlorite storage tank shall be equipped with intrinsically safe level controls
for operation of the Hypochlorite generation equipment and alarm initiation.

N. The Hypochlorite generator shall automatically start and stop based on the high and low level
in the Sodium Hypochlorite storage tank.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 7

O. Under normal operating conditions, the stored Sodium Hypochlorite solution shall be
injected into the process at locations shown on the contract drawings for disinfection.

P. The Hypochlorite generator shall shut down for the following conditions:
1. Common Critical Alarms
a. E-Stop
b. Hydrogen High level
c. Hydrogen Loop Fault
d. Hydrogen Detector Sensor Fault
e. No Blower available
f. No Booster Pump available
2. OSHG Process Critical Alarms
a. Cell High Temperature [Not to exceed 115 ºF (46.1 ºC)]
b. Liquid flow in the drain
c. Low water temperature to the cell [50 ºF (10 ºC)]
d. Rectifier fault
e. Cell Low Water Flow
f. Cell Low Solution Level
g. Differential Pressure Switch Fail

R. The Hypochlorite generator shall alarm for the common and critical alarms listed above
including the following conditions:
1. Hypochlorite Tank Low Level
2. Hypochlorite Tank High Level
3. Hypochlorite Level Transmitter Loop Fault
4. No Hypochlorite Tank in service
5. Rectifier voltage above or below a high or low set point
6. Rectifier current above or below a high or low set point
7. Rectifier Fault
8. Blower Run Status (Fail)

S. The Hypochlorite storage tank level controls shall provide the following four (4) specific level
conditions to the OSHGS control panel:
1. Generator Stop
2. Generator Start
3. High for High level alarm
4. Low for Low level alarm

2.3 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATOR SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS

A. The Sodium Hypochlorite generator system shall produce __75____ (maximum) pounds per
day chlorine equivalent as ___1100____ gallons per day of 0.8% Sodium Hypochlorite.
1. Capacity per Hypochlorite generator rack(s) or skid(s): _____75 Lb/d_______
2. Total number of Hypochlorite generator rack(s) or skid (s): ___1_________
3. Quantity of Hypochlorite generator rack(s) or skid(s) running as Duty:____75 Lb/d
4. Quantity of Hypochlorite generator rack(s) or skid(s) as Standby: ______0______

B. The Sodium Hypochlorite storage tank shall have a minimum __35___ hour(s) capacity.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 8
C. Under emergency conditions, if commercially available Sodium Hypochlorite (10–12 percent
solution) is used, Bulk Hypo dilution system shall be provided.

D. The electrolytic cell shall generate an aqueous solution of a minimum consistent
concentration of 0.8%±5% by weight of chlorine equivalent as Sodium Hypochlorite. The
system’s maximum capacity shall be achieved without exceeding the maximum raw material
usages listed below.

E. Sodium Hypochlorite recirculation design shall not be allowed as it causes repeat breakdown
and degradation of the Sodium Hypochlorite solution strength, increase product
temperature, increase by-product (such as chlorate and perchlorate) formation, decrease
performance efficiency, increase salt consumption rate (salt consumption costs), and
increase the electrolytic cell(s) failure rate.

F. The electrolytic cell shall generate a solution of sodium hypochlorite <115 ºF (46 ºC). Higher
hypochlorite solution temperatures will decrease the hypochlorite production efficiency
(increased salt consumption rate), increase electrolysis side reactions leading to the increase
of production of un-wanted disinfection by-products (DBPs) such as chlorate, bromate and
perchlorate.

G. Soft water to the hypochlorite generator shall be split to maximize efficiency, performance,
and longevity of the electrolytic cell(s).

H. The electrolytic cell shall consume 2.8 pounds of salt per pound of chlorine equivalent output,
using salt containing no organic binders, flow control agents or resin cleaning material, and
meeting the following specifications:

NaCl:
- dry basis 96.3% minimum
- wet 93.3% minimum
Calcium Sulfate 0.30% maximum
Magnesium Chloride 0.06% maximum
Calcium Chloride 0.10% maximum
Magnesium Sulfate 0.02% maximum
Insolubles 0.10% maximum
Moisture (as H2O) 3.0% maximum
Lead 0.0007% maximum
Copper 0.0003% maximum
Iron (as Fe) 0.002% maximum
Fluoride 0.00001% maximum
Manganese 0.0002% maximum

Limit Aluminum, Silicon, Barium, Strontium, Titanium, Suspended Solids, Heavy
Metals, Complexing Agents (i.e., Sugars, EDTA, and CN-)

I. The electrolytic cell shall consume 2.0 kilowatt-hours AC of electricity per pound of chlorine
equivalent output.

J. The electrolytic cell shall consume a maximum of 15.0 gallons of water per pound of chlorine
equivalent generated. The water supply to the softener shall be potable and free of polymer

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 9
additives, flocculants, coagulants, anti-scalants, organics, oil & grease, and suspended solids
and shall meet the following specifications:
pH 6.5 to 7.5 (for best operation) - up to 8.5 (maximum
allowable)
Hardness (Ca/Mg) < 10 ppm (at outlet of water softener)
Total Organic Carbon (TOC) < 2 ppm
Iron < 200 ppb
Manganese < 10 ppb
Nickel < 5 ppb
Fluoride < 1 ppm
Copper < 5 ppb
Chlorine (Cl2) < 2 ppm
Barium < 1 ppm
Strontium < 10 ppm
Polyphosphates < 5 ppm
Magnesium < 50 ppm

Limit Aluminum, Silicon, Titanium, Heavy Metals, Complexing Agents (i.e., Sugars,
EDTA, CN-)
Recommended Water temperature 60-85°F.

K. The diluted brine solution at the inlet of electrolytic cell shall meet the following
specifications:
pH 6.5 to 7.5 (for best operation) - up to 8.5 (maximum
allowable)
Hardness (Ca/Mg) < 120 ppm
Total Organic Carbon (TOC) < 2 ppm
Iron < 200 ppb
Manganese < 10 ppb
Nickel < 5 ppb
Fluoride < 1 ppm
Copper < 5 ppb
Chlorine (Cl2) < 2 ppm
Barium < 1 ppm
Strontium < 10 ppm
Polyphosphates < 5 ppm

Limit Aluminum, Silicon, Titanium, Heavy Metals, Complexing Ag ents (i.e., Sugars,
EDTA, CN-).

L. The Electrolytic Cell(s) shall be periodically cleaned for best performance and longevity and
shall be cleaned In-Place for Safety of the operating/maintenance personnel. Regular removal
of the electrolytic cell assembly from the hypochlorite generation system for periodic acid
cleaning maintenance shall not be allowed.

M. The Engineer shall provide the following supplied water quality and temperature
information to properly size the OSHGS.
1. Lowest water temperature: ___50__ (degrees F)year
2. Highest water temperature: __ 60__ (degrees F)year
3. Annual average water temperature: ___55__ (degrees F) year

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 10

2.4 GENERATION SYSTEM EQUIPMENT

A. The self-contained Hypochlorite generator rack/skid shall be factory pre-plumbed and pre-
wired.

B. The Hypochlorite generator rack/skid frame shall be compact and constructed of powder
coated carbon steel.

C. The Hypochlorite generator rack/skid shall be configured to allow easy access to all
components for ease of operation & maintenance and shall adhere to standard equipment
height and reach requirements.

D. The OSHGS package shall consist of the equipment listed in Section 1.01.B of this
specification.

E. The water and brine flow mixing system shall be mounted on a removable backboard which
shall offer remote installation flexibility.

F. The OSHGS package shall have the following operation and/or safety features:
1. Cell high temperature switch (or sensor)
2. Cell low level switch
3. Soft water low and high temperature sensors
4. Rectifier low & high voltage
5. Rectifier low & high current
6. Automatic current regulation
7. 8-Stage startup sequence that verifies proper and safe operation
8. Flow switch at the Drain of Hypochlorite Generator Rack or Skid
9. Differential pressure switch
10. Hydrogen detector(s)

G. The above safety features shall be interlocked to prevent or alarm operation if any of the
normal parameters are exceeded. In the event of a trip condition, an alarm contact set will be
made signaling an alarm condition.

H. The brine proportioning flow control system shall function to automatically draw
concentrated brine solution from the Brine tank and dilute it with softened water for delivery
to the electrolytic cell(s).

2.5 ELECTROLYTIC CELLS

A. The electrolytic cell casing shall be constructed of high-quality clear cast acrylic material,
allowing for operators’ full visual inspection of electrodes condition from all angles. The
electrolytic cell casing shall be a separate entity from the electrodes pack and shall be made
from one material to ensure the integrity of the cell casing overtime and to eliminate the
potential for leaks due to differences in coefficients of expansion and contraction of dissimilar
materials.

B. The electrolytic cell casing construction shall be tubular, allowing electrodes to be removed
as a single assembly. Any necessary joining of cell materials shall be by solvent welding or

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 11
mechanical compression. Thermal welding will not be allowed.

C. The electrolytic cell casing(s) shall not be covered with a clear protection shield.

D. The electrolytic cell shall be installed and operated in the horizontal position which allows
the electrodes pack inside the casing to remain fully flooded. The electrolytic cell shall be
mounted on the rack/skid in such a way to allow for clear and easy access, removal, and
service. No vertically oriented electrolytic cells shall be allowed to avoid Hydrogen blinding
on the electrode plate surfaces due to Hydrogen bubbles rising over the full length (long
distance) of a vertically oriented cell.

E. The DSA® bipolar electrodes shall be made of Titanium with the anode side coated with a
highly efficient patented coating formulation of mixed metal oxide for high chlorine
efficiency, high electrical efficiency, stable composition, and maximum longevity.

F. The DSA® electrodes shall be a solid flat plate and shall be constructed in a bipolar
configuration to facilitate current distribution and minimize voltage drop through the
electrodes. Expanded metal electrodes will not be allowed.

G. DSA® electrodes and specialized coating formulation shall be manufactured by the sodium
hypochlorite generation system’s manufacturer for high quality control.

H. The DSA® bipolar electrodes shall be oriented vertically to maximize the high velocity gas
lift between electrodes, to minimize gas blinding and to allow for optimum electrolyte mixing
to occur over a short distance.

I. Electrodes with a vertical height >5 inches (127 mm) shall not be allowed as they increase
hydrogen blinding rate and decrease system efficiency.

J. The electrolytic cell solution flow shall be based on plug flow to allow the Hypochlorite to
form uniformly in a very controlled manner, to prevent repeated breakdown and prevent a
reduction of Hypochlorite solution concentration strength. Each compartment of the
electrolytic cell shall enhance the Hypochlorite concentration by a finite amount from the
previous compartment to achieve a consistent 0.8 wt. % solution and maximum efficiency.
Electrolytic cells without baffles and with straight flow through shall not be allowed as it will
lead to lower and variable hypochlorite solution output concentration strength.

K. Maximum allowable cell current density shall be 1.20 Amps/in².

L. Maximum allowable voltage across any given electrolytic cell compartment shall not exceed
4.6 Volts DC.

M. The Hydrogen by-product shall be vented upward out of each electrolytic cell.

2.6 CONTROL SYSTEM

A. The OSHGS Supplier shall provide an MET Listed Sodium Hypochlorite control panel which
complies with UL 508A requirements for Enclosed Industrial Control panels.

B. Compliance of the control panel to UL 508 (for Industrial Control Devices and accessories for

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 12
starting, stopping, regulating, controlling, or protecting electric motors or systems that store
or process information) shall not be allowed.

C. The control enclosure shall be NEMA 4 or 12, ANSI 61 grey polyester painted steel or a NEMA
4X 304 stainless steel and house the Human Machine Interface (HMI), Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC), memory Card, and Ethernet Hub for communication. Associated
components and terminal strips for field devices to fully support the functions of the OSHGS
operation.

D. The OSHGS Supplier shall provide an Allen Bradley MicroLogix 1400 Programmable Logic
Controller (PLC) with Serial Ports/Protocol, Ethernet Ports/Protocols, built-in digital I/Os,
memory for application updates and data logging, and I/O modules expansion capabilities.
Similar PLC make and models shall be acceptable.

E. The control panel housing a 7” TFT Color Touch-Screen HMI shall show all relevant operating
parameters and/or alarm conditions.

F. All controls and operation logic specified herein shall be programmed in a PLC. The control
panel logic shall function at the PLC level where operating parameters will be scaled,
measured, and controlled.

G. All controls and operation logic for the chemical dosing system shall be supported by a
separate control panel or by Owner’s SCADA and Variable Frequency Drive(s) (VFD) as
described in section 2.14 of this specification.

H. The control panel shall be provided with the following items: Emergency Stop Push Button
and Main & Safety Labels.

I. The OSHGS control panel shall control and(or) monitor all functions and operational
parameters including:
1. Cell safety devices
2. Process temperature control
3. Rectifier control
4. DC amperage and voltage
5. Hypochlorite tank levels
6. Hydrogen dilution system control
7. Hydrogen detection
8. Brine level control
9. Alarm history
10. Alarm trending

J. The Installation Contractor shall coordinate with the OSHGS Supplier and Instrumentation
Supplier for proper system/SCADA integration.

K. The control panel shall be equipped with all provisions to facilitate Remote OSHG System
monitoring and troubleshooting for multiple operators’ access.

2.7 REMOTE MONITORING SYSTEM

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 13
A. The control panel shall be designed to be capable of Remote Monitoring, Remote Alarming
and Remote Troubleshooting of the OSHG system controls from standard Web-Accessible
Mobile Devices.
1. Remote Monitoring shall allow site operators and/or OSHGS Supplier the use of
Web-Accessible Mobile Devices to view all On-Site control panel’s HMI screens and
screen graphics.
2. Remote Alarming shall provide remote alerts of the following common and critical
process and maintenance alarms via Email and SMS.
a. Hydrogen High Level
b. No Blower Available
c. Cell High Temperature
d. Liquid Flow in the Drain
e. Rectifier Fault
f. Hypo Tank Low level
g. Cell Low Level
h. Cell Cleaning Overdue
i. Voltage above or below a high or low set point
j. Amperage above or below a high or low set point
3. Remote Troubleshooting shall allow the OSHGS Supplier to remotely use Mobile
Devices to troubleshoot the hypochlorite Generator system with the Operator at the
site and remotely access any local data and alarms log files.
4. Remote Monitoring shall be secure. OSHGS Supplier’s remote access to the OSHGS
site control system shall only be authorized by the Owner site Operation’s Team.

B. The control panel shall be designed with capabilities to store critical process and
maintenance parameter data for local access or remote web-access, and used for trending
purpose, analysis of equipment operation efficiency parameters and recommendation for
better equipment performance. Parameters to be stored shall include:
1. Hypochlorite Concentration collected and logged data
2. Hypochlorite Output Temperature collected and logged data
3. Water and Brine Flow rate
4. System Operating Hours
5. Acid Cleaning logged data
6. Alarm History

2.8 RECTIFER / POWER SUPPLY

A. Air Cooled – Switch Mode Type
1. The rectifier/power supply shall provide a constant low ripple of up to 3 % across the
full range of control to achieve excellent power quality.
2. The rectifier/power supply shall be built into a powder coated metal enclosure.
3. The power circuit shall be designed for continuous operation at the rated output and
suitable for industrial applications.
4. The forced air-cooling system shall enable the rectifier/power supply to work reliably
with a long lifespan.
5. The rectifier/power supply shall include the following components:
a. EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) filter
b. Power semiconductors for pulse amplitude modulation
c. Electronics for constant current and voltage control

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 14
6. The rectifier/power supply shall include the following protection devices:
a. Over current protection
b. Short-circuit protection
c. Over temperature supervision
7. The rectifier/power supply shall include the following system interface:
a. Set-Point Adjustment for Volts and Amps: 4-20mA
b. Actual Feedback Values for Volts and Amps: 4-20mA
c. Main Input Contactor “On/Off” (Customer)
d. Pulse Enable “On/Off” (Customer)
e. Fault Feedback (Customer)
f. EPO (Emergency Power Off) Button
g. Digital Ammeter and Voltmeter
8. The rectifier/power supply shall be rated for duty at 35 degrees Celsius (95 degrees
Fahrenheit) at 3000 feet altitude.

2.9 WATER SOFTENER

A. The OSHGS Supplier shall provide a dual tank softener system for softening the make-up
water supply for the Brine tank and the Hypochlorite generator rack/skid.

B. Each water softener system shall include the following:
1. Dual Polyethylene tanks reinforced with fiberglass wrapping
2. Electric & Programmable Twin Alternating Control Valve

C. Each water softener system shall be able to operate dual tanks alternating, capable of
continuous operation and automatic regeneration.

D. The water softener shall be located no more than 15 feet away and at no more than 8 feet
elevation below the Brine tank. Otherwise, an auxiliary Brine Day tank with level controls and
a transfer pump shall be provided.

E. The water softener shall use brine for the regeneration cycle which is drawn from the injector
nozzle inside the water softener’s control valve.

F. The maximum level of free Chlorine (Cl2) in the water supplied to the water softener shall not
be greater than 2.0 mg/l to protect the water softener resins.

G. The make-up water treated by the water softener shall not exceed 10 mg/L of hardness as
CaCO3 at the outlet of the softener.

2.10 BRINE TANK

A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) Tank (Capacity between 0.4 Ton and 2.5 Ton)
1. The OSHGS Supplier shall provide flat bottom, upright, open top opaque tank(s)
suitable for the storage of salt and brine solution.
a. Number of tanks: ___1_____
b. Storage Capacity (each tank) ___200___ Gallons
c. Minimum days of storage capacity ___14____ days
d. Diameter (maximum): ___3.0___ feet.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 15
e. Height (Shell): ___4.5___ feet.
f. Height (overall): ___6.0___ feet.
2. The tank shall include a removable cover to allow for manual emptying of salt bags.
3. Each Brine tank shall be provided with the following connections and accessories:
a. One 1/2-inch tubing connection brine outlet with internal brine slotted PVC
pipe with screen.
b. One 1-inch connection for drain with valve.
c. The brine level control sub-assembly shall consist of:
1) A 1-1/2-inch clear PVC sight gauge.
2) A float type level switch assembly (with one float level switch) which
actuates a normally closed water solenoid valve (120VAC, 1 ph, 60
Hz).
3) One ½-inch tubing connection for water fill.
d. When applicable, the Installation Contractor shall provide seismic restraints.

2.11 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE STORAGE TANK

A. High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)
1. The OSHGS Supplier shall provide flat bottom, upright and dome top High-Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) or high-density cross-linked polyethylene (HDXLPE) tank(s)
suitable for storage of <2% Sodium Hypochlorite solution. If the Storage Tank is
intended to store Bulk Sodium Hypo (≥12%) for a considerable period, a liner shall
be added to the PE Tank.
a. Number of tanks: ___1___
b. Storage Capacity (each tank): ___1600 gallons
c. Diameter (maximum): ___6.33 feet
d. Height (Shell): ___9.0_ feet
e. Height (Overall): ___9.5_ feet
2. Each Hypochlorite storage tank shall be provided with the following connections and
accessories:
a. Hypochlorite solution inlet connection for 0.8% hypochlorite solution from
ClorTec system.
b. Overflow connection with downpipe
c. Drain connection or a drain line connected on the tank outlet piping to the
dosing pump(s)
d. Hypochlorite solution outlet connection for dosing system (The size of this
fitting is determined based on the dosing pump(s) type, capacity, and distance
from the storage tank(s))
e. Air inlet connection and air outlet connection (The sizes of these fittings are
site specific and shall be determined by the OSHGS Supplier.)
f. Hypochlorite solution level sensor connection
g. Diluted Hypochlorite inlet connection with a downpipe for 0.8% diluted
hypochlorite solution from optional bulk hypochlorite dilution system.
h. One Threaded sealed cover for 17" and below or fume tight manway cover for
24" using EPDM gasket
i. Ladder with safety cage in accordance with OSHA and local standards.
Support ladder directly on the concrete foundation and attach to the tank
wall. The ladder shall extend from the top of the tank to the concrete floor,
which includes the height of the support pad. The ladder shall be located

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 16
adjacent to the tank manway at the top of the tank. Fasteners shall be type
304 stainless steel. Anchor bolts shall be type 304 SS and provided by the
Installation Contractor.
j. Ultrasonic Level Sensor or other types of level instrument with associated
fitting
k. Installing Contractor needs to provide flexible connection for each fitting
located at a 1/3 of the lower sidewall of the PE Tank.

2.12 HYDROGEN DILUTION SYSTEM (NOT INCLUDED)

2.13 HYDROGEN DETECTOR

A. The OSHG Supplier shall provide a Hydrogen Gas Detector (shipped loose) to be field installed
and wired by the Installation Contractor.

B. The Hydrogen Gas Detector(s) shall be mounted at the highest point in the room above the
generator rack or skid assembly and above the Hypochlorite storage tank(s) (if indoor).

C. Each Hydrogen Gas Detector shall consist of gas transmitter with 0-100% LEL range (H2
specific) and catalytic bead sensor with junction box.

D. The Hydrogen Gas Detector analog output shall be linear 4-20mA loop powered.

E. The Hydrogen Gas Detector shall be provided with a calibration kit including calibration
adapter, 50% LEL hydrogen cylinder (balance in air), regulator, and carrying case.

2.14 SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE DOSING SYSTEM

A. Diaphragm Pump(s)
1. The injection metering pump(s) shall be reciprocating, positive displacement,
hydraulically actuated and motor driven.
2. The metering pump(s) operating configuration and conditions shall be as follows:
a. Number of injection points: ___1_____________
b. Number of pump(s) required: ___2_____________
c. Pump(s) operation configuration: ___1 (Qty) Duty _1 (Qty) Standby
d. Flow rate capacity (max) per pump: 0.43___(26 GPH) gpm
e. Flow rate capacity (min) per pump: 0.16___(10 GPH)__ gpm
f. Operating flow rate per pump: 0.38___(23 GPH)__ gpm
g. Rated Discharge pressure (max) per pump: 160________psig
h. Operating discharge pressure: 145______________ psig
3. The pump shall be driven by a TEFC Duty electric motor.
4. Stroke volume shall be freely adjustable between 0 and 100% via a micrometer
(manual knob).
5. The pump shall incorporate an internal pressure relief/venting valve.
6. The suction and discharge check valve balls and seats shall be capable of being
removed from the check valve body for inspection, cleaning, or replacement.
7. All metering pumps shall be designed for 24 hours per day operation.
8. The pump liquid end shall be constructed of polyethylene, with check valves and O-
Ring.
9. The pump shall have the capabilities of manual speed control, automatic speed

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 17
control from an external VFD or automatic stroke length control.
10. Duty/Standby pumps shall be supplied with the following accessories:
a. One (1) Pulsation Dampener
b. One (1) Pressure Relief Valve
c. One (1) Back Pressure Valve
d. One (1) Y-Strainer
e. One (1) Calibration Column
f. Polypropylene Mounting Stand for each pump

To allow better field installation flexibility, the Metering Pump and accessories shall
be supplied as loose components.

B. The metering pumps shall be controlled by:
1. Flow Pacing: Each pump shall be supplied with a variable frequency drive, in a NEMA
4 enclosure mounted next to the metering pump stand or skid. The Owner’s SCADA
system shall provide a start signal and a speed input to the VFD based on a 4-20mA
flow signal to adjust the pump speed automatically. For added turn-down ratio, the
stroke length shall be manually adjusted on hydraulically actuated diaphragm
pump(s) only.

2.15 WATER HEATER

A. Incoming water supply temperature shall be as follows.
1. Lowest water temperature: ___50__ (degrees F).
2. Annual average water temperature: 55____ (degrees F).

B. The Tank-less water heater shall be provided with the following:
1. Heavy gauge Type 304 Stainless Steel Enclosure
2. High quality Incoloy Sheathed Heating Elements
3. Copper and Bronze Heating Chamber
4. Integral Adjustable Electronic Temperature Controller with Digital Display of flow
rate, inlet and outlet temperature
5. Safety Thermostats
6. Inlet Flowmeter to measure inlet water flow rate to match heating power required.
7. Outlet Thermistor to ensure consistent outlet temperature.
8. Drain port

C. The entire unit shall be packaged ready for plumbing and electrical service connections and
shall bear the cULus listing mark certifying the entire unit to UL Sanitation listed to ANSI/NSF
Standard 5 and CSA.

D. The water heater shall be sized by the OSHGS supplier.

E. The water heater shall be powered directly from the Well house electrical system.

F. For incoming water temperature between 55-60 degrees F:
1. A water heater shall be required to provide the optimum water temperature range
(of 65-75 degrees F) to the hypochlorite generation system and allow for best salt and
power consumption efficiency.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 18

G. If the incoming water temperature is between 51-55 degrees F, a water heater shall be
required to provide the optimum water temperature range of 65-75 degrees F to the
hypochlorite generation system and allow for best salt and power consumption efficiency or
to provide a water temperature range of 55-60 degrees F to the hypochlorite generation
system and allow for best control & reduction of by-products (such as chlorate, bromate and
perchlorate).

2.16 WATER CHILLER (NOT INCLUDED)

2.17 BOOSTER PUMP (NOT INCLUDED)

2.18 PORTABLE ACID CLEANING SYSTEM (NOT INCLUDED)

2.19 BULK HYPOCHLORITE DILUTION PANEL

A. One (1) Hypochlorite dilution panel shall be provided to dilute 10%-12% commercial
Hypochlorite solution to 0.8% for emergency operation.

B. The dilution panel shall meet the following requirements respectively:

1. Backboard material Blue Polypropylene
2. Backboard dimensions 36” wide x 48” high
3. Softened water inlet flow rate 19 gpm
4. Softened water inlet pressure 40 psig

C. The dilution panel shall be equipped with a softened water flowmeter, a bulk hypochlorite
flowmeter, a diaphragm valve, an eductor, and sample ports on the inlet and outlet. The
eductor shall draw the bulk hypochlorite solution from a dedicated storage tank and the
control valve shall meter the proper flow of bulk Hypochlorite solution. The bulk
Hypochlorite solution shall be mixed with softened water (15:1 dilution ratio) to output a
0.8% solution (based on 12% commercial hypo concentration) to a dedicated storage tank.

2.20 TOOLS, SPARE PARTS, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. The OSHGS Supplier shall furnish one set of the following spare parts for each OSHGS
installation as an Option.
1. One (1) each electrolytic cell level switch and one (1) temperature sensor
2. One (1) set of pump spare kit for each type of pump.
3. Spare fuses for the Control Panel (included in the Control Panel)

B. Spare parts shall be packed and consolidated in a single box with clear indelible identification
markings and shall be stored in a dry and warm location until transferred to the Owner at the
completion of the contract along with a packing list for future re-order.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 19
C. The OSHGS Supplier shall furnish One (1) maintenance kit which includes chlorine test kit,
water hardness test kit, hydrometer, dial thermometer, graduated cylinder, salinity chart,
cartridge filter, tools, and the Operation & Maintenance Logbook.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. The Contractor shall inspect all equipment and materials against the OSHGS Supplier’s
approved Shop Drawings at time of delivery. Equipment and materials damaged or not
meeting requirements of the OSHGS Supplier’s approved shop drawings shall be immediately
returned to the OSHGS Supplier for replacement or repair. Equipment and materials damaged
during shipment shall be replaced or repair based on the terms of the insurance.

B. Equipment and materials shall be stored in a cool dry location and protected from the
elements according to the OSHGS Supplier's instructions.

C. Equipment and materials shall be handled in an approved manner according to the OSHGS
Supplier's instructions.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Installation of the OSHGS, metering pumps, tanks and appurtenances shall be performed by
the Installation Contractor and shall be in accordance with the OSHGS Supplier’s approved
drawings. Any deviations from the approved drawings shall be repaired at the contractor’s
expense. Conflicts of information shall be called to the attention of the Engineer.
B. All equipment or assemblies shall be installed on concrete bases and secured with anchor
bolts provided by the Installation Contractor. The Installation Contractor shall determine the
anchor bolts size, length, material and make. Only the equipment bolt pattern shall be in
accordance with the OSHGS Supplier’s approved drawings. The concrete bases shall be
poured up to 1-inch below the metal bases, legs, or soleplates. Equipment legs or base plates
shall be accurately shimmed to grade and the spaces between filled with an approved non-
shrink grout. After the grout has reached its initial set, exposed edges shall be cut back 2
inches and the edges neatly finished with 1 to 2-cement mortar.

C. The Installation Contractor shall provide a drain for each piece of equipment requiring it.

D. The Installation Contractor shall support piping independent of equipment. Equipment shall
be free from all loads and stresses induced by the piping. No vibration or movements are
allowed.

E. All equipment including motors, belts and drives shall be aligned to the best industrial
standards by the Installation Contractor. The Installation Contractor shall conduct field check
and adjust all equipment alignments in the presence of the Owner or the Owner’s designated
representative.

F. The Installation Contractor shall inspect all equipment before installation. If damaged, the
Installation Contractor shall notify the OSHGS Supplier promptly. The Installation Contractor

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 20
shall not install damaged equipment.

G. The Installation Contractor shall have an authorized inspector as designated by the tank
manufacturer to validate the proper installation of all tanks.

H. The Installation Contractor shall install flex couplings or flexible hoses at the bottom inlet,
the bottom outlet of any Polyethylene tank, and any other location as noted by sticker(s) on
the tank by the tank manufacturer. The flex connections shall be in accordance with the tank
manufacturer specifications.

I. The Installation Contractor shall install flex couplings or flexible hoses compatible with
Sodium Hypochlorite solution at each outlet of each generator rack or skid.

J. The Installation Contractor shall install disconnect switches for each transformer/rectifier,
blower, water heater, water chiller, water booster pump, hypochlorite metering pump
and/or any other electrical equipment requiring it per code.

3.3 START-UP SERVICES AND TESTING

A. The Installation Contractor shall complete the OSHGS Supplier’s pre-startup checklist after
the installation of the OSHGS is complete and provide digital pictures of the installation from
the beginning to end of the process as reflected in the P&ID and defined in the scope to
schedule the OEM representative.

B. The Installation Contractor shall verify that all Health & Safety related installations such as
electrical grounding/bonding, Safety guards and warning signs in place, Eyewash stations are
installed.

C. The Installation Contractor shall verify whether OSHGS was stored properly for short or
extended period per OSHGS supplier’s guidelines.

D. The Installation Contractor shall verify and confirm the following items for the efficient
operation of the OSHGS:
1. Water, brine, and salt quality per OSHGS Supplier specifications.
2. Plumbing connections to and from all equipment, components, and instruments are
completed.
3. Plumbing connections to drains are available.
4. DC cables are connected from rectifier to electrolytic cell(s).
5. Polarity of DC Cables.
6. DC cables are installed in open air and/or open cable trays.
7. Owner SCADA wired from PLC cabinet(s) to control room.
8. Owner SCADA is ready and active.

E. The Installation Contractor and OSHGS Supplier shall make equipment adjustments such as
adjusting system water pressure required to place system in proper operating condition
provide PRV as required.

F. Installation Contractor and OSHGS Supplier shall test the OSHGS for proper operation in the
presence of the Owner and Engineer and shall demonstrate that the Sodium Hypochlorite
solution is at a concentration of 0.8%±5%.

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 21

G. If the Sodium Hypochlorite feed system fails to meet any of the specified performance
requirements, the Installation Contractor and/or OSHGS Supplier shall modify and/or
replace defective equipment until it meets specified requirements, and re-test system to
verify satisfactory operation.

H. The Installation Contractor shall, after the installation of the storage tanks is complete but
before the piping connections are made, block all outlets, and fill each tank with water (not
air) to check for leaks. No leakage shall be permitted.

I. If required, the Installation Contractor shall furnish two (2) layers of gravel at the bottom of
the brine tank(s) before start-up. The height of the gravel layers, the gravel sizes and the
gravel specifications shall be per the brine tank manufacturer’s specifications and approved
submittal drawings.

J. The Installation Contractor shall test and verify SCADA communications in the presence of
the OSHGS Supplier at the time of system start-up. The presence of the site SCADA integrator
shall be required at the time of start-up to ensure that all data are being sent and received.

K. The OSHGS supplier’s Field Services personnel or factory trained representative shall
perform the services listed below for each Hypochlorite generator and applicable dosing
system(s).
1. Test, calibrate and adjust all OSHGS provided components for best performance.
2. Assist in initial start-up and field-testing.
3. Instruct Owner’s personnel in the operation, maintenance and troubleshooting of all
components. Conduct a training seminar at the site.
4. Supervise the correction of any defective or faulty work before and during start-up of
the system.
END OF SECTION

BC&A
WEBER BASIN WATER CONSERVANCY DISTRICT ON-SITE SODIUM HYPOCHLORITE GENERATION SYSTEM
SOUTH WEBER WELL #2 RECONSTRUCTION PAGE 46 33 50 - 22
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK

APPENDIX A
PREPURCHASE MEDIUM VOLTAGE VFD CUTSHEETS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENTLP
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
MVB6505769940TITLE_0001.DWG
PROJECT TITLE PAGE
MV PROJECT
05-01-2023CTO 00
00010001
10007370575
PROJECT NUMBER:
PROJECT:
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
MVB6505769940
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENIDX
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
MVB6505769940INDEX_0001.DWG
PROJECT INDEX
MV PROJECT
05-01-2023CTO 00
00010001
10007370576
PROJECT INDEX
DOCUMENT NO TYPE VER DESCRIPTION ASSIGNED TO
10007370575 TLP 00 MV PROJECT, PROJECT TITLE PAGE MVB6505769940
10007370576 IDX 00 MV PROJECT, PROJECT INDEX MVB6505769940
10007370574 NTS 00 MV PROJECT, PROJECT GENERAL NOTES MVB6505769940
10007370571 DDSL 00 MV BULLETIN 6000MCC, LINEUP SPECIFICATION AND LAYOUT MVB6505769940-01
10007370573 OLD 00 MV BULLETIN 6000MCC, LINEUP MV POWER ONELINE MVB6505769940-01
10007370572 ILK 00 MV BULLETIN 6000MCC, LINEUP MECHANICAL INTERLOCK DIAGRAM MVB6505769940-01
10007370565 DDSL 00 MV BULLETIN 1500MCC, LINEUP SPECIFICATION AND LAYOUT MVB6505769940-02
10007370567 OLD 00 MV BULLETIN 1500MCC, LINEUP MV POWER ONELINE MVB6505769940-02
10007370566 ILK 00 MV BULLETIN 1500MCC, LINEUP MECHANICAL INTERLOCK DIAGRAM MVB6505769940-02
10007370570 DDSD 00 MV BULLETIN 6000STR, STRUCTURE LAYOUT MVB6505769940-01-01-01
10007370564 DDSD 00 MV BULLETIN 1500STR, STRUCTURE LAYOUT MVB6505769940-02-01-01
10007370569 SPC 00 MV BULLETIN 6000T, UNIT SPECIFICATION MVB6505769940-01-01-01-01
10007370568 ELD 00 MV BULLETIN 6000T, UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM MVB6505769940-01-01-01-01
10007529987 MDL 00 MV BULLETIN 6000T,DRAWING SHEET INDEX AND NOTES, MV BULLETIN 6000T,DRA MVB6505769940-01-01-01-01
10007370563 SPC 00 MV BULLETIN 1512AD, UNIT SPECIFICATION MVB6505769940-02-01-01-01
10007370562 ELD 00 MV BULLETIN 1512AD, UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM MVB6505769940-02-01-01-01
10007429789 MDL 00 MV BULLETIN 1512AD,DRAWING SHEET INDEX AND NOTES, MV BULLETIN 1512AD,D MVB6505769940-02-01-01-01
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENNTS
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-09 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
MVB6505769940NOTES_0001.DWG
PROJECT GENERAL NOTES
MV PROJECT
05-01-2023CTO 00
00010001
10007370574
PROJECT GENERAL NOTES
DESCRIPTION
001
002
FOR ELECTRICAL DEVICE DESIGNATIONS SEE UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM.
IEC SYMBOLS SHOWN ON THE ELECTRICAL DRAWING HAVE BEEN DERIVED FROM IEC 60617.
NEMA SYMBOLS SHOWN ON THE ELECTRICAL DRAWING HAVE BEEN DERIVED FROM ICS 19-2002 (R2007).
NOTE ALTERNATING CURRENTAC
DIRECT CURRENTDC
LOW VOLTAGELV
ABBREVIATIONS
RA SEPARATERASEP
JUMPER CUSTOMERJC
JUMPER MANUFACTURINGJM
MEDIUM VOLTAGEMV
REMOTEREM
PHASEPH
SHIELDSHD
NOT APPLICABLEN/A
SHIPPING SPLITSS
BROWN
BLUE
BLACK
YELLOW
WHITE
RED
ORANGE
GREEN
COLOR DESIGNATIONS
BK
BU
BN
GN
OG
RD
YE
VT
GY
WH
PK
GD
TQ
SR
VIOLET
GREY
PINK
GOLD
TURQUOISE
SILVER
CLEARCL
AMBERAM
PART TYPE DESIGNATIONS
DOORSDR
PL WIRE PANEL
WB BOTTOM PANEL
FAN AND CMC PANELWL
PUMP PANELWP
LOW VOLTAGE TUBWT
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENDDSL
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-09 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
MVB6505769940-016000VFD_DDSL_0001.DWG
LINEUP SPECIFICATION AND LAYOUT
MV BULLETIN 6000MCC
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00010001
10007370571
LINEUP CUSTOMER INFORMATION
NONE SELECTEDDRIVE SYNCHRONOUS TRANSFER
NOEXPORT PACKAGING REQUIRED
END USER LANGUAGE OF CHOICE ENGLISH
DISPLAYED UNITS OF MEASURE IMPERIAL (IN FT LBS HP)
CUST. SPECIFIED CERTIFICATION CULUS
DRAWING FORMAT IEC
CONFIGURATION TYPE
DRIVE SYSTEM COMMUNICATION NONE SELECTED
OPERATING ALTITUDE 0-1463 M (0-4800 FT)
HIGH OPERATING AMBIENT 0 - 40 DEG C
POWERFLEX 6000T
LINEUP INCOMING POWER
NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE (V)4160 VAC (L-L)
LINE FREQUENCY (HZ)
POWER SYSTEM CONFIGURATION WYE (SOLID GROUNDED)
LINEUP CONNECTION TYPE NONE SELECTED
INCOMING CABLE DIRECTION BOTTOM
LINEUP INCOMING POWER LOCATION NONE SELECTED
60
LINEUP ENCLOSURE
LOW VOLTAGE WIREWAY NONE SELECTED
SEISMIC RATED NONE SELECTED
SHIPPING BLOCK CONFIGURATION NONE SELECTED
LINEUP NAMEPLATES
MASTER NAMEPLATE ON LINEUP NONE SELECTED
UNIT NAMEPLATES WHITE W/ BLACK LETTERS 3 LINES
LINEUP CERTIFICATIONS
CUST. SPECIFIED CERTIFICATION CULUS
OTHER CERTIFICATION REQUIRED NONE SELECTED
LINEUP FEATURES COMMON TO ALL UNITS
CONTROL POWER SOURCE SEPARATE CONTROL POWER
CONTROL VOLTAGE (V)120 VAC (L-GND)
CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING TYPE STANDARD #14 AWG CU (TINNED), TYPE TEW (MTW)
LOAD CABLE EXIT DIRECTION BOTTOM
UNIT 'A' ID
STRUCTURE ID
SHIPPING BLOCK ID
LINEUP ID
PROJECT ID
STRUCTURE WIDTH
STRUCTURE WEIGHT
UNIT 'A' BULLETIN
UNIT 'A' LOCATION
UNIT DDSD
STRUCTURE DEPTH
STRUCTURE HEIGHT
STRUCTURE
ENCLOSURE TYPE
ARC RESISTANT
EXTERNAL
CUSTOM COLOR
POWER BUS
STRUCTURE POSITION
LOW VOLTAGE PANEL
LOW VOLTAGE
KEY INTERLOCK
CONFIGURATION CODE
DESCRIPTION
LINE CABLES PRESENT
IN SHIPPING BLOCK
PRESENT
LINEUP LAYOUT AND STRUCTURE SPECIFICATION
PAINT COLOR
WIREWAY
SWITCH
UNIT 'B' ID
UNIT 'B' LOCATION
UNIT 'B' BULLETIN
ITEM ID
01
MVB6505769940
01
01A
6000T
10007370570
01
01
MVB6505769940-101
4914 KG [10825 LBS]
1910 MM [75.20 IN]
1250 MM [49.21 IN]
2888 MM [113.7 IN]
F1910.1
(F1910.1 VFD)
1/IP42(G)
NO
RAL7038 GRAY TEXTURED+BLACK LV
STAND-ALONE (COMPLETE)
N/A
YES
N/A
N/A
N/A
NONE SELECTED
N/A
N/A
10
FAN
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENOLD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
MVB6505769940-016000VFD_OLD_0001.DWG
LINEUP LOAD DATA AND BUS LINKS
LINEUP MV POWER ONELINE
MV BULLETIN 6000MCC
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00010001
10007370573
UNIT NAMEPLATE
UNIT BULLETIN
UNIT LOCATION
UNIT ID
STRUCTURE ID
SHIPPING BLOCK ID
LINEUP ID
PROJECT ID
MASTER NAMEPLATE
MAXIMUM COLD STALL TIME
SERVICE FACTOR/OVER-CAPACITY
RATED SPEED
LOAD RATED CURRENT
LOCKED ROTOR CURRENT
MAXIMUM HOT STALL TIME
ACCELERATION TIME OF LOAD
POWER FACTOR
POWER FACTOR ANGLE
LOAD RATING
UNIT ELD
UNIT MDL
UNIT SPC
MOTOR VOLTAGE
ITEM ID
MVB6505769940
01
L1,L2,L3
U,V,W
Q-VFD
-GND_PE
-FA_SA
GND_PE
1
1000:1
-BC_1V
-BC_1W
-BC_1U
1350KVA
BV_DIS
180 AMP
-KF_PCU
-KF_PCV
-KF_PCW
1
4000/1
-BC_U
-BC_W
A 4160 VAC (L-L), 3PH, 60HZ
AM
3~
MV_MTR
+REM
MAIN DEVICE
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
Q-MD
MD_MAIN_STAT
+REM
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4160 V (L-L), 3 PHASE, 60 HZ
LINE CABLE ENTRY DIRECTION: TOP
2.8KV MINIMUM LINE-TO-LINE

LOAD CABLE EXIT DIRECTION: BOTTOM
2.8KV MINIMUM LINE-TO-LINE

4160 V (L-L), 3 PHASE, 60 HZ
6000T
1.15
1785 RPM
155 AMP
4000
0.85
1250 HP
01A
01
01
01
MVB6505769940-101
10007370568

10007370569
N/A
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENILK
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-09 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
MVB6505769940-016000VFD_ILK_0001.DWG
LINEUP MECHANICAL INTERLOCK DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000MCC
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00010001
10007370572
KEY INTERLOCK SYMBOLS
SWITCH INTERLOCK - BOLT EXTENDED
SWITCH INTERLOCK - BOLT WITHDRAWN
SWITCH INTERLOCK, MULTI KEY UNIT
ACCESS DOOR INTERLOCK - BOLT EXTENDED
ACCESS DOOR INTERLOCK - BOLT WITHDRAWN
ACCESS DOOR INTERLOCK - MULTI KEY UNIT
TRANSFER INTERLOCK
P - PRIMARY KEY
S - SECONDARY KEY
P S S
SECONDARY KEYS RELEASED WHEN PRIMARY KEY IS TRAPPED
LO DEVICE IS LOCKED IN OPEN POSITION
LC DEVICE IS LOCKED IN CLOSED POSITION
DEVICE IS LOCKED IN OPEN OR CLOSED POSITIONLO/LC
KEY CAN BE RELEASED WHEN INTERLOCK BOLT IS EXTENDEDE
KEY CAN BE RELEASED WHEN INTERLOCK BOLT IS WITHDRAWNW
KEY FLOW
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK
KEY IS SHIPPED WITH LOCK
RAM INTERLOCK
LOW VOLTAGE PANEL INTERLOCK
PROVISION FOR PADLOCK
DOOR CLIP FASTENED TO TOP DOOR
DOOR CLIP FASTENED TO BOTTOM DOOR
CABINET SLIDER INTERLOCK (LEFT/RIGHT)
CABINET SLIDER INTERLOCK (RIGHT/LEFT)
DOOR CABINET SLIDER INTERLOCK (TOP/BOTTOM)
REVERSE DOOR INTERLOCK
SWITCH HANDLE KEY IS SHIPPED WITH SEPARATE EQUIPMENT
KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM SUPPLIED BY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION
SYSTEM IS SHOWN IN THE
DE-ENERGIZED STATE.
DANGER: THE CUSTOMER MUST ENSURE
THAT THE KEY INTERLOCK SCHEME
FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS INTEGRATED
INTO THEIR OPERATION IN A
PREDETERMINED SAFE SEQUENCE,
THEREFORE ELIMINATING MISS
OPERATIONS RESULTING IN DAMAGE TO
THIS EQUIPMENT.
DANGER: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR
DEATH.
DUPLICATE KEYS
EXTREME DANGER EXISTS WITH THE
MISUSE OF ANY DUPLICATE KEY(S)
USED TO CIRCUMVENT THE DESIGNED
SEQUENTIAL OPERATION OF A
TRAPPED KEY SYSTEM. DUPLICATE
KEYS DEFEAT THE PROTECTION
PROVIDED BY ANY TRAPPED KEY
SYSTEM.
AFTER FINAL INSTALLATION,
DUPLICATE KEYS MUST BE DESTROYED
OR SECURED AND CONTROLLED BY A
RESPONSIBLE PERSON TO PREVENT
ANY MISUSE OF THE DUPLICATED KEY.
CONSULT THE KEY INTERLOCK
DRAWINGS TO DETERMINE THE NUMBER
OF KEYS REQUIRED FOR SAFE
EQUIPMENT OPERATION.
LV CONTROL COMPARTMENT INTERLOCK - BOLT EXTENDED
ADDITIONAL INTERLOCK KEYS HAVE BEEN SHIPPED FOR
INSTALLATION PURPOSES. THE QUANTITY OF KEYS REQUIRED
FOR SAFE EQUIPMENT OPERATION IS INDICATED BY INSTANCES
OF THIS SYMBOL IN THIS DIAGRAM.
UNIT BULLETIN
UNIT LOCATION
UNIT ID
STRUCTURE ID
SHIPPING BLOCK ID
LINEUP ID
PROJECT ID
UNIT ELD
ITEM ID
01
MVB6505769940
REMOVABLE OPERATING HANDLE
6000T
10007370568

INPUT CONTACTOR
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
-QS_DI
LV
MV
K2 K2
DETAIL 'A'
MVMV
DETAIL 'A'
SEE
P SS SK1/K2/K2/K2
K1 K2
K1
THE CUSTOMER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR INSTALLING A KEY INTERLOCK IN THE INPUT DEVICE WHICH INTEGRATES WITH THE ROCKWELL
AUTOMATION DRIVE KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM TO PREVENT ACCESS TO THE DRIVE MV SECTIONS WITH INPUT POWER STILL APPLIED.
DANGER: THE MV VFD IS ONE COMPONENT IN THIS SYSTEM WHICH INCLUDES AN INPUT DEVICE SUPPLIED BY OTHERS. THE SUPPLIER OF
THE INPUT DEVICE IS RESPONSIBLE FOR ENSURING THAT THERE IS SAFE ACCESS TO THE INPUT DEVICE AND SAFE ACCESS TO THE
DRIVE.
K2
K2 K2
MVB6505769940- 201
DIR: 10007370566
01A
101
01
01
01
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENDDSL
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
MVB6505769940-021500MCC_DDSL_0001.DWG
LINEUP SPECIFICATION AND LAYOUT
MV BULLETIN 1500MCC
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00010001
10007370565
UNIT 'A' ID
STRUCTURE ID
SHIPPING BLOCK ID
LINEUP ID
PROJECT ID
STRUCTURE WIDTH
STRUCTURE WEIGHT
UNIT 'A' BULLETIN
UNIT 'A' LOCATION
UNIT DDSD
STRUCTURE DEPTH
STRUCTURE HEIGHT
STRUCTURE
ENCLOSURE TYPE
ARC RESISTANT
EXTERNAL
CUSTOM COLOR
POWER BUS
STRUCTURE POSITION
LOW VOLTAGE PANEL
LOW VOLTAGE
KEY INTERLOCK
CONFIGURATION CODE
DESCRIPTION
LINE CABLES PRESENT
IN SHIPPING BLOCK
PRESENT
LINEUP LAYOUT AND STRUCTURE SPECIFICATION
PAINT COLOR
WIREWAY
SWITCH
UNIT 'B' ID
UNIT 'B' LOCATION
UNIT 'B' BULLETIN
ITEM ID
02
MVB6505769940LINEUP CUSTOMER INFORMATION
NOEXPORT PACKAGING REQUIRED
NONE SELECTED
NONE SELECTEDDRIVE SYNCHRONOUS TRANSFER
OTHER CERTIFICATION REQUIRED
0 - 40 DEG CHIGH OPERATING AMBIENT
1001-2000 M (3300-6600 FT)OPERATING ALTITUDE
NO COMMUNICATION NETWORKCOMMUNICATION NETWORK
MOTOR CONTROL CENTERCONFIGURATION TYPE
CUST. SPECIFIED CERTIFICATION
IMPERIAL (IN FT LBS HP)DISPLAYED UNITS OF MEASURE
ENGLISHEND USER LANGUAGE OF CHOICE
None Selected
LINEUP INCOMING POWER
WYE (HIGH RESISTANCE GROUND)POWER SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
LEFT END OF LINEUPLINEUP INCOMING POWER LOCATION
BOTTOMINCOMING CABLE DIRECTION
LUGS CONNECTED TO MAIN BUSLINEUP CONNECTION TYPE
LINE FREQUENCY (HZ)
4160 VAC (L-L)NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE (V)
60
LINEUP ENCLOSURE
ROCKWELL STANDARDSYSTEM ENCLOSURE TYPE
NOARC RESISTANT
NONE SELECTEDARC EXHAUST TYPE
LINEUP NAMEPLATES
WHITE W/ BLACK LETTERS 3 LINES
WHITE W/ BLACK LETTERS 3 LINES
UNIT NAMEPLATES
MASTER NAMEPLATE ON LINEUP
LINEUP FEATURES COMMON TO ALL UNITS
BOTTOM EXITLOAD CABLE EXIT DIRECTION
TEW OR MTW TINNED COPPERCONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING TYPE
120 VAC (L-GND)CONTROL VOLTAGE (V)
CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERSCONTROL POWER SOURCE
LINEUP BUS WORK
NOBACK-TO-BACK BUS LINKS
UNPLATEDGROUND BUS PLATING
GROUND BUS SIZE
50KA (RMS SYMMETRICAL) 0.5 SECBUS BAR BRACING
NON-INSULATEDBUS BAR INSULATION
TIN PLATEDBUS BAR PLATING
COPPERBUS BAR MATERIAL
BUS BAR CURRENT RATING (A)
3/8 X 2 INCH (9.5 X 51MM)
1200 A
UNIT 'A' ID
STRUCTURE ID
SHIPPING BLOCK ID
LINEUP ID
PROJECT ID
STRUCTURE WIDTH
STRUCTURE WEIGHT
UNIT 'A' BULLETIN
UNIT 'A' LOCATION
UNIT DDSD
STRUCTURE DEPTH
STRUCTURE HEIGHT
STRUCTURE
ENCLOSURE TYPE
ARC RESISTANT
EXTERNAL
CUSTOM COLOR
POWER BUS
STRUCTURE POSITION
LOW VOLTAGE PANEL
LOW VOLTAGE
KEY INTERLOCK
CONFIGURATION CODE
DESCRIPTION
LINE CABLES PRESENT
IN SHIPPING BLOCK
PRESENT
LINEUP LAYOUT AND STRUCTURE SPECIFICATION
PAINT COLOR
WIREWAY
SWITCH
UNIT 'B' ID
UNIT 'B' LOCATION
UNIT 'B' BULLETIN
ITEM ID
02
MVB6505769940
01
01
MVB6505769940-201
488 KG [1075 LBS]
660 MM [26 IN]
914 MM [36 IN]
2311 MM [91 IN]
A660.1
(26" FVNR)
1/IP21
NO
ANSI 49 MED LT
GRAY HIGH GLOSS
None Selected
BOTTOM
STAND-ALONE
(COMPLETE)
NONE SELECTED
2 X 4 INCH (50
X 100MM)
1 KEY IN UNIT A
N/A
N/A
N/A
1512AD
01A
01
10007370564
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-08A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENOLD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
MVB6505769940-021500MCC_OLD_0001.DWG
LINEUP LOAD DATA AND BUS LINKS
LINEUP MV POWER ONELINE
MV BULLETIN 1500MCC
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00010001
10007370567
UNIT NAMEPLATE
UNIT BULLETIN
UNIT LOCATION
UNIT ID
STRUCTURE ID
SHIPPING BLOCK ID
LINEUP ID
PROJECT ID
MASTER NAMEPLATE
MAXIMUM COLD STALL TIME
SERVICE FACTOR/OVER-CAPACITY
RATED SPEED
LOAD RATED CURRENT
LOCKED ROTOR CURRENT
MAXIMUM HOT STALL TIME
ACCELERATION TIME OF LOAD
POWER FACTOR
POWER FACTOR ANGLE
LOAD RATING
UNIT ELD
UNIT MDL
UNIT SPC
MOTOR VOLTAGE
ITEM ID
MVB6505769940
02
(3)
1U,1V,1WQ-DI
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.90
N/A
N/A
250/5
-BC_PHASE
-QS_DI
250E, DBL BARREL
-FF_PWR
L1,L2,L3
GND_PE
(2) 1/2E
-FF_CPT1
500VA
4200V
110/120V
-BV_CPT1
-Q_VFD
+RASEP
LOAD CABLE EXIT DIRECTION: TOP EXIT
1512AD
1.15
1785
155 A
1250 HP
01A
01
01
01
MVB6505769940-201
10007370562

10007370563
N/A
1E, 4.8KV
-FF_PT1
1E, 4.8KV
-FF_PT2
425VA
4200V
120V
-BV_PT1
425VA
4200V
120V
-BV_PT2
400A, 5KV
-QC_DI
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENILK
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
MVB6505769940-021500MCC_ILK_0001.DWG
LINEUP MECHANICAL INTERLOCK DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 1500MCC
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00010001
10007370566
KEY INTERLOCK SYMBOLS
SWITCH INTERLOCK - BOLT EXTENDED
SWITCH INTERLOCK - BOLT WITHDRAWN
SWITCH INTERLOCK, MULTI KEY UNIT
ACCESS DOOR INTERLOCK - BOLT EXTENDED
ACCESS DOOR INTERLOCK - BOLT WITHDRAWN
ACCESS DOOR INTERLOCK - MULTI KEY UNIT
TRANSFER INTERLOCK
P - PRIMARY KEY
S - SECONDARY KEY
P S S
SECONDARY KEYS RELEASED WHEN PRIMARY KEY IS TRAPPED
LO DEVICE IS LOCKED IN OPEN POSITION
LC DEVICE IS LOCKED IN CLOSED POSITION
DEVICE IS LOCKED IN OPEN OR CLOSED POSITIONLO/LC
KEY CAN BE RELEASED WHEN INTERLOCK BOLT IS EXTENDEDE
KEY CAN BE RELEASED WHEN INTERLOCK BOLT IS WITHDRAWNW
KEY FLOW
MECHANICAL INTERLOCK
KEY IS SHIPPED WITH LOCK
RAM INTERLOCK
LOW VOLTAGE PANEL INTERLOCK
PROVISION FOR PADLOCK
DOOR CLIP FASTENED TO TOP DOOR
DOOR CLIP FASTENED TO BOTTOM DOOR
CABINET SLIDER INTERLOCK (LEFT/RIGHT)
CABINET SLIDER INTERLOCK (RIGHT/LEFT)
DOOR CABINET SLIDER INTERLOCK (TOP/BOTTOM)
REVERSE DOOR INTERLOCK
SWITCH HANDLE KEY IS SHIPPED WITH SEPARATE EQUIPMENT
KEY INTERLOCK SYSTEM SUPPLIED BY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION
SYSTEM IS SHOWN IN THE
DE-ENERGIZED STATE.
DANGER: THE CUSTOMER MUST ENSURE
THAT THE KEY INTERLOCK SCHEME
FOR THIS EQUIPMENT IS INTEGRATED
INTO THEIR OPERATION IN A
PREDETERMINED SAFE SEQUENCE,
THEREFORE ELIMINATING MISS
OPERATIONS RESULTING IN DAMAGE TO
THIS EQUIPMENT.
DANGER: ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD.
WILL CAUSE SEVERE INJURY OR
DEATH.
DUPLICATE KEYS
EXTREME DANGER EXISTS WITH THE
MISUSE OF ANY DUPLICATE KEY(S)
USED TO CIRCUMVENT THE DESIGNED
SEQUENTIAL OPERATION OF A
TRAPPED KEY SYSTEM. DUPLICATE
KEYS DEFEAT THE PROTECTION
PROVIDED BY ANY TRAPPED KEY
SYSTEM.
AFTER FINAL INSTALLATION,
DUPLICATE KEYS MUST BE DESTROYED
OR SECURED AND CONTROLLED BY A
RESPONSIBLE PERSON TO PREVENT
ANY MISUSE OF THE DUPLICATED KEY.
CONSULT THE KEY INTERLOCK
DRAWINGS TO DETERMINE THE NUMBER
OF KEYS REQUIRED FOR SAFE
EQUIPMENT OPERATION.
LV CONTROL COMPARTMENT INTERLOCK - BOLT EXTENDED
ADDITIONAL INTERLOCK KEYS HAVE BEEN SHIPPED FOR
INSTALLATION PURPOSES. THE QUANTITY OF KEYS REQUIRED
FOR SAFE EQUIPMENT OPERATION IS INDICATED BY INSTANCES
OF THIS SYMBOL IN THIS DIAGRAM.
UNIT BULLETIN
UNIT LOCATION
UNIT ID
STRUCTURE ID
SHIPPING BLOCK ID
LINEUP ID
PROJECT ID
UNIT ELD
ITEM ID
02
MVB6505769940
REMOVABLE OPERATING HANDLE
WHEN KEY K1 FROM THE -QS_DI ISOLATOR IS INSTALLED IN TRANSFER BLOCK OF
THE CORRESPONDING SYSTEM VFD (LOCATED IN A SEPARATE LINEUP DRIVE ITEM
# 101) THE \VC_CEWS_IK_HDL_KB_DEFINED\ KEYS FOR THE MV DOORS OF THE
VFD ARE RELEASED FROM THE TRANSFER BLOCK AND CAN BE USED TO OPEN THE
DOORS OF THE VFD. (KEY IS SHIPPED WITH THE VFD)
LV
MV
-QS_DI
L1,L2,L3
1U,1V,1W
-QC_DI
-QS_DI
K1
K1
LO
10007370562
1512AD
01A
01
01
01
MVB6505769940-201
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENDDSD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-09 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
6364F3837FEE48CB6000STR_DDMODEL_0001.DWG
FRONT VIEW
STRUCTURE LAYOUT
MV BULLETIN 6000STR
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00010001
10007370570
2328.0
0.0
2888.6
19
0
0
.
0
0.
0
19
1
0
.
0
0.
0
12
7
.
5
22
7
.
5
1250.0
0.0
952.5
127.0
G H
435.0x300.0
11
3
.
0
0.
0
91
3
.
0
12
8
.
0
14
7
.
0
32
.
0
64
4
.
0
12
5
6
.
0
18
6
8
.
0
17
8
7
.
0
19
0
0
.
0
19.500
0.000
118.000
1127.000
1195.500
1215.000
350.0
130.0
G H
x .0
FRONT VIEW
STRUCTURE CONFIGURATION CODE:F1910.1
DIMENSION:MM
FLOOR PLAN
ROOF PLAN
NOTE
A
B
C 400 IS REQUIRED FOR NON-DUCTED DRIVES.1000 IS REQUIRED FOR DUCTED DRIVES.
COOLING FANS
FOOTNOTES
10
FAN
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
RATB.CEWS.JIC.H.D.C
APPROVED
MVB6505769940
DDSD EN
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2A2023-06-19 APPROVAL
00 2023-08-07 REL TO MFG
R.TRIVEDI
S. JOHN
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
OF
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
RATB.SAP.JIC.H.D.C
10007370564
0001 0002
00
S. JOHN 05-01-2023
MV BULLETIN 1500STR
STRUCTURE LAYOUT
18FD8106FECC495E1500STR_DDMODEL_0001.DWG
D
91.25 [2317]
1.00 [25]
30.00 [762]
16.04 [407]
0 [0]
30.00 [762]
9.31 [236]
0 [0]
4.45 [113]
32.99 [837]
36.00 [914]
36.00 [914]
4.64 [118]
20.13 [511]
26
.
0
0

[
6
6
0
]
0
[
0
]
36
.
0
0

[
9
1
4
]
0
[
0
]
0
[
0
]
3.
6
1

[
9
2
]
5.
4
1

[
1
3
7
]
6.
6
1

[
1
6
8
]
26
.
0
0

[
6
6
0
]
0
[
0
]
2.
3
1

[
5
9
]
4.
6
2

[
1
1
7
]
5.
0
0

[
1
2
7
]
6.
5
6

[
1
6
7
]
23
.
6
9

[
6
0
2
]
26
.
0
0

[
6
6
0
]
0 [0]
91.25 [2317]
0 [0]
2
84
100
103
7
8
15
84
5
1
4
FRONT VIEW RIGHT VIEW ROOF PLAN
FLOOR PLAN
12
STRUCTURE CONFIGURATION CODE:A660.1
DIMENSION:IN [MM]
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
RATB.CEWS.JIC.H.D.C
APPROVED
MVB6505769940
DDSD EN
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2A2023-06-19 APPROVAL
00 2023-08-07 REL TO MFG
R.TRIVEDI
S. JOHN
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
OF
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
RATB.SAP.JIC.H.D.C
10007370564
0002 0002
00
S. JOHN 05-01-2023
MV BULLETIN 1500STR
FOOTNOTES
18FD8106FECC495E1500STR_DDMODEL_0002.DWG
D
FOOTNOTES
NOTE DESCRIPTION
1 MEDIUM VOLTAGE COMPARTMENT
2 LOW VOLTAGE COMPARTMENT
4 REMOVABLE LIFTING ANGLES (2) SUPPLIED (NOT SHOWN)
5 MOUNTING HOLES FOR 0.50 [12] DIA. ANCHOR BOLTS
7 BOTTOM LINE CABLE CONDUIT OPENING, 5.68 [144] X 9.00 [229]
8 BOTTOM LOAD CABLE CONDUIT OPENING, 5.68 [144] X 9.00 [229]
12 CONTROL WIRE CONDUIT OPENING, 3.00 [76] X 3.00 [76]
15 CONTROL WIRE CONDUIT OPENING, 3.00 [76] X 5.00 [127]
84 NON-REMOVABLE SILL CHANNELS, 1.00 [25] X 3.00 [76]
100 TOP LINE CABLE CONDUIT OPENING, 5.68 [144] X 9.00 [229]
103 TOP LOAD CABLE CONDUIT OPENING, 5.68 [144] X 9.00 [229]
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENSPC
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-09 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F47000_UNT_SPC_0001.DWG
UNIT SPECIFICATION
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00010001
10007370569
BASE UNIT DATA
CATALOG NUMBER
1/IP42(G)ENCLOSURE TYPE
4160 VAC (L-L)MOTOR VOLTAGE (V)
NONE SELECTED
BASIC CONTROLDRIVE SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
NONE SELECTEDCONTROL POWER SOURCE
NONE SELECTEDINTEGRAL DRIVE INPUT CODE
DRIVE RECTIFIER CODE
NONE SELECTEDTRANSFORMER TYPE
DRIVE CURRENT RATING CODE
NONE SELECTEDCONTROLLER SIZE
CONTACTOR CONTROL TYPE
SYSTEM VOLTAGE CLASS
OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 0 - 40 DEG C
UNIT DESCRIPTION POWERFLEX 6000T AIR COOLED
DRIVE RATING CODE ND HIGH ALTITUDE 1463M 40 C
6000T-AA180KE6AJ-EHEU
NONE SELECTED
171A (DERATED ON ALTITUDE CONSIDERATION)
4160 V
METERING DEVICES
NONE SELECTEDTACHOMETER INTERFACE
NONE SELECTEDMETERING - ANALOG CLUSTER
AUXILIARY CONTROL RELAYS
RUNNING/READY/FAULT/ALARMAUXILIARY RELAYS - IEC
COMMUNICATION & ANALOG SIGNALS
NONE SELECTEDCOMM ADAPTERS CONTROL LOGIX
NONE SELECTEDCOMM ADAPTERS PORT #1
NONE SELECTEDCOMM ADAPTERS DPI
NONE SELECTEDISOLATED ANALOG INTERFACE TO
NONE SELECTEDISOLATED ANALOG INTERFACE LO
CURRENT OUTPUTISOLATED ANALOG INTERFACE CO
NONE SELECTEDISOLATED ANALOG INTERFACE VO
SPEED OUTPUTISOLATED ANALOG INTERFACE SO
SPEED REFERENCE INPUTISOLATED ANALOG INTERFACE SRI
CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING
TEW (MTW) TINNED COPPERCONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING TYPE
NONE SELECTEDCONTROL CIRCUIT LUGS
NONE SELECTEDHEAT SHRINK TUBING
IEC TERMINAL BLOCKSCONTROL TERMINAL BLOCK TYPE
SPACE HEATERS
NONE SELECTEDCABINET SPACE HEATER
2700W AT 120VAC, EXT. SOURCEMOTOR SPACE HEATER CIRCUIT
ADDITIONAL COOLING OPTIONS
NONE SELECTEDHEAT EXCHANGER
NONE SELECTEDDUCTED VFD EXHAUST
NONE SELECTEDREDUNDANT FAN
MISCELLANEOUS
NONE SELECTEDREMOTE MONITORING AND ANALYTICS
NOUNIT HAS MASTER NAMEPLATE
NONE SELECTEDREDUNDANT POWER SUPPLY
STANDARD 5 CYCLEDRIVE UV RIDE THROUGH
0-1463 M (0-4800 FT)HIGH ALTITUDE OPTION
NONE SELECTEDPOWER CELL DOOR VENTED
NONE SELECTEDDEVICE NAMEPLATES
PROTECTION & MONITORING
NONE SELECTEDDRIVE FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
NONE SELECTEDTORQPROVE CONTROL
OPERATOR INTERFACE LOCALLY MOUNTED EHIM
RTD MONITORING RELAYS NONE SELECTED
DOOR MOUNTED PILOT DEVICES
PUSH BUTTONS - NON-ILLUM #1 NONE SELECTED
PUSH BUTTONS - NON-ILLUM #3 NONE SELECTED
PUSH BUTTONS - NON-ILLUM #4 NONE SELECTED
PUSH BUTTONS - EMERGENCY STOP EMERGENCY STOP
LENS COLOR - FORWARD NONE SELECTED
LENS COLOR - REVERSE NONE SELECTED
LENS COLOR - OFF NONE SELECTED
LENS COLOR - ON NONE SELECTED
LENS COLOR - DRIVE READY GREEN
LENS COLOR - DRIVE RUNNING RED
LENS COLOR - FAULT RED
LENS COLOR - WARNING NONE SELECTED
SELECTOR SWITCH #1 LOCAL-REMOTE-DCS
SELECTOR SWITCH #3 NONE SELECTED
SPEED POTENTIOMETER NONE SELECTED
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0001.DWG
DRAWING SHEET INDEX, FOOTNOTES
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370001
10007370568
DRAWING SHEET INDEX
WIRING SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED
BY ROCKWELL AUTOMATION.
WIRING SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS.
WIRING SUPPLIED BY ROCKWELL AUTOMATION
TO BE COMPLETED BY OTHERS.
+WT-1-1 PART TYPE-SECTION-ZONE
/0050.4D
-KG_DI
CROSS REFERENCE: SHEET AND CO-ORDINATE
DEVICE DESIGNATION
FOOTNOTES
ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
ID DESCRIPTION
SHEET NO DESCRIPTION
0001 DRAWING SHEET INDEX, FOOTNOTES
0002 DEVICE DESIGNATIONS
0003 DEVICE DESIGNATIONS
0004 TERMINAL STRIP REPORT
0005 TERMINAL STRIP REPORT
0006 SPACE HEATER CIRCUITS
0007 ETHERNET SWITCH AND AUXILIARY RELAY CONTACTS
0008 MV INTERLOCK
0009 MV INTERLOCK
0010 POWER CONFIGURATION
0011 JUNCTION CABINET POWER CIRCUIT
0012 INPUT CIRCUITS
0013 POWER CELLS
0014 MAIN COOLING FAN FOR TRANSF AND POWER CELL CABINET
0015 CONTROL POWER RESET CIRCUIT
0016 AC/DC CONVERTER CIRCUIT
0017 AC/DC CONVERTER CIRCUIT
0018 DC CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION
0019 SFIB, POD AND PIOB
0020 PIOB CONNECTIONS
0021 24VDC CONVERTER CIRCUITS
0022 TRANSCIVER CONNECTION
0023 POD I/O MODULE SLOT 7
0024 POD I/O MODULE SLOT 8
0025 POD OPTION MODULE SLOT 4
0026 POD OPTION MODULE SLOT 5
0027 POD OPTION MODULE SLOT 6
0028 MAIN POINT I/O LAYOUT
0029 MAIN POINT 1 I/O 1 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
0030 MAIN POINT 1 I/O 2 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
0031 MAIN POINT 1 I/O 3 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
0032 MAIN POINT 1 I/O 4 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
0033 MAIN POINT 1 I/O 5 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
0034 MAIN POINT 1 I/O 6,7 - OUTPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
0035 MAIN POINT 1 I/O 8,9 - OUTPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
0036 MV TRANSFORMER T1 RTD
0037 ESTOP AND DOOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT
NOTE DESCRIPTION
003 REMOVE JUMPER WHEN CONNECTING REMOTE EQUIPMENT.
004 EXTERNAL SUPPLY MUST HAVE BRANCH CIRCUIT PROTECTION.
010 REFER TO USERS MANUAL FOR WIRING INFORMATION.
031 FOR CUSTOMER USE.
060 WIRING TO BE INSTALLED IN THIS UNIT THEN COILED AND SECURED FOR SHIPMENT. TO BE TERMINATED IN ADJACENT UNIT BY OTHERS
DURING COMMISSIONING.
062 IF CUSTOMER DOESN'T HAVE NEUTRAL GROUNDED THEN REMOVE THIS JUMPER
200 DANGER: MORE THAN ONE LIVE CIRCUIT BEHIND THIS DOOR. DE-ENERGIZE POWER LOCATED AT ____ BEFORE SERVICING. FAILURE TO
DE-ENERGIZE POWER CAN RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.
203 DANGER: GROUND MUST BE CONNECTED TO PREVENT HIGH VOLTAGES FROM BEING APPLIED TO DRIVE CONTROL BOARDS. FAILURE TO
PROPERLY GROUND CAN RESULT IN SEVERE INJURY OR DEATH.
261 NORMALLY CLOSED LATE BREAK (NCLB) CENTER POSITION
262 NORMALLY OPEN (NO) CENTER LEFT
263 NORMALLY CLOSED EARLY BREAK (NCEB) LEFT POSITION
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0002.DWG
DEVICE DESIGNATIONS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370002
10007370568
DEVICE DESIGNATIONS
ID DESCRIPTION XREF
-AR_MSR RELAY - PROTECTION, MONITORING SAFETY /0037.2E
-BC_L1 TRANSFORMER - CURRENT /0012.3B
-BC_L2 TRANSFORMER - CURRENT /0012.5B
-BC_L3 TRANSFORMER - CURRENT /0012.7B
-BC_U TRANSFORMER - CURRENT, HALL EFFECT /0013.14A
-BC_W TRANSFORMER - CURRENT HALL EFFECT /0013.15H
-BH_VFDC RESISTIVE TEMPERATURE DETECTOR - VFD CABINET /0036.2F
-BV_CPT1 TRANSFORMER - VOLTAGE, CONTROL POWER /0015.5F
-BV_DIS TRANSFORMER - DRIVE ISOLATION /0012.11B
-EH_MSH SPACE HEATER/HEATER ELEMENT - MOTOR /0006.10K
-FA_SA1 SURGE ARRESTOR 1 /0011.4D
-FA_SA2 SURGE ARRESTOR 2 /0011.5D
-FA_SA3 SURGE ARRESTOR 3 /0011.5D
-FB_10CB1 CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE 1, DC CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION /0018.3B
-FB_10CB2 CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE 2, DC CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION /0018.6B
-FB_10CB3 CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE 3, DC CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION /0018.7B
-FB_10CB4 CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE 4, DC CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION /0018.9B
-FB_10CB5 CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE 5, DC CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION /0018.10B
-FB_10CB6 CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE 6, DC CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION /0018.13B
-FB_EXTCTRL CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE, MAIN CONTROL POWER FROM EXTERNAL SOURCE /0015.5C
-FB_FAN_TPC CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE, FANS SUPPLY IN TRANSFORMER AMD POWER CELL CABINET /0014.7B
-FB_INTCTRL CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE, MAIN CONTROL POWER FROM INTERNAL TRANSFORMER /0015.12D
-FB_MSH CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE, PRIMARY OF MOTOR SPACE HEATER CIRCUIT /0006.5K
-FB_PLC1 CIRCUIT BREAKER - MINIATURE, PLC CONTROL CIRCUIT /0016.5E
-FE_EN FERRITE - ETHERNET CABLE /0007.5H
-FE_RJ45 FERRITE - RJ45 CABLE /0007.5H
-FV_CTRL1 VARISTOR - METAL OXIDE, CONTROL CIRCUIT /0015.5D
-FV_CTRL2 VARISTOR - METAL OXIDE, CONTROL CIRCUIT /0015.4D
-FV_CTRL3 VARISTOR - METAL OXIDE, CONTROL CIRCUIT /0015.6D
-GND_PE GROUND - EARTH POTENTIAL /0010.4C
-GND_SG GROUND - SAFETY /0012.7H
-GP_BUFFER POWER SUPPLY - BUFFER /0018.4F
-JC_E7 JUMPER CUSTOMER 7 - MOTOR SPACE HEATER SUPPLY /0006.13K
-JC_E8 JUMPER CUSTOMER 8 - CONTROL POWER RESET CIRCUIT /0015.5C
-JC_EADIC1 JUMPER CUSTOMER 1 - ESTOP AND DOOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT /0037.5B
-JC_ESTP1 JUMPER CUSTOMER - REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP 1 /0037.3C
-JC_ESTP2 JUMPER CUSTOMER - REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP 2 /0037.4C
-JC_STP JUMPER CUSTOMER - REMOTE STOP /0024.6C
-KA_ALM RELAY - AUXILIARY, ALARM /0023.12J
-KA_CPMON RELAY - AUXILIARY, CONTROL POWER MONITOR /0016.13E
-KA_CR19 RELAY - AUXILIARY 19, ESRA /0037.4J
-KA_CR19A RELAY - AUXILIARY 19A, ESRB /0037.3J
-KA_CR2 RELAY - AUXILIARY 2, LOCAL/REMOTE /0024.15C
-KA_CR20 RELAY - AUXILIARY 20, DOOR RA /0037.9J
-KA_CRCC1 RELAY - AUXILIARY 1, CONTROL CABINET /0037.11J
-KA_FLT RELAY - AUXILIARY, FAULT /0023.14J
-KA_IDFR RELAY - AUXILIARY, INPUT DEVICE FEEDBACK RELAY /0018.3K
-KA_IRC RELAY - AUXILIARY, DRIVE INPUT DEVICE CLOSE PERMISSIVE /0020.3J
-KA_IRO RELAY - AUXILIARY, DRIVE INPUT DEVICE OPEN /0020.1J
-KA_LOSS1 RELAY - AUXILIARY 1, LOSS OF POWER DETECTION /0015.6J
-KA_LOSS2 RELAY - AUXILIARY 2, LOSS OF POWER DETECTION /0015.8J
-KA_RDY RELAY - AUXILIARY, READY /0024.13J
-KA_RUN RELAY - AUXILIARY, RUN /0024.15J
-KF_CB ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - CONTROL BOARD /0019.1A
-KF_CB (SLOT7)ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLE - CONTROL BOARD (SLOT7)/0019.13B
-KF_CB (SLOT8)ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLE - CONTROL BOARD (SLOT8)/0019.11B
-KF_PCU0 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 0 PHASE U /0013.5B
-KF_PCU1 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 1 PHASE U /0013.6B
-KF_PCU2 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 2 PHASE U /0013.8B
-KF_PCU3 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 3 PHASE U /0013.9B
-KF_PCV0 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 0 PHASE V /0013.5E
-KF_PCV1 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 1 PHASE V /0013.6E
-KF_PCV2 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 2 PHASE V /0013.8E
-KF_PCV3 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 3 PHASE V /0013.9E
-KF_PCW0 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 0 PHASE W /0013.5H
-KF_PCW1 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 1 PHASE W /0013.6H
-KF_PCW2 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 2 PHASE W /0013.8H
-KF_PCW3 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - POWER CELL 3 PHASE W /0013.9H
-KF_SRVC_PC PERSONAL COMPUTER - SERVICE /0007.7H
-KF_TRC_J2 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - TRANSCEIVER CARD J2 /0022.3A
-KF_TRC_J3 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - TRANSCEIVER CARD J3 /0022.3D
-KF_TRC_J4 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - TRANSCEIVER CARD J4 /0022.3G
-KF_TRC_J5 ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - TRANSCEIVER CARD J5 /0022.7A
ID DESCRIPTION XREF
-KF_VSB ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLY - VOLTAGE SENSING BOARD /0012.3G
-KP_1_DNADPTR POINT I/O - GROUP 1 DEVICENET ADAPTER /0028.2A
-KP_1_EPS_1 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 EXPANSION POWER SUPPLY 1 /0028.2D
-KP_1_EPS_2 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 EXPANSION POWER SUPPLY 2 /0028.2G
-KP_1_PIO1 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 1 /0028.5A
-KP_1_PIO10 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 10 /0028.5D
-KP_1_PIO11 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 11 /0028.7D
-KP_1_PIO12 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 12 /0028.8D
-KP_1_PIO13 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 13 /0028.10D
-KP_1_PIO14 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 14 /0028.5G
-KP_1_PIO15 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 15 /0028.7G
-KP_1_PIO16 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 16 /0028.8G
-KP_1_PIO17 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 17 /0028.10G
-KP_1_PIO2 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 2 /0028.6A
-KP_1_PIO3 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 3 /0028.7A
-KP_1_PIO4 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 4 /0028.9A
-KP_1_PIO5 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 5 /0028.10A
-KP_1_PIO6 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 6 /0028.11A
-KP_1_PIO7 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 7 /0028.13A
-KP_1_PIO8 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 8 /0028.14A
-KP_1_PIO9 POINT I/O - GROUP 1 MODULE 9 /0028.16A
-MV_LVCFN1 MOTOR - LV CABINET FAN /0017.12B
-MV_LVCFN2 MOTOR - LV CABINET FAN /0017.12C
-MV_MTR MOTOR- AC INDUCTION /0010.16B
-MV_TPC_MFN10 MOTOR - TRANSFORMER AND POWER CELL CABINET FAN 10 /0014.16B
-NI_ES1 NETWORK INTERFACE - ETHERNET SWITCH /0007.1G
-PI_EN1 CUSTOMER ETHERNET NETWORK 1 /0007.6H
-PI_ICO CUSTOMER ISOLATED CURRENT OUTPUT SIGNAL /0023.2J
-PI_ISI CUSTOMER ISOLATED SPEED INPUT SIGNAL /0024.4B
-PI_ISO CUSTOMER ISOLATED SPEED OUTPUT SIGNAL /0024.3J
-PI_LVC CUSTOMER LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY FOR CONTROL CIRCUIT /0015.4A
-PI_LVMSH CUSTOMER LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY FOR MOTOR SPACE HEATER CIRCUIT /0006.9J
-PL_ALM PILOT LIGHT - ALARM /0023.13H
-PL_FLT PILOT LIGHT - FAULT /0023.15H
-PL_VFDRDY PILOT LIGHT - DRIVE READY /0024.14H
-PL_VFDRUN PILOT LIGHT - DRIVE RUNNING /0024.16H
-PM_EHIM OPERATOR INTERFACE TERMINAL - ENHANCED HUMAN INTERFACE MODULE /0007.9G
-PV_SPD RESISTOR - POTENTIOMETER, SPEED /0024.4C
-Q_MD CONTROLLER - MAIN DEVICE /0010.3B
-QC_CTRL1 CONTACTOR 1 - EXTERNAL CONTROL POWER SOURCE /0015.2J
-QC_CTRL2 CONTACTOR 2 - EXTERNAL CONTROL POWER SOURCE /0015.10J
-QC_MSH CONTACTOR - MOTOR SPACE HEATER /0006.10K
-QC_TPC_FN10 CONTACTOR - TRANSFORMER AND POWER CELL CABINET FAN 10 /0035.4H
-RR_PIOBJ1_1 RESISTOR - POINT INPUT OUTPUT BOARD /0012.3F
-RR_PIOBJ2_1 RESISTOR - POINT INPUT OUTPUT BOARD /0012.5F
-RR_PIOBJ3_1 RESISTOR - POINT INPUT OUTPUT BOARD /0012.7F
-RR_XTDN1 RESISTOR - TERMINATION DEVICENET NETWORK /0028.5L
-RU_EMI SUPPRESSOR - ELECTRO-MAGNETIC INTERFERENCE /0015.5D
-SE_ESTP PUSHBUTTON - EMERGENCY STOP /0037.3C
-SG_ECPR PUSHBUTTON - EXTERNAL CONTROL POWER RESET /0015.10G
-SG_REM_SDN PUSHBUTTON - REMOTE SLOW DOWN /0023.6C
-SG_REM_STR PUSHBUTTON - REMOTE CUSTOMER START /0024.7D
-SG_REM_SUP PUSHBUTTON - REMOTE SPEED UP /0023.5C
-SG_RESET PUSHBUTTON - RESET /0024.10B
-SG_STR PUSHBUTTON - START /0024.8D
-SL_CC1 SWITCH - LIMIT 1, CONTROL CABINET /0037.11F
-SL_JC1 SWITCH - LIMIT 1, JUNCTION CABINET /0037.7F
-SL_PC1 SWITCH - LIMIT 1, POWER CELL CABINET /0037.6D
-SL_PC2 SWITCH - LIMIT 2, POWER CELL CABINET /0037.6G
-SS_LOR SWITCH - SELECTOR, LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE /0024.7B
-SS_REM_LR SWITCH - SELECTOR - REMOTE, LOCAL REMOTE /0023.8C
-TM_TSC TRANSDUCER - CURRENT OUTPUT /0023.2H
-TM_TSSO TRANSDUCER - SPEED OUTPUT /0024.3H
-TR_PS1A CONVERTER - 100-240VAC/24-28VDC /0016.8E
-TR_PS3A CONVERTER - 100-240VAC/24-28VDC /0016.9G
-TR_PS4A CONVERTER - 100-240VAC/24-28VDC /0016.9H
-WC_CB-DNADPTR CABLE - CONTROL BOARD TO DEVICENET ADAPTER /0028.5K
-WC_CC1 CABLE - CONTROL CABINET 1 /0037.11E
-WC_CSU-PIOBJ4 CABLE - HALL EFFECT CURRENT SENSOR TO POINT INPUT OUTPUT BOARD /0013.14H
-WC_CSW-PIOBJ4 CABLE - HALL EFFECT CURRENT SENSOR TO POINT INPUT OUTPUT BOARD /0013.15H
-WC_CTL1-CBJ1 CABLE - CURRENT TRANSFORMER TO CONTROL BOARD /0012.3D
-WC_CTL2-CBJ2 CABLE - CURRENT TRANSFORMER TO CONTROL BOARD /0012.5D
-WC_CTL3-CBJ3 CABLE - CURRENT TRANSFORMER TO CONTROL BOARD /0012.7D
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0003.DWG
DEVICE DESIGNATIONS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370003
10007370568
ID DESCRIPTION XREF
-WC_DIS-PIO10_1 CABLE - TRANSFORMER PHASE L1 TO POINT INPUT OUTPUT 10 /0036.4B
-WC_DIS-PIO10_2 CABLE - TRANSFORMER PHASE L2 TO POINT INPUT OUTPUT 10 /0036.4C
-WC_DIS-PIO11_3 CABLE - TRANSFORMER PHASE L3 TO POINT INPUT OUTPUT 11 /0036.4E
-WC_ES1P1-POD_MCBP1 CABLE - ETHERNET SWITCH 1 TO POD MCB /0007.4J
-WC_ES1P2-RJ45 CABLE - ETHERNET SWITCH 1 TO RJ45 PORT /0007.4H
-WC_ES1P3-ENET CABLE - ETHERNET SWITCH 1 TO CUSTOMER ETHERNET /0007.4H
-WC_ES1P5-EHIM CABLE - ETHERNET SWITCH 1 TO HUMAN INTERFACE MODULE /0007.4G
-WC_ICO CABLE - ISOLATED CURRENT OUTPUT /0023.2J
-WC_ISI CABLE - ISOLATED SPEED INPUT /0024.5B
-WC_ISO CABLE - ISOLATED SPEED OUTPUT /0024.3J
-WC_JC1 CABLE - 1 JUNCTION CABINET /0008.7C
-WC_KFIO8-SPD CABLE - POD IO8 TO SPEED POTENTIOMETER /0024.3D
-WC_PC CABLE - PERSONAL COMPUTER /0007.7H
-WC_PC1 CABLE - 1 POWER CELL CABINET /0008.8C
-WC_PC2 CABLE - 2 POWER CELL CABINET /0008.9C
-WC_POD-PIOB CABLE - POD TO PIOB /0019.9H
-WC_TRC-PC CABLE - TRANSCEIVERS TO POWER CELLS /0022.4B
-WC_TSC CABLE - CURRENT TRANSDUCER /0023.2F
-WC_TSSO CABLE - SPEED OUTPUT TRANSDUCER /0024.3F
-WC_VFDC-PIO11_4 CABLE - VFD CABINET TO POINT INPUT OUTPUT 11 /0036.4F
-WC_VSBJ1-CBJ7 CABLE - VOLTAGE SENSING TO CONTROL BOARD /0012.6H
-WD_L1 TERMINAL - POWER DISTRIBUTION, LINE TERMINAL /0010.4B
-WD_L1111 TERMINAL - POWER DISTRIBUTION, LINE TERMINAL /0012.10B
-WD_L1112 TERMINAL - POWER DISTRIBUTION, LINE TERMINAL /0012.10B
-WD_L1113 TERMINAL - POWER DISTRIBUTION, LINE TERMINAL /0012.10B
-WD_L2 TERMINAL - POWER DISTRIBUTION, LINE TERMINAL /0010.4B
-WD_L3 TERMINAL - POWER DISTRIBUTION, LINE TERMINAL /0010.4B
-WD_U TERMINAL - POWER DISTRIBUTION, LOAD TERMINAL /0010.15B
-WD_V TERMINAL - POWER DISTRIBUTION, LOAD TERMINAL /0010.15B
-WD_W TERMINAL - POWER DISTRIBUTION, LOAD TERMINAL /0010.15B
-WP_IOC CABLE POWER - FROM INPUT TERMINALS TO TRANSFORMER PRIMARY WINDINGS AND FROM POWER
CELL TO OUTPUT
/0010.14B
-WP_JC CABLE POWER - JUNCTION CABINET /0011.6B
-WP_PC CABLE - POWER FROM TRANSFORMER SECONDARY WINDINGS TO POWER CELL /0013.12A
-WP_SA CABLE - POWER, SURGE ARRESTOR /0011.4C
-WP_TC CABLE POWER - TRANSFORMER CABINET /0012.9B
-XC_VFD1 TERMINAL BLOCK ASSEMBLY - CUSTOMER /0004.1A
-XP_PJFN10 CONNECTOR - CONNECTION /0014.13B
-XP_PJLS1 CONNECTOR - CONNECTION /0037.7H
-XP_PJLS2 CONNECTOR - CONNECTION /0037.6C
-XP_PJLS3 CONNECTOR - CONNECTION /0037.6F
-XP_PJLSCC1 CONNECTOR - CONNECTION /0037.11F
-XP_RJ45 CONNECTOR - ETHERNET RJ45 /0007.6H
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0004.DWG
TERMINAL STRIP REPORT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370004
10007370568
-XC_VFD1
+WT-1-1
FROM XREF SOURCE DESCRIPTION RA JUMPERSTERM IDCUSTOMER JUMPERS
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
3A
14
14
14
-JC_EADIC1 /0037.5B (JUMPER)JUMPER CUSTOMER 1 - ESTOP AND DOOR INTERLOCK
CIRCUIT 115
142
E 143A
143B
143B
143B
143B
144
144
145A
145B
-Q_MD /0010.2C REMOTE CONTROLLER - MAIN DEVICE DI-1
-Q_MD /0010.2C REMOTE CONTROLLER - MAIN DEVICE DI-2
-Q_MD /0010.2D REMOTE CONTROLLER - MAIN DEVICE DI-14A
-KA_RDY /0007.12B REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, READY [N.O.]D-740
-KA_RDY /0007.13B REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, READY [N.O.]D-740A
-KA_RDY /0007.12B REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, READY [N.C.]D-741
-KA_RDY /0007.13B REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, READY [N.C.]D-741A
-KA_RUN /0007.12D REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, RUN [N.O.]D-744
-KA_RUN /0007.13D REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, RUN [N.O.]D-744A
-KA_RUN /0007.12D REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, RUN [N.C.]D-745
-KA_RUN /0007.13D REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, RUN [N.C.]D-745A
-KA_FLT /0007.15B REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, FAULT [N.O.]D-748
-KA_FLT /0007.15B REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, FAULT [N.O.]D-748A
-KA_FLT /0007.15B REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, FAULT [N.C.]D-749
-KA_FLT /0007.15B REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, FAULT [N.C.]D-749A
-KA_ALM /0007.15D REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, ALARM [N.O.]D-752
-KA_ALM /0007.15D REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, ALARM [N.O.]D-752A
-KA_ALM /0007.15D REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, ALARM [N.C.]D-753
-KA_ALM /0007.15D REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, ALARM [N.C.]D-753A
-KA_IRC /0007.12E REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, DRIVE INPUT DEVICE CLOSE
PERMISSIVE [N.O.]D-758
-KA_IRC /0007.13E REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, DRIVE INPUT DEVICE CLOSE
PERMISSIVE [N.O.]D-758A
-KA_IRC /0007.12F REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, DRIVE INPUT DEVICE CLOSE
PERMISSIVE [N.C.]D-759
-KA_IRC /0007.13F REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, DRIVE INPUT DEVICE CLOSE
PERMISSIVE [N.C.]D-759A
-KA_IDFR /0007.15E REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, INPUT DEVICE FEEDBACK RELAY
[N.O.]D-760
-KA_IDFR /0007.15E REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, INPUT DEVICE FEEDBACK RELAY
[N.O.]D-760A
-KA_IDFR /0007.15F REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, INPUT DEVICE FEEDBACK RELAY
[N.C.]D-761
-KA_IDFR /0007.15F REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY, INPUT DEVICE FEEDBACK RELAY
[N.C.]D-761A
-KA_CR2 /0007.12G REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY 2, LOCAL/REMOTE [N.O.]D-762
-KA_CR2 /0007.13G REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY 2, LOCAL/REMOTE [N.O.]D-762A
-KA_CR2 /0007.12H REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY 2, LOCAL/REMOTE [N.C.]D-763
-KA_CR2 /0007.13H REMOTE RELAY - AUXILIARY 2, LOCAL/REMOTE [N.C.]D-763A
801
801
E 801
826
826
826
826
E 826
/0004.15A
837A
/0004.7L
838A
839
839
E 839
840
P 840
841
841
E 841
842
E 842
845
845
E 845
E 847
-PI_ISI /0024.5B REMOTE CUSTOMER ISOLATED SPEED INPUT SIGNAL 931
-PI_ISI /0024.5B REMOTE CUSTOMER ISOLATED SPEED INPUT SIGNAL 931A
935
935
935
935
941
941
942
942
942
942
942
942
942
942
942
942
-Q_MD /0018.3F REMOTE CONTROLLER - MAIN DEVICE [MD_MAIN_STAT]1035A
-Q_MD /0018.3G REMOTE CONTROLLER - MAIN DEVICE [MD_MAIN_STAT]1036A
1037A
1050A
-JC_EADIC1 /0037.5B (JUMPER)JUMPER CUSTOMER 1 - ESTOP AND DOOR INTERLOCK
CIRCUIT 1051A
E 1051A
1052A
1052A
1052A
1052A
1052A
1053A
1053A
1053A
1053A
1053A
1053A
1053A
1235
1239
-SG_REM_STR /0024.7D REMOTE PUSHBUTTON - REMOTE CUSTOMER START [N.O.]1442
1442
-SG_REM_SDN /0023.6C REMOTE PUSHBUTTON - REMOTE SLOW DOWN [N.O.]1442A
-SG_REM_STR /0024.7D REMOTE PUSHBUTTON - REMOTE CUSTOMER START [N.O.]1442A
-SG_REM_SUP /0023.5C REMOTE PUSHBUTTON - REMOTE SPEED UP [N.O.]1442A
-SS_REM_LR /0023.8C REMOTE SWITCH - SELECTOR - REMOTE, LOCAL REMOTE 1442A
-SS_REM_LR /0023.9C REMOTE SWITCH - SELECTOR - REMOTE, LOCAL REMOTE [N.O.]1442A
-SS_REM_LR /0023.9C REMOTE SWITCH - SELECTOR - REMOTE, LOCAL REMOTE [N.C.]1442A
-SS_REM_LR /0023.10C REMOTE SWITCH - SELECTOR - REMOTE, LOCAL REMOTE [N.C.]1442A
1442A
1442A
-JC_STP /0024.6C (JUMPER)JUMPER CUSTOMER - REMOTE STOP 1438
-JC_STP /0024.6C (JUMPER)JUMPER CUSTOMER - REMOTE STOP 1439
1444
1444
1446
1446
-SG_REM_SUP /0023.5C REMOTE PUSHBUTTON - REMOTE SPEED UP [N.O.]1535
-SG_REM_SDN /0023.6C REMOTE PUSHBUTTON - REMOTE SLOW DOWN [N.O.]1536
-SS_REM_LR /0023.9C REMOTE SWITCH - SELECTOR - REMOTE, LOCAL REMOTE [N.C.]1537
-SS_REM_LR /0023.9C REMOTE SWITCH - SELECTOR - REMOTE, LOCAL REMOTE [N.O.]
-SS_REM_LR /0023.10C REMOTE SWITCH - SELECTOR - REMOTE, LOCAL REMOTE [N.C.]1538
1639
1640
/0005.7A
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0005.DWG
TERMINAL STRIP REPORT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370005
10007370568
1641
/0004.15L
1650
1679
2435
2435
-JC_ESTP2 /0037.4C (JUMPER)JUMPER CUSTOMER - REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP 2 2436
-JC_ESTP2 /0037.4C (JUMPER)JUMPER CUSTOMER - REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP 2 2437
2438
-JC_ESTP1 /0037.3C (JUMPER)JUMPER CUSTOMER - REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP 1 2439
-JC_ESTP1 /0037.3C (JUMPER)JUMPER CUSTOMER - REMOTE EMERGENCY STOP 1 2440
2535
2535
2538
2539
2539
2539
2539
2539
2540
2540
2540
2540
2540
2541
2542
2543
2544
2544
2544
2545
2545
2545
2546
2549
2835A
2836A
2837A
-PI_LVMSH /0006.9J REMOTE CUSTOMER LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY FOR MOTOR SPACE
HEATER CIRCUIT
P
MSH-L1
-EH_MSH /0006.10K REMOTE SPACE HEATER/HEATER ELEMENT - MOTOR MSH-L1B
-PI_LVMSH /0006.10J REMOTE CUSTOMER LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY FOR MOTOR SPACE
HEATER CIRCUIT MSH-N1
-JC_E7 /0006.13K JUMPER CUSTOMER 7 - MOTOR SPACE HEATER SUPPLY MSH-N1
-JC_E7 /0006.13K JUMPER CUSTOMER 7 - MOTOR SPACE HEATER SUPPLY MSH-N1A
-EH_MSH /0006.10K REMOTE SPACE HEATER/HEATER ELEMENT - MOTOR MSH-N1B
PE1
-PI_ISI /0024.4B REMOTE CUSTOMER ISOLATED SPEED INPUT SIGNAL SHD
-PI_LVC /0015.4A REMOTE CUSTOMER LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY FOR CONTROL CIRCUIT 837
-PI_LVC /0015.5A REMOTE CUSTOMER LOW VOLTAGE SUPPLY FOR CONTROL CIRCUIT 838
1644
1644
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0006.DWG
SPACE HEATER CIRCUITS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370006
10007370568
MSH-L1A 1
+REM
-EH_MSH
221
30A
+WT-1-1
-FB_MSH
34
-XC_VFD1
MSH-N1B
-XC_VFD1
MSH-L1B
-XC_VFD1
MSH-L1
-XC_VFD1
MSH-N11L1
/0006.10K
2T1
+WT-1-1
-QC_MSH
4T2
/0006.10K
3L2
+WT-1-1
-QC_MSH
+REM
-PI_LVMSH
120VAC, 50/60Hz (L1-N1)
N1L1
004/0001.9B
-XC_VFD1
MSH-N1A
-JC_E7
062/0001.9B
200/0001.9B
MOTOR
SPACE
HEATER
-XC_VFD1
MSH-N1
-KA_RUN
+WT-1-1
4
/0024.15J
12
+WT-1-1
-QC_MSH
A2A1
9A
103A /0006.7K
/0006.12K
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0007.DWG
ETHERNET SWITCH AND AUXILIARY RELAY CONTACTS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370007
10007370568
ETHERNET SWITCH AUXILIARY RELAY CONTACTS
+REM
-WC_PC8
+DR-1-1
-XP_RJ45
8
-KF_SRVC_PC
+REM
+WT-1-1
-FE_RJ45
-GND_PE
ALLEN-BRADLEY
PRT_5 8
PRT_4 8
PRT_3 8
PRT_2 8
PRT_1 8
STRATIX 2000TM
-/N
+/L
-/N
+/L
PWR1
PWR2
+WT-1-1
-NI_ES1
1
2
3
4
-WC_ES1P2-RJ45
EHIM-T10CED4G
+
-DC_INGND
8 ETHERNET
-PM_EHIM
+DR-1-1
-WC_ES1P5-EHIM
8 ETHERNET
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.14E
P1-WC_ES1P1-POD_MCBP1
+REM
-WC_ES1P3-ENET -FE_EN +REM
-PI_EN1
9
/0024.13J
5
+WT-1-1
-KA_RDY
-KA_RDY
+WT-1-1
2
/0024.13J
10
031/0001.9B
-XC_VFD1
D-740
-XC_VFD1
D-740A
-XC_VFD1
D-741
-XC_VFD1
D-741A
9
/0023.14J
5
+WT-1-1
-KA_FLT
-KA_FLT
+WT-1-1
2
/0023.14J
10
-XC_VFD1
D-748
-XC_VFD1
D-748A
-XC_VFD1
D-749
-XC_VFD1
D-749A
031/0001.9B
10
/0024.15J
6
+WT-1-1
-KA_RUN
-KA_RUN
+WT-1-1
3
/0024.15J
11
031/0001.9B
-XC_VFD1
D-744
-XC_VFD1
D-744A
-XC_VFD1
D-745
-XC_VFD1
D-745A
9
/0023.12J
5
+WT-1-1
-KA_ALM
-KA_ALM
+WT-1-1
2
/0023.12J
10
031/0001.9B
-XC_VFD1
D-752
-XC_VFD1
D-752A
-XC_VFD1
D-753
-XC_VFD1
D-753A
9
/0020.3J
5
+WT-1-1
-KA_IRC
-KA_IRC
+WT-1-1
2
/0020.3J
10
-XC_VFD1
D-758
-XC_VFD1
D-758A
-XC_VFD1
D-759
-XC_VFD1
D-759A
031/0001.9B
9
/0018.3K
5
+WT-1-1
-KA_IDFR
-KA_IDFR
+WT-1-1
2
/0018.3K
10
-XC_VFD1
D-760
-XC_VFD1
D-760A
-XC_VFD1
D-761
-XC_VFD1
D-761A
031/0001.9B
9
/0024.15C
5
+WT-1-1
-KA_CR2
-KA_CR2
+WT-1-1
2
/0024.15C
10
-XC_VFD1
D-762
-XC_VFD1
D-762A
-XC_VFD1
D-763
-XC_VFD1
D-763A
031/0001.9B
/0021.4B
/0018.12F
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0008.DWG
MV INTERLOCK
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370008
10007370568
MV OPEN
(NO)
MAIN
DEVICE
MV CLOSE
PERMISSIVE
(NO)
MAIN
DEVICE
E-STOP
STATUS
(RESERVED)
5
9
-KA_CR19A
/0037.3J
/0010.1C
/0010.1C
/0010.1D
-XC_VFD1
2541
-XC_VFD1
2538
-XC_VFD1
2542
-XC_VFD1
2543
DI-1
-XC_VFD1
DI-2
-XC_VFD1
DI-14A
-XC_VFD1
-XC_VFD1
2535
-JM_1-JM_2
-JM_3
-JM_4
7
11
-KA_IRC
/0020.3J
5
9
-KA_CR20
/0037.9J
5
9
-KA_CR19
/0037.4J
2535
-XC_VFD1
1
9
/0037.3J
-KA_CR19A
2537
2536
-XC_VFD1
2539
2
10
/0037.4J
-KA_CR19
-XC_VFD1
2540
-XC_VFD1
2539
-XC_VFD1
2540
5
9
-KA_IRO
/0020.1J
-XC_VFD1
2539
11
12
/0037.7F
-SL_JC1
-XC_VFD1
2540
11
12
/0037.6D
-SL_PC1
11
12
/0037.6G
-SL_PC2
-XC_VFD1
2539
-XC_VFD1
2540
-XC_VFD1
2539
-XC_VFD1
2540
-WC_JC1
-WC_JC1
/0008.7C
-WC_PC1
-WC_PC1
/0008.8C
-WC_PC2
-WC_PC2
/0008.9C
-XP_PJLS1
1
1
/0037.7H
-XP_PJLS2
1
1
/0037.6C
-XP_PJLS3
1
1
/0037.6F
-XP_PJLS1
3
3
/0037.7H
-XP_PJLS2
3
3
/0037.6C
-XP_PJLS3
3
3
/0037.6F
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0009.DWG
MV INTERLOCK
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370009
10007370568
-XC_VFD1
2544
-XC_VFD1
2545
-XC_VFD1
2544
-XC_VFD1
2545
3
11
/0037.4J
-KA_CR19
2
10
/0037.9J
-KA_CR20
-XC_VFD1
2545
4
12
/0020.3J
-KA_IRC
-XC_VFD1
2544
MV CLOSE
PERMISSIVE
(NC)
-XC_VFD1
2546
-XC_VFD1
2549
MV OPEN
(NC)
8
12
-KA_CR19
/0037.4J
2547
2
10
/0020.1J
-KA_IRO
2548
7
11
-KA_CR20
/0037.9J
MAIN
DEVICE
MAIN
DEVICE
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0010.DWG
POWER CONFIGURATION
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370010
10007370568
U
-WD_U
V
-WD_V
W
-WD_W
M
3~
T1
+REM
-MV_MTR
T2
T3
/0011.14B U
/0011.14B V
/0011.14B W
-WP_IOC
L1
-WD_L1
L1
-WD_L2
L1
-WD_L3
/0011.2BL1
/0011.2BL2
/0011.2BL3
-GND_PE
/0008.1J
/0008.1B
/0008.1K
PERMISSIVE
(NO)
VFD_LINE
MD_MAIN_STAT
MV CLOSE
(NO)
E-STOP
(MAINx)
MAIN DEVICE
+REM
-Q_MD
L1
L2
L3
DI-2
DI-1
DI-14A
GND PE
D-1036A
D-1035A
U
V
W
DI-2
DI-1
DI-14A
/0012.10B
/0018.2F
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0011.DWG
JUNCTION CABINET POWER CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370011
10007370568
/0012.2BL1
/0012.2BL2
/0012.2BL3
-FA_SA1
2
1
-FA_SA2
2
1
-FA_SA3
2
1
-GND_PE
-WP_JC
-WP_SA
/0010.5B L1
/0010.5B L2
/0010.5B L3
/0013.3A U
/0013.3E V
/0013.3H W
/0010.13BU
/0010.13BV
/0010.13BW
L1
L2
L3
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0012.DWG
INPUT CIRCUITS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370012
10007370568
-GND_PE
3A
14
1300
1301
1302
/0014.2B1300
/0014.2B1301
/0014.2B1302
/0015.12B3A
/0015.12A14
/0011.9B L1
/0011.9B L2
/0011.9B L3
H1 H2
X1
-BC_L1
X2
-WC_CTL1-CBJ1
BK
SH
D CL
-GND_PE
H1 H2
X2X1
-BC_L2
X2
-WC_CTL2-CBJ2
BK
SH
D CL
-GND_PE
H1 H2
X2X1
-BC_L3
X2
-WC_CTL3-CBJ3
BK
SH
D CL
-GND_PE
/0
0
1
2
.
2
J
L1
/0
0
1
2
.
2
J
L2
/0
0
1
2
.
2
J
L3
21
+WT-1-1
-RR_PIOBJ1_1
21
+WT-1-1
-RR_PIOBJ2_1
21
+WT-1-1
-RR_PIOBJ3_1
+WT-1-1
-WC_VSBJ1-CBJ7 24
-KF_CB
VSB
+WT-1-1
/0019.5J
J7
GND
-GND_SG
-GND_PE
203/0001.9B
-GND_PE
400V-
751V-
2401V-
4161V-
750V
2400V
7200V
4160V
24
5
5
7201V-
11001V-
14400V
11000V
-KF_VSB
6F
5F
4F
3F
2F
1F
J1
GND1
GND2
6E
5E
4E
3E
2E
1E
6D
5D
4D
3D
2D
1D
6C
5C
4C
3C
2C
1C
J2
J5
V_FDBK
SYNC_IN
SYNC_OUT
6B
5B
4B
3B
2B
1B
6A
5A
4A
3A
2A
1A
-GND_PE
L1
-WD_L1111
L2
-WD_L1112
L3
-WD_L1113
-WP_TC
-WP_IOC
/0010.14B
PT100
GND
X0
Xc1
Xc2
Xb1
Xb2
Xa1
Xa2
L3
L2
L1
-BV_DIS
6
RB
+
I+I-
SH
D
RB
-
6
CT
L
2
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.3J
J2
1 2 3 4 5 6
6
RB
+
I+I-
SH
D
RB
-
6
CT
L
3
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.4J
J3
1 2 3 4 5 6
6
RB
+
I+I-
SH
D
RB
-
6
CT
L
1
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.3J
J1
1 2 3 4 5 6
/0013.3E V
/0012.8C L2
/0013.3H W
/0013.3B U
/0012.8C L1
/0012.9C L3
L1
L1
L2
L2
L3
L3
W
V
U
/0013.5C
/0013.5F
/0013.5K
/0036.1B
/0036.1C
/0036.1E
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0013.DWG
POWER CELLS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370013
10007370568
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCU0
1U
1V 1W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCU1
2U
2V 2W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCU2
3U
3V 3W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCU3
4U
4V 4W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCV0
5U
5V 5W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCV1
6U
6V 6W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCV2
7U
7V 7W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCV3
8U
8V 8W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCW0
9U
9V 9W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCW1
10
U
10
V
10
W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCW2
11
U
11
V
11
W
U
X1 X2
V W
TX RX
-KF_PCW3
12
U
12
V
12
W
-WP_PC -WP_PC -WP_PC -WP_PC
-WP_PC -WP_PC -WP_PC -WP_PC
-WP_PC -WP_PC -WP_PC -WP_PC
1004100310021001
1013101210111010
1022102110201019
1034103310321031
1043104210411040
1052105110501049
10641063
10621061
1073107210711070
1082108110801079
11531152A1151A
116311621161
117311721171
-BV_DIS
/0012.13B 1U 1V 1W 2U 2V 2W 3U 3V 3W 4U 4V 4W
-BV_DIS
/0012.13C 5U 5V 5W 6U 6V 6W 7U 7V 7W 8U 8V 8W
-BV_DIS
/0012.13D 9U 9V 9W
10
U
10
V
10
W
11
U
11
V
11
W
12
U
12
V
12
W
M-+
-BC_U
/0016.6G956
/0016.11H965
/0016.11G957
M-+
-BC_W
-W
C
_
C
S
U
-
P
I
O
B
J
4
WH
RD BL
K
SH
D
-W
C
_
C
S
W
-
P
I
O
B
J
4
WH
RD BL
K
SH
D
45
9
46
3
46
1
45
8
46
0
46
2
/0011.11B U
/0012.2J U
/0011.11B V
/0012.2J V
/0011.11B W
/0012.2J W
1159
V
W
U -WP_PC
-WP_PC
12
U-
U-
1
N
U+
W-
1
N
SH
D W+
12
SH
D
+24V
-24V
HECS-COM
HECS-COM
W-
HE
C
S
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.5J J4
6 7 5 8 10 9 12
1
2
3
4
11
956
965
957
/0
0
2
2
.
5
A
/0
0
2
2
.
5
D
/0
0
2
2
.
5
G
/0
0
2
2
.
1
0
A
/0
0
2
2
.
5
B
/0
0
2
2
.
5
E
/0
0
2
2
.
5
G
/0
0
2
2
.
1
0
B
/0
0
2
2
.
5
C
/0
0
2
2
.
5
E
/0
0
2
2
.
5
H
/0
0
2
2
.
1
0
C
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0014.DWG
MAIN COOLING FAN FOR TRANSF AND POWER CELL CABINET
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370014
10007370568
060/0001.9B
-XP_PJFN10
44
33
22
11
-XC_VFD1
PE1
-GND_PE
460 VAC (L-L),3PH
/0012.14E 1300
/0012.14E 1301
/0012.14E 1302
1300
1301
1302
2835
2836
2837
PE1
M
3~
-MV_TPC_MFN10
GTB050KUT34R
6/T35/L3
4/T23/L2
2/T1
-QC_TPC_FN10
+WT-1-1
/0035.4H
1/L121
15A
+WT-1-1
-FB_FAN_TPC
43
65
2835A
2836A
2837A
-XC_VFD1
2837A
-XC_VFD1
2836A
-XC_VFD1
2835A
/0030.4E /0030.6E
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0015.DWG
CONTROL POWER RESET CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370015
10007370568
-XC_VFD1
837
-XC_VFD1
838
62
61
/0015.10J
+WT-1-1
-QC_CTRL2
52
51
/0015.10J
+WT-1-1
-QC_CTRL2
2T
1
1L
1
-QC_CTRL1
+WT-1-1
4T
2
3L
2
A2
A1
+WT-1-1
-QC_CTRL1
9A
2T
1
1L
1
-QC_CTRL2
+WT-1-1
4T
2
3L
2
A2
A1
+WT-1-1
-KA_LOSS2
52
51
/0015.2J
+WT-1-1
-QC_CTRL1
62
61
/0015.2J
+WT-1-1
-QC_CTRL1
A2
A1
+WT-1-1
-QC_CTRL2
9A
-SG_ECPR
+DR-1-1 1
2
843
844
/0
0
1
6
.
3
A
84
0
/0
0
1
6
.
1
4
A
84
2
/0012.15F 14
/0012.15E 3A
+REM
-PI_LVC
NL1
004/0001.9B 200/0001.9B
848
849
A2
A1
+WT-1-1
-KA_LOSS1
-XC_VFD1
839
-XC_VFD1
841
-XC_VFD1
845
-XC_VFD1
847
220 VAC (L-GND)
-GND_PE
FROM
CUSTOMER
FROM MAIN
TRANSFORMER
11
5
12
7
0V
22
0
V
+WT-1-1
-BV_CPT1
120/240
1.5KVA
10
4
0V
4
12
/0015.6J
+WT-1-1
-KA_LOSS1
2
1
8A
+WT-1-1
-FB_INTCTRL
-XC_VFT1
3A
-XC_VFT1
14
/0015.11G
/0029.8E
-XC_VFD1
839
-XC_VFD1
841 -XC_VFD1
839
-XC_VFD1
841
-XC_VFD1
845
-GND_PE
-XC_VFD1
14
-XC_VFD1
14
-XC_VFD1
845
-XC_VFD1
840
-XC_VFD1
842
-XC_VFD1
14
-XC_VFD1
3A
/0015.12H
/0015.13H
/0029.4E
/0015.2H
/0015.2H
/0015.5H
/0015.5H
/0029.6E
/0015.10H
/0015.10H
120 VAC (L-GND)
/0029.7E
-GND_PE
838A
PE LINE
PE LOAD
NP
+WT-1-1
-RU_EMI
P'N'
PE
2
1
15A
-FB_EXTCTRL
3
4 -JC_E8
062/0001.9B
1
+WT-1-1
-FV_CTRL1
2
-GND_PE
1
+WT-1-1
-FV_CTRL2
2 1
+WT-1-1
-FV_CTRL3
2
-XC_VFD2
GND
-XC_VFD2
838
-XC_VFD2
837
/0015.5C
-XC_VFD1
838A
-XC_VFD1
837A
837A
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0016.DWG
AC/DC CONVERTER CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370016
10007370568
21
10A
+WT-1-1
-FB_PLC1
-GND_PE
+WT-1-1
-KA_CPMON
A1A2
1606-XLS240E
AC_IN
DC_OUT+-- (M)+ (+24V)
L N
PE
240W
+WT-1-1
-TR_PS1A
/0018.1K942/0018.1B 941 941
/0021.2D957
-GND_PE
956/0021.2A 956
/0013.15K965965
942
957
/0013.15K957/0013.15J 956
1606-XLP
AC_IN
DC_OUT -+
-TR_PS3A
+WT-1-1
50W
NL
GND
1606-XLP
AC_IN
DC_OUT -+
-TR_PS4A
+WT-1-1
NL
GND
-GND_PE
/0
0
1
7
.
2
B
93
5
/0
0
1
7
.
1
4
B
82
6-XC_VFD1
801
-XC_VFD1
801
-XC_VFD1
935
-XC_VFD1
826
-XC_VFD1
840
-XC_VFD1
842
220 VAC (L-GND)/0
0
1
5
.
5
L
84
2
/0
0
1
5
.
5
L
84
0
-XC_VFD1
801
-XC_VFD1
826
-JM_UPS1 -JM_UPS2
/0020.7C
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0017.DWG
AC/DC CONVERTER CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370017
10007370568
/0
0
1
6
.
5
K
93
5
/0
0
1
6
.
1
4
K
82
6
M
1~
1
+DR-1-1
-MV_LVCFN1
2
GND PE-GND_PE
M
1~
1
+DR-1-1
-MV_LVCFN2
2
GND PE-GND_PE
-XC_VFD1
935
-XC_VFD1
935
-XC_VFD1
935
-XC_VFD1
826
-XC_VFD1
826
-XC_VFD1
826
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0018.DWG
DC CONTROL POWER DISTRIBUTION
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370018
10007370568
/0016.6F 941
/0016.11F 942
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_IDFR
-XC_VFD1
1037A
-XC_VFD1
1036A
-XC_VFD1
1035A
24
V
D
C

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

P
O
W
E
R
-XC_VFD1
941
-XC_VFD1
942
/0
0
2
0
.
1
5
E
94
2
/0
0
2
0
.
1
5
G
10
5
3
A
-/
N
+/
L
+WT-1-1
-KF_CB
/0019.1D
P1
4
2
3
/0
0
3
7
.
1
B
10
5
1
A
/0
0
3
7
.
1
J
94
2
-GND_PE
2
1+WT-1-1
-FB_10CB2
-XC_VFD1
1050A
-XC_VFD1
942
2
1
2A
+WT-1-1
-FB_10CB3
-XC_VFD1
1051A
2
1+WT-1-1
-FB_10CB4
-XC_VFD1
1052A
2
1+WT-1-1
-FB_10CB5
-XC_VFD1
1053A
/0
0
2
0
.
1
5
K
94
2
/0
0
2
3
.
2
K
94
2
/0
0
2
0
.
1
5
A
10
5
2
A
/0
0
2
3
.
2
B
10
5
2
A
-XC_VFD1
1053A
/0
0
3
4
.
2
B
10
5
3
A
-JM_CNTRL1
2
1
6A
+WT-1-1
-FB_10CB1
V/
L
1
CH
A
S
_
G
N
D
C/
L
2
/
N
6
+WT-1-1
-KP_1_DNADPTR
/0028.1B
4 5
7
2 3
-GND_PE
16
0
6
XL
S
B
U
F
F
E
R
2
4
-
+
GN
D
+WT-1-1
-GP_BUFFER
-XC_VFD1
941
-XC_VFD1
942
-XC_VFD1
942
-XC_VFD1
942
-XC_VFD1
942
/0007.15F
/0007.15E
/0020.1D
+DR-1-1
-PM_EHIM
/0007.9F
DC
_
I
N
+
-
GN
D
2
1
4A
+WT-1-1
-FB_10CB6
1054A
-GND_PE
V/
L
1
CH
A
S
_
G
N
D
C/
L
2
/
N
6
+WT-1-1
-KP_1_EPS_1
/0028.1E
4 5
7
2 3
V/
L
1
CH
A
S
_
G
N
D
C/
L
2
/
N
6
+WT-1-1
-KP_1_EPS_2
/0028.1G
4 5
7
2 3
-GND_PE-GND_PE
/0
0
2
3
.
1
3
D
10
5
3
A
-XC_VFD1
1053A
+REM
-Q_MD D-
1
0
3
5
A
D-
1
0
3
6
A
MD
_
M
A
I
N
_
S
T
A
T
/0010.3E
/0
0
2
3
.
1
5
D
10
5
3
A
-XC_VFD1
1053A
/0
0
2
4
.
1
6
D
10
5
3
A
-XC_VFD1
1053A
/0
0
2
4
.
1
4
D
10
5
3
A
-XC_VFD1
1053A
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0019.DWG
SFIB, POD AND PIOB
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370019
10007370568
CH1 CH213
/0037.4F
14
+WT-1-1
-AR_MSR
1135
1136
1137
-WC_POD-PIOB
9
/0037.11J
5
+WT-1-1
-KA_CRCC1
1138
1139
SFIB
36
SL
O
T

J
2
SL
O
T

J
3
SL
O
T

J
4
HSI64
+-24V
3
+-24V
3
SL
O
T

J
5
SL
O
T

J
6
SL
O
T

J
7
SL
O
T

J
8
SL
O
T

J
9
SL
O
T

J
1
5
SL
O
T

J
1
6
SL
O
T

J
1
7
36 36 36 36 36 36 36
36 36 36
POWER INPUT
OUTPUT BOARD
36
RA COMM
6
IL1
6
IL2
6
IL3
24
VSB
12
HECSU
HECSW
DIGITAL INPUTSJ9
DIGITAL OUTPUTSJ9
DI0 DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI0
COM
DI1
COM
DI2
COM
DI3
COM
DI4
COM
DO0 DO1 DO2 DO3 DO4 DO5 DO7DO6 COM COM
+-12VDC 7
INTERNAL 5DRIVE
LINK
POD
64
SL
O
T

8
64
SL
O
T

7
64
SL
O
T

6
64
SL
O
T

5
64
SL
O
T

4
ENETRJ1 8
ENETRJ2 8
HSI64
DPI_DIN 5
DPI_HMI 5
MCB
24VC
DiOdc
DiOac
+24V
DiC
TB1
+-12V
7
+-12V
7
P9
J12
+WT-1-1
-KF_CB
J4
B
J3
B
J2
B
P13
P14
J7
B
J6
B
J5
B
J9
B
J8
B
J1
7
T
J1
6
T
J1
5
T
PIO
J1 J2 J3 J7 J4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
J6
J8
P1
P2
P6
P10
P11
J2
B
J3
B
J4
B
TB1-1
TB1-2
TB1-3
TB1-4
TB1-5
JST
JSB
1
2
36
RA
-
C
O
M
M
XC
V
R
-KF_TRC_J2
+WT-1-1
/0022.2B
P1
HS
I
36
RA
-
C
O
M
M
XC
V
R
-KF_TRC_J3
+WT-1-1
/0022.2D
P1
HS
I
36
RA
-
C
O
M
M
XC
V
R
-KF_TRC_J4
+WT-1-1
/0022.2G
P1
HS
I
20
-
7
5
0
-
2
2
6
2
C
-
2
R
24
V
D
C

D
I
O
64
HS
I
P1
-KF_CB (SLOT8)
20
-
7
5
0
-
2
2
6
2
C
-
2
R
24
V
D
C

D
I
O
64
HS
I
P1
-KF_CB (SLOT7)
/0023.2E /0024.2E
/0007.6J
/0
0
1
2
.
7
H
/0
0
1
2
.
5
E
/0
0
1
2
.
7
E
/0
0
1
2
.
3
E
/0
0
1
3
.
1
4
K
/0018.6F
/0
0
2
0
.
1
E
/0
0
2
0
.
3
E
/0
0
2
0
.
4
E
/0
0
2
0
.
6
E
/0
0
2
0
.
7
E
/0
0
2
0
.
9
E
/0
0
2
0
.
1
0
E
/0
0
2
0
.
1
2
E
/0
0
2
0
.
1
3
E
/0
0
2
0
.
1
5
E
/0
0
2
0
.
1
G
/0
0
2
0
.
3
G
/0
0
2
0
.
4
G
/0
0
2
0
.
6
G
/0
0
2
0
.
7
G
/0
0
2
0
.
9
G
/0
0
2
0
.
1
0
G
/0
0
2
0
.
1
2
G
/0
0
2
0
.
1
3
G
/0
0
2
0
.
1
5
G
/0028.7K
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0020.DWG
PIOB CONNECTIONS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370020
10007370568
/0018.9D1052A-XC_VFD11052A
5
9
-KA_CPMON
+WT-1-1
/0016.13E
-XC_VFD11052A
CONTROL POWER
MONITOR RELAY
/0018.9H942
/0018.10D1053A
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_IRO
1240 1241
24
V
D
C

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

O
U
T
P
U
T
S
MAIN
DEVICE
OPEN
MAIN
DEVICE
CLOSE
-XC_VFD1
1239
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_IRC
DI
0
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.6J
1
DI
1
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.6J
2
DI
2
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.6J
3
DI
3
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.7J
4
DI
4
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.7J
5
DI
0
C
O
M
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.7J
6
DI
1
C
O
M
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.8J
7
DI
2
C
O
M
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.8J
8
DI
3
C
O
M
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.8J
9
DI
4
C
O
M
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.8J
10
/0018.9H942
24
V
D
C

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

I
N
P
U
T
S
DO
0
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.6K
11
DO
1
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.6K
12
DO
2
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.6K
13
DO
3
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.7K
14
DO
4
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.7K
15
DO
5
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.7K
16
DO
6
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.8K
17
DO
7
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.8K
18
CO
M
0
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.8K
19
CO
M
1
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
/0019.8K
20
+24V +24V
24V COMM 24V COMM 24V COMM 24V COMM 24V COMM
1239
/0007.13F
/0009.4F
/0007.13E
/0008.2G
/0009.5F
/0008.6E
-XC_VFD1
1235
MAIN DEVICE
CLOSED
7
11
-KA_IDFR
+WT-1-1
/0018.3K
942
1053A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0021.DWG
24VDC CONVERTER CIRCUITS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370021
10007370568
24
V
D
C
/0016.6G 956
/0016.11G 957
-/
N
+/
L
+WT-1-1
-NI_ES1
/0007.1G
PW
R
1
2
1
+
-
+WT-1-1
-TM_TSSO
/0024.4H
PO
W
E
R
7
8
+
-
+WT-1-1
-TM_TSC
/0023.3H
PO
W
E
R
7
8
956
957
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0022.DWG
TRANSCIVER CONNECTION
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370022
10007370568
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
TRANSCEIVER
36
RA COMM TXD 1
RXD 1CH-0
TXD 1
RXD 1CH-1
TXD 1
RXD 1CH-2
-KF_TRC_J2
+WT-1-1
P1 GRY
BLK
GRY
BLK
GRY
BLK
TRANSCEIVER
36
RA COMM TXD 1
RXD 1CH-0
TXD 1
RXD 1CH-1
TXD 1
RXD 1CH-2
-KF_TRC_J3
+WT-1-1
P1 GRY
BLK
GRY
BLK
GRY
BLK
TRANSCEIVER
36
RA COMM TXD 1
RXD 1CH-0
TXD 1
RXD 1CH-1
TXD 1
RXD 1CH-2
-KF_TRC_J4
+WT-1-1
P1 GRY
BLK
GRY
BLK
GRY
BLK
TRANSCEIVER
36
RA COMM TXD 1
RXD 1CH-0
TXD 1
RXD 1CH-1
TXD 1
RXD 1CH-2
-KF_TRC_J5
+WT-1-1
P1 GRY
BLK
GRY
BLK
GRY
BLK
-WC_TRC-PC
/0
0
2
2
.
9
A
/0
0
2
2
.
4
J
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCU0
/0013.5A
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCV0
/0013.5E
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCW0
/0013.5H
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCU1
/0013.7A
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCV1
/0013.7E
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCW1
/0013.7H
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCU2
/0013.8A
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCV2
/0013.8E
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCW2
/0013.8H
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCU3
/0013.10A
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCV3
/0013.10E
RX
TX
F_NT
-KF_PCW3
/0013.10H
/0019.2H
/0019.3H
/0019.4H
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0023.DWG
POD I/O MODULE SLOT 7
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370023
10007370568
/0018.9D 1052A
/0018.9H 942
24
V
D
C

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

P
O
W
E
R
-XC_VFD1
942
-XC_VFD1
1535
REMOTE
SPEED UP
-XC_VFD1
1536
REMOTE
SLOW DOWN
-XC_VFD1
1537
REMOTE
MOP
-XC_VFD1
1538
REMOTE
PRESET SPD3
-XC_VFD1
1442A
/0024.2A1052A
/0024.2K942
/0024.16B 1442A
-SG_REM_SUP
+REM 3
4
-SG_REM_SDN
+REM 3
4
XOOO
NO
+REM
-SS_REM_LR PO
S
3
PO
S
2
PO
S
1
PO
S
4
OXOX OOOXOOXO
-XC_VFD1
1442A
-XC_VFD1
1442A
-XC_VFD1
1442A
-XC_VFD1
1442A
-XC_VFD1
1442A
-XC_VFD1
1442A
REMOTE
PRESET SPD6
REMOTE
PRESET SPD7
20
-
7
5
0
-
2
2
6
2
C
-
2
R
AO
0
AO
1
DI
C
24
V
D
C

I
/
O
TB
1
64
HSI
PT
C
AI
0
AI
1
DI
1
DI
0
DI
2
DI
3
DI
4
DI
5
TB
2
R0 R1
R0 R1
-KF_CB (SLOT7)
Ao
0
-
Ao
0
+
Ao
1
-
Ao
1
+
Di

C
P1
Sh
Pt
c
-
Pt
c
+
-1
0
V
10
V
C
+1
0
V
Ai
0
-
Ai
0
+
Ai
1
-
Ai
1
+
24
V
C
+2
4
V
Di
0
Di
1
Di
2
Di
3
Di
4
Di
5
Sh
R0
C
R1
C
R0
N
O
R0
N
C
R1
N
O
R1
N
C
/0019.13B
-XC_VFD1
1442A
261/0001.9C 262/0001.9C 263/0001.9C
/0
0
2
3
.
2
D
SH
D
1449 1450
-+SH
D
+REM
-PI_ICO
-WC_ICO
+REM
-WC_TSC
CL BK SHD
/0
0
2
3
.
3
G
SH
D
+-
78
IN
P
U
T
OU
T
P
U
T
+-+-PO
W
E
R
+-
6
4
+WT-1-1
-TM_TSC 3
5
1 2
+DR-1-1
-PL_ALM
X2
X1
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_ALM
1545
/0
0
1
8
.
1
0
D
10
5
3
A
/0007.15D
/0007.15D
+DR-1-1
-PL_FLT
X2
X1
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_FLT
1546
/0
0
1
8
.
1
1
D
10
5
3
A
/0007.15B
/0007.15B
1052A
SHD
1053A 1053A
/0023.10C
/0023.9C
/0023.9C
/0
0
2
1
.
9
B
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0024.DWG
POD I/O MODULE SLOT 8
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370024
10007370568
/0023.15B 1052A
/0023.15K 942
24
V
D
C

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

P
O
W
E
R
-XC_VFD1
942
/0025.2A1052A
/0025.2K942
20
-
7
5
0
-
2
2
6
2
C
-
2
R
AO
0
AO
1
DI
C
24
V
D
C

I
/
O
TB
1
64
HSI
PT
C
AI
0
AI
1
DI
1
DI
0
DI
2
DI
3
DI
4
DI
5
TB
2
R0 R1
R0 R1
-KF_CB (SLOT8)
Ao
0
-
Ao
0
+
Ao
1
-
Ao
1
+
Di

C
P1
Sh
Pt
c
-
Pt
c
+
-1
0
V
10
V
C
+1
0
V
Ai
0
-
Ai
0
+
Ai
1
-
Ai
1
+
24
V
C
+2
4
V
Di
0
Di
1
Di
2
Di
3
Di
4
Di
5
Sh
R0
C
R1
C
R0
N
O
R0
N
C
R1
N
O
R1
N
C
/0019.11B
/0024.15D942
-SG_RESET
+DR-1-1 3
4
-XC_VFD1
1444
-XC_VFD1
1444
93
1
A
93
1
SH
D
-+
+REM
-PI_ISI
-WC_ISI
+REM
-XC_VFD1
SH
D
14
3
5
14
3
6
14
3
7
1
3
+DR-1-1
-PV_SPD
2
-WC_KFIO8-SPD
SHD WH RD BK
/0
0
2
4
.
4
G
SH
D
/0
0
2
4
.
3
D
SH
D
14481447
-+SH
D
+REM
-PI_ISO
-WC_ISO
+REM
-WC_TSSO
CL BK SHD
+-
78
IN
P
U
T
OU
T
P
U
T
+-+-PO
W
E
R
+-
6
4
+WT-1-1
-TM_TSSO 3
5
1 2
-XC_VFD1
1439
-JC_STP
-XC_VFD1
1438
-JM_54
-XC_VFD1
1052A
003/0001.9A
-XC_VFD1
1442
-SG_REM_STR
+REM 3
4
-SG_STR
+DR-1-13
4
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_CR2
-XC_VFD1
1442A
/0023.4B
-XC_VFD1
1442
-XC_VFD1
1446
/0024.7K942
/0007.13H
/0007.13G
-XC_VFD1
942
-XC_VFD1
1446
+DR-1-1
-PL_VFDRDY
X2
X1
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_RDY
1451
/0
0
1
8
.
1
1
D
10
5
3
A
/0007.13B
/0007.13B
+DR-1-1
-PL_VFDRUN
X2
X1
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_RUN
1452
/0
0
1
8
.
1
1
D
10
5
3
A
/0007.13D
/0006.7K
/0007.13D
SHD 1053A
RE
M
O
T
E
OF
F
LO
C
A
L
2
1
XOO
+DR-1-1
-SS_LOR 4
3
OOX
1446
/0
0
2
1
.
6
B
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0025.DWG
POD OPTION MODULE SLOT 4
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370025
10007370568
/0024.16A 1052A
/0024.16K 942
24
V
D
C

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

P
O
W
E
R
/0026.2A1052A
/0026.2K942
1052A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0026.DWG
POD OPTION MODULE SLOT 5
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370026
10007370568
/0025.14A 1052A
/0025.14K 942
24
V
D
C

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

P
O
W
E
R
/0027.2A1052A
/0027.2K942
1052A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0027.DWG
POD OPTION MODULE SLOT 6
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370027
10007370568
/0026.14A 1052A
/0026.14K 942
24
V
D
C

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

P
O
W
E
R
/0029.2B1052A
/0029.2J942
1052A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0028.DWG
MAIN POINT I/O LAYOUT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370028
10007370568
1734
CH_0
CH_1
2
3
77
0
1
IB8
CH_2
CH_3
CH_4
CH_5
6
7
4
5
CH_6
CH_7
-KP_1_PIO1
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
24V+
CAN_H
CAN_L
24V-
SHD
+WT-1-1
-KP_1_DNADPTR
/0028.3B
BK
BU
WH
RD
1734
0
4
5
1
OUT_0A
OUT_1A
OUT_2A
OUT_3A
77
2
6
7
3
OUT_0B
OUT_1B
OUT_2B
OUT_3B
OW4
-KP_1_PIO8
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
CH_0
CH_1
2
3
77
0
1
IB8
CH_2
CH_3
CH_4
CH_5
6
7
4
5
CH_6
CH_7
-KP_1_PIO2
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
IN 0/A
IN 0/B
RET 04
SHD6
77
0
2
IR2
IN 1/A
IN 1/B
RET 15
SHD7
1
3
-KP_1_PIO10
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
IN 0/A
IN 0/B
RET 04
SHD6
77
0
2
IR2
IN 1/A
IN 1/B
RET 15
SHD7
1
3
-KP_1_PIO11
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
IN 0/A
IN 0/B
RET 04
SHD6
77
0
2
IR2
IN 1/A
IN 1/B
RET 15
SHD7
1
3
-KP_1_PIO12
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
010/0001.9B
010/0001.9B 010/0001.9B 010/0001.9B
1734
IN 0/A
IN 0/B
RET 04
SHD6
77
0
2
IR2
IN 1/A
IN 1/B
RET 15
SHD7
1
3
-KP_1_PIO14
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
IN 0/A
IN 0/B
RET 04
SHD6
77
0
2
IR2
IN 1/A
IN 1/B
RET 15
SHD7
1
3
-KP_1_PIO15
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
IN 0/A
IN 0/B
RET 04
SHD6
77
0
2
IR2
IN 1/A
IN 1/B
RET 15
SHD7
1
3
-KP_1_PIO16
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
IN 0/A
IN 0/B
RET 04
SHD6
77
0
2
IR2
IN 1/A
IN 1/B
RET 15
SHD7
1
3
-KP_1_PIO17
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
010/0001.9B
1734-ADN
NC
V
C
NC
V
C
CHAS_GND
7
CHAS_GND
24V+
CAN_H
CAN_L
24V-
INTERNAL
SHDDRIVE
LINK
-KP_1_DNADPTR
+WT-1-1
PRT_OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
BK
BU
WH
RD
NODE: 7
24V+
CAN_H
CAN_L
24V-
SHD DNET5 5
-KF_CB
+WT-1-1
BK
BU
WH
RD
INTERNAL DRIVE LINK
/0019.10K
J8
21
+WT-1-1
-RR_XTDN1
1734-EP24DC
NC
V
C
NC
V
C
CHAS_GND
7
CHAS_GND
7
-KP_1_EPS_1
PRT_OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PRT_IN
1734-EP24DC
NC
V
C
NC
V
C
CHAS_GND
7
CHAS_GND
7
-KP_1_EPS_2
PRT_OUT
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PRT_IN
-WC_CB-DNADPTR
1734
IN 0/A
IN 0/B
RET 04
SHD6
77
0
2
IR2
IN 1/A
IN 1/B
RET 15
SHD7
1
3
-KP_1_PIO13
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
010/0001.9B
1734
NC_0
NC_1
2
3
77
0
1
ARM
NC_2
NC_3
NC_4
NC_5
6
7
4
5
NC_6
NC_7
-KP_1_PIO3
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
NC_0
NC_1
2
3
77
0
1
ARM
NC_2
NC_3
NC_4
NC_5
6
7
4
5
NC_6
NC_7
-KP_1_PIO9
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
NC_0
NC_1
2
3
77
0
1
ARM
NC_2
NC_3
NC_4
NC_5
6
7
4
5
NC_6
NC_7
-KP_1_PIO4
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
NC_0
NC_1
2
3
77
0
1
ARM
NC_2
NC_3
NC_4
NC_5
6
7
4
5
NC_6
NC_7
-KP_1_PIO5
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
NC_0
NC_1
2
3
77
0
1
ARM
NC_2
NC_3
NC_4
NC_5
6
7
4
5
NC_6
NC_7
-KP_1_PIO6
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
1734
NC_0
NC_1
2
3
77
0
1
ARM
NC_2
NC_3
NC_4
NC_5
6
7
4
5
NC_6
NC_7
-KP_1_PIO7
+WT-1-1
PRT_IN
PRT_OUT
/0029.4H
/0029.6H
/0029.7H
/0029.8H
/0029.9H
/0029.10H
/0029.11H
/0029.13H
/0035.3C
/0035.4C
/0035.6C
/0035.7C
/0030.4H
/0030.6H
/0030.7H
/0030.8H
/0030.9H
/0030.10H
/0030.11H
/0030.13H
/0036.5B
/0036.5C
/0036.5E
/0036.5F
/0018.7F
/0028.2K
/0018.9F
/0018.10F
/0031.4H
/0031.6H
/0031.7H
/0031.8H
/0031.9H
/0031.10H
/0031.11H
/0031.13H
/0035.11C
/0035.12C
/0035.13C
/0035.14C
/0035.11C
/0035.12C
/0035.13C
/0035.14C
/0032.4H
/0032.6H
/0032.7H
/0032.8H
/0032.9H
/0032.10H
/0032.11H
/0032.13H
/0033.4H
/0033.6H
/0033.7H
/0033.8H
/0033.9H
/0033.10H
/0033.11H
/0033.13H
/0034.3C
/0034.4C
/0034.6C
/0034.7C
/0034.3C
/0034.4C
/0034.6C
/0034.7C
/0034.9C
/0034.10C
/0034.12C
/0034.13C
/0034.9C
/0034.10C
/0034.12C
/0034.13C
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0029.DWG
MAIN POINT 1 I/O 1 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370029
10007370568
-KP_1_PIO1
+WT-1-1
/0028.4A CH
_
0
-KP_1_PIO1
+WT-1-1
/0028.4B CH
_
1
-KP_1_PIO1
+WT-1-1
/0028.4B CH
_
2
-KP_1_PIO1
+WT-1-1
/0028.4B CH
_
3
-KP_1_PIO1
+WT-1-1
/0028.4B CH
_
4
-KP_1_PIO1
+WT-1-1
/0028.4B CH
_
5
-KP_1_PIO1
+WT-1-1
/0028.4C CH
_
6
-KP_1_PIO1
+WT-1-1
/0028.4C CH
_
7
/0027.14A 1052A
1635 1636
5
9
-KA_LOSS2
+WT-1-1
/0015.8J
1637
5
9
-KA_LOSS1
+WT-1-1
/0015.6J
1638
-XC_VFD1
1639
-XC_VFD1
1640
-XC_VFD1
1641
8
12
-KA_CR20
+WT-1-1
/0037.9J
/0027.14K 942
/0030.2B1052A
/0030.2J942
1642
CONTROL
POWER
SUPPLIED
FROM MV
TRANSFORMER
CONTROL
POWER
SUPPLIED
FROM
CUSTOMER
CONTROL
POWER ON
FROM MV
TRANSFORMER
COTROL
POWER ON
FROM
CUSTOMER
SPARE SPARE SPARE MV
CABINET
DOORS
CLOSED
14
13
-QC_CTRL2
+WT-1-1
/0015.10J
14
13
-QC_CTRL1
+WT-1-1
/0015.2J
1052A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0030.DWG
MAIN POINT 1 I/O 2 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370030
10007370568
-KP_1_PIO2
+WT-1-1
/0028.6A CH
_
0
-KP_1_PIO2
+WT-1-1
/0028.6B CH
_
1
-KP_1_PIO2
+WT-1-1
/0028.6B CH
_
2
-KP_1_PIO2
+WT-1-1
/0028.6B CH
_
3
-KP_1_PIO2
+WT-1-1
/0028.6B CH
_
4
-KP_1_PIO2
+WT-1-1
/0028.6B CH
_
5
-KP_1_PIO2
+WT-1-1
/0028.6C CH
_
6
-KP_1_PIO2
+WT-1-1
/0028.6C CH
_
7
/0029.14B 1052A
/0029.14J 942
/0031.2B1052A
/0031.2J942
1644
/0014.7B
+WT-1-1
-FB_FAN_TPC
11
14 -XC_VFD1
1650
1643
-MV_TPC_MFN10
/0014.16B
FAN
POWER
SUPPLY
CLOSED
VFD FAN
10
FEEDBACK
SPARE
-XC_VFD1
1644
-XC_VFD1
1644
-XP_PJFN10
5
-XP_PJFN10
6
VFD FAN
11
FEEDBACK
1052A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0031.DWG
MAIN POINT 1 I/O 3 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370031
10007370568
/0030.14B 1052A
/0030.14J 942 /0032.2J942
/0032.2B1052A
-KP_1_PIO3
+WT-1-1
/0028.7A NC
_
0
-KP_1_PIO3
+WT-1-1
/0028.7B NC
_
1
-KP_1_PIO3
+WT-1-1
/0028.7B NC
_
2
-KP_1_PIO3
+WT-1-1
/0028.7B NC
_
3
-KP_1_PIO3
+WT-1-1
/0028.7B NC
_
4
-KP_1_PIO3
+WT-1-1
/0028.7B NC
_
5
-KP_1_PIO3
+WT-1-1
/0028.7C NC
_
6
-KP_1_PIO3
+WT-1-1
/0028.7C NC
_
7
1052A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0032.DWG
MAIN POINT 1 I/O 4 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370032
10007370568
/0031.14B 1052A
/0031.14J 942 /0033.2J942
/0033.2B1052A
-KP_1_PIO4
+WT-1-1
/0028.8A NC
_
0
-KP_1_PIO4
+WT-1-1
/0028.8B NC
_
1
-KP_1_PIO4
+WT-1-1
/0028.8B NC
_
2
-KP_1_PIO4
+WT-1-1
/0028.8B NC
_
3
-KP_1_PIO4
+WT-1-1
/0028.8B NC
_
4
-KP_1_PIO4
+WT-1-1
/0028.8B NC
_
5
-KP_1_PIO4
+WT-1-1
/0028.8C NC
_
6
-KP_1_PIO4
+WT-1-1
/0028.8C NC
_
7
1052A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0033.DWG
MAIN POINT 1 I/O 5 - INPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370033
10007370568
/0032.14B 1052A
/0032.14J 942 /0034.2J942
-KP_1_PIO5
+WT-1-1
/0028.10A NC
_
0
-KP_1_PIO5
+WT-1-1
/0028.10B NC
_
1
-KP_1_PIO5
+WT-1-1
/0028.10B NC
_
2
-KP_1_PIO5
+WT-1-1
/0028.10B NC
_
3
-KP_1_PIO5
+WT-1-1
/0028.10B NC
_
4
-KP_1_PIO5
+WT-1-1
/0028.10B NC
_
5
-KP_1_PIO5
+WT-1-1
/0028.10C NC
_
6
-KP_1_PIO5
+WT-1-1
/0028.10C NC
_
7
-XC_VFD1
1052A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0034.DWG
MAIN POINT 1 I/O 6,7 - OUTPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370034
10007370568
/0018.10D 1053A
/0033.14J 942
/0035.2B1053A
/0035.2J942
-KP_1_PIO6
+WT-1-1
/0028.11A
NC
_
0
-KP_1_PIO6
+WT-1-1
/0028.11B
NC
_
1
-KP_1_PIO6
+WT-1-1
/0028.11B
NC
_
2
-KP_1_PIO6
+WT-1-1
/0028.11B
NC
_
3
-KP_1_PIO7
+WT-1-1
/0028.12A
NC
_
0
-KP_1_PIO7
+WT-1-1
/0028.12B
NC
_
1
-KP_1_PIO7
+WT-1-1
/0028.12B
NC
_
2
-KP_1_PIO7
+WT-1-1
/0028.12B
NC
_
3
NC
_
4
NC
_
5
NC
_
6
NC
_
7
NC
_
4
NC
_
5
NC
_
6
NC
_
7
1053A
942
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0035.DWG
MAIN POINT 1 I/O 8,9 - OUTPUT CONTROL CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370035
10007370568
/0034.15B 1053A
/0034.15J 942
-KP_1_PIO8
+WT-1-1
/0028.14B
0
OU
T
_
0
A
2
OU
T
_
0
B
-KP_1_PIO8
+WT-1-1
/0028.14B
1
OU
T
_
1
A
3
OU
T
_
1
B
-KP_1_PIO8
+WT-1-1
/0028.14B
4
OU
T
_
2
A
6
OU
T
_
2
B
-KP_1_PIO8
+WT-1-1
/0028.14B
5
OU
T
_
3
A
7
OU
T
_
3
B
A2
A1
+WT-1-1
-QC_TPC_FN10
9A
1680
1679
SPARE
-XC_VFD1
1679
VFD FAN
10
CONTACTOR
/ FAN
CONTACTOR
-KP_1_PIO9
+WT-1-1
/0028.15A
NC
_
0
-KP_1_PIO9
+WT-1-1
/0028.15B
NC
_
1
-KP_1_PIO9
+WT-1-1
/0028.15B
NC
_
2
-KP_1_PIO9
+WT-1-1
/0028.15B
NC
_
3
NC
_
4
NC
_
5
NC
_
6
NC
_
7
-XC_VFD1
1053A
-XC_VFD1
942
/0014.11B
/0014.11B
/0014.11B
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0036.DWG
MV TRANSFORMER T1 RTD
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370036
10007370568
+WT-1-1
-KP_1_PIO10
IN 0/A
/0028.4D
0
IN 0/B2
RET 04
SHD6
+WT-1-1
-KP_1_PIO10
IN 1/A
/0028.4E
1
IN 1/B3
RET 15
SHD7
+WT-1-1
-KP_1_PIO11
IN 0/A
/0028.6D
0
IN 0/B2
RET 04
SHD6
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
-WC_DIS-PIO10_1
WH
RD
RD
SHD
2001
-WC_DIS-PIO10_2
WH
RD
RD
SHD
-WC_DIS-PIO11_3
WH
RD
RD
SHD
PT100
A
-BV_DIS
/0012.11E
PT100
B
-BV_DIS
/0012.11E
PT100
C
-BV_DIS
/0012.11E
+WT-1-1
-KP_1_PIO11
IN 1/A
/0028.6E
1
IN 1/B3
RET 15
SHD7
2010
2011
-WC_VFDC-PIO11_4
WH
RD
SHD
PT100
-BH_VFDC
+FA1-1-1
2012
-JM_VFDC-PIO11_4
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-04 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
1606AD2AF75240F46000TAFRM_0037.DWG
ESTOP AND DOOR INTERLOCK CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 6000T
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00370037
10007370568
/0018.7D 1051A
/0018.7H 942
-XC_VFD1
1051A
-JC_EADIC1
=INST -XC_VFD1
115
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_CR20
24
V
D
C

C
O
N
T
R
O
L

P
O
W
E
R
003/0001.9A 003/0001.9A
EMERGENCY
STOP
CABINET
DOOR
CLOSED
23
24
-SL_PC1
-XC_VFD1
142
WT-1-1
-WC_PC1
23
24
-SL_PC2
WT-1-1
-WC_PC2
-XP_PJLS2
2
2
-XP_PJLS3
2
2
-XP_PJLS1
2
2
23
24
-SL_JC1
WT-1-1
-WC_JC1
WT-1-1
-WC_PC1
WT-1-1
-WC_PC2
WT-1-1
-WC_JC1
-XC_VFD1
143B
-XC_VFD1
143A
-XC_VFD1
143B
-XC_VFD1
143B
-XC_VFD1
143B
-WC_CC1
+UP-1-1
-XP_PJLSCC1
2
2
23
24
-SL_CC1
WT-1-1
-WC_CC1
-XC_VFD1
144
-XC_VFD1
144
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_CRCC1
-XC_VFD1
145A
WT-1-1
-WC_CC1
11
12
/0037.11F
-SL_CC1
WT-1-1
-WC_CC1
-XC_VFD1
145B-XP_PJLS2
4
4
/0037.6C
-XP_PJLS3
4
4
/0037.6F
-XP_PJLSCC1
4
4
/0037.11F
-XP_PJLSCC1
3
3
/0037.11F
-XP_PJLS1
4
4
/0037.7H
-XP_PJLSCC1
1
1
/0037.11F
/0019.16D
/0037.11C
/0008.7E
/0008.9E
/0008.8E
/0009.3F
/0008.2E
/0009.5H
/0029.13E
-XC_VFD1
2439
-X
C
_
V
F
D
1
24
4
0
-J
C
_
E
S
T
P
1
-XC_VFD1
2436
-X
C
_
V
F
D
1
24
3
7
-J
C
_
E
S
T
P
2
=INST
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_CR19A
2441
-X
C
_
V
F
D
1
24
3
8
-X
C
_
V
F
D
1
24
3
5
MS
R
1
2
7
R
/
T
PW
R
_
I
N
SA
F
E
T
Y
_
I
N
MO
N
_
F
D
B
K
/
RE
S
E
T
SA
F
E
T
Y
_
I
N
CH
2
CH
1
-AR_MSR
+WT-1-1
A2
14 24 34 42
A1 S1
1
S5
2
S1
2
S3
4
S2
1
S2
2
13 23 33 41
-S
E
_
E
S
T
P
+D
R
-
1
-
1
20
2
20
1
20
6
20
5
A1
A2
+WT-1-1
-KA_CR19
-X
C
_
V
F
D
1
24
3
5
/0008.5E
/0009.2F
/0008.2C
/0009.5D
/0008.3G
/0008.4G
942
/0
0
1
9
.
1
5
B
/0
0
1
9
.
1
5
B
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
SHEET NO.SHEET DESCRIPTION
001 DRAWING SHEET INDEX AND NOTES
002 DOORS LAYOUT
003 LV DOOR LAYOUT - CONTROL CABINET
004 LV PANEL LAYOUT - LEFT - CONTROL CABINET
005 LV PANEL LAYOUT - FRONT - CONTROL CABINET
006 LV PANEL LAYOUT - RIGHT - CONTROL CABINET
0010007529987A32023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 6000T
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
DRAWING SHEET INDEX AND NOTES
VERSIZE
6OF1SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN00
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
DRAWING SHEET INDEX
10007529987A000-0017 - REV 0
4321
C
B
A
5 6 7 8
4321 5 6 7 8
D
E
F
C
B
A
D
E
F
RA_TB_IEC_A3_H_FRM_REV_C
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
0010007529987A32023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 6000T
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
DOORS LAYOUT
VERSIZE
6OF2SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN00
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
10007529987A000-0017 - REV 0
SCALE 0,075
4321
C
B
A
5 6 7 8
4321 5 6 7 8
D
E
F
C
B
A
D
E
F
RA_TB_IEC_A3_H_FRM_REV_C
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
0010007529987A32023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 6000T
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
LV DOOR LAYOUT - CONTROL CABINET
VERSIZE
6OF3SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN00
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
#DBCOMMAND=INSERT_BALLOON,TEXT=ETAGNAME, EXCLUDE=PNL_;DRX_;NP;CWW;DIN,ZONE=FUTURE,OFFSET=25,VIEW=DR-LV
10007529987A000-0017 - REV 0
SCALE 0,200
MV_LVCFN2
PL_VFDRDY
PL_ALM
PM_EHIM
MV_LVCFN1
XP_RJ45
PL_FLT
PL_VFDRUN
SG_ECPR
SG_RESET
SS_LOR
SE_ESTP
4321
C
B
A
5 6 7 8
4321 5 6 7 8
D
E
F
C
B
A
D
E
F
RA_TB_IEC_A3_H_FRM_REV_C
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
0010007529987A32023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 6000T
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
LV PANEL LAYOUT - LEFT - CONTROL CABINET
VERSIZE
6OF4SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN00
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
10007529987A000-0017 - REV 0
#DBCOMMAND=INSERT_BALLOON,TEXT=ETAGNAME, EXCLUDE=PNL_;DRX_;NP;CWW;DIN,ZONE=FUTURE,OFFSET=25,VIEW=LV_PNL_LFT
SCALE 0,200
XC_VFD1
KA_IDFR
KA_IRO
KA_IRC
KA_CR19
KA_CR19A
KA_CR20
KA_CR20A
QC_TPC_FN10
QC_CTRL1
QC_CTRL2
QC_MSH
KA_LOSS1
KA_LOSS2
KA_CPMON
FB_FAN_TPC
FB_INTCTRL
FB_EXTCTRL
FB_MSH
KA_CR2
KA_FLT
KA_ALM
KA_RDY
KA_RUN
4321
C
B
A
5 6 7 8
4321 5 6 7 8
D
E
F
C
B
A
D
E
F
RA_TB_IEC_A3_H_FRM_REV_C
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
0010007529987A32023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 6000T
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
LV PANEL LAYOUT - FRONT - CONTROL CABINET
VERSIZE
6OF5SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN00
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
#DBCOMMAND=INSERT_BALLOON,TEXT=ETAGNAME, EXCLUDE=PNL_;DRX_;NP;CWW;DIN,ZONE=FUTURE,OFFSET=25,VIEW=LV_PNL_FNT

10007529987A000-0017 - REV 0
SCALE 0,200
BV_CPT1
RU_EMI
KF_CB
4321
C
B
A
5 6 7 8
4321 5 6 7 8
D
E
F
C
B
A
D
E
F
RA_TB_IEC_A3_H_FRM_REV_C
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
0010007529987A32023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 6000T
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
LV PANEL LAYOUT - RIGHT - CONTROL CABINET
VERSIZE
6OF6SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN00
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
#DBCOMMAND=INSERT_BALLOON,TEXT=ETAGNAME, EXCLUDE=PNL_;DRX_;NP;CWW;DIN,ZONE=FUTURE,OFFSET=25,VIEW=LV_PNL_RGT
10007529987A000-0017 - REV 0
SCALE 0,200
TR_PS3A
TR_PS4A
TM_TSC
TM_TSSO
TR_PS1A
GP_BUFFER
KP_1_DNADPTR
KP_1_PIO1
KP_1_PIO2
KP_1_PIO3
KP_1_PIO4
KP_1_PIO5
KP_1_PIO6
KP_1_PIO7
KP_1_PIO8
KP_1_PIO9
KP_1_PIO10
KP_1_PIO11
KP_1_PIO12
KP_1_EPS_1
KA_CRCC1
FB_10CB6
FB_10CB5
FB_10CB4
FB_10CB3
FB_10CB2
FB_10CB1
FB_PLC1
KP_1_PIO17
KP_1_PIO16
KP_1_PIO15
KP_1_PIO14
KP_1_PIO13
NI_ES1
AR_MSR
KP_1_EPS_2
4321
C
B
A
5 6 7 8
4321 5 6 7 8
D
E
F
C
B
A
D
E
F
RA_TB_IEC_A3_H_FRM_REV_C
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENSPC
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
0BAF0C34F8B543B51500_UNT_SPC_0001.DWG
UNIT SPECIFICATION
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
05-01-2023CTO 00
00010001
10007370563
BASE UNIT DATA
CATALOG NUMBER
1/IP21ENCLOSURE TYPE
INTELLIVAC
CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMERSCONTROL POWER SOURCE
CONTACTOR CONTROL TYPE
SYSTEM VOLTAGE CLASS
OPERATING AMBIENT TEMPERATURE 0 - 40 DEG C
CONTROLLER SIZE 400A NOMINAL
UNIT DESCRIPTION 1512AD
1512AD-AAE
5KV
PROTECTION & MONITORING
MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY NONE SELECTED
FEEDER PROTECTION RELAY SPECIFIED ON CMOD
OVERLOAD RELAY SEL 710 MODEL NO. 071001ABA9X72850201
GROUND FAULT RELAY NONE SELECTED
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSF NONE SELECTED
LOCKOUT RELAYS NONE SELECTED
DOOR MOUNTED PILOT DEVICES
REDLENS COLOR - ON
GREENLENS COLOR - OFF
METERING DEVICES
METERING - ANALOG CURRENT NONE SELECTED
METERING - ANALOG VOLTAGE NONE SELECTED
METERING - ANALOG TIME NONE SELECTED
METERING - ANALOG COUNTER NONE SELECTED
SHORTING TERMINAL BLOCK NONE SELECTED
TEST TERMINAL BLOCK CURRENT NONE SELECTED
TEST TERMINAL BLOCK VOLTAGE NONE SELECTED
TEST TERMINAL BLOCK MULTI NONE SELECTED
COMMUNICATION & ANALOG SIGNALS
ISOLATED ANALOG TRANSDUCERS NONE SELECTED
CONTROLLER NETWORK INTERFACES NONE SELECTED
CONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING
TEW OR MTW TINNED COPPERCONTROL CIRCUIT WIRING TYPE
NONE SELECTEDCONTROL CIRCUIT LUGS
NONE SELECTEDHEAT SHRINK TUBING
NEMA TERMINAL BLOCKSCONTROL TERMINAL BLOCK TYPE
SPACE HEATERS
NONE SELECTEDCABINET SPACE HEATER
NONE SELECTEDMOTOR SPACE HEATER CIRCUIT
MISCELLANEOUS
NONE SELECTEDDRIVE FUNCTIONAL SAFETY
YESUNIT HAS MASTER NAMEPLATE
NONE SELECTEDKEY INTERLOCK POWER CELL DOOR
LOCK 'OFF'KEY INTERLOCK SUPPLEMENTARY
ISOLATION TRANSFORMERINPUT IMPEDANCE OPTION
NONE SELECTEDPOWER CELL DOOR VENTED
0-1463 M (0-4800 FT)HIGH ALTITUDE OPTION
NONE SELECTEDDEVICE NAMEPLATES
CONTROL - POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER
3 PHASE VOLT.REF. INTERWIRINGPOTENTIAL TRANSF INTERWIRING
NONE SELECTEDPOTENTIAL TRANSFORMERS
500VA CPTCONTROL CIRCUIT TRANSFORMER
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
0BAF0C34F8B543B51512AD_ELD_0001.DWG
DRAWING SHEET INDEX, FOOTNOTES
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00070001
10007370562
DRAWING SHEET INDEX
WIRING SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED
BY ROCKWELL AUTOMATION.
WIRING SUPPLIED AND INSTALLED BY OTHERS.
WIRING SUPPLIED BY ROCKWELL AUTOMATION
TO BE COMPLETED BY OTHERS.
+WT-1-1 PART TYPE-SECTION-ZONE
/0050.4D
-KG_DI
CROSS REFERENCE: SHEET AND CO-ORDINATE
DEVICE DESIGNATION
FOOTNOTES
ADDITIONAL COMPONENTS AND FEATURES
ID DESCRIPTION
-PN_DRLK_1 WARNING LABEL - DOOR SECTION 1
-PN_FALK_1 WARNING LABEL - FINAL ASSEMBLY SECTION 1
-PN_PLLK_1 WARNING LABEL - PANEL SECTION 1
-WW_CTRL_TEW WIRE - LOW VOLTAGE CONTROL WIRE TYPE - TEW (MTW) COPPER
-XP_DI CONNECTOR + CABLE ASSEMBLY - DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR
SHEET NO DESCRIPTION
0001 DRAWING SHEET INDEX, FOOTNOTES
0002 DEVICE DESIGNATIONS
0003 TERMINAL STRIP REPORT, AUXILIARY CIRCUITS
0004 MV POWER CIRCUIT
0005 LV CONTROL CIRCUIT
0006 SECONDARY TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT
0007 MULTI FUNCTION RELAY CIRCUIT
NOTE DESCRIPTION
031 FOR CUSTOMER USE.
059 TO BE PROGRAMMED BY THE CUSTOMER BEFORE START UP.
202 DANGER: WHEN REPLACING LINE FUSES, BE CERTAIN TO REPLACE WITH SAME CLASS, TYPE AND RATING FUSE. FAILURE TO REPLACE WITH
FUSE ORIGINALLY SPECIFIED CAN RESULT IN EXPLOSIVE DAMAGE AND SEVERE INJURY.
207 CAUTION: DO NOT PUT DEVICE IN SERVICE UNTIL ALL PARAMETERS HAVE BEEN PROGRAMMED. FAILURE TO PROGRAM CAN RESULT IN
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT. INSTANTANEOUS TRIP ELEMENTS MUST NOT BE USED, OR MUST BE BLOCKED. EARTH FAULT RELAYS MUST BE
BLOCKED ABOVE CONTACTOR INTERRUPTING RATING, OR HAVE A SUITABLE DELAY FOR THE APPLIED POWER FUSE. REMOVE THIS LABEL
AFTER COMMISSIONING.
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
0BAF0C34F8B543B51512AD_ELD_0002.DWG
DEVICE DESIGNATIONS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00070002
10007370562
DEVICE DESIGNATIONS
ID DESCRIPTION XREF
-BC_PHASE TRANSFORMER - CURRENT 3 PHASE /0004.12B
-BV_CPT1 TRANSFORMER - VOLTAGE, CONTROL POWER /0004.6D
-BV_PT1 TRANSFORMER - VOLTAGE, POTENTIAL /0004.8D
-BV_PT2 TRANSFORMER - VOLTAGE, POTENTIAL /0004.9D
-FF_CPT1 FUSE - PRIMARY OF CONTROL POWER TRANSFORMER 1 /0004.6C
-FF_CTRLA FUSE - PRIMARY CONTROL CIRCUIT /0005.3D
-FF_IVDI FUSE - PRIMARY OF DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR INTELLIVAC MODULE /0005.8D
-FF_PT1 FUSE- PRIMARY OF POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER 1 /0004.8C
-FF_PT2 FUSE- PRIMARY OF POTENTIAL TRANSFORMER 2 /0004.9C
-FF_PWR FUSE- MEDIUM VOLTAGE POWER /0004.6B
-FF_VREF FUSE- VOLTAGE REFERENCE CIRCUIT /0006.4D
-GND_PE GROUND - EARTH POTENTIAL /0004.3B
-GND_PE_CUST GROUND - EARTH POTENTIAL, CUSTOMER /0004.2C
-KA_PRTC RELAY - AUXILIARY, PROTECTION RELAY /0005.12J
-KC_DI RELAY - CLOSING, DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR /0005.12C
-KI_IVDI INTELLIVAC - DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR /0005.9D
-PL_OFF_DI PILOT LIGHT - DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR OFF /0005.12H
-PL_ON_DI PILOT LIGHT - DRIVE INPUT CONTACTOR ON /0005.12G
-PR_FPR RELAY - PROTECTION, FEEDER /0007.12B
-Q_VFD CONTROLLER - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE /0004.14B
-QC_DI CONTACTOR - DRIVE INPUT /0005.12F
-QS_DI ISOLATION SWITCH - DRIVE INPUT /0004.4B
-SS_NOT SWITCH - SELECTOR, NORMAL-OFF-TEST /0005.14C
-TSB_VI TEST BLOCK - CURRENT AND VOLTAGE /0006.8G
-WB_MP BUS - MAIN POWER /0004.4B
-WP_BC_PHASE CABLE - POWER, CONTACTOR TO CURRENT TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY /0004.9B
-XC_DI TERMINAL BLOCK ASSEMBLY - CUSTOMER /0003.1A
-XS_TSR CONNECTOR - TEST SUPPLY RECEPTACLE /0005.10C
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
0BAF0C34F8B543B51512AD_ELD_0003.DWG
TERMINAL STRIP REPORT, AUXILIARY CIRCUITS
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00070003
10007370562
-XC_DI
+PL-1-1
LK
/0005.12F
-QC_DI -XC_DI
37
-XC_DI
36
031/0001.9A
-XC_DI
DI-36
-XC_DI
DI-37
-JM_34 -JM_35
FROM XREF SOURCE DESCRIPTION RA JUMPERSTERM IDCUSTOMER JUMPERS
VA
VB
VB
P VCP1
1
1
1
-Q_VFD /0005.4D RA SEP.CONTROLLER - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
[DI_EMER_STP_CLSE_CMD]DI-1
-Q_VFD /0005.5D RA SEP.CONTROLLER - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
[DI_EMER_STP_CLSE_CMD]DI-14A
2
-Q_VFD /0005.5C RA SEP.CONTROLLER - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE
[DI_EMER_STP_CLSE_CMD]DI-2
3
12
12
P 12
32
33
34
35
-QC_DI /0003.10F REMOTE CONTACTOR - DRIVE INPUT 36
E DI-36
-QC_DI /0003.11F REMOTE CONTACTOR - DRIVE INPUT 37
P DI-37
-Q_VFD /0004.14G RA SEP.CONTROLLER - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE D-1035A
-Q_VFD /0004.14G RA SEP.CONTROLLER - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE D-1036A
26
28
29
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
0BAF0C34F8B543B51512AD_ELD_0004.DWG
MV POWER CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00070004
10007370562
1X
2
1X
1
250/5
-BC_PHASE
3X
2
3X
1
2X
1
2X
2
3X
2
1U
1V
1W
-GND_PECURRENT LIMITING
5.5KV, 1/PH, BOLT-ON
250E, DBL BARREL
-FF_PWR-QS_DI
-GND_PE
202/0001.9B -WP_BC_PHASE
350 MCM, 13.8KV
1/PHASE, TOP EXIT
T1L1
/0005.12F
-QC_DI
T2L2
T3L3
L1
3PH, 60HZ
4160 VAC (L-L),
+REM
-PI_MV L2
L3
L1 L2 L3
-WB_MP
GND_PE+REM
-GND_PE_CUST
GN
D
_
P
E
CURRENT LIMITING
4800V
(2) 1/2E
-FF_CPT1
H2H1
X4X3X2X1
-BV_CPT1
110/120V
4200V
500VA
X4
-GND_PE
/0
0
0
5
.
1
A
5
/0
0
0
5
.
1
5
A
6
120 VAC (L-GND)
-JM_53
-XC_DI
D-1036A
-XC_DI
D-1035A
DI_EMER_STP
DI_CLSE_CMD
DI_CNT_STAT
DI_LOAD
=INST
+RASEP
-Q_VFD
1U
1V
1W
DI-2543
DI-2535
DI-2538
D-1036A
D-1035A
6000T
5
/0004.4B
6
-QS_DI
FE
/0005.12F
-QC_DI-XC_DI
2
-XC_DI
3
/0005.1B
/0006.2D
/0004.12G
/0006.2D
/0005.5C
H2H1
X2X1
-BV_PT1
120V
4200V
425VA, 60HZ
X2X2
H2 H2H1
X2X1
-BV_PT2
120V
4200V
425VA, 60HZ
CURRENT
LIMITING
1E, 4.8KV
-FF_PT1
-GND_PE
/0
0
0
6
.
1
D
25
/0
0
0
6
.
1
D
26
/0
0
0
6
.
1
D
27
CURRENT
LIMITING
1E, 4.8KV
-FF_PT2
/0
0
0
6
.
1
G
42
/0
0
0
6
.
1
G
44
/0
0
0
6
.
1
G
46
/0
0
0
6
.
1
G
30
42 44 46
30
/0005.4D
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
0BAF0C34F8B543B51512AD_ELD_0005.DWG
LV CONTROL CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00070005
10007370562
9 43
OOX
87
OOX
65
XOO
-QS_DI
8
/0004.4B
7
14
14B
13
15
21
250VAC
2A
+PL-1-1
-FF_IVDI
13
/0005.12C
14
+PL-1-1
-KC_DI
-GND_PE
-XC_DI
1
-XC_DI
DI-14A INTELLIVAC
EC
MOD_STAT
CNT_STAT
AUX
OPEN
CLOSE
TCO
CCO
PWR_IN
BASE UNIT
+PL-1-1
-KI_IVDI
GND
L1 L2/N
1
2
7
8
9
10
11
12
3
4
6
5
13
14
15
16
+PL-1-1
-KI_IVDI
109
CLOSE
/0005.9E
-XC_DI
12
207/0001.9B 059/0001.9B
121011
-XS_TSR
+PL-1-1
120 VAC (L-GND)
60HZ
L N
GND
-GND_PE
12
TEST
OFF
NORMAL
XOO
TEST
OFF
NORMAL
+PL-1-1
-SS_NOT
17
20
-GND_PE
M
EH, IV CTRL
400A, 5KV
N
-QC_DI
C
/0005.8F
/0004.12G
/0005.5G
/0005.5H
/0003.10F
/0004.8B
/0004.8B
/0004.8B
7
/0
0
0
4
.
6
F
5
/0
0
0
4
.
6
F
6120 VAC (L-GND)
2
1
-QS_DI
/0004.4B
2
1
250VAC
4A
+PL-1-1
-FF_CTRLA
8
BA
/0005.12F
-QC_DI
-JM_10
-XC_DI
DI-1
-XC_DI
DI-2
CH1 CH2
DI-1 DI-14A
+RASEP
-Q_VFD DI_EMER_STP
/0004.16G
DI_CLSE_CMD DI-2
+PL-1-1
-KC_DI
A2A1 /0005.8D23
/0005.12J
24
+PL-1-1
-KA_PRTC
-JM_3
1
-XC_DI
1 HG
/0005.12F
-QC_DI-XC_DI
32
-XC_DI
33 106105
RD
+DR-1-1
-PL_ON_DI
LED
CONTACTOR ON
DRIVE INPUT
-XC_DI
12
-JM_4
-XC_DI
1
-XC_DI
12JI
/0005.12F
-QC_DI-XC_DI
34
-XC_DI
35 106105
GN
+DR-1-1
-PL_OFF_DI
LED
CONTACTOR OFF
DRIVE INPUT
-+
PE
/0007.11B
071001ABA9X72850201
A1 A2
-PR_FPR
+DR-1-1
-XC_DI
1
+PL-1-1
-KA_PRTC
A2A1 /0005.9C
OUT103
A09A07
/0007.13C
+DR-1-1
-PR_FPR
A08
150
31
/0005.11D
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
0BAF0C34F8B543B51512AD_ELD_0006.DWG
SECONDARY TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00070006
10007370562
21
600VAC
1A
+PL-1-1
-FF_VREF
43
-JM_30
/0004.8F 25
/0004.8F 26
/0004.9F 27
-XC_DI
26
-XC_DI
28
-XC_DI
29
-XC_DI
VA
-XC_DI
VB
-XC_DI
VC
3 4
-QS_DI
5 6
VA
VB
VC
+DR-1-1
-PR_FPR
E01 VOLTAGE_INPUTS
/0007.11F
E02
E03
N
-XC_DI
VB
VB
Z02Z01
/0007.11G
CT_INPUTS
+DR-1-1
-PR_FPR
Z03 Z04
Z05 Z06
/0004.13D 42
/0004.13D 44
/0004.13D 46
/0004.13D 30
25
27
G
H
B
A
D
C
F
E
I
J
-TSB_VI
-DR-1-1
774B430G20
ABB FT-1
1314
10 9
12 11
1516
2 1
4 3
6 5
8 7
1718
1920
42A
44A
46A
30A
PROJ. DOC. TYPE:
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
LANG:
CUSTOMER:
PROJECT:REV DATE STAGE
RATB.CEWS.IEC.H.A1.B
APPROVED
00
APPROVAL2023-06-19A MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
ENELD
MVB6505769940
R.TRIVEDI
2023-08-07 REL TO MFGS. JOHN
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
OF
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
DRAWN BY:DATE:
SHEET
SIZE VER
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
1 16
A
1 16
A
MM
RATB.SAP.IEC.H.A1.B
A1
0BAF0C34F8B543B51512AD_ELD_0007.DWG
MULTI FUNCTION RELAY CIRCUIT
UNIT ELECTRICAL DIAGRAM
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
05-01-2023S. JOHN 00
00070007
10007370562
SEL-710
SLOT E
SLOT Z
E02
E04
VA
VB
VC
E01
E03
VOLTAGE_INPUTSN
Z02
CT_INPUTSZ04
Z06
Z08
1A
1B
1C
1N
Z01
Z03
Z05
Z07
GFCT_INPUTS
SLOT B 8
PORT 2
PORT 1
9
PORT 3
9
PORT F
FO
E05 NE06N
WYE
B01
B02 IRIG-B-
+
SLOT DD01...D30 RTD1-10
A01
A02
GND -/N
+/H IN_PWR
SLOT A
A10
A11
A12 IN102
IN101
OUT101
A03
A04
OUT102
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
SLOT C
DI301
C11
C12
DI302
C13
C14
DI303
C15
C16
DO301
C01
C02
DO302
C03
C04
DO303
C05
C06
DO304
C07
C08
AO301
C09
C10
NO
COM
NC
OUT103
E08
E10
IA87
IB87
IC87
E07
E09 INPUTS
COM
AC CURRENT
-PR_FPR
+DR-1-1 071001ABA9X72850201
TX
RX
/0005.9J
/0005.5H
/0006.13C
/0006.14F
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RA_TB_NEMA_D_H_FRM_REV_B
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
SHEET NO SHEET DESCRIPTION
0001 DRAWING SHEET INDEX AND NOTES
0002 DOOR LAYOUT - LOCATION DR-1-1
0003 PANEL LAYOUT - LOCATION PL-1-1
0004 DOOR LAYOUT - LOCATION DR-1-2
010007429789D2023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
DRAWING SHEET INDEX AND NOTES
VERSIZE
4OF1SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN0
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
A000-0005 - REV 0
DRAWING SHEET INDEX
10007429789
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RA_TB_NEMA_D_H_FRM_REV_B
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
010007429789D2023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
DOOR LAYOUT - LOCATION DR-1-1
VERSIZE
4OF2SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN0
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
10007429789
#DBCOMMAND=INSERT_BALLOON,TEXT=ETAGNAME, EXCLUDE=PNL_;DRX_;NP;CWW;DIN,ZONE=FUTURE,OFFSET=25,VIEW=DR-1-1
A000-0005 - REV 0
SCALE 0.350
PL_OFF_DI
TSB_VI
PL_ON_DI
PR_FPR
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RA_TB_NEMA_D_H_FRM_REV_B
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
010007429789D2023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
PANEL LAYOUT - LOCATION PL-1-1
VERSIZE
4OF3SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN0
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
10007429789
#DBCOMMAND=INSERT_BALLOON,TEXT=ETAGNAME, EXCLUDE=BRK_;PCB_;PNL_;DRX_;NP;CWW;DIN,ZONE=FUTURE,OFFSET=25,VIEW=PL-1-1
A000-0005 - REV 0
SCALE 0.350
XC_DI
KA_PRTC
SS_NOT
XS_TSR
FF_CTRLA
FF_IVDI
FF_VREF
KC_DI
KI_IVDI
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RQPNMLKJHGFEDCBA
01
02
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
20
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
09
08
07
06
05
04
03
21
41
RA_TB_NEMA_D_H_FRM_REV_B
THIRD ANGLE
PROJECTION
010007429789D2023-5-1DATE:S. JOHNDRAWN BY:
MV BULLETIN 1512AD
UNIT LAYOUT DRAWING
DOOR LAYOUT - LOCATION DR-1-2
VERSIZE
4OF4SHEET
CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY INFORMATION.
THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY
INFORMATION OF ROCKWELL AUTOMATION, INC. AND MAY
NOT BE USED, COPIED OR DISCLOSED TO OTHERS EXCEPT
WITH THE AUTHORIZED WRITTEN PERMISSION OF
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION INC.
LANG: EN
MVB6505769940-
ORDER-LINE NUMBER:
WEBER BSIN WTR CNSERVANCY DST
-
-
CUSTOMER:
MVDRIVE PF6000T SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
-
-
PROJECT:
PROJ.DOC.TYPE: MDL
----
----
----
----
----
----
----
REL TO MFG2023-5-1S. JOHN0
STAGEDATEAPPROVEDREV
-
--
10007429789
#DBCOMMAND=INSERT_BALLOON,TEXT=ETAGNAME, EXCLUDE=PNL_;DRX_;NP;CWW;DIN,ZONE=FUTURE,OFFSET=25,VIEW=DR-1-2
A000-0005 - REV 0
SCALE 0.350

APPENDIX B
PREPURCHASE MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR CUTSHEETS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
SP12I01
TITLE
DATE
CHK.BY
JOB NO.
FILENAME
DWG.NO.
DRN.BY
SCALE
REV.
DATE SYM. REVISION RECORD AUTH. DR. CK.THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS PROPRIETARY INFORMATION OF ELECTRO MECHANICAL CORP. OR
ITS OPERATING DIVISIONS IN WHOM TITLE REMAINS. ANY REPRODUCTION, DISTRIBUTION, DIS-
CLOSURE OR USE NOT OTHERWISE EXPRESSLY APPROVED IN WRITING IS STRICTLY PROHIBITED.
373111.dft
0.070
KMD
9/29/2003
RGN
37-31
D37-3111
15kV 95kV BIL 600A DEADFRONT SWITCHGEAR
PSE-11
PARKING
STAND
80 3/4
83
55 1/2 69 9/1672 3/4
10 7/16 TYP.
COMPARTMENT 1 & 2 ONLY
8 5/8
1. 11 GA MILD STEEL ENCLOSURE WITH FINISH COAT
MUNSELL NO. 7GY 3.29/1.5 GREEN.
2. REMOVABLE LIFTING BRACKETS.
3.NEMA 2 HOLE STAINLESS STEEL GROUND PADS WITH
FULL WIDTH 3/8" DIA. COPPER GROUND BAR .
4. NEMA GRADE GPO-3 BARRIER, SWITCH AND FUSE.
5. OPERATING HANDLE AND SWITCH POSITION INDICATOR.
6. INSTRUCTION POCKETS PROVIDED.
7.NAMEPLATE AND 3-LINE DIAGRAM PROVIDED.
8. SWITCH AND FUSE VIEWING WINDOW.
9. GALVANIZED 16 GA STEEL FLOOR PAN WITH DRAIN SCREENS.
10. WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS.
11. 600 AMP ALUMINUM BUS BAR .
12. EPOXY INSULATORS.
13. CABLE GUIDES.
14. ACTIVE DOOR HAS 3 POINT LATCHING, CONCEALED
STAINLESS STEEL HINGES AND PINS, PROVISIONS FOR
PADLOCKING AND PENTA-HEAD SECURITY BOLTS AND
105v DOOR STOPS.
15. CROSS BROKEN ONE PIECE ROOF WITH ANTI-CONDENSATE
APPLIED TO UNDERSIDE TO REDUCE MOISTURE BUILD-UP.
16. PROTECTIVE GASKET FOR BASE OF ENCLOSURE IS
1/2 X 1-1/2 CLOSED CELL FOAM TYPE.
17. PHASE INDICATION LABELS PROVIDED.
18. APPROXIMATE WEIGHT : 2500 LBS.
STANDARD COMPONENTS
STANDARDS
SWITCHGEAR PER ANSI/IEEE C37.74
BUSHINGS PER ANSI/IEEE 386
ENCLOSURE PER ANSI/IEEE C57.12.28
COMPARTMENT 3 COMPARTMENT 4
1 2 3
COMPARTMENT 2 COMPARTMENT 1
1 2 3
3 2 1
3 2 1
12
18
1 1/2 MIN.
RECOMMENDED PAD SECTION
UNIT SIDE PANEL
CONCRETE PAD
5/8-11 ANCHOR BOLT
(NOT PROVIDED)
(4) TIE DOWN PLATES
(PROVIDED)
PAD OUTLINE
UNIT OUTLINE
FUSE
COMPT. 3
SWITCH
COMPT. 4
SWITCH
COMPT. 2
SWITCH
COMPT. 1
PROJECTED TERMINATION LOCATIONS
SEE TIE DOWN DETAIL
2 TYP.
ALL AROUND
PAD LAYOUT
T6,T7 OPTION
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
COMPARTMENTS 1 & 2
(DOORS REMOVED)COMPARTMENTS 3 & 4
(DOORS REMOVED)
6 (A2 & A6 OPTIONS)
SEE BASE CHART
BASE SPACER OPTIONS
A2 & A6 : 6"
A3 & A7 : 12"
A4 & A8 : 18"
A5 & A9 : 24"
02
03
04
05
06
07
07
08
09
10
11
14
14
15
16
FRONT VIEW
WITH BASE OPTION SHOWN
RIGHT SIDE VIEW
WITH BASE OPTION SHOWN
44 1/8
1
75
K1, K2, K3,K4 OPTION
K3,K4 OPTION
8 3/4 TYP.
COMPARTMENT 1,2,4
75
600 AMP
BUSHING
10 7/16 TYP. FOR
COMPARTMENT 1 & 2 ONLY
14 1/16 TYP.
COMPARTMENT 1,2,4
12 13/16 TYP.
COMPARTMENT 4 ONLY
4 TYP.
ALL AROUND
SECTION VIEW THRU COMPARTMENTS
RIGHT SIDE
SECTION VIEW THRU COMPARTMENTS
LEFT SIDE
4 3/16 11 1/4 TYP.
COMPARTMENT 3 ONLY
6 1/2
4 3/8
8 3/4
17 3/4
21 11/16
17 3/4
21 13/16
14 3/8
15 11/16
17 3/4
21 13/16
12 13/16
COMPARTMENT 4 ONLY
4 3/8 TYP.
8 3/4 TYP.
11 1/4 TYP.
5 5/8 TYP.
08
17 17 4 1/4
COMPARTMENT 3 ONLY
600 AMP
BUSHING 600 AMP
BUSHING
72 3/4
33
33
200 AMP
BUSHING WELL
12
THIS "GENERIC" DRAWING PROVIDES STANDARD
DIMENSIONAL DATA. SEE " CUSTOMER SELECTED OPTIONS"
FOR SPECIFIC OPTIONS CHOSEN FOR A PARTICULAR JOB.

APPENDIX C
PREPURCHASE MEDIUM VOLTAGE PAD MOUNT TRANSFORMER
CUTSHEETS

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY BLANK
NOMINAL SYSTEM VOLTAGE
MAXIMUM DESIGN VOLTAGE
BASIC INSULATION LEVEL (BIL)
CONTINUOUS CURRENT
PHASE
FREQUENCY
JOB NUMBER
SERIAL NUMBER
YEAR OF MANUFACTURE
12.47 kV
15 kV
95 kV
200 A
3
60 HZ
4462
207782
2023
WINNECONNE, WI 54986
MANUFACTURED BY
www.switchgearpower.com
SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC
SYSTEM RATING
ISO VIEW
FOR REFERENCE ONLY
SCALE: NONE
4462 STEVEN SALES CODALE SOUTH WEBER WELL #2
15kV, 95kV BIL, 200 AMP
PAD MOUNTED PRIMARY METERING CABINET
NEMA 3R OUTDOOR CONSTRUCTION
NOTES
HEXAGONAL BALLOONS W/LETTERS DENOTE "FEATURES" LISTED. XX•
CIRCULAR BALLOONS W/NUMBERS DENOTE THE DRAWING "BILL OF MATERIALS". XX•
SPS STANDARD UTILIZES A BELLEVILLE WASHER ON THE BUS TO BUS CONNECTIONS.•
FEATURES
CROSS-KINKED ROOF; SECTION OVER TRANSFORMER A.
COMPARTMENT IS REMOVABLE.
REMOVABLE LIFTING PLATES WITH BLIND MOUNTING HOLES.B.
LOCKING MECHANISM IS 3-POINT POSITIVE LATCH WITH C.
PADLOCKABLE HANDLE AND SHIELDED 1/2-13 UNC PENTA
HEAD SECURITY BOLT.
BARREL HINGE, LOOSE JOINT WITH STAINLESS STEEL PIN, D.
BOLTED TO DOOR AND CABINET, DOORS ARE REMOVABLE
IN THE OPEN POSITION ONLY.
GROUND PADS ARE STAINLESS STEEL, UNPAINTED AND E.
WELDED TO THE ENCLOSURE. TRANSFORMER
COMPARTMENT INCLUDES CENTER GROUND BUS SUPPORT
AND FULL WIDTH SILVER PLATED COPPER GROUND BUS.
PARKING STANDS ARE #12 GAUGE STAINLESS STEEL AND F.
UNPAINTED.
DOOR STAYS HOLD DOORS IN THE 90 , 110 , 140 OPEN G.
POSITION.
PHASE TO GROUND BARRIERS ARE 3/16" THICK GPO-3 H.
MATERIAL.
N/AI.
COMPARTMENT BARRIERS ARE 1/4" LEXAN MATERIAL, LIFT-J.
OUT STYLE SUPPLIED WITH NON-CONDUCTIVE HANDLES.
MIMIC BUS INDICATING ONE-LINE DIAGRAM, INCLUDES K.
"LINE", "LOAD" AND "METERING TRANSFORMER" LABELS,
LOCATED ON EQUIPMENT WALL (DEADFRONT) IN ELBOW
COMPARTMENT.
REMOVABLE METERING TRANSFORMER PANS.L.
COMPARTMENT DESIGNATION LABELS, "ELBOW" AND M.
"METERING TRANSFORMER". LOCATED ABOVE RESPECTIVE
COMPARTMENT DOORS.
VENTED LOUVERS WITH STAINLESS STEEL PERF WELDED ON THE N.
BACK SIDE.
N/AO.
SAFETY AND WARNING LABELS:P.
TRIPLE LABEL: "DANGER, HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ENCLOSED",
"DANGER,LOCK OUT ALL SOURCES" AND "WARNING,
ELECTRIC SHOCK HAZARD, TRAINED PERSONNEL."
"ARC FLASH HAZARD"
"DANGER, HIGH VOLTAGE REMOVE POWER"
SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS" COMPANY LOGO
N/AQ.
FLEXIBLE (DOOR BONDING) GROUND STRAP LOCATED ON R.
ACCESS DOORS.
N/AS.
EQUIPMENT WALL (DEADFRONT) IS FULL HEIGHT AND WELDED T.
TO THE UNDERSIDE OF THE ROOF, COMPLETELY CLOSING OFF
THE TERMINATION COMPARTMENT.
MANUFACTURER'S DATA PLATE (SEE DATE PLATE DETAIL).U.
FLOOR PLATE WITH DRAIN HOLES IN TRANSFORMER SECTIONV.
MEDIA FILTERW.
N/AX.
GROUND CONNECTOR,TANK,BRASSY.
CONSTRUCTION
NEMA TYPE 3R OUTDOOR, 12 GAUGE GALVANNEAL •STEEL, WELDED CONSTRUCTION.
FINISH COAT IS MUNSELL GREEN NO. 7GY 3.29/1.5. •PAINT FINISH MEETS OR EXCEEDS A.N.S.I. C57.12.28 2006 PAINT SPECIFICATIONS FOR EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE INTEGRITY. (DRY FILM THICKNESS = 3 TO 5 mil MINIMUM DFT), NO EXCEPTIONS. IF ENCLOSURE IS OF A WET-PROCESS PAINT APPLICATION THE ENCLOSURE WILL NEED TO BE CAULKED BEFORE THE PAINT PROCESS THIS DOES NOT APPLY TO POWDER COATED FINISHES, DUE TO THE HEAT BURNING THE CAULK.
GASKETED FRONT & REAR DOORS, NEOPRENE •GASKET, SECURED WITH A WATER AND OIL RESISTANT ADHESIVE.
HARDWARE IS GRADE 5 ZINC PLATED. EXCEPTION •FOR PURCHASED COMPONENTS. EXTERIOR COMPONENTS ARE STAINLESS STEEL.
NO-DRIP COMPOUND APPLIED TO UNDERSIDE OF •REMOVABLE ENCLOSURE ROOF.
U
A
REVISIONS
REV.ZONE DESCRIPTION REVISED BY DATE ECN#
-RELEASED FOR SUBMITTAL EEG 7/13/2023
A A4 PT,URJ-17 757064020 WAS 757061020RELEASED FOR CONSTRUCTION EEG 8/21/2023 4462-003
MAJOR COMPONENT BILL OF MATERIALS
ITEM NO QTY.DESCRIPTION MANUFACTURER MANUFACTURER NUMBER COMMENTS
1 3 PT,URJ-17,7200/12470GY,120V,60:1,15kV,110kV BIL,60Hz,0.3WXMY,FUSE SIZING ARTECHE 757064020
2 3 CT,CRE-17,200:5A,15kV,110kV BIL,T150,0.3B-1.8 ARTECHE 756231040
3 6 BUSHING WELL INSERT, 15kV, 95kV BIL, 200A COOPER POWER SYSTEMS LBI215 STOCK
4 6 BUSHING WELL,15kV,95kV BIL,200A, EPOXY APPARATUS REUEL U-UBW95 STOCK
5 1 TERMINAL BLOCK,SHORTING,6-P,75A,600V MARATHON 1506SC STOCK
6 3 FUSE,3A,FAST ACTING,CURRENT LIMITING,CC,600VAC/DC MERSEN ATMR3
7 1 FUSEHOLDER,CLASS CC,FOUR POLE MERSEN & FERRAZ SHAWMUT USCC4
8 1 DUMMY FUSE,NEUTRAL,CLASS CC EATON NNB-R
9 1 ENCLOSURE SAGINAW CONTROL & ENGINEERING SCE-12R1206LP -
10 1 GROUND BAR,21 POINT EATON GBK21P STOCK
11 6 FLANGE,CLAMP RING,4 HOLE REUEL 921-M-105 STOCK
EEG 7/13/2023
KJP 08/21/2023
SHEET 1 OF 4
A
SCALE:1:8
4462-M
PAD MOUNTED PRIMARY METERING
CABINET NEMA 3R
15kV, 95 kV BIL, 200 AMP
APPROVED
DRAWN
DATEAPPROVALS
P.O.
S.O.-
-
-
-
4462
S8063943
WEIGHT: 1500.39 lb
TITLE: UTILITY

ENGINEER
CONTRACTOR
AGENT
2 4 856317
87654321
C
D
F
A
B
E
F
E
D
C
B
A
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS SUBJECT MATTER IN WHICH SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC HAS PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. THE INFORMATION AND DESIGN DISCLOSED HEREIN WERE ORIGINATED BY AND ARE THE PROPRERTY OF SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC. NEITHER RECEIPT NOR POSESSION THERE OF CONFERS OR TRANSFERS ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE, COPY, OR DISCLOSE THE DOCUMENT OR ANY PART THERE OF. ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM OR WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED UPON REQUEST TOSWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC.SIZE
D
REV.
3D PROJECTION INFORMATION
72.00
48.00
79.87
24.00
12.00
36.00
B
B DD
FRONT EXTERIOR VIEW
3
E2
3
B6
AB
B
C
D
M
P
P
METER SOCKET & TEST SWITCH IS CUSTOMER SUPPLIED, INSTALLED, AND WIRED
72.00
79.87
24.00
12.00
36.00
48.00
REAR EXTERIOR VIEW
A
B
B
C
D
M
P
P
METER SOCKET & TEST SWITCH IS CUSTOMER SUPPLIED, INSTALLED, AND WIRED
8.00
TYP
5.00
TYP
5.00
TYP
0

1
0
.
5
0

3
1
.
5
0

5
2
.
5
0

0
22.00
30.00
FRONT EXTERIOR VIEW(DOOR OPEN)
R
F
K
R
G G
9
METER SOCKET & TEST SWITCH IS CUSTOMER SUPPLIED, INSTALLED, AND WIRED
REAR EXTERIOR VIEW(DOOR OPEN)
J
R
P
P
G
R
G
J
9
METER SOCKET & TEST SWITCH IS CUSTOMER SUPPLIED, INSTALLED, AND WIRED
EEG 7/13/2023
KJP 08/21/2023
SHEET 2 OF 4
A
SCALE:1:9
4462-M
PAD MOUNTED PRIMARY METERING
CABINET NEMA 3R
15kV, 95 kV BIL, 200 AMP
APPROVED
DRAWN
DATEAPPROVALS
P.O.
S.O.-
-
-
-
4462
S8063943
WEIGHT: 1500.39 lb
TITLE: UTILITY

ENGINEER
CONTRACTOR
AGENT
2 4 856317
87654321
C
D
F
A
B
E
F
E
D
C
B
A
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS SUBJECT MATTER IN WHICH SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC HAS PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. THE INFORMATION AND DESIGN DISCLOSED HEREIN WERE ORIGINATED BY AND ARE THE PROPRERTY OF SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC. NEITHER RECEIPT NOR POSESSION THERE OF CONFERS OR TRANSFERS ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE, COPY, OR DISCLOSE THE DOCUMENT OR ANY PART THERE OF. ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM OR WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED UPON REQUEST TOSWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC.SIZE
D
REV.
3D PROJECTION INFORMATION
DOOR 3-POINT LATCH DETAIL
LATCH CAM
3-POINT
GUIDE
DOOR ROD
W/ NYLON WHEELS
DOOR RODS
DOOR 3-POINT HANDLE DETAIL
THREADED WELD STUDS TOSECURE ROOF TO CABINET.(FRONT ONLY)
REAR OF ROOF ISLOCKED DOWN BY AWELDED ON ANGLE.
5/8-11 UNC ANCHOR,
SUPPLIED BY OTHERS
1.500 MIN
MOUNTING DETAIL
MOUNTING BRACKETTYPICAL (4) BY SPS
CONCRETE PAD
ENCLOSURE
TOP VIEW(BOTH ROOF PANELS REMOVED)
3 6X
11 6X
4 6X
L
2X
6.00
20.67
OPEN AREA
68.00
OPEN AREA
2X
2.00
2X
12.00
2.00 2.99
SECTION D-D
2
B3
APPROXIMATE
CONDUIT OPENING
V VDRAINHOLES
22.67
48.00
16.77
22.00
8.00
30.00
SECTION B-B
2
B3
H
L
J
E
3 6X
L
T W
E
13X
23X
11 6X
4 6X
Y
Y
EEG 7/13/2023
KJP 08/21/2023
SHEET 3 OF 4
A
SCALE:1:9
4462-M
PAD MOUNTED PRIMARY METERING
CABINET NEMA 3R
15kV, 95 kV BIL, 200 AMP
APPROVED
DRAWN
DATEAPPROVALS
P.O.
S.O.-
-
-
-
4462
S8063943
WEIGHT: 1500.39 lb
TITLE: UTILITY

ENGINEER
CONTRACTOR
AGENT
2 4 856317
87654321
C
D
F
A
B
E
F
E
D
C
B
A
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS SUBJECT MATTER IN WHICH SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC HAS PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. THE INFORMATION AND DESIGN DISCLOSED HEREIN WERE ORIGINATED BY AND ARE THE PROPRERTY OF SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC. NEITHER RECEIPT NOR POSESSION THERE OF CONFERS OR TRANSFERS ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE, COPY, OR DISCLOSE THE DOCUMENT OR ANY PART THERE OF. ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM OR WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED UPON REQUEST TOSWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC.SIZE
D
REV.
3D PROJECTION INFORMATION
48.00
LEFT EXTERIOR VIEW
A BB
C
METER SOCKET & TEST SWITCH IS CUSTOMER SUPPLIED, INSTALLED, AND WIRED
48.00
3.50
12.00
A
A
RIGHT SIDE EXTERIOR VIEW
A BB
U
N
C
4
D2
9
15.00 21.00 21.00 15.00
72.00
48.00
24.00
12.00
36.00
79.91
SECTION A-A
2 3X 1 3X
9
4 6X
11 6X
3 6X
Y
Y
DETAIL ESCALE: 1 : 4DOOR REMOVED
6 3X
8
7
10
5
9
EEG 7/13/2023
KJP 08/21/2023
SHEET 4 OF 4
A
SCALE:1:9
4462-M
PAD MOUNTED PRIMARY METERING
CABINET NEMA 3R
15kV, 95 kV BIL, 200 AMP
APPROVED
DRAWN
DATEAPPROVALS
P.O.
S.O.-
-
-
-
4462
S8063943
WEIGHT: 1500.39 lb
TITLE: UTILITY

ENGINEER
CONTRACTOR
AGENT
2 4 856317
87654321
C
D
F
A
B
E
F
E
D
C
B
A
PROPRIETARY RIGHTS:THIS DOCUMENT CONTAINS SUBJECT MATTER IN WHICH SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC HAS PROPRIETARY RIGHTS. THE INFORMATION AND DESIGN DISCLOSED HEREIN WERE ORIGINATED BY AND ARE THE PROPRERTY OF SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC. NEITHER RECEIPT NOR POSESSION THERE OF CONFERS OR TRANSFERS ANY RIGHTS TO REPRODUCE, COPY, OR DISCLOSE THE DOCUMENT OR ANY PART THERE OF. ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN, EXCEPT BY WRITTEN PERMISSION FROM OR WRITTEN AGREEMENT WITH SWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC. THIS DOCUMENT IS TO BE RETURNED UPON REQUEST TOSWITCHGEAR POWER SYSTEMS, LLC.SIZE
D
REV.
3D PROJECTION INFORMATION